Chevrolet - Blazer 4wd - Workshop Manual - 1982 - 1982

Factory Workshop Manual Make Chevrolet Model Blazer 4wd Engine and year V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 12 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 13 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 14 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 20 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 21 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 22 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification Number: 90-56-8 Section: 8 Date: September 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 916521R Subject: PACKARD 32 WAY CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION Model and Year: 1980-90 A, B, F, G, J, L, W, Y CARS AND ALL TRUCKS WITH GMP4 ECM APPLICATIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin serves to clarify the labeling of the Packard 32 way connectors used on the GMP4 under dash ECMS. Currently a common strain relief is used in both the C-D 32 pin and the E-F 32 pin connectors. To properly identify these connectors, the strain reliefs must be removed. Use the lettering on the connector as shown on figure. The colors used at this time for the 32 pin E-F connector are yellow, mint green or orange. This updates any previous information released concerning identification that indicates any of these colors as being C & D connectors, found in the 6E and 8D Sections of the affected Service Manuals. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 29 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM/PCM - Damaged and/or Misdiagnosed Number: 91-384-6E Section: 6E Date: AUGUST 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 176503 Subject: DAMAGED ECM/PCM AND/OR MIS-DIAGNOSED ECM/PCM SYMPTOMS DUE TO INCORRECT "TAP-TESTING" PROCEDURES Model and Year: 1982-91 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS CONDITION: Because of the intermittent nature of some Electronic Control Module (ECM) or Powertrain Control Modules (PCM) symptoms, some service technicians have been subjecting the ECM/PCM to vibration and/or shock testing. Commonly known as tap-testing, this procedure involves tapping on the ECM/PCM case, while the engine is running. It is generally accepted that if the engine or ECM/PCM falters due to the tapping, an intermittent internal ECM/PCM defect may be indicated. However, this may not always be true. If too much force is applied to the ECM/PCM during the test the following symptoms may result: ^ Immediate ECM/PCM failure. ^ ECM/PCM suffers damage which may cause a failure at a later date. ^ ECM/PCM Reset (or Glitch), creating a momentary stall, miss Service Engine Soon (SES) light and/or loss of serial data. CAUSE: The ECM/PCM should be tapped using only the fingertips of one hand. Use of the palm, fist, or any type of tool subjects the ECM/PCM to forces that can cause both the circuit board and the outer aluminum case to flex and distort beyond design limits. The Integrated Circuits (IC) used in today's ECM/PCMs are mounted to the circuit board using a mounting process referred to as "surface technology." There are no circuit board holes for IC leads to go through. The IC leads set on pads, (28 pads or 52 pads depending on the IC) and solder is flowed around the leads to make the electrical connection to the circuit board. ^ Any flexing of the circuit board, beyond design limits, places the IC solder connections at risk of damage. Such damage may be apparent immediately, or it may appear at a future date. Circuit board deflection can occur as a result of striking the ECM/PCM, using ONLY THE PALM OF THE HAND. ^ If struck on the bottom side (the side opposite the service label), the ECM/PCM's aluminum outer case may deflect inward far enough to contact the electrical leads attached to the circuit board. Once in contact with the case the ECM/PCM electrical components will be shorted directly to ground. Although such shorting certainly has the potential to damage the ECM/PCM, it may not be permanent damage, depending on which circuit is involved. However, even if permanent damage is avoided, a short on any of the circuits will cause a disruption of normal ECM/PCM operation for the instant that the short occurs. This disruption may cause the ECM/PCM to reset (see "reset" above), creating the false impression that it is vibration sensitive or faulty. Reset is the ECM/PCM's normal way of coping with large voltage spikes. An ECM/PCM reset does not indicate that the ECM/PCM is defective or faulty, only that it is being subjected to abnormal conditions. CORRECTION: 1. TAP THE ECM/PCM ONLY ON THE TOP SIDE (The top side is where the service label is located.) ^ This will minimize the chance of deflecting the ECM/PCM case into the electrical leads on the circuit board. The clearance between the case and the circuit board is closest on the bottom side of the ECM/PCM. 2. TAP THE ECM/PCM USING ONLY THE FINGERTIPS - NO TOOLS. ^ To avoid excessive case deflection, avoid tapping in the center of the case. Tapping close to the edge of the ECM/PCM, especially in the corners, is best. ^ While using greater force may seem more effective, the test itself may cause the ECM/PCM to fail. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 30 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM May Contain Wrong PROM Number: 88-42 Section: 6E Date: Sept., 1987 Subject: SERVICE REPLACEMENT ELECTRONIC MODULES (ECM) WITH PROM INSTALLED Model and Year: 1981-88 ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS It has been brought to our attention that some service replacement electronic control modules (ECM's) have contained a PROM. A PROM should not have been included in a replacement ECM as it may not be the correct PROM for the vehicle. When this situation is encountered, the PROM should be removed from the replacement ECM and the PROM from the vehicle should be installed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 31 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Revised Replacement Procedure Number: 87-150 Section: 6E Date: MAY, 1987 Subject: REVISED ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE - CHART C-1 Model and Year: 1982 THROUGH 1987 ECM EQUIPPED VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The purpose of this bulletin is to introduce new ECM test procedures to reduce the possibility of multiple ECM failures on any one vehicle. Since 1982, most ECM's have used an integrated circuit (IC) in place of separate transistors to turn "on" or "off" different components controlled by the ECM. These IC's are called quad drivers (QDR). Each QDR has four separate outputs, meaning it can turn "on" or "off" four different items independently. A failed QDR usually results in an ECM output becoming either shorted to ground or open. Many times all four QDR output will be inoperative if just one vehicle circuit is faulty. The revised diagnosis incorporates new test procedures designed to identify a damaged QDR. Once identified, the circuit must be repaired to reduce the incidence of repeat ECM failures. This chart replaces the current service manual procedure for either: 1. Chart C-1 ECM replacement check, or 2. Any diagnostic chart where "replace ECM" is the conclusion, especially if a footnote indicates checking certain circuits for less than 20 OHM's resistance. It is strongly suggested that this chart be used whenever an ECM replacement is indicated for 1982 through 1987 vehicles. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 32 QDR Application Chart QDR Application Chart For CHART C-1 The following chart contains ECM QDR arrangement for all ECM models thru 1987.* Important Note: ^ Many 82-83 ECMs did not use QDRs, and will not appear on the chart. ^ This procedure will not work on any ECM Service Number which does not appear on the chart. (This is because such an ECM does not contain QDRs.) ^ Not all available QDR outputs are used for ECM application. Verify circuit usage from the ECM wiring diagrams for each specific engine using Section "6E" of the service manual. *Additional ECMs listed on page 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 33 ECM - CHECK CHART Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 34 QDR APPLICATION CHART QDR Application Chart For CHART C-1 The following chart contains ECM QDR arrangement for all ECM models thru 1987. Important Note: ^ Many 82-83 ECMs did not use QDRs, and will not appear on the chart. ^ This procedure will not work on any ECM Service Number which does not appear on the chart. (This is because such an ECM does not contain QDRs.) ^ Not all available QDR outputs are used for ECM application. Verify circuit usage from the ECM wiring diagrams for each specific engine using Section "6E" of the service manual. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions For information regarding B, C, P, U and Manufacturer Code Descriptions - Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit > Component Information > Specifications Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit: Specifications IDLE SPEED CONTROL Measured between terminals A& B and C & D. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit > Component Information > Specifications Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit: Specifications IDLE SPEED CONTROL Measured between terminals A& B and C & D. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair MODULE REPLACEMENT 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove module retaining screws, then lift module upward. 3. Disconnect module electrical connector. Note position of electrical connector prior to disconnecting. Remove module from distributor. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Check to ensure that module electrical connector is installed in proper position. If module is not being replaced, do not wipe grease from module or distributor base. If new module is to be installed, coat module and distributor base with pack of grease supplied with replacement module. PICKUP COIL, REPLACE 1. Remove distributor from engine. 2. Mark relationship of distributor shaft and driven gear for reference during assembly. 3. Remove roll pin and driven gear from shaft. 4. Remove distributor cap, magnetic shield (if equipped), shaft and rotor. 5. Remove C-washer on top of pickup coil assembly, then disconnect pickup coil leads from module and remove pickup coil assembly. 6. Reverse procedure to install. HALL EFFECT SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED), REPLACE 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove switch retaining screws, then while pulling switch away, remove wiring connector. Remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. NOTE: After Hall Effect switch is installed, spin distributor shaft to ensure teeth do not touch. If necessary loosen, then re-tighten pickup coil teeth and Hall Effect switch to eliminate contact. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Improved Kit CORPORATE NUMBER: 436501R NUMBER: 84-T-101 GROUP: 6B - Engine Cooling IMPORTANT - All Service Personnel Should Read DATE: November, 1986 SUBJECT: COOLANT SENSOR KIT MODELS: 1980-84 LIGHT DUTY MODELS EQUIPPED WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL All 1980-84 Caballeros and all 1980-84 vehicles equipped with NB2 California emissions were built with engines incorporating computer command control. Many coolant sensors have been replaced on these vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 GM vehicles using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit > Page 55 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Service Kit Number: 84-270 Section: 6E Date: NOV., 1986 Subject: COOLANT SENSOR KIT Model and Year: 1980-84 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL 1982-84 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS WITH CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Many coolant sensors have been replaced on 1980 to 1984 vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" Light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 cars and 1982-84 Light Duty Trucks using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 56 TEMPERATURE SENSORS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from valve and connect a suitable vacuum pump with an integral gauge to valve. 2. With pedal in released position, apply approximately 14 inches of vacuum to valve, then observe gauge. 3. If valve loses more than 5 inches of vacuum in one minute, valve is defective. 4. With vacuum applied to valve, depress pedal. If valve does not release vacuum when pedal is depressed, valve is defective. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from valve and connect a suitable vacuum pump with an integral gauge to valve. 2. With pedal in released position, apply approximately 14 inches of vacuum to valve, then observe gauge. 3. If valve loses more than 5 inches of vacuum in one minute, valve is defective. 4. With vacuum applied to valve, depress pedal. If valve does not release vacuum when pedal is depressed, valve is defective. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Fig. 10 Engagement switch test connections. Cruise Master On 1981---83 models, place slide switch in on position. 1. Disconnect switch electrical connector from main harness connector at base of steering column. 2. Connect ohmmeter between terminals 1 and 2 on switch connector, Fig. 10. With engage button released, meter should indicate continuity; with button fully depressed meter should indicate infinite resistance. 3. Connect ohmmeter between terminals 1 and 3 on switch connector. Meter should indicate infinite resistance. 4. Fully depress engage button, then release button halfway to engage position. Meter should indicate continuity. 5. On 1981---82 models, release engage button and move slide switch to resume position. Meter should indicate continuity between terminals 1 and 3. 6. Return slide switch to on position on 1981---82 models, then on all models, connect ohmmeter between terminals 2 and 3 on switch connector. 7. With engage button released, meter should indicate infinite resistance. With engage button in halfway (engage) position, meter should indicate continuity between terminals 2 and 3. 8. If switch fails to perform as outlined, switch assembly is defective. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications Oil Pressure Switch 10 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > IP Dimmer Control - Proper Setting Dimmer Switch: Technical Service Bulletins IP Dimmer Control - Proper Setting File In Section: 08 - Body and Accessories Bulletin No.: 99-08-42-009 Date: November, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Proper Setting of I/P Dimmer Control to View PRNDL Display with Automatic Headlamp Control Models: 2000 and Prior All Passenger Cars and Trucks With Automatic Headlamp Control and Electronic PRNDL Display Under certain conditions, if the instrument panel dimmer control is turned relatively low, the PRNDL will not be visible until the automatic headlamp control turns the headlamps off and the daytime running lamps (DRL) are turned back on. Such a condition may be if the vehicle is first started in an environment where the headlamp control turns on the headlamps and then the vehicle is driven out into a brighter environment (for example, when a vehicle is backed out of a dark garage into the bright sunlight). This condition is normal and any repair attempt will not be successful. Demonstrate this condition to the customer using the service lane and then turn the instrument panel dimmer control to a higher setting. This will enable the driver to see the PRNDL display Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair MANUAL TRANSMISSION MODELS Column Mounted Type 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect switch wiring harness. 3. Remove switch retaining screws and switch. 4. Assemble new switch onto column, then install retaining screws. 5. Reconnect battery ground cable, then check switch for proper operation. Transmission Mounted Type 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Disconnect switch wiring harness, then remove switch from transmission. 4. Reverse procedure to install, then check switch for proper operation. Models With Neutral Start/Mechanical Lockout 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect wiring harness connectors at switch. 3. Remove switch retaining screws and switch from mast jacket. 4. Place gear selector in neutral, then align actuator on new switch with hole in shift tube. 5. Position connector side of switch into cutout in lower jacket, then push down on front of switch until tangs snap into holes in jacket. Install retaining screws. 6. Reconnect wiring harness connectors, then place shift lever in Park. 7. Reconnect battery ground cable, then check switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Number: 89-262-5 Section: 5 Date: September 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 915002 Subject: LIGHT BRAKE DRAG - BRAKE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Model and Year: 1980-89 A, B, F, G, J, L, X, Y 1980-89 ALL TRUCKS Figure 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 89-178-5, DATED JUNE 1989, IN ORDER THAT WE MAY CORRECTLY IDENTIFY THE SWITCH REQUIRING ADJUSTMENT. ALL COPIES OF 89-178-5 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some vehicles may experience a condition of light brake drag while driving. These conditions have been found to be more noticeable on vehicles which have an anti-lock brake system. This may be caused by improper brake switch adjustment. If the brake switch is not adjusted properly, the switch may push on the brake pedal and cause the brake to remain partially applied. If a vehicle exhibits any of the above conditions, perform the following functional brake switch adjustment check: Passenger Cars Only: The following steps should be used to check brake switch adjustment: 1. Remove the driver-side hush panel (refer to Figure 1). 2. Gently pull back on the brake pedal until no audible clicks are heard. The switch will be moved in the tubular retainer providing adjustment. 3. Replace the hush panel. 4. Verify that the brake drag condition is no longer present and that the cruise control and brake lights function properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving > Page 88 If the functional brake switch adjustment check does not repair the condition, refer to Section 5 of the appropriate Service Information Manual for aid in diagnosing other causes. For warranty purposes use: Labor Operation Number: N2440 Labor Time: .3 hour TRUCK ONLY: Service Procedure: 1. Depress the brake pedal and press the switch in until it is firmly seated in the clip. * Audible "clicks" can be heard as the threaded portion of the switch is pushed through the clip. 2. Pull the brake pedal against the pedal stop until the audible "click" can no longer be heard. For stop lamp switch adjustments on vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation Number: T7945 Labor Time: .2 Hr. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes Light Brake Drag While Driving Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Number: 89-262-5 Section: 5 Date: September 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 915002 Subject: LIGHT BRAKE DRAG - BRAKE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Model and Year: 1980-89 A, B, F, G, J, L, X, Y 1980-89 ALL TRUCKS Figure 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 89-178-5, DATED JUNE 1989, IN ORDER THAT WE MAY CORRECTLY IDENTIFY THE SWITCH REQUIRING ADJUSTMENT. ALL COPIES OF 89-178-5 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some vehicles may experience a condition of light brake drag while driving. These conditions have been found to be more noticeable on vehicles which have an anti-lock brake system. This may be caused by improper brake switch adjustment. If the brake switch is not adjusted properly, the switch may push on the brake pedal and cause the brake to remain partially applied. If a vehicle exhibits any of the above conditions, perform the following functional brake switch adjustment check: Passenger Cars Only: The following steps should be used to check brake switch adjustment: 1. Remove the driver-side hush panel (refer to Figure 1). 2. Gently pull back on the brake pedal until no audible clicks are heard. The switch will be moved in the tubular retainer providing adjustment. 3. Replace the hush panel. 4. Verify that the brake drag condition is no longer present and that the cruise control and brake lights function properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes Light Brake Drag While Driving > Page 94 If the functional brake switch adjustment check does not repair the condition, refer to Section 5 of the appropriate Service Information Manual for aid in diagnosing other causes. For warranty purposes use: Labor Operation Number: N2440 Labor Time: .3 hour TRUCK ONLY: Service Procedure: 1. Depress the brake pedal and press the switch in until it is firmly seated in the clip. * Audible "clicks" can be heard as the threaded portion of the switch is pushed through the clip. 2. Pull the brake pedal against the pedal stop until the audible "click" can no longer be heard. For stop lamp switch adjustments on vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation Number: T7945 Labor Time: .2 Hr. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 93356D > Oct > 92 > Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Spark Plug Wire: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Number: 93-35-6D Section: 6D Date: OCT. 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 716404R ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: ENGINE MISS HESITATION OR ROUGHNESS DUE TO PIERCED SECONDARY IGNITION COMPONENTS Model and Year: 1980-93 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 87-121, DATED MAY 1987. THE 1989-93 MODEL YEARS HAVE BEEN ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 87-121 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. During the diagnosis procedure for an engine miss, hesitation or roughness, a spark plug or spark plug wire condition may be suspected. Several types of commercial or homemade diagnostic equipment required the secondary ignition boots or wire to be pierced. This is normally done to check for spark plug firing or to perform a cylinder balance test. Similarly the use of pliers or other such tools to disengage a spark plug boot may pierce or damage the boot or wire. Secondary ignition components should not be pierced for any reason. Piercing a spark plug wire and/or distributor boot may create a condition that will not be immediately apparent. Over time, the hole in the pierced boot may allow a ground path to develop creating a plug misfire condition. Heavily moisture laden air in the vicinity of the pierced boot may accelerate this effect. Piercing a secondary ignition wire creates a gap in the wire's conductive core. This gap is a point of high resistance. The current flow in the wire will increase to compensate for the higher wire resistance. Over time, the wire may fail creating a plug misfire condition. The time required for the condition to appear depends upon the extent of damage to the conductive core. To help prevent future condition that are spark plug wire related, do not pierce or otherwise damage any secondary ignition component. Only use diagnostic equipment containing an inductive pick-up to check for spark plug firing or to perform cylinder balance tests. When disengaging a spark plug boot from the spark plug, twist the flanged boot 1/2 turn then pull on the boot only to remove the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 105 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect wiring connector at switch. 2. Remove retaining nut, if equipped, then unscrew switch from mounting bracket. 3. To install, depress brake pedal and push new switch into clip until shoulder bottoms out. 4. Plug connector onto switch and check operation. Electrical contact should be made when pedal is depressed .500 inch (Caballero and El Camino), .700 inch (G and P models) or 1.125 inch (C, K, R and V models) from its fully released position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Column Mounted Dimmer Switch Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Column Mounted Dimmer Switch Fig. 11 Column mounted dimmer switch installation 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove instrument panel lower trim and on models with A/C, remove A/C duct extension at column. 3. Disconnect shift indicator from column and remove toe-plate cover screws. 4. Remove two nuts from instrument panel support bracket studs and lower steering column, resting steering wheel on front seat. 5. Remove dimmer switch retaining screws and the switch. Tape actuator rod to column and separate switch from rod. 6. Reverse procedure to install. To adjust switch, depress dimmer switch slightly and install a 3/32 inch twist drill to lock the switch to the body, Fig. 11. Force switch upward to remove lash between switch and pivot. Torque switch retaining screw to 35 inch lbs. and remove tape from actuator rod. Remove twist drill and check for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Column Mounted Dimmer Switch > Page 110 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Floor Mounted Dimmer Switch 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Fold back carpeting in area of switch, then disconnect electrical connector from switch. 3. Remove switch retaining screws and the switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Fig. 9 Headlamp switch. C, G, K, R & V models C, K, R & V MODELS 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Reaching behind instrument cluster, depress shaft retaining button and remove switch knob and rod. 3. Remove left side instrument cluster bezel screws, then pull outward on bezel and hold switch retaining nut with wrench, Fig. 9. 4. Disconnect wiring connector, then rotate switch counterclockwise and remove from vehicle. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair DIRECTIONAL SIGNAL SWITCH The directional signal switch can be removed with the steering column in the vehicle and without disturbing any of the column mountings. Removal 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. Remove the column to instrument panel trim cover. 3. Position screwdriver blade into cover slot. Pry up and out to free cover from lock plate. 4. Screw the center post of Lock Plate Compressing Tool J-23653 onto the steering shaft as far as it will Compress the lock plate by turning the center post clockwise. Pry the round wire snap ring out of the shaft groove and discard the ring. Remove Tool J-23653 and lift the end of the shaft. NOTICE: If the column is being disassembled on the bench, with the snap ring removed the shaft could slide out of the lower end of the mast jacket, damaging the shaft assembly. 5. Slide the directional signal cancelling cam upper bearing preload spring and thrust washer off the end of the shaft. 6. Remove the directional signal lever screw and remove the lever. 7. Push the hazard warning knob in and unscrew the knob. 8. Remove the three switch mounting screws. 9. All Columns - Pull the switch connector out of the bracket on the jacket and feed switch connector through column support bracket and pull switch straight up, guiding the wiring harness through the column housing and protector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 117 10. Remove wire protector by pulling downward out of column with pliers using tab provided. Tilt Column - Position the directional signal and shifter housing in the "low" position. Remove the harness cover by pulling toward the lower end of the column, be careful not to damage the wires. 11. Remove the three switch mounting screws and pull the switch straight up, guiding the wiring harness and cover through the column housing. Installation CAUTION: It is extremely important that only the specified screws, bolts and nuts be used at assembly, or personal injury could result. Use of overlength screws could prevent a portion of the assembly from compressing under impact. 1. All except Tilt - Be sure that the wiring harness is in the protector. Feed the connector and cover down through the housing and under the mounting bracket (column in vehicle). Tilt - Feed the connector down through the housing and under the mounting bracket. Then install the cover on the harness. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 118 2. Install the three mounting screws and clip the connector to the bracket on the jacket. 3. Install the column to instrument panel trim plate. 4. Install the hazard warning knob and directional signal lever. 5. Make certain that the switch is in "Neutral" and the hazard warning knob is out. Slide the thrust washer, upper bearing preload spring and cancelling cam onto the upper end of the shaft. 6. Place the lock plate onto the end of the shaft. Screw the center post of the Lock Plate Compressing Tool J-23653 onto the steering shaft as far as it will go. Place a NEW snap ring over the center post. Place the "C" bar over the center post and then compress the lock plate by turning the nut clockwise. Slide the new snap ring down the tapered center post and into the shaft groove. Remove Tool J-23653. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor <--> [Barometric Pressure Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications Absolute Pressure Sensor: Specifications MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE, VACUUM AND BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSORS Engines may use one, or a combination of these sensors. All sensors appear the same. Manifold Absolute Pressure sensors have a vacuum line connected between the unit and manifold vacuum. On Barometric Pressure sensors, the line is not used and the connector is either open or has a filter installed over it. Pressure sensors also have a vacuum line between the sensor and intake manifold and only appear on carburetted models. Barometric Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Start engine and apply 10 in./ 250 mm Hg to unit, voltage should be 1.2-2.3 volts less. Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage as indicated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Improved Kit CORPORATE NUMBER: 436501R NUMBER: 84-T-101 GROUP: 6B - Engine Cooling IMPORTANT - All Service Personnel Should Read DATE: November, 1986 SUBJECT: COOLANT SENSOR KIT MODELS: 1980-84 LIGHT DUTY MODELS EQUIPPED WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL All 1980-84 Caballeros and all 1980-84 vehicles equipped with NB2 California emissions were built with engines incorporating computer command control. Many coolant sensors have been replaced on these vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 GM vehicles using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit > Page 128 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Service Kit Number: 84-270 Section: 6E Date: NOV., 1986 Subject: COOLANT SENSOR KIT Model and Year: 1980-84 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL 1982-84 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS WITH CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Many coolant sensors have been replaced on 1980 to 1984 vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" Light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 cars and 1982-84 Light Duty Trucks using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 129 TEMPERATURE SENSORS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications TEMPERATURE SENSORS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 Number: 90-199-6E Section: 6E Date: March 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 016510 Subject: REVISED CHART C-1D, CODE 33, 34, 63, 64 Model and Year: 1980-90 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin revises the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Output Check Chart C-1D and updates Code 33, Code 34, Code 63, and Code 64 in the Service Manual section on "Driveability And Emissions" (Section 6E1, 6E2, and 6E3). This information applies to all MAP Sensors on 1980-1990 vehicles with gasoline engines (except turbocharged) with green (standard) MAP sensor electrical connector insert or the solid black MAP sensor electrical connector insert. The revised chart information: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 137 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 138 - Diagnostic Chart C-1D. The updated chart information: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 139 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 140 - Diagnostic Chart Code 33. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 141 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 142 - Diagnostic Chart Code 34. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 143 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 144 - Diagnostic Chart Code 63. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 145 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 146 - Diagnostic Chart Code 64. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 147 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications Manifold Absolute, Vacuum, and Barometric Pressure Sensors Engines may use one, or a combination of these sensors. All sensors appear the same. Manifold Absolute Pressure sensors have a vacuum line connected between the unit and manifold vacuum. On Barometric Pressure sensors, the line is not used and the connector is either open or has a filter installed over it. Pressure sensors also have a vacuum line between the sensor and intake manifold and only appear on carbureted models. Barometric Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Start engine and apply 10 in./250 mm Hg to unit, voltage should be: 3.8L Turbo 4V, 0.9-1.7 volts less; others, 1.2-2.3 volts less. Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage as indicated. 5 volts reference. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 148 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 008 - Chart C-1D Map and Baro Output Check NOTE: MAP and BARO sensors are essentially the same device--one--MAP--measures the difference between pressure in the manifold and atmospheric pressure, and the other--BARO--measures atmospheric pressure. 1. Check that sensor voltage is highest when manifold pressure is highest--output normally is in the middle range for specific altitudes. - Low voltage increases spark advance. - High voltage decreases spark advance. 2. Check to see if the rate of change of the output VS change in pressure is correct--normal change would be about the middle of the range listed. - The voltage should change as soon as the vacuum is changed. - If it doesn't, it could result in detonation or a sag on acceleration which could also be caused by fuel or a restriction in the hose to the sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > RTV Sealants - Use on Engines With Oxygen Sensors Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins RTV Sealants - Use on Engines With Oxygen Sensors NUMBER: 86-B-28 GROUP: 6 - Gasoline Engine DATE: March, 1986 SUBJECT: RTV (AEROBIC SEALANTS) AND ANAEROBIC SEALANTS FOR ENGINES EQUIPPED WITH OXYGEN SENSORS MODELS: 1981-86 C, K, G, S, T, M, AND CABALLEROS WITH YF5 CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS 1985-86 S, T, AND M WITH 2.5L EFI AND NA Incorrect usage of RTV sealants (cure in the presence of air) may cause damage to vehicle components such as oxygen sensors. This is caused by silica particles collecting on the oxygen sensor and contaminating the sensor. The correct application for RTV sealants is listed in the WDDGM parts book. The correct RTV sealants to use on engines in GMC Trucks are part numbers 1052914 or 1052917 (black) or part number 1052915 (clear). Red RTV sealant, part number 1052366, is for use on rear axle differential covers only, as it contains silica. Anaerobic sealers (cure without the presence of air) part numbers 1052756, 1052943, and 1052942 are also used to seal the rear main bearing cap to the block on engines used in GMC Trucks. See the chart below for a description of General Motors service approved RTV silicone and anaerobic sealers. GENERAL MOTORS SERVICE APPROVED RTV SILICONE SEALANTS Part Name Color Part Number Size Application GMS (Type B) Black 1052914 300 ml. Caulker All Light 1052917 3 oz. Tube Duty Engines Except 2.5L GMS (Type A) Clear 1052915 300 ml. Caulker 2.5L 4 Cylinder GMS Red 1052366 3 oz. Tube Rear Axle Usage Only GENERAL MOTORS SERVICE APPROVED ANAEROBIC SEALANTS Part Name Part Number Size Application Loctite (R) Gasket Maker 1052942 6 ml. Engine Anaerobic Applications 1052943 50 ml. 1052756 6 ml. Loctite (R) Transmission Case Cover 1052756 6 ml. Transmission Case Covers Sealant Loctite (R) Trim Bonding Adhesive 1052621 4 gm. Trim, Super Glue Loctite (R) Pipe Sealant w/Teflon 1052080 50 ml. Pipe Sealant Loctite (R) Thread Locking Kit 1052624 10 ml. Thread Locking, Retaining Compound Loctite (R) Inside Mirror Adhesive Kit 1052369 0.4 cc. Inside Rear View Mirror GENERAL MOTORS OTHER APPROVED SEALANTS Part Name Part Number Application Gasket Sealing Compound 1050026 Gasket Sealing Adhesive Caulking Kit 9636067 Windshield, Back Glass, Anywhere Urethane Based Sealer Is Required Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications 84-235 6C (VI) Feb., 1985 Subject: TPS SETTINGS - ALL GASOLINE ENGINES Model and Year: 1981 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Listed below are all Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) settings for 1981 thru 1984. ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1981 Buick 3.8L A .97V High step of fast idle cam Buick 3.8L Turbo "A" Car 1.30V High step of fast idle cam Buick 4.1L .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L 9 .41V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L X .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L K .41V ISC retracted at slow idle Chevrolet 4.4L .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L H .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.7L .56V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L Y .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L 5 .51V Stopped at curb idle 1982 Buick 3.8L Non-Turbo A .77V High step of fast idle cam Chev. 1.6L Minimum System C .92V High step of fast idle cam (Fed) Chev. 1.6L Full Function C .40V Stopped at curb idle (Calif) Chev. 1.8L L4 G .26V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. 2.8L V6 X,Z,1 .26V Stopped at curb idle Chev. 3.8L V6 .36V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. All V8 H,7 .51V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L, 4.3L .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 .525V Ign. on, engine off ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1983 Buick 3.8L A .86V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .26V Curb idle solenoid retracted Chevrolet 3.8L 9 .36V ISC retracted (min. idle) Chevrolet 5.0L H,S,7 .51V Curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L .46V ILC retracted Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications > Page 157 Curb idle 1984 Buick 3.8L A .46V Curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Curb idle Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L G,H .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .30V Throttle kicker retracted *Non-Adjustable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications 84-235 6C (VI) Feb., 1985 Subject: TPS SETTINGS - ALL GASOLINE ENGINES Model and Year: 1981 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Listed below are all Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) settings for 1981 thru 1984. ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1981 Buick 3.8L A .97V High step of fast idle cam Buick 3.8L Turbo "A" Car 1.30V High step of fast idle cam Buick 4.1L .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L 9 .41V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L X .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L K .41V ISC retracted at slow idle Chevrolet 4.4L .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L H .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.7L .56V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L Y .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L 5 .51V Stopped at curb idle 1982 Buick 3.8L Non-Turbo A .77V High step of fast idle cam Chev. 1.6L Minimum System C .92V High step of fast idle cam (Fed) Chev. 1.6L Full Function C .40V Stopped at curb idle (Calif) Chev. 1.8L L4 G .26V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. 2.8L V6 X,Z,1 .26V Stopped at curb idle Chev. 3.8L V6 .36V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. All V8 H,7 .51V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L, 4.3L .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 .525V Ign. on, engine off ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1983 Buick 3.8L A .86V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .26V Curb idle solenoid retracted Chevrolet 3.8L 9 .36V ISC retracted (min. idle) Chevrolet 5.0L H,S,7 .51V Curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L .46V ILC retracted Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications > Page 163 Curb idle 1984 Buick 3.8L A .46V Curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Curb idle Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L G,H .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .30V Throttle kicker retracted *Non-Adjustable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Hall Effect Switch <--> [Hall Effect Sensor, Ignition] > Component Information > Service and Repair Hall Effect Switch: Service and Repair HALL EFFECT SWITCH (If Equipped), REPLACE 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove switch retaining screws, then while pulling switch away, remove wiring connector. Remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. NOTE: After Hall Effect switch is installed, spin distributor shaft to ensure teeth do not touch. If necessary loosen, then re-tighten pickup coil teeth and Hall Effect switch to eliminate contact. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation Fig. 12 Mechanical neutral start system, shown in Park position On some automatic transmission equipped vehicles, the actuation of the ignition switch is prevented by a mechanical lockout system, Fig. 12, which prevents the lock cylinder from rotating when the selector lever is out of Park or Neutral. When the selector lever is in Park or Neutral, the slots in the bowl plate and the finger on the actuator rod align, allowing the finger to pass through the bowl plate, in turn actuating the ignition switch, Fig. 12. If the selector lever is in any position other than Park or Neutral, the finger contacts the bowl plate when the lock cylinder is rotated, thereby preventing full travel of the lock cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 177 Neutral Safety Switch: Service and Repair On some automatic transmission equipped vehicles, the back-up light switch is integral with the neutral start switch. Fig. 13 Neutral start switch replacement. Series 10---30/1500---3500 C, K, R & V MODELS 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect electrical connector at switch. 3. Remove switch mounting screws, then the switch. 4. Position shift lever in neutral gate notch. 5. Insert a .098 inch gauge pin into switch gauge hole as shown, Fig. 13, then assemble switch to column by inserting carrier tang into shift tube slot. 6. Install switch mounting screws into retainers. If retainers strip, they must be replaced. 7. Remove gauge pin, then position shift lever into Park to shear internal plastic pin in switch. 8. Return shift lever to neutral gate notch, then ensure switch gauge hole will accept .080 inch gauge pin. If not, loosen mounting screws, then rotate switch on column until .098 inch gauge pin can be reinserted into gauge hole. 9. Reconnect electrical connector and battery ground cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description A pressure sensitive switch is screwed through the rear face of the valve body assembly into the direct clutch oil passage. This switch is closed (grounded) in all but direct drive and reverse, since there is no oil pressure in this passage in Neutral, First or Second gear. The pressure switch is connected by a wire to a transmission connector and hence through an engine solenoid valve to the distributor and engine thermoswitch. When this circuit is grounded (switch closed), spark advance is retarded. When the transmission shifts to high gear (or reverse), oil pressure in the direct clutch passage will open the switch and circuit so that the transmission will no longer affect the vacuum advance of the distributor. Line Pressure Regulator Regulates line pressure according to pump speed and engine torque. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Electronic Speed Sensor Retainer Bolt ............................................................................................... ...................................................................... 7 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 191 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 192 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 193 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 194 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 195 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 196 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 197 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 198 Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Alignment - The Importance of Four Wheel Alignment Number: 89-01-3A Section: 3A Date: SEPT., 1988 Subject: THE IMPORTANCE OF FOUR WHEEL ALIGNMENT Model and Year: 1979-89 ALL CHEVROLET MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS In which direction will the vehicle pictured below travel if the steering wheel is straight ahead? The vehicle will track to the left because of the directional forces created by the rear wheels and tires. This directional force is called the "thrust angle". The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle but the rear wheels control tracking and assist in directing the car. What might the driver comment about? In the illustration, the driver may comment about the steering wheel being off center when going straight down the road. This would be true because of the added input required at the steering wheel to offset the thrust angle force caused by the rear wheels not tracking the front wheels to the geometric center line of the vehicle. The driver may also comment about unusual tire wear, not precise handling characteristics and even decreased fuel economy. A four wheel alignment allows the technician to measure the toe of each rear wheel to determine if the rear wheels are tracking the geometric center line of the car. Ideally the geometric center line will be the same as the thrust line. In the example in Figure 1, the thrust line has shifted to the right because the rear wheel toe is not tracking the front wheels. This can occur on both or on one rear wheel. On some vehicles the rear toe is adjustable; other models may require component straightening or replacement or shims. Once the rear toe is properly adjusted or set, the front wheel toe can be set so all four wheels are tracking the geometric center line of the vehicle. This will provide optimum tire wear, handling and fuel economy characteristics for the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 199 Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Locking Wheel Nuts Impact On Tire Balance 85-37 3E (X) FEB., 1985 Subject: LOCKING WHEEL NUTS Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Whenever a heavier, solid locking wheel nut is used to replace a standard nut, it should be installed nearest the valve stem, and a 1/2 ounce balance weight should be added 180~ opposite the locking nut. This situation will usually occur on styled wheels. For improved appearance, the balance weight should be installed on the wheel's inboard side. When rotating tires, always re-install the locking nut nearest the tire valve stem so that it remains opposite the 1/2 ounce balance weight. This procedure will improve the on-car wheel balance by compensating for the heavy locking wheel nut. This does not apply to the light weight, two-piece locking nuts used on some Chevrolet models. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 200 Alignment: Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 201 CASTER CHART Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 202 CASTER, CAMBER, WHEEL TOE-IN Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 203 Alignment: Service and Repair Caster and camber adjustments are made by means of shims located between upper control arm shaft and mounting bracket attached to suspension crossmember. A series of convex and concave spacers with flat opposite sides are used. These spacers allow a positive cross shaft-to-bracket attachment regardless of the number of shims used. Shims may be changed at either front or rear to vary caster, or at both points to vary camber. CASTER 1. Measure frame angle at "B". 2. Check caster on alignment machine. 3. Using frame angle measurement and measured caster angle, determine actual (corrected) caster angle as follows: a. Subtract a ``down in rear'' frame angle from a positive caster angle reading. b. Add an ``up in rear'' frame angle to a positive caster angle reading. c. Add a ``down in rear'' frame angle to a negative caster angle reading. d. Subtract an ``up in rear'' frame angle from a negative caster angle reading. 4. Measure dimension ``A''. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 204 5. Using dimension ``A,'' and Caster Specification Chart, find the recommended caster angle. See: Steering and Suspension/Specifications 6. The frame corrected angle should correspond to the recommended angle on the chart within plus or minus 1/4°. Make necessary changes to bring caster angle within limits. CAMBER 1. Determine camber angle using suitable equipment. 2. Add or subtract shims from both front and rear bolts to adjust camber as required. TOE-IN Toe-in can be increased or decreased by changing the length of the tie rods. A threaded sleeve is provided for this purpose. When tie rods are mounted ahead of the steering knuckle, decrease the length to increase toe-in. When tie rods are mounted behind the steering knuckle, increase the length to increase toe-in. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Light Duty ............................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 5.5 - 7.0 psi Heavy Duty ................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. 7.5 - 9.0 psi (with vapor return hose pinched off) Volume ................................................................................................................................................ ................................. 1 pint or more in 30 seconds Vacuum ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................... at least 15 in HG Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel Pump Pressure Test 1. Disconnect fuel line at carburetor and connect a suitable pressure gage. 2. Start engine and check pressure with engine running at slow idle speed. Fuel pump pressure should be as specified. 3. If fuel pump pressure is below 17-45 kPa (2.5 - 6.5 psi), pump must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel System Diagnosis > Page 211 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pump Pressure Test - Mechanical Fuel Pump Fuel Pump Pressure Test 1. Disconnect fuel line at pump and connect a suitable pressure gage. 2. Start engine and check pressure with engine running at slow idle speed. Fuel pump pressure should be as specified. On vehicles equipped with a vapor return system squeeze off the return hose so that an accurate reading can be obtained. 3. If fuel pump pressure is below minimum, pump must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Light Duty NOTE: Vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) below 6000 lbs (8500 lbs for California), and passenger carrying vehicles with a capacity of 12 persons or less, are Light Duty Emissions Vehicles. NOTE: Idle mixture needles have been preset at the factory and sealed. Idle mixture should be adjusted only in the case of major carburetor overhaul, throttle body replacement or high emissions as determined by official inspections. Adjusting mixture by other than the following method may violate Federal and or California or other state or Provincial laws. Because of the sealed idle mixture needles, the idle mixture checking procedure requires artificial enrichment by adding propane. 1. Set parking brake and block drive wheel. Engine must be at normal operating temperature and air conditioning off. 2. Disconnect and plug EGR and cannister purge vacuum hoses. 3. Connect an accurate tachometer to engine. 4. Disconnect vacuum advance and set timing to specification. Reconnect vacuum hose. See: Ignition Timing 5. Set carburetor idle speed to specification. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Adjustments 6. Disconnect crankcase ventilation tube from air cleaner. Fig. 61 - Propane Enrichment Tool Installation 7. Using tool J-26911, insert hose with rubber stopper, from propane valve into crankcase ventilation tube opening in air cleaner. Propane cartridge must be vertical. 8. With engine idling in drive (neutral for manual shifts) slowly open propane control valve while pressing button. Continue to add propane until speed drops due to over richness. Note maximum engine speed (enriched speed). 9. If the enriched idle speed is within the enriched idle specification the mixture is correct. Go to step 17. Enrichment Specification: See: Idle Speed/Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty > Page 216 10. If the enriched idle speed is not within specification, remove mixture screw plugs as follows: - Remove carburetor from engine to gain access to the plugs covering the idle mixture needles. - Invert carburetor on a suitable holding fixture, manifold side up. NOTE: Use care to avoid damaging linkage, tubes, and parts protruding from the air horn. - Make two parallel cuts in the throttle body on either side of the locator points beneath the idle mixture needle plug (manifold side) with a hack saw. The cuts should not extend more than 1/8 inch beyond the locator points. The distance between the saw marks depends on the size of the punch to be used. - Place a flat punch at a point near the ends of the saw marks in the throttle body. Holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive it into the throttle body until the casing breaks away, exposing the steel plug. - Holding a center punch vertical, drive it into the steel plug. - Then holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive the plug out of the casting. NOTE: Hardened plug may break rather than remain intact. It is not necessary to remove the plug completely, instead, remove loose pieces. - Repeat procedure for the remaining mixture needle and re-install carburetor. 11. Using tool J29030 or equivalent, lightly seat mixture needles, then back out equally, just enough so engine will run. 12. Place transmission in drive (automatic) or neutral (manual). 13. Back each screw out (richen 1/8 turn at a time until maximum idle speed is obtained). Then using base idle speed adjustment screw, set idle speed to the enriched idle specification. See: Idle Speed/Specifications 14. Turn each mixture screw in (clockwise) 1/8 turn at a time until idle speed reaches base idle speed. 15. Re-check enriched speed with propane. If not within specification, repeat adjustment beginning with step 12. 16. After adjustments are complete, seal the idle mixture needle setting using silicone sealant or equivalent. The sealer is required to prevent tampering with the setting and to prevent the possibility of loss of fuel vapors. 17. Check and adjust fast idle speed. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Adjustments 18. Turn off engine. Remove propane tool, connect crankcase ventilation tube. Unplug and reconnect vacuum hoses. Install air cleaner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty > Page 217 Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Heavy Duty NOTES: - Idle mixture needles have been preset at the factory and sealed. Idle mixture should be adjusted only in the case of major carburetor overhaul, throttle body replacement, or high emissions as determined by official inspections. - If necessary, remove idle needle plugs: Perform this adjustment with engine at operating temperature, parking brake applied, drive wheels blocked and transmission in park or neutral. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove air cleaner. 2. Connect tachometer and vacuum gage to engine. 3. As a preliminary adjustment, turn idle mixture needles in lightly to seat and back out 2 turns. NOTE: Do not turn idle mixture needle tightly against seat or damage may result. 4. With engine running (choke wide open and transmission in neutral) adjust idle speed screw to curb idle speed. See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Idle Speed 5. Adjust each idle mixture needle to obtain highest RPM. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until "best" idle is obtained. 7. If necessary, reset curb idle speed. See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Idle Speed/Federal 8. After adjustments are complete, seal the idle mixture needle setting using silicone sealant or equivalent. 9. Check and if necessary, adjust throttle lever actuator.See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Idle Speed 10. Check and if necessary, adjust fast idle speed. See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Fast Idle Speed 11. Turn off engine, remove gages, unplug and reconnect vacuum hoses. Install air cleaner. 12. Remove block from drive wheel. CONCEALMENT PLUG REMOVAL - Remove carburetor from engine to gain access to the plugs covering the idle mixture needles. - Invert carburetor on a suitable holding fixture, manifold side up. NOTE: Use care to avoid damaging linkage, tubes, and parts protruding from the air horn. - Make two parallel cuts in the throttle body on either side of the locator points beneath the idle mixture needle plug (manifold side) with a hack saw. The cuts should not extend more than 1/8 inch beyond the locator points. The distance between the saw marks depends on the size of the punch to be used. - Place a flat punch at a point near the ends of the saw marks in the throttle body. Holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive it into the throttle body until the casing breaks away, exposing the steel plug. - Holding a center punch vertical, drive it into the steel plug. - Then holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive the plug out of the casting. NOTE: Hardened plug may break rather than remain intact. It is not necessary to remove the plug completely, instead, remove loose pieces. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty > Page 218 - Repeat procedure for the remaining mixture needle and re-install carburetor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Enriched Idle Speed Idle Speed: Specifications Enriched Idle Speed ENRICHED IDLE SPEED Carburetor Number 17082221 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 150 17082225 .................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 150 17082222 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 50 17082224 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 50 17082226 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 50 17082227 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 50 17082506 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 50 17082508 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 50 17082223 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 100 17082231 .................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 100 17082235 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 100 17082291 .................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 100 17082293 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 100 17082230 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 20 17082234 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 20 17082524 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 20 17082526 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 20 17082290 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 40 17082292 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 40 NOTE: Enriched Idle Speed value is added to base idle speed. This value is used during the idle mixture adjustment procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Enriched Idle Speed > Page 223 Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed NOTE: Vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) below 6000 lbs (8500 lbs for California), and passenger carrying vehicles with a capacity of 12 persons or less, are Light Duty Emissions Vehicles. CURB IDLE SPEED Light Duty Automatic ............................................................................................................................................. ............................... 500 rpm (California 550) Manual ......................................................................... ........................................................................................................ 600 rpm (High Alt. 700) Heavy Duty Automatic ............................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 700 rpm Manual ......................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. 700 rpm A/C ON IDLE SPEED Manual Federal ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 750 rpm California ................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... 650 rpm Automatic Federal ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 600 rpm California ................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... 650 rpm FAST IDLE SPEED Light Duty Automatic ............................................................................................................................................. ........................... 1600 rpm (California 1800) Manual ......................................................................... .............................................................................................. 1300 rpm (High Altitude 1600) Heavy Duty Automatic/Manual ................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 1900 rpm NOTE: Measured on high cam step. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed Idle Speed: Adjustments Idle Speed California NOTE: On engines equipped with an Idle Speed Control (ISC) motor, idle speed is controlled by an electrical signal from the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Do not use the ISC plunger to adjust curb idle. The motor varies idle speed from a base (minimum authority) to a high (maximum authority) idle speed. Do not adjust unless diagnosis indicates a malfunction. Check for proper base and high idle speed as follows. CAUTION: DO NOT disconnect or connect ISC connector with ignition "ON" as damage to the ECM may occur. 1. Perform preliminary procedures: - Check and adjust ignition timing. - Disconnect and plug vacuum lines for evaporative purge and EGR valve. 2. Before starting engine, place transmission in "PARK" (automatic) or "NEUTRAL" (manual), set parking brake and block drive wheels. 3. Connect dwell meter to Mixture Control (M/C) solenoid dwell lead. This is a green connection breaking out of the main wiring harness leading to carburetor. NOTE: Remember to set dwell meter on the six cylinder scale, regardless of the engine being tested. 4. Turn A/C "OFF". 5. Start engine and run until stabilized and in "closed loop" mode (dwell meter needle starts to vary). 6. Turn ignition "OFF". CAUTION: Do not unplug ISC connector with ignition "ON" as damage to motor will occur. 7. Unplug connector from ISC motor. 8. Fully retract ISC plunger by applying 12 volts to terminal "C" ad grounding lead to terminal "D" of the ISC motor connection. CAUTION: DO NOT leave battery voltage applied to motor longer than necessary to retract ISC plunger. Prolonged contact will damage motor. Also, NEVER connect voltage source across terminal "A" and "B" as damage to the internal throttle contact switch will result. 9. Start engine and run until dwell meter needle starts to vary, indicating "closed loop" operation. 10. Place automatic transmission in "DRIVE". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 226 11. With ISC plunger fully retracted, adjust carburetor base (slow idle stop screw to 470 RPM (minimum authority). 12. Place transmission in "PARK" (automatic transmissions). 13. Fully extend ISC plunger by applying 12 volts to terminal "D" and grounding lead to terminal "C" of the ISC motor connection. Leave power applied only long enough to extend the plunger. 14. MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS: Using tool J29607 or BT-8022 or equivalent, turn ISC plunger to obtain 900 RPM (Maximum Authority). 15. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS: - With transmission in "PARK", using tool J-29607, BT-8022 or equivalent, preset ISC plunger to obtain 1500 RPM. - With parking brake set and drive wheels blocked, place transmission in "DRIVE". Turn ISC plunger to obtain 900 RPM (Maximum Authority). 16. Recheck ISC "Maximum Authority" RPM with voltage applied to ISC motor (step 13). Motor will ratchet at full extension with power applied. 17. After adjustment of ISC plunger, measure distance from back side of plunger head to ISC nosepiece. Dimension "B" must not exceed that shown in below chart. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 227 18. Fully retract ISC plunger (step 8). Place transmission in "PARK" (automatic) or "NEUTRAL" (manual) and turn ignition "OFF". Disconnect 12 volt power source, ground lead, tachometer and dwell meters. With ignition "OFF" reconnect four terminal harness connector to ISC motor. 19. "TRICKING" the ISC motor as described will cause the "CHECK ENGINE" light to come on and an ISC motor trouble code to be set. By restoring the system to normal operation, the light will go out, but the trouble code will continue to be stored as an "INTERMITTENT" problem. In this case, it will be necessary to clear the diagnostic trouble codes by removing the ECM fuse from the fuse block for about 10 seconds. Federal PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES - Warm engine to normal operating temperature (upper radiator hose hot). - Turn "OFF" all accessories, including A/C. - Check Timing (adjust if not to specification). See: Ignition Timing - Connect tachometer. CAUTION: Exercise care not to ground the TACH terminal (which is located next to the BAT connector) as this may damage the Electronic Control Module (ECM) or coil. CURB IDLE SPEED - Disconnect and plug vacuum hose to EGR valve and canister purge. - Adjust curb idle speed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 228 Without A/C Turn idle speed screw to specified curb idle (automatic transmissions in drive with wheels blocked and parking brake set). See: Specifications With A/C With A/C "OFF", turn idle speed screw to specified curb idle (automatic transmissions in drive with wheels blocked and parking brake set). - Disconnect wire to A/C compressor clutch and turn A/C "ON". - Open throttle momentarily to assure solenoid plunger is fully extended. - Turn solenoid screw to the specified idle speed. See: Specifications - Reconnect wire to compressor clutch. THROTTLE LEVER ACTUATOR - Disconnect vacuum hose from solenoid valve to the actuator diaphragm. - Connect an external vacuum source to the diaphragm and apply 20 inches of vacuum. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 229 - Manually open the throttle slightly and allow it to close against the extended actuator plunger. With engine warm, idle speed should be: Federal - 1500 rpm California - 1600 rpm NOTE: The throttle lever actuator is designed to control emissions by holding the throttle open slightly during deceleration and coasting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 230 Idle Speed: Adjustments Fast Idle Speed PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES - Warm engine to normal operating temperature (upper radiator hose hot). - Turn "OFF" all accessories, including A/C. - Check Timing (adjust if not to specification). - Connect tachometer. CAUTION: Exercise care not to ground the TACH terminal (which is located next to the BAT connector) as this may damage the Electronic Control Module (ECM) or coil. ADJUST FAST IDLE SPEED - Transmission in "PARK" or "NEUTRAL". - Disconnect and plug EGR vacuum line. - Place cam on "HIGH" step. - Turn fast idle screw to obtain specified rpm. See: Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 240 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 246 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Throttle Body Injected Engines 1. Remove fuel pump fuse from fuse box. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and replace fuel pump fuse. Port Injected Engines 1. Disconnect fuel tank harness connector. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and reconnect fuel tank harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Ignition Firing Order FIRING ORDER Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Number 1 Cylinder Location FIRING ORDER Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Timing Marks and Indicators > System Information > Locations Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug Wire <--> [Ignition Cable] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spark Plug Wire: > 93356D > Oct > 92 > Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Spark Plug Wire: Customer Interest Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Number: 93-35-6D Section: 6D Date: OCT. 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 716404R ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: ENGINE MISS HESITATION OR ROUGHNESS DUE TO PIERCED SECONDARY IGNITION COMPONENTS Model and Year: 1980-93 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 87-121, DATED MAY 1987. THE 1989-93 MODEL YEARS HAVE BEEN ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 87-121 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. During the diagnosis procedure for an engine miss, hesitation or roughness, a spark plug or spark plug wire condition may be suspected. Several types of commercial or homemade diagnostic equipment required the secondary ignition boots or wire to be pierced. This is normally done to check for spark plug firing or to perform a cylinder balance test. Similarly the use of pliers or other such tools to disengage a spark plug boot may pierce or damage the boot or wire. Secondary ignition components should not be pierced for any reason. Piercing a spark plug wire and/or distributor boot may create a condition that will not be immediately apparent. Over time, the hole in the pierced boot may allow a ground path to develop creating a plug misfire condition. Heavily moisture laden air in the vicinity of the pierced boot may accelerate this effect. Piercing a secondary ignition wire creates a gap in the wire's conductive core. This gap is a point of high resistance. The current flow in the wire will increase to compensate for the higher wire resistance. Over time, the wire may fail creating a plug misfire condition. The time required for the condition to appear depends upon the extent of damage to the conductive core. To help prevent future condition that are spark plug wire related, do not pierce or otherwise damage any secondary ignition component. Only use diagnostic equipment containing an inductive pick-up to check for spark plug firing or to perform cylinder balance tests. When disengaging a spark plug boot from the spark plug, twist the flanged boot 1/2 turn then pull on the boot only to remove the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug Wire <--> [Ignition Cable] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spark Plug Wire: > 93356D > Oct > 92 > Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Spark Plug Wire: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Number: 93-35-6D Section: 6D Date: OCT. 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 716404R ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: ENGINE MISS HESITATION OR ROUGHNESS DUE TO PIERCED SECONDARY IGNITION COMPONENTS Model and Year: 1980-93 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 87-121, DATED MAY 1987. THE 1989-93 MODEL YEARS HAVE BEEN ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 87-121 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. During the diagnosis procedure for an engine miss, hesitation or roughness, a spark plug or spark plug wire condition may be suspected. Several types of commercial or homemade diagnostic equipment required the secondary ignition boots or wire to be pierced. This is normally done to check for spark plug firing or to perform a cylinder balance test. Similarly the use of pliers or other such tools to disengage a spark plug boot may pierce or damage the boot or wire. Secondary ignition components should not be pierced for any reason. Piercing a spark plug wire and/or distributor boot may create a condition that will not be immediately apparent. Over time, the hole in the pierced boot may allow a ground path to develop creating a plug misfire condition. Heavily moisture laden air in the vicinity of the pierced boot may accelerate this effect. Piercing a secondary ignition wire creates a gap in the wire's conductive core. This gap is a point of high resistance. The current flow in the wire will increase to compensate for the higher wire resistance. Over time, the wire may fail creating a plug misfire condition. The time required for the condition to appear depends upon the extent of damage to the conductive core. To help prevent future condition that are spark plug wire related, do not pierce or otherwise damage any secondary ignition component. Only use diagnostic equipment containing an inductive pick-up to check for spark plug firing or to perform cylinder balance tests. When disengaging a spark plug boot from the spark plug, twist the flanged boot 1/2 turn then pull on the boot only to remove the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Specifications Distributor: Specifications DISTRIBUTOR TIMING ADVANCE Degrees advance at engine rpm, no load, in addition to basic timing. Mechanical advance distributors only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Specifications > Page 279 Distributor: Application and ID HEI distributors with EST can be identified by the following; They have no distributor mounted vacuum controls--spark timing is controlled electronically. - With EST system uses a seven terminal High Energy Ignition (HEI) module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Replacement Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Replacement 1. Disconnect battery and tachometer lead from distributor cap. 2. Disconnect coil connectors from distributor cap and 4 terminal connector (if equipped). NOTE: Do not use a tool of any kind to release coil connectors or damage to lock tabs will result. 3. Remove distributor cap with ignition high tension wires connected and position aside. Remove vacuum hose (if equipped). 4. Remove distributor clamp screw and hold-down clamp. 5. Mark relationship of rotor to distributor housing, then lift distributor from engine slightly until rotor stops turning. Mark relationship of new rotor position on distributor housing, then remove distributor from engine. 6. If engine was not cranked after distributor was removed from engine, proceed as follows: a. Position rotor to align with second mark made on distributor housing prior to removing distributor. b. Install distributor into engine and align rotor with first mark made on distributor housing prior to removing distributor. c. Install distributor cap and connect all electrical connectors. d. Adjust ignition timing as specified in individual car chapters. 7. If engine was cranked after distributor was removed from engine, proceed as follows: a. Remove No. 1 spark plug and crank engine until compression pressure is felt in No. 1 cylinder. Slowly rotate engine until top dead center is indicated. b. Turn rotor to a position just ahead of No. 1 spark plug tower on distributor cap. c. Install distributor. Connect 4 terminal connector (if equipped). d. Install distributor cap, coil connectors, tachometer lead and battery feed wire. e. Adjust ignition timing to specifications in Tune Up Section. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Replacement > Page 282 Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Overhaul Fig 1 Removing distributor shield. Models equipped with 6 & 8 cylinder engines Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Replacement > Page 283 Fig 2 Pickup coil disassembled. Models equipped with 6 & 8 cylinder engines 1. Remove cap and coil as an assembly. 2. Remove rotor and pickup coil leads from module. 3. Mark relationship of distributor shaft and driven gear for reference during assembly. 4. Remove roll pin and driven gear. 5. Remove distributor shaft assembly. 6. Remove shield, Fig. 1. 7. Remove retaining ring, pickup coil, magnet and pole piece, Fig. 2. 8. Remove module retaining screws and capacitor screw, then remove module, capacitor and harness assembly from distributor. 9. Disconnect wiring harness from module. Reverse procedure to assemble. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Torque Spark Plug: Specifications Plug Tightening Torque 17 - 27 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Torque > Page 288 SPARK PLUGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Minimum, 698 kPa (100 psi) @ 200 rpm. The lowest cylinder reading should not be less than 80% of the highest. Perform compression test with engine at normal operating temperature, spark plugs removed and throttle wide open. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications FRONT TO REAR 6-250, 292.............................................................................................................. ..............................................................................E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E V6-231................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................E-I-I-E-I-E V6-262 Left Side............................................................................................ .....................................................................................................................E-I-E-I-I-E Right Side....... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..........................................E-I-I-E-I-E V8-267, 305, 350, 400............................................................... .......................................................................................................................E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E V8-454.... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................E-I-E-I-E-I-E-I Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 295 Valve Clearance: Adjustments STATIC ADJUSTMENT NOTE: This procedure does not apply to 231 V-6 engines. 1. Start engine and allow to reach normal operating temperature, then shut engine off. 2. With engine in position to fire No. 1 cylinder, adjust the following valves: V6-229 and 262, Exhaust Nos. 1, 5 and 6; Intake Nos. 1, 2 and 3. 6-250 and 292, Exhaust Nos. 1, 3 and 5; Intake Nos. 1, 2 and 4. V8 engines, Exhaust Nos. 1, 3, 4 and 8; Intake Nos. 1, 2, 5 and 7. To properly adjust valves, tighten adjusting nut until all lash is eliminated, then tighten nut the specified additional number of turns. On V8-454 / 7.4L engine, tighten nut 3/4 additional turn from zero lash. On all others, tighten nut one full turn from zero lash. 3. Turn crankshaft one complete revolution, which will bring engine in position to fire cylinders 4(V6) or 6(Inline 6 and V8). With engine in this position, adjust the following valves: V6-229 and 262, Exhaust Nos. 2, 3 and 4; Intake Nos. 4, 5 and 6. 6-250 and 292, Exhaust Nos. 2, 4 and 6; Intake Nos. 3, 5 and 6. V8 engines, Exhaust Nos. 2, 5, 6 and 7; Intake Nos. 3, 4, 6 and 8. When zero lash is obtained, tighten adjusting nuts as specified in step 2. ENGINE RUNNING ADJUSTMENT NOTE: The following procedure, performed with the engine running, should be done only in case readjustment is required. 1. After engine has been warmed to operating temperature, remove valve cover and install a new valve cover gasket. 2. With engine running at idle speed, back off valve rocker arm nut until rocker arm starts to clatter. 3. Turn rocker arm nut down slowly until the clatter just stops. This is the zero lash position. 4. Turn nut down 1/4 additional turn and pause 10 seconds until engine runs smoothly. Repeat additional 1/4 turns, pausing 10 seconds each time, until nut has been turned down the specified number of turns from the zero lash position. This preload adjustment must be done slowly to allow the lifter to adjust itself to prevent the possibility of interference between the intake valve head and top of piston, which might result in internal damage and/or bent pushrods. Noisy lifters should be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - Proper Use of Timing Belt Tension Gauge Timing Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Proper Use of Timing Belt Tension Gauge Number: 83-I-55 Section: VI Date: April, 1983 Subject: PROPER USE OF TIMING BELT TENSION GAUGE J-26486-A (ENGINE VIN CODES C AND O) TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Timing Belt Tension Gauge When using timing belt tension gauge J-26486-A, it should be noted the scale reads is newtons on the inside scale and in pounds on the outside scale (see illustration). The newton scale is in graduations of one hundreds (example: .5 = 50 newtons). If your gauge does not have the -A detail, it can be ordered through Kent-Moore Tool Division (P/N J-26486-1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 304 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 305 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Belt Tension - Used BELT TENSION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Belt Tension - Used > Page 308 BELT TENSION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 319 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 325 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Injection Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Centrifugal Pump Filter Air Injection Filter: Service and Repair Centrifugal Pump Filter Fig. 11 - Removing Centrifugal Type Pump Air Filter REMOVAL 1. Remove drive belt, pulley bolts and pulley from air pump. 2. Using a suitable tool--Fig 11--pry loose outer disc of filter fan. NOTE: Carefully pry disc to ensure that no dirt fragments enter the air intake hole. INSTALLATION NOTE: Do not attempt to install a filter by hammering it or pressing the filter on. 1. Install filter by drawing it on with the pulley, then alternately tighten pulley bolts evenly until filter is properly seated. 2. Ensure outer edge of filter is in the air pump housing--a slight amount of interference with the air pump housing bore is normal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Injection Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Centrifugal Pump Filter > Page 330 Air Injection Filter: Service and Repair Conventional Filter Fig. 12 - Conventional Type Pump Air Filter NOTE: The air filter element is not serviceable and must be replaced. 1. Remove and replace the air filter element as shown in Fig. 12. 2. Position the assembled air horn and filter element in the air cleaner body, ensuring tang is in the slot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Throttle Body Injected Engines 1. Remove fuel pump fuse from fuse box. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and replace fuel pump fuse. Port Injected Engines 1. Disconnect fuel tank harness connector. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and reconnect fuel tank harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hose/Line HVAC: > 8540 > Feb > 85 > A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs Hose/Line HVAC: Customer Interest A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs 85-40 1B (Ia) FEB., 1985 Subject: A/C REFRIGERANT HOSE AND CLAMP REPAIRS Model and Year: ALL CHEVROLET VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS WARRANTY AND NON-WARRANTY REPAIRS When a freon leak is detected at an air conditioning refrigerant hose connection which has a crimped metal band, the crimped band may be replaced with a special screw-type service clamp for non-warranty type repairs according to the following clamp replacement procedure. Also included is a hose repair procedure for a damaged and/or leaking refrigerant hose. This allows the dealer the added flexibility of repairing hose assemblies rather than replacing them. Warranty repairs should continue the replacement procedure. NOTICE: Hoses marked with the words "PARKER", "PARKER PARFLEX 80" or "PARFLEX 80" are nylon and cannot be repaired by these procedures. These hoses should be replaced as entire assemblies. Figure 1 CLAMP REPLACEMENT 1. Completely discharge the air conditioning system by an approved method. 2. Disconnect the entire hose assembly and remove it from the vehicle. Put tape or approved plastic caps over all of the openings to the system, including the removed hose assembly, to prevent dirt and moisture contamination. 3. Using a fine tooth hacksaw, cut a wide notch all the way across the crimped metal band (see Figure 1). NOTICE: AVOID CUTTING THE HOSE MATERIAL. FIGURE 2 4. Using a cold chisel and a small hammer, tap carefully at the notch until the band is split all the way across (see Figure 2). 5. Pry the band open until it can be removed without cutting the hose material with the burred edges. NOTICE: If the hose material has been cut, all or part of the hose must be replaced. See Table A for applicable clamps, hose material, and splicer fitting kits. The repaired hose should be the same overall length as the original. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hose/Line HVAC: > 8540 > Feb > 85 > A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs > Page 348 FIGURE 3 6. Install the special screw-type service clamp so that the locator lug is positioned on the hose end (see Figure 3). Tighten clamp to 4.5 N-m (40 in. lbs.). 7. Reinstall the hose assembly on the vehicle with new 'O' rings where used. A/C compressor oil should be used to lubricate the 'O' rings. 8. Partially charge the system and perform a leak test before completely recharging. FIGURE 4 HOSE REPAIR 1. Perform Step #1 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. 2. Using a fine tooth hacksaw, cut all the way through the metal band clamp and into the top layer of the hose on one end of the hose if only part of it is being replaced or on both ends if the entire hose is being replaced. 3. Pry the band open until it can be removed without damaging the fitting. 4. If only part of the hose is being replaced: a. Cut the bad part away squarely. b. Use a new section of the hose of the same inside diameter and cut it 13 mm (1/2") shorter than the removed section (see Table A for parts applications). c. Install the proper size splicer fitting kit per the instructions, between the remaining section and new section of hose and install the other end of the hose on the fitting. Align fittings so that there will be no twist in the hose when it is on the vehicle (see Figure 4). See Table A for parts applications. d. Install two service clamps at a splice and one at a fitting as in Step #6 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. e. Perform Steps #7 and #8 of the Claim Replacement procedure. 5. If the entire section of hose is being replaced: a. Cut the old hose off of both fittings. b. Install a new section of hose of the same inside diameter and cut to the same length and install it on fittings. Align fittings so that there will be no twist in the hose when it is on the vehicle. See Table A for parts applications. c. Install a service clamp at each end as in Step #6 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. d. Perform Steps #7 and #8 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. TABLE A Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hose/Line HVAC: > 8540 > Feb > 85 > A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs > Page 349 AIR CONDITIONING SERVICE CLAMPS, HOSE MATERIAL AND SPLICER FITTING KITS Hose Roll Group # Part # Description I.D. Length 9.242/ (Hose O.D. 11/16"1.166 3909030 A/C Hose Clamp 1-7/32") 8.962 230882 A/C Refrigerant Hose 5/16" 15' 8.962 230883* A/C Refrigerant Hose 13/32" 15' 8.962 12309273* A/C Refrigerant Hose 13/32" 15' 8.962 12309274 A/C Refrigerant Hose 13/32" 50' 8.962 230884 A/C Refrigerant Hose 1/2" 15' 8.962 12309271* A/C Refrigerant Hose 1/2" 15' 8.962 12309272 A/C Refrigerant Hose 1/2" 50' 8.962 12309275 A/C Refrigerant Hose 5/8" 15' 8.962 12309276 A/C Refrigerant Hose 5/8" 50' 9.222 3023686 Splicer Fitting Kit 5/16" 9.222 3023687 Splicer Fitting Kit 13/32" 9.222 3023688 Splicer Fitting Kit 1/2" 9.222 3023689 Splicer Fitting Kit 5/8" * Hoses in this list which are of the same inside diameter and roll length are interchangeable. Different part numbers denote different manufacturer sources in these cases. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hose/Line HVAC: > 8540 > Feb > 85 > A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs Hose/Line HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs 85-40 1B (Ia) FEB., 1985 Subject: A/C REFRIGERANT HOSE AND CLAMP REPAIRS Model and Year: ALL CHEVROLET VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS WARRANTY AND NON-WARRANTY REPAIRS When a freon leak is detected at an air conditioning refrigerant hose connection which has a crimped metal band, the crimped band may be replaced with a special screw-type service clamp for non-warranty type repairs according to the following clamp replacement procedure. Also included is a hose repair procedure for a damaged and/or leaking refrigerant hose. This allows the dealer the added flexibility of repairing hose assemblies rather than replacing them. Warranty repairs should continue the replacement procedure. NOTICE: Hoses marked with the words "PARKER", "PARKER PARFLEX 80" or "PARFLEX 80" are nylon and cannot be repaired by these procedures. These hoses should be replaced as entire assemblies. Figure 1 CLAMP REPLACEMENT 1. Completely discharge the air conditioning system by an approved method. 2. Disconnect the entire hose assembly and remove it from the vehicle. Put tape or approved plastic caps over all of the openings to the system, including the removed hose assembly, to prevent dirt and moisture contamination. 3. Using a fine tooth hacksaw, cut a wide notch all the way across the crimped metal band (see Figure 1). NOTICE: AVOID CUTTING THE HOSE MATERIAL. FIGURE 2 4. Using a cold chisel and a small hammer, tap carefully at the notch until the band is split all the way across (see Figure 2). 5. Pry the band open until it can be removed without cutting the hose material with the burred edges. NOTICE: If the hose material has been cut, all or part of the hose must be replaced. See Table A for applicable clamps, hose material, and splicer fitting kits. The repaired hose should be the same overall length as the original. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hose/Line HVAC: > 8540 > Feb > 85 > A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs > Page 355 FIGURE 3 6. Install the special screw-type service clamp so that the locator lug is positioned on the hose end (see Figure 3). Tighten clamp to 4.5 N-m (40 in. lbs.). 7. Reinstall the hose assembly on the vehicle with new 'O' rings where used. A/C compressor oil should be used to lubricate the 'O' rings. 8. Partially charge the system and perform a leak test before completely recharging. FIGURE 4 HOSE REPAIR 1. Perform Step #1 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. 2. Using a fine tooth hacksaw, cut all the way through the metal band clamp and into the top layer of the hose on one end of the hose if only part of it is being replaced or on both ends if the entire hose is being replaced. 3. Pry the band open until it can be removed without damaging the fitting. 4. If only part of the hose is being replaced: a. Cut the bad part away squarely. b. Use a new section of the hose of the same inside diameter and cut it 13 mm (1/2") shorter than the removed section (see Table A for parts applications). c. Install the proper size splicer fitting kit per the instructions, between the remaining section and new section of hose and install the other end of the hose on the fitting. Align fittings so that there will be no twist in the hose when it is on the vehicle (see Figure 4). See Table A for parts applications. d. Install two service clamps at a splice and one at a fitting as in Step #6 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. e. Perform Steps #7 and #8 of the Claim Replacement procedure. 5. If the entire section of hose is being replaced: a. Cut the old hose off of both fittings. b. Install a new section of hose of the same inside diameter and cut to the same length and install it on fittings. Align fittings so that there will be no twist in the hose when it is on the vehicle. See Table A for parts applications. c. Install a service clamp at each end as in Step #6 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. d. Perform Steps #7 and #8 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. TABLE A Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hose/Line HVAC: > 8540 > Feb > 85 > A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs > Page 356 AIR CONDITIONING SERVICE CLAMPS, HOSE MATERIAL AND SPLICER FITTING KITS Hose Roll Group # Part # Description I.D. Length 9.242/ (Hose O.D. 11/16"1.166 3909030 A/C Hose Clamp 1-7/32") 8.962 230882 A/C Refrigerant Hose 5/16" 15' 8.962 230883* A/C Refrigerant Hose 13/32" 15' 8.962 12309273* A/C Refrigerant Hose 13/32" 15' 8.962 12309274 A/C Refrigerant Hose 13/32" 50' 8.962 230884 A/C Refrigerant Hose 1/2" 15' 8.962 12309271* A/C Refrigerant Hose 1/2" 15' 8.962 12309272 A/C Refrigerant Hose 1/2" 50' 8.962 12309275 A/C Refrigerant Hose 5/8" 15' 8.962 12309276 A/C Refrigerant Hose 5/8" 50' 9.222 3023686 Splicer Fitting Kit 5/16" 9.222 3023687 Splicer Fitting Kit 13/32" 9.222 3023688 Splicer Fitting Kit 1/2" 9.222 3023689 Splicer Fitting Kit 5/8" * Hoses in this list which are of the same inside diameter and roll length are interchangeable. Different part numbers denote different manufacturer sources in these cases. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > P/S - Rack & Pinion O-Ring Seal Fitting Leaks Power Steering Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins P/S - Rack & Pinion O-Ring Seal Fitting Leaks 85-61 3B (IX) APR., 1985 Subject: POWER STEERING HOSE LINE CONNECTION FITTING LEAKS Model and Year: ALL VEHICLES WITH POWER STEERING EXCEPT NOVA, SPRINT AND SPECTRUM TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS "O" ring type seal fittings have been used on rack and pinion and integral gear power steering hose line connections since 1980. Fitting torque specification is 27 N-m (20 lbs. ft.). If a leak is experienced at the fitting area when properly tightened, this condition may be caused by a damaged fitting "O" ring. Inspect the "O" ring for damage, pipe end for cracks, fitting threads for damage and replace as required. DO NOT EXCEED fitting torque specification. Additional torque will not increase "O" ring sealing ability and may result in cracking the connection boss on aluminum gear housings. If a leak is experienced at the connection area with a new undamaged "O" ring under correct torque, inspect housing boss for possible porosity. A porosity condition will require housing or short gear replacement. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Clutch Fluid: Capacity Specifications Fill the clutch master cylinder to the "Full" or "MAX" mark on the reservoir. Do not overfill. Caution: Should accidental spillage occur, rinse the area thoroughly with water. Pay special attention to any electrical wires, parts, harnesses, rubber or painted surfaces. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 366 Clutch Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Hydraulic Clutch Fluid ........................................................................................................................................................... DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Bulletin No.: 00-06-02-006D Date: August 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Engine Coolant Recycling and Warranty Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER Vehicles 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please address this bulletin to the Warranty Claims Administrator and the Service Manager. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to adjust the title and Include Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-02-006C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Coolant Reimbursement Policy General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words: if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of GM Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Licensed Approved DEX-COOL(R) Providers Important: USE OF NON-APPROVED VIRGIN OR RECYCLED DEX-COOL(R) OR DEVIATIONS IN THE FORM OF ALTERNATE CHEMICALS OR ALTERATION OF EQUIPMENT, WILL VOID THE GM ENDORSEMENT, MAY DEGRADE COOLANT SYSTEM INTEGRITY AND PLACE THE COOLING SYSTEM WARRANTY UNDER JEOPARDY. Shown in Table 1 are the only current licensed and approved providers of DEX-COOL(R). Products that are advertised as "COMPATIBLE" or "RECOMMENDED" for use with DEX-COOL(R) have not been tested or approved by General Motors. Non-approved coolants may degrade the Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information > Page 371 coolant system integrity and will no longer be considered a 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Coolant Removal Services/Recycling The tables include all coolant recycling processes currently approved by GM. Also included is a primary phone number and demographic information. Used DEX-COOL(R) can be combined with used conventional coolant (green) for recycling. Depending on the recycling service and/or equipment, it is then designated as a conventional 2 yr/30,000 mile (50,000 km) coolant or DEX-COOL(R) 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Recycled coolants as designated in this bulletin may be used during the vehicle(s) warranty period. DEX-COOL(R) Recycling The DEX-COOL(R) recycling service listed in Table 2 has been approved for recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL) or conventional) to DEX-COOL(R) with 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) usability. Recycling Fluid Technologies is the only licensed provider of Recycled DEX-COOL(R) meeting GM6277M specifications and utilizes GM approved inhibitor packages. This is currently a limited program being monitored by GM Service Operations which will be expanded as demand increases. Conventional (Green) Recycling Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information > Page 372 Processes shown in the Table 3 are capable of recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL(R) or conventional) to a conventional (green) coolant. Recycling conventional coolant can be accomplished at your facility by a technician using approved EQUIPMENT (listed by model number in Table 3), or by an approved coolant recycling SERVICE which may recycle the coolant at your facility or at an offsite operation. Refer to the table for GM approved coolant recyclers in either of these two categories. Should you decide to recycle the coolant yourself, strict adherence to the operating procedures is imperative. Use ONLY the inhibitor chemicals supplied by the respective (GM approved) recycling equipment manufacturer. Sealing Tablets Cooling System Sealing Tablets (Seal Tabs) should not be used as a regular maintenance item after servicing an engine cooling system. Discoloration of coolant can occur if too many seal tabs have been inserted into the cooling system. This can occur if seal tabs are repeatedly used over the service life of a vehicle. Where appropriate, seal tabs may be used if diagnostics fail to repair a small leak in the cooling system. When a condition appears in which seal tabs may be recommended, a specific bulletin will be released describing their proper usage. Water Quality The integrity of the coolant is dependent upon the quality of DEX-COOL(R) and water. DEX-COOL(R) is a product that has enhanced protection capability as well as an extended service interval. These enhanced properties may be jeopardized by combining DEX-COOL(R) with poor quality water. If you suspect the water in your area of being poor quality, it is recommended you use distilled or de-ionized water with DEX-COOL(R). "Pink" DEX-COOL(R) DEX-COOL(R) is orange in color to distinguish it from other coolants. Due to inconsistencies in the mixing of the dyes used with DEX-COOL(R), some batches may appear pink after time. The color shift from orange to pink does not affect the integrity of the coolant, and still maintains the 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) service interval. Back Service Only use DEX-COOL(R) if the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information > Page 373 Contamination Mixing conventional green coolant with DEX-COOL(R) will degrade the service interval from 5 yrs./150,000 miles (240,000 km) to 2 yrs./30,000 miles (50,000 km) if left in the contaminated condition. If contamination occurs, the cooling system must be flushed twice immediately and re-filled with a 50/50 mixture of DEX-COOL(R) and clean water in order to preserve the enhanced properties and extended service interval of DEX-COOL(R). After 5 years/150,000 miles (240,000 km) After 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km), the coolant should be changed, preferably using a coolant exchanger. If the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R) and has not had problems with contamination from non-DEX-COOL(R) coolants, then the service interval remains the same, and the coolant does not need to be changed for another 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km) Equipment (Coolant Exchangers) The preferred method of performing coolant replacement is to use a coolant exchanger. A coolant exchanger can replace virtually all of the old coolant with new coolant. Coolant exchangers can be used to perform coolant replacement without spillage, and facilitate easy waste collection. They can also be used to lower the coolant level in a vehicle to allow for less messy servicing of cooling system components. It is recommended that you use a coolant exchanger with a vacuum feature facilitates removing trapped air from the cooling system. This is a substantial time savings over repeatedly thermo cycling the vehicle and topping-off the radiator. The vacuum feature also allows venting of a hot system to relieve system pressure. Approved coolant exchangers are available through the GMDE (General Motors Dealer Equipment) program. For refilling a cooling system that has been partially or fully drained for repairs other than coolant replacement, the Vac-N-Fill Coolant Refill Tool (GE-47716) is recommended to facilitate removal of trapped air from the cooling system during refill. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 00-06-02-006D > Aug > 06 > Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Bulletin No.: 00-06-02-006D Date: August 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Engine Coolant Recycling and Warranty Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER Vehicles 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please address this bulletin to the Warranty Claims Administrator and the Service Manager. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to adjust the title and Include Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-02-006C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Coolant Reimbursement Policy General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words: if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of GM Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Licensed Approved DEX-COOL(R) Providers Important: USE OF NON-APPROVED VIRGIN OR RECYCLED DEX-COOL(R) OR DEVIATIONS IN THE FORM OF ALTERNATE CHEMICALS OR ALTERATION OF EQUIPMENT, WILL VOID THE GM ENDORSEMENT, MAY DEGRADE COOLANT SYSTEM INTEGRITY AND PLACE THE COOLING SYSTEM WARRANTY UNDER JEOPARDY. Shown in Table 1 are the only current licensed and approved providers of DEX-COOL(R). Products that are advertised as "COMPATIBLE" or "RECOMMENDED" for use with DEX-COOL(R) have not been tested or approved by General Motors. Non-approved coolants may degrade the Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 00-06-02-006D > Aug > 06 > Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information > Page 379 coolant system integrity and will no longer be considered a 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Coolant Removal Services/Recycling The tables include all coolant recycling processes currently approved by GM. Also included is a primary phone number and demographic information. Used DEX-COOL(R) can be combined with used conventional coolant (green) for recycling. Depending on the recycling service and/or equipment, it is then designated as a conventional 2 yr/30,000 mile (50,000 km) coolant or DEX-COOL(R) 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Recycled coolants as designated in this bulletin may be used during the vehicle(s) warranty period. DEX-COOL(R) Recycling The DEX-COOL(R) recycling service listed in Table 2 has been approved for recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL) or conventional) to DEX-COOL(R) with 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) usability. Recycling Fluid Technologies is the only licensed provider of Recycled DEX-COOL(R) meeting GM6277M specifications and utilizes GM approved inhibitor packages. This is currently a limited program being monitored by GM Service Operations which will be expanded as demand increases. Conventional (Green) Recycling Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 00-06-02-006D > Aug > 06 > Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information > Page 380 Processes shown in the Table 3 are capable of recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL(R) or conventional) to a conventional (green) coolant. Recycling conventional coolant can be accomplished at your facility by a technician using approved EQUIPMENT (listed by model number in Table 3), or by an approved coolant recycling SERVICE which may recycle the coolant at your facility or at an offsite operation. Refer to the table for GM approved coolant recyclers in either of these two categories. Should you decide to recycle the coolant yourself, strict adherence to the operating procedures is imperative. Use ONLY the inhibitor chemicals supplied by the respective (GM approved) recycling equipment manufacturer. Sealing Tablets Cooling System Sealing Tablets (Seal Tabs) should not be used as a regular maintenance item after servicing an engine cooling system. Discoloration of coolant can occur if too many seal tabs have been inserted into the cooling system. This can occur if seal tabs are repeatedly used over the service life of a vehicle. Where appropriate, seal tabs may be used if diagnostics fail to repair a small leak in the cooling system. When a condition appears in which seal tabs may be recommended, a specific bulletin will be released describing their proper usage. Water Quality The integrity of the coolant is dependent upon the quality of DEX-COOL(R) and water. DEX-COOL(R) is a product that has enhanced protection capability as well as an extended service interval. These enhanced properties may be jeopardized by combining DEX-COOL(R) with poor quality water. If you suspect the water in your area of being poor quality, it is recommended you use distilled or de-ionized water with DEX-COOL(R). "Pink" DEX-COOL(R) DEX-COOL(R) is orange in color to distinguish it from other coolants. Due to inconsistencies in the mixing of the dyes used with DEX-COOL(R), some batches may appear pink after time. The color shift from orange to pink does not affect the integrity of the coolant, and still maintains the 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) service interval. Back Service Only use DEX-COOL(R) if the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 00-06-02-006D > Aug > 06 > Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information > Page 381 Contamination Mixing conventional green coolant with DEX-COOL(R) will degrade the service interval from 5 yrs./150,000 miles (240,000 km) to 2 yrs./30,000 miles (50,000 km) if left in the contaminated condition. If contamination occurs, the cooling system must be flushed twice immediately and re-filled with a 50/50 mixture of DEX-COOL(R) and clean water in order to preserve the enhanced properties and extended service interval of DEX-COOL(R). After 5 years/150,000 miles (240,000 km) After 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km), the coolant should be changed, preferably using a coolant exchanger. If the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R) and has not had problems with contamination from non-DEX-COOL(R) coolants, then the service interval remains the same, and the coolant does not need to be changed for another 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km) Equipment (Coolant Exchangers) The preferred method of performing coolant replacement is to use a coolant exchanger. A coolant exchanger can replace virtually all of the old coolant with new coolant. Coolant exchangers can be used to perform coolant replacement without spillage, and facilitate easy waste collection. They can also be used to lower the coolant level in a vehicle to allow for less messy servicing of cooling system components. It is recommended that you use a coolant exchanger with a vacuum feature facilitates removing trapped air from the cooling system. This is a substantial time savings over repeatedly thermo cycling the vehicle and topping-off the radiator. The vacuum feature also allows venting of a hot system to relieve system pressure. Approved coolant exchangers are available through the GMDE (General Motors Dealer Equipment) program. For refilling a cooling system that has been partially or fully drained for repairs other than coolant replacement, the Vac-N-Fill Coolant Refill Tool (GE-47716) is recommended to facilitate removal of trapped air from the cooling system during refill. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 436201B > Apr > 95 > Coolant - Information on Propylene Glycol Usage Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Coolant - Information on Propylene Glycol Usage File In Section: 6 - Engine Bulletin No.: 43-62-01B Date: April, 1995 Subject: Propylene Glycol Engine Coolant Models: 1994 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks This bulletin is being revised to reflect most current information on propylene glycol engine coolant. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 4362O1A (Group Reference 6 - Engine). General Motors has been reviewing data supplied on the performance of propylene glycol engine coolant in GM vehicles. It is our conclusion that propylene glycol engine coolant will perform adequately under most vehicle operating conditions. As a result, propylene glycol engine coolant (meeting performance specification GM 1825M) may be used in GM vehicles and will not affect the warranty coverage. Prior to adding propylene glycol engine coolant to the cooling system, all the existing (ethylene glycol) coolant must be removed. This can be accomplished either by utilizing water-based coolant flushing equipment or "waterless quick change" equipment available in the GMDE program. As with any coolant change procedure, be sure to thoroughly purge the heater core and block as well as the radiator before attempting to convert the system to propylene glycol coolant. Freeze/Boil point levels are different for propylene glycol than for ethylene glycol engine coolant. To accurately determine freeze/boil protection level, it is imperative that coolants not be mixed. Removing all the used coolant as previously discussed resolves this concern. Freeze protection of propylene glycol cannot be determined using a standard hydrometer. Rather, a refractometer or test strip must be used. Propylene glycol engine coolants may be recycled in the same manner as conventional ethylene glycol coolant. No adverse effects will be encountered if these coolants are mixed prior to recycling, however, the ratio of propylene glycol coolant to ethylene glycol coolant should be kept low to minimize the effects on freeze point measurements. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 310504 > Feb > 94 > Warranty - Recycled Engine Coolant Policy Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - Recycled Engine Coolant Policy Group Ref.: Warranty Administration Bulletin No.: 310504 Date: February, 1994 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION SUBJECT: RECYCLED ENGINE COOLANT POLICY MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS ATTENTION: WARRANTY CLAIMS ADMINISTRATOR AND SERVICE MANAGER General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. For detailed information on GM approved engine coolant recycling equipment guidelines refer to the following bulletins: Cadillac 93-1-18, GMC Truck 93-6B-34, Chevrolet 93-73-6B, Pontiac 93-6-18, Oldsmobile 1-93-43, Buick 93-6B-1 (Corporate Number 236203). Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial to assure that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words, if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 91090A > Apr > 90 > Coolant - Used Anti-Freeze Policy Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Coolant - Used Anti-Freeze Policy Number: 91-09-0A Section: OA Date: April 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 976202 Subject: INFORMATION REGARDING RECONSTITUTED ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT TESTING AND THE USE OF A REFRACTOMETER Model and Year: ALL MODELS AND YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS RECONSTITUTED ANTIFREEZE At present, three types of recycling systems are available: 1) chemical addition to coolant; 2) filtration and addition of supplemental additives; and 3) separation of pure glycol from used coolant and reinhibition. 1) Chemical Addition-NOT RECOMMENDED With chemical addition, chemicals are added to the used engine coolant in an attempt to "clean up" the coolant. This system is the easiest since the only work involved is the addition of chemicals to the radiator. Most of these types of recycling systems use a strong acid to change precipitated corrosion products into a more soluble form. However, in addition to dissolving the corrosion products, the strong acid also attacks and corrodes the metals of the cooling system. 2) Filtration and Addition of Supplemental Additives-NOT RECOMMENDED In this type of system, the used coolant is either taken out of the vehicle or a flush-type unit is connected to the cooling system. The current technology consists simply of filtration and reinhibition of the spent coolant. While this does remove suspended solids, filtration does nothing to remove harmful degradation and corrosion products that are soluble in glycol solution. The reinhibition step used in current recycling systems may fail to produce a coolant which adequately protects all metals including aluminum in the most critical heat transfer applications, such as occurs in the cylinder heads and blocks. 3) Separation of Pure Glycol and InhibitionThe separation of pure glycol and the addition of fresh inhibitors is the ideal method for recycling coolants. Unfortunately, this method is expensive from both a collection standpoint and the technology available to economically extract pure ethylene glycol from used coolant. At this time, General Motors does not endorse these practices or equipment. Due to a worldwide shortage of ethylene glycol in 1988, some coolant manufacturers have started to mix other types of glycol in their coolant formulations; propylene glycol is the most common new ingredient. A hydrometer will not provide a correct measurement of freeze protection when anything other than ethylene glycol and water is being tested. The degree of inaccuracy will vary depending on the proportion of other glycols present in the coolant. Hydrometers test the amount of glycol in a mixture by measuring the specific gravity of the mixture; the more ethylene glycol, the higher the float balls go, and the better the freeze protection. Because ethylene glycol and propylene glycol do not have the same specific gravities, hydrometer readings of mixtures containing propylene glycol give incorrect values. As the shortage of ethylene glycol continues and/or worsens, more and more variations in antifreeze formulas will be marketed. It is, therefore, recommended that you purchase a "refractometer" and encourage your technicians to use it. Refractometers test for the amount of glycol in a coolant mixture by measuring the speed of light as it passes through the fluid and are not affected by the specific gravity of the glycol. The freeze protection of solutions of ethylene glycol in water, solutions of propylene glycol in water, and solutions of mixtures of propylene glycol and ethylene glycol in water may all be tested with sufficient accuracy using a refractometer. The following refractometers are available from Kent Moore: J 23688 Farenheit scale, measures to -50 F J 26568 Centigrade scale, measures to -45.5 C J 38633 Farenheit scale, measures to -84 F (For extreme cold weather regions) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 91090A > Apr > 90 > Coolant - Used Anti-Freeze Policy > Page 394 The toll free number for Kent Moore is 1-800-345-2233. Portions of this article were reprinted with permission, from Dow Chemical Canada, Inc., P.O. Box 1012, Sarnia, Ontario N7T 7K7. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 90496B > Aug > 89 > Cooling System - Reconstituted Anti-Freeze Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Reconstituted Anti-Freeze Information Number: 90-49-6B Section: 6B Date: August 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 930107 Subject: RECONSTITUTED ANTI-FREEZE Model and Year: ALL MODELS, ALL MODEL YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin provides information on "reconstituted anti-freeze". It has been brought to our attention that a number of manufacturers claim to have the capability of reconstituting engine coolant on site. At this time, General Motors does not endorse this practice or any equipment. Anti-freeze recycling is a very complex issue. In use as an engine coolant, ethylene glycol becomes oxidized producing a very degraded and deteriorated substance. Contamination by other automotive fluids during draining, handling and storage is also a major detriment to the reclaiming process. There is no additive we are aware of that can be merely put into used coolant that will restore it to an acceptable state. Typically, a multi-million dollar facility, utilizing sophisticated technology with distillation capabilities along with appropriate quality control would be required to adequately process used coolant to bring it to GM specifications. Disposal of all chemical products should be done in accordance with all applicable federal, state and local laws and regulations. Review engine coolant substitutes Dealer Service Bulletin No. 89-57-6B, dated January 1989. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 83I26 > Dec > 82 > Engine Coolant - Usage Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant - Usage Number: 83-I-26 Section: XIII Date: Dec., 1982 Subject: ENGINE COOLANT USAGE IN 1983 VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Chevrolet Motor Division has in past model years recommended use of ethylene glycol base anti-freeze that meets GM Specification 1899-M. This recommendation has changed for 1982 and 1983 vehicles which are factory filled with coolant which meets GM 1825-M specifications. It is required that any additions of coolant to these vehicles be done with GM 1825-M. This change was necessary due to the use of aluminum components on some engines which required a different formulation of anti-freeze to prevent corrosion. This anti-freeze is available from WDDGM in gallons and drums as P/N 1052753 and P/N 1052754. This new coolant may be added to systems which contain anti-freeze meeting the GM 1899-M specifications with no adverse effect, but it is recommended that when a complete draining of a cooling system is performed such as for engine repair, that it be refilled with one source rather than mixing old anti-freeze with new as there may be slight differences in their chemical properties that could affect their overall performance. Procedures for mixing anti-freeze to water to obtain the required protection level are unchanged. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > Page 403 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Coolant - Used Anti-Freeze Policy Number: 91-09-0A Section: OA Date: April 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 976202 Subject: INFORMATION REGARDING RECONSTITUTED ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT TESTING AND THE USE OF A REFRACTOMETER Model and Year: ALL MODELS AND YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS RECONSTITUTED ANTIFREEZE At present, three types of recycling systems are available: 1) chemical addition to coolant; 2) filtration and addition of supplemental additives; and 3) separation of pure glycol from used coolant and reinhibition. 1) Chemical Addition-NOT RECOMMENDED With chemical addition, chemicals are added to the used engine coolant in an attempt to "clean up" the coolant. This system is the easiest since the only work involved is the addition of chemicals to the radiator. Most of these types of recycling systems use a strong acid to change precipitated corrosion products into a more soluble form. However, in addition to dissolving the corrosion products, the strong acid also attacks and corrodes the metals of the cooling system. 2) Filtration and Addition of Supplemental Additives-NOT RECOMMENDED In this type of system, the used coolant is either taken out of the vehicle or a flush-type unit is connected to the cooling system. The current technology consists simply of filtration and reinhibition of the spent coolant. While this does remove suspended solids, filtration does nothing to remove harmful degradation and corrosion products that are soluble in glycol solution. The reinhibition step used in current recycling systems may fail to produce a coolant which adequately protects all metals including aluminum in the most critical heat transfer applications, such as occurs in the cylinder heads and blocks. 3) Separation of Pure Glycol and InhibitionThe separation of pure glycol and the addition of fresh inhibitors is the ideal method for recycling coolants. Unfortunately, this method is expensive from both a collection standpoint and the technology available to economically extract pure ethylene glycol from used coolant. At this time, General Motors does not endorse these practices or equipment. Due to a worldwide shortage of ethylene glycol in 1988, some coolant manufacturers have started to mix other types of glycol in their coolant formulations; propylene glycol is the most common new ingredient. A hydrometer will not provide a correct measurement of freeze protection when anything other than ethylene glycol and water is being tested. The degree of inaccuracy will vary depending on the proportion of other glycols present in the coolant. Hydrometers test the amount of glycol in a mixture by measuring the specific gravity of the mixture; the more ethylene glycol, the higher the float balls go, and the better the freeze protection. Because ethylene glycol and propylene glycol do not have the same specific gravities, hydrometer readings of mixtures containing propylene glycol give incorrect values. As the shortage of ethylene glycol continues and/or worsens, more and more variations in antifreeze formulas will be marketed. It is, therefore, recommended that you purchase a "refractometer" and encourage your technicians to use it. Refractometers test for the amount of glycol in a coolant mixture by measuring the speed of light as it passes through the fluid and are not affected by the specific gravity of the glycol. The freeze protection of solutions of ethylene glycol in water, solutions of propylene glycol in water, and solutions of mixtures of propylene glycol and ethylene glycol in water may all be tested with sufficient accuracy using a refractometer. The following refractometers are available from Kent Moore: J 23688 Farenheit scale, measures to -50 F J 26568 Centigrade scale, measures to -45.5 C J 38633 Farenheit scale, measures to -84 F (For extreme cold weather regions) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > Page 404 The toll free number for Kent Moore is 1-800-345-2233. Portions of this article were reprinted with permission, from Dow Chemical Canada, Inc., P.O. Box 1012, Sarnia, Ontario N7T 7K7. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > Page 405 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant - Usage Number: 83-I-26 Section: XIII Date: Dec., 1982 Subject: ENGINE COOLANT USAGE IN 1983 VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Chevrolet Motor Division has in past model years recommended use of ethylene glycol base anti-freeze that meets GM Specification 1899-M. This recommendation has changed for 1982 and 1983 vehicles which are factory filled with coolant which meets GM 1825-M specifications. It is required that any additions of coolant to these vehicles be done with GM 1825-M. This change was necessary due to the use of aluminum components on some engines which required a different formulation of anti-freeze to prevent corrosion. This anti-freeze is available from WDDGM in gallons and drums as P/N 1052753 and P/N 1052754. This new coolant may be added to systems which contain anti-freeze meeting the GM 1899-M specifications with no adverse effect, but it is recommended that when a complete draining of a cooling system is performed such as for engine repair, that it be refilled with one source rather than mixing old anti-freeze with new as there may be slight differences in their chemical properties that could affect their overall performance. Procedures for mixing anti-freeze to water to obtain the required protection level are unchanged. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > Page 406 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - Recycled Engine Coolant Policy Group Ref.: Warranty Administration Bulletin No.: 310504 Date: February, 1994 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION SUBJECT: RECYCLED ENGINE COOLANT POLICY MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS ATTENTION: WARRANTY CLAIMS ADMINISTRATOR AND SERVICE MANAGER General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. For detailed information on GM approved engine coolant recycling equipment guidelines refer to the following bulletins: Cadillac 93-1-18, GMC Truck 93-6B-34, Chevrolet 93-73-6B, Pontiac 93-6-18, Oldsmobile 1-93-43, Buick 93-6B-1 (Corporate Number 236203). Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial to assure that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words, if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-037E Date: April 07, 2011 Subject: Release of DEXRON(R)-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saturn Relay 2005 and Prior Saturn L-Series 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2005-2008 Saturn VUE with 4T45-E 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Except 2008 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Equinox Except 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Epica Except 2007 and Prior Chevrolet Optra Except 2008 and Prior Pontiac Torrent, Vibe, Wave Except 2003-2005 Saturn ION with CVT or AF23 Only Except 1991-2002 Saturn S-Series Except 2008 and Prior Saturn VUE with CVT, AF33 or 5AT (MJ7/MJ8) Transmission Only Except 2008 Saturn Astra Attention: DEXRON(R)-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is the only approved fluid for warranty repairs for General Motors transmissions/transaxles requiring DEXRON(R)-III and/or prior DEXRON(R) transmission fluids. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-037D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSFER CASES and POWER STEERING The content of this bulletin does not apply to manual transmissions or transfer cases. Any vehicle that previously required DEXRON(R)-III for a manual transmission or transfer case should now use P/N 88861800. This fluid is labeled Manual Transmission and Transfer Case Fluid. Some manual transmissions and transfer cases require a different fluid. Appropriate references should be checked when servicing any of these components. Power Steering Systems should now use P/N 9985010 labeled Power Steering Fluid. Consult the Parts Catalog, Owner's Manual, or Service Information (SI) for fluid recommendations. Some of our customers and/or General Motors dealerships/Saturn Retailers may have some concerns with DEXRON(R)-VI and DEXRON(R)-III Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) and transmission warranty claims. DEXRON(R)-VI is the only approved fluid for warranty repairs for General Motors transmissions/transaxles requiring DEXRON(R)-III and/or prior DEXRON(R) transmission fluids (except as noted above). Please remember that the clean oil reservoirs of the J-45096 - Flushing and Flow Tester machine should be purged of DEXRON(R)-III and filled with DEXRON(R)-VI for testing, flushing or filling General Motors transmissions/transaxles (except as noted above). DEXRON(R)-VI can be used in any proportion in past model vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission/transaxle in place of DEXRON(R)-III (i.e. topping off the fluid in the event of a repair or fluid change). DEXRON(R)-VI is also compatible with any former version of DEXRON(R) for use in automatic transmissions/transaxles. DEXRON(R)-VI ATF General Motors Powertrain has upgraded to DEXRON(R)-VI ATF with the start of 2006 vehicle production. Current and prior automatic transmission models that had used DEXRON(R)-III must now only use DEXRON(R)-VI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 411 All 2006 and future model transmissions that use DEXRON(R)-VI are to be serviced ONLY with DEXRON(R)-VI fluid. DEXRON(R)-VI is an improvement over DEXRON(R)-III in the following areas: * These ATF change intervals remain the same as DEXRON(R)-III for the time being. 2006-2008 Transmission Fill and Cooler Flushing Some new applications of the 6L80 six speed transmission will require the use of the J 45096 Flushing and Flow Tester to accomplish transmission fluid fill. The clean oil reservoir of the machine should be purged of DEXRON(R)-III and filled with DEXRON(R)-VI. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 412 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 413 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 414 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels 85-54 6 (VI) MAR., 1985 Subject: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE OIL LEVELS Model and Year:ALL PASSENGER AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and replaces Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 83-I-57 which should be destroyed. The following chart provides a guide for minimum acceptable oil levels "as received" from the factory. Only those components which have levels less than indicated below should have additional oil installed. Engine - Full mark to 6 mm (.24 in.) below full mark. Transmission a) Automatic - With engine idling, transmission selector in "Park", vehicle on a level surface and oil temperature between 10 to 38~C the oil level on the following transmissions should be as indicated: 440-T4 Transmission: Oil level should be in middle of cross-hatch area. 125/125C Transmission: Oil level should be slightly above full level. All other Transmissions: Oil level should be slightly below add level. If oil level gauge has dimples below add mark, oil level should be between these two dimples. b) Manual 1) Lower edge of inspection plug hole on rear wheel drive vehicles. 2) Between cold level range dimples or at cold level mark on front wheel drive vehicles. Differential - Lower edge of inspection plug hole to 9.5 mm (.37 in.) below lower edge of inspection plug hole. Transfer Case - Lower edge of inspection plug hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 415 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DEXRON III Fluid Introduction File In Section: 0 - General Information Bulletin No.: 57-02-01 Date: March, 1995 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Section 0 - General Information - DEXRON(R)-III Transmission Fluid Introduction Models: 1995 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks General Motors has phased in a new automatic transmission fluid, DEXRON(R)-III, that does not need replacing under normal service. DEXRON(R)-III is designed to help the transmission deliver the best possible performance under all conditions. Refer to Figure 1. The improvements in DEXRON(R)-III include better friction stability, more high temperature oxidation stability and better material compatibility. DEXRON(R)-III has the same low temperature fluidity as DEXRON(R)-IIE, for better transmission performance in cold weather. DEXRON(R)-IIE and DEXRON(R)-III are fully compatible. DEXRON(R)-III is fully compatible with any General Motors passenger vehicle or light truck with automatic transmission and built since 1949. Dealers should require their supplier to include the DEXRON(R)-III license number on all automatic transmission fluid invoices. Starting February 1, 1994 DEXRON(R)-III was phased into all North American assembly plants. DEXRON(R)-III fluid is available from GMSPO (see fluid numbers below): U.S. 1 Quart 12346143 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 416 1 Gallon 12346144 55 Gallon 12346145 In Canada 1 Liter 10952622 4 Liter 10952623 200 Liter 10952624 The 1995 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle fluid change intervals are the following: (1994 and prior should use the schedules as written in the Owner's Manual.) If the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. In hilly or mountainous terrain. When doing frequent trailer towing. Uses such as found in taxi, police car or delivery service. Change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (63,000 km). If the vehicle is not used mainly under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require periodic changing for vehicles under 8,600 GVWR. Vehicles over 8,600 GVWR change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83,000 km) regardless of driving conditions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 417 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - New Trans Fluid, Dexron IIE Number: 92-26-7A Section: 7A Date: OCT. 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 177125 ASE No.: A2 Subject: DEXRON-IIE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE FLUID Model and Year: 1976-92 ALL TRUCKS WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION APPLICATIONS: SUBJECT: All Automatic Transmissions DEXRON-IIE Automatic Transmission/Transaxle Fluid TRANSMISSION MODELS: VEHICLE APPLICATIONS: All All HYDRA-MATIC Automatic Transmissions/Transaxles Bulletin Covers: General Motors Corporation has developed a new service fill automatic transmission/transaxle fluid which is designated DEXRON-IIE. This fluid is the preferred fluid for all HYDRA-MATIC automatic transmission/transaxles and will eventually replace DEXRON II. DEXRON-IIE is acceptable for use wherever DEXRON II was previously specified. DEXRON II is acceptable for use when DEXRON-IIE is not available. DEXRON-IIE can be used in both electronically and hydraulically controlled transmissions/transaxles. DEXRON-IIE Advantages: ^ Has better anti-foaming characteristics. ^ Improved low temperature flow characteristics (low temperature viscosity) and improved high temperature oxidation stability. ^ DEXRON-IIE and DEXRON II can be mixed in any ratio. No draining or flushing of system is required. ^ DEXRON-IIE is back serviceable to 1949 for all General Motors automatic transmission/transaxles. ^ No change in transmission/transaxle calibration or reduction in transmission/transaxle durability will occur as a result of using DEXRON-IIE. Service Parts Information: PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 12345881 1 quart container 12345882 1 gallon container 12345883 55 gallon drum Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Leaded Gasoline Models TYPE.................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................AF CAPACITY, Initial refill*: Hydra-Matic 350............................................................................................ .....................................................................................2.8 Liters 3.0 Quarts Hydra-Matic 200 & 400.. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......3.3 Liters 3.5 Quarts Hydra-Matic 700-R4...................................................................................... .....................................................................................4.7 Liters 5.0 Quarts *With the engine at operating temperature, shift transmission through all gears. Let engine slow idle in PARK for 3 minutes or more. Check fluid level and add fluid as needed Unleaded Gasoline Models TYPE.................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................AF CAPACITY, Initial refill*: Hydra-Matic 350............................................................................................ ....................................................................................2.8 Liters 3.0 Quarts Hydra-Matic 200 & 400... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....3.3 Liters 3.5 Quarts Hydra-Matic 700-R4........................................................................................ ..................................................................................4.7 Liters 5.0 Quarts * With the engine at operating temperature, shift transmission through all gears. Let engine slow idle in PARK for 3 minutes or more. Check fluid level and add fluid as needed THM 400/475 Transmission Pan Capacity ....................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 4.0 Qts Overhaul Capacity ......................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... 11.5 Qts THM 700-R4 Transmission Pan Capacity ....................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 5.0 Qts Overhaul Capacity ......................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... 11.5 Qts Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 420 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications THM 700-R4 Transmission Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Dextron II THM 400/475 Transmission Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Dextron II Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels 85-54 6 (VI) MAR., 1985 Subject: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE OIL LEVELS Model and Year:ALL PASSENGER AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and replaces Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 83-I-57 which should be destroyed. The following chart provides a guide for minimum acceptable oil levels "as received" from the factory. Only those components which have levels less than indicated below should have additional oil installed. Engine - Full mark to 6 mm (.24 in.) below full mark. Transmission a) Automatic - With engine idling, transmission selector in "Park", vehicle on a level surface and oil temperature between 10 to 38~C the oil level on the following transmissions should be as indicated: 440-T4 Transmission: Oil level should be in middle of cross-hatch area. 125/125C Transmission: Oil level should be slightly above full level. All other Transmissions: Oil level should be slightly below add level. If oil level gauge has dimples below add mark, oil level should be between these two dimples. b) Manual 1) Lower edge of inspection plug hole on rear wheel drive vehicles. 2) Between cold level range dimples or at cold level mark on front wheel drive vehicles. Differential - Lower edge of inspection plug hole to 9.5 mm (.37 in.) below lower edge of inspection plug hole. Transfer Case - Lower edge of inspection plug hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Tremec 3 Speed Fluid capacities .................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 3.5 Pts Saginaw 3 Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 3.0 Pts Saginaw (76 mm) 4 Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 3.2 Pts Warner 83 mm 4 Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. 3.0 Warner T-4C 4 Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 4.0 Pts Warner T-5 (77MM) 5 Speed Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................... 5.0 Pts. Muncie 3 Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 3.0 Pts Muncie CH & SM-465 4 Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 8.2 Pts Muncie 4 (117MM) Speed Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................... 8.2 Pts. Isuzu M-150 (77.5 mm) 4-Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 4.2 Pts Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 427 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Tremec 3 Speed Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 80W Gear Oil Saginaw 3 Speed Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 80W Gear Oil Saginaw (76 mm) 4 Speed Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ...................................................... 80W-90 Gear Oil Warner 83 mm 4 Speed Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 80W Gear Oil Warner T-4C 4 Speed Fluid Types .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Dextron II ATF Muncie 3 Speed Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 80W Gear Oil Muncie CH & SM-465 4 Speed Fluid Types .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 80W-90 Gear Oil Muncie 4 (117MM) Speed Lubricant Type ..................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 80W-90 Gear Oil Isuzu M-150 (77.5 mm) 4-Speed Fluid Types .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Dextron II ATF Warner T-5 (77MM) 5 Speed Lubricant Type ..................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Dextron II ATF Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 913700B > Jul > 91 > Locking Differential - Chattering on Turns Fluid - Differential: Customer Interest Locking Differential - Chattering on Turns Number: 91-370-0B Section: 0B Date: JULY 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 964201R Subject: LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL LUBRICANT Model and Year: 1982-91 ALL TRUCKS WITH G80 REAR AXLE THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 90-139-4A, DATED JANUARY 1990. CONDITION DESCRIPTION AND CORRECTION HAVE BEEN ADDED AS WELL AS THE 1991 MODEL YEAR. ALL COPIES OF 90-139-4A SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some light duty trucks equipped with locking rear axles (G80) may exhibit rear axle chatter, especially when turning a corner from a stop. This condition of alternate engagement and disengagement of the clutches in the differential assembly is usually caused by contaminated axle lubricant. To correct this condition, drain and refill the rear axle with SAE 80W-90 GL5 (P/N 1052271). The use of any additive in locking rear axles (G80) is not recommended. Rear axle additives are designed for use in limited slip differentials which are normally installed in cars. All light duty trucks equipped with RPO G80 make use of a locking differential and the use of additives will delay the engagement of the locking mechanism and may decrease axle life. VEHICLES/COMPONENTS INVOLVED: Some light duty trucks equipped with locking rear axles, RPO G80. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION: Part Number Description 1052271 Lubricant, Rear Axle (24 oz.) See Appropriate Parts Manual Gasket, Rear Axle Housing Cover Parts are currently available through GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION: As specified in Light Duty Truck Maintenance Schedules, locking rear axle fluid drain and refill is required owner maintenance at the first engine oil change. Failure to drain and refill the rear axle as specified may contribute to a later axle chatter condition. Refer to the appropriate Light Duty Truck Maintenance Schedule or service manual, section 0B, for further details on change intervals. For those vehicles repaired under warranty, which have had the axle fluid changed at the first oil change and have experienced rear axle chatter use: Labor Operation: F2010 Use applicable labor time guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 76-02-02A > Oct > 98 > Drivetrain - Recommended Axle Lubricant Fluid - Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Recommended Axle Lubricant File In Section: 0 - General Information Bulletin No.: 76-02-02A Date: October, 1998 INFORMATION Subject: Recommended Axle Lubricant Models: 1999 and Prior Rear Wheel Drive Passenger Cars, Light and Medium Duty Trucks, and Four Wheel Drive Vehicles This bulletin is being revised to add the 1998 and 1999 Model Years and add Vehicle Line and Recommended Axle Lubricant Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 76-02-02 (Section 0 - General Information). The following tables provide the latest information on recommended axle lubricant. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 76-02-02A > Oct > 98 > Drivetrain - Recommended Axle Lubricant > Page 441 Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 913700B > Jul > 91 > Locking Differential - Chattering on Turns Fluid - Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins Locking Differential - Chattering on Turns Number: 91-370-0B Section: 0B Date: JULY 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 964201R Subject: LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL LUBRICANT Model and Year: 1982-91 ALL TRUCKS WITH G80 REAR AXLE THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 90-139-4A, DATED JANUARY 1990. CONDITION DESCRIPTION AND CORRECTION HAVE BEEN ADDED AS WELL AS THE 1991 MODEL YEAR. ALL COPIES OF 90-139-4A SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some light duty trucks equipped with locking rear axles (G80) may exhibit rear axle chatter, especially when turning a corner from a stop. This condition of alternate engagement and disengagement of the clutches in the differential assembly is usually caused by contaminated axle lubricant. To correct this condition, drain and refill the rear axle with SAE 80W-90 GL5 (P/N 1052271). The use of any additive in locking rear axles (G80) is not recommended. Rear axle additives are designed for use in limited slip differentials which are normally installed in cars. All light duty trucks equipped with RPO G80 make use of a locking differential and the use of additives will delay the engagement of the locking mechanism and may decrease axle life. VEHICLES/COMPONENTS INVOLVED: Some light duty trucks equipped with locking rear axles, RPO G80. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION: Part Number Description 1052271 Lubricant, Rear Axle (24 oz.) See Appropriate Parts Manual Gasket, Rear Axle Housing Cover Parts are currently available through GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION: As specified in Light Duty Truck Maintenance Schedules, locking rear axle fluid drain and refill is required owner maintenance at the first engine oil change. Failure to drain and refill the rear axle as specified may contribute to a later axle chatter condition. Refer to the appropriate Light Duty Truck Maintenance Schedule or service manual, section 0B, for further details on change intervals. For those vehicles repaired under warranty, which have had the axle fluid changed at the first oil change and have experienced rear axle chatter use: Labor Operation: F2010 Use applicable labor time guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 85546VI > Mar > 85 > Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels Fluid - Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels 85-54 6 (VI) MAR., 1985 Subject: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE OIL LEVELS Model and Year:ALL PASSENGER AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and replaces Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 83-I-57 which should be destroyed. The following chart provides a guide for minimum acceptable oil levels "as received" from the factory. Only those components which have levels less than indicated below should have additional oil installed. Engine - Full mark to 6 mm (.24 in.) below full mark. Transmission a) Automatic - With engine idling, transmission selector in "Park", vehicle on a level surface and oil temperature between 10 to 38~C the oil level on the following transmissions should be as indicated: 440-T4 Transmission: Oil level should be in middle of cross-hatch area. 125/125C Transmission: Oil level should be slightly above full level. All other Transmissions: Oil level should be slightly below add level. If oil level gauge has dimples below add mark, oil level should be between these two dimples. b) Manual 1) Lower edge of inspection plug hole on rear wheel drive vehicles. 2) Between cold level range dimples or at cold level mark on front wheel drive vehicles. Differential - Lower edge of inspection plug hole to 9.5 mm (.37 in.) below lower edge of inspection plug hole. Transfer Case - Lower edge of inspection plug hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 76-02-02A > Oct > 98 > Drivetrain - Recommended Axle Lubricant Fluid - Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Recommended Axle Lubricant File In Section: 0 - General Information Bulletin No.: 76-02-02A Date: October, 1998 INFORMATION Subject: Recommended Axle Lubricant Models: 1999 and Prior Rear Wheel Drive Passenger Cars, Light and Medium Duty Trucks, and Four Wheel Drive Vehicles This bulletin is being revised to add the 1998 and 1999 Model Years and add Vehicle Line and Recommended Axle Lubricant Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 76-02-02 (Section 0 - General Information). The following tables provide the latest information on recommended axle lubricant. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 76-02-02A > Oct > 98 > Drivetrain - Recommended Axle Lubricant > Page 455 Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 85546VI > Mar > 85 > Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels Fluid - Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels 85-54 6 (VI) MAR., 1985 Subject: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE OIL LEVELS Model and Year:ALL PASSENGER AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and replaces Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 83-I-57 which should be destroyed. The following chart provides a guide for minimum acceptable oil levels "as received" from the factory. Only those components which have levels less than indicated below should have additional oil installed. Engine - Full mark to 6 mm (.24 in.) below full mark. Transmission a) Automatic - With engine idling, transmission selector in "Park", vehicle on a level surface and oil temperature between 10 to 38~C the oil level on the following transmissions should be as indicated: 440-T4 Transmission: Oil level should be in middle of cross-hatch area. 125/125C Transmission: Oil level should be slightly above full level. All other Transmissions: Oil level should be slightly below add level. If oil level gauge has dimples below add mark, oil level should be between these two dimples. b) Manual 1) Lower edge of inspection plug hole on rear wheel drive vehicles. 2) Between cold level range dimples or at cold level mark on front wheel drive vehicles. Differential - Lower edge of inspection plug hole to 9.5 mm (.37 in.) below lower edge of inspection plug hole. Transfer Case - Lower edge of inspection plug hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Leaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities Fluid - Differential: Specifications Leaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities Limited-Slip........................................................................................................................................... .............................................80W, 80W-90* GL-5*‡ Others................................................................. ....................................................................................................................................80W, 80W-90* GL-5 *For vehicles normally operated in Canada, 80W only ‡May use GL-5 for top-up only CAPACITY, Refill: Front: K-20, -2500........................................................................................................................................... ...........................................2.4 Liters 5.0 Pints K-30, -3500................................................................. .....................................................................................................................2.8 Liters 6.0 Pints Rear: 8-1/2" ring gear..................................................................................................................................... ............................................2.0 Liters 4.2 Pints Dana 10-1/2" ring gear.............................................. .......................................................................................................................3.4 Liters 7.2 Pints 1981: 8-7/8" ring gear..................................................................................................................................... ............................................1.7 Liters 3.5 Pints 10-1/2" ring gear........................................................ .......................................................................................................................3.0 Liters 6.5 Pints Dana 10-1/4" ring gear......................................................................................................................... .........................................11.7 Liters 26.8 Pints 1982: 9-1/2" ring gear..................................................................................................................................... ............................................2.6 Liters 5.5 Pints Dana 9-3/4" ring gear................................................ .......................................................................................................................2.8 Liters 6.0 Pints 10-1/2 ring gear.................................................................................................................................... ............................................2.6 Liters 5.0 Pints Rockwell 12" ring gear............................................... .....................................................................................................................6.6 Liters 14.0 Pints Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Leaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities > Page 462 Fluid - Differential: Specifications Unleaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities Limited-Slip........................................................................................................................................... ...............................................80W, 80W-90* GL-5* Others................................................................. ....................................................................................................................................80W, 80W-90* GL-5 *For vehicles normally operated in Canada, 80W only CAPACITY, Refill: Front: All.................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ..........................2.4 Liters 5.0 Pints Rear: S series 7-1/7" ring gear.................................................... ..................................................................................................................1.5 Liters 3.5 Pints 8-1/2" ring gear............................................................................................................................................... .....................................2.0 Liters 4.2 Pints Dana 10-1/2" ring gear..................................................... ...................................................................................................................3.4 Liters 7.2 Pints 1981: 8-7/8" ring gear..................................................................................................................................... ...............................................1.7 Liters 3.5 Pints 10-1/2" ring gear..................................................... .............................................................................................................................3.0 Liters 6.5 Pints 1982: 9-1/2" ring gear........................................................................................................................... .........................................................2.6 Liters 5.5 Pints 9-3/4" ring gear............................................. .......................................................................................................................................2.8 Liters 6.0 Pints 10-1/2" ring gear.......................................................................................................................... ........................................................2.6 Liters 5.5 Pints Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Leaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities > Page 463 Fluid - Differential: Specifications Unleaded Gasoline Canadian Models - Schedules & Capacities Limited-Slip........................................................................................................................................... ...............................................80W, 80W-90* GL-5* Others................................................................. ....................................................................................................................................80W, 80W-90* GL-5 *For vehicles normally operated in Canada, 80W only CAPACITY, Refill: Front: All.................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ..........................2.4 Liters 5.0 Pints Rear: S series 7-1/7" ring gear.................................................... ...................................................................................................................1.5 Liters 3.5 Pints 8-1/2" ring gear............................................................................................................................................... .....................................2.0 Liters 4.2 Pints Dana 10-1/2" ring gear..................................................... ...................................................................................................................3.4 Liters 7.2 Pints 1981: 8-7/8" ring gear..................................................................................................................................... ...............................................1.7 Liters 3.5 Pints 10-1/2" ring gear..................................................... ..............................................................................................................................3.0 Liters 6.5 Pints 1982: 9-1/2" ring gear........................................................................................................................... .........................................................2.6 Liters 5.5 Pints 9-3/4" ring gear............................................. .......................................................................................................................................2.8 Liters 6.0 Pints 10-1/2" ring gear.......................................................................................................................... ........................................................2.6 Liters 5.5 Pints Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels 85-54 6 (VI) MAR., 1985 Subject: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE OIL LEVELS Model and Year:ALL PASSENGER AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and replaces Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 83-I-57 which should be destroyed. The following chart provides a guide for minimum acceptable oil levels "as received" from the factory. Only those components which have levels less than indicated below should have additional oil installed. Engine - Full mark to 6 mm (.24 in.) below full mark. Transmission a) Automatic - With engine idling, transmission selector in "Park", vehicle on a level surface and oil temperature between 10 to 38~C the oil level on the following transmissions should be as indicated: 440-T4 Transmission: Oil level should be in middle of cross-hatch area. 125/125C Transmission: Oil level should be slightly above full level. All other Transmissions: Oil level should be slightly below add level. If oil level gauge has dimples below add mark, oil level should be between these two dimples. b) Manual 1) Lower edge of inspection plug hole on rear wheel drive vehicles. 2) Between cold level range dimples or at cold level mark on front wheel drive vehicles. Differential - Lower edge of inspection plug hole to 9.5 mm (.37 in.) below lower edge of inspection plug hole. Transfer Case - Lower edge of inspection plug hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Model 207 Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 4.6 Pts New Process Model 205 Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 5.0 Pts New Process Model 208 Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 5.0 Pts New Process Models 231 Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 2.5 Pts New Process Models 241 Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 4.6 Pts Leaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities Type...................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................AF CAPACITY, Refill: NP208................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ......4.8 Liters 10.0 Pints NP105............................................................................................................ .....................................................................................2.4‡ Liters 5.0‡ Pints ‡Fill to one inch of fill plug Unleaded Gasoline Canadian Models - Schedules & Capacities (4x4)..................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................AF CAPACITY, Refill: All models.......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....4.8 Liters 10.0 Pints Unleaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities (4x4)..................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................AF CAPACITY, Refill: All models.......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....4.8 Liters 10.0 Pints Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 470 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Model 207 Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... Dextron II ATF New Process Model 205 Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... Dextron II ATF New Process Model 208 Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... Dextron II ATF New Process Models 231 & 241 Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... Dextron II ATF Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 475 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 476 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 477 Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels 85-54 6 (VI) MAR., 1985 Subject: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE OIL LEVELS Model and Year:ALL PASSENGER AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and replaces Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 83-I-57 which should be destroyed. The following chart provides a guide for minimum acceptable oil levels "as received" from the factory. Only those components which have levels less than indicated below should have additional oil installed. Engine - Full mark to 6 mm (.24 in.) below full mark. Transmission a) Automatic - With engine idling, transmission selector in "Park", vehicle on a level surface and oil temperature between 10 to 38~C the oil level on the following transmissions should be as indicated: 440-T4 Transmission: Oil level should be in middle of cross-hatch area. 125/125C Transmission: Oil level should be slightly above full level. All other Transmissions: Oil level should be slightly below add level. If oil level gauge has dimples below add mark, oil level should be between these two dimples. b) Manual 1) Lower edge of inspection plug hole on rear wheel drive vehicles. 2) Between cold level range dimples or at cold level mark on front wheel drive vehicles. Differential - Lower edge of inspection plug hole to 9.5 mm (.37 in.) below lower edge of inspection plug hole. Transfer Case - Lower edge of inspection plug hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 478 Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Mobil Oil Corporation Engine Oil Press Release Number: 83-I-30 Section: VI Date: Dec., 1982 Subject: MOBIL OIL CORPORATION ENGINE OIL PRESS RELEASE TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS On November 23, 1982, Mobile Oil Corporation issued the following press release: Mobil Oil Corporation said today it had recalled certain shipments of one of its multi-grade motor oils, Mobil Super 10W-40, from distributors and retailers in six upper midwestern states (i.e., Illinois, Wisconsin, Michigan, Indiana, Ohio and the eastern half of Iowa). Other areas and other oils are not affected. A Mobil spokesman advised that only one grade of oil, Mobil Super 10W-40, is involved and that the problem occurs only at low temperatures (below +20~F). Motorists in the six states who purchased Mobil Super 10W-40 since July, 1982 and put it in their cars should pay very close attention to the dash board gauges or an indication of low oil pressure. If the red oil pressure light remains on after starting, the engine should be turned off to avoid possible damage and a Mobil dealer called for assistance. Customers who purchased Mobil Super 10W-40 since July in the six named states and put it in their auto engines should go to a Mobil station as soon as possible and have the oil and oil filter replaced. Mobil will make this replacement at no cost to the motorist. "We are standing behind this product fully", the spokesman said. Affected customers will need to provide proper identification. A sample of the oil will be retained. Customers who have unopened cans of Mobil Super 10W-40 purchased in these six states since July are encouraged to take the cans to a Mobil service station or the retail outlet where the purchase was made for a replacement in kind. The Mobil Super 10W-40 in question was manufactured in July at the company's Cicero, Illinois, plant which supplies part of Mobil's midwest market. There has been no problem at Cicero Since July and all suspect product has been recalled. The Mobil Super 10W-40 now on sale is the normal high quality product. "The low temperature problem became apparent only in the last few days," the spokesman added. There is no problem with other grades of motor oil and no problem with Mobil Super 10W-40 outside the six state area. The faulty oil, Mobil Super 10W-40, was marketed through Mobil dealers and other retail outlets. "Most of what we will be taking back is good oil, but we just didn't want to take a chance," the Mobil spokesman said. A REMINDER: THIS PROBLEM RELATES ONLY TO MOBIL SUPER 10W-40 AND NOT TO MOBIL'S OTHER MOTOR OILS. We believe that all (division) dealers should cooperate with Mobil in their efforts to correct the situation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 479 Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Recommendations Number: 84-89 Section: OB (XIV) Date: Mar., 1984 Subject: ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATIONS Model and Year: PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The purpose of this bulletin is to: ^ Advise you of the reasons for changes in engine oil viscosity recommendations, and ^ Explain the new API service symbol which should assist vehicle owners in finding engine oils recommended for GM engines. GASOLINE ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY RECOMMENDATIONS Since 1980, the preferred viscosities for GM gasoline engines are SAE 10W-30 for the larger engines and SAE 5W-30 for the smaller engines (engines sizes defined later). SAE 10W-40 is not included in the viscosity chart for 1984 GM gasoline engines, for several reasons, including: ^ Fuel economy with SAE 10W-30 oils is about 1% better than that with SAE 10W-40 oils. ^ SAE 10W-30 oils generally produce less piston and ring deposits than SAE 10W-40 oils. Such deposits can lead to stuck rings and increased oil consumption. The use of SAE 10W-40 engine oil in a vehicle equipped with a gasoline engine will not automatically void the General Motors Corporation New Car Limited Warranty. However, since SAE 10W-40 engine oil is not recommended for use in 1984 GM vehicles equipped with gasoline engines, if the use of such oil causes damage, the cost of the engine repair will not be covered by the Warranty. The Warranty does not cover any damage due to the use of non-recommended oils, whether SAE 10W-40 or some other viscosity. In addition, the Warranty does not cover damages caused by the use of oils that do not meet the recommended API quality or SAE viscosity grade. DIESEL ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY RECOMMENDATIONS Preferred viscosities for diesel engines in GM passenger cars and light duty trucks are SAE 30 for the larger engines and SAE 10W-30 for the smaller engines. SAE 10W-40 oils have never been recommended for diesel engines in GM passenger cars and light duty diesel trucks. Nevertheless, some owners have used SAE 10W-40 oils and, in some cases, experienced engine damage caused by excessive piston and ring deposits. In an effort to clarify the GM recommendations for passenger cars and light duty trucks, the 1984 owner's manuals state specifically for diesel engines "DO NOT USE SAE 10W-40 GRADE OIL, OR ANY OTHER GRADE NOT RECOMMENDED". If damage to a GM diesel engine is caused by the use of SAE 10W-40 engine oil, the cost of the engine repair will not be covered by the Warranty. API ENGINE OIL SERVICE SYMBOL API ENGINE OIL SERVICE SYMBOL Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 480 A new API service symbol is being used in GM owner's manuals and on oil cans. Urge your customers to look for it in their manuals and on the containers of the oil they select for use in their cars. These are examples of the symbol: The symbol has an upper segment, center area, and lower segment. An explanation of the information in each of these locations is as follows: Upper Segment: QUALITY LEVEL API (American Petroleum Institute) Service Categories Gasoline Engines Diesel Engines SF/CC SF/CD (preferred) SF/CD SF/CC SF Center Area: OIL THICKNESS (Grade) SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) Viscosity Classification Gasoline Engines Diesel Engines ^ SAE 5W-30 (preferred for ^ SAE 30 (preferred above engines of 2.8 liters or less). freezing*). ^ SAE 10W-30 (preferred for ^ SAE 10W-30 and SAE 15W-40 all other engines). (acceptable for all engines; use only for cold-weather ^ SAE 15W-40, SAE 20W-20 and operation; helps starting). SAE 30 (acceptable for all engines). * Except for 1.8 and 2.2 liter diesels, where SAE 10W-30 is preferred at all temperatures. Lower Segment: FUEL ECONOMY RATING "ENERGY CONSERVING" Oils with these words provide more miles per gallon of fuel. The Goodwrench line of engine oils recently introduced by GM meets these standards and provides proper lubrication protection for passenger cars and light duty trucks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 481 Engine Oil: Specifications Type...................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................SG CAPACITY, Refill: 6-cyl.292 eng..................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....4.7 Liters 5.0 Quarts 8-cyl.454 eng.................................................................................................. .....................................................................................5.7 Liters 6.0 Quarts K-30, 3500..................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .....4.7 Liters 5.0 Quarts Others............................................................................................................ ......................................................................................3.8 Liters 4.0 Quarts Capacity shown is without filter. When replacing filter, additional oil may be needed Above 40°F (4°C).......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .........................30 Above 20°F (-7°C).................................................................................................. ........................................................20W-20, 10W-30, 20W-40, 20W-50 0° to 60°F (-18° to 16°C)..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .10W, 5W-30, 10W-30* Below 20°F (-7°C).......................................................................................... ................................................................................................5W-20‡, 5W-30 *10W-30 preferred above 0°F (-8°C) ‡Not recommended for sustained high speed Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold Power Steering Fluid: Customer Interest P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold Group Ref.: Steering/Suspension Bulletin No.: 033206 Date: March 1994 SUBJECT: REDUCED POWER STEERING ASSIST AT LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURES (NEW POWER STEERING FLUID) MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS Applications: Appropriate for all passenger vehicles, but particularly beneficial in 1980 and later FWD Models equipped with Power Rack and Pinion Steering. CONDITION: Comments of reduced power steering assist at low ambient temperatures (approximately 10°F and lower) may be noted by some vehicle operators when turning the steering wheel in BOTH the right and left direction during warm-up after cold start. All vehicles with power steering exhibit this condition to varying degrees, but condition may be more noticeable with power rack and pinion steering systems that typically have longer hoses and cooler lines. Note: This condition, which is related to power steering fluid viscosity, should not, however, be confused with conditions having similar symptoms such as that described divisional Special Policy numbers listed: CAUSE: In cold weather, power steering fluid thickens in the same manner as any other petroleum-based oil or fluid. Upon cold starting, the fluid resists movement through the system and the driver senses reduced power assist (sometimes referred to as "stiff steer"). As the vehicle operates and fluid circulates through the power steering system, the fluid warms and thins to its normal operating viscosity. CORRECTION: Saginaw Division has developed a new Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid for use in cold climates. Compared with conventional power steering fluid, this new fluid flows better at low temperatures and resists the thickening which contributes to reduced power assist upon start up. RACK AND PINION STEERING SYSTEMS Reduced power assist upon cold weather starting may be more noticeable in Power Rack and Pinion steering systems that may contain six or more feet of Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 490 pressure and return hose along with long cooler lines. Such long systems contain greater volumes of fluid and vehicles so equipped tend to have longer periods of reduced power assist. The new fluid performs particularly well with current designed Rack and Pinion steering systems and special remanufactured Rack and Pinion Steering Assemblies. PARTS INFORMATION: Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid is available from GMSPO. Order as: Parts are currently available from GMSPO. SERVICE PROCEDURE: The power steering fluid replacement procedure is a two-stage process: first, flushing the old fluid from the system with new fluid; and second, bleeding the system to remove any trapped air. The two sequences outline the steps in each procedure. FLUSHING THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM 1. Raise the front end of the vehicle off the ground until the wheels are free to turn. 2. Remove the fluid return line at the pump reservoir inlet connector. 3. Plug the inlet connector port on the pump reservoir. 4. Position the fluid return line toward a large container in order to catch the draining fluid. 5. While a second person fills the reservoir with new Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid, start and run the engine at idle. 6. Turn the steering wheel from stop to stop. NOTICE: Do not hold the wheel against stops while flushing the system, Holding steering wheel against wheel stops will cause high system pressure, overheating, and damage to the pump and/or gear. 7. Continue draining until all of the old fluid is cleared from the power steering system. Addition of approximately 1 quart of new fluid will be required to flush system. 8. Unplug pump reservoir inlet and reconnect return line. 9. Turn engine off, and fill reservoir to the "Full Cold" mark. 10. Continue with following procedure "Bleeding the Power Steering System". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 491 BLEEDING THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM After replacing the fluid or servicing the power steering hydraulic system, you must bleed air from the system. Air in the system prevents an accurate fluid level reading, causes pump cavitation noise and over time could damage the pump. To bleed the power steering system proceed as follows: 1. Begin with the engine off, front wheels off the ground, and wheels turned all the way to the left. 2. Add Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid to the "FULL COLD" mark on the fluid level indicator. 3. Bleed the system by turning the wheels from side to side without hitting stops. Important: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 492 This may require turning the wheels from side to side twenty times. On systems with long return lines or fluid coolers, turning steering wheel lock-to-lock forty times may be required. Keep the fluid level at the "FULL COLD" mark. Fluid with air In it has a light tan appearance. This air must be eliminated from the fluid before normal steering action can be obtained. 4. Start the engine. With the engine idling, recheck the fluid level. If necessary, add fluid to bring the level to the "FULL COLD" mark. 5. Return the wheels to the center position. Lower front wheels to the ground. Continue running the engine for two or three minutes. 6. Test the vehicle to be sure the steering functions normally and is free from noise. Important: Inspect for fluid leakage at connection points along the power steering system. 7. Recheck the fluid level as described in Steps 3 and 4 except that the fluid level should now be up to the "FULL HOT" mark after the system has stabilized at its normal operating temperature. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold Power Steering Fluid: All Technical Service Bulletins P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold Group Ref.: Steering/Suspension Bulletin No.: 033206 Date: March 1994 SUBJECT: REDUCED POWER STEERING ASSIST AT LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURES (NEW POWER STEERING FLUID) MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS Applications: Appropriate for all passenger vehicles, but particularly beneficial in 1980 and later FWD Models equipped with Power Rack and Pinion Steering. CONDITION: Comments of reduced power steering assist at low ambient temperatures (approximately 10°F and lower) may be noted by some vehicle operators when turning the steering wheel in BOTH the right and left direction during warm-up after cold start. All vehicles with power steering exhibit this condition to varying degrees, but condition may be more noticeable with power rack and pinion steering systems that typically have longer hoses and cooler lines. Note: This condition, which is related to power steering fluid viscosity, should not, however, be confused with conditions having similar symptoms such as that described divisional Special Policy numbers listed: CAUSE: In cold weather, power steering fluid thickens in the same manner as any other petroleum-based oil or fluid. Upon cold starting, the fluid resists movement through the system and the driver senses reduced power assist (sometimes referred to as "stiff steer"). As the vehicle operates and fluid circulates through the power steering system, the fluid warms and thins to its normal operating viscosity. CORRECTION: Saginaw Division has developed a new Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid for use in cold climates. Compared with conventional power steering fluid, this new fluid flows better at low temperatures and resists the thickening which contributes to reduced power assist upon start up. RACK AND PINION STEERING SYSTEMS Reduced power assist upon cold weather starting may be more noticeable in Power Rack and Pinion steering systems that may contain six or more feet of Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 498 pressure and return hose along with long cooler lines. Such long systems contain greater volumes of fluid and vehicles so equipped tend to have longer periods of reduced power assist. The new fluid performs particularly well with current designed Rack and Pinion steering systems and special remanufactured Rack and Pinion Steering Assemblies. PARTS INFORMATION: Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid is available from GMSPO. Order as: Parts are currently available from GMSPO. SERVICE PROCEDURE: The power steering fluid replacement procedure is a two-stage process: first, flushing the old fluid from the system with new fluid; and second, bleeding the system to remove any trapped air. The two sequences outline the steps in each procedure. FLUSHING THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM 1. Raise the front end of the vehicle off the ground until the wheels are free to turn. 2. Remove the fluid return line at the pump reservoir inlet connector. 3. Plug the inlet connector port on the pump reservoir. 4. Position the fluid return line toward a large container in order to catch the draining fluid. 5. While a second person fills the reservoir with new Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid, start and run the engine at idle. 6. Turn the steering wheel from stop to stop. NOTICE: Do not hold the wheel against stops while flushing the system, Holding steering wheel against wheel stops will cause high system pressure, overheating, and damage to the pump and/or gear. 7. Continue draining until all of the old fluid is cleared from the power steering system. Addition of approximately 1 quart of new fluid will be required to flush system. 8. Unplug pump reservoir inlet and reconnect return line. 9. Turn engine off, and fill reservoir to the "Full Cold" mark. 10. Continue with following procedure "Bleeding the Power Steering System". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 499 BLEEDING THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM After replacing the fluid or servicing the power steering hydraulic system, you must bleed air from the system. Air in the system prevents an accurate fluid level reading, causes pump cavitation noise and over time could damage the pump. To bleed the power steering system proceed as follows: 1. Begin with the engine off, front wheels off the ground, and wheels turned all the way to the left. 2. Add Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid to the "FULL COLD" mark on the fluid level indicator. 3. Bleed the system by turning the wheels from side to side without hitting stops. Important: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 500 This may require turning the wheels from side to side twenty times. On systems with long return lines or fluid coolers, turning steering wheel lock-to-lock forty times may be required. Keep the fluid level at the "FULL COLD" mark. Fluid with air In it has a light tan appearance. This air must be eliminated from the fluid before normal steering action can be obtained. 4. Start the engine. With the engine idling, recheck the fluid level. If necessary, add fluid to bring the level to the "FULL COLD" mark. 5. Return the wheels to the center position. Lower front wheels to the ground. Continue running the engine for two or three minutes. 6. Test the vehicle to be sure the steering functions normally and is free from noise. Important: Inspect for fluid leakage at connection points along the power steering system. 7. Recheck the fluid level as described in Steps 3 and 4 except that the fluid level should now be up to the "FULL HOT" mark after the system has stabilized at its normal operating temperature. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A Group Ref.: HVAC Bulletin No.: 331226 Date: January, 1994 INFORMATION SUBJECT: RETROFITTING R-12 VEHICLES TO R-134a MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR YEARS, PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS WITH R-12 A/C SYSTEMS There has been a great deal of information presented by the media regarding the need to retrofit vehicles produced with R-12, to a substitute refrigerant. This bulletin will outline GM's position and future plans on this subject. Most important, there is currently NO requirement to retrofit any R-12 vehicle. Vehicles built with R-12 can be serviced with R-12, as long as the refrigerant is available. At some point in time, R-12 may become either too scarce or too expensive to economically justify service on some vehicles with R-12. By that time, GM will provide you with instructions on retrofitting those vehicles from R-12 to R-134a. GM vehicle divisions, platforms, and component suppliers have been actively working on the details of retrofitting R-12 vehicles. An enormous amount of work is required to determine how hundreds of vehicle models can be satisfactorily retrofitted. Additional information will be provided as it becomes available. The following items contain important technical information that should answer many of the questions, and correct some misconceptions reported in the media. SUBSTITUTE REFRIGERANTS R-134a is the only approved substitute refrigerant that GM recommends and it should only be used if a complete retrofit procedure has been performed. None of the other refrigerants currently being marketed as replacement or drop-in substitutes for R-12 are approved for use in GM vehicles. R-12 and R-134a are not interchangeable. R-134a cannot be added to fill a low R-12 system. The combination of the two materials can cause high system pressures, which could cause damage to the system. Retrofitting an R-12 vehicle to R-134a requires careful preparation to insure that neither the vehicle nor the A/C service equipment has become contaminated. RESIDUAL MINERAL OIL The concern that mineral oil is chemically incompatible with R-134a and/or PAG lubricant has been proven to be untrue. A normal charge of mineral oil left in the A/C system after a retrofit to R-134a will not damage the system. Mineral oil, however, does not mix well with R-134a, and will not provide adequate lubrication. Tests on both the orifice tube and TXV systems show that the mineral oil parks in places such as the accumulator, and does not appreciably affect performance or damage the system. The retrofit service bulletin will specify the correct oil to be used. It is important that this oil recommendation be followed carefully. RESIDUAL R-12 Residual R-12 left in a system, due to improper retrofit service procedures, may result in system damage unless the residual R-12 is kept below the 2 percent limit specified by the Society of Automotive Engineers' Specification J-1661. New service methods are being developed to minimize the level of R-12 remaining in the A/C system after the retrofit procedure is completed. Following these new procedures will be critical to insure that the above limits are met. SYSTEM FLUSHING R-11, a material commonly used as an A/C system flushing solvent, has been found to be chemically incompatible with PAG lubricant. Technicians should be aware that residual R-11 remaining in an R-12 system will be very damaging if the vehicle is retrofitted to R-134a later in its life. For many years GM has recommended the use of in-line filters as an alternative to system flushing. SYSTEM FLUSHING, USING EITHER R-11 OR ANY OTHER FLUSHING MATERIAL, IS NOT APPROVED BY GM FOR ANY A/C SYSTEM. DESICCANT PROTECTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 505 It has been reported that the desiccant (moisture absorption material) used in 1992 and older R-12 A/C systems is incompatible with R-134a and PAG oil. The older desiccant was designed specifically for R-12 systems, but testing has shown that it is NOT necessary to replace the older desiccant just because the vehicle is being retrofitted to R-134a. 1993 and newer GM vehicles use desiccant designed to be compatible with both R-12 and R-134a systems. The amount of desiccant used in most GM vehicles is designed to last for at least seven years. To help maintain adequate protection for vehicles that must be retrofitted, it is recommended that the accumulator/dryer, which contains the desiccant, be replaced if the vehicle is more than five years old. "O" RINGS While continuing to service with R-12, be sure to use "O" rings and seal materials which are compatible with R-134a and PAG oil. This practice will eliminate concern in case the vehicle requires retrofitting later in its life. All "O" rings and seal materials available from GMSPO are compatible with R-134a systems. RETROFITTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE Currently, it appears that for most GM vehicles, the retrofit procedure will require minimal changes to the existing system. Some vehicles may need additional parts and/or procedures to provide acceptable performance and/or durability. Our testing has shown that vehicles that have undergone recommended retrofit procedures will, in most climatic conditions, be minimally affected in terms of A/C performance. SERVICE POLICY Basic service policy is as follows: During Warranty - If an R-12 produced vehicle A/C system must be repaired or recharged under warranty, repairs will be completed using R-12. If R-12 is unavailable or unaffordable, GM will notify the dealer body and will pay for the warranty repair and the retrofit to R-134a. NOTE: It a customer requests that an in-warranty vehicle be converted to R-134a, and the R-12 system is functioning properly, the customer will be expected to pay for the retrofit. Out of Warranty - The cost of the conversion will be the responsibility of the customer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 506 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C Refrigerant - Contamination File In Section: 1 - HVAC Bulletin No.: 43-12-23 Date: September, 1994 Subject: Contaminated A/C Refrigerant Models: 1994 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks with R12 Air Conditioning Systems Government regulations limit the production of R12 refrigerant, commonly referred to as Freon, during 1994/1995 and restrict manufacture of new R12 material effective January 1, 1996. As R12 prices rise and supplies are depleted, it is anticipated non-approved substitute refrigerants and/or poor quality R12 material sold as new or reprocessed may become more prevalent. The Mobile Air Conditioning Society (MACS) recently expressed concern over reports of the sale of R12 refrigerant containing as high as 15% contamination by R22, a refrigerant commonly used in stationary home systems but unsuitable for use in mobile units. GM dealers should be careful to protect against contaminating their existing supplies of R12 or the A/C systems in customers' vehicles they service by dealing with reputable suppliers. All R12 refrigerant purchased for warranty repairs should be purchased through GM SPO to ensure GM quality standards are met. The use of non-approved R12 refrigerant substitutes, some of which contain flammable materials, has also been reported by MACS. These products are available to "do-it-yourselfers" who, in many cases, believe they are harmless replacements for the small cans of R12 used so commonly in the past. Once added to the A/C system, the vehicle can no longer be serviced using R12 recovery/recycling equipment without: - Risking permanent damage to recovery/recycling equipment - Contaminating the previously recovered R12 material in the recovery tank - Spreading the contamination when the recovered material is used to charge other vehicles or - Possible loss of the recovered material if the contaminated level is high enough to activate the air purge system Contaminated refrigerant also impacts customer satisfaction through poor vehicle A/C performance and loss of A/C system compressor/component durability. System or component failure resulting from the use of refrigerant which does not meet GM specification is not covered by the "New Vehicle Warranty". Unfortunately, there is no simple method to identify if a "do-it-yourselfer" or repair shop has added to or recharged a system with a non-approved refrigerant. The inability to protect against the spread of contaminated refrigerant threatens the recycling program and the industry's desire to maximize use of the remaining R12 supply. Beginning in 1993, General Motors STG, Harrison Division, Research Labs and Kent-Moore worked in conjunction with suppliers of various technologies to develop a tester to identify contaminated refrigerant in vehicle A/C systems before recovery. During development of the technology, several dealer service manager focus group studies were conducted to identify design features to best suit dealership needs. The discussions and surveys clearly indicated the desire for a dedicated instrument, permanently mounted to the refrigerant recovery cart to ensure ALL vehicles are automatically tested prior to recovering refrigerant. Testing ALL refrigerant for contamination prior to recovery is the ONLY means to ensure customer satisfaction, protect recovery equipment and avoid unintentional venting of refrigerant by your dealership. General Motors has evaluated all available technology for this project and only the J 39851 R12 "Pureguard" meets General Motors' specifications. The J 39851 R12 Pureguard Refrigerant Monitor has been classified as an essential tool and will be shipped by Kent-Moore to your dealership beginning in September of 1994. The essential price of the R12 "Pureguard" is $561 (for Canadian dealers the price is $800 Canadian). If your dealership has multiple R12 recovery equipment, additional units may be ordered from Kent-Moore for $561 at 1-800-345-2233. Features of the R12 "Pureguard" include: - Universally mounts to R12 Recovery Equipment - Automatically interrupts power to the Recovery Equipment when contaminated refrigerant is identified - Fully automatic design does not require technician action, training or interpretation - LCD displays Pureguard functions Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 507 - Meets GM contamination sensitivity requirements - Self calibrating - Micro-processor controlled - Audio alarm alerts technician Other Refrigerant Identifiers are being advertised which may be available this A/C season. However, ONLY the Kent-Moore J 39851 R12 "Pureguard" meets General Motors' current specifications which ensure recovered refrigerant is compatible with General Motors vehicles and General Motors approved recovery systems. An R134a Pureguard Refrigerant Identifier is currently under development and is anticipated to be available in early 1995. The contamination of R134a refrigerant is not expected to be a concern until the program to retrofit R12 vehicles to R134a becomes more widely used. Future bulletins will be issued to address the recovery and disposal of contaminated refrigerant. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 508 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins Contaminated R12 Refrigerant - Testing & Handling FILE IN SECTION: 1 - HVAC BULLETIN NO.: 53-12-05 DATE: May, 1995 SUBJECT: Contaminated R12 Refrigerant Testing and Handling MODELS: 1994 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks with R12 A/C Systems The J 39851 "PureGuard" R12 refrigerant monitor was recently shipped to all GM dealers as an essential tool to test R12 refrigerant. Dealers are strongly urged to install this protective device on their ACR3 or other R12 recovery equipment immediately. The PureGuard is easily installed on any recovery cart (20 minutes), requires no recovery cart modifications, is fully automatic (no training required) and does not increase the time required to perform normal A/C service procedures. Proper use of this tool can: ^ Prevent damage to your R12 recovery/recycling equipment. ^ Prevent contamination of previously recovered R12 in the recovery tank. ^ Prevent loss of your recovered R12 as contaminated refrigerant will activate automatic air purge system. ^ Prevent the spread of contaminated R12 to other vehicles you service. If your dealership has multiple R12 recovery stations which are not protected, use the PureGuard to check the refrigerant in these recovery tanks for contamination at least once each week. Simply connect the PureGuard blue service hose (that would normally be connected to the vehicle low side service port) to the red or vapor side of any recovery cart tank and run the test. It is also important to check a tank containing recovered/recycled material for purity before installation on your charging equipment. Even new R12 refrigerant purchased from sources other than GM should be tested for contamination prior to use. Sources of Contaminated R12 Refrigerant Since refrigerant testing has not been a standard practice in the mobile A/C repair industry, the amount of R12 refrigerant contamination is unknown. As R12 prices rise and supplies are depleted, it is anticipated that contaminated R12 refrigerant may become more prevalent from the following as well as other sources: ^ The use of R12 refrigerant substitutes without installation of unique service fittings and proper identification labeling. ^ Improper use of R12 substitutes, such as topping off R12 systems with R134a or other refrigerants available to "do-it-yourselfers". ^ Poor quality or contaminated new or reprocessed R12 refrigerant. R12 can and should continue to be used to service vehicles built with R12 as long as it is available. Combining any refrigerant with R12 results in a refrigerant mixture which cannot be used in an A/C system. R134a is the only substitute refrigerant approved by GM and should only be used when the appropriate retrofit service bulletin procedures are explicitly followed. Use of any other substitute refrigerant requires the purchase of additional dedicated recovery, recycling (if applicable) and charging equipment to service each substitute refrigerant used. However, you should know that the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has listed several products as acceptable replacements for R12 mobile A/C systems under the Significant New Alternatives Policy (SNAP). Some of these products are: R134a, R401c (a DuPont refrigerant blend) and FRIGC (another refrigerant blend). It is important to understand that the SNAP program only considers the health, safety and environmental characteristics of a chemical. It does not test for A/C system cooling performance or durability. That judgment is deferred to the vehicle manufacturer. Use of any R12 refrigerant substitute without dedicated service equipment, unique fittings, labels and refrigerant testing prior to recovery, could result in contamination of the R12 supply and the loss of the R12 recycling program. What To Do When Contamination is Detected Repeat the test to verify contaminated refrigerant is present. Clear the PureGuard following the instructions listed on the face panel, then perform a second test to verify that the vehicle A/C system contains contaminated or mixed refrigerant. Contact the vehicle owner to advise that previous A/C system repairs were apparently performed with an R12 refrigerant substitute. Suggest the owner Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 509 contact or return to the previous repair facility. Explain that environmental regulations prohibit repair facilities from discharging ozone depleting A/C refrigerants into the atmosphere. Explain that recovery of this unknown refrigerant could damage your service equipment. If the customer wishes to pursue repairs through your facility, it is recommended that the proper A/C service equipment be purchased. General Motors recommends the Kent-Moore J 41428 "Scavenger", an air operated refrigerant recovery station, be used to remove unknown refrigerants. The air operated feature reduces the hazard of recovering potentially flammable refrigerants. Dealers should evaluate the need to purchase the equipment based on the number of contaminated vehicles they encounter. As an alternative to the initial purchase of a recovery only station, dealers should check locally for A/C specialty shops which may have the equipment to service substitute or contaminated refrigerants. They may be able to provide contaminated refrigerant recovery service to the dealer. The GM Service Technology Group has tested a recovery procedure where a 15 or 30 pound DOT approved refillable tank is fully evacuated then connected to a vehicle A/C system to recover the charge. Testing has shown that even when the recovery tank is cooled down in dry ice, the procedure does not guarantee the entire charge will be recovered. Since EPA regulations require full recovery of ozone depleting substances, GM does not recommend this procedure. Contaminated Refrigerant Disposal Although A/C refrigerant testing and disposal have not been a service practice in the mobile A/C industry, It has been common in the stationary A/C service industry for many years. Listed at the end of this bulletin are companies that provide refrigerant disposal service for the stationary A/C industry. Please be advised that GM has not independently evaluated these companies and is not in any way endorsing or promoting the use of these companies. Each of these companies has expressed an interest in providing refrigerant disposal service to GM dealers. In working with the stationary A/C industry, these companies typically receive large volumes of different refrigerants that have been mixed together. Unfortunately, because the volume of material returned by the mobile A/C industry will be in much smaller quantities, the cost of handling will be greater. To arrange for return of the refrigerant, simply call the company nearest you using the phone number listed below. The company will advise you on billing and shipping procedures. Disposal cost will vary between $3.00 and $5.00 per pound plus freight and handling. Shipping charges will vary by distance and location. In general, a 7 to 10 day turn-around time on the tank can be expected. The tank can be shipped via common carrier. Documents that your refrigerant has been properly disposed of will be sent to you with the return of your tank. As an alternative, many dealerships already have contracts in place with a disposal company who manages their hazardous wastes. In these cases, the disposal service may agree to handle containers of mixed refrigerants. Initially, the local disposal companies may be surprised by this inquiry. They may want to evaluate how much material will be collected before deciding whether to provide this service. As we move forward with the practice of testing R12 refrigerant, it will take time for all the questions to be answered. STG will provide additional information as soon as it is available. Understanding The PureGuard The PureGuard is a highly sensitive instrument capable of detecting R12 with 3% or less cross-contamination with other refrigerants. Any refrigerant mixture in excess of this amount poses a threat to both your refrigerant supply and recovery equipment. The PureGuard uses a pass/fail approach when monitoring the refrigerant and is precisely calibrated to cut power to the recovery machine if it encounters R12 mixed with any substitute refrigerants. The PureGuard ignores the presence of the air, dyes or oils in the refrigerant sampled. At least 20 psi must be present in the vehicle's A/C system for the PureGuard to function. Otherwise, refrigerant cannot be introduced to the PureGuard's test chamber. If a vehicle's A/C system contains less than 20 psi, it is an indication that the vehicle's system is nearly depleted of refrigerant. Occasionally, erratic PureGuard operation or service code 002 display will be encountered when A/C system pressure is exactly 20 psi. If this occurs, simply cycle the on/off switch to reset the PureGuard. After the 30 second PureGuard warm-up cycle, proceed immediately with vehicle recovery operation. Feedback from the field has indicated PureGuard service code 002 will also be displayed if the oil drain port is not sealed. Make sure the "0" ring seal in the cap is in place and that the cap is tight. If the PureGuard fails to clear or if you experience any other problems operating the PureGuard, contact Kent-Moore Technical Service at 1-800-345-2233. The unit should not be returned without first contacting Kent-Moore to obtain return authorization. Refrigerant Disposal Locations: United States Refrigerant Reclamation Inc. 12420 North Green River Rd. Evansville, IN 47711 800-207-5931, FAX - 812-867-1463 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 510 Omega Refrigerant Reclamation 5263 North Fourth St. Irwindale, CA 91706 310-698-0991, FAX 310-696-1908 Refrigerant Management Svcs of Georgia 216 F. Atlanta Hwy. Cumming, GA 30130 Ph/FAX 800-347-5872 Refrigerant Reclaim Inc. 122 Old Stage Coach Rd. Dumfries, VA 22026 800-238-5902, FAX 703-441-0393 Gartech Refrigerant Reclamation Ctr. 2002 Platinum Garland, TX 75042 214-272-4070, FAX 214-272-8548 National Refrigerants, Inc. 11401 Roosevelt Blvd. Philadelphia, PA 19154 215-698-6620, FAX 215-602-8205 CFC Reclamation 1321 Swift North Kansas City, MO 64116 816-471-2511 Full Cycle-Global 550 James Street Lakewood, NJ 08701 908-370-3400, FAX - 908-370-3088 Refrigerant Reclaim Svcs, Inc. dba Full Cycle-Global 121 S. Norwood Drive Ft. Worth, TX 76053-7807 817-282-0022, FAX - 800-831-6182 Full Cycle-Global 2055 Silber, Ste. 109 Houston, TX 77055 713-681-7370, FAX - 713-681-9947 Full Cycle-Global 343 South Airline Hwy. Gonzales, LA 70737 504-644-5303, FAX - 504-644-1809 Full Cycle-Global 2966 Wireton Blue Island, IL 60406 708-388-8551, FAX - 708-388-8550 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 511 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Use of Alternate Refrigerants In CFC 12 Number: 92-250-1A Section: 0A Date: AUGUST 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 231205 ASE No.: A7 Subject: USE OF ALTERNATE REFRIGERANTS IN CFC 12 REFRIGERANT MOBILE AIR CONDITIONERS Model and Year: GALL MODEL YEARS - ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS INCLUDING GEO A number of inquiries have been received concerning the use of "alternate refrigerants" as a replacement for R-12 refrigerant in General Motors air conditioning systems. Regardless of any advertised claims, there are currently no substitutes for refrigerant R-12 approved by General Motors. At the present time, only new or recycled R-12 is approved for use in General Motors R-12 air conditioning systems. Based on studies performed to date, the use of "alternate refrigerants" in General Motors R-12 air conditioning systems may result in higher system pressures, higher leak rates or incompatibility with drying and sealing materials. System performance and reliability may also be affected. Service equipment manufacturers have indicated that cross-contaminating R-12 recovery/recycling equipment with "alternate refrigerants" may damage the equipment. General Motors supports the Society of Automotive Engineers recommended service procedures for recovery and recycling of R-12. The use of known "alternate refrigerants" without proper service practices for identifying vehicle systems containing these "alternate refrigerants" and dedicated recovery equipment to service those vehicles will contaminate the recycled supply of R-12 refrigerant. Contamination of the recycled R-12 refrigerant makes the refrigerant unusable for recharging air conditioning systems and could jeopardize the recycling program. At the present time, General Motors has not approved any "alternate refrigerant" for R-12 in R-12 air conditioning systems. Therefore, R-12 systems should continue to be serviced with new or recycled R-12 only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 512 Refrigerant: Specifications System ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... 3.75 lbs Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Specifications A-6 Compressor .................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... 10 oz R-4 Compressor .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................ 6 oz Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Hydraulic System Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic System Bleeding Manual Bleeding 1. If vehicle is equipped with power brakes, remove vacuum reserve by applying brakes several times with engine off. 2. Fill master cylinder reservoirs with suitable brake fluid. Be sure to always keep master cylinder reservoirs at least half full during entire bleeding procedure. 3. If master cylinder is suspected to have air in the bore, it must be bled first, as follows: a. Disconnect forward brake pipe connection at master cylinder. b. Allow brake fluid to fill master cylinder bore until it begins to flow from forward pipe connector port. c. Connect and tighten forward brake pipe at master cylinder. d. Depress brake pedal slowly one time and hold, then loosen forward brake pipe connection at master cylinder to purge air from bore. Tighten connection, then release brake pedal slowly. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat sequence, including 15 second wait, until all air is purged from bore. e. Bleed rear bore of master cylinder as front bore was bled. 4. Bleed right rear brake as follows: a. Depress brake pedal slowly one time and hold. b. Loosen bleeder valve to purge air from brake, then tighten bleeder valve and slowly release pedal. c. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat sequence, including 15 second wait, until all air is purged. 5. Bleed left rear, right front, and left front brakes, in that order, using same method as for right rear brake. 6. Check brake operation and ensure pedal is firm. Also check master cylinder fluid level and add fluid as necessary. 7. Turn off brake warning light by applying moderate pressure to brake pedal several times. 8. Road test vehicle. Fig. 1 Installing Pressure Bleeder Adapter Pressure Bleeding 1. Loosen, then slightly retighten bleeder valves at all four wheels. Repair any broken, stripped or frozen valves at this time. 2. Using a diaphragm type pressure bleeder, install suitable bleeder adapter to master cylinder, Fig. 1. 3. Charge bleeder ball to 20-25 psi, then depress and hold valve stem on combination valve. 4. Connect pressure bleeder line to adapter. 5. Open line valve on pressure bleeder, then depress bleed-off valve on adapter until a small amount of brake fluid is released. 6. Raise and support vehicle. 7. Bleed right rear, left rear, right front and left front brakes, in that order. 8. Place transparent tube over bleeder valve, then allow tube to hang down into transparent container. Ensure end of tube is submerged in clean brake fluid. 9. Open bleeder valve 1/2 to 3/4 turn and allow fluid to flow into container until all air is purged from line. Flushing Hydraulic System If brake fluid is old, rusty or contaminated, or whenever new parts are installed in the hydraulic system, the system must be flushed. Bleed brakes, allowing at least one quart of clean brake fluid to pass through system. Any rubber parts in hydraulic system which were exposed to contaminated fluid must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Hydraulic System Bleeding > Page 520 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bleeding THIS PROCEDURE CAN BE PERFORMED WITH MASTER CYLINDER ON OR OFF VEHICLE. 1. Disconnect brake lines at master cylinder, if necessary. 2. Connect suitable lengths of brake lines to master cylinder and immerse other ends of lines in master cylinder reservoirs. 3. Apply master cylinder pushrod or brake pedal with full strokes until air bubbles have disappeared in reservoirs. It may require 20-30 applications to fully eliminate air bubbles. 4. Remove bleeding lines from master cylinder, then install master cylinder on vehicle, if necessary, and connect brake lines. 5. Fill the reservoir. Normal bleeding procedures should be followed after the master cylinder is installed. For additional information see Bench Bleeding Notes. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Fundamentals and Basics Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 521 Brake Bleeding: Fundamentals and Basics BENCH BLEEDING Why A master-cylinder will develop little or no pressure if air is trapped in cylinder bore. Normal brake bleeding will not remove air trapped within the master-cylinder. How Clamp the master-cylinder securely in a vice. It is usually best to clamp the side of the vice onto the flat surface that is used to secure the master-cylinder to the brake booster. There are two basic methods for bleeding master-cylinder, one utilizes stroking the master-cylinder to expel air from the cylinder bore while the other utilizes a large syringe to backflush fluid from the outlet ports to the reservoir. Stroking Fill the master-cylinder with clean brake fluid. - The brake line fittings on the master-cylinder should be capped or plugged. NOTE: Special "bench bleeding" plastic fittings are available which allow for recirculating the brake fluid back into the reservoir. - Using a dull object, slowly stroke the master-cylinder piston, air and brake fluid will be expelled from the brake line fittings. Prior to releasing the piston plug or cap the outlet ports. - Repeat this procedure 8-10 times or until no air is emitted from the outlet ports. - When finished, cap the outlet ports and install the master-cylinder. Syringe Fill the syringe (one especially designed for brake bleeding) with clean brake fluid. - Insert the end of the syringe into one of the outlet ports on the master-cylinder. - Slowly compress the syringe and back flush the brake fluid through the master-cylinder. - A combination of air and brake fluid will be emitted from the inlet port in the fluid reservoir. - Repeat this procedure until only brake fluid is emitted into the reservoir. Cap the outlet ports and install the master-cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Coolant Level Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Level Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair This lamp will be illuminated when engine coolant level in the radiator drops below a pre-determined level. To turn lamp "OFF," check cooling system, then add coolant to bring system to proper level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Number: 90-406-7A Section: 7A Date: March 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 067107 Subject: AVAILABILITY/SERVICING OF NEW TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL INDICATOR Model and Year: 1982-90 C/K TRUCKS, 1987-90 R/V TRUCKS, 1983-90 G VANS WITH 3L80 OR 4L60 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION A new transmission fluid level indicator featuring a seal at the transmission fill tube inlet end is available. This indicator, which is installed on all 1991 C/K, R/V and G models, may be installed on previous models listed below. SERVICE PROCEDURE: When installing a new transmission fluid level indicator, replacement of the transmission fluid fill tube is not necessary. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION Part Number Model Description 15659455 1982-90 C/K All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15659455 1987-90 RN All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15677051 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 4L60 level indicator 15677052 1987-90 G2 (6.2C) & 4L60 Transmission fluid 1983-86 G All & 4L60 level indicator 15677055 1987-90 G3 (6.2J) & 3L80 Transmission fluid 1987-88 G3 (5.7M) & 3L80 level indicator 1984-86 G All & 3L80 1983 G3 & 3L80 15677056 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 3L80 level indicator 15677057 1988-90 G3 (7.4N) & 3L80 Transmission fluid level indicator Parts are currently available from GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION For vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation: K6130 Use applicable Labor Time Guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair The Check Engine Lamp will be illuminated when the ignition switch is placed in the On position. When the engine is started, the lamp should go off. If the lamp remains on for 10 seconds or constantly after the engine is started, the self diagnosis system has detected a problem and has stored a code in the system Electronic Control Module (ECM). After diagnosis and repair, the ECM memory can be cleared of codes by removing the ECM fuse or disconnecting the battery ground cable for approximately 30 seconds, with ignition switch in the Off position. It should be noted, that if battery ground cable is disconnected to clear codes, components such as clocks, electronically tuned radios etc., will have to be reset. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Level Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Level Warning Indicator: Description and Operation On models less gauges, the oil/choke warning indicator lamp should be illuminated when the ignition switch is in the Run or Start position. When the engine is started, the choke warning indicator lamp should go off. If the lamp fails to illuminate with ignition switch in Run or Start position with engine not operating, a burnt out bulb or fuse or defect in choke electrical system is indicated. If lamp remains on after engine has been started, a problem in the engine oil pressure system or electrical choke system exist. On models equipped with gauges, the choke warning indicator lamp should be illuminated when the ignition switch is in the Run or Start position. When the engine is started, the choke warning indicator lamp should go off. If fails to illuminate with ignition switch in Run or Start position with engine not operating, a burnt out bulb or fuse or defect in choke electrical system is indicated. If lamp remains on after engine has been started, a problem in the alternator circuit is indicated. After service has been completed, the lamp operation should return to normal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 91263E > Jun > 90 > Tires (Front) - Irregular Wear Tires: Customer Interest Tires (Front) - Irregular Wear Number: 91-26-3E Section: 3E Date: June 1990 Corp. Bulletin No: 053501 Subject: FRONT TIRE WEAR Model and Year: 1982-91 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS (REAR WHEEL DRIVE) THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 91-12-3E. THE KILOMETERS HAVE BEEN TRANSLATED INTO MILES. ALL COPIES OF 91-12-3E SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Rear wheel drive trucks, equipped with All Season and/or On-Off road tires may exhibit irregular wear of; the front tires. Small amounts of irregular wear is considered normal and is not necessarily a result of incorrect alignment. Incorrect alignment (especially toe) may result in premature wear of the front tires, however agressive cornering may also have a similar effect. Drive axle tires are much less prone to irregular wear, therefore they should not be considered for comparison of wear to non-drive axle tires. The rate of irregular wear is also dependent upon the depth of tread. New tires are more prone to irregular wear, so it is essential that tires are rotated at the proper intervals to normalize the wear. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 91263E > Jun > 90 > Tires (Front) - Irregular Wear > Page 550 Light Duty truck tire rotation recommendations are pictured on the following page. Rotation Guidelines for Tires used on Light Duty Trucks: Tires used on Pickups, Vans and Utility vehicles should be rotated at the first 6,000 miles for Schedule 1 or 7,500 miles for Schedule 2 and then every 15,000 miles thereafter. NOTE: Earlier rotation may be required should irregular wear pafterns develop due to harsh service use - the following rotation patterns are recommended for the various vehicle types and tire combinations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 556 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 557 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 558 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 559 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 560 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-03-10-020C > Apr > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-03-10-020C > Apr > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires > Page 565 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-00-90-002J > Jan > 09 > Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-90-002J Date: January 28, 2009 Subject: Information on Proper Tire Pressure Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and clarify additional information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-90-002I (Section 00 - General Information). Important: ^ Adjustment of tire pressure for a customer with a Low Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light on and no codes in the TPM system is NOT a warrantable repair. Claims to simply adjust the tire pressure will be rejected. ^ ALL tires (including the spare tire) MUST be set to the recommended inflation pressure stated on the vehicle's tire placard (on driver's door) during the PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION (PDI). Recommended inflation pressure is not the pressure printed on tire sidewall. ^ Tires may be over-inflated from the assembly plant due to the mounting process. ^ Generally a 5.6°C (10°F) temperature change will result in (is equivalent to) a 6.9 kPa (1 psi) tire pressure change. ^ 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 Only - The H2 comes standard with Light Truck "D" Load Range tires with a recommended cold inflation pressure of 289 kPa (42 psi). These tires will alert the driver to a low pressure situation at roughly 262 kPa (38 psi) due to a requirement in FMVSS 138 which specifies a Minimum Activation Pressure for each tire type. This creates a relatively narrow window of "usable" pressure values and the warning will be more sensitive to outside temperature changes during the colder months. As with other cold temperature/tire pressure issues, there is nothing wrong with the system itself. If a vehicle is brought in with this concern, check for tire damage and set all tires to the Recommended Cold Inflation Pressure shown on the vehicle placard. Accurate tire pressures ensure the safe handling and appropriate ride characteristics of GM cars and trucks. It is critical that the tire pressure be adjusted to the specifications on the vehicle¡C■s tire placard during PDI. Ride, handling and road noise concerns may be caused by improperly adjusted tire pressure. The first step in the diagnosis of these concerns is to verify that the tires are inflated to the correct pressures. The recommended tire inflation pressure is listed on the vehicle¡C■s tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver¡C■s side front or rear door edge, center pillar, or the rear compartment lid. Tip ^ Generally a 5.6°C (10°F) temperature increase will result in (is equivalent to) a 6.9 kPa (1 psi) tire pressure increase. ^ The definition of a "cold" tire is one that has been sitting for at least 3 hours, or driven no more than 1.6 km (1 mi). ^ On extremely cold days, if the vehicle has been indoors, it may be necessary to compensate for the low external temperature by adding additional air to the tire during PDI. ^ During cold weather, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator light (a yellow horseshoe with an exclamation point) may illuminate. If this indicator turns off after the tires warm up (reach operating temperature), the tire pressure should be reset to placard pressure at the cold temperature. ^ The TPM system will work correctly with nitrogen in tires. ^ The TPM system is compatible with the GM Vehicle Care Tire Sealant but may not be with other commercially available sealants. Important: ^ Do not use the tire pressure indicated on the tire itself as a guide. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-00-90-002J > Jan > 09 > Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information > Page 570 ^ Always inspect and adjust the pressure when the tires are cold. ^ Vehicles that have different pressures for the front and the rear need to be adjusted after tire rotation. Improper tire inflation may result in any or all of the following conditions: ^ Premature tire wear ^ Harsh ride ^ Excessive road noise ^ Poor handling ^ Reduced fuel economy ^ Low Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Light ON ^ Low Tire Pressure Message on the Drivers Information Center (DIC) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 433502 > Jul > 94 > Tires - Speed Rated Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Speed Rated Information Group Ref.: 3 - Steering/Suspension Bulletin No.: 433502 Date: July, 1994 INFORMATION SUBJECT: SPEED RATED TIRES MODELS: 1995 AND PRIOR YEAR PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS All original equipment passenger car and light duty truck tires used by General Motors have a speed rating symbol molded on their sidewall. This speed symbol, along with the tire's load index, make up the service description that follows the tire's size. The original equipment tire size, speed rating, and recommended inflation pressure are listed on the tire placard usually located on the driver's door edge. WHEN REPLACING TIRES, NEVER INSTALL A TIRE THAT IS A SMALLER SIZE OR LESSER SPEED RATING THAN THAT USED AS ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT. As in the past, it is recommended that replacement tires have a TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) number on the sidewall that is identical to that on the original tires. Common speed rating on tires used by General Motors are as follows: (see illustration) IMPORTANT: Most base all season tires and touring tires used by GM are S rated. Performance tires will usually have a higher speed rating. High performance tires are usually Z rated. Z rated tires carry the Z symbol within the tire size, rather than after the size in the service description. These speeds apply only at the tire's full pressure. An underinflated tire will not meet its speed rating capability. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 91263E > Jun > 90 > Tires (Front) - Irregular Wear Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires (Front) - Irregular Wear Number: 91-26-3E Section: 3E Date: June 1990 Corp. Bulletin No: 053501 Subject: FRONT TIRE WEAR Model and Year: 1982-91 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS (REAR WHEEL DRIVE) THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 91-12-3E. THE KILOMETERS HAVE BEEN TRANSLATED INTO MILES. ALL COPIES OF 91-12-3E SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Rear wheel drive trucks, equipped with All Season and/or On-Off road tires may exhibit irregular wear of; the front tires. Small amounts of irregular wear is considered normal and is not necessarily a result of incorrect alignment. Incorrect alignment (especially toe) may result in premature wear of the front tires, however agressive cornering may also have a similar effect. Drive axle tires are much less prone to irregular wear, therefore they should not be considered for comparison of wear to non-drive axle tires. The rate of irregular wear is also dependent upon the depth of tread. New tires are more prone to irregular wear, so it is essential that tires are rotated at the proper intervals to normalize the wear. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 91263E > Jun > 90 > Tires (Front) - Irregular Wear > Page 579 Light Duty truck tire rotation recommendations are pictured on the following page. Rotation Guidelines for Tires used on Light Duty Trucks: Tires used on Pickups, Vans and Utility vehicles should be rotated at the first 6,000 miles for Schedule 1 or 7,500 miles for Schedule 2 and then every 15,000 miles thereafter. NOTE: Earlier rotation may be required should irregular wear pafterns develop due to harsh service use - the following rotation patterns are recommended for the various vehicle types and tire combinations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 585 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 586 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 587 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 593 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 594 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 595 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA82V128000 > Dec > 82 > Recall 82V128000: Wheel Stud Failure Wheels: Recalls Recall 82V128000: Wheel Stud Failure ON THE INVOLVED VEHICLES, THE REAR BRAKE DRUM BALANCE WEIGHTS MAY INTERFERE WITH THE ALUMINUM WHEELS. THIS CONTACT COULD CAUSE THE WHEEL LUG NUTS TO LOOSEN, LEADING TO WHEEL STUD FAILURE. THIS COULD ALLOW SEPARATION OF THE WHEEL AND TIRE FROM THE VEHICLE. THE DEALER WILL INSPECT AND, IF NECESSARY, MODIFY THE REAR BRAKE DRUM BALANCE WEIGHTS WITHOUT CHARGE TO OWNER. VEHICLE DESCRIPTION: LIGHT TRUCKS EQUIPPED WITH OPTIONAL ALUMINUM WHEELS AND REAR BRAKE DRUMS. SYSTEM: SERVICE BRAKES; REAR BRAKE DRUM, BALANCE WEIGHTS. CONSEQUENCES OF DEFECT: WHEEL AND TIRE SEPARATION COULD OCCUR WITHOUT PRIOR WARNING AND COULD RESULT IN LOSS OF VEHICLE CONTROL AND AN ACCIDENT. 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK BLAZER 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK C10 1982 GMC C15 1982 GMC JIMMY Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 609 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 610 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 611 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 616 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 622 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 623 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 624 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 629 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 634 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 635 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 640 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 641 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 642 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 647 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 99-03-10-102 > Jun > 99 > Warranty - OE Chrome Plated Aluminum Wheel ID Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - OE Chrome Plated Aluminum Wheel ID File In Section: 03 - Suspension Bulletin No.: 99-03-10-102 Date: June, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Original Equipment Chrome Plated Aluminum Wheel Identification Models: 1999 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Chrome plated aluminum wheels have been returned to the Warranty Parts Center that are not the original equipment (OE) components. Original equipment chrome plated aluminum wheels can be identified by either a balance weight clip retention groove (1) or a step (2) that is machined around both of the wheel's rim flanges. The rim flanges (3) of painted original equipment aluminum wheels do not have a groove or a step. Chrome plated aluminum wheels that do not have the wheel rim flange groove or step are aftermarket chrome plated components and are NOT warrantable. Any aftermarket chrome wheels received by the Warranty Parts Center will be charged back to the dealership. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 393504 > Jul > 93 > Wheels - Sealing Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Sealing Leaking Cast Aluminum Bulletin Number: 93-3-16 Reference Number: 393504 Publish Date: 7/93 Subject: LEAKING CAST ALUMINUM WHEELS (REPAIR WITH ADHESIVE SEALANT) Models Affected: 1985-1993 ALL MODELS Should a vehicle equipped with cast aluminum wheels exhibit a slow leak due to a porous condition existing in the wheel, the wheel can be repaired by using Dow Corning Silastic 732 RTV, p/n 1052366 or equivalent, as described in the following procedure: 1. Remove tire-wheel assembly from vehicle. 2. Locate leaking area by inflating tire to 40 psi and dipping tire-wheel assembly in water bath. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark leak area and remove tire from wheel. 4. Scuff INSIDE rim surface at leak area with # 80 grit paper and clean area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M # 08984. 5. Apply 1/8" thick layer of adhesive/sealant to leak area on INSIDE of rim and allow six hours of drying time. 6. Mount tire on wheel, pressurizing to 40 psi and check for leaks. NOTICE: Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. 7. Adjust tire pressure to meet placard specification. 8. Balance tire-wheel assembly, using proper coated weights. 9. Water test wheel again. 10. Reinstall tire-wheel assembly on vehicle. Parts are currently available from GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION: Labor Operation Number: E0420 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 8537 > Feb > 85 > Wheels - Locking Wheel Nuts Impact On Tire Balance Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Locking Wheel Nuts Impact On Tire Balance 85-37 3E (X) FEB., 1985 Subject: LOCKING WHEEL NUTS Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Whenever a heavier, solid locking wheel nut is used to replace a standard nut, it should be installed nearest the valve stem, and a 1/2 ounce balance weight should be added 180~ opposite the locking nut. This situation will usually occur on styled wheels. For improved appearance, the balance weight should be installed on the wheel's inboard side. When rotating tires, always re-install the locking nut nearest the tire valve stem so that it remains opposite the 1/2 ounce balance weight. This procedure will improve the on-car wheel balance by compensating for the heavy locking wheel nut. This does not apply to the light weight, two-piece locking nuts used on some Chevrolet models. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 84127 > May > 84 > Aluminum Wheels - Cleaning/Painting/Coating Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Aluminum Wheels - Cleaning/Painting/Coating Number: 84-127 Section: 3E (X) Date: May, 1984 Subject: CLEANING, PAINTING, AND COATING OF ALUMINUM WHEELS Model and Year: ALL MODELS WITH ALUMINUM WHEELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Cast aluminum wheels with a clear coat finish that have peeling paint, discoloration of the paint or corrosion should be cleaned and repainted instead of replaced using the following procedure. NOTICE: During entire procedure, be careful not to scratch or damage the shiny aluminum surfaces. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 360 grit sandpaper. ^ Nylon auto glass type scraper. ^ American Sure Seal Silicone Remover (stock number S-STC), 3M number 08984 wax remover or equivalent.* ^ Paint thinner. ^ American Sure Seal Wheel Polish - stock DAP or equivalent.* ^ Enamel color coat paint or lacquer. ^ American Sure Seal Coricone 1700 Clear Metal Protectant (stock number DCC or equivalent). ^ DuPont 228S conversion coating or equivalent. ^ General Purpose Pads, 3M #7448 or equivalent. ^ American Sure Seal Glaze Cream Cleaner (stock number DGC), 3M number 05979 Clean-N-Glaze or equivalent medium abrasive rubbing compound.* ^ American Sure Seal Aluminum Cleaner (stock number DWC or equivalent).* ^ American Sure Seal Paint Remover Product, strip-off (stock number SSO or equivalent).* PROCEDURE 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly from car. Remove tire from wheel (after marking wheel/tire relationship) or mask off tire prior to painting. If wheel and tire are not separated, mark weights and remove. 2. Using a general purpose pad or buffing wheel and the Clean-N-Glaze, aggressively rub over the machined surface to remove some of the corrosion and restore most of the lustre. 3. Wipe over the previously cleaned surfaces with an aluminum cleaner-polish to obtain maximum lustre. 4. Using the silicone remover, clean the entire wheel. Wash off with clear water and air blow dry. CAUTION: USE OF RUBBER GLOVES AND EYE GOGGLES IS NECESSARY TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY. 5. Using the paint stripper, spray the entire wheel surface with this product. Wait two (2) or three (3) minutes and then remove with a high pressure water hose. Steps 6 through 12 are to be used only on aluminum wheels with painted surfaces. Painted aluminum wheels began to be installed in 1980. 6. If peeling or discoloration is extremely bad, it may be necessary to use the paint stripper. Scrape off any loose paint with a nylon scraper and/or 360 grit sandpaper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 84127 > May > 84 > Aluminum Wheels - Cleaning/Painting/Coating > Page 668 7. Wipe entire wheel clean with the silicone remover and flush off again with water, followed by blow drying. 8. Mask off areas of wheel not to be painted. 9. Wipe over the painted surface with the aluminum cleaner; then apply the metal prep., following label directions. (This is a two-step operation which will improve the adhesion of the primer.) 10. To ensure coverage in all areas, an application of zinc chromate primer should be applied to the wheel painted surface in four (4) light applications, rotating the wheel 90~ between applications. 11. Apply the color coat using the same procedure as for the primer. 12. After ten (10) minutes of air drying, heat may be applied to the paint to reduce drying time. 13. When the wheel is completely dry, remove masking tape. Wheel must be perfectly clean of foreign material and dry before applying Coricone 1700, and clean the masked area with wax or silicone remover to eliminate tape residue. 14. Spray two (2) light coatings of Coricone 1700 wheel protector on wheel allowing two (2) or three (3) minutes between coats. The clear coat will put an invisible coating on top of the painted surface and the polished aluminum. 15. DO NOT use heat on clear coat, allow to air dry for 24 hours. 16. Reinstall the tire and wheel (re-align the index marks and/or the balance weight). *For the nearest distributor in your area, call collect (416) 625-7900. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > NHTSA82V128000 > Dec > 82 > Recall 82V128000: Wheel Stud Failure Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 82V128000: Wheel Stud Failure ON THE INVOLVED VEHICLES, THE REAR BRAKE DRUM BALANCE WEIGHTS MAY INTERFERE WITH THE ALUMINUM WHEELS. THIS CONTACT COULD CAUSE THE WHEEL LUG NUTS TO LOOSEN, LEADING TO WHEEL STUD FAILURE. THIS COULD ALLOW SEPARATION OF THE WHEEL AND TIRE FROM THE VEHICLE. THE DEALER WILL INSPECT AND, IF NECESSARY, MODIFY THE REAR BRAKE DRUM BALANCE WEIGHTS WITHOUT CHARGE TO OWNER. VEHICLE DESCRIPTION: LIGHT TRUCKS EQUIPPED WITH OPTIONAL ALUMINUM WHEELS AND REAR BRAKE DRUMS. SYSTEM: SERVICE BRAKES; REAR BRAKE DRUM, BALANCE WEIGHTS. CONSEQUENCES OF DEFECT: WHEEL AND TIRE SEPARATION COULD OCCUR WITHOUT PRIOR WARNING AND COULD RESULT IN LOSS OF VEHICLE CONTROL AND AN ACCIDENT. 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK BLAZER 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK C10 1982 GMC C15 1982 GMC JIMMY Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations Speedometer Head: All Technical Service Bulletins Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations File In Section: 8 - Chassis/Body Electrical Bulletin No.: 66-83-04A Date: September, 1996 INFORMATION Subject: AC Delco Service Center Locations for Odometer/Speedometer Service Models: 1997 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (excluding Cadillac) This bulletin is being revised to provide the necessary contact information only. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 66-83-04 (Section 8 - Chassis/Body Electrical) General Motors provides service for sophisticated electronic products through the authorized AC Delco Service Center Program. This program is designed to provide GM vehicle owners with the highest quality and most technically up-to-date product available. Repair products from unauthorized service outlets are not acceptable as warranty replacements. Currently, there are 25 authorized AC Delco Service Centers who exchange and remanufacture odometer/speedometers (list included). Only these Centers should be contacted for service. Important: W series and 1997 T series Medium Duty truck odometer/speedometers must be ordered directly from GMSPO. The following steps should be taken when utilizing the AC Delco Service Centers: Dealers should contact their local AC Delco Service Center (list included). Any listed facility may be used. The following information must be provided: Part number VIN, Mileage, Vehicle Year, Make and Model Dealer Name and Address Delivery Date of Vehicle Name of the person requesting exchange or service Phone number Repair Order Number P.O. number (if non - warranty) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 678 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 679 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 680 AC Delco Service Centers Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 83I23 > Dec > 82 > TCC - Engages at Incorrect Speed Speedometer Head: All Technical Service Bulletins TCC - Engages at Incorrect Speed Number: 83-I-23 Section: VII Date: Dec., 1982 Subject: TCC ENGAGES AT INCORRECT SPEED - ALL GAS ENGINES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS If a condition is encountered where the torque converter clutch is engaging at the incorrect speed, be sure to check speedometer head magnet field plate for foreign material i.e.: grease, dirt, etc. Foreign material on the drum could change the signal to the ECM resulting in erratic TCC operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 690 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 691 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 692 AC Delco Service Centers Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 702 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 703 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 704 AC Delco Service Centers Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Adjustments > Front Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Front Two Wheel Drive - 2WD FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT 1. While rotating wheel forward, torque spindle nut to 12 ft. lbs. 2. Back off nut until ``just loose'' then hand tighten nut and back it off again until either hole in spindle lines up with hole in nut. Do not back off nut more than 1/2 flat. 3. Install new cotter pin. With wheel bearing properly adjusted, there will be .001---.005 inch endplay. Four Wheel Drive - 4WD For Front Wheel Bearing Adjustment Procedures on four wheel drive models refer to Locking Hub/Adjustments. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Adjustments > Front > Page 713 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Rear Chevrolet Full Floating Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT Before checking wheel bearing adjustment, make sure brakes are fully released and do not drag. Check bearing play by grasping tire at top and pulling back and forth or by using a pry bar under tire. If bearings are properly adjusted, movement of brake drum in relation to brake flange plate will be barely noticeable and wheel will turn freely. If movement is excessive, adjust bearings as follows: 1. Raise vehicle until wheel is free to rotate, then remove axle shaft. 2. Disengage retainer tang and remove retainer from axle housing tube. 3. Torque adjusting nut to 50 ft. lbs. while rotating hub assembly. Ensure bearing cones are seated and in contact with spindle shoulder. 4. Back off adjusting nut until just loose. 5. Insert key into adjusting nut slot, if equipped. Install snap ring to retain key in position. 6. Lower vehicle, then install axle shaft. GMC Single Speed Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT 1. Raise and support rear axle. 2. Remove axle shaft as outlined previously. Release brakes. 3. Disengage retainer tang from locknut, then remove locknut and retainer from axle housing tube. 4. Torque inner adjusting nut to 50 ft. lbs. while rotating wheel, then back off nut 1/8 of a turn. 5. Install retainer so that short tang engages nearest slot on adjusting nut. 6. Install outer locknut and torque to 250 ft. lbs., then bend long tang of retainer into slot of outer nut. Timken (Rockwell) Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Adjustments > Front > Page 714 Fig. 12 Timken (Rockwell) axle w/12 inch ring gear This axle, Fig. 12, employs a heavy duty hypoid drive pinion and ring gear. The differential and gear assembly is mounted on tapered roller bearings. The straddle mounted pinion has two tapered roller bearings in front of the pinion teeth which take the forward and reverse thrust, while a third bearing behind the pinion teeth carries the radial load. AXLE HOUSING, REPLACE Refer to ``Chevrolet Full Floating Axles'' for axle housing replacement procedures, since procedures are identical for both axles. AXLE SHAFT, REPLACE 1. Remove hub cap, then install slide hammer adapter into tapped hole in axle flange. 2. Attach slide hammer onto adapter, then remove axle shaft from housing. 3. Install axle shaft, ensuring flange and hub splines align. 4. Install new gasket, position flange to hub, then install attaching bolts and tighten to specifications. WHEEL BEARINGS, ADJUST 1. Remove axle shaft as outlined previously. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Disengage retainer tang from locknut, then remove locknut and retainer from axle housing tube. 4. While rotating wheel, torque inner adjusting nut to 50 ft. lbs., then back off nut 1/8 of a turn. 5. Install retainer so that short tang engages nearest slot on adjusting nut. 6. Install outer locknut and torque to 250 ft. lbs., then bend long tang of retainer into slot of outer nut. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Coil Spring Suspension FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS AND/OR HUB 1. Raise and support vehicle, then remove wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove hub cap and cotter pin. 3. Remove brake caliper. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 4. Remove retaining nut, then the hub and disc assembly. 5. Remove outer wheel bearing. 6. To remove inner bearing, pry out grease seal, then remove seal and inner bearing. 7. Reverse procedure to install, then adjust wheel bearings as previously described. Leaf Spring Suspension FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS AND/OR HUB 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove dust cap, if equipped. 3. Remove locking hub as outlined under LOCKING HUBS. 4. Remove disc brake caliper and position aside. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 5. Remove wheel bearing outer locknut, lock ring and wheel bearing inner adjusting nut. 6. Remove hub and disc assembly, and outer wheel bearing. 7. Remove oil seal, inner wheel bearing and inner and outer bearing cups using a suitable drift. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Adjust wheel bearings as outlined under ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE/WHEEL BEARING. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 717 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Chevrolet Full Floating Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS Fig. 5 Removing bearing adjusting nut locknut Hub & Drum, Remove 1. Remove wheel and axle shaft. 2. Disengage tang of nut lock from slot or flat of locknut, then remove locknut from housing tube, using appropriate tool, Fig. 5. 3. Disengage tang of nut lock from slot or flat of adjusting nut and remove nut lock from housing tube. 4. Use appropriate tool, Fig. 5, to remove adjusting nut from housing tube. Remove thrust washer from housing tube. 5. Pull hub and drum straight off axle housing. Fig. 6 Removing outer bearing & cup Bearing & Cup, Replace 1. Using a hammer and suitable drift, drive inner bearing, cup and seal from hub assembly. 2. Remove outer bearing snap ring using suitable pliers. 3. Using tools J-24426 and J-8092, Fig. 6, drive outer bearing and cup from hub assembly. 4. Install new outer bearing into hub assembly. 5. Install outer bearing cup using tools mentioned in Step 3. Drive cup beyond snap ring groove. Install outer bearing cup with tool J-8092 positioned upside down to prevent chamfer on tool from damaging cup. 6. Install snap ring into groove using suitable pliers. 7. Using tool J-24426, drive cup against snap ring. 8. Install inner bearing cup using tools J-24427 and J-8092. Drive cup into position until it seats against shoulder of hub bore. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 718 9. Install new oil seal. Chevrolet Salisbury Type Semi-Floating Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS 1. Remove axle shaft as previously described. 2. Use a suitable puller to remove bearing and oil seal. 3. Lubricate wheel bearing and cavity between seal lips with wheel bearing lubricant before installation. 4. Reverse procedure to install. GMC Single Speed REAR WHEEL BEARINGS Fig. 5 Removing bearing adjusting nut locknut Fig. 9 Removing bearing retainer ring 1. Remove wheel and axle shaft. 2. Disengage tang of retainer from slot or flat of locknut, then remove locknut from housing tube, Fig. 5. 3. Disengage tang of retainer from slot or flat of adjusting nut, then remove retainer. 4. Using tool shown in Fig. 5, remove adjusting nut from housing tube. Remove thrust washer. 5. Pull hub and drum assembly off axle housing. Remove oil seal and discard. 6. Using a suitable steel bar and an arbor press, press inner bearing cup from hub. 7. Using a suitable pliers, remove outer bearing retaining ring, Fig. 9. 8. Using an old axle shaft or equivalent, drive on axle shaft spacer to remove outer bearing assembly from hub. 9. Position axle shaft spacer and outer bearing into hub, ensuring larger side of bearing faces outer end of hub. 10. Position outer bearing cup into hub with thin edge facing toward outer end of hub, then press cup into hub. 11. Install retaining ring, then press cup into contact with ring. 12. Drive inner bearing cup into hub, then install new oil seal. 13. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to complete installation, then adjust wheel bearings as outlined in ``Wheel Bearing, Adjust'' procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cover: > 8454 > Jan > 84 > Wire Wheel Cover - Snapping/Creaking Noise Wheel Cover: Customer Interest Wire Wheel Cover - Snapping/Creaking Noise Number : 84-54 Section: 9 (XIV) Date : Jan., 1984 Subject: WIRE WHEEL COVER NOISE Model and Year: ALL MODELS AND YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Wire Wheel Cover Some wire wheel covers may have a snapping or creaking noise when driving at low speeds. This noise may be caused by the wheel cover flexing on the wheel. This condition can be corrected by removing the wheel covers and placing them upside down on a covered bench. Then center punch and drill four (4) 1/4" holes evenly spaced in the wheel cover (see illustration). Holes should be drilled on the second step of the cover from the inboard side. Install the four (4) nylon clips, P/N 411700, in the drilled holes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cover: > 8454 > Jan > 84 > Wire Wheel Cover Snapping/Creaking Noise Wheel Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Wire Wheel Cover - Snapping/Creaking Noise Number : 84-54 Section: 9 (XIV) Date : Jan., 1984 Subject: WIRE WHEEL COVER NOISE Model and Year: ALL MODELS AND YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Wire Wheel Cover Some wire wheel covers may have a snapping or creaking noise when driving at low speeds. This noise may be caused by the wheel cover flexing on the wheel. This condition can be corrected by removing the wheel covers and placing them upside down on a covered bench. Then center punch and drill four (4) 1/4" holes evenly spaced in the wheel cover (see illustration). Holes should be drilled on the second step of the cover from the inboard side. Install the four (4) nylon clips, P/N 411700, in the drilled holes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Hub: Service and Repair FRONT HUB/BEARING 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove dust cap, if equipped. 3. Remove locking hub as outlined under ``Locking Hub Service.'' 4. Remove disc brake caliper and position aside. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 5. Remove wheel bearing outer locknut, lock ring and wheel bearing inner adjusting nut. 6. Remove hub and disc assembly, and outer wheel bearing. 7. Remove oil seal, inner wheel bearing and inner and outer bearing cups using a suitable drift. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Adjust wheel bearings as outlined under ``Wheel Bearings, Adjust'' procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Adjustments Wheel Hub (Locking): Adjustments Fig. 4 Adjusting wheel bearing EXC. HUBS W/MONROE AUTO. TYPE LOCKING HUB 1. Remove dust cap or locking hub, lockwasher and outer locknut. 2. Using suitable spanner wrench, torque inner adjusting nut to 50 ft.. lbs. while rotating hub. Back off adjusting nut and torque to 50 ft. lbs. on 1985---87 models with manual hubs, or 35 ft. lbs. on all other models, while rotating hub, Fig. 4. 3. Back off adjusting nut just enough to free bearing on 1986---87 models with manual hubs, or 3/8 of a turn on all other models. 4. On 1980---84 K10---20/1500---2500 vehicles, proceed as follows: a. On 1980 models, assemble adjusting nut lock by aligning nearest hole in lock with adjusting nut pin. Install outer locknut and torque to 80 ft. lbs. b. On 1981---84 models, assemble drag sleeve retainer washer over the axle shaft and against bearing adjusting nut. The tang on the inside diameter of this washer is assembled in the keyway of the spindle. Assemble and tighten outer locknut to 160---205 ft. lbs. 5. On 1980---84 K30/3500 vehicles, proceed as follows: a. On 1980---81 models, assemble lockwasher and locknut, then torque locknut to 65 ft. lbs. Bend one ear of lockwasher at least 30° over inner adjusting nut, and the other ear at least 60° over outer locknut. b. On 1982---84 models, assemble drag sleeve retainer washer over axle shaft and against bearing adjusting nut. The tang on the inside diameter of this washer is assembled in the keyway of the spindle. Assemble and tighten outer locknut to 160---205 ft. lbs. 6. On 1985---87 models, assemble drag sleeve retainer washer. Ensure tang on inside diameter of washer passes onto slot in spindle and hole in washer aligns with locknut pin. Move adjustment nut as necessary to align pin, then torque locknut to 160 ft. lbs. 7. On all vehicles, check to ensure all hub assemblies have .001---.010 inch endplay. 8. Install dust cap or locking hub. HUBS W/MONROE AUTO. TYPE LOCKING HUB 1. Remove locking hub assembly. 2. Torque locknut to 70 ft. lbs. while rotating hub and disc assembly. 3. Back off locknut, then torque to 25 ft. lbs. while rotating hub and disc. 4. Back off locknut to align nearest slot, then install locknut key. 5. Measure endplay. Endplay should be .001---.010 inch. 6. Reinstall locking hub assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Monroe Auto. Locking Hub Fig. 7 Exploded view of Monroe automatic locking hub Description This automatic locking hub, Fig. 7, when placed in four wheel drive, directs power to the front wheels. The front axle turns the axle shaft, activating the tri-cam mechanism, which then moves the drive gear outward into engagement with the ring gear. When two wheel drive is selected, disengagement is accomplished by the reverse movement of the wheels, which causes the drive gear and tri-cam to rotate to the disengaged position, moving the drive gear out of mesh with the ring gear. Removal 1. Remove tire and wheel assembly, hubcap and hub lock. 2. Remove spring retainer, then the loose spring. 3. Carefully pull hub lock assembly from wheel. If hub lock assembly will not slide out freely, rotate wheel to facilitate removal. Disassembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 740 1. Position hub lock assembly with plastic bearing side facing downward. 2. Pry inboard spring from assembly, then remove spindle lock, thrust bearing and tri-cam assembly. 3. Clean adapter housing assembly. If any part of this assembly is worn, replace as necessary. 4. Slide ring gear from adapter housing, then remove the six ring gear springs. 5. Remove ring gear spring retainer. Assembly 1. Install ring gear spring retainer. 2. Position the six ring gear springs into adapter housing. 3. Grease outside surface of ring gear, then install into adapter housing. Ensure gear teeth are closest to springs. 4. Insert and install ring gear retaining ring. Ensure ring gear springs are properly seated in adapter housing. 5. Grease tri-cam assembly, then install into adapter housing. 6. Install thrust bearing, spindle lock and inboard snap ring. Rotate spindle lock tangs in both directions to check for free movement. Installation 1. Install hub lock by first sliding hub onto axle shaft spline, then guide hub into wheel hub spline. When hub lock bottoms out, rotate entire wheel while pressing inward on hub until hub lock tangs engage wheel bearing locknut. Allow hub lock to seat itself. Hub lock should not protrude more than 3/8 inch from face of wheel hub. 2. Install spring, then unlock hub lock by rotating wheel hub while applying force to drive gear spring. 3. Install spring retainer and spring. 4. Install hub cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 741 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Spicer Manual Locking Hub Fig. 8 Exploded view of Spicer manual locking hub Description As shown in Fig. 8, the splines on the inside diameter of the axle shaft sleeve and ring assembly mesh with the axle shaft splines. The assembly is retained on the axle shaft with a snap ring. The splines on the outside diameter of the inner clutch ring assembly mesh with the wheel hub splines. Therefore, when the actuator knob is turned towards the ``L'' position, the actuating cam body is forced outward towards the hub end, allowing the inner clutch to be forced under spring tension towards the axle shaft sleeve and ring assembly until the inner clutch assembly teeth are engaged in the axle shaft sleeve and ring assembly teeth, locking the axle and hub. Operation When the transfer case is shifted into the position for driving the front axle, turn the actuating knob so that it is aligned with the letter L. If the clutch teeth do not engage with the knob turned to this position, the clutch teeth are butted and a slight movement of the wheel in either direction will complete the lock. The front axle will now drive the wheel. When the transfer case is to be shifted into the position for driving the rear axle only, turn the actuating knob so that it is aligned with the letter F. This will disengage the clutch teeth and thus unlock the wheel hub from the axle shaft. The wheel will now turn free on the axle. Be certain that the transfer case is shifted into two wheel drive position before disengaging the Hub-Lock. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 742 Fig. 8 Exploded view of Spicer manual locking hub Removal 1. Position actuator knob in ``LOCK,'' then raise and support vehicle. Rotate tire to ensure engagement of hub lock. 2. Remove retaining plate attaching bolts, then the retaining plate, actuating knob and O-rings. 3. Remove internal snap ring, outer clutch retaining ring, actuating cam body, outer clutch gear and pressure spring, Fig. 8. 4. Remove axle shaft snap ring, then the inner clutch ring. 5. Remove spring retainer plate, if equipped. Installation 1. Install spring retainer plate, if equipped, over spindle nuts and against wheel bearing outer cup. Ensure flanged side of plate faces toward wheel bearing. 2. Install inner clutch ring onto axle shaft, press ring inward, then install snap ring. 3. Install pressure spring with larger side facing inward. 4. Install outer clutch gear, actuating cam body, outer clutch retaining ring and the internal snap ring. Ensure actuating cams face outward. 5. Install O-ring, actuating knob, actuating knob O-ring and the retaining plate. 6. Install retaining plate attaching bolts and torque to 38 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 743 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Warner Auto. Locking Hub Fig. 6 Exploded view of Warner automatic locking hub Description The Automatic Locking Hub, shown in Fig. 6, engages or disengages to lock the front axle shaft to the hub of the front wheel. Engagement occurs whenever the vehicle is operated in 4WD. Disengagement occurs whenever 2WD has been selected and the vehicle is moving rearward. Disengagement will not occur when the vehicle is moved rearward if 4WD is selected and the hub has already been engaged. Before disassembling a unit for a complaint of abnormal noise, note the following: 1. To obtain all-wheel drive, the transfer case lever must be placed in 4L or 4H, at which time the hub locks will automatically engage. 2. To unlock the hubs, shift the transfer case lever to 2H, then slowly reverse the vehicle direction approximately 10 feet. 3. An incomplete shift from 2WD to 4WD, or disengagement of only one hub lock may cause an abnormal sound from the front axle. Shift to 4WD to stop the noise, then unlock the hubs as previously stated. Removal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 744 1. Remove 5 screws retaining the cover to outer clutch housing. 2. Remove cover, seal, seal bridge and bearing components. 3. Compress the wire retaining ring and remove the remaining components from the hub. Disassembly 1. Remove snap ring from groove in hub sleeve, then turn clutch gear until it falls into engagement with the outer clutch housing. Lift and tilt the drag sleeve to unlock the tangs of the brake band from window of inner cage, then remove the drag sleeve and brake assembly. The brake band must never be removed from the drag sleeve. The spring tension of the brake band can be changed if the coils are overexpanded and could affect hub operation. 2. Remove snap ring from groove in outer clutch housing, then pry plastic outer cage free from inner cage while inner cage is being removed. 3. Pry plastic outer cage tabs free from groove in outer clutch housing, then remove outer cage. 4. Remove clutch sleeve and attached components from outer clutch housing. 5. Compress return spring and hold the spring with clamps, then position the assembly in a vise so that the vise holds both ends of the clutch sleeve. Remove retaining spring. 6. Remove clamps holding the return spring, then slowly open the vise to permit the release of the return spring in a safe manner. Remove retainer seat, spring and spring support washers from the hub sleeve. 7. Remove C-ring from clutch sleeve. It is necessary to position sleeve assembly so that the C-ring ends are aligned with legs of cam follower, allowing removal between the legs. 8. Remove conical spring from between cam follower and clutch gear, then separate cam follower from clutch gear. Do not pry the legs of the cam follower apart. Assembly & Installation 1. Install tangs of cam follower over flats of clutch gear, then compress conical spring and position with large diameter located against clutch gear. 2. Position clutch gear assembly over splines of hub sleeve. The teeth of the cam follower should be located at the end of the hub sleeve with no splines, and the clutch gear and spring should slide freely over splines of hub sleeve. 3. Install C-ring into groove of hub sleeve, then install a spring retainer over each end of return spring. 4. Position one end of return spring with retainer against shoulder of clutch gear, then place support washer on end of the return spring. Compress return spring and install retainer ring into groove of hub sleeve. 5. Place assembled components into outer housing. The cam follower should be positioned with legs facing outward. 6. Install 3 of the cover screws into 3 holes of the outer clutch housing. These screws will support the component to permit the clutch hub to drop down so that the tangs of the brake band can be assembled. 7. Carefully install the plastic outer cage into outer clutch housing with ramps facing toward cam follower. The small external tabs of the plastic cage should be located in wide groove of outer clutch housing. 8. Install steel inner cage into the outer cage, aligning tab of outer cage with window of the inner cage, then install retaining ring into groove of outer clutch housing above outer cage. 9. The brake band and drag are serviced as a complete assembly. Install one of the 2 tangs of the brake band on each side of the lug of the outer cage, located in the window of the steel inner cage. It will be necessary to tilt these parts to engage the tangs in this position as the drag sleeve is positioned against the face of the cam follower. 10. Remove the 3 screws and rest the end of the hub sleeve on a suitable support, then install washer and snap ring above drag sleeve. The following steps may be completed as the hub is installed into vehicle. 11. Install wire retaining ring into groove of end of clutch housing without spline. The tangs of retainer ring should point away from splined end of clutch housing. 12. Hold the tangs together and install the 2 bent down tabs of seal bridge over tangs. The seal bridge holds the wire retainer ring in a clamped position in groove of outer clutch housing. Install O-ring into groove of outer clutch housing and over the seal bridge. 13. Lubricate and install the bearing over the inner race. The steel ball bearing should be visible when the bearing is properly installed. 14. Install bearing retainer clip into hole in outer race, then install bearing and retainer assembly in end of hub sleeve. Install seal ring over outer clutch housing. 15. Install bearing race spring into bore of cover, then install cover and spring assembly. Align holes in cover to holes in outer clutch housing and install 5 screws. 16. Install O-ring over seal bridge to prevent it from dislodging during handling prior to the hub bearing being installed into the vehicle. 17. The hub and attached parts should turn freely after installation. The 5 cover screws must be loosened to install the hub into the vehicle. After installation, torque the cover screws to 40---50 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 745 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Warner Manual Locking Hub Description Turning the locking hub clutch control to the ``L'' or ``4'' position connects the wheel hubs to the axle shafts. Therefore, when the transfer case is driving the front axle and the locking hubs are in the ``L'' or ``4'' position, the wheels are driven by the axle shafts. When the transfer case is not driving the front axle, the locking hub clutch controls are turned to the ``F'' or ``2'' position to disconnect the wheel hubs from the axle shafts. The wheels now rotate freely, but the axle shafts remain stationary. On any vehicle equipped with manually operated locking hubs, extreme care must be taken to ensure locking hub dials are fully engaged or disengaged, to prevent possible damage to the locking hubs. If the locking hubs are not properly maintained, full engagement of the control dials may become impossible due to excessive dirt and dust. Any time the vehicle is driven through water deep enough to cover the hubs, the locking hubs should be removed and cleaned, then lubricated thoroughly. These hubs are serviced as an assembly or subassembly only (hub body or hub clutch assembly only). Do not attempt to disassemble these units. If an entire hub or subassembly is defective, replace the entire assembly or subassembly. The hubs may be removed for cleaning and inspection purposes and for periodic lubrication only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 746 Fig. 9 Exploded view of Warner manual locking hub Removal 1. Remove socket head screws, axle hub retaining ring and axle shaft retaining ring. 2. Remove hub clutch assembly, Fig. 9. 3. Clean and inspect all components. Replace as necessary. Installation 1. Lubricate all hub components. 2. Install hub clutch, axle hub retaining ring and axle shaft retaining ring. 3. Install new O-ring in hub body and position in clutch. 4. Install socket head screws and torque to 30 inch lbs. 5. Raise and support front of vehicle, then set control dial to ``FREE'' position and rotate wheels. If wheels drag, check hub installation. 6. Lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels - Locking Wheel Nuts Impact On Tire Balance Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Locking Wheel Nuts Impact On Tire Balance 85-37 3E (X) FEB., 1985 Subject: LOCKING WHEEL NUTS Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Whenever a heavier, solid locking wheel nut is used to replace a standard nut, it should be installed nearest the valve stem, and a 1/2 ounce balance weight should be added 180~ opposite the locking nut. This situation will usually occur on styled wheels. For improved appearance, the balance weight should be installed on the wheel's inboard side. When rotating tires, always re-install the locking nut nearest the tire valve stem so that it remains opposite the 1/2 ounce balance weight. This procedure will improve the on-car wheel balance by compensating for the heavy locking wheel nut. This does not apply to the light weight, two-piece locking nuts used on some Chevrolet models. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Seal: Service and Repair 1. Remove axle shaft as previously described. 2. Use a suitable puller to remove bearing and oil seal. 3. Lubricate wheel bearing and cavity between seal lips with wheel bearing lubricant before installation. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Minimum, 698 kPa (100 psi) @ 200 rpm. The lowest cylinder reading should not be less than 80% of the highest. Perform compression test with engine at normal operating temperature, spark plugs removed and throttle wide open. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft: Specifications Camshaft Journal Diameter 1.8682-1.8692 in Camshaft End Play 0.004-0.012 in Camshaft Runout 0.001 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 763 Camshaft: Service and Repair V6-229, 262, V8-267, 305, 350, 400 & 454 Depending on vehicle and engine application, the grille, radiator and condenser (if equipped) must be removed to facilitate camshaft removal. 1. Remove intake manifold as outlined previously. 2. Remove pushrods and valve lifters. 3. Remove timing case cover and timing chain as outlined previously. 4. Install two 5/16-18 x 4 inch bolts into camshaft bolt holes, then pull camshaft out of cylinder block. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Specifications Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Specifications Lifter Bore Diameter .8432-.8442 in Lifter Diameter 0.8420-0.8427 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 767 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Fig. 26 Hydraulic valve lifter (Typical) The hydraulic valve lifters, Fig. 26, are simple in design. Readjustments are not necessary and servicing them requires that care and cleanliness be exercised in the handling of parts. DISASSEMBLE & ASSEMBLE 1. Hold plunger down with pushrod and, using a small screw driver or awl, remove plunger retainer. 2. Remove parts from lifter body. 3. Clean all parts and inspect for damage. If any parts are damaged, the entire lifter assembly should be replaced. The inertia valve in the plunger for rocker arm lubrication should move when the plunger is shaken. 4. To reassemble, invert plunger and set ball into hole in plunger. Place ball check valve retainer over ball and on plunger. Place check valve retainer spring over retainer. Assemble body over plunger assembly. Turn assembly over and install pushrod seat. Compress plunger with pushrod and install retainer. 5. Compress plunger to open oil holes and fill plunger with engine oil. Work plunger up and down and refill. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Push Rod > Component Information > Application and ID Push Rod: Application and ID When a replacement pushrod has a paint stripe at one end, this painted end must be installed in contact with the rocker arm. To provide durability a hardened insert is incorporated in the rocker arm end of these pushrods. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Fig. 24 Rocker arm stud removal. Exc. V6-231 & V8-454 Fig. 25 Rocker arm stud installation. Exc. V6-231 & V8-454 EXC. V6-231 Rocker arm studs that have damaged threads may be replaced with standard studs. Loose studs should be replaced with .003 inch or .013 inch oversize studs which are available for replacement. Remove the old stud by placing a suitable spacer over the stud, Fig. 24. Install a nut and flat washer on the stud and pull out the stud by turning the nut. After reaming the hole for an oversize stud, coat the press-fit area of the new stud with rear axle lubricant. Install the stud by driving it in until it protrudes from the head the same distance as the other studs, Fig. 25. On V8-454, the rocker arm studs are threaded into the cylinder head. Coat threads on cylinder head end of stud before assembling to head. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bearing: Service and Repair 6-250, 292, V6-229, 262, V8-267, 305, 350, 400 & 454 Connecting rod bearing inserts are available in standard size and undersizes of .001 inch, .002 inch, .010 inch and .020 inch. The bearings can be replaced without removing the rod assembly by removing the cap and replacing the upper and lower halves of the bearing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance Connecting Rod: Specifications Bearing Clearance Bearing Clearance Rod Bearing Clearance .0013-.0035 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance > Page 782 Connecting Rod: Specifications Large End Side Clearance Large End Side Clearance Rod Side Clearance .006-.014 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance > Page 783 Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Cap Bolts 45 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 784 Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Assemble pistons to connecting rods as shown in Figs. 36 through 41. Fig. 36 Piston & rod assembly. 6-250 Fig. 37 Piston & rod assembly. 6-292 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 785 Fig. 38 Piston & rod assembly. V6-229 & 262 Fig. 39 Piston & rod assembly. V6-231 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 786 Fig. 40 Piston & rod assembly. V8-267, 305, 350 & 400 Fig. 41 Piston & rod assembly. V8-454 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair V6-229, 262, V8-267, 305, 350, 400 & 454 Shell type bearings are used, and if worn excessively, should be replaced. No attempt should be made to shim, file or otherwise take up worn bearings. Main bearings are available in standard and undersizes of .001, .002, .009, .010 and .020 inch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Torque Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Main Cap Torque Main Cap Torque Main Bearing Cap Bolts 80 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Torque Specifications > Page 794 Crankshaft: Specifications Journal/Bearing Dimensions Journal/Bearing Dimensions Crankshaft Journals Main Bearing Journal Diameter Note: Front, 2.4484-2.4493 inches; intermediate, 2.4481-2.4490 inches; rear,2.4479-2.4488 inches. Connecting Rod Journal Diameter 2.0986-2.0998 in Maximum Out Of Round All 0.001 in Maximum Taper All 0.001 in Runout Service Limit Note: If main journals are misaligned, crankshaft is bent and should be replaced. Bearing Clearance Main Bearings Note: Production: Front, .0008-.0020 inch; intermediate, .0011-.0023 inch;rear, .0017-.0032 inch. Service: Front, .001-.0015 inch; intermediate,.001-.0025 inch; rear, .0025-.0035 inch. Thrust Bearing .002-.006 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Block Heater: > 921599E > Apr > 92 > Engine - Block Heater Leaks Engine Block Heater: Customer Interest Engine - Block Heater Leaks Number: 92-159-9E Section: 9E Date: APRIL 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 266201 ASE No.: A7 Subject: ENGINE BLOCK HEATER LEAKS Model and Year: 1976-92 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS Some owners of 1976-1992 light duty truck engines may experience a leaking condition from the engine block heater. This condition may be caused by the block heater losing torque because the yoke, which secures the block heater, has cracked. This could cause a loss of engine coolant. The block heater brass yoke may crack due to stress corrosion where it contacts the stainless steel crossbar. The yoke is stressed or cracked from over torquing the hold down screw (Figure 1, "6"). Corrosion in the stressed area is accelerated due to the dissimilar metals. To correct this condition, a redesigned block heater should be installed. The yoke material (Figure 1 "3") of the block heater was changed from brass to stainless steel. The stainless steel is a higher strength material which reduces the possibility of stress corrosion and galvanic potential. SERVICE PROCEDURE: Follow the "ENGINE BLOCK HEATER REPLACEMENT" instructions in section 9E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER of the appropriate Service Manual. CAUTION: The gasket "O" ring seals between the block heater and the block. Excessive tightening is not necessary. The torque specification is 1.6 - 2.2 N-m (15.0 - 20.0 lbs.in.) The revised engine block heater (P/N 10154624) can be used in any light duty truck, gas or diesel engine, where an engine block heater is used. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION Qty/Veh 10154624 Engine Block Heater 1 Parts are currently available from GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Block Heater: > 921599E > Apr > 92 > Engine - Block Heater Leaks > Page 803 For vehicles repaired under warranty use: Description Labor Op. Heater, Engine Block - Replace R4600 Use applicable labor time guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Block Heater: > 921599E > Apr > 92 > Engine - Block Heater Leaks Engine Block Heater: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Block Heater Leaks Number: 92-159-9E Section: 9E Date: APRIL 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 266201 ASE No.: A7 Subject: ENGINE BLOCK HEATER LEAKS Model and Year: 1976-92 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS Some owners of 1976-1992 light duty truck engines may experience a leaking condition from the engine block heater. This condition may be caused by the block heater losing torque because the yoke, which secures the block heater, has cracked. This could cause a loss of engine coolant. The block heater brass yoke may crack due to stress corrosion where it contacts the stainless steel crossbar. The yoke is stressed or cracked from over torquing the hold down screw (Figure 1, "6"). Corrosion in the stressed area is accelerated due to the dissimilar metals. To correct this condition, a redesigned block heater should be installed. The yoke material (Figure 1 "3") of the block heater was changed from brass to stainless steel. The stainless steel is a higher strength material which reduces the possibility of stress corrosion and galvanic potential. SERVICE PROCEDURE: Follow the "ENGINE BLOCK HEATER REPLACEMENT" instructions in section 9E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER of the appropriate Service Manual. CAUTION: The gasket "O" ring seals between the block heater and the block. Excessive tightening is not necessary. The torque specification is 1.6 - 2.2 N-m (15.0 - 20.0 lbs.in.) The revised engine block heater (P/N 10154624) can be used in any light duty truck, gas or diesel engine, where an engine block heater is used. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION Qty/Veh 10154624 Engine Block Heater 1 Parts are currently available from GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Block Heater: > 921599E > Apr > 92 > Engine - Block Heater Leaks > Page 809 For vehicles repaired under warranty use: Description Labor Op. Heater, Engine Block - Replace R4600 Use applicable labor time guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Balancer Bolt Torque Balancer Bolt Torque Vibration Damper Or Pulley 60 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston Diameter Standard 3.9988-4.0008 in Note: Measured at 90 degree angle to piston pin Piston Clearance 0.0007-0.0017 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Piston Measurements and Replacement Piston: Service and Repair Piston Measurements and Replacement EXC. V6-231 A .001 inch oversize piston is available for service use so that proper clearances can be obtained for slightly worn cylinder bores requiring only light honing. In addition, oversizes of .020 inch, .030 inch and .040 inch are available. If the cylinders have less than .005 inch taper or wear, they can be reconditioned with a hone and fitted with the .001 inch oversize piston. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Piston Measurements and Replacement > Page 818 Piston: Service and Repair Pistons & Rods Assemble Assemble pistons to connecting rods as shown in Figs. 36 through 41. Fig. 36 Piston & rod assembly. 6-250 Fig. 37 Piston & rod assembly. 6-292 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Piston Measurements and Replacement > Page 819 Fig. 38 Piston & rod assembly. V6-229 & 262 Fig. 39 Piston & rod assembly. V6-231 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Piston Measurements and Replacement > Page 820 Fig. 40 Piston & rod assembly. V8-267, 305, 350 & 400 Fig. 41 Piston & rod assembly. V8-454 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Piston Pin Dimensions Piston Pin: Specifications Piston Pin Diameter Standard 0.9269-0.9271 in Pin To Piston Bore Clearance 0.001 in Note: Maximum Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Piston Pin Dimensions > Page 825 Piston Pin: Specifications Pin Interference Fit Pin Interference Fit Pin To Bore Clearance .0008-.0016 in Note: Interference fit. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications End Gap Compression 0.01 in Note: Minimum Oil 0.015 in Side Clearance Compression 0.0012-0.0032 in Oil 0.002-0.007 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications FRONT TO REAR 6-250, 292.............................................................................................................. ..............................................................................E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E V6-231................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................E-I-I-E-I-E V6-262 Left Side............................................................................................ .....................................................................................................................E-I-E-I-I-E Right Side....... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..........................................E-I-I-E-I-E V8-267, 305, 350, 400............................................................... .......................................................................................................................E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E V8-454.... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................E-I-E-I-E-I-E-I Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 833 Valve Clearance: Adjustments STATIC ADJUSTMENT NOTE: This procedure does not apply to 231 V-6 engines. 1. Start engine and allow to reach normal operating temperature, then shut engine off. 2. With engine in position to fire No. 1 cylinder, adjust the following valves: V6-229 and 262, Exhaust Nos. 1, 5 and 6; Intake Nos. 1, 2 and 3. 6-250 and 292, Exhaust Nos. 1, 3 and 5; Intake Nos. 1, 2 and 4. V8 engines, Exhaust Nos. 1, 3, 4 and 8; Intake Nos. 1, 2, 5 and 7. To properly adjust valves, tighten adjusting nut until all lash is eliminated, then tighten nut the specified additional number of turns. On V8-454 / 7.4L engine, tighten nut 3/4 additional turn from zero lash. On all others, tighten nut one full turn from zero lash. 3. Turn crankshaft one complete revolution, which will bring engine in position to fire cylinders 4(V6) or 6(Inline 6 and V8). With engine in this position, adjust the following valves: V6-229 and 262, Exhaust Nos. 2, 3 and 4; Intake Nos. 4, 5 and 6. 6-250 and 292, Exhaust Nos. 2, 4 and 6; Intake Nos. 3, 5 and 6. V8 engines, Exhaust Nos. 2, 5, 6 and 7; Intake Nos. 3, 4, 6 and 8. When zero lash is obtained, tighten adjusting nuts as specified in step 2. ENGINE RUNNING ADJUSTMENT NOTE: The following procedure, performed with the engine running, should be done only in case readjustment is required. 1. After engine has been warmed to operating temperature, remove valve cover and install a new valve cover gasket. 2. With engine running at idle speed, back off valve rocker arm nut until rocker arm starts to clatter. 3. Turn rocker arm nut down slowly until the clatter just stops. This is the zero lash position. 4. Turn nut down 1/4 additional turn and pause 10 seconds until engine runs smoothly. Repeat additional 1/4 turns, pausing 10 seconds each time, until nut has been turned down the specified number of turns from the zero lash position. This preload adjustment must be done slowly to allow the lifter to adjust itself to prevent the possibility of interference between the intake valve head and top of piston, which might result in internal damage and/or bent pushrods. Noisy lifters should be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Throttle Body Injected Engines 1. Remove fuel pump fuse from fuse box. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and replace fuel pump fuse. Port Injected Engines 1. Disconnect fuel tank harness connector. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and reconnect fuel tank harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Fig. 24 Rocker arm stud removal. Exc. V6-231 & V8-454 Fig. 25 Rocker arm stud installation. Exc. V6-231 & V8-454 EXC. V6-231 Rocker arm studs that have damaged threads may be replaced with standard studs. Loose studs should be replaced with .003 inch or .013 inch oversize studs which are available for replacement. Remove the old stud by placing a suitable spacer over the stud, Fig. 24. Install a nut and flat washer on the stud and pull out the stud by turning the nut. After reaming the hole for an oversize stud, coat the press-fit area of the new stud with rear axle lubricant. Install the stud by driving it in until it protrudes from the head the same distance as the other studs, Fig. 25. On V8-454, the rocker arm studs are threaded into the cylinder head. Coat threads on cylinder head end of stud before assembling to head. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Valve Cover Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Valve Cover Gasket: > 84626AVI > Jun > 84 > Rocker Cover - Oil Leaks Valve Cover Gasket: Customer Interest Rocker Cover - Oil Leaks Number: 84-62 Section: 6A (VI) Date: June, 1984 Subject: ROCKER COVER OIL LEAKS ON SMALL BLOCK V8 OR 90~ V6 ENGINES Model and Year: 1960-84 PASSENGER AND TRUCK VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin is being reissued to correct part numbers and packaging information; the original issue should be destroyed. Rocker Cover New rocker cover gaskets and attaching hardware have been released for servicing vehicles equipped with Chevrolet produced small block V8 and 90~ V6 (200 or 229 CID) engines. The parts listed and the illustration on Page 2 can be used to service engines from current production back to 1960. 14082319 Viton Gasket (90~ V6) (2 req'd per engine) 14082322 Viton Gasket (V8) (2 req'd per engine) 14085816 Reinforcement Unit (2 req'd per engine) Contains 4 - 14082321 Reinforcement 4 - 14082320 Stud and 4 - 14051876 Nut Torque nuts to 5.6 - 7.3 N-m (50-65 in.lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Valve Cover Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Cover Gasket: > 84626AVI > Jun > 84 > Rocker Cover - Oil Leaks Valve Cover Gasket: All Technical Service Bulletins Rocker Cover - Oil Leaks Number: 84-62 Section: 6A (VI) Date: June, 1984 Subject: ROCKER COVER OIL LEAKS ON SMALL BLOCK V8 OR 90~ V6 ENGINES Model and Year: 1960-84 PASSENGER AND TRUCK VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin is being reissued to correct part numbers and packaging information; the original issue should be destroyed. Rocker Cover New rocker cover gaskets and attaching hardware have been released for servicing vehicles equipped with Chevrolet produced small block V8 and 90~ V6 (200 or 229 CID) engines. The parts listed and the illustration on Page 2 can be used to service engines from current production back to 1960. 14082319 Viton Gasket (90~ V6) (2 req'd per engine) 14082322 Viton Gasket (V8) (2 req'd per engine) 14085816 Reinforcement Unit (2 req'd per engine) Contains 4 - 14082321 Reinforcement 4 - 14082320 Stud and 4 - 14051876 Nut Torque nuts to 5.6 - 7.3 N-m (50-65 in.lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications Valve Guide: Specifications Guide Diameter Guide Diameter Standard Inside Diameter 0.34375 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications > Page 857 Valve Guide: Service and Repair Valve guides in these engines are an integral part of the head and, therefore, cannot be removed. For service, guide holes can be reamed oversize to accommodate one of several service valves with oversize stems. Check the valve stem clearance of each valve (after cleaning) in its respective valve guide. If the clearance exceeds the service limits of .004 inch on the intake or .005 inch on the exhaust, ream the valve guide to accommodate the next oversize diameter valve stem. Select the reamer for the smallest oversize which will provide a clean straight bore through the valve guide. After reaming, a new seat should be cut into the head to assure perfect seating of the new valve. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Specifications Valve Seat: Specifications Seat Width Intake .031-.062 in Exhaust .062-.093 in Seat Angle Intake 46 deg Exhaust 46 deg Run Out Intake 0.002 in Exhaust 0.002 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Valve Rotator > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Rotator: Service and Repair Fig. 20 Valve rotator & retaining components The parts involved in the rotating mechanism, Fig. 20, are a special spring seat retainer, a pair of flat half-moon keys, a close fitting cap located on the valve stem and a specially constructed valve stem. In order to accommodate valve expansion, the valve lash must be maintained. When camshaft rotation causes this lash or clearance to be taken up, the cap on the valve stem causes the valve keys to raise the spring retainer, removing the load on the valve springs from the valve before the valve is moved from its seat. A clearance of .002---.004 inch should be maintained between the end face of the valve stem and cap. This is the distance the spring retainer is moved before the valve is moved. The slow valve rotating motion is caused by the vibration of the valve, the flowing of exhaust gases around the valve head, and a slight rotating motion imparted to the valve by the valve spring. Whenever valve work is being done, a check for clearance should be made by holding the assembled valve and rotating mechanism in the hands. With one hand, press down on the valve cap and turn the valve with the other hand. If the valve turns readily, it indicates that there is clearance present. A special gauge is available to check this clearance. If the gauge indicates no clearance, grind off the end of the valve stem. If the clearance is too great, grind off the open end of the valve cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Specifications > Valve Clearance Specifications Valve: Specifications Guide Clearance Guide Clearance Stem To Guide Clearance Intake Note: Standard, .0010-.0027 inch; service limit, .0037 inch. Exhaust Note: Standard, .0010-.0027 inch; service limit, .0047 inch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Specifications > Valve Clearance Specifications > Page 869 Valve: Specifications Valve Arrangement FRONT TO REAR 6-250, 292.............................................................................................................. ..............................................................................E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E V6-231................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................E-I-I-E-I-E V6-262 Left Side............................................................................................ .....................................................................................................................E-I-E-I-I-E Right Side....... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..........................................E-I-I-E-I-E V8-267, 305, 350, 400............................................................... .......................................................................................................................E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E V8-454.... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................E-I-E-I-E-I-E-I Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-06-01-008A Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Diagnosing Accessory Drive Belt / Serpentine Belt Noise and Availability and Use of Kent-Moore EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year and update the Tool Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-06-01-008 (Section 06 - Engine). Background Several aftermarket companies offer laser alignment tools for accessory drive systems that can be very helpful in eliminating drive belt noise as a result of misaligned pulleys. Typically pricing ranges from $160 - $200. EN-49228 Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt The GM Tool program has now made available a competitive, simple to use and time-saving laser tool to assist in achieving precise alignment of the drive belt pulleys. This optional tool removes the guesswork from proper pulley alignment and may serve to reduce comebacks from: - Drive Belt Noise - Accelerated Drive Belt Wear - Drive Belt Slippage Instructions The instructions below are specific only to the truck Gen IV V-8 family of engines. These instructions are only for illustrative purposes to show how the tool may be used. Universal instructions are included in the box with the Laser Alignment Tool - Drive Belt. Caution - Do not look directly into the beam projected from the laser. - Use caution when shining the laser on highly polished or reflective surfaces. Laser safety glasses help reduce laser beam glare in many circumstances. - Always use laser safety glasses when using the laser. Laser safety glasses are not designed to protect eyes from direct laser exposure. 1. Observe and mark the serpentine belt orientation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 875 2. Remove the serpentine belt from the accessory drive system. 3. Install the tool onto the power steering pulley. Position the legs of the tool into the outer grooves of the pulley, farthest from the front of the engine. 4. Install the retaining cord around the pulley and to the legs of the tool. 5. Put on the laser safety glasses provided with the tool. 6. Depress the switch on the rear of the tool to activate the light beam. 7. Rotate the power steering pulley as required to project the light beam onto the crankshaft balancer pulley grooves. 8. Inspect for proper power steering pulley alignment. - If the laser beam projects onto the second rib or raised area (1), the pulleys are aligned properly. - If the laser beam projects more than one-quarter rib 0.9 mm (0.035 in) mis-alignment, adjust the position of the power steering pulley as required. - Refer to SI for Power Steering Pulley Removal and Installation procedures. 9. Install the serpentine belt to the accessory drive system in the original orientation. 10. Operate the vehicle and verify that the belt noise concern is no longer present. Tool Information Please visit the GM service tool website for pricing information or to place your order for this tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Drive Belt Misalignment Diagnostics > Page 876 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Belt Tension - Used BELT TENSION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Belt Tension - Used > Page 879 BELT TENSION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Rough/Unstable/Incorrect Idle Engine Mount: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Rough/Unstable/Incorrect Idle Number: 88-269-6E Section: 6E Date: JUNE, 1988 Subject: SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE ROUGH, UNSTABLE OR INCORRECT IDLE Model and Year: 1981-88 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS When diagnosing Rough, Unstable, or Incorrect Idle, make sure to check the motor mounts for damage, grounding out on the frame, or mispositioned, etc. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 884 Engine Mount: Service and Repair CABALLERO & EL CAMINO Fig. 4 Engine mount replacement. C, K, R & V models w/V6-262 engine Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 885 Fig. 5 Engine mount replacement. G models w/V6-262 engine Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 886 Fig. 6 Engine mount replacement. C, K, P, R & V models w/V8 engines Fig. 7 Engine mount replacement. G models w/V8 engines V6 & V8 Engines 1. Working from below frame mounting bracket, remove engine mount through bolt. When replacing right side mount on models with V6-262 engine it is only necessary to loosen the through bolt. 2. Raise and support engine, then remove mount attaching bolts and the mount. Raise engine only enough to gain sufficient clearance for removal. Check for interference between rear of engine and cowl panel. 3. Install new engine mount to engine, then tighten attaching bolts. 4. Install and tighten engine mount through bolt. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Normal Oil Pressure 30-45 psi Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 11-00-90-001 Date: March 14, 2011 Subject: Global Information for GM dexos1(TM) and GM dexos2(TM) Engine Oil Specifications for Spark Ignited and Diesel Engines, Available Licensed Brands, and Service Fill for Adding or Complete Oil Change Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Excluding All Vehicles Equipped with Duramax(TM) Diesel Engines GM dexos 1(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 1(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons The dexos(TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos‹›(TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos‹›(TM) specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 1(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 1(TM) Engine Oil Specification Important General Motors dexos 1(TM) engine oil specification replaces the previous General Motors specifications GM6094M, GM4718M and GM-LL-A-025 for most GM gasoline engines. The oil specified for use in GM passenger cars and trucks, PRIOR to the 2011 model year remains acceptable for those previous vehicles. However, dexos 1(TM) is backward compatible and can be used in those older vehicles. In North America, starting with the 2011 model year, GM introduced dexos 1(TM) certified engine oil as a factory fill and service fill for gasoline engines. The reasons for the new engine oil specification are as follows: - To meet environmental goals such as increasing fuel efficiency and reducing engine emissions. - To promote long engine life. - To minimize the number of engine oil changes in order to help meet the goal of lessening the industry's overall dependence on crude oil. dexos 1(TM) is a GM-developed engine oil specification that has been designed to provide the following benefits: - Further improve fuel economy, to meet future corporate average fuel economy (CAFE) requirements and fuel economy retention by allowing the oil to maintain its fuel economy benefits throughout the life of the oil. - More robust formulations for added engine protection and aeration performance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 895 - Support the GM Oil Life System, thereby minimizing the replacement of engine oil, before its life has been depleted. - Reduce the duplication of requirements for a large number of internal GM engine oil specifications. International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) GF-5 Standard In addition to GM dexos 1(TM), a new International Lubricants Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) standard called GF-5, was introduced in October 2010. - There will be a corresponding API category, called: SN Resource Conserving. The current GF-4 standard was put in place in 2004 and will become obsolete in October 2011. Similar to dexos 1(TM), the GF-5 standard will use a new fuel economy test, Sequence VID, which demands a statistically significant increase in fuel economy versus the Sequence VIB test that was used for GF-4. - It is expected that all dexos 1(TM) approved oils will be capable of meeting the GF-5 standard. However, not all GF-5 engine oils will be capable of meeting the dexos 1(TM) specification. - Like dexos(TM), the new ILSAC GF-5 standard will call for more sophisticated additives. The API will begin licensing marketers during October 2010, to produce and distribute GF-5 certified products, which are expected to include SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30 oils. Corporate Average Fuel Economy (CAFE) Requirements Effect on Fuel Economy Since CAFE standards were first introduced in 1974, the fuel economy of cars has more than doubled, while the fuel economy of light trucks has increased by more than 50 percent. Proposed CAFE standards call for a continuation of increased fuel economy in new cars and trucks. To meet these future requirements, all aspects of vehicle operation are being looked at more critically than ever before. New technology being introduced in GM vehicles designed to increase vehicle efficiency and fuel economy include direct injection, cam phasing, turbocharging and active fuel management (AFM). The demands of these new technologies on engine oil also are taken into consideration when determining new oil specifications. AFM for example can help to achieve improved fuel economy. However alternately deactivating and activating the cylinders by not allowing the intake and exhaust valves to open contributes to additional stress on the engine oil. Another industry trend for meeting tough fuel economy mandates has been a shift toward lower viscosity oils. dexos 1(TM) will eventually be offered in several viscosity grades in accordance with engine needs: SAE 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30. Using the right viscosity grade oil is critical for proper engine performance. Always refer to the Maintenance section of a vehicle Owner Manual for the proper viscosity grade for the engine being serviced. GM Oil Life System in Conjunction With dexos (TM) Supports Extended Oil Change Intervals To help conserve oil while maintaining engine protection, many GM vehicles are equipped with the GM Oil Life System. This system can provide oil change intervals that exceed the traditional 3,000 mile (4,830 km) recommendation. The dexos (TM) specification, with its requirements for improved oil robustness, compliments the GM Oil Life System by supporting extended oil change intervals over the lifetime of a vehicle. If all GM customers with GM Oil Life System equipped vehicles would use the system as intended, GM estimates that more than 100 million gallons of oil could be saved annually. GM dexos 2(TM) Information Center Website Refer to the following General Motors website for dexos 2(TM) information about the different licensed brands that are currently available: http://www.gmdexos.com GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Trademark and Icons Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 896 The dexos (TM) specification and trademarks are exclusive to General Motors, LLC. Only those oils displaying the dexos (TM) trademark and icon on the front label meet the demanding performance requirements and stringent quality standards set forth in the dexos (TM)specification. Look on the front label for any of the logos shown above to identify an authorized, licensed dexos 2(TM) engine oil. GM dexos 2(TM) Engine Oil Specification - dexos 2(TM) is approved and recommended by GM for use in Europe starting in model year 2010 vehicles, regardless of where the vehicle was manufactured. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European gasoline engines. Important The Duramax(TM) diesel engine is the exception and requires lubricants meeting specification CJ-4. - dexos 2(TM) is the recommended service fill oil for European light-duty diesel engines and replaces GM-LL-B-025 and GM-LL-A-025. - dexos 2(TM) protects diesel engines from harmful soot deposits and is designed with limits on certain chemical components to prolong catalyst life and protect expensive emission reduction systems. It is a robust oil, resisting degradation between oil changes and maintaining optimum performance longer. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 897 Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels 85-54 6 (VI) MAR., 1985 Subject: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE OIL LEVELS Model and Year:ALL PASSENGER AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and replaces Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 83-I-57 which should be destroyed. The following chart provides a guide for minimum acceptable oil levels "as received" from the factory. Only those components which have levels less than indicated below should have additional oil installed. Engine - Full mark to 6 mm (.24 in.) below full mark. Transmission a) Automatic - With engine idling, transmission selector in "Park", vehicle on a level surface and oil temperature between 10 to 38~C the oil level on the following transmissions should be as indicated: 440-T4 Transmission: Oil level should be in middle of cross-hatch area. 125/125C Transmission: Oil level should be slightly above full level. All other Transmissions: Oil level should be slightly below add level. If oil level gauge has dimples below add mark, oil level should be between these two dimples. b) Manual 1) Lower edge of inspection plug hole on rear wheel drive vehicles. 2) Between cold level range dimples or at cold level mark on front wheel drive vehicles. Differential - Lower edge of inspection plug hole to 9.5 mm (.37 in.) below lower edge of inspection plug hole. Transfer Case - Lower edge of inspection plug hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 898 Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Mobil Oil Corporation Engine Oil Press Release Number: 83-I-30 Section: VI Date: Dec., 1982 Subject: MOBIL OIL CORPORATION ENGINE OIL PRESS RELEASE TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS On November 23, 1982, Mobile Oil Corporation issued the following press release: Mobil Oil Corporation said today it had recalled certain shipments of one of its multi-grade motor oils, Mobil Super 10W-40, from distributors and retailers in six upper midwestern states (i.e., Illinois, Wisconsin, Michigan, Indiana, Ohio and the eastern half of Iowa). Other areas and other oils are not affected. A Mobil spokesman advised that only one grade of oil, Mobil Super 10W-40, is involved and that the problem occurs only at low temperatures (below +20~F). Motorists in the six states who purchased Mobil Super 10W-40 since July, 1982 and put it in their cars should pay very close attention to the dash board gauges or an indication of low oil pressure. If the red oil pressure light remains on after starting, the engine should be turned off to avoid possible damage and a Mobil dealer called for assistance. Customers who purchased Mobil Super 10W-40 since July in the six named states and put it in their auto engines should go to a Mobil station as soon as possible and have the oil and oil filter replaced. Mobil will make this replacement at no cost to the motorist. "We are standing behind this product fully", the spokesman said. Affected customers will need to provide proper identification. A sample of the oil will be retained. Customers who have unopened cans of Mobil Super 10W-40 purchased in these six states since July are encouraged to take the cans to a Mobil service station or the retail outlet where the purchase was made for a replacement in kind. The Mobil Super 10W-40 in question was manufactured in July at the company's Cicero, Illinois, plant which supplies part of Mobil's midwest market. There has been no problem at Cicero Since July and all suspect product has been recalled. The Mobil Super 10W-40 now on sale is the normal high quality product. "The low temperature problem became apparent only in the last few days," the spokesman added. There is no problem with other grades of motor oil and no problem with Mobil Super 10W-40 outside the six state area. The faulty oil, Mobil Super 10W-40, was marketed through Mobil dealers and other retail outlets. "Most of what we will be taking back is good oil, but we just didn't want to take a chance," the Mobil spokesman said. A REMINDER: THIS PROBLEM RELATES ONLY TO MOBIL SUPER 10W-40 AND NOT TO MOBIL'S OTHER MOTOR OILS. We believe that all (division) dealers should cooperate with Mobil in their efforts to correct the situation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 899 Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Recommendations Number: 84-89 Section: OB (XIV) Date: Mar., 1984 Subject: ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATIONS Model and Year: PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The purpose of this bulletin is to: ^ Advise you of the reasons for changes in engine oil viscosity recommendations, and ^ Explain the new API service symbol which should assist vehicle owners in finding engine oils recommended for GM engines. GASOLINE ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY RECOMMENDATIONS Since 1980, the preferred viscosities for GM gasoline engines are SAE 10W-30 for the larger engines and SAE 5W-30 for the smaller engines (engines sizes defined later). SAE 10W-40 is not included in the viscosity chart for 1984 GM gasoline engines, for several reasons, including: ^ Fuel economy with SAE 10W-30 oils is about 1% better than that with SAE 10W-40 oils. ^ SAE 10W-30 oils generally produce less piston and ring deposits than SAE 10W-40 oils. Such deposits can lead to stuck rings and increased oil consumption. The use of SAE 10W-40 engine oil in a vehicle equipped with a gasoline engine will not automatically void the General Motors Corporation New Car Limited Warranty. However, since SAE 10W-40 engine oil is not recommended for use in 1984 GM vehicles equipped with gasoline engines, if the use of such oil causes damage, the cost of the engine repair will not be covered by the Warranty. The Warranty does not cover any damage due to the use of non-recommended oils, whether SAE 10W-40 or some other viscosity. In addition, the Warranty does not cover damages caused by the use of oils that do not meet the recommended API quality or SAE viscosity grade. DIESEL ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY RECOMMENDATIONS Preferred viscosities for diesel engines in GM passenger cars and light duty trucks are SAE 30 for the larger engines and SAE 10W-30 for the smaller engines. SAE 10W-40 oils have never been recommended for diesel engines in GM passenger cars and light duty diesel trucks. Nevertheless, some owners have used SAE 10W-40 oils and, in some cases, experienced engine damage caused by excessive piston and ring deposits. In an effort to clarify the GM recommendations for passenger cars and light duty trucks, the 1984 owner's manuals state specifically for diesel engines "DO NOT USE SAE 10W-40 GRADE OIL, OR ANY OTHER GRADE NOT RECOMMENDED". If damage to a GM diesel engine is caused by the use of SAE 10W-40 engine oil, the cost of the engine repair will not be covered by the Warranty. API ENGINE OIL SERVICE SYMBOL API ENGINE OIL SERVICE SYMBOL Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - GM dexos 1 and dexos 2(R) Oil Specifications > Page 900 A new API service symbol is being used in GM owner's manuals and on oil cans. Urge your customers to look for it in their manuals and on the containers of the oil they select for use in their cars. These are examples of the symbol: The symbol has an upper segment, center area, and lower segment. An explanation of the information in each of these locations is as follows: Upper Segment: QUALITY LEVEL API (American Petroleum Institute) Service Categories Gasoline Engines Diesel Engines SF/CC SF/CD (preferred) SF/CD SF/CC SF Center Area: OIL THICKNESS (Grade) SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) Viscosity Classification Gasoline Engines Diesel Engines ^ SAE 5W-30 (preferred for ^ SAE 30 (preferred above engines of 2.8 liters or less). freezing*). ^ SAE 10W-30 (preferred for ^ SAE 10W-30 and SAE 15W-40 all other engines). (acceptable for all engines; use only for cold-weather ^ SAE 15W-40, SAE 20W-20 and operation; helps starting). SAE 30 (acceptable for all engines). * Except for 1.8 and 2.2 liter diesels, where SAE 10W-30 is preferred at all temperatures. Lower Segment: FUEL ECONOMY RATING "ENERGY CONSERVING" Oils with these words provide more miles per gallon of fuel. The Goodwrench line of engine oils recently introduced by GM meets these standards and provides proper lubrication protection for passenger cars and light duty trucks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 901 Engine Oil: Specifications Type...................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................SG CAPACITY, Refill: 6-cyl.292 eng..................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....4.7 Liters 5.0 Quarts 8-cyl.454 eng.................................................................................................. .....................................................................................5.7 Liters 6.0 Quarts K-30, 3500..................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .....4.7 Liters 5.0 Quarts Others............................................................................................................ ......................................................................................3.8 Liters 4.0 Quarts Capacity shown is without filter. When replacing filter, additional oil may be needed Above 40°F (4°C).......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .........................30 Above 20°F (-7°C).................................................................................................. ........................................................20W-20, 10W-30, 20W-40, 20W-50 0° to 60°F (-18° to 16°C)..... .............................................................................................................................................................. .10W, 5W-30, 10W-30* Below 20°F (-7°C).......................................................................................... ................................................................................................5W-20‡, 5W-30 *10W-30 preferred above 0°F (-8°C) ‡Not recommended for sustained high speed Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oil Cooler: > 84149VICLONE > Jun > 84 > Engine - Loss of Engine Oil Pressure After Oil Change Oil Cooler: Customer Interest Engine - Loss of Engine Oil Pressure After Oil Change Number: 84-149 Section: 6B (VI) Date: June, 1984 Subject: POSSIBLE LOSS OF ENGINE OIL PRESSURE FOLLOWING AN OIL CHANGE Model and Year: ALL MODEL YEARS TRUCKS/ PASSENGER CARS WITH 5.0L AND 5.7L V8 ENGINES AND KC4 ENGINE OIL COOLERS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Some vehicles equipped with 5.0L and 5.7L V8's and engine oil coolers (RPO KC4) may encounter a "no engine oil pressure" after an oil change or hot soak. This condition may be caused by trapped air in the oil cooler assembly. Performing the following steps should eliminate any additional occurrences: 1. Remove the engine oil filter. 2. Remove the cooler lines from the cooler adapter assembly. 3. Remove the two (2) cooler adapter to engine block attaching bolts. Cooler Adapter - Air Bleed Holes 4. Drill two (2) 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) air bleed holes in the cooler adapter as shown in the attached graphics. 5. Clean adapter with a suitable solvent making sure all metal chips are removed. 6. Reinstall the adapter and torque the attaching bolts to 9 N-m (80 in.lbs.). NOTICE: Replace the adapter seal and gasket using the appropriate part number assigned to the engine RPO. 7. Reinstall the cooler lines and oil filter. 8. Start engine and check for oil leaks. Labor Operation Number: T1111 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oil Cooler: > 84149VICLONE > Jun > 84 > Engine - Loss of Engine Oil Pressure After Oil Change > Page 910 Labor Time : .6 hours Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Cooler: > 84149VICLONE > Jun > 84 > Engine - Loss of Engine Oil Pressure After Oil Change Oil Cooler: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Loss of Engine Oil Pressure After Oil Change Number: 84-149 Section: 6B (VI) Date: June, 1984 Subject: POSSIBLE LOSS OF ENGINE OIL PRESSURE FOLLOWING AN OIL CHANGE Model and Year: ALL MODEL YEARS TRUCKS/ PASSENGER CARS WITH 5.0L AND 5.7L V8 ENGINES AND KC4 ENGINE OIL COOLERS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Some vehicles equipped with 5.0L and 5.7L V8's and engine oil coolers (RPO KC4) may encounter a "no engine oil pressure" after an oil change or hot soak. This condition may be caused by trapped air in the oil cooler assembly. Performing the following steps should eliminate any additional occurrences: 1. Remove the engine oil filter. 2. Remove the cooler lines from the cooler adapter assembly. 3. Remove the two (2) cooler adapter to engine block attaching bolts. Cooler Adapter - Air Bleed Holes 4. Drill two (2) 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) air bleed holes in the cooler adapter as shown in the attached graphics. 5. Clean adapter with a suitable solvent making sure all metal chips are removed. 6. Reinstall the adapter and torque the attaching bolts to 9 N-m (80 in.lbs.). NOTICE: Replace the adapter seal and gasket using the appropriate part number assigned to the engine RPO. 7. Reinstall the cooler lines and oil filter. 8. Start engine and check for oil leaks. Labor Operation Number: T1111 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Cooler: > 84149VICLONE > Jun > 84 > Engine - Loss of Engine Oil Pressure After Oil Change > Page 916 Labor Time : .6 hours Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance Oil Filter: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Noise/Damage Oil Filter Application Importance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 07-06-01-016B Date: July 27, 2009 Subject: Information on Internal Engine Noise or Damage After Oil Filter Replacement Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being updated to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-01-016A (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important Engine damage that is the result of an incorrect or improperly installed engine oil filter is not a warrantable claim. The best way to avoid oil filter quality concerns is to purchase ACDelco(R) oil filters directly from GMSPO. Oil filter misapplication may cause abnormal engine noise or internal damage. Always utilize the most recent parts information to ensure the correct part number filter is installed when replacing oil filters. Do not rely on physical dimensions alone. Counterfeit copies of name brand parts have been discovered in some aftermarket parts systems. Always ensure the parts you install are from a trusted source. Improper oil filter installation may result in catastrophic engine damage. Refer to the appropriate Service Information (SI) installation instructions when replacing any oil filter and pay particular attention to procedures for proper cartridge filter element alignment. If the diagnostics in SI (Engine Mechanical) lead to the oil filter as the cause of the internal engine noise or damage, dealers should submit a field product report. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002I (Information for Dealers on How to Submit a Field Product Report). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Level Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Level Warning Indicator: Description and Operation On models less gauges, the oil/choke warning indicator lamp should be illuminated when the ignition switch is in the Run or Start position. When the engine is started, the choke warning indicator lamp should go off. If the lamp fails to illuminate with ignition switch in Run or Start position with engine not operating, a burnt out bulb or fuse or defect in choke electrical system is indicated. If lamp remains on after engine has been started, a problem in the engine oil pressure system or electrical choke system exist. On models equipped with gauges, the choke warning indicator lamp should be illuminated when the ignition switch is in the Run or Start position. When the engine is started, the choke warning indicator lamp should go off. If fails to illuminate with ignition switch in Run or Start position with engine not operating, a burnt out bulb or fuse or defect in choke electrical system is indicated. If lamp remains on after engine has been started, a problem in the alternator circuit is indicated. After service has been completed, the lamp operation should return to normal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pan: Service and Repair Engine oiling system. 6-250 & 292 Engine oiling system. V8-267, 305, 350 & 400 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 927 Engine oiling system. V8-454 Engine oiling system. V6-231 V6-229, 262, V8-267, 305, 350 & 400 1980---84 1. Drain engine oil and remove dipstick and tube. 2. If equipped, remove exhaust crossover pipe. 3. With automatic transmission, remove converter housing under pan. 4. Remove starter brace and inboard bolt and swing starter aside. 5. On K models, remove strut rods, if equipped. 6. On El Camino and Caballero with V6-229, remove upper half of fan shroud. Loosen left engine front mount through bolt and remove right bolt. Raise engine and reinstall bolt. Do not tighten. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 928 7. Remove oil pan and discard gaskets and seals. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications Oil Pressure Switch 10 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Many trucks utilize a warning light on the instrument panel in place of the conventional dash indicating gauge to warn the driver when the oil pressure is dangerously low. The warning light is wired in series with the ignition switch and the engine unit--which is an oil pressure switch. The oil pressure switch contains a diaphragm and a set of contacts. When the ignition switch is turned on, the warning light circuit is energized and the circuit is completed through the closed contacts in the pressure switch. When the engine is started, build-up of oil pressure compresses the diaphragm, opening the contacts, thereby breaking the circuit and putting out the light. TROUBLESHOOTING On some models, the oil pressure indicator light also serves as the electric choke defect indicator. If Oil or ENG. indicator light does not light, check to ensure electric choke is not disconnected at carburetor. Also check for defect in electric choke heater, blown gauge fuse or defect in lamp or wiring circuit. If indicator light stays on with engine running possible causes are: oil pressure is low, switch to indicator light wiring has an open circuit, oil pressure switch wire connector has disconnected or on some models, gauge or radio fuse has blown. The oil pressure warning light should go on when the ignition is turned on. If it does not light, disconnect the wire from the engine unit and ground the wire to the frame or cylinder block. Then if the warning light still does not go on with the ignition switch on, replace the bulb. If the warning light goes on when the wire is grounded to the frame or cylinder block, the engine unit should be checked for being loose or poorly grounded. If the unit is found to be tight and properly grounded, it should be removed and a new one installed. (The presence of sealing compound on the threads of the engine unit will cause a poor ground.) If the warning light remains lit when it normally should be out, replace the engine unit before proceeding further to determine the cause for a low pressure indication. The warning light will sometimes light up or flicker when the engine is idling, even though the oil pressure is adequate. However, the light should go out when the engine speed is increased. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Normal Oil Pressure 30-45 psi Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement Intake Manifold: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-06-01-026C Date: February 03, 2010 Subject: Intake Manifold Inspection/Replacement After Severe Internal Engine Damage Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-01-026B (Section 06 - Engine). When replacing an engine due to internal damage, extreme care should be taken when transferring the intake manifold to the new Goodwrench service engine long block. Internal damage may result in the potential discharge of internal engine component debris in the intake manifold via broken pistons and/or bent, broken, or missing intake valves. After removing the intake manifold from the engine, the technician should carefully inspect all of the cylinder head intake ports to see if the valve heads are still present and not bent. Usually when the valve heads are missing or sufficiently bent, internal engine component debris will be present to varying degrees in the intake port of the cylinder head. If this debris is present in any of the cylinder head intake ports, the intake manifold should be replaced. This replacement is required due to the complex inlet runner and plenum configuration of most of the intake manifolds, making thorough and complete component cleaning difficult and nearly impossible to verify complete removal of debris. Re-installation of an intake manifold removed from an engine with deposits of internal engine component debris may result in the ingestion of any remaining debris into the new Goodwrench service engine. This may cause damage or potential failure of the new service engine. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 943 Intake Manifold: Specifications Manifold Bolt Torque 30 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 944 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Fig.11 Intake Manifold Tightening Sequence V8-267, 305, 350, 400 Series 10---30/1500---3500 1. Disconnect battery ground cable, then drain cooling system. 2. Remove air cleaner. 3. On G models, remove engine cover. 4. Remove AIR crossover hose, if applicable. 5. Disconnect heater and radiator hoses, then remove upper alternator bracket. 6. Disconnect all vacuum hoses and electrical connections that will interfere with manifold removal. 7. Disconnect fuel line, linkage and cables from carburetor or TBI unit. 8. Remove spark plug wires, if necessary. 9. Remove distributor. 10. On all except G models with fuel injected engine, if equipped with A/C, remove compressor and bracket and position aside. 11. On fuel injected models, disconnect ignition coil wires, then remove emission control sensors and bracket on right side. Remove cruise control transducer and bracket, then the fuel line bracket at rear of manifold. On G models, remove bracket at rear of belt idler. 12. On all models, remove carburetor or TBI unit, if necessary. 13. Remove intake manifold attaching bolts, then the intake manifold. 14. Reverse procedure to install, using new gaskets and seals. Coat front and rear ridges of cylinder case with a 3/16 inch bead of RTV sealant. Extend bead 1/2 inch up each cylinder head to retain side gaskets, then seal around all water passages. Torque manifold bolts to specification in sequence shown in Fig. 11. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Level Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Level Warning Indicator: Description and Operation On models less gauges, the oil/choke warning indicator lamp should be illuminated when the ignition switch is in the Run or Start position. When the engine is started, the choke warning indicator lamp should go off. If the lamp fails to illuminate with ignition switch in Run or Start position with engine not operating, a burnt out bulb or fuse or defect in choke electrical system is indicated. If lamp remains on after engine has been started, a problem in the engine oil pressure system or electrical choke system exist. On models equipped with gauges, the choke warning indicator lamp should be illuminated when the ignition switch is in the Run or Start position. When the engine is started, the choke warning indicator lamp should go off. If fails to illuminate with ignition switch in Run or Start position with engine not operating, a burnt out bulb or fuse or defect in choke electrical system is indicated. If lamp remains on after engine has been started, a problem in the alternator circuit is indicated. After service has been completed, the lamp operation should return to normal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Many trucks utilize a warning light on the instrument panel in place of the conventional dash indicating gauge to warn the driver when the oil pressure is dangerously low. The warning light is wired in series with the ignition switch and the engine unit--which is an oil pressure switch. The oil pressure switch contains a diaphragm and a set of contacts. When the ignition switch is turned on, the warning light circuit is energized and the circuit is completed through the closed contacts in the pressure switch. When the engine is started, build-up of oil pressure compresses the diaphragm, opening the contacts, thereby breaking the circuit and putting out the light. TROUBLESHOOTING On some models, the oil pressure indicator light also serves as the electric choke defect indicator. If Oil or ENG. indicator light does not light, check to ensure electric choke is not disconnected at carburetor. Also check for defect in electric choke heater, blown gauge fuse or defect in lamp or wiring circuit. If indicator light stays on with engine running possible causes are: oil pressure is low, switch to indicator light wiring has an open circuit, oil pressure switch wire connector has disconnected or on some models, gauge or radio fuse has blown. The oil pressure warning light should go on when the ignition is turned on. If it does not light, disconnect the wire from the engine unit and ground the wire to the frame or cylinder block. Then if the warning light still does not go on with the ignition switch on, replace the bulb. If the warning light goes on when the wire is grounded to the frame or cylinder block, the engine unit should be checked for being loose or poorly grounded. If the unit is found to be tight and properly grounded, it should be removed and a new one installed. (The presence of sealing compound on the threads of the engine unit will cause a poor ground.) If the warning light remains lit when it normally should be out, replace the engine unit before proceeding further to determine the cause for a low pressure indication. The warning light will sometimes light up or flicker when the engine is idling, even though the oil pressure is adequate. However, the light should go out when the engine speed is increased. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Fig. 43 Fabricated seal starting tool for helix type seal. Fig. 44 Crankshaft rear oil seal. Helix type EXC. V6-231 & 1986---87 V6-262, V8-305 & V8-350 These engines are equipped with a two-piece, helix type rear seal. A seal starting tool, Fig. 43, must be used to prevent the upper seal half from coming into contact with the sharp edge of the block. When necessary to correct an oil leak due to a defective seal, always replace the upper and lower seal halves as a unit, Fig. 44. When installing either half, lubricate the lip portion only with engine oil, keeping oil off the parting line surface as this is treated with glue. Always clean crankshaft surface before installing a new seal. 1. To replace the lower seal, remove seal from groove in bearing cap, using a small screwdriver. 2. Insert new seal and roll it in place with finger and thumb. 3. To replace the upper seal (with engine in car) use a small hammer and tap a brass pin punch on one end of the seal until it protrudes far enough to be removed with pliers. 4. Position tip of tool, Fig. 43, between crankshaft and seal seat in cylinder block. 5. Position seal between crankshaft and tip of tool with seal bead contacting tip of tool. Ensure oil seal lip is facing toward front of engine. 6. Roll seal around crankshaft, using tool as a ``shoehorn'' to protect seal bead from sharp corner of seal seat surface in cylinder block. Tool must remain in position until seal is properly seated with both ends flush with block. 7. Remove tool, using care not to dislodge seal. 8. Install new seal into bearing cap with tool as outlined previously. 9. Install bearing cap with sealant applied to the cap to case interface. Do not apply sealant to seal ends. Torque rear main bearing cap bolts to specifications as listed in the ``Engine Tightening Specification Chart.'' Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Cover Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Valve Cover Gasket: > 84626AVI > Jun > 84 > Rocker Cover - Oil Leaks Valve Cover Gasket: Customer Interest Rocker Cover - Oil Leaks Number: 84-62 Section: 6A (VI) Date: June, 1984 Subject: ROCKER COVER OIL LEAKS ON SMALL BLOCK V8 OR 90~ V6 ENGINES Model and Year: 1960-84 PASSENGER AND TRUCK VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin is being reissued to correct part numbers and packaging information; the original issue should be destroyed. Rocker Cover New rocker cover gaskets and attaching hardware have been released for servicing vehicles equipped with Chevrolet produced small block V8 and 90~ V6 (200 or 229 CID) engines. The parts listed and the illustration on Page 2 can be used to service engines from current production back to 1960. 14082319 Viton Gasket (90~ V6) (2 req'd per engine) 14082322 Viton Gasket (V8) (2 req'd per engine) 14085816 Reinforcement Unit (2 req'd per engine) Contains 4 - 14082321 Reinforcement 4 - 14082320 Stud and 4 - 14051876 Nut Torque nuts to 5.6 - 7.3 N-m (50-65 in.lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Cover Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Cover Gasket: > 84626AVI > Jun > 84 > Rocker Cover - Oil Leaks Valve Cover Gasket: All Technical Service Bulletins Rocker Cover - Oil Leaks Number: 84-62 Section: 6A (VI) Date: June, 1984 Subject: ROCKER COVER OIL LEAKS ON SMALL BLOCK V8 OR 90~ V6 ENGINES Model and Year: 1960-84 PASSENGER AND TRUCK VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin is being reissued to correct part numbers and packaging information; the original issue should be destroyed. Rocker Cover New rocker cover gaskets and attaching hardware have been released for servicing vehicles equipped with Chevrolet produced small block V8 and 90~ V6 (200 or 229 CID) engines. The parts listed and the illustration on Page 2 can be used to service engines from current production back to 1960. 14082319 Viton Gasket (90~ V6) (2 req'd per engine) 14082322 Viton Gasket (V8) (2 req'd per engine) 14085816 Reinforcement Unit (2 req'd per engine) Contains 4 - 14082321 Reinforcement 4 - 14082320 Stud and 4 - 14051876 Nut Torque nuts to 5.6 - 7.3 N-m (50-65 in.lbs.). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications Oil Pressure Switch 10 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - Proper Use of Timing Belt Tension Gauge Timing Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Proper Use of Timing Belt Tension Gauge Number: 83-I-55 Section: VI Date: April, 1983 Subject: PROPER USE OF TIMING BELT TENSION GAUGE J-26486-A (ENGINE VIN CODES C AND O) TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Timing Belt Tension Gauge When using timing belt tension gauge J-26486-A, it should be noted the scale reads is newtons on the inside scale and in pounds on the outside scale (see illustration). The newton scale is in graduations of one hundreds (example: .5 = 50 newtons). If your gauge does not have the -A detail, it can be ordered through Kent-Moore Tool Division (P/N J-26486-1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair Timing Chain: Service and Repair Fig. 34 Valve timing marks. V6-229, 262, V8-267, 305, 350, 400 & 454 V6-229, 262, V8-267, 305, 350, 400 & 454 1. Remove timing case cover as outlined previously. 2. Remove crankshaft oil slinger. 3. Crank engine until "O" marks on sprockets are in alignment, Fig. 34. 4. Remove three camshaft-to-sprocket bolts. 5. Remove camshaft sprocket and timing chain together. Sprocket is a light press fit on camshaft for approximately 1/8 inch. If sprocket does not come off easily, a light blow with a plastic hammer on the lower edge of the sprocket should dislodge it. 6. If crankshaft sprocket is to be replaced, remove it with a suitable gear puller. Install new sprocket, aligning key and keyway. 7. Install chain onto camshaft sprocket. Hold sprocket with chain hanging vertically, then align marks on sprockets as shown, Fig. 34. The valve timing marks shown in Fig. 34, do not indicate TDC compression stroke for No. 1 cylinder, which is used during distributor installation. If distributor was removed, install timing chain and sprockets, aligning timing marks, Fig. 34, then rotate engine until No. 1 cylinder is on compression and camshaft timing mark is 180° from valve timing position shown in Fig. 34. Install distributor. 8. Align dowel in camshaft with dowel hole in sprocket and install sprocket on camshaft. Do not attempt to drive sprocket on camshaft as welch plug at rear of engine can be dislodged. 9. Draw sprocket onto camshaft, using the three mounting bolts. Tighten to 20 ft. lbs. torque. 10. Lubricate timing chain and install cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair Timing Cover: Service and Repair V6-229, 262, V8-267, 305, 350, 400 & 454 1. Remove vibration damper and water pump, then the oil pan, if necessary. 2. Remove cover retaining screws and cover. 3. Clean gasket surface of block and timing case cover. 4. Remove any excess oil pan gasket material that may be protruding at the oil pan to engine block junction. 5. Apply a thin bead of RTV #1052366 sealer or equivalent to the joint formed at oil pan and block. 6. Coat new gasket with sealer and position it on cover, then install cover to oil pan seal on cover and coat bottom of seal with engine oil. 7. Position cover on engine and loosely install the upper bolts. 8. Tighten screws alternately and evenly while pressing downward on cover so that dowels are aligned with holes in cover. Do not force cover over dowels as cover can be distorted. 9. Install remaining cover screws, vibration damper and water pump. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Light Duty ............................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 5.5 - 7.0 psi Heavy Duty ................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. 7.5 - 9.0 psi (with vapor return hose pinched off) Volume ................................................................................................................................................ ................................. 1 pint or more in 30 seconds Vacuum ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................... at least 15 in HG Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel Pump Pressure Test 1. Disconnect fuel line at carburetor and connect a suitable pressure gage. 2. Start engine and check pressure with engine running at slow idle speed. Fuel pump pressure should be as specified. 3. If fuel pump pressure is below 17-45 kPa (2.5 - 6.5 psi), pump must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel System Diagnosis > Page 990 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pump Pressure Test - Mechanical Fuel Pump Fuel Pump Pressure Test 1. Disconnect fuel line at pump and connect a suitable pressure gage. 2. Start engine and check pressure with engine running at slow idle speed. Fuel pump pressure should be as specified. On vehicles equipped with a vapor return system squeeze off the return hose so that an accurate reading can be obtained. 3. If fuel pump pressure is below minimum, pump must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Light Duty NOTE: Vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) below 6000 lbs (8500 lbs for California), and passenger carrying vehicles with a capacity of 12 persons or less, are Light Duty Emissions Vehicles. NOTE: Idle mixture needles have been preset at the factory and sealed. Idle mixture should be adjusted only in the case of major carburetor overhaul, throttle body replacement or high emissions as determined by official inspections. Adjusting mixture by other than the following method may violate Federal and or California or other state or Provincial laws. Because of the sealed idle mixture needles, the idle mixture checking procedure requires artificial enrichment by adding propane. 1. Set parking brake and block drive wheel. Engine must be at normal operating temperature and air conditioning off. 2. Disconnect and plug EGR and cannister purge vacuum hoses. 3. Connect an accurate tachometer to engine. 4. Disconnect vacuum advance and set timing to specification. Reconnect vacuum hose. See: Ignition Timing 5. Set carburetor idle speed to specification. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Adjustments 6. Disconnect crankcase ventilation tube from air cleaner. Fig. 61 - Propane Enrichment Tool Installation 7. Using tool J-26911, insert hose with rubber stopper, from propane valve into crankcase ventilation tube opening in air cleaner. Propane cartridge must be vertical. 8. With engine idling in drive (neutral for manual shifts) slowly open propane control valve while pressing button. Continue to add propane until speed drops due to over richness. Note maximum engine speed (enriched speed). 9. If the enriched idle speed is within the enriched idle specification the mixture is correct. Go to step 17. Enrichment Specification: See: Idle Speed/Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty > Page 995 10. If the enriched idle speed is not within specification, remove mixture screw plugs as follows: - Remove carburetor from engine to gain access to the plugs covering the idle mixture needles. - Invert carburetor on a suitable holding fixture, manifold side up. NOTE: Use care to avoid damaging linkage, tubes, and parts protruding from the air horn. - Make two parallel cuts in the throttle body on either side of the locator points beneath the idle mixture needle plug (manifold side) with a hack saw. The cuts should not extend more than 1/8 inch beyond the locator points. The distance between the saw marks depends on the size of the punch to be used. - Place a flat punch at a point near the ends of the saw marks in the throttle body. Holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive it into the throttle body until the casing breaks away, exposing the steel plug. - Holding a center punch vertical, drive it into the steel plug. - Then holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive the plug out of the casting. NOTE: Hardened plug may break rather than remain intact. It is not necessary to remove the plug completely, instead, remove loose pieces. - Repeat procedure for the remaining mixture needle and re-install carburetor. 11. Using tool J29030 or equivalent, lightly seat mixture needles, then back out equally, just enough so engine will run. 12. Place transmission in drive (automatic) or neutral (manual). 13. Back each screw out (richen 1/8 turn at a time until maximum idle speed is obtained). Then using base idle speed adjustment screw, set idle speed to the enriched idle specification. See: Idle Speed/Specifications 14. Turn each mixture screw in (clockwise) 1/8 turn at a time until idle speed reaches base idle speed. 15. Re-check enriched speed with propane. If not within specification, repeat adjustment beginning with step 12. 16. After adjustments are complete, seal the idle mixture needle setting using silicone sealant or equivalent. The sealer is required to prevent tampering with the setting and to prevent the possibility of loss of fuel vapors. 17. Check and adjust fast idle speed. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Adjustments 18. Turn off engine. Remove propane tool, connect crankcase ventilation tube. Unplug and reconnect vacuum hoses. Install air cleaner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty > Page 996 Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Heavy Duty NOTES: - Idle mixture needles have been preset at the factory and sealed. Idle mixture should be adjusted only in the case of major carburetor overhaul, throttle body replacement, or high emissions as determined by official inspections. - If necessary, remove idle needle plugs: Perform this adjustment with engine at operating temperature, parking brake applied, drive wheels blocked and transmission in park or neutral. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove air cleaner. 2. Connect tachometer and vacuum gage to engine. 3. As a preliminary adjustment, turn idle mixture needles in lightly to seat and back out 2 turns. NOTE: Do not turn idle mixture needle tightly against seat or damage may result. 4. With engine running (choke wide open and transmission in neutral) adjust idle speed screw to curb idle speed. See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Idle Speed 5. Adjust each idle mixture needle to obtain highest RPM. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until "best" idle is obtained. 7. If necessary, reset curb idle speed. See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Idle Speed/Federal 8. After adjustments are complete, seal the idle mixture needle setting using silicone sealant or equivalent. 9. Check and if necessary, adjust throttle lever actuator.See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Idle Speed 10. Check and if necessary, adjust fast idle speed. See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Fast Idle Speed 11. Turn off engine, remove gages, unplug and reconnect vacuum hoses. Install air cleaner. 12. Remove block from drive wheel. CONCEALMENT PLUG REMOVAL - Remove carburetor from engine to gain access to the plugs covering the idle mixture needles. - Invert carburetor on a suitable holding fixture, manifold side up. NOTE: Use care to avoid damaging linkage, tubes, and parts protruding from the air horn. - Make two parallel cuts in the throttle body on either side of the locator points beneath the idle mixture needle plug (manifold side) with a hack saw. The cuts should not extend more than 1/8 inch beyond the locator points. The distance between the saw marks depends on the size of the punch to be used. - Place a flat punch at a point near the ends of the saw marks in the throttle body. Holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive it into the throttle body until the casing breaks away, exposing the steel plug. - Holding a center punch vertical, drive it into the steel plug. - Then holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive the plug out of the casting. NOTE: Hardened plug may break rather than remain intact. It is not necessary to remove the plug completely, instead, remove loose pieces. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty > Page 997 - Repeat procedure for the remaining mixture needle and re-install carburetor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Enriched Idle Speed Idle Speed: Specifications Enriched Idle Speed ENRICHED IDLE SPEED Carburetor Number 17082221 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 150 17082225 .................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 150 17082222 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 50 17082224 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 50 17082226 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 50 17082227 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 50 17082506 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 50 17082508 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 50 17082223 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 100 17082231 .................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 100 17082235 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 100 17082291 .................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 100 17082293 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 100 17082230 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 20 17082234 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 20 17082524 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 20 17082526 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 20 17082290 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 40 17082292 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 40 NOTE: Enriched Idle Speed value is added to base idle speed. This value is used during the idle mixture adjustment procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Enriched Idle Speed > Page 1002 Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed NOTE: Vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) below 6000 lbs (8500 lbs for California), and passenger carrying vehicles with a capacity of 12 persons or less, are Light Duty Emissions Vehicles. CURB IDLE SPEED Light Duty Automatic ............................................................................................................................................. ............................... 500 rpm (California 550) Manual ......................................................................... ........................................................................................................ 600 rpm (High Alt. 700) Heavy Duty Automatic ............................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 700 rpm Manual ......................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. 700 rpm A/C ON IDLE SPEED Manual Federal ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 750 rpm California ................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... 650 rpm Automatic Federal ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 600 rpm California ................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... 650 rpm FAST IDLE SPEED Light Duty Automatic ............................................................................................................................................. ........................... 1600 rpm (California 1800) Manual ......................................................................... .............................................................................................. 1300 rpm (High Altitude 1600) Heavy Duty Automatic/Manual ................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 1900 rpm NOTE: Measured on high cam step. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed Idle Speed: Adjustments Idle Speed California NOTE: On engines equipped with an Idle Speed Control (ISC) motor, idle speed is controlled by an electrical signal from the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Do not use the ISC plunger to adjust curb idle. The motor varies idle speed from a base (minimum authority) to a high (maximum authority) idle speed. Do not adjust unless diagnosis indicates a malfunction. Check for proper base and high idle speed as follows. CAUTION: DO NOT disconnect or connect ISC connector with ignition "ON" as damage to the ECM may occur. 1. Perform preliminary procedures: - Check and adjust ignition timing. - Disconnect and plug vacuum lines for evaporative purge and EGR valve. 2. Before starting engine, place transmission in "PARK" (automatic) or "NEUTRAL" (manual), set parking brake and block drive wheels. 3. Connect dwell meter to Mixture Control (M/C) solenoid dwell lead. This is a green connection breaking out of the main wiring harness leading to carburetor. NOTE: Remember to set dwell meter on the six cylinder scale, regardless of the engine being tested. 4. Turn A/C "OFF". 5. Start engine and run until stabilized and in "closed loop" mode (dwell meter needle starts to vary). 6. Turn ignition "OFF". CAUTION: Do not unplug ISC connector with ignition "ON" as damage to motor will occur. 7. Unplug connector from ISC motor. 8. Fully retract ISC plunger by applying 12 volts to terminal "C" ad grounding lead to terminal "D" of the ISC motor connection. CAUTION: DO NOT leave battery voltage applied to motor longer than necessary to retract ISC plunger. Prolonged contact will damage motor. Also, NEVER connect voltage source across terminal "A" and "B" as damage to the internal throttle contact switch will result. 9. Start engine and run until dwell meter needle starts to vary, indicating "closed loop" operation. 10. Place automatic transmission in "DRIVE". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1005 11. With ISC plunger fully retracted, adjust carburetor base (slow idle stop screw to 470 RPM (minimum authority). 12. Place transmission in "PARK" (automatic transmissions). 13. Fully extend ISC plunger by applying 12 volts to terminal "D" and grounding lead to terminal "C" of the ISC motor connection. Leave power applied only long enough to extend the plunger. 14. MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS: Using tool J29607 or BT-8022 or equivalent, turn ISC plunger to obtain 900 RPM (Maximum Authority). 15. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS: - With transmission in "PARK", using tool J-29607, BT-8022 or equivalent, preset ISC plunger to obtain 1500 RPM. - With parking brake set and drive wheels blocked, place transmission in "DRIVE". Turn ISC plunger to obtain 900 RPM (Maximum Authority). 16. Recheck ISC "Maximum Authority" RPM with voltage applied to ISC motor (step 13). Motor will ratchet at full extension with power applied. 17. After adjustment of ISC plunger, measure distance from back side of plunger head to ISC nosepiece. Dimension "B" must not exceed that shown in below chart. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1006 18. Fully retract ISC plunger (step 8). Place transmission in "PARK" (automatic) or "NEUTRAL" (manual) and turn ignition "OFF". Disconnect 12 volt power source, ground lead, tachometer and dwell meters. With ignition "OFF" reconnect four terminal harness connector to ISC motor. 19. "TRICKING" the ISC motor as described will cause the "CHECK ENGINE" light to come on and an ISC motor trouble code to be set. By restoring the system to normal operation, the light will go out, but the trouble code will continue to be stored as an "INTERMITTENT" problem. In this case, it will be necessary to clear the diagnostic trouble codes by removing the ECM fuse from the fuse block for about 10 seconds. Federal PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES - Warm engine to normal operating temperature (upper radiator hose hot). - Turn "OFF" all accessories, including A/C. - Check Timing (adjust if not to specification). See: Ignition Timing - Connect tachometer. CAUTION: Exercise care not to ground the TACH terminal (which is located next to the BAT connector) as this may damage the Electronic Control Module (ECM) or coil. CURB IDLE SPEED - Disconnect and plug vacuum hose to EGR valve and canister purge. - Adjust curb idle speed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1007 Without A/C Turn idle speed screw to specified curb idle (automatic transmissions in drive with wheels blocked and parking brake set). See: Specifications With A/C With A/C "OFF", turn idle speed screw to specified curb idle (automatic transmissions in drive with wheels blocked and parking brake set). - Disconnect wire to A/C compressor clutch and turn A/C "ON". - Open throttle momentarily to assure solenoid plunger is fully extended. - Turn solenoid screw to the specified idle speed. See: Specifications - Reconnect wire to compressor clutch. THROTTLE LEVER ACTUATOR - Disconnect vacuum hose from solenoid valve to the actuator diaphragm. - Connect an external vacuum source to the diaphragm and apply 20 inches of vacuum. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1008 - Manually open the throttle slightly and allow it to close against the extended actuator plunger. With engine warm, idle speed should be: Federal - 1500 rpm California - 1600 rpm NOTE: The throttle lever actuator is designed to control emissions by holding the throttle open slightly during deceleration and coasting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1009 Idle Speed: Adjustments Fast Idle Speed PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES - Warm engine to normal operating temperature (upper radiator hose hot). - Turn "OFF" all accessories, including A/C. - Check Timing (adjust if not to specification). - Connect tachometer. CAUTION: Exercise care not to ground the TACH terminal (which is located next to the BAT connector) as this may damage the Electronic Control Module (ECM) or coil. ADJUST FAST IDLE SPEED - Transmission in "PARK" or "NEUTRAL". - Disconnect and plug EGR vacuum line. - Place cam on "HIGH" step. - Turn fast idle screw to obtain specified rpm. See: Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 1019 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 1025 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Throttle Body Injected Engines 1. Remove fuel pump fuse from fuse box. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and replace fuel pump fuse. Port Injected Engines 1. Disconnect fuel tank harness connector. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and reconnect fuel tank harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Ignition Firing Order FIRING ORDER Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Number 1 Cylinder Location FIRING ORDER Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Timing Marks and Indicators > System Information > Locations Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug Wire <--> [Ignition Cable] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spark Plug Wire: > 93356D > Oct > 92 > Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Spark Plug Wire: Customer Interest Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Number: 93-35-6D Section: 6D Date: OCT. 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 716404R ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: ENGINE MISS HESITATION OR ROUGHNESS DUE TO PIERCED SECONDARY IGNITION COMPONENTS Model and Year: 1980-93 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 87-121, DATED MAY 1987. THE 1989-93 MODEL YEARS HAVE BEEN ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 87-121 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. During the diagnosis procedure for an engine miss, hesitation or roughness, a spark plug or spark plug wire condition may be suspected. Several types of commercial or homemade diagnostic equipment required the secondary ignition boots or wire to be pierced. This is normally done to check for spark plug firing or to perform a cylinder balance test. Similarly the use of pliers or other such tools to disengage a spark plug boot may pierce or damage the boot or wire. Secondary ignition components should not be pierced for any reason. Piercing a spark plug wire and/or distributor boot may create a condition that will not be immediately apparent. Over time, the hole in the pierced boot may allow a ground path to develop creating a plug misfire condition. Heavily moisture laden air in the vicinity of the pierced boot may accelerate this effect. Piercing a secondary ignition wire creates a gap in the wire's conductive core. This gap is a point of high resistance. The current flow in the wire will increase to compensate for the higher wire resistance. Over time, the wire may fail creating a plug misfire condition. The time required for the condition to appear depends upon the extent of damage to the conductive core. To help prevent future condition that are spark plug wire related, do not pierce or otherwise damage any secondary ignition component. Only use diagnostic equipment containing an inductive pick-up to check for spark plug firing or to perform cylinder balance tests. When disengaging a spark plug boot from the spark plug, twist the flanged boot 1/2 turn then pull on the boot only to remove the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug Wire <--> [Ignition Cable] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spark Plug Wire: > 93356D > Oct > 92 > Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Spark Plug Wire: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Number: 93-35-6D Section: 6D Date: OCT. 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 716404R ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: ENGINE MISS HESITATION OR ROUGHNESS DUE TO PIERCED SECONDARY IGNITION COMPONENTS Model and Year: 1980-93 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 87-121, DATED MAY 1987. THE 1989-93 MODEL YEARS HAVE BEEN ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 87-121 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. During the diagnosis procedure for an engine miss, hesitation or roughness, a spark plug or spark plug wire condition may be suspected. Several types of commercial or homemade diagnostic equipment required the secondary ignition boots or wire to be pierced. This is normally done to check for spark plug firing or to perform a cylinder balance test. Similarly the use of pliers or other such tools to disengage a spark plug boot may pierce or damage the boot or wire. Secondary ignition components should not be pierced for any reason. Piercing a spark plug wire and/or distributor boot may create a condition that will not be immediately apparent. Over time, the hole in the pierced boot may allow a ground path to develop creating a plug misfire condition. Heavily moisture laden air in the vicinity of the pierced boot may accelerate this effect. Piercing a secondary ignition wire creates a gap in the wire's conductive core. This gap is a point of high resistance. The current flow in the wire will increase to compensate for the higher wire resistance. Over time, the wire may fail creating a plug misfire condition. The time required for the condition to appear depends upon the extent of damage to the conductive core. To help prevent future condition that are spark plug wire related, do not pierce or otherwise damage any secondary ignition component. Only use diagnostic equipment containing an inductive pick-up to check for spark plug firing or to perform cylinder balance tests. When disengaging a spark plug boot from the spark plug, twist the flanged boot 1/2 turn then pull on the boot only to remove the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Specifications Distributor: Specifications DISTRIBUTOR TIMING ADVANCE Degrees advance at engine rpm, no load, in addition to basic timing. Mechanical advance distributors only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1058 Distributor: Application and ID HEI distributors with EST can be identified by the following; They have no distributor mounted vacuum controls--spark timing is controlled electronically. - With EST system uses a seven terminal High Energy Ignition (HEI) module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Replacement Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Replacement 1. Disconnect battery and tachometer lead from distributor cap. 2. Disconnect coil connectors from distributor cap and 4 terminal connector (if equipped). NOTE: Do not use a tool of any kind to release coil connectors or damage to lock tabs will result. 3. Remove distributor cap with ignition high tension wires connected and position aside. Remove vacuum hose (if equipped). 4. Remove distributor clamp screw and hold-down clamp. 5. Mark relationship of rotor to distributor housing, then lift distributor from engine slightly until rotor stops turning. Mark relationship of new rotor position on distributor housing, then remove distributor from engine. 6. If engine was not cranked after distributor was removed from engine, proceed as follows: a. Position rotor to align with second mark made on distributor housing prior to removing distributor. b. Install distributor into engine and align rotor with first mark made on distributor housing prior to removing distributor. c. Install distributor cap and connect all electrical connectors. d. Adjust ignition timing as specified in individual car chapters. 7. If engine was cranked after distributor was removed from engine, proceed as follows: a. Remove No. 1 spark plug and crank engine until compression pressure is felt in No. 1 cylinder. Slowly rotate engine until top dead center is indicated. b. Turn rotor to a position just ahead of No. 1 spark plug tower on distributor cap. c. Install distributor. Connect 4 terminal connector (if equipped). d. Install distributor cap, coil connectors, tachometer lead and battery feed wire. e. Adjust ignition timing to specifications in Tune Up Section. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Replacement > Page 1061 Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Overhaul Fig 1 Removing distributor shield. Models equipped with 6 & 8 cylinder engines Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Replacement > Page 1062 Fig 2 Pickup coil disassembled. Models equipped with 6 & 8 cylinder engines 1. Remove cap and coil as an assembly. 2. Remove rotor and pickup coil leads from module. 3. Mark relationship of distributor shaft and driven gear for reference during assembly. 4. Remove roll pin and driven gear. 5. Remove distributor shaft assembly. 6. Remove shield, Fig. 1. 7. Remove retaining ring, pickup coil, magnet and pole piece, Fig. 2. 8. Remove module retaining screws and capacitor screw, then remove module, capacitor and harness assembly from distributor. 9. Disconnect wiring harness from module. Reverse procedure to assemble. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Torque Spark Plug: Specifications Plug Tightening Torque 17 - 27 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Torque > Page 1067 SPARK PLUGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Minimum, 698 kPa (100 psi) @ 200 rpm. The lowest cylinder reading should not be less than 80% of the highest. Perform compression test with engine at normal operating temperature, spark plugs removed and throttle wide open. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications FRONT TO REAR 6-250, 292.............................................................................................................. ..............................................................................E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E V6-231................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................E-I-I-E-I-E V6-262 Left Side............................................................................................ .....................................................................................................................E-I-E-I-I-E Right Side....... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..........................................E-I-I-E-I-E V8-267, 305, 350, 400............................................................... .......................................................................................................................E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E V8-454.... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................E-I-E-I-E-I-E-I Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1074 Valve Clearance: Adjustments STATIC ADJUSTMENT NOTE: This procedure does not apply to 231 V-6 engines. 1. Start engine and allow to reach normal operating temperature, then shut engine off. 2. With engine in position to fire No. 1 cylinder, adjust the following valves: V6-229 and 262, Exhaust Nos. 1, 5 and 6; Intake Nos. 1, 2 and 3. 6-250 and 292, Exhaust Nos. 1, 3 and 5; Intake Nos. 1, 2 and 4. V8 engines, Exhaust Nos. 1, 3, 4 and 8; Intake Nos. 1, 2, 5 and 7. To properly adjust valves, tighten adjusting nut until all lash is eliminated, then tighten nut the specified additional number of turns. On V8-454 / 7.4L engine, tighten nut 3/4 additional turn from zero lash. On all others, tighten nut one full turn from zero lash. 3. Turn crankshaft one complete revolution, which will bring engine in position to fire cylinders 4(V6) or 6(Inline 6 and V8). With engine in this position, adjust the following valves: V6-229 and 262, Exhaust Nos. 2, 3 and 4; Intake Nos. 4, 5 and 6. 6-250 and 292, Exhaust Nos. 2, 4 and 6; Intake Nos. 3, 5 and 6. V8 engines, Exhaust Nos. 2, 5, 6 and 7; Intake Nos. 3, 4, 6 and 8. When zero lash is obtained, tighten adjusting nuts as specified in step 2. ENGINE RUNNING ADJUSTMENT NOTE: The following procedure, performed with the engine running, should be done only in case readjustment is required. 1. After engine has been warmed to operating temperature, remove valve cover and install a new valve cover gasket. 2. With engine running at idle speed, back off valve rocker arm nut until rocker arm starts to clatter. 3. Turn rocker arm nut down slowly until the clatter just stops. This is the zero lash position. 4. Turn nut down 1/4 additional turn and pause 10 seconds until engine runs smoothly. Repeat additional 1/4 turns, pausing 10 seconds each time, until nut has been turned down the specified number of turns from the zero lash position. This preload adjustment must be done slowly to allow the lifter to adjust itself to prevent the possibility of interference between the intake valve head and top of piston, which might result in internal damage and/or bent pushrods. Noisy lifters should be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair Water Pump: Service and Repair EXC. V6-231 1. Drain cooling system. 2. Remove fan belt and fan. 3. Disconnect all hoses from water pump. 4. Remove alternator upper and lower mounting braces, if necessary. 5. Remove pump attaching bolts and remove water pump. On 6-250 engines, pull pump straight out of block to prevent damage to impeller. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Bulletin No.: 00-06-02-006D Date: August 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Engine Coolant Recycling and Warranty Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER Vehicles 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please address this bulletin to the Warranty Claims Administrator and the Service Manager. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to adjust the title and Include Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-02-006C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Coolant Reimbursement Policy General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words: if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of GM Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Licensed Approved DEX-COOL(R) Providers Important: USE OF NON-APPROVED VIRGIN OR RECYCLED DEX-COOL(R) OR DEVIATIONS IN THE FORM OF ALTERNATE CHEMICALS OR ALTERATION OF EQUIPMENT, WILL VOID THE GM ENDORSEMENT, MAY DEGRADE COOLANT SYSTEM INTEGRITY AND PLACE THE COOLING SYSTEM WARRANTY UNDER JEOPARDY. Shown in Table 1 are the only current licensed and approved providers of DEX-COOL(R). Products that are advertised as "COMPATIBLE" or "RECOMMENDED" for use with DEX-COOL(R) have not been tested or approved by General Motors. Non-approved coolants may degrade the Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information > Page 1083 coolant system integrity and will no longer be considered a 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Coolant Removal Services/Recycling The tables include all coolant recycling processes currently approved by GM. Also included is a primary phone number and demographic information. Used DEX-COOL(R) can be combined with used conventional coolant (green) for recycling. Depending on the recycling service and/or equipment, it is then designated as a conventional 2 yr/30,000 mile (50,000 km) coolant or DEX-COOL(R) 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Recycled coolants as designated in this bulletin may be used during the vehicle(s) warranty period. DEX-COOL(R) Recycling The DEX-COOL(R) recycling service listed in Table 2 has been approved for recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL) or conventional) to DEX-COOL(R) with 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) usability. Recycling Fluid Technologies is the only licensed provider of Recycled DEX-COOL(R) meeting GM6277M specifications and utilizes GM approved inhibitor packages. This is currently a limited program being monitored by GM Service Operations which will be expanded as demand increases. Conventional (Green) Recycling Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information > Page 1084 Processes shown in the Table 3 are capable of recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL(R) or conventional) to a conventional (green) coolant. Recycling conventional coolant can be accomplished at your facility by a technician using approved EQUIPMENT (listed by model number in Table 3), or by an approved coolant recycling SERVICE which may recycle the coolant at your facility or at an offsite operation. Refer to the table for GM approved coolant recyclers in either of these two categories. Should you decide to recycle the coolant yourself, strict adherence to the operating procedures is imperative. Use ONLY the inhibitor chemicals supplied by the respective (GM approved) recycling equipment manufacturer. Sealing Tablets Cooling System Sealing Tablets (Seal Tabs) should not be used as a regular maintenance item after servicing an engine cooling system. Discoloration of coolant can occur if too many seal tabs have been inserted into the cooling system. This can occur if seal tabs are repeatedly used over the service life of a vehicle. Where appropriate, seal tabs may be used if diagnostics fail to repair a small leak in the cooling system. When a condition appears in which seal tabs may be recommended, a specific bulletin will be released describing their proper usage. Water Quality The integrity of the coolant is dependent upon the quality of DEX-COOL(R) and water. DEX-COOL(R) is a product that has enhanced protection capability as well as an extended service interval. These enhanced properties may be jeopardized by combining DEX-COOL(R) with poor quality water. If you suspect the water in your area of being poor quality, it is recommended you use distilled or de-ionized water with DEX-COOL(R). "Pink" DEX-COOL(R) DEX-COOL(R) is orange in color to distinguish it from other coolants. Due to inconsistencies in the mixing of the dyes used with DEX-COOL(R), some batches may appear pink after time. The color shift from orange to pink does not affect the integrity of the coolant, and still maintains the 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) service interval. Back Service Only use DEX-COOL(R) if the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information > Page 1085 Contamination Mixing conventional green coolant with DEX-COOL(R) will degrade the service interval from 5 yrs./150,000 miles (240,000 km) to 2 yrs./30,000 miles (50,000 km) if left in the contaminated condition. If contamination occurs, the cooling system must be flushed twice immediately and re-filled with a 50/50 mixture of DEX-COOL(R) and clean water in order to preserve the enhanced properties and extended service interval of DEX-COOL(R). After 5 years/150,000 miles (240,000 km) After 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km), the coolant should be changed, preferably using a coolant exchanger. If the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R) and has not had problems with contamination from non-DEX-COOL(R) coolants, then the service interval remains the same, and the coolant does not need to be changed for another 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km) Equipment (Coolant Exchangers) The preferred method of performing coolant replacement is to use a coolant exchanger. A coolant exchanger can replace virtually all of the old coolant with new coolant. Coolant exchangers can be used to perform coolant replacement without spillage, and facilitate easy waste collection. They can also be used to lower the coolant level in a vehicle to allow for less messy servicing of cooling system components. It is recommended that you use a coolant exchanger with a vacuum feature facilitates removing trapped air from the cooling system. This is a substantial time savings over repeatedly thermo cycling the vehicle and topping-off the radiator. The vacuum feature also allows venting of a hot system to relieve system pressure. Approved coolant exchangers are available through the GMDE (General Motors Dealer Equipment) program. For refilling a cooling system that has been partially or fully drained for repairs other than coolant replacement, the Vac-N-Fill Coolant Refill Tool (GE-47716) is recommended to facilitate removal of trapped air from the cooling system during refill. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 00-06-02-006D > Aug > 06 > Cooling System Coolant Recycling Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Coolant Recycling Information Bulletin No.: 00-06-02-006D Date: August 15, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Engine Coolant Recycling and Warranty Information Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER Vehicles 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Attention: Please address this bulletin to the Warranty Claims Administrator and the Service Manager. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to adjust the title and Include Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-06-02-006C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Coolant Reimbursement Policy General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words: if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of GM Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Licensed Approved DEX-COOL(R) Providers Important: USE OF NON-APPROVED VIRGIN OR RECYCLED DEX-COOL(R) OR DEVIATIONS IN THE FORM OF ALTERNATE CHEMICALS OR ALTERATION OF EQUIPMENT, WILL VOID THE GM ENDORSEMENT, MAY DEGRADE COOLANT SYSTEM INTEGRITY AND PLACE THE COOLING SYSTEM WARRANTY UNDER JEOPARDY. Shown in Table 1 are the only current licensed and approved providers of DEX-COOL(R). Products that are advertised as "COMPATIBLE" or "RECOMMENDED" for use with DEX-COOL(R) have not been tested or approved by General Motors. Non-approved coolants may degrade the Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 00-06-02-006D > Aug > 06 > Cooling System Coolant Recycling Information > Page 1091 coolant system integrity and will no longer be considered a 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Coolant Removal Services/Recycling The tables include all coolant recycling processes currently approved by GM. Also included is a primary phone number and demographic information. Used DEX-COOL(R) can be combined with used conventional coolant (green) for recycling. Depending on the recycling service and/or equipment, it is then designated as a conventional 2 yr/30,000 mile (50,000 km) coolant or DEX-COOL(R) 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) coolant. Recycled coolants as designated in this bulletin may be used during the vehicle(s) warranty period. DEX-COOL(R) Recycling The DEX-COOL(R) recycling service listed in Table 2 has been approved for recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL) or conventional) to DEX-COOL(R) with 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) usability. Recycling Fluid Technologies is the only licensed provider of Recycled DEX-COOL(R) meeting GM6277M specifications and utilizes GM approved inhibitor packages. This is currently a limited program being monitored by GM Service Operations which will be expanded as demand increases. Conventional (Green) Recycling Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 00-06-02-006D > Aug > 06 > Cooling System Coolant Recycling Information > Page 1092 Processes shown in the Table 3 are capable of recycling waste engine coolants (DEX-COOL(R) or conventional) to a conventional (green) coolant. Recycling conventional coolant can be accomplished at your facility by a technician using approved EQUIPMENT (listed by model number in Table 3), or by an approved coolant recycling SERVICE which may recycle the coolant at your facility or at an offsite operation. Refer to the table for GM approved coolant recyclers in either of these two categories. Should you decide to recycle the coolant yourself, strict adherence to the operating procedures is imperative. Use ONLY the inhibitor chemicals supplied by the respective (GM approved) recycling equipment manufacturer. Sealing Tablets Cooling System Sealing Tablets (Seal Tabs) should not be used as a regular maintenance item after servicing an engine cooling system. Discoloration of coolant can occur if too many seal tabs have been inserted into the cooling system. This can occur if seal tabs are repeatedly used over the service life of a vehicle. Where appropriate, seal tabs may be used if diagnostics fail to repair a small leak in the cooling system. When a condition appears in which seal tabs may be recommended, a specific bulletin will be released describing their proper usage. Water Quality The integrity of the coolant is dependent upon the quality of DEX-COOL(R) and water. DEX-COOL(R) is a product that has enhanced protection capability as well as an extended service interval. These enhanced properties may be jeopardized by combining DEX-COOL(R) with poor quality water. If you suspect the water in your area of being poor quality, it is recommended you use distilled or de-ionized water with DEX-COOL(R). "Pink" DEX-COOL(R) DEX-COOL(R) is orange in color to distinguish it from other coolants. Due to inconsistencies in the mixing of the dyes used with DEX-COOL(R), some batches may appear pink after time. The color shift from orange to pink does not affect the integrity of the coolant, and still maintains the 5 yr/150,000 mile (240,000 km) service interval. Back Service Only use DEX-COOL(R) if the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 00-06-02-006D > Aug > 06 > Cooling System Coolant Recycling Information > Page 1093 Contamination Mixing conventional green coolant with DEX-COOL(R) will degrade the service interval from 5 yrs./150,000 miles (240,000 km) to 2 yrs./30,000 miles (50,000 km) if left in the contaminated condition. If contamination occurs, the cooling system must be flushed twice immediately and re-filled with a 50/50 mixture of DEX-COOL(R) and clean water in order to preserve the enhanced properties and extended service interval of DEX-COOL(R). After 5 years/150,000 miles (240,000 km) After 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km), the coolant should be changed, preferably using a coolant exchanger. If the vehicle was originally equipped with DEX-COOL(R) and has not had problems with contamination from non-DEX-COOL(R) coolants, then the service interval remains the same, and the coolant does not need to be changed for another 5 yrs/150,000 miles (240,000 km) Equipment (Coolant Exchangers) The preferred method of performing coolant replacement is to use a coolant exchanger. A coolant exchanger can replace virtually all of the old coolant with new coolant. Coolant exchangers can be used to perform coolant replacement without spillage, and facilitate easy waste collection. They can also be used to lower the coolant level in a vehicle to allow for less messy servicing of cooling system components. It is recommended that you use a coolant exchanger with a vacuum feature facilitates removing trapped air from the cooling system. This is a substantial time savings over repeatedly thermo cycling the vehicle and topping-off the radiator. The vacuum feature also allows venting of a hot system to relieve system pressure. Approved coolant exchangers are available through the GMDE (General Motors Dealer Equipment) program. For refilling a cooling system that has been partially or fully drained for repairs other than coolant replacement, the Vac-N-Fill Coolant Refill Tool (GE-47716) is recommended to facilitate removal of trapped air from the cooling system during refill. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 436201B > Apr > 95 > Coolant - Information on Propylene Glycol Usage Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Coolant - Information on Propylene Glycol Usage File In Section: 6 - Engine Bulletin No.: 43-62-01B Date: April, 1995 Subject: Propylene Glycol Engine Coolant Models: 1994 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks This bulletin is being revised to reflect most current information on propylene glycol engine coolant. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 4362O1A (Group Reference 6 - Engine). General Motors has been reviewing data supplied on the performance of propylene glycol engine coolant in GM vehicles. It is our conclusion that propylene glycol engine coolant will perform adequately under most vehicle operating conditions. As a result, propylene glycol engine coolant (meeting performance specification GM 1825M) may be used in GM vehicles and will not affect the warranty coverage. Prior to adding propylene glycol engine coolant to the cooling system, all the existing (ethylene glycol) coolant must be removed. This can be accomplished either by utilizing water-based coolant flushing equipment or "waterless quick change" equipment available in the GMDE program. As with any coolant change procedure, be sure to thoroughly purge the heater core and block as well as the radiator before attempting to convert the system to propylene glycol coolant. Freeze/Boil point levels are different for propylene glycol than for ethylene glycol engine coolant. To accurately determine freeze/boil protection level, it is imperative that coolants not be mixed. Removing all the used coolant as previously discussed resolves this concern. Freeze protection of propylene glycol cannot be determined using a standard hydrometer. Rather, a refractometer or test strip must be used. Propylene glycol engine coolants may be recycled in the same manner as conventional ethylene glycol coolant. No adverse effects will be encountered if these coolants are mixed prior to recycling, however, the ratio of propylene glycol coolant to ethylene glycol coolant should be kept low to minimize the effects on freeze point measurements. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 310504 > Feb > 94 > Warranty - Recycled Engine Coolant Policy Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - Recycled Engine Coolant Policy Group Ref.: Warranty Administration Bulletin No.: 310504 Date: February, 1994 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION SUBJECT: RECYCLED ENGINE COOLANT POLICY MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS ATTENTION: WARRANTY CLAIMS ADMINISTRATOR AND SERVICE MANAGER General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. For detailed information on GM approved engine coolant recycling equipment guidelines refer to the following bulletins: Cadillac 93-1-18, GMC Truck 93-6B-34, Chevrolet 93-73-6B, Pontiac 93-6-18, Oldsmobile 1-93-43, Buick 93-6B-1 (Corporate Number 236203). Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial to assure that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words, if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 91090A > Apr > 90 > Coolant - Used Anti-Freeze Policy Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Coolant - Used Anti-Freeze Policy Number: 91-09-0A Section: OA Date: April 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 976202 Subject: INFORMATION REGARDING RECONSTITUTED ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT TESTING AND THE USE OF A REFRACTOMETER Model and Year: ALL MODELS AND YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS RECONSTITUTED ANTIFREEZE At present, three types of recycling systems are available: 1) chemical addition to coolant; 2) filtration and addition of supplemental additives; and 3) separation of pure glycol from used coolant and reinhibition. 1) Chemical Addition-NOT RECOMMENDED With chemical addition, chemicals are added to the used engine coolant in an attempt to "clean up" the coolant. This system is the easiest since the only work involved is the addition of chemicals to the radiator. Most of these types of recycling systems use a strong acid to change precipitated corrosion products into a more soluble form. However, in addition to dissolving the corrosion products, the strong acid also attacks and corrodes the metals of the cooling system. 2) Filtration and Addition of Supplemental Additives-NOT RECOMMENDED In this type of system, the used coolant is either taken out of the vehicle or a flush-type unit is connected to the cooling system. The current technology consists simply of filtration and reinhibition of the spent coolant. While this does remove suspended solids, filtration does nothing to remove harmful degradation and corrosion products that are soluble in glycol solution. The reinhibition step used in current recycling systems may fail to produce a coolant which adequately protects all metals including aluminum in the most critical heat transfer applications, such as occurs in the cylinder heads and blocks. 3) Separation of Pure Glycol and InhibitionThe separation of pure glycol and the addition of fresh inhibitors is the ideal method for recycling coolants. Unfortunately, this method is expensive from both a collection standpoint and the technology available to economically extract pure ethylene glycol from used coolant. At this time, General Motors does not endorse these practices or equipment. Due to a worldwide shortage of ethylene glycol in 1988, some coolant manufacturers have started to mix other types of glycol in their coolant formulations; propylene glycol is the most common new ingredient. A hydrometer will not provide a correct measurement of freeze protection when anything other than ethylene glycol and water is being tested. The degree of inaccuracy will vary depending on the proportion of other glycols present in the coolant. Hydrometers test the amount of glycol in a mixture by measuring the specific gravity of the mixture; the more ethylene glycol, the higher the float balls go, and the better the freeze protection. Because ethylene glycol and propylene glycol do not have the same specific gravities, hydrometer readings of mixtures containing propylene glycol give incorrect values. As the shortage of ethylene glycol continues and/or worsens, more and more variations in antifreeze formulas will be marketed. It is, therefore, recommended that you purchase a "refractometer" and encourage your technicians to use it. Refractometers test for the amount of glycol in a coolant mixture by measuring the speed of light as it passes through the fluid and are not affected by the specific gravity of the glycol. The freeze protection of solutions of ethylene glycol in water, solutions of propylene glycol in water, and solutions of mixtures of propylene glycol and ethylene glycol in water may all be tested with sufficient accuracy using a refractometer. The following refractometers are available from Kent Moore: J 23688 Farenheit scale, measures to -50 F J 26568 Centigrade scale, measures to -45.5 C J 38633 Farenheit scale, measures to -84 F (For extreme cold weather regions) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 91090A > Apr > 90 > Coolant - Used Anti-Freeze Policy > Page 1106 The toll free number for Kent Moore is 1-800-345-2233. Portions of this article were reprinted with permission, from Dow Chemical Canada, Inc., P.O. Box 1012, Sarnia, Ontario N7T 7K7. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 90496B > Aug > 89 > Cooling System Reconstituted Anti-Freeze Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Reconstituted Anti-Freeze Information Number: 90-49-6B Section: 6B Date: August 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 930107 Subject: RECONSTITUTED ANTI-FREEZE Model and Year: ALL MODELS, ALL MODEL YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin provides information on "reconstituted anti-freeze". It has been brought to our attention that a number of manufacturers claim to have the capability of reconstituting engine coolant on site. At this time, General Motors does not endorse this practice or any equipment. Anti-freeze recycling is a very complex issue. In use as an engine coolant, ethylene glycol becomes oxidized producing a very degraded and deteriorated substance. Contamination by other automotive fluids during draining, handling and storage is also a major detriment to the reclaiming process. There is no additive we are aware of that can be merely put into used coolant that will restore it to an acceptable state. Typically, a multi-million dollar facility, utilizing sophisticated technology with distillation capabilities along with appropriate quality control would be required to adequately process used coolant to bring it to GM specifications. Disposal of all chemical products should be done in accordance with all applicable federal, state and local laws and regulations. Review engine coolant substitutes Dealer Service Bulletin No. 89-57-6B, dated January 1989. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > 83I26 > Dec > 82 > Engine Coolant - Usage Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant - Usage Number: 83-I-26 Section: XIII Date: Dec., 1982 Subject: ENGINE COOLANT USAGE IN 1983 VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Chevrolet Motor Division has in past model years recommended use of ethylene glycol base anti-freeze that meets GM Specification 1899-M. This recommendation has changed for 1982 and 1983 vehicles which are factory filled with coolant which meets GM 1825-M specifications. It is required that any additions of coolant to these vehicles be done with GM 1825-M. This change was necessary due to the use of aluminum components on some engines which required a different formulation of anti-freeze to prevent corrosion. This anti-freeze is available from WDDGM in gallons and drums as P/N 1052753 and P/N 1052754. This new coolant may be added to systems which contain anti-freeze meeting the GM 1899-M specifications with no adverse effect, but it is recommended that when a complete draining of a cooling system is performed such as for engine repair, that it be refilled with one source rather than mixing old anti-freeze with new as there may be slight differences in their chemical properties that could affect their overall performance. Procedures for mixing anti-freeze to water to obtain the required protection level are unchanged. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > Page 1115 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Coolant - Used Anti-Freeze Policy Number: 91-09-0A Section: OA Date: April 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 976202 Subject: INFORMATION REGARDING RECONSTITUTED ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT TESTING AND THE USE OF A REFRACTOMETER Model and Year: ALL MODELS AND YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS RECONSTITUTED ANTIFREEZE At present, three types of recycling systems are available: 1) chemical addition to coolant; 2) filtration and addition of supplemental additives; and 3) separation of pure glycol from used coolant and reinhibition. 1) Chemical Addition-NOT RECOMMENDED With chemical addition, chemicals are added to the used engine coolant in an attempt to "clean up" the coolant. This system is the easiest since the only work involved is the addition of chemicals to the radiator. Most of these types of recycling systems use a strong acid to change precipitated corrosion products into a more soluble form. However, in addition to dissolving the corrosion products, the strong acid also attacks and corrodes the metals of the cooling system. 2) Filtration and Addition of Supplemental Additives-NOT RECOMMENDED In this type of system, the used coolant is either taken out of the vehicle or a flush-type unit is connected to the cooling system. The current technology consists simply of filtration and reinhibition of the spent coolant. While this does remove suspended solids, filtration does nothing to remove harmful degradation and corrosion products that are soluble in glycol solution. The reinhibition step used in current recycling systems may fail to produce a coolant which adequately protects all metals including aluminum in the most critical heat transfer applications, such as occurs in the cylinder heads and blocks. 3) Separation of Pure Glycol and InhibitionThe separation of pure glycol and the addition of fresh inhibitors is the ideal method for recycling coolants. Unfortunately, this method is expensive from both a collection standpoint and the technology available to economically extract pure ethylene glycol from used coolant. At this time, General Motors does not endorse these practices or equipment. Due to a worldwide shortage of ethylene glycol in 1988, some coolant manufacturers have started to mix other types of glycol in their coolant formulations; propylene glycol is the most common new ingredient. A hydrometer will not provide a correct measurement of freeze protection when anything other than ethylene glycol and water is being tested. The degree of inaccuracy will vary depending on the proportion of other glycols present in the coolant. Hydrometers test the amount of glycol in a mixture by measuring the specific gravity of the mixture; the more ethylene glycol, the higher the float balls go, and the better the freeze protection. Because ethylene glycol and propylene glycol do not have the same specific gravities, hydrometer readings of mixtures containing propylene glycol give incorrect values. As the shortage of ethylene glycol continues and/or worsens, more and more variations in antifreeze formulas will be marketed. It is, therefore, recommended that you purchase a "refractometer" and encourage your technicians to use it. Refractometers test for the amount of glycol in a coolant mixture by measuring the speed of light as it passes through the fluid and are not affected by the specific gravity of the glycol. The freeze protection of solutions of ethylene glycol in water, solutions of propylene glycol in water, and solutions of mixtures of propylene glycol and ethylene glycol in water may all be tested with sufficient accuracy using a refractometer. The following refractometers are available from Kent Moore: J 23688 Farenheit scale, measures to -50 F J 26568 Centigrade scale, measures to -45.5 C J 38633 Farenheit scale, measures to -84 F (For extreme cold weather regions) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > Page 1116 The toll free number for Kent Moore is 1-800-345-2233. Portions of this article were reprinted with permission, from Dow Chemical Canada, Inc., P.O. Box 1012, Sarnia, Ontario N7T 7K7. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > Page 1117 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant - Usage Number: 83-I-26 Section: XIII Date: Dec., 1982 Subject: ENGINE COOLANT USAGE IN 1983 VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Chevrolet Motor Division has in past model years recommended use of ethylene glycol base anti-freeze that meets GM Specification 1899-M. This recommendation has changed for 1982 and 1983 vehicles which are factory filled with coolant which meets GM 1825-M specifications. It is required that any additions of coolant to these vehicles be done with GM 1825-M. This change was necessary due to the use of aluminum components on some engines which required a different formulation of anti-freeze to prevent corrosion. This anti-freeze is available from WDDGM in gallons and drums as P/N 1052753 and P/N 1052754. This new coolant may be added to systems which contain anti-freeze meeting the GM 1899-M specifications with no adverse effect, but it is recommended that when a complete draining of a cooling system is performed such as for engine repair, that it be refilled with one source rather than mixing old anti-freeze with new as there may be slight differences in their chemical properties that could affect their overall performance. Procedures for mixing anti-freeze to water to obtain the required protection level are unchanged. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant: > Page 1118 Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - Recycled Engine Coolant Policy Group Ref.: Warranty Administration Bulletin No.: 310504 Date: February, 1994 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION SUBJECT: RECYCLED ENGINE COOLANT POLICY MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS ATTENTION: WARRANTY CLAIMS ADMINISTRATOR AND SERVICE MANAGER General Motors supports the use of recycled engine coolant for warranty repairs/service, providing a GM approved engine coolant recycling system is used. For detailed information on GM approved engine coolant recycling equipment guidelines refer to the following bulletins: Cadillac 93-1-18, GMC Truck 93-6B-34, Chevrolet 93-73-6B, Pontiac 93-6-18, Oldsmobile 1-93-43, Buick 93-6B-1 (Corporate Number 236203). Recycled coolant will be reimbursed at the GMSPO dealer price for new coolant plus the appropriate mark-up. When coolant replacement is required during a warranty repair, it is crucial to assure that only the relative amount of engine coolant concentrate be charged, not the total diluted volume. In other words, if you are using two gallons of pre-diluted (50:50) recycled engine coolant to service a vehicle, you may request reimbursement for one gallon of Goodwrench engine coolant concentrate at the dealer price plus the appropriate warranty parts handling allowance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Level Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair This lamp will be illuminated when engine coolant level in the radiator drops below a pre-determined level. To turn lamp "OFF," check cooling system, then add coolant to bring system to proper level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair REMOVE and REPLACE 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove grille assembly. 3. Disconnect electrical connector from cooling fan. 4. Remove fan assembly attaching bolts and the fan. 5. Reverse procedure to install. COOLING FAN MODIFICATIONS (IF APPLICABLE) Fig. 1 Electric cooling fan installation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1126 Fig. 2 Electric cooling fan wiring harness installation Fig. 3 Electric cooling fan temperature sender installation As of January 1, 1985, all C, K, R and V-20/2500-30/3500 models equipped with the V8-454 engine and heavy duty emissions systems are equipped with an auxiliary electric engine cooling fan. Similar 1982---85 truck models not equipped with the fan may have one installed using the following procedure: 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove grille assembly. 3. Drill mounting holes and install fan assembly (part No. 15593566), Fig. 1. 4. Drain cooling system, then install fan relay (part No. 14078902), Fig. 2. 5. Install fan wiring harness (part No. 12064526), Fig. 2. Secure harness to fender and radiator support away from sharp edges. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1127 6. Install temperature sender (part No. 14080661) in right cylinder head, Fig. 3. Fig. 4 Electric cooling fan wiring harness routing Fig. 5 Electric cooling fan wiring circuit 7. Route and secure fan wiring harness as shown in Figs. 4 and 5. 8. Fill cooling system and connect battery ground cable. 9. Run engine and check for proper fan operation. Fan should be energized when engine temperature reaches approximately 225---240°F. Ensure fan blows air through radiator. If fan blows in opposite direction, reverse wires in fan electrical connector at motor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Blade > Component Information > Service Precautions Fan Blade: Service Precautions Do not operate engine until fan has first been inspected for cracks and/or separations. If a fan blade is found to be bent or damaged in any way, do not attempt to repair or reuse damaged part. Proper balance is essential in fan assembly operation. Balance cannot be assured once a fan assembly has been found to be bent or damaged and failure may occur during operation, creating an extremely dangerous condition. Always replace damaged fan assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation Fan Clutch: Description and Operation Fig. 1 Fan drive clutch assembly, 1984---87. 1980---83 similar Fig. 2 Variable speed fan with flat bimetallic thermostatic spring Variable Speed Fan W/Bi-Metallic Coiled Thermostatic Spring The fan drive clutch, Fig. 1, is a fluid coupling containing silicone oil. Fan speed is regulated by the torque-carrying capacity of the silicone oil. The more silicone oil in the coupling, the greater the fan speed, and the less silicone oil, the slower the fan speed. There are two types of fan drive clutches in use, one with a flat bimetallic thermostatic spring, Fig. 2, and the second with a coiled bimetallic thermostatic spring, Fig. 3. The fan drive clutch with the flat bimetallic spring works with a control piston on front of the fluid coupling to regulate the amount of silicone oil entering the coupling. The bimetallic strip bows outward with an increase in ambient temperature and allows a piston to move outward. This piston opens a valve regulating the flow of silicone oil into the coupling from a reserve chamber. The silicone oil is returned to the reserve chamber through a bleed hole when the valve is closed. The second fan drive clutch uses a heat-sensitive, coiled bimetallic spring connected to an opening plate which brings about similar results. Both units cause the fan speed to increase with a rise in temperature and to decrease as temperature decreases. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1134 Fan Clutch: Testing and Inspection Bi-Metallic Coiled Spring Removal FAN DRIVE CLUTCH TEST Do not operate the engine until the fan has been first checked for possible cracks and separations. Run the engine at a fast idle speed (1000 RPM) until normal operating temperature is reached. This process can be speeded up by blocking off the front of the radiator with cardboard. Regardless of temperatures, the unit must be operated for at least five minutes immediately before being tested. Stop the engine and, using a glove or a cloth to protect the hand, immediately check the effort required to turn the fan. If considerable effort is required, it can be assumed that the coupling is operating satisfactorily. If very little effort is required to turn the fan, it is an indication that the coupling is not operating properly and should be replaced. If the clutch fan is the coiled bimetallic spring type, it may be tested while the vehicle is being driven. To check, disconnect the bimetal spring, Fig. 4, and rotate 90° counterclockwise. This disables the temperature-controlled, free-wheeling feature and the clutch performs like a conventional fan. If this cures the overheating condition, replace the clutch fan. FAN CLUTCH NOISE Fan clutch noise can sometimes be noticed when clutch is engaged for maximum cooling. Clutch noise is also noticeable within the first few minutes after starting engine while clutch is redistributing the silicone fluid back to its normal, disengaged operating condition after settling for long periods of time (overnight). However, continuous fan noise or an excessive roar indicates the clutch assembly is locked-up due to internal failure. This condition can be checked by attempting to manually rotate fan. If fan cannot be rotated manually or there is a rough, abrasive feel as fan is rotated, the clutch should be replaced. FAN LOOSENESS Lateral movement can be observed at the fan blade tip under various temperature conditions because of the type bearing used. This movement should not exceed 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) as measured at the fan tip. If this lateral movement does not exceed specifications, there is no cause for replacement. CLUTCH FLUID LEAK Small fluid leaks do not generally affect the operation of the unit. These leaks generally occur around the area of the bearing assembly, but if the leaks appear to be excessive, engine overheating may occur. Check for clutch and fan free-wheeling by attempting to rotate fan and clutch assembly by hand five times. If no drag is felt, replace clutch. FAN BLADE INSPECTION Place fan on flat surface with leading edge facing down. If there is a clearance between fan blade touching surface and opposite blade of more than .090 inch (2 mm), replace fan. (See caution at beginning of chapter.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1135 Fig. 2 Variable speed fan with flat bimetallic thermostatic spring FAN SERVICE To prevent silicone fluid from draining into fan drive bearing, do not store or place drive unit on bench with rear of shaft pointing downward. The removal procedure for either type of fan clutch assembly is generally the same. Merely unfasten the unit from the water pump and remove the assembly from vehicle. The type of unit shown in Fig. 2, may be partially disassembled for inspection and cleaning. Remove capscrews that hold the assembly together and separate the fan from the drive clutch. Next, remove metal strip on front of clutch assembly by pushing one end of it toward the fan clutch body so it clears the retaining bracket. Push the strip to the side so that its opposite end will spring out of place. Now remove the small control piston underneath it. Check the piston for free movement of the coupling device. If piston sticks, clean it with emery cloth. If the bimetal strip is damaged, replace the entire unit. These strips are not interchangeable. When reassembling, install the control piston so that the projection on the end of it will contact the metal strip. Next install metal strip with any identification number or letters facing the clutch. After reassembly, clean the clutch drive assembly with a cloth soaked in a suitable solvent. Avoid dipping the clutch assembly in any type liquid. Install the assembly in the reverse order of removal. The coil spring type fan clutch cannot be disassembled, serviced or repaired. If it does not function properly, it must be replaced with a new unit. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Improved Kit CORPORATE NUMBER: 436501R NUMBER: 84-T-101 GROUP: 6B - Engine Cooling IMPORTANT - All Service Personnel Should Read DATE: November, 1986 SUBJECT: COOLANT SENSOR KIT MODELS: 1980-84 LIGHT DUTY MODELS EQUIPPED WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL All 1980-84 Caballeros and all 1980-84 vehicles equipped with NB2 California emissions were built with engines incorporating computer command control. Many coolant sensors have been replaced on these vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 GM vehicles using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit > Page 1141 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Service Kit Number: 84-270 Section: 6E Date: NOV., 1986 Subject: COOLANT SENSOR KIT Model and Year: 1980-84 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL 1982-84 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS WITH CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Many coolant sensors have been replaced on 1980 to 1984 vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" Light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 cars and 1982-84 Light Duty Trucks using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1142 TEMPERATURE SENSORS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators Heater Core: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-001A Date: July 16, 2008 Subject: Information On Aluminum Heater Core and/or Radiator Replacement Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-001 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important: 2004-05 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX-COOL(R). Refer to the flushing procedure explained later in this bulletin. The following information should be utilized when servicing aluminum heater core and/or radiators on repeat visits. A replacement may be necessary because erosion, corrosion, or insufficient inhibitor levels may cause damage to the heater core, radiator or water pump. A coolant check should be performed whenever a heater core, radiator, or water pump is replaced. The following procedures/ inspections should be done to verify proper coolant effectiveness. Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if the radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Important: If the vehicle's coolant is low, drained out, or the customer has repeatedly added coolant or water to the system, then the system should be completely flushed using the procedure explained later in this bulletin. Technician Diagnosis ^ Verify coolant concentration. A 50% coolant/water solution ensures proper freeze and corrosion protection. Inhibitor levels cannot be easily measured in the field, but can be indirectly done by the measurement of coolant concentration. This must be done by using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale), or equivalent, coolant tester. The Refractometer uses a minimal amount of coolant that can be taken from the coolant recovery reservoir, radiator or the engine block. Inexpensive gravity float testers (floating balls) will not completely analyze the coolant concentration fully and should not be used. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65% coolant concentrate. This mixture will have a freeze point protection of -34 degrees Fahrenheit (-37 degrees Celsius). If the concentration is below 50%, the cooling system must be flushed. ^ Inspect the coolant flow restrictor if the vehicle is equipped with one. Refer to Service Information (SI) and/or the appropriate Service Manual for component location and condition for operation. ^ Verify that no electrolysis is present in the cooling system. This electrolysis test can be performed before or after the system has been repaired. Use a digital voltmeter set to 12 volts. Attach one test lead to the negative battery post and insert the other test lead into the radiator coolant, making sure the lead does not touch the filler neck or core. Any voltage reading over 0.3 volts indicates that stray current is finding its way into the coolant. Electrolysis is often an intermittent condition that occurs when a device or accessory that is mounted to the radiator is energized. This type of current could be caused from a poorly grounded cooling fan or some other accessory and can be verified by watching the volt meter and turning on and off various accessories or engage the starter motor. Before using one of the following flush procedures, the coolant recovery reservoir must be removed, drained, cleaned and reinstalled before refilling the system. Notice: ^ Using coolant other than DEX‐COOL(R) may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX‐COOL(R) (silicate free) coolant in your vehicle. ^ If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 1147 Flushing Procedures using DEX-COOL(R) Important: The following procedure recommends refilling the system with DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. This coolant is orange in color and has a service interval of 5 years or 240,000 km (150,000 mi). However, when used on vehicles built prior to the introduction of DEX-COOL(R), maintenance intervals will remain the same as specified in the Owner's Manual. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling system flush and fill machine is not available, drain the coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run the vehicle until the thermostat opens. Repeat and run the vehicle three (3) times to totally remove the old coolant or until the drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with DEX‐COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to the system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and reverify the coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore the coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, reverify the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Flushing Procedures using Conventional Silicated (Green Colored) Coolant Important: 2004-2005 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX‐COOL(R). The Aveo and Wave are filled with conventional, silicated engine coolant that is blue in color. Silicated coolants are typically green in color and are required to be drained, flushed and refilled every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). The Aveo and Wave are to be serviced with conventional, silicated coolant. Use P/N 12378560 (1 gal) (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 (1 L). Refer to the Owner's Manual or Service Information (SI) for further information on OEM coolant. Important: Do not mix the OEM orange colored DEX-COOL(R) coolant with green colored coolant when adding coolant to the system or when servicing the vehicle's cooling system. Mixing the orange and green colored coolants will produce a brown coolant which may be a customer dissatisfier and will not extend the service interval to that of DEX-COOL(R). Conventional silicated coolants offered by GM Service and Parts Operations are green in color. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling systems flush and fill machine is not available, drain coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run vehicle until thermostat opens. Repeat and run vehicle three (3) times to totally remove old coolant or until drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with a good quality ethylene glycol base engine coolant, P/N 12378560, 1 gal (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L), conforming to GM specification 1825M, or recycled coolant conforming to GM specification 1825M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% good quality ethylene glycol base (green colored) engine coolant, P/N 12378560 1 gal., (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L) conforming to GM specification 1825M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and recheck coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, recheck the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. Concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 1148 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1149 Heater Core: Service and Repair Fig. 23 Heater distributor assembly. C, K, R & V models less A/C C, K, R & V MODELS Less A/C 1. Disconnect battery ground cable, then drain cooling system. 2. Disconnect heater hoses at core, then plug core tubes to prevent coolant spillage. 3. Working from engine compartment, remove distributor duct stud attaching nuts. 4. Remove glove box and door assembly. 5. Disconnect air-defrost and temperature door cables. 6. Remove floor outlet, then the defroster duct to heater distributor duct attaching screw. 7. Remove heater distributor to dash panel attaching screws, Fig. 23. 8. Pull distributor rearward, then disconnect all harnesses that will interfere with distributor removal. 9. Remove heater distributor from vehicle. 10. Remove heater core retaining straps, then the heater core. 11. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1150 Fig. 24 A/C & heater assembly. C, K, R & V models With A/C 1. Disconnect battery ground cable, then drain cooling system. 2. Disconnect heater hoses at core and plug core tubes. 3. Remove glove box assembly. 4. Remove screws at center duct to selector duct/instrument panel. Remove center upper and lower ducts. 5. Disconnect bowden cable at temperature door. 6. Remove nuts at selector duct studs (projecting through firewall). Remove selector duct to firewall screw. 7. Draw selector duct assembly rearward so core tubes clear firewall. Lower assembly sufficiently to remove vacuum lines and harness connections. 8. Remove selector duct assembly. Disconnect core mounting straps and remove core, Fig. 24. 9. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Coolant Level Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Level Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair This lamp will be illuminated when engine coolant level in the radiator drops below a pre-determined level. To turn lamp "OFF," check cooling system, then add coolant to bring system to proper level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection A bimetal temperature switch located in the cylinder head controls the operation of a temperature indicator light with a red lens. If the engine cooling system is not functioning properly and coolant temperature exceeds a predetermined value, the warning light will illuminate. TROUBLESHOOTING If the red light is not lit when the engine is being cranked, check for a burned out bulb, an open in the light circuit, or a defective ignition switch. If the red light is lit when the engine is running, check the wiring between light and switch for a ground, defective temperature switch, or overheated cooling system. As a test circuit to check whether the red bulb is functioning properly, a wire which is connected to the ground terminal of the ignition switch is tapped into its circuit. When the ignition is in the ``Start'' (engine cranking) position, the ground terminal is grounded inside the switch and the red bulb will be lit. When the engine is started and the ignition switch is in the ``On'' position, the test circuit is opened and the bulb is then controlled by the temperature switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators Radiator: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-001A Date: July 16, 2008 Subject: Information On Aluminum Heater Core and/or Radiator Replacement Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-001 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important: 2004-05 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX-COOL(R). Refer to the flushing procedure explained later in this bulletin. The following information should be utilized when servicing aluminum heater core and/or radiators on repeat visits. A replacement may be necessary because erosion, corrosion, or insufficient inhibitor levels may cause damage to the heater core, radiator or water pump. A coolant check should be performed whenever a heater core, radiator, or water pump is replaced. The following procedures/ inspections should be done to verify proper coolant effectiveness. Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if the radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Important: If the vehicle's coolant is low, drained out, or the customer has repeatedly added coolant or water to the system, then the system should be completely flushed using the procedure explained later in this bulletin. Technician Diagnosis ^ Verify coolant concentration. A 50% coolant/water solution ensures proper freeze and corrosion protection. Inhibitor levels cannot be easily measured in the field, but can be indirectly done by the measurement of coolant concentration. This must be done by using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale), or equivalent, coolant tester. The Refractometer uses a minimal amount of coolant that can be taken from the coolant recovery reservoir, radiator or the engine block. Inexpensive gravity float testers (floating balls) will not completely analyze the coolant concentration fully and should not be used. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65% coolant concentrate. This mixture will have a freeze point protection of -34 degrees Fahrenheit (-37 degrees Celsius). If the concentration is below 50%, the cooling system must be flushed. ^ Inspect the coolant flow restrictor if the vehicle is equipped with one. Refer to Service Information (SI) and/or the appropriate Service Manual for component location and condition for operation. ^ Verify that no electrolysis is present in the cooling system. This electrolysis test can be performed before or after the system has been repaired. Use a digital voltmeter set to 12 volts. Attach one test lead to the negative battery post and insert the other test lead into the radiator coolant, making sure the lead does not touch the filler neck or core. Any voltage reading over 0.3 volts indicates that stray current is finding its way into the coolant. Electrolysis is often an intermittent condition that occurs when a device or accessory that is mounted to the radiator is energized. This type of current could be caused from a poorly grounded cooling fan or some other accessory and can be verified by watching the volt meter and turning on and off various accessories or engage the starter motor. Before using one of the following flush procedures, the coolant recovery reservoir must be removed, drained, cleaned and reinstalled before refilling the system. Notice: ^ Using coolant other than DEX‐COOL(R) may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX‐COOL(R) (silicate free) coolant in your vehicle. ^ If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 1162 Flushing Procedures using DEX-COOL(R) Important: The following procedure recommends refilling the system with DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. This coolant is orange in color and has a service interval of 5 years or 240,000 km (150,000 mi). However, when used on vehicles built prior to the introduction of DEX-COOL(R), maintenance intervals will remain the same as specified in the Owner's Manual. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling system flush and fill machine is not available, drain the coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run the vehicle until the thermostat opens. Repeat and run the vehicle three (3) times to totally remove the old coolant or until the drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with DEX‐COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to the system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and reverify the coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore the coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, reverify the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Flushing Procedures using Conventional Silicated (Green Colored) Coolant Important: 2004-2005 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX‐COOL(R). The Aveo and Wave are filled with conventional, silicated engine coolant that is blue in color. Silicated coolants are typically green in color and are required to be drained, flushed and refilled every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). The Aveo and Wave are to be serviced with conventional, silicated coolant. Use P/N 12378560 (1 gal) (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 (1 L). Refer to the Owner's Manual or Service Information (SI) for further information on OEM coolant. Important: Do not mix the OEM orange colored DEX-COOL(R) coolant with green colored coolant when adding coolant to the system or when servicing the vehicle's cooling system. Mixing the orange and green colored coolants will produce a brown coolant which may be a customer dissatisfier and will not extend the service interval to that of DEX-COOL(R). Conventional silicated coolants offered by GM Service and Parts Operations are green in color. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling systems flush and fill machine is not available, drain coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run vehicle until thermostat opens. Repeat and run vehicle three (3) times to totally remove old coolant or until drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with a good quality ethylene glycol base engine coolant, P/N 12378560, 1 gal (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L), conforming to GM specification 1825M, or recycled coolant conforming to GM specification 1825M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% good quality ethylene glycol base (green colored) engine coolant, P/N 12378560 1 gal., (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L) conforming to GM specification 1825M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and recheck coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, recheck the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. Concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 1163 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 1164 Radiator: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling - Radiator Repair/Replacement Guidelines File In Section: 06 - Engine/Propulsion System Bulletin No.: 99-06-02-017 Date: October, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Radiator Repair/Replacement Guidelines Models: 2000 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks If repair of an aluminum/plastic radiator is required, it is recommended that the following guidelines be followed: For Vehicles Under Warranty For aluminum/plastic radiators that have damage to the face of the core including bent fins, punctures, cuts, leaking tubes or header tubes, the aluminum radiator core section should be replaced with a new one. In these cases, if both of the plastic tanks are not damaged, they can be reused with the new core. If one or both of the plastic tanks are damaged along with the core, it is recommended that a complete new radiator assembly be installed. Warranty repairs for leaks at the tank to header (gasket leaks), broken/cracked plastic tanks, cross threaded or leaking oil coolers should be repaired without replacing the complete radiator. This type of repair should be handled by the radiator repair facility in your area. Many of these radiator repair facilities are members of the National Automotive Radiator Service Association (NARSA) who follow industry and General Motors guidelines when repairing radiators. These facilities have the special tools, tanks and pressurizing equipment needed to properly test the repaired radiator prior to returning it to the dealership. Many of these facilities receive the repair components directly from General Motors. The sublet expense for a new radiator or the repair of the radiator under warranty should be handled following normal procedures. For Vehicles No Longer Under Warranty The GM released epoxy repair kit referenced in previous publications is no longer available. Repairs to the radiator, rather than replacement, is strictly at the owner's discretion. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Specifications Radiator Cap: Specifications Release Pressure 15 psi Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Improved Kit CORPORATE NUMBER: 436501R NUMBER: 84-T-101 GROUP: 6B - Engine Cooling IMPORTANT - All Service Personnel Should Read DATE: November, 1986 SUBJECT: COOLANT SENSOR KIT MODELS: 1980-84 LIGHT DUTY MODELS EQUIPPED WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL All 1980-84 Caballeros and all 1980-84 vehicles equipped with NB2 California emissions were built with engines incorporating computer command control. Many coolant sensors have been replaced on these vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 GM vehicles using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit > Page 1174 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Service Kit Number: 84-270 Section: 6E Date: NOV., 1986 Subject: COOLANT SENSOR KIT Model and Year: 1980-84 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL 1982-84 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS WITH CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Many coolant sensors have been replaced on 1980 to 1984 vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" Light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 cars and 1982-84 Light Duty Trucks using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1175 TEMPERATURE SENSORS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection A bimetal temperature switch located in the cylinder head controls the operation of a temperature indicator light with a red lens. If the engine cooling system is not functioning properly and coolant temperature exceeds a predetermined value, the warning light will illuminate. TROUBLESHOOTING If the red light is not lit when the engine is being cranked, check for a burned out bulb, an open in the light circuit, or a defective ignition switch. If the red light is lit when the engine is running, check the wiring between light and switch for a ground, defective temperature switch, or overheated cooling system. As a test circuit to check whether the red bulb is functioning properly, a wire which is connected to the ground terminal of the ignition switch is tapped into its circuit. When the ignition is in the ``Start'' (engine cranking) position, the ground terminal is grounded inside the switch and the red bulb will be lit. When the engine is started and the ignition switch is in the ``On'' position, the test circuit is opened and the bulb is then controlled by the temperature switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Opening Temperature 195 F Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair Water Pump: Service and Repair EXC. V6-231 1. Drain cooling system. 2. Remove fan belt and fan. 3. Disconnect all hoses from water pump. 4. Remove alternator upper and lower mounting braces, if necessary. 5. Remove pump attaching bolts and remove water pump. On 6-250 engines, pull pump straight out of block to prevent damage to impeller. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis Number: 82-I-149 Section: VIII Date: June, 1983 Subject: DIAGNOSING PLUGGED DUAL BED BEAD TYPE CATALYTIC CONVERTERS 1981-82 VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH DUAL BED BEAD CATALYTIC CONVERTERS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS NOTICE: This procedure supercedes the procedure described in Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 81-I-82 for the diagnosis of plugged dual bed bead catalytic converters. Proper diagnosis of a plugged catalytic converter is essential before the converter is replaced in service. The following diagnostic procedure is recommended: 1. Remove hose at left or right (whichever is easiest) manifold A.I.R. check valve, then remove check valve. FIGURE 1 - PROPANE ENRICHMENT DEVICE 2. Using hose and nipple (Figure 1) from the Propane Enrichment Device (J26911), connect hose to a fuel pump pressure gauge. 3. Install nipple into the manifold air pipe. 4. With engine at normal operating temperature, run the engine at 2500 RPM and observe backpressure reading on gauge. 5. If backpressure measures 2-3/4 psi or greater, a plugged exhaust system is indicated. 6. Inspect muffler for heat distress or possible internal failure. 8. If no other cause for excessive backpressure is found, replace the catalytic converter with OEM converter or as otherwise directed in service bulletins. NOTICE: It is very unusual for single bed bead converters to plug without obvious signs of expansion or heat distress (except in cases where leaded gasoline is used). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1190 Technical Service Bulletin # 82T144 Date: 830601 Dual Bed Cat Converters - Revised Repair Procedure Number: 82-T-144 Section: VIII Date: June, 1983 Subject: REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DUAL BED BEAD CATALYTIC CONVERTERS - ALL 1981-82 VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH DUAL BED BEAD CATALYTIC CONVERTERS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin supercedes bulletin 81-T-76, 81-T-76 Supplement and 82-T-58. A new repair procedure has been developed for servicing dual bed bead catalytic converters. The procedure consist of transferring the catalyst beads from plugged or externally damaged (not internally damaged or expanded) dual bed converters to an empty new design dual bed bead converter. Also, some new upper bed catalyst beads must be added to the upper bed of the new converter. Used beads from expanded or internally damaged converters cannot be used in the new empty converter. Either "stored" upper and lower bed beads or upper and lower bed bead kits must be use in conjunction with the rebuild kit. Subject vehicles that had the original dual bed converter replaced with a single bed converter or 1982 vehicles produced with the single bed converter (built after April 17, 1982) must be serviced with another single bed converter of the same part number. Vehicles involved in this program are listed below: Carline Engines 1981 Model Year Chevrolet ("B") Camaro, Malibu, Monte Carlo, and El Camino 3.8L (229), 4.4L, 5.0L Chevrolet ("B") Camaro, Corvette and Malibu 5.7L 1982 Model Year Chevrolet ("B"), Malibu, Monte Carlo and El Camino 3.8L (229), 4.4L, 5.0L Chevrolet ("B") 5.7L Camaro 5.0L (LG4) Inspection Procedure 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Refer to Figure 1 for location of catalytic converter part number. 3. If converter part number is listed in Column 1 of table below, replace converter with the appropriate converter part number identified in Column 2. Column 1 Column 2 Original Dual New Dual Bed Model Year Vehicle Bed Bead Conv. Bead Conv. 1981 "A", "Aspl", and "B" (including Police) 1982 "B", "G" and 8999586 "Gspl" (including Police) 25056366 (1982 Police) 25056673 1981 "F" (non-Z28) 8999588 25056674 1981 "F" (Z28) 8999589 25056675 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1191 1982 "F" 5.0L (LG4) 8999830 25056676 1981 "Y" 8999338 25056672 4. Vehicles with converter part numbers not identified in Column 1 of the table will require the same converter part number as removed from the vehicle. Use normal operation number and labor time for the replacement of these converters. CAUTION: THE CATALYTIC CONVERTER BEADS CONTAIN PLATINUM, PALLADIUM AND/OR RHODIUM. ADDITIONALLY, THE BEADS MAY BE FINELY COATED WITH LEAD COMPOUNDS. THEREFORE, PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN TO MINIMIZE DUST GENERATION DURING THE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. THESE PRECAUTIONS INCLUDE: A. Pour water into catalytic converter prior to bead removal as described in Step 5. B. The use of a suitable dust mask, rubber gloves and safety glasses is recommended when handling catalyst beads. C. Applicable OSHA standards should be reviewed. D. Allow catalytic converter to cool before handling. Listed below are tools required to perform repair procedure: Description Tool # No. Required Converter Plug Installer J-34118 1 Catalytic Converter Bead Replacement Kit J-34155 1 Replacement Kit includes: Sifting Pan J-34155-1 1 Storage Pan J-34155-2 2 Funnel J-34155-3 1 Service Procedure 1. Disconnect air supply pipe from catalytic converter. 2. Disconnect intermediate pipe from rear of converter. 3. Disconnect hanger bracket from converter, except Corvette. 4. On Corvettes, remove nuts and bolts and remove converter. All other models, remove front exhaust clamp then remove converter. 5. Stand old converter upright on inlet end and pour two (2) 8 ounce cups of water into outlet end to control catalyst dust. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1192 FIGURE 1 - CONVERTER BELT FLANGE 6. Using hammer and chisel, remove upper bed fill hole plug (see Figure 1 for description of upper and lower beds) from old converter by driving chisel between the converter shell and rim of fill plug. Deform fill plug until it can be removed with pliers. 7. Hold converter over a clean pan (J-34155-2) and empty catalyst beads by shaking and tapping converter belt flange (Figure 1) with rubber mallet. NOTICE: If upper bed is void or near void (a cup or less) of catalyst beads, the converter is considered damaged (internally) or expanded. Catalyst beads found in internally damaged or expanded converters are not to be used in new converters. These beads can be returned via exchange program described in WDDGM Bulletin IB No. 80-93. 8. Pour upper bed beads into sifting pan J-34155-1. Sift out broken beads (smaller than half size) into a clean box. Pour sifted beads (half size and larger) into the other pan J-34155-2. Set sifted beads aside for now. NOTICE: Unusable beads and dust can be returned via exchange program described in WDDGM Bulletin IB No. 80-93. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1193 FIGURE 2 - CONVERTER BELT FLANGE 9. Prop new converter up at a 45~ angle with upper bed fill hole at top. (See Figure 1 for a description of upper and lower beds.) Tap funnel J-34155-3 into converter fill hole with hammer (Figure 2). 10. Install packet of new upper bed beads from kit, P/N 25056590, into upper bed of the new converter. FIGURE 3 - FULL CONVERTER 11. Pour sifted upper bed beads (ref. Step 8) or new upper bed beads if required into upper bed of new converter. Tap belt flange of converter with rubber mallet to allow beads to settle. Continue filling and tapping until converter is full. See Figure 3 for definition of full upper bed. If upper bed is full, proceed to Step 12. If upper bed is not full, use leftover upper bed catalyst beads from involved dual bed converters to fill upper bed. If there are not enough used upper bed beads, obtain upper bed bead kit, P/N 25056680 (zone approval is required to obtain this kit), and continue to fill upper bed until full. NOTICE: Used upper bed beads (from non-damaged or expanded converters) can be mixed with new upper bed beads. DO NOT MIX UPPER AND LOWER BEADS. Also, do not mix any other catalyst beads from converters other than converters involved in this bulletin. Store unused upper bed beads in a clean container marked "upper bed". 12. Lay converter down on a flat surface with upper bed on top. 13. Insert fill plug, P/N 8998202 (provided in kit, P/N 25056590), into upper bed fill hole. If outer rim of the fill plug doesn't fit flat against converter shell, remove enough beads so it does. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1194 FIGURE 4 - FILL PLUG 14. With fill plug in fill hole, insert tool J-34118 into fill plug (Figure 4). Tighten tool to 35 ft.lbs. (47 N-m) and make sure plug outer rim is flat and tight against converter shell. Set new converter aside. 15. Remove lower bed fill hole plug from old converter using procedure described in Step 6. FIGURE 1 - CONVERTER BELT FLANGE 16. Hold converter over a clean pan (J-34155-2) and empty catalyst beads by shaking and tapping converter belt flange (Figure 1) with rubber mallet. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1195 FIGURE 1 - CONVERTER BELT FLANGE FIGURE 2 - CONVERTER BELT FLANGE 17. Sift lower bed beads using procedure described in Step 8. 18. Prop new converter up at a 45~ angle with lower bed fill hole at top. (See Figure 1 for definition of upper and lower beds.) Tap funnel J-34155-3 into converter fill hole with hammer (Figure 2). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1196 FIGURE 3 - FULL CONVERTER 19. Pour sifted lower bed beads (ref. Step 17) or new lower bed beads if required, into new converter lower bed. Tap belt flange with rubber mallet to allow beads to settle. Continue filling and tapping until converter is full (ref. Figure 3). If lower bed is not full, use leftover lower bed catalyst beads saved from involved dual bed converters to fill lower bed. If there are not enough used lower bed beads, obtain lower bed bead service kit, P/N 25056682 (zone approval is required to obtain this kit), and continue filling the lower bed until full. NOTICE: The leftover lower bed beads can be saved for future use. Store them in a clean container marked "lower bed" DO NOT MIX UPPER AND LOWER BEADS, Also, do not mix any other catalyst beads from converters other than converters involved in this bulletin. 20. Lay converter down on flat surface with lower bed on top and install fill plug using procedure described in Steps 13 and 14. 21. Reverse removal procedure for installation of new converter. Refer to appropriate service manual for installation torque. 22. Lower vehicle. Labor Operation Number: T0117 Labor Time : .9 hours Parts List Number Required Per Description P/N Carline Vehicle Upper bed rebuilt kit 25056590 All 1 (contains 300 grams of upper bed catalyst, 2 fill hole plugs and instruction sheet) *Upper bed bead kit 25056680 All As required (contains 700 grams of catalyst beads, no fill plugs or instruction sheet) *Lower bed bead kit 25056682 All As required (contains 1,000 grams of catalyst beads, no fill hole plugs or instruction sheet) Clamp, catalytic converter air "A" "B" injection pipe 22505116 "G" 1 Bolt (pipe to rear converter) 11502877 "A" "B" "F" "G" 2 Bolt (hanger to converter) 11504596 1981 "A", "B" 1982 "B" "F" "G" 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1197 Bolt (hanger to converter) 9424320 1981 "F" 2 Nut (pipe to converter - "Y") 9414034 1981 "F", (hanger to converter - "F") "Y" 2 "F" 8 "Y" Washer (hanger to converter - "F") 9439512 1981 "F" (pipe to converter - "Y") "Y" 2 "F", 8 "Y" Bolt (pipe to converter) 9439636 1981 "Y" 8 Clamp, exhaust (2 1/4") 1259609 "A", "B" "F", "G" 1 Fill hole plug 8998202 As required * Requires zone approval Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1198 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation PURPOSE The catalytic converter reduces the emission of Hydrocarbons, Carbon Monoxide and Oxides of Nitrogen. OPERATION The catalytic converter remains unchanged while enabling a chemical reaction to take place which combines Hydrocarbons (HC) and Carbon Monoxide (CO) with Oxygen to form water (H2O) and Carbon Dioxide (CO2). Fig. 13 - Underfloor Converter On 1975-79 vehicles, the catalyst is structured in the form of pellets--Fig 13. Fig. 14 - Monolith Converter On 1980-82 vehicles, two converters are used, the underfloor converter--Fig 13 and a honeycomb monolith converter--Fig 14. The catalyst consists of a porous substrate of an inert material, coated with platinum and other noble metals--active catalytic materials. Due to its high operating temperatures, the underfloor converter--located in the exhaust system between the exhaust manifold and muffler--requires heat shields to protect chassis components, passenger compartment and other areas from heat related damage. Fig. 15 - Fuel Tank Filler Safety Neck For All Vehicles Equipped With Catalytic Converters A smaller diameter fuel filler neck prevents system contamination by not allowing the larger diameter leaded fuel nozzles to be inserted--Fig 15. CAUTION: Use unleaded fuels only. Use of more than a very small amount of leaded fuel will ruin catalyst. NOTE: Periodic maintenance of the exhaust system is not required; however, if the vehicle is raised for other service, it is advisable to check the general condition of the catalytic converter. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Bolts 20 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1202 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair SERIES 10---30/1500---3500 1980---85 1. Remove air cleaner and carburetor heat stove pipe. 2. Remove spark plugs and spark plug wiring heat shields. 3. Disconnect exhaust pipe from manifold, then remove manifold attaching bolts and the manifold. 4. Reverse procedure to install, using new gasket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification Number: 90-56-8 Section: 8 Date: September 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 916521R Subject: PACKARD 32 WAY CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION Model and Year: 1980-90 A, B, F, G, J, L, W, Y CARS AND ALL TRUCKS WITH GMP4 ECM APPLICATIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin serves to clarify the labeling of the Packard 32 way connectors used on the GMP4 under dash ECMS. Currently a common strain relief is used in both the C-D 32 pin and the E-F 32 pin connectors. To properly identify these connectors, the strain reliefs must be removed. Use the lettering on the connector as shown on figure. The colors used at this time for the 32 pin E-F connector are yellow, mint green or orange. This updates any previous information released concerning identification that indicates any of these colors as being C & D connectors, found in the 6E and 8D Sections of the affected Service Manuals. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1210 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM/PCM - Damaged and/or Misdiagnosed Number: 91-384-6E Section: 6E Date: AUGUST 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 176503 Subject: DAMAGED ECM/PCM AND/OR MIS-DIAGNOSED ECM/PCM SYMPTOMS DUE TO INCORRECT "TAP-TESTING" PROCEDURES Model and Year: 1982-91 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS CONDITION: Because of the intermittent nature of some Electronic Control Module (ECM) or Powertrain Control Modules (PCM) symptoms, some service technicians have been subjecting the ECM/PCM to vibration and/or shock testing. Commonly known as tap-testing, this procedure involves tapping on the ECM/PCM case, while the engine is running. It is generally accepted that if the engine or ECM/PCM falters due to the tapping, an intermittent internal ECM/PCM defect may be indicated. However, this may not always be true. If too much force is applied to the ECM/PCM during the test the following symptoms may result: ^ Immediate ECM/PCM failure. ^ ECM/PCM suffers damage which may cause a failure at a later date. ^ ECM/PCM Reset (or Glitch), creating a momentary stall, miss Service Engine Soon (SES) light and/or loss of serial data. CAUSE: The ECM/PCM should be tapped using only the fingertips of one hand. Use of the palm, fist, or any type of tool subjects the ECM/PCM to forces that can cause both the circuit board and the outer aluminum case to flex and distort beyond design limits. The Integrated Circuits (IC) used in today's ECM/PCMs are mounted to the circuit board using a mounting process referred to as "surface technology." There are no circuit board holes for IC leads to go through. The IC leads set on pads, (28 pads or 52 pads depending on the IC) and solder is flowed around the leads to make the electrical connection to the circuit board. ^ Any flexing of the circuit board, beyond design limits, places the IC solder connections at risk of damage. Such damage may be apparent immediately, or it may appear at a future date. Circuit board deflection can occur as a result of striking the ECM/PCM, using ONLY THE PALM OF THE HAND. ^ If struck on the bottom side (the side opposite the service label), the ECM/PCM's aluminum outer case may deflect inward far enough to contact the electrical leads attached to the circuit board. Once in contact with the case the ECM/PCM electrical components will be shorted directly to ground. Although such shorting certainly has the potential to damage the ECM/PCM, it may not be permanent damage, depending on which circuit is involved. However, even if permanent damage is avoided, a short on any of the circuits will cause a disruption of normal ECM/PCM operation for the instant that the short occurs. This disruption may cause the ECM/PCM to reset (see "reset" above), creating the false impression that it is vibration sensitive or faulty. Reset is the ECM/PCM's normal way of coping with large voltage spikes. An ECM/PCM reset does not indicate that the ECM/PCM is defective or faulty, only that it is being subjected to abnormal conditions. CORRECTION: 1. TAP THE ECM/PCM ONLY ON THE TOP SIDE (The top side is where the service label is located.) ^ This will minimize the chance of deflecting the ECM/PCM case into the electrical leads on the circuit board. The clearance between the case and the circuit board is closest on the bottom side of the ECM/PCM. 2. TAP THE ECM/PCM USING ONLY THE FINGERTIPS - NO TOOLS. ^ To avoid excessive case deflection, avoid tapping in the center of the case. Tapping close to the edge of the ECM/PCM, especially in the corners, is best. ^ While using greater force may seem more effective, the test itself may cause the ECM/PCM to fail. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1211 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM May Contain Wrong PROM Number: 88-42 Section: 6E Date: Sept., 1987 Subject: SERVICE REPLACEMENT ELECTRONIC MODULES (ECM) WITH PROM INSTALLED Model and Year: 1981-88 ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS It has been brought to our attention that some service replacement electronic control modules (ECM's) have contained a PROM. A PROM should not have been included in a replacement ECM as it may not be the correct PROM for the vehicle. When this situation is encountered, the PROM should be removed from the replacement ECM and the PROM from the vehicle should be installed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1212 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Revised Replacement Procedure Number: 87-150 Section: 6E Date: MAY, 1987 Subject: REVISED ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE - CHART C-1 Model and Year: 1982 THROUGH 1987 ECM EQUIPPED VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The purpose of this bulletin is to introduce new ECM test procedures to reduce the possibility of multiple ECM failures on any one vehicle. Since 1982, most ECM's have used an integrated circuit (IC) in place of separate transistors to turn "on" or "off" different components controlled by the ECM. These IC's are called quad drivers (QDR). Each QDR has four separate outputs, meaning it can turn "on" or "off" four different items independently. A failed QDR usually results in an ECM output becoming either shorted to ground or open. Many times all four QDR output will be inoperative if just one vehicle circuit is faulty. The revised diagnosis incorporates new test procedures designed to identify a damaged QDR. Once identified, the circuit must be repaired to reduce the incidence of repeat ECM failures. This chart replaces the current service manual procedure for either: 1. Chart C-1 ECM replacement check, or 2. Any diagnostic chart where "replace ECM" is the conclusion, especially if a footnote indicates checking certain circuits for less than 20 OHM's resistance. It is strongly suggested that this chart be used whenever an ECM replacement is indicated for 1982 through 1987 vehicles. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1213 QDR Application Chart QDR Application Chart For CHART C-1 The following chart contains ECM QDR arrangement for all ECM models thru 1987.* Important Note: ^ Many 82-83 ECMs did not use QDRs, and will not appear on the chart. ^ This procedure will not work on any ECM Service Number which does not appear on the chart. (This is because such an ECM does not contain QDRs.) ^ Not all available QDR outputs are used for ECM application. Verify circuit usage from the ECM wiring diagrams for each specific engine using Section "6E" of the service manual. *Additional ECMs listed on page 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1214 ECM - CHECK CHART Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1215 QDR APPLICATION CHART QDR Application Chart For CHART C-1 The following chart contains ECM QDR arrangement for all ECM models thru 1987. Important Note: ^ Many 82-83 ECMs did not use QDRs, and will not appear on the chart. ^ This procedure will not work on any ECM Service Number which does not appear on the chart. (This is because such an ECM does not contain QDRs.) ^ Not all available QDR outputs are used for ECM application. Verify circuit usage from the ECM wiring diagrams for each specific engine using Section "6E" of the service manual. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions For information regarding B, C, P, U and Manufacturer Code Descriptions - Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit > Component Information > Specifications Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit: Specifications IDLE SPEED CONTROL Measured between terminals A& B and C & D. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit > Component Information > Specifications Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit: Specifications IDLE SPEED CONTROL Measured between terminals A& B and C & D. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair MODULE REPLACEMENT 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove module retaining screws, then lift module upward. 3. Disconnect module electrical connector. Note position of electrical connector prior to disconnecting. Remove module from distributor. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Check to ensure that module electrical connector is installed in proper position. If module is not being replaced, do not wipe grease from module or distributor base. If new module is to be installed, coat module and distributor base with pack of grease supplied with replacement module. PICKUP COIL, REPLACE 1. Remove distributor from engine. 2. Mark relationship of distributor shaft and driven gear for reference during assembly. 3. Remove roll pin and driven gear from shaft. 4. Remove distributor cap, magnetic shield (if equipped), shaft and rotor. 5. Remove C-washer on top of pickup coil assembly, then disconnect pickup coil leads from module and remove pickup coil assembly. 6. Reverse procedure to install. HALL EFFECT SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED), REPLACE 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove switch retaining screws, then while pulling switch away, remove wiring connector. Remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. NOTE: After Hall Effect switch is installed, spin distributor shaft to ensure teeth do not touch. If necessary loosen, then re-tighten pickup coil teeth and Hall Effect switch to eliminate contact. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor <--> [Barometric Pressure Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications Absolute Pressure Sensor: Specifications MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE, VACUUM AND BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSORS Engines may use one, or a combination of these sensors. All sensors appear the same. Manifold Absolute Pressure sensors have a vacuum line connected between the unit and manifold vacuum. On Barometric Pressure sensors, the line is not used and the connector is either open or has a filter installed over it. Pressure sensors also have a vacuum line between the sensor and intake manifold and only appear on carburetted models. Barometric Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Start engine and apply 10 in./ 250 mm Hg to unit, voltage should be 1.2-2.3 volts less. Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage as indicated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Improved Kit CORPORATE NUMBER: 436501R NUMBER: 84-T-101 GROUP: 6B - Engine Cooling IMPORTANT - All Service Personnel Should Read DATE: November, 1986 SUBJECT: COOLANT SENSOR KIT MODELS: 1980-84 LIGHT DUTY MODELS EQUIPPED WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL All 1980-84 Caballeros and all 1980-84 vehicles equipped with NB2 California emissions were built with engines incorporating computer command control. Many coolant sensors have been replaced on these vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 GM vehicles using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit > Page 1238 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Service Kit Number: 84-270 Section: 6E Date: NOV., 1986 Subject: COOLANT SENSOR KIT Model and Year: 1980-84 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL 1982-84 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS WITH CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Many coolant sensors have been replaced on 1980 to 1984 vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" Light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 cars and 1982-84 Light Duty Trucks using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1239 TEMPERATURE SENSORS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications TEMPERATURE SENSORS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 Number: 90-199-6E Section: 6E Date: March 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 016510 Subject: REVISED CHART C-1D, CODE 33, 34, 63, 64 Model and Year: 1980-90 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin revises the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Output Check Chart C-1D and updates Code 33, Code 34, Code 63, and Code 64 in the Service Manual section on "Driveability And Emissions" (Section 6E1, 6E2, and 6E3). This information applies to all MAP Sensors on 1980-1990 vehicles with gasoline engines (except turbocharged) with green (standard) MAP sensor electrical connector insert or the solid black MAP sensor electrical connector insert. The revised chart information: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1247 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1248 - Diagnostic Chart C-1D. The updated chart information: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1249 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1250 - Diagnostic Chart Code 33. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1251 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1252 - Diagnostic Chart Code 34. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1253 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1254 - Diagnostic Chart Code 63. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1255 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1256 - Diagnostic Chart Code 64. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1257 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications Manifold Absolute, Vacuum, and Barometric Pressure Sensors Engines may use one, or a combination of these sensors. All sensors appear the same. Manifold Absolute Pressure sensors have a vacuum line connected between the unit and manifold vacuum. On Barometric Pressure sensors, the line is not used and the connector is either open or has a filter installed over it. Pressure sensors also have a vacuum line between the sensor and intake manifold and only appear on carbureted models. Barometric Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Start engine and apply 10 in./250 mm Hg to unit, voltage should be: 3.8L Turbo 4V, 0.9-1.7 volts less; others, 1.2-2.3 volts less. Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage as indicated. 5 volts reference. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1258 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 008 - Chart C-1D Map and Baro Output Check NOTE: MAP and BARO sensors are essentially the same device--one--MAP--measures the difference between pressure in the manifold and atmospheric pressure, and the other--BARO--measures atmospheric pressure. 1. Check that sensor voltage is highest when manifold pressure is highest--output normally is in the middle range for specific altitudes. - Low voltage increases spark advance. - High voltage decreases spark advance. 2. Check to see if the rate of change of the output VS change in pressure is correct--normal change would be about the middle of the range listed. - The voltage should change as soon as the vacuum is changed. - If it doesn't, it could result in detonation or a sag on acceleration which could also be caused by fuel or a restriction in the hose to the sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > RTV Sealants - Use on Engines With Oxygen Sensors Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins RTV Sealants - Use on Engines With Oxygen Sensors NUMBER: 86-B-28 GROUP: 6 - Gasoline Engine DATE: March, 1986 SUBJECT: RTV (AEROBIC SEALANTS) AND ANAEROBIC SEALANTS FOR ENGINES EQUIPPED WITH OXYGEN SENSORS MODELS: 1981-86 C, K, G, S, T, M, AND CABALLEROS WITH YF5 CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS 1985-86 S, T, AND M WITH 2.5L EFI AND NA Incorrect usage of RTV sealants (cure in the presence of air) may cause damage to vehicle components such as oxygen sensors. This is caused by silica particles collecting on the oxygen sensor and contaminating the sensor. The correct application for RTV sealants is listed in the WDDGM parts book. The correct RTV sealants to use on engines in GMC Trucks are part numbers 1052914 or 1052917 (black) or part number 1052915 (clear). Red RTV sealant, part number 1052366, is for use on rear axle differential covers only, as it contains silica. Anaerobic sealers (cure without the presence of air) part numbers 1052756, 1052943, and 1052942 are also used to seal the rear main bearing cap to the block on engines used in GMC Trucks. See the chart below for a description of General Motors service approved RTV silicone and anaerobic sealers. GENERAL MOTORS SERVICE APPROVED RTV SILICONE SEALANTS Part Name Color Part Number Size Application GMS (Type B) Black 1052914 300 ml. Caulker All Light 1052917 3 oz. Tube Duty Engines Except 2.5L GMS (Type A) Clear 1052915 300 ml. Caulker 2.5L 4 Cylinder GMS Red 1052366 3 oz. Tube Rear Axle Usage Only GENERAL MOTORS SERVICE APPROVED ANAEROBIC SEALANTS Part Name Part Number Size Application Loctite (R) Gasket Maker 1052942 6 ml. Engine Anaerobic Applications 1052943 50 ml. 1052756 6 ml. Loctite (R) Transmission Case Cover 1052756 6 ml. Transmission Case Covers Sealant Loctite (R) Trim Bonding Adhesive 1052621 4 gm. Trim, Super Glue Loctite (R) Pipe Sealant w/Teflon 1052080 50 ml. Pipe Sealant Loctite (R) Thread Locking Kit 1052624 10 ml. Thread Locking, Retaining Compound Loctite (R) Inside Mirror Adhesive Kit 1052369 0.4 cc. Inside Rear View Mirror GENERAL MOTORS OTHER APPROVED SEALANTS Part Name Part Number Application Gasket Sealing Compound 1050026 Gasket Sealing Adhesive Caulking Kit 9636067 Windshield, Back Glass, Anywhere Urethane Based Sealer Is Required Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications 84-235 6C (VI) Feb., 1985 Subject: TPS SETTINGS - ALL GASOLINE ENGINES Model and Year: 1981 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Listed below are all Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) settings for 1981 thru 1984. ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1981 Buick 3.8L A .97V High step of fast idle cam Buick 3.8L Turbo "A" Car 1.30V High step of fast idle cam Buick 4.1L .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L 9 .41V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L X .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L K .41V ISC retracted at slow idle Chevrolet 4.4L .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L H .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.7L .56V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L Y .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L 5 .51V Stopped at curb idle 1982 Buick 3.8L Non-Turbo A .77V High step of fast idle cam Chev. 1.6L Minimum System C .92V High step of fast idle cam (Fed) Chev. 1.6L Full Function C .40V Stopped at curb idle (Calif) Chev. 1.8L L4 G .26V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. 2.8L V6 X,Z,1 .26V Stopped at curb idle Chev. 3.8L V6 .36V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. All V8 H,7 .51V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L, 4.3L .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 .525V Ign. on, engine off ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1983 Buick 3.8L A .86V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .26V Curb idle solenoid retracted Chevrolet 3.8L 9 .36V ISC retracted (min. idle) Chevrolet 5.0L H,S,7 .51V Curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L .46V ILC retracted Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications > Page 1267 Curb idle 1984 Buick 3.8L A .46V Curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Curb idle Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L G,H .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .30V Throttle kicker retracted *Non-Adjustable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications 84-235 6C (VI) Feb., 1985 Subject: TPS SETTINGS - ALL GASOLINE ENGINES Model and Year: 1981 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Listed below are all Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) settings for 1981 thru 1984. ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1981 Buick 3.8L A .97V High step of fast idle cam Buick 3.8L Turbo "A" Car 1.30V High step of fast idle cam Buick 4.1L .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L 9 .41V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L X .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L K .41V ISC retracted at slow idle Chevrolet 4.4L .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L H .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.7L .56V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L Y .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L 5 .51V Stopped at curb idle 1982 Buick 3.8L Non-Turbo A .77V High step of fast idle cam Chev. 1.6L Minimum System C .92V High step of fast idle cam (Fed) Chev. 1.6L Full Function C .40V Stopped at curb idle (Calif) Chev. 1.8L L4 G .26V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. 2.8L V6 X,Z,1 .26V Stopped at curb idle Chev. 3.8L V6 .36V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. All V8 H,7 .51V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L, 4.3L .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 .525V Ign. on, engine off ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1983 Buick 3.8L A .86V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .26V Curb idle solenoid retracted Chevrolet 3.8L 9 .36V ISC retracted (min. idle) Chevrolet 5.0L H,S,7 .51V Curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L .46V ILC retracted Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications > Page 1273 Curb idle 1984 Buick 3.8L A .46V Curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Curb idle Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L G,H .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .30V Throttle kicker retracted *Non-Adjustable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Hall Effect Switch <--> [Hall Effect Sensor, Ignition] > Component Information > Service and Repair Hall Effect Switch: Service and Repair HALL EFFECT SWITCH (If Equipped), REPLACE 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove switch retaining screws, then while pulling switch away, remove wiring connector. Remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. NOTE: After Hall Effect switch is installed, spin distributor shaft to ensure teeth do not touch. If necessary loosen, then re-tighten pickup coil teeth and Hall Effect switch to eliminate contact. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Light Duty ............................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 5.5 - 7.0 psi Heavy Duty ................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. 7.5 - 9.0 psi (with vapor return hose pinched off) Volume ................................................................................................................................................ ................................. 1 pint or more in 30 seconds Vacuum ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................... at least 15 in HG Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel Pump Pressure Test 1. Disconnect fuel line at carburetor and connect a suitable pressure gage. 2. Start engine and check pressure with engine running at slow idle speed. Fuel pump pressure should be as specified. 3. If fuel pump pressure is below 17-45 kPa (2.5 - 6.5 psi), pump must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel System Diagnosis > Page 1284 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pump Pressure Test - Mechanical Fuel Pump Fuel Pump Pressure Test 1. Disconnect fuel line at pump and connect a suitable pressure gage. 2. Start engine and check pressure with engine running at slow idle speed. Fuel pump pressure should be as specified. On vehicles equipped with a vapor return system squeeze off the return hose so that an accurate reading can be obtained. 3. If fuel pump pressure is below minimum, pump must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Light Duty NOTE: Vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) below 6000 lbs (8500 lbs for California), and passenger carrying vehicles with a capacity of 12 persons or less, are Light Duty Emissions Vehicles. NOTE: Idle mixture needles have been preset at the factory and sealed. Idle mixture should be adjusted only in the case of major carburetor overhaul, throttle body replacement or high emissions as determined by official inspections. Adjusting mixture by other than the following method may violate Federal and or California or other state or Provincial laws. Because of the sealed idle mixture needles, the idle mixture checking procedure requires artificial enrichment by adding propane. 1. Set parking brake and block drive wheel. Engine must be at normal operating temperature and air conditioning off. 2. Disconnect and plug EGR and cannister purge vacuum hoses. 3. Connect an accurate tachometer to engine. 4. Disconnect vacuum advance and set timing to specification. Reconnect vacuum hose. See: Ignition Timing 5. Set carburetor idle speed to specification. See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Adjustments 6. Disconnect crankcase ventilation tube from air cleaner. Fig. 61 - Propane Enrichment Tool Installation 7. Using tool J-26911, insert hose with rubber stopper, from propane valve into crankcase ventilation tube opening in air cleaner. Propane cartridge must be vertical. 8. With engine idling in drive (neutral for manual shifts) slowly open propane control valve while pressing button. Continue to add propane until speed drops due to over richness. Note maximum engine speed (enriched speed). 9. If the enriched idle speed is within the enriched idle specification the mixture is correct. Go to step 17. Enrichment Specification: See: Idle Speed/Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty > Page 1289 10. If the enriched idle speed is not within specification, remove mixture screw plugs as follows: - Remove carburetor from engine to gain access to the plugs covering the idle mixture needles. - Invert carburetor on a suitable holding fixture, manifold side up. NOTE: Use care to avoid damaging linkage, tubes, and parts protruding from the air horn. - Make two parallel cuts in the throttle body on either side of the locator points beneath the idle mixture needle plug (manifold side) with a hack saw. The cuts should not extend more than 1/8 inch beyond the locator points. The distance between the saw marks depends on the size of the punch to be used. - Place a flat punch at a point near the ends of the saw marks in the throttle body. Holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive it into the throttle body until the casing breaks away, exposing the steel plug. - Holding a center punch vertical, drive it into the steel plug. - Then holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive the plug out of the casting. NOTE: Hardened plug may break rather than remain intact. It is not necessary to remove the plug completely, instead, remove loose pieces. - Repeat procedure for the remaining mixture needle and re-install carburetor. 11. Using tool J29030 or equivalent, lightly seat mixture needles, then back out equally, just enough so engine will run. 12. Place transmission in drive (automatic) or neutral (manual). 13. Back each screw out (richen 1/8 turn at a time until maximum idle speed is obtained). Then using base idle speed adjustment screw, set idle speed to the enriched idle specification. See: Idle Speed/Specifications 14. Turn each mixture screw in (clockwise) 1/8 turn at a time until idle speed reaches base idle speed. 15. Re-check enriched speed with propane. If not within specification, repeat adjustment beginning with step 12. 16. After adjustments are complete, seal the idle mixture needle setting using silicone sealant or equivalent. The sealer is required to prevent tampering with the setting and to prevent the possibility of loss of fuel vapors. 17. Check and adjust fast idle speed. See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Adjustments 18. Turn off engine. Remove propane tool, connect crankcase ventilation tube. Unplug and reconnect vacuum hoses. Install air cleaner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty > Page 1290 Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Heavy Duty NOTES: - Idle mixture needles have been preset at the factory and sealed. Idle mixture should be adjusted only in the case of major carburetor overhaul, throttle body replacement, or high emissions as determined by official inspections. - If necessary, remove idle needle plugs: Perform this adjustment with engine at operating temperature, parking brake applied, drive wheels blocked and transmission in park or neutral. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove air cleaner. 2. Connect tachometer and vacuum gage to engine. 3. As a preliminary adjustment, turn idle mixture needles in lightly to seat and back out 2 turns. NOTE: Do not turn idle mixture needle tightly against seat or damage may result. 4. With engine running (choke wide open and transmission in neutral) adjust idle speed screw to curb idle speed. See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Idle Speed 5. Adjust each idle mixture needle to obtain highest RPM. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until "best" idle is obtained. 7. If necessary, reset curb idle speed. See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Idle Speed/Federal 8. After adjustments are complete, seal the idle mixture needle setting using silicone sealant or equivalent. 9. Check and if necessary, adjust throttle lever actuator.See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Idle Speed 10. Check and if necessary, adjust fast idle speed. See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Fast Idle Speed 11. Turn off engine, remove gages, unplug and reconnect vacuum hoses. Install air cleaner. 12. Remove block from drive wheel. CONCEALMENT PLUG REMOVAL - Remove carburetor from engine to gain access to the plugs covering the idle mixture needles. - Invert carburetor on a suitable holding fixture, manifold side up. NOTE: Use care to avoid damaging linkage, tubes, and parts protruding from the air horn. - Make two parallel cuts in the throttle body on either side of the locator points beneath the idle mixture needle plug (manifold side) with a hack saw. The cuts should not extend more than 1/8 inch beyond the locator points. The distance between the saw marks depends on the size of the punch to be used. - Place a flat punch at a point near the ends of the saw marks in the throttle body. Holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive it into the throttle body until the casing breaks away, exposing the steel plug. - Holding a center punch vertical, drive it into the steel plug. - Then holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive the plug out of the casting. NOTE: Hardened plug may break rather than remain intact. It is not necessary to remove the plug completely, instead, remove loose pieces. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty > Page 1291 - Repeat procedure for the remaining mixture needle and re-install carburetor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Enriched Idle Speed Idle Speed: Specifications Enriched Idle Speed ENRICHED IDLE SPEED Carburetor Number 17082221 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 150 17082225 .................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 150 17082222 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 50 17082224 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 50 17082226 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 50 17082227 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 50 17082506 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 50 17082508 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 50 17082223 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 100 17082231 .................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 100 17082235 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 100 17082291 .................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 100 17082293 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 100 17082230 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 20 17082234 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 20 17082524 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 20 17082526 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 20 17082290 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 40 17082292 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 40 NOTE: Enriched Idle Speed value is added to base idle speed. This value is used during the idle mixture adjustment procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Enriched Idle Speed > Page 1296 Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed NOTE: Vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) below 6000 lbs (8500 lbs for California), and passenger carrying vehicles with a capacity of 12 persons or less, are Light Duty Emissions Vehicles. CURB IDLE SPEED Light Duty Automatic ............................................................................................................................................. ............................... 500 rpm (California 550) Manual ......................................................................... ........................................................................................................ 600 rpm (High Alt. 700) Heavy Duty Automatic ............................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 700 rpm Manual ......................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. 700 rpm A/C ON IDLE SPEED Manual Federal ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 750 rpm California ................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... 650 rpm Automatic Federal ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 600 rpm California ................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... 650 rpm FAST IDLE SPEED Light Duty Automatic ............................................................................................................................................. ........................... 1600 rpm (California 1800) Manual ......................................................................... .............................................................................................. 1300 rpm (High Altitude 1600) Heavy Duty Automatic/Manual ................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 1900 rpm NOTE: Measured on high cam step. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed Idle Speed: Adjustments Idle Speed California NOTE: On engines equipped with an Idle Speed Control (ISC) motor, idle speed is controlled by an electrical signal from the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Do not use the ISC plunger to adjust curb idle. The motor varies idle speed from a base (minimum authority) to a high (maximum authority) idle speed. Do not adjust unless diagnosis indicates a malfunction. Check for proper base and high idle speed as follows. CAUTION: DO NOT disconnect or connect ISC connector with ignition "ON" as damage to the ECM may occur. 1. Perform preliminary procedures: - Check and adjust ignition timing. - Disconnect and plug vacuum lines for evaporative purge and EGR valve. 2. Before starting engine, place transmission in "PARK" (automatic) or "NEUTRAL" (manual), set parking brake and block drive wheels. 3. Connect dwell meter to Mixture Control (M/C) solenoid dwell lead. This is a green connection breaking out of the main wiring harness leading to carburetor. NOTE: Remember to set dwell meter on the six cylinder scale, regardless of the engine being tested. 4. Turn A/C "OFF". 5. Start engine and run until stabilized and in "closed loop" mode (dwell meter needle starts to vary). 6. Turn ignition "OFF". CAUTION: Do not unplug ISC connector with ignition "ON" as damage to motor will occur. 7. Unplug connector from ISC motor. 8. Fully retract ISC plunger by applying 12 volts to terminal "C" ad grounding lead to terminal "D" of the ISC motor connection. CAUTION: DO NOT leave battery voltage applied to motor longer than necessary to retract ISC plunger. Prolonged contact will damage motor. Also, NEVER connect voltage source across terminal "A" and "B" as damage to the internal throttle contact switch will result. 9. Start engine and run until dwell meter needle starts to vary, indicating "closed loop" operation. 10. Place automatic transmission in "DRIVE". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1299 11. With ISC plunger fully retracted, adjust carburetor base (slow idle stop screw to 470 RPM (minimum authority). 12. Place transmission in "PARK" (automatic transmissions). 13. Fully extend ISC plunger by applying 12 volts to terminal "D" and grounding lead to terminal "C" of the ISC motor connection. Leave power applied only long enough to extend the plunger. 14. MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS: Using tool J29607 or BT-8022 or equivalent, turn ISC plunger to obtain 900 RPM (Maximum Authority). 15. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS: - With transmission in "PARK", using tool J-29607, BT-8022 or equivalent, preset ISC plunger to obtain 1500 RPM. - With parking brake set and drive wheels blocked, place transmission in "DRIVE". Turn ISC plunger to obtain 900 RPM (Maximum Authority). 16. Recheck ISC "Maximum Authority" RPM with voltage applied to ISC motor (step 13). Motor will ratchet at full extension with power applied. 17. After adjustment of ISC plunger, measure distance from back side of plunger head to ISC nosepiece. Dimension "B" must not exceed that shown in below chart. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1300 18. Fully retract ISC plunger (step 8). Place transmission in "PARK" (automatic) or "NEUTRAL" (manual) and turn ignition "OFF". Disconnect 12 volt power source, ground lead, tachometer and dwell meters. With ignition "OFF" reconnect four terminal harness connector to ISC motor. 19. "TRICKING" the ISC motor as described will cause the "CHECK ENGINE" light to come on and an ISC motor trouble code to be set. By restoring the system to normal operation, the light will go out, but the trouble code will continue to be stored as an "INTERMITTENT" problem. In this case, it will be necessary to clear the diagnostic trouble codes by removing the ECM fuse from the fuse block for about 10 seconds. Federal PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES - Warm engine to normal operating temperature (upper radiator hose hot). - Turn "OFF" all accessories, including A/C. - Check Timing (adjust if not to specification). See: Ignition Timing - Connect tachometer. CAUTION: Exercise care not to ground the TACH terminal (which is located next to the BAT connector) as this may damage the Electronic Control Module (ECM) or coil. CURB IDLE SPEED - Disconnect and plug vacuum hose to EGR valve and canister purge. - Adjust curb idle speed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1301 Without A/C Turn idle speed screw to specified curb idle (automatic transmissions in drive with wheels blocked and parking brake set). See: Specifications With A/C With A/C "OFF", turn idle speed screw to specified curb idle (automatic transmissions in drive with wheels blocked and parking brake set). - Disconnect wire to A/C compressor clutch and turn A/C "ON". - Open throttle momentarily to assure solenoid plunger is fully extended. - Turn solenoid screw to the specified idle speed. See: Specifications - Reconnect wire to compressor clutch. THROTTLE LEVER ACTUATOR - Disconnect vacuum hose from solenoid valve to the actuator diaphragm. - Connect an external vacuum source to the diaphragm and apply 20 inches of vacuum. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1302 - Manually open the throttle slightly and allow it to close against the extended actuator plunger. With engine warm, idle speed should be: Federal - 1500 rpm California - 1600 rpm NOTE: The throttle lever actuator is designed to control emissions by holding the throttle open slightly during deceleration and coasting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1303 Idle Speed: Adjustments Fast Idle Speed PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES - Warm engine to normal operating temperature (upper radiator hose hot). - Turn "OFF" all accessories, including A/C. - Check Timing (adjust if not to specification). - Connect tachometer. CAUTION: Exercise care not to ground the TACH terminal (which is located next to the BAT connector) as this may damage the Electronic Control Module (ECM) or coil. ADJUST FAST IDLE SPEED - Transmission in "PARK" or "NEUTRAL". - Disconnect and plug EGR vacuum line. - Place cam on "HIGH" step. - Turn fast idle screw to obtain specified rpm. See: Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 1313 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 1319 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 1325 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 1331 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Throttle Body Injected Engines 1. Remove fuel pump fuse from fuse box. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and replace fuel pump fuse. Port Injected Engines 1. Disconnect fuel tank harness connector. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and reconnect fuel tank harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Ignition Firing Order FIRING ORDER Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Number 1 Cylinder Location FIRING ORDER Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Timing Marks and Indicators > System Information > Locations Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug Wire <--> [Ignition Cable] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spark Plug Wire: > 93356D > Oct > 92 > Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Spark Plug Wire: Customer Interest Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Number: 93-35-6D Section: 6D Date: OCT. 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 716404R ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: ENGINE MISS HESITATION OR ROUGHNESS DUE TO PIERCED SECONDARY IGNITION COMPONENTS Model and Year: 1980-93 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 87-121, DATED MAY 1987. THE 1989-93 MODEL YEARS HAVE BEEN ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 87-121 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. During the diagnosis procedure for an engine miss, hesitation or roughness, a spark plug or spark plug wire condition may be suspected. Several types of commercial or homemade diagnostic equipment required the secondary ignition boots or wire to be pierced. This is normally done to check for spark plug firing or to perform a cylinder balance test. Similarly the use of pliers or other such tools to disengage a spark plug boot may pierce or damage the boot or wire. Secondary ignition components should not be pierced for any reason. Piercing a spark plug wire and/or distributor boot may create a condition that will not be immediately apparent. Over time, the hole in the pierced boot may allow a ground path to develop creating a plug misfire condition. Heavily moisture laden air in the vicinity of the pierced boot may accelerate this effect. Piercing a secondary ignition wire creates a gap in the wire's conductive core. This gap is a point of high resistance. The current flow in the wire will increase to compensate for the higher wire resistance. Over time, the wire may fail creating a plug misfire condition. The time required for the condition to appear depends upon the extent of damage to the conductive core. To help prevent future condition that are spark plug wire related, do not pierce or otherwise damage any secondary ignition component. Only use diagnostic equipment containing an inductive pick-up to check for spark plug firing or to perform cylinder balance tests. When disengaging a spark plug boot from the spark plug, twist the flanged boot 1/2 turn then pull on the boot only to remove the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug Wire <--> [Ignition Cable] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spark Plug Wire: > 93356D > Oct > 92 > Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Spark Plug Wire: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Number: 93-35-6D Section: 6D Date: OCT. 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 716404R ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: ENGINE MISS HESITATION OR ROUGHNESS DUE TO PIERCED SECONDARY IGNITION COMPONENTS Model and Year: 1980-93 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 87-121, DATED MAY 1987. THE 1989-93 MODEL YEARS HAVE BEEN ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 87-121 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. During the diagnosis procedure for an engine miss, hesitation or roughness, a spark plug or spark plug wire condition may be suspected. Several types of commercial or homemade diagnostic equipment required the secondary ignition boots or wire to be pierced. This is normally done to check for spark plug firing or to perform a cylinder balance test. Similarly the use of pliers or other such tools to disengage a spark plug boot may pierce or damage the boot or wire. Secondary ignition components should not be pierced for any reason. Piercing a spark plug wire and/or distributor boot may create a condition that will not be immediately apparent. Over time, the hole in the pierced boot may allow a ground path to develop creating a plug misfire condition. Heavily moisture laden air in the vicinity of the pierced boot may accelerate this effect. Piercing a secondary ignition wire creates a gap in the wire's conductive core. This gap is a point of high resistance. The current flow in the wire will increase to compensate for the higher wire resistance. Over time, the wire may fail creating a plug misfire condition. The time required for the condition to appear depends upon the extent of damage to the conductive core. To help prevent future condition that are spark plug wire related, do not pierce or otherwise damage any secondary ignition component. Only use diagnostic equipment containing an inductive pick-up to check for spark plug firing or to perform cylinder balance tests. When disengaging a spark plug boot from the spark plug, twist the flanged boot 1/2 turn then pull on the boot only to remove the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Specifications Distributor: Specifications DISTRIBUTOR TIMING ADVANCE Degrees advance at engine rpm, no load, in addition to basic timing. Mechanical advance distributors only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1364 Distributor: Application and ID HEI distributors with EST can be identified by the following; They have no distributor mounted vacuum controls--spark timing is controlled electronically. - With EST system uses a seven terminal High Energy Ignition (HEI) module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Replacement Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Replacement 1. Disconnect battery and tachometer lead from distributor cap. 2. Disconnect coil connectors from distributor cap and 4 terminal connector (if equipped). NOTE: Do not use a tool of any kind to release coil connectors or damage to lock tabs will result. 3. Remove distributor cap with ignition high tension wires connected and position aside. Remove vacuum hose (if equipped). 4. Remove distributor clamp screw and hold-down clamp. 5. Mark relationship of rotor to distributor housing, then lift distributor from engine slightly until rotor stops turning. Mark relationship of new rotor position on distributor housing, then remove distributor from engine. 6. If engine was not cranked after distributor was removed from engine, proceed as follows: a. Position rotor to align with second mark made on distributor housing prior to removing distributor. b. Install distributor into engine and align rotor with first mark made on distributor housing prior to removing distributor. c. Install distributor cap and connect all electrical connectors. d. Adjust ignition timing as specified in individual car chapters. 7. If engine was cranked after distributor was removed from engine, proceed as follows: a. Remove No. 1 spark plug and crank engine until compression pressure is felt in No. 1 cylinder. Slowly rotate engine until top dead center is indicated. b. Turn rotor to a position just ahead of No. 1 spark plug tower on distributor cap. c. Install distributor. Connect 4 terminal connector (if equipped). d. Install distributor cap, coil connectors, tachometer lead and battery feed wire. e. Adjust ignition timing to specifications in Tune Up Section. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Replacement > Page 1367 Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Overhaul Fig 1 Removing distributor shield. Models equipped with 6 & 8 cylinder engines Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Replacement > Page 1368 Fig 2 Pickup coil disassembled. Models equipped with 6 & 8 cylinder engines 1. Remove cap and coil as an assembly. 2. Remove rotor and pickup coil leads from module. 3. Mark relationship of distributor shaft and driven gear for reference during assembly. 4. Remove roll pin and driven gear. 5. Remove distributor shaft assembly. 6. Remove shield, Fig. 1. 7. Remove retaining ring, pickup coil, magnet and pole piece, Fig. 2. 8. Remove module retaining screws and capacitor screw, then remove module, capacitor and harness assembly from distributor. 9. Disconnect wiring harness from module. Reverse procedure to assemble. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Torque Spark Plug: Specifications Plug Tightening Torque 17 - 27 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Torque > Page 1373 SPARK PLUGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Minimum, 698 kPa (100 psi) @ 200 rpm. The lowest cylinder reading should not be less than 80% of the highest. Perform compression test with engine at normal operating temperature, spark plugs removed and throttle wide open. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications FRONT TO REAR 6-250, 292.............................................................................................................. ..............................................................................E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E V6-231................................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......................E-I-I-E-I-E V6-262 Left Side............................................................................................ .....................................................................................................................E-I-E-I-I-E Right Side....... .............................................................................................................................................................. ..........................................E-I-I-E-I-E V8-267, 305, 350, 400............................................................... .......................................................................................................................E-I-I-E-E-I-I-E V8-454.... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................E-I-E-I-E-I-E-I Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1380 Valve Clearance: Adjustments STATIC ADJUSTMENT NOTE: This procedure does not apply to 231 V-6 engines. 1. Start engine and allow to reach normal operating temperature, then shut engine off. 2. With engine in position to fire No. 1 cylinder, adjust the following valves: V6-229 and 262, Exhaust Nos. 1, 5 and 6; Intake Nos. 1, 2 and 3. 6-250 and 292, Exhaust Nos. 1, 3 and 5; Intake Nos. 1, 2 and 4. V8 engines, Exhaust Nos. 1, 3, 4 and 8; Intake Nos. 1, 2, 5 and 7. To properly adjust valves, tighten adjusting nut until all lash is eliminated, then tighten nut the specified additional number of turns. On V8-454 / 7.4L engine, tighten nut 3/4 additional turn from zero lash. On all others, tighten nut one full turn from zero lash. 3. Turn crankshaft one complete revolution, which will bring engine in position to fire cylinders 4(V6) or 6(Inline 6 and V8). With engine in this position, adjust the following valves: V6-229 and 262, Exhaust Nos. 2, 3 and 4; Intake Nos. 4, 5 and 6. 6-250 and 292, Exhaust Nos. 2, 4 and 6; Intake Nos. 3, 5 and 6. V8 engines, Exhaust Nos. 2, 5, 6 and 7; Intake Nos. 3, 4, 6 and 8. When zero lash is obtained, tighten adjusting nuts as specified in step 2. ENGINE RUNNING ADJUSTMENT NOTE: The following procedure, performed with the engine running, should be done only in case readjustment is required. 1. After engine has been warmed to operating temperature, remove valve cover and install a new valve cover gasket. 2. With engine running at idle speed, back off valve rocker arm nut until rocker arm starts to clatter. 3. Turn rocker arm nut down slowly until the clatter just stops. This is the zero lash position. 4. Turn nut down 1/4 additional turn and pause 10 seconds until engine runs smoothly. Repeat additional 1/4 turns, pausing 10 seconds each time, until nut has been turned down the specified number of turns from the zero lash position. This preload adjustment must be done slowly to allow the lifter to adjust itself to prevent the possibility of interference between the intake valve head and top of piston, which might result in internal damage and/or bent pushrods. Noisy lifters should be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications TEMPERATURE SENSORS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor <--> [Barometric Pressure Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications Absolute Pressure Sensor: Specifications MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE, VACUUM AND BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSORS Engines may use one, or a combination of these sensors. All sensors appear the same. Manifold Absolute Pressure sensors have a vacuum line connected between the unit and manifold vacuum. On Barometric Pressure sensors, the line is not used and the connector is either open or has a filter installed over it. Pressure sensors also have a vacuum line between the sensor and intake manifold and only appear on carburetted models. Barometric Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Start engine and apply 10 in./ 250 mm Hg to unit, voltage should be 1.2-2.3 volts less. Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage as indicated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Improved Kit CORPORATE NUMBER: 436501R NUMBER: 84-T-101 GROUP: 6B - Engine Cooling IMPORTANT - All Service Personnel Should Read DATE: November, 1986 SUBJECT: COOLANT SENSOR KIT MODELS: 1980-84 LIGHT DUTY MODELS EQUIPPED WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL All 1980-84 Caballeros and all 1980-84 vehicles equipped with NB2 California emissions were built with engines incorporating computer command control. Many coolant sensors have been replaced on these vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 GM vehicles using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit > Page 1392 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Service Kit Number: 84-270 Section: 6E Date: NOV., 1986 Subject: COOLANT SENSOR KIT Model and Year: 1980-84 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL 1982-84 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS WITH CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Many coolant sensors have been replaced on 1980 to 1984 vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" Light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 cars and 1982-84 Light Duty Trucks using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1393 TEMPERATURE SENSORS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification Number: 90-56-8 Section: 8 Date: September 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 916521R Subject: PACKARD 32 WAY CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION Model and Year: 1980-90 A, B, F, G, J, L, W, Y CARS AND ALL TRUCKS WITH GMP4 ECM APPLICATIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin serves to clarify the labeling of the Packard 32 way connectors used on the GMP4 under dash ECMS. Currently a common strain relief is used in both the C-D 32 pin and the E-F 32 pin connectors. To properly identify these connectors, the strain reliefs must be removed. Use the lettering on the connector as shown on figure. The colors used at this time for the 32 pin E-F connector are yellow, mint green or orange. This updates any previous information released concerning identification that indicates any of these colors as being C & D connectors, found in the 6E and 8D Sections of the affected Service Manuals. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1398 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM/PCM - Damaged and/or Misdiagnosed Number: 91-384-6E Section: 6E Date: AUGUST 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 176503 Subject: DAMAGED ECM/PCM AND/OR MIS-DIAGNOSED ECM/PCM SYMPTOMS DUE TO INCORRECT "TAP-TESTING" PROCEDURES Model and Year: 1982-91 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS CONDITION: Because of the intermittent nature of some Electronic Control Module (ECM) or Powertrain Control Modules (PCM) symptoms, some service technicians have been subjecting the ECM/PCM to vibration and/or shock testing. Commonly known as tap-testing, this procedure involves tapping on the ECM/PCM case, while the engine is running. It is generally accepted that if the engine or ECM/PCM falters due to the tapping, an intermittent internal ECM/PCM defect may be indicated. However, this may not always be true. If too much force is applied to the ECM/PCM during the test the following symptoms may result: ^ Immediate ECM/PCM failure. ^ ECM/PCM suffers damage which may cause a failure at a later date. ^ ECM/PCM Reset (or Glitch), creating a momentary stall, miss Service Engine Soon (SES) light and/or loss of serial data. CAUSE: The ECM/PCM should be tapped using only the fingertips of one hand. Use of the palm, fist, or any type of tool subjects the ECM/PCM to forces that can cause both the circuit board and the outer aluminum case to flex and distort beyond design limits. The Integrated Circuits (IC) used in today's ECM/PCMs are mounted to the circuit board using a mounting process referred to as "surface technology." There are no circuit board holes for IC leads to go through. The IC leads set on pads, (28 pads or 52 pads depending on the IC) and solder is flowed around the leads to make the electrical connection to the circuit board. ^ Any flexing of the circuit board, beyond design limits, places the IC solder connections at risk of damage. Such damage may be apparent immediately, or it may appear at a future date. Circuit board deflection can occur as a result of striking the ECM/PCM, using ONLY THE PALM OF THE HAND. ^ If struck on the bottom side (the side opposite the service label), the ECM/PCM's aluminum outer case may deflect inward far enough to contact the electrical leads attached to the circuit board. Once in contact with the case the ECM/PCM electrical components will be shorted directly to ground. Although such shorting certainly has the potential to damage the ECM/PCM, it may not be permanent damage, depending on which circuit is involved. However, even if permanent damage is avoided, a short on any of the circuits will cause a disruption of normal ECM/PCM operation for the instant that the short occurs. This disruption may cause the ECM/PCM to reset (see "reset" above), creating the false impression that it is vibration sensitive or faulty. Reset is the ECM/PCM's normal way of coping with large voltage spikes. An ECM/PCM reset does not indicate that the ECM/PCM is defective or faulty, only that it is being subjected to abnormal conditions. CORRECTION: 1. TAP THE ECM/PCM ONLY ON THE TOP SIDE (The top side is where the service label is located.) ^ This will minimize the chance of deflecting the ECM/PCM case into the electrical leads on the circuit board. The clearance between the case and the circuit board is closest on the bottom side of the ECM/PCM. 2. TAP THE ECM/PCM USING ONLY THE FINGERTIPS - NO TOOLS. ^ To avoid excessive case deflection, avoid tapping in the center of the case. Tapping close to the edge of the ECM/PCM, especially in the corners, is best. ^ While using greater force may seem more effective, the test itself may cause the ECM/PCM to fail. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1399 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM May Contain Wrong PROM Number: 88-42 Section: 6E Date: Sept., 1987 Subject: SERVICE REPLACEMENT ELECTRONIC MODULES (ECM) WITH PROM INSTALLED Model and Year: 1981-88 ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS It has been brought to our attention that some service replacement electronic control modules (ECM's) have contained a PROM. A PROM should not have been included in a replacement ECM as it may not be the correct PROM for the vehicle. When this situation is encountered, the PROM should be removed from the replacement ECM and the PROM from the vehicle should be installed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1400 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Revised Replacement Procedure Number: 87-150 Section: 6E Date: MAY, 1987 Subject: REVISED ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE - CHART C-1 Model and Year: 1982 THROUGH 1987 ECM EQUIPPED VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The purpose of this bulletin is to introduce new ECM test procedures to reduce the possibility of multiple ECM failures on any one vehicle. Since 1982, most ECM's have used an integrated circuit (IC) in place of separate transistors to turn "on" or "off" different components controlled by the ECM. These IC's are called quad drivers (QDR). Each QDR has four separate outputs, meaning it can turn "on" or "off" four different items independently. A failed QDR usually results in an ECM output becoming either shorted to ground or open. Many times all four QDR output will be inoperative if just one vehicle circuit is faulty. The revised diagnosis incorporates new test procedures designed to identify a damaged QDR. Once identified, the circuit must be repaired to reduce the incidence of repeat ECM failures. This chart replaces the current service manual procedure for either: 1. Chart C-1 ECM replacement check, or 2. Any diagnostic chart where "replace ECM" is the conclusion, especially if a footnote indicates checking certain circuits for less than 20 OHM's resistance. It is strongly suggested that this chart be used whenever an ECM replacement is indicated for 1982 through 1987 vehicles. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1401 QDR Application Chart QDR Application Chart For CHART C-1 The following chart contains ECM QDR arrangement for all ECM models thru 1987.* Important Note: ^ Many 82-83 ECMs did not use QDRs, and will not appear on the chart. ^ This procedure will not work on any ECM Service Number which does not appear on the chart. (This is because such an ECM does not contain QDRs.) ^ Not all available QDR outputs are used for ECM application. Verify circuit usage from the ECM wiring diagrams for each specific engine using Section "6E" of the service manual. *Additional ECMs listed on page 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1402 ECM - CHECK CHART Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1403 QDR APPLICATION CHART QDR Application Chart For CHART C-1 The following chart contains ECM QDR arrangement for all ECM models thru 1987. Important Note: ^ Many 82-83 ECMs did not use QDRs, and will not appear on the chart. ^ This procedure will not work on any ECM Service Number which does not appear on the chart. (This is because such an ECM does not contain QDRs.) ^ Not all available QDR outputs are used for ECM application. Verify circuit usage from the ECM wiring diagrams for each specific engine using Section "6E" of the service manual. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions For information regarding B, C, P, U and Manufacturer Code Descriptions - Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Idle Speed Control Assembly - Repair Kit Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Technical Service Bulletins Idle Speed Control Assembly - Repair Kit Number: 82-I-144 Section: VIm Date: Mar., 1983 Subject: IDLE SPEED CONTROL ASSEMBLY REPAIR KIT - 1981-82 ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS A revised gear and shaft has been released for 1982 production idle speed control assemblies. Idle speed control assemblies with the new gear and shaft may be identified by a yellow dot on the housing near the shaft. In order to provide these improvements to the service assemblies, two (2) separate service repair packages have been re leased to repair 1981 and 1982 idle speed control assemblies (ISC). Applications are as follows: P/N Application 17079749 For Cavalier series equipped with engine Code "G" 17079750 All other engines The repair kits contain a gear and shaft assembly, a boot, grease and an instruction sheet. The repair packages are to be used if the following conditions exist: ^ Idle speed control assembly runs forward and reverse, but plunger does not extend or retract properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit > Component Information > Specifications Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit: Specifications IDLE SPEED CONTROL Measured between terminals A& B and C & D. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair The Check Engine Lamp will be illuminated when the ignition switch is placed in the On position. When the engine is started, the lamp should go off. If the lamp remains on for 10 seconds or constantly after the engine is started, the self diagnosis system has detected a problem and has stored a code in the system Electronic Control Module (ECM). After diagnosis and repair, the ECM memory can be cleared of codes by removing the ECM fuse or disconnecting the battery ground cable for approximately 30 seconds, with ignition switch in the Off position. It should be noted, that if battery ground cable is disconnected to clear codes, components such as clocks, electronically tuned radios etc., will have to be reset. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 Number: 90-199-6E Section: 6E Date: March 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 016510 Subject: REVISED CHART C-1D, CODE 33, 34, 63, 64 Model and Year: 1980-90 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin revises the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Output Check Chart C-1D and updates Code 33, Code 34, Code 63, and Code 64 in the Service Manual section on "Driveability And Emissions" (Section 6E1, 6E2, and 6E3). This information applies to all MAP Sensors on 1980-1990 vehicles with gasoline engines (except turbocharged) with green (standard) MAP sensor electrical connector insert or the solid black MAP sensor electrical connector insert. The revised chart information: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1420 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1421 - Diagnostic Chart C-1D. The updated chart information: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1422 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1423 - Diagnostic Chart Code 33. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1424 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1425 - Diagnostic Chart Code 34. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1426 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1427 - Diagnostic Chart Code 63. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1428 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1429 - Diagnostic Chart Code 64. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1430 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications Manifold Absolute, Vacuum, and Barometric Pressure Sensors Engines may use one, or a combination of these sensors. All sensors appear the same. Manifold Absolute Pressure sensors have a vacuum line connected between the unit and manifold vacuum. On Barometric Pressure sensors, the line is not used and the connector is either open or has a filter installed over it. Pressure sensors also have a vacuum line between the sensor and intake manifold and only appear on carbureted models. Barometric Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Start engine and apply 10 in./250 mm Hg to unit, voltage should be: 3.8L Turbo 4V, 0.9-1.7 volts less; others, 1.2-2.3 volts less. Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage as indicated. 5 volts reference. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1431 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 008 - Chart C-1D Map and Baro Output Check NOTE: MAP and BARO sensors are essentially the same device--one--MAP--measures the difference between pressure in the manifold and atmospheric pressure, and the other--BARO--measures atmospheric pressure. 1. Check that sensor voltage is highest when manifold pressure is highest--output normally is in the middle range for specific altitudes. - Low voltage increases spark advance. - High voltage decreases spark advance. 2. Check to see if the rate of change of the output VS change in pressure is correct--normal change would be about the middle of the range listed. - The voltage should change as soon as the vacuum is changed. - If it doesn't, it could result in detonation or a sag on acceleration which could also be caused by fuel or a restriction in the hose to the sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Memory Calibration Unit > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > PROM/MEMCAL - Identification Marks Memory Calibration Unit: Technical Service Bulletins PROM/MEMCAL - Identification Marks File In Section: 6E - Engine Fuel & Emission Bulletin No.: 44-65-01 Date: October, 1994 Subject: New PROM/MEMCAL Identification Markings Models: 1995 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks Note: For the purposes of this document, the terms PROM and MEMCAL will be used interchangeably. To simplify identification of service PROMs. a new external marking format will be implemented. Parts manufactured after Sept. 1994 will feature these new markings. This change will place the full 8-digit service part number on the PROM, in place of the old 4-digit "EXTERNAL ID" number. In the past, parts and service personnel could not identify a PROM without using a cross-reference table that matched external IDs and service numbers. In the future, the cross-reference table will not be required for PROMs; parts will be ordered directly from the number appearing on the PROM. However, the label will retain the broadcast code alpha characters to allow continued use of cross-reference charts, if so desired. Old Marking Format: New Marking Format: ^ Ordering the above PROM from the old marking format would require using a cross-reference chart to determine a service part number, based on the BROAD CAST CODE and EXTERNAL ID NUMBERS. ^ To order from the new format, simply combine the 2nd and 3rd lines to form an 8-digit part number that can be directly ordered from SPO (number 16134624 in the above example). As these changes are phased into the parts inventory, it should be noted that dealers will continue to see parts with both formats for some time in the future. This is because: ^ Millions of vehicles have already been built with the old format. ^ SPO has existing stock of MEMCALs and PROMs with the old format. ^ PROMS with 7-digit part numbers (representing less than 10% of current part numbers) will continue to use the old format. The 7-digit part numbers are easily identified because they always begin with "122xxxx". Due to manufacturing processes, more than one 8-digit part number may appear on a MEMCAL. In this event, service personnel should use the label on the exterior cover of the MEMCAL assembly. To avoid confusion, only the service label will include the BROAD CAST CODE, consisting of letter characters (I.E., ARCL). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Memory Calibration Unit > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > PROM/MEMCAL - Identification Marks > Page 1436 CHANGES TO MEMCAL/PROM LABELING FORMATS ^ MEMCALs may use either INK-JET or ADHESIVE labels, as shown. ^ PROMs will always use ADHESIVE labels with the same format as shown for MEMCALs. These changes will become effective on parts manufactured after 10/94. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Mixture Control Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications Mixture Control Solenoid: Specifications IDLE CONTROL SOLENOID - CARBURETTED ENGINES On some engines, the ECM will will be damaged if the resistance of the mixture control solenoid is less than specified. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > RTV Sealants - Use on Engines With Oxygen Sensors Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins RTV Sealants - Use on Engines With Oxygen Sensors NUMBER: 86-B-28 GROUP: 6 - Gasoline Engine DATE: March, 1986 SUBJECT: RTV (AEROBIC SEALANTS) AND ANAEROBIC SEALANTS FOR ENGINES EQUIPPED WITH OXYGEN SENSORS MODELS: 1981-86 C, K, G, S, T, M, AND CABALLEROS WITH YF5 CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS 1985-86 S, T, AND M WITH 2.5L EFI AND NA Incorrect usage of RTV sealants (cure in the presence of air) may cause damage to vehicle components such as oxygen sensors. This is caused by silica particles collecting on the oxygen sensor and contaminating the sensor. The correct application for RTV sealants is listed in the WDDGM parts book. The correct RTV sealants to use on engines in GMC Trucks are part numbers 1052914 or 1052917 (black) or part number 1052915 (clear). Red RTV sealant, part number 1052366, is for use on rear axle differential covers only, as it contains silica. Anaerobic sealers (cure without the presence of air) part numbers 1052756, 1052943, and 1052942 are also used to seal the rear main bearing cap to the block on engines used in GMC Trucks. See the chart below for a description of General Motors service approved RTV silicone and anaerobic sealers. GENERAL MOTORS SERVICE APPROVED RTV SILICONE SEALANTS Part Name Color Part Number Size Application GMS (Type B) Black 1052914 300 ml. Caulker All Light 1052917 3 oz. Tube Duty Engines Except 2.5L GMS (Type A) Clear 1052915 300 ml. Caulker 2.5L 4 Cylinder GMS Red 1052366 3 oz. Tube Rear Axle Usage Only GENERAL MOTORS SERVICE APPROVED ANAEROBIC SEALANTS Part Name Part Number Size Application Loctite (R) Gasket Maker 1052942 6 ml. Engine Anaerobic Applications 1052943 50 ml. 1052756 6 ml. Loctite (R) Transmission Case Cover 1052756 6 ml. Transmission Case Covers Sealant Loctite (R) Trim Bonding Adhesive 1052621 4 gm. Trim, Super Glue Loctite (R) Pipe Sealant w/Teflon 1052080 50 ml. Pipe Sealant Loctite (R) Thread Locking Kit 1052624 10 ml. Thread Locking, Retaining Compound Loctite (R) Inside Mirror Adhesive Kit 1052369 0.4 cc. Inside Rear View Mirror GENERAL MOTORS OTHER APPROVED SEALANTS Part Name Part Number Application Gasket Sealing Compound 1050026 Gasket Sealing Adhesive Caulking Kit 9636067 Windshield, Back Glass, Anywhere Urethane Based Sealer Is Required Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM Packard 32 Way Connector Identification Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Packard 32 Way Connector Identification Number: 90-56-8 Section: 8 Date: September 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 916521R Subject: PACKARD 32 WAY CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION Model and Year: 1980-90 A, B, F, G, J, L, W, Y CARS AND ALL TRUCKS WITH GMP4 ECM APPLICATIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin serves to clarify the labeling of the Packard 32 way connectors used on the GMP4 under dash ECMS. Currently a common strain relief is used in both the C-D 32 pin and the E-F 32 pin connectors. To properly identify these connectors, the strain reliefs must be removed. Use the lettering on the connector as shown on figure. The colors used at this time for the 32 pin E-F connector are yellow, mint green or orange. This updates any previous information released concerning identification that indicates any of these colors as being C & D connectors, found in the 6E and 8D Sections of the affected Service Manuals. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1449 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM/PCM - Damaged and/or Misdiagnosed Number: 91-384-6E Section: 6E Date: AUGUST 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 176503 Subject: DAMAGED ECM/PCM AND/OR MIS-DIAGNOSED ECM/PCM SYMPTOMS DUE TO INCORRECT "TAP-TESTING" PROCEDURES Model and Year: 1982-91 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS CONDITION: Because of the intermittent nature of some Electronic Control Module (ECM) or Powertrain Control Modules (PCM) symptoms, some service technicians have been subjecting the ECM/PCM to vibration and/or shock testing. Commonly known as tap-testing, this procedure involves tapping on the ECM/PCM case, while the engine is running. It is generally accepted that if the engine or ECM/PCM falters due to the tapping, an intermittent internal ECM/PCM defect may be indicated. However, this may not always be true. If too much force is applied to the ECM/PCM during the test the following symptoms may result: ^ Immediate ECM/PCM failure. ^ ECM/PCM suffers damage which may cause a failure at a later date. ^ ECM/PCM Reset (or Glitch), creating a momentary stall, miss Service Engine Soon (SES) light and/or loss of serial data. CAUSE: The ECM/PCM should be tapped using only the fingertips of one hand. Use of the palm, fist, or any type of tool subjects the ECM/PCM to forces that can cause both the circuit board and the outer aluminum case to flex and distort beyond design limits. The Integrated Circuits (IC) used in today's ECM/PCMs are mounted to the circuit board using a mounting process referred to as "surface technology." There are no circuit board holes for IC leads to go through. The IC leads set on pads, (28 pads or 52 pads depending on the IC) and solder is flowed around the leads to make the electrical connection to the circuit board. ^ Any flexing of the circuit board, beyond design limits, places the IC solder connections at risk of damage. Such damage may be apparent immediately, or it may appear at a future date. Circuit board deflection can occur as a result of striking the ECM/PCM, using ONLY THE PALM OF THE HAND. ^ If struck on the bottom side (the side opposite the service label), the ECM/PCM's aluminum outer case may deflect inward far enough to contact the electrical leads attached to the circuit board. Once in contact with the case the ECM/PCM electrical components will be shorted directly to ground. Although such shorting certainly has the potential to damage the ECM/PCM, it may not be permanent damage, depending on which circuit is involved. However, even if permanent damage is avoided, a short on any of the circuits will cause a disruption of normal ECM/PCM operation for the instant that the short occurs. This disruption may cause the ECM/PCM to reset (see "reset" above), creating the false impression that it is vibration sensitive or faulty. Reset is the ECM/PCM's normal way of coping with large voltage spikes. An ECM/PCM reset does not indicate that the ECM/PCM is defective or faulty, only that it is being subjected to abnormal conditions. CORRECTION: 1. TAP THE ECM/PCM ONLY ON THE TOP SIDE (The top side is where the service label is located.) ^ This will minimize the chance of deflecting the ECM/PCM case into the electrical leads on the circuit board. The clearance between the case and the circuit board is closest on the bottom side of the ECM/PCM. 2. TAP THE ECM/PCM USING ONLY THE FINGERTIPS - NO TOOLS. ^ To avoid excessive case deflection, avoid tapping in the center of the case. Tapping close to the edge of the ECM/PCM, especially in the corners, is best. ^ While using greater force may seem more effective, the test itself may cause the ECM/PCM to fail. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1450 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM May Contain Wrong PROM Number: 88-42 Section: 6E Date: Sept., 1987 Subject: SERVICE REPLACEMENT ELECTRONIC MODULES (ECM) WITH PROM INSTALLED Model and Year: 1981-88 ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS It has been brought to our attention that some service replacement electronic control modules (ECM's) have contained a PROM. A PROM should not have been included in a replacement ECM as it may not be the correct PROM for the vehicle. When this situation is encountered, the PROM should be removed from the replacement ECM and the PROM from the vehicle should be installed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1451 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ECM - Revised Replacement Procedure Number: 87-150 Section: 6E Date: MAY, 1987 Subject: REVISED ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE - CHART C-1 Model and Year: 1982 THROUGH 1987 ECM EQUIPPED VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The purpose of this bulletin is to introduce new ECM test procedures to reduce the possibility of multiple ECM failures on any one vehicle. Since 1982, most ECM's have used an integrated circuit (IC) in place of separate transistors to turn "on" or "off" different components controlled by the ECM. These IC's are called quad drivers (QDR). Each QDR has four separate outputs, meaning it can turn "on" or "off" four different items independently. A failed QDR usually results in an ECM output becoming either shorted to ground or open. Many times all four QDR output will be inoperative if just one vehicle circuit is faulty. The revised diagnosis incorporates new test procedures designed to identify a damaged QDR. Once identified, the circuit must be repaired to reduce the incidence of repeat ECM failures. This chart replaces the current service manual procedure for either: 1. Chart C-1 ECM replacement check, or 2. Any diagnostic chart where "replace ECM" is the conclusion, especially if a footnote indicates checking certain circuits for less than 20 OHM's resistance. It is strongly suggested that this chart be used whenever an ECM replacement is indicated for 1982 through 1987 vehicles. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1452 QDR Application Chart QDR Application Chart For CHART C-1 The following chart contains ECM QDR arrangement for all ECM models thru 1987.* Important Note: ^ Many 82-83 ECMs did not use QDRs, and will not appear on the chart. ^ This procedure will not work on any ECM Service Number which does not appear on the chart. (This is because such an ECM does not contain QDRs.) ^ Not all available QDR outputs are used for ECM application. Verify circuit usage from the ECM wiring diagrams for each specific engine using Section "6E" of the service manual. *Additional ECMs listed on page 4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1453 ECM - CHECK CHART Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ECM Packard 32 Way Connector Identification > Page 1454 QDR APPLICATION CHART QDR Application Chart For CHART C-1 The following chart contains ECM QDR arrangement for all ECM models thru 1987. Important Note: ^ Many 82-83 ECMs did not use QDRs, and will not appear on the chart. ^ This procedure will not work on any ECM Service Number which does not appear on the chart. (This is because such an ECM does not contain QDRs.) ^ Not all available QDR outputs are used for ECM application. Verify circuit usage from the ECM wiring diagrams for each specific engine using Section "6E" of the service manual. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions For information regarding B, C, P, U and Manufacturer Code Descriptions - Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit > Component Information > Specifications Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit: Specifications IDLE SPEED CONTROL Measured between terminals A& B and C & D. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor <--> [Barometric Pressure Sensor] > Component Information > Specifications Absolute Pressure Sensor: Specifications MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE, VACUUM AND BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSORS Engines may use one, or a combination of these sensors. All sensors appear the same. Manifold Absolute Pressure sensors have a vacuum line connected between the unit and manifold vacuum. On Barometric Pressure sensors, the line is not used and the connector is either open or has a filter installed over it. Pressure sensors also have a vacuum line between the sensor and intake manifold and only appear on carburetted models. Barometric Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Start engine and apply 10 in./ 250 mm Hg to unit, voltage should be 1.2-2.3 volts less. Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage as indicated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Improved Kit CORPORATE NUMBER: 436501R NUMBER: 84-T-101 GROUP: 6B - Engine Cooling IMPORTANT - All Service Personnel Should Read DATE: November, 1986 SUBJECT: COOLANT SENSOR KIT MODELS: 1980-84 LIGHT DUTY MODELS EQUIPPED WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL All 1980-84 Caballeros and all 1980-84 vehicles equipped with NB2 California emissions were built with engines incorporating computer command control. Many coolant sensors have been replaced on these vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 GM vehicles using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Coolant Sensor - Improved Kit > Page 1468 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Technical Service Bulletins Coolant Sensor Service Kit Number: 84-270 Section: 6E Date: NOV., 1986 Subject: COOLANT SENSOR KIT Model and Year: 1980-84 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS WITH COMPUTER COMMAND CONTROL 1982-84 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS WITH CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Many coolant sensors have been replaced on 1980 to 1984 vehicles as a result of a "Check Engine" Light and Code 15. In many cases, the sensor was not defective, and the real cause was a poor connection between the sensor and the wire harness connector. An improved coolant sensor and connector kit, P/N 10045847, containing all necessary parts, has been released for all 1980-84 cars and 1982-84 Light Duty Trucks using Computer Command Control. This sensor is used to provide coolant temperature information to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Separate sensors are used for gage or warning light operation, or to activate the electric cooling fan, and are not affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1469 TEMPERATURE SENSORS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications TEMPERATURE SENSORS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 Number: 90-199-6E Section: 6E Date: March 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 016510 Subject: REVISED CHART C-1D, CODE 33, 34, 63, 64 Model and Year: 1980-90 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin revises the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Output Check Chart C-1D and updates Code 33, Code 34, Code 63, and Code 64 in the Service Manual section on "Driveability And Emissions" (Section 6E1, 6E2, and 6E3). This information applies to all MAP Sensors on 1980-1990 vehicles with gasoline engines (except turbocharged) with green (standard) MAP sensor electrical connector insert or the solid black MAP sensor electrical connector insert. The revised chart information: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1477 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1478 - Diagnostic Chart C-1D. The updated chart information: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1479 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1480 - Diagnostic Chart Code 33. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1481 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1482 - Diagnostic Chart Code 34. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1483 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1484 - Diagnostic Chart Code 63. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1485 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > MAP - Revised Check Chart for DTC's 33, 34, 63, 64 > Page 1486 - Diagnostic Chart Code 64. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1487 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications Manifold Absolute, Vacuum, and Barometric Pressure Sensors Engines may use one, or a combination of these sensors. All sensors appear the same. Manifold Absolute Pressure sensors have a vacuum line connected between the unit and manifold vacuum. On Barometric Pressure sensors, the line is not used and the connector is either open or has a filter installed over it. Pressure sensors also have a vacuum line between the sensor and intake manifold and only appear on carbureted models. Barometric Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage with ignition on and engine off. Start engine and apply 10 in./250 mm Hg to unit, voltage should be: 3.8L Turbo 4V, 0.9-1.7 volts less; others, 1.2-2.3 volts less. Pressure Sensors: Measure voltage as indicated. 5 volts reference. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1488 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 008 - Chart C-1D Map and Baro Output Check NOTE: MAP and BARO sensors are essentially the same device--one--MAP--measures the difference between pressure in the manifold and atmospheric pressure, and the other--BARO--measures atmospheric pressure. 1. Check that sensor voltage is highest when manifold pressure is highest--output normally is in the middle range for specific altitudes. - Low voltage increases spark advance. - High voltage decreases spark advance. 2. Check to see if the rate of change of the output VS change in pressure is correct--normal change would be about the middle of the range listed. - The voltage should change as soon as the vacuum is changed. - If it doesn't, it could result in detonation or a sag on acceleration which could also be caused by fuel or a restriction in the hose to the sensor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > RTV Sealants - Use on Engines With Oxygen Sensors Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins RTV Sealants - Use on Engines With Oxygen Sensors NUMBER: 86-B-28 GROUP: 6 - Gasoline Engine DATE: March, 1986 SUBJECT: RTV (AEROBIC SEALANTS) AND ANAEROBIC SEALANTS FOR ENGINES EQUIPPED WITH OXYGEN SENSORS MODELS: 1981-86 C, K, G, S, T, M, AND CABALLEROS WITH YF5 CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS 1985-86 S, T, AND M WITH 2.5L EFI AND NA Incorrect usage of RTV sealants (cure in the presence of air) may cause damage to vehicle components such as oxygen sensors. This is caused by silica particles collecting on the oxygen sensor and contaminating the sensor. The correct application for RTV sealants is listed in the WDDGM parts book. The correct RTV sealants to use on engines in GMC Trucks are part numbers 1052914 or 1052917 (black) or part number 1052915 (clear). Red RTV sealant, part number 1052366, is for use on rear axle differential covers only, as it contains silica. Anaerobic sealers (cure without the presence of air) part numbers 1052756, 1052943, and 1052942 are also used to seal the rear main bearing cap to the block on engines used in GMC Trucks. See the chart below for a description of General Motors service approved RTV silicone and anaerobic sealers. GENERAL MOTORS SERVICE APPROVED RTV SILICONE SEALANTS Part Name Color Part Number Size Application GMS (Type B) Black 1052914 300 ml. Caulker All Light 1052917 3 oz. Tube Duty Engines Except 2.5L GMS (Type A) Clear 1052915 300 ml. Caulker 2.5L 4 Cylinder GMS Red 1052366 3 oz. Tube Rear Axle Usage Only GENERAL MOTORS SERVICE APPROVED ANAEROBIC SEALANTS Part Name Part Number Size Application Loctite (R) Gasket Maker 1052942 6 ml. Engine Anaerobic Applications 1052943 50 ml. 1052756 6 ml. Loctite (R) Transmission Case Cover 1052756 6 ml. Transmission Case Covers Sealant Loctite (R) Trim Bonding Adhesive 1052621 4 gm. Trim, Super Glue Loctite (R) Pipe Sealant w/Teflon 1052080 50 ml. Pipe Sealant Loctite (R) Thread Locking Kit 1052624 10 ml. Thread Locking, Retaining Compound Loctite (R) Inside Mirror Adhesive Kit 1052369 0.4 cc. Inside Rear View Mirror GENERAL MOTORS OTHER APPROVED SEALANTS Part Name Part Number Application Gasket Sealing Compound 1050026 Gasket Sealing Adhesive Caulking Kit 9636067 Windshield, Back Glass, Anywhere Urethane Based Sealer Is Required Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications 84-235 6C (VI) Feb., 1985 Subject: TPS SETTINGS - ALL GASOLINE ENGINES Model and Year: 1981 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Listed below are all Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) settings for 1981 thru 1984. ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1981 Buick 3.8L A .97V High step of fast idle cam Buick 3.8L Turbo "A" Car 1.30V High step of fast idle cam Buick 4.1L .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L 9 .41V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L X .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L K .41V ISC retracted at slow idle Chevrolet 4.4L .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L H .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.7L .56V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L Y .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L 5 .51V Stopped at curb idle 1982 Buick 3.8L Non-Turbo A .77V High step of fast idle cam Chev. 1.6L Minimum System C .92V High step of fast idle cam (Fed) Chev. 1.6L Full Function C .40V Stopped at curb idle (Calif) Chev. 1.8L L4 G .26V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. 2.8L V6 X,Z,1 .26V Stopped at curb idle Chev. 3.8L V6 .36V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. All V8 H,7 .51V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L, 4.3L .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 .525V Ign. on, engine off ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1983 Buick 3.8L A .86V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .26V Curb idle solenoid retracted Chevrolet 3.8L 9 .36V ISC retracted (min. idle) Chevrolet 5.0L H,S,7 .51V Curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L .46V ILC retracted Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications > Page 1497 Curb idle 1984 Buick 3.8L A .46V Curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Curb idle Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L G,H .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .30V Throttle kicker retracted *Non-Adjustable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications 84-235 6C (VI) Feb., 1985 Subject: TPS SETTINGS - ALL GASOLINE ENGINES Model and Year: 1981 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Listed below are all Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) settings for 1981 thru 1984. ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1981 Buick 3.8L A .97V High step of fast idle cam Buick 3.8L Turbo "A" Car 1.30V High step of fast idle cam Buick 4.1L .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L 9 .41V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L X .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L K .41V ISC retracted at slow idle Chevrolet 4.4L .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L H .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.7L .56V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L Y .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L 5 .51V Stopped at curb idle 1982 Buick 3.8L Non-Turbo A .77V High step of fast idle cam Chev. 1.6L Minimum System C .92V High step of fast idle cam (Fed) Chev. 1.6L Full Function C .40V Stopped at curb idle (Calif) Chev. 1.8L L4 G .26V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. 2.8L V6 X,Z,1 .26V Stopped at curb idle Chev. 3.8L V6 .36V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. All V8 H,7 .51V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L, 4.3L .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 .525V Ign. on, engine off ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1983 Buick 3.8L A .86V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .26V Curb idle solenoid retracted Chevrolet 3.8L 9 .36V ISC retracted (min. idle) Chevrolet 5.0L H,S,7 .51V Curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L .46V ILC retracted Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications > Page 1502 Curb idle 1984 Buick 3.8L A .46V Curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Curb idle Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L G,H .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .30V Throttle kicker retracted *Non-Adjustable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Diverter Valve: Service and Repair Fig. 10 - AIR System Hose Routing REMOVAL 1. Disconnect hoses from diverter valve--Fig 10. 2. Remove diverter valve from air pump housing. INSTALLATION 1. Install diverter valve and a new gasket onto air pump housing. 2. Torque diverter valve bolts to 60-70 in lb. 3. Connect hoses to diverter valve--Fig 10. 4. Check system for leaks. NOTE: Ensure diverter valve is mounted directly to the air injection pump. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Check Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Injection Check Valve: Service and Repair Fig. 10 - AIR System Hose Routing CAUTION: Do not bend or twist the air manifold when removing the check valve. REPLACEMENT 1. Disconnect air pump outlet hose from check valve--Fig 10. 2. Remove check valve from air manifold. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Control Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Vacuum Air Control Valve Air Injection Control Valve: Testing and Inspection High Vacuum Air Control Valve 1. Start engine and allow to reach normal operating temperature. 2. With engine idling, apply a minimum of 10 in Hg vacuum to high vacuum mode assembly. Air should divert to air cleaner. If not, replace control valve. NOTE: - SEE EMISSION CONTROL APPLICATION CHARTS to determine application of control switches and valves. - Refer to the number stamped on the base of the switch or valve for calibrated switching or activation temperatures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Control Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Vacuum Air Control Valve > Page 1515 Air Injection Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Low Vacuum Air Control Valve 1. With engine idling at normal operating temperature, disconnect vacuum line from low vacuum mode assembly. 2. Check to make sure air is diverting to air cleaner. If not, replace control valve. NOTE: - SEE EMISSION CONTROL APPLICATION CHARTS to determine application of control switches and valves. - Refer to the number stamped on the base of the switch or valve for calibrated switching or activation temperatures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Centrifugal Pump Filter Air Injection Filter: Service and Repair Centrifugal Pump Filter Fig. 11 - Removing Centrifugal Type Pump Air Filter REMOVAL 1. Remove drive belt, pulley bolts and pulley from air pump. 2. Using a suitable tool--Fig 11--pry loose outer disc of filter fan. NOTE: Carefully pry disc to ensure that no dirt fragments enter the air intake hole. INSTALLATION NOTE: Do not attempt to install a filter by hammering it or pressing the filter on. 1. Install filter by drawing it on with the pulley, then alternately tighten pulley bolts evenly until filter is properly seated. 2. Ensure outer edge of filter is in the air pump housing--a slight amount of interference with the air pump housing bore is normal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Centrifugal Pump Filter > Page 1520 Air Injection Filter: Service and Repair Conventional Filter Fig. 12 - Conventional Type Pump Air Filter NOTE: The air filter element is not serviceable and must be replaced. 1. Remove and replace the air filter element as shown in Fig. 12. 2. Position the assembled air horn and filter element in the air cleaner body, ensuring tang is in the slot. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Hose/Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Injection Hose/Tube: Service and Repair Fig. 7 - Typical Air Manifold Installations 1. Remove exhaust manifold. 2. Place exhaust manifold into a soft jaw vise and remove all carbon build-up from injection tubes. 3. Using a suitable penetrating oil, lubricate and remove injection tubes from exhaust manifold--Fig 7. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Injection Pump: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Mark and remove air pump pulley. 3. Disconnect hoses, vacuum and electrical connectors from air management valve, if equipped. 4. Disconnect hoses from diverter valve and remove valve from air pump, if equipped. 5. Remove air pump mounting bolts and pump assembly from vehicle. NOTE: If air pump is being replaced, transfer air management valve, if equipped to the new air pump assembly. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Relief Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Injection Relief Valve: Service and Repair Fig. 8 - Removing Pressure Relief Valve With Slide Hammer Tool Shown REMOVAL - If the pressure relief valve is incorporated in the diverter valve or air bypass valve, the complete valve must be replaced. - If the pressure relief valve is incorporated inside the air pump, pull pressure relief valve from air pump--using tools No. J-6585 and J-7055-5 or equivalents--Fig 8. Fig. 9 - Installing Pressure Relief Valve NOTE: Use extreme care when installing injection tube to avoid distorting air pump housing. INSTALLATION 1. Tap relief valve into air pump housing--using a 15/16 inch socket--Fig 9--until valve is completely seated on housing. Pressure Setting Plug Replacement NOTE: The length of the pressure setting plug determines the pressure required to open the relief valve. Plugs are usually color-coded by length. Be sure to use the correct plug for application. 1. Using a small screwdriver carefully unlock the legs from the inside surface of the relief valve. 2. To install the plug, carefully push it into the relief valve until the legs lock. NOTE: If pressure setting plug is to be reused ensure the leg angles are sufficient for the plug to lock into the relief valve. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Thermal Vacuum Valve, Air Injection > Component Information > Description and Operation Thermal Vacuum Valve: Description and Operation Fig. 30 - Thermal Vacuum Switch Used on some engines, the thermal vacuum switch prevents vacuum from actuating the air control and air switching valves until the engine reaches a predetermined temperature (120° F). When engine temperature reaches this calibration point, the thermal vacuum switch opens and allows vacuum to pass through it to the air control and air switching valves. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis Catalytic Converter: Technical Service Bulletins Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis Number: 82-I-149 Section: VIII Date: June, 1983 Subject: DIAGNOSING PLUGGED DUAL BED BEAD TYPE CATALYTIC CONVERTERS 1981-82 VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH DUAL BED BEAD CATALYTIC CONVERTERS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS NOTICE: This procedure supercedes the procedure described in Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 81-I-82 for the diagnosis of plugged dual bed bead catalytic converters. Proper diagnosis of a plugged catalytic converter is essential before the converter is replaced in service. The following diagnostic procedure is recommended: 1. Remove hose at left or right (whichever is easiest) manifold A.I.R. check valve, then remove check valve. FIGURE 1 - PROPANE ENRICHMENT DEVICE 2. Using hose and nipple (Figure 1) from the Propane Enrichment Device (J26911), connect hose to a fuel pump pressure gauge. 3. Install nipple into the manifold air pipe. 4. With engine at normal operating temperature, run the engine at 2500 RPM and observe backpressure reading on gauge. 5. If backpressure measures 2-3/4 psi or greater, a plugged exhaust system is indicated. 6. Inspect muffler for heat distress or possible internal failure. 8. If no other cause for excessive backpressure is found, replace the catalytic converter with OEM converter or as otherwise directed in service bulletins. NOTICE: It is very unusual for single bed bead converters to plug without obvious signs of expansion or heat distress (except in cases where leaded gasoline is used). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1537 Technical Service Bulletin # 82T144 Date: 830601 Dual Bed Cat Converters - Revised Repair Procedure Number: 82-T-144 Section: VIII Date: June, 1983 Subject: REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DUAL BED BEAD CATALYTIC CONVERTERS - ALL 1981-82 VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH DUAL BED BEAD CATALYTIC CONVERTERS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin supercedes bulletin 81-T-76, 81-T-76 Supplement and 82-T-58. A new repair procedure has been developed for servicing dual bed bead catalytic converters. The procedure consist of transferring the catalyst beads from plugged or externally damaged (not internally damaged or expanded) dual bed converters to an empty new design dual bed bead converter. Also, some new upper bed catalyst beads must be added to the upper bed of the new converter. Used beads from expanded or internally damaged converters cannot be used in the new empty converter. Either "stored" upper and lower bed beads or upper and lower bed bead kits must be use in conjunction with the rebuild kit. Subject vehicles that had the original dual bed converter replaced with a single bed converter or 1982 vehicles produced with the single bed converter (built after April 17, 1982) must be serviced with another single bed converter of the same part number. Vehicles involved in this program are listed below: Carline Engines 1981 Model Year Chevrolet ("B") Camaro, Malibu, Monte Carlo, and El Camino 3.8L (229), 4.4L, 5.0L Chevrolet ("B") Camaro, Corvette and Malibu 5.7L 1982 Model Year Chevrolet ("B"), Malibu, Monte Carlo and El Camino 3.8L (229), 4.4L, 5.0L Chevrolet ("B") 5.7L Camaro 5.0L (LG4) Inspection Procedure 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Refer to Figure 1 for location of catalytic converter part number. 3. If converter part number is listed in Column 1 of table below, replace converter with the appropriate converter part number identified in Column 2. Column 1 Column 2 Original Dual New Dual Bed Model Year Vehicle Bed Bead Conv. Bead Conv. 1981 "A", "Aspl", and "B" (including Police) 1982 "B", "G" and 8999586 "Gspl" (including Police) 25056366 (1982 Police) 25056673 1981 "F" (non-Z28) 8999588 25056674 1981 "F" (Z28) 8999589 25056675 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1538 1982 "F" 5.0L (LG4) 8999830 25056676 1981 "Y" 8999338 25056672 4. Vehicles with converter part numbers not identified in Column 1 of the table will require the same converter part number as removed from the vehicle. Use normal operation number and labor time for the replacement of these converters. CAUTION: THE CATALYTIC CONVERTER BEADS CONTAIN PLATINUM, PALLADIUM AND/OR RHODIUM. ADDITIONALLY, THE BEADS MAY BE FINELY COATED WITH LEAD COMPOUNDS. THEREFORE, PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN TO MINIMIZE DUST GENERATION DURING THE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. THESE PRECAUTIONS INCLUDE: A. Pour water into catalytic converter prior to bead removal as described in Step 5. B. The use of a suitable dust mask, rubber gloves and safety glasses is recommended when handling catalyst beads. C. Applicable OSHA standards should be reviewed. D. Allow catalytic converter to cool before handling. Listed below are tools required to perform repair procedure: Description Tool # No. Required Converter Plug Installer J-34118 1 Catalytic Converter Bead Replacement Kit J-34155 1 Replacement Kit includes: Sifting Pan J-34155-1 1 Storage Pan J-34155-2 2 Funnel J-34155-3 1 Service Procedure 1. Disconnect air supply pipe from catalytic converter. 2. Disconnect intermediate pipe from rear of converter. 3. Disconnect hanger bracket from converter, except Corvette. 4. On Corvettes, remove nuts and bolts and remove converter. All other models, remove front exhaust clamp then remove converter. 5. Stand old converter upright on inlet end and pour two (2) 8 ounce cups of water into outlet end to control catalyst dust. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1539 FIGURE 1 - CONVERTER BELT FLANGE 6. Using hammer and chisel, remove upper bed fill hole plug (see Figure 1 for description of upper and lower beds) from old converter by driving chisel between the converter shell and rim of fill plug. Deform fill plug until it can be removed with pliers. 7. Hold converter over a clean pan (J-34155-2) and empty catalyst beads by shaking and tapping converter belt flange (Figure 1) with rubber mallet. NOTICE: If upper bed is void or near void (a cup or less) of catalyst beads, the converter is considered damaged (internally) or expanded. Catalyst beads found in internally damaged or expanded converters are not to be used in new converters. These beads can be returned via exchange program described in WDDGM Bulletin IB No. 80-93. 8. Pour upper bed beads into sifting pan J-34155-1. Sift out broken beads (smaller than half size) into a clean box. Pour sifted beads (half size and larger) into the other pan J-34155-2. Set sifted beads aside for now. NOTICE: Unusable beads and dust can be returned via exchange program described in WDDGM Bulletin IB No. 80-93. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1540 FIGURE 2 - CONVERTER BELT FLANGE 9. Prop new converter up at a 45~ angle with upper bed fill hole at top. (See Figure 1 for a description of upper and lower beds.) Tap funnel J-34155-3 into converter fill hole with hammer (Figure 2). 10. Install packet of new upper bed beads from kit, P/N 25056590, into upper bed of the new converter. FIGURE 3 - FULL CONVERTER 11. Pour sifted upper bed beads (ref. Step 8) or new upper bed beads if required into upper bed of new converter. Tap belt flange of converter with rubber mallet to allow beads to settle. Continue filling and tapping until converter is full. See Figure 3 for definition of full upper bed. If upper bed is full, proceed to Step 12. If upper bed is not full, use leftover upper bed catalyst beads from involved dual bed converters to fill upper bed. If there are not enough used upper bed beads, obtain upper bed bead kit, P/N 25056680 (zone approval is required to obtain this kit), and continue to fill upper bed until full. NOTICE: Used upper bed beads (from non-damaged or expanded converters) can be mixed with new upper bed beads. DO NOT MIX UPPER AND LOWER BEADS. Also, do not mix any other catalyst beads from converters other than converters involved in this bulletin. Store unused upper bed beads in a clean container marked "upper bed". 12. Lay converter down on a flat surface with upper bed on top. 13. Insert fill plug, P/N 8998202 (provided in kit, P/N 25056590), into upper bed fill hole. If outer rim of the fill plug doesn't fit flat against converter shell, remove enough beads so it does. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1541 FIGURE 4 - FILL PLUG 14. With fill plug in fill hole, insert tool J-34118 into fill plug (Figure 4). Tighten tool to 35 ft.lbs. (47 N-m) and make sure plug outer rim is flat and tight against converter shell. Set new converter aside. 15. Remove lower bed fill hole plug from old converter using procedure described in Step 6. FIGURE 1 - CONVERTER BELT FLANGE 16. Hold converter over a clean pan (J-34155-2) and empty catalyst beads by shaking and tapping converter belt flange (Figure 1) with rubber mallet. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1542 FIGURE 1 - CONVERTER BELT FLANGE FIGURE 2 - CONVERTER BELT FLANGE 17. Sift lower bed beads using procedure described in Step 8. 18. Prop new converter up at a 45~ angle with lower bed fill hole at top. (See Figure 1 for definition of upper and lower beds.) Tap funnel J-34155-3 into converter fill hole with hammer (Figure 2). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1543 FIGURE 3 - FULL CONVERTER 19. Pour sifted lower bed beads (ref. Step 17) or new lower bed beads if required, into new converter lower bed. Tap belt flange with rubber mallet to allow beads to settle. Continue filling and tapping until converter is full (ref. Figure 3). If lower bed is not full, use leftover lower bed catalyst beads saved from involved dual bed converters to fill lower bed. If there are not enough used lower bed beads, obtain lower bed bead service kit, P/N 25056682 (zone approval is required to obtain this kit), and continue filling the lower bed until full. NOTICE: The leftover lower bed beads can be saved for future use. Store them in a clean container marked "lower bed" DO NOT MIX UPPER AND LOWER BEADS, Also, do not mix any other catalyst beads from converters other than converters involved in this bulletin. 20. Lay converter down on flat surface with lower bed on top and install fill plug using procedure described in Steps 13 and 14. 21. Reverse removal procedure for installation of new converter. Refer to appropriate service manual for installation torque. 22. Lower vehicle. Labor Operation Number: T0117 Labor Time : .9 hours Parts List Number Required Per Description P/N Carline Vehicle Upper bed rebuilt kit 25056590 All 1 (contains 300 grams of upper bed catalyst, 2 fill hole plugs and instruction sheet) *Upper bed bead kit 25056680 All As required (contains 700 grams of catalyst beads, no fill plugs or instruction sheet) *Lower bed bead kit 25056682 All As required (contains 1,000 grams of catalyst beads, no fill hole plugs or instruction sheet) Clamp, catalytic converter air "A" "B" injection pipe 22505116 "G" 1 Bolt (pipe to rear converter) 11502877 "A" "B" "F" "G" 2 Bolt (hanger to converter) 11504596 1981 "A", "B" 1982 "B" "F" "G" 2 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Catalytic Converters - Plugging Diagnosis > Page 1544 Bolt (hanger to converter) 9424320 1981 "F" 2 Nut (pipe to converter - "Y") 9414034 1981 "F", (hanger to converter - "F") "Y" 2 "F" 8 "Y" Washer (hanger to converter - "F") 9439512 1981 "F" (pipe to converter - "Y") "Y" 2 "F", 8 "Y" Bolt (pipe to converter) 9439636 1981 "Y" 8 Clamp, exhaust (2 1/4") 1259609 "A", "B" "F", "G" 1 Fill hole plug 8998202 As required * Requires zone approval Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1545 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation PURPOSE The catalytic converter reduces the emission of Hydrocarbons, Carbon Monoxide and Oxides of Nitrogen. OPERATION The catalytic converter remains unchanged while enabling a chemical reaction to take place which combines Hydrocarbons (HC) and Carbon Monoxide (CO) with Oxygen to form water (H2O) and Carbon Dioxide (CO2). Fig. 13 - Underfloor Converter On 1975-79 vehicles, the catalyst is structured in the form of pellets--Fig 13. Fig. 14 - Monolith Converter On 1980-82 vehicles, two converters are used, the underfloor converter--Fig 13 and a honeycomb monolith converter--Fig 14. The catalyst consists of a porous substrate of an inert material, coated with platinum and other noble metals--active catalytic materials. Due to its high operating temperatures, the underfloor converter--located in the exhaust system between the exhaust manifold and muffler--requires heat shields to protect chassis components, passenger compartment and other areas from heat related damage. Fig. 15 - Fuel Tank Filler Safety Neck For All Vehicles Equipped With Catalytic Converters A smaller diameter fuel filler neck prevents system contamination by not allowing the larger diameter leaded fuel nozzles to be inserted--Fig 15. CAUTION: Use unleaded fuels only. Use of more than a very small amount of leaded fuel will ruin catalyst. NOTE: Periodic maintenance of the exhaust system is not required; however, if the vehicle is raised for other service, it is advisable to check the general condition of the catalytic converter. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Deceleration Valve > Component Information > Diagrams Fig. 204 - Vacuum Hose Routing Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Early Fuel Evaporation ( EFE ) > EFE Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair EFE Solenoid: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable and remove air cleaner. 2. Disconnect electrical leads and vacuum hoses from solenoid, then remove solenoid to valve cover bracket retaining screw and the solenoid. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Early Fuel Evaporation ( EFE ) > EFE Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Actuator Assembly EFE Valve: Service and Repair Actuator Assembly 1. Disconnect vacuum hoses from actuator. 2. Remove fasteners holding actuator to manifold or bracket. 3. Disconnect and remove rod from actuator, if equipped. 4. Remove actuator assembly. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Torque actuator rod nuts, if equipped to 25 in lb. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Early Fuel Evaporation ( EFE ) > EFE Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Actuator Assembly > Page 1557 EFE Valve: Service and Repair Exhaust Heat Valve 1. Remove crossover exhaust pipe. 2. Disconnect actuator rod from valve. 3. Remove valve from exhaust pipe. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Early Fuel Evaporation ( EFE ) > EFE Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Actuator Assembly > Page 1558 EFE Valve: Service and Repair Manifold Heat Valve 1. Remove exhaust pipe to manifold nuts and lower exhaust pipe. 2. Remove heat valve from exhaust pipe. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Early Fuel Evaporation ( EFE ) > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EFE > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Thermal Vacuum Valve: Testing and Inspection Below the switching point; EFE and Manifold Vacuum ports should be open - EGR and Ported Vacuum ports should be opened and vented through the Vent port - Vent port should be blocked to the EFE port Above the switching point; Manifold Vacuum Port--Should be blocked - EFE port should be vented at the Vent port - EGR and Ported Vacuum ports should be open, while the Vent port is blocked at the EGR port. NOTE: Refer to the number stamped on the base of the switch or valve for calibrated switching or activation temperatures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Early Fuel Evaporation ( EFE ) > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EFE > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Temperature TVS Thermal Vacuum Valve: Service and Repair Oil Temperature TVS 1. Disconnect hoses from TVS ports. 2. Remove TVS. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Early Fuel Evaporation ( EFE ) > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EFE > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Temperature TVS > Page 1564 Thermal Vacuum Valve: Service and Repair EGR EFE Thermal Vacuum Switch (EGR-EFE-TVS) EGR Early Fuel Evaporation Thermal Vacuum Switch (EGR-EFE-TVS) This switch controls vacuum to the EGR and EFE valves according to engine coolant temperature. This switch allows the EFE system to operate only during engine warm-up periods, by supplying manifold vacuum to the EFE valve when coolant temperature is below the switching point. Above the switching point, the vacuum is blocked and the EFE actuator is vented to atmosphere. This switch also permits EGR operation at a reduced rate during warm-up and at full operation after warm-up. When engine coolant temperature is below the switching point, vacuum is directed from the ported vacuum port to the EGR port. Above the switching point, the vent orifice is blocked so full ported vacuum is directed to the EGR port. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Early Fuel Evaporation ( EFE ) > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EFE > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Temperature TVS > Page 1565 Thermal Vacuum Valve: Service and Repair EFE Distributor Thermal Vacuum Switch (EFE-DTVS) Early Fuel Evaporation Distributor Thermal Vacuum Switch (EFE-DTVS) The EFE-DTVS is an engine coolant sensitive vacuum switch which controls vacuum to both the distributor and EFE valve. When engine coolant temperatures are below the calibration point of the switch, manifold vacuum is directed to the EFE system and the distributor vacuum advance is vented to atmosphere. When engine coolant temperatures are above the calibration point of the switch, the EFE actuator is vented to atmosphere while the distributor receives ported vacuum for proper spark advance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Early Fuel Evaporation ( EFE ) > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EFE > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Temperature TVS > Page 1566 Thermal Vacuum Valve: Service and Repair EFE Thermal Vacuum Switch (EFE-TVS) Early Fuel Evaporation Thermal Vacuum Switch (EFE-TVS) When engine coolant temperature is below the calibration point of the switch, manifold vacuum flows through ports 2 and 3 of this switch to the EFE actuator, closing the EFE actuator. Above the switching point, port 3 of this switch is blocked and the EFE vacuum actuator is vented to atmosphere through port 1. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Early Fuel Evaporation ( EFE ) > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EFE > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Temperature TVS > Page 1567 Thermal Vacuum Valve: Service and Repair Coolant Temperature TVS 1. Drain coolant until coolant level is below engine coolant outlet housing. 2. Disconnect hoses from TVS ports. 3. Remove TVS. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Torque TVS to 120 in lb. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Early Fuel Evaporation ( EFE ) > Vacuum Check Valve, EFE > Component Information > Description and Operation Vacuum Check Valve: Description and Operation Located in the vacuum line from the carburetor to the EFE thermal vacuum switch--the EFE-CV holds the highest vacuum reached, enabling the EFE heat valve to remain closed until the TVS switches modes. It also prevents the heat valve from rattling during severe low vacuum conditions (heavy acceleration). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Canister Control Valves - Revised Mounting Procedure Canister Purge Control Valve: Technical Service Bulletins Canister Control Valves - Revised Mounting Procedure Number: 83-I-51 Section: VI & VIII Date: March, 1983 Subject: REVISED MOUNTING PROCEDURE FOR CANISTER CONTROL VALVES - 1982-83 "B", "F" AND "G" CARS WITH EITHER 3.8L V6, 4.4L V8, 5.0L V8 OR 5.7L V8 ENGINES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS In the event a canister control valve requires replacement, refer to Chevrolet Service Bulletin 83-I-29 for functional testing. A new part number valve should be installed (refer to chart below). In addition, on all vehicles the valve should be suspended using the following procedure: ENGINE ENGINE VIN VIN CODE CODE DISPLACE- ENGINE/ NEW CCV MENT VEHICLE VALVE MOUNT PART NO. 1982 1983 1982/ 5.7L LM1 Suspend 17075074 83 No Sketch Needed L 6 1982/ 5.0L LG4 Suspend 17075074 H 83 "B" & "G" No Sketch Needed 1982/ 5.0L LG4/"F" Suspend Per 17075074 H H 83 LG4 With 7K4 Sketch #1 "B" & "G" 1982 3.8L LC3/"B" Suspend Per 17075075 K LC3/"G" Sketch #2 17075074 K 1983 3.8L LC3/"B" Suspend Per 17075075 9 LC3/"G" Sketch #3 17075074 9 1982 4.4L L39 Suspend 17075074 J "B" & "G" No Sketch Needed VALVE MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS I. 1982-1983 LG4-LM1 in "B" or "G" Vehicles 1982 L39 in "B" or "G" Vehicles 1. Remove bolt which retains CCV bracket to alternator brace and discard. 2. Remove two (2) screws which retain CCV to bracket. Discard bracket and screws. 3. Allow CCV to be suspended in hose harness. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Canister Control Valves - Revised Mounting Procedure > Page 1576 Canister Control Valve II. 1982-83 "B" or "G" and LG4/LM1 With 7K4 1982-83 "F" and -LG4 (refer to Sketch #1) 1. Remove bolt which retains CCV bracket to alternator brace and discard. 2. Remove two (2) screws which retain CCV to bracket. Discard bracket and screws. 3. Remove clamp from bowl vent hose and purge TVS hose at CCV. 4. Shorten bowl vent hose to 6-3/4" overall length. 5. Shorten purge hose to 2-1/4" length from connector end. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Canister Control Valves - Revised Mounting Procedure > Page 1577 6. Install both hoses back on CCV; fasten clamps. Canister Control Valve III. 1982 "B" or "G" and LC3 (refer to Sketch #2) 1. Remove bracket from water outlet and from canister control valve (CCV). Discard bracket and two (2) retaining screws. 2. Reinstall water outlet bolt. 3. Shorten bowl vent hose to 4 3/4". 4. Remove and discard 6" top hose from CCV to carburetor manifold vacuum tube. 5. Cut a 10" long piece of 7/32" GM 6148 or GM 6150 hose. Route this hose from the CCV and under ISC motor and TPS connector to carburetor tube. 6. Wrap plastic tie under bowl vent hose clamp at CCV then up and over LH A.I.R. pump hose - to hold CCV in upright position. 7. Install thermal vent valve (TBVV), if previously used, in bowl vent hose, black end (carb.) towards carburetor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Canister Control Valves - Revised Mounting Procedure > Page 1578 Canister Control Valve IV. 1983 "B" or "G" and LC3 (refer to Sketch #3) 1. Remove bracket from water outlet and from canister control valve (CCV). Discard bracket and two (2) retaining screws. 2. Reinstall water outlet bolt. 3. Separate purge vent-hose at purge TVS switch from connector using cutter or razor. 4. Shorten purge vent hose to 4" long by cutting off connector end. 5. Shorten bowl vent hose to 6 1/4". 6. Shorten carburetor vacuum hose by cutting off 2". 7. Shorten PCV hose by cutting off 2". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Canister Control Valves - Revised Mounting Procedure > Page 1579 8. Reassemble purge, hose and bowl vent hoses at both ends using clamps. 9. Reconnect carburetor vacuum hose and PCV at both ends. Use applicable labor operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1580 Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair The canister purge valve--used on some applications--can be repaired without replacing the complete vapor canister using repair kit--Part No 7041344--consisting of a spring, a washer, a diaphragm and a cap. NOTE: This is not a routine maintenance item and should be performed only if damaged, or parts are missing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Thermal Vacuum Valve - EVAP > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Thermal Vacuum Valve - EVAP: Testing and Inspection Below the switching point; Ports 1 and 2 should be blocked - No ported vacuum should be directed to the canister and EGR valve. Above the switching point; Ports 1 and 2 should be open, allowing ported vacuum to be directed to the canister and EGR valve. Replace valve, if defective. NOTE: Refer to the number stamped on the base of the switch or valve for calibrated switching or activation temperatures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Control Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation EGR Control Solenoid: Description and Operation Some engines are equipped with an EGR bleed solenoid located in the EGR line. Engine Cold The bleed solenoid--energized when the engine is cold--bleeds off system vacuum so the EGR valve will operate at half normal vacuum. Engine Warm Solenoid is de-energized allowing full ported vacuum to be applied to the EGR valve. Torque Converter Clutch Engaged Some bleed solenoids reduce vacuum to the EGR valve when the torque converter clutch is applied. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 1. Connect a suitable vacuum pump to the "Vacuum Regulator Valve" (VRV) port, and a vacuum gauge to the "EGR" or "TCC" solenoid port. 2. Apply 15 inches Hg vacuum draw to "VRV" port, while noting reading of vacuum gauge. 3. Vacuum gauge should read 2.5 inches lower than vacuum pump on all 1981 and 1982 High Altitude V8 engines; and 0.75 inches lower on 1982 V6 and V8 (Exc. High Alt.) engines. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation EGR Valve: Description and Operation This valve is used on some 1977-82 vehicles to regulate the EGR flow according to engine load. The back pressure EGR valve is equipped with a transducer located inside the valve. The transducer uses exhaust gas pressure to control an air bleed within the valve to modify the vacuum signal from the carburetor. A small diaphragm controlled valve inside the EGR valve assembly acts as a pressure regulator. The control valve receives an exhaust back pressure signal through the hollow shaft which exerts a force on the bottom of the control valve diaphragm, opposed by light spring pressure. A metal deflector plate prevents hot exhaust gases from flowing directly on the diaphragm. Vacuum is applied to the EGR valve from the carburetor spark port, to ensure no exhaust gas recirculation during idle. During off-idle operation, manifold vacuum is applied to the vacuum chamber through a restriction in the signal tube. When engine load is light, and back pressure is low, the control valve is open, allowing air to flow from the bleeds in the diaphragm plate, through the control valve orifice, an into the vacuum chamber. The air bleeds off vacuum, decreasing the signal trying to open the EGR valve. If back pressure does not close the control valve, sealing off the air flow, there will not be any vacuum buildup to open the EGR valve for exhaust gas recirculation. When power demands are made on the engine, and exhaust gas recirculation is required, exhaust back pressure increases, closing the control valve, thereby shutting off air flow through the valve. Vacuum builds up in the vacuum chamber until the spring force holding the EGR valve closed is overcome. When the EGR valve opens, the exhaust pressure decreases because some of the exhaust gas is flowing into the intake manifold through the EGR passage. In actual operation, the system will reach a balanced condition providing maximum EGR operation. Any increase in engine load will momentarily increase the exhaust signal, causing the control valve to close, allowing a stronger vacuum signal. The system will then stabilize at a greater EGR flow. At maximum engine load, when manifold vacuum is nearly zero, there will be no EGR flow momentarily. This is due to the insufficient vacuum required to pull the valve open, even though high exhaust back pressure has closed the control valve. Fig. 61 Positive Back Pressure EGR Valve. Typical Fig. 62 Negative Back Pressure Valve. Typical Two types of back pressure EGR valves are used on General Motors vehicles. A Positive Back Pressure EGR Valve--Fig 61--is used on most engines. A Negative Back Pressure EGR Valve--Fig 62--is used on those engines with relatively low back pressure to provide the desired opening Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1594 point and flow rate. NOTE: Ported Vacuum, Positive Back Pressure, and Negative Back Pressure EGR valves can be identified by the pattern on the back of the diaphragm plate. Ported Vacuum EGR valves have a raised circular rib on the diaphragm plate. Positive Back Pressure EGR valves have a slightly raised X-shaped rib on the diaphragm plate, while Negative Back Pressure EGR valves have a substantially raised X-shaped rib. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1595 EGR Valve: Testing and Inspection Ported Vacuum & Negative Back Pressure EGR Valves 1. Check vacuum hoses for correct routing and EGR valve signal tube orifice for obstructions. 2. Connect vacuum gauge between EGR valve and carburetor--a minimum of 5 inches Hg vacuum should be available with engine running at normal operating temperature. 3. Depress valve diaphragm, then position finger over source tube. Release diaphragm. 4. Valve is good if diaphragm takes at least 20 seconds to move to closed position. If diaphragm closes in less than 20 seconds, replace EGR valve. NOTE: On engines equipped with EGR thermal vacuum switch or solenoid, there should be no EGR valve movement below the calibration temperature. If movement occurs, check TVS or solenoid for proper operation. Positive Back Pressure EGR Valve 1. Check vacuum hoses for correct routing and EGR valve signal tube orifice for obstructions. 2. Remove EGR valve from vehicle, and apply a constant vacuum of 10 inches Hg to EGR valve signal tube while observing position of valve. If valve is not closed, replace EGR valve. 3. With vacuum supply still applied, direct a low pressure stream of air into EGR valve exhaust inlet. Valve should open. If not, replace EGR valve. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1596 EGR Valve: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect EGR vacuum hose from valve. 2. Remove belts or nuts securing EGR valve to manifold. 3. Remove EGR valve from manifold. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > EGR Canister Purge Thermal Vacuum Switch (EGR-CP-DTVS) Thermal Vacuum Valve: Description and Operation EGR Canister Purge Thermal Vacuum Switch (EGR-CP-DTVS) EGR Canister Purge Thermal Vacuum Switch (EGR-CP-TVS) When engine coolant temperature is below the calibration point of the switch, ported vacuum is blocked from the canister and the EGR valve. Above the switching point, ported vacuum is directed to both the canister purge port and the EGR valve. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > EGR Canister Purge Thermal Vacuum Switch (EGR-CP-DTVS) > Page 1601 Thermal Vacuum Valve: Description and Operation EGR EFE Thermal Vacuum Switch (EGR-EFE-TVS) EGR Early Fuel Evaporation Thermal Vacuum Switch (EGR-EFE-TVS) This switch controls vacuum to the EGR and EFE valves according to engine coolant temperature. This switch allows the EFE system to operate only during engine warm-up periods, by supplying manifold vacuum to the EFE valve when coolant temperature is below the switching point. Above the switching point, the vacuum is blocked and the EFE actuator is vented to atmosphere. This switch also permits EGR operation at a reduced rate during warm-up and at full operation after warm-up. When engine coolant temperature is below the switching point, vacuum is directed from the ported vacuum port to the EGR port. Above the switching point, the vent orifice is blocked so full ported vacuum is directed to the EGR port. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > EGR Canister Purge Thermal Vacuum Switch (EGR-CP-DTVS) > Page 1602 Thermal Vacuum Valve: Description and Operation EGR Thermal Vacuum Switch (EGR-TVS) PURPOSE Controls activation of the EGR valve depending on temperature. OPERATION When engine coolant temperature is below the calibration point of the thermal vacuum switch, the TVS blocks ported vacuum from reaching the EGR valve. When engine coolant temperature is at or above the calibration point, ported vacuum is directed from the TVS to the valve--for effective EGR operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EGR > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > EGR-TCV Thermal Vacuum Valve: Testing and Inspection EGR-TCV - This valve is used on some engines in the vacuum line to the EGR valve. - The valve is closed below 61° F to block the vacuum to the EGR valve permitting better cold engine operation. - The valve is open above 76° F permitting normal EGR operation. - If vacuum is present at the EGR valve when engine coolant temperature is below 61° F, or there is no vacuum present when temperature is above 76° F, replace the valve. NOTE: Refer to the number stamped on the base of the switch or valve for calibrated switching or activation temperatures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EGR > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > EGR-TCV > Page 1605 Thermal Vacuum Valve: Testing and Inspection EGR-TVS WITH ENGINE HOT 1. Disconnect EGR valve vacuum hose from EGR valve and connect a vacuum gauge to hose. 2. Start engine and with transmission in Park or Neutral partially open throttle. As throttle opens, a vacuum increase should be noted on the vacuum gauge. 3. If there is a vacuum increase, EGR-TVS is operating properly. 4. If there is no vacuum increase, disconnect carburetor to EGR-TVS hose and connect vacuum gauge to hose. 5. Open throttle, a vacuum increase should be noted on vacuum gauge. If there is no vacuum increase,repace EGR-TVS. 6. If there still is no vacuum increase, check for plugged or damaged hose or carburetor. WITH ENGINE COLD 1. Drain coolant until coolant level is below EGR-TVS. 2. Disconnect vacuum hoses and remove switch. 3. Check switch to ensure that it is not damaged. 4. Connect a vacuum hose to the lower nipple on switch, marked "C" or "CARB". Connect a vacuum gauge to upper nipple, marked "E" or EGR". 5. Place switch in warm water(approximately 75 F) and submerge completely for 2 minutes while stirring the water. 6. Apply 12 inches Hg to hose on the lower nipple of switch. The switch should close. If switch does not close, replace EGR-TVS. NOTE: Leakage of up to 2 inches Hg of vacuum in 2 minutes is allowable and does not mean switch is defective. NOTE: Refer to the number stamped on the base of the switch or valve for calibrated switching or activation temperatures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EGR > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > EGR-TCV > Page 1606 Thermal Vacuum Valve: Testing and Inspection EGR Canister Purge TVS (EGR-CP-TVS) Below the switching point; Ports 1 and 2 should be blocked - No ported vacuum should be directed to the canister and EGR valve. Above the switching point; Ports 1 and 2 should be open, allowing ported vacuum to be directed to the canister and EGR valve. Replace valve, if defective. NOTE: Refer to the number stamped on the base of the switch or valve for calibrated switching or activation temperatures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EGR > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > EGR-TCV > Page 1607 Thermal Vacuum Valve: Testing and Inspection EGR Early Fuel Evaporation TVS Below the switching point; EFE and Manifold Vacuum ports should be open - EGR and Ported Vacuum ports should be opened and vented through the Vent port - Vent port should be blocked to the EFE port Above the switching point; Manifold Vacuum Port--Should be blocked - EFE port should be vented at the Vent port - EGR and Ported Vacuum ports should be open, while the Vent port is blocked at the EGR port. NOTE: Refer to the number stamped on the base of the switch or valve for calibrated switching or activation temperatures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Thermal Vacuum Valve, EGR > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1608 Thermal Vacuum Valve: Service and Repair 1. Drain engine coolant. 2. Disconnect vacuum hoses from EGR-TVS and remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install switch, noting the following. - Apply a suitable sealer to the EGR-TVS threads. - Torque switch to 20 ft lb. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Vacuum Check Valve, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Vacuum Check Valve: Description and Operation OPERATION Solenoid--energized by the ECM during cold engine operation--blocks ported vacuum to the EGR valve. When engine temperature is at or above the value programmed into the ECM, the module de-energizes the solenoid, which then directs ported vacuum to the EGR valve, activating the EGR system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Vacuum Delay Valve, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation Vacuum Delay Valve: Description and Operation This valve--used on some vehicles--is located in the vacuum hose to the EGR valve. Its purpose is to delay vacuum from bleeding down at the EGR valve. The vacuum is metered through a .005 inch orifice and requires up to 4 seconds from vacuum to bleed down completely. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Component Information > Description and Operation Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Description and Operation Fig. 37 - Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System. Typical Fig. 38 - PCV Valve Cross Section In 1961, the earliest form of automobile emission control, the PCV system was standard equipment on all General Motors vehicles sold in California. Two years later in 1963, all General Motors vehicles sold in the United States were equipped with this emission control system. Combustion engines produce varying amounts of blow-by gases--gases containing undesirable pollutants which seep past the piston rings and into the crankcase during combustion. SYSTEM OPERATION The PCV system prevents blow-by gasses from entering the atmosphere by routing blow-by gases into the intake manifold through a vacuum controlled ventilating valve and a hose while allowing proper crankcase ventilation. Blow-by gases mix with the air/fuel mixture and are burned during combustion. - When the engine is running, fresh air is drawn into the crankcase through a tube or hose connected to the air cleaner housing. Fig. 41 - Positive Crankcase Ventilation System Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1618 Fig. 42 - Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve PCV VALVE OPERATION The PCV valve--Fig 42--consists of needle valve, spring and housing. When the engine is off, the spring holds the needle valve closed to stop vapors from entering the intake manifold. When the engine is running, manifold vacuum unseats the needle valve--allowing crankcase vapors to enter the intake manifold. In case of a backfire in the intake manifold, the valve closes--stopping the backflow and preventing ignition of fumes in the crankcase. During certain engine conditions more blow-by gases are created than the ventilator valve can handle. The excess is returned through the air intake tube to the air cleaner and carburetor where it is burned in the engine. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > PCV System Test Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Testing and Inspection PCV System Test With Tester Fig. 45 A/C Positive Crankcase Ventilation System Tester System Air Intake & PCV Valve NOTE: This test uses the AC positive crankcase ventilation tester--Fig 45--which is operated by the engine vacuum through the oil filler opening. 1. With engine at normal operating temperature, remove oil filler cap and dipstick. 2. Connect one end of the hose to the tester body and connect the other end of the hose to the tester adapter. 3. Use the dipstick hole plug to plug the opening in the dipstick tube. 4. Insert the tester adapter in the filler cap opening and turn the selector knob to No. 2--Fig. 45. 5. If the vehicle has a system with the tube from the air cleaner going into the oil filler cap, disconnect the tube at the filler cap and plug the tube. 6. Start engine and let it idle. 7. With plugs secure and tube free of kinks, hold tester body upright and note color in the tester windows. Following lists the various colors and probable cause or related condition of the system. Green: System operating properly. Green & Yellow 1. PCV valve or system partially plugged. 2. Slight kink in tester hose. 3. Slight engine blow-by. 4. Plugs from kit or engine vacuum lines are not properly sealed. 5. Tester knob improperly set. Yellow 1. PCV valve or system partially plugged. 2. Tester hose kinked or blocked. 3. Blow-by at maximum capacity of PCV valve. 4. Plugs from kit or engine vacuum lines are not properly sealed. 5. Tester knob improperly set. Yellow & Red 1. PCV valve or system partially or fully plugged. 2. More engine blow-by than PCV valve can handle. 3. Vent hose plugged or collapsed. Red 1. PCV valve or system fully plugged or stuck. 2. Vent hose plugged or collapsed. 3. Extreme blow-by. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > PCV System Test > Page 1621 Without Tester A quick check of the system can he made by pulling the end of the PCV valve out of the valve cover and placing a finger over the end of the valve to block the air flow, while the engine is idling. A vacuum should be felt and the engine speed should drop approximately 50 rpm if the system is satisfactory, and no further testing is necessary. - If there is no change in engine speed a clogged system is indicated, proceed to the next step. To isolate the problem, remove the PCV valve from the hose and note vacuum felt and any change in idle speed. If the ventilator hoses and carburetor passages are clear, a strong vacuum will be felt and the engine idle will change drastically or the engine will stall when the end of the hose is uncovered. If this occurs, the trouble is in the valve. - If the engine continues to idle approximately as it did before the hose was uncovered, the hoses or carburetor passages are blocked. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > PCV System Test > Page 1622 Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Testing and Inspection PCV Valve Test NOTE: If vehicle is driven under dusty conditions, replace filter element as necessary. Inspect and replace any hoses that show signs of damage or plugged condition. 1. Install a PCV valve known to be good in the crankcase ventilation system. 2. Start engine and compare engine idle condition to the prior idle condition. - If the idle condition proves satisfactory, replace the PCV valve and clean hoses, fittings, etc. - If the loping or rough idle condition remains when the good PCV valve is installed, the crankcase ventilation system is not at fault--and further diagnosis will have to be made to find the cause of the malfunction. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Component Information > Service and Repair > Recommended Service Interval Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Service and Repair Recommended Service Interval Recommended PCV Valve Replacement Interval 1966-71 Vehicles - Every 12,000 Miles. 1972-74 Light, Medium And Heavy Duty Vehicles - Every 24,000 Miles. 1975-76 Light Duty Vehicles - Every 30,000 Miles. 1975-76 Medium And Heavy Duty Vehicles - Every 24,000 Miles. 1977-82 Light Duty Vehicles With Light Duty Emission Package - Every 30,000 Miles. 1977-82 Light Duty Vehicles With Heavy Duty Emission Package - Every 24,000 Miles. 1977-82 Medium And Heavy Duty Vehicles - Every 24,000 Miles. NOTE: If a 1977-82 medium and heavy duty vehicle is operated involving extensive idling and/or short trip use at freezing temperatures--where the engine does not become thoroughly warmed-up--replace PCV valve every 12,000 miles. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Component Information > Service and Repair > Recommended Service Interval > Page 1625 Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Service and Repair PCV Valve Replacement REMOVAL 1. Start and operate engine at idle. 2. Place thumb over end of valve to check for vacuum. If there is no vacuum at valve, check for plugged hoses or valve. 3. Replace plugged or damaged hoses, as required. 4. Switch engine "OFF" and remove PCV valve. Shake valve--needle inside valve should rattle. - If no rattle is heard replace PCV valve. INSTALLATION 1. Install new PCV valve and grommet onto intake manifold or rocker arm shaft cover. 2. Connect hoses and adjust engine idle--if necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Thermostatic Air Cleaner > Thermostatic Air Cleaner Vacuum Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Thermostatic Air Cleaner Vacuum Motor: Testing and Inspection 1. With engine off, look into left and right snorkel to be sure the valve plates are open. On smaller engines the left snorkel will be blocked closed and will not operate. 2. Start engine and observe valve plates with engine idling. The left plate--if equipped--will close immediately, regardless of temperature. 3. If the temperature in the air cleaner is below 90° F, the right valve plate will also close to outside air. With temperatures above approximately 100° F, the valve will remain open. 4. If vacuum motors fail to operate with vacuum directly applied, replace motor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Thermostatic Air Cleaner > Thermostatic Air Cleaner Vacuum Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1630 Thermostatic Air Cleaner Vacuum Motor: Service and Repair 1. Remove air cleaner from engine. 2. Drill out spot welds securing vacuum motor retaining straps to snorkel tube. 3. Lift then unhook linkage rod from damper door and remove vacuum motor. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Thermostatic Air Cleaner > Thermostatic Air Cleaner Vacuum Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Thermostatic Air Cleaner Vacuum Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. With engine temperature below 85° F, tape a thermometer in air cleaner. 2. Install air cleaner cover and start engine. 3. When cold air door starts to open, remove air cleaner cover and check temperature. - If temperature is below approximately 85° F, sensor must be replaced. NOTE: If hoses have been removed from connectors for any reason, it is very important that they be correctly positioned for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Thermostatic Air Cleaner > Thermostatic Air Cleaner Vacuum Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1634 Thermostatic Air Cleaner Vacuum Switch: Service and Repair 1. Remove air cleaner from engine. 2. Disconnect vacuum hoses from temperature sensor. 3. Pry temperature sensor tabs upward. NOTE: Note position of temperature sensor before removal from air cleaner. The new temperature sensor must be installed in the same position as the old temperature sensor. 4. Remove clip and sensor from air cleaner. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Light Duty ............................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 5.5 - 7.0 psi Heavy Duty ................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. 7.5 - 9.0 psi (with vapor return hose pinched off) Volume ................................................................................................................................................ ................................. 1 pint or more in 30 seconds Vacuum ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................... at least 15 in HG Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel Pump Pressure Test 1. Disconnect fuel line at carburetor and connect a suitable pressure gage. 2. Start engine and check pressure with engine running at slow idle speed. Fuel pump pressure should be as specified. 3. If fuel pump pressure is below 17-45 kPa (2.5 - 6.5 psi), pump must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel System Diagnosis > Page 1641 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pump Pressure Test - Mechanical Fuel Pump Fuel Pump Pressure Test 1. Disconnect fuel line at pump and connect a suitable pressure gage. 2. Start engine and check pressure with engine running at slow idle speed. Fuel pump pressure should be as specified. On vehicles equipped with a vapor return system squeeze off the return hose so that an accurate reading can be obtained. 3. If fuel pump pressure is below minimum, pump must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Throttle Body Injected Engines 1. Remove fuel pump fuse from fuse box. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and replace fuel pump fuse. Port Injected Engines 1. Disconnect fuel tank harness connector. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and reconnect fuel tank harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Enriched Idle Speed Idle Speed: Specifications Enriched Idle Speed ENRICHED IDLE SPEED Carburetor Number 17082221 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 150 17082225 .................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 150 17082222 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 50 17082224 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 50 17082226 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 50 17082227 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 50 17082506 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 50 17082508 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 50 17082223 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 100 17082231 .................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 100 17082235 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 100 17082291 .................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... 100 17082293 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 100 17082230 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 20 17082234 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 20 17082524 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 20 17082526 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 20 17082290 ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................................... 40 17082292 .................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................ 40 NOTE: Enriched Idle Speed value is added to base idle speed. This value is used during the idle mixture adjustment procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Enriched Idle Speed > Page 1649 Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed NOTE: Vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) below 6000 lbs (8500 lbs for California), and passenger carrying vehicles with a capacity of 12 persons or less, are Light Duty Emissions Vehicles. CURB IDLE SPEED Light Duty Automatic ............................................................................................................................................. ............................... 500 rpm (California 550) Manual ......................................................................... ........................................................................................................ 600 rpm (High Alt. 700) Heavy Duty Automatic ............................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 700 rpm Manual ......................................................................... .................................................................................................................................. 700 rpm A/C ON IDLE SPEED Manual Federal ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 750 rpm California ................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... 650 rpm Automatic Federal ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 600 rpm California ................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... 650 rpm FAST IDLE SPEED Light Duty Automatic ............................................................................................................................................. ........................... 1600 rpm (California 1800) Manual ......................................................................... .............................................................................................. 1300 rpm (High Altitude 1600) Heavy Duty Automatic/Manual ................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 1900 rpm NOTE: Measured on high cam step. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed Idle Speed: Adjustments Idle Speed California NOTE: On engines equipped with an Idle Speed Control (ISC) motor, idle speed is controlled by an electrical signal from the Electronic Control Module (ECM). Do not use the ISC plunger to adjust curb idle. The motor varies idle speed from a base (minimum authority) to a high (maximum authority) idle speed. Do not adjust unless diagnosis indicates a malfunction. Check for proper base and high idle speed as follows. CAUTION: DO NOT disconnect or connect ISC connector with ignition "ON" as damage to the ECM may occur. 1. Perform preliminary procedures: - Check and adjust ignition timing. - Disconnect and plug vacuum lines for evaporative purge and EGR valve. 2. Before starting engine, place transmission in "PARK" (automatic) or "NEUTRAL" (manual), set parking brake and block drive wheels. 3. Connect dwell meter to Mixture Control (M/C) solenoid dwell lead. This is a green connection breaking out of the main wiring harness leading to carburetor. NOTE: Remember to set dwell meter on the six cylinder scale, regardless of the engine being tested. 4. Turn A/C "OFF". 5. Start engine and run until stabilized and in "closed loop" mode (dwell meter needle starts to vary). 6. Turn ignition "OFF". CAUTION: Do not unplug ISC connector with ignition "ON" as damage to motor will occur. 7. Unplug connector from ISC motor. 8. Fully retract ISC plunger by applying 12 volts to terminal "C" ad grounding lead to terminal "D" of the ISC motor connection. CAUTION: DO NOT leave battery voltage applied to motor longer than necessary to retract ISC plunger. Prolonged contact will damage motor. Also, NEVER connect voltage source across terminal "A" and "B" as damage to the internal throttle contact switch will result. 9. Start engine and run until dwell meter needle starts to vary, indicating "closed loop" operation. 10. Place automatic transmission in "DRIVE". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1652 11. With ISC plunger fully retracted, adjust carburetor base (slow idle stop screw to 470 RPM (minimum authority). 12. Place transmission in "PARK" (automatic transmissions). 13. Fully extend ISC plunger by applying 12 volts to terminal "D" and grounding lead to terminal "C" of the ISC motor connection. Leave power applied only long enough to extend the plunger. 14. MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS: Using tool J29607 or BT-8022 or equivalent, turn ISC plunger to obtain 900 RPM (Maximum Authority). 15. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS: - With transmission in "PARK", using tool J-29607, BT-8022 or equivalent, preset ISC plunger to obtain 1500 RPM. - With parking brake set and drive wheels blocked, place transmission in "DRIVE". Turn ISC plunger to obtain 900 RPM (Maximum Authority). 16. Recheck ISC "Maximum Authority" RPM with voltage applied to ISC motor (step 13). Motor will ratchet at full extension with power applied. 17. After adjustment of ISC plunger, measure distance from back side of plunger head to ISC nosepiece. Dimension "B" must not exceed that shown in below chart. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1653 18. Fully retract ISC plunger (step 8). Place transmission in "PARK" (automatic) or "NEUTRAL" (manual) and turn ignition "OFF". Disconnect 12 volt power source, ground lead, tachometer and dwell meters. With ignition "OFF" reconnect four terminal harness connector to ISC motor. 19. "TRICKING" the ISC motor as described will cause the "CHECK ENGINE" light to come on and an ISC motor trouble code to be set. By restoring the system to normal operation, the light will go out, but the trouble code will continue to be stored as an "INTERMITTENT" problem. In this case, it will be necessary to clear the diagnostic trouble codes by removing the ECM fuse from the fuse block for about 10 seconds. Federal PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES - Warm engine to normal operating temperature (upper radiator hose hot). - Turn "OFF" all accessories, including A/C. - Check Timing (adjust if not to specification). See: Ignition System/Ignition Timing - Connect tachometer. CAUTION: Exercise care not to ground the TACH terminal (which is located next to the BAT connector) as this may damage the Electronic Control Module (ECM) or coil. CURB IDLE SPEED - Disconnect and plug vacuum hose to EGR valve and canister purge. - Adjust curb idle speed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1654 Without A/C Turn idle speed screw to specified curb idle (automatic transmissions in drive with wheels blocked and parking brake set). See: Specifications With A/C With A/C "OFF", turn idle speed screw to specified curb idle (automatic transmissions in drive with wheels blocked and parking brake set). - Disconnect wire to A/C compressor clutch and turn A/C "ON". - Open throttle momentarily to assure solenoid plunger is fully extended. - Turn solenoid screw to the specified idle speed. See: Specifications - Reconnect wire to compressor clutch. THROTTLE LEVER ACTUATOR - Disconnect vacuum hose from solenoid valve to the actuator diaphragm. - Connect an external vacuum source to the diaphragm and apply 20 inches of vacuum. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1655 - Manually open the throttle slightly and allow it to close against the extended actuator plunger. With engine warm, idle speed should be: Federal - 1500 rpm California - 1600 rpm NOTE: The throttle lever actuator is designed to control emissions by holding the throttle open slightly during deceleration and coasting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Adjustments > Idle Speed > Page 1656 Idle Speed: Adjustments Fast Idle Speed PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES - Warm engine to normal operating temperature (upper radiator hose hot). - Turn "OFF" all accessories, including A/C. - Check Timing (adjust if not to specification). - Connect tachometer. CAUTION: Exercise care not to ground the TACH terminal (which is located next to the BAT connector) as this may damage the Electronic Control Module (ECM) or coil. ADJUST FAST IDLE SPEED - Transmission in "PARK" or "NEUTRAL". - Disconnect and plug EGR vacuum line. - Place cam on "HIGH" step. - Turn fast idle screw to obtain specified rpm. See: Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Light Duty NOTE: Vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) below 6000 lbs (8500 lbs for California), and passenger carrying vehicles with a capacity of 12 persons or less, are Light Duty Emissions Vehicles. NOTE: Idle mixture needles have been preset at the factory and sealed. Idle mixture should be adjusted only in the case of major carburetor overhaul, throttle body replacement or high emissions as determined by official inspections. Adjusting mixture by other than the following method may violate Federal and or California or other state or Provincial laws. Because of the sealed idle mixture needles, the idle mixture checking procedure requires artificial enrichment by adding propane. 1. Set parking brake and block drive wheel. Engine must be at normal operating temperature and air conditioning off. 2. Disconnect and plug EGR and cannister purge vacuum hoses. 3. Connect an accurate tachometer to engine. 4. Disconnect vacuum advance and set timing to specification. Reconnect vacuum hose. See: Ignition System/Ignition Timing 5. Set carburetor idle speed to specification. See: Adjustments 6. Disconnect crankcase ventilation tube from air cleaner. Fig. 61 - Propane Enrichment Tool Installation 7. Using tool J-26911, insert hose with rubber stopper, from propane valve into crankcase ventilation tube opening in air cleaner. Propane cartridge must be vertical. 8. With engine idling in drive (neutral for manual shifts) slowly open propane control valve while pressing button. Continue to add propane until speed drops due to over richness. Note maximum engine speed (enriched speed). 9. If the enriched idle speed is within the enriched idle specification the mixture is correct. Go to step 17. Enrichment Specification: See: Idle Speed/Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty > Page 1661 10. If the enriched idle speed is not within specification, remove mixture screw plugs as follows: - Remove carburetor from engine to gain access to the plugs covering the idle mixture needles. - Invert carburetor on a suitable holding fixture, manifold side up. NOTE: Use care to avoid damaging linkage, tubes, and parts protruding from the air horn. - Make two parallel cuts in the throttle body on either side of the locator points beneath the idle mixture needle plug (manifold side) with a hack saw. The cuts should not extend more than 1/8 inch beyond the locator points. The distance between the saw marks depends on the size of the punch to be used. - Place a flat punch at a point near the ends of the saw marks in the throttle body. Holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive it into the throttle body until the casing breaks away, exposing the steel plug. - Holding a center punch vertical, drive it into the steel plug. - Then holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive the plug out of the casting. NOTE: Hardened plug may break rather than remain intact. It is not necessary to remove the plug completely, instead, remove loose pieces. - Repeat procedure for the remaining mixture needle and re-install carburetor. 11. Using tool J29030 or equivalent, lightly seat mixture needles, then back out equally, just enough so engine will run. 12. Place transmission in drive (automatic) or neutral (manual). 13. Back each screw out (richen 1/8 turn at a time until maximum idle speed is obtained). Then using base idle speed adjustment screw, set idle speed to the enriched idle specification. See: Idle Speed/Specifications 14. Turn each mixture screw in (clockwise) 1/8 turn at a time until idle speed reaches base idle speed. 15. Re-check enriched speed with propane. If not within specification, repeat adjustment beginning with step 12. 16. After adjustments are complete, seal the idle mixture needle setting using silicone sealant or equivalent. The sealer is required to prevent tampering with the setting and to prevent the possibility of loss of fuel vapors. 17. Check and adjust fast idle speed. See: Adjustments 18. Turn off engine. Remove propane tool, connect crankcase ventilation tube. Unplug and reconnect vacuum hoses. Install air cleaner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty > Page 1662 Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Heavy Duty NOTES: - Idle mixture needles have been preset at the factory and sealed. Idle mixture should be adjusted only in the case of major carburetor overhaul, throttle body replacement, or high emissions as determined by official inspections. - If necessary, remove idle needle plugs: Perform this adjustment with engine at operating temperature, parking brake applied, drive wheels blocked and transmission in park or neutral. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove air cleaner. 2. Connect tachometer and vacuum gage to engine. 3. As a preliminary adjustment, turn idle mixture needles in lightly to seat and back out 2 turns. NOTE: Do not turn idle mixture needle tightly against seat or damage may result. 4. With engine running (choke wide open and transmission in neutral) adjust idle speed screw to curb idle speed. See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Idle Speed 5. Adjust each idle mixture needle to obtain highest RPM. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until "best" idle is obtained. 7. If necessary, reset curb idle speed. See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Idle Speed/Federal 8. After adjustments are complete, seal the idle mixture needle setting using silicone sealant or equivalent. 9. Check and if necessary, adjust throttle lever actuator.See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Idle Speed 10. Check and if necessary, adjust fast idle speed. See: Idle Speed/Adjustments/Fast Idle Speed 11. Turn off engine, remove gages, unplug and reconnect vacuum hoses. Install air cleaner. 12. Remove block from drive wheel. CONCEALMENT PLUG REMOVAL - Remove carburetor from engine to gain access to the plugs covering the idle mixture needles. - Invert carburetor on a suitable holding fixture, manifold side up. NOTE: Use care to avoid damaging linkage, tubes, and parts protruding from the air horn. - Make two parallel cuts in the throttle body on either side of the locator points beneath the idle mixture needle plug (manifold side) with a hack saw. The cuts should not extend more than 1/8 inch beyond the locator points. The distance between the saw marks depends on the size of the punch to be used. - Place a flat punch at a point near the ends of the saw marks in the throttle body. Holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive it into the throttle body until the casing breaks away, exposing the steel plug. - Holding a center punch vertical, drive it into the steel plug. - Then holding the punch at a 45 degree angle, drive the plug out of the casting. NOTE: Hardened plug may break rather than remain intact. It is not necessary to remove the plug completely, instead, remove loose pieces. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air/Fuel Mixture > System Information > Adjustments > Light Duty > Page 1663 - Repeat procedure for the remaining mixture needle and re-install carburetor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 1673 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Air Filter Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Filter Element: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 1679 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Accelerator Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Accelerator Pumps, VITON - Available Technical Service Bulletin # 83I65VIM Date: 830501 Accelerator Pumps, VITON - Available Number: 83-I-65 Section: VIm Date: May, 1983 Subject: VITON ACCELERATOR PUMPS - CURRENT AND PAST MODELS EQUIPPED WITH DUAL AND QUADRAJETS - 1975-83 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Viton accelerator pumps are now available from WDDGM for service when a customer is using a high aromatic fuel, gasohol or has dry-out conditions stemming from long periods of non-operation. Two (2) types of viton accelerator pumps are released and must be used in the correct float bowl assembly. FIGURE 1. (DUALJET SHOWN) CARBURETOR Float bowl assemblies that have the letters "MW" (machined well) embossed next to the throttle position sensor electrical connector use the red lip (with garter spring) viton accelerator pump only. See Figure 1. Some 1982-83 "MW" float bowl assemblies used during production were assembled with the red viton pump and some were not. If the float bowl assembly does not contain the red viton pump, a blue dot will be on the rear of the throttle body near the bolt hole. See Figure 1. If the letters "MW" are not on the float bowl assembly a blue, thin lip accelerator pump can be used per the part list included with this bulletin. This float bowl assembly has the non-machined pump well and uses the blue, thin lip accelerator pump only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Accelerator Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Accelerator Pumps, VITON - Available > Page 1685 FIGURE 2. VITON ACCELERATOR PUMPS Viton service replacement pumps are identified as H.D. (Heavy Duty) in the parts book and are shown in Figure 2. Applications are as follows: Red lip (with garter spring) Machined well only (MW) Blue, thin lip Non-machined well only Dual and quadrajet pump part numbers: Red lip (with garter spring) 17072978 Blue thin lip See parts list PUMP ASSEMBLIES USED IN DUALJET AND QUADRAJET CHEVROLET APPLICATIONS 1975 - 1983 ORIGINAL ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT ASSEMBLY 07048874 17074108 17051117 17074109 17051374 17074104 17054773 17074111 17054791 17074112 17061752 17074114 17062731 17074115 17064155 17074117 17064156 17074118 17071169 17074119 1975 - 1978 Chevrolet CARB NUMBER REPLACEMENT PUMP ASSY. 1975 CHEVROLET 07045200 17074104 07045220 17074104 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Accelerator Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Accelerator Pumps, VITON - Available > Page 1686 07045221 17074104 17055038 17074104 17055040 17074104 1976 CHEVROLET 17055040 17074104 17056200 17074104 17056219 17074104 17056286 17074104 17056503 17074104 17056508 17074104 17056509 17074104 17056518 17074104 17056519 17074104 17056528 17074104 1977 CHEVROLET 17055199 17074104 17057221 17074104 17057512 17074104 17057517 17074104 17058399 17074104 17058463 17074104 17058464 17074104 1978 CHEVROLET 17055736 17074108 17058130 17074108 17058131 17074108 17058132 17074108 17058133 17074108 17058184 17074108 17058186 17074108 17058201 17074108 17058206 17074108 17058285 17074104 17058282 17074108 17058397 17074108 17058284 17074108 17058398 17074104 17058460 17074108 17058465 17074104 CARB NUMBER REPLACEMENT PUMP ASSY. 1978 CHEVROLET 17058466 17074104 17058467 17074104 17058468 17074104 17058509 17074104 17058510 17074104 17058512 17074104 17058586 17074104 17058588 17074104 1979 Chevrolet Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Accelerator Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Accelerator Pumps, VITON - Available > Page 1687 17058474 17074104 17059009 17074112 17059061 17074104 17059065 17074104 17059066 17074104 17059100 17074118 17059101 17074118 17059102 17074118 17059103 17074118 17059104 17074117 17059106 17074117 17059108 17074117 17059110 17074117 17059130 17074117 17059131 17074117 17059132 17074117 17059133 17074117 17059134 17074117 17059135 17074117 17059136 17074117 17059137 17074117 17059138 17074117 17059139 17074117 17059140 17074117 17059141 17074117 17059142 17074118 17059143 17074118 17059144 17074118 17059145 17074118 17059170 17074117 17059171 17074117 17059201 17074104 17059203 17074109 17059205 17074104 17059206 17074104 17059207 17074109 17059208 17074104 CARB NUMBER REPLACEMENT PUMP ASSY. 1979 CHEVROLET 17059209 17074104 17059210 17074104 17059211 17074104 17059212 17074115 17059213 17074115 17059215 17074115 17059216 17074109 17059217 17074109 17059218 17074108 17059222 17074108 17059228 17074104 17059229 17074115 17059282 17074109 17059284 17074109 17059293 17074114 17059309 17074112 17059359 17074112 17059366 17074104 17059368 17074104 17059430 17074117 17059432 17074117 17059434 17074117 17059436 17074117 17059501 17074104 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Accelerator Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Accelerator Pumps, VITON - Available > Page 1688 17059502 17074109 17059503 17074104 17059504 17074109 17059505 17074109 17059506 17074104 17059507 17074109 17059508 17074104 17059509 17074104 17059510 17074104 17059512 17074115 17059513 17074115 17059515 17074115 17059520 17074104 17059521 17074104 17059527 17074104 17059528 17074104 17059529 17074115 17059582 17074109 17059584 17074109 17059586 17074104 17059588 17074104 17065723 17074104 17066080 17074109 1980 Chevrolet CARB NUMBER REPLACEMENT PUMP ASSY. 17080009 17074112 17080100 17074118 17080102 17074118 17080104 17074117 17080105 17074117 17080106 17074117 17080107 17074117 17080108 17074117 17080110 17074117 17080130 17074117 17080131 17074117 17080132 17074117 17080133 17074117 17080138 17074117 17080140 17074117 17080142 17074118 17080143 17074118 17080144 17074118 17080145 17074118 17080146 17074117 17080147 17074117 17080148 17074117 17080149 17074117 17080170 17074117 17080171 17074117 17080172 17074117 17080173 17074117 17080174 17074117 17080175 17074117 17080201 17074104 17080202 17074109 17080204 17074109 17080205 17074104 17080206 17074104 17080207 17074109 17080212 17074115 17080213 17074115 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Accelerator Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Accelerator Pumps, VITON - Available > Page 1689 17080215 17074115 17080224 17074104 17080225 17074104 17080226 17074104 17080227 17074104 17090228 17074104 17080229 17074115 17080282 17074109 17080284 17074109 17080290 17074104 CARB NUMBER REPLACEMENT 1980 CHEVROLET PUMP ASSY. 17080291 17074104 17080292 17074104 17080295 17074104 17080297 17074104 17080298 17074115 17080309 17074112 17080359 17074112 17080502 17074104 17080503 17074104 17080504 17074104 17080506 17074104 17080507 17074115 17080508 17074104 17080511 17074115 17080512 17074115 17080513 17074115 17080516 17074104 17080517 17074104 17080523 17074104 17080524 17074104 17080525 17074104 17080526 17074104 17080527 17074104 17080528 17074104 17080529 17074115 1981 Chevrolet 17081009 17074112 17081101 17074118 17081103 17074118 17081131 17074119 17081133 17074119 17081134 17074119 17081136 17074119 17081138 17074119 17081140 17074119 17081142 17074118 17081143 17074118 17081144 17074118 17081145 17074118 17081170 17074117 17081171 17074117 17081172 17074117 17081173 17074117 17081174 17074117 17081175 17074117 17081200 17074109 CARB NUMBER REPLACEMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Accelerator Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Accelerator Pumps, VITON - Available > Page 1690 PUMP ASSY. 1981 CHEVROLET 17081201 17074109 17081202 17074104 17081203 17074104 17081204 17074104 17081205 17074109 17081206 17074109 17081207 17074104 17081211 17074109 17081216 17074104 17081217 17074104 17081218 17074104 17081219 17074104 17081220 17074109 17081222 17074104 17081224 17074104 17081226 17074109 17081227 17074109 17081228 17074104 17081282 17074109 17081283 17074109 17081284 17074109 17081285 17074109 17081290 17074104 17081291 17074104 17081292 17074104 17081296 17074109 17081297 17074109 17081309 17074112 17081329 17074112 17081506 17074104 17081508 17074104 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Accelerator Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Accelerator Pumps, VITON - Available > Page 1691 17081524 17074109 17081526 17074109 1982 Chevrolet 17082130 17074119 17082132 17074119 17082138 17074119 17082140 17074119 17082172 17074117 17082173 17074117 17082174 17074117 17082175 17074117 17082202 17074104 17082203 17074104 17082204 17074104 CARB NUMBER REPLACEMENT PUMP ASSY. 1982 CHEVROLET 17082207 17074104 17082213 17074115 17082216 17074104 17082218 17074104 17082220 17074109 17082221 17074109 17082222 17074109 17082223 17074109 17082224 17074109 17082225 17074109 17082226 17074109 17082227 17074109 17082230 17074109 17082231 17074109 17082234 17074104 17082235 17074104 17082280 17074109 17082281 17074109 17082282 17074109 17082283 17074109 17082288 17074109 17082289 17074109 17082290 17074104 17082291 17074104 17082292 17074104 17082293 17074104 17082296 17074109 17082297 17074109 17082506 17074104 17082508 17074104 17082513 17074115 17082524 17074109 17082526 17074109 1983 Chevrolet 17083130 17074119 17083132 17074119 17083202 17074104 17083203 17074104 17083204 17074104 17083207 17074104 17083216 17074104 17083218 17074104 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Accelerator Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Accelerator Pumps, VITON - Available > Page 1692 17083220 17074109 17083221 17074109 17083222 17074109 17083223 17074109 CARB NUMBER REPLACEMENT PUMP ASSY. 1983 CHEVROLET 17083224 17074109 17083225 17074109 17083226 17074109 17083227 17074109 17083230 17074109 17083231 17074109 17083234 17074104 17083235 17074104 17083236 17074104 17083280 17074109 17083281 17074109 17083282 17074109 17083283 17074109 17083290 17074104 17083291 17074104 17083292 17074104 17083293 17074104 17083298 17074115 17083506 17074111 17083507 17074115 17083508 17074111 17083524 17074115 17083526 17074115 17054922 17074104 17054924 17074104 17054933 17074104 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Choke Thermostat/Heater > Component Information > Diagrams Choke Thermostat/Heater: Diagrams Electrical Diagram of Choke Heater Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Choke Thermostat/Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1696 Choke Thermostat/Heater: Description and Operation Electric choke assembly exploded view NOTE: The electric assist choke system does not change any carburetor service procedures and cannot be adjusted. If the system is found to be out of calibration, the choke unit must be replaced. PURPOSE The electric assist choke helps to reduce hydrocarbon (HC) and carbon monoxide (CO) emission during start and warm-up periods--choke-on--by opening the choke more rapidly at ambient temperatures above 60-65° F, than it does at ambient temperatures below 60°-65° F. OPERATION System Components--Fig 39 Thermostatic Coil Ceramic Resistor Cover Bi-Metal Snap Disc Contact Spring. Ceramic Resistor The electrically actuated ceramic resistor--composed of a small center section for gradual heating and a larger outer section for rapid heating of the thermostatic coil--heats the thermostatic coil gradually relaxing coil tension allowing the choke valve to open. The electric current is supplied to the ceramic resistor from the oil pressure switch when the engine is running and oil pressure is above the minimum value for the switch. Air Temperatures Below 50° F As current applied to the small section of the ceramic resistor allows slow opening of the choke valve--for good engine warm-up; A bi-metal disc closes the spring loaded contact applying current to the large section of the ceramic resistor. - This increases heat flow to the thermostatic coil, opening the choke valve more rapidly . Air Temperatures Between 50-70° F Current is applied to the small section--or both the small and large sections--of the ceramic resistor, producing the heat required to control choke valve position for optimum engine operation. Temperatures Near 60 to 65°F Designed to open choke more rapidly when temperatures are 60 to 65° F or greater, than when temperatures are below 60 to 65° F. Air Temperatures Above 70° F Since leaner air/fuel mixtures are required for warmer temperatures current is applied to both the small section and large section--through the Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Choke Thermostat/Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1697 spring contact--of the ceramic resistor, to rapidly heat the thermostatic coil for quicker choke valve opening. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Carburetor > Choke Thermostat/Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1698 Choke Thermostat/Heater: Testing and Inspection Fig. 29 - Electric Choke Assembly Possible Causes For Improper Electric Assist Choke Operation: 1. Low or no engine oil pressure. 2. Oil pressure switch faulty. 3. No current to oil pressure switch due to: a. "Radio-idle stop" fuse burned out--15 amp. b. Oil pressure switch circuit open--broken wire. 4. No current between choke and oil pressure switch due to: a. Broken (18 light blue) lead wire. b. Coil terminal not properly secured. c. Faulty choke assembly to housing grounding plate ground circuit. 5. Choke coil assembly faulty. NOTE: A voltmeter should be used to check oil pressure and choke coil circuits. If choke coil assembly is a suspected problem, perform the following test: 1. Remove choke coil from carburetor and allow coil to cool to room temperature. 2. Connect a "jumper" wire between the positive battery terminal and choke coil terminal assembly. 3. Connect a second "jumper" wire between the negative battery terminal and the choke coil assembly grounding plate. 4. The tang on the choke coil should rotate 45° in 54-90 seconds. 5. If choke coil does not rotate or exceeds the 54-90 second time limit, replace choke coil. 6. If coil is within specification, check steps 1 through 5. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 93966C > Feb > 93 > Fuel System - Factors That Affect Economy/Mileage Fuel: Customer Interest Fuel System - Factors That Affect Economy/Mileage Number: 93-96-6C Section: 6C Date: FEB. 1993 Corporate Bulletin No.: 306502 ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: FACTORS THAT AFFECT FUEL ECONOMY Model and Year: ALL YEARS ALL MODELS BACKGROUND INFORMATION: EPA fuel economy estimates are posted on the fuel economy label of all new vehicles. The only intended use of these values is for comparison among the different vehicles. Fuel economy estimates are generated from data taken during a laboratory test using pre-production prototype vehicles under extremely controlled conditions using a professional driver, with the vehicle operating on an instrument similar to a treadmill. The comparisons of current vehicle fuel economy to the EPA fuel economy estimates is a misuse of the information and should be discouraged. The EPA GAS MILEAGE GUIDE, available at each dealership, points out that the actual mileage when driving a vehicle may differ considerably from the estimated mileage. The guide also describes how vehicles are tested under identical conditions to insure the results can be compared with confidence. The EPA GAS MILEAGE GUIDE also points out that city fuel economy estimate simulates a 7.5 mile, stop-and-go trip with an average speed of 20 mph. The trip takes 23 minutes and has 18 stops. About 18 percent of the time is spent idling, as in waiting at traffic lights or in rush hour traffic. Two kinds of engine starts are used - the cold start, which is similar to starting a car in the morning after it has been parked all night - and the hot start, similar to restarting a vehicle after it has been warmed up, driven and stopped for a short time. The test to determine the highway fuel economy estimate represents a mixture of "non-city" driving. Segments corresponding to different kinds of rural roads and interstate highways are included. The test simulates a 10 mile trip and averages 48 mph. The test is run from a hot start and has little idling time and no stops. The EPA GAS MILEAGE GUIDE explains that the actual test results are adjusted downward to arrive at the estimates used in the booklet and on the labels. City estimates are lowered by 10 percent and the highway estimate by 22 percent from the laboratory test results. The guide also points out that traveling at higher speeds lowers fuel economy and traveling at 65 mph instead of 55 mph lowers fuel economy over 15 percent. FACTORS THAT AFFECT FUEL ECONOMY: Axle Ratio Numerically lower axle ratios generally produce better highway fuel economy. The exception to this is if the engine is "working" exceptionally hard, (heavy vehicle loads pulling a trailer, small engine in a large vehicle ... ). In these cases a numerically higher axle may provide better fuel economy. Numerically higher axle ratios will also tend to provide more fuel economy in congested city traffic and stop and go conditions. Brakes Brake drag (even a minimal amount undetectable by coasting), can have a significant negative impact on fuel economy. Pull upward on the brake pedal to assure that the stoplight switch and cruise switch at the brake pedal are full and properly adjusted. A "click" sound when the pedal is pulled upward indicates that the switch was improperly adjusted. This causes the front brake pads to lightly rub the rotors, causing a fuel economy loss, without generating excessive heat or brake pad wear. Driving Habits Frequent short trips (less than 5 miles), especially in cooler ambient temperatures (less than 65 degrees), will necessitate fuel enrichment on start-ups, especially after "soaks" with the engine off for approximately a half hour or more. Frequent accelerator pedal movement while driving will reduce fuel economy because of fuel enrichment during the periods of acceleration. Under such driving conditions the torque converter clutch (TCC) also disengages, contributing to fuel economy losses. Prolonged idle periods reduce fuel economy especially in cold ambients when vehicle is allowed to "Warm up". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 93966C > Feb > 93 > Fuel System - Factors That Affect Economy/Mileage > Page 1707 Fuels Oxygenated fuels, with methanol and/or ethanol blended into the gasoline have lower energy and thus reduce fuel economy. Typically there is about a 1 MPG penalty for a vehicle which gets 25 to 30 MPG on 100 percent gasoline. Using fuels of a lower octane than the vehicle was calibrated to will cause increased "KS" Knock Sensor system activity. This will result in a net decrease in spark advance and thus poorer fuel economy. Using fuel of a higher octane than the vehicle was calibrated for WILL NOT increase fuel economy. Variations in how much fuel is added to the fuel tank during re-fueling can greatly affect calculated fuel economy. These effects decrease as the distance traveled and the number of tank fillups increase. Green Engine New vehicles have not yet had an opportunity for the engine to break in, (rings to seat ... ). A typical engine will take 3 to 5 thousand miles to break in and during this time period a gradual increase in fuel economy can be expected. Parasitic Loads Air conditioning and/or electrical loads, (headlights, heated backglass ... ) also result in lower fuel economy, (typically less than 1 MPG difference, each 10 AMPs takes approximately .4 MPG). Road Conditions Road surface condition impacts fuel economy. Gravel and/or pot holed roads decrease fuel economy. Hills (vs. level terrain) also negatively impact fuel economy. Even gradual unperceptible increases in elevation result in real measurable decreases in fuel economy. Similarly, driving in the rain or snow decreases fuel economy. Suspension Vehicle suspension misalignment can cause poor fuel economy. Check all four tires for abnormal and/or premature tire wear. New tires, tire rotation, and/or front end alignment may be required to correct fuel economy. Tires Performance tires and/or tires with larger "contact areas," (like 60 series aspect ratio), can cause as much as 3 MPG lower fuel economy when compared to hard "thin" tires. Find out if the tire size currently on the car is the same as original equipment. Replacement tires tailor than original equipment tires cause the odometer to read LESS THAN actual distance traveled. This will result in lower calculated fuel economy than actual fuel economy. Tire Pressure Harder tires, (more air pressure, or different tire compositions) result in better fuel economy. Do not exceed maximum pressure as labeled on the tire, typically 30-35 psi. The disadvantage of this is that the greater the tire pressure, the harsher the vehicle ride. Transmission On 4-Speed automatics, it is possible to drive the vehicle in 3rd gear rather than "overdrive" and not perceive it. Typically this condition occurs when the shift indicator, or the shift linkage/detent is misadjusted. Misadjusted shift linkage can also result in improper signals to the ECM, which can result in less spark advance, and results in a drop in fuel economy. Driving a vehicle in 3rd gear rather than overdrive at highway speeds typically results in a 3 to 5 MPG penalty. Torque Converter Clutch operation is essential for good fuel economy. A non-locking torque converter typically results in a 1 to 2 MPG penalty at highway speeds. Vehicle Weight Each 125 lbs. of additional weight results in a .3 MPG loss of fuel economy. Thus, additional passengers, luggage ... will decrease fuel economy. Vehicle Wind Resistance More wind "DRAG" means less fuel economy. Thus, hang-on luggage carders, cat toppers, open windows and/or open trunk... mean less fuel economy. (See "Driving Habits"). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 93316C > Oct > 92 > Fuels - Effect of Volatility on Driveability Fuel: Customer Interest Fuels - Effect of Volatility on Driveability Number: 93-31-6C Section: 6C Date: OCT. 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 249128R ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: EFFECT OF FUEL VOLATILITY ON DRIVEABILITY CONDITIONS Model and Year: ALL MODEL YEARS, ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 92-281-6C, DATED SEPT. 1992. THE 1993 MODEL YEAR HAS BEEN ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 92-281-6C SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Recent changes in EPA regulations have effectively lowered the maximum allowable fuel volatility. Volatility, which can be defined as a gasoline's ability to change from a liquid to a vapor, directly affects the amount of evaporative emissions produced by the fuel. Higher volatility means that more unburned hydrocarbons will be released into the atmosphere. Unfortunately, reducing fuel volatility can cause problems during cold engine operation when low temperatures impede the fuel's ability to vaporize and burn. Two terms are often used to describe volatility characteristics. These are: Distillation Curve A graph showing the relationship between temperature and the percentage of fuel evaporated. The fuel components that boil at relatively low temperatures (below about 90 degrees F) are known as the "light ends", and are essential for good cold engine performance. The "heavy ends", which begin to boil at about 300 degrees F, contain the most energy but are more difficult to burn. Laboratory analysis is usually required to determine the distillation curve of a gasoline sample. - Reid Vapor Pressure (RVP) RVP is the pressure (psi) that vaporized fuel exerts within a sealed container as it is heated to 100 degrees F. The higher the RVP the higher the fuel volatility. While RVP is readily tested in the field, fuels of the same RVP can have different distillation curves and cold driveability characteristics. Fuel volatility will vary depending on geographic location and time of year (fuel intended to be used in higher ambient conditions is formulated with less volatility). This can make cold driveability as big a problem during summer months as during the winter. There may be additional variation in the volatility characteristics of pump gasoline, caused by the differences in fuel manufacturers, blends and storage times. As EPA fuel volatility standards are lowered, variations between fuels (which may further reduce volatility) becomes a critical factor influencing cold engine performance. No matter how thoroughly the relationship between fuel quality and cold driveability is understood, eliminating fuel quality as an issue can be difficult, because: TOOLS WHICH TEST FUEL VOLATILITY MEASURE ONLY RVP, NOT THE DISTILLATION CURVE. The distillation curve has a greater effect on cold driveability than RVP. THE CUSTOMER MAY PERCEIVE RAISING THE FUEL QUALITY ISSUE AS AN ATTEMPT TO EVADE HIS PROBLEM. This may cause difficulty in getting accurate fuel usage information. WATER, AND OTHER TYPES OF FUEL CONTAMINATION, MAY CAUSE CONTINUED DRIVEABILITY COMPLAINTS. - The problem symptoms may remain even though the vehicle has been refueled several times with a quality gasoline. CUSTOMER CONCERNS CONDITION: Poor Cold Engine Operation, symptoms may include; hard start/extended crank, stalling, backfiring, hesitation and/or lack of power. POSSIBLE CAUSE: Low volatility fuel will not vaporize sufficiently to allow normal combustion. CORRECTION: Replace Fuel. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE: 1. Perform basic system checks in section 6E of the service manual. 2. Check for service bulletins which relate to cold driveability issues specific to the problem vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 93316C > Oct > 92 > Fuels - Effect of Volatility on Driveability > Page 1712 - An updated engine control calibration, or service procedure, may be available to make the engine less susceptible to low volatility fuels. 3. If basic checks do not reveal a vehicle fault, then advise the customer that fuel quality may be an issue. Recommend the following actions: Change brands of fuel - Use 87 octane gasoline, unless the vehicle is designed for premium gasoline. - Try to empty the fuel tank as much as practical before refilling. - Run a minimum of three tanks of new fuel before returning for service. 4. If above steps are ineffective, do not proceed with additional vehicle diagnosis and/or parts replacement until the fuel tank has been drained and refilled with a known good quality gasoline AT THE DEALERSHIP. 5. If the problem remains refer to service manual, service bulletins and/or technical assistance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 05-06-04-022G > Oct > 10 > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-022G Date: October 27, 2010 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Information and Available Brands (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - Canada ONLY Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Canada Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and include an additional gasoline brand as a TOP TIER source. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). In the U.S., refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047I. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by the Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with Minimum Additive recommended by the CGSB Top Tier Fuel Availability Chevron was the first to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in Canada. Shell became the first national gasoline retailer to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline across Canada. Petro-Canada began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline nationally as of October 1, 2006. Sunoco began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in March of 2007. Esso began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in May of 2010. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 05-06-04-022G > Oct > 10 > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 1718 Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards The following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards in all octane grades : Chevron Canada (markets in British Columbia and western Alberta) - Shell Canada (nationally) - Petro-Canada (nationally) - Sunoco-Canada (Ontario) - Esso-Canada (nationally) What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency and no metallic additives. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent recommendations of Canadian standards and does not contain metallic additives, which can damage vehicle emission control components. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began in the U.S. and Canada on May 3, 2004. Some fuel marketers have already joined and introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota, Volkswagen and Audi. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. In the U.S., government regulations require that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In Canada, gasoline standards recommend adherence to U.S. detergency requirements but do not require it. In fact, many brands of gasoline in Canada do not contain any detergent additive. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required or recommended, and no metallic additives are allowed. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency and the intentional addition of metallic additives is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and engine performance, and also provide reduced emissions. Also, the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Who should use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. More information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at this website, http://www.toptiergas.com/. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 05-06-04-022G > Oct > 10 > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 1719 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 04-06-04-047I > Aug > 09 > Fuel System - 'TOP TIER' Detergent Gasoline Information Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - 'TOP TIER' Detergent Gasoline Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-047I Date: August 17, 2009 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - U.S. Only Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) (U.S. Only) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 (U.S. Only) 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 (U.S. Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (U.S. Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and additional sources to the Top Tier Fuel Retailers list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047H (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). In Canada, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with Legal Minimum additive Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards As of August 1, 2009, all grades of the following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards: - Chevron - Chevron-Canada - QuikTrip - Conoco Phillips 66 - 76 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 04-06-04-047I > Aug > 09 > Fuel System - 'TOP TIER' Detergent Gasoline Information > Page 1724 - Shell - Shell-Canada - Entec Stations located in the greater Montgomery, Alabama area. - MFA Oil Company located throughout Missouri. - Kwik Trip, Inc. in Minnesota and Wisconsin and Kwik Star convenience stores in Iowa. The Somerset Refinery, Inc. at Somerset Oil stations in Kentucky. Aloha Petroleum - Tri-Par Oil Company - Turkey Hill Minit Markets - Texaco - Petro-Canada - Sunoco-Canada - Road Ranger located in Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kentucky, Missouri, Ohio and Wisconsin What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent requirements imposed by the EPA. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began on May 3, 2004 and many fuel marketers have joined the program and have introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Where Can I find the Latest Information on TOP TIER Fuel and Retailers? On the web, please visit www.toptiergas.com for additional information and updated retailer lists. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: Audi, BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota and Volkswagen. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. The EPA requires that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required by the EPA. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and performance and reduced emissions. Also, use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 570102 > Jun > 95 > Fuel Reformulated/Oxygenated Gasolines Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Reformulated/Oxygenated Gasolines FILE IN SECTION: 0 - General Information BULLETIN NO.: 57-01-02 DATE: June, 1995 SUBJECT: Reformulated Gasoline (RFG), Oxygenated Gasoline and California Phase 2 RFG MODELS: 1995 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks General Motors customers will be potentially exposed to a variety of different fuel types. Besides the conventional gasoline available, new types such as Reformulated Gasoline (RFG), oxygenated gasoline, and starting in 1996, California Phase 2 RFG. Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) is blended to burn more cleanly and not to evaporate as readily. RFG must contain a minimum of 2 percent oxygen, which is usually achieved with ethanol or EPA-approved ethers such as methyl tertiary-butyl ether (MTBE). This type of fuel is required by the Clean Air Act in the nine worst ozone non-attainment areas of the country, and may also be required in other areas designated ozone non-attainment, at the option of the states. RFG is intended to produce approximately 15 percent less pollution than conventional gasoline. Using RFG should reduce the total health risk to the public by reducing exposure to ozone and air toxins. General Motors supports the use of RFG as a cost effective means of providing air quality benefits. Oxygenated gasolines are prevalent in the wintertime for Carbon Monoxide (CO) non-attainment areas. These fuels contain oxygen components similar to RFG. Approximately 50 percent of the fuel sold in the U.S. in the wintertime contains an oxygenate component. Vehicle fuel economy may be slightly reduced, if at all, by the use of gasoline containing oxygenates. Fuel economy is most affected by engine and vehicle type, driving habits, weather conditions, and vehicle maintenance. Properly blended RFG, oxygenated gasoline, and California Phase 2 RFG will have no adverse effect on vehicle performance or to the durability of engine and fuel system components. In fact, the General Motors Owner's Manual fuel statements have consistently permitted the use of properly blended fuels containing up to 10 percent ethanol (since 1980) and up to 15 percent methyl tertiary-butyl ether (MTBE) for current and all past model year vehicles. These statements continue to be valid. The use of oxygenate-containing fuels will not invalidate the GM vehicle warranty. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 93966C > Feb > 93 > Fuel System - Factors That Affect Economy/Mileage Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Factors That Affect Economy/Mileage Number: 93-96-6C Section: 6C Date: FEB. 1993 Corporate Bulletin No.: 306502 ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: FACTORS THAT AFFECT FUEL ECONOMY Model and Year: ALL YEARS ALL MODELS BACKGROUND INFORMATION: EPA fuel economy estimates are posted on the fuel economy label of all new vehicles. The only intended use of these values is for comparison among the different vehicles. Fuel economy estimates are generated from data taken during a laboratory test using pre-production prototype vehicles under extremely controlled conditions using a professional driver, with the vehicle operating on an instrument similar to a treadmill. The comparisons of current vehicle fuel economy to the EPA fuel economy estimates is a misuse of the information and should be discouraged. The EPA GAS MILEAGE GUIDE, available at each dealership, points out that the actual mileage when driving a vehicle may differ considerably from the estimated mileage. The guide also describes how vehicles are tested under identical conditions to insure the results can be compared with confidence. The EPA GAS MILEAGE GUIDE also points out that city fuel economy estimate simulates a 7.5 mile, stop-and-go trip with an average speed of 20 mph. The trip takes 23 minutes and has 18 stops. About 18 percent of the time is spent idling, as in waiting at traffic lights or in rush hour traffic. Two kinds of engine starts are used - the cold start, which is similar to starting a car in the morning after it has been parked all night - and the hot start, similar to restarting a vehicle after it has been warmed up, driven and stopped for a short time. The test to determine the highway fuel economy estimate represents a mixture of "non-city" driving. Segments corresponding to different kinds of rural roads and interstate highways are included. The test simulates a 10 mile trip and averages 48 mph. The test is run from a hot start and has little idling time and no stops. The EPA GAS MILEAGE GUIDE explains that the actual test results are adjusted downward to arrive at the estimates used in the booklet and on the labels. City estimates are lowered by 10 percent and the highway estimate by 22 percent from the laboratory test results. The guide also points out that traveling at higher speeds lowers fuel economy and traveling at 65 mph instead of 55 mph lowers fuel economy over 15 percent. FACTORS THAT AFFECT FUEL ECONOMY: Axle Ratio Numerically lower axle ratios generally produce better highway fuel economy. The exception to this is if the engine is "working" exceptionally hard, (heavy vehicle loads pulling a trailer, small engine in a large vehicle ... ). In these cases a numerically higher axle may provide better fuel economy. Numerically higher axle ratios will also tend to provide more fuel economy in congested city traffic and stop and go conditions. Brakes Brake drag (even a minimal amount undetectable by coasting), can have a significant negative impact on fuel economy. Pull upward on the brake pedal to assure that the stoplight switch and cruise switch at the brake pedal are full and properly adjusted. A "click" sound when the pedal is pulled upward indicates that the switch was improperly adjusted. This causes the front brake pads to lightly rub the rotors, causing a fuel economy loss, without generating excessive heat or brake pad wear. Driving Habits Frequent short trips (less than 5 miles), especially in cooler ambient temperatures (less than 65 degrees), will necessitate fuel enrichment on start-ups, especially after "soaks" with the engine off for approximately a half hour or more. Frequent accelerator pedal movement while driving will reduce fuel economy because of fuel enrichment during the periods of acceleration. Under such driving conditions the torque converter clutch (TCC) also disengages, contributing to fuel economy losses. Prolonged idle periods reduce fuel economy especially in cold ambients when vehicle is allowed to "Warm up". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 93966C > Feb > 93 > Fuel System - Factors That Affect Economy/Mileage > Page 1733 Fuels Oxygenated fuels, with methanol and/or ethanol blended into the gasoline have lower energy and thus reduce fuel economy. Typically there is about a 1 MPG penalty for a vehicle which gets 25 to 30 MPG on 100 percent gasoline. Using fuels of a lower octane than the vehicle was calibrated to will cause increased "KS" Knock Sensor system activity. This will result in a net decrease in spark advance and thus poorer fuel economy. Using fuel of a higher octane than the vehicle was calibrated for WILL NOT increase fuel economy. Variations in how much fuel is added to the fuel tank during re-fueling can greatly affect calculated fuel economy. These effects decrease as the distance traveled and the number of tank fillups increase. Green Engine New vehicles have not yet had an opportunity for the engine to break in, (rings to seat ... ). A typical engine will take 3 to 5 thousand miles to break in and during this time period a gradual increase in fuel economy can be expected. Parasitic Loads Air conditioning and/or electrical loads, (headlights, heated backglass ... ) also result in lower fuel economy, (typically less than 1 MPG difference, each 10 AMPs takes approximately .4 MPG). Road Conditions Road surface condition impacts fuel economy. Gravel and/or pot holed roads decrease fuel economy. Hills (vs. level terrain) also negatively impact fuel economy. Even gradual unperceptible increases in elevation result in real measurable decreases in fuel economy. Similarly, driving in the rain or snow decreases fuel economy. Suspension Vehicle suspension misalignment can cause poor fuel economy. Check all four tires for abnormal and/or premature tire wear. New tires, tire rotation, and/or front end alignment may be required to correct fuel economy. Tires Performance tires and/or tires with larger "contact areas," (like 60 series aspect ratio), can cause as much as 3 MPG lower fuel economy when compared to hard "thin" tires. Find out if the tire size currently on the car is the same as original equipment. Replacement tires tailor than original equipment tires cause the odometer to read LESS THAN actual distance traveled. This will result in lower calculated fuel economy than actual fuel economy. Tire Pressure Harder tires, (more air pressure, or different tire compositions) result in better fuel economy. Do not exceed maximum pressure as labeled on the tire, typically 30-35 psi. The disadvantage of this is that the greater the tire pressure, the harsher the vehicle ride. Transmission On 4-Speed automatics, it is possible to drive the vehicle in 3rd gear rather than "overdrive" and not perceive it. Typically this condition occurs when the shift indicator, or the shift linkage/detent is misadjusted. Misadjusted shift linkage can also result in improper signals to the ECM, which can result in less spark advance, and results in a drop in fuel economy. Driving a vehicle in 3rd gear rather than overdrive at highway speeds typically results in a 3 to 5 MPG penalty. Torque Converter Clutch operation is essential for good fuel economy. A non-locking torque converter typically results in a 1 to 2 MPG penalty at highway speeds. Vehicle Weight Each 125 lbs. of additional weight results in a .3 MPG loss of fuel economy. Thus, additional passengers, luggage ... will decrease fuel economy. Vehicle Wind Resistance More wind "DRAG" means less fuel economy. Thus, hang-on luggage carders, cat toppers, open windows and/or open trunk... mean less fuel economy. (See "Driving Habits"). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 93316C > Oct > 92 > Fuels - Effect of Volatility on Driveability Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuels - Effect of Volatility on Driveability Number: 93-31-6C Section: 6C Date: OCT. 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 249128R ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: EFFECT OF FUEL VOLATILITY ON DRIVEABILITY CONDITIONS Model and Year: ALL MODEL YEARS, ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 92-281-6C, DATED SEPT. 1992. THE 1993 MODEL YEAR HAS BEEN ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 92-281-6C SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Recent changes in EPA regulations have effectively lowered the maximum allowable fuel volatility. Volatility, which can be defined as a gasoline's ability to change from a liquid to a vapor, directly affects the amount of evaporative emissions produced by the fuel. Higher volatility means that more unburned hydrocarbons will be released into the atmosphere. Unfortunately, reducing fuel volatility can cause problems during cold engine operation when low temperatures impede the fuel's ability to vaporize and burn. Two terms are often used to describe volatility characteristics. These are: Distillation Curve A graph showing the relationship between temperature and the percentage of fuel evaporated. The fuel components that boil at relatively low temperatures (below about 90 degrees F) are known as the "light ends", and are essential for good cold engine performance. The "heavy ends", which begin to boil at about 300 degrees F, contain the most energy but are more difficult to burn. Laboratory analysis is usually required to determine the distillation curve of a gasoline sample. - Reid Vapor Pressure (RVP) RVP is the pressure (psi) that vaporized fuel exerts within a sealed container as it is heated to 100 degrees F. The higher the RVP the higher the fuel volatility. While RVP is readily tested in the field, fuels of the same RVP can have different distillation curves and cold driveability characteristics. Fuel volatility will vary depending on geographic location and time of year (fuel intended to be used in higher ambient conditions is formulated with less volatility). This can make cold driveability as big a problem during summer months as during the winter. There may be additional variation in the volatility characteristics of pump gasoline, caused by the differences in fuel manufacturers, blends and storage times. As EPA fuel volatility standards are lowered, variations between fuels (which may further reduce volatility) becomes a critical factor influencing cold engine performance. No matter how thoroughly the relationship between fuel quality and cold driveability is understood, eliminating fuel quality as an issue can be difficult, because: TOOLS WHICH TEST FUEL VOLATILITY MEASURE ONLY RVP, NOT THE DISTILLATION CURVE. The distillation curve has a greater effect on cold driveability than RVP. THE CUSTOMER MAY PERCEIVE RAISING THE FUEL QUALITY ISSUE AS AN ATTEMPT TO EVADE HIS PROBLEM. This may cause difficulty in getting accurate fuel usage information. WATER, AND OTHER TYPES OF FUEL CONTAMINATION, MAY CAUSE CONTINUED DRIVEABILITY COMPLAINTS. - The problem symptoms may remain even though the vehicle has been refueled several times with a quality gasoline. CUSTOMER CONCERNS CONDITION: Poor Cold Engine Operation, symptoms may include; hard start/extended crank, stalling, backfiring, hesitation and/or lack of power. POSSIBLE CAUSE: Low volatility fuel will not vaporize sufficiently to allow normal combustion. CORRECTION: Replace Fuel. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE: 1. Perform basic system checks in section 6E of the service manual. 2. Check for service bulletins which relate to cold driveability issues specific to the problem vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 93316C > Oct > 92 > Fuels - Effect of Volatility on Driveability > Page 1738 - An updated engine control calibration, or service procedure, may be available to make the engine less susceptible to low volatility fuels. 3. If basic checks do not reveal a vehicle fault, then advise the customer that fuel quality may be an issue. Recommend the following actions: Change brands of fuel - Use 87 octane gasoline, unless the vehicle is designed for premium gasoline. - Try to empty the fuel tank as much as practical before refilling. - Run a minimum of three tanks of new fuel before returning for service. 4. If above steps are ineffective, do not proceed with additional vehicle diagnosis and/or parts replacement until the fuel tank has been drained and refilled with a known good quality gasoline AT THE DEALERSHIP. 5. If the problem remains refer to service manual, service bulletins and/or technical assistance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 892680B > Oct > 89 > Fuel - Use of Gasoline Containing 15 Percent MTBE Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Use of Gasoline Containing 15 Percent MTBE Number: 89-268-08 Section: 0B Date: October 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 930108 Subject: USE OF GASOLINE CONTAINING 15 PERCENT MTBE Model and Year: ALL 1980-89 PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS In August of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency approved the use of methyltertiary-butyl ether (MTBE) in gasolines at concentrations of 15 percent or Prior to that time, the legal limit was 11 percent; Generai Motors owners manuals stated that the use of gasolines containing 11 percent or less MTBE should not adversely affect the operation of the vehicle and would be covered by the New Vehicle and Emission Control Systems Warranties. The use of 15 percent MTBE in gasoline should also not adversely affect the operation of 1989 and earlier model vehicles and therefore, will not void any warranties covering those vehicles. In the interest of contributing to cleaner air, General Motors recommends that all model year vehicles use such fuels whenever available. The 1990 and future owners manuals will reflect this position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 862600A > May > 88 > Fuel Additive - Prevents Exhaust Valve Recession Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Additive - Prevents Exhaust Valve Recession Number: 86-260-OA Section: OA Date: MAY, 1988 Subject: GASOLINE ADDITIVE FOR PREVENTING EXHAUST VALVE RECESSION Model and Year: PRE-1971 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS, 1971-1978 TRUCKS OVER 6,000 LBS. GVW, 1979-1986 TRUCKS OVER 8,000 LBS. GVW TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Some engines designed to use leaded gasoline may experience exhaust valve recession if operated at high speeds and loads with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, if leaded-gasoline is not available, or if additional protection is desired with low-lead gasoline, the GM Anti-Valve-Recession Additive, Part Number 12345492, may be used. The recommended dosage is one container per tankful (20 gallons) of unleaded gasoline, which should provide valve protection equivalent to leaded gasoline with a lead concentration of 0.1 grams per gallon. This additive can be used in all GM gasoline-fueled engines in: (a) pre-1971 passenger cars and trucks (b) 1971-1978 trucks over 6,000 lbs. GVW (c) 1979-1986 trucks over 8,000 lbs. GVW. NOTE: Additive should not be used in engines designed to operate exclusively on unleaded gasoline (with restriction in fuel tank filler neck). As a reminder, the engines mentioned above were designed to use a fuel with a minimum octane rating of 89, (R+M)/2 (average of Research and Motor octane numbers). If unleaded fuel is used, be sure that it has an octane rating of at least 89 (R+M)/2. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 05-06-04-022G > Oct > 10 > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-04-022G Date: October 27, 2010 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Information and Available Brands (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - Canada ONLY Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Canada Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and include an additional gasoline brand as a TOP TIER source. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). In the U.S., refer to the latest version of Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047I. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by the Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: 16,093 km (10,000 mi) with Minimum Additive recommended by the CGSB Top Tier Fuel Availability Chevron was the first to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in Canada. Shell became the first national gasoline retailer to offer TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline across Canada. Petro-Canada began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline nationally as of October 1, 2006. Sunoco began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in March of 2007. Esso began offering TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline in May of 2010. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 05-06-04-022G > Oct > 10 > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 1752 Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards The following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards in all octane grades : Chevron Canada (markets in British Columbia and western Alberta) - Shell Canada (nationally) - Petro-Canada (nationally) - Sunoco-Canada (Ontario) - Esso-Canada (nationally) What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency and no metallic additives. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent recommendations of Canadian standards and does not contain metallic additives, which can damage vehicle emission control components. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began in the U.S. and Canada on May 3, 2004. Some fuel marketers have already joined and introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota, Volkswagen and Audi. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. In the U.S., government regulations require that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In Canada, gasoline standards recommend adherence to U.S. detergency requirements but do not require it. In fact, many brands of gasoline in Canada do not contain any detergent additive. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required or recommended, and no metallic additives are allowed. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency and the intentional addition of metallic additives is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and engine performance, and also provide reduced emissions. Also, the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Who should use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" recommended by Canadian standards. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. More information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at this website, http://www.toptiergas.com/. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 05-06-04-022G > Oct > 10 > Fuel System - TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Canada) > Page 1753 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 04-06-04-047I > Aug > 09 > Fuel System - 'TOP TIER' Detergent Gasoline Information Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - 'TOP TIER' Detergent Gasoline Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-04-047I Date: August 17, 2009 Subject: TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (Deposits, Fuel Economy, No Start, Power, Performance, Stall Concerns) - U.S. Only Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) (U.S. Only) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 (U.S. Only) 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 (U.S. Only) 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X (U.S. Only) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and additional sources to the Top Tier Fuel Retailers list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-04-047H (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). In Canada, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-04-022F. A new class of fuel called TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is appearing at retail stations of some fuel marketers. This gasoline meets detergency standards developed by six automotive companies. All vehicles will benefit from using TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline over gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Those vehicles that have experienced deposit related concerns may especially benefit from the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Intake valve: - 10,000 miles with Legal Minimum additive Gasoline Brands That Currently Meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards As of August 1, 2009, all grades of the following gasoline brands meet the TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Standards: - Chevron - Chevron-Canada - QuikTrip - Conoco Phillips 66 - 76 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 04-06-04-047I > Aug > 09 > Fuel System - 'TOP TIER' Detergent Gasoline Information > Page 1758 - Shell - Shell-Canada - Entec Stations located in the greater Montgomery, Alabama area. - MFA Oil Company located throughout Missouri. - Kwik Trip, Inc. in Minnesota and Wisconsin and Kwik Star convenience stores in Iowa. The Somerset Refinery, Inc. at Somerset Oil stations in Kentucky. Aloha Petroleum - Tri-Par Oil Company - Turkey Hill Minit Markets - Texaco - Petro-Canada - Sunoco-Canada - Road Ranger located in Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kentucky, Missouri, Ohio and Wisconsin What is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is a new class of gasoline with enhanced detergency. It meets new, voluntary deposit control standards developed by six automotive companies that exceed the detergent requirements imposed by the EPA. Where Can TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Be Purchased? The TOP TIER program began on May 3, 2004 and many fuel marketers have joined the program and have introduced TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. This is a voluntary program and not all fuel marketers will offer this product. Once fuel marketers make public announcements, they will appear on a list of brands that meet the TOP TIER standards. Where Can I find the Latest Information on TOP TIER Fuel and Retailers? On the web, please visit www.toptiergas.com for additional information and updated retailer lists. Who developed TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards were developed by six automotive companies: Audi, BMW, General Motors, Honda, Toyota and Volkswagen. Why was TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline developed? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline was developed to increase the level of detergent additive in gasoline. The EPA requires that all gasoline sold in the U.S. contain a detergent additive. However, the requirement is minimal and in many cases, is not sufficient to keep engines clean. In order to meet TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards, a higher level of detergent is needed than what is required by the EPA. Also, TOP TIER was developed to give fuel marketers the opportunity to differentiate their product. Why did the six automotive companies join together to develop TOP TIER? All six corporations recognized the benefits to both the vehicle and the consumer. Also, joining together emphasized that low detergency is an issue of concern to several automotive companies. What are the benefits of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline? TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help keep engines cleaner than gasoline containing the "Lowest Additive Concentration" set by the EPA. Clean engines help provide optimal fuel economy and performance and reduced emissions. Also, use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline will help reduce deposit related concerns. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 570102 > Jun > 95 > Fuel - Reformulated/Oxygenated Gasolines Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Reformulated/Oxygenated Gasolines FILE IN SECTION: 0 - General Information BULLETIN NO.: 57-01-02 DATE: June, 1995 SUBJECT: Reformulated Gasoline (RFG), Oxygenated Gasoline and California Phase 2 RFG MODELS: 1995 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks General Motors customers will be potentially exposed to a variety of different fuel types. Besides the conventional gasoline available, new types such as Reformulated Gasoline (RFG), oxygenated gasoline, and starting in 1996, California Phase 2 RFG. Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) is blended to burn more cleanly and not to evaporate as readily. RFG must contain a minimum of 2 percent oxygen, which is usually achieved with ethanol or EPA-approved ethers such as methyl tertiary-butyl ether (MTBE). This type of fuel is required by the Clean Air Act in the nine worst ozone non-attainment areas of the country, and may also be required in other areas designated ozone non-attainment, at the option of the states. RFG is intended to produce approximately 15 percent less pollution than conventional gasoline. Using RFG should reduce the total health risk to the public by reducing exposure to ozone and air toxins. General Motors supports the use of RFG as a cost effective means of providing air quality benefits. Oxygenated gasolines are prevalent in the wintertime for Carbon Monoxide (CO) non-attainment areas. These fuels contain oxygen components similar to RFG. Approximately 50 percent of the fuel sold in the U.S. in the wintertime contains an oxygenate component. Vehicle fuel economy may be slightly reduced, if at all, by the use of gasoline containing oxygenates. Fuel economy is most affected by engine and vehicle type, driving habits, weather conditions, and vehicle maintenance. Properly blended RFG, oxygenated gasoline, and California Phase 2 RFG will have no adverse effect on vehicle performance or to the durability of engine and fuel system components. In fact, the General Motors Owner's Manual fuel statements have consistently permitted the use of properly blended fuels containing up to 10 percent ethanol (since 1980) and up to 15 percent methyl tertiary-butyl ether (MTBE) for current and all past model year vehicles. These statements continue to be valid. The use of oxygenate-containing fuels will not invalidate the GM vehicle warranty. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 892680B > Oct > 89 > Fuel - Use of Gasoline Containing 15 Percent MTBE Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel - Use of Gasoline Containing 15 Percent MTBE Number: 89-268-08 Section: 0B Date: October 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 930108 Subject: USE OF GASOLINE CONTAINING 15 PERCENT MTBE Model and Year: ALL 1980-89 PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS In August of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency approved the use of methyltertiary-butyl ether (MTBE) in gasolines at concentrations of 15 percent or Prior to that time, the legal limit was 11 percent; Generai Motors owners manuals stated that the use of gasolines containing 11 percent or less MTBE should not adversely affect the operation of the vehicle and would be covered by the New Vehicle and Emission Control Systems Warranties. The use of 15 percent MTBE in gasoline should also not adversely affect the operation of 1989 and earlier model vehicles and therefore, will not void any warranties covering those vehicles. In the interest of contributing to cleaner air, General Motors recommends that all model year vehicles use such fuels whenever available. The 1990 and future owners manuals will reflect this position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel: > 862600A > May > 88 > Fuel Additive - Prevents Exhaust Valve Recession Fuel: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Additive - Prevents Exhaust Valve Recession Number: 86-260-OA Section: OA Date: MAY, 1988 Subject: GASOLINE ADDITIVE FOR PREVENTING EXHAUST VALVE RECESSION Model and Year: PRE-1971 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS, 1971-1978 TRUCKS OVER 6,000 LBS. GVW, 1979-1986 TRUCKS OVER 8,000 LBS. GVW TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Some engines designed to use leaded gasoline may experience exhaust valve recession if operated at high speeds and loads with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, if leaded-gasoline is not available, or if additional protection is desired with low-lead gasoline, the GM Anti-Valve-Recession Additive, Part Number 12345492, may be used. The recommended dosage is one container per tankful (20 gallons) of unleaded gasoline, which should provide valve protection equivalent to leaded gasoline with a lead concentration of 0.1 grams per gallon. This additive can be used in all GM gasoline-fueled engines in: (a) pre-1971 passenger cars and trucks (b) 1971-1978 trucks over 6,000 lbs. GVW (c) 1979-1986 trucks over 8,000 lbs. GVW. NOTE: Additive should not be used in engines designed to operate exclusively on unleaded gasoline (with restriction in fuel tank filler neck). As a reminder, the engines mentioned above were designed to use a fuel with a minimum octane rating of 89, (R+M)/2 (average of Research and Motor octane numbers). If unleaded fuel is used, be sure that it has an octane rating of at least 89 (R+M)/2. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Throttle Body Injected Engines 1. Remove fuel pump fuse from fuse box. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and replace fuel pump fuse. Port Injected Engines 1. Disconnect fuel tank harness connector. 2. Start engine and allow to run until supply of fuel in pipes is depleted. 3. Crank engine an additional 3 seconds to ensure relief of any additional fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition Off and reconnect fuel tank harness connector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - Introduction Of The Fuel Injector Tester Fuel Injector: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Introduction Of The Fuel Injector Tester NO.: 93-I-39 DATE: June, 1993 GROUP: 6 CORP. NO.: 316501R SUBJECT: INFORMATION ON THE INTRODUCTION OF THE FUEL INJECTOR TESTER TOOL J - 39021 This bulletin is being revised to add information about the coil test and a list of driveability problems. In February, 1993, Kent-Moore shipped a new Fuel Injector Tester, tool J-39021, as part of the Essential Tool Program. This tool has the capability of performing injector balance and coil tests on all GM and many non-GM fuel injection systems. The injector balance test is one familiar to most technicians where fuel pressure drop is measured as an injector is energized for a set period of time. This fuel pressure drop is compared to that of the other injectors in the vehicle or a published standard. The injector coil test is a new test whereby the injector's resistance is measured during normal gperation by feeding a fixed current through the injector and measuring the voltage across the injector. Injector coil failures are more accurately detected using this method than by simply measuring the injectors resistance with an ohmmeter. Refer to the instructions included with the tool for testing procedures. This tool, and the injector coil test specifically, were developed to detect deterioration of injector coils due to the introduction of injector cleaners and fuel blends containing high levels of alcohol. Alcohol and water carried by the alcohol may attack and corrode injector coils resulting in a change in coil resistance and one or more of the following driveability symptoms: ^ rough idle ^ engine miss/surge ^ stall after start/hard start ^ fails emission test ^ poor fuel economy ^ exhaust odor The injector coil test procedure also requires the use of the Digital Voltmeter, J-39200, to measure the voltage across the injector during the test. The Fuel Injector Tester, J-39021, supplies one of three fixed current values throughout the duration of the test. Selection of the supply current value (0.5, 2.5, or 4.0 amps) is based on the injector's specified resistance. When the push-to-start-test button is pressed, the tool energizes the injector coil for five seconds. The condition of the injector coil (pass/fail) is determined by the voltage reading displayed on the voltmeter while the injector is energized. Instructions and specifications for most GM fuel injectors are included with the tool. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - Introduction Of The Fuel Injector Tester > Page 1779 Fuel Injector: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Injectors - Remanufactured for TBI Systems Number: 86-36 Section: 6C Date: FEB., 1986 Subject: REMANUFACTURED FUEL INJECTORS FOR (TBI) THROTTLE BODY INJECTION Model and Year: 1982-86 CHEVROLET VEHICLES WITH TBI TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Remanufactured Fuel Injectors for Chevrolet vehicles equipped with Throttle Body Injection (TBI) will be available from GMWDD on March 1, 1986. The new line of Remanufactured Injectors will cover all Chevrolet vehicles with single point and dual point TBI for model years 1980 - 1986. An application chart is attached. WARRANTY Remanufactured TBI Fuel Injectors are the recommended choice for new vehicle warranties requiring an injector replacement. These injectors meet the same specifications as the brand new injectors they replace. After March 1, 1986, Dealers should begin to order Remanufactured Injectors to be used for warranty, however, new injectors may still be used until inventory is depleted. Beyond vehicle warranty, the injectors are warranted for 90 days and/or 4,000 miles. PACKAGING PACKAGING In order to help dealers return the core injectors in good condition, a two-tube package was designed. The inner tube contains the injector and all of the additional parts and instructions necessary to install the remanufactured injector. The outside tube MUST be used to return the old injector to obtain core credit. APPLICATION REMANUFACTURED CORRESPONDING INJECTOR NEW INJECTOR APPLICATION SERVICE KIT SERVICE KIT MODEL YEAR, ENGINE SOURCE, ENGINE SIZE 17111695 17079694 1983-86 Chevrolet 2.0 17111550 17111456 1986 Chevrolet 2.8 17111542 17111159 1985 Chevrolet 4.3 17111694 17111468 1986 Chevrolet 4.3 17111545 17078855 1982-83 Chevrolet 5.0 17111546 17078885 1982-83 Chevrolet 5.0 17111547 17078846 1982-84 Chevrolet 5.7 17111548 17078827 1982-84 Chevrolet 5.7 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - Introduction Of The Fuel Injector Tester > Page 1780 Fuel Injector: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Injector - Electrical Damage Prevention Number: 83-I-49 Section: VIt Date: March, 1983 Subject: FUEL INJECTOR, ELECTRICAL DAMAGE ALL 1982-83 MODELS WITH 2.5L (L4), 5.0L (V8), 5.7L (V8) WITH EFI TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Analysis of returned fuel injector assemblies indicates a major portion have had internal electrical damage. Since the computer system will not allow enough current to damage the coil, it must be assumed that they are subjected to abnormal current loads during diagnosis. Service manual procedures state that all diagnostic testing of the injector be done using a test light. The test light serves as a "current limiting" resistance which will protect the injector coil. If these procedures are not followed, the injector coil will be permenently damaged. Full battery voltage applied across the injector assembly will destroy the coil in less than a half a second. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Pressure Light Duty ............................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 5.5 - 7.0 psi Heavy Duty ................................................................. ............................................................................................................................. 7.5 - 9.0 psi (with vapor return hose pinched off) Volume ................................................................................................................................................ ................................. 1 pint or more in 30 seconds Vacuum ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................... at least 15 in HG Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel System Diagnosis Fuel Pump Pressure Test 1. Disconnect fuel line at carburetor and connect a suitable pressure gage. 2. Start engine and check pressure with engine running at slow idle speed. Fuel pump pressure should be as specified. 3. If fuel pump pressure is below 17-45 kPa (2.5 - 6.5 psi), pump must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel System Diagnosis > Page 1787 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pump Pressure Test - Mechanical Fuel Pump Fuel Pump Pressure Test 1. Disconnect fuel line at pump and connect a suitable pressure gage. 2. Start engine and check pressure with engine running at slow idle speed. Fuel pump pressure should be as specified. On vehicles equipped with a vapor return system squeeze off the return hose so that an accurate reading can be obtained. 3. If fuel pump pressure is below minimum, pump must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Switching Valve > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Fuel Selector Valve Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Switching Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 1792 Fuel Tank Switching Valve: Description and Operation Auxiliary Fuel Selector Valve NOTE: This information applies only to vehicles equipped with auxiliary fuel tank option. An auxiliary fuel tank switching valve, controlled by an electrical switch, allows selection of either the primary fuel tank or auxiliary fuel tank. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Switching Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 1793 Auxiliary Fuel Tank Selector Diagnostic Chart Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Switching Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 1794 Fuel Tank Switching Valve: Service and Repair Auxiliary Fuel Selector Valve WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury when disconnecting the fuel hoses and lines, cover the fuel hoses and lines with a shop cloth to collect the fuel, and then place the cloth into an approved container. REMOVAL: The auxiliary fuel tank control valve is located under the right hand side, center of vehicle, attached to the inner side of the frame. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable from vehicle battery. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Remove hose shield, when required. 4. Remove electrical connector from valve and switch assembly. 5. Remove fuel feed and return hoses. Note position and color markings on hoses. 6. Remove selector valve and meter switch from frame. INSTALLATION: 1. Install the selector valve and meter switch to the frame. 2. Connect the fuel feed and return hoses, taking care to install hoses in the correct positions. 3. Connect electrical connector to valve and switch assembly. 4. Install hose shield, when required. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Reconnect negative battery cable to vehicle battery. 7. START vehicle and allow to run while checking for fuel leaks. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Description and Operation Idle Speed Control (Linkage): Description and Operation Fig. 48 - Throttle Return Control (TRC) System Schematic PURPOSE Reduces hydrocarbon emissions during coasting--Fig 48. OPERATION During coasting the control valve allows vacuum to act on the throttle lever actuator holding the throttle valve slightly open to admit more air to the combustion chambers--leaning out the overrich mixture caused by the sudden closure of the throttle plates. When manifold vacuum drops below a predetermined value the control valve closes allowing the throttle actuator to return the throttle valve to normal idle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > System Test Idle Speed Control (Linkage): Testing and Inspection System Test 1. Connect a tachometer to the distributor "TACH" terminal. 2. Start engine and apply throttle until 1890 rpm is indicated on tachometer. - The throttle lever actuator should be extended at this speed. 3. Slightly close throttle opening until 1700 rpm is indicated on tachometer. - The throttle lever actuator should close at this speed. 4. If the throttle lever actuator operates out of the 1700-1890 rpm limit, replace speed switch. 5. If the actuator does not operate at any speed, note the following: a. Using a voltmeter, check for voltage at vacuum solenoid and speed switch. A voltage of 12-14 volts should be indicated on both the vacuum solenoid and speed switch. b. If voltage is present at one component but not the other, check and/or repair engine wiring harness. c. If voltage is not present at either component, check engine wiring harness electrical connections at distributor and/or bulkhead electrical connector. Repair as required. d. If correct voltage is indicated at each component, check for correct solenoid valve operation. Ground solenoid to switch connecting wire terminal at solenoid connector. Throttle lever actuator should extend. e. If it does not extend, disconnect solenoid side port hose from actuator hose, and check port orifice for restriction. Clean orifice as required. f. If hose is not plugged or damaged, replace solenoid. g. If actuator extends in step d, ground solenoid to switch wire terminal at speed switch. If it does not extend, repair or replace wire connecting speed switch to solenoid. If it still does not extend, check speed switch ground wire for ground. Voltage should be 0 volts. If not correctly ground speed switch. h. If actuator still does not extend when engine is operating above 1890 rpm, replace speed switch. 6. If actuator remains extended at all speeds, note the following: a. Disconnect electrical connector from vacuum solenoid. b. If actuator remains extended, check plugged orifice in solenoid side port. If solenoid side port is not plugged, connect vacuum hose and recheck system. If actuator still remains extended, remove solenoid connector. If actuator does not close, replace vacuum solenoid. c. If actuator closes with solenoid connector removed, connect wire and remove speed switch connector. If actuator closes, replace speed switch. If the actuator still does not close, solenoid to switch wire is shorted to ground in the wiring harness, repair or replace as required. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > System Test > Page 1800 Idle Speed Control (Linkage): Testing and Inspection Throttle Lever Actuator Test 1. Disconnect valve to actuator at valve and connect to an external vacuum source equipped with a vacuum gauge, then apply 20 inches Hg vacuum to actuator and seal off vacuum source. If vacuum reading drops, the actuator is leaking and must be replaced. 2. To check actuator proceed as follows: a. Check throttle lever, shaft and linkage for freedom of operation. b. Run engine until operating temperature is reached and idle is stabilized with transmission in neutral or park. Note idle speed. c. Apply 20 inches Hg vacuum to actuator, then open throttle slightly and allow to close against extended actuator plunger. Note engine speed. d. Release and reapply 20 inches Hg vacuum and note the rpm to which engine speed increases. If speed is not within 150 rpm, the actuator plunger may be binding or the actuator diaphragm may be defective. If binding condition does not exist or cannot be corrected, the actuator must be replaced. e. Release vacuum. If engine speed does not return to within 50 rpm of the speed noted in step 2b, the actuator plunger may be binding. If binding problem cannot be corrected, then actuator must be replaced. 3. If engine rpm noted in step 2c is not within 1475-1525 rpm for V8-350 & 400 engines, 1375-1425 rpm for 454 engine, the throttle lever actuator must be adjusted. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1801 Idle Speed Control (Linkage): Adjustments NOTE: If the valve cannot be adjusted, it must be replaced. 1. Disconnect valve to carburetor hose at carburetor and connect to an external vacuum source equipped with a vacuum gauge. 2. Disconnect valve to actuator hose at actuator and connect to vacuum gauge. 3. Firmly place finger over end of bleed fitting and apply minimum of 23 inches Hg vacuum to the control valve. 4. Seal off the vacuum source, then uncover the bleed fitting. - The vacuum reading on the actuator side will drop off to zero and the reading on the vacuum source gauge will drop to a value designated as the "valve set point". - If this value is not 21.5 +/- 0.50 inches Hg, adjust valve as follows; 5. Pry off the plastic cover and turn the screw clockwise to raise the set point or counterclockwise to lower the set point and recheck setting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Idle Speed Control Assembly - Repair Kit Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Technical Service Bulletins Idle Speed Control Assembly - Repair Kit Number: 82-I-144 Section: VIm Date: Mar., 1983 Subject: IDLE SPEED CONTROL ASSEMBLY REPAIR KIT - 1981-82 ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS A revised gear and shaft has been released for 1982 production idle speed control assemblies. Idle speed control assemblies with the new gear and shaft may be identified by a yellow dot on the housing near the shaft. In order to provide these improvements to the service assemblies, two (2) separate service repair packages have been re leased to repair 1981 and 1982 idle speed control assemblies (ISC). Applications are as follows: P/N Application 17079749 For Cavalier series equipped with engine Code "G" 17079750 All other engines The repair kits contain a gear and shaft assembly, a boot, grease and an instruction sheet. The repair packages are to be used if the following conditions exist: ^ Idle speed control assembly runs forward and reverse, but plunger does not extend or retract properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit > Component Information > Specifications Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit: Specifications IDLE SPEED CONTROL Measured between terminals A& B and C & D. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit > Component Information > Specifications Idle/Throttle Speed Control Unit: Specifications IDLE SPEED CONTROL Measured between terminals A& B and C & D. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications 84-235 6C (VI) Feb., 1985 Subject: TPS SETTINGS - ALL GASOLINE ENGINES Model and Year: 1981 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Listed below are all Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) settings for 1981 thru 1984. ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1981 Buick 3.8L A .97V High step of fast idle cam Buick 3.8L Turbo "A" Car 1.30V High step of fast idle cam Buick 4.1L .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L 9 .41V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L X .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L K .41V ISC retracted at slow idle Chevrolet 4.4L .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L H .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.7L .56V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L Y .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L 5 .51V Stopped at curb idle 1982 Buick 3.8L Non-Turbo A .77V High step of fast idle cam Chev. 1.6L Minimum System C .92V High step of fast idle cam (Fed) Chev. 1.6L Full Function C .40V Stopped at curb idle (Calif) Chev. 1.8L L4 G .26V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. 2.8L V6 X,Z,1 .26V Stopped at curb idle Chev. 3.8L V6 .36V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. All V8 H,7 .51V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L, 4.3L .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 .525V Ign. on, engine off ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1983 Buick 3.8L A .86V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .26V Curb idle solenoid retracted Chevrolet 3.8L 9 .36V ISC retracted (min. idle) Chevrolet 5.0L H,S,7 .51V Curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L .46V ILC retracted Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications > Page 1818 Curb idle 1984 Buick 3.8L A .46V Curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Curb idle Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L G,H .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .30V Throttle kicker retracted *Non-Adjustable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Threadlocking Compound - Packaging Change Throttle Body: Technical Service Bulletins Threadlocking Compound - Packaging Change Number: 83-I-114 Section: VIm Date: September, 1983 Subject: PACKAGING CHANGE IN THE THREADLOCKING COMPOUND RECOMMENDED FOR TBI SERVICING - 1982-1983 ALL APPLICATIONS WITH TBI TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS There are a variety of procedures involving TBI servicing where threadlocking materials have been found to be desirable. For these applications, Rochester Products has recommended the use of Loctite 262, or equivalent. Recently, the manufacturers of Loctite have changed the package labeling of their product Threadlocker 262, and this has caused some concern. Although the makeup of the compound has not been changed, the description "PERMANENT" and the term "Non Service Removable" has conveyed the impression that any parts, once coated with the compound, would be joined forever. For the applications involving TBI screws, the diameter of the screws, the nature of the mating aluminum casting material into which they are driven, and the length of these screw thread engagements, are such that the use of Loctite 262 is satisfactory. Although there are situations involving the use of this high strength material that could be considered permanent, TBI screws which have been coated with the compound can be removed without damage, if necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications Throttle Position Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications 84-235 6C (VI) Feb., 1985 Subject: TPS SETTINGS - ALL GASOLINE ENGINES Model and Year: 1981 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Listed below are all Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) settings for 1981 thru 1984. ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1981 Buick 3.8L A .97V High step of fast idle cam Buick 3.8L Turbo "A" Car 1.30V High step of fast idle cam Buick 4.1L .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L 9 .41V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L X .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L K .41V ISC retracted at slow idle Chevrolet 4.4L .51V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L H .56V Stopped at curb idle Chevrolet 5.7L .56V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L Y .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L 5 .51V Stopped at curb idle 1982 Buick 3.8L Non-Turbo A .77V High step of fast idle cam Chev. 1.6L Minimum System C .92V High step of fast idle cam (Fed) Chev. 1.6L Full Function C .40V Stopped at curb idle (Calif) Chev. 1.8L L4 G .26V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. 2.8L V6 X,Z,1 .26V Stopped at curb idle Chev. 3.8L V6 .36V ISC retracted at slow idle Chev. All V8 H,7 .51V Stopped at curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L, 4.3L .46V Stopped at curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 .525V Ign. on, engine off ENGINE-PRODUCED BY VIN VOLTS CONDITION 1983 Buick 3.8L A .86V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .26V Curb idle solenoid retracted Chevrolet 3.8L 9 .36V ISC retracted (min. idle) Chevrolet 5.0L H,S,7 .51V Curb idle Oldsmobile 5.0L .46V ILC retracted Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Throttle Position Sensor - Specifications > Page 1827 Curb idle 1984 Buick 3.8L A .46V Curb idle Pontiac 2.5L R,2 * Curb idle Chevrolet 2.0L P .525V Curb idle Chevrolet 5.0L G,H .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 3.8L .48V Curb idle Chevrolet 1.6L C .92V High step of fast idle cam Chevrolet 2.8L L,X,Z,1 .30V Throttle kicker retracted *Non-Adjustable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Ignition Firing Order FIRING ORDER Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations > Number 1 Cylinder Location FIRING ORDER Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Timing Marks and Indicators > System Information > Locations Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Specifications Distributor: Specifications DISTRIBUTOR TIMING ADVANCE Degrees advance at engine rpm, no load, in addition to basic timing. Mechanical advance distributors only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1844 Distributor: Application and ID HEI distributors with EST can be identified by the following; They have no distributor mounted vacuum controls--spark timing is controlled electronically. - With EST system uses a seven terminal High Energy Ignition (HEI) module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Replacement Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Replacement 1. Disconnect battery and tachometer lead from distributor cap. 2. Disconnect coil connectors from distributor cap and 4 terminal connector (if equipped). NOTE: Do not use a tool of any kind to release coil connectors or damage to lock tabs will result. 3. Remove distributor cap with ignition high tension wires connected and position aside. Remove vacuum hose (if equipped). 4. Remove distributor clamp screw and hold-down clamp. 5. Mark relationship of rotor to distributor housing, then lift distributor from engine slightly until rotor stops turning. Mark relationship of new rotor position on distributor housing, then remove distributor from engine. 6. If engine was not cranked after distributor was removed from engine, proceed as follows: a. Position rotor to align with second mark made on distributor housing prior to removing distributor. b. Install distributor into engine and align rotor with first mark made on distributor housing prior to removing distributor. c. Install distributor cap and connect all electrical connectors. d. Adjust ignition timing as specified in individual car chapters. 7. If engine was cranked after distributor was removed from engine, proceed as follows: a. Remove No. 1 spark plug and crank engine until compression pressure is felt in No. 1 cylinder. Slowly rotate engine until top dead center is indicated. b. Turn rotor to a position just ahead of No. 1 spark plug tower on distributor cap. c. Install distributor. Connect 4 terminal connector (if equipped). d. Install distributor cap, coil connectors, tachometer lead and battery feed wire. e. Adjust ignition timing to specifications in Tune Up Section. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Replacement > Page 1847 Distributor: Service and Repair Distributor Overhaul Fig 1 Removing distributor shield. Models equipped with 6 & 8 cylinder engines Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distributor Replacement > Page 1848 Fig 2 Pickup coil disassembled. Models equipped with 6 & 8 cylinder engines 1. Remove cap and coil as an assembly. 2. Remove rotor and pickup coil leads from module. 3. Mark relationship of distributor shaft and driven gear for reference during assembly. 4. Remove roll pin and driven gear. 5. Remove distributor shaft assembly. 6. Remove shield, Fig. 1. 7. Remove retaining ring, pickup coil, magnet and pole piece, Fig. 2. 8. Remove module retaining screws and capacitor screw, then remove module, capacitor and harness assembly from distributor. 9. Disconnect wiring harness from module. Reverse procedure to assemble. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Hall Effect Switch <--> [Hall Effect Sensor, Ignition] > Component Information > Service and Repair Hall Effect Switch: Service and Repair HALL EFFECT SWITCH (If Equipped), REPLACE 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove switch retaining screws, then while pulling switch away, remove wiring connector. Remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. NOTE: After Hall Effect switch is installed, spin distributor shaft to ensure teeth do not touch. If necessary loosen, then re-tighten pickup coil teeth and Hall Effect switch to eliminate contact. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug Wire <--> [Ignition Cable] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Spark Plug Wire: > 93356D > Oct > 92 > Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Spark Plug Wire: Customer Interest Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Number: 93-35-6D Section: 6D Date: OCT. 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 716404R ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: ENGINE MISS HESITATION OR ROUGHNESS DUE TO PIERCED SECONDARY IGNITION COMPONENTS Model and Year: 1980-93 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 87-121, DATED MAY 1987. THE 1989-93 MODEL YEARS HAVE BEEN ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 87-121 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. During the diagnosis procedure for an engine miss, hesitation or roughness, a spark plug or spark plug wire condition may be suspected. Several types of commercial or homemade diagnostic equipment required the secondary ignition boots or wire to be pierced. This is normally done to check for spark plug firing or to perform a cylinder balance test. Similarly the use of pliers or other such tools to disengage a spark plug boot may pierce or damage the boot or wire. Secondary ignition components should not be pierced for any reason. Piercing a spark plug wire and/or distributor boot may create a condition that will not be immediately apparent. Over time, the hole in the pierced boot may allow a ground path to develop creating a plug misfire condition. Heavily moisture laden air in the vicinity of the pierced boot may accelerate this effect. Piercing a secondary ignition wire creates a gap in the wire's conductive core. This gap is a point of high resistance. The current flow in the wire will increase to compensate for the higher wire resistance. Over time, the wire may fail creating a plug misfire condition. The time required for the condition to appear depends upon the extent of damage to the conductive core. To help prevent future condition that are spark plug wire related, do not pierce or otherwise damage any secondary ignition component. Only use diagnostic equipment containing an inductive pick-up to check for spark plug firing or to perform cylinder balance tests. When disengaging a spark plug boot from the spark plug, twist the flanged boot 1/2 turn then pull on the boot only to remove the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug Wire <--> [Ignition Cable] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Spark Plug Wire: > 93356D > Oct > 92 > Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Spark Plug Wire: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Miss, Hesitation, or Roughness Number: 93-35-6D Section: 6D Date: OCT. 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 716404R ASE No.: A1, A8 Subject: ENGINE MISS HESITATION OR ROUGHNESS DUE TO PIERCED SECONDARY IGNITION COMPONENTS Model and Year: 1980-93 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 87-121, DATED MAY 1987. THE 1989-93 MODEL YEARS HAVE BEEN ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 87-121 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. During the diagnosis procedure for an engine miss, hesitation or roughness, a spark plug or spark plug wire condition may be suspected. Several types of commercial or homemade diagnostic equipment required the secondary ignition boots or wire to be pierced. This is normally done to check for spark plug firing or to perform a cylinder balance test. Similarly the use of pliers or other such tools to disengage a spark plug boot may pierce or damage the boot or wire. Secondary ignition components should not be pierced for any reason. Piercing a spark plug wire and/or distributor boot may create a condition that will not be immediately apparent. Over time, the hole in the pierced boot may allow a ground path to develop creating a plug misfire condition. Heavily moisture laden air in the vicinity of the pierced boot may accelerate this effect. Piercing a secondary ignition wire creates a gap in the wire's conductive core. This gap is a point of high resistance. The current flow in the wire will increase to compensate for the higher wire resistance. Over time, the wire may fail creating a plug misfire condition. The time required for the condition to appear depends upon the extent of damage to the conductive core. To help prevent future condition that are spark plug wire related, do not pierce or otherwise damage any secondary ignition component. Only use diagnostic equipment containing an inductive pick-up to check for spark plug firing or to perform cylinder balance tests. When disengaging a spark plug boot from the spark plug, twist the flanged boot 1/2 turn then pull on the boot only to remove the wire. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Specifications IGNITION COIL Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1868 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Removing ignition coil cover. Models with internal coil--Typical UNITS WITH INTERNAL COIL 1. Remove electrical connector from distributor cap by lifting retaining tabs. 2. Remove three coil cover attaching screws, then remove cover, Fig. 1. 3. Remove coil attaching screws, then remove ignition coil with leads from distributor cap. 4. Remove coil arc seal. 5. Reverse procedure to install. UNITS WITH EXTERNAL COIL 1. On 1982-85 Skylark, 1982-86 Citation, Omega, Phoenix, 1982-86 Celebrity, Century, Cutlass Ciera, 6000 & 1984-86 Cutlass Cruiser, proceed as follows: a. Remove bolt securing radio capacitor to coil. b. Disconnect coil electrical connector and high tension lead. c. Remove three coil mounting bolts, then remove coil. d. Reverse procedure to install. 2. On Chevette and 1000 models, proceed as follows: a. Remove coil cover, then disconnect ignition switch to coil lead at coil. b. Disconnect coil high tension lead, then remove coil retaining bolts and the coil. c. Reverse procedure to install. 3. On Cavalier, CIMARRON, FIRENZA, 2000, Sunbird & Skyhawk models, proceed as follows: NOTE:On 1982-86 FIRENZA, Skyhawk, Sunbird & 2000 with 1.8L OHC engine, the coil is located at the rear of the engine near the end of the cam cover. a. Disconnect battery ground cable, then raise and support vehicle. b. Disconnect fuel pump lines at fuel pump, then remove vacuum pipe retaining bracket nut at coil and position pipe aside. c. Remove fuel pump, then remove coil mounting bolts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1869 MODULE REPLACEMENT 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove module retaining screws, then lift module upward. 3. Disconnect module electrical connector. Note position of electrical connector prior to disconnecting. Remove module from distributor. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Check to ensure that module electrical connector is installed in proper position. If module is not being replaced, do not wipe grease from module or distributor base. If new module is to be installed, coat module and distributor base with pack of grease supplied with replacement module. PICKUP COIL, REPLACE 1. Remove distributor from engine. 2. Mark relationship of distributor shaft and driven gear for reference during assembly. 3. Remove roll pin and driven gear from shaft. 4. Remove distributor cap, magnetic shield (if equipped), shaft and rotor. 5. Remove C-washer on top of pickup coil assembly, then disconnect pickup coil leads from module and remove pickup coil assembly. 6. Reverse procedure to install. HALL EFFECT SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED), REPLACE 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove switch retaining screws, then while pulling switch away, remove wiring connector. Remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. NOTE: After Hall Effect switch is installed, spin distributor shaft to ensure teeth do not touch. If necessary loosen, then re-tighten pickup coil teeth and Hall Effect switch to eliminate contact. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair MODULE REPLACEMENT 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove module retaining screws, then lift module upward. 3. Disconnect module electrical connector. Note position of electrical connector prior to disconnecting. Remove module from distributor. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Check to ensure that module electrical connector is installed in proper position. If module is not being replaced, do not wipe grease from module or distributor base. If new module is to be installed, coat module and distributor base with pack of grease supplied with replacement module. PICKUP COIL, REPLACE 1. Remove distributor from engine. 2. Mark relationship of distributor shaft and driven gear for reference during assembly. 3. Remove roll pin and driven gear from shaft. 4. Remove distributor cap, magnetic shield (if equipped), shaft and rotor. 5. Remove C-washer on top of pickup coil assembly, then disconnect pickup coil leads from module and remove pickup coil assembly. 6. Reverse procedure to install. HALL EFFECT SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED), REPLACE 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove switch retaining screws, then while pulling switch away, remove wiring connector. Remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. NOTE: After Hall Effect switch is installed, spin distributor shaft to ensure teeth do not touch. If necessary loosen, then re-tighten pickup coil teeth and Hall Effect switch to eliminate contact. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Pick-Up Coil, Ignition > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Distributor Pickup Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Pick-Up Coil, Ignition > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 1877 Distributor Pickup Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Control Module: Service and Repair MODULE REPLACEMENT 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove module retaining screws, then lift module upward. 3. Disconnect module electrical connector. Note position of electrical connector prior to disconnecting. Remove module from distributor. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Check to ensure that module electrical connector is installed in proper position. If module is not being replaced, do not wipe grease from module or distributor base. If new module is to be installed, coat module and distributor base with pack of grease supplied with replacement module. PICKUP COIL, REPLACE 1. Remove distributor from engine. 2. Mark relationship of distributor shaft and driven gear for reference during assembly. 3. Remove roll pin and driven gear from shaft. 4. Remove distributor cap, magnetic shield (if equipped), shaft and rotor. 5. Remove C-washer on top of pickup coil assembly, then disconnect pickup coil leads from module and remove pickup coil assembly. 6. Reverse procedure to install. HALL EFFECT SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED), REPLACE 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove switch retaining screws, then while pulling switch away, remove wiring connector. Remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. NOTE: After Hall Effect switch is installed, spin distributor shaft to ensure teeth do not touch. If necessary loosen, then re-tighten pickup coil teeth and Hall Effect switch to eliminate contact. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Hall Effect Switch <--> [Hall Effect Sensor, Ignition] > Component Information > Service and Repair Hall Effect Switch: Service and Repair HALL EFFECT SWITCH (If Equipped), REPLACE 1. Remove distributor cap and rotor. 2. Remove switch retaining screws, then while pulling switch away, remove wiring connector. Remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. NOTE: After Hall Effect switch is installed, spin distributor shaft to ensure teeth do not touch. If necessary loosen, then re-tighten pickup coil teeth and Hall Effect switch to eliminate contact. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Torque Spark Plug: Specifications Plug Tightening Torque 17 - 27 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Torque > Page 1890 SPARK PLUGS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor Thermal Vacuum Switch <--> [Thermal Vacuum Valve, Vacuum/Dist. Advance] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Distributor Thermal Vacuum Switch: Testing and Inspection Fig. 38a - EGR EFE EMR Thermal Vacuum Switch Below the switching point; Ports 1 and 2 and 3 and 6 should be connected - Ports 4 and 5 should be sealed--Fig 38A. Above the switching point; Port 1 should be connected to Port 5 - Port 2 should be connected to Port 6 - Port 3 should be connected to Port 4. NOTE: Refer to the number stamped on the base of the switch or valve for calibrated switching or activation temperatures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Upshift Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Upshift Solenoid 1-2 Shift Valve Controls the speed at which the 1-2 and 2-1 shifts occur. 2-3 Shift Valve Controls speeds at which 2-3 and 3-2 shifts occur. Stator Valve Used only on transmissions having the variable pitch stator, this valve shifts when line oil is exhausted at end of valve when stator control solenoid is energized. This exhausts oil from the variable pitch stator piston and changes from the low to the high angle. When the stator solenoid is not energized, converter oil is directed to the stator piston and low angle is obtained. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Upshift Solenoid > Page 1901 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Shift Solenoid DESCRIPTION The detent solenoid is activated by an electric switch at the carburetor. When the throttle is opened sufficiently to close this switch, the solenoid in the transmission is activated, causing a downshift at speeds below 70 mph. it lower speeds, downshifts will occur at lesser throttle openings without the use of the electric switch. 1-2 Detent Valve Senses regulated modulator pressure tending to hold 1-2 shift valve downshifted and provides an area for detent pressure for detent 2-1 shifts. Detent Valve Shifts when oil line is exhausted at end of valve when detent solenoid is energized. This directs detent oil to the 1-2 accumulator valve, 1-2 regulator and 2-3 modulator valves, 3-2 valve and the vacuum modulator valve. Detent Regulator Valve When the detent valve shifts, the detent regulator is free to allow drive oil to enter the detent passage and thus becomes regulated at 70 psi. Detent pressure will also flow into the mod lator passage which flows to the shift valves. Low gear oil moves the detent regulator open to drive oil, allowing drive oil to enter modulator and detent passages. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Maintenance Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Number: 90-406-7A Section: 7A Date: March 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 067107 Subject: AVAILABILITY/SERVICING OF NEW TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL INDICATOR Model and Year: 1982-90 C/K TRUCKS, 1987-90 R/V TRUCKS, 1983-90 G VANS WITH 3L80 OR 4L60 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION A new transmission fluid level indicator featuring a seal at the transmission fill tube inlet end is available. This indicator, which is installed on all 1991 C/K, R/V and G models, may be installed on previous models listed below. SERVICE PROCEDURE: When installing a new transmission fluid level indicator, replacement of the transmission fluid fill tube is not necessary. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION Part Number Model Description 15659455 1982-90 C/K All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15659455 1987-90 RN All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15677051 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 4L60 level indicator 15677052 1987-90 G2 (6.2C) & 4L60 Transmission fluid 1983-86 G All & 4L60 level indicator 15677055 1987-90 G3 (6.2J) & 3L80 Transmission fluid 1987-88 G3 (5.7M) & 3L80 level indicator 1984-86 G All & 3L80 1983 G3 & 3L80 15677056 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 3L80 level indicator 15677057 1988-90 G3 (7.4N) & 3L80 Transmission fluid level indicator Parts are currently available from GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION For vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation: K6130 Use applicable Labor Time Guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description A pressure sensitive switch is screwed through the rear face of the valve body assembly into the direct clutch oil passage. This switch is closed (grounded) in all but direct drive and reverse, since there is no oil pressure in this passage in Neutral, First or Second gear. The pressure switch is connected by a wire to a transmission connector and hence through an engine solenoid valve to the distributor and engine thermoswitch. When this circuit is grounded (switch closed), spark advance is retarded. When the transmission shifts to high gear (or reverse), oil pressure in the direct clutch passage will open the switch and circuit so that the transmission will no longer affect the vacuum advance of the distributor. Line Pressure Regulator Regulates line pressure according to pump speed and engine torque. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Electronic Speed Sensor Retainer Bolt ............................................................................................... ...................................................................... 7 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - ECM May Contain Wrong PROM PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM May Contain Wrong PROM Number: 88-42 Section: 6E Date: Sept., 1987 Subject: SERVICE REPLACEMENT ELECTRONIC MODULES (ECM) WITH PROM INSTALLED Model and Year: 1981-88 ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS It has been brought to our attention that some service replacement electronic control modules (ECM's) have contained a PROM. A PROM should not have been included in a replacement ECM as it may not be the correct PROM for the vehicle. When this situation is encountered, the PROM should be removed from the replacement ECM and the PROM from the vehicle should be installed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1920 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Service Precautions A PROM is a sensitive electronic part and must be handled with care. If the connector terminals (pins) on the bottom of the PROM are exposed, avoid touching them. Pins can be broken easily, and the PROM can be damaged by static electric discharge. Follow these guidelines when replacing a PROM: ^ Disconnect the battery ground cable before removing a PROM. Reconnect the cable after the new PROM is installed. ^ DO NOT try to remove a PROM from its plastic PROM carrier. ^ Note the direction in which the original PROM and its carrier were installed in the ECM, and install the replacement PROM in the same direction. Most PROM's are marked with a notch at one end for orientation. Many PROM's can be installed in a reversed direction, which will destroy the PROM when power is applied. CAUTION: A PROM can be damaged by static electric discharge. Avoid damage as follows: ^ DO NOT remove a PROM from its packing material until you are ready to install it. DO NOT hold a PROM by its pins. ^ Before entering a vehicle to remove or replace a PROM, touch an exposed metal part of the vehicle to discharge any static charge from your body or use anti-static wrist straps. ^ Avoid sliding across upholstery or carpeting when removing or installing a PROM. If this is not possible, touch an exposed metal part of the vehicle with your free hand before removing a PROM or installing a new one in its socket in the ECM. ^ When available, use an antistatic grounding strap attached to your wrist and clipped to a metal part of the vehicle body to prevent static charges from accumulating. Antistatic, conductive floormats are also available. ^ For some vehicles, it may be desirable to remove the ECM when replacing the PROM. ^ NOTE: See POWERTRAIN MANAGEMENT / SERVICE PRECAUTIONS / VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNINGS / ELECTRICAL PRECAUTIONS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Introducing the GM PROM Cross Reference Index PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Introducing the GM PROM Cross Reference Index This PROM cross reference index provides tables that let you use a PROM identification (ID) code to identify the PROM installed in the engine control module (ECM) on most GM vehicles. The code can be either - or both - the internal "scan ID" code or the external PROM code. From the PROM identification, you can find the part number of the PROM and trace the PROM history to determine if any revised PROM's have been issued to supersede the one in the vehicle. The PROM history for a specific vehicle lists a succession of superseding PROM's ending with the most recent PROM released as a service part for the vehicle. PROM's that were released as service parts and explained in a technical service bulletin (TSB) are listed with a description of why the PROM was issued. In most cases, the applicable TSB also is referenced. This index lists ECM PROM's for the 1980-95 vehicles. It does not contain ID codes and part numbers for all PROM's used in all GM vehicles. NOTE: GM flash PROM's (EEPROM's) can only be updated at GM Dealerships with factory-supplied equipment. These cars will not display a PROM ID. By following the steps outlined below, you can use the PROM index to determine if the problem you are diagnosing can possibly be corrected by installing a revised PROM. The PROM index tables are organized by model year, engine displacement, and engine code (the eighth digit of the Vehicle Identification Number). The table columns are arranged as shown below: Example of Table Column Arrangement SCAN PROM PROM PART SUPERSEDING TSB REFERENCE ID CODE (BCC) NUMBER ID PART NUMBER NUMBER (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................ 9461 8958 AMU 16058955R 8290 01228290 86194 Column 1, SCAN ID: The scan ID is the internal PROM identification number transmitted on the ECM data stream and displayed by the scanner as PROM ID. The PROM records for each year and engine are listed numerically by this scan ID. Column 2, PROM CODE: These are the numbers and letters marked on the top of the PROM itself. The numbers are often referred to as the "external PROM ID." The letters are often called the "broadcast code." Together they are the external PROM code. Column 3, PROM P/N: This is the GM part number for the PROM identified by the codes in columns 1 and 2. Column 4, SUPERSEDING ID PROM PART NUMBER: Use the superseding scan ID to locate the newer PROM in the table. If the scan ID for the superseding PROM is not known, the PROM broadcast code is listed here. If the PROM is superseded by a newer PROM, that part number is listed here. Column 5, TSB REFERENCE NUMBER The TSB NUMBER column identifies the original TSB that released this PROM for service. Whenever possible you should refer to the TSB for additional information before changing a PROM. The bulletin may list other parts that must be installed when the PROM is changed, or it may provide additional troubleshooting information. To find a TSB, see Reading Technical Service Bulletins. See: Reading Technical Service Bulletins This will display all the TSB's for that particular vehicle. EXPANDED FOOTNOTES Here you will find SUPERSEDING SCAN ID, PROM PART NUMBERS, symptoms and additional parts that need to be replaced when servicing the PROM. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Introducing the GM PROM Cross Reference Index > Page 1923 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Introducing the GM PROM Cross Reference Index This PROM cross reference index provides tables that let you use a PROM identification (ID) code to identify the PROM installed in the engine control module (ECM) on most GM vehicles. The code can be either - or both - the internal "scan ID" code or the external PROM code. From the PROM identification, you can find the part number of the PROM and trace the PROM history to determine if any revised PROM's have been issued to supersede the one in the vehicle. The PROM history for a specific vehicle lists a succession of superseding PROM's ending with the most recent PROM released as a service part for the vehicle. PROM's that were released as service parts and explained in a technical service bulletin (TSB) are listed with a description of why the PROM was issued. In most cases, the applicable TSB also is referenced. This index lists ECM PROM's for the 1980-95 vehicles. It does not contain ID codes and part numbers for all PROM's used in all GM vehicles. NOTE: GM flash PROM's (EEPROM's) can only be updated at GM Dealerships with factory-supplied equipment. These cars will not display a PROM ID. By following the steps outlined below, you can use the PROM index to determine if the problem you are diagnosing can possibly be corrected by installing a revised PROM. The PROM index tables are organized by model year, engine displacement, and engine code (the eighth digit of the Vehicle Identification Number). The table columns are arranged as shown below: Example of Table Column Arrangement SCAN PROM PROM PART SUPERSEDING TSB REFERENCE ID CODE (BCC) NUMBER ID PART NUMBER NUMBER (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................ 9461 8958 AMU 16058955R 8290 01228290 86194 Column 1, SCAN ID: The scan ID is the internal PROM identification number transmitted on the ECM data stream and displayed by the scanner as PROM ID. The PROM records for each year and engine are listed numerically by this scan ID. Column 2, PROM CODE: These are the numbers and letters marked on the top of the PROM itself. The numbers are often referred to as the "external PROM ID." The letters are often called the "broadcast code." Together they are the external PROM code. Column 3, PROM P/N: This is the GM part number for the PROM identified by the codes in columns 1 and 2. Column 4, SUPERSEDING ID PROM PART NUMBER: Use the superseding scan ID to locate the newer PROM in the table. If the scan ID for the superseding PROM is not known, the PROM broadcast code is listed here. If the PROM is superseded by a newer PROM, that part number is listed here. Column 5, TSB REFERENCE NUMBER The TSB NUMBER column identifies the original TSB that released this PROM for service. Whenever possible you should refer to the TSB for additional information before changing a PROM. The bulletin may list other parts that must be installed when the PROM is changed, or it may provide additional troubleshooting information. To find a TSB, see Reading Technical Service Bulletins. See: Reading Technical Service Bulletins This will display all the TSB's for that particular vehicle. EXPANDED FOOTNOTES Here you will find SUPERSEDING SCAN ID, PROM PART NUMBERS, symptoms and additional parts that need to be replaced when servicing the PROM. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Introducing the GM PROM Cross Reference Index > Page 1924 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Additional PROM Information New ECM PROMs for GM vehicles may be released for service at any time. The information in this system is accurate to the best of the publisher's knowledge and the publication date of the disk. Before ordering a PROM, consult with a GM parts and service dealer to verify the latest part number information. Scanner PROM ID information for earlier-model vehicles (1980-83) is less complete than for later models. To accurately identify PROM's in earlier vehicles, it may be necessary to check the external PROM code marked on the PROM. General Motors has often recommended that dealership technicians check the PROM history of a vehicle and install the most recent PROM revision before performing other diagnostic operations. Each succeeding PROM revision for a specific vehicle includes all previous revisions. Therefore, whenever you consider changing a PROM, review the entire PROM history to see if any revision covered the current driveability problem. Installing the most recent PROM revision may be impractical however for an independent service facility, particularly if the latest PROM revision does not address the specific driveability problem of the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Introducing the GM PROM Cross Reference Index > Page 1925 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Additional PROM Information New ECM PROMs for GM vehicles may be released for service at any time. The information in this system is accurate to the best of the publisher's knowledge and the publication date of the disk. Before ordering a PROM, consult with a GM parts and service dealer to verify the latest part number information. Scanner PROM ID information for earlier-model vehicles (1980-83) is less complete than for later models. To accurately identify PROM's in earlier vehicles, it may be necessary to check the external PROM code marked on the PROM. General Motors has often recommended that dealership technicians check the PROM history of a vehicle and install the most recent PROM revision before performing other diagnostic operations. Each succeeding PROM revision for a specific vehicle includes all previous revisions. Therefore, whenever you consider changing a PROM, review the entire PROM history to see if any revision covered the current driveability problem. Installing the most recent PROM revision may be impractical however for an independent service facility, particularly if the latest PROM revision does not address the specific driveability problem of the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Introducing the GM PROM Cross Reference Index > Page 1926 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID PROM/MEMCAL Identification Marks File In Section: 6E - Engine Fuel & Emission Bulletin No.: 44-65-01 Date: October, 1994 Subject: New PROM/MEMCAL Identification Markings Models: 1995 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks Note: For the purposes of this document, the terms PROM and MEMCAL will be used interchangeably. To simplify identification of service PROMs. a new external marking format will be implemented. Parts manufactured after Sept. 1994 will feature these new markings. This change will place the full 8-digit service part number on the PROM, in place of the old 4-digit "EXTERNAL ID" number. In the past, parts and service personnel could not identify a PROM without using a cross-reference table that matched external IDs and service numbers. In the future, the cross-reference table will not be required for PROMs; parts will be ordered directly from the number appearing on the PROM. However, the label will retain the broadcast code alpha characters to allow continued use of cross-reference charts, if so desired. Old Marking Format: New Marking Format: ^ Ordering the above PROM from the old marking format would require using a cross-reference chart to determine a service part number, based on the BROAD CAST CODE and EXTERNAL ID NUMBERS. ^ To order from the new format, simply combine the 2nd and 3rd lines to form an 8-digit part number that can be directly ordered from SPO (number 16134624 in the above example). As these changes are phased into the parts inventory, it should be noted that dealers will continue to see parts with both formats for some time in the future. This is because: ^ Millions of vehicles have already been built with the old format. ^ SPO has existing stock of MEMCALs and PROMs with the old format. ^ PROMS with 7-digit part numbers (representing less than 10% of current part numbers) will continue to use the old format. The 7-digit part numbers are easily identified because they always begin with "122xxxx". Due to manufacturing processes, more than one 8-digit part number may appear on a MEMCAL. In this event, service personnel should use the label on the exterior cover of the MEMCAL assembly. To avoid confusion, only the service label will include the BROAD CAST CODE, consisting of letter characters (I.E., ARCL). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Introducing the GM PROM Cross Reference Index > Page 1927 CHANGES TO MEMCAL/PROM LABELING FORMATS ^ MEMCALs may use either INK-JET or ADHESIVE labels, as shown. ^ PROMs will always use ADHESIVE labels with the same format as shown for MEMCALs. These changes will become effective on parts manufactured after 10/94. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Introducing the GM PROM Cross Reference Index > Page 1928 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID PROM/MEMCAL Identification Marks File In Section: 6E - Engine Fuel & Emission Bulletin No.: 44-65-01 Date: October, 1994 Subject: New PROM/MEMCAL Identification Markings Models: 1995 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks Note: For the purposes of this document, the terms PROM and MEMCAL will be used interchangeably. To simplify identification of service PROMs. a new external marking format will be implemented. Parts manufactured after Sept. 1994 will feature these new markings. This change will place the full 8-digit service part number on the PROM, in place of the old 4-digit "EXTERNAL ID" number. In the past, parts and service personnel could not identify a PROM without using a cross-reference table that matched external IDs and service numbers. In the future, the cross-reference table will not be required for PROMs; parts will be ordered directly from the number appearing on the PROM. However, the label will retain the broadcast code alpha characters to allow continued use of cross-reference charts, if so desired. Old Marking Format: New Marking Format: ^ Ordering the above PROM from the old marking format would require using a cross-reference chart to determine a service part number, based on the BROAD CAST CODE and EXTERNAL ID NUMBERS. ^ To order from the new format, simply combine the 2nd and 3rd lines to form an 8-digit part number that can be directly ordered from SPO (number 16134624 in the above example). As these changes are phased into the parts inventory, it should be noted that dealers will continue to see parts with both formats for some time in the future. This is because: ^ Millions of vehicles have already been built with the old format. ^ SPO has existing stock of MEMCALs and PROMs with the old format. ^ PROMS with 7-digit part numbers (representing less than 10% of current part numbers) will continue to use the old format. The 7-digit part numbers are easily identified because they always begin with "122xxxx". Due to manufacturing processes, more than one 8-digit part number may appear on a MEMCAL. In this event, service personnel should use the label on the exterior cover of the MEMCAL assembly. To avoid confusion, only the service label will include the BROAD CAST CODE, consisting of letter characters (I.E., ARCL). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Introducing the GM PROM Cross Reference Index > Page 1929 CHANGES TO MEMCAL/PROM LABELING FORMATS ^ MEMCALs may use either INK-JET or ADHESIVE labels, as shown. ^ PROMs will always use ADHESIVE labels with the same format as shown for MEMCALs. These changes will become effective on parts manufactured after 10/94. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Introducing the GM PROM Cross Reference Index > Page 1930 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Reading Technical Service Bulletins Always read any Technical Service Bulletins (TSB's) referenced before replacing a PROM. Service bulletins list parts that must be installed when a PROM is changed, and provide information on trouble codes, troubleshooting and driveability problems for which the PROM was released. To find applicable TSB's: Complete TSB Listing 1. Hold down right mouse button and select "Vehicle" in the "Pull Right Menu". 2. Select the TSB ICON. 3. Select "All Technical Service Bulletins by Number, Date, and Title". 4. Select "Sort by Number", "Sort by Date", or "Sort by Title". 5. Scroll up or down to find the desired TSB. PROM TSB Listing Only 1. Hold down right mouse button and select "Technical Service Bulletins" in the "Pull Right Menu". 2. Select "All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory". 3. Select "Sort by Number", "Sort by Date", or "Sort by Title". 4. Scroll up or down to find the desired TSB. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Introducing the GM PROM Cross Reference Index > Page 1931 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Reading Technical Service Bulletins Always read any Technical Service Bulletins (TSB's) referenced before replacing a PROM. Service bulletins list parts that must be installed when a PROM is changed, and provide information on trouble codes, troubleshooting and driveability problems for which the PROM was released. To find applicable TSB's: Complete TSB Listing 1. Hold down right mouse button and select "Vehicle" in the "Pull Right Menu". 2. Select the TSB ICON. 3. Select "All Technical Service Bulletins by Number, Date, and Title". 4. Select "Sort by Number", "Sort by Date", or "Sort by Title". 5. Scroll up or down to find the desired TSB. PROM TSB Listing Only 1. Hold down right mouse button and select "Technical Service Bulletins" in the "Pull Right Menu". 2. Select "All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory". 3. Select "Sort by Number", "Sort by Date", or "Sort by Title". 4. Scroll up or down to find the desired TSB. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Footnotes 1 Thru 50 [1] Also needs EGR P/N 1706739. [2] Also requires EGR P/N 17111295. [3] Requires Throttle Body service P/N 17067142, EGR valve service P/N 17067111, Injector service kit P/N 17067976. [4] Requires Throttle Body service P/N 17067142, EGR valve service P/N 17067107, Injector service kit P/N 17067976. [5] Requires Throttle Body service P/N 17067144, EGR valve service P/N 17067110, Injector service kit P/N 17067976. [6] PROM I.D. 7080 KJ is also acceptable for PROM I.D. 5853 KJ only. Requires Throttle Body service P/N 17067144, EGR valve service P/N 17067108 (FED), 17067144 (CAL), Injector service kit P/N 17067976. [7] Required Throttle Body service P/N 17067142, EGR valve service P/N 17067107 (FED), 17068210 (CAL), Injector service kit P/N 17067976. [8] Requires Throttle Body service P/N 17068019, EGR valve service P/N 17067109, Injector service kit P/N 17067976. [9] For Federal - Use 01226047 (PROM CODE 7654 BKW). For California - Use 01226049 (PROM CODE 7665 BKY). [10] For Federal - Use 01226054. For California - Use 01226056 [11] For Federal - Use 01226055. For California - Use 01226057. [12] For Federal - Use 01226046 (PROM CODE 7648 BKU). For California - Use 01226049 (PROM CODE 7665 BKY). [13] For federal - Use 01226046 (PROM CODE 7648 BKU). For California - Use 01226048 (PROM CODE 7659 BKX). [14] ECM may have been replaced by service ECM P/N 16019710 (1225500). [15] ECM may also be 16018161. ECM may also have been replaced by service ECM P/N 16018000 (1225330). [16] ECM may also be 16018201. ECM may also have been replaced by service ECM P/N 16018000 (1225330). [17] ECM may also be 16018211. ECM may have been replaced by service ECM P/N 16018000 (1225330). [18] ECM may also be 16023761. ECM may have been replaced by service ECM P/N 16018000 (1225330). [19] ECM may also be 16018101. ECM may have been replaced by service ECM P/N 16018000 (1225330). [20] For 2-board ECM only. [21] May need EGR valve P/N 17079563. Original equipment P/N 16029014. [22] Original equipment PROM P/N 16017094, now 16025254 [23] Original equipment PROM P/N 16017224, now 16025264. [24] Also needs EGR valve P/N 17079013. Original equipment PROM P/N 16030034 (PROM ID: BOH). [25] Requires kit P/N 25522748 containing: Wiring harness jumper P/N 12043500, Relay P/N 25522747, Foam P/N 25522723, EGR P/N 17079799. [26] Needs EGR valve P/N 17079818. [27] For (MY7) - Use 01226473 (SCAN I.D. = 3941). For (M19) - Use 01226474 (SCAN I.D. = 3951). [28] For (MY7) or (M19, C60) - Use 01226473 (SCAN I.D. = 3941). For (M19) - Use 01226474 (SCAN I.D. = 3951). [29] ECM may also be 16023561(M5), or 16033061(M4 with A/C). [30] For F62 axle - Use 01226441 (SCAN I.D. = 3622). For F17 axle - Use 01226439 (SCAN I.D. = 3332). [31] For one_board ECM only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1934 [32] Requires Thermac Sensor P/N 8997916. [33] For Federal - Use 01227729 (SCAN I.D. = 7729). For California - Use 01227728 (SCAN I.D. = 7728). [34] Use 01227629 (SCAN I.D. = 7629) only to resolve surge or chuggle. [35] Use 01227381 (SCAN I.D. = 7381) only to resolve chuggle. [36] Use 01227386 (SCAN I.D. = 7386) only to resolve chuggle. [37] Retrofit PROM - Does not supersede the regular replacement service PROM. To be used only as required to resolve cases of chuggle. [38] Retrofit PROM - Supersedes all previous service PROM part numbers. To be used as both the regular service replacement (PROM-damaged or defective), and to resolve cases of chuggle. [39] Retrofit PROM - Supersedes all previous service PROM part numbers. To be used as both the regular service replacement (PROM-damaged or defective), and to resolve cases of chuggle, detonation, or flatness. [40] Retrofit PROM - Does not supersede the regular replacement service PROMS. To be used only as required to resolve cases of chuggle, detonation, or flatness. [41] Need EGR valve P/N 17111577 (Federal only). [42] For use with P215/65 tires - use 01228290 (SCAN I.D. = 8290). For use with P235/60, P245/50 tires - use 01228291 (SCAN I.D. = 8291). [43] For use with P215/65 tires - use 01228292 (SCAN I.D. - 8292). For use with P235/60, P245/50 tires - use 01228293 (SCAN I.D. = 8293). [44] Use 16143570 (SCAN I.D. = 3531) for hot hard restart (Requires Fuel Pump P/N 25115764, Fuel Sender P/N 25093526). Use 16143459 (SCAN I.D. = 3571) for Code 42, Spark Knock, High Idle. [45] Use 16143455 (SCAN I.D. = 3511) for hot hard restart (Requires Fuel Pump P/N 25115764, Fuel Sender P/N 25093526). Use 16143453 (SCAN I.D. = 3501) for Code 42, Spark Knock, High Idle. [46] Use 16143575 (SCAN I.D. = 3541) for hot hard restart (Requires Fuel Pump P/N 25115764). Use 16143460 (SCAN I.D. = 3581) for Code 42, Spark Knock, High Idle. [47] Use 16143580 (SCAN I.D. = 3551) for hot hard restart (Requires Fuel Pump P/N 25115764). Use 16143462 (SCAN I.D. = 3591) for Code 42, Spark Knock, High Idle. [48] Use 16143457 (SCAN I.D. = 3521) for hot hard restart (Requires Fuel Pump P/N 25115925, Fuel Sender P/N 25092778). Use 16143466 (SCAN I.D. = 3481) for Code 42, Spark Knock, High Idle. [49] Use 16143452 (SCAN I.D. = 3491) for hot hard restart (Requires Fuel Pump P/N 25115925, Fuel Sender P/N 25092778). Use 16143463 (SCAN I.D. = 3451) for Code 42, Spark Knock, High Idle. [50] Needs air injection service kit (P/N 10115773) and new vehicle emission control label. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1935 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Footnotes 51 Thru 100 [51] Must be ordered with service kit P/N 10115773. [52] With this PROM installed, use 1987-88 2.8L speed density engine driveability and emissions manual. [53] PROM update eliminates MAF sensor, replacing it with a speed density system. With a 1990 or earlier primary cartridge, I.D. vehicle on scanner as a 1989 model (VIN = K-1-W). [54] For 2WD use 16120099 (SCAN I.D. = 9941). For 4WD use 16120109 (SCAN I.D. = 9901). [55] For 2.73 (GU2) Axle use 16120077 (SCAN I.D. = 9891). For 3.08 (GU4) Axle use 16120082 (SCAN I.D. = 9901). For 3.42 (GU6) and 3.73 (GT4) Axles use 16120086 (SCAN I.D. = 9911). [56] For 2WD use 16120042 (SCAN I.D. = 9991). For 4WD use 16120129 (SCAN I.D. = 0011). [57] Needs accelerator pump check ball spring P/N 17069583. [58] For false Code 44 on long coast down, use retrofit service PROM 01228486 AAND 1050. For regular service replacement, use PROM 16062797 AAND 2798. [59] For false Code 44 on long coast down, use retrofit service PROM 01228487 AANF 1052. For regular service replacement, use PROM 16062801 AANF 2802. [60] USE 16143545 (SCAN I.D. = 3461) For hot hard restart (Requires Fuel Pump P/N 25115764, Fuel Sender P/N 25093744). Use 16143465 (SCAN I.D. = 3471) for Code 42, Spark Knock, High Idle. [61] With this PROM installed, use 1987-88 2.8L speed density engine driveability and emissions manual. [62] For use with model C1 Trucks - Use 16121162 (SCAN I.D. = 3511). For use with model C2, K, K2, AND K1000 Trucks - use 16121166 (SCAN I.D. = 3521). [63] Also requires installation of new EGR valve package P/N 17112238 (Contains EGR valve P/N 17090078 and a gasket). [64] Use 16181863 (SCAN I.D. = 0844) for cold start stall. Use 16181859 (SCAN I.D. = 0834) only if required to solve both cold start stall and chuggle. [65] Use 16181871 (SCAN I.D. = 0864) for cold start stall. Use 16181867 (SCAN I.D. = 0854) only if required to solve both cold start stall and chuggle. [66] Use 16165848 (SCAN I.D. = 5614) for cold start stall. Use 16165843 (SCAN I.D. = 5624) only if required to solve both cold start stall and chuggle. [67] Do not rely on the scanner ID to determine which PROM is in a vehicle. Look at the BCC on the PROM to be sure. Do not confuse with some 1991 models with a 2.84 axle ratio and a Federal emissions pkg which used scanner ID 5644 but had a BCC of AWJD. [68] This PROM may have a negative impact on fuel economy. [69] Cannot be used on vehicles that do not have digital EGR valves. [70] Use 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) for cold start stall. Use 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) only if required to solve both cold start stall and chuggle. [71] Use 16181883 (SCAN I.D. = 0894) for cold start stall. Use 16181875 (SCAN I.D. = 0874) only if required to solve both cold start stall and chuggle. [72] Use 16181887 (SCAN I.D. = 0904) for cold start stall. Use 16181879 (SCAN I.D. = 0884) only if required to solve both cold start stall and chuggle. [73] This PROM may have a negative impact on fuel economy. [74] PROM can only be used with ECM P/N 16144288. [75] Make certain the vehicle has been updated with previously attempted service fixes as follows: EGR valve P/N 17090156 (stamped on valve) 17112373 (GMSPO kit), PCV valve P/N 25098542, ESC module P/N 16175099 (BCC=BARC). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1936 [76] For vehicles with sleeve bearing engines. [77] Combination detonation and neutral gear rattle PROM available. [78] Needs ESC P/N 16175099. [79] Model 2DDM Transmissions - Check dealer records to see if the torque converter has already been replaced with P/N 8650935 (Tagged BCC: DGAF). Trans. with torque converters with P/N 8656959 (Tagged BCC: DG5F) need to replace it with P/N 8650935. [80] For dedicated natural gas vehicles. Order with kit P/N 12545589 unless the only problem is idle fluctuation. [81] For chuggle at 40-45 condition, use PROM only. For tip-in hesitation only, use EGR valve only - P/N 17078431. For cold driveability hesitation, use both PROM and EGR. [82] Requires supplementary tune-up label, spark bypass relay kit P/N 14086983, spark plugs P/N 5614009, sun visor starting label P/N 14085150. Also, remove and discard fuse labeled "crank" from fuse BLK #2 position (3 Amp. Fuse). [83] Manual transmission cars should also be updated with the clutch anticipate switch per dealer service bulletin number. 91-472-7C. [84] Cold driveability, use with PROM 0051 AAF (G057). REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067142, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067111, INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [85] Cold driveability, use with PROM 0050 AAF (G057). REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067142, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067111, INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [86] Exhaust noise (requires catalytic converter), cold driveability, use with PROM 5884 BH (G057). REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17068019, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067109, INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [87] Exhaust noise (requires catalytic converter), cold driveability, use with PROM 5869 BH (G057). REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17068019, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067109, INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [88] Exhaust noise (requires catalytic converter), cold driveability, use with PROM 5779 KB (G057). REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067144, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067110, INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [89] Exhaust noise (requires catalytic converter), cold driveability, use with PROM 5778 KB (G057). REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067144, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067110, INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [90] Cold driveability, use with PROM 5854 KJ (G057). PROM I.D. 7080 KJ IS ALSO ACCEPTABLE FOR PROM I.D. 5853 KJ ONLY. REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067144, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067108 (FED), 17067144 (CAL), INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [91] Cold driveability, use with PROM 5853 KJ (G057). PROM I.D. 7080 KJ IS ALSO ACCEPTABLE FOR PROM I.D. 5853 KJ ONLY. REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067144, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067108 (FED), 17067144 (CAL), INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [92] Cold driveability, use with PROM 5861 KK (G057). REQUIRED THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067142, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067107 (FED), 17068210 (CAL), INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [93] Cold driveability, use with PROM 5860 KK (G057). REQUIRED THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067142, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067107 (FED), 17068210 (CAL), INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [94] Exhaust noise (requires catalytic converter), cold driveability, use with PROM 5786 LW (G057). REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067142, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067107, INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [95] Exhaust noise (requires catalytic converter), cold driveability, use with PROM 5785 LW (G057). REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067142, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067107, INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [96] Cold driveability, use with PROM 7088 LY (G057). REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067142, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067111, INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [97] Cold driveability, use with PROM 7087 LY (G057). REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067142, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067111, INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [98] Chuggle at 40-45 mph, cold driveability hesitation. FOR CHUGGLE AT 40-45 CONDITION, USE PROM ONLY. FOR TIP-IN HESITATION ONLY, USE EGR VALVE ONLY - P/N 17078431. FOR COLD DRIVEABILITY HESITATION, USE BOTH PROM AND EGR. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1937 [99] Driveability correction for heavy chuggle. REQUIRES KIT P/N 25522748 CONTAINING: WIRING HARNESS JUMPER P/N 12043500, RELAY P/N 25522747, FOAM P/N 25522723, EGR P/N 17079799. [100] Cold startability adjustment. REQUIRES SUPPLEMENTARY TUNE-UP LABEL, SPARK BYPASS RELAY KIT P/N 14086983, SPARK PLUGS P/N 5614009, SUN VISOR STARTING LABEL P/N 14085150. ALSO, REMOVE AND DISCARD FUSE LABELED "CRANK" FROM FUSE BLK #2 POSITION (3 AMP. FUSE). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1938 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Footnotes 101 Thru 150 [101] Driveability correction for heavy chuggle. REQUIRES KIT P/N 25522748 CONTAINING: WIRING HARNESS JUMPER P/N 12043500, RELAY P/N 25522747, FOAM P/N 25522723, EGR P/N 17079799. [102] Cold startability adjustment. REQUIRES SUPPLEMENTARY TUNE-UP LABEL, SPARK BYPASS RELAY KIT P/N 14086983, SPARK PLUGS P/N 5614009, SUN VISOR STARTING LABEL P/N 14085150. ALSO, REMOVE AND DISCARD FUSE LABELED "CRANK" FROM FUSE BLK #2 POSITION (3 AMP. FUSE). [103] Cold startability adjustment. REQUIRES SUPPLEMENTARY TUNE-UP LABEL, SPARK BYPASS RELAY KIT P/N 14086983, SPARK PLUGS P/N 5614009, SUN VISOR STARTING LABEL P/N 14085150. ALSO, REMOVE AND DISCARD FUSE LABELED "CRANK" FROM FUSE BLK #2 POSITION (3 AMP. FUSE). [104] Cold startability adjustment. REQUIRES SUPPLEMENTARY TUNE-UP LABEL, SPARK BYPASS RELAY KIT P/N 14086983, SPARK PLUGS P/N 5614009, SUN VISOR STARTING LABEL P/N 14085150. ALSO, REMOVE AND DISCARD FUSE LABELED "CRANK" FROM FUSE BLK #2 POSITION (3 AMP. FUSE). [105] Surge. RETROFIT PROM - DOES NOT SUPERSEDE THE REGULAR REPLACEMENT SERVICE PROM. TO BE USED ONLY AS REQUIRED TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE. [106] Surge and CODE 51. RETROFIT PROM - SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUS SERVICE PROM PART NUMBERS. TO BE USED AS BOTH THE REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT (PROM-DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE), AND TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE. [107] Surge and CODE 51. RETROFIT PROM - SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUS SERVICE PROM PART NUMBERS. TO BE USED AS BOTH THE REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT (PROM-DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE), AND TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE. [108] Surge and CODE 51. RETROFIT PROM - SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUS SERVICE PROM PART NUMBERS. TO BE USED AS BOTH THE REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT (PROM-DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE), AND TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE. [109] Surge and CODE 51. RETROFIT PROM - SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUS SERVICE PROM PART NUMBERS. TO BE USED AS BOTH THE REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT (PROM-DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE), AND TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE. [110] Surge. RETROFIT PROM - SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUS SERVICE PROM PART NUMBERS. TO BE USED AS BOTH THE REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT (PROM-DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE), AND TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE. [111] Surge and CODE 51. RETROFIT PROM - SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUS SERVICE PROM PART NUMBERS. TO BE USED AS BOTH THE REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT (PROM-DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE), AND TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE. [112] Surge and CODE 51. RETROFIT PROM - SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUS SERVICE PROM PART NUMBERS. TO BE USED AS BOTH THE REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT (PROM-DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE), AND TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE, DETONATION, OR FLATNESS. [113] Surge and CODE 51. RETROFIT PROM - SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUS SERVICE PROM PART NUMBERS. TO BE USED AS BOTH THE REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT (PROM-DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE), AND TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE, DETONATION, OR FLATNESS. [114] Surge, flatness or tip-in hesitation. RETROFIT PROM - DOES NOT SUPERSEDE THE REGULAR REPLACEMENT SERVICE PROMS. TO BE USED ONLY AS REQUIRED TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE, DETONATION, OR FLATNESS. [115] FOR USE WITH P215/65 TIRES - USE 01228290 (SCAN I.D. = 8290). FOR USE WITH P235/60, P245/50 TIRES - USE 01228291 (SCAN I.D. = 8291). [116] FOR USE WITH P215/65 TIRES - USE 01228290 (SCAN I.D. = 8290). FOR USE WITH P235/60, P245/50 TIRES - USE 01228291 (SCAN I.D. = 8291). [117] Spark knock only. USE 16143570 (SCAN I.D. = 3531) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143459 (SCAN I.D. = 3571) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [118] Spark knock only. USE 16143455 (SCAN I.D. = 3511) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143453 (SCAN I.D. = 3501) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [119] Spark knock. USE 16143575 (SCAN I.D. = 3541) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764). USE 16143460 (SCAN I.D. = 3581) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [120] Detonation. USE 16143580 (SCAN I.D. = 3551) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764). USE 16143462 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1939 (SCAN I.D. = 3591) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [121] Stall, sags, hesitation. USE 16143575 (SCAN I.D. = 3541) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764). USE 16143460 (SCAN I.D. = 3581) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [122] USE 16143575 (SCAN I.D. = 3541) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764). USE 16143460 (SCAN I.D. = 3581) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [123] USE 16143570 (SCAN I.D. = 3531) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143459 (SCAN I.D. = 3571) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [124] USE 16143455 (SCAN I.D. = 3511) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143453 (SCAN I.D. = 3501) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [125] USE 16143457 (SCAN I.D. = 3521) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115925, FUEL SENDER P/N 25092778). USE 16143466 (SCAN I.D. = 3481) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [126] USE 16143452 (SCAN I.D. = 3491) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115925, FUEL SENDER P/N 25092778). USE 16143463 (SCAN I.D. = 3451) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [127] USE 16143457 (SCAN I.D. = 3521) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115925, FUEL SENDER P/N 25092778). USE 16143466 (SCAN I.D. = 3481) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [128] USE 16143452 (SCAN I.D. = 3491) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115925, FUEL SENDER P/N 25092778). USE 16143463 (SCAN I.D. = 3451) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [129] Engine stall and/or hesitation after cold start. NEEDS AIR INJECTION SERVICE KIT (P/N 10115773) AND NEW VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL LABEL. [130] Engine stall and/or hesitation after cold start. NEEDS AIR INJECTION SERVICE KIT (P/N 10115773) AND NEW VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL LABEL. [131] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. WITH THIS PROM INSTALLED, USE 1987-88 2.8L SPEED DENSITY ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSIONS MANUAL. [132] Cold stall and chuggle. DO NOT RELY ON THE SCANNER ID TO DETERMINE WHICH PROM IS IN A VEHICLE. LOOK AT THE BCC ON THE PROM TO BE SURE. DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SOME 1991 MODELS WITH A 2.84 AXLE RATIO AND A FEDERAL EMISSIONS PKG. WITH USED SCANNER ID 5644 BUT HAD A BCC OF AWJD. [133] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. WITH THIS PROM INSTALLED, USE 1987-88 2.8L SPEED DENSITY ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSIONS MANUAL. [134] Tip-in hesitation on acceleration; engine stall or sag on cold start; engine stall on deceleration; check engine light with CODES 23,25,33, or 34; or engine speed flare on clutch operation, with manual transmission equipped vehicle. WITH THIS PROM INSTALLED, USE 1987-88 2.8L SPEED DENSITY ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSIONS MANUAL. [135] Tip-in hesitation on acceleration; engine stall or sag on cold start; engine stall on deceleration; check engine light with CODES 23,25,33, or 34; or engine speed flare on declutch operation with manual transmission equipped vehicle. WITH THIS PROM INSTALLED, USE 1987-88 2.8L SPEED DENSITY ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSIONS MANUAL. [136] Driveability conditions, and/or CODES 23,25,33,34. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [137] Driveability conditions, and/or CODES 23,25,33,34. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [138] Driveability conditions, and/or CODES 23,25,33,34. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [139] Driveability conditions, and/or CODES 23,25,33,34. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1940 [140] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [141] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [142] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [143] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [144] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [145] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [146] PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [147] PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [148] PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [149] Tip-in hesitation on acceleration; engine stall or sag on cold start; engine stall on deceleration; check engine light with CODES 23,25,33, or 34; or engine speed flare on declutch operation with manual transmission equipped vehicle. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [150] Tip-in hesitation on acceleration; engine stall or sag on cold start; engine stall on deceleration; check engine light with CODES 23,25,33, or 34; or engine speed flare on declutch operation with manual transmission equipped vehicle. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1941 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Footnotes 151 Thru 200 [151] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [152] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [153] Driveability improvement and eliminate FALSE "Service Engine Soon" lights. FOR 2WD USE 16120099 (SCAN I.D. = 9941). FOR 4WD USE 16120109 (SCAN I.D. = 9901). [154] Driveability improvement and eliminate FALSE "Service Engine Soon" lights. FOR 2.73 (GU2) AXLE USE 16120077 (SCAN I.D. = 9891). FOR 3.08 (GU4) AXLE USE 16120082 (SCAN I.D. = 9901). FOR 3.42 (GU6) AND 3.73 (GT4) AXLES USE 16120086 (SCAN I.D. = 9911). [155] Driveability improvement and eliminate FALSE "Service Engine Soon" lights. FOR 2WD USE 16120042 (SCAN I.D. = 9991). FOR 4WD USE 16120129 (SCAN I.D. = 0011). [156] Prom calibration. FOR FALSE CODE 44 ON LONG COAST DOWN, USE RETROFIT SERVICE PROM 01228486 AAND 1050. FOR REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT, USE PROM 16062797 AAND 2798. [157] FOR FALSE CODE 44 ON LONG COAST DOWN, USE RETROFIT SERVICE PROM 01228487 AANF 1052. FOR REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT, USE PROM 16062801 AANF 2802. [158] Spark knock only. USE 16143570 (SCAN I.D. = 3531) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143459 (SCAN I.D. = 3571) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [159] Spark knock only. USE 16143455 (SCAN I.D. = 3511) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143453 (SCAN I.D. = 3501) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [160] Detonation. USE 16143580 (SCAN I.D. = 3551) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764). USE 16143462 (SCAN I.D. = 3591) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [161] USE 16143545 (SCAN I.D. = 3461) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093744). USE 16143465 (SCAN I.D. = 3471) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [162] USE 16143570 (SCAN I.D. = 3531) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143459 (SCAN I.D. = 3571) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [163] USE 16143545 (SCAN I.D. = 3461) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093744). USE 16143465 (SCAN I.D. = 3471) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [164] USE 16143570 (SCAN I.D. = 3531) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143459 (SCAN I.D. = 3571) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [165] USE 16143455 (SCAN I.D. = 3511) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143453 (SCAN I.D. = 3501) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [166] Hard start when hot and detonation. USE 16143457 (SCAN I.D. = 3521) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115925, FUEL SENDER P/N 25092778). USE 16143466 (SCAN I.D. = 3481) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [167] Hard start when hot and detonation. USE 16143452 (SCAN I.D. = 3491) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115925, FUEL SENDER P/N 25092778). USE 16143463 (SCAN I.D. = 3451) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [168] Engine stall and/or hesitation after cold start. NEEDS AIR INJECTION SERVICE KIT (P/N 10115773) AND NEW VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL LABEL. [169] Cold stall and chuggle. DO NOT RELY ON THE SCANNER ID TO DETERMINE WHICH PROM IS IN A VEHICLE. LOOK AT THE BCC ON THE PROM TO BE SURE. DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SOME 1991 MODELS WITH A 2.84 AXLE RATIO AND A FEDERAL EMISSIONS PKG. WHICH USED SCANNER ID 5644 BUT HAD A BCC OF AWJD. [170] Engine stall and/or hesitation after cold start. NEEDS AIR INJECTION SERVICE KIT (P/N 10115773) AND NEW VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL LABEL. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1942 [171] Engine stall and/or hesitation after cold start. MUST BE ORDERED WITH SERVICE KIT P/N 10115773. [172] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. WITH THIS PROM INSTALLED, USE 1987-88 2.8L SPEED DENSITY ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSIONS MANUAL. [173] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. WITH THIS PROM INSTALLED, USE 1987-88 2.8L SPEED DENSITY ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSIONS MANUAL. [174] Driveability conditions, and/or CODES 23,25,33,34. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [175] Driveability conditions, and/or CODES 23,25,33,34. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [176] Driveability conditions, and/or CODES 23,25,33,34. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [177] Driveability conditions, and/or CODES 23,25,33,34. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [178] Driveability conditions, and/or CODES 23,25,33,34. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [179] Driveability conditions, and/or CODES 23,25,33,34. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [180] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [181] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [182] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [183] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [184] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [185] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [186] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [187] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [188] Driveability conditions, and/or CODES 23,25,33,34. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1943 DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [189] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [190] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [191] Information on PROM calibrations. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [192] Information on PROM calibrations. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [193] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [194] Driveability conditions and/or stored engine codes. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [195] FOR USE WITH MODEL C1 TRUCKS - USE 16121162 (SCAN I.D. = 3511). FOR USE WITH MODEL C2, K, K2, AND K1000 TRUCKS USE 16121166 (SCAN I.D. = 3521). [196] Engine surge. ALSO REQUIRES INSTALLATION OF NEW EGR VALVE PACKAGE P/N 17112238 (CONTAINS EGR VALVE P/N 17090078 AND A GASKET). [197] Engine stall and/or hesitation after cold start. NEEDS AIR INJECTION SERVICE KIT (P/N 10115773) AND NEW VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL LABEL. [198] Engine stall and/or hesitation after cold start. NEEDS AIR INJECTION SERVICE KIT (P/N 10115773) AND NEW VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL LABEL. [199] Cold stall and chuggle. DO NOT RELY ON THE SCANNER ID TO DETERMINE WHICH PROM IS IN A VEHICLE. LOOK AT THE BCC ON THE PROM TO BE SURE. DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SOME 1991 MODELS WITH A 2.84 AXLE RATIO AND A FEDERAL EMISSIONS PKG. WHICH USED SCANNER ID 5644 BUT HAD A BCC OF AWJD. [200] Cold stall and chuggle. DO NOT RELY ON THE SCANNER ID TO DETERMINE WHICH PROM IS IN A VEHICLE. LOOK AT THE BCC ON THE PROM TO BE SURE. DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SOME 1991 MODELS WITH A 2.84 AXLE RATIO AND A FEDERAL EMISSIONS PKG. WHICH USED SCANNER ID 5644 BUT HAD A BCC OF AWJD. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1944 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Footnotes 201 Thru 250 [201] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16181863 (SCAN I.D. = 0844) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181859 (SCAN I.D. = 0834) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [202] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16181863 (SCAN I.D. = 0844) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181859 (SCAN I.D. = 0834) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [203] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16181863 (SCAN I.D. = 0844) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181859 (SCAN I.D. = 0834) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [204] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16181871 (SCAN I.D. = 0864) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181867 (SCAN I.D. = 0854) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [205] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16181871 (SCAN I.D. = 0864) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181867 (SCAN I.D. = 0854) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [206] Cold stall and chuggle. DO NOT RELY ON THE SCANNER ID TO DETERMINE WHICH PROM IS IN A VEHICLE. LOOK AT THE BCC ON THE PROM TO BE SURE. DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SOME 1991 MODELS WITH A 2.84 AXLE RATIO AND A FEDERAL EMISSIONS PKG. WHICH USED SCANNER ID 5644 BUT HAD A BCC OF AWJD. [207] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165848 (SCAN I.D. = 5614) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165843 (SCAN I.D. = 5624) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [208] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [209] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [210] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165848 (SCAN I.D. = 5614) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165843 (SCAN I.D. = 5624) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [211] Engine stall, long cranks/idle/decel/surge. CANNOT BE USED ON VEHICLES THAT DO NOT HAVE DIGITAL EGR VALVES. [212] Cold stall and chuggle. DO NOT RELY ON THE SCANNER ID TO DETERMINE WHICH PROM IS IN A VEHICLE. LOOK AT THE BCC ON THE PROM TO BE SURE. DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SOME 1991 MODELS WITH A 2.84 AXLE RATIO AND A FEDERAL EMISSIONS PKG. WHICH USED SCANNER ID 5644 BUT HAD A BCC OF AWJD. [213] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165848 (SCAN I.D. = 5614) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165843 (SCAN I.D. = 5624) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [214] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [215] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [216] Cold start extended crank. Engine starts with ignition key cycled. USE 16181883 (SCAN I.D. = 0894) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181875 (SCAN I.D. = 0874) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [217] Cold start extended crank, engine starts with ignition key cycled. USE 16181883 (SCAN I.D. = 0894) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181875 (SCAN I.D. = 0874) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [218] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16181887 (SCAN I.D. = 0904) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181879 (SCAN I.D. = 0884) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [219] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16181887 (SCAN I.D. = 0904) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181879 (SCAN I.D. = 0884) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [220] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165848 (SCAN I.D. = 5614) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165843 (SCAN I.D. = 5624) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [221] Surge or chuggle on decel and/or rough idle. PROM CAN ONLY BE USED WITH ECM P/N 16144288. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1945 [222] Surge or chuggle on decel and/or rough idle. PROM CAN ONLY BE USED WITH ECM P/N 16144288. [223] Engine stall. MANUAL TRANSMISSION CARS SHOULD ALSO BE UPDATED WITH THE CLUTCH ANTICIPATE SWITCH PER DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 91-472-7C. [224] USE 16165848 (SCAN I.D. = 5614) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165843 (SCAN I.D. = 5624) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [225] USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [226] USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [227] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165848 (SCAN I.D. = 5614) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165843 (SCAN I.D. = 5624) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [228] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [229] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [230] Surge or chuggle on decel and/or rough idle. PROM CAN ONLY BE USED WITH ECM P/N 16144288. [231] MAKE CERTAIN THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN UPDATED WITH PREVIOUSLY ATTEMPTED SERVICE FIXES AS FOLLOWS: EGR VALVE P/N 17090156 (STAMPED ON VALVE) 17112373 (GMSPO KIT), PCV VALVE P/N 25098542, ESC MODULE P/N 16175099 (BCC=BARC). [232] Driveability improvements. MAKE CERTAIN THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN UPDATED WITH PREVIOUSLY ATTEMPTED SERVICE FIXES AS FOLLOWS: EGR VALVE P/N 17090156 (STAMPED ON VALVE) 17112373 (GMSPO KIT), PCV VALVE P/N 25098542, ESC MODULE P/N 16175099 (BCC=BARC). [233] Driveability improvements. MAKE CERTAIN THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN UPDATED WITH PREVIOUSLY ATTEMPTED SERVICE FIXES AS FOLLOWS: EGR VALVE P/N 17090156 (STAMPED ON VALVE) 17112373 (GMSPO KIT), PCV VALVE P/N 25098542, ESC MODULE P/N 16175099 (BCC=BARC). [234] Driveablity improvements. MAKE CERTAIN THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN UPDATED WITH PREVIOUSLY ATTEMPTED SERVICE FIXES AS FOLLOWS: EGR VALVE P/N 17090156 (STAMPED ON VALVE) 17112373 (GMSPO KIT), PCV VALVE P/N 25098542, ESC MODULE P/N 16175099 (BCC=BARC). [235] Driveability improvements. MAKE CERTAIN THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN UPDATED WITH PREVIOUSLY ATTEMPTED SERVICE FIXES AS FOLLOWS: EGR VALVE P/N 17090156 (STAMPED ON VALVE) 17112373 (GMSPO KIT), PCV VALVE P/N 25098542, ESC MODULE P/N 16175099 (BCC=BARC). [236] Center Port Fuel Injection noise. FOR VEHICLES WITH SLEEVE BEARING ENGINES. [237] Neutral gear rattle only. COMBINATION DETONATION AND NEUTRAL GEAR RATTLE PROM AVAILABLE. [238] Driveability improvements. MAKE CERTAIN THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN UPDATED WITH PREVIOUSLY ATTEMPTED SERVICE FIXES AS FOLLOWS: EGR VALVE P/N 17090156 (STAMPED ON VALVE) 17112373 (GMSPO KIT), PCV VALVE P/N 25098542, ESC MODULE P/N 16175099 (BCC=BARC). [239] TCC chuggle. MODEL 2DDM TRANSMISSIONS - CHECK DEALER RECORDS TO SEE IF THE TORQUE CONVERTER HAS ALREADY BEEN REPLACED WITH P/N 8650935 (TAGGED BCC: DGAF). TRANS. WITH TORQUE CONVERTERS WITH P/N 8656959 (TAGGED BCC: DG5F) NEED TO REPLACE IT WITH P/N 8650935. [240] Unstable idle in park or neutral/poor driveability. FOR DEDICATED NATURAL GAS VEHICLES. ORDER WITH KIT P/N 12545589 UNLESS THE ONLY PROBLEM IS IDLE FLUCTUATION. [241] Driveability improvements. MAKE CERTAIN THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN UPDATED WITH PREVIOUSLY ATTEMPTED SERVICE FIXES AS FOLLOWS: EGR VALVE P/N 17090156 (STAMPED ON VALVE) 17112373 (GMSPO KIT), PCV VALVE P/N 25098542, ESC MODULE P/N 16175099 (BCC=BARC). [242] Information on PROM calibrations. CANNOT BE USED ON VEHICLES THAT DO NOT HAVE DIGITAL EGR VALVES. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1946 [243] TCC chuggle. MODEL 2DDM TRANSMISSIONS - CHECK DEALER RECORDS TO SEE IF THE TORQUE CONVERTER HAS ALREADY BEEN REPLACED WITH P/N 8650935 (TAGGED BCC: DGAF). TRANS. WITH TORQUE CONVERTERS WITH P/N 8656959 (TAGGED BCC: DG5F) NEED TO REPLACE IT WITH P/N 8650935. [244] TCC chuggle. MODEL 2DDM TRANSMISSIONS - CHECK DEALER RECORDS TO SEE IF THE TORQUE CONVERTER HAS ALREADY BEEN REPLACED WITH P/N 8650935 (TAGGED BCC: DGAF). TRANS. WITH TORQUE CONVERTERS WITH P/N 8656959 (TAGGED BCC: DG5F) NEED TO REPLACE IT WITH P/N 8650935. [245] Tip-in hesitation on acceleration; engine stall or sag on cold start; engine stall on deceleration; check engine light with CODES 23,25,33, or 34; or engine speed flare on declutch operation with manual transmission equipped vehicle. [246] Tip-in hesitation on acceleration; engine stall or sag on cold start; engine stall on deceleration; check engine light with CODES 23,25,33, or 34; or engine speed flare on declutch operation with manual transmission equipped vehicle. [247] Check engine light comes on while idling on vehicles equipped with Computer Controlled Emission System (C.C.E.S.), driven in altitudes above 3000 feet. [248] Engine may stop running during parking maneuver or during coast down at low speeds during ambient temperature above 85°F. [249] Tip-in hesitation on acceleration; engine stall or sag on cold start; engine stall on deceleration; check engine light with CODES 23,25,33, or 34; or engine speed flare on declutch operation with manual transmission equipped vehicle. [250] Surge on acceleration and/or at road load speeds, false "Service Engine Soon" light (CODE 32), poor driveability during warm up, Detonation under load. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1947 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Footnotes 251 Thru 300 [251] Hesitation or sag during the first two minutes of cold operation while vehicle is under moderate to heavy throttle drive away, or TCC chuggle. [252] Cold start-stall, hesitation, or sag when the engine coolant is between 36°F to 111°F (2°C to 44°C); or Inadequate AC performance when driving at a steady speed and throttle position, between 24 to 64 MPH, when the cruise control is not being used. [253] Lack of throttle response on trucks equipped with governors; or hot restart driveaway sag, both governor and non-governor trucks. [254] Intermittent stall after cold start; engine stalling on coast down; hesitation cold; or ECM CODES E22,E26,E32,E55,E70, and/or E85 [255] PROM I.D. 7080 KJ is also acceptable for PROM I.D. 5853 KJ only. Requires Throttle body service P/N 17067144, EGR valve] service P/N 17067108 (FED), 17067144 (CAL), Injector service kit P/N 17067976. [256] Requires Throttle body service P/N 17067142, EGR valve service P/N 17067107 (FED), 17068210 (CAL), Injector service kit P/N 17067976. [257] FOR CHUGGLE AT 40-45 CONDITION, USE PROM ONLY. FOR TIP-IN HESITATION ONLY, USE EGR VALVE ONLY - P/N 17078431. FOR COLD DRIVEABILITY HESITATION, USE BOTH PROM AND EGR. [258] REQUIRES SUPPLEMENTARY TUNE-UP LABEL, SPARK BYPASS RELAY KIT P/N 015 14086983, SPARK PLUGS P/N 5614009, SUN VISOR STARTING LABEL P/N 015 14085150. ALSO, REMOVE AND DISCARD FUSE LABELED "CRANK" FROM FUSE BLK #2 POSITION (3 AMP. FUSE). [259] DO NOT RELY ON THE SCANNER ID TO DETERMINE WHICH PROM IS IN A VEHICLE. LOOK AT THE BCC ON THE PROM TO BE SURE. DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SOME 1991 MODELS WITH A 2.84 AXLE RATIO AND A FEDERAL EMISSIONS PACKAGE WITH USED SCANNER ID 5644 BUT HAD A [260] DO NOT RELY ON THE SCANNER ID TO DETERMINE WHICH PROM IS IN A VEHICLE. LOOK AT THE BCC ON THE PROM TO BE SURE. DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SOME 1991 MODELS WITH A 2.84 AXLE RATIO AND A FEDERAL EMISSIONS PACKAGE WITH USED SCANNER ID 5644 BUT HAD A [261] DO NOT RELY ON THE SCANNER ID TO DETERMINE WHICH PROM IS IN A VEHICLE. LOOK AT THE BCC ON THE PROM TO BE SURE. DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SOME 1991 MODELS WITH A 2.84 AXLE RATIO AND A FEDERAL EMISSIONS PACKAGE WITH USED SCANNER ID 5644 BUT HAD A [262] MAKE CERTAIN THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN UPDATED WITH PREVIOUSLY AT TEMPTED SERVICE FIXES AS FOLLOWS: EGR VALVE P/N 17090156 (STAMPED ON VALVE) 17112373 (GMSPO KIT), PCV VALVE P/N 25098542, ESC MODULE P/N 16175099 (BCC=BARC). [263] MAKE CERTAIN THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN UPDATED WITH PREVIOUSLY ATTEMPTED SERVICE FIXES AS FOLLOWS: EGR VALVE P/N 17090156 (STAMPED ON VALVE) 17112373 (GMSPO KIT), PCV VALVE P/N 25098542, ESC MODULE P/N 16175099 (BCC=BARC). [264] MODEL 2DDM TRANS. CARS - CHECK DLR. RECORDS TO SEE IF THE TORQUE CONVERTER HAS ALREADY BEEN REPLACED WITH PN 8650935 (BCC: DGAF). TRANSMISSIONS WITH TORQUE CONVERTERS WITH PN 8656959 (BCC: DG5F) NEED TO HAVE THE TORQUE CONVERTER REPLACED W [265] MODEL 2DDM TRANS. CARS - CHECK DLR. RECORDS TO SEE IF THE TORQUE CONVERTER HAS ALREADY BEEN REPLACED WITH PN 8650935 (BCC: DGAF). TRANSMISSIONS WITH TORQUE CONVERTERS WITH PN 8656959 (BCC: DG5F) NEED TO HAVE THE TORQUE CONVERTER REPLACED W [266] Vehicles equipped with Computer Controlled Emission System (C.C.E.S) experience a Check Engine Light coming on while idling, usually when idling time exceeds 2 minutes with transmission in gear in altitudes above 3000 feet. [267] Cold driveability, use with PROM 5854 KJ (G057). PROM I.D. 7080 KJ IS ALSO ACCEPTABLE FOR PROM I.D. 5853 KJ ONLY. REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067144, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067108 (FED), 17067144 (CAL), INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [268] Cold driveability, use with PROM 5853 KJ (G057). PROM I.D. 7079 KJ IS ALSO ACCEPTABLE FOR PROM I.D. 5854 KJ ONLY. REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067144, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067108 (FED), 17067144 (CAL), INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [269] Cold driveability, use with PROM 5861 KK (G057). REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067142, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067107 (FED), 17068210 (CAL), INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1948 [270] Cold driveability, use with PROM 5860 KK (G057). REQUIRES THROTTLE BODY SERVICE P/N 17067142, EGR VALVE SERVICE P/N 17067107 (FED), 17068210 (CAL), INJECTOR SERVICE KIT P/N 17067976. [271] Tip-in hesitation, lack low speed performance. Used with Manual transaxle vehicles with A/C only. Requires EGR TVS P/N 373510, and A.I.R. valve P/N 17082701. [272] Weak drive-away after cold start, requires EGR TVS P/N 373510. Also, for CALIFORNIA emissions, manual transaxle, replace A.I.R. management valve with PN 17082701. [273] Level road surge, tip-in hesitation, lack of low speed performance - for automatic transaxles only. (Requires EGR valve P/N 17068212). FOR FEDERAL - USE 01226055. FOR CALIFORNIA - USE 01226057. [274] Stall in coast down with clutch disengaged and A/C on, weak drive away after cold start , requires EGR TVS P/N 373510. Also, for CALIFORNIA emissions, manual transaxle, replace A.I.R. management valve with PN 17082701. [275] Idle shake, detonation (G043). FOR 2.5L EFI, AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE, AND FIRST DESIGN (3-BOARD) ECM. THE SECOND DESIGN (2-BOARD) ECM HAS THE SPARK REVISION ALREADY INCORPORATED IN ITS PROM. [276] Chuggle/surge at 40-45 MPH, tip-in hesitation/sag, spark knock, requires EGR valve (G032). FOR CHUGGLE AT 40-45 CONDITION, USE PROM ONLY. FOR TIP-IN HESITATION ONLY, USE EGR VALVE ONLY - P/N 17078431. FOR COLD DRIVEABILITY HESITATION, USE BOTH PROM AND EGR. [277] Chuggle and surge at 35-55 MPH, requires EGR kit. REQUIRES KIT P/N 25522748 CONTAINING: WIRING HARNESS JUMPER P/N 12043500, RELAY P/N 25522747, FOAM P/N 25522723, EGR P/N 17079799. [278] CODE 42, spark knock, cold startability, plug fouling (G040). REQUIRES SUPPLEMENTARY TUNE-UP LABEL, SPARK BYPASS RELAY KIT P/N 14086983, SPARK PLUGS P/N 5614009, SUN VISOR STARTING LABEL P/N 14085150. ALSO, REMOVE AND DISCARD FUSE LABELED "CRANK" FROM FUSE BLK #2 POSITION (3 AMP. FUSE). [279] Chuggle and surge at 35-55 MPH, requires EGR kit (G040). REQUIRES KIT P/N 25522748 CONTAINING: WIRING HARNESS JUMPER P/N 12043500, RELAY P/N 25522747, FOAM P/N 25522723, EGR P/N 17079799. [280] Cold hesitation/sag, warm surge (G082). RETROFIT PROM SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUS SERVICE PROM PART NUMBERS. TO BE USED AS BOTH THE REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT (PROM-DAMAGED OF DEFECTIVE), AND TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE, DETONATION, OR FLATNESS. [281] TCC chuggle or surge (G043). WHEN INSTALLING PROM IN A CANADIAN 1985 NB, A CODE 13 WILL OCCUR AS THE VEHICLE WAS NOT EQUIPPED WITH AN O2 SENSOR. TO ELIMINATE THE CODE 13, NEED TO INSTALL O2 SENSOR # 8990741 AND CONNECT TO THE EXISTING PURPLE WIRE AND CONNECTOR IN THE [282] Surge or chuggle at 52-60 MPH (G071). RETROFIT PROM - DOES NOT SUPERSEDE THE REGULAR REPLACEMENT SERVICE PROM. TO BE USED ONLY AS REQUIRED TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE. [283] Surge or chuggle at 52-60 MPH (G071). RETROFIT PROM - SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUS SERVICE PROM PART NUMBERS. TO BE USED AS BOTH THE REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT (PROM-DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE), AND TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE. [284] Chuggle, hesitation, tip-in spark knock. RETROFIT PROM - SUPERSEDES ALL PREVIOUS SERVICE PROM PART NUMBERS. TO BE USED AS BOTH THE REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT (PROM-DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE), AND TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE, DETONATION, OR FLATNESS. [285] Chuggle, hesitation, tip-in spark knock. RETROFIT PROM - DOES NOT SUPERSEDE THE REGULAR REPLACEMENT SERVICE PROMS. TO BE USED ONLY AS REQUIRED TO RESOLVE CASES OF CHUGGLE, DETONATION, OR FLATNESS. [286] FOR USE WITH P215/65 TIRES - USE 01228290 (SCAN I.D. = 8290). FOR USE WITH P235/60, P245/50 TIRES - USE 01228291 (SCAN I.D. = 8291). [287] FOR USE WITH P215/65 TIRES - USE 01228292 (SCAN I.D. = 8292). FOR USE WITH P235/60, P245/50 TIRES - USE 01228293 (SCAN I.D. = 8293). [288] FALSE CODES 33, 34, 43, rough idle, chuggle, hesitation (G006,G007). USED WITH VIN #119016 OR LATER ALUMINUM HEAD CORVETTES AND ALL CONVERTIBLE MODELS WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION, 2.59 (GM1) AXLE ONLY. [289] FALSE CODES 33, 34, 43, rough idle, chuggle, hesitation (G006,G007). USED FOR VIN #119016 OR LATER ALUMINUM HAED CORVETTES AND ALL CONVERTIBLE MODELS WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION, 2.73 (GU2)/3.07 (G44) AXLE ONLY. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1949 [290] Spark knock. USE 16143570 (SCAN I.D. = 3531) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143459 (SCAN I.D. = 3571) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [291] Spark knock. USE 16143455 (SCAN I.D. = 3511) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143453 (SCAN I.D. = 3501) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [292] Spark knock (G055). USE 16143575 (SCAN I.D. = 3541) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764). USE 16143460 (SCAN I.D. = 3581) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [293] Spark knock (G043). USE 16143580 (SCAN I.D. = 3551) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764). USE 16143462 (SCAN I.D. = 3591) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [294] Stalling, tip-in hesitation/sag, rough idle, cold driveability. USE 16143575 (SCAN I.D. = 3541) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764). USE 16143460 (SCAN I.D. = 3581) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [295] Hard hot restart (requires rubber bumper pkg PN 25004553, and a pulsator package PN 25094266), or CODE 42, intermittent high idle, spark knock (G055). [296] USE 16143575 (SCAN I.D. = 3541) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764). USE 16143460 (SCAN I.D. = 3581) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [297] USE 16143570 (SCAN I.D. = 3531) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143459 (SCAN I.D. = 3571) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [298] USE 16143455 (SCAN I.D. = 3511) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143453 (SCAN I.D. = 3501) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [299] USE 16143455 (SCAN I.D. = 3511) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143453 (SCAN I.D. = 3501) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [300] Spark knock. USE 16143457 (SCAN I.D. = 3521) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115925, FUEL SENDER P/N 25092778). USE 16143466 (SCAN I.D. = 3481) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1950 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Footnotes 301 Thru 350 [301] Spark knock. USE 16143452 (SCAN I.D. = 3491) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115925, FUEL SENDER P/N 25092778). USE 16143463 (SCAN I.D. = 3451) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [302] Hard start hot (requires installation of a rubber bumper pkg PN 25004553, and a pulsator pkg PN 25094266) or CODE 42, high idle, spark knock (G055). [303] USE 16143457 (SCAN I.D. = 3521) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115925, FUEL SENDER P/N 25092778). USE 16143466 (SCAN I.D. = 3481) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [304] Hard hot restart (requires rubber bumper pkg PN 25004553, and a pulsator package PN 25094266), or CODE 42, intermittent high idle, spark knock (G055). [305] USE 16143452 (SCAN I.D. = 3491) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115925, FUEL SENDER P/N 25092778). USE 16143463 (SCAN I.D. = 3451) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [306] Tip-in hesitation,stall,CODES 23,25,33,or 34, or speed flare on declutch op. w/man. trans. (CODE 23 or 25 require MAT sensor model year diagnostics) (G027). WITH THIS PROM INSTALLED, USE 1987-88 2.8L SPEED DENSITY ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSIONS MANUAL. [307] CODES 23, 25, 33, 34, driveability and stalling (G027). PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [308] Tip-in hesitation,stall,CODES 23,25,33,or 34, or speed flare on declutch op. w/man. trans. (CODE 23 or 25 require MAT sensor model year diagnostics). PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [309] Code 23, 25, 33, 34, driveability and stalling. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [310] Tip-in hesitation,stall,CODES 23,25,33,or 34, or speed flare on declutch op. w/man. trans. (CODE 23 or 25 require MAT sensor model year diagnostics) (G027). PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [311] High emissions, exhaust odor, starting and driveability problems (G046). Requires Connector Bleed Assembly P/N 10105820 [312] FALSE CODES 43, 54, unstable idle. FOR 2.73 (GU2) AXLE USE 16120077 (SCAN I.D. = 9891). FOR 3.08 (GU4) AXLE USE 16120082 (SCAN I.D. = 9901). FOR 3.42 (GU6) AND 3.73 (GT4) AXLES USE 16120086 (SCAN I.D. = 9911). [313] Running change. FOR FALSE CODE 44 ON LONG COAST DOWN, USE RETROFIT SERVICE PROM 01228486 SCAN I.D. 8486, AAND 1050. FOR REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT, USE PROM 16062797 SCAN I.D. 2223, AAND 2798. [314] Running change. FOR FALSE CODE 44 ON LONG COAST DOWN, USE RETROFIT SERVICE PROM 01228487 SCAN I.D. 8487, AANF 1052. FOR REGULAR SERVICE REPLACEMENT, USE PROM 16062801 SCAN I.D. 2233, AANF 2802. [315] Surge on acceleration and/or at road load speeds, false "Service Engine Soon" light (CODE 32), poor driveability during warm up, Detonation under load (G052). [316] Spark knock. USE 16143570 (SCAN I.D. = 3531) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143459 (SCAN I.D. = 3571) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [317] Spark knock. USE 16143455 (SCAN I.D. = 3511) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143453 (SCAN I.D. = 3501) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [318] Spark knock (G043). USE 16143580 (SCAN I.D. = 3551) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764). USE 16143462 (SCAN I.D. = 3591) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [319] Spark knock (G055). USE 16143545 (SCAN I.D. = 3461) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093744). USE 16143465 (SCAN I.D. = 3471) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [320] CODE 42, spark knock, intermittent high idle. IF MAJOR CONDITION IS HARD HOT ENGINE RESTART, PROM ALSO REQUIRES INSTALLATION OF A RUBBER BUMPER PKG PN 25004553, AND PULSATOR PKG PN 25094266. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1951 [321] USE 16143545 (SCAN I.D. = 3461) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093744). USE 16143465 (SCAN I.D. = 3471) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [322] USE 16143570 (SCAN I.D. = 3531) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143459 (SCAN I.D. = 3571) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [323] USE 16143455 (SCAN I.D. = 3511) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115764, FUEL SENDER P/N 25093526). USE 16143453 (SCAN I.D. = 3501) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [324] Spark knock. USE 16143457 (SCAN I.D. = 3521) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115925, FUEL SENDER P/N 25092778). USE 16143466 (SCAN I.D. = 3481) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [325] Spark knock. USE 16143452 (SCAN I.D. = 3491) FOR HOT HARD RESTART (REQUIRES FUEL PUMP P/N 25115925, FUEL SENDER P/N 25092778). USE 16143463 (SCAN I.D. = 3451) FOR CODE 42, SPARK KNOCK, HIGH IDLE. [326] Tip-in hesitation, stall, CODES 23, 25, 33, or 34, or speed flare on declutch op. w/man. trans. (CODE 23 or 25 require MAT sensor model year diagnostics) (G027). WITH THIS PROM INSTALLED, USE 1987-88 2.8L SPEED DENSITY ENGINE DRIVEABILITY AND EMISSIONS MANUAL. [327] CODES 23, 25, 33, 34. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [328] Tip-in hesitation,stall,CODES 23,25,33,or 34, or speed flare on declutch op. w/ man. trans. (CODE 23 or 25 require MAT sensor model year diagnostics). PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [329] Tip-in hesitation,stall,CODES 23,25,33,or 34, or speed flare on declutch op. w/ man. trans. (CODE 23 or 25 require MAT sensor model year diagnostics) (G027). PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [330] CODES 23, 25, 33, 34, driveability and stalling (G027). PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [331] Code 23, 25, 33, 34, driveability and stalling. PROM UPDATE ELIMINATES MAF SENSOR, REPLACING IT WITH A SPEED DENSITY SYSTEM. WITH A 1990 OR EARLIER PRIMARY CARTRIDGE, I.D. VEHICLE ON SCANNER AS A 1989 MODEL (VIN = K-1-W). [332] FOR USE WITH MODEL C1 TRUCKS - USE 16121162 (SCAN I.D. = 3511). FOR USE WITH MODEL C2, K, K2, AND K1000 TRUCKS USE 16121166 (SCAN I.D. = 3521). [333] Surge on acceleration and/or at road load speeds, false "Service Engine Soon" light (CODE 32), poor driveability during warm up, Detonation under load (G052). [334] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16181863 (SCAN I.D. = 0844) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181859 (SCAN I.D. = 0834) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [335] [Cold engine extended crank. USE 16181871 (SCAN I.D. = 0864) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181867 (SCAN I.D. = 0854) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [336] Engine does not stay running on initial cold start and chuggle at 35-45 MPH with TCC engaged. New MEM-CAL may affect fuel economy. DO NOT RELY ON THE SCANNER ID TO DETERMINE WHICH PROM IS IN A VEHICLE. LOOK AT THE BCC ON THE PROM TO BE SURE. DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SOME 1991 MODELS WITH A 2.84 AXLE RATIO AND A FEDERAL EMISSIONS PACKAGE WITH SCANNER ID 5644 BUT A BCC OF A] [337] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165848 (SCAN I.D. = 5614) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165843 (SCAN I.D. = 5624) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [338] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [339] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [340] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165848 (SCAN I.D. = 5614) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165843 (SCAN I.D. = 5624) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1952 [341] Hesitation or sag during the first two minutes of cold operation while vehicle is under moderate to heavy throttle driveaway, or TCC chuggle. [342] Cold start-stall, hesitation, or sag when the engine coolant is between 36°F - 111°F (2°C 44°C); or Inadequate A/C performance when driving at steady speed and throttle position, between 24 - 64 MPH, when the cruise control is not being used. [343] Engine does not stay running on initial cold start and chuggle at 35-45 MPH with TCC engaged. New MEM-CAL may affect fuel economy. DO NOT RELY ON THE SCANNER ID TO DETERMINE WHICH PROM IS IN A VEHICLE. LOOK AT THE BCC ON THE PROM TO BE SURE. DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SOME 1991 MODELS WITH A 2.84 AXLE RATIO AND A FEDERAL EMISSIONS PACKAGE WITH SCANNER ID 5644 BUT A BCC OF A [344] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165848 (SCAN I.D. = 5614) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165843 (SCAN I.D. = 5624) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [345] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [346] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16181883 (SCAN I.D. = 0894) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181875 (SCAN I.D. = 0874) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [347] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16181887 (SCAN I.D. = 0904) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16181879 (SCAN I.D. = 0884) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [348] Service Engine Soon light (SES) with a code 43 or tip-in sag, tip-in hesitation, surge at WOT, or spark detonation when cold. [349] Engine stall. MANUAL TRANSMISSION CARS SHOULD ALSO BE UPDATED WITH THE CLUTCH ANTICIPATE SWITCH PER DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 91-472-7C. [350] Engine does not stay running on initial cold start and chuggle at 35-45 MPH with TCC engaged. New MEM-CAL may affect fuel economy. DO NOT RELY ON THE SCANNER ID TO DETERMINE WHICH PROM IS IN A VEHICLE. LOOK AT THE BCC ON THE PROM TO BE SURE. DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SOME 1991 MODELS WITH A 2.84 AXLE RATIO AND A FEDERAL EMISSIONS PACKAGE WITH SCANNER ID 5644 BUT A BCC OF A. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Footnotes 1 Thru 50 > Page 1953 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Application and ID Footnotes 351 Thru 400 [351] USE 16165848 (SCAN I.D. = 5614) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165843 (SCAN I.D. = 5624) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [352] USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [353] Cold engine extended crank. USE 16165839 (SCAN I.D. = 5634) FOR COLD START STALL. USE 16165829 (SCAN I.D. = 5644) ONLY IF REQUIRED TO SOLVE BOTH COLD START STALL AND CHUGGLE. [354] Lack of throttle response on trucks equipped with governors; or hot restart driveaway sag, both governor and non-governor trucks. [355] Low speed driveability or detonation. MAKE CERTAIN THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN UPDATED WITH PREVIOUSLY ATTEMPTED SERVICE FIXES AS FOLLOWS: EGR VALVE P/N 17090156 (STAMPED ON VALVE) 17112373 (GMSPO KIT), PCV VALVE P/N 25098542, ESC MODULE P/N 16175099 (BCC=BARC). [356] Tip-in hesitation, sag, backfire, spark knock. MAKE CERTAIN THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN UPDATED WITH PREVIOUSLY ATTEMPTED SERVICE FIXES AS FOLLOWS: EGR VALVE P/N 17090156 (STAMPED ON VALVE) 17112373 (GMSPO KIT), PCV VALVE P/N 25098542, ESC MODULE P/N 16175099 (BCC=BARC). [357] Hesitation or sag during the first two minutes of cold operation while vehicle is under moderate to heavy throttle driveaway, or TCC chuggle. [358] Sustained detonation/knock. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS REQUIRE TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) CALIBRATION. USE OF THIS PROM IN A NON-DETONATING ENGINE MAY RESULT IN DEGRADED DRIVEABILITY. [359] High emissions, exhaust odor, starting and driveability problems (G046). Requires Connector Bleed Assembly P/N 10105820 [360] Neutral gear rattle. MAY ALSO REQUIRE CLUTCH DRIVEN PLATE P/N 15961141, AND CLUTCH PILOT BEARING P/N 14061685. COMBINATION DETONATION AND NEUTRAL GEAR RATTLE PROM AVAILABLE. [361] Malfunction Indicator Lamp (check engine light) illuminates and may set a DTC 24 (VSS Circuit Fault) during a California State Emissions Test. [362] Higher than normal hydrocarbon emissions during the idle portion of the inspection and maintenance test. Also, may exhibit a slight detonation during a light throttle acceleration [363] TCC chuggle. MODEL 2DDM TRANS. - CHECK DEALER RECORDS TO SEE IF THE TORQUE CONVERTER HAS BEEN REPLACED WITH P/N 8650935 (BCC: DGAF). TRANS. WITH TORQUE CONVERTERS WITH P/N 8656959 (BCC: DG5F) NEED TO HAVE THE TORQUE CONVERTER REPLACED WITH P/N 8650935. [364] Cold start stall, cold tip in hesitation and/or a cold rough idle after extended idling. Additionally, in 40-50°F ambient temp., fogging on the inside of the front windshield which does not clear with the defroster on occurs. [365] Poor throttle response, stall, misfire, poor cold or hot start, extended crank of the starter with a hot engine, and/or vehicle will start and then stall when the engine is hot. MT vehicles may also experience decel. stall and poor accel. performance. [366] Poor throttle response, stalling, misfire, poor cold or hot starting, extended cranking of the starter with a hot engine, and/or vehicle will start and then stall when the engine is hot. USED WITH MANUAL TRANSMISSION ONLY. [367] MIL illuminates and/or store a DTC 32 (EGR error) with no noticeable driveability concern, usually occurring while climbing a grade. [368] MIL illuminates and/or store a DTC 32 (EGR error) with no noticeable driveability concern, usually occurring while climbing a grade, towing a trailer or driving into a strong head wind. [369] High emissions, exhaust odor, starting and driveability problems (G046). Requires Connector Bleed Assembly P/N 10105820 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Application and ID > Expanded Footnotes > Page 1954 Prom Information Scan Prom Prom Prom Superseding ID Code Bcc Part # ID Part # TSB Reference # 5540 3119 ADL 01225540 5607 3447 AMY 01225607 6095 01226095 5608 3567 ANW 01225608 6023 6448 AWU 01226023 6095 6291 AUJ 01226095 Running change. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Description and Operation > CALPAK PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Description and Operation CALPAK CAUTION: If the computer is found to be defective and needs replacement, remove the old CALPAK and PROM, then place both into the replacement computer. When replacing the COMPUTER always transfer the BROADCAST CODE and PRODUCTION ECM/PCM NUMBER to the service label on the replacement computer. DESCRIPTION: The resistor network calibration called a CALPAK is located inside the computer. Its appearance and service is similar to the PROM. The CALPAK allows fuel to be delivered if other parts of the computer fail. The CALPAK provides the computer with calibrations for: ^ Cold Start Cranking. ^ Limp home fuel (fuel backup mode). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Description and Operation > CALPAK > Page 1957 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Description and Operation EEPROM CAUTION: The EEPROM is soldered to the COMPUTER and cannot be serviced separately. Reprogramming of EEPROM information is necessary when replacing a COMPUTER, or when changing the engine and/or transaxle calibrations. Failure to do this will cause the vehicle to have a no start or poor running condition. It is essential that a replacement COMPUTER be reprogrammed with the correct VIN, option content, tire size, and calibration information. Reprogramming of the EEPROM is only possible with the Service Stall System (SSS) hardware available at authorized dealer locations. Check with a dealer before performing COMPUTER replacement or EEPROM reprogramming. DESCRIPTION: The term EEPROM is defined as Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) in the COMPUTER. The EEPROM stores vehicle information such as engine and transaxle calibrations, vehicle identification number, programmable vehicle option content and MALF history. Vehicle information stored on the EEPROM has a major effect on how the vehicle will operate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Description and Operation > CALPAK > Page 1958 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Description and Operation EPROM CAUTION: The EPROM is serviceable in some applications and can be removed for replacement. If the COMPUTER is found to be defective and needs replacement, remove the old EPROM if applicable and place into the new computer. When replacing the COMPUTER always transfer the BROADCAST CODE and PRODUCTION ECM/PCM NUMBER to the service label on the replacement computer. DESCRIPTION: The term EPROM means Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM). The EPROM functions in the same manner as a regular PROM and is programmed with data pertaining to the vehicles weight, engine, transmission, axle ratio etc. Automotive technicians do not ERASE or PROGRAM the EPROM in the field. Instead, the EPROM is serviced in one of two manners. Some applications are soldered to the circuit board and require both the computer and EPROM to be replaced as a complete unit. Other applications allow for the EPROM only to replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Description and Operation > CALPAK > Page 1959 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Description and Operation MEMCAL CAUTION: If the COMPUTER is found to be defective and needs replacement, remove the old MEMCAL and place it into the replacement computer. When replacing the COMPUTER always transfer the BROADCAST CODE and PRODUCTION ECM/PCM NUMBER to the service label on the replacement computer. DESCRIPTION: The MEMCAL assembly contains both the functions of the PROM and the CALPAK. Like the PROM, it contains the calibrations needed for a specific vehicle. It also is the fuel back up control for the computer should it become damaged or faulty. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Description and Operation > CALPAK > Page 1960 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Description and Operation PROM CAUTION: If the computer is found to be defective and needs replacement, remove the old PROM and place it into the replacement computer. Some ECM's are equipped with another chip called a CALPAK. If the computer is equipped with a CALPAK chip, it will be located next to the PROM and must be transferred along with the PROM. When replacing the computer always transfer the BROADCAST CODE and PRODUCTION ECM/PCM NUMBER to the service label on the replacement computer. DESCRIPTION: To allow one type of computer to be used for many different vehicles, a device called a Programable Read Only Memory (PROM) unit is used. The PROM is located inside the computer and has system calibration information based upon the vehicle's axle ratio, engine, transmission, weight, and other specific configurations of the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1961 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Testing and Inspection Some control modules may have problems due to cracked solder joints on the circuit board. These internal control module problems can cause the following symptoms: ^ Failure to start or vehicle is stalling. ^ The "CHECK ENGINE" "SERVICE ENGINE SOON" or "MALFUNCTION INDICATOR" light will flash or light up, but no trouble codes will be present. ^ Vehicle instrument panel displays may be inoperative. ^ The control module may or may not communicate with the scanner. ^ Other intermittent driveability problems. Incorrect PROM or MEMCAL removal and replacement can create solder joint problems or aggravate an existing condition. See PROM or MEMCAL INSTALLATION for proper procedures. If a solder joint problem results in a "hard" failure, normal test procedures will usually pinpoint a faulty control module. Many symptoms caused by poor solder joints in the control module result in intermittent problems, but they may be hard to duplicate during troubleshooting. Control modules with solder joint problems are sensitive to heat and vibration. You can check for these internal control module problems in either, or both, of the following ways: ^ Remove the control module from its mounting bracket and extend it on the harness so that you can expose it to the vehicle heater ducts. Alternatively, use the flexible duct to route air from the heater to the control module location. Then run the engine and operate the heater at the "MAX HEAT" position. This exposes the control module to approximately 140°F. ^ With the engine running, tap on the control module several times with your hand or finger tips to simulate vehicle vibration. If the engine stumbles or stalls, the "CHECK ENGINE" "SERVICE ENGINE SOON" or "MALFUNCTION INDICATOR" light flashes, or any of the previous symptoms occur, the control module may have bad solder joints on the circuit board. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Service and Repair > CALPAK PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Service and Repair CALPAK 1. Remove ECM from vehicle. 2. Remove ECM access cover. 3. Remove Calibration Pack (CALPAK) using removal tool shown. Grasp the CALPAK carrier on the narrow ends only. Gently rock the carrier from end to end while applying a firm upward force. 4. Inspect the reference end of the CALPAK carrier and carefully set aside. Do not remove the CALPAK from the carrier to confirm CALPAK correctness. The notch in the CALPAK is referenced to the small notch in the carrier. The small notch of the carrier must be aligned with the small notch in the socket. CAUTION: ANY TIME THE CALPAK IS INSTALLED BACKWARDS AND THE IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED ON, THE CALPAK IS DESTROYED. 5. Install the CALPACK by pressing on the CALPAK carrier until it is firmly seated in the socket. Do not press on the CALPAK, only the carrier. 6. Install ECM access cover. 7. Install ECM and perform a DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK to confirm proper installation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Service and Repair > CALPAK > Page 1964 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Service and Repair EEPROM CAUTION: The Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is a permanent memory that is physically soldered to the circuit boards within the computer. It is not serviceable and should not be removed for replacement. If COMPUTER replacement is performed, reprogramming of the EEPROM will be necessary. Failure to do this will cause the vehicle to have a no start or poor running condition. Reprogramming of the EEPROM is only possible with the Service Stall System (SSS) hardware available at authorized dealer locations. Check with a dealer before performing COMPUTER replacement or EEPROM reprogramming. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Service and Repair > CALPAK > Page 1965 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Service and Repair EPROM REMOVAL: ^ DO NOT remove an EPROM from its packing material until you are ready to install it. DO NOT hold an EPROM by its pins. ^ Before entering a vehicle to remove or replace an EPROM, touch an exposed metal part of the vehicle to discharge any static charge from your body or use anti-static wrist straps. Avoid sliding across upholstery or carpeting when removing or installing an EPROM. If this is not possible, touch an exposed metal part of the vehicle with your free hand before removing or replacing an EPROM. ^ When available, use an antistatic grounding strap attached to your wrist and clipped to a metal part of the vehicle body to prevent static charges from accumulating. Antistatic conductive floormats are also available. ^ It may be desirable to remove the computer for EPROM replacement. ^ Remove computer access cover. ^ Unlock the locking levers by pressing outward toward the sides of the EPROM. ^ Remove EPROM from its socket INSTALLATION: EPROM/MEM-CAL Unit Installation ^ Install the replacement EPROM in the same direction. ^ VERY GENTLY PRESS down on the ends of the EPROM until the locking levers are rotated toward the sides of the EPROM. ^ NOTE: To avoid Computer damage, do not press on the ends of the EPROM until the levers snap into place. Do not use any vertical force beyond the minimum required to engage the EPROM into its socket. ^ While continuing light pressure on the ends of the EPROM, use your index fingers to press the locking levers inward until they are snapped into place. Listen for the click. ^ Install the access cover on the computer. ^ Perform FUNCTIONAL CHECK Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Service and Repair > CALPAK > Page 1966 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Service and Repair MEMCAL *** UPDATED BY TSB #91-318-6E DATED MAY 1991 CONDITION: When installing a service replacement computer, the use of incorrect MEMCAL installation procedures may cause the computer to fail before it can be installed in the vehicle. This condition may appear as if the computer were defective when shipped to the dealership, when in fact it was damaged while being installed. In addition this condition may also occur when installing an updated MEMCAL into the vehicles original equipment computer. CAUSE: Excessive vertical force may be applied to the MEMCAL resulting in flexing of the circuit board and damage to the connections between the circuit board and attached components. Excessive vertical force may be generated in two ways. ^ Incorrect MEMCAL installation procedures. ^ Interference between MEMCAL and cover. IMPORTANT CORRECTION: This procedure supersedes any instructions regarding MEMCAL installation dated prior to September 1990. 1. Inspect the MEMCAL to determine if a cork spacer is glued to the top side of the MEMCAL assembly. If so, remove it prior to installation. 2. Align small notches with matching notches in Computer MEMCAL socket. 3. VERY GENTLY PRESS down on the ends of the MEMCAL until the locking levers are rotated toward the sides of the MEMCAL. NOTE: To avoid Computer damage, do not press on the ends of the MEMCAL until the levers snap into place. Do not use any vertical force beyond the minimum required to engage the MEMCAL into its socket. 4. While continuing light pressure on the ends of the MEMCAL, use your index fingers to press the locking levers inward until they are snapped into place. Listen for the click. 5. Install MEMCAL cover and install Computer cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Service and Repair > CALPAK > Page 1967 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Service and Repair PROM 1. Remove ECM from vehicle. 2. Remove ECM access cover. PROM Removal 3. Remove PROM using the rocker-type PROM removal tool shown. Engage one end of the PROM carrier with the hook end of the tool. Press on the vertical bar end of the tool and rock the engaged end of the PROM carrier up as far as possible. Engage the opposite end of the PROM carrier in the same manner and rock this end up as far as possible. Repeat this process until the PROM carrier and PROM are free of the PROM socket. The PROM carrier with the PROM in it should lift off of the PROM socket easily. 4. Inspect the reference end of the PROM carrier and carefully set aside. Do not remove the PROM from the carrier to confirm PROM correctness. The notch in the PROM is referenced to the small notch in the carrier. The small notch of the carrier must be aligned with the small notch in the socket. CAUTION: ANY TIME THE PROM IS INSTALLED BACKWARDS AND THE IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED ON, THE PROM IS DESTROYED. 5. Install PROM by pressing on the PROM carrier until it is firmly seated in the socket. Do not press on the PROM, only the carrier. 6. Install ECM access cover. 7. Install ECM and perform a DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK to confirm proper installation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Upshift Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Upshift Solenoid 1-2 Shift Valve Controls the speed at which the 1-2 and 2-1 shifts occur. 2-3 Shift Valve Controls speeds at which 2-3 and 3-2 shifts occur. Stator Valve Used only on transmissions having the variable pitch stator, this valve shifts when line oil is exhausted at end of valve when stator control solenoid is energized. This exhausts oil from the variable pitch stator piston and changes from the low to the high angle. When the stator solenoid is not energized, converter oil is directed to the stator piston and low angle is obtained. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Upshift Solenoid > Page 1975 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Shift Solenoid DESCRIPTION The detent solenoid is activated by an electric switch at the carburetor. When the throttle is opened sufficiently to close this switch, the solenoid in the transmission is activated, causing a downshift at speeds below 70 mph. it lower speeds, downshifts will occur at lesser throttle openings without the use of the electric switch. 1-2 Detent Valve Senses regulated modulator pressure tending to hold 1-2 shift valve downshifted and provides an area for detent pressure for detent 2-1 shifts. Detent Valve Shifts when oil line is exhausted at end of valve when detent solenoid is energized. This directs detent oil to the 1-2 accumulator valve, 1-2 regulator and 2-3 modulator valves, 3-2 valve and the vacuum modulator valve. Detent Regulator Valve When the detent valve shifts, the detent regulator is free to allow drive oil to enter the detent passage and thus becomes regulated at 70 psi. Detent pressure will also flow into the mod lator passage which flows to the shift valves. Low gear oil moves the detent regulator open to drive oil, allowing drive oil to enter modulator and detent passages. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Upshift Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Upshift Solenoid 1-2 Shift Valve Controls the speed at which the 1-2 and 2-1 shifts occur. 2-3 Shift Valve Controls speeds at which 2-3 and 3-2 shifts occur. Stator Valve Used only on transmissions having the variable pitch stator, this valve shifts when line oil is exhausted at end of valve when stator control solenoid is energized. This exhausts oil from the variable pitch stator piston and changes from the low to the high angle. When the stator solenoid is not energized, converter oil is directed to the stator piston and low angle is obtained. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Upshift Solenoid > Page 1982 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Shift Solenoid DESCRIPTION The detent solenoid is activated by an electric switch at the carburetor. When the throttle is opened sufficiently to close this switch, the solenoid in the transmission is activated, causing a downshift at speeds below 70 mph. it lower speeds, downshifts will occur at lesser throttle openings without the use of the electric switch. 1-2 Detent Valve Senses regulated modulator pressure tending to hold 1-2 shift valve downshifted and provides an area for detent pressure for detent 2-1 shifts. Detent Valve Shifts when oil line is exhausted at end of valve when detent solenoid is energized. This directs detent oil to the 1-2 accumulator valve, 1-2 regulator and 2-3 modulator valves, 3-2 valve and the vacuum modulator valve. Detent Regulator Valve When the detent valve shifts, the detent regulator is free to allow drive oil to enter the detent passage and thus becomes regulated at 70 psi. Detent pressure will also flow into the mod lator passage which flows to the shift valves. Low gear oil moves the detent regulator open to drive oil, allowing drive oil to enter modulator and detent passages. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 883787A > Dec > 88 > A/T - No Engine Braking In Drive 2 (D2) Accumulator: Customer Interest A/T - No Engine Braking In Drive 2 (D2) Number: 88-378-7A Section: 7A Date: DEC., 1988 Subject: NO ENGINE BRAKING IN DRIVE 2 (D2) Model and Year: 1978-88 TRUCKS WITH THM 400/475 FIGURE 1 - THM 400/475, HYDRA-MATIC 3L80/3L80-HD TRANSMISSION IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION FIGURE 2 - VALVE BODY TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin covers no engine braking in Drive 2 (D2) selector range caused by a broken plastic Front Accumulator Piston (303). The transmissions affected are the THM 400/475/ HYDRA-MATIC 3L80/3L80-HD Transmission. The die cast aluminum piston can be used in service for this condition and will reduce the chance of any broken or cracked pistons. DATE OF PRODUCTION CHANGE: (Figure 1) August 1, 1988 (Julian Date 214) all 1989 THM 400/475/ HYDRA-MATIC 3L80/3L80-HD Transmissions were built with the aluminum Front Accumulator Piston (303). SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION: (Figure 2) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 883787A > Dec > 88 > A/T - No Engine Braking In Drive 2 (D2) > Page 1991 Service Part No. Part Description 8626883 Piston-Front Accumulator (303) This part is currently available from GMSPO. IMPORTANT: The plastic Front Accumulator Piston (8629080) should be replaced if found in any 1978-88 Control Valve Assembly (049). SERVICE MANUAL REFERENCE: Refer to the Unit Repair Section of the appropriate Service Manual for proper replacement procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > 87-71-74 > Nov > 98 > A/T - 1-2 Accumulator Piston/Outer Spring Replacement Accumulator: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 1-2 Accumulator Piston/Outer Spring Replacement File In Section: 7 - Transmission Bulletin No.: 87-71-74 Date: November, 1998 INFORMATION Subject: 1-2 Accumulator Piston and Outer Spring Replacement Models: 1982-96 Buick Roadmaster 1982-96 Cadillac Brougham, Fleetwood, DeVille 1982-86 Chevrolet Caprice 1982-99 Chevrolet Camaro, Corvette 1982-99 Pontiac Firebird with HYDRA-MATIC 4L60, 4L60-E Transmission (RPOs MD8, M30) 1982-99 Chevrolet and GMC C/K, M/L, S/T, G Models 1991-99 Oldsmobile Bravada with HYDRA-MATIC 4L60, 4L60-E Transmission (RPOs MD8, M30) Transmissions built from 1982 through 1999 were built with one of two styles of 1-2 accumulator pistons and outer springs. Important: The 1-2 accumulator pistons and outer springs are not interchangeable. For replacement of the 1-2 accumulator piston and outer spring, remove the 1-2 accumulator assembly and inspect the interior for the presence of either an aluminum or composite (plastic) 1-2 accumulator piston. Design 1 1-2 accumulator assemblies with an aluminum piston and a round wire outer spring, use service package P/N 24204495 (1982-1993) or P/N 24204496 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > 87-71-74 > Nov > 98 > A/T - 1-2 Accumulator Piston/Outer Spring Replacement > Page 1997 (1994-1997). Design 2 1-2 accumulator assemblies with a composite (plastic) piston and an ovate wire outer spring, started May 11, 1998 (Julian Date 131), use service package P/N 24214343 (1998-1999). Notice: Failure to follow the above instructions may result in transmission distress. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > 883787A > Dec > 88 > A/T - No Engine Braking In Drive 2 (D2) Accumulator: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Engine Braking In Drive 2 (D2) Number: 88-378-7A Section: 7A Date: DEC., 1988 Subject: NO ENGINE BRAKING IN DRIVE 2 (D2) Model and Year: 1978-88 TRUCKS WITH THM 400/475 FIGURE 1 - THM 400/475, HYDRA-MATIC 3L80/3L80-HD TRANSMISSION IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION FIGURE 2 - VALVE BODY TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin covers no engine braking in Drive 2 (D2) selector range caused by a broken plastic Front Accumulator Piston (303). The transmissions affected are the THM 400/475/ HYDRA-MATIC 3L80/3L80-HD Transmission. The die cast aluminum piston can be used in service for this condition and will reduce the chance of any broken or cracked pistons. DATE OF PRODUCTION CHANGE: (Figure 1) August 1, 1988 (Julian Date 214) all 1989 THM 400/475/ HYDRA-MATIC 3L80/3L80-HD Transmissions were built with the aluminum Front Accumulator Piston (303). SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION: (Figure 2) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > 883787A > Dec > 88 > A/T - No Engine Braking In Drive 2 (D2) > Page 2002 Service Part No. Part Description 8626883 Piston-Front Accumulator (303) This part is currently available from GMSPO. IMPORTANT: The plastic Front Accumulator Piston (8629080) should be replaced if found in any 1978-88 Control Valve Assembly (049). SERVICE MANUAL REFERENCE: Refer to the Unit Repair Section of the appropriate Service Manual for proper replacement procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > ATRASIL8713 > Apr > 87 > A/T - 700R4 Auxiliary Accumulator Valve Accumulator: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 700R4 Auxiliary Accumulator Valve SIL 87-13 (Apr) Subject: 700 R4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > ATRASIL8713 > Apr > 87 > A/T - 700R4 Auxiliary Accumulator Valve > Page 2007 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > ATRASIL8713 > Apr > 87 > A/T - 700R4 Auxiliary Accumulator Valve > Page 2008 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > ATRASIL8713 > Apr > 87 > A/T - 700R4 Auxiliary Accumulator Valve > Page 2009 1. After October 6, 1986 (Julian date 279) all THM 700 R4's have an auxiliary accumulator valve body. It is bolted to the case adjacent to the main valve body. (See Figure 1) The auxiliary accumulator valve body is diecast aluminum and contains a forward clutch accumulator, an abuse shuttle valve, and a low overrun valve (See Figure 2) to provide smooth neutral to drive shifts, increased forward durability, and smooth manual 2-1 downshifts. The number 5 checkball is in the auxiliary accumulator valve body, instead of its usual spot in the valve body (See Figure 3). A tube feeding the forward clutch extends from the auxiliary accumulator accumulator valve body to the pump. The forward feed cup plug in the pump has been omitted so the tube can fit in. ( See Figure 4) 2. Since the auxiliary valve body has been added, the valve body gaskets are as follows: 8667232 upper gasket and 8663583 for the lower gasket. The use of earlier model gaskets on the 1987 THM 700 R4 covers a 3rd clutch hole on the separator plate. 3. The separator plate is stamped with two letter codes for identification. If the first letter stamped is "A", that plate is used with the auxiliary valve body. 4. The case has a window cut out of it to make room for the tube as it goes into the pump. Many 1986 THM 700 R4 cases have this provision. A bleed orifice lube hole has been added to the governor bore. To find this, look through the back of the case where the extension housing is bolted. 5. The transmission oil pan for the 1987 THM 700 R4 is slightly deeper to accommodate the auxiliary accumulator valve body. The 1987 models use part number 8663618. The 1982-1986 models use part number 8654700. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > 87-71-74 > Nov > 98 > A/T - 1-2 Accumulator Piston/Outer Spring Replacement Accumulator: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 1-2 Accumulator Piston/Outer Spring Replacement File In Section: 7 - Transmission Bulletin No.: 87-71-74 Date: November, 1998 INFORMATION Subject: 1-2 Accumulator Piston and Outer Spring Replacement Models: 1982-96 Buick Roadmaster 1982-96 Cadillac Brougham, Fleetwood, DeVille 1982-86 Chevrolet Caprice 1982-99 Chevrolet Camaro, Corvette 1982-99 Pontiac Firebird with HYDRA-MATIC 4L60, 4L60-E Transmission (RPOs MD8, M30) 1982-99 Chevrolet and GMC C/K, M/L, S/T, G Models 1991-99 Oldsmobile Bravada with HYDRA-MATIC 4L60, 4L60-E Transmission (RPOs MD8, M30) Transmissions built from 1982 through 1999 were built with one of two styles of 1-2 accumulator pistons and outer springs. Important: The 1-2 accumulator pistons and outer springs are not interchangeable. For replacement of the 1-2 accumulator piston and outer spring, remove the 1-2 accumulator assembly and inspect the interior for the presence of either an aluminum or composite (plastic) 1-2 accumulator piston. Design 1 1-2 accumulator assemblies with an aluminum piston and a round wire outer spring, use service package P/N 24204495 (1982-1993) or P/N 24204496 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > 87-71-74 > Nov > 98 > A/T - 1-2 Accumulator Piston/Outer Spring Replacement > Page 2015 (1994-1997). Design 2 1-2 accumulator assemblies with a composite (plastic) piston and an ovate wire outer spring, started May 11, 1998 (Julian Date 131), use service package P/N 24214343 (1998-1999). Notice: Failure to follow the above instructions may result in transmission distress. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > ATRASIL8713 > Apr > 87 > A/T - 700R4 Auxiliary Accumulator Valve Accumulator: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 700R4 Auxiliary Accumulator Valve SIL 87-13 (Apr) Subject: 700 R4 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > ATRASIL8713 > Apr > 87 > A/T - 700R4 Auxiliary Accumulator Valve > Page 2020 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > ATRASIL8713 > Apr > 87 > A/T - 700R4 Auxiliary Accumulator Valve > Page 2021 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Accumulator: > ATRASIL8713 > Apr > 87 > A/T - 700R4 Auxiliary Accumulator Valve > Page 2022 1. After October 6, 1986 (Julian date 279) all THM 700 R4's have an auxiliary accumulator valve body. It is bolted to the case adjacent to the main valve body. (See Figure 1) The auxiliary accumulator valve body is diecast aluminum and contains a forward clutch accumulator, an abuse shuttle valve, and a low overrun valve (See Figure 2) to provide smooth neutral to drive shifts, increased forward durability, and smooth manual 2-1 downshifts. The number 5 checkball is in the auxiliary accumulator valve body, instead of its usual spot in the valve body (See Figure 3). A tube feeding the forward clutch extends from the auxiliary accumulator accumulator valve body to the pump. The forward feed cup plug in the pump has been omitted so the tube can fit in. ( See Figure 4) 2. Since the auxiliary valve body has been added, the valve body gaskets are as follows: 8667232 upper gasket and 8663583 for the lower gasket. The use of earlier model gaskets on the 1987 THM 700 R4 covers a 3rd clutch hole on the separator plate. 3. The separator plate is stamped with two letter codes for identification. If the first letter stamped is "A", that plate is used with the auxiliary valve body. 4. The case has a window cut out of it to make room for the tube as it goes into the pump. Many 1986 THM 700 R4 cases have this provision. A bleed orifice lube hole has been added to the governor bore. To find this, look through the back of the case where the extension housing is bolted. 5. The transmission oil pan for the 1987 THM 700 R4 is slightly deeper to accommodate the auxiliary accumulator valve body. The 1987 models use part number 8663618. The 1982-1986 models use part number 8654700. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2023 Accumulator: Description and Operation 1-2 Accumulator The 1-2 accumulator charges the rear servo accumulator in 1st gear in preparation for the apply of the intermediate clutch on the 1-2 shift. On most models the valve train consists of a 1-2 accumulator valve and 2 springs. The 1-2 accumulator oil pressure controls application of the intermediate clutch to obtain smooth shifts. On other models the valve train consists of a 1-2 primary valve and spring, a 1-2 accumulator valve, spring and plug. The 1-2 accumulator oil pressure is a two-stage pressure to obtain greater flexibility in obtaining the desired curve for various engine requirements. Regulates drive oil to a proportional lesser value, that increases as modulator pressure increases, to control engagement of the intermediate clutch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - New 2-4 Band Apply, Anchor Brackets, Lube Window Band: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - New 2-4 Band Apply, Anchor Brackets, Lube Window Number: 90-121-7A Section: 7A Date: December 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 977161 Subject: 2-4 BAND CHANGES-APPLY/ANCHOR BRACKETS AND NEW LUBE WINDOW Model and Year: 1982-90 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS WITH 4L60 (700-R4) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Figure 1 - 2-4 Band Assembly Figure 2 - THM 700-R4/HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 Transmission Identification Information TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This bulletin covers a new HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 transmission 2-4 band with changes to the apply and anchor brackets, locating tabs, and the addition of a "lube window." The lube window was added to direct lubricating transmission fluid to the band friction material while the band is not applied. Structural changes to the apply and anchor brackets increase their durability and the locating tabs were added to aid in assembly. (See Figure 1.) Starting September 8, 1989 (Julian Date 251), all HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 transmissions were built using the new 2-4 band assembly. (See Figure 2.) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - New 2-4 Band Apply, Anchor Brackets, Lube Window > Page 2028 The new band is interchangeable with the previous band and should be used for service whenever possible. As soon as the previous bands are used up, the new bands will become available. Part Name Previous Part Number New Part Number Band Assembly - 2/4 8654144 8673175 Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Refer to the HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 Unit Repair section of the appropriate Service Manual for removal and installation of the 2-4 band. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - New Servo Apply Pin Band Apply Servo: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - New Servo Apply Pin GMC NUMBER: 88-T-44 GROUP: 7A - Automatic Transmission DATE: September, 1987 CORPORATE NUMBER: 867105 SUBJECT: NEW SERVO APPLY PIN MODELS: 1982 - 88 LIGHT DUTY MODELS EQUIPPED WITH THM 700-R4 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS BULLETIN COVERS: This bulletin covers changes to the second servo apply pin that eliminated the two ring seals. This change reduces the potential for seal damage during assembly. Testing has shown that any potential leakage in this area with the new design pin will not affect transmission performance. FIGURE 1 - THM 700-R4 TRANSMISSION IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - New Servo Apply Pin > Page 2033 FIGURE 2 DATE OF PRODUCTION CHANGE: (Figure No. 1) Beginning January 5, 1987 (Julian date 005) THM 700-R4 transmissions were built with the new servo apply pin (Figure No. 2). SERVICE ACTION: The new second servo apply piston pin (Figure No. 2) can be used on all 1982-1988 THM 700-R4 transmissions. NOTICE: If a past design second servo apply pin is used on a THM 700-R4 transmission, seal rings must be installed. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION: SECOND SERVO APPLY PIN PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION PIN LENGTH 8667571 Pin Second Apply 66.37-66.67 mm (2.61" - 2.62") (2 IDENTIFICATION RINGS) 8667572 Pin Second Apply 66.74-68.04 mm (2.67" - 2.68") (3 IDENTIFICATION RINGS) 8667573 Pin Second Apply 69.11 -69.41 mm (2.72" - 2.73") (WIDE BAND) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2034 Band Apply Servo: Specifications Servo cover attaching bolts ................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... 15 ft lbs Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2035 Band Apply Servo: Description and Operation Front Servo The front servo applies the 2nd overrun band to provide engine braking in 2nd gear and 1st gear. It is also used as an accumulator for the apply of the direct clutch, and in conjunction with a series of check balls controlling orifices, is a part of the timing for the release of the direct clutch. To prevent the apply of the 2nd overrun band in Neutral, Direct Drive and Reverse ranges, oil is directed from the manual valve to the release side of the servo piston. In Direct Drive the servo release oil from the manual valve is used to charge the servo in preparation for the apply of the direct clutch. Direct clutch oil is directed to the front servo accumulator piston where spring force plus direct clutch pressure stroke the piston up a against the force of servo release oil. This lowers the clutch apply pressure for a smooth engagement. The release of the direct clutch and the exhausting of the front servo accumulator is slowed down by three check balls and three orifices which permits a soft return of the drive load to the intermediate sprag and also allows engine RPM to increase during a detent 3-2 downshift in preparation for the lower gear ratio, which results in a smooth shift and better acceleration. Rear Servo The rear servo applies the rear band for overrun engine braking in low range 1st gear. It applies the band in Reverse to hold the reaction carrier to provide reverse gear ratio. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Updated Side Cover Or Bottom Pan Removal Case: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Updated Side Cover Or Bottom Pan Removal 85-36 7A (VIIc) FEB., 1985 Subject: USAGE OF HEX HEAD SCREWS AND CONICAL WASHER ASSEMBLIES Model and Year: THM TRANSMISSIONS OR TRANSAXLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS When servicing any THM transmission or transaxle and removal of the side cover and/or bottom pan is required, IT IS NOT ALWAYS NECESSARY TO REPLACE THE HEX HEAD SCREWS AND CONICAL WASHER ASSEMBLIES. HEX HEAD SCREW AND CONICAL WASHER ASSEMBLY NOTICE: Screws with the coating stripped away exposing the exterior portion of the head or washer should be replaced. Also, replace those hex head screws if the washer is inverted (see illustration below). Insert this information in the appropriate section of your 1985 service manual. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-027 Date: June 04, 2008 Subject: No Movement When Transmission is Shifted to Drive or Third - Normal Operation When Shifted to Second, First or Reverse (Replace Forward Sprag Assembly) Models: 1982 - 2005 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2006 - 2007 Buick Rainier 2006 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2006 Chevrolet SSR 2006 - 2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Colorado, Express, Silverado Classic, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 GMC Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2006 - 2008 GMC Canyon, Envoy, Savana, Sierra Classic, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL 2006 Pontiac GTO 2006 - 2007 HUMMER H2 2006 - 2008 HUMMER H3 2006 - 2008 Saab 9-7X with 4L60, 4L60E, 4L65E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MD8, M30, M32, M33 or M70) Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle has no movement when the transmission is shifted to DRIVE or THIRD position, but there is normal operation when it is shifted to SECOND, FIRST or REVERSE position. Cause This condition may be caused by a damaged forward sprag assembly (642). Correction When inspecting the sprag, it is important to test the sprag for proper operation by holding the outer race (644) with one hand while rotating the input sun gear (640) with the other hand. The sun gear should rotate only in the counterclockwise direction with the input sun gear facing upward. If the sprag rotates in both directions or will not rotate in either direction, the sprag elements should be inspected by removing one of the sprag assembly retaining rings (643). Refer to SI Unit Repair section for forward clutch sprag disassembly procedures. If the sprag is found to be damaged, make repairs to the transmission as necessary. A new forward roller clutch sprag assembly is now available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear > Page 2048 If clutch debris is found, it is also very important to inspect the Pressure Control (PC) solenoid valve (377) fluid screens. Clean or replace the PC solenoid (377) as necessary. It is also important to flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J45096. Refer to SI Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test for the procedure. The notches above each sprag must point up as shown when assembled into the outer race. Bearing Assembly, Input Sun Gear Snap Ring, Overrun Clutch Hub Retaining Hub, Overrun Clutch Wear Plate, Sprag Assembly Retainer and Race Assembly, Sprag Forward Sprag Assembly Retainer Rings, Sprag Assembly Outer Race, Forward Clutch Washer, Thrust (Input Carrier to Race) The following information applies when this sprag is used in 1982-86 transmissions. The new design sprag can be used on models 1982 through 1986, by replacing the entire assembly (637 - 644). Individual components are NOT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear > Page 2049 interchangeable. Important: The wear plate (640) and input thrust washer (660) are not required with the new sprag. Use of the thrust washer and wear plate with the new sprag assembly will cause a misbuild (correct end play cannot be obtained). Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 855 > Oct > 84 > A/T - Burned 3-4 Clutch/High 2nd-3rd Gear Shifts Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - Burned 3-4 Clutch/High 2nd-3rd Gear Shifts Number: 85-5 Section: 7A (VIIc) Date: Oct., 1984 Subject: BURNED 3-4 CLUTCH AND/OR HIGH 2-3 SHIFTS Model and Year: ALL 1982-85 THM 700-R4 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and supercedes Chevrolet Dealer Service Bulletin 84-107 dated April, 1984 which should be destroyed. This bulletin updates model year usage and supplies additional information pertaining to checking for bleed-off of the orifice cup plug. FIGURE 7 - Bleed Orifice Cup Plug Starting production of all 1985 THM 700-R4 transmissions an air bleed orifice cup plug was added to the input clutch housing (Figure 7). Due to this change, the procedure listed below for air checking the 3-4 clutch piston and the check ball has been revised. Some 1982-84 THM 700-R4 transmissions may exhibit a burned 3-4 clutch, and/or high 2-3 shifts. (The high 2-3 shifts are experienced on "C/K/G" truck gas/diesel applications only.) FIGURE 5 - Transmission Identification Label Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 855 > Oct > 84 > A/T - Burned 3-4 Clutch/High 2nd-3rd Gear Shifts > Page 2054 FIGURE 6 - THM 700-R4 TRANSMISSION-I.D. LOCATION Starting January 15, (Julian Date 015) 1984, all THM 700-R4 transmissions are being built with a new input housing and shaft assembly and control valve body assembly. Refer to Figures 5 and 6 for Julian Date location. FIGURE 1 - FORMER INPUT HOUSING & SHAFT ASSEMBLY The former input housing and shaft assembly had a check ball seat drilled into the housing. A check ball was installed into this hole and the opening was then staked to retain the ball (see Figure 1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 855 > Oct > 84 > A/T - Burned 3-4 Clutch/High 2nd-3rd Gear Shifts > Page 2055 FIGURE 2 - NEW INPUT HOUSING & SHAFT ASSEMBLY The new input housing and shaft assembly has a check valve retainer and ball assembly which is pressed into the housing (see Figure 2). Only the new input housing and shaft assembly is available for service. Refer to the parts manual for correct part numbers and model application. Also, for the burned 3-4 clutch, air check the 3rd and 4th clutch piston and the check ball in the input clutch housing for leaks by following the procedure as listed below: FIGURE 2 - NEW INPUT HOUSING & SHAFT ASSEMBLY Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 855 > Oct > 84 > A/T - Burned 3-4 Clutch/High 2nd-3rd Gear Shifts > Page 2056 FIGURE 4 - AIR CHECK OF HOUSING & SHAFT ASSEMBLY 1. If you have an input clutch housing which does not have the new air bleed orifice cup plug (Figure 2) then, place your thumb firmly over the oil hole on the turbine shaft shown in Figure 4. FIGURE 7 - Bleed Orifice Cup Plug FIGURE 8 - Turbine Shaft 2. If you have an input clutch housing which has the new air bleed orifice cup plug (Figure 7) then, place your middle finger over the air bleed orifice cup plug and your index finger over the oil hole on the turbine shaft as shown in Figure 8. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 855 > Oct > 84 > A/T - Burned 3-4 Clutch/High 2nd-3rd Gear Shifts > Page 2057 FIGURE 4 - AIR CHECK OF HOUSING & SHAFT ASSEMBLY 3. Place the nozzle of an air gun over the check valve hole shown in Figure 4. 4. Inject a short blast of air into the check valve hole. 5. After injecting the air into the check valve hole, release your thumb off the oil hole on the turbine shaft. As you remove your thumb off the oil hole, you should hear air escape. 6. If you do not hear air escape from the oil hole, remove the 3rd and 4th clutch piston assembly and inspect it for damage. Also, check the check ball for proper sealing. If you hear air escape from the oil hole, the piston assembly and the check valve are good. FIGURE 3 - NEW CONTROL VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY The new control valve body assembly is for the burned 3-4 clutch, and the high 2-3 shifts which are experienced on the "C/K/G" trucks gas/diesel applications only. The new control valve body assembly is identified with an "X" on the casting (see Figure 3) to distinguish it from the past control valve body assembly. Only the new control valve body assembly is available for service. Refer to the parts manual for correct part numbers and model applications. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft Number: 84-177 Section: 7A (VIIc) Date: July, 1984 Subject: BURNED OVERRUN CLUTCH, FORWARD CLUTCH, AND 3-4 CLUTCH PLATE ASSEMBLIES Model and Year: ALL THM 700-R4 - 1982 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Beginning April 16, 1984 (Julian Date 107), a new input housing and shaft assembly and oil pump assembly went into production for all models of the THM 700-R4 transmission. In addition, new torque converters went into production for all 298 mm applications (4.1L in-line L6; V8 gas and diesel engines). FIGURE 1 - Transmission Identification All transmissions built starting with Julian Date 107 are stamped with the letter "T" on the pan rail after the transmission identification number (Figure 1). The letter "T" will only be used for the remainder of the 1984 model year. These production changes eliminate the possibility of burned clutch packs in the input housing due to hairline cracks which could develop across the ring grooves in the turbine shaft. A crack in this area of the turbine shaft on models built prior to this change could cause one or any combination of the following clutches to slip and overheat due to loss of apply pressure: A. Overrun Clutch Pack B. Forward Clutch Pack C. 3-4 Clutch Pack SERVICE INFORMATION 1. If any 1982, 1983 or 1984 THM 700-R4 transmission (built prior to Julian Date 107) experiences burned clutch packs within the input housing assembly, check for a possible cracked turbine shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft > Page 2062 FIGURE 2 - Stator Shaft Sleeve IMPORTANT: A hairline crack in the turbine shaft is not always detected by visually inspecting the shaft. To determine if the shaft is cracked, inspect the stator shaft sleeve for possible score marks in the inner diameter (Figure 2). If scoring is found, the probable cause is a crack in the turbine shaft which opens under torque conditions and produces the scoring and burned clutch packs. If this condition is found, replace both the input housing and shaft assembly and the oil pump assembly complete. Due to recent changes in the oil pump cover and pump body castings, these parts are serviced as an assembly for 1982 through 1984.. 2. Oil pump assemblies, input housing and shaft assemblies, and converters can be purchased separately as shown in the following Charts #1, #2, and #3, respectively. However, any transmission built prior to this change (1982, 1983, or 1984 not identified by a "T") must use the part numbers shown in the column marked "before Julian Date 107". Any 1984 transmission built after this change (identified by the letter "T") must use the part numbers in the column marked "after Julian Date 107". 3. Due to the numerous changes made on the above parts, those shown for use prior to the change must not be interchanged with those shown for use after the change. Interchanging these parts will result in conditions such as: A. Interference fits B. Loose fits C. No drive D. Possible repeat cracks in the turbine shaft E. Future confusion if the transmission should require additional service. CHART 1 YEAR MODELS PART NAME BEFORE STARTING JULIAN DATE WITH JULIAN 107 DATE 107 1982 T5, YK, YL, T6, TW, YA, TC, TE, TH, TJ, TK, M2, OIL PUMP M4, M5, M7, MB, MC, MD, ASSY. COMPLETE 8647967 ME, Y3, Y4, Y6 1982 M6, MH, TN, TP OIL PUMP 8647968 ASSY. COMPLETE 1983 TC, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TE, TH, TK, MD, ME, MW, VH, OIL PUMP T2, VA, YN, ML, MP, MS, ASSY. COMPLETE 8647967 T7, MK, YG, PQ, YP, YK, Y9, YF 1983 YH, TS, TZ, T8, TP, MH, OIL PUMP 8647968 VJ, TL ASSY. COMPLETE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft > Page 2063 1984 MB, MC, MD, VH, TE, ME, MK, MJ, VN, TC, TH, MW, OIL PUMP TK, VA, YF, PQ, YG, YP, ASSY COMPLETE 8647967 YK, Y6, YN, YA, Y9, YW 1984 TL, TZ, ML, MP, MS, T7, Oil Pump YH, Y7, Y8, TS, MR, TG, ASSY. Complete 8647968 8654309 TD 1984 MH, VX, VJ, VE, TM, T8, OIL PUMP MG ASSY. COMPLETE 8647969 8654310 CHART 2 YEAR MODELS PART NAME BEFORE STARTING JULIAN DATE WITH JULIAN 107 DATE 107 1982 T5, YK, YL, T6, TW, YA, TC, TE, TH, TJ, TK, M2, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 M4, M5, M7, MB, MC, MD, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) ME, Y3, Y4, Y6, M6, MH, TN, TP 1983 TC, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TE, TH, TK, MD, ME, MW, VH, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 TZ, MK, YN, YF, YG, YP, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) YK, Y9, TS, T8, TP, MH, VJ, TL 1983 T2, VA, ML, MP, MS, T7, INPUT HOUSING *8647128 YH, YF, PQ AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647965) 1984 MB, MC, MD, VH, MR, TG, ME, MK, MJ, VN, TC, TH, MW, TD, TK, MG, MH, VX, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 VJ, TL, VE, TM, TZ, T8, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) 8654156 TE, YP, Y8, TS, YK, Y6, YN, YA, Y9, YW, YG 1984 VA, ML, MP, MS, T7, YH, INPUT HOUSING *8647128 YF, PQ, Y7 AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647965) 8654155 * These part numbers will be superseded by the numbers shown in ( ) Approx. in October 1984. Torque converter assemblies for 1982, 1983, and 1984 models built prior to Julian Date 107, use current released part numbers. Torque converter assemblies for 1984 models starting with Julian Date 107, use the part numbers as shown in the chart below: CHART 3 1984 MODEL TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY PART NUMBERS STARTING WITH JULIAN DATE 107 MG, MH, VX, VJ, VE, TM, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647903 TZ, T8 YK, Y6, MD, VH, MR, TG, TE, ME, MK, TH, MK, TH, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647901 MW, TD, TK Y8 CONVERTER ASSY. 8647900 YG, TS, YN, YA, Y9, YW, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647904 YP, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TC CONVERTER ASSY. 8647902 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-027 Date: June 04, 2008 Subject: No Movement When Transmission is Shifted to Drive or Third - Normal Operation When Shifted to Second, First or Reverse (Replace Forward Sprag Assembly) Models: 1982 - 2005 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2006 - 2007 Buick Rainier 2006 Cadillac Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT 2006 Chevrolet SSR 2006 - 2008 Chevrolet Avalanche, Colorado, Express, Silverado Classic, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, TrailBlazer 2006 GMC Yukon Denali, Yukon Denali XL 2006 - 2008 GMC Canyon, Envoy, Savana, Sierra Classic, Sierra, Yukon, Yukon XL 2006 Pontiac GTO 2006 - 2007 HUMMER H2 2006 - 2008 HUMMER H3 2006 - 2008 Saab 9-7X with 4L60, 4L60E, 4L65E or 4L70E Automatic Transmission (RPOs MD8, M30, M32, M33 or M70) Condition Some customers may comment that the vehicle has no movement when the transmission is shifted to DRIVE or THIRD position, but there is normal operation when it is shifted to SECOND, FIRST or REVERSE position. Cause This condition may be caused by a damaged forward sprag assembly (642). Correction When inspecting the sprag, it is important to test the sprag for proper operation by holding the outer race (644) with one hand while rotating the input sun gear (640) with the other hand. The sun gear should rotate only in the counterclockwise direction with the input sun gear facing upward. If the sprag rotates in both directions or will not rotate in either direction, the sprag elements should be inspected by removing one of the sprag assembly retaining rings (643). Refer to SI Unit Repair section for forward clutch sprag disassembly procedures. If the sprag is found to be damaged, make repairs to the transmission as necessary. A new forward roller clutch sprag assembly is now available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear > Page 2069 If clutch debris is found, it is also very important to inspect the Pressure Control (PC) solenoid valve (377) fluid screens. Clean or replace the PC solenoid (377) as necessary. It is also important to flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J45096. Refer to SI Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test for the procedure. The notches above each sprag must point up as shown when assembled into the outer race. Bearing Assembly, Input Sun Gear Snap Ring, Overrun Clutch Hub Retaining Hub, Overrun Clutch Wear Plate, Sprag Assembly Retainer and Race Assembly, Sprag Forward Sprag Assembly Retainer Rings, Sprag Assembly Outer Race, Forward Clutch Washer, Thrust (Input Carrier to Race) The following information applies when this sprag is used in 1982-86 transmissions. The new design sprag can be used on models 1982 through 1986, by replacing the entire assembly (637 - 644). Individual components are NOT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-027 > Jun > 08 > A/T No Movement in Drive or 3rd Gear > Page 2070 interchangeable. Important: The wear plate (640) and input thrust washer (660) are not required with the new sprag. Use of the thrust washer and wear plate with the new sprag assembly will cause a misbuild (correct end play cannot be obtained). Parts Information Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-017 > Apr > 08 > A/T 4L60, Revised Sprag/Forward Clutch Hub Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4L60, Revised Sprag/Forward Clutch Hub INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-017 Date: April 04, 2008 Subject: 4L60 Automatic Transmission - New Sprag Assembly Forward Clutch to Overrun Clutch Hub Models: 1982-1986 Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with 4L60 Hydra-Matic Transmission (RPO MD8) The notches above each sprag must point up as shown when assembled into the outer race. Bearing Assembly, Input Sun Gear Snap Ring, Overrun Clutch Hub Retaining Hub, Overrun Clutch Wear Plate, Sprag Assembly Retainer and Race Assembly, Sprag Forward Sprag Assembly Retainer Rings, Sprag Assembly Outer Race, Forward Clutch Washer, Thrust (Input Carrier to Race) The New Forward Clutch Assembly Changes are as Follows: ^ Two more Sprag Elements (28 total) ^ Larger Inner and Outer Race Diameters ^ Solid Steel End Retainer Rings The new design sprag can be used on models 1982 through 1986, by replacing the entire assembly (637 - 644). Individual components are NOT inter-changeable. Important: The wear plate (640) and input thrust washer (660) are not required with the new sprag. Use of the thrust washer and wear plate with the new sprag assembly will cause a misbuild (correct end play cannot be obtained). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-07-30-017 > Apr > 08 > A/T 4L60, Revised Sprag/Forward Clutch Hub > Page 2075 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > ATRASIL8813 > Mar > 88 > A/T 700R4 New 3-4 Clutch Apply Package Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 700R4 New 3-4 Clutch Apply Package SIL 88-13 (Mar) THM 700-R4 SUBJECT: New 3-4 Clutch Apply Package TRANSMISSION MODELS: All Models CHANGE TO ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS: NOTICE Certain transmissions ("A" Models, Figure 14) will have two steel plates stacked together in two places (one in the middle) to provide the same stack-up as a six plate clutch assembly and to draw heat away from the fiber plates. When assemblying the 3-4 clutch, refer to Figures 13, 13A and 14 for proper assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > ATRASIL8813 > Mar > 88 > A/T 700R4 New 3-4 Clutch Apply Package > Page 2080 - New 3-4 clutch apply plate "stepped" replacing a "flat" apply plate (Fig. 13) - Input housing and shaft assembly revised with longer housing splines for using the new 3-4 clutch apply plate. - New input internal gear with longer splines on outside diameter. - Eliminate usage of longer 3-4 clutch apply ring (now only using short 3-4 clutch apply ring on all models. - New 3-4 backing plates, (material and thickness) - New internal retaining ring (thinner) and end configuration changed for identification. SERVICE ACTION: The new 3-4 clutch apply plate or the new input housing and shaft assembly cannot be used on transmissions built prior to February 9, 1987 (Julian date 040). SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION: PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 8642173 Plate, 3-4 clutch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > ATRASIL8813 > Mar > 88 > A/T 700R4 New 3-4 Clutch Apply Package > Page 2081 8667423 3-4 Clutch Apply Plate 8667661 Input Housing and Shaft Assembly (621) (used with 245 mm converter) 8667659 Input Housing and Shaft Assembly (621) (used with 298 mm converter) 8667660 Input Housing and Shaft Assembly (621) (used with 298 mm converter MHM model only) 8663636 Internal Retaining Ring 8663639 Input Internal Gear 3-4 Clutch Backing Plate Selection Procedure (Figure 15) 1. With the input housing and shaft assembly fully assembled, use a feeler gage to measure for correct backing plate travel (Figure 15). 2. Select the proper backing plate to obtain the specified travel (Figure 15). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > ATRASIL8810 > Feb > 88 > A/T 700R4 New Lo & Reverse Clutch Assembly Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 700R4 New Lo & Reverse Clutch Assembly SIL 88-10 (Feb) THM 700-R4 SUBJECT: New Lo and Reverse Clutch Assembly TRANSMISSION MODELS: All models Figures 7 and 8 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > ATRASIL8810 > Feb > 88 > A/T 700R4 New Lo & Reverse Clutch Assembly > Page 2086 Figures 9 and 10 Change to Assembly Components: (Figures 7, 8, 9 and 10) New Lo and reverse clutch assembly for all models that contain: - New lo and reverse clutch wave plate (682 B) - 5 lo and reverse clutch plate assemblies (fiber) - 4 lo and reverse clutch plates (steel) - New selective spacer plate (682A) - New retainer and ball assembly (106) added to reverse apply passage - In rear of case (Figure 9) - New lo and reverse clutch piston with shorter apply skirt (Figure 10) Procedure for selection of the lo and reverse selective backing plate (Figure 7) 1. On a flat work surface, stack up the following lo and reverse clutch assembly parts: - 1 waved plate - 5 fiber plates and four steel plates (682), starting with one fiber plate and alternating with a steel plate - lo and reverse clutch support assembly (679) 2. Apply an evenly distributed load to the top of the lo and reverse support assembly (679). Light pressure (5 lbs.) on the lo and reverse support assembly (679) will provide the correct dimension for measurement. (Caution: excessive pressure will start to flatten the wave plate, resulting in an inaccurate measurement.) 3. Measure height of clutch pack from work surface to the top of lo and reverse clutch support (679). Refer to Figure 7, Dimension "D". 4. Use dimension "D" (Figure 8) to select proper thickness of the selective spacer plate for assembly. 5. Install the proper selective spacer plate between the wave plate and first fiber clutch plate with the identification facing up. 6. The overall height for dimension "D" with the selective spacer plate included should be 30.515 mm - 31.401 mm (1.20" - 1.24"). SERVICE ACTION: The new lo and reverse clutch assembly components may be used on all 1982 through 1987 transmissions only if all the new service parts and procedures for selection of the clutch pack clearance are used during assembly. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > ATRASIL8810 > Feb > 88 > A/T 700R4 New Lo & Reverse Clutch Assembly > Page 2087 PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION Lo and Reverse Clutch Spacer Plate (Selective) 8667584 Identification 4-Refer to Figure 8 8667585 Identification 5-Refer to Figure 8 6261120 Identification None-Refer to Figure 8 8667583 Lo and Reverse Clutch Piston 8648987 Lo and Reverse Clutch Piston Seals 8642472 Lo and Reverse Clutch Plate Assembly (fiber-S required) 6261120 Lo and Revers Clutch Plate (steel - 4 required) 8667048 Lo and Reverse Clutch Wave Plate 8663890 Retainer and Ball Assembly (double orifice) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 8563 > Apr > 85 > A/T - Forward Clutch Plate Assembly Modifications Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Forward Clutch Plate Assembly Modifications 85-63 7A (VIIc) APR., 1985 Subject: FORWARD CLUTCH PLATE ASSEMBLY Model and Year: 1982-85 THM 700-R4 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS At the start of production of the 1985 THM 700-R4 transmission, ALL MODELS will be built with thicker steel clutch plates and thinner composition clutch plates in the forward clutch assembly. NOTICE: THE THICKNESS CHANGE IN THE PLATES DOES NOT AFFECT THE OVERALL "STACK UP" DIMENSION FOR THE FORWARD CLUTCH ASSEMBLY WHEN USED IN SETS AS SHOWN BELOW. DO NOT MIX THE NEW PLATES WITH PLATES FOR TRANSMISSIONS BUILT PRIOR TO THE 1985 MODEL YEAR. USE A MICROMETER TO INSURE THE PROPER PLATE USAGE. Your parts catalog should reflect information contained in the chart below. PART NUMBER PART NAME THICKNESS MODEL YEAR 8642167 FORWARD CLUTCH PLATE 1.97 mm (.077") 1982-1984 8647350 FORWARD CLUTCH PLATE ASSEMBLY 2.03 mm (.079") 1982-1984 8654325 FORWARD CLUTCH PLATE 2.29 mm (.090") 1985 8654324 FORWARD CLUTCH PLATE ASSEMBLY 1.78 mm (.070") 1985 8642991 OVERHAUL REPAIR PACKAGE 1982-1984 8647980 OVERHAUL REPAIR PACKAGE 1985 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 855 > Oct > 84 > A/T - Burned 3-4 Clutch/High 2nd-3rd Gear Shifts Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Burned 3-4 Clutch/High 2nd-3rd Gear Shifts Number: 85-5 Section: 7A (VIIc) Date: Oct., 1984 Subject: BURNED 3-4 CLUTCH AND/OR HIGH 2-3 SHIFTS Model and Year: ALL 1982-85 THM 700-R4 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and supercedes Chevrolet Dealer Service Bulletin 84-107 dated April, 1984 which should be destroyed. This bulletin updates model year usage and supplies additional information pertaining to checking for bleed-off of the orifice cup plug. FIGURE 7 - Bleed Orifice Cup Plug Starting production of all 1985 THM 700-R4 transmissions an air bleed orifice cup plug was added to the input clutch housing (Figure 7). Due to this change, the procedure listed below for air checking the 3-4 clutch piston and the check ball has been revised. Some 1982-84 THM 700-R4 transmissions may exhibit a burned 3-4 clutch, and/or high 2-3 shifts. (The high 2-3 shifts are experienced on "C/K/G" truck gas/diesel applications only.) FIGURE 5 - Transmission Identification Label Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 855 > Oct > 84 > A/T - Burned 3-4 Clutch/High 2nd-3rd Gear Shifts > Page 2096 FIGURE 6 - THM 700-R4 TRANSMISSION-I.D. LOCATION Starting January 15, (Julian Date 015) 1984, all THM 700-R4 transmissions are being built with a new input housing and shaft assembly and control valve body assembly. Refer to Figures 5 and 6 for Julian Date location. FIGURE 1 - FORMER INPUT HOUSING & SHAFT ASSEMBLY The former input housing and shaft assembly had a check ball seat drilled into the housing. A check ball was installed into this hole and the opening was then staked to retain the ball (see Figure 1). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 855 > Oct > 84 > A/T - Burned 3-4 Clutch/High 2nd-3rd Gear Shifts > Page 2097 FIGURE 2 - NEW INPUT HOUSING & SHAFT ASSEMBLY The new input housing and shaft assembly has a check valve retainer and ball assembly which is pressed into the housing (see Figure 2). Only the new input housing and shaft assembly is available for service. Refer to the parts manual for correct part numbers and model application. Also, for the burned 3-4 clutch, air check the 3rd and 4th clutch piston and the check ball in the input clutch housing for leaks by following the procedure as listed below: FIGURE 2 - NEW INPUT HOUSING & SHAFT ASSEMBLY Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 855 > Oct > 84 > A/T - Burned 3-4 Clutch/High 2nd-3rd Gear Shifts > Page 2098 FIGURE 4 - AIR CHECK OF HOUSING & SHAFT ASSEMBLY 1. If you have an input clutch housing which does not have the new air bleed orifice cup plug (Figure 2) then, place your thumb firmly over the oil hole on the turbine shaft shown in Figure 4. FIGURE 7 - Bleed Orifice Cup Plug FIGURE 8 - Turbine Shaft 2. If you have an input clutch housing which has the new air bleed orifice cup plug (Figure 7) then, place your middle finger over the air bleed orifice cup plug and your index finger over the oil hole on the turbine shaft as shown in Figure 8. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 855 > Oct > 84 > A/T - Burned 3-4 Clutch/High 2nd-3rd Gear Shifts > Page 2099 FIGURE 4 - AIR CHECK OF HOUSING & SHAFT ASSEMBLY 3. Place the nozzle of an air gun over the check valve hole shown in Figure 4. 4. Inject a short blast of air into the check valve hole. 5. After injecting the air into the check valve hole, release your thumb off the oil hole on the turbine shaft. As you remove your thumb off the oil hole, you should hear air escape. 6. If you do not hear air escape from the oil hole, remove the 3rd and 4th clutch piston assembly and inspect it for damage. Also, check the check ball for proper sealing. If you hear air escape from the oil hole, the piston assembly and the check valve are good. FIGURE 3 - NEW CONTROL VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY The new control valve body assembly is for the burned 3-4 clutch, and the high 2-3 shifts which are experienced on the "C/K/G" trucks gas/diesel applications only. The new control valve body assembly is identified with an "X" on the casting (see Figure 3) to distinguish it from the past control valve body assembly. Only the new control valve body assembly is available for service. Refer to the parts manual for correct part numbers and model applications. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft Number: 84-177 Section: 7A (VIIc) Date: July, 1984 Subject: BURNED OVERRUN CLUTCH, FORWARD CLUTCH, AND 3-4 CLUTCH PLATE ASSEMBLIES Model and Year: ALL THM 700-R4 - 1982 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Beginning April 16, 1984 (Julian Date 107), a new input housing and shaft assembly and oil pump assembly went into production for all models of the THM 700-R4 transmission. In addition, new torque converters went into production for all 298 mm applications (4.1L in-line L6; V8 gas and diesel engines). FIGURE 1 - Transmission Identification All transmissions built starting with Julian Date 107 are stamped with the letter "T" on the pan rail after the transmission identification number (Figure 1). The letter "T" will only be used for the remainder of the 1984 model year. These production changes eliminate the possibility of burned clutch packs in the input housing due to hairline cracks which could develop across the ring grooves in the turbine shaft. A crack in this area of the turbine shaft on models built prior to this change could cause one or any combination of the following clutches to slip and overheat due to loss of apply pressure: A. Overrun Clutch Pack B. Forward Clutch Pack C. 3-4 Clutch Pack SERVICE INFORMATION 1. If any 1982, 1983 or 1984 THM 700-R4 transmission (built prior to Julian Date 107) experiences burned clutch packs within the input housing assembly, check for a possible cracked turbine shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft > Page 2104 FIGURE 2 - Stator Shaft Sleeve IMPORTANT: A hairline crack in the turbine shaft is not always detected by visually inspecting the shaft. To determine if the shaft is cracked, inspect the stator shaft sleeve for possible score marks in the inner diameter (Figure 2). If scoring is found, the probable cause is a crack in the turbine shaft which opens under torque conditions and produces the scoring and burned clutch packs. If this condition is found, replace both the input housing and shaft assembly and the oil pump assembly complete. Due to recent changes in the oil pump cover and pump body castings, these parts are serviced as an assembly for 1982 through 1984.. 2. Oil pump assemblies, input housing and shaft assemblies, and converters can be purchased separately as shown in the following Charts #1, #2, and #3, respectively. However, any transmission built prior to this change (1982, 1983, or 1984 not identified by a "T") must use the part numbers shown in the column marked "before Julian Date 107". Any 1984 transmission built after this change (identified by the letter "T") must use the part numbers in the column marked "after Julian Date 107". 3. Due to the numerous changes made on the above parts, those shown for use prior to the change must not be interchanged with those shown for use after the change. Interchanging these parts will result in conditions such as: A. Interference fits B. Loose fits C. No drive D. Possible repeat cracks in the turbine shaft E. Future confusion if the transmission should require additional service. CHART 1 YEAR MODELS PART NAME BEFORE STARTING JULIAN DATE WITH JULIAN 107 DATE 107 1982 T5, YK, YL, T6, TW, YA, TC, TE, TH, TJ, TK, M2, OIL PUMP M4, M5, M7, MB, MC, MD, ASSY. COMPLETE 8647967 ME, Y3, Y4, Y6 1982 M6, MH, TN, TP OIL PUMP 8647968 ASSY. COMPLETE 1983 TC, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TE, TH, TK, MD, ME, MW, VH, OIL PUMP T2, VA, YN, ML, MP, MS, ASSY. COMPLETE 8647967 T7, MK, YG, PQ, YP, YK, Y9, YF 1983 YH, TS, TZ, T8, TP, MH, OIL PUMP 8647968 VJ, TL ASSY. COMPLETE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft > Page 2105 1984 MB, MC, MD, VH, TE, ME, MK, MJ, VN, TC, TH, MW, OIL PUMP TK, VA, YF, PQ, YG, YP, ASSY COMPLETE 8647967 YK, Y6, YN, YA, Y9, YW 1984 TL, TZ, ML, MP, MS, T7, Oil Pump YH, Y7, Y8, TS, MR, TG, ASSY. Complete 8647968 8654309 TD 1984 MH, VX, VJ, VE, TM, T8, OIL PUMP MG ASSY. COMPLETE 8647969 8654310 CHART 2 YEAR MODELS PART NAME BEFORE STARTING JULIAN DATE WITH JULIAN 107 DATE 107 1982 T5, YK, YL, T6, TW, YA, TC, TE, TH, TJ, TK, M2, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 M4, M5, M7, MB, MC, MD, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) ME, Y3, Y4, Y6, M6, MH, TN, TP 1983 TC, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TE, TH, TK, MD, ME, MW, VH, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 TZ, MK, YN, YF, YG, YP, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) YK, Y9, TS, T8, TP, MH, VJ, TL 1983 T2, VA, ML, MP, MS, T7, INPUT HOUSING *8647128 YH, YF, PQ AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647965) 1984 MB, MC, MD, VH, MR, TG, ME, MK, MJ, VN, TC, TH, MW, TD, TK, MG, MH, VX, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 VJ, TL, VE, TM, TZ, T8, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) 8654156 TE, YP, Y8, TS, YK, Y6, YN, YA, Y9, YW, YG 1984 VA, ML, MP, MS, T7, YH, INPUT HOUSING *8647128 YF, PQ, Y7 AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647965) 8654155 * These part numbers will be superseded by the numbers shown in ( ) Approx. in October 1984. Torque converter assemblies for 1982, 1983, and 1984 models built prior to Julian Date 107, use current released part numbers. Torque converter assemblies for 1984 models starting with Julian Date 107, use the part numbers as shown in the chart below: CHART 3 1984 MODEL TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY PART NUMBERS STARTING WITH JULIAN DATE 107 MG, MH, VX, VJ, VE, TM, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647903 TZ, T8 YK, Y6, MD, VH, MR, TG, TE, ME, MK, TH, MK, TH, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647901 MW, TD, TK Y8 CONVERTER ASSY. 8647900 YG, TS, YN, YA, Y9, YW, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647904 YP, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TC CONVERTER ASSY. 8647902 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 83120 > Jan > 84 > A/T - Clutch Bulletin Index Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Clutch Bulletin Index Number: 83-120 Section: 7c (VIIa) Date: Jan.., 1984 Subject: CLUTCH BULLETIN INDEX Model and Year: 1982-83 CAMARO AND TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This is a consolidated index for your convenience of all bulletins (Information and Technical) released on clutches from 1982 through 1983. Carline Engine Subject Bulletin # Camaro 2.5L L4 Reverse Clutch Chatter 83-T-69 July, 1983 Camaro 2.5L L4 Clutch Linkage Buzz 82-T-143 and Modulation May, 1983 Camaro 2.8L V6 Reverse Clutch Chatter 83-T-90 (CANCELLED AND REPLACED BY 83-113) Oct., 1983 Camaro 2.8L V6 Reverse Clutch Chatter 83-113 (REPLACES 83-T-90) Nov., 1983 Camaro L4, V6, V8 Loose Cordon Shaft 83-T-6 Mounting Bracket Apr., 1983 Camaro 2.8L V6 Reverse Clutch Chatter 82-T-132 Dec., 1982 Camaro 5.0L V8 Forward Clutch Chatter To Be Released Trucks Engine Subject Bulletin # "S/T" 2.8L V6 Clutch Chatter First 83-93 or Reverse Oct., 1983 S-10 2.8L V6 Neutral Gear Rattle 82-T-46 Mar., 1983 Truck Engine Subject Bulletin # "C/K" 83-T-7 10-30 6.2L Diesel Clutch Groan Dec., 1982 Kodiak 3208 Cater- Clutch Linkage High 83-T-85 (H.D.) pillar Pedal Effort Sept., 1983 Truck "C/K" 6.2L Diesel Neutral Gear Rattle 82-T-76 89 mm 4-Speed June, 1982 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Number: 89-262-5 Section: 5 Date: September 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 915002 Subject: LIGHT BRAKE DRAG - BRAKE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Model and Year: 1980-89 A, B, F, G, J, L, X, Y 1980-89 ALL TRUCKS Figure 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 89-178-5, DATED JUNE 1989, IN ORDER THAT WE MAY CORRECTLY IDENTIFY THE SWITCH REQUIRING ADJUSTMENT. ALL COPIES OF 89-178-5 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some vehicles may experience a condition of light brake drag while driving. These conditions have been found to be more noticeable on vehicles which have an anti-lock brake system. This may be caused by improper brake switch adjustment. If the brake switch is not adjusted properly, the switch may push on the brake pedal and cause the brake to remain partially applied. If a vehicle exhibits any of the above conditions, perform the following functional brake switch adjustment check: Passenger Cars Only: The following steps should be used to check brake switch adjustment: 1. Remove the driver-side hush panel (refer to Figure 1). 2. Gently pull back on the brake pedal until no audible clicks are heard. The switch will be moved in the tubular retainer providing adjustment. 3. Replace the hush panel. 4. Verify that the brake drag condition is no longer present and that the cruise control and brake lights function properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving > Page 2115 If the functional brake switch adjustment check does not repair the condition, refer to Section 5 of the appropriate Service Information Manual for aid in diagnosing other causes. For warranty purposes use: Labor Operation Number: N2440 Labor Time: .3 hour TRUCK ONLY: Service Procedure: 1. Depress the brake pedal and press the switch in until it is firmly seated in the clip. * Audible "clicks" can be heard as the threaded portion of the switch is pushed through the clip. 2. Pull the brake pedal against the pedal stop until the audible "click" can no longer be heard. For stop lamp switch adjustments on vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation Number: T7945 Labor Time: .2 Hr. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving > Page 2121 If the functional brake switch adjustment check does not repair the condition, refer to Section 5 of the appropriate Service Information Manual for aid in diagnosing other causes. For warranty purposes use: Labor Operation Number: N2440 Labor Time: .3 hour TRUCK ONLY: Service Procedure: 1. Depress the brake pedal and press the switch in until it is firmly seated in the clip. * Audible "clicks" can be heard as the threaded portion of the switch is pushed through the clip. 2. Pull the brake pedal against the pedal stop until the audible "click" can no longer be heard. For stop lamp switch adjustments on vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation Number: T7945 Labor Time: .2 Hr. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-037E Date: April 07, 2011 Subject: Release of DEXRON(R)-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2008 HUMMER H2 2006-2008 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saturn Relay 2005 and Prior Saturn L-Series 2005-2007 Saturn ION 2005-2008 Saturn VUE with 4T45-E 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Except 2008 and Prior Chevrolet Aveo, Equinox Except 2006 and Prior Chevrolet Epica Except 2007 and Prior Chevrolet Optra Except 2008 and Prior Pontiac Torrent, Vibe, Wave Except 2003-2005 Saturn ION with CVT or AF23 Only Except 1991-2002 Saturn S-Series Except 2008 and Prior Saturn VUE with CVT, AF33 or 5AT (MJ7/MJ8) Transmission Only Except 2008 Saturn Astra Attention: DEXRON(R)-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is the only approved fluid for warranty repairs for General Motors transmissions/transaxles requiring DEXRON(R)-III and/or prior DEXRON(R) transmission fluids. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-037D (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSFER CASES and POWER STEERING The content of this bulletin does not apply to manual transmissions or transfer cases. Any vehicle that previously required DEXRON(R)-III for a manual transmission or transfer case should now use P/N 88861800. This fluid is labeled Manual Transmission and Transfer Case Fluid. Some manual transmissions and transfer cases require a different fluid. Appropriate references should be checked when servicing any of these components. Power Steering Systems should now use P/N 9985010 labeled Power Steering Fluid. Consult the Parts Catalog, Owner's Manual, or Service Information (SI) for fluid recommendations. Some of our customers and/or General Motors dealerships/Saturn Retailers may have some concerns with DEXRON(R)-VI and DEXRON(R)-III Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) and transmission warranty claims. DEXRON(R)-VI is the only approved fluid for warranty repairs for General Motors transmissions/transaxles requiring DEXRON(R)-III and/or prior DEXRON(R) transmission fluids (except as noted above). Please remember that the clean oil reservoirs of the J-45096 - Flushing and Flow Tester machine should be purged of DEXRON(R)-III and filled with DEXRON(R)-VI for testing, flushing or filling General Motors transmissions/transaxles (except as noted above). DEXRON(R)-VI can be used in any proportion in past model vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission/transaxle in place of DEXRON(R)-III (i.e. topping off the fluid in the event of a repair or fluid change). DEXRON(R)-VI is also compatible with any former version of DEXRON(R) for use in automatic transmissions/transaxles. DEXRON(R)-VI ATF General Motors Powertrain has upgraded to DEXRON(R)-VI ATF with the start of 2006 vehicle production. Current and prior automatic transmission models that had used DEXRON(R)-III must now only use DEXRON(R)-VI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 2126 All 2006 and future model transmissions that use DEXRON(R)-VI are to be serviced ONLY with DEXRON(R)-VI fluid. DEXRON(R)-VI is an improvement over DEXRON(R)-III in the following areas: * These ATF change intervals remain the same as DEXRON(R)-III for the time being. 2006-2008 Transmission Fill and Cooler Flushing Some new applications of the 6L80 six speed transmission will require the use of the J 45096 Flushing and Flow Tester to accomplish transmission fluid fill. The clean oil reservoir of the machine should be purged of DEXRON(R)-III and filled with DEXRON(R)-VI. Parts Information Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 2127 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 2128 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 2129 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels 85-54 6 (VI) MAR., 1985 Subject: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE OIL LEVELS Model and Year:ALL PASSENGER AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and replaces Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 83-I-57 which should be destroyed. The following chart provides a guide for minimum acceptable oil levels "as received" from the factory. Only those components which have levels less than indicated below should have additional oil installed. Engine - Full mark to 6 mm (.24 in.) below full mark. Transmission a) Automatic - With engine idling, transmission selector in "Park", vehicle on a level surface and oil temperature between 10 to 38~C the oil level on the following transmissions should be as indicated: 440-T4 Transmission: Oil level should be in middle of cross-hatch area. 125/125C Transmission: Oil level should be slightly above full level. All other Transmissions: Oil level should be slightly below add level. If oil level gauge has dimples below add mark, oil level should be between these two dimples. b) Manual 1) Lower edge of inspection plug hole on rear wheel drive vehicles. 2) Between cold level range dimples or at cold level mark on front wheel drive vehicles. Differential - Lower edge of inspection plug hole to 9.5 mm (.37 in.) below lower edge of inspection plug hole. Transfer Case - Lower edge of inspection plug hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 2130 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - DEXRON III Fluid Introduction File In Section: 0 - General Information Bulletin No.: 57-02-01 Date: March, 1995 SERVICE MANUAL UPDATE Subject: Section 0 - General Information - DEXRON(R)-III Transmission Fluid Introduction Models: 1995 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks General Motors has phased in a new automatic transmission fluid, DEXRON(R)-III, that does not need replacing under normal service. DEXRON(R)-III is designed to help the transmission deliver the best possible performance under all conditions. Refer to Figure 1. The improvements in DEXRON(R)-III include better friction stability, more high temperature oxidation stability and better material compatibility. DEXRON(R)-III has the same low temperature fluidity as DEXRON(R)-IIE, for better transmission performance in cold weather. DEXRON(R)-IIE and DEXRON(R)-III are fully compatible. DEXRON(R)-III is fully compatible with any General Motors passenger vehicle or light truck with automatic transmission and built since 1949. Dealers should require their supplier to include the DEXRON(R)-III license number on all automatic transmission fluid invoices. Starting February 1, 1994 DEXRON(R)-III was phased into all North American assembly plants. DEXRON(R)-III fluid is available from GMSPO (see fluid numbers below): U.S. 1 Quart 12346143 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 2131 1 Gallon 12346144 55 Gallon 12346145 In Canada 1 Liter 10952622 4 Liter 10952623 200 Liter 10952624 The 1995 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle fluid change intervals are the following: (1994 and prior should use the schedules as written in the Owner's Manual.) If the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. In hilly or mountainous terrain. When doing frequent trailer towing. Uses such as found in taxi, police car or delivery service. Change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (63,000 km). If the vehicle is not used mainly under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require periodic changing for vehicles under 8,600 GVWR. Vehicles over 8,600 GVWR change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83,000 km) regardless of driving conditions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - DEXRON(R)-VI Fluid Information > Page 2132 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - New Trans Fluid, Dexron IIE Number: 92-26-7A Section: 7A Date: OCT. 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 177125 ASE No.: A2 Subject: DEXRON-IIE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE FLUID Model and Year: 1976-92 ALL TRUCKS WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION APPLICATIONS: SUBJECT: All Automatic Transmissions DEXRON-IIE Automatic Transmission/Transaxle Fluid TRANSMISSION MODELS: VEHICLE APPLICATIONS: All All HYDRA-MATIC Automatic Transmissions/Transaxles Bulletin Covers: General Motors Corporation has developed a new service fill automatic transmission/transaxle fluid which is designated DEXRON-IIE. This fluid is the preferred fluid for all HYDRA-MATIC automatic transmission/transaxles and will eventually replace DEXRON II. DEXRON-IIE is acceptable for use wherever DEXRON II was previously specified. DEXRON II is acceptable for use when DEXRON-IIE is not available. DEXRON-IIE can be used in both electronically and hydraulically controlled transmissions/transaxles. DEXRON-IIE Advantages: ^ Has better anti-foaming characteristics. ^ Improved low temperature flow characteristics (low temperature viscosity) and improved high temperature oxidation stability. ^ DEXRON-IIE and DEXRON II can be mixed in any ratio. No draining or flushing of system is required. ^ DEXRON-IIE is back serviceable to 1949 for all General Motors automatic transmission/transaxles. ^ No change in transmission/transaxle calibration or reduction in transmission/transaxle durability will occur as a result of using DEXRON-IIE. Service Parts Information: PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 12345881 1 quart container 12345882 1 gallon container 12345883 55 gallon drum Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Leaded Gasoline Models TYPE.................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................AF CAPACITY, Initial refill*: Hydra-Matic 350............................................................................................ .....................................................................................2.8 Liters 3.0 Quarts Hydra-Matic 200 & 400.. .............................................................................................................................................................. ......3.3 Liters 3.5 Quarts Hydra-Matic 700-R4...................................................................................... .....................................................................................4.7 Liters 5.0 Quarts *With the engine at operating temperature, shift transmission through all gears. Let engine slow idle in PARK for 3 minutes or more. Check fluid level and add fluid as needed Unleaded Gasoline Models TYPE.................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................AF CAPACITY, Initial refill*: Hydra-Matic 350............................................................................................ ....................................................................................2.8 Liters 3.0 Quarts Hydra-Matic 200 & 400... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....3.3 Liters 3.5 Quarts Hydra-Matic 700-R4........................................................................................ ..................................................................................4.7 Liters 5.0 Quarts * With the engine at operating temperature, shift transmission through all gears. Let engine slow idle in PARK for 3 minutes or more. Check fluid level and add fluid as needed THM 400/475 Transmission Pan Capacity ....................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 4.0 Qts Overhaul Capacity ......................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... 11.5 Qts THM 700-R4 Transmission Pan Capacity ....................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 5.0 Qts Overhaul Capacity ......................................... ........................................................................................................................................................... 11.5 Qts Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2135 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications THM 700-R4 Transmission Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Dextron II THM 400/475 Transmission Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ................................................................. Dextron II Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Updated Side Cover Or Bottom Pan Removal Fluid Pan: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Updated Side Cover Or Bottom Pan Removal 85-36 7A (VIIc) FEB., 1985 Subject: USAGE OF HEX HEAD SCREWS AND CONICAL WASHER ASSEMBLIES Model and Year: THM TRANSMISSIONS OR TRANSAXLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS When servicing any THM transmission or transaxle and removal of the side cover and/or bottom pan is required, IT IS NOT ALWAYS NECESSARY TO REPLACE THE HEX HEAD SCREWS AND CONICAL WASHER ASSEMBLIES. HEX HEAD SCREW AND CONICAL WASHER ASSEMBLY NOTICE: Screws with the coating stripped away exposing the exterior portion of the head or washer should be replaced. Also, replace those hex head screws if the washer is inverted (see illustration below). Insert this information in the appropriate section of your 1985 service manual. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2140 Fluid Pan: Specifications Oil pan bolts ......................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 8 ft lbs Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description A pressure sensitive switch is screwed through the rear face of the valve body assembly into the direct clutch oil passage. This switch is closed (grounded) in all but direct drive and reverse, since there is no oil pressure in this passage in Neutral, First or Second gear. The pressure switch is connected by a wire to a transmission connector and hence through an engine solenoid valve to the distributor and engine thermoswitch. When this circuit is grounded (switch closed), spark advance is retarded. When the transmission shifts to high gear (or reverse), oil pressure in the direct clutch passage will open the switch and circuit so that the transmission will no longer affect the vacuum advance of the distributor. Line Pressure Regulator Regulates line pressure according to pump speed and engine torque. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 8535 > Feb > 85 > A/T - Replacement of the Pump Body Oil Seal Assembly Fluid Pump: Customer Interest A/T - Replacement of the Pump Body Oil Seal Assembly 85-35 7A (VIIc) FEB., 1985 Subject: REPLACEMENT OF THE PUMP BODY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY Model and Year: ALL 1982 THRU 1985 THM 700-R4 TRANSMISSION TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS When replacing the pump body oil seal assembly on all THM 700-R4 transmissions, it is recommended that Loctite TM RC/609, or its equivalent, be used. This compound, when applied according to the manufacturer's instructions, will aid in the retention of the seal in the pump body. NOTICE: IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT DURING THE APPLICATION OF THIS COMPOUND TO THE SEAL AND BORE THAT EXCESS COMPOUND DOES NOT GET INTO THE OIL DRAINBACK PASSAGE. Use the following steps as a guide, along with the proper service manual, for the removal and installation of the oil seal assembly. 1. Pry out old seal using a screwdriver or suitable puller. 2. Inspect the seal bore for the following: A. Porosity or cracks - replace the pump body if either of these conditions are found. B. Nicks or burrs - use crocus cloth to polish, but do not enlarge the bore. 3. Clear the seal bore with a suitable solvent to insure that it is free of dirt and oil. 4. Apply Locitite TM RC/609, or equivalent, to the mating surfaces of the new seal and seal bore per the sealant manufacturer's instructions. 5. Install the new seal assembly using tool J-25016. 6. Inspect the seal to insure that it is properly seated and the garter spring is in place. 7. Allow the compound to fully cure according to the sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft Fluid Pump: Customer Interest A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft Number: 84-177 Section: 7A (VIIc) Date: July, 1984 Subject: BURNED OVERRUN CLUTCH, FORWARD CLUTCH, AND 3-4 CLUTCH PLATE ASSEMBLIES Model and Year: ALL THM 700-R4 - 1982 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Beginning April 16, 1984 (Julian Date 107), a new input housing and shaft assembly and oil pump assembly went into production for all models of the THM 700-R4 transmission. In addition, new torque converters went into production for all 298 mm applications (4.1L in-line L6; V8 gas and diesel engines). FIGURE 1 - Transmission Identification All transmissions built starting with Julian Date 107 are stamped with the letter "T" on the pan rail after the transmission identification number (Figure 1). The letter "T" will only be used for the remainder of the 1984 model year. These production changes eliminate the possibility of burned clutch packs in the input housing due to hairline cracks which could develop across the ring grooves in the turbine shaft. A crack in this area of the turbine shaft on models built prior to this change could cause one or any combination of the following clutches to slip and overheat due to loss of apply pressure: A. Overrun Clutch Pack B. Forward Clutch Pack C. 3-4 Clutch Pack SERVICE INFORMATION 1. If any 1982, 1983 or 1984 THM 700-R4 transmission (built prior to Julian Date 107) experiences burned clutch packs within the input housing assembly, check for a possible cracked turbine shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft > Page 2156 FIGURE 2 - Stator Shaft Sleeve IMPORTANT: A hairline crack in the turbine shaft is not always detected by visually inspecting the shaft. To determine if the shaft is cracked, inspect the stator shaft sleeve for possible score marks in the inner diameter (Figure 2). If scoring is found, the probable cause is a crack in the turbine shaft which opens under torque conditions and produces the scoring and burned clutch packs. If this condition is found, replace both the input housing and shaft assembly and the oil pump assembly complete. Due to recent changes in the oil pump cover and pump body castings, these parts are serviced as an assembly for 1982 through 1984.. 2. Oil pump assemblies, input housing and shaft assemblies, and converters can be purchased separately as shown in the following Charts #1, #2, and #3, respectively. However, any transmission built prior to this change (1982, 1983, or 1984 not identified by a "T") must use the part numbers shown in the column marked "before Julian Date 107". Any 1984 transmission built after this change (identified by the letter "T") must use the part numbers in the column marked "after Julian Date 107". 3. Due to the numerous changes made on the above parts, those shown for use prior to the change must not be interchanged with those shown for use after the change. Interchanging these parts will result in conditions such as: A. Interference fits B. Loose fits C. No drive D. Possible repeat cracks in the turbine shaft E. Future confusion if the transmission should require additional service. CHART 1 YEAR MODELS PART NAME BEFORE STARTING JULIAN DATE WITH JULIAN 107 DATE 107 1982 T5, YK, YL, T6, TW, YA, TC, TE, TH, TJ, TK, M2, OIL PUMP M4, M5, M7, MB, MC, MD, ASSY. COMPLETE 8647967 ME, Y3, Y4, Y6 1982 M6, MH, TN, TP OIL PUMP 8647968 ASSY. COMPLETE 1983 TC, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TE, TH, TK, MD, ME, MW, VH, OIL PUMP T2, VA, YN, ML, MP, MS, ASSY. COMPLETE 8647967 T7, MK, YG, PQ, YP, YK, Y9, YF 1983 YH, TS, TZ, T8, TP, MH, OIL PUMP 8647968 VJ, TL ASSY. COMPLETE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft > Page 2157 1984 MB, MC, MD, VH, TE, ME, MK, MJ, VN, TC, TH, MW, OIL PUMP TK, VA, YF, PQ, YG, YP, ASSY COMPLETE 8647967 YK, Y6, YN, YA, Y9, YW 1984 TL, TZ, ML, MP, MS, T7, Oil Pump YH, Y7, Y8, TS, MR, TG, ASSY. Complete 8647968 8654309 TD 1984 MH, VX, VJ, VE, TM, T8, OIL PUMP MG ASSY. COMPLETE 8647969 8654310 CHART 2 YEAR MODELS PART NAME BEFORE STARTING JULIAN DATE WITH JULIAN 107 DATE 107 1982 T5, YK, YL, T6, TW, YA, TC, TE, TH, TJ, TK, M2, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 M4, M5, M7, MB, MC, MD, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) ME, Y3, Y4, Y6, M6, MH, TN, TP 1983 TC, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TE, TH, TK, MD, ME, MW, VH, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 TZ, MK, YN, YF, YG, YP, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) YK, Y9, TS, T8, TP, MH, VJ, TL 1983 T2, VA, ML, MP, MS, T7, INPUT HOUSING *8647128 YH, YF, PQ AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647965) 1984 MB, MC, MD, VH, MR, TG, ME, MK, MJ, VN, TC, TH, MW, TD, TK, MG, MH, VX, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 VJ, TL, VE, TM, TZ, T8, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) 8654156 TE, YP, Y8, TS, YK, Y6, YN, YA, Y9, YW, YG 1984 VA, ML, MP, MS, T7, YH, INPUT HOUSING *8647128 YF, PQ, Y7 AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647965) 8654155 * These part numbers will be superseded by the numbers shown in ( ) Approx. in October 1984. Torque converter assemblies for 1982, 1983, and 1984 models built prior to Julian Date 107, use current released part numbers. Torque converter assemblies for 1984 models starting with Julian Date 107, use the part numbers as shown in the chart below: CHART 3 1984 MODEL TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY PART NUMBERS STARTING WITH JULIAN DATE 107 MG, MH, VX, VJ, VE, TM, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647903 TZ, T8 YK, Y6, MD, VH, MR, TG, TE, ME, MK, TH, MK, TH, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647901 MW, TD, TK Y8 CONVERTER ASSY. 8647900 YG, TS, YN, YA, Y9, YW, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647904 YP, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TC CONVERTER ASSY. 8647902 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8722 > Jul > 87 > A/T - 700R4 Pump Assembly Casting Number Information Fluid Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 700R4 Pump Assembly Casting Number Information SIL 87-22 (July) SUBJECT: 700 R4 The following casting number information may be helpful in determining if the pump assembly being used is a matched set. To find these numbers, look at the casting of the pump cover and pump body. See Figure 1. YEAR PUMP COVER PUMP BODY 82-83 8642031 8642380 Early 84 8642025 Small turbine shaft bushing 8642380 Late 84 8642025 Large turbine shaft bushing 8642380 85 8654304 8654303 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8722 > Jul > 87 > A/T - 700R4 Pump Assembly Casting Number Information > Page 2163 Early 86 8654304 8654732 Late 86 8663570 8654732 Early 87 8663570 8654732 Some of these pumps will have 10 Vane Rotor Late 87 8663570 8654732 All pumps have 10 vane rotor. Cup plug beside filter inlet removed only on models with auxiliary valve body. The 1985 pump cover (8654304) can be used with the early type pump body (8642380). When using the 1985 pump cover on the early type pump body, plug the hole in the pump cover as shown. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8627 > Nov > 86 > A/T - 2004R/700R4 Oil Pump & Slide Service Fluid Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2004R/700R4 Oil Pump & Slide Service SIL 86-27 (Nov) SUBJECT: 200 R4/700 4R SERVICE PROCEDURES FOR THE OIL PUMP ROTOR & SLIDE Beginning mid November, 1983, service parts became available to service the oil pump rotor and slide of the pump body assembly, on all THM 200-4R and 700-R4 transmissions. This service procedure on all THM 200-4R and 700-R4 transmissions must be followed to assure proper end clearance on the oil pump rotor and slide. SERVICE PROCEDURE: Note DO NOT attempt to service the oil pump rotor if either the pump body pocket or pump body cover surfaces are scored. Servicing of the oil pump rotor and slide should be performed ONLY if the selective pump rotor, or the slide show wear. 1. Disassembly of the oil pump: A. Disassemble the oil pump body assembly following procedures outlined in the service manual. Refer to Figure 1 for the THM 200-4R and Figure 2 for the THM 700-R4 transmission oil pump body assembly. 2. Selecting the pump rotor and slide: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8627 > Nov > 86 > A/T - 2004R/700R4 Oil Pump & Slide Service > Page 2168 A. Use a micrometer to measure the original pump rotor and slide thickness accurately (Figure 3). To obtain the most accurate reading, measure on flat undamaged surfaces. The oil pump rotor and slides for the THM 200-4R and the THM 700-R4 transmissions are the same. B. Using the original part measurement, order replacement parts according to the selective charts. Note The replacement part will provide the same clearance that the oil pump assembly was originally built with. The proper end clearance specification is 0.020 to 0.050 mm. or (.0008") to (.002") for the 200-4R and the 700-R4. C. Hone both sides of the replacement rotor and slide to remove any burrs, and measure the replacement parts with a micrometer to assure proper selection. Note Incorrect rotor selection could result in a damaged oil pump assembly, and/or low oil pressure. Incorrect slide selection could result in incorrect line pressure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > 8535 > Feb > 85 > A/T - Replacement of the Pump Body Oil Seal Assembly Fluid Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Replacement of the Pump Body Oil Seal Assembly 85-35 7A (VIIc) FEB., 1985 Subject: REPLACEMENT OF THE PUMP BODY OIL SEAL ASSEMBLY Model and Year: ALL 1982 THRU 1985 THM 700-R4 TRANSMISSION TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS When replacing the pump body oil seal assembly on all THM 700-R4 transmissions, it is recommended that Loctite TM RC/609, or its equivalent, be used. This compound, when applied according to the manufacturer's instructions, will aid in the retention of the seal in the pump body. NOTICE: IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT DURING THE APPLICATION OF THIS COMPOUND TO THE SEAL AND BORE THAT EXCESS COMPOUND DOES NOT GET INTO THE OIL DRAINBACK PASSAGE. Use the following steps as a guide, along with the proper service manual, for the removal and installation of the oil seal assembly. 1. Pry out old seal using a screwdriver or suitable puller. 2. Inspect the seal bore for the following: A. Porosity or cracks - replace the pump body if either of these conditions are found. B. Nicks or burrs - use crocus cloth to polish, but do not enlarge the bore. 3. Clear the seal bore with a suitable solvent to insure that it is free of dirt and oil. 4. Apply Locitite TM RC/609, or equivalent, to the mating surfaces of the new seal and seal bore per the sealant manufacturer's instructions. 5. Install the new seal assembly using tool J-25016. 6. Inspect the seal to insure that it is properly seated and the garter spring is in place. 7. Allow the compound to fully cure according to the sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8535 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Updated Oil Pump Fluid Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 700R4 Updated Oil Pump SIL 85-35 SUBJECT: 700 R4 PUMPS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8535 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Updated Oil Pump > Page 2177 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8535 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Updated Oil Pump > Page 2178 On June 28, 1984, or Julian Date 180, all models of the 1984 THM 700-R4 transmission (refer to Figure 1) were built using a new pump assembly to reduce pump fluid leaks. This pump change is also used on all 1985 THM 700-R4 transmission models. Refer to Figure 2 for identification of the casting changes and Figure 3 for the reference casting number locations. When replacing the new pump body that is used on all 1985 THM 700-R4 transmissions, use service package Part Number 8649950. The previously released service package, Part Number 8642986 MUST NOT be used in 1985 model transmissions as low line pressures may occur. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8535 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Updated Oil Pump > Page 2179 The pump body and cover are not serviced separately in 1982 through 1984 THM 700-R4 transmissions. Refer to the chart for 1982 through 1985 model year THM 700-R4 service parts information. NOTES: 1 - Use the WDDGM parts catalog for PUMP ASSEMBLY part numbers based on model application. 2 - Use the WDDGM parts catalog for PUMP COVER part numbers based on model application. Refer to the appropriate Service Information Manual for removal and installation procedures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8532 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Front Pump Air Check Fluid Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 700R4 Front Pump Air Check SIL 85-32 Subject: 700-R4 OIL PUMP AIR CHECK Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8532 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Front Pump Air Check > Page 2184 The oil pump assembly can be checked with compressed air to pin point blocked passages. This air check will assure that all the oil passages are open and all the cup plugs are properly installed. However, if an oil passage is only restricted, the use of compressed air will not be effective. If a restriction is suspected, use a pistol type oiler (with transmission fluid) instead of compressed air to perform these checks. IMPORTANT When performing these checks it will be necessary to block certain holes while feeding compressed air into others. For your protection wear rubber gloves and safety glasses. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL856 > Jan > 85 > A/T - THM 400 Front Pump Interchangeability Fluid Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - THM 400 Front Pump Interchangeability SIL 85-6 SUBJECT: 400 Use the illustrated guidelines in helping to determine the interchangeability of THM 400 pump halves. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL856 > Jan > 85 > A/T - THM 400 Front Pump Interchangeability > Page 2189 Note THE SOLID VALVE, 2ND TYPE, MUST ONLY BE USED IN THE PUMP COVER ASSEMBLY WITH THE SQUARED OFF PRESSURE REGULATOR BOSS (PRESSURE BOOST BUSHING END) FIG. 2. THE PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE, 1ST TYPE, WITH OIL HOLES AND ORIFICE CUP PLUG, IS RELEASED FOR SERVICE AND CAN BE USED TO SERVICE EITHER PAST MODEL OR THE CURRENT PUMP COVER ASSEMBLY. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft Fluid Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft Number: 84-177 Section: 7A (VIIc) Date: July, 1984 Subject: BURNED OVERRUN CLUTCH, FORWARD CLUTCH, AND 3-4 CLUTCH PLATE ASSEMBLIES Model and Year: ALL THM 700-R4 - 1982 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Beginning April 16, 1984 (Julian Date 107), a new input housing and shaft assembly and oil pump assembly went into production for all models of the THM 700-R4 transmission. In addition, new torque converters went into production for all 298 mm applications (4.1L in-line L6; V8 gas and diesel engines). FIGURE 1 - Transmission Identification All transmissions built starting with Julian Date 107 are stamped with the letter "T" on the pan rail after the transmission identification number (Figure 1). The letter "T" will only be used for the remainder of the 1984 model year. These production changes eliminate the possibility of burned clutch packs in the input housing due to hairline cracks which could develop across the ring grooves in the turbine shaft. A crack in this area of the turbine shaft on models built prior to this change could cause one or any combination of the following clutches to slip and overheat due to loss of apply pressure: A. Overrun Clutch Pack B. Forward Clutch Pack C. 3-4 Clutch Pack SERVICE INFORMATION 1. If any 1982, 1983 or 1984 THM 700-R4 transmission (built prior to Julian Date 107) experiences burned clutch packs within the input housing assembly, check for a possible cracked turbine shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft > Page 2194 FIGURE 2 - Stator Shaft Sleeve IMPORTANT: A hairline crack in the turbine shaft is not always detected by visually inspecting the shaft. To determine if the shaft is cracked, inspect the stator shaft sleeve for possible score marks in the inner diameter (Figure 2). If scoring is found, the probable cause is a crack in the turbine shaft which opens under torque conditions and produces the scoring and burned clutch packs. If this condition is found, replace both the input housing and shaft assembly and the oil pump assembly complete. Due to recent changes in the oil pump cover and pump body castings, these parts are serviced as an assembly for 1982 through 1984.. 2. Oil pump assemblies, input housing and shaft assemblies, and converters can be purchased separately as shown in the following Charts #1, #2, and #3, respectively. However, any transmission built prior to this change (1982, 1983, or 1984 not identified by a "T") must use the part numbers shown in the column marked "before Julian Date 107". Any 1984 transmission built after this change (identified by the letter "T") must use the part numbers in the column marked "after Julian Date 107". 3. Due to the numerous changes made on the above parts, those shown for use prior to the change must not be interchanged with those shown for use after the change. Interchanging these parts will result in conditions such as: A. Interference fits B. Loose fits C. No drive D. Possible repeat cracks in the turbine shaft E. Future confusion if the transmission should require additional service. CHART 1 YEAR MODELS PART NAME BEFORE STARTING JULIAN DATE WITH JULIAN 107 DATE 107 1982 T5, YK, YL, T6, TW, YA, TC, TE, TH, TJ, TK, M2, OIL PUMP M4, M5, M7, MB, MC, MD, ASSY. COMPLETE 8647967 ME, Y3, Y4, Y6 1982 M6, MH, TN, TP OIL PUMP 8647968 ASSY. COMPLETE 1983 TC, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TE, TH, TK, MD, ME, MW, VH, OIL PUMP T2, VA, YN, ML, MP, MS, ASSY. COMPLETE 8647967 T7, MK, YG, PQ, YP, YK, Y9, YF 1983 YH, TS, TZ, T8, TP, MH, OIL PUMP 8647968 VJ, TL ASSY. COMPLETE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft > Page 2195 1984 MB, MC, MD, VH, TE, ME, MK, MJ, VN, TC, TH, MW, OIL PUMP TK, VA, YF, PQ, YG, YP, ASSY COMPLETE 8647967 YK, Y6, YN, YA, Y9, YW 1984 TL, TZ, ML, MP, MS, T7, Oil Pump YH, Y7, Y8, TS, MR, TG, ASSY. Complete 8647968 8654309 TD 1984 MH, VX, VJ, VE, TM, T8, OIL PUMP MG ASSY. COMPLETE 8647969 8654310 CHART 2 YEAR MODELS PART NAME BEFORE STARTING JULIAN DATE WITH JULIAN 107 DATE 107 1982 T5, YK, YL, T6, TW, YA, TC, TE, TH, TJ, TK, M2, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 M4, M5, M7, MB, MC, MD, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) ME, Y3, Y4, Y6, M6, MH, TN, TP 1983 TC, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TE, TH, TK, MD, ME, MW, VH, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 TZ, MK, YN, YF, YG, YP, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) YK, Y9, TS, T8, TP, MH, VJ, TL 1983 T2, VA, ML, MP, MS, T7, INPUT HOUSING *8647128 YH, YF, PQ AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647965) 1984 MB, MC, MD, VH, MR, TG, ME, MK, MJ, VN, TC, TH, MW, TD, TK, MG, MH, VX, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 VJ, TL, VE, TM, TZ, T8, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) 8654156 TE, YP, Y8, TS, YK, Y6, YN, YA, Y9, YW, YG 1984 VA, ML, MP, MS, T7, YH, INPUT HOUSING *8647128 YF, PQ, Y7 AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647965) 8654155 * These part numbers will be superseded by the numbers shown in ( ) Approx. in October 1984. Torque converter assemblies for 1982, 1983, and 1984 models built prior to Julian Date 107, use current released part numbers. Torque converter assemblies for 1984 models starting with Julian Date 107, use the part numbers as shown in the chart below: CHART 3 1984 MODEL TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY PART NUMBERS STARTING WITH JULIAN DATE 107 MG, MH, VX, VJ, VE, TM, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647903 TZ, T8 YK, Y6, MD, VH, MR, TG, TE, ME, MK, TH, MK, TH, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647901 MW, TD, TK Y8 CONVERTER ASSY. 8647900 YG, TS, YN, YA, Y9, YW, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647904 YP, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TC CONVERTER ASSY. 8647902 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8722 > Jul > 87 > A/T - 700R4 Pump Assembly Casting Number Information Fluid Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 700R4 Pump Assembly Casting Number Information SIL 87-22 (July) SUBJECT: 700 R4 The following casting number information may be helpful in determining if the pump assembly being used is a matched set. To find these numbers, look at the casting of the pump cover and pump body. See Figure 1. YEAR PUMP COVER PUMP BODY 82-83 8642031 8642380 Early 84 8642025 Small turbine shaft bushing 8642380 Late 84 8642025 Large turbine shaft bushing 8642380 85 8654304 8654303 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8722 > Jul > 87 > A/T - 700R4 Pump Assembly Casting Number Information > Page 2201 Early 86 8654304 8654732 Late 86 8663570 8654732 Early 87 8663570 8654732 Some of these pumps will have 10 Vane Rotor Late 87 8663570 8654732 All pumps have 10 vane rotor. Cup plug beside filter inlet removed only on models with auxiliary valve body. The 1985 pump cover (8654304) can be used with the early type pump body (8642380). When using the 1985 pump cover on the early type pump body, plug the hole in the pump cover as shown. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8627 > Nov > 86 > A/T - 2004R/700R4 Oil Pump & Slide Service Fluid Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2004R/700R4 Oil Pump & Slide Service SIL 86-27 (Nov) SUBJECT: 200 R4/700 4R SERVICE PROCEDURES FOR THE OIL PUMP ROTOR & SLIDE Beginning mid November, 1983, service parts became available to service the oil pump rotor and slide of the pump body assembly, on all THM 200-4R and 700-R4 transmissions. This service procedure on all THM 200-4R and 700-R4 transmissions must be followed to assure proper end clearance on the oil pump rotor and slide. SERVICE PROCEDURE: Note DO NOT attempt to service the oil pump rotor if either the pump body pocket or pump body cover surfaces are scored. Servicing of the oil pump rotor and slide should be performed ONLY if the selective pump rotor, or the slide show wear. 1. Disassembly of the oil pump: A. Disassemble the oil pump body assembly following procedures outlined in the service manual. Refer to Figure 1 for the THM 200-4R and Figure 2 for the THM 700-R4 transmission oil pump body assembly. 2. Selecting the pump rotor and slide: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8627 > Nov > 86 > A/T - 2004R/700R4 Oil Pump & Slide Service > Page 2206 A. Use a micrometer to measure the original pump rotor and slide thickness accurately (Figure 3). To obtain the most accurate reading, measure on flat undamaged surfaces. The oil pump rotor and slides for the THM 200-4R and the THM 700-R4 transmissions are the same. B. Using the original part measurement, order replacement parts according to the selective charts. Note The replacement part will provide the same clearance that the oil pump assembly was originally built with. The proper end clearance specification is 0.020 to 0.050 mm. or (.0008") to (.002") for the 200-4R and the 700-R4. C. Hone both sides of the replacement rotor and slide to remove any burrs, and measure the replacement parts with a micrometer to assure proper selection. Note Incorrect rotor selection could result in a damaged oil pump assembly, and/or low oil pressure. Incorrect slide selection could result in incorrect line pressure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8535 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Updated Oil Pump Fluid Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 700R4 Updated Oil Pump SIL 85-35 SUBJECT: 700 R4 PUMPS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8535 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Updated Oil Pump > Page 2211 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8535 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Updated Oil Pump > Page 2212 On June 28, 1984, or Julian Date 180, all models of the 1984 THM 700-R4 transmission (refer to Figure 1) were built using a new pump assembly to reduce pump fluid leaks. This pump change is also used on all 1985 THM 700-R4 transmission models. Refer to Figure 2 for identification of the casting changes and Figure 3 for the reference casting number locations. When replacing the new pump body that is used on all 1985 THM 700-R4 transmissions, use service package Part Number 8649950. The previously released service package, Part Number 8642986 MUST NOT be used in 1985 model transmissions as low line pressures may occur. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8535 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Updated Oil Pump > Page 2213 The pump body and cover are not serviced separately in 1982 through 1984 THM 700-R4 transmissions. Refer to the chart for 1982 through 1985 model year THM 700-R4 service parts information. NOTES: 1 - Use the WDDGM parts catalog for PUMP ASSEMBLY part numbers based on model application. 2 - Use the WDDGM parts catalog for PUMP COVER part numbers based on model application. Refer to the appropriate Service Information Manual for removal and installation procedures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8532 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Front Pump Air Check Fluid Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 700R4 Front Pump Air Check SIL 85-32 Subject: 700-R4 OIL PUMP AIR CHECK Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL8532 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Front Pump Air Check > Page 2218 The oil pump assembly can be checked with compressed air to pin point blocked passages. This air check will assure that all the oil passages are open and all the cup plugs are properly installed. However, if an oil passage is only restricted, the use of compressed air will not be effective. If a restriction is suspected, use a pistol type oiler (with transmission fluid) instead of compressed air to perform these checks. IMPORTANT When performing these checks it will be necessary to block certain holes while feeding compressed air into others. For your protection wear rubber gloves and safety glasses. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL856 > Jan > 85 > A/T - THM 400 Front Pump Interchangeability Fluid Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - THM 400 Front Pump Interchangeability SIL 85-6 SUBJECT: 400 Use the illustrated guidelines in helping to determine the interchangeability of THM 400 pump halves. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid Pump: > ATRASIL856 > Jan > 85 > A/T - THM 400 Front Pump Interchangeability > Page 2223 Note THE SOLID VALVE, 2ND TYPE, MUST ONLY BE USED IN THE PUMP COVER ASSEMBLY WITH THE SQUARED OFF PRESSURE REGULATOR BOSS (PRESSURE BOOST BUSHING END) FIG. 2. THE PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE, 1ST TYPE, WITH OIL HOLES AND ORIFICE CUP PLUG, IS RELEASED FOR SERVICE AND CAN BE USED TO SERVICE EITHER PAST MODEL OR THE CURRENT PUMP COVER ASSEMBLY. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2224 Fluid Pump: Specifications Pump assembly attaching bolts ........................................................................................................... .................................................................... 18 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Governor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Governor: > 913717A > Jul > 91 > A/T 4L60/700-R4 Transmissions Stuck In First Governor: Customer Interest A/T - 4L60/700-R4 Transmissions Stuck In First Number: 91-371-7A Section: 7A Date: JULY 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 177113R Subject: TRANSMISSION STUCK IN FIRST GEAR Model and Year: 1982-91 CAPRICE, CAMARO AND CORVETTE 1982-91 C/K, G, S/T, 1985-91 M VAN 1987-91 R/V AND 1990-91 L VAN WITH 4L60 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Figure 1 Bulletin Covers: Some HYDRA-MATIC 4L60/700-R4 transmissions may experience a "no upshift" or "stuck in first gear" condition. This may be caused by the input carrier to output shaft retaining ring coming unseated, or retaining ring omitted during assembly. This can allow the output shaft to move slightly, and cause wear on the governor gear (the governor gear ON THE GOVERNOR, not the governor drive gear on the output shaft). The governor gear wear may be described as an "apple cored" condition. If the governor gear is worn, the transmission cannot upshift out of first gear. Service Information: Remove the governor and inspect the governor gear. If it is "apple cored", disassemble the transmission and look for the presence of the input carrier to output shaft retaining ring. ^ If the retaining ring is missing, replace it, but make sure the original retaining ring is not broken and stuck inside the transmission. ^ If the retaining ring has become unseated, replace the retaining ring with a new one since the original has probably been over-expanded. When installing a new retaining ring, be careful not to over-expand the retaining ring. Service Parts Information: The input carrier to output shaft retaining ring is available in several packages through GMSPO. It is included in the snap ring package, overhaul repair components package, and overhaul seals and gasket package. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Governor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Governor: > 913717A > Jul > 91 > A/T 4L60/700-R4 Transmissions Stuck In First > Page 2233 Service Manual References: Reference the Automatic Transmission Unit Repair Section of the appropriate service manual for retaining ring installation information. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Governor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Governor: > 913717A > Jul > 91 > A/T - 4L60/700-R4 Transmissions Stuck In First Governor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4L60/700-R4 Transmissions Stuck In First Number: 91-371-7A Section: 7A Date: JULY 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 177113R Subject: TRANSMISSION STUCK IN FIRST GEAR Model and Year: 1982-91 CAPRICE, CAMARO AND CORVETTE 1982-91 C/K, G, S/T, 1985-91 M VAN 1987-91 R/V AND 1990-91 L VAN WITH 4L60 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Figure 1 Bulletin Covers: Some HYDRA-MATIC 4L60/700-R4 transmissions may experience a "no upshift" or "stuck in first gear" condition. This may be caused by the input carrier to output shaft retaining ring coming unseated, or retaining ring omitted during assembly. This can allow the output shaft to move slightly, and cause wear on the governor gear (the governor gear ON THE GOVERNOR, not the governor drive gear on the output shaft). The governor gear wear may be described as an "apple cored" condition. If the governor gear is worn, the transmission cannot upshift out of first gear. Service Information: Remove the governor and inspect the governor gear. If it is "apple cored", disassemble the transmission and look for the presence of the input carrier to output shaft retaining ring. ^ If the retaining ring is missing, replace it, but make sure the original retaining ring is not broken and stuck inside the transmission. ^ If the retaining ring has become unseated, replace the retaining ring with a new one since the original has probably been over-expanded. When installing a new retaining ring, be careful not to over-expand the retaining ring. Service Parts Information: The input carrier to output shaft retaining ring is available in several packages through GMSPO. It is included in the snap ring package, overhaul repair components package, and overhaul seals and gasket package. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Governor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Governor: > 913717A > Jul > 91 > A/T - 4L60/700-R4 Transmissions Stuck In First > Page 2239 Service Manual References: Reference the Automatic Transmission Unit Repair Section of the appropriate service manual for retaining ring installation information. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Governor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2240 Governor: Description and Operation The vehicle speed signal to the transmission is supplied by the governor which is driven by the output shaft he governor consists of flyweights and a regulator valve. Centrifugal force of the flyweights is imposed on the regulator valve, causing it to regulate a pressure signal that increases with speed. Governor pressure acts on the modulator valve to cause modulator pressure to decrease as vehicle speed increases. Generates a speed sensitive oil pressure that increases with output shaft or vehicle speed. Governor pressure is used to control the shift points and modulator pressure regulation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Maintenance Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Fluid Level Indicator Available Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Number: 90-406-7A Section: 7A Date: March 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 067107 Subject: AVAILABILITY/SERVICING OF NEW TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL INDICATOR Model and Year: 1982-90 C/K TRUCKS, 1987-90 R/V TRUCKS, 1983-90 G VANS WITH 3L80 OR 4L60 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION A new transmission fluid level indicator featuring a seal at the transmission fill tube inlet end is available. This indicator, which is installed on all 1991 C/K, R/V and G models, may be installed on previous models listed below. SERVICE PROCEDURE: When installing a new transmission fluid level indicator, replacement of the transmission fluid fill tube is not necessary. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION Part Number Model Description 15659455 1982-90 C/K All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15659455 1987-90 RN All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15677051 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 4L60 level indicator 15677052 1987-90 G2 (6.2C) & 4L60 Transmission fluid 1983-86 G All & 4L60 level indicator 15677055 1987-90 G3 (6.2J) & 3L80 Transmission fluid 1987-88 G3 (5.7M) & 3L80 level indicator 1984-86 G All & 3L80 1983 G3 & 3L80 15677056 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 3L80 level indicator 15677057 1988-90 G3 (7.4N) & 3L80 Transmission fluid level indicator Parts are currently available from GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION For vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation: K6130 Use applicable Labor Time Guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Maintenance Indicator A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Number: 90-406-7A Section: 7A Date: March 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 067107 Subject: AVAILABILITY/SERVICING OF NEW TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL INDICATOR Model and Year: 1982-90 C/K TRUCKS, 1987-90 R/V TRUCKS, 1983-90 G VANS WITH 3L80 OR 4L60 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION A new transmission fluid level indicator featuring a seal at the transmission fill tube inlet end is available. This indicator, which is installed on all 1991 C/K, R/V and G models, may be installed on previous models listed below. SERVICE PROCEDURE: When installing a new transmission fluid level indicator, replacement of the transmission fluid fill tube is not necessary. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION Part Number Model Description 15659455 1982-90 C/K All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15659455 1987-90 RN All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15677051 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 4L60 level indicator 15677052 1987-90 G2 (6.2C) & 4L60 Transmission fluid 1983-86 G All & 4L60 level indicator 15677055 1987-90 G3 (6.2J) & 3L80 Transmission fluid 1987-88 G3 (5.7M) & 3L80 level indicator 1984-86 G All & 3L80 1983 G3 & 3L80 15677056 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 3L80 level indicator 15677057 1988-90 G3 (7.4N) & 3L80 Transmission fluid level indicator Parts are currently available from GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION For vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation: K6130 Use applicable Labor Time Guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise Output Shaft: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-07-30-042F Date: February 05, 2010 Subject: Information on 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X with 4L60-E, 4L65-E or 4L70-E Automatic Transmission (RPOs M30, M32, M70) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and 4L70E transmission. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-07-30-042E (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important For 2005 model year fullsize utilities and pickups, refer to Corporate Bulletin 05-07-30-012. Some vehicles may exhibit a clunk noise that can be heard on a 2-3 upshift or a 3-2 downshift. During a 2-3 upshift, the 2-4 band is released and the 3-4 clutch is applied. The timing of this shift can cause a momentary torque reversal of the output shaft that results in a clunk noise. This same torque reversal can also occur on a 3-2 downshift when the 3-4 clutch is released and the 2-4 band applied. This condition may be worse on a 4-wheel drive vehicle due to the additional tolerances in the transfer case. This is a normal condition. No repairs should be attempted. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise > Page 2254 Output Shaft: Technical Service Bulletins A/T- THM 700-R4 New Output Shafts and Seal Number: 91-390-7A Section: 7A Date: AUGUST 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 177118 Subject: NEW OUTPUT SHAFTS AND INPUT HOUSING TO OUTPUT SHAFT SEAL Model and Year: 1982-91 CAPRICE, CAMARO AND CORVETTE, 1982-91 C1/C2, G1/G2, K1/K2, S/T; 1987-91 R/V; 1985-91 M AND 1990-91 L TRUCKS WITH 4L60/THM 700-R4 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION APPLICATIONS: 1982-91 HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 (MD8) THM 700-R4 SUBJECT: New Output Shafts and Input Housing to Output Shaft Seal (Product Service Information) TRANSMISSION MODELS: All VEHICLE APPLICATIONS: B, F, Y - Cars C/K, R/V, S/T - Trucks G, L, M - Vans Figure 1 Bulletin Covers: HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 output shafts and input housing to output shaft seals have been revised to provide increased lube flow. Since lube hole locations have changed, the input housing to output shaft seal has been revised to accommodate them. Date of Production Change: Beginning January 28, 1991 (Julian Date 028), all HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 transmissions were built using the new output shafts and seals. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - 2-3 Upshift or 3-2 Downshift Clunk Noise > Page 2255 Service Information: The NEW SEAL can only be used on the NEW OUTPUT SHAFTS. If the new seal is used on a previous model output shaft, the seal will block one of the lube passages. The previous seal can be used on both the new and previous output shafts. The new output shafts and seal will service any HYDRA-MATIC 4L60/THM 700-R4 transmission ever built. The new output shafts can be identified by lube hole location. They have a lube hole on the chamfer at the front of the output shaft. The lube hole was previously located on the shank of the output shaft. Service Parts Information: The new output shafts and seals will become available for service as current stock is depleted at GMSPO. Reference the GMSPO parts catalog for the correct output shaft to order for your specific transmission application. Service Manual Reference: Refer to the Automatic Transmission Unit Repair Section of the appropriate service manual for output shaft and seal removal and installation information. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft Bearing/Bushing, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Rear Case Bushing - Removal & Installation Procedure Output Shaft Bearing/Bushing: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Rear Case Bushing - Removal & Installation Procedure Number: 90-162-7A Section: 7A Date: February 1990 Corp. Bulletin No.: 077103 Subject: REMOVE REAR CASE BUSHING OR REAR EXTENSION BUSHING - NEW ON-VEHICLE SERVICE PROCEDURE Model and Year: 1976-90 B, F, G, Y CARS & 1976-90 C, G, K, L, M, R, S, T, V TRUCKS WITH THM 200-4R, THM 200-C, THM 200 & 4L60/THM 700R4 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Figure 1 This bulletin covers a new rear bushing (or rear extension bushing) removal/installation procedure that can be performed while the transmission is in the vehicle. This procedure saves labor time on each of the following transmission models: THM 200-4R THM 200-C THM 200 HYDRA-MATIC 4L60/THM 700-R4 Labor savings are different on each model but can be significant. This tool is currently available from Kent-Moore: J 38119 - Rear Case Extension Bushing Remover and Installer IMPORTANT: J 38119 includes two expansion tubes - one silver and one black. Use the BLACK tube for GM transmissions. Begin each procedure by raising vehicle on a hoist. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft Bearing/Bushing, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Rear Case Bushing - Removal & Installation Procedure > Page 2260 Figure 2 Bushing Removal Procedure: (Figure 2) 1. Disconnect propshaft from rear of transmission. 2. Remove rear case seal. 3. Assemble tool as shown in Figure 2. 4. Insert collet into rear opening of transmission case. 5. Slide expansion tube into segmented collet. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft Bearing/Bushing, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Rear Case Bushing - Removal & Installation Procedure > Page 2261 6. Turn cap to lock collet into position. 7. Use a 15/16" end wrench and turn bolt clockwise to remove bushing. 8. Remove J 38119 with collet attached. Figure 3 Bushing Installation Procedure: (Figure 3) 1. Remove long bolt from cap of J 38119. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Output Shaft Bearing/Bushing, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Rear Case Bushing - Removal & Installation Procedure > Page 2262 2. Place new bushing over segmented collet. 3. Slide black expansion tube into segments. 4. Turn cap to lock collet into place. 5. Install new bushing into transmission by driving J 38119 in firmly with a plastic hammer. 6. Turn cap to unlock collet. 7. Remove J 38119. 8. Remove collet. 9. Install rear case seal. 10. Connect propshaft to rear of transmission. SERVICE MANUAL REFERENCE: This procedure is not currently included in any Service Manual. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description A pressure sensitive switch is screwed through the rear face of the valve body assembly into the direct clutch oil passage. This switch is closed (grounded) in all but direct drive and reverse, since there is no oil pressure in this passage in Neutral, First or Second gear. The pressure switch is connected by a wire to a transmission connector and hence through an engine solenoid valve to the distributor and engine thermoswitch. When this circuit is grounded (switch closed), spark advance is retarded. When the transmission shifts to high gear (or reverse), oil pressure in the direct clutch passage will open the switch and circuit so that the transmission will no longer affect the vacuum advance of the distributor. Line Pressure Regulator Regulates line pressure according to pump speed and engine torque. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Electronic Speed Sensor Retainer Bolt ............................................................................................... ...................................................................... 7 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Upshift Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Upshift Solenoid 1-2 Shift Valve Controls the speed at which the 1-2 and 2-1 shifts occur. 2-3 Shift Valve Controls speeds at which 2-3 and 3-2 shifts occur. Stator Valve Used only on transmissions having the variable pitch stator, this valve shifts when line oil is exhausted at end of valve when stator control solenoid is energized. This exhausts oil from the variable pitch stator piston and changes from the low to the high angle. When the stator solenoid is not energized, converter oil is directed to the stator piston and low angle is obtained. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Upshift Solenoid > Page 2274 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Shift Solenoid DESCRIPTION The detent solenoid is activated by an electric switch at the carburetor. When the throttle is opened sufficiently to close this switch, the solenoid in the transmission is activated, causing a downshift at speeds below 70 mph. it lower speeds, downshifts will occur at lesser throttle openings without the use of the electric switch. 1-2 Detent Valve Senses regulated modulator pressure tending to hold 1-2 shift valve downshifted and provides an area for detent pressure for detent 2-1 shifts. Detent Valve Shifts when oil line is exhausted at end of valve when detent solenoid is energized. This directs detent oil to the 1-2 accumulator valve, 1-2 regulator and 2-3 modulator valves, 3-2 valve and the vacuum modulator valve. Detent Regulator Valve When the detent valve shifts, the detent regulator is free to allow drive oil to enter the detent passage and thus becomes regulated at 70 psi. Detent pressure will also flow into the mod lator passage which flows to the shift valves. Low gear oil moves the detent regulator open to drive oil, allowing drive oil to enter modulator and detent passages. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shifter A/T: Specifications Throttle lever bracket from T.V. link bolts ............................................................................................ ................................................................... 8 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2278 Shifter A/T: Description and Operation SELECTOR 0UADRANT The selector quadrant symbols vary between vehicle makes. However, note that they all have six selector positions to enable the driver to control the operation of the transmission under various conditions. Regardless of the varying quadrant symbols, all transmissions operate in the same manner. Of course the purpose of the letters P (parking), N (neutral) and R (reverse) is obvious. The letter D and Drive (left dot) are used for all normal driving conditions and maximum economy. These positions have three gear ratios from 1st gear, to 2nd to 3rd or direct drive. Downshifts are available for safe passing by depressing the accelerator pedal. The symbols S, L2 and 2, which are all second (or intermediate) gear positions, add performance for congested traffic or hilly terrain. This range has the same starting ratio as direct drive but prevents the transmission from shifting above 2nd speed to retain acceleration when extra performance is desired. Engine braking is provided in this range. The symbols L, L1 and 1, which are all 1st (or low) gear positions, permit operation at a lower gear ratio and should be used when maximum torque multiplication is desired, such as pulling a heavy load or descending a steep grade. When the selector lever is moved from direct drive to low at normal highway speeds, the transmission will shift to 2nd gear and remain in 2nd until vehicle speed is reduced to the normal 2-1 downshift The transmission will then shift to 1st gear and remain in 1st regardless of vehicle or engine speed until the selector lever is moved back into 2nd gear position or to direct drive position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Modulator > Component Information > Description and Operation Shift Modulator: Description and Operation Description The engine vacuum signal is provided by the vacuum modulator which consists of an evacuated bellows, a diaphragm and a spring. These are so arranged that the bellows and spring apply force that acts on the modulator valve so that it increases modulator pressure. Engine vacuum and a spring oppose the bellows and spring to control modulator pressure. To reduce the effect of altitude on shift points, the effective area of the diaphragm is different than that of the bellows. Atmospheric pressure acts on the resulting differential area to reduce modulator pressure. Operation A vacuum modulator is used to sense engine torque input to the transmission automatically. The vacuum modulator transmits this signal to the pressure regulator, which controls line pressure, so that all torque requirements of the transmission are met and proper shift spacing is obtained at all throttle openings. Vacuum Modulator Valve Provides modulator pressure that senses engine torque and vehicle speed. The vacuum modulator speed is used to vary the shift points according to throttle opening and to raise line pressure proportional to engine torque. 2-3 Modulator Valve Senses modulator pressure to apply a variable force that tends to hold the 2-3 shift valve downshifted. 3-2 Valve Shuts off modulator pressure from acting on shift valves after direct clutch has been applied. This allows fairly heavy throttle operation in third speed without downshifting. In third speed detent pressure or modulator pressure above 105 psi can be directed to the shift valves to provide downshift forces. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Modulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2282 Shift Modulator: Service and Repair 1. Remove modulator attaching screw and retainer. 2. Remove modulator assembly from case and discard O-ring seal. 3. Remove modulator valve from case. 4. Reverse procedure to install, using a new O-ring seal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - TV Cable Identification (700-R4 Light Duty) Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - TV Cable Identification (700-R4 Light Duty) 85-100 7A July, 1985 Subject: TV CABLE IDENTIFICATION Model and Year: 1982-85 LIGHT DUTY WITH 700-R4 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS FIGURE NO. 1 On-vehicle identification of the TV cable may be accomplished by locating the two-letter code imprinted on tape approximately 1 1/2" behind the adjusting mechanism (See Figure No. 1). TV cable application is determined by the engine used in the vehicle. The following is a list of TV cable codes, part numbers, and applications used in trucks equipped with the 700-R4 automatic transmission. Engine Cable Code Part Number 2.0L AX 25513305 2.5L FT 25517312 2.8L NC 14040597 4.1L FL 25515600 4.3L ON 25522513 5.0L-5.7L FJ 25515598 6.2L FK 25515599 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - TV Cable Identification (700-R4 Light Duty) > Page 2287 Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Throttle Valve Cable Adjustment Number: 83-I-34 Section: VII Date: JAN., 1983 Subject: T.V. CABLE ADJUSTMENT - ALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS USED WITH GAS OR DIESEL ENGINES - EXCEPT THM 400 SINCE 1981 CABLE READJUSTMENT TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The following procedures should be used whenever the T.V. cable has to be readjusted. Shift points and the durability of the transmission can be affected by this adjustment. 1. Engine must be off. 2. Reset cable to readjust position: ^ Depress and hold metal readjust tab. ^ Move slider back through fitting away from throttle lever until slider stops against fitting. ^ Release readjust tab. 3. Adjust cable: ^ Rotate throttle lever to wide-open-throttle. ^ Slider must ratchet (click). If not, refer to repair procedure. 4. Review system for proper operation by driving vehicle and checking for availability of wide-open-throttle downshifts (into passing gear). REPAIR PROCEDURE ^ Inspect T.V. cable bracket on engine. The bracket should be firmly attached. Tighten fasteners if loose. The bracket should be flat and perpendicular to the T.V. cable at the cable attaching surface. If not, replace the bracket. ^ Inspect T.V. cable for binding or damage. The cable should work freely, without restriction. If not, replace the cable. ^ Inspect T.V. link at transmission. It should operate freely and be undamaged. If not, refer to transmission repair section of the service manual. ^ Readjust T.V. cable using Steps 1 through 4. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Stator, Alternator Torque Converter: Description and Operation Stator, Alternator Description The converter also has a smaller vaned section, called a stator, that funnels the oil back to the converter pump through smaller openings, at increased speed. The speeded up oil directs additional force to the engine-driven converter pump, thereby multiplying engine torque. In other words, without the stator, the unit is nothing more than a fluid coupling. The stator assembly in some transmissions is a variable pitch unit The stator blades are operated at either of two positions: maximum or high angle, and minimum or low angle. Maximum or high an le means greater redirection of the oil an increased engine speed, and torque multiplication for maximum performance. At engine idle, it reduces the converter's efficiency, reducing "creep." Minimum or low angle results in a more efficient converter for cruising operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Stator, Alternator > Page 2292 Torque Converter: Description and Operation Torque Converter Description The torque converter is of welded construction and is serviced as an assembly. The unit is made up of two vaned sections, or halves, that face each other in an oil filled housing. The pump half of the converter is connected to the engine and the turbine half is connected to the transmission. When the engine makes the converter pump revolve, it sends oil against the turbine, making it revolve also. The oil then returns in a circular flow back to the converter pump, continuing this flow as long as the engine is running. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 83I23 > Dec > 82 > TCC - Engages at Incorrect Speed Torque Converter Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins TCC - Engages at Incorrect Speed Number: 83-I-23 Section: VII Date: Dec., 1982 Subject: TCC ENGAGES AT INCORRECT SPEED - ALL GAS ENGINES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS If a condition is encountered where the torque converter clutch is engaging at the incorrect speed, be sure to check speedometer head magnet field plate for foreign material i.e.: grease, dirt, etc. Foreign material on the drum could change the signal to the ECM resulting in erratic TCC operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 83I23 > Dec > 82 > TCC Engages at Incorrect Speed Torque Converter Clutch: Customer Interest TCC - Engages at Incorrect Speed Number: 83-I-23 Section: VII Date: Dec., 1982 Subject: TCC ENGAGES AT INCORRECT SPEED - ALL GAS ENGINES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS If a condition is encountered where the torque converter clutch is engaging at the incorrect speed, be sure to check speedometer head magnet field plate for foreign material i.e.: grease, dirt, etc. Foreign material on the drum could change the signal to the ECM resulting in erratic TCC operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Torque Converter Clutch: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold Power Steering Fluid: All Technical Service Bulletins P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold Group Ref.: Steering/Suspension Bulletin No.: 033206 Date: March 1994 SUBJECT: REDUCED POWER STEERING ASSIST AT LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURES (NEW POWER STEERING FLUID) MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS Applications: Appropriate for all passenger vehicles, but particularly beneficial in 1980 and later FWD Models equipped with Power Rack and Pinion Steering. CONDITION: Comments of reduced power steering assist at low ambient temperatures (approximately 10°F and lower) may be noted by some vehicle operators when turning the steering wheel in BOTH the right and left direction during warm-up after cold start. All vehicles with power steering exhibit this condition to varying degrees, but condition may be more noticeable with power rack and pinion steering systems that typically have longer hoses and cooler lines. Note: This condition, which is related to power steering fluid viscosity, should not, however, be confused with conditions having similar symptoms such as that described divisional Special Policy numbers listed: CAUSE: In cold weather, power steering fluid thickens in the same manner as any other petroleum-based oil or fluid. Upon cold starting, the fluid resists movement through the system and the driver senses reduced power assist (sometimes referred to as "stiff steer"). As the vehicle operates and fluid circulates through the power steering system, the fluid warms and thins to its normal operating viscosity. CORRECTION: Saginaw Division has developed a new Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid for use in cold climates. Compared with conventional power steering fluid, this new fluid flows better at low temperatures and resists the thickening which contributes to reduced power assist upon start up. RACK AND PINION STEERING SYSTEMS Reduced power assist upon cold weather starting may be more noticeable in Power Rack and Pinion steering systems that may contain six or more feet of Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Torque Converter Clutch: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 2311 pressure and return hose along with long cooler lines. Such long systems contain greater volumes of fluid and vehicles so equipped tend to have longer periods of reduced power assist. The new fluid performs particularly well with current designed Rack and Pinion steering systems and special remanufactured Rack and Pinion Steering Assemblies. PARTS INFORMATION: Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid is available from GMSPO. Order as: Parts are currently available from GMSPO. SERVICE PROCEDURE: The power steering fluid replacement procedure is a two-stage process: first, flushing the old fluid from the system with new fluid; and second, bleeding the system to remove any trapped air. The two sequences outline the steps in each procedure. FLUSHING THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM 1. Raise the front end of the vehicle off the ground until the wheels are free to turn. 2. Remove the fluid return line at the pump reservoir inlet connector. 3. Plug the inlet connector port on the pump reservoir. 4. Position the fluid return line toward a large container in order to catch the draining fluid. 5. While a second person fills the reservoir with new Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid, start and run the engine at idle. 6. Turn the steering wheel from stop to stop. NOTICE: Do not hold the wheel against stops while flushing the system, Holding steering wheel against wheel stops will cause high system pressure, overheating, and damage to the pump and/or gear. 7. Continue draining until all of the old fluid is cleared from the power steering system. Addition of approximately 1 quart of new fluid will be required to flush system. 8. Unplug pump reservoir inlet and reconnect return line. 9. Turn engine off, and fill reservoir to the "Full Cold" mark. 10. Continue with following procedure "Bleeding the Power Steering System". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Torque Converter Clutch: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 2312 BLEEDING THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM After replacing the fluid or servicing the power steering hydraulic system, you must bleed air from the system. Air in the system prevents an accurate fluid level reading, causes pump cavitation noise and over time could damage the pump. To bleed the power steering system proceed as follows: 1. Begin with the engine off, front wheels off the ground, and wheels turned all the way to the left. 2. Add Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid to the "FULL COLD" mark on the fluid level indicator. 3. Bleed the system by turning the wheels from side to side without hitting stops. Important: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Torque Converter Clutch: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 2313 This may require turning the wheels from side to side twenty times. On systems with long return lines or fluid coolers, turning steering wheel lock-to-lock forty times may be required. Keep the fluid level at the "FULL COLD" mark. Fluid with air In it has a light tan appearance. This air must be eliminated from the fluid before normal steering action can be obtained. 4. Start the engine. With the engine idling, recheck the fluid level. If necessary, add fluid to bring the level to the "FULL COLD" mark. 5. Return the wheels to the center position. Lower front wheels to the ground. Continue running the engine for two or three minutes. 6. Test the vehicle to be sure the steering functions normally and is free from noise. Important: Inspect for fluid leakage at connection points along the power steering system. 7. Recheck the fluid level as described in Steps 3 and 4 except that the fluid level should now be up to the "FULL HOT" mark after the system has stabilized at its normal operating temperature. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Torque Converter Clutch: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 2319 pressure and return hose along with long cooler lines. Such long systems contain greater volumes of fluid and vehicles so equipped tend to have longer periods of reduced power assist. The new fluid performs particularly well with current designed Rack and Pinion steering systems and special remanufactured Rack and Pinion Steering Assemblies. PARTS INFORMATION: Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid is available from GMSPO. Order as: Parts are currently available from GMSPO. SERVICE PROCEDURE: The power steering fluid replacement procedure is a two-stage process: first, flushing the old fluid from the system with new fluid; and second, bleeding the system to remove any trapped air. The two sequences outline the steps in each procedure. FLUSHING THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM 1. Raise the front end of the vehicle off the ground until the wheels are free to turn. 2. Remove the fluid return line at the pump reservoir inlet connector. 3. Plug the inlet connector port on the pump reservoir. 4. Position the fluid return line toward a large container in order to catch the draining fluid. 5. While a second person fills the reservoir with new Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid, start and run the engine at idle. 6. Turn the steering wheel from stop to stop. NOTICE: Do not hold the wheel against stops while flushing the system, Holding steering wheel against wheel stops will cause high system pressure, overheating, and damage to the pump and/or gear. 7. Continue draining until all of the old fluid is cleared from the power steering system. Addition of approximately 1 quart of new fluid will be required to flush system. 8. Unplug pump reservoir inlet and reconnect return line. 9. Turn engine off, and fill reservoir to the "Full Cold" mark. 10. Continue with following procedure "Bleeding the Power Steering System". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Torque Converter Clutch: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 2320 BLEEDING THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM After replacing the fluid or servicing the power steering hydraulic system, you must bleed air from the system. Air in the system prevents an accurate fluid level reading, causes pump cavitation noise and over time could damage the pump. To bleed the power steering system proceed as follows: 1. Begin with the engine off, front wheels off the ground, and wheels turned all the way to the left. 2. Add Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid to the "FULL COLD" mark on the fluid level indicator. 3. Bleed the system by turning the wheels from side to side without hitting stops. Important: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Torque Converter Clutch: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 2321 This may require turning the wheels from side to side twenty times. On systems with long return lines or fluid coolers, turning steering wheel lock-to-lock forty times may be required. Keep the fluid level at the "FULL COLD" mark. Fluid with air In it has a light tan appearance. This air must be eliminated from the fluid before normal steering action can be obtained. 4. Start the engine. With the engine idling, recheck the fluid level. If necessary, add fluid to bring the level to the "FULL COLD" mark. 5. Return the wheels to the center position. Lower front wheels to the ground. Continue running the engine for two or three minutes. 6. Test the vehicle to be sure the steering functions normally and is free from noise. Important: Inspect for fluid leakage at connection points along the power steering system. 7. Recheck the fluid level as described in Steps 3 and 4 except that the fluid level should now be up to the "FULL HOT" mark after the system has stabilized at its normal operating temperature. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-07-30-052G Date: March 02, 2011 Subject: Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow(R) Models: 2011 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2003-2010 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 with Automatic Transmission/Transaxle including Allison(R) Transmissions Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. The J 45096 transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test tool replaces current tool J 35944-A. J 45096 is a self-contained unit utilizing a 12-volt flow meter, shop air supply and DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid (ATF). In the flush mode, transmission fluid is cycled through the transmission oil cooling system. High-pressure air is automatically injected into the fluid stream adding agitation to the ATF oil to enhance the removal of contaminated ATF oil and debris. In the flow mode, an electronic flow meter is used to measure the flow capability of the ATF oil cooling system. A digital display indicates the ATF oil flow rate in gallons per minute (GPM) along with the amount of ATF oil in the supply vessel, supply vessel ATF oil temperature, machine cycles and the operating mode. The supply oil vessel has 30 L (32 qt) capacity and the waste oil vessel has 32 L (34 qt) capacity. The waste oil vessel is constructed of a translucent composite material that allows the user to easily identify the oil level. The waste oil vessel can accommodate vacuum evacuation and gravity draining. In the code mode, a random, encrypted code is generated that can be used for verification of flow test results. Current essential cooler line adapters are used to connect the J 45096 to the automatic transmission oil cooler lines that allows J 45096 to adapt to General Motors passenger cars and light duty trucks, current and past models (except the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo). The tool may be adapted for use on the Pontiac Vibe, Wave and Chevrolet Aveo by dealership personnel with a barbed hose connector and rubber hose obtained locally. The Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission has a transmission oil requirement which is slightly different than DEXRON(R) VI ATF. However, flushing the cooler with DEXRON(R) VI automatic transmission fluid is an acceptable service procedure. Very little fluid remains in the cooler after the flush procedure and the residual DEXRON(R) VI ATF in the cooler is compatible with the Vibe's/Wave's/Aveo's transmission fluid. Notice Insufficient oil flow through the ATF oil cooling system will cause premature transmission failure. The required minimum ATF oil flow rate reading is directly related to the supply oil temperature. Refer to the flow rate reference chart for the oil flow rate specification based on the temperature of the ATF in the supply vessel. Helpful Hints for Maintaining the Temperature at or above 18°C (65°F) Important - The temperature of the supply vessel oil must be 18°C (65°F) or greater for J 45096 to operate. It is recommended to store the J 45096 in an area of the dealership where the room temperature remains at or above 18°C (65°F) when not in use. - Do not attempt to increase the fluid temperature in the Transflow(R) machine with an engine oil dipstick, or any other immersion type heater. The Transflow(R) machine has a check valve in the supply reservoir. Inserting a heater will damage the check valve and the subsequent repair expense would be the dealer's responsibility. - A heater blanket, P/N J-45096-10, is available for the Transflow(R) transmission cooling system flushing tool. This heater fastens around the Transflow(R) internal supply vessel and runs on 110 volts AC. The heater will warm the ATF in the supply vessel to at least 18°C (65° F) and has a thermostat to hold a constant temperature. Store the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine in a room where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Keep the ATF level in the reservoir low when the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R), is not in use. Store several gallons of oil in an area where the temperature is maintained at or above 18°C (65°F). Fill the reservoir of the J 45096 as needed before using the machine on Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 2326 each repair. With the ATF in a tightly sealed container, place the container in a tub of hot water for a period of time. Then pour the ATF into the reservoir. This method works best with a low fluid level in the reservoir. Place the Transflow(R) machine in the direct sunlight with the cabinet door open to expose the reservoir to the rays of the warm sun. Flush / Flow Test Procedure Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle and require the transmission oil pan or transmission side cover to be removed include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate procedure. Important The J 45096 can be used to flush the transmission oil cooler system on an Allison equipped vehicle, but the flow meter should not be utilized. Refer to SI for Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flushing and Flow Test J 45096 for the appropriate flow check procedure. Machine Displays After completion of the flush and flow test, the following information is to be recorded on the repair order. This information is displayed on the Transmission Cooling System Service Tool, J 45096, Transflow(R) machine when the dial is in the code position. - Tested flow rate (displayed in Gallons Per Minute (GPM) - Temperature (displayed is degrees Fahrenheit) - Cycle number (a number) - Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code (i.e. A10DFB2) Warranty Information Important All labor operations that include removal of the transmission from the vehicle include labor time to flush the transmission oil cooler system. Performing a transmission oil cooling system flush and flow test will use between 4.7-7.5 L (5-8 qts) of DEXRON(R)VI transmission fluid. The amount Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 2327 of transmission fluid (ATF), (DEXRON(R)VI) (fluid) that is to be charged for the flush portion of the repair should not exceed the allowable charge for 7.5 L (2 gal) of fluid. This expense should be shown in the Parts Section of the warranty claim document. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. The Seven digit Alpha/Numeric flow code, i.e. A10DFB2, "MUST" be written on the job card, entered in the warranty claim labor operation Flush Code additional field (when available) and placed in the comments section of the warranty claim. Any repair that requires the technician to contact the Product Quality Center (PQC) must also include the seven digit flow code. The agent will request the seven digit flow code and add the information to the PQC case prior to providing authorization for the warranty claim. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 2328 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Water Or Coolant Contamination Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-07-30-035B Date: November 01, 2010 Subject: Information on Water or Ethylene Glycol in Transmission Fluid Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with Automatic Transmission Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-035A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). Water or ethylene glycol in automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is harmful to internal transmission components and will have a negative effect on reliability and durability of these parts. Water or ethylene glycol in ATF will also change the friction of the clutches, frequently resulting in shudder during engagement or gear changes, especially during torque converter clutch engagement. Indications of water in the ATF may include: - ATF blowing out of the transmission vent tube. - ATF may appear cloudy or, in cases of extreme contamination, have the appearance of a strawberry milkshake. - Visible water in the oil pan. - A milky white substance inside the pan area. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be glued to the valve body face or case. - Spacer plate gaskets that appear to be swollen or wrinkled in areas where they are not compressed. - Rust on internal transmission iron/steel components. If water in the ATF has been found and the source of the water entry has not been identified, or if a leaking in-radiator transmission oil cooler is suspected (with no evidence of cross-contamination in the coolant recovery reservoir), a simple and quick test kit is available that detects the presence of ethylene glycol in ATF. The "Gly-Tek" test kit, available from the Nelco Company, should be obtained and the ATF tested to make an accurate decision on the need for radiator replacement. This can help to prevent customer comebacks if the in-radiator transmission oil cooler is leaking and reduce repair expenses by avoiding radiator replacement if the cooler is not leaking. These test kits can be obtained from: Nelco Company Test kits can be ordered by phone or through the website listed above. Orders are shipped standard delivery time but can be shipped on a next day delivery basis for an extra charge. One test kit will complete 10 individual fluid sample tests. For vehicles repaired under warranty, the cost of the complete test kit plus shipping charges should be divided by 10 and submitted on the warranty claim as a net item. The transmission should be repaired or replaced based on the normal cost comparison procedure. Important If water or coolant is found in the transmission, the following components MUST be replaced. - Replace all of the rubber-type seals. - Replace all of the composition-faced clutch plates and/or bands. - Replace all of the nylon parts. - Replace the torque converter. - Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter. Important The following steps must be completed when repairing or replacing. Flush and flow check the transmission oil cooler using J 45096. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-07-30-052F- Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Essential Tool J 45096 TransFlow. - Thoroughly inspect the engine cooling system and hoses and clean/repair as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 2329 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Fluid Oil Cooler Flush > Page 2330 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cooler Replacement/Flushing BULLETIN NO: 93-7A-97 SECTION: 7A Automatic Transmission NUMBER: 14 CORPORATE REFERENCE NO: 367102R DATE: July, 1993 SUBJECT: Information on Automatic Transmission Cooler Replacement MODELS: 1993 and Prior Light Duty Trucks Equipped with Automatic Transmissions When inspection of an inoperative automatic transmission reveals metal material in the oil pan, the transmission oil cooler (located in the radiator end tank) must be replaced. The cooler lines must also be flushed to prevent any debris from entering the transmission oil cooler or the transmission. If inspection reveals friction material or fluid contamination (but no metal), the transmission cooler must be flushed and a flow check MUST be performed. It is essential to flush the cooler after SRTA installation, major overhaul, in the case of pump or torque converter replacement, or when fluid contamination is suspected. Use Kent-Moore tool J35944 and solvent J35944-20 to flush the cooler. Follow the instructions published in each Service Manual, Section 7A, On Vehicle Service, Transmission Cooler Flushing. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION Refer to section 4.128 of the appropriate GMSPO parts catalog for transmission oil cooler applications. WARRANTY INFORMATION For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Note: If transmission is to be replaced with SRTA, do not use ADD condition H (To Replace Transmission Oil Cooler - 0.7 hr). Labor Operation K7000 (Transmission Assembly Replace) already includes 0.7 hr (for transmission cooler flush). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Electronic Speed Sensor Retainer Bolt ............................................................................................... ...................................................................... 7 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Turbine Shaft: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft Turbine Shaft: Customer Interest A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft Number: 84-177 Section: 7A (VIIc) Date: July, 1984 Subject: BURNED OVERRUN CLUTCH, FORWARD CLUTCH, AND 3-4 CLUTCH PLATE ASSEMBLIES Model and Year: ALL THM 700-R4 - 1982 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Beginning April 16, 1984 (Julian Date 107), a new input housing and shaft assembly and oil pump assembly went into production for all models of the THM 700-R4 transmission. In addition, new torque converters went into production for all 298 mm applications (4.1L in-line L6; V8 gas and diesel engines). FIGURE 1 - Transmission Identification All transmissions built starting with Julian Date 107 are stamped with the letter "T" on the pan rail after the transmission identification number (Figure 1). The letter "T" will only be used for the remainder of the 1984 model year. These production changes eliminate the possibility of burned clutch packs in the input housing due to hairline cracks which could develop across the ring grooves in the turbine shaft. A crack in this area of the turbine shaft on models built prior to this change could cause one or any combination of the following clutches to slip and overheat due to loss of apply pressure: A. Overrun Clutch Pack B. Forward Clutch Pack C. 3-4 Clutch Pack SERVICE INFORMATION 1. If any 1982, 1983 or 1984 THM 700-R4 transmission (built prior to Julian Date 107) experiences burned clutch packs within the input housing assembly, check for a possible cracked turbine shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Turbine Shaft: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft > Page 2342 FIGURE 2 - Stator Shaft Sleeve IMPORTANT: A hairline crack in the turbine shaft is not always detected by visually inspecting the shaft. To determine if the shaft is cracked, inspect the stator shaft sleeve for possible score marks in the inner diameter (Figure 2). If scoring is found, the probable cause is a crack in the turbine shaft which opens under torque conditions and produces the scoring and burned clutch packs. If this condition is found, replace both the input housing and shaft assembly and the oil pump assembly complete. Due to recent changes in the oil pump cover and pump body castings, these parts are serviced as an assembly for 1982 through 1984.. 2. Oil pump assemblies, input housing and shaft assemblies, and converters can be purchased separately as shown in the following Charts #1, #2, and #3, respectively. However, any transmission built prior to this change (1982, 1983, or 1984 not identified by a "T") must use the part numbers shown in the column marked "before Julian Date 107". Any 1984 transmission built after this change (identified by the letter "T") must use the part numbers in the column marked "after Julian Date 107". 3. Due to the numerous changes made on the above parts, those shown for use prior to the change must not be interchanged with those shown for use after the change. Interchanging these parts will result in conditions such as: A. Interference fits B. Loose fits C. No drive D. Possible repeat cracks in the turbine shaft E. Future confusion if the transmission should require additional service. CHART 1 YEAR MODELS PART NAME BEFORE STARTING JULIAN DATE WITH JULIAN 107 DATE 107 1982 T5, YK, YL, T6, TW, YA, TC, TE, TH, TJ, TK, M2, OIL PUMP M4, M5, M7, MB, MC, MD, ASSY. COMPLETE 8647967 ME, Y3, Y4, Y6 1982 M6, MH, TN, TP OIL PUMP 8647968 ASSY. COMPLETE 1983 TC, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TE, TH, TK, MD, ME, MW, VH, OIL PUMP T2, VA, YN, ML, MP, MS, ASSY. COMPLETE 8647967 T7, MK, YG, PQ, YP, YK, Y9, YF 1983 YH, TS, TZ, T8, TP, MH, OIL PUMP 8647968 VJ, TL ASSY. COMPLETE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Turbine Shaft: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft > Page 2343 1984 MB, MC, MD, VH, TE, ME, MK, MJ, VN, TC, TH, MW, OIL PUMP TK, VA, YF, PQ, YG, YP, ASSY COMPLETE 8647967 YK, Y6, YN, YA, Y9, YW 1984 TL, TZ, ML, MP, MS, T7, Oil Pump YH, Y7, Y8, TS, MR, TG, ASSY. Complete 8647968 8654309 TD 1984 MH, VX, VJ, VE, TM, T8, OIL PUMP MG ASSY. COMPLETE 8647969 8654310 CHART 2 YEAR MODELS PART NAME BEFORE STARTING JULIAN DATE WITH JULIAN 107 DATE 107 1982 T5, YK, YL, T6, TW, YA, TC, TE, TH, TJ, TK, M2, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 M4, M5, M7, MB, MC, MD, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) ME, Y3, Y4, Y6, M6, MH, TN, TP 1983 TC, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TE, TH, TK, MD, ME, MW, VH, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 TZ, MK, YN, YF, YG, YP, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) YK, Y9, TS, T8, TP, MH, VJ, TL 1983 T2, VA, ML, MP, MS, T7, INPUT HOUSING *8647128 YH, YF, PQ AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647965) 1984 MB, MC, MD, VH, MR, TG, ME, MK, MJ, VN, TC, TH, MW, TD, TK, MG, MH, VX, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 VJ, TL, VE, TM, TZ, T8, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) 8654156 TE, YP, Y8, TS, YK, Y6, YN, YA, Y9, YW, YG 1984 VA, ML, MP, MS, T7, YH, INPUT HOUSING *8647128 YF, PQ, Y7 AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647965) 8654155 * These part numbers will be superseded by the numbers shown in ( ) Approx. in October 1984. Torque converter assemblies for 1982, 1983, and 1984 models built prior to Julian Date 107, use current released part numbers. Torque converter assemblies for 1984 models starting with Julian Date 107, use the part numbers as shown in the chart below: CHART 3 1984 MODEL TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY PART NUMBERS STARTING WITH JULIAN DATE 107 MG, MH, VX, VJ, VE, TM, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647903 TZ, T8 YK, Y6, MD, VH, MR, TG, TE, ME, MK, TH, MK, TH, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647901 MW, TD, TK Y8 CONVERTER ASSY. 8647900 YG, TS, YN, YA, Y9, YW, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647904 YP, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TC CONVERTER ASSY. 8647902 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Turbine Shaft: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft Turbine Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft Number: 84-177 Section: 7A (VIIc) Date: July, 1984 Subject: BURNED OVERRUN CLUTCH, FORWARD CLUTCH, AND 3-4 CLUTCH PLATE ASSEMBLIES Model and Year: ALL THM 700-R4 - 1982 THRU 1984 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Beginning April 16, 1984 (Julian Date 107), a new input housing and shaft assembly and oil pump assembly went into production for all models of the THM 700-R4 transmission. In addition, new torque converters went into production for all 298 mm applications (4.1L in-line L6; V8 gas and diesel engines). FIGURE 1 - Transmission Identification All transmissions built starting with Julian Date 107 are stamped with the letter "T" on the pan rail after the transmission identification number (Figure 1). The letter "T" will only be used for the remainder of the 1984 model year. These production changes eliminate the possibility of burned clutch packs in the input housing due to hairline cracks which could develop across the ring grooves in the turbine shaft. A crack in this area of the turbine shaft on models built prior to this change could cause one or any combination of the following clutches to slip and overheat due to loss of apply pressure: A. Overrun Clutch Pack B. Forward Clutch Pack C. 3-4 Clutch Pack SERVICE INFORMATION 1. If any 1982, 1983 or 1984 THM 700-R4 transmission (built prior to Julian Date 107) experiences burned clutch packs within the input housing assembly, check for a possible cracked turbine shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Turbine Shaft: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft > Page 2349 FIGURE 2 - Stator Shaft Sleeve IMPORTANT: A hairline crack in the turbine shaft is not always detected by visually inspecting the shaft. To determine if the shaft is cracked, inspect the stator shaft sleeve for possible score marks in the inner diameter (Figure 2). If scoring is found, the probable cause is a crack in the turbine shaft which opens under torque conditions and produces the scoring and burned clutch packs. If this condition is found, replace both the input housing and shaft assembly and the oil pump assembly complete. Due to recent changes in the oil pump cover and pump body castings, these parts are serviced as an assembly for 1982 through 1984.. 2. Oil pump assemblies, input housing and shaft assemblies, and converters can be purchased separately as shown in the following Charts #1, #2, and #3, respectively. However, any transmission built prior to this change (1982, 1983, or 1984 not identified by a "T") must use the part numbers shown in the column marked "before Julian Date 107". Any 1984 transmission built after this change (identified by the letter "T") must use the part numbers in the column marked "after Julian Date 107". 3. Due to the numerous changes made on the above parts, those shown for use prior to the change must not be interchanged with those shown for use after the change. Interchanging these parts will result in conditions such as: A. Interference fits B. Loose fits C. No drive D. Possible repeat cracks in the turbine shaft E. Future confusion if the transmission should require additional service. CHART 1 YEAR MODELS PART NAME BEFORE STARTING JULIAN DATE WITH JULIAN 107 DATE 107 1982 T5, YK, YL, T6, TW, YA, TC, TE, TH, TJ, TK, M2, OIL PUMP M4, M5, M7, MB, MC, MD, ASSY. COMPLETE 8647967 ME, Y3, Y4, Y6 1982 M6, MH, TN, TP OIL PUMP 8647968 ASSY. COMPLETE 1983 TC, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TE, TH, TK, MD, ME, MW, VH, OIL PUMP T2, VA, YN, ML, MP, MS, ASSY. COMPLETE 8647967 T7, MK, YG, PQ, YP, YK, Y9, YF 1983 YH, TS, TZ, T8, TP, MH, OIL PUMP 8647968 VJ, TL ASSY. COMPLETE Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Turbine Shaft: > 84177 > Jul > 84 > A/T - Burned Clutches/Cracked Turbine Shaft > Page 2350 1984 MB, MC, MD, VH, TE, ME, MK, MJ, VN, TC, TH, MW, OIL PUMP TK, VA, YF, PQ, YG, YP, ASSY COMPLETE 8647967 YK, Y6, YN, YA, Y9, YW 1984 TL, TZ, ML, MP, MS, T7, Oil Pump YH, Y7, Y8, TS, MR, TG, ASSY. Complete 8647968 8654309 TD 1984 MH, VX, VJ, VE, TM, T8, OIL PUMP MG ASSY. COMPLETE 8647969 8654310 CHART 2 YEAR MODELS PART NAME BEFORE STARTING JULIAN DATE WITH JULIAN 107 DATE 107 1982 T5, YK, YL, T6, TW, YA, TC, TE, TH, TJ, TK, M2, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 M4, M5, M7, MB, MC, MD, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) ME, Y3, Y4, Y6, M6, MH, TN, TP 1983 TC, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TE, TH, TK, MD, ME, MW, VH, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 TZ, MK, YN, YF, YG, YP, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) YK, Y9, TS, T8, TP, MH, VJ, TL 1983 T2, VA, ML, MP, MS, T7, INPUT HOUSING *8647128 YH, YF, PQ AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647965) 1984 MB, MC, MD, VH, MR, TG, ME, MK, MJ, VN, TC, TH, MW, TD, TK, MG, MH, VX, INPUT HOUSING *8647127 VJ, TL, VE, TM, TZ, T8, AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647963) 8654156 TE, YP, Y8, TS, YK, Y6, YN, YA, Y9, YW, YG 1984 VA, ML, MP, MS, T7, YH, INPUT HOUSING *8647128 YF, PQ, Y7 AND SHAFT ASSY. (8647965) 8654155 * These part numbers will be superseded by the numbers shown in ( ) Approx. in October 1984. Torque converter assemblies for 1982, 1983, and 1984 models built prior to Julian Date 107, use current released part numbers. Torque converter assemblies for 1984 models starting with Julian Date 107, use the part numbers as shown in the chart below: CHART 3 1984 MODEL TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY PART NUMBERS STARTING WITH JULIAN DATE 107 MG, MH, VX, VJ, VE, TM, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647903 TZ, T8 YK, Y6, MD, VH, MR, TG, TE, ME, MK, TH, MK, TH, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647901 MW, TD, TK Y8 CONVERTER ASSY. 8647900 YG, TS, YN, YA, Y9, YW, CONVERTER ASSY. 8647904 YP, MB, MC, MJ, VN, TC CONVERTER ASSY. 8647902 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Vacuum Regulator Valve, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Vacuum Regulator Valve: Description and Operation Manual Valve Establishes range of transmission operation as selected by the vehicle operator through the manual selector lever. 1-2 Regulator Valve Regulates modulator pressure to a proportional pressure, tending to keep the 1-2 shift valve in downshift position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Vacuum Regulator Valve, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2354 Vacuum Regulator Valve: Service and Repair REPLACE A solid type pressure regulator valve must be used only in a pump cover with a "Squared On" (machined) pressure regulator boss. A pressure regulator valve with oil holes and an orifice cup plug may be used with either type pump. 1. Remove bottom pan and strainer. 2. Using a screwdriver or steel rod, compress regulator boost valve bushing against pressure regulator spring. Pressure regulator spring is under extreme pressure and will force valve bushing out of bore when snap ring is removed if valve bushing is not held securely. 3. Continue to exert pressure on valve bushing and remove snap ring. Gradually re ease pressure on valve bushing until spring force is exhausted. 4. Carefully remove regulator boost valve bushing and valve, and pressure regulator spring. Be careful not to drop parts as they will fall out if they are not held. 5. Remove pressure regulator valve arid spring retainer. Remove spacers if present. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 912837A > Apr > 91 > A/T - 4L60 Binding/Inoperative In Reverse Valve Body: Customer Interest A/T - 4L60 Binding/Inoperative In Reverse Number: 91-283-7A Section: 7A Date: APRIL 1991 Corp. Bulletin No.: 977143R Subject: BINDING OR INOPERATIVE IN REVERSE - STUCK 4-3 SEQUENCE VALVE AND/OR 2-3 SHIFT VALVE Model and Year: 1982-91 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS WITH 700R4 (4L60) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 89-271-7A, DATED OCTOBER 1989. THE 1990-91 MODEL YEARS HAVE BEEN ADDED, AS WELL AS INFORMATION CONCERNING BOLT TIGHTENING PATTERN. ALL COPIES OF 89-271-7A SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Figure 1 - Control Valve Assembly SERVICE PROCEDURE: When servicing a HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 transmission for a binding in reverse condition, remove the control valve assembly and inspect the 4-3 sequence valve and the 2-3 shift valve. Refer to Figure 1. Either valve, if stuck in the upshifted position, will result in a binding condition. To correct this condition, the valve body must be completely disassembled and reconditioned according to procedures contaihed in the HYDRA-MATIC 4L60/THM 700-R4 Unit Repair section of the appropriate Service Manual. Inspect the transmission bottom pan for clutch material or burned fluid. Evidence of this will necessitate further transmission diagnosis. Repairs may include complete transmission reconditioning, inc.luding disassembly and reconditioning of the transmission pump and possible torque converter replacement. Complete the cleaning of the hydraulic circuit by changing the transmission fluid and filter and flushing the transmission cooler and cooler pipes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 912837A > Apr > 91 > A/T - 4L60 Binding/Inoperative In Reverse > Page 2363 HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 IMPORTANT: Overtorquing or uneven torquing of the bolts during unit reassembly can cause valves to bind. This condition may become more apparent as the unit warms to operating temperature. The correct bolt torque specifications for the HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 control valve assembly are 8-14 N-m (6-10 lb.ft.). Torquing bolts to the minimum specification, 8 N-m (6 lb.ft.) is recommended. The bolts should be tightened in a spiral pattern starting at the center and working toward the outside of the control valve assembly as shown in Figure 2. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 913967A > Aug > 91 > A/T - Evaluating Peened Spacer Plates Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Evaluating Peened Spacer Plates Number: 91-396-7A Section: 7A Date: AUGUST 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 177120 Subject: EVALUATING PEENED SPACER PLATES Model and Year: 1982-91 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLES AND TRANSMISSIONS (EXCEPT GEO) TRANSMISSIONS APPLICATIONS: All HYDRA-MATIC Automatic Transmissions and Transaxles SUBJECT: Evaluating Peened Spacer Plates (Service Information) TRANSMISSION MODELS: All VEHICLE APPLICATIONS: All Vehicles Using HYDRA-MATIC Automatic Transmissions and Transaxles Bulletin Covers: Some spacer plate peening is considered acceptable and preferred because it can help seat the check ball. This bulletin will help you decide if a spacer plate needs to be replaced due to a peening condition. Service Procedure: The following two procedures can help determine if the spacer plate can be reused. The following must be performed at all check-ball locations. Figure 1 1. The spacer plate must be inspected 100% for raised material on the opposite side of the check-ball seat (see Figure 1). If the material on the opposite side is raised, the peening is too severe and the spacer plate must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 913967A > Aug > 91 > A/T - Evaluating Peened Spacer Plates > Page 2369 Figure 2 2. To verify that the spacer plate is peening evenly and the ball is sealing correctly, seat the check-ball on the spacer plate. Shine a beam of light on the opposite side and inspect for light between the spacer plate and check-ball (see Figure 2). No trace of light should be present. If light can be seen, a proper seal does not exist, and the spacer plate must be replaced. Service Manual Reference: Refer to the HYDRA-MATIC Automatic Transaxle/Transmission Diagnosis or Unit Repair section of your service manual for proper check-ball locations and functions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 912837A > Apr > 91 > A/T - 4L60 Binding/Inoperative In Reverse Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 4L60 Binding/Inoperative In Reverse Number: 91-283-7A Section: 7A Date: APRIL 1991 Corp. Bulletin No.: 977143R Subject: BINDING OR INOPERATIVE IN REVERSE - STUCK 4-3 SEQUENCE VALVE AND/OR 2-3 SHIFT VALVE Model and Year: 1982-91 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS WITH 700R4 (4L60) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 89-271-7A, DATED OCTOBER 1989. THE 1990-91 MODEL YEARS HAVE BEEN ADDED, AS WELL AS INFORMATION CONCERNING BOLT TIGHTENING PATTERN. ALL COPIES OF 89-271-7A SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Figure 1 - Control Valve Assembly SERVICE PROCEDURE: When servicing a HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 transmission for a binding in reverse condition, remove the control valve assembly and inspect the 4-3 sequence valve and the 2-3 shift valve. Refer to Figure 1. Either valve, if stuck in the upshifted position, will result in a binding condition. To correct this condition, the valve body must be completely disassembled and reconditioned according to procedures contaihed in the HYDRA-MATIC 4L60/THM 700-R4 Unit Repair section of the appropriate Service Manual. Inspect the transmission bottom pan for clutch material or burned fluid. Evidence of this will necessitate further transmission diagnosis. Repairs may include complete transmission reconditioning, inc.luding disassembly and reconditioning of the transmission pump and possible torque converter replacement. Complete the cleaning of the hydraulic circuit by changing the transmission fluid and filter and flushing the transmission cooler and cooler pipes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 912837A > Apr > 91 > A/T - 4L60 Binding/Inoperative In Reverse > Page 2374 HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 IMPORTANT: Overtorquing or uneven torquing of the bolts during unit reassembly can cause valves to bind. This condition may become more apparent as the unit warms to operating temperature. The correct bolt torque specifications for the HYDRA-MATIC 4L60 control valve assembly are 8-14 N-m (6-10 lb.ft.). Torquing bolts to the minimum specification, 8 N-m (6 lb.ft.) is recommended. The bolts should be tightened in a spiral pattern starting at the center and working toward the outside of the control valve assembly as shown in Figure 2. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 8571 > Apr > 85 > A/T - New Control Valve Assembly Identification Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - New Control Valve Assembly Identification 85-71 7A(V IIc) APR., 1985 Subject: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON THE NEW DESIGN CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY REFERENCED IN CHEVROLET DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN 84-107 Model and Year: ALL 1982 THRU 1985 THM 700-R4 TRANSMISSIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Some recent comments indicate that some confusion still exists on how to identify the new design Control Valve Assembly as referenced in Chevrolet Dealer Service Bulletin 84-107 dated April, 1984. The Control Valve Assemblies can be identified as follows: 1. The new design Control Valve Assembly used in production starting on January 15, 1984, (Julian date 015) is identified by one of two ways: Figure 1 - New Design Control Valve Body Assembly a. Casting number 2264 with a letter "X". (See Figure 1) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 8571 > Apr > 85 > A/T - New Control Valve Assembly Identification > Page 2379 Figure 2 - New Design Control Valve Body Assembly b. Casting number 4256. (See Figure 2) 2. The past design Control Valve Assembly (or build dates prior to Julian Date 015) is identified by the casting number 2264 without an "X". NOTICE: ALL CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES ORDERED FROM THE WAREHOUSING AND DISTRIBUTION DIVISION OF GENERAL MOTORS (WDDGM) WILL BE IDENTIFIED AS INDICATED IN ITEM 1 ABOVE. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > ATRASIL8538 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Redesigned Valve Body Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 700R4 Redesigned Valve Body SIL 85-38 SUBJECT: 700 R4 VALVE BODY ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON THE NEW DESIGN CONTROL VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY REFERENCED IN TRUCK SERVICE BULLETIN 85-B-18 1982-1985 LIGHT DUTY MODELS WITH 700-R4 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS A new design Control Valve Body Assembly is referenced in Truck Service Bulletin 85B-18. 1. The new design Control Valve Body Assembly was used in production starting on January 15, 1984, (Julian date 015) and is identified by one of two ways: A. Casting number 2264 with a letter "X" (see Figure No.1). -OR- Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > ATRASIL8538 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Redesigned Valve Body > Page 2384 B. Casting number 4256 (see Figure No. 2). 2. The past design Control Valve Body Assembly (or build dates prior to Julian date 015 of 1984) is identified by the casting number 2264 without an ALL CONTROL VALVE BODY ASSEMBLIES ORDERED FROM THE WAREHOUSING AND DISTRIBUTION DIVISION OF GENERAL MOTORS (WDDGM) ARE OF THE LATEST DESIGN AND WILL BE IDENTIFIED AS INDICATED IN ITEM 1, A. or B. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 83I60 > Apr > 83 > A/T Input Housing Assembly - Air Check Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Input Housing Assembly - Air Check Number: 83-I-60 Section: VIIc Date: April, 1983 Subject: THM 700-R4 INPUT HOUSING ASSEMBLY AIR CHECK - 1982-83 ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS When disassembling a THM 700-R4 transmission, it is a good idea to air check the oil passages in the input housing assembly. Air checking these passages will help you diagnose: 1. Block channels 2. Cross channel leaks 3. Clutches are or are not applying 4. Checkballs are or are not sealing After the input housing assembly is removed from the transmission, perform an air check as follows: 1. Adjust air pressure to approximately 30 psi. FIGURE A - TURBINE SHAFT OIL PASSAGES 2. Blow air into the hole nearest the end of the turbine shaft (hole marked #1 in Figure A). (Figure A shows the input housing as installed in the transmission. However, these checks are made with the input housing assembly removed.) Air blown into hole #1 will exit out the end of the turbine shaft around the checkball capsule. (Use care not to blow transmission fluid on your clothing or body.) 3. Now blow air into the hole marked #2. This is the overrun clutch passage. The air from this passage will go past the lip seals on the forward clutch piston and exit through hole #3 on the turbine shaft. If you place a finger over hole #3, to block the air flow, the overrun clutch should apply. 4. Now air check hole #3. This hole should apply the forward clutch. 5. Air checking hole #4 should apply the 3-4 clutch. 6. The last hole on the turbine shaft is for lube supply to the internal components located along the output shaft. Any air blown into this hole should exit out of the one hole at the back of the turbine shaft which does not contain a sealing ball. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 913967A > Aug > 91 > A/T - Evaluating Peened Spacer Plates Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Evaluating Peened Spacer Plates Number: 91-396-7A Section: 7A Date: AUGUST 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 177120 Subject: EVALUATING PEENED SPACER PLATES Model and Year: 1982-91 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLES AND TRANSMISSIONS (EXCEPT GEO) TRANSMISSIONS APPLICATIONS: All HYDRA-MATIC Automatic Transmissions and Transaxles SUBJECT: Evaluating Peened Spacer Plates (Service Information) TRANSMISSION MODELS: All VEHICLE APPLICATIONS: All Vehicles Using HYDRA-MATIC Automatic Transmissions and Transaxles Bulletin Covers: Some spacer plate peening is considered acceptable and preferred because it can help seat the check ball. This bulletin will help you decide if a spacer plate needs to be replaced due to a peening condition. Service Procedure: The following two procedures can help determine if the spacer plate can be reused. The following must be performed at all check-ball locations. Figure 1 1. The spacer plate must be inspected 100% for raised material on the opposite side of the check-ball seat (see Figure 1). If the material on the opposite side is raised, the peening is too severe and the spacer plate must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 913967A > Aug > 91 > A/T - Evaluating Peened Spacer Plates > Page 2394 Figure 2 2. To verify that the spacer plate is peening evenly and the ball is sealing correctly, seat the check-ball on the spacer plate. Shine a beam of light on the opposite side and inspect for light between the spacer plate and check-ball (see Figure 2). No trace of light should be present. If light can be seen, a proper seal does not exist, and the spacer plate must be replaced. Service Manual Reference: Refer to the HYDRA-MATIC Automatic Transaxle/Transmission Diagnosis or Unit Repair section of your service manual for proper check-ball locations and functions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 8571 > Apr > 85 > A/T - New Control Valve Assembly Identification Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - New Control Valve Assembly Identification 85-71 7A(V IIc) APR., 1985 Subject: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON THE NEW DESIGN CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY REFERENCED IN CHEVROLET DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN 84-107 Model and Year: ALL 1982 THRU 1985 THM 700-R4 TRANSMISSIONS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Some recent comments indicate that some confusion still exists on how to identify the new design Control Valve Assembly as referenced in Chevrolet Dealer Service Bulletin 84-107 dated April, 1984. The Control Valve Assemblies can be identified as follows: 1. The new design Control Valve Assembly used in production starting on January 15, 1984, (Julian date 015) is identified by one of two ways: Figure 1 - New Design Control Valve Body Assembly a. Casting number 2264 with a letter "X". (See Figure 1) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 8571 > Apr > 85 > A/T - New Control Valve Assembly Identification > Page 2399 Figure 2 - New Design Control Valve Body Assembly b. Casting number 4256. (See Figure 2) 2. The past design Control Valve Assembly (or build dates prior to Julian Date 015) is identified by the casting number 2264 without an "X". NOTICE: ALL CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLIES ORDERED FROM THE WAREHOUSING AND DISTRIBUTION DIVISION OF GENERAL MOTORS (WDDGM) WILL BE IDENTIFIED AS INDICATED IN ITEM 1 ABOVE. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > ATRASIL8538 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Redesigned Valve Body Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 700R4 Redesigned Valve Body SIL 85-38 SUBJECT: 700 R4 VALVE BODY ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON THE NEW DESIGN CONTROL VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY REFERENCED IN TRUCK SERVICE BULLETIN 85-B-18 1982-1985 LIGHT DUTY MODELS WITH 700-R4 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS A new design Control Valve Body Assembly is referenced in Truck Service Bulletin 85B-18. 1. The new design Control Valve Body Assembly was used in production starting on January 15, 1984, (Julian date 015) and is identified by one of two ways: A. Casting number 2264 with a letter "X" (see Figure No.1). -OR- Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > ATRASIL8538 > Jan > 85 > A/T - 700R4 Redesigned Valve Body > Page 2404 B. Casting number 4256 (see Figure No. 2). 2. The past design Control Valve Body Assembly (or build dates prior to Julian date 015 of 1984) is identified by the casting number 2264 without an ALL CONTROL VALVE BODY ASSEMBLIES ORDERED FROM THE WAREHOUSING AND DISTRIBUTION DIVISION OF GENERAL MOTORS (WDDGM) ARE OF THE LATEST DESIGN AND WILL BE IDENTIFIED AS INDICATED IN ITEM 1, A. or B. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Valve Body: > 83I60 > Apr > 83 > A/T Input Housing Assembly - Air Check Valve Body: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Input Housing Assembly - Air Check Number: 83-I-60 Section: VIIc Date: April, 1983 Subject: THM 700-R4 INPUT HOUSING ASSEMBLY AIR CHECK - 1982-83 ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS When disassembling a THM 700-R4 transmission, it is a good idea to air check the oil passages in the input housing assembly. Air checking these passages will help you diagnose: 1. Block channels 2. Cross channel leaks 3. Clutches are or are not applying 4. Checkballs are or are not sealing After the input housing assembly is removed from the transmission, perform an air check as follows: 1. Adjust air pressure to approximately 30 psi. FIGURE A - TURBINE SHAFT OIL PASSAGES 2. Blow air into the hole nearest the end of the turbine shaft (hole marked #1 in Figure A). (Figure A shows the input housing as installed in the transmission. However, these checks are made with the input housing assembly removed.) Air blown into hole #1 will exit out the end of the turbine shaft around the checkball capsule. (Use care not to blow transmission fluid on your clothing or body.) 3. Now blow air into the hole marked #2. This is the overrun clutch passage. The air from this passage will go past the lip seals on the forward clutch piston and exit through hole #3 on the turbine shaft. If you place a finger over hole #3, to block the air flow, the overrun clutch should apply. 4. Now air check hole #3. This hole should apply the forward clutch. 5. Air checking hole #4 should apply the 3-4 clutch. 6. The last hole on the turbine shaft is for lube supply to the internal components located along the output shaft. Any air blown into this hole should exit out of the one hole at the back of the turbine shaft which does not contain a sealing ball. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Clutch Fluid: Capacity Specifications Fill the clutch master cylinder to the "Full" or "MAX" mark on the reservoir. Do not overfill. Caution: Should accidental spillage occur, rinse the area thoroughly with water. Pay special attention to any electrical wires, parts, harnesses, rubber or painted surfaces. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2415 Clutch Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Hydraulic Clutch Fluid ........................................................................................................................................................... DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Slave Cylinder: Specifications Slave cylinder retaining nuts ................................................................................................................ ................................................................ 10-15 ft lbs Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2419 Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect hydraulic line from slave cylinder. 3. Remove slave cylinder retaining nuts, then the slave cylinder. INSTALLATION 1. Connect hydraulic line to slave cylinder. 2. Bleed system. 3. Position slave cylinder on bell housing, then install retaining nuts and torque to 10-15 ft lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Adjustments Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments Fig. 2 Clutch pedal adjustment. 1980---84 C & K models & 1980---87 P models 1980---84 C & K MODELS & 1980---87 P MODELS EXC. 157 INCH WHEEL BASE P30/3500 & MOTOR HOME 1. Disconnect return spring at clutch fork. 2. Position clutch lever firmly against rubber bumper on brake pedal bracket. 3. Push outer end of fork rearward until release bearing lightly contacts pressure plate. 4. Loosen locknut and adjust rod length so that swivel slips freely into gauge hole, Fig. 2. Increase length until all lash is removed from linkage. 5. Reinstall rod into lower hole on lever. Install two washers and cotter pin. Tighten locknut without changing rod length. 6. Reinstall return spring and check pedal travel. Pedal travel should be 1-3/8 to 1-5/8 inch on C-K models; and 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 inch on P models. 157 INCH WHEEL BASE P30/3500 1. Disconnect return spring from clutch fork. 2. Loosen nut ``G'' at swivel, Fig. 2. 3. Move clutch fork rod against fork to eliminate play between release bearing and clutch. 4. Position clutch lever against rubber stop on brake pedal bracket. 5. Rotate fork rod until a clearance of 1/4 to 5/16 inch is obtained between shoulder fork rod and the adjustment nut. 6. Tighten nut ``G'' against swivel and install return spring. 7. Check free pedal clearance at pedal. Pedal clearance should be 1-3/8 to 1-5/8 inch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: Customer Interest Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 2431 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-06-01-029E > Apr > 10 > Vehicle - Engine Crankcase and Subsystems Flushing Info. Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: All Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Engine Crankcase and Subsystems Flushing Info. INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-06-01-029E Date: April 29, 2010 Subject: Unnecessary Flushing Services, Additive Recommendations and Proper Utilization of GM Simplified Maintenance Schedule to Enhance Customer Service Experience Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and add information about the proper transmission flush procedure. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-06-01-029D (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). An Overview of Proper Vehicle Service General Motors is aware that some companies are marketing tools and equipment to support a subsystem flushing procedures. These dedicated machines are in addition to many engine oil, cooling system, fuel system, A/C, transmission flush and steering system additives available to the consumer. GM Vehicles under normal usage do not require any additional procedures or additives beyond what is advised under the former Vehicle Maintenance Schedules or the current Simplified Maintenance Schedules. Do not confuse machines available from Kent-Moore/SPX that are designed to aid and accelerate the process of fluid changing with these flushing machines. Engine Crankcase Flushing General Motors Corporation does not endorse or recommend engine crankcase flushing for any of its gasoline engines. Analysis of some of the aftermarket materials used for crankcase flushing indicate incompatibility with GM engine components and the potential for damage to some engine seals and bearings. Damage to engine components resulting from crankcase flushing IS NOT COVERED under the terms of the New Vehicle Warranty. GM Authorized Service Information: Detailed, Descriptive, and Complete If a specific model vehicle or powertrain need is identified, GM will issue an Authorized Service Document containing a procedure and, if required, provide, make available, or require the specific use of a machine, tool or chemical to accomplish proper vehicle servicing. An example of this is fuel injector cleaning. Due to variation in fuel quality in different areas of the country, GM has recognized the need for fuel injector cleaning methods on some engines, though under normal circumstances, this service is not part of the maintenance requirements. GM has published several gasoline fuel injector cleaning bulletins that fully outline the methods to be used in conjunction with GM Part Numbered solutions to accomplish proper and safe cleaning of the fuel injectors with preventative maintenance suggestions to maintain optimum performance. You may refer to Corporate Bulletin Numbers 03-06-04-030 and 04-06-04-051 for additional information on this subject. Subsystem Flushing Flushing of A/C lines, radiators, transmission coolers, and power steering systems are recognized practices to be performed after catastrophic failures or extreme corrosion when encountered in radiators. For acceptable A/C flushing concerns, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 01-01-38-006. This practice is NOT required or recommended for normal service operations. The use of external transmission fluid exchange or flush machines is NOT recommended for the automatic or manual transmission. Use of external machines to replace the fluid may affect the operation or durability of the transmission. Transmission fluid should only be replaced by draining and refilling following directions in SI. Refer to Automatic/Manual Transmission Fluid and Filter Replacement. Approved Transmission Flushing Tool (Transmission Cooler Only) The Automatic Transmission Oil Cooler Flush and Flow Test Tool is recommended for GM vehicles. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Flushing and Flow Test in SI using the J 45096. Service Is Important to You and Your Customer General Motors takes great pride in offering our dealerships and customers high quality vehicles that require extremely low maintenance over the life of the vehicle. This low cost of ownership builds repeat sales and offers our customers measurable economy of operation against competing vehicles. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-06-01-029E > Apr > 10 > Vehicle - Engine Crankcase and Subsystems Flushing Info. > Page 2437 Providing responsible services at the proper intervals will greatly aid your dealership with repeat business, and additional services when required. Most customers appreciate and gain trust in the dealership that informs and offers them just what they need for continued trouble-free operation. Examine your service department's practices and verify that all Service Consultants and Technicians focus on customer satisfaction, vehicle inspections, and other products at time of service. Use this opportunity to upgrade the services you provide to your customers. Here are a few suggestions: - Take the time required to align your dealership service practices with the new GM Simplified Maintenance Schedule. Use the new vehicle Owner's Manual Maintenance I and II schedules to create a "mirror image" in your advertising and dealer service pricing that is easily understandable to your customer. Taking advantage of this new service strategy may greatly increase your dealership service sales and customer retention while decreasing the frequency of visits and inconvenience to your customer. - Review your program to ensure that all vehicles coming in are evaluated for safety and wear items. Examine all vehicles for tire condition, signs of misalignment, brake wear, exterior lamp functionality, exhaust condition, A/C cooling performance, SRS or Air Bag MIL, along with Service Engine Soon or Check Engine indicators. If the Service Engine Soon or Check Engine MIL is illuminated, it is vital that you inform the customer of the concerns with ignoring the indicator and what the required repair would cost. In addition to the possibility of increased emissions and driveability concerns, many customers are unaware that lower gas mileage may also result, with additional cost to the customer. - Be complete in your service recommendations. Some sales opportunities are not being fully pursued nationally. Focus on overlooked but required maintenance that has real benefits to the customer. Many vehicles are equipped with cabin air filters. If these filters are used beyond replacement time, they may impede airflow decreasing A/C and heating performance. Make sure these filters are part of your recommended service. Note that some of our vehicles may not have been factory equipped but will accept the filters as an accessory. - Express the value in maintaining the finish quality of the customer's vehicle at the Maintenance I and II visits. More fully utilize the vehicle prep personnel you already have in place. In today's world, many people simply ignore the finish of their vehicle, at best infrequently using an automatic car wash for exterior cleaning. Offer vehicle detailing services in stages from just a wash and wax to a complete interior cleaning. When paired with the Simplified Maintenance visit, this will increase customer satisfaction. On return, the customer gets a visibly improved vehicle that will be a source of pride of ownership along with a vehicle that is now fully maintained. Also, reinforce the improved resale value of a completely maintained vehicle. - For customers who clean and maintain the appearance of their vehicles themselves encourage the use of GM Vehicle Care products. Many customers may have never used GM Car Wash/Wax Concentrate, GM Cleaner Wax or a longtime product, GM Glass Cleaner, which is a favorite of many customers who try it just once. If your dealership give samples of these products with new car purchases, customers may already be sold on the product but not willing to make a special trip to the dealership. Capitalize on sales at this time. Stock shelves right at the Service counter with these products and consider instituting compensation programs for Service Consultants who suggest these products. Many consumers faced with an intimidating wall full of car care products sold at local auto parts stores may find it comforting to purchase a fully tested product sold by GM that they know will not harm the finish of their vehicle. We suggest these competitively priced basic vehicle care products to emphasize: In USA: - #12378401 GM Vehicle Care Wash/Wax Concentrate 16 fl. oz. (0.473L) - #89021822 GM Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner Aerosol 18 oz. (510 g) - #12377966 GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax 16 fl. oz. (0.473L) - #1052929 GM Vehicle Care Chrome and Wire Wheel Cleaner 16 fl. oz. (0.473L) - #88861431 GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator 24 fl. oz. (0.710L) In Canada: - #10953203 GM Vehicle Care Wash & Wax Concentrate 473 mL - #992727 GM Glass Cleaner Aerosol 500 g - #10952905 GM Vehicle Care Liquid Cleaner/Wax 473 mL - #10953013 GM Vehicle Care Chrome Cleaner and Polish 454 mL - #10953202 GM Vehicle Care Wheel Brite 473 mL - #88901678 GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator 473 mL - Display signboards with the installed price for popular GM Accessories such as running boards and Tonneau Covers. Customers may not think to ask about these desirable items at the time of a service visit. - Finally, take advantage of the GM Goodwrench initiatives (Tire Program, Goodwrench Credit Card, etc. / Dealer Marketing Association (DMA) Promotions in Canada) to provide the customer with more reasons to identify your dealership as the best place to go for parts and service. Remember to utilize ALL of the service aspects you possess in your dealership to satisfy and provide value to your customer. Many businesses exist profitably as an oil change location, a vehicle repair facility, or a detailing shop alone. You already have the capabilities of all three and provide these services with the inherent trust of your customer, under the GM Mark of Excellence. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON Bulletin No.: 04-07-30-013B Date: February 01, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Automatic Transmission Shift, Engine Driveability Concerns or Service Engine Soon (SES) Light On as a Result of the Use of an Excessively/Over-Oiled Aftermarket, Reusable Air Filter Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2007 and Prior Saturn Models 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-07-30-013A (Section 07 - Transmission/Transaxle). The use of an excessively/over-oiled aftermarket, reusable air filter may result in: Service Engine Soon (SES) light on Transmission shift concerns, slipping and damaged clutch(es) or band(s) Engine driveability concerns, poor acceleration from a stop, limited engine RPM range The oil that is used on these air filter elements may be transferred onto the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor causing contamination of the sensor. As a result, the Grams per Second (GPS) signal from the MAF may be low and any or all of the concerns listed above may occur. When servicing a vehicle with any of these concerns, be sure to check for the presence of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter. The MAF, GPS reading should be compared to a like vehicle with an OEM air box and filter under the same driving conditions to verify the concern. The use of an aftermarket reusable air filter DOES NOT void the vehicle's warranty. If an aftermarket reusable air filter is used, technicians should inspect the MAF sensor element and the air induction hose for contamination of oil prior to making warranty repairs. Transmission or engine driveability concerns (related to the MAF sensor being contaminated with oil) that are the result of the use of an aftermarket reusable, excessively/over-oiled air filter are not considered to be warrantable repair items. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-07-30-013B > Feb > 07 > Engine, A/T - Shift/Driveability Concerns/MIL ON > Page 2442 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: > 9313310 > Mar > 93 > Door Locks - Binding or Sticking or Key Hard to Insert Door Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Door Locks - Binding or Sticking or Key Hard to Insert Number: 93-133-10 Section: 10 Date: MARCH 1993 Corporate Bulletin No.: 1341070R ASE No.: B1 Subject: DOOR LOCK CYLINDERS (RECOMMENDED LUBRICATION) Model and Year: ALL 1993 AND PREVIOUS MODEL CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN 92-41-10, DATED NOV. 1991. THE 1993 MODEL YEAR HAS BEEN ADDED AS WELL AS A NOTE. PLEASE DISCARD ALL COPIES OF 92-41-10. Customer comments of binding/sticking door lock cylinders, or keys that are hard to insert or extract may be corrected in many cases by applying the proper lubrication. The recommended materials for lubricating these components are (in order of preference): - GM # 12345120 Multi purpose lubricant (9 oz. spray) or # 12345121 (12 oz.). - 5 W 30 Motor Oil - GM # 1052276 or 1052277 spray type Silicone (4.5 oz. or 12 oz. cans). Penetrating oil type lubricants (such as GM # 1052949 or 1052950, WD-40 lubricants) ARE NOT RECOMMENDED because they wash out the original lubrication and eventually evaporate, leaving little or no lubricating material. However, if these type materials are used to "unfreeze" or loosen lock cylinder components, refer to steps 2 through 4 listed below for the proper methods of lubricating. NOTE: DO NOT REPLACE THE DOOR LOCK CYLINDERS UNTIL AFTER THE LUBRICATING MATERIALS HAVE BEEN USED AND THE CYLINDER REMAINS FROZEN/BOUND. If door lock cylinders require replacement for any reason, apply a coating of GM # 12345120 Multi purpose Lubricant to the inside of the lock case and the cylinder keyway prior to assembling and installing the cylinder. Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Frozen cylinders due to cold weather may be repaired using the following procedure: 1. Apply heat to the cylinder area with a heat gun while being careful not to damage the painted surfaces. 2. Hold the shutter door open with a paper clip (or similar item) and force air into the cylinder using compressed air and a blow gun attachment. 3. While holding the shutter door open, inject a small amount of lubricant (see above recommendations) into the cylinder. 4. Work the key into the cylinder several times and wipe any excess lubrication residue from the key. Use applicable Labor Time Number and Time allowance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Bearings > Component Information > Adjustments > 2 - Pinion Carrier Bearings: Adjustments 2 - Pinion Fig. 3 Installing shims To adjust differential side bearing preload, change thickness of right and left shims equally so original backlash is not disturbed. 1. Ensure side bearing surfaces are clean and free of burrs. 2. Apply suitable lubricant to side bearings. If original bearings are to be reused, original outer races should also be used. 3. Install differential case in carrier, with bearing outer races in position. 4. Install left bearing cap and cap attaching bolts loosely so case may be moved during adjustment. 5. Measure original spacers and subtract .004 inch from each reading. Use caution not to interchange right and left spacers. 6. Select a service spacer for each side equal to thickness of original shim minus .004 inch, then install shim as shown in Fig. 3. Ensure flat edge of spacer faces against housing. 7. At this point, bearings should have no play and no drag (zero preload). If zero preload is not present, shims should be added or removed equally from both sides as necessary. 8. Check case for zero endplay using a suitable dial indicator. If shim installation causes excessive pinion to ring gear clearance, select thinner left shim and add difference to right side. Keep total shim thickness at a value equal to that obtained in step 6. 9. Install both bearing caps and cap attaching bolts. Torque bolts 40 ft. lbs. Fig. 4 Gear tooth contact pattern check 10. If pinion was not removed, check backlash and tooth pattern as follows: a. Apply suitable marking compound on ring gear teeth. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Bearings > Component Information > Adjustments > 2 - Pinion > Page 2459 b. Rotate drive pinion one revolution and check gear tooth contact pattern as shown on Fig. 4. Add or remove shims as required. c. After backlash and tooth pattern operation has been completed, remove shim packs using caution not to mix them. d. Select new shims for each side .004 inch thicker than those removed, then install each shim on its proper side. This additional thickness will ensure proper bearing preload. e. Check total rotational torque. Total torque with differential case preloaded and pinion installed should be 16---29 inch lbs. if new bearings are installed or 10---16 inch lbs. if original bearings are installed. f. If total rotational torque is not as specified, repeat steps 4 through 10. 11. If drive pinion was removed, remove differential case and shims, then proceed to ``Drive Pinion & Bearing Shim Adjustment'' procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Bearings > Component Information > Adjustments > 2 - Pinion > Page 2460 Carrier Bearings: Adjustments 4 - Pinion Fig. 3 Installing shims To adjust differential side bearing preload, change thickness of right and left shims equally so original backlash is not disturbed. 1. Ensure side bearing surfaces are clean and free of burrs. 2. Apply suitable lubricant to side bearings. If original bearings are to be reused, original outer races should also be used. 3. Install differential case in carrier, with bearing outer races in position. 4. Install left bearing cap and cap attaching bolts loosely so case may be moved during adjustment. 5. Measure original spacers and subtract .004 inch from each reading. Use caution not to interchange right and left spacers. 6. Select a service spacer for each side equal to thickness of original shim minus .004 inch, then install shim as shown in Fig. 3. Ensure flat edge of spacer faces against housing. 7. At this point, bearings should have no play and no drag (zero preload). If zero preload is not present, shims should be added or removed equally from both sides as necessary. 8. Check case for zero endplay using a dial indicator. If shim installation causes excessive pinion to ring gear clearance, select thinner left shim and add difference to right side. Keep total shim thickness at a value equal to that obtained in step 6. 9. Install both bearing caps and cap attaching bolts. Torque bolts 40 ft. lbs. Fig. 4 Gear tooth contact pattern check 10. If pinion was not removed, check backlash and tooth pattern as follows: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Bearings > Component Information > Adjustments > 2 - Pinion > Page 2461 a. Apply marking compound on ring gear teeth. b. Rotate drive pinion one revolution and check gear tooth contact pattern as shown on Fig. 4. Add or remove shims as required. c. After backlash and tooth pattern operation has been completed, remove shim packs using caution not to mix them. d. Select new shims for each side .004 inch thicker than those removed, then install each shim on its proper side. This additional thickness will ensure proper bearing preload. e. Check total rotational torque. Total torque with differential case preloaded and pinion installed should be 16-29 inch lbs. if new bearings are installed or 10-16 inch lbs. if original bearings are installed. f. If total rotational torque is not as specified, repeat steps 4 through 10. 11. If drive pinion was removed, remove differential case and shims, then proceed to DRIVE PINION & BEARING SHIM ADJUSTMENT procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Pinion Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA83V045000 > Apr > 83 > Recall 83V045000: Differential PInion Shaft Lock Screw Carrier Pinion Shaft: Recalls Recall 83V045000: Differential PInion Shaft Lock Screw THE LOCKING SCREW THAT RETAINS THE PINION SHAFT IN PLACE IN THE DIFFERENTIAL COULD COME LOOSE. THE PINION SHAFT TURNS THE GEARS INSIDE THE DIFFERENTIAL THAT ROTATE THE DRIVE AXLES AND REAR WHEELS. IF THE LOCKING SCREW COMES LOOSE, IT COULD DAMAGE OTHER COMPONENTS OR JAM IN THE GEARS. IF THE PINION SHAFT COMES LOOSE, THE REAR WHEELS MAY NO LONGER POWER THE VEHICLE. THE DEALER WILL REPLACE THE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SCREW AT NO CHARGE. VEHICLE DESCRIPTION: LIGHT TRUCKS EQUIPPED WITH EATON LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL. SYSTEM: POWER TRAIN; DIFFERENTIAL SHAFT LOCK SCREW. CONSEQUENCES OF DEFECT: IF THE FAILURE SHOULD OCCUR WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION, THE DRIVER MAY LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE AND AN ACCIDENT COULD RESULT. 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK C10 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK G10 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK G20 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK K10 1982 GMC C15 1982 GMC G15 1982 GMC G25 1982 GMC K15 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Pinion Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Carrier Pinion Shaft: > 83T91 > Oct > 83 > Differential Pinion Cross Shaft - R&R; When Broken Carrier Pinion Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Differential Pinion Cross Shaft - R&R; When Broken Number: 83-T-91 Section: IV Date: OCT., 1983 Subject: DIFFERENTIAL CASE PINION CROSS SHAFT REMOVAL PROCEDURE WITH A BROKEN PINION SHAFT LOCK SCREW ALL REAR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS - ALL YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The following procedure should be used to remove a broken differential pinion cross shaft lock screw. SAFETY GLASSES MUST BE WORN. FIGURE 1 - DIFFERENTIAL CASE STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL 1. Install puller such as J-22888 or equivalent with the puller jaws inserted into the case openings and puller screw against the end of the pinion cross shaft on the side of the case opposite the lock screw (refer to Figure 1). This is necessary so shearing the lock screw will not distress the pinion gear surface inside the case. A spacer such as a 5/16" nut may be required between the puller screw and the pinion cross shaft. 2. Position the case assembly on an angle so pinion cross shaft will clear pinion gear head during removal procedure. 3. Tighten puller screw to 50-55 lbs.ft. (68-75 N-m). Tap end of puller once with a hammer. Retighten puller screw about 1/8 turn (50-55 lbs.ft. [68-75 N-m.]) and tap again. Repeat procedure until pinion cross shaft shears the lock screw. NOTICE: Too severe of a hammer blow may damage carrier side bearings. 4. When the lock screw is sheared, remove puller, turn case assembly and remove pinion cross shaft. The remainder of the lock screw can then usually be removed with a prick punch. A slight metal distress from lock screw hole to outer portion of case is acceptable. If case is broken out at lock screw hole area, the case must be replaced. 5. Install new parts as required and reassemble differential. LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL A limited slip differential case assembly does not have access for both puller jaws. As the lock screw hole in the pinion cross shaft is within .150" from the end of shaft, a die grinder with a 1/4" carbide bit can be used to grind a groove through the end of the pinion cross shaft exposing the lock screw. A 1/4" die grinder is a commonly available 28,000 to 30,000 RPM tool similar to a router. Both electric and air powered die grinders are available from power tool sources. This tool and bit is also useful for elongating holes in steel, etc. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Pinion Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Carrier Pinion Shaft: > 83T91 > Oct > 83 > Differential Pinion Cross Shaft - R&R; When Broken > Page 2475 FIGURE 2 - RING GEAR 1. Wrap the ring gear in a shop towel and place towels around case assembly exposing only the end of pinion cross shaft. This will protect the differential internal parts from exposure to metal grindings (refer to Figure 2). 2. Inspect and correct any fuel leaks in area of tank and fuel lines, as grinder will cause sparks. 3. Grind a groove through the end of the pinion cross shaft exposing the lock screw. When lock screw is exposed use a punch and hammer to drive out pinion cross shaft past the lock screw with the case on an angle so shaft will clear pinion gear head. 4. In most instances, the broken piece of lock screw can be removed with the case still in the housing. 5. Clean all traces of grindings from housing. 6. Install new parts as required and reassemble differential. The suggested labor time to remove a broken pinion shaft lock screw from either a standard or limited slip differential is .4 hour. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Pinion Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Carrier Pinion Shaft: > NHTSA83V045000 > Apr > 83 > Recall 83V045000: Differential PInion Shaft Lock Screw Carrier Pinion Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 83V045000: Differential PInion Shaft Lock Screw THE LOCKING SCREW THAT RETAINS THE PINION SHAFT IN PLACE IN THE DIFFERENTIAL COULD COME LOOSE. THE PINION SHAFT TURNS THE GEARS INSIDE THE DIFFERENTIAL THAT ROTATE THE DRIVE AXLES AND REAR WHEELS. IF THE LOCKING SCREW COMES LOOSE, IT COULD DAMAGE OTHER COMPONENTS OR JAM IN THE GEARS. IF THE PINION SHAFT COMES LOOSE, THE REAR WHEELS MAY NO LONGER POWER THE VEHICLE. THE DEALER WILL REPLACE THE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SCREW AT NO CHARGE. VEHICLE DESCRIPTION: LIGHT TRUCKS EQUIPPED WITH EATON LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL. SYSTEM: POWER TRAIN; DIFFERENTIAL SHAFT LOCK SCREW. CONSEQUENCES OF DEFECT: IF THE FAILURE SHOULD OCCUR WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION, THE DRIVER MAY LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE AND AN ACCIDENT COULD RESULT. 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK C10 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK G10 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK G20 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK K10 1982 GMC C15 1982 GMC G15 1982 GMC G25 1982 GMC K15 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Pinion Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Carrier Pinion Shaft: > 83T91 > Oct > 83 > Differential Pinion Cross Shaft - R&R; When Broken Carrier Pinion Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Differential Pinion Cross Shaft - R&R; When Broken Number: 83-T-91 Section: IV Date: OCT., 1983 Subject: DIFFERENTIAL CASE PINION CROSS SHAFT REMOVAL PROCEDURE WITH A BROKEN PINION SHAFT LOCK SCREW ALL REAR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS - ALL YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The following procedure should be used to remove a broken differential pinion cross shaft lock screw. SAFETY GLASSES MUST BE WORN. FIGURE 1 - DIFFERENTIAL CASE STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL 1. Install puller such as J-22888 or equivalent with the puller jaws inserted into the case openings and puller screw against the end of the pinion cross shaft on the side of the case opposite the lock screw (refer to Figure 1). This is necessary so shearing the lock screw will not distress the pinion gear surface inside the case. A spacer such as a 5/16" nut may be required between the puller screw and the pinion cross shaft. 2. Position the case assembly on an angle so pinion cross shaft will clear pinion gear head during removal procedure. 3. Tighten puller screw to 50-55 lbs.ft. (68-75 N-m). Tap end of puller once with a hammer. Retighten puller screw about 1/8 turn (50-55 lbs.ft. [68-75 N-m.]) and tap again. Repeat procedure until pinion cross shaft shears the lock screw. NOTICE: Too severe of a hammer blow may damage carrier side bearings. 4. When the lock screw is sheared, remove puller, turn case assembly and remove pinion cross shaft. The remainder of the lock screw can then usually be removed with a prick punch. A slight metal distress from lock screw hole to outer portion of case is acceptable. If case is broken out at lock screw hole area, the case must be replaced. 5. Install new parts as required and reassemble differential. LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL A limited slip differential case assembly does not have access for both puller jaws. As the lock screw hole in the pinion cross shaft is within .150" from the end of shaft, a die grinder with a 1/4" carbide bit can be used to grind a groove through the end of the pinion cross shaft exposing the lock screw. A 1/4" die grinder is a commonly available 28,000 to 30,000 RPM tool similar to a router. Both electric and air powered die grinders are available from power tool sources. This tool and bit is also useful for elongating holes in steel, etc. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Pinion Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Carrier Pinion Shaft: > 83T91 > Oct > 83 > Differential Pinion Cross Shaft - R&R; When Broken > Page 2485 FIGURE 2 - RING GEAR 1. Wrap the ring gear in a shop towel and place towels around case assembly exposing only the end of pinion cross shaft. This will protect the differential internal parts from exposure to metal grindings (refer to Figure 2). 2. Inspect and correct any fuel leaks in area of tank and fuel lines, as grinder will cause sparks. 3. Grind a groove through the end of the pinion cross shaft exposing the lock screw. When lock screw is exposed use a punch and hammer to drive out pinion cross shaft past the lock screw with the case on an angle so shaft will clear pinion gear head. 4. In most instances, the broken piece of lock screw can be removed with the case still in the housing. 5. Clean all traces of grindings from housing. 6. Install new parts as required and reassemble differential. The suggested labor time to remove a broken pinion shaft lock screw from either a standard or limited slip differential is .4 hour. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Differential Pinion Cross Shaft - R&R; When Broken Differential Case: Technical Service Bulletins Differential Pinion Cross Shaft - R&R; When Broken Number: 83-T-91 Section: IV Date: OCT., 1983 Subject: DIFFERENTIAL CASE PINION CROSS SHAFT REMOVAL PROCEDURE WITH A BROKEN PINION SHAFT LOCK SCREW ALL REAR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS - ALL YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The following procedure should be used to remove a broken differential pinion cross shaft lock screw. SAFETY GLASSES MUST BE WORN. FIGURE 1 - DIFFERENTIAL CASE STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL 1. Install puller such as J-22888 or equivalent with the puller jaws inserted into the case openings and puller screw against the end of the pinion cross shaft on the side of the case opposite the lock screw (refer to Figure 1). This is necessary so shearing the lock screw will not distress the pinion gear surface inside the case. A spacer such as a 5/16" nut may be required between the puller screw and the pinion cross shaft. 2. Position the case assembly on an angle so pinion cross shaft will clear pinion gear head during removal procedure. 3. Tighten puller screw to 50-55 lbs.ft. (68-75 N-m). Tap end of puller once with a hammer. Retighten puller screw about 1/8 turn (50-55 lbs.ft. [68-75 N-m.]) and tap again. Repeat procedure until pinion cross shaft shears the lock screw. NOTICE: Too severe of a hammer blow may damage carrier side bearings. 4. When the lock screw is sheared, remove puller, turn case assembly and remove pinion cross shaft. The remainder of the lock screw can then usually be removed with a prick punch. A slight metal distress from lock screw hole to outer portion of case is acceptable. If case is broken out at lock screw hole area, the case must be replaced. 5. Install new parts as required and reassemble differential. LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL A limited slip differential case assembly does not have access for both puller jaws. As the lock screw hole in the pinion cross shaft is within .150" from the end of shaft, a die grinder with a 1/4" carbide bit can be used to grind a groove through the end of the pinion cross shaft exposing the lock screw. A 1/4" die grinder is a commonly available 28,000 to 30,000 RPM tool similar to a router. Both electric and air powered die grinders are available from power tool sources. This tool and bit is also useful for elongating holes in steel, etc. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Differential Pinion Cross Shaft - R&R; When Broken > Page 2490 FIGURE 2 - RING GEAR 1. Wrap the ring gear in a shop towel and place towels around case assembly exposing only the end of pinion cross shaft. This will protect the differential internal parts from exposure to metal grindings (refer to Figure 2). 2. Inspect and correct any fuel leaks in area of tank and fuel lines, as grinder will cause sparks. 3. Grind a groove through the end of the pinion cross shaft exposing the lock screw. When lock screw is exposed use a punch and hammer to drive out pinion cross shaft past the lock screw with the case on an angle so shaft will clear pinion gear head. 4. In most instances, the broken piece of lock screw can be removed with the case still in the housing. 5. Clean all traces of grindings from housing. 6. Install new parts as required and reassemble differential. The suggested labor time to remove a broken pinion shaft lock screw from either a standard or limited slip differential is .4 hour. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > 7 1/2 - 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear Differential Clutch: Service and Repair 7 1/2 - 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear Cam Gear Clutch Fig. 8 Exploded View Of Eaton Locking Differential. Models With 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear 1. Remove retaining ring from end of cam gear, Fig. 8. 2. Remove discs and cam plate from gear, keeping all components in order. 3. Clean and inspect components, and replace any that are damaged, distorted or excessively worn. If cam gear must be replaced, refer to CAM GEAR SHIM SELECTION for shim selection procedures prior to case reassembly. 4. Position gear on flat surface with hub end up, and assemble cam plate onto gear with cam form down to mate with cam form on gear. 5. Assemble two eared discs, one splined disc and one wave washer on cam gear, starting with eared disc as shown in Fig. 8. 6. Alternately assemble three eared discs and two splined discs on cam gear hub, starting with eared discs. 7. Install retaining ring, ensuring that retainer is fully seated. Side Gear (RH) Clutch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > 7 1/2 - 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear > Page 2495 Fig. 8 Exploded View Of Eaton Locking Differential. Models With 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear 1. Remove disc pack and shim from side gear, keeping components in order. 2. Clean and inspect components, and replace any that are damaged, deformed or excessively worn. If side gear must be replaced, refer to SIDE GEAR SHIM SELECTION for shim selection prior to case assembly. If side gear hub is scored or worn, inspect bore in case and replace assembly if bore is damaged or worn. 3. Alternately assemble eared discs and splined discs on side gear hub, starting with eared disc as shown in Fig. 8. 4. Install original shim or replacement shim of same thickness if original side gear is being used. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > 7 1/2 - 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear > Page 2496 Differential Clutch: Service and Repair 8 7/8 Inch Ring Gear Cam Gear Clutch If cam plate or clutch discs must be replaced, the cam gear subassembly must be serviced as follows: 1. Measure and record overall length of gear assembly (front face of gear to back side of thrust ring, including shim). This dimension will be needed to reassemble unit if thrust ring is replaced. Do not replace thrust ring unless necessary. If ring is excessively worn or scored, check bore in case for scoring. If bore is scored, replace entire differential. 2. With gear hub end up, compress disc pack and install jaws of split ring bearing remover between the thrust ring and the top eared disc. Bevel side of bearing remover should face up toward thrust ring. 3. Place cam gear assembly with bearing remover attached in an arbor press supporting the bearing remover on both sides. 4. Install a 1-1/2 inch to 1-3/4 inch diameter plug on gear hub. Press against plug with ram of press to remove thrust ring. Keep components in proper order. 5. Place gear on bench with hub end up. 6. Assemble cam plate with cam form down to mate with cam form on gear. Fig. 8 Exploded View Of Eaton Locking Differential. Models With 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear 7. Assemble onto cam plate: 2 eared discs, 1 splined disc, and 1 wave spring alternately, Fig. 8. 8. Assemble onto gear hub: 2 splined discs and 3 eared discs alternately, Fig. 8. 9. Locate cam gear assembly in arbor press with hub end up. Place thrust ring on gear hub and press to shoulder making sure that ring is square with hub. Compress disc pack by pushing down on the discs to keep the splined discs from becoming wedged between the thrust ring and gear shoulder while pressing the subassembly together. Side Gear (RH) Clutch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > 7 1/2 - 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear > Page 2497 Fig. 8 Exploded View Of Eaton Locking Differential. Models With 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear 1. Remove shim and disc pack from side gear, keeping components in order. 2. Inspect discs and guide clips and replace as needed. 3. Inspect side gear and shim. If either component is damaged or excessively worn, differential assembly must be replaced. If gear hub is scored or abnormally worn, inspect corresponding bore in case. If case bore is damaged or oversize, differential assembly must be replaced. 4. Assemble eared and splined discs onto side gear hub, starting with eared disc as shown in Fig. 8. If original disc pack is used, ensure that discs are installed in original position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > 7 1/2 - 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear > Page 2498 Differential Clutch: Service and Repair 9 1/2 Inch Ring Gear Cam Gear Clutch Fig. 6 Cam Gear Thrust Ring Removal. Eaton Locking Differential 1. Measure and record overall length of cam gear assembly from front face of gear to back side of thrust ring, including shim. 2. With gear hub facing up, compress disc pack and insert jaws of suitable split ring bearing puller between thrust ring and top eared disc with bevel side of puller facing thrust ring, Fig. 6. 3. Support bearing remover in press and press cam gear from thrust ring using 1-3/4 inch diameter spacer. Keep all component in order as cam gear is removed. 4. Remove disc pack and cam plate from gear, clean and inspect components, and replace any that are damaged or excessively worn. Do not replace thrust ring and/or cam gear unless necessary. If ring or gear is excessively worn or scored, inspect bore in case. If case bore is scored, entire assembly must be replaced. If cam gear or thrust ring are replaced, shim thickness must be selected to provide original assembly dimension and proper differential pinion backlash. 5. Position cam gear on flat surface with hub end up and install cam plate with cam form down to mate with form on gear. Fig. 5 Exploded View Of Eaton Locking Differential 6. Assemble two eared discs, one splined disc and wave spring onto cam plate as shown in Fig. 5. If components are reused, they must be installed in original position. 7. Alternately assemble three splined and four eared discs on cam gear hub, as shown in Fig. 5. 8. Mount cam gear assembly in press and position thrust ring over gear hub. 9. Compress disc pack to prevent splined disc from being trapped, then press thrust ring onto gear until seated against shoulder of gear. 10. Inspect assembly to ensure that discs are properly assembled and that first splined disc (large spline) is properly located on cam plate. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > 7 1/2 - 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear > Page 2499 Side Gear (RH) Clutch Fig. 5 Exploded View Of Eaton Locking Differential 1. Remove shim and disc pack from gear keeping components in order. 2. Inspect discs and guide clips and replace as needed. 3. Inspect side gear and shim. If either component is scored or excessively worn, inspect case and replace entire assembly if case is defective. If either side gear or shim must be replaced, shim thickness must be determined as outlined in SIDE GEAR SHIM SELECTION. 4. Alternately assemble splined and eared discs on side gear hub as shown in Fig. 5. If components are reused, they must be installed in original position. 5. Install original shim or new shim of equal thickness. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > 7 1/2 - 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear > Page 2500 Differential Clutch: Service and Repair 10 1/2 Inch Ring Gear Cam Gear Clutch Fig. 6 Cam Gear Thrust Ring Removal. Eaton Locking Differential Fig. 4 Exploded View Of Cam Gear Assembly. Eaton Locking Differential 1. Measure and record overall length of cam gear assembly from front face of gear to back face of thrust ring, including shim. 2. Compress disc pack and insert jaws of bearing separator tool No. J-22912 or equivalent between thrust ring and top clutch disc with chamfer of separator facing thrust ring. 3. Support separator in press and press cam gear from thrust ring using suitable spacer, Fig. 3, keeping components in order as cam gear is removed. 4. Remove discs, spring and cam plate from gear, Fig. 4, clean and inspect components and replace any that are damaged or excessively worn. Do not replace cam gear and/or thrust ring unless necessary. If ring or gear is excessively worn or scored, inspect bore in case. If case bore is scored, differential assembly must be replaced. If cam gear or thrust ring is replaced, shim thickness must be selected to provide original assembly dimension and proper differential pinion backlash. 5. Position cam gear with hub facing up and install cam plate with cam form down to mesh with form on gear. 6. Assemble two eared discs and one disc with large splines on cam plate, starting with eared disc as shown in Fig. 4, then install wave spring. If components are reused, they must be installed in original position. 7. Assemble four eared discs and three splined discs on cam gear, starting with eared disc as shown in Fig. 4. 8. Position cam gear assembly in press and install thrust ring on hub of gear, ensuring that ring is square with hub. 9. Compress disc pack to prevent disc from being trapped, then press thrust ring onto cam gear until ring is seated against shoulder of gear. 10. Inspect assembly and ensure that components are properly installed. Side Gear (LH) Clutch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > 7 1/2 - 8 1/2 Inch Ring Gear > Page 2501 Fig. 2 Exploded View Of Eaton Locking Differential 1. Remove guide clips and clutch discs from gear keeping components in order. 2. Clean and inspect components, and replace as needed. If side gear shim is defective, it must be replaced with one of equal thickness. If side gear is replaced, and/or if side gear shim thickness cannot be determined, perform SIDE GEAR SHIM SELECTION procedure. 3. Install eared and splined clutch discs on side gear, starting with eared disc as shown in Fig. 2. If components are reused, they must be installed in original position. 4. Install selected shim on side gear. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Axle Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rockwell Full Floating Axle Differential Axle Housing: Service and Repair Rockwell Full Floating Axle 1. Raise and support vehicle, then remove rear wheels. 2. Remove the two trunnion bearing U-bolts, then split universal joint and position propeller shaft aside. 3. Remove hub and drum assembly, then disconnect parking brake cable at lever and flange plate. 4. Disconnect brake hose at axle connector, then the shock absorbers at axle brackets. 5. Support axle housing with a suitable jack, remove spring plate U-bolts and remove axle housing from vehicle. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Axle Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rockwell Full Floating Axle > Page 2506 Differential Axle Housing: Service and Repair GMC Single Speed Axle Refer to ``Chevrolet Full Floating Axles'' for axle housing replacement procedures, since procedures are identical for both axles. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Axle Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rockwell Full Floating Axle > Page 2507 Differential Axle Housing: Service and Repair Chevrolet Full Floating Axle 1.. Raise and support vehicle, then remove rear wheels. 2. Remove the two trunnion bearing U-bolts, then split universal joint and position propeller shaft aside. 3. Remove hub and drum assembly, then disconnect parking brake cable at lever and flange plate. 4. Disconnect brake hose at axle connector, then the shock absorbers at axle brackets. 5. Support axle housing with a suitable jack, remove spring plate U-bolts and remove axle housing from vehicle. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Axle Housing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rockwell Full Floating Axle > Page 2508 Differential Axle Housing: Service and Repair Chevrolet Salisbury Semi-Floating Axle Construction of the axle assembly is such that service operations may be performed with the housing installed in the vehicle or with the housing removed and installed in a holding fixture. The following procedure is necessary only when the housing requires replacement. 1. Raise vehicle and place stand jacks under frame side rails. 2. Remove rear wheels and drums. 3. Support rear axle assembly with a suitable jack so that tension is relieved in springs and tie rod, if equipped. 4. Disconnect tie rod at axle housing bracket, if equipped. 5. Remove trunnion bearing U-bolts from rear yoke, split universal joint, position propeller shaft to one side and tie it to frame side rail. 6. Remove axle U-bolt nuts and allow shock absorbers to hang freely so that they do not interfere with axle. On K and V Series trucks, remove spacer from axle housing. 7. Disconnect hydraulic brake hose at connector on axle housing. 8. Remove brake drum and disconnect parking brake cable at lever and at flange plate. 9. Lower axle and remove from vehicle. 10. Reverse procedure to install axle assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 913700B > Jul > 91 > Locking Differential - Chattering on Turns Fluid - Differential: Customer Interest Locking Differential - Chattering on Turns Number: 91-370-0B Section: 0B Date: JULY 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 964201R Subject: LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL LUBRICANT Model and Year: 1982-91 ALL TRUCKS WITH G80 REAR AXLE THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 90-139-4A, DATED JANUARY 1990. CONDITION DESCRIPTION AND CORRECTION HAVE BEEN ADDED AS WELL AS THE 1991 MODEL YEAR. ALL COPIES OF 90-139-4A SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some light duty trucks equipped with locking rear axles (G80) may exhibit rear axle chatter, especially when turning a corner from a stop. This condition of alternate engagement and disengagement of the clutches in the differential assembly is usually caused by contaminated axle lubricant. To correct this condition, drain and refill the rear axle with SAE 80W-90 GL5 (P/N 1052271). The use of any additive in locking rear axles (G80) is not recommended. Rear axle additives are designed for use in limited slip differentials which are normally installed in cars. All light duty trucks equipped with RPO G80 make use of a locking differential and the use of additives will delay the engagement of the locking mechanism and may decrease axle life. VEHICLES/COMPONENTS INVOLVED: Some light duty trucks equipped with locking rear axles, RPO G80. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION: Part Number Description 1052271 Lubricant, Rear Axle (24 oz.) See Appropriate Parts Manual Gasket, Rear Axle Housing Cover Parts are currently available through GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION: As specified in Light Duty Truck Maintenance Schedules, locking rear axle fluid drain and refill is required owner maintenance at the first engine oil change. Failure to drain and refill the rear axle as specified may contribute to a later axle chatter condition. Refer to the appropriate Light Duty Truck Maintenance Schedule or service manual, section 0B, for further details on change intervals. For those vehicles repaired under warranty, which have had the axle fluid changed at the first oil change and have experienced rear axle chatter use: Labor Operation: F2010 Use applicable labor time guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 76-02-02A > Oct > 98 > Drivetrain - Recommended Axle Lubricant Fluid - Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Recommended Axle Lubricant File In Section: 0 - General Information Bulletin No.: 76-02-02A Date: October, 1998 INFORMATION Subject: Recommended Axle Lubricant Models: 1999 and Prior Rear Wheel Drive Passenger Cars, Light and Medium Duty Trucks, and Four Wheel Drive Vehicles This bulletin is being revised to add the 1998 and 1999 Model Years and add Vehicle Line and Recommended Axle Lubricant Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 76-02-02 (Section 0 - General Information). The following tables provide the latest information on recommended axle lubricant. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 76-02-02A > Oct > 98 > Drivetrain - Recommended Axle Lubricant > Page 2522 Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 913700B > Jul > 91 > Locking Differential - Chattering on Turns Fluid - Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins Locking Differential - Chattering on Turns Number: 91-370-0B Section: 0B Date: JULY 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 964201R Subject: LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL LUBRICANT Model and Year: 1982-91 ALL TRUCKS WITH G80 REAR AXLE THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 90-139-4A, DATED JANUARY 1990. CONDITION DESCRIPTION AND CORRECTION HAVE BEEN ADDED AS WELL AS THE 1991 MODEL YEAR. ALL COPIES OF 90-139-4A SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some light duty trucks equipped with locking rear axles (G80) may exhibit rear axle chatter, especially when turning a corner from a stop. This condition of alternate engagement and disengagement of the clutches in the differential assembly is usually caused by contaminated axle lubricant. To correct this condition, drain and refill the rear axle with SAE 80W-90 GL5 (P/N 1052271). The use of any additive in locking rear axles (G80) is not recommended. Rear axle additives are designed for use in limited slip differentials which are normally installed in cars. All light duty trucks equipped with RPO G80 make use of a locking differential and the use of additives will delay the engagement of the locking mechanism and may decrease axle life. VEHICLES/COMPONENTS INVOLVED: Some light duty trucks equipped with locking rear axles, RPO G80. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION: Part Number Description 1052271 Lubricant, Rear Axle (24 oz.) See Appropriate Parts Manual Gasket, Rear Axle Housing Cover Parts are currently available through GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION: As specified in Light Duty Truck Maintenance Schedules, locking rear axle fluid drain and refill is required owner maintenance at the first engine oil change. Failure to drain and refill the rear axle as specified may contribute to a later axle chatter condition. Refer to the appropriate Light Duty Truck Maintenance Schedule or service manual, section 0B, for further details on change intervals. For those vehicles repaired under warranty, which have had the axle fluid changed at the first oil change and have experienced rear axle chatter use: Labor Operation: F2010 Use applicable labor time guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 85546VI > Mar > 85 > Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels Fluid - Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels 85-54 6 (VI) MAR., 1985 Subject: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE OIL LEVELS Model and Year:ALL PASSENGER AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and replaces Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 83-I-57 which should be destroyed. The following chart provides a guide for minimum acceptable oil levels "as received" from the factory. Only those components which have levels less than indicated below should have additional oil installed. Engine - Full mark to 6 mm (.24 in.) below full mark. Transmission a) Automatic - With engine idling, transmission selector in "Park", vehicle on a level surface and oil temperature between 10 to 38~C the oil level on the following transmissions should be as indicated: 440-T4 Transmission: Oil level should be in middle of cross-hatch area. 125/125C Transmission: Oil level should be slightly above full level. All other Transmissions: Oil level should be slightly below add level. If oil level gauge has dimples below add mark, oil level should be between these two dimples. b) Manual 1) Lower edge of inspection plug hole on rear wheel drive vehicles. 2) Between cold level range dimples or at cold level mark on front wheel drive vehicles. Differential - Lower edge of inspection plug hole to 9.5 mm (.37 in.) below lower edge of inspection plug hole. Transfer Case - Lower edge of inspection plug hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 76-02-02A > Oct > 98 > Drivetrain - Recommended Axle Lubricant Fluid - Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Recommended Axle Lubricant File In Section: 0 - General Information Bulletin No.: 76-02-02A Date: October, 1998 INFORMATION Subject: Recommended Axle Lubricant Models: 1999 and Prior Rear Wheel Drive Passenger Cars, Light and Medium Duty Trucks, and Four Wheel Drive Vehicles This bulletin is being revised to add the 1998 and 1999 Model Years and add Vehicle Line and Recommended Axle Lubricant Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 76-02-02 (Section 0 - General Information). The following tables provide the latest information on recommended axle lubricant. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 76-02-02A > Oct > 98 > Drivetrain - Recommended Axle Lubricant > Page 2536 Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - Differential: > 85546VI > Mar > 85 > Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels Fluid - Differential: All Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels 85-54 6 (VI) MAR., 1985 Subject: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE OIL LEVELS Model and Year:ALL PASSENGER AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and replaces Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 83-I-57 which should be destroyed. The following chart provides a guide for minimum acceptable oil levels "as received" from the factory. Only those components which have levels less than indicated below should have additional oil installed. Engine - Full mark to 6 mm (.24 in.) below full mark. Transmission a) Automatic - With engine idling, transmission selector in "Park", vehicle on a level surface and oil temperature between 10 to 38~C the oil level on the following transmissions should be as indicated: 440-T4 Transmission: Oil level should be in middle of cross-hatch area. 125/125C Transmission: Oil level should be slightly above full level. All other Transmissions: Oil level should be slightly below add level. If oil level gauge has dimples below add mark, oil level should be between these two dimples. b) Manual 1) Lower edge of inspection plug hole on rear wheel drive vehicles. 2) Between cold level range dimples or at cold level mark on front wheel drive vehicles. Differential - Lower edge of inspection plug hole to 9.5 mm (.37 in.) below lower edge of inspection plug hole. Transfer Case - Lower edge of inspection plug hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Leaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities Fluid - Differential: Specifications Leaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities Limited-Slip........................................................................................................................................... .............................................80W, 80W-90* GL-5*‡ Others................................................................. ....................................................................................................................................80W, 80W-90* GL-5 *For vehicles normally operated in Canada, 80W only ‡May use GL-5 for top-up only CAPACITY, Refill: Front: K-20, -2500........................................................................................................................................... ...........................................2.4 Liters 5.0 Pints K-30, -3500................................................................. .....................................................................................................................2.8 Liters 6.0 Pints Rear: 8-1/2" ring gear..................................................................................................................................... ............................................2.0 Liters 4.2 Pints Dana 10-1/2" ring gear.............................................. .......................................................................................................................3.4 Liters 7.2 Pints 1981: 8-7/8" ring gear..................................................................................................................................... ............................................1.7 Liters 3.5 Pints 10-1/2" ring gear........................................................ .......................................................................................................................3.0 Liters 6.5 Pints Dana 10-1/4" ring gear......................................................................................................................... .........................................11.7 Liters 26.8 Pints 1982: 9-1/2" ring gear..................................................................................................................................... ............................................2.6 Liters 5.5 Pints Dana 9-3/4" ring gear................................................ .......................................................................................................................2.8 Liters 6.0 Pints 10-1/2 ring gear.................................................................................................................................... ............................................2.6 Liters 5.0 Pints Rockwell 12" ring gear............................................... .....................................................................................................................6.6 Liters 14.0 Pints Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Leaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities > Page 2543 Fluid - Differential: Specifications Unleaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities Limited-Slip........................................................................................................................................... ...............................................80W, 80W-90* GL-5* Others................................................................. ....................................................................................................................................80W, 80W-90* GL-5 *For vehicles normally operated in Canada, 80W only CAPACITY, Refill: Front: All.................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ..........................2.4 Liters 5.0 Pints Rear: S series 7-1/7" ring gear.................................................... ..................................................................................................................1.5 Liters 3.5 Pints 8-1/2" ring gear............................................................................................................................................... .....................................2.0 Liters 4.2 Pints Dana 10-1/2" ring gear..................................................... ...................................................................................................................3.4 Liters 7.2 Pints 1981: 8-7/8" ring gear..................................................................................................................................... ...............................................1.7 Liters 3.5 Pints 10-1/2" ring gear..................................................... .............................................................................................................................3.0 Liters 6.5 Pints 1982: 9-1/2" ring gear........................................................................................................................... .........................................................2.6 Liters 5.5 Pints 9-3/4" ring gear............................................. .......................................................................................................................................2.8 Liters 6.0 Pints 10-1/2" ring gear.......................................................................................................................... ........................................................2.6 Liters 5.5 Pints Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Leaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities > Page 2544 Fluid - Differential: Specifications Unleaded Gasoline Canadian Models - Schedules & Capacities Limited-Slip........................................................................................................................................... ...............................................80W, 80W-90* GL-5* Others................................................................. ....................................................................................................................................80W, 80W-90* GL-5 *For vehicles normally operated in Canada, 80W only CAPACITY, Refill: Front: All.................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ..........................2.4 Liters 5.0 Pints Rear: S series 7-1/7" ring gear.................................................... ...................................................................................................................1.5 Liters 3.5 Pints 8-1/2" ring gear............................................................................................................................................... .....................................2.0 Liters 4.2 Pints Dana 10-1/2" ring gear..................................................... ...................................................................................................................3.4 Liters 7.2 Pints 1981: 8-7/8" ring gear..................................................................................................................................... ...............................................1.7 Liters 3.5 Pints 10-1/2" ring gear..................................................... ..............................................................................................................................3.0 Liters 6.5 Pints 1982: 9-1/2" ring gear........................................................................................................................... .........................................................2.6 Liters 5.5 Pints 9-3/4" ring gear............................................. .......................................................................................................................................2.8 Liters 6.0 Pints 10-1/2" ring gear.......................................................................................................................... ........................................................2.6 Liters 5.5 Pints Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner Pinion Bearing: Adjustments Borg Warner 2 - Pinion Fig. 8 Pinion gauge plate installation Fig. 9 Checking pinion depth Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2549 Fig. 10 Pinion depth gauge tool installation. Corvette Adjustment 1. Install pinion bearing races in housing using a suitable driver. 2. Lubricate pinion bearings and install bearings in races. 3. Mount depth gauging jig in housing, Fig. 8, noting the following: a. Assemble gauge plate onto preload stud. b. Hold pinion bearings in position, insert stud through rear bearing and pilot and front bearing and pilot, then install retaining nut and tighten nut until snug. c. Rotate tool to ensure bearings are properly seated. d. Hold preload stud and tighten nut until 20 inch lbs. of torque, which is required to rotate stud. To prevent damage to bearing, tighten nut in small increments, checking rotating torque after each adjustment. e. Mount side bearing discs on arbor, using step for disc that corresponds to base of housing. f. Mount arbor and plunger assembly in housing, ensuring side bearing discs are properly seated, install bearing caps and tighten cap bolts to prevent bearing discs from moving, Fig. 9. 4. Mount dial indicator on arbor stud with indicator contact button bearing against top of arbor plunger. 5. Preload indicator 3/4 revolution and secure to arbor mounting stud in this position. 6. Place arbor plunger on gauge plate, rotating plate as needed so that plunger rests directly on button corresponding to ring gear size. 7. Slowly rock plunger rod back and forth across button while observing dial indicator. 8. At point on button where indicator registers greatest deflection, zero dial indicator. Perform steps 7 and 8 several times to ensure correct setting. 9. Once verified zero reading is obtained, swing plunger aside until it is clear of gauge plate button and record dial indicator reading. Indicator will now read required pinion depth shim thickness for a ``nominal'' pinion. 10. Inspect rear face of drive pinion to be installed for a pinion code number. This number indicates in thousandths of an inch necessary modification of pinion shim thickness obtained in step 9. 11. Select pinion depth adjusting shim as follows: a. If pinion is stamped with a plus (+) number, add that number of thousandths to dimension obtained in step 9. b. If pinion is stamped with a minus ( - ) number, subtract that many thousandths from dimension obtained in step 9. c. If pinion is not stamped with plus or minus number, dimension obtained in step 9 is correct shim thickness. 12. Remove gauging tools and pinion bearings from housing, noting installation position of bearings. Installation 1. Install selected shim onto pinion shaft, lubricate rear pinion bearing with specified axle lubricant, then press rear bearing onto pinion using suitable spacers. 2. Install new collapsible spacer onto pinion shaft, then insert pinion assembly into housing. 3. Lubricate front pinion bearing, install bearing into housing and tap bearing over pinion shaft with a drift while assistant holds pinion in place. Old pinion nut and a large washer can be used to seat front bearing on pinion, but care must be taken not to collapse spacer if this method is used. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2550 4. Install new pinion seal in housing, coat seal lips with grease, then mount driveshaft yoke on pinion shaft, lightly tapping yoke until several pinion shaft threads protrude from yoke. 5. Coat rear of pinion washer with suitable sealer, then install washer and new pinion nut. 6. Hold driveshaft yoke with suitable tool, then alternately tighten pinion nut and rotate pinion until endplay is reduced to zero. 7. When endplay is reduced to zero, check pinion bearing preload using a torque wrench. 8. Continue tightening pinion nut in small increments until 35-40 inch lbs. of bearing preload is obtained with new bearings or 20-25 inch lbs. of bearing preload is obtained with used bearings, rotating pinion and checking preload after each adjustment. Exceeding preload specification will compress collapsible spacer too far, requiring replacement of spacer. If preload specification is exceeded, spacer must be replaced and adjustment procedure must be repeated. Do not loosen pinion nut to reduce preload. 4 - Pinion Fig. 5 Drive pinion & bearing shim adjustment 1. Install front pinion bearing cup in carrier using tool J-7817 or equivalent. 2. Install spacer (E) into carrier bore, Fig. 5. 3. Slide rear pinion bearing and cap (F) onto thru bolt (D) and rear bearing into axle housing. 4. Install thru bolt (D), rear bearing and cap (F) into axle housing. 5. Assemble front bearing cone (A) and spacer (B) onto thru bolt. 6. Rotate nut and shaft while increasing torque on nut until a rotational torque of 15-22 inch lbs. is obtained. Rotate thru bolt back and forth when tightening nut to properly seat bearing. 7. Install discs on thru bolt assembly as shown in Fig. 5. Position carrier so dial indicator contact rod is directly over gauging area of gauge plate J-35118-2. Discs must be fully seated in side bearing bores. 8. Install bearing caps over gauge shaft discs, then the cap attaching bolts. torque attaching bolts to 40 ft. lbs. 9. With dial indicator rod contacting gauging area of J-35118-2, rock gauge shaft back and forth until dial indicator measures the greatest deflection, then zero dial indicator. 10. Rotate gauge shaft until shaft does not contact gauge plate, then note measurement. 11. Select correct pinion shim as follows: a. If reusing production pinion, and pinion is marked with a ``+,'' correct shim will have a thickness equal to gauge reading minus amount specified on pinion. b. If reusing production pinion, and pinion is marked with a `` - ,'' correct shim will have a thickness equal to gauge reading plus amount specified on pinion. c. If using a production or service pinion which has no marking, correct shim will have a thickness equal to gauge reading. 12. Install selected pinion shim into carrier, then press rear pinion bearing cup into carrier using tool J-5590 or equivalent. 13. Press rear pinion bearing onto pinion using a bearing installation tool, then install pinion in carrier. 14. Install collapsible spacer and front bearing onto pinion while supporting pinion under head. 15. Install oil seal, companion flange and new nut on pinion, then tighten pinion nut until a rotating torque of 10-25 inch lbs. with new bearings or 5-12 inch lbs. with original bearings is obtained while rotating pinion forwards to seat bearings. 16. If preload is excessive after tightening pinion nut, replace collapsible spacer and repeat steps 14 and 15. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2551 Pinion Bearing: Adjustments Dana/Spicer Fig. 5 Pinion setting chart If original ring gear and pinion assembly are to be reused, measure original shim pack and build a new shim pack to the same dimension. If baffle is in the axle assembly, it is considered part of the shim pack. Ring gears and pinions are supplied in matched sets only. If a new gear is being used, verify numbers on pinion and ring gear before proceeding with assembly. On the button end of the pinion there is a ``+'', `` - '', or ``0'' number which indicates the best running position for each particular gear set. This position is controlled by shims installed behind the inner bearing cup. If baffles or oil slingers are used, they are considered part of the adjusting shim pack. If a new gear set is being installed, note the plus or minus mark on both old and new pinions and adjust thickness of shim pack to compensate for the difference between these two numbers. Refer to chart, Fig. 5, when determining shim size. 1. Install inner shim pack and, on 9-3/4 inch ring gear axle, the oil slinger in inner or rear cup bore, then drive cup into position using suitable tool. 2. Add or remove an equal amount to the outer shim pack as was added to the inner shim pack. 3. Drive outer cup into carrier bore, then press rear pinion bearing onto pinion shaft. 4. Install drive pinion and bearing into differential carrier. 5. Install shims and outer or front pinion bearing. 6. Install companion flange, then the washer and nut on pinion shaft. Torque nut to 250 ft. lbs. with a suitable holding bar in place. 7. Remove holding bar, then measure rotating torque of pinion shaft. Rotating torque should measure 10-20 inch lbs. with original bearings installed, or 20-40 inch lbs. with new bearings installed, discounting torque required to start turning shaft. 8. If rotating torque is not within specifications, adjust shim pack as necessary. Increase outer shim pack to reduce torque, or decrease shim pack to increase torque. 9. Remove nut, washer and companion flange from pinion shaft. 10. Install oil slinger, gasket (if equipped) and oil seal onto pinion shaft. 11. Install companion flange, washer and nut and torque nut to 250 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2552 Pinion Bearing: Adjustments Timken/Rockwell - 12 Inch Ring Gear Fig. 1 Timken/Rockwell drive axle w/12 inch ring gear exploded view DISASSEMBLY 1. Tap or press pinion from cage, taking care not to damage shaft threads, then remove outer pinion bearing, Fig. 1. 2. Remove spacer from pinion, then the inner bearing, using suitable separator and press or puller. 3. If straddle bearing must be replaced, remove snap ring and washer, then the bearing, using suitable puller. 4. If bearings are to be replaced, press outer races from bearing cage, taking care not to distort cage. 5. Inspect components as outlined, and replace as needed, keeping components in order for assembly. ASSEMBLY & PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT 1. When installing new cups, press them firmly against pinion bearing cage shoulders. 2. Lubricate bearings and cups with suitable lubricant. 3. Press rear thrust and radial bearings firmly against pinion shoulders, using suitable sleeve that will bear only on bearing inner race. 4. Install radial bearing lock ring, then squeeze ring into pinion shaft groove. 5. Insert pinion and bearing assembly in pinion cage and position spacer or spacer combination over pinion shaft. 6. Press front bearing firmly against spacer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2553 7. Rotate cage several revolutions to assure normal bearing contact. 8. Press flange or yoke against forward bearing and install washer and pinion shaft nut. 9. Place pinion and cage assembly over carrier studs, hold flange with suitable tool, and torque pinion shaft nut to 350 ft. lbs. 10. Check pinion bearing preload torque. If rotating torque is not within 5 to 15 pound inches, disassemble, adjust spacer, reassemble, and recheck preload torque. Use thinner spacer to increase or thicker spacer to decrease preload. 11. Hold flange with suitable tool and remove pinion shaft nut and flange. 12. Lubricate pinion shaft oil seal and cover outer edge of seal body with non-hardening sealing compound, then press seal against cover shoulder with suitable tool. 13. Install new gasket and bearing cover. 14. Press flange against forward bearing and install washer and pinion shaft nut, torquing nut to 350 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2554 Pinion Bearing: Adjustments Corporate and Eaton 7 1/2 - 8 7/8 Inch Ring Gear Fig. 16 Pinion depth gauge tool installation. Models w/7-1/2 inch ring gear Fig. 17 Pinion depth gauge tool installation. Models w/8-1/2 & 8-7/8 inch ring gear PINION DEPTH ADJUSTMENT If original ring gear and pinion assembly and rear pinion bearing are to be reused, original depth adjusting shim can be used. However, if ring gear and pinion or rear pinion bearing are replaced, pinion depth must be adjusted using following procedures. 1. Install pinion bearing races to be used in housing using suitable driver. 2. Lubricate pinion bearings and install bearings in races. 3. Mount depth gauging jig in housing noting the following. Use gauge assembly J-23597-01 for models with 7-1/2 inch ring gear, J-21777-01 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2555 for models with 8-1/2 or 8-7/8 inch ring gear, Figs. 16 and 17, or suitable equivalents. On models with 8-7/8 inch ring gear, substitute cloverleaf gauge plate J-21777-36 for plate J-21777-29. Follow all tool manufacturer's recommendations when installing gauge assembly. a. Assemble gauge plate onto preload stud. b. Hold pinion bearings in position, insert stud through rear bearing and pilot and front bearing and pilot, then install retaining nut and tighten nut until snug. c. Rotate tool to ensure that bearings are properly seated. d. Hold preload stud and tighten nut until 20 inch lbs. torque are required to rotate stud. Tighten nut in small increments, checking rotating torque after each adjustment, to prevent damaging bearings. e. Mount side bearing discs on arbor, using step for disc that corresponds to base of housing. f. Mount arbor and plunger assembly in housing, ensuring that side bearing discs are properly seated, install bearing caps and tighten cap bolts to prevent bearing discs from moving. 4. Mount suitable dial indicator on arbor stud with indicator contact button bearing against top of arbor plunger. 5. Preload indicator 1/2 revolution and secure to arbor mounting stud in this position. 6. Place arbor plunger on gauge plate, rotating plate as needed so that plunger rests directly on button corresponding to ring gear size. 7. Slowly rock plunger rod back and forth across button while observing dial indicator. 8. At point on button where indicator registers greatest deflection, zero dial indicator. Perform steps 7 and 8 several times to ensure correct setting. 9. Once verified zero reading is obtained, swing plunger aside until it is clear of gauge plate button and record dial indicator reading. Indicator will now read required pinion depth shim thickness for a ``nominal'' pinion. 10. Inspect rear face of drive pinion to be installed for a pinion code number. This number indicates in thousandths of an inch necessary modification of pinion shim thickness obtained in step 9. 11. Select pinion depth adjusting shim as follows: a. If pinion is stamped with a plus (+) number, add that number of thousandths to dimension obtained in step 9. b. If pinion is stamped with a minus ( - ) number, subtract that many thousandths from dimension obtained in step 9. c. If pinion is not stamped with plus or minus number, dimension obtained in step 9 is correct shim thickness. 12. Remove gauging tools and pinion bearings from housing, noting installation position of bearings. PINION INSTALLATION 1. Install selected shim onto pinion shaft, lubricate rear pinion bearing with specified axle lubricant, then press rear bearing onto pinion using suitable spacers. 2. Install new collapsible spacer onto pinion shaft, then insert pinion assembly into housing. 3. Lubricate front pinion bearing, install bearing into housing and tap bearing over pinion shaft with suitable drift while assistant holds pinion in place. Old pinion nut and suitable large washer can be used to seat front bearing on pinion, but care must be taken not to collapse spacer if this method is used. 4. Install new pinion seal in housing, coat seal lips with grease, then mount driveshaft yoke on pinion shaft, lightly tapping yoke until several pinion shaft threads protrude from yoke. 5. Coat rear of pinion washer with suitable sealer, then install washer and new pinion nut. 6. Hold drive shaft yoke with suitable tool, then alternately tighten pinion nut and rotate pinion until endplay is reduced to zero. 7. When endplay is reduced to zero, check pinion bearing preload using suitable torque wrench. 8. Continue tightening pinion nut in small increments until specified pinion bearing preload is obtained, rotating pinion and checking preload after each adjustment. Exceeding preload specification will compress collapsible spacer too far, requiring replacement of spacer. If preload specification is exceeded, spacer must be replaced and adjustment procedure must be repeated. Do not loosen pinion nut to reduce preload. 9 1/2 Inch Ring Gear Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2556 Fig. 9 Pinion depth gauge installation PINION DEPTH, ADJUST If original ring gear and pinion assembly and rear pinion bearing are to be reused, original depth adjusting shim can be used. However, if ring gear and pinion or rear pinion bearing requires replacement, pinion depth must be adjusted using following procedures. 1. Install pinion bearing races to be used in housing using suitable driver. 2. Lubricate pinion bearings and install bearings in races. 3. Mount depth gauging jig in housing noting the following. Use gauge assembly J-21777-01, Fig. 9, or suitable equivalent. Follow all tool manufacturer's recommendations when installing gauge assembly. a. Assemble gauge plate on preload stud. b. Hold pinion bearings in position, insert stud through rear bearing and pilot, then front bearing and pilot, install retaining nut and tighten nut hand tight. c. Rotate tool to ensure that bearings are properly seated. d. Hold preload stud and tighten nut until 20 inch lbs. torque is required to rotate stud. Tighten nut in small increments, checking rotating torque after each adjustment using suitable torque wrench. e. Mount side bearing discs on arbor, using step that corresponds to base of housing. f. Mount arbor and plunger assembly in housing ensuring that side bearing discs are properly seated, install bearing caps and tighten cap bolts to prevent bearing discs from moving. 4. Mount suitable dial indicator on arbor stud with indicator contact button bearing against top of arbor plunger. 5. Preload indicator 1/2 revolution, then secure to arbor stud in this position. 6. Place arbor plunger on gauge plate, rotate plate as needed so that plunger rests directly on button corresponding to ring gear size. 7. Slowly rock plunger rod back and forth across button while observing dial indicator. 8. At point on button where indicator registers greatest deflection, zero dial indicator. Perform steps 7 and 8 several times to ensure correct setting. 9. Once verified zero setting is obtained, swing plunger aside until it is clear of gauge plate button and record dial indicator reading. Indicator will now read required pinion depth shim thickness for ``nominal'' pinion. 10. Inspect rear face of drive pinion to be installed for a pinion code number. This number indicates in thousandths of an inch necessary modification of pinion shim thickness obtained in step 9. 11. Select pinion depth adjusting shim as follows: a. If pinion is stamped with a plus (+) number, add that number of thousandths to dimension obtained in step 9. b. If pinion is stamped with a minus ( - ) number, subtract that many thousandths from dimension obtained in step 9. c. If pinion is not stamped with plus or minus number, dimension obtained in step 9 is correct shim thickness. 12. Remove gauging tool and pinion bearings from housing. DRIVE PINION, INSTALL 1. Install pinion bearing races in housing, if not previously installed, using suitable drivers to ensure that races are squarely seated. 2. Install selected shim on pinion shaft, lubricate rear pinion bearing with specified axle lubricant, then press rear bearing onto pinion using suitable spacers. 3. Install new collapsible spacer on pinion and insert pinion assembly into housing. 4. Lubricate front pinion bearing, install bearing in housing and tap bearing onto pinion shaft while assistant holds pinion in place. Old pinion nut and large washer can be used to draw front bearing onto pinion, but care must be taken not to collapse spacer if this method is used. 5. Install new pinion seal in housing, coat seal lips with grease, then mount driveshaft flange on pinion shaft, lightly tapping flange until several pinion shaft threads protrude. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2557 6. Coat rear of pinion washer with suitable sealer, then install washer and new pinion nut and adjust preload to specifications. PINION BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT 1. Ensure that pinion and bearings are properly installed, as outlined. 2. Hold driveshaft companion flange with suitable tool, then alternately tighten pinion nut and rotate pinion until endplay is reduced to zero. 3. When endplay is reduced to zero, check pinion bearing preload by rotating pinion with suitable torque wrench. 4. Continue tightening pinion nut in small increments until specified bearing preload is obtained, rotating pinion and checking preload after each adjustment. Exceeding preload specification will compress collapsible spacer too far, requiring replacement of spacer. If preload specification is exceeded, spacer must be replaced and adjustment procedure must be repeated. Do not loosen pinion nut to reduce preload. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion Pinion Bearing: Service and Repair Borg Warner - 2 Pinion 1. Scribe reference mark between drive pinion and driveshaft yoke, then hold yoke with suitable tool and remove pinion nut and yoke. If yoke shows wear in the seal-to-flange contacting surface, the yoke should be replaced. 2. Install original pinion nut a few turns on pinion shaft, then using hammer and drift, tap pinion shaft out of pinion housing. Hold gear end of pinion shaft when removing to prevent it from falling from axle housing. On Corvette models, the pinion preload shims may stick to the pinion housing or the rear bearing during removal. These shims must be collected and kept together for use during reassembly. 3. Remove and discard pinion nut and collapsible spacer. 4. If being replaced, remove front and rear bearing races from pinion housing using drift positioned in race slots and hammer. 5. If rear pinion bearing is being replaced, remove using arbor press and adapters. Measure and record thickness of shim which is found under rear bearing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion > Page 2560 Pinion Bearing: Service and Repair Dana/Spicer 9 3/4 Inch Ring Gear Fig. 5 Pinion Setting Chart If original ring gear and pinion assembly are to be reused, measure original shim pack and build a new shim pack to the same dimension. If baffle is in the axle assembly, it is considered part of the shim pack. Ring gears and pinions are supplied in matched sets only. If a new gear is being used, verify numbers on pinion and ring gear before proceeding with assembly. On the button end of the pinion there is a +, - , or 0 number which indicates the best running position for each particular gear set. This position is controlled by shims installed behind the inner bearing cup. If baffles or oil slingers are used, they are considered part of the adjusting shim pack. If a new gear set is being installed, note the plus or minus mark on both old and new pinions and adjust thickness of shim pack to compensate for the difference between these two numbers. Refer to chart, Fig. 5, when determining shim size. 1. Install inner shim pack and, on 9-3/4 inch ring gear axle, the oil slinger in inner or rear cup bore, then drive cup into position using suitable tool. 2. Add or remove an equal amount to the outer shim pack as was added to the inner shim pack. 3. Drive outer cup into carrier bore, then press rear pinion bearing onto pinion shaft. 4. Install drive pinion and bearing into differential carrier. 5. Install shims and outer or front pinion bearing. 6. Install companion flange, then the washer and nut on pinion shaft. 7. Measure rotating torque of pinion shaft. Rotating torque should measure 10-20 inch lbs. with original bearings installed, or 20-40 inch lbs. with new bearings installed, discounting torque required to start turning shaft. 8. If rotating torque is not within specifications, adjust shim pack as necessary. Increase outer shim pack to reduce torque, or decrease shim pack to increase torque. 9. Remove nut, washer and companion flange from pinion shaft. 10. Install oil slinger, gasket (if equipped) and oil seal onto pinion shaft. 11. Install companion flange, washer and nut and torque as described is step 7. Disassembly Fig. 9 Drive Pinion Removal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion > Page 2561 Fig. 10 Pinion Straddle Bearing Removal 1. Clamp pinion assembly in vise taking care not to damage housing or gear. 2. Hold driveshaft flange with suitable tool, then remove pinion nut and washer. 3. Remove driveshaft flange from pinion shaft using suitable puller. 4. Support housing in press as shown in Fig. 9, and press pinion from housing. Do not allow pinion to drop on floor. 5. Separate pinion flange, oil seal, front bearing and bearing retainer, driving seal from housing with suitable drift. 6. Remove bearing races from housing using suitable drift and place front bearing race with bearing. 7. Press rear bearing from pinion and place bearing with race. 8. Remove straddle bearing from axle housing using suitable drift, Fig. 10. 9. Inspect components keeping all components in order, and replace as needed. Assembly & Preload Coat components with specified lubricant during assembly. If components are reused, they should be installed in original position. 1. Press rear bearing onto pinion using suitable spacers. 2. Install front and rear bearing races in housing, using suitable drivers to ensure that races are properly seated. 3. Install straddle bearing in axle housing using straddle bearing installer tool No. J-23322 or equivalent to ensure that bearing is properly seated. 4. Insert pinion through housing, install new collapsible spacer and front bearing over pinion shaft, support pinion and press front bearing onto shaft. 5. Lubricate lips of new seal with grease and install seal using suitable driver to seat seal against shoulder of housing. 6. Install driveshaft companion flange, washer and new pinion nut. 7. Clamp housing in vise, hold flange with suitable tool and torque pinion nut just until all endplay is removed. 8. Check pinion bearing preload (rotating torque) using suitable torque wrench. 9. Continue tightening pinion nut in small increments until specified preload is obtained, checking preload after each adjustment. Exceeding specified preload will collapse spacer too far to be reused. If preload specification is exceeded, spacer must be replaced and adjustment procedure must be repeated. Do not loosen pinion nut to reduce bearing preload. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion > Page 2562 Pinion Bearing: Service and Repair Timken/Rockwell - 12 Inch Ring Gear Fig. 1 Exploded View Of Timken/Rockwell Drive Axle With 12 inch Ring Gear DISASSEMBLY 1. Tap or press pinion from cage, taking care not to damage shaft threads, then remove outer pinion bearing, Fig. 1. 2. Remove spacer from pinion, then the inner bearing, using suitable separator and press or puller. 3. If straddle bearing must be replaced, remove snap ring and washer, then the bearing, using suitable puller. 4. If bearings are to be replaced, press outer races from bearing cage, taking care not to distort cage. 5. Inspect components as outlined, and replace as needed, keeping components in order for assembly. ASSEMBLY & PRELOAD 1. When installing new cups, press them firmly against pinion bearing cage shoulders. 2. Lubricate bearings and cups with suitable lubricant. 3. Press rear thrust and radial bearings firmly against pinion shoulders, using suitable sleeve that will bear only on bearing inner race. 4. Install radial bearing lock ring, then squeeze ring into pinion shaft groove. 5. Insert pinion and bearing assembly in pinion cage and position spacer or spacer combination over pinion shaft. 6. Press front bearing firmly against spacer. 7. Rotate cage several revolutions to assure normal bearing contact. 8. Press flange or yoke against forward bearing and install washer and pinion shaft nut. 9. Place pinion and cage assembly over carrier studs, hold flange with suitable tool and torque pinion shaft nut to 240 ft. lbs. 10. Check pinion bearing preload torque. If rotating torque is not within 5 to 15 pound inches, disassemble, adjust spacer, reassemble, and recheck preload torque. Use thinner spacer to increase or thicker spacer to decrease preload. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion > Page 2563 11. Hold flange with suitable tool and remove pinion shaft nut and flange. 12. Lubricate pinion shaft oil seal and cover outer edge of seal body with non-hardening sealing compound, then press seal against cover shoulder with suitable tool. 13. Install new gasket and bearing cover. 14. Press flange against forward bearing and install washer and pinion shaft nut, torquing nut to 240 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion > Page 2564 Pinion Bearing: Service and Repair Corporate and Eaton 9 1/2 Inch Ring Gear PINION DEPTH ADJUSTMENT Fig. 9 Pinion Depth Gauge Installation If original ring gear and pinion assembly and rear pinion bearing are to be reused, original depth adjusting shim can be used. However, if ring gear and pinion or rear pinion bearing requires replacement, pinion depth must be adjusted using following procedures. 1. Install pinion bearing races to be used in housing using suitable driver. 2. Lubricate pinion bearings and install bearings in races. 3. Mount depth gauging jig in housing noting the following. Use gauge assembly tool No. J-21777-01, Fig. 9, or suitable equivalent. Follow all tool manufacturer's recommendations when installing gauge assembly. a. Assemble gauge plate on preload stud. b. Hold pinion bearings in position, insert stud through rear bearing and pilot, then front bearing and pilot, install retaining nut and tighten nut hand tight. c. Rotate tool to ensure that bearings are properly seated. d. Hold preload stud and tighten nut until 20 inch lbs. torque is required to rotate stud. Tighten nut in small increments, checking rotating torque after each adjustment using suitable torque wrench. e. Mount side bearing discs on arbor, using step that corresponds to base of housing. f. Mount arbor and plunger assembly in housing ensuring that side bearing discs are properly seated, install bearing caps and tighten cap bolts to prevent bearing discs from moving. 4. Mount suitable dial indicator on arbor stud with indicator contact button bearing against top of arbor plunger. 5. Preload indicator 1/2 revolution, then secure to arbor stud in this position. 6. Place arbor plunger on gauge plate, rotate plate as needed so that plunger rests directly on button corresponding to ring gear size. 7. Slowly rock plunger rod back and forth across button while observing dial indicator. 8. At point on button where indicator registers greatest deflection, zero dial indicator. Perform steps 7 and 8 several times to ensure correct setting. 9. Once verified zero setting is obtained, swing plunger aside until it is clear of gauge plate button and record dial indicator reading. Indicator will now read required pinion depth shim thickness for ``nominal'' pinion. 10. Inspect rear face of drive pinion to be installed for a pinion code number. This number indicates in thousandths of an inch necessary modification of pinion shim thickness obtained in step 9. 11. Select pinion depth adjusting shim as follows: a. If pinion is stamped with a plus (+) number, add that number of thousandths to dimension obtained in step 9. b. If pinion is stamped with a minus (-) number, subtract that many thousandths from dimension obtained in step 9. c. If pinion is not stamped with plus or minus number, dimension obtained in step 9 is correct shim thickness. 12. Remove gauging tool and pinion bearings from housing. DRIVE PINION INSTALLATION 1. Install pinion bearing races in housing, if not previously installed, using suitable drivers to ensure that races are squarely seated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion > Page 2565 2. Install selected shim on pinion shaft, lubricate rear pinion bearing with specified axle lubricant, then press rear bearing onto pinion using suitable spacers. 3. Install new collapsible spacer on pinion and insert pinion assembly into housing. 4. Lubricate front pinion bearing, install bearing in housing and tap bearing onto pinion shaft while assistant holds pinion in place. Old pinion nut and large washer can be used to draw front bearing onto pinion, but care must be taken not to collapse spacer if this method is used. 5. Install new pinion seal in housing, coat seal lips with grease, then mount driveshaft flange on pinion shaft, lightly tapping flange until several pinion shaft threads protrude. 6. Coat rear of pinion washer with suitable sealer, then install washer and new pinion nut and adjust preload to specifications. PINION BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT 1. Ensure that pinion and bearings are properly installed, as outlined. 2. Hold driveshaft companion flange with suitable tool, then alternately tighten pinion nut and rotate pinion until endplay is reduced to zero. 3. When endplay is reduced to zero, check pinion bearing preload by rotating pinion with suitable torque wrench. 4. Continue tightening pinion nut in small increments until specified bearing preload is obtained, rotating pinion and checking preload after each adjustment. Exceeding preload specification will compress collapsible spacer too far, requiring replacement of spacer. If preload specification is exceeded, spacer must be replaced and adjustment procedure must be repeated. Do not loosen pinion nut to reduce preload. 12 1/4 Inch Ring Gear DISASSEMBLY 1. Clamp pinion drive flange in suitable vise. 2. Remove cotter pin, nut, and washer from end of pinion. 3. Remove drive flange and bearing retainer assembly from pinion. 4. Drive oil seal from retainer and discard seal. 5. Remove pinion rear bearing snap ring, then, using tool J-1453 or equivalent, press bearing from pinion. 6. Position drive pinion in arbor press so that bearing is supported by two pieces of flat steel stock placed parallel to each other and against pinion so as to contact large area of bearing outer race. 7. Press pinion from bearing, ensuring that pinion is supported. INSPECTION 1. Wash all parts in suitable solvent. 2. Inspect pinion for scored, cracked, chipped, or worn teeth. 3. Inspect splines on pinion shaft for excessive wear. 4. Inspect pinion bearing assemblies for roughness, defects, or excessive wear. ASSEMBLY 1. Pack cavity between pinion oil seal lips with suitable lubricant. 2. Using tool J-22281 or equivalent, press oil seal into retainer with seal lips facing pinion bearing. 3. Install pinion rear bearing assembly on pinion shaft, ensuring that chamfered side of inner race seats against shoulder on pinion shaft, then, using tool J-1364 or equivalent, install pinion bearing lock ring. 4. Position pinion front bearing on pinion shaft so that extended portion of inner race faces pinion head, then, using suitable length of two inch pipe, press bearing onto shaft until bearing seats against pinion head. When pressing bearing onto pinion, be careful not to damage ground surface of pilot. 5. Slide oil seal retainer onto pinion shaft, then tap drive flange onto pinion splines. 6. Clamp drive flange in suitable vise and install flange washer and nut, torquing nut to 220 ft. lbs., then install cotter pin without backing off nut. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Differential Pinion Cross Shaft - R&R; When Broken Pinion Gear: Technical Service Bulletins Differential Pinion Cross Shaft - R&R; When Broken Number: 83-T-91 Section: IV Date: OCT., 1983 Subject: DIFFERENTIAL CASE PINION CROSS SHAFT REMOVAL PROCEDURE WITH A BROKEN PINION SHAFT LOCK SCREW ALL REAR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS - ALL YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The following procedure should be used to remove a broken differential pinion cross shaft lock screw. SAFETY GLASSES MUST BE WORN. FIGURE 1 - DIFFERENTIAL CASE STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL 1. Install puller such as J-22888 or equivalent with the puller jaws inserted into the case openings and puller screw against the end of the pinion cross shaft on the side of the case opposite the lock screw (refer to Figure 1). This is necessary so shearing the lock screw will not distress the pinion gear surface inside the case. A spacer such as a 5/16" nut may be required between the puller screw and the pinion cross shaft. 2. Position the case assembly on an angle so pinion cross shaft will clear pinion gear head during removal procedure. 3. Tighten puller screw to 50-55 lbs.ft. (68-75 N-m). Tap end of puller once with a hammer. Retighten puller screw about 1/8 turn (50-55 lbs.ft. [68-75 N-m.]) and tap again. Repeat procedure until pinion cross shaft shears the lock screw. NOTICE: Too severe of a hammer blow may damage carrier side bearings. 4. When the lock screw is sheared, remove puller, turn case assembly and remove pinion cross shaft. The remainder of the lock screw can then usually be removed with a prick punch. A slight metal distress from lock screw hole to outer portion of case is acceptable. If case is broken out at lock screw hole area, the case must be replaced. 5. Install new parts as required and reassemble differential. LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL A limited slip differential case assembly does not have access for both puller jaws. As the lock screw hole in the pinion cross shaft is within .150" from the end of shaft, a die grinder with a 1/4" carbide bit can be used to grind a groove through the end of the pinion cross shaft exposing the lock screw. A 1/4" die grinder is a commonly available 28,000 to 30,000 RPM tool similar to a router. Both electric and air powered die grinders are available from power tool sources. This tool and bit is also useful for elongating holes in steel, etc. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Differential Pinion Cross Shaft - R&R; When Broken > Page 2570 FIGURE 2 - RING GEAR 1. Wrap the ring gear in a shop towel and place towels around case assembly exposing only the end of pinion cross shaft. This will protect the differential internal parts from exposure to metal grindings (refer to Figure 2). 2. Inspect and correct any fuel leaks in area of tank and fuel lines, as grinder will cause sparks. 3. Grind a groove through the end of the pinion cross shaft exposing the lock screw. When lock screw is exposed use a punch and hammer to drive out pinion cross shaft past the lock screw with the case on an angle so shaft will clear pinion gear head. 4. In most instances, the broken piece of lock screw can be removed with the case still in the housing. 5. Clean all traces of grindings from housing. 6. Install new parts as required and reassemble differential. The suggested labor time to remove a broken pinion shaft lock screw from either a standard or limited slip differential is .4 hour. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner Pinion Gear: Adjustments Borg Warner 2 - Pinion Fig. 8 Pinion gauge plate installation Fig. 9 Checking pinion depth Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2573 Fig. 10 Pinion depth gauge tool installation. Corvette Adjustment 1. Install pinion bearing races in housing using a suitable driver. 2. Lubricate pinion bearings and install bearings in races. 3. Mount depth gauging jig in housing, Fig. 8, noting the following: a. Assemble gauge plate onto preload stud. b. Hold pinion bearings in position, insert stud through rear bearing and pilot and front bearing and pilot, then install retaining nut and tighten nut until snug. c. Rotate tool to ensure bearings are properly seated. d. Hold preload stud and tighten nut until 20 inch lbs. of torque, which is required to rotate stud. To prevent damage to bearing, tighten nut in small increments, checking rotating torque after each adjustment. e. Mount side bearing discs on arbor, using step for disc that corresponds to base of housing. f. Mount arbor and plunger assembly in housing, ensuring side bearing discs are properly seated, install bearing caps and tighten cap bolts to prevent bearing discs from moving, Fig. 9. 4. Mount dial indicator on arbor stud with indicator contact button bearing against top of arbor plunger. 5. Preload indicator 3/4 revolution and secure to arbor mounting stud in this position. 6. Place arbor plunger on gauge plate, rotating plate as needed so that plunger rests directly on button corresponding to ring gear size. 7. Slowly rock plunger rod back and forth across button while observing dial indicator. 8. At point on button where indicator registers greatest deflection, zero dial indicator. Perform steps 7 and 8 several times to ensure correct setting. 9. Once verified zero reading is obtained, swing plunger aside until it is clear of gauge plate button and record dial indicator reading. Indicator will now read required pinion depth shim thickness for a ``nominal'' pinion. 10. Inspect rear face of drive pinion to be installed for a pinion code number. This number indicates in thousandths of an inch necessary modification of pinion shim thickness obtained in step 9. 11. Select pinion depth adjusting shim as follows: a. If pinion is stamped with a plus (+) number, add that number of thousandths to dimension obtained in step 9. b. If pinion is stamped with a minus ( - ) number, subtract that many thousandths from dimension obtained in step 9. c. If pinion is not stamped with plus or minus number, dimension obtained in step 9 is correct shim thickness. 12. Remove gauging tools and pinion bearings from housing, noting installation position of bearings. Installation 1. Install selected shim onto pinion shaft, lubricate rear pinion bearing with specified axle lubricant, then press rear bearing onto pinion using suitable spacers. 2. Install new collapsible spacer onto pinion shaft, then insert pinion assembly into housing. 3. Lubricate front pinion bearing, install bearing into housing and tap bearing over pinion shaft with a drift while assistant holds pinion in place. Old pinion nut and a large washer can be used to seat front bearing on pinion, but care must be taken not to collapse spacer if this method is used. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2574 4. Install new pinion seal in housing, coat seal lips with grease, then mount driveshaft yoke on pinion shaft, lightly tapping yoke until several pinion shaft threads protrude from yoke. 5. Coat rear of pinion washer with suitable sealer, then install washer and new pinion nut. 6. Hold driveshaft yoke with suitable tool, then alternately tighten pinion nut and rotate pinion until endplay is reduced to zero. 7. When endplay is reduced to zero, check pinion bearing preload using a torque wrench. 8. Continue tightening pinion nut in small increments until 35-40 inch lbs. of bearing preload is obtained with new bearings or 20-25 inch lbs. of bearing preload is obtained with used bearings, rotating pinion and checking preload after each adjustment. Exceeding preload specification will compress collapsible spacer too far, requiring replacement of spacer. If preload specification is exceeded, spacer must be replaced and adjustment procedure must be repeated. Do not loosen pinion nut to reduce preload. 4 - Pinion Fig. 5 Drive pinion & bearing shim adjustment 1. Install front pinion bearing cup in carrier using tool J-7817 or equivalent. 2. Install spacer (E) into carrier bore, Fig. 5. 3. Slide rear pinion bearing and cap (F) onto thru bolt (D) and rear bearing into axle housing. 4. Install thru bolt (D), rear bearing and cap (F) into axle housing. 5. Assemble front bearing cone (A) and spacer (B) onto thru bolt. 6. Rotate nut and shaft while increasing torque on nut until a rotational torque of 15-22 inch lbs. is obtained. Rotate thru bolt back and forth when tightening nut to properly seat bearing. 7. Install discs on thru bolt assembly as shown in Fig. 5. Position carrier so dial indicator contact rod is directly over gauging area of gauge plate J-35118-2. Discs must be fully seated in side bearing bores. 8. Install bearing caps over gauge shaft discs, then the cap attaching bolts. torque attaching bolts to 40 ft. lbs. 9. With dial indicator rod contacting gauging area of J-35118-2, rock gauge shaft back and forth until dial indicator measures the greatest deflection, then zero dial indicator. 10. Rotate gauge shaft until shaft does not contact gauge plate, then note measurement. 11. Select correct pinion shim as follows: a. If reusing production pinion, and pinion is marked with a ``+,'' correct shim will have a thickness equal to gauge reading minus amount specified on pinion. b. If reusing production pinion, and pinion is marked with a `` - ,'' correct shim will have a thickness equal to gauge reading plus amount specified on pinion. c. If using a production or service pinion which has no marking, correct shim will have a thickness equal to gauge reading. 12. Install selected pinion shim into carrier, then press rear pinion bearing cup into carrier using tool J-5590 or equivalent. 13. Press rear pinion bearing onto pinion using a bearing installation tool, then install pinion in carrier. 14. Install collapsible spacer and front bearing onto pinion while supporting pinion under head. 15. Install oil seal, companion flange and new nut on pinion, then tighten pinion nut until a rotating torque of 10-25 inch lbs. with new bearings or 5-12 inch lbs. with original bearings is obtained while rotating pinion forwards to seat bearings. 16. If preload is excessive after tightening pinion nut, replace collapsible spacer and repeat steps 14 and 15. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2575 Pinion Gear: Adjustments Dana/Spicer Fig. 5 Pinion setting chart If original ring gear and pinion assembly are to be reused, measure original shim pack and build a new shim pack to the same dimension. If baffle is in the axle assembly, it is considered part of the shim pack. Ring gears and pinions are supplied in matched sets only. If a new gear is being used, verify numbers on pinion and ring gear before proceeding with assembly. On the button end of the pinion there is a ``+'', `` - '', or ``0'' number which indicates the best running position for each particular gear set. This position is controlled by shims installed behind the inner bearing cup. If baffles or oil slingers are used, they are considered part of the adjusting shim pack. If a new gear set is being installed, note the plus or minus mark on both old and new pinions and adjust thickness of shim pack to compensate for the difference between these two numbers. Refer to chart, Fig. 5, when determining shim size. 1. Install inner shim pack and, on 9-3/4 inch ring gear axle, the oil slinger in inner or rear cup bore, then drive cup into position using suitable tool. 2. Add or remove an equal amount to the outer shim pack as was added to the inner shim pack. 3. Drive outer cup into carrier bore, then press rear pinion bearing onto pinion shaft. 4. Install drive pinion and bearing into differential carrier. 5. Install shims and outer or front pinion bearing. 6. Install companion flange, then the washer and nut on pinion shaft. Torque nut to 250 ft. lbs. with a suitable holding bar in place. 7. Remove holding bar, then measure rotating torque of pinion shaft. Rotating torque should measure 10-20 inch lbs. with original bearings installed, or 20-40 inch lbs. with new bearings installed, discounting torque required to start turning shaft. 8. If rotating torque is not within specifications, adjust shim pack as necessary. Increase outer shim pack to reduce torque, or decrease shim pack to increase torque. 9. Remove nut, washer and companion flange from pinion shaft. 10. Install oil slinger, gasket (if equipped) and oil seal onto pinion shaft. 11. Install companion flange, washer and nut and torque nut to 250 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2576 Pinion Gear: Adjustments Timken/Rockwell - 12 Inch Ring Gear Fig. 1 Timken/Rockwell drive axle w/12 inch ring gear exploded view DISASSEMBLY 1. Tap or press pinion from cage, taking care not to damage shaft threads, then remove outer pinion bearing, Fig. 1. 2. Remove spacer from pinion, then the inner bearing, using suitable separator and press or puller. 3. If straddle bearing must be replaced, remove snap ring and washer, then the bearing, using suitable puller. 4. If bearings are to be replaced, press outer races from bearing cage, taking care not to distort cage. 5. Inspect components as outlined, and replace as needed, keeping components in order for assembly. ASSEMBLY & PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT 1. When installing new cups, press them firmly against pinion bearing cage shoulders. 2. Lubricate bearings and cups with suitable lubricant. 3. Press rear thrust and radial bearings firmly against pinion shoulders, using suitable sleeve that will bear only on bearing inner race. 4. Install radial bearing lock ring, then squeeze ring into pinion shaft groove. 5. Insert pinion and bearing assembly in pinion cage and position spacer or spacer combination over pinion shaft. 6. Press front bearing firmly against spacer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2577 7. Rotate cage several revolutions to assure normal bearing contact. 8. Press flange or yoke against forward bearing and install washer and pinion shaft nut. 9. Place pinion and cage assembly over carrier studs, hold flange with suitable tool, and torque pinion shaft nut to 350 ft. lbs. 10. Check pinion bearing preload torque. If rotating torque is not within 5 to 15 pound inches, disassemble, adjust spacer, reassemble, and recheck preload torque. Use thinner spacer to increase or thicker spacer to decrease preload. 11. Hold flange with suitable tool and remove pinion shaft nut and flange. 12. Lubricate pinion shaft oil seal and cover outer edge of seal body with non-hardening sealing compound, then press seal against cover shoulder with suitable tool. 13. Install new gasket and bearing cover. 14. Press flange against forward bearing and install washer and pinion shaft nut, torquing nut to 350 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2578 Pinion Gear: Adjustments Corporate and Eaton 7 1/2 - 8 7/8 Inch Ring Gear Fig. 16 Pinion depth gauge tool installation. Models w/7-1/2 inch ring gear Fig. 17 Pinion depth gauge tool installation. Models w/8-1/2 & 8-7/8 inch ring gear PINION DEPTH ADJUSTMENT If original ring gear and pinion assembly and rear pinion bearing are to be reused, original depth adjusting shim can be used. However, if ring gear and pinion or rear pinion bearing are replaced, pinion depth must be adjusted using following procedures. 1. Install pinion bearing races to be used in housing using suitable driver. 2. Lubricate pinion bearings and install bearings in races. 3. Mount depth gauging jig in housing noting the following. Use gauge assembly J-23597-01 for models with 7-1/2 inch ring gear, J-21777-01 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2579 for models with 8-1/2 or 8-7/8 inch ring gear, Figs. 16 and 17, or suitable equivalents. On models with 8-7/8 inch ring gear, substitute cloverleaf gauge plate J-21777-36 for plate J-21777-29. Follow all tool manufacturer's recommendations when installing gauge assembly. a. Assemble gauge plate onto preload stud. b. Hold pinion bearings in position, insert stud through rear bearing and pilot and front bearing and pilot, then install retaining nut and tighten nut until snug. c. Rotate tool to ensure that bearings are properly seated. d. Hold preload stud and tighten nut until 20 inch lbs. torque are required to rotate stud. Tighten nut in small increments, checking rotating torque after each adjustment, to prevent damaging bearings. e. Mount side bearing discs on arbor, using step for disc that corresponds to base of housing. f. Mount arbor and plunger assembly in housing, ensuring that side bearing discs are properly seated, install bearing caps and tighten cap bolts to prevent bearing discs from moving. 4. Mount suitable dial indicator on arbor stud with indicator contact button bearing against top of arbor plunger. 5. Preload indicator 1/2 revolution and secure to arbor mounting stud in this position. 6. Place arbor plunger on gauge plate, rotating plate as needed so that plunger rests directly on button corresponding to ring gear size. 7. Slowly rock plunger rod back and forth across button while observing dial indicator. 8. At point on button where indicator registers greatest deflection, zero dial indicator. Perform steps 7 and 8 several times to ensure correct setting. 9. Once verified zero reading is obtained, swing plunger aside until it is clear of gauge plate button and record dial indicator reading. Indicator will now read required pinion depth shim thickness for a ``nominal'' pinion. 10. Inspect rear face of drive pinion to be installed for a pinion code number. This number indicates in thousandths of an inch necessary modification of pinion shim thickness obtained in step 9. 11. Select pinion depth adjusting shim as follows: a. If pinion is stamped with a plus (+) number, add that number of thousandths to dimension obtained in step 9. b. If pinion is stamped with a minus ( - ) number, subtract that many thousandths from dimension obtained in step 9. c. If pinion is not stamped with plus or minus number, dimension obtained in step 9 is correct shim thickness. 12. Remove gauging tools and pinion bearings from housing, noting installation position of bearings. PINION INSTALLATION 1. Install selected shim onto pinion shaft, lubricate rear pinion bearing with specified axle lubricant, then press rear bearing onto pinion using suitable spacers. 2. Install new collapsible spacer onto pinion shaft, then insert pinion assembly into housing. 3. Lubricate front pinion bearing, install bearing into housing and tap bearing over pinion shaft with suitable drift while assistant holds pinion in place. Old pinion nut and suitable large washer can be used to seat front bearing on pinion, but care must be taken not to collapse spacer if this method is used. 4. Install new pinion seal in housing, coat seal lips with grease, then mount driveshaft yoke on pinion shaft, lightly tapping yoke until several pinion shaft threads protrude from yoke. 5. Coat rear of pinion washer with suitable sealer, then install washer and new pinion nut. 6. Hold drive shaft yoke with suitable tool, then alternately tighten pinion nut and rotate pinion until endplay is reduced to zero. 7. When endplay is reduced to zero, check pinion bearing preload using suitable torque wrench. 8. Continue tightening pinion nut in small increments until specified pinion bearing preload is obtained, rotating pinion and checking preload after each adjustment. Exceeding preload specification will compress collapsible spacer too far, requiring replacement of spacer. If preload specification is exceeded, spacer must be replaced and adjustment procedure must be repeated. Do not loosen pinion nut to reduce preload. 9 1/2 Inch Ring Gear Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2580 Fig. 9 Pinion depth gauge installation PINION DEPTH, ADJUST If original ring gear and pinion assembly and rear pinion bearing are to be reused, original depth adjusting shim can be used. However, if ring gear and pinion or rear pinion bearing requires replacement, pinion depth must be adjusted using following procedures. 1. Install pinion bearing races to be used in housing using suitable driver. 2. Lubricate pinion bearings and install bearings in races. 3. Mount depth gauging jig in housing noting the following. Use gauge assembly J-21777-01, Fig. 9, or suitable equivalent. Follow all tool manufacturer's recommendations when installing gauge assembly. a. Assemble gauge plate on preload stud. b. Hold pinion bearings in position, insert stud through rear bearing and pilot, then front bearing and pilot, install retaining nut and tighten nut hand tight. c. Rotate tool to ensure that bearings are properly seated. d. Hold preload stud and tighten nut until 20 inch lbs. torque is required to rotate stud. Tighten nut in small increments, checking rotating torque after each adjustment using suitable torque wrench. e. Mount side bearing discs on arbor, using step that corresponds to base of housing. f. Mount arbor and plunger assembly in housing ensuring that side bearing discs are properly seated, install bearing caps and tighten cap bolts to prevent bearing discs from moving. 4. Mount suitable dial indicator on arbor stud with indicator contact button bearing against top of arbor plunger. 5. Preload indicator 1/2 revolution, then secure to arbor stud in this position. 6. Place arbor plunger on gauge plate, rotate plate as needed so that plunger rests directly on button corresponding to ring gear size. 7. Slowly rock plunger rod back and forth across button while observing dial indicator. 8. At point on button where indicator registers greatest deflection, zero dial indicator. Perform steps 7 and 8 several times to ensure correct setting. 9. Once verified zero setting is obtained, swing plunger aside until it is clear of gauge plate button and record dial indicator reading. Indicator will now read required pinion depth shim thickness for ``nominal'' pinion. 10. Inspect rear face of drive pinion to be installed for a pinion code number. This number indicates in thousandths of an inch necessary modification of pinion shim thickness obtained in step 9. 11. Select pinion depth adjusting shim as follows: a. If pinion is stamped with a plus (+) number, add that number of thousandths to dimension obtained in step 9. b. If pinion is stamped with a minus ( - ) number, subtract that many thousandths from dimension obtained in step 9. c. If pinion is not stamped with plus or minus number, dimension obtained in step 9 is correct shim thickness. 12. Remove gauging tool and pinion bearings from housing. DRIVE PINION, INSTALL 1. Install pinion bearing races in housing, if not previously installed, using suitable drivers to ensure that races are squarely seated. 2. Install selected shim on pinion shaft, lubricate rear pinion bearing with specified axle lubricant, then press rear bearing onto pinion using suitable spacers. 3. Install new collapsible spacer on pinion and insert pinion assembly into housing. 4. Lubricate front pinion bearing, install bearing in housing and tap bearing onto pinion shaft while assistant holds pinion in place. Old pinion nut and large washer can be used to draw front bearing onto pinion, but care must be taken not to collapse spacer if this method is used. 5. Install new pinion seal in housing, coat seal lips with grease, then mount driveshaft flange on pinion shaft, lightly tapping flange until several pinion shaft threads protrude. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Adjustments > Borg Warner > Page 2581 6. Coat rear of pinion washer with suitable sealer, then install washer and new pinion nut and adjust preload to specifications. PINION BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT 1. Ensure that pinion and bearings are properly installed, as outlined. 2. Hold driveshaft companion flange with suitable tool, then alternately tighten pinion nut and rotate pinion until endplay is reduced to zero. 3. When endplay is reduced to zero, check pinion bearing preload by rotating pinion with suitable torque wrench. 4. Continue tightening pinion nut in small increments until specified bearing preload is obtained, rotating pinion and checking preload after each adjustment. Exceeding preload specification will compress collapsible spacer too far, requiring replacement of spacer. If preload specification is exceeded, spacer must be replaced and adjustment procedure must be repeated. Do not loosen pinion nut to reduce preload. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion Pinion Gear: Service and Repair Borg Warner - 2 Pinion 1. Scribe reference mark between drive pinion and driveshaft yoke, then hold yoke with suitable tool and remove pinion nut and yoke. If yoke shows wear in the seal-to-flange contacting surface, the yoke should be replaced. 2. Install original pinion nut a few turns on pinion shaft, then using hammer and drift, tap pinion shaft out of pinion housing. Hold gear end of pinion shaft when removing to prevent it from falling from axle housing. On Corvette models, the pinion preload shims may stick to the pinion housing or the rear bearing during removal. These shims must be collected and kept together for use during reassembly. 3. Remove and discard pinion nut and collapsible spacer. 4. If being replaced, remove front and rear bearing races from pinion housing using drift positioned in race slots and hammer. 5. If rear pinion bearing is being replaced, remove using arbor press and adapters. Measure and record thickness of shim which is found under rear bearing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion > Page 2584 Pinion Gear: Service and Repair Dana/Spicer Fig. 5 Pinion Setting Chart If original ring gear and pinion assembly are to be reused, measure original shim pack and build a new shim pack to the same dimension. If baffle is in the axle assembly, it is considered part of the shim pack. Ring gears and pinions are supplied in matched sets only. If a new gear is being used, verify numbers on pinion and ring gear before proceeding with assembly. On the button end of the pinion there is a +, - , or 0 number which indicates the best running position for each particular gear set. This position is controlled by shims installed behind the inner bearing cup. If baffles or oil slingers are used, they are considered part of the adjusting shim pack. If a new gear set is being installed, note the plus or minus mark on both old and new pinions and adjust thickness of shim pack to compensate for the difference between these two numbers. Refer to chart, Fig. 5, when determining shim size. 1. Install inner shim pack and, on 9-3/4 inch ring gear axle, the oil slinger in inner or rear cup bore, then drive cup into position using suitable tool. 2. Add or remove an equal amount to the outer shim pack as was added to the inner shim pack. 3. Drive outer cup into carrier bore, then press rear pinion bearing onto pinion shaft. 4. Install drive pinion and bearing into differential carrier. 5. Install shims and outer or front pinion bearing. 6. Install companion flange, then the washer and nut on pinion shaft. 7. Measure rotating torque of pinion shaft. Rotating torque should measure 10-20 inch lbs. with original bearings installed, or 20-40 inch lbs. with new bearings installed, discounting torque required to start turning shaft. 8. If rotating torque is not within specifications, adjust shim pack as necessary. Increase outer shim pack to reduce torque, or decrease shim pack to increase torque. 9. Remove nut, washer and companion flange from pinion shaft. 10. Install oil slinger, gasket (if equipped) and oil seal onto pinion shaft. 11. Install companion flange, washer and nut and torque as described is step 7. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion > Page 2585 Pinion Gear: Service and Repair Corporate and Eaton 9 1/2 Inch Ring Gear PINION DEPTH ADJUSTMENT Fig. 9 Pinion Depth Gauge Installation If original ring gear and pinion assembly and rear pinion bearing are to be reused, original depth adjusting shim can be used. However, if ring gear and pinion or rear pinion bearing requires replacement, pinion depth must be adjusted using following procedures. 1. Install pinion bearing races to be used in housing using suitable driver. 2. Lubricate pinion bearings and install bearings in races. 3. Mount depth gauging jig in housing noting the following. Use gauge assembly tool No. J-21777-01, Fig. 9, or suitable equivalent. Follow all tool manufacturer's recommendations when installing gauge assembly. a. Assemble gauge plate on preload stud. b. Hold pinion bearings in position, insert stud through rear bearing and pilot, then front bearing and pilot, install retaining nut and tighten nut hand tight. c. Rotate tool to ensure that bearings are properly seated. d. Hold preload stud and tighten nut until 20 inch lbs. torque is required to rotate stud. Tighten nut in small increments, checking rotating torque after each adjustment using suitable torque wrench. e. Mount side bearing discs on arbor, using step that corresponds to base of housing. f. Mount arbor and plunger assembly in housing ensuring that side bearing discs are properly seated, install bearing caps and tighten cap bolts to prevent bearing discs from moving. 4. Mount suitable dial indicator on arbor stud with indicator contact button bearing against top of arbor plunger. 5. Preload indicator 1/2 revolution, then secure to arbor stud in this position. 6. Place arbor plunger on gauge plate, rotate plate as needed so that plunger rests directly on button corresponding to ring gear size. 7. Slowly rock plunger rod back and forth across button while observing dial indicator. 8. At point on button where indicator registers greatest deflection, zero dial indicator. Perform steps 7 and 8 several times to ensure correct setting. 9. Once verified zero setting is obtained, swing plunger aside until it is clear of gauge plate button and record dial indicator reading. Indicator will now read required pinion depth shim thickness for ``nominal'' pinion. 10. Inspect rear face of drive pinion to be installed for a pinion code number. This number indicates in thousandths of an inch necessary modification of pinion shim thickness obtained in step 9. 11. Select pinion depth adjusting shim as follows: a. If pinion is stamped with a plus (+) number, add that number of thousandths to dimension obtained in step 9. b. If pinion is stamped with a minus (-) number, subtract that many thousandths from dimension obtained in step 9. c. If pinion is not stamped with plus or minus number, dimension obtained in step 9 is correct shim thickness. 12. Remove gauging tool and pinion bearings from housing. DRIVE PINION INSTALLATION 1. Install pinion bearing races in housing, if not previously installed, using suitable drivers to ensure that races are squarely seated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion > Page 2586 2. Install selected shim on pinion shaft, lubricate rear pinion bearing with specified axle lubricant, then press rear bearing onto pinion using suitable spacers. 3. Install new collapsible spacer on pinion and insert pinion assembly into housing. 4. Lubricate front pinion bearing, install bearing in housing and tap bearing onto pinion shaft while assistant holds pinion in place. Old pinion nut and large washer can be used to draw front bearing onto pinion, but care must be taken not to collapse spacer if this method is used. 5. Install new pinion seal in housing, coat seal lips with grease, then mount driveshaft flange on pinion shaft, lightly tapping flange until several pinion shaft threads protrude. 6. Coat rear of pinion washer with suitable sealer, then install washer and new pinion nut and adjust preload to specifications. PINION BEARING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT 1. Ensure that pinion and bearings are properly installed, as outlined. 2. Hold driveshaft companion flange with suitable tool, then alternately tighten pinion nut and rotate pinion until endplay is reduced to zero. 3. When endplay is reduced to zero, check pinion bearing preload by rotating pinion with suitable torque wrench. 4. Continue tightening pinion nut in small increments until specified bearing preload is obtained, rotating pinion and checking preload after each adjustment. Exceeding preload specification will compress collapsible spacer too far, requiring replacement of spacer. If preload specification is exceeded, spacer must be replaced and adjustment procedure must be repeated. Do not loosen pinion nut to reduce preload. Disassembly Fig. 9 Drive Pinion Removal Fig. 10 Pinion Straddle Bearing Removal 1. Clamp pinion assembly in vise taking care not to damage housing or gear. 2. Hold driveshaft flange with suitable tool, then remove pinion nut and washer. 3. Remove driveshaft flange from pinion shaft using suitable puller. 4. Support housing in press as shown in Fig. 9, and press pinion from housing. Do not allow pinion to drop on floor. 5. Separate pinion flange, oil seal, front bearing and bearing retainer, driving seal from housing with suitable drift. 6. Remove bearing races from housing using suitable drift and place front bearing race with bearing. 7. Press rear bearing from pinion and place bearing with race. 8. Remove straddle bearing from axle housing using suitable drift, Fig. 10. 9. Inspect components keeping all components in order, and replace as needed. Assembly & Preload Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion > Page 2587 Coat components with specified lubricant during assembly. If components are reused, they should be installed in original position. 1. Press rear bearing onto pinion using suitable spacers. 2. Install front and rear bearing races in housing, using suitable drivers to ensure that races are properly seated. 3. Install straddle bearing in axle housing using straddle bearing installer tool No. J-23322 or equivalent to ensure that bearing is properly seated. 4. Insert pinion through housing, install new collapsible spacer and front bearing over pinion shaft, support pinion and press front bearing onto shaft. 5. Lubricate lips of new seal with grease and install seal using suitable driver to seat seal against shoulder of housing. 6. Install driveshaft companion flange, washer and new pinion nut. 7. Clamp housing in vise, hold flange with suitable tool and torque pinion nut just until all endplay is removed. 8. Check pinion bearing preload (rotating torque) using suitable torque wrench. 9. Continue tightening pinion nut in small increments until specified preload is obtained, checking preload after each adjustment. Exceeding specified preload will collapse spacer too far to be reused. If preload specification is exceeded, spacer must be replaced and adjustment procedure must be repeated. Do not loosen pinion nut to reduce bearing preload. 12 1/4 Inch Ring Gear DISASSEMBLY 1. Clamp pinion drive flange in suitable vise. 2. Remove cotter pin, nut, and washer from end of pinion. 3. Remove drive flange and bearing retainer assembly from pinion. 4. Drive oil seal from retainer and discard seal. 5. Remove pinion rear bearing snap ring, then, using tool J-1453 or equivalent, press bearing from pinion. 6. Position drive pinion in arbor press so that bearing is supported by two pieces of flat steel stock placed parallel to each other and against pinion so as to contact large area of bearing outer race. 7. Press pinion from bearing, ensuring that pinion is supported. INSPECTION 1. Wash all parts in suitable solvent. 2. Inspect pinion for scored, cracked, chipped, or worn teeth. 3. Inspect splines on pinion shaft for excessive wear. 4. Inspect pinion bearing assemblies for roughness, defects, or excessive wear. ASSEMBLY 1. Pack cavity between pinion oil seal lips with suitable lubricant. 2. Using tool J-22281 or equivalent, press oil seal into retainer with seal lips facing pinion bearing. 3. Install pinion rear bearing assembly on pinion shaft, ensuring that chamfered side of inner race seats against shoulder on pinion shaft, then, using tool J-1364 or equivalent, install pinion bearing lock ring. 4. Position pinion front bearing on pinion shaft so that extended portion of inner race faces pinion head, then, using suitable length of two inch pipe, press bearing onto shaft until bearing seats against pinion head. When pressing bearing onto pinion, be careful not to damage ground surface of pilot. 5. Slide oil seal retainer onto pinion shaft, then tap drive flange onto pinion splines. 6. Clamp drive flange in suitable vise and install flange washer and nut, torquing nut to 220 ft. lbs., then install cotter pin without backing off nut. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion > Page 2588 Pinion Gear: Service and Repair Timken/Rockwell - 12 Inch Ring Gear Fig. 1 Exploded View Of Timken/Rockwell Drive Axle With 12 inch Ring Gear DISASSEMBLY 1. Tap or press pinion from cage, taking care not to damage shaft threads, then remove outer pinion bearing, Fig. 1. 2. Remove spacer from pinion, then the inner bearing, using suitable separator and press or puller. 3. If straddle bearing must be replaced, remove snap ring and washer, then the bearing, using suitable puller. 4. If bearings are to be replaced, press outer races from bearing cage, taking care not to distort cage. 5. Inspect components as outlined, and replace as needed, keeping components in order for assembly. ASSEMBLY & PRELOAD 1. When installing new cups, press them firmly against pinion bearing cage shoulders. 2. Lubricate bearings and cups with suitable lubricant. 3. Press rear thrust and radial bearings firmly against pinion shoulders, using suitable sleeve that will bear only on bearing inner race. 4. Install radial bearing lock ring, then squeeze ring into pinion shaft groove. 5. Insert pinion and bearing assembly in pinion cage and position spacer or spacer combination over pinion shaft. 6. Press front bearing firmly against spacer. 7. Rotate cage several revolutions to assure normal bearing contact. 8. Press flange or yoke against forward bearing and install washer and pinion shaft nut. 9. Place pinion and cage assembly over carrier studs, hold flange with suitable tool and torque pinion shaft nut to 240 ft. lbs. 10. Check pinion bearing preload torque. If rotating torque is not within 5 to 15 pound inches, disassemble, adjust spacer, reassemble, and recheck preload torque. Use thinner spacer to increase or thicker spacer to decrease preload. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Gear, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Borg Warner - 2 Pinion > Page 2589 11. Hold flange with suitable tool and remove pinion shaft nut and flange. 12. Lubricate pinion shaft oil seal and cover outer edge of seal body with non-hardening sealing compound, then press seal against cover shoulder with suitable tool. 13. Install new gasket and bearing cover. 14. Press flange against forward bearing and install washer and pinion shaft nut, torquing nut to 240 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Front Wheel Driveshaft Boot Damage Prevention Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Technical Service Bulletins Front Wheel Driveshaft Boot - Damage Prevention File In Section: 4 - Drive Axle Bulletin No. 56-43-01 Date: March, 1995 Subject: Preventing Front Wheel Driveshaft Boot Damage Models: 1995 and Prior Light Duty Trucks with Four Wheel Drive (4WD) or All Wheel Drive (AWD) When diagnosing a vehicle for customer concerns such as noise and/or vibrations, it is often necessary to run the vehicle while it is supported in the air by hoists or jack stands. On light duty truck models with four wheel drive (4WD) or All Wheel Drive (AWD) the front suspension should not be allowed to hang free while performing on-hoist testing. It the front suspension is allowed to hang free, the CV joint will be at a very high angle. This will likely result in damage to the front wheel driveshaft boots. In addition, extra vibrations may occur and may damage the front wheel driveshaft joints. When on-hoist testing an AWD or 4WD light duty truck, support the outer end of the lower control arm using jack stands. This will reduce the CV joint angle and prevent damage to the front wheel driveshaft assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Universal Joint: Service and Repair 1. Remove lock rings from trunnion bearings. 2. Support shaft yoke in a suitable vise. 3. With a brass drift and a hammer, tap on one end of trunnion bearing to drive the opposite bearing from yoke. Then, support other side of yoke and drive out remaining bearing. 4. Remove trunnion. Inspect and replace bearings if necessary, then lubricate with wheel bearing grease. 5. Replace trunnion and press bearings into yoke and over trunnion hubs far enough to install lock rings. 6. Gently tap yoke to seat bearings against lock rings. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Fig. 3 Axle Shaft Bearing Removal Fig. 4 Axle Shaft Bearing Installation Fig. 5 Axle Shaft Seal Installation 1. Remove axle shaft as described under AXLE SHAFT. 2. Remove axle seal by prying behind seal steel case with a suitable pry bar. Use care to avoid damaging axle housing. 3. Remove axle bearing using slide hammer J-2619, adapter J-2619-4, or axle bearing puller J-22813-01. The tangs of the axle bearing puller should engage the bearing outer race, Fig. 3. 4. Lubricate new bearing with gear lubricant, then install bearing in axle housing with axle shaft bearing installer J-23765 or equivalent until bearing is seated in housing, Fig. 4. 5. Apply suitable gear lubricant to seal lips, then position seal on axle shaft seal installer J-23771 or equivalent. Install in axle housing, tapping into place until seal is flush with housing, Fig. 5. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Adjustments > Front Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Front Two Wheel Drive - 2WD FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT 1. While rotating wheel forward, torque spindle nut to 12 ft. lbs. 2. Back off nut until ``just loose'' then hand tighten nut and back it off again until either hole in spindle lines up with hole in nut. Do not back off nut more than 1/2 flat. 3. Install new cotter pin. With wheel bearing properly adjusted, there will be .001---.005 inch endplay. Four Wheel Drive - 4WD For Front Wheel Bearing Adjustment Procedures on four wheel drive models refer to Locking Hub/Adjustments. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Adjustments > Front > Page 2606 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Rear Chevrolet Full Floating Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT Before checking wheel bearing adjustment, make sure brakes are fully released and do not drag. Check bearing play by grasping tire at top and pulling back and forth or by using a pry bar under tire. If bearings are properly adjusted, movement of brake drum in relation to brake flange plate will be barely noticeable and wheel will turn freely. If movement is excessive, adjust bearings as follows: 1. Raise vehicle until wheel is free to rotate, then remove axle shaft. 2. Disengage retainer tang and remove retainer from axle housing tube. 3. Torque adjusting nut to 50 ft. lbs. while rotating hub assembly. Ensure bearing cones are seated and in contact with spindle shoulder. 4. Back off adjusting nut until just loose. 5. Insert key into adjusting nut slot, if equipped. Install snap ring to retain key in position. 6. Lower vehicle, then install axle shaft. GMC Single Speed Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT 1. Raise and support rear axle. 2. Remove axle shaft as outlined previously. Release brakes. 3. Disengage retainer tang from locknut, then remove locknut and retainer from axle housing tube. 4. Torque inner adjusting nut to 50 ft. lbs. while rotating wheel, then back off nut 1/8 of a turn. 5. Install retainer so that short tang engages nearest slot on adjusting nut. 6. Install outer locknut and torque to 250 ft. lbs., then bend long tang of retainer into slot of outer nut. Timken (Rockwell) Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Adjustments > Front > Page 2607 Fig. 12 Timken (Rockwell) axle w/12 inch ring gear This axle, Fig. 12, employs a heavy duty hypoid drive pinion and ring gear. The differential and gear assembly is mounted on tapered roller bearings. The straddle mounted pinion has two tapered roller bearings in front of the pinion teeth which take the forward and reverse thrust, while a third bearing behind the pinion teeth carries the radial load. AXLE HOUSING, REPLACE Refer to ``Chevrolet Full Floating Axles'' for axle housing replacement procedures, since procedures are identical for both axles. AXLE SHAFT, REPLACE 1. Remove hub cap, then install slide hammer adapter into tapped hole in axle flange. 2. Attach slide hammer onto adapter, then remove axle shaft from housing. 3. Install axle shaft, ensuring flange and hub splines align. 4. Install new gasket, position flange to hub, then install attaching bolts and tighten to specifications. WHEEL BEARINGS, ADJUST 1. Remove axle shaft as outlined previously. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Disengage retainer tang from locknut, then remove locknut and retainer from axle housing tube. 4. While rotating wheel, torque inner adjusting nut to 50 ft. lbs., then back off nut 1/8 of a turn. 5. Install retainer so that short tang engages nearest slot on adjusting nut. 6. Install outer locknut and torque to 250 ft. lbs., then bend long tang of retainer into slot of outer nut. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Coil Spring Suspension FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS AND/OR HUB 1. Raise and support vehicle, then remove wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove hub cap and cotter pin. 3. Remove brake caliper. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 4. Remove retaining nut, then the hub and disc assembly. 5. Remove outer wheel bearing. 6. To remove inner bearing, pry out grease seal, then remove seal and inner bearing. 7. Reverse procedure to install, then adjust wheel bearings as previously described. Leaf Spring Suspension FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS AND/OR HUB 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove dust cap, if equipped. 3. Remove locking hub as outlined under LOCKING HUBS. 4. Remove disc brake caliper and position aside. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 5. Remove wheel bearing outer locknut, lock ring and wheel bearing inner adjusting nut. 6. Remove hub and disc assembly, and outer wheel bearing. 7. Remove oil seal, inner wheel bearing and inner and outer bearing cups using a suitable drift. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Adjust wheel bearings as outlined under ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE/WHEEL BEARING. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2610 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Chevrolet Full Floating Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS Fig. 5 Removing bearing adjusting nut locknut Hub & Drum, Remove 1. Remove wheel and axle shaft. 2. Disengage tang of nut lock from slot or flat of locknut, then remove locknut from housing tube, using appropriate tool, Fig. 5. 3. Disengage tang of nut lock from slot or flat of adjusting nut and remove nut lock from housing tube. 4. Use appropriate tool, Fig. 5, to remove adjusting nut from housing tube. Remove thrust washer from housing tube. 5. Pull hub and drum straight off axle housing. Fig. 6 Removing outer bearing & cup Bearing & Cup, Replace 1. Using a hammer and suitable drift, drive inner bearing, cup and seal from hub assembly. 2. Remove outer bearing snap ring using suitable pliers. 3. Using tools J-24426 and J-8092, Fig. 6, drive outer bearing and cup from hub assembly. 4. Install new outer bearing into hub assembly. 5. Install outer bearing cup using tools mentioned in Step 3. Drive cup beyond snap ring groove. Install outer bearing cup with tool J-8092 positioned upside down to prevent chamfer on tool from damaging cup. 6. Install snap ring into groove using suitable pliers. 7. Using tool J-24426, drive cup against snap ring. 8. Install inner bearing cup using tools J-24427 and J-8092. Drive cup into position until it seats against shoulder of hub bore. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2611 9. Install new oil seal. Chevrolet Salisbury Type Semi-Floating Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS 1. Remove axle shaft as previously described. 2. Use a suitable puller to remove bearing and oil seal. 3. Lubricate wheel bearing and cavity between seal lips with wheel bearing lubricant before installation. 4. Reverse procedure to install. GMC Single Speed REAR WHEEL BEARINGS Fig. 5 Removing bearing adjusting nut locknut Fig. 9 Removing bearing retainer ring 1. Remove wheel and axle shaft. 2. Disengage tang of retainer from slot or flat of locknut, then remove locknut from housing tube, Fig. 5. 3. Disengage tang of retainer from slot or flat of adjusting nut, then remove retainer. 4. Using tool shown in Fig. 5, remove adjusting nut from housing tube. Remove thrust washer. 5. Pull hub and drum assembly off axle housing. Remove oil seal and discard. 6. Using a suitable steel bar and an arbor press, press inner bearing cup from hub. 7. Using a suitable pliers, remove outer bearing retaining ring, Fig. 9. 8. Using an old axle shaft or equivalent, drive on axle shaft spacer to remove outer bearing assembly from hub. 9. Position axle shaft spacer and outer bearing into hub, ensuring larger side of bearing faces outer end of hub. 10. Position outer bearing cup into hub with thin edge facing toward outer end of hub, then press cup into hub. 11. Install retaining ring, then press cup into contact with ring. 12. Drive inner bearing cup into hub, then install new oil seal. 13. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to complete installation, then adjust wheel bearings as outlined in ``Wheel Bearing, Adjust'' procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Hub: Service and Repair FRONT HUB/BEARING 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove dust cap, if equipped. 3. Remove locking hub as outlined under ``Locking Hub Service.'' 4. Remove disc brake caliper and position aside. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 5. Remove wheel bearing outer locknut, lock ring and wheel bearing inner adjusting nut. 6. Remove hub and disc assembly, and outer wheel bearing. 7. Remove oil seal, inner wheel bearing and inner and outer bearing cups using a suitable drift. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Adjust wheel bearings as outlined under ``Wheel Bearings, Adjust'' procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Adjustments Wheel Hub (Locking): Adjustments Fig. 4 Adjusting wheel bearing EXC. HUBS W/MONROE AUTO. TYPE LOCKING HUB 1. Remove dust cap or locking hub, lockwasher and outer locknut. 2. Using suitable spanner wrench, torque inner adjusting nut to 50 ft.. lbs. while rotating hub. Back off adjusting nut and torque to 50 ft. lbs. on 1985---87 models with manual hubs, or 35 ft. lbs. on all other models, while rotating hub, Fig. 4. 3. Back off adjusting nut just enough to free bearing on 1986---87 models with manual hubs, or 3/8 of a turn on all other models. 4. On 1980---84 K10---20/1500---2500 vehicles, proceed as follows: a. On 1980 models, assemble adjusting nut lock by aligning nearest hole in lock with adjusting nut pin. Install outer locknut and torque to 80 ft. lbs. b. On 1981---84 models, assemble drag sleeve retainer washer over the axle shaft and against bearing adjusting nut. The tang on the inside diameter of this washer is assembled in the keyway of the spindle. Assemble and tighten outer locknut to 160---205 ft. lbs. 5. On 1980---84 K30/3500 vehicles, proceed as follows: a. On 1980---81 models, assemble lockwasher and locknut, then torque locknut to 65 ft. lbs. Bend one ear of lockwasher at least 30° over inner adjusting nut, and the other ear at least 60° over outer locknut. b. On 1982---84 models, assemble drag sleeve retainer washer over axle shaft and against bearing adjusting nut. The tang on the inside diameter of this washer is assembled in the keyway of the spindle. Assemble and tighten outer locknut to 160---205 ft. lbs. 6. On 1985---87 models, assemble drag sleeve retainer washer. Ensure tang on inside diameter of washer passes onto slot in spindle and hole in washer aligns with locknut pin. Move adjustment nut as necessary to align pin, then torque locknut to 160 ft. lbs. 7. On all vehicles, check to ensure all hub assemblies have .001---.010 inch endplay. 8. Install dust cap or locking hub. HUBS W/MONROE AUTO. TYPE LOCKING HUB 1. Remove locking hub assembly. 2. Torque locknut to 70 ft. lbs. while rotating hub and disc assembly. 3. Back off locknut, then torque to 25 ft. lbs. while rotating hub and disc. 4. Back off locknut to align nearest slot, then install locknut key. 5. Measure endplay. Endplay should be .001---.010 inch. 6. Reinstall locking hub assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Monroe Auto. Locking Hub Fig. 7 Exploded view of Monroe automatic locking hub Description This automatic locking hub, Fig. 7, when placed in four wheel drive, directs power to the front wheels. The front axle turns the axle shaft, activating the tri-cam mechanism, which then moves the drive gear outward into engagement with the ring gear. When two wheel drive is selected, disengagement is accomplished by the reverse movement of the wheels, which causes the drive gear and tri-cam to rotate to the disengaged position, moving the drive gear out of mesh with the ring gear. Removal 1. Remove tire and wheel assembly, hubcap and hub lock. 2. Remove spring retainer, then the loose spring. 3. Carefully pull hub lock assembly from wheel. If hub lock assembly will not slide out freely, rotate wheel to facilitate removal. Disassembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 2620 1. Position hub lock assembly with plastic bearing side facing downward. 2. Pry inboard spring from assembly, then remove spindle lock, thrust bearing and tri-cam assembly. 3. Clean adapter housing assembly. If any part of this assembly is worn, replace as necessary. 4. Slide ring gear from adapter housing, then remove the six ring gear springs. 5. Remove ring gear spring retainer. Assembly 1. Install ring gear spring retainer. 2. Position the six ring gear springs into adapter housing. 3. Grease outside surface of ring gear, then install into adapter housing. Ensure gear teeth are closest to springs. 4. Insert and install ring gear retaining ring. Ensure ring gear springs are properly seated in adapter housing. 5. Grease tri-cam assembly, then install into adapter housing. 6. Install thrust bearing, spindle lock and inboard snap ring. Rotate spindle lock tangs in both directions to check for free movement. Installation 1. Install hub lock by first sliding hub onto axle shaft spline, then guide hub into wheel hub spline. When hub lock bottoms out, rotate entire wheel while pressing inward on hub until hub lock tangs engage wheel bearing locknut. Allow hub lock to seat itself. Hub lock should not protrude more than 3/8 inch from face of wheel hub. 2. Install spring, then unlock hub lock by rotating wheel hub while applying force to drive gear spring. 3. Install spring retainer and spring. 4. Install hub cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 2621 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Spicer Manual Locking Hub Fig. 8 Exploded view of Spicer manual locking hub Description As shown in Fig. 8, the splines on the inside diameter of the axle shaft sleeve and ring assembly mesh with the axle shaft splines. The assembly is retained on the axle shaft with a snap ring. The splines on the outside diameter of the inner clutch ring assembly mesh with the wheel hub splines. Therefore, when the actuator knob is turned towards the ``L'' position, the actuating cam body is forced outward towards the hub end, allowing the inner clutch to be forced under spring tension towards the axle shaft sleeve and ring assembly until the inner clutch assembly teeth are engaged in the axle shaft sleeve and ring assembly teeth, locking the axle and hub. Operation When the transfer case is shifted into the position for driving the front axle, turn the actuating knob so that it is aligned with the letter L. If the clutch teeth do not engage with the knob turned to this position, the clutch teeth are butted and a slight movement of the wheel in either direction will complete the lock. The front axle will now drive the wheel. When the transfer case is to be shifted into the position for driving the rear axle only, turn the actuating knob so that it is aligned with the letter F. This will disengage the clutch teeth and thus unlock the wheel hub from the axle shaft. The wheel will now turn free on the axle. Be certain that the transfer case is shifted into two wheel drive position before disengaging the Hub-Lock. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 2622 Fig. 8 Exploded view of Spicer manual locking hub Removal 1. Position actuator knob in ``LOCK,'' then raise and support vehicle. Rotate tire to ensure engagement of hub lock. 2. Remove retaining plate attaching bolts, then the retaining plate, actuating knob and O-rings. 3. Remove internal snap ring, outer clutch retaining ring, actuating cam body, outer clutch gear and pressure spring, Fig. 8. 4. Remove axle shaft snap ring, then the inner clutch ring. 5. Remove spring retainer plate, if equipped. Installation 1. Install spring retainer plate, if equipped, over spindle nuts and against wheel bearing outer cup. Ensure flanged side of plate faces toward wheel bearing. 2. Install inner clutch ring onto axle shaft, press ring inward, then install snap ring. 3. Install pressure spring with larger side facing inward. 4. Install outer clutch gear, actuating cam body, outer clutch retaining ring and the internal snap ring. Ensure actuating cams face outward. 5. Install O-ring, actuating knob, actuating knob O-ring and the retaining plate. 6. Install retaining plate attaching bolts and torque to 38 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 2623 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Warner Auto. Locking Hub Fig. 6 Exploded view of Warner automatic locking hub Description The Automatic Locking Hub, shown in Fig. 6, engages or disengages to lock the front axle shaft to the hub of the front wheel. Engagement occurs whenever the vehicle is operated in 4WD. Disengagement occurs whenever 2WD has been selected and the vehicle is moving rearward. Disengagement will not occur when the vehicle is moved rearward if 4WD is selected and the hub has already been engaged. Before disassembling a unit for a complaint of abnormal noise, note the following: 1. To obtain all-wheel drive, the transfer case lever must be placed in 4L or 4H, at which time the hub locks will automatically engage. 2. To unlock the hubs, shift the transfer case lever to 2H, then slowly reverse the vehicle direction approximately 10 feet. 3. An incomplete shift from 2WD to 4WD, or disengagement of only one hub lock may cause an abnormal sound from the front axle. Shift to 4WD to stop the noise, then unlock the hubs as previously stated. Removal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 2624 1. Remove 5 screws retaining the cover to outer clutch housing. 2. Remove cover, seal, seal bridge and bearing components. 3. Compress the wire retaining ring and remove the remaining components from the hub. Disassembly 1. Remove snap ring from groove in hub sleeve, then turn clutch gear until it falls into engagement with the outer clutch housing. Lift and tilt the drag sleeve to unlock the tangs of the brake band from window of inner cage, then remove the drag sleeve and brake assembly. The brake band must never be removed from the drag sleeve. The spring tension of the brake band can be changed if the coils are overexpanded and could affect hub operation. 2. Remove snap ring from groove in outer clutch housing, then pry plastic outer cage free from inner cage while inner cage is being removed. 3. Pry plastic outer cage tabs free from groove in outer clutch housing, then remove outer cage. 4. Remove clutch sleeve and attached components from outer clutch housing. 5. Compress return spring and hold the spring with clamps, then position the assembly in a vise so that the vise holds both ends of the clutch sleeve. Remove retaining spring. 6. Remove clamps holding the return spring, then slowly open the vise to permit the release of the return spring in a safe manner. Remove retainer seat, spring and spring support washers from the hub sleeve. 7. Remove C-ring from clutch sleeve. It is necessary to position sleeve assembly so that the C-ring ends are aligned with legs of cam follower, allowing removal between the legs. 8. Remove conical spring from between cam follower and clutch gear, then separate cam follower from clutch gear. Do not pry the legs of the cam follower apart. Assembly & Installation 1. Install tangs of cam follower over flats of clutch gear, then compress conical spring and position with large diameter located against clutch gear. 2. Position clutch gear assembly over splines of hub sleeve. The teeth of the cam follower should be located at the end of the hub sleeve with no splines, and the clutch gear and spring should slide freely over splines of hub sleeve. 3. Install C-ring into groove of hub sleeve, then install a spring retainer over each end of return spring. 4. Position one end of return spring with retainer against shoulder of clutch gear, then place support washer on end of the return spring. Compress return spring and install retainer ring into groove of hub sleeve. 5. Place assembled components into outer housing. The cam follower should be positioned with legs facing outward. 6. Install 3 of the cover screws into 3 holes of the outer clutch housing. These screws will support the component to permit the clutch hub to drop down so that the tangs of the brake band can be assembled. 7. Carefully install the plastic outer cage into outer clutch housing with ramps facing toward cam follower. The small external tabs of the plastic cage should be located in wide groove of outer clutch housing. 8. Install steel inner cage into the outer cage, aligning tab of outer cage with window of the inner cage, then install retaining ring into groove of outer clutch housing above outer cage. 9. The brake band and drag are serviced as a complete assembly. Install one of the 2 tangs of the brake band on each side of the lug of the outer cage, located in the window of the steel inner cage. It will be necessary to tilt these parts to engage the tangs in this position as the drag sleeve is positioned against the face of the cam follower. 10. Remove the 3 screws and rest the end of the hub sleeve on a suitable support, then install washer and snap ring above drag sleeve. The following steps may be completed as the hub is installed into vehicle. 11. Install wire retaining ring into groove of end of clutch housing without spline. The tangs of retainer ring should point away from splined end of clutch housing. 12. Hold the tangs together and install the 2 bent down tabs of seal bridge over tangs. The seal bridge holds the wire retainer ring in a clamped position in groove of outer clutch housing. Install O-ring into groove of outer clutch housing and over the seal bridge. 13. Lubricate and install the bearing over the inner race. The steel ball bearing should be visible when the bearing is properly installed. 14. Install bearing retainer clip into hole in outer race, then install bearing and retainer assembly in end of hub sleeve. Install seal ring over outer clutch housing. 15. Install bearing race spring into bore of cover, then install cover and spring assembly. Align holes in cover to holes in outer clutch housing and install 5 screws. 16. Install O-ring over seal bridge to prevent it from dislodging during handling prior to the hub bearing being installed into the vehicle. 17. The hub and attached parts should turn freely after installation. The 5 cover screws must be loosened to install the hub into the vehicle. After installation, torque the cover screws to 40---50 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 2625 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Warner Manual Locking Hub Description Turning the locking hub clutch control to the ``L'' or ``4'' position connects the wheel hubs to the axle shafts. Therefore, when the transfer case is driving the front axle and the locking hubs are in the ``L'' or ``4'' position, the wheels are driven by the axle shafts. When the transfer case is not driving the front axle, the locking hub clutch controls are turned to the ``F'' or ``2'' position to disconnect the wheel hubs from the axle shafts. The wheels now rotate freely, but the axle shafts remain stationary. On any vehicle equipped with manually operated locking hubs, extreme care must be taken to ensure locking hub dials are fully engaged or disengaged, to prevent possible damage to the locking hubs. If the locking hubs are not properly maintained, full engagement of the control dials may become impossible due to excessive dirt and dust. Any time the vehicle is driven through water deep enough to cover the hubs, the locking hubs should be removed and cleaned, then lubricated thoroughly. These hubs are serviced as an assembly or subassembly only (hub body or hub clutch assembly only). Do not attempt to disassemble these units. If an entire hub or subassembly is defective, replace the entire assembly or subassembly. The hubs may be removed for cleaning and inspection purposes and for periodic lubrication only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 2626 Fig. 9 Exploded view of Warner manual locking hub Removal 1. Remove socket head screws, axle hub retaining ring and axle shaft retaining ring. 2. Remove hub clutch assembly, Fig. 9. 3. Clean and inspect all components. Replace as necessary. Installation 1. Lubricate all hub components. 2. Install hub clutch, axle hub retaining ring and axle shaft retaining ring. 3. Install new O-ring in hub body and position in clutch. 4. Install socket head screws and torque to 30 inch lbs. 5. Raise and support front of vehicle, then set control dial to ``FREE'' position and rotate wheels. If wheels drag, check hub installation. 6. Lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Seal: Service and Repair 1. Remove axle shaft as previously described. 2. Use a suitable puller to remove bearing and oil seal. 3. Lubricate wheel bearing and cavity between seal lips with wheel bearing lubricant before installation. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration Technical Service Bulletin # 891994A Date: 890601 Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration Number: 89-199-4A Section: 4A Date: June 1989 Subject: EVALUATING DRIVELINE VIBRATION Model and Year: 1980-89 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The purpose of this bulletin is to provide a logical approach to evaluating vehicles for driveline generated vibrations and imbalance occurring between 50-62 mph. The following diagnosis tree is designed to be used as a guide, and when utilized properly can help isolate and identify causes of driveline disturbances. Procedure: Prior to road test, determine if disturbance is engine related by following the procedure below: 1. With engine at operating temperature and vehicle parked, set parking brake and place transmission shift lever in neutral. 2. Slowly accelerate engine from idle to 4000 RPM (diesels 3200 RPM), noting RPM at which vibration is felt (if any). 3. If vibration is felt, disregard use of this bulletin and isolate and repair responsible engine component (transmission, clutch/flywheel, torque converter, engine accessory, etc.). Road test vehicle on a smooth level road to verify customer comment. It is usually beneficial to road test the vehicle with the customer present. Note the speeds and conditions at which the disturbance is most noticeable. Refer to Remark A in this bulletin for diagnosis information. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2635 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2636 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2637 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2638 To Use Diagnosis Tree: Locate symptom on the diagnosis tree which best describes the disturbance. Follow arrows and perform the required check or service action. Never bypass or skip an inspection or assume that a component is OK. All steps must be performed as called out. Definition of Terms: "Boom" - Continuous bass drum roll sound caused by body cavity resonance excited by drivetrain. Sometimes felt as pressure in ears. "Buffeting" - High pressure pulsation. "Droning" - A low heavy reverberating often muffled sound. Sounds like a bowling ball rolling down alley. "Drumming" - A drum roll similar to "Boom." "Howling" - A mid-range continuous sound usually associated with driveline gear noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2639 Figure 2 Procedure 1. Measure runout of companion flange, as described in Figure 2. Indicate high point with a mark. 2. Remove companion flange as described in Section 4B of the Service Manual. 3. Measure runout of pinion stem at radius between nut thread and spline. Mark low point. 4. Reinstall pinion companion flange with marks aligned. Tighten pinion nut to specification torque. Refer to Section 4B of the Service Manual. 5. Remeasure companion flange runout. If excessive runout still exists, do Step 6. 6. Additional reindexing of the companion flange to the pinion stem splines by one or two teeth may further reduce runout Remarks A. Verify concern. Drive on smooth road up to 65 mph as speed limits permit. Note speeds and severity of disturbance. Assure that disturbance is not engine or transmission related. Refer to Section OC "Vibration Diagnosis Chart" in the 1989 Service Manual. If disturbance is determined to be engine/transmission related, disregard use of this bulletin. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2640 B. Disturbance may peak within this speed range. C. Visually check components for damage, looseness, missing balance weights, etc. D. This may compensate for companion flange runout E. Excessive companion flange runout may occur as high prop runout. Replace companion flange as required, see Figure 2. F. IMPORTANT: If runout is reduced to below 0.005-inch and the flange possesses a compensation weight, this part is out of spec. See Figure 2. G. Ensure the companion flange runout is still well within specifications. H. If this point has been crossed several times, it is recommended that the Technical Assistance Center be contacted. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2641 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2642 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2643 Propshaft Runout Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2644 Figure 1 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2645 Figure 1 *IMPORTANT: This measurement must be taken at the tapered hole on the splined shaft after the rear propeller shaft is removed. **IMPORTANT: This measurement must be taken with the rear propeller shaft mounted on the front shaft which is within specifications. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2646 Figure 2 Companion Flange Compensation Weights Figure 3 This "compensation" weight was originally installed to compensate for the effect of offsetting 1/2 the mass of the propshaft because of companion flange runout. Missing or improperly located weights may worsen the driveline disturbance. Refer to Figure 2 for companion flange and compensation weight specifications. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Evaluating Driveline Vibration > Page 2647 Pinion Companion Flange Vectoring (Indexing) Figure 4 Vectoring is a procedure to optimize the mounting and match the high point of the companion flange to the low point of the pinion stem to help reduce flange runout. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Slip Yoke > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Slip Yoke/U-Joint - Replacement and Servicing Slip Yoke: Technical Service Bulletins Slip Yoke/U-Joint - Replacement and Servicing File In Section: 4 - Drive Axle Bulletin No.: 46-41-01 Date: September, 1994 INFORMATION Subject: Slip Yoke Replacement and U-Joint Servicing Models: 1995 and Prior Light Duty Trucks U-joints that are pressed out of the propeller shaft or slip yoke must not be re-used. When it is necessary to press out the u-joint to replace a slip yoke, a new u-joint must be installed. A new u-joint is necessary as the bearing cup seals and slingers are easily damaged. If these components are damaged, dirt and water can contaminate the bearing causing early bearing wear-out. Replacement of the rear u-joint is not required if the retaining straps holding the u-joint to the rear axle pinion flange are removed. Light duty trucks make use of three types of yokes: 1. Vented slip yoke. This yoke can be identified by a small hole in the center of the slip yoke welch plug. This yoke uses grease for internal lubrication. The internal splines of the yoke should be coated with a light covering of grease before installation to the output shaft. A small amount of grease may be forced from the vent hole during operation. No attempts should be made to plug the vent hole. 2. Non-vented slip yoke. This yoke has no vent hole and relies on transmission or transfer case fluid for internal lubrication. Grease should not be used on the yoke internal splines as it may contaminate the transmission or transfer case fluid. 3. Bolted or fixed yoke. This yoke does not slide so it needs no internal lubrication. The transmission/transfer case output shaft seal should be inspected for damage before installing the yoke. The seal lips should also be greased before yoke installation for longer seal life and better performance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Slip Yoke/U-Joint - Replacement and Servicing Universal Joint: Technical Service Bulletins Slip Yoke/U-Joint - Replacement and Servicing File In Section: 4 - Drive Axle Bulletin No.: 46-41-01 Date: September, 1994 INFORMATION Subject: Slip Yoke Replacement and U-Joint Servicing Models: 1995 and Prior Light Duty Trucks U-joints that are pressed out of the propeller shaft or slip yoke must not be re-used. When it is necessary to press out the u-joint to replace a slip yoke, a new u-joint must be installed. A new u-joint is necessary as the bearing cup seals and slingers are easily damaged. If these components are damaged, dirt and water can contaminate the bearing causing early bearing wear-out. Replacement of the rear u-joint is not required if the retaining straps holding the u-joint to the rear axle pinion flange are removed. Light duty trucks make use of three types of yokes: 1. Vented slip yoke. This yoke can be identified by a small hole in the center of the slip yoke welch plug. This yoke uses grease for internal lubrication. The internal splines of the yoke should be coated with a light covering of grease before installation to the output shaft. A small amount of grease may be forced from the vent hole during operation. No attempts should be made to plug the vent hole. 2. Non-vented slip yoke. This yoke has no vent hole and relies on transmission or transfer case fluid for internal lubrication. Grease should not be used on the yoke internal splines as it may contaminate the transmission or transfer case fluid. 3. Bolted or fixed yoke. This yoke does not slide so it needs no internal lubrication. The transmission/transfer case output shaft seal should be inspected for damage before installing the yoke. The seal lips should also be greased before yoke installation for longer seal life and better performance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2656 Universal Joint: Specifications Universal joint flange locknut ............................................................................................................... ........................................................... 90-120 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2657 Universal Joint: Description and Operation Fig. 10 Constant velocity (CV) universal joint This type of universal joint, Fig. 10, consists of two conventional cross and roller joints connected with a special link yoke. Because the two joint angles are the same, even though the usual universal joint fluctuation is present within the unit, the acceleration of the front joint (within the yoke) is always neutralized by the deceleration of the rear joint (within the yoke) and vice versa. The end result is the front and rear propeller shafts always turn at a constant velocity. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Constant Velocity Type Universal Joint: Service and Repair Constant Velocity Type Disassembly Fig. 11 Bearing Cup Removal Sequence Fig. 12 Alignment Punch Marks Fig. 13 Cross Press Being Used In Place Of Socket Constant Velocity Joint To disassemble the constant velocity joint, the bearings should be removed in sequence shown in Fig. 11. This method requires the least amount of work. 1. Mark all yokes before disassembly as shown in Fig. 12, so that they can be reassembled in their original relationship to maintain driveshaft balance. The following procedure can be performed in a vise. A cross press tool, Fig. 13, can be used in place of the socket used to drive the bearings. 2. Support the driveshaft horizontally in line with the base plate of a press. Place rear end of coupling yoke over a 1-1/8 inch socket to accept the bearing. Place a socket slightly smaller than the bearing, on the opposite side of the spider. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Constant Velocity Type > Page 2660 Fig. 14 Using spacer to completely drive out bearing Fig. 15 Solid Ball & Replaceable Balls. Notch Identifies Driveshaft With Replaceable Ball Fig. 16 Exploded View Of Ball & Seat 3. Press bearing cup out of coupling yoke ear. If bearing cup is not completely removed, insert spacer C-4365-4 or equivalent, Fig. 14, and complete removal of bearing cup. 4. Rotate driveshaft 180° and shear the opposite retaining ring, and press the bearing cup out of the coupling yoke as described previously, using spacer C-4365-4 or equivalent. 5. Disengage cross trunnions, still attached to flange yoke, from coupling yoke. Pull flange yoke and cross from centering ball on ball support tube yoke. The ball socket is part of the flange yoke. The ball on some joints is not replaceable. The joints with a replaceable ball can be recognized as shown in Fig. 15. Do not attempt to remove solid ball, as removal tool may be damaged. 6. Pry seal from ball cavity, then remove washers, spring and shoes, Fig. 16. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Constant Velocity Type > Page 2661 Fig. 17 Removing centering ball Ball Socket 1. To remove ball, separate universal joint between coupling yoke and flange yoke by pressing out trunnion bearing in coupling yoke. Pull flange yoke and cross with ball socket from centering ball as a unit. 2. Clean and inspect ball seat insert bushing for wear. If worn, replace flange yoke and cross assembly. 3. Pry seal from ball cavity, then remove washers, spring and ball seats. 4. Clean and inspect centering ball surface, seal, ball seats, spring and washer. If parts are worn or broken, replace with a service kit. 5. Remove centering ball as shown in Fig. 17, using components of tool C-4365 or equivalent. Install components as shown, and draw ball off ball stud. Assembly Fig. 12 Alignment Punch Marks Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Constant Velocity Type > Page 2662 Fig. 18 Inserting cross into yoke Fig. 19 Aligning Bearing Cups & Journals Ball Socket & Constant Velocity Joint During assembly, make sure that marks made during disassembly, Fig. 12, are aligned to maintain balance. 1. To install centering ball onto stud, use tool C-4365 or equivalent, and drive ball until it can be seen that ball has seated firmly against shoulder at base of stud. 2. To install cross assembly, install one bearing cup part way into one side of yoke and turn this yoke to the bottom. Insert cross into yoke so that the trunnion seats into bearing, Fig. 18. Install opposite bearing cup part way, Fig. 19. Make sure that both cross journals are started straight into both bearing cups. 3. Press bearing cups, while moving cross to ensure free movement of trunnions in bearing. If any binding is felt, stop pressing and check needle bearings to make sure that needle bearings have not been trapped under the ends of the cross journals. 4. As soon as one of the retaining ring grooves clears the inside of yoke, stop pressing and install retaining ring. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Constant Velocity Type > Page 2663 Fig. 20 Relieving Binding Condition At Point A Fig. 21 Relieving Binding Condition At Point B Fig. 22 Relieving Binding Condition At Point C 5. Continue to press until opposite retaining ring can be snapped into place. If difficulty is encountered, strike the yoke firmly in locations shown in Figs. 20, 21 and 22, to spring the yoke ears slightly. 6. Lubricate center ball and socket, and assemble other half universal joint, if disassembled. Lubrication Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Constant Velocity Type > Page 2664 Fig. 23 Lubrication fitting adapter Fig. 24 Lubrication fitting adapter & fitting location Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Constant Velocity Type > Page 2665 Fig. 25 Lubrication Fitting Locations Lubrication of the constant velocity joints should not be overlooked during the regular service intervals recommended by the manufacturer. During lubrication, use only the type of lubricant recommended by the manufacturer. This lubricant is usually lithium type chassis grease. Lubrication fitting adapters and locations of the lubrication fittings are shown in Figs. 23, 24 and 25. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Constant Velocity Type > Page 2666 Universal Joint: Service and Repair Service Notes Fig. 1 Production Type Universal Joints Which Use Nylon Injection Rings In Place Of Snap Rings Fig. 2 Service Type Universal Joints (Internal Snap Ring Type) SERVICE NOTES -- Before disassembling any universal joint, examine the assembly carefully and note the position of the grease fitting (if used). Also, be sure to mark the yokes with relation to the propeller shaft so they may be reassembled in the same relative position. Failure to observe these precautions may produce rough vehicle operation which results in rapid wear and failure of parts, and place an unbalanced load on transmission, engine and rear axle. When universal joints are disassembled for lubrication or inspection, and the old parts are to be reinstalled, special care must be exercised to avoid damage to universal joint spider or cross and bearing cups. Some driveshafts use an injected nylon retainer on the universal joint bearings. When service is necessary, pressing the bearings out will sheer the nylon retainer, Fig. 1. Replacement with the conventional steel snap ring type is then necessary, Fig. 2. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Constant Velocity Type > Page 2667 Universal Joint: Service and Repair Cross & Roller Type Fig. 3 Cross & Roller Type Universal Joints Fig. 4 Cross & roller type universal joints & propeller shaft Figs. 3 and 4 illustrate typical examples of universal joints of this type. They all operate on the same principle and similar service and replacement procedures may be applied to all. Fig. 5 Removing Bearing Cups From Yoke Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Constant Velocity Type > Page 2668 SERVICING WITHOUT UNIVERSAL JOINT REPLACEMENT TOOL Disassembly 1. Remove snap rings (or retainer plates) that retain bearings in yoke and driveshaft. 2. Place U-joint in a vise. 3. Select a wrench socket with an outside diameter slightly smaller than the U-joint bearings. Select another wrench socket with an inside diameter slightly larger than the U-joint bearings. 4. Place the sockets at opposite bearings in the yoke so that the smaller socket becomes a bearing pusher and the larger socket becomes a bearing receiver when the vise jaws come together, Fig. 5. Close vise jaws until both bearings are free of yoke and remove bearings from the cross or spider. 5. If bearings will not come all the way out, close vise until bearing in receiver socket protrudes from yoke as much as possible without using excessive force. Then remove from vise and place that portion of bearing which protrudes from yoke between vise jaws. Tighten vise to hold bearing and drive yoke off with a soft hammer. 6. To remove opposite bearing from yoke, replace in vise with pusher socket on exposed cross journal with receiver socket over bearing cup. Then tighten vise jaws to press bearing back through yoke into receiving socket. 7. Remove yoke from driveshaft and again place protruding portion of bearing between vise jaws. Then tighten vise to hold bearing while driving yoke off bearing with soft hammer. 8. Turn spider or cross 1/4 turn and use the same procedure to press bearings out of driveshaft. Fig. 6 Installing Bearing Cups Into Driveshaft Yoke Assembly 1. If old parts are to be reassembled, pack bearing cups with universal joint grease. Do not fill cups completely or use excessive amounts as over-lubrication may damage seals during reassembly. Use new seals. 2. If new parts are being installed, check new bearings for adequate grease before assembling. 3. With the pusher (smaller) socket, press one bearing part way into driveshaft. Position spider into the partially installed bearing. Place second bearing into driveshaft. Fasten driveshaft in vise so that bearings are in contact with faces of vise jaws, Fig. 6. Some spiders are provided with locating lugs which must face toward driveshaft when installed. 4. Press bearings all the way into position and install snap rings or retainer plates. 5. Install bearings in yoke in same manner. When installation is completed, check U-joint for binding or roughness. If free movement is impeded, correct the condition before installation in vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Constant Velocity Type > Page 2669 Fig. 7 Removing Bearing Cups Using Tool & Adapter Fig. 8 Removing bearing cap by holding cap in vise & striking center yoke with hammer SERVICING WITH UNIVERSAL JOINT REPLACEMENT TOOL Disassembly 1. Place driveshaft in a vise using care to avoid damaging it. 2. Remove bearing retaining snap rings. Some universal joints use injected nylon retainers in place of snap rings. During servicing, the snap rings supplied with the replacement universal joint assembly must be used. 3. Position tool on shaft and press bearing out of yoke, Fig. 7. If bearing cannot be pressed all the way out, remove it using vise grips or channel lock pliers or position driveshaft as shown and strike center yoke with hammer, Fig. 8. Mark yoke and shaft to make sure they will be reassembled in their same relative positions. 4. Reposition tool so that it presses on the spider in order to press other bearing from opposite side of flange. 5. If used, remove flange from spider. Assembly 1. Start new bearing into yoke, then position spider into yoke and press bearing until it is 1/4 inch below surface. 2. Remove tool and install a new snap ring. 3. Start new bearing in opposite side of yoke, then install tool and press on bearing until opposite bearing contacts snap ring. 4. Remove tool and install remaining snap ring. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Constant Velocity Type > Page 2670 Universal Joint: Service and Repair Double Cardan Type Fig. 9 Double cardan universal joint exploded view The double cardan type joint, Fig. 9, incorporates two universal joints, a centering socket yoke, and center yoke at one end of the shaft. A single universal joint is used at the other end. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove all bearing cap retainers. 2. Mark bearing caps, spiders, propeller shaft yoke, link yoke and socket yoke for assembly alignment reference, Fig. 9. 3. Remove bearing caps attaching from spider to propeller shaft yoke as follows: a. Use a 5/8 inch socket to drive the bearing cap and a 1-1/16 inch socket to receive the opposite bearing cap as it is driven out. b. Place 5/8 inch socket on one bearing cap and 1-1/16 inch socket on opposite bearing. c. Position assembly in vise so vise jaws bear directly against sockets. d. Tighten vise to press first bearing cap out of link yoke. e. Loosen vise, reposition sockets and press opposite bearing cap out of link yoke. 4. Disengage propeller shaft yoke from link yoke. 5. Remove bearing caps attaching front spider to propeller shaft as described in step 3 above. 6. Remove front spider from yoke. 7. Remove bearing caps attaching rear spider to link yoke as outlined in step 3 above and remove spider and socket yoke from link yoke. 8. Clean all parts in solvent and wipe dry. Inspect assembly for damage or wear. If any component is worn or damaged, the entire assembly must be replaced. ASSEMBLY When assembling universal joint, make sure to align spiders and yokes according to marks made during disassembly. 1. Lubricate all bearings and contact surfaces with lithium base chassis grease. 2. Install bearing caps on yoke ends of rear spider and secure caps with tape, Fig. 9. 3. Assemble socket yoke and rear spider. 4. Position rear spider in link yoke and install bearing caps. Press caps into yoke using 5/8 inch socket until bearing cap retainer grooves are exposed. 5. Install rear spider-to-link yoke bearing cap retainers. 6. Position front spider in propeller shaft yoke and install bearing caps. Press caps into yoke using a 5/8 inch socket until bearing cap retainer grooves are exposed. 7. Install front spider-to-propeller shaft yoke bearing cap retainers. 8. Install thrust washer and socket spring in ball socket bearing bore, if removed. 9. Install thrust washer on ball socket bearing boss (located on propeller shaft yoke), if removed. 10. Align ball socket bearing boss on propeller shaft yoke with ball socket bearing bore and insert boss into bore. 11. Align front spider with link yoke bearing cap bores and install bearing caps. Press caps into yoke using a 5/8 inch socket until bearing cap retainer grooves are exposed. 12. Install front spider-to-link yoke bearing cap retainers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications Flywheel: Specifications Flywheel to Crankshaft Bolts 60 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Maintenance Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Number: 90-406-7A Section: 7A Date: March 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 067107 Subject: AVAILABILITY/SERVICING OF NEW TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL INDICATOR Model and Year: 1982-90 C/K TRUCKS, 1987-90 R/V TRUCKS, 1983-90 G VANS WITH 3L80 OR 4L60 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION A new transmission fluid level indicator featuring a seal at the transmission fill tube inlet end is available. This indicator, which is installed on all 1991 C/K, R/V and G models, may be installed on previous models listed below. SERVICE PROCEDURE: When installing a new transmission fluid level indicator, replacement of the transmission fluid fill tube is not necessary. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION Part Number Model Description 15659455 1982-90 C/K All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15659455 1987-90 RN All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15677051 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 4L60 level indicator 15677052 1987-90 G2 (6.2C) & 4L60 Transmission fluid 1983-86 G All & 4L60 level indicator 15677055 1987-90 G3 (6.2J) & 3L80 Transmission fluid 1987-88 G3 (5.7M) & 3L80 level indicator 1984-86 G All & 3L80 1983 G3 & 3L80 15677056 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 3L80 level indicator 15677057 1988-90 G3 (7.4N) & 3L80 Transmission fluid level indicator Parts are currently available from GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION For vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation: K6130 Use applicable Labor Time Guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Case: Specifications Case attaching screws ........................................................................................................................ .................................................................. 30-36 ft lbs Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Counter Gear, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Counter Gear: Specifications Countergear End Play Check Attach dial indicator, check end play. If end play is greater than 0.025 in. new selective thrust washers must be installed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Countershaft: Specifications Countershaft nut .................................................................................................................................. .................................................................... 80 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Extension Housing, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Saginaw 3 Speed Extension Housing: Specifications Saginaw 3 Speed Extension housing to case bolts .......................................................................................................... ...................................................................... 45 ft.lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Extension Housing, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Saginaw 3 Speed > Page 2694 Extension Housing: Specifications Isuzu M-150 (77.5 mm) 4-Speed Extension housing bolts ....................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 30 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Extension Housing, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Saginaw 3 Speed > Page 2695 Extension Housing: Specifications Warner 83 mm 4 Speed Extension housing long bolts ............................................................................................................... ................................................................... 40 ft. lbs. Extension housing short bolts .......................... ........................................................................................................................................................ 25 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Extension Housing, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Saginaw 3 Speed > Page 2696 Extension Housing: Specifications Warner T-4C 4 Speed Extension housing retaining bolts ........................................................................................................ ................................................................... 25 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Extension Housing, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Saginaw 3 Speed > Page 2697 Extension Housing: Specifications Saginaw 3 Speed Extension housing to case bolts .......................................................................................................... ...................................................................... 45 ft.lbs. Isuzu M-150 (77.5 mm) 4-Speed Extension housing bolts ....................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 30 ft. lbs. Warner 83 mm 4 Speed Extension housing long bolts ............................................................................................................... ................................................................... 40 ft. lbs. Extension housing short bolts .......................... ........................................................................................................................................................ 25 ft. lbs. Warner T-4C 4 Speed Extension housing retaining bolts ........................................................................................................ ................................................................... 25 ft. lbs. Warner T-5 (77MM) 5 Speed Adapter housing retaining bolts ........................................................................................................... ................................................................... 25 ft. lbs. Tremec 3 Speed Extension housing attaching cap screws .............................................................................................................................................................. 42-50 ft lbs Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels 85-54 6 (VI) MAR., 1985 Subject: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE OIL LEVELS Model and Year:ALL PASSENGER AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and replaces Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 83-I-57 which should be destroyed. The following chart provides a guide for minimum acceptable oil levels "as received" from the factory. Only those components which have levels less than indicated below should have additional oil installed. Engine - Full mark to 6 mm (.24 in.) below full mark. Transmission a) Automatic - With engine idling, transmission selector in "Park", vehicle on a level surface and oil temperature between 10 to 38~C the oil level on the following transmissions should be as indicated: 440-T4 Transmission: Oil level should be in middle of cross-hatch area. 125/125C Transmission: Oil level should be slightly above full level. All other Transmissions: Oil level should be slightly below add level. If oil level gauge has dimples below add mark, oil level should be between these two dimples. b) Manual 1) Lower edge of inspection plug hole on rear wheel drive vehicles. 2) Between cold level range dimples or at cold level mark on front wheel drive vehicles. Differential - Lower edge of inspection plug hole to 9.5 mm (.37 in.) below lower edge of inspection plug hole. Transfer Case - Lower edge of inspection plug hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Tremec 3 Speed Fluid capacities .................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 3.5 Pts Saginaw 3 Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 3.0 Pts Saginaw (76 mm) 4 Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 3.2 Pts Warner 83 mm 4 Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................. 3.0 Warner T-4C 4 Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 4.0 Pts Warner T-5 (77MM) 5 Speed Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................... 5.0 Pts. Muncie 3 Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 3.0 Pts Muncie CH & SM-465 4 Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 8.2 Pts Muncie 4 (117MM) Speed Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................... 8.2 Pts. Isuzu M-150 (77.5 mm) 4-Speed Fluid Capacities ................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 4.2 Pts Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2704 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Tremec 3 Speed Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 80W Gear Oil Saginaw 3 Speed Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 80W Gear Oil Saginaw (76 mm) 4 Speed Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ...................................................... 80W-90 Gear Oil Warner 83 mm 4 Speed Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 80W Gear Oil Warner T-4C 4 Speed Fluid Types .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Dextron II ATF Muncie 3 Speed Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 80W Gear Oil Muncie CH & SM-465 4 Speed Fluid Types .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 80W-90 Gear Oil Muncie 4 (117MM) Speed Lubricant Type ..................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 80W-90 Gear Oil Isuzu M-150 (77.5 mm) 4-Speed Fluid Types .......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Dextron II ATF Warner T-5 (77MM) 5 Speed Lubricant Type ..................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... Dextron II ATF Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Warner T-4C 4 Speed Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing: Specifications Warner T-4C 4 Speed Front bearing cap attaching bolts ........................................................................................................ .................................................................... 15 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Warner T-4C 4 Speed > Page 2709 Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing: Specifications Saginaw 3 Speed Main drive gear bearing ....................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 15 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Warner T-4C 4 Speed > Page 2710 Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing: Specifications Warner T-5 (77MM) 5 Speed Front bearing cap retaining bolts ......................................................................................................... .................................................................... 15 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Isuzu M-150 (77.5 mm) 4-Speed Mainshaft: Specifications Isuzu M-150 (77.5 mm) 4-Speed Reverse gear to mainshaft nut ............................................................................................................ ..................................................................... 95 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Isuzu M-150 (77.5 mm) 4-Speed > Page 2715 Mainshaft: Specifications Warner 83 mm 4 Speed Main drive gear bearing retainer bolts ................................................................................................. ................................................................... 18 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Specifications > Isuzu M-150 (77.5 mm) 4-Speed Reverse Idler Gear: Specifications Isuzu M-150 (77.5 mm) 4-Speed Reverse gear to mainshaft nut ............................................................................................................ ..................................................................... 95 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Specifications > Isuzu M-150 (77.5 mm) 4-Speed > Page 2720 Reverse Idler Gear: Specifications Warner T-4C 4 Speed Reverse idler gear and reverse lever on pivot bolt .................................................................................................................................................. 20 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Three Speed Shift Linkage Adjust Shift Linkage: Adjustments Three Speed Shift Linkage Adjust Fig. 6 Three speed column shift linkage adjustment.C, K, R & V models Fig. 7 Three speed column shift linkage adjustment. G & P models SERIES 10---30/1500---3500 Column Shift 1. Position transmission lever B (C, K, R and V models) or C (G and P models) clockwise to forward detent, Figs. 6 and 7, then turn ignition switch to ``LOCK.'' 2. Remove column lash by rotating lever J (C, K, R and V models) or L (G and P models) downward and tightening bolt C (C, K, R and V models) or M (G and P models). 3. Turn ignition switch to ``UNLOCK,'' then position transmission levers in Neutral. To position levers in Neutral, move levers B and E (C, K, R and V models) or B and C (G and P models) to forward detent, then turn counterclockwise one detent, Figs. 6 and 7. 4. Align gage pin holes in levers H, J and K (C, K, R and V models) or G, H, and L (G and P models), then insert gage pin. 5. Repeat Step 2 for rod F (C, K, R and V models) or E (G and P models) and levers E and H (C, K, R and V models) or B and G (G and P) models). 6. Remove gage pin. 7. Place column lever in Reverse and check interlock control. Ignition should lock only when in Reverse. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Three Speed Shift Linkage Adjust > Page 2725 Shift Linkage: Adjustments Four Speed Shift Linkage Adjust Fig. 9 Four speed shift linkage adjustment. Series 10---30/1500---3500 SERIES 10---30/1500---3500 Transmission and shifter levers must be in Neutral position at time of rod assembly. A .250 inch gage pin must fit freely into gage pin hole when shifter levers are positioned as outlined above, Fig. 9. Some 1982---83 C, K and P models equipped with V8-379 diesel engine and four speed 117 mm transmission may exhibit hard shifting, bearing or gear noise, or improper clutch operation. The above mentioned complaints may be caused by the transmission top cover protruding beyond the front face of the transmission, resulting in transmission to engine misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits any of the complaints noted, proceed as follows: 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Using a .005 inch feeler gauge or shim, check for gaps between transmission and clutch housing. 3. If a gap or separation is noted, check for interference between top cover and clutch housing. If interference exists, proceed to next step. 4. Loosen, but do not remove, transmission to clutch housing attaching bolts. 5. Remove transmission top cover, then grind excess material from forward side of cover until proper transmission to clutch housing clearance is obtained. Remove burrs from ground edges. 6. Wash cover with suitable solvent, then torque transmission to clutch housing attaching bolts to 100 ft. lbs. 7. Install reworked top cover, using a new gasket. 8. Torque top cover attaching bolts to 20 ft. lbs., then lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Mount: Specifications Center support screws ......................................................................................................................... .................................................................... 15 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description A pressure sensitive switch is screwed through the rear face of the valve body assembly into the direct clutch oil passage. This switch is closed (grounded) in all but direct drive and reverse, since there is no oil pressure in this passage in Neutral, First or Second gear. The pressure switch is connected by a wire to a transmission connector and hence through an engine solenoid valve to the distributor and engine thermoswitch. When this circuit is grounded (switch closed), spark advance is retarded. When the transmission shifts to high gear (or reverse), oil pressure in the direct clutch passage will open the switch and circuit so that the transmission will no longer affect the vacuum advance of the distributor. Line Pressure Regulator Regulates line pressure according to pump speed and engine torque. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Electronic Speed Sensor Retainer Bolt ............................................................................................... ...................................................................... 7 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Updated Minimum Acceptable Oil Levels 85-54 6 (VI) MAR., 1985 Subject: MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE OIL LEVELS Model and Year:ALL PASSENGER AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS This cancels and replaces Chevrolet Dealer Service Information Bulletin 83-I-57 which should be destroyed. The following chart provides a guide for minimum acceptable oil levels "as received" from the factory. Only those components which have levels less than indicated below should have additional oil installed. Engine - Full mark to 6 mm (.24 in.) below full mark. Transmission a) Automatic - With engine idling, transmission selector in "Park", vehicle on a level surface and oil temperature between 10 to 38~C the oil level on the following transmissions should be as indicated: 440-T4 Transmission: Oil level should be in middle of cross-hatch area. 125/125C Transmission: Oil level should be slightly above full level. All other Transmissions: Oil level should be slightly below add level. If oil level gauge has dimples below add mark, oil level should be between these two dimples. b) Manual 1) Lower edge of inspection plug hole on rear wheel drive vehicles. 2) Between cold level range dimples or at cold level mark on front wheel drive vehicles. Differential - Lower edge of inspection plug hole to 9.5 mm (.37 in.) below lower edge of inspection plug hole. Transfer Case - Lower edge of inspection plug hole. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Model 207 Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 4.6 Pts New Process Model 205 Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 5.0 Pts New Process Model 208 Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 5.0 Pts New Process Models 231 Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 2.5 Pts New Process Models 241 Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 4.6 Pts Leaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities Type...................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................AF CAPACITY, Refill: NP208................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ......4.8 Liters 10.0 Pints NP105............................................................................................................ .....................................................................................2.4‡ Liters 5.0‡ Pints ‡Fill to one inch of fill plug Unleaded Gasoline Canadian Models - Schedules & Capacities (4x4)..................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................AF CAPACITY, Refill: All models.......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....4.8 Liters 10.0 Pints Unleaded Gasoline Models - Schedules & Capacities (4x4)..................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................AF CAPACITY, Refill: All models.......................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....4.8 Liters 10.0 Pints Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2744 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Model 207 Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... Dextron II ATF New Process Model 205 Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... Dextron II ATF New Process Model 208 Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... Dextron II ATF New Process Models 231 & 241 Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... Dextron II ATF Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Shifter Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Model 207 Shifter Transfer Case: Specifications Model 207 Shift lever retaining nut ........................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 15-20 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Shifter Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Model 207 > Page 2749 Shifter Transfer Case: Specifications New Process Models 231 & 241 Shift Lever Nut ..................................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 20 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Shift Linkage, Transfer Case > Shift Cable, Transfer Case > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Fig. 1 Transfer case shift linkage.. New Process Model 205 NEW PROCESS MODEL 205 The control linkage for New Process Model 205 transfer cases is shown in Fig. 1. Inspect linkage system periodically for freedom of operation, proper engagement or loose attaching bolts. Adjust, clean and tighten as necessary. Fig. 2 Transfer case shift linkage adjustment. New Process Model 208 NEW PROCESS MODEL 208 1. Position transfer case shift lever in 4 Hi detent. 2. Push lower shifter lever forward to 4 Hi stop, then install rod swivel into shift lever hole. 3. Install .200 inch gage behind swivel as shown, Fig. 2. 4. With shifter against 4 Hi stop, tighten rod nut (A) until it contacts gage. 5. Remove gage, then push swivel rearward against nut (A) and tighten nut (B). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Upshift Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Upshift Solenoid 1-2 Shift Valve Controls the speed at which the 1-2 and 2-1 shifts occur. 2-3 Shift Valve Controls speeds at which 2-3 and 3-2 shifts occur. Stator Valve Used only on transmissions having the variable pitch stator, this valve shifts when line oil is exhausted at end of valve when stator control solenoid is energized. This exhausts oil from the variable pitch stator piston and changes from the low to the high angle. When the stator solenoid is not energized, converter oil is directed to the stator piston and low angle is obtained. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Upshift Solenoid > Page 2761 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Shift Solenoid DESCRIPTION The detent solenoid is activated by an electric switch at the carburetor. When the throttle is opened sufficiently to close this switch, the solenoid in the transmission is activated, causing a downshift at speeds below 70 mph. it lower speeds, downshifts will occur at lesser throttle openings without the use of the electric switch. 1-2 Detent Valve Senses regulated modulator pressure tending to hold 1-2 shift valve downshifted and provides an area for detent pressure for detent 2-1 shifts. Detent Valve Shifts when oil line is exhausted at end of valve when detent solenoid is energized. This directs detent oil to the 1-2 accumulator valve, 1-2 regulator and 2-3 modulator valves, 3-2 valve and the vacuum modulator valve. Detent Regulator Valve When the detent valve shifts, the detent regulator is free to allow drive oil to enter the detent passage and thus becomes regulated at 70 psi. Detent pressure will also flow into the mod lator passage which flows to the shift valves. Low gear oil moves the detent regulator open to drive oil, allowing drive oil to enter modulator and detent passages. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Maintenance Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Number: 90-406-7A Section: 7A Date: March 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 067107 Subject: AVAILABILITY/SERVICING OF NEW TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL INDICATOR Model and Year: 1982-90 C/K TRUCKS, 1987-90 R/V TRUCKS, 1983-90 G VANS WITH 3L80 OR 4L60 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION A new transmission fluid level indicator featuring a seal at the transmission fill tube inlet end is available. This indicator, which is installed on all 1991 C/K, R/V and G models, may be installed on previous models listed below. SERVICE PROCEDURE: When installing a new transmission fluid level indicator, replacement of the transmission fluid fill tube is not necessary. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION Part Number Model Description 15659455 1982-90 C/K All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15659455 1987-90 RN All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15677051 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 4L60 level indicator 15677052 1987-90 G2 (6.2C) & 4L60 Transmission fluid 1983-86 G All & 4L60 level indicator 15677055 1987-90 G3 (6.2J) & 3L80 Transmission fluid 1987-88 G3 (5.7M) & 3L80 level indicator 1984-86 G All & 3L80 1983 G3 & 3L80 15677056 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 3L80 level indicator 15677057 1988-90 G3 (7.4N) & 3L80 Transmission fluid level indicator Parts are currently available from GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION For vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation: K6130 Use applicable Labor Time Guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description A pressure sensitive switch is screwed through the rear face of the valve body assembly into the direct clutch oil passage. This switch is closed (grounded) in all but direct drive and reverse, since there is no oil pressure in this passage in Neutral, First or Second gear. The pressure switch is connected by a wire to a transmission connector and hence through an engine solenoid valve to the distributor and engine thermoswitch. When this circuit is grounded (switch closed), spark advance is retarded. When the transmission shifts to high gear (or reverse), oil pressure in the direct clutch passage will open the switch and circuit so that the transmission will no longer affect the vacuum advance of the distributor. Line Pressure Regulator Regulates line pressure according to pump speed and engine torque. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Electronic Speed Sensor Retainer Bolt ............................................................................................... ...................................................................... 7 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Anti-Lock Brake - Aftermarket Products Usage Precaution Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems: Technical Service Bulletins Anti-Lock Brake Aftermarket Products Usage Precaution Group Ref.: Brakes Bulletin No.: 435001 Date: February, 1994 INFORMATION SUBJECT: AFTERMARKET ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM PRODUCTS MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS The brake system is one of the most important features on any passenger vehicle. Several products which tap into the master cylinder and/or brake system and claim to improve brake system performance are being sold in the aftermarket. Some of these products imply performance similar to new vehicle anti-lock brake systems. However, contrary to their claims, add-on systems which deplete fluid from the master cylinder on brake apply may actually increase a vehicle's stopping distance. This may cause the vehicle to fail to comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 105. If this happens, the facility which altered the vehicle could be liable for rendering the brake system "inoperative". GM would like to remind each dealer of their legal obligation with regard to any actions which might take a vehicle out of compliance with FMVSS, and to stress the need to understand the operation of any aftermarket system offered to your customers. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2781 Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems: Description and Operation Fig. 1 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) system schematic The Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) system, Fig. 1, reduces the occurrence of rear wheel lockup during severe braking by regulating rear hydraulic line pressure. Pressure applied to the rear wheel brakes is regulated by a control valve assembly located under the master cylinder. The control valve consists of a dump valve which releases hydraulic pressure into an accumulator, and an isolation valve which holds rear brake pressure. Operation of the dump valve and isolation valve is controlled by an Electronic Control Unit (ECU) which is mounted next to the master cylinder. The ECU receives signals from the brake lamp switch and the transmission mounted speed sensor. Signals from the speed sensor are transmitted through a digital ratio adapter mounted on the instrument cluster, and the adapter is used to calibrate the system for the specific rear axle ratio and rear tires used on the vehicle. The ECU operates the control valves according to speed sensor and brake switch inputs, allowing maximum rear braking while preventing rear wheel lock-up. As pressure is applied to the brake pedal during severe brake application, the ECU will control the valves to perform one of three functions or a combination of all three. The ECU operates the valves to allow full hydraulic pressure to be applied to the rear the rear brakes, reduces pressure applied to the rear brakes by pulsing the dump valve, or increases pressure applied to the rear brakes by pulsing the isolation valve. The ECU is programmed to perform a self-diagnostic function, and it stores trouble codes which relate to sensed malfunctions in the RWAL system. The system is connected to the existing brake warning lamp. An indication of system operation and bulb check is performed through the warning lamp, and each time the ignition is switched on the lamp will remain on for approximately 2 seconds. System malfunctions are indicated by the brake warning lamp, and if the ECU senses a malfunction a trouble code is stored in its memory and the warning lamp will remain on whenever the ignition is on. The procedure for determining trouble codes is outlined under Diagnosis and Testing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions For information regarding diagnosis of all B, C, P, U, Manufacturer code descriptions and all other code descriptions - Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2784 Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures System diagnosis is performed by referring to the system schematic, Fig. 6, and following the Diagnostic Circuit Check Fig. 7. Malfunctions are indicated as trouble codes which are stored in the ECU memory, and following the Diagnostic Circuit Check will allow access to stored trouble codes. A diagnosis chart for each trouble code, Figs. 8 through 18, is used to determine the cause of the malfunction. READING TROUBLE CODES Trouble codes are accessed by connecting a jumper wire between terminals A and H of the underdash ALDL connector, Fig. 6, and observing the flashes of the brake warning lamp. Note the following when performing the Diagnostic Circuit Check to access trouble codes. 1. When the terminals are jumped, count the number of short flashes starting from the initial long flash and including the long flash in the count. 2. The count sequence will repeat as long as the ALDL connector terminals are jumped with the ignition on. 3. Sometimes the first count sequence will be short. However, subsequent counts will be accurate. 4. If more than one failure has occurred, only the first recognized failure code will be stored and flashed by the ECU. 5. After determining the stored failure code, perform steps indicated by the diagnostic circuit check and follow the indicated failure code chart. After performing all indicated repairs, road test vehicle to check system operation, then recheck system for stored trouble codes. Fig. 6 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System wiring schematic Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2785 Fig. 7 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System Diagnostic Circuit Check Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2786 Fig. 8 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System Codes 1, 11, & 12 diagnosis. ECU malfunction Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2787 Fig. 9 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System Code 2 diagnosis. Open isolation valve or ECU malfunction Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2788 Fig. 10 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System Code 3 diagnosis. Open dump valve or ECU malfunction Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2789 Fig. 11 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System Code 4 diagnosis. Grounded anti-lock valve switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2790 Fig. 12 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System Code 5 diagnosis. Excessive actuation of dump valve during anti-lock stop Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2791 Fig. 13 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System Code 6 diagnosis. Erratic speed signal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2792 Fig. 14 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System Code 7 diagnosis. Shorted isolation valve or faulty ECU Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2793 Fig. 15 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System Code 8 diagnosis. Shorted dump valve or faulty ECU Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2794 Fig. 16 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System Code 9 diagnosis. Open circuit to speed signal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2795 Fig. 17 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System Code 10 diagnosis. Brake lamp switch circuit malfunction Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions > Page 2796 Fig. 18 Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) Brake System Codes 13, 14 & 15 diagnosis. ECU malfunction Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 2797 Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems: Service and Repair ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU) Do not touch electrical connections and pins or allow them to come into contact with brake fluid. 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect electrical connectors from ECU. 3. Pry up tab at rear of ECU and remove unit toward front of vehicle. 4. Slide unit into bracket until tab locks into hole. 5. Inspect electrical connectors for brake fluid contamination, clean with alcohol as needed, then connect electrical connectors to ECU. Fig. 46 ECU & Control Valve Assembly Installation ISOLATION/DUMP VALVE ASSEMBLY 1. Disconnect brake lines from control valve, the plug lines and open fittings. 2. Remove bolts (25) securing control valve, Fig. 2, and support valve assembly. Do nor allow valve assembly to hang from wiring. 3. Disconnect electrical connectors and remove control valve assembly. 4. Reverse procedure to install, then bleed brakes as needed. SPEED SENSOR Speed sensor resistance should be 90---2000 ohms. The sensor is not serviceable, and should be replaced if defective. The speed sensor is located in the left rear of the transmission for 2 wheel drive models, or on the transfer case for 4 wheel drive models. On some models with 4 speed manual transmissions (RPO M20), it may be necessary to remove the transmission rear bearing retainer in order to replace the speed sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle, then disconnect electrical connector from speed sensor. 2. On 2 wheel drive models except models with M20 transmission, remove bolt securing speed sensor retainer. On models with M20 transmission and 4 wheel drive models, loosen sensor with suitable wrench. 3. Position suitable container under sensor, then remove sensor and O-ring. 4. Coat O-ring with transmission fluid, then install O-ring and speed sensor. 5. Torque retainer bolt to 8 ft. lbs. for models with automatic transmission or 9 ft. lbs. for models with manual transmission. On models with M20 transmission and 4 wheel drive models, torque sensor to 32 ft. lbs. SPEEDOMETER CALIBRATION The speedometer must be recalibrated to allow proper system operation whenever the rear axle ratio or rear tire size is changed. Calibration requires the use of a speedometer calibration service kit. When servicing the digital ratio adapter and calibrating the speedometer, do not touch the pins on the rear of the instrument cluster as immediate damage to the cluster will occur. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 2798 Fig. 3 Speedometer calibration service kit Fig. 4 Instrument cluster connections for speedometer calibration Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 2799 Fig. 5 Speedometer calibration chart 1. Remove instrument cluster assembly as outlined. 2. Plug connector from speedometer calibration service kit into rear of cluster, Figs. 3 and 4. 3. Momentarily touch connector leads across battery terminals noting the following: a. Service kit connector should be used a maximum of 10 times. b. It is not necessary to momentarily energize calibration system if speedometer has been previously calibrated. 4. Refer to the calibration chart Fig. 5, to determine which pins to remove from the calibration clip, Fig. 3, noting the following: a. The rectangular end of the clip is the top, and pins are numbered 1---8 from top to bottom. b. Remove proper pins by bending them back and forth with long nose pliers, taking care not to bend adjacent pins. 5. Insert calibration clip into rectangular slot in rear of cluster, Fig. 4, ensuring pins engage proper holes. 6. Reinstall cluster and check system operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Hydraulic System Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic System Bleeding Manual Bleeding 1. If vehicle is equipped with power brakes, remove vacuum reserve by applying brakes several times with engine off. 2. Fill master cylinder reservoirs with suitable brake fluid. Be sure to always keep master cylinder reservoirs at least half full during entire bleeding procedure. 3. If master cylinder is suspected to have air in the bore, it must be bled first, as follows: a. Disconnect forward brake pipe connection at master cylinder. b. Allow brake fluid to fill master cylinder bore until it begins to flow from forward pipe connector port. c. Connect and tighten forward brake pipe at master cylinder. d. Depress brake pedal slowly one time and hold, then loosen forward brake pipe connection at master cylinder to purge air from bore. Tighten connection, then release brake pedal slowly. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat sequence, including 15 second wait, until all air is purged from bore. e. Bleed rear bore of master cylinder as front bore was bled. 4. Bleed right rear brake as follows: a. Depress brake pedal slowly one time and hold. b. Loosen bleeder valve to purge air from brake, then tighten bleeder valve and slowly release pedal. c. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat sequence, including 15 second wait, until all air is purged. 5. Bleed left rear, right front, and left front brakes, in that order, using same method as for right rear brake. 6. Check brake operation and ensure pedal is firm. Also check master cylinder fluid level and add fluid as necessary. 7. Turn off brake warning light by applying moderate pressure to brake pedal several times. 8. Road test vehicle. Fig. 1 Installing Pressure Bleeder Adapter Pressure Bleeding 1. Loosen, then slightly retighten bleeder valves at all four wheels. Repair any broken, stripped or frozen valves at this time. 2. Using a diaphragm type pressure bleeder, install suitable bleeder adapter to master cylinder, Fig. 1. 3. Charge bleeder ball to 20-25 psi, then depress and hold valve stem on combination valve. 4. Connect pressure bleeder line to adapter. 5. Open line valve on pressure bleeder, then depress bleed-off valve on adapter until a small amount of brake fluid is released. 6. Raise and support vehicle. 7. Bleed right rear, left rear, right front and left front brakes, in that order. 8. Place transparent tube over bleeder valve, then allow tube to hang down into transparent container. Ensure end of tube is submerged in clean brake fluid. 9. Open bleeder valve 1/2 to 3/4 turn and allow fluid to flow into container until all air is purged from line. Flushing Hydraulic System If brake fluid is old, rusty or contaminated, or whenever new parts are installed in the hydraulic system, the system must be flushed. Bleed brakes, allowing at least one quart of clean brake fluid to pass through system. Any rubber parts in hydraulic system which were exposed to contaminated fluid must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Hydraulic System Bleeding > Page 2804 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bleeding THIS PROCEDURE CAN BE PERFORMED WITH MASTER CYLINDER ON OR OFF VEHICLE. 1. Disconnect brake lines at master cylinder, if necessary. 2. Connect suitable lengths of brake lines to master cylinder and immerse other ends of lines in master cylinder reservoirs. 3. Apply master cylinder pushrod or brake pedal with full strokes until air bubbles have disappeared in reservoirs. It may require 20-30 applications to fully eliminate air bubbles. 4. Remove bleeding lines from master cylinder, then install master cylinder on vehicle, if necessary, and connect brake lines. 5. Fill the reservoir. Normal bleeding procedures should be followed after the master cylinder is installed. For additional information see Bench Bleeding Notes. See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Fundamentals and Basics Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2805 Brake Bleeding: Fundamentals and Basics BENCH BLEEDING Why A master-cylinder will develop little or no pressure if air is trapped in cylinder bore. Normal brake bleeding will not remove air trapped within the master-cylinder. How Clamp the master-cylinder securely in a vice. It is usually best to clamp the side of the vice onto the flat surface that is used to secure the master-cylinder to the brake booster. There are two basic methods for bleeding master-cylinder, one utilizes stroking the master-cylinder to expel air from the cylinder bore while the other utilizes a large syringe to backflush fluid from the outlet ports to the reservoir. Stroking Fill the master-cylinder with clean brake fluid. - The brake line fittings on the master-cylinder should be capped or plugged. NOTE: Special "bench bleeding" plastic fittings are available which allow for recirculating the brake fluid back into the reservoir. - Using a dull object, slowly stroke the master-cylinder piston, air and brake fluid will be expelled from the brake line fittings. Prior to releasing the piston plug or cap the outlet ports. - Repeat this procedure 8-10 times or until no air is emitted from the outlet ports. - When finished, cap the outlet ports and install the master-cylinder. Syringe Fill the syringe (one especially designed for brake bleeding) with clean brake fluid. - Insert the end of the syringe into one of the outlet ports on the master-cylinder. - Slowly compress the syringe and back flush the brake fluid through the master-cylinder. - A combination of air and brake fluid will be emitted from the inlet port in the fluid reservoir. - Repeat this procedure until only brake fluid is emitted into the reservoir. Cap the outlet ports and install the master-cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Manual Clarified, Caliper To Knuckle Clearance Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Manual Clarified, Caliper To Knuckle Clearance 85-38 5 (V) FEB., 1985 Subject: BRAKE CALIPERS TO KNUCKLE CLEARANCE Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The front caliper to knuckle clearance given in the service manuals may be misinterpreted. The indicator clearance of 0.13 - 0.30 mm (0.005 - 0.012 in.) represents an ideal condition where the caliper is centered in the knuckle opening. In actual practice, braking action moves the caliper against the knuckle which may result in little or no clearance on one end of the caliper/knuckle assembly. The clearance at each end of the caliper should be measured individually and added together to determine the total caliper to knuckle clearance. The total clearance should be 0.26 0.60 mm (0.010 - 0.024 in.). Reference Section 5 of the Shop Manual. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Bendix Single Piston Sliding Caliper Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Bendix Single Piston Sliding Caliper Fig. 1 Disc brake assembly The Bendix single piston sliding caliper disc brake is standard equipment on some truck applications, while on other trucks it is used only in Hydro-Boost power brake applications with both front disc brakes and 4 wheel disc brakes. On 4 wheel disc brakes, the front and rear systems are identical. The sliding caliper attaches to and slides on the steering knuckle. The caliper assembly is held in place with a support key and spring Fig. 1. A screw prevents the key from sliding on the steering knuckle. The linings are riveted to the brake pads. The inboard and outboard brake pads are not interchangeable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Bendix Single Piston Sliding Caliper > Page 2813 Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Delco-Moraine Single Piston Caliper Fig. 1 Exploded View The Delco-Moraine Single Piston Caliper is held in place by two mounting bolts. The caliper assembly, Fig. 1, slides on its mounting surfaces. Upon brake application, hydraulic pressure against the piston forces the inboard pad against the inboard side of the disc. This action causes the caliper assembly to slide until the outboard pad comes into contact with the disc, which in turn creates a slowing or stopping action. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2814 Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Should it become necessary to remove the caliper for installation of new parts, clean all parts in denatured alcohol or brake parts cleaner, wipe dry using lint-free cloths. Using compressed air, blow out drilled passages and bores. Check dust boots for punctures or tears. If punctures or tears are evident, new boots should be installed upon reassembly. Inspect piston bores in both housings for scoring or pitting. Bores that show light scratches or corrosion can usually be cleaned with crocus cloth. However, bores that have deep scratches or scoring may be honed, provided the diameter of the bore is not increased more than 0.05 mm (0.002 inch). If the bore does not clean up within this specification, a new caliper housing should be installed (black stains on the bore walls are caused by piston seals and will do no harm). When using a hone, be sure to install the hone baffle before honing bore. The baffle is used to protect the hone stones from damage. Use extreme care in cleaning the caliper after honing. Remove all dust and grit by flushing the caliper with denatured alcohol or brake parts cleaner. Wipe dry with clean lint-free cloth and then clean a second time in the same manner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Identifying Caliper Types Fig. 6 Exploded View BENDIX SINGLE PISTON SLIDING CALIPER Type 1 Exploded View DELCO-MORAINE SINGLE PISTON CALIPER Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2817 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Bendix Single Piston Sliding Caliper Removal For additional information see Removal Notes. See: Fundamentals and Basics Fig. 2 Bottoming position in bore 1. Siphon two-thirds of brake fluid from master cylinder reservoir serving front disc brakes. 2. Raise vehicle, support on jack stands and remove front wheels. 3. Bottom the caliper piston in bore. Insert a screwdriver between inboard pad and piston, then pry piston back into bore. The piston can also be bottomed in the bore with a large C-clamp, Fig. 2. Fig. 3 Removing caliper support key 4. Remove support key retaining screw. 5. Drive caliper support key and spring from steering knuckle with a suitable drift and hammer, Fig. 3. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2818 Removing Caliper From Disc 6. Lift caliper from anchor plate and off rotor, Fig. 4. Hang caliper from coil spring with wire. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 7. Remove inboard brake pad from steering knuckle, then the anti-rattle spring from the brake pad. 8. Remove outboard brake pad from caliper. It may be necessary to loosen the brake pad with a hammer to permit pad removal. Rebuild Fig. 6 Exploded View DISASSEMBLY 1. Drain brake fluid from caliper. Fig. 5 Removing caliper piston 2. Position caliper with shop cloths, Fig. 5, and apply compressed air to fluid inlet port to ease piston from bore. Do not attempt to catch piston or to protect it when applying compressed air, since personal injury is possible. 3. Remove boot from piston, then the piston seal from bore, Fig. 6. Use wooden or plastic tool to remove piston seal since metal tools may damage piston. 4. Remove bleeder screw. ASSEMBLY NOTICE: Clean all parts in denatured alcohol or brake parts cleaner before assembly and dry them with dry compressed air 1. Coat square cut piston seal with clean brake fluid, then install seal into piston bore. Work seal into groove with clean fingers. 2. Install and torque bleeder screw to 100 inch lbs. Fig. 7 Installing Caliper Piston Boot 3. Lubricate boot and tool J-24548 with clean brake fluid, then place dust seal on tool, allowing 1/4 inch of tool to extend past small lip of boot, Fig. 7. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2819 4. Place dust seal and tool over piston bore, then work large lip of boot into seal groove, Fig. 8. Ensure dust seal is fully seated. Fig. 8 Installing piston in caliper 5. Lubricate caliper piston and insert through tool. Center piston in bore and use a hammer handle to apply pressure to install piston halfway into bore, Fig. 8. 6. Remove tool J-24548 and seat small lip of boot in caliper piston groove, then bottom piston in bore. Installation For additional information see Installation Notes. See: Fundamentals and Basics Fig. 6 Exploded View 1. Clean and lubricate sliding surfaces of caliper and the anchor plate with Delco Silicone Lube, P/N 5459912, or equivalent. 2. Install inboard brake pad anti-rattle spring on brake pad rear flange, and ensure looped section of clip is facing away from rotor. 3. Install inboard brake pad in steering knuckle. 4. Install outboard brake pad in caliper. Ensure pad flange is seated fully into outboard arms of caliper. It may be necessary to use a C-clamp to seat the pad. 5. Place caliper assembly over rotor and position in steering knuckle. Ensure dust boot is not torn or improperly positioned by inboard brake pad during caliper installation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2820 Installing The Caliper Key Brake Caliper 6. Align caliper with steering knuckle abutment surfaces, then insert support key and spring between abutment surfaces at the trailing end of caliper and steering knuckle. With a hammer and brass drift, drive caliper support key and spring into position, then install and torque support key retaining screw to 16.2-24.3 Nm (12-18 ft lb). 7. Refill master cylinder to within one inch of rim. Press brake pedal several times to seat pads. 8. Install front wheels and lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2821 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Delco-Moraine Single Piston Caliper Removal For additional information see Removal Notes. See: Fundamentals and Basics 1. Siphon enough brake fluid out of the master cylinder to bring fluid level to 1/3 full to avoid fluid overflow when the caliper piston is pushed back into its bore. 2. Raise vehicle and remove front wheels. Fig. 2 Compressing piston & shoes with C-clamp 3. Using a C-clamp, push piston back into its bore. Fig. 3 Caliper & Mounting Bolts 4. Remove two mounting bolts and lift caliper away from disc. Hang caliper from coil spring with wire. CAUTION: Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. Rebuild Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2822 Fig. 1 Exploded View DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove caliper. 2. Disconnect hose from steel line, remove U-shaped retainer and withdraw hose from frame support bracket. 3. After cleaning outside of caliper, remove brake hose and discard copper gasket. 4. Drain brake fluid from caliper. Fig. 4 Removing Piston From Caliper 5. Pad caliper interior with clean shop towels and use compressed air to remove piston, Fig. 5. Use just enough air pressure to ease piston out of bore. Do not blow piston out of bore. WARNING: Do not place fingers in front of piston in an attempt to catch or protect it when applying compressed air. This could result in serious injury. Removing Dust Boot Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2823 6. Carefully pry dust boot out of bore. 7. Using a small piece of wood or plastic, remove piston seal from bore. CAUTION: Do not use a metal tool of any kind to remove seal as it may damage bore. 8. Remove bleeder screw. ASSEMBLY NOTICE: Clean all parts in denatured alcohol or brake parts cleaner before assembly and dry the parts with dry compressed air. 1. Inspect caliper bore for scoring, nicks, corrosion or wear. Replace caliper housing if bore will not clean up with crocus cloth. 2. Lubricate caliper piston bore and new piston seal with clean brake fluid. Position seal in bore groove. Fig. 6 Installing boot to piston 3. Lubricate piston with clean brake fluid and assemble a new boot into the groove in the piston so the fold faces the open end of the piston, Fig. 6. 4. Using care not to unseat the seal, insert piston into bore and force the piston to the bottom of the bore. Fig. 7 Installing boot to caliper 5. Position dust boot in caliper counterbore and install, Fig. 7. Check the boot installation to be sure the retaining ring molded into the boot is not bent and that the boot is installed below the caliper face and evenly all around. If the boot is not fully installed, dirt and moisture may enter the bore and cause corrosion. 6. Install the brake hose in the caliper using a new copper gasket. 7. Install pads and caliper assembly. Installation For additional information see Installation Notes. See: Fundamentals and Basics Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2824 Retracting Piston 1. Retract piston in caliper bore and position caliper over disc, lining up holes in caliper with holes in mounting bracket. If brake hose was not disconnected during removal, be sure not to kink it during installation. Caliper Mounting Bolts 2. Start mounting bolts through sleeves in inboard caliper ears and the mounting bracket, making sure ends of bolts pass under ears on inboard pad. NOTICE: If the caliper was removed for service, make sure it is installed on the correct knuckle. The caliper bleed screw should be positioned on top of caliper when assembled on vehicle. 3. Push mounting bolts through to engage holes in the outboard ears. Then thread mounting bolts into bracket. 4. Torque mounting bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft lb). Caliper Knuckle Clearances 5. Measure the clearance between the caliper and the steering knuckle. The clearance at each end of the caliper should be measured individually and Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2825 added together. this total should be between 0.26-0.60 mm (0.010-0.024 inch). 6. If brake hose was removed, reconnect it and bleed the brakes. 7. Install wheels and tires, lower vehicle and add brake fluid to master cylinder to bring level to 1/4 inch from top. WARNING: Before moving vehicle, pump brake pedal several times to be sure it is firm. Do not move vehicle until a firm pedal is obtained. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Removal Notes Brake Caliper: Fundamentals and Basics Removal Notes When Removing the Caliper, Remember... - Prior to removing the calipers, remove/siphon brake fluid from master-cylinder until the reservoir is only 1/3 full. - Brake fluid will remove paint and damage electrical connections. Use a drip pan and fender covers to protect the vehicle's finish and electrical system. - Always replace all brake linings on an axle. Never replace only one wheel. Unequal lining thickness between wheels on the same axle will result in a strong steering pull when the brakes are applied. - Work on one side at a time. If you forget how to reassemble the parts you can always use the other side as a model. - When forcing the piston back into the caliper, open the bleeder valve first. Corrosion and other deposits accumulate inside of the caliper. If the bleeder valve is not opened when the piston is forced back into the caliper, these deposits will be forced back through the brake lines and into the master-cylinder. When pushing the pistons back into the caliper with the bleeder screw open, a stream of brake fluid will be expelled from the bleeder screw for 2-3 feet. Use a drip pan and be careful not to "shoot" brake fluid onto the vehicle's finish. A cleaner method is to use a piece of clear plastic hose and a glass or plastic jar to catch the expelled fluid. - Upon removal, Do Not allow the calipers to hang by the flexible brake hoses. The brake hoses can be damaged easily by this practice. These hoses are double walled, damage to the interior pressure hose will not be visible. - Do not depress the brake pedal with either caliper removed from the rotor. The caliper pistons will be inadvertently expelled from the caliper. If this occurs rebuild or replace the caliper, do not attempt to insert the piston back into the caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Removal Notes > Page 2828 Brake Caliper: Fundamentals and Basics Installation Notes WHEN INSTALLING CALIPERS AND PADS, REMEMBER... - Clean and lubricate caliper slide joint/pins with high temperature silicone grease: Unlike drum brakes, disc brakes do not utilize a spring to withdraw the pads/linings when the brake pedal is released. Disc brakes rely on the elasticity of the piston seals, and the unrestricted movement of the caliper slide assemblies to release the brakes. If the slide joints/pins are not cleaned and lubricated properly the disc brake linings will drag upon the release of the brake pedal. This will result in overheated brakes and premature brake wear. Disc Brake Mechanical Force Diagram NOTE: Floating calipers require free and unrestricted movement on the caliper mounting. Floating or sliding calipers have pistons only on one side of the rotor. The first part of the piston's travel forces the inner pad against the rotor, then further travel forces the movable part of the caliper to pull the outer pad against the rotor. High temperature silicone lubricant must be used. Low temperature grease can melt and contaminate the pads and rotors, or can bake into a very hard substance which binds the slides. Petroleum based grease can cause the slide boots to soften and swell. Work on one side at a time. If you forget how to reassemble the parts you can always use the other side as a model. Anti-squeal Coating - Apply an anti-squeal coating to the back side of the pads/linings. This coatings acts as an insulator to dampen high frequency vibrations that are generated during normal braking. These compounds are highly effective in preventing brake squeal. - Many professional repair shops recommend always rebuilding or replacing the calipers when replacing the brake linings, because: When the pistons are forced back into the calipers, the piston seals are dragged across any corrosion or abrasives that may be deposited on the inside of the caliper. Damage to the seals may not be initially evident. As the new brake linings begin to wear, the piston is gradually withdrawn from the caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Removal Notes > Page 2829 This results in the piston seals again being dragged across the layer of corrosion and deposits. Calipers which are not rebuilt or replaced have a higher probability of sticking or leaking. - Check to ensure the bleeder screw is not frozen prior to reinstalling caliper. Freeing a stuck bleeder screw is much easier with the caliper removed from the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Pad: > 87T675 > Jul > 87 > Brake Pads - Front Brake Squeal Brake Pad: Customer Interest Brake Pads - Front Brake Squeal GMC NUMBER: 87-T-67 GROUP: 5 -Brakes DATE: July, 1987 CORPORATE NUMBER: 765003 SUBJECT: FRONT BRAKE SQUEAL MODELS: 1979-1987 LIGHT DUTY TRUCK MODELS Some 1979-1987 light duty truck models may experience a high pitched squeal coming from the front of the vehicle under light to moderate brake applications. Revised noise insulated brake pads (called SAS II) with an insulator permanently attached to the metal portion of the brake pads are now available to help reduce brake squeal. These brake pads are available for the light duty trucks listed below. OPTION PART MODEL CODE YEAR NUMBER M Van Manual Brakes JB1 1985-87 12321436 Power Brakes JB3 1985-87 12321435 S/T JB1, JM5, 1982-87 12321426 All JM7 R/V, G - 1,2 Under JB1 1983-87 12321434 8,000 GVW and Manual Brakes R/V - 1, 2 Under JB3, JD3 JB5, JD5 1984-87 12321435 8,000 GVW and Power JB6, JD6 Brakes G - 1,2 Under 8,600 JB3, JB5 JD5 1984-87 12321435 GVW and Power Brakes R/V - 2 8,600 GVW JB7, JD7 1979-87 12321437 and Power Brakes Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Pad: > 87T675 > Jul > 87 > Brake Pads - Front Brake Squeal Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brake Pads - Front Brake Squeal GMC NUMBER: 87-T-67 GROUP: 5 -Brakes DATE: July, 1987 CORPORATE NUMBER: 765003 SUBJECT: FRONT BRAKE SQUEAL MODELS: 1979-1987 LIGHT DUTY TRUCK MODELS Some 1979-1987 light duty truck models may experience a high pitched squeal coming from the front of the vehicle under light to moderate brake applications. Revised noise insulated brake pads (called SAS II) with an insulator permanently attached to the metal portion of the brake pads are now available to help reduce brake squeal. These brake pads are available for the light duty trucks listed below. OPTION PART MODEL CODE YEAR NUMBER M Van Manual Brakes JB1 1985-87 12321436 Power Brakes JB3 1985-87 12321435 S/T JB1, JM5, 1982-87 12321426 All JM7 R/V, G - 1,2 Under JB1 1983-87 12321434 8,000 GVW and Manual Brakes R/V - 1, 2 Under JB3, JD3 JB5, JD5 1984-87 12321435 8,000 GVW and Power JB6, JD6 Brakes G - 1,2 Under 8,600 JB3, JB5 JD5 1984-87 12321435 GVW and Power Brakes R/V - 2 8,600 GVW JB7, JD7 1979-87 12321437 and Power Brakes Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types Brake Pad: Service and Repair Identifying Caliper Types Fig. 6 Exploded View BENDIX SINGLE PISTON SLIDING CALIPER Type 1 Exploded View DELCO-MORAINE SINGLE PISTON CALIPER Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2845 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Bendix Single Piston Sliding Caliper Removal CAUTION: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake hose, however, use caution not to twist or kink hose. 1. Siphon two-thirds of brake fluid from master cylinder reservoir serving front disc brakes. 2. Raise vehicle, support on jack stands and remove front wheels. Fig. 2 Bottoming Position In Bore 3. Bottom the caliper piston in bore. Insert a screwdriver between inboard pad and piston, then pry piston back into bore. The piston can also be bottomed in the bore with a large C-clamp. 4. Remove support key retaining screw. Fig. 3 Removing Caliper Support Key 5. Drive caliper support key and spring from steering knuckle with a suitable drift and hammer. Fig. 4 Removing Or Installing Caliper 6. Lift caliper from anchor plate and off rotor. Hang caliper from coil spring with wire. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 7. Remove inboard pad from steering knuckle, then the anti-rattle spring from the pad. 8. Remove outboard pad from caliper. It may be necessary to loosen the pad with a hammer to permit removal. Installation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2846 Caliper And Brake Pads 1. Clean and lubricate sliding surfaces of caliper and the anchor plate with Delco Silicone Lube, P/N 5459912, or equivalent. 2. Install anti-rattle spring on inboard pad, and ensure looped section of clip is facing away from rotor. 3. Install inboard pad in steering knuckle. 4. Install outboard pad in caliper. Ensure pad is seated fully into outboard arms of caliper. It may be necessary to tap the ears and bottom tab with a hammer to seat the pad being careful not to hit the friction material. Fig. 4 Removing Or Installing Caliper 5. Place caliper assembly over rotor and position in steering knuckle. Ensure dust boot is not torn or improperly positioned by inboard pad during caliper installation. Installing The Caliper Key 6. Align caliper with steering knuckle abutment surfaces, then insert support key and spring between abutment surfaces at the trailing end of caliper and steering knuckle. With a hammer and brass drift, drive caliper support key and spring into position, then install and torque support key retaining screw to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft lb). 7. Refill master cylinder to within one inch of rim. Press brake pedal several times to seat pads. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2847 8. Install front wheels and lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2848 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Delco-Moraine Single Piston Caliper Removal Caliper Assembly 1. Remove caliper assembly. See Brake Caliper / Service and Repair. See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair 2. Remove inboard pad. Dislodge outboard pad and position caliper on the front suspension so the brake hose will not support the weight of the caliper. CAUTION: Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 3. Remove pad support spring from piston. 4. Remove two sleeves from inboard ears of the caliper. 5. Remove four rubber bushings from the grooves in each of the caliper ears. Installation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2849 Caliper Assembly 1. Lubricate new sleeves, rubber bushings, bushing grooves and mounting bolt ends with Delco Silicone Lube or equivalent. 2. Install new bushings and sleeves on caliper ears. Position the sleeve so that the end toward the pad is flush with the machined surface of the ear. 3. Install pad retaining spring on inner pad. 4. Position inner pad in caliper so spring ends centrally contact pad edge. Initially, this will place the pad on an angle. Push upper edge of pad down until pad is flat against caliper. When properly seated, spring ends will not extend past pad more than 2.4 mm (0.1 inch). 5. Position outer pad in caliper with pad ears over caliper ears and tab at bottom of pad engaged in caliper cutout. 6. Install caliper. See Brake Caliper / Service and Repair. See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair CAUTION: Make sure that the brake hose is not twisted or kinked since damage to the hose could result. Compressing The Pad Ears 7. Compress the pad ears to the caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2850 Caliper Knuckle Clearances 8. Measure the clearance between the caliper and the steering knuckle. The clearance at each end of the caliper should be measured individually and added together. this total should be between 0.26-0.60 mm (0.010-0.024 inch). 9. Install tire and wheel assembly. 10. Lower the vehicle. WARNING: Before moving vehicle, pump brake pedal several times to be sure it is firm. Do not move vehicle until a firm pedal is obtained. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 902935 > Jul > 90 > Brakes - Poor Rotor Finish/Hard Pedal Feel Brake Rotor/Disc: Customer Interest Brakes - Poor Rotor Finish/Hard Pedal Feel Number: 90-293-5 Section: 5 Date: July 1990 Corp. Bulletin No.: 005003 Subject: BRAKE ROTOR REFINISH Model and Year: 1981-90 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Comments have been received of poor brake rotor finish and/or hard brake pedal feel after refinishing brake rotors using the On-Vehicle Brake Lathe (VGB 320/366, Kent-Moore 38- 070400) sold through GM Dealer Equipment program. CAUSE: This condition results from using non-original cutting tips. Only original equipment replacement tips should be used. CORRECTION: When replacing the original cutting tips for an On-Vehicle Brake Lathe, use only replacement tips ordered from Kent-Moore Tool and Equipment Division. The replacement cutting tips can be ordered from Kent-Moore (1-800-GM-TOOLS) as follows: Part Number: J-37704-13 Cufting Tips (Box of Ten) We believe this source and their equipment to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such equipment. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from this firm or for any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 73-50-37 > Jan > 98 > Brakes - Rotor & Hub Flange Cleaning Tool Revision Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rotor & Hub Flange Cleaning Tool Revision File In Section: 5 - Brakes Bulletin No.: 73-50-37 Date: January, 1998 INFORMATION Subject: Revision to J 42450 Tool; Proper Brake Rotor and Hub Flange Surface Cleaning Models: 1998 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks - with Disc Brakes (Rotor and Hub Separate) This bulletin is being revised to update the following text. This bulletin is being issued to inform the dealer about a revision to tool J 42450 and reinforce the need for proper hub flange and brake rotor mating surface cleaning during service. Tool J 42450 is a cleaning pad arbor and pad system that fits over the wheel stud and cleans the portion of the hub surface that is very difficult to reach with normal rotary cleaning pads. Tool J 42450 is being revised to J 42450-A to improve the hook and loop material retention. Any dealer experiencing problems with tool J 42450 should contact Kent-Moore at 1-800-345-2233 for a revised arbor at no charge. Anytime the brake rotor has been separated from the hub bearing flange or if rotor machining is necessary, the rotor and hub should be marked to maintain the original position. Clean the hub flange of all dirt and foreign material using special tool J 42450 or J 42450-A. Clean both sides of the brake rotor hub using an aggressive (80 grit) abrasive sanding pad on a rotary disc. Properly cleaning the rotor surfaces before rotor machining or reassembly ensures that dirt and corrosion will not add lateral runout to the rotor. Proper cleaning of the hub flange will also minimize the stack-up of lateral runout. On reassembly, the rotor should be reinstalled aligning the marks made on disassembly. Always use a torque wrench or the appropriate Torque Socket found in J 39544-KIT on an impact wrench when installing the wheel and tire assembly. Torque all wheel nuts using the correct sequence and torque. Refer to the Tire and Wheel Sub-Section in the applicable Service Manual. Excessive torque or torque variation between wheel nuts may cause distortion of the hub and rotor mating surface. This distortion may cause lateral runout and lead to brake pulsation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 911335 > Dec > 90 > Brakes - Change In Brake Feel After Rotor Refinishing Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Change In Brake Feel After Rotor Refinishing Number: 91-133-5 5 Section: 5 Date: December 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 075003R Subject: CHANGE IN BRAKE EFFECTIVENESS AFTER DISC BRAKE ROTOR REFINISHING/PAD REPLACEMENT Model and Year: ALL PASSENGER CARS ALL LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 90-316-5, DATED AUGUST 1990. INFORMATION HAS BEEN ADDED REGARDING HUB AND ROTOR CLEANING, PROPER TORQUING TECHNIQUE, REVISED MACHINING TABLE, CHANGE SPECIFICATION FOR MAXIMUM SCORINGING DEPTH. THE 1991 MODEL YEAR WAS ALSO ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 90-316-5 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some comments have been received about a change in preceived braking effectiveness which occurs after rotors have been refinished and/or disc brake pads have been replaced. New lining materials have been formulated for increased lining life and to reduce brake squeal. Also, Federal regulations currently prohibit the use of asbestos in Original Equipment Manufactured (O.E.M.) front disc brake linings, and will totally ban asbestos from all O.E.M. brake linings in the near future. Due to these changes, initial rotor surface finish is more critical than in the past, and is required for good brake performance. Following are some recommended actions/procedures to assure proper performance of the brake systems on all vehicles after rotor and/or pad service has been performed: 1 . When performing routine brake maintenance such as replacing worn disc brake pads or shoes, DO NOT refinish disc brake rotors or drums unless: A. There is a brake pulsation condition present, and this pulsation is found to be caused by the brake rotors or drums, or B. The rotors and/or drums are excessively scored. Surface scoring that does not exceed 1.2 MM (0.050 in.) on rotors or drums should not affect brake operation. Before removing rotors from the hub assembly, mark the rotor and on wheel stud so that the rotor may be re-installed in the same position. If rotors are removed, it is very important that rust and scale be removed from the rotor and hub mating surfaces. Failure to do so may introduce excessive lateral runout when the rotor is mounted on the brake lathe, or when the rotor is re-installed to the hub. 2. When refinishing disc brake rotors, it is important that the brake lathe be in good operating condition and that all tools or bits are sharp. Recommended vibration dampeners and/or adaptors should be used and should be clean and free of nicks (remember, 1988-91 W models require the use of an adaptor, J37160, because of the two-piece design). The following table shows the recommended procedure for rotor machining: ROUGH CUT FINISH CUT Spindle Speed 150 RPM 150 RPM Depth of Cut (per side) 0.127 mm (0.005") 0.051 mm (0.002") Tool Cross Feed per Rev 0.152 mm - 0.254 mm 0.051 mm (0.002")Max (0.006" - 0.010") Vibration Damper Yes Yes Sand Rotors-Final Finish No Yes It is important that a rough and a finish cut be made. All brake lathes use a single-point cutting tool which is not capable of giving the necessary surface finish. A SECONDARY FINISHING OPERATION MUST BE PERFORMED TO OBTAIN THE NECESSARY SURFACE FINISH. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 911335 > Dec > 90 > Brakes - Change In Brake Feel After Rotor Refinishing > Page 2868 An acceptable finish can be obtained using the Ammco Model 8350 Safe Swirl Disc Rotor Grinder, or equivalent, using 120 grit sandpaper and sanding each rotor surface with moderate pressure for a minimum of 60 seconds with the rotor turning at 150 RPM. An alternate method is to use a sanding block with 150 grit sandpaper. With the rotor turning at approximately 150 RPM, sand each side for a minimum of 60 seconds using moderate pressure. After the rotor has been sanded, the surfaces must be cleaned with a solvent such as brake cleaning, denatured alcohol, or equivalent. THE FINISHED ROTOR SURFACE SHOULD BE AS CLOSE TO THAT OF A NEW ROTOR AS POSSIBLE. FAILURE TO OBTAIN THE BEST POSSIBLE ROTOR FINISH WILL AFFECT INITIAL BRAKING PERFORMANCE. CAUTION: ROTORS OR DRUMS SHOULD ALWAYS BE REPLACED IF TURNING WILL RESULT IN A ROTOR OR DRUM THAT DOES NOT MEET MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATIONS FOR MINIMUM ROTOR THICKNESS OR MAXIMUM DRUM DIAMETER. NOTICE: When re-installing tire and wheel assemblies, it is very important that proper procedures be followed when installing and torquing the wheel nuts: A. Finger start all wheel nuts. B. Tighten wheel nuts to specified torque (use the "star," or alternating nut pattern) using a torque wrench. DO NOT USE AN IMPACT WRENCH. UNEVEN AND/OR EXCESSIVE TORQUING OF THE WHEEL NUTS HAS BEEN FOUND TO DISTORT ROTORS, RESULTING IN PREMATURE CUSTOMER COMEBACKS FOR BRAKE PULSATION 3. After brake pads have been replaced and/or rotors have been refinished, it is recommended that the new braking surfaces be broken in, or burnished, to properly seat them. This can be accomplished by making 20 stops from 30 mph, using medium to firm pressure. Take care to avoid overheating the brakes. 4. It is strongly recommended that the correct, specified General Motors replacement part(s) be used when servicing G.M. vehicles. General Motors does not test non-G.M. parts for proper performance on G.M. vehicles. Therefore, the use of non-G.M. parts may result in unacceptable vehicle performance. It is also important that the correct G.M. part(s) be used in the correct G.M. application. For example, some "A" model disc brake pads ("A" Heavy) will fit on "C" and "H" models, but will not provide the same performance as the pads specified for use on C and H vehicles. It may seem preferable to stock fewer brake pad part numbers, but customer dissatisfaction may result if vehicle performance is affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 902935 > Jul > 90 > Brakes - Poor Rotor Finish/Hard Pedal Feel Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Poor Rotor Finish/Hard Pedal Feel Number: 90-293-5 Section: 5 Date: July 1990 Corp. Bulletin No.: 005003 Subject: BRAKE ROTOR REFINISH Model and Year: 1981-90 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Comments have been received of poor brake rotor finish and/or hard brake pedal feel after refinishing brake rotors using the On-Vehicle Brake Lathe (VGB 320/366, Kent-Moore 38- 070400) sold through GM Dealer Equipment program. CAUSE: This condition results from using non-original cutting tips. Only original equipment replacement tips should be used. CORRECTION: When replacing the original cutting tips for an On-Vehicle Brake Lathe, use only replacement tips ordered from Kent-Moore Tool and Equipment Division. The replacement cutting tips can be ordered from Kent-Moore (1-800-GM-TOOLS) as follows: Part Number: J-37704-13 Cufting Tips (Box of Ten) We believe this source and their equipment to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such equipment. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from this firm or for any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 883125 > Aug > 88 > Brakes - Pulsations and Rotor Surface Refinish Technical Service Bulletin # 883125 Date: 880801 Brakes - Pulsations and Rotor Surface Refinish Number: 88-312-5 Section: 5 Date: AUGUST, 1988 Subject BRAKE PULSATIONS AND DISC BRAKE ROTOR SURFACE REFINISH Model and Year 1982-88 CHEVROLET MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS On today's vehicles the primary reason for brake pulsation is variation in the thickness of the rotor, which generally occurs after some mileage. The causes of rotor thickness variation tend to occur while the vehicle is in motion and the brake pedal is in the unapplied position. Three events must occur simultaneously: 1. The rotor/bearing system runout must be out of specification enough to produce high spots on the rotor face in relation to the caliper. 2. There must be a condition of caliper drag which causes the inboard and/or outboard shoe to rub on the rotor high spots. 3. The lining material must be sufficiently abrasive to cause wear on the high spots and therefore to develop rotor thickness variation after accumulated mileage. Following is a discussion of each of these events along with information about the conditions which can contribute to each. System Runout Information SYSTEM RUNOUT: Excessive system runout can exist as a result of the stack up of the tolerances of a rotor and a bearing which has been manufactured at one end or the other of their respective design specifications, or if either the rotor or bearing are out of specification. The manufacturing process controls which determine the amount of rotor or bearing runout are continuously being improved to reduce the amount of system and/or component runout. During manufacturing of the brake rotor, tolerances of the braking surfaces for flatness, thickness variation and lateral runout are held very close. Maintaining these close tolerances on the rotor's braking surface is necessary to prevent brake roughness. A lateral runout check of the rotor must be performed to determine the extent of runout. Lateral Runout Check: 1. Remove the wheel and tire. Invert the wheel nuts and reinstall them on the studs to the specified torque. Be sure to follow the alternating nut torquing sequence to ensure proper rotor alignment. 2. Fasten a dial indicator to the caliper so the dial indictor button contacts the rotor about 13 mm (0.500 inch) from the outer edge. 3. Zero the dial indicator. 4. Move the rotor one complete revolution and observe total indicated runout (T.I.R.). Lateral runout cannot exceed 0.08 mm (0.003-inch). ^ On front wheel drive vehicles, excessive lateral runout of the rotor can often be improved by indexing the rotor on the hub one or two bolt positions from the original position. If the lateral runout CANNOT be corrected by indexing the rotor, check the hub and bearing assembly for looseness. NOTICE: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the wheel bearing flange, remove any rust or foreign material from the mating surfaces of the wheel bearing flange and rotor. Failure to do this may result in excessive lateral runout of the rotor, causing brake pedal pulsation. 5. If lateral runout exceeds that specified in Step 4, refinish the rotor to specifications, reinstall rotor, and remeasure lateral runout. Wheel Bolt Torque, Caliper and Lining Material Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 883125 > Aug > 88 > Brakes - Pulsations and Rotor Surface Refinish > Page 2877 FIGURE 1 - WHEEL NUT TIGHTENING WHEEL BOLT TORQUE: Overtorqued wheel nuts or torquing wheel nuts without alternating the tightening sequence, especially on aluminum wheels, can also create a rotor runout condition. Refer to Figure 1. The use of a torque wrench when tightening wheel nuts is necessary to prevent distortion of the rotor, hub or wheel. The wheel nuts should be tightened in two steps to assure an even clamp load. FIGURE 2 - CALL TO BRACKET CLEARANCE CALIPER DRAG: Caliper drag is usually caused by interference between the caliper to knuckle interface or a caliper bolt binding on the caliper bolt bushing. Caliper to knuckle clearance is important. Clearance should be checked with the caliper in position and the caliper mounting bolts properly torqued. If excessive clearance exists, a clunking noise may occur on each brake apply. Too little clearance can cause caliper drag. The desired clearance is .005 - .012 in. at each caliper to knuckle bracket interface, or a total of .010 - .024 in. The caliper bracket stops can be filed -to obtain proper clearance. Refer to Figure 2. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 883125 > Aug > 88 > Brakes - Pulsations and Rotor Surface Refinish > Page 2878 FIGURE 3 - LUBRICATING CALIPER CAVITY When servicing the caliper, the caliper bolts should be cleaned and the space between the caliper bolt bushings should be filled with silicone grease such as Part Number 1052863 or equivalent. This will prevent the caliper dragging or binding on the mounting bolts. Refer to Figure 3. LINING MATERIAL ABRASIVENESS: The degree of abrasiveness of the brake lining material is determined by the manufacturer. A highly abrasive material will tend to create a rotor out-of-parallel condition if system runout and caliper drag are present. The properties and characteristics of brake linings are specified by Product Engineering. Some brake lining designs may be more aggressive when stopping, i.e. higher friction coefficient, while others are less aggressive but may be very durable and long lasting. The linings for any specific vehicle are selected on the basis of friction, wear, etc., to optimize front and rear braking for that specific vehicle. The brake lining used should be whatever is recommended by the manufacturer in the parts catalog or in the latest service bulletin. Brake pedal pulsation can also occur in the rear on drum brakes if there is radial runout in the drum and/or axle flange, or bearing. Thickness Variation Check: If a brake pedal pulsation condition is felt, a thickness variation check should be performed on the rotor. Thickness variation can be checked by measuring the thickness of the rotor at four or more points around the circumference of the rotor. Use a micrometer calibrated in one tenth increments per .001 inch. All measurements must be made at the same distance in, from the edge of the rotor. A rotor that varies by more than 0.013 mm (0.0005-inch) can cause pedal pulsation and/or front end vibration during brake applications. A rotor that does not meet these specifications should be refinished or replaced as necessary. Rotor Refinish Recommendations: Rotor refinish should only be performed because of non-parallelism (thickness variation), runout, or deep scoring grooves deeper than .015 inches. When replacing a rotor with a new rotor from stock it should NOT require refinishing unless ons of the conditions mentioned above is present. Also, routine replacement of disc brake linings does NOT require rotor refinishing. When rotor refinishing is required the following recommended procedures should be used to obtain the proper micro-inch surface finish which is required for new rotors (10 to 50 micro-inches with non-directional swirl pattern). When refinishing a rotor for a pulsation condition it is recommended that at least 0.010 inch be removed from the inboard and outboard side of the rotor surface to insure removal of the high and low spots on the face of the rotor. Rough Cut Finish Cut Spindle 150 rpm 150 rpm Depth of Cut Per Side .005 inch .002 inch Tool Cross Feed Per Rev. 0.006-.010 inch .002 inch max. Vibration Dampener Yes Yes Swirl Pattern-120 GRIT No yes The following is also important: ^ The brake lathe must be in good working order and have capability to produce the intended surface finish. ^ Excessive spindle speed or too deep a cut can result in a rough finish. ^ Cutting tools must be sharp. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 883125 > Aug > 88 > Brakes - Pulsations and Rotor Surface Refinish > Page 2879 FIGURE 4 - ROTOR MOUNTING ADAPTER - J 37160 ^ Adapters, if used, must be clean and free of nicks. Adapters may be used because of a two piece composite rotor design. (Refer to Figure 4). ^ The rotor surface contacting the arbor and/or the adapter must be free of debris and coarse surface corrosion. ^ If the dealership's rotor turning equipment cannot produce a finish cut equivalent to a new rotor's surface, finish cuts may be further improved and made non-directional by dressing the rotor surface with a sanding disc power tool. Light scoring of the rotor surfaces not exceeding 0.38 mm (0.015 inch) in depth, which may result from normal use, will not affect brake operation. To become familiar with the required surface finish, drag a fingernail over the surface of a new rotor from the parts stock or one on a new vehicle. If your brake equipment cannot produce this smooth a finish when correctly used, contact the equipment manufacturer for corrective instructions. Following these refinishing specifications and recommendations will help to hold the rotor surface finish to the specified range. Controlling the braking surface finish of the rotor is necessary to provide adequate early stopping ability and to avoid pulls and erratic performance and will aid in extending lining life. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 73-50-37 > Jan > 98 > Brakes - Rotor & Hub Flange Cleaning Tool Revision Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rotor & Hub Flange Cleaning Tool Revision File In Section: 5 - Brakes Bulletin No.: 73-50-37 Date: January, 1998 INFORMATION Subject: Revision to J 42450 Tool; Proper Brake Rotor and Hub Flange Surface Cleaning Models: 1998 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks - with Disc Brakes (Rotor and Hub Separate) This bulletin is being revised to update the following text. This bulletin is being issued to inform the dealer about a revision to tool J 42450 and reinforce the need for proper hub flange and brake rotor mating surface cleaning during service. Tool J 42450 is a cleaning pad arbor and pad system that fits over the wheel stud and cleans the portion of the hub surface that is very difficult to reach with normal rotary cleaning pads. Tool J 42450 is being revised to J 42450-A to improve the hook and loop material retention. Any dealer experiencing problems with tool J 42450 should contact Kent-Moore at 1-800-345-2233 for a revised arbor at no charge. Anytime the brake rotor has been separated from the hub bearing flange or if rotor machining is necessary, the rotor and hub should be marked to maintain the original position. Clean the hub flange of all dirt and foreign material using special tool J 42450 or J 42450-A. Clean both sides of the brake rotor hub using an aggressive (80 grit) abrasive sanding pad on a rotary disc. Properly cleaning the rotor surfaces before rotor machining or reassembly ensures that dirt and corrosion will not add lateral runout to the rotor. Proper cleaning of the hub flange will also minimize the stack-up of lateral runout. On reassembly, the rotor should be reinstalled aligning the marks made on disassembly. Always use a torque wrench or the appropriate Torque Socket found in J 39544-KIT on an impact wrench when installing the wheel and tire assembly. Torque all wheel nuts using the correct sequence and torque. Refer to the Tire and Wheel Sub-Section in the applicable Service Manual. Excessive torque or torque variation between wheel nuts may cause distortion of the hub and rotor mating surface. This distortion may cause lateral runout and lead to brake pulsation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 911335 > Dec > 90 > Brakes Change In Brake Feel After Rotor Refinishing Brake Rotor/Disc: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Change In Brake Feel After Rotor Refinishing Number: 91-133-5 5 Section: 5 Date: December 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 075003R Subject: CHANGE IN BRAKE EFFECTIVENESS AFTER DISC BRAKE ROTOR REFINISHING/PAD REPLACEMENT Model and Year: ALL PASSENGER CARS ALL LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 90-316-5, DATED AUGUST 1990. INFORMATION HAS BEEN ADDED REGARDING HUB AND ROTOR CLEANING, PROPER TORQUING TECHNIQUE, REVISED MACHINING TABLE, CHANGE SPECIFICATION FOR MAXIMUM SCORINGING DEPTH. THE 1991 MODEL YEAR WAS ALSO ADDED. ALL COPIES OF 90-316-5 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some comments have been received about a change in preceived braking effectiveness which occurs after rotors have been refinished and/or disc brake pads have been replaced. New lining materials have been formulated for increased lining life and to reduce brake squeal. Also, Federal regulations currently prohibit the use of asbestos in Original Equipment Manufactured (O.E.M.) front disc brake linings, and will totally ban asbestos from all O.E.M. brake linings in the near future. Due to these changes, initial rotor surface finish is more critical than in the past, and is required for good brake performance. Following are some recommended actions/procedures to assure proper performance of the brake systems on all vehicles after rotor and/or pad service has been performed: 1 . When performing routine brake maintenance such as replacing worn disc brake pads or shoes, DO NOT refinish disc brake rotors or drums unless: A. There is a brake pulsation condition present, and this pulsation is found to be caused by the brake rotors or drums, or B. The rotors and/or drums are excessively scored. Surface scoring that does not exceed 1.2 MM (0.050 in.) on rotors or drums should not affect brake operation. Before removing rotors from the hub assembly, mark the rotor and on wheel stud so that the rotor may be re-installed in the same position. If rotors are removed, it is very important that rust and scale be removed from the rotor and hub mating surfaces. Failure to do so may introduce excessive lateral runout when the rotor is mounted on the brake lathe, or when the rotor is re-installed to the hub. 2. When refinishing disc brake rotors, it is important that the brake lathe be in good operating condition and that all tools or bits are sharp. Recommended vibration dampeners and/or adaptors should be used and should be clean and free of nicks (remember, 1988-91 W models require the use of an adaptor, J37160, because of the two-piece design). The following table shows the recommended procedure for rotor machining: ROUGH CUT FINISH CUT Spindle Speed 150 RPM 150 RPM Depth of Cut (per side) 0.127 mm (0.005") 0.051 mm (0.002") Tool Cross Feed per Rev 0.152 mm - 0.254 mm 0.051 mm (0.002")Max (0.006" - 0.010") Vibration Damper Yes Yes Sand Rotors-Final Finish No Yes It is important that a rough and a finish cut be made. All brake lathes use a single-point cutting tool which is not capable of giving the necessary surface finish. A SECONDARY FINISHING OPERATION MUST BE PERFORMED TO OBTAIN THE NECESSARY SURFACE FINISH. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 911335 > Dec > 90 > Brakes Change In Brake Feel After Rotor Refinishing > Page 2889 An acceptable finish can be obtained using the Ammco Model 8350 Safe Swirl Disc Rotor Grinder, or equivalent, using 120 grit sandpaper and sanding each rotor surface with moderate pressure for a minimum of 60 seconds with the rotor turning at 150 RPM. An alternate method is to use a sanding block with 150 grit sandpaper. With the rotor turning at approximately 150 RPM, sand each side for a minimum of 60 seconds using moderate pressure. After the rotor has been sanded, the surfaces must be cleaned with a solvent such as brake cleaning, denatured alcohol, or equivalent. THE FINISHED ROTOR SURFACE SHOULD BE AS CLOSE TO THAT OF A NEW ROTOR AS POSSIBLE. FAILURE TO OBTAIN THE BEST POSSIBLE ROTOR FINISH WILL AFFECT INITIAL BRAKING PERFORMANCE. CAUTION: ROTORS OR DRUMS SHOULD ALWAYS BE REPLACED IF TURNING WILL RESULT IN A ROTOR OR DRUM THAT DOES NOT MEET MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATIONS FOR MINIMUM ROTOR THICKNESS OR MAXIMUM DRUM DIAMETER. NOTICE: When re-installing tire and wheel assemblies, it is very important that proper procedures be followed when installing and torquing the wheel nuts: A. Finger start all wheel nuts. B. Tighten wheel nuts to specified torque (use the "star," or alternating nut pattern) using a torque wrench. DO NOT USE AN IMPACT WRENCH. UNEVEN AND/OR EXCESSIVE TORQUING OF THE WHEEL NUTS HAS BEEN FOUND TO DISTORT ROTORS, RESULTING IN PREMATURE CUSTOMER COMEBACKS FOR BRAKE PULSATION 3. After brake pads have been replaced and/or rotors have been refinished, it is recommended that the new braking surfaces be broken in, or burnished, to properly seat them. This can be accomplished by making 20 stops from 30 mph, using medium to firm pressure. Take care to avoid overheating the brakes. 4. It is strongly recommended that the correct, specified General Motors replacement part(s) be used when servicing G.M. vehicles. General Motors does not test non-G.M. parts for proper performance on G.M. vehicles. Therefore, the use of non-G.M. parts may result in unacceptable vehicle performance. It is also important that the correct G.M. part(s) be used in the correct G.M. application. For example, some "A" model disc brake pads ("A" Heavy) will fit on "C" and "H" models, but will not provide the same performance as the pads specified for use on C and H vehicles. It may seem preferable to stock fewer brake pad part numbers, but customer dissatisfaction may result if vehicle performance is affected. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 883125 > Aug > 88 > Brakes Pulsations and Rotor Surface Refinish Technical Service Bulletin # 883125 Date: 880801 Brakes - Pulsations and Rotor Surface Refinish Number: 88-312-5 Section: 5 Date: AUGUST, 1988 Subject BRAKE PULSATIONS AND DISC BRAKE ROTOR SURFACE REFINISH Model and Year 1982-88 CHEVROLET MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS On today's vehicles the primary reason for brake pulsation is variation in the thickness of the rotor, which generally occurs after some mileage. The causes of rotor thickness variation tend to occur while the vehicle is in motion and the brake pedal is in the unapplied position. Three events must occur simultaneously: 1. The rotor/bearing system runout must be out of specification enough to produce high spots on the rotor face in relation to the caliper. 2. There must be a condition of caliper drag which causes the inboard and/or outboard shoe to rub on the rotor high spots. 3. The lining material must be sufficiently abrasive to cause wear on the high spots and therefore to develop rotor thickness variation after accumulated mileage. Following is a discussion of each of these events along with information about the conditions which can contribute to each. System Runout Information SYSTEM RUNOUT: Excessive system runout can exist as a result of the stack up of the tolerances of a rotor and a bearing which has been manufactured at one end or the other of their respective design specifications, or if either the rotor or bearing are out of specification. The manufacturing process controls which determine the amount of rotor or bearing runout are continuously being improved to reduce the amount of system and/or component runout. During manufacturing of the brake rotor, tolerances of the braking surfaces for flatness, thickness variation and lateral runout are held very close. Maintaining these close tolerances on the rotor's braking surface is necessary to prevent brake roughness. A lateral runout check of the rotor must be performed to determine the extent of runout. Lateral Runout Check: 1. Remove the wheel and tire. Invert the wheel nuts and reinstall them on the studs to the specified torque. Be sure to follow the alternating nut torquing sequence to ensure proper rotor alignment. 2. Fasten a dial indicator to the caliper so the dial indictor button contacts the rotor about 13 mm (0.500 inch) from the outer edge. 3. Zero the dial indicator. 4. Move the rotor one complete revolution and observe total indicated runout (T.I.R.). Lateral runout cannot exceed 0.08 mm (0.003-inch). ^ On front wheel drive vehicles, excessive lateral runout of the rotor can often be improved by indexing the rotor on the hub one or two bolt positions from the original position. If the lateral runout CANNOT be corrected by indexing the rotor, check the hub and bearing assembly for looseness. NOTICE: Whenever the brake rotor has been separated from the wheel bearing flange, remove any rust or foreign material from the mating surfaces of the wheel bearing flange and rotor. Failure to do this may result in excessive lateral runout of the rotor, causing brake pedal pulsation. 5. If lateral runout exceeds that specified in Step 4, refinish the rotor to specifications, reinstall rotor, and remeasure lateral runout. Wheel Bolt Torque, Caliper and Lining Material Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 883125 > Aug > 88 > Brakes Pulsations and Rotor Surface Refinish > Page 2894 FIGURE 1 - WHEEL NUT TIGHTENING WHEEL BOLT TORQUE: Overtorqued wheel nuts or torquing wheel nuts without alternating the tightening sequence, especially on aluminum wheels, can also create a rotor runout condition. Refer to Figure 1. The use of a torque wrench when tightening wheel nuts is necessary to prevent distortion of the rotor, hub or wheel. The wheel nuts should be tightened in two steps to assure an even clamp load. FIGURE 2 - CALL TO BRACKET CLEARANCE CALIPER DRAG: Caliper drag is usually caused by interference between the caliper to knuckle interface or a caliper bolt binding on the caliper bolt bushing. Caliper to knuckle clearance is important. Clearance should be checked with the caliper in position and the caliper mounting bolts properly torqued. If excessive clearance exists, a clunking noise may occur on each brake apply. Too little clearance can cause caliper drag. The desired clearance is .005 - .012 in. at each caliper to knuckle bracket interface, or a total of .010 - .024 in. The caliper bracket stops can be filed -to obtain proper clearance. Refer to Figure 2. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 883125 > Aug > 88 > Brakes Pulsations and Rotor Surface Refinish > Page 2895 FIGURE 3 - LUBRICATING CALIPER CAVITY When servicing the caliper, the caliper bolts should be cleaned and the space between the caliper bolt bushings should be filled with silicone grease such as Part Number 1052863 or equivalent. This will prevent the caliper dragging or binding on the mounting bolts. Refer to Figure 3. LINING MATERIAL ABRASIVENESS: The degree of abrasiveness of the brake lining material is determined by the manufacturer. A highly abrasive material will tend to create a rotor out-of-parallel condition if system runout and caliper drag are present. The properties and characteristics of brake linings are specified by Product Engineering. Some brake lining designs may be more aggressive when stopping, i.e. higher friction coefficient, while others are less aggressive but may be very durable and long lasting. The linings for any specific vehicle are selected on the basis of friction, wear, etc., to optimize front and rear braking for that specific vehicle. The brake lining used should be whatever is recommended by the manufacturer in the parts catalog or in the latest service bulletin. Brake pedal pulsation can also occur in the rear on drum brakes if there is radial runout in the drum and/or axle flange, or bearing. Thickness Variation Check: If a brake pedal pulsation condition is felt, a thickness variation check should be performed on the rotor. Thickness variation can be checked by measuring the thickness of the rotor at four or more points around the circumference of the rotor. Use a micrometer calibrated in one tenth increments per .001 inch. All measurements must be made at the same distance in, from the edge of the rotor. A rotor that varies by more than 0.013 mm (0.0005-inch) can cause pedal pulsation and/or front end vibration during brake applications. A rotor that does not meet these specifications should be refinished or replaced as necessary. Rotor Refinish Recommendations: Rotor refinish should only be performed because of non-parallelism (thickness variation), runout, or deep scoring grooves deeper than .015 inches. When replacing a rotor with a new rotor from stock it should NOT require refinishing unless ons of the conditions mentioned above is present. Also, routine replacement of disc brake linings does NOT require rotor refinishing. When rotor refinishing is required the following recommended procedures should be used to obtain the proper micro-inch surface finish which is required for new rotors (10 to 50 micro-inches with non-directional swirl pattern). When refinishing a rotor for a pulsation condition it is recommended that at least 0.010 inch be removed from the inboard and outboard side of the rotor surface to insure removal of the high and low spots on the face of the rotor. Rough Cut Finish Cut Spindle 150 rpm 150 rpm Depth of Cut Per Side .005 inch .002 inch Tool Cross Feed Per Rev. 0.006-.010 inch .002 inch max. Vibration Dampener Yes Yes Swirl Pattern-120 GRIT No yes The following is also important: ^ The brake lathe must be in good working order and have capability to produce the intended surface finish. ^ Excessive spindle speed or too deep a cut can result in a rough finish. ^ Cutting tools must be sharp. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Rotor/Disc: > 883125 > Aug > 88 > Brakes Pulsations and Rotor Surface Refinish > Page 2896 FIGURE 4 - ROTOR MOUNTING ADAPTER - J 37160 ^ Adapters, if used, must be clean and free of nicks. Adapters may be used because of a two piece composite rotor design. (Refer to Figure 4). ^ The rotor surface contacting the arbor and/or the adapter must be free of debris and coarse surface corrosion. ^ If the dealership's rotor turning equipment cannot produce a finish cut equivalent to a new rotor's surface, finish cuts may be further improved and made non-directional by dressing the rotor surface with a sanding disc power tool. Light scoring of the rotor surfaces not exceeding 0.38 mm (0.015 inch) in depth, which may result from normal use, will not affect brake operation. To become familiar with the required surface finish, drag a fingernail over the surface of a new rotor from the parts stock or one on a new vehicle. If your brake equipment cannot produce this smooth a finish when correctly used, contact the equipment manufacturer for corrective instructions. Following these refinishing specifications and recommendations will help to hold the rotor surface finish to the specified range. Controlling the braking surface finish of the rotor is necessary to provide adequate early stopping ability and to avoid pulls and erratic performance and will aid in extending lining life. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2897 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Heavy Duty Power Brakes, Rotor Dimensions Heavy Duty Power Brakes, Rotor Dimensions Nominal Thickness 1.28 in Minimum Thickness 1.215 in Thickness Variation (Parallelism) 0.0005 in Run Out (T.I.R) 0.004 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2898 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection PURPOSE In the manufacturing of the brake rotor all the tolerances regarding surface finish, parallelism, and lateral runout are held very closely. The maintenance of these tolerances provide the surface necessary to prevent brake roughness. Light scoring of the rotor surface not in excess of 01.5 mm (0.060-inch) in depth is normal. This condition does not affect the brake operation. Some discoloration or wear of the disc surface is normal and does not require re-surfacing when linings are replaced. SPECIFICATIONS - See: Specifications LATERAL RUNOUT Lateral runout is the movement of the rotor from side to side as it rotates on the spindle. This could also be referred to as "rotor wobble". This movement causes the brake pad and piston to be knocked back into it's bore. This results in additional pedal travel and a vibration during braking. Checking Lateral Runout 1. Tighten the wheel bearings to eliminate all freeplay. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2899 2. Attach a dial indicator to a solid non-rotating portion of the hub assembly or suspension. - The point of the styles must contact the rotor face about 25 mm (1-inch) from the rotor edge. 3. Move the rotor one complete rotation and observe the dial indicator. 4. Rotate the bezel on the dial indicator such that "0" is at the low deflection point. 5. Again rotate the rotor at least one complete turn and observe the needle deflection. Total needle deflection will equal lateral runout. - The lateral runout should not exceed 0.08 mm (0.003-inch). 6. Readjust the wheel bearings. MINIMUM THICKNESS The thickness of a rotor is important for two reasons: 1. Rotors which are too thin are not able to properly absorb and release heat during heavy braking. This results in reduced braking capacity and brake fade. 2. Rotors worn below minimum thickness in combination with worn pads/linings can result in the caliper piston extending too far becoming cocked or jammed. Rotor thickness should be measured at the thinnest point on the rotor. Any rotor which is worn below its minimum thickness should be replaced. For accurate measurements, it is best to remove the caliper to allow for complete access to the inboard side of the rotor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2900 For more information on how to use a disc brake micrometer see Fundamentals and Basics. See: Fundamentals and Basics PARALLELISM Parallelism is the measurement of the thickness of the rotor at 12 or more points around the circumference of the rotor. All measurements must be made at the same distance in from the edge of the rotor. Lack Of Parallelism Lack Of Parallelism The rotor thickness must not vary more than 0.013 mm (0.0005-inch) from point to point. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2901 MACHINING Since accurate control of the rotor tolerances is necessary for proper performance of the disc brakes, machining of the rotor should be done only with precision equipment. NOTE: 1 inch = 25.4mm, so if your micrometer measures in inches and the specified thickness on the disc is in millimeters, convert millimeters to inches by dividing the specified number of millimeters by 25.4. Example: Specification on disc is 17.8 mm. Dividing 17.8mm by 25.4mm/in = 17.8/25.4 = 0.70 inches. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Hubs Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Automatic Hubs Knuckle And Hub/Rotor Components REMOVE OR DISCONNECT 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Caliper and position aside. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose, refer to Brake Caliper / Service and Repair. 3. Locking hub, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints / Locking Hub / Service and Repair. 4. Wheel bearing outer locknut, lock ring and wheel bearing inner adjusting nut. 5. Hub/disc assembly and outer wheel bearing. INSTALL OR CONNECT 1. Apply an approved high temperature front wheel bearing grease to the spindle at the inner and outer bearing seat, shoulder and seal seat. Also Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Hubs > Page 2904 finger apply a small amount of grease inboard of each bearing cup in the hub/disc assembly. Pressure pack the bearings with a grease machine or hand pack them. Ensure grease is worked thoroughly into the rollers, cone and cage. 2. Inner bearing, (apply an additional quantity of grease outboard of the inner bearing), and seal. 3. Rotor. 4. Outer bearing and adjusting nut. 5. Adjust wheel bearings, rotate wheel and torque adjusting nut to 47 Nm (35 ft lb), then back off 3/8 of a turn. 6. Ring and lock nut. 7. Ensure tang on inside diameter of washer passes onto slot in spindle and hole in washer aligns with locknut pin. Move adjustment nut as necessary to align pin, then tighten locknut to 217 Nm (160 ft lb). 8. Ensure endplay is 0.001-0.010 inch. 9. Locking hub and caliper. 10. Tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Hubs > Page 2905 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Manual Hubs Knuckle And Hub/Rotor Components REMOVE OR DISCONNECT 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Caliper and position aside. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose, refer to Brake Caliper / Service and Repair. 3. Locking hub, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints / Locking Hub / Service and Repair. 4. Wheel bearing outer locknut, lock ring and wheel bearing inner adjusting nut. 5. Hub/disc assembly and outer wheel bearing. INSTALL OR CONNECT 1. Apply an approved high temperature front wheel bearing grease to the spindle at the inner and outer bearing seat, shoulder and seal seat. Also Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Automatic Hubs > Page 2906 finger apply a small amount of grease inboard of each bearing cup in the hub/disc assembly. Pressure pack the bearings with a grease machine or hand pack them. Ensure grease is worked thoroughly into the rollers, cone and cage. 2. Inner bearing, (apply an additional quantity of grease outboard of the inner bearing), and seal. 3. Rotor. 4. Outer bearing and adjusting nut. 5. Adjust wheel bearings, rotate wheel and torque adjusting nut to 67.5 Nm (50 ft lb), then back off enough to free bearing. 6. Ring and lock nut. 7. Ensure tang on inside diameter of washer passes onto slot in spindle and hole in washer aligns with locknut pin. Move adjustment nut as necessary to align pin, then tighten locknut to 217 Nm (160 ft lb). 8. Ensure endplay is 0.001-0.010 inch. 9. Locking hub and caliper. 10. Tire and wheel assembly. 11. Lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Installation Notes Brake Rotor/Disc: Fundamentals and Basics Installation Notes WHEN INSTALLING A ROTOR/DISC, REMEMBER... Thoroughly clean the rotors with brake cleaner. - Any grease or brake fluid which comes in contact with the rotor should be thoroughly cleaned prior to installing the new pads/linings. - Grease and other contaminants become lodged in the microscopic pores of the rotor's surface. This prolongs the brake-in time of the new linings and contaminates the friction material. - Commercially produced aerosol brake cleaners should be used to clean the rotor. Unlike carburetor cleaner or other petroleum based solvents, brake cleaner does not leave a residue on the rotor's surface. Recheck the wheel bearings once the tires are installed. - With the vehicle raised and properly supported, grasp the tire at the top and bottom and attempt to rock them back and forth. There should be no detectable lateral (wobble) movement. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Installation Notes > Page 2909 Brake Rotor/Disc: Fundamentals and Basics Tightening Notes WHEN TIGHTENING LUG NUTS, REMEMBER... Always tighten the lug nuts to the correct torque specification. Lightly lubricate the studs with an anti-seize compound to ensure proper torque and prevent damage to the threads. Tighten in an alternating pattern around the wheel until the wheel is centered on the studs. Do your final tightening with a torque wrench. When servicing disc brakes it is very important to properly torque the wheel assembly. Lug nuts which are installed with an air impact tool are often over-torqued. This may distort the rotor and result in excessive lateral runout (rotor wobble) and a pedal pulsation upon braking. Recheck the wheel bearings once the tires are installed. With the vehicle raised and properly supported, grasp the tire at the top and bottom and attempt to rock them back and forth. There should be no detectable lateral (wobble) movement. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Installation Notes > Page 2910 Brake Rotor/Disc: Fundamentals and Basics Wheel Bearing Inspection and Repacking WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION Inspect the wheel bearing closely for the following: Fatigue Spalding Look for small flakes of shiny metal (babbit) embedded in the grease. This can easily be done by dragging the bearing across a clean shop towel. Any metal flakes will be readily visible in the grease deposited on the shop towel. If any flakes are found the wheel bearing should be replaced. Brinelling Look for a series of vertical indentations on the races. This is caused by impact loading or vibration while the bearing is not rotating. Replace the bearing if the indentations are severe or the bearing is noisy. Heat Discoloration Heat discoloration can range from faint yellow to dark blue. This results from the bearing being adjusted too tightly or an insufficient amount of lubricant/grease. Excessive heat can cause the races and rollers to soften. To check for a loss of temper on the races or rollers a simple file test may be performed. A file drawn lightly over a race or roller which has lost its case hardening will grab and cut metal, whereas a file drawn lightly over a hardened part will glide readily without scratching the metal. Replace the bearing and race if softening is indicated. Cracked Outer Race Cracked races often result from the race being driven in cocked or at an angle. Replace the bearing and race and be careful to drive the new race in evenly. Loose Outer Race Check to see that the race is tight and secure in the hub. If there is any evidence of movement or slippage, replace both the hub assembly and the bearing. Bent or Damaged Cage Verify that the cage has not been bent or distorted. Bent or damaged cages are often the result of improper bearing and grease seal removal techniques. When removing the inner wheel bearing use a seal puller to remove the grease seal. The inner bearing should then just slide out of the hub. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Installation Notes > Page 2911 Do not re-install the spindle nut and attempt to slide-hammer the grease seal from the hub. WHEEL BEARING REPACKING - The hub and spindle should be thoroughly cleaned of all old grease. - The bearings should be cleaned in solvent and allowed to dry completely. WARNING: Do not spin dry the bearings with compressed air, this practice can rapidly damage bearings. - If possible use a commercial wheel bearing packer, otherwise repack the bearings by hand. Hand Repacking Place a quantity of high-temperature, multi purpose wheel bearing grease in the palm of your hand. - Cup the bottom of the bearing cage (the wider end) into the palm of your hand forcing grease up through the cage. Repeat the procedure until the new grease is pushed out of the top of the cage. - Repeat this around the entire circumference of the bearing. - Apply a coating of new wheel bearing grease to the spindle and the inside of the hub. NOTE: The hub should not be completely packed with new grease. As the brakes are applied the hub will heat up and the grease will expand. If an excessive amount of grease is prepacked into the hub, upon heating it will force its way past the grease seals and contaminate the brake system. - Also apply a thin coating of grease to the inside lip of the new grease seals. NOTE: The side of the grease seal from which the spring is visible should point towards the bearing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Installation Notes > Page 2912 Brake Rotor/Disc: Fundamentals and Basics How to Use A Micrometer CONSTRUCTION The spindle on a micrometer is moved in or out by rotating the thimble or ratchet. The thread pitch on the spindle is 40 threads per inch. A single full rotation of the thimble extends or retracts the spindle one thread or 1/40 of an inch (0.025, 25 thousands). The thimble is divided into 25 equal divisions. Rotating the thimble one division will extend or retract the spindle 1/25 of a thread. (1/25) x (1/40)inch = 1/1000 inch (0.001), one division on the thimble is equal to 0.001 inches. HOW TO READ As the thimble is rotated out it uncovers a scale on the sleeve. Each major division on the scale is 1/10 of an inch (0.100) Each major division is separated into 4 minor divisions, each equal to 25/1000 of an inch (0.025). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Installation Notes > Page 2913 A full rotation will move the thimble exactly one minor division on the sleeve. To read the micrometer you must add the measurement which is visible on the sleeve to the measurement which is showing on the thimble In the example the sleeve measurement is 0.250 inches and the thimble measurement is 0.017 inches. The total measurement is then equal to the two measurements combined, 0.267 inches. NOTES The accuracy and calibration of a micrometer can be altered easily by applying too much pressure to the spindle. Use the thimble to quickly rotate the spindle in until it is near the rotor. - Use the ratchet to rotate the spindle into contact with the rotor. - The ratchet has a built in slip which prevents excessive stress or pressure from developing. Calibrate the micrometer regularly. Most micrometers come with a precision dowel which allows for easy and accurate adjustments. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Specifications Backing Plate: Specifications 8.5 inch Ring Gear ............................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 47 Nm (35 ft lb) 9.5 inch Ring Gear ............................................................................................................................... .................................................... 142 Nm (105 ft lb) 9.75 - 10.5 inch Ring Gear .................................................................................................................. .................................................... 142 Nm (105 ft lb) 10.5 inch Ring Gear ............................................................................................................................. .................................................... 142 Nm (105 ft lb) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Full Floating Axle Backing Plate: Service and Repair Full Floating Axle Backing Plate REMOVE 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove brake drum. See Brake Drum / Service and Repair. See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair 4. Remove brake shoes. See Brake Shoes / Service and Repair. See: Brake Shoe/Service and Repair 5. Disconnect hydraulic line at wheel cylinder. CAUTION: Do not pull metal line away from cylinder, as this may kink or bend line. Line will separate from cylinder when cylinder is moved away from brake backing plate. 6. Remove wheel cylinder-to-brake plate attaching screws, then the wheel cylinder. 7. Remove the four backing plate attaching bolts then remove the backing plate. INSTALL 1. Install backing plate and retaining bolts. Torque bolts to specifications. 2. Install wheel cylinder. See Wheel Cylinder / Service and Repair. See: Wheel Cylinder/Service and Repair 3. Install brake shoes. See Brake Shoes / Service and Repair. See: Brake Shoe/Service and Repair 4. Install brake drum. See Brake Drum / Service and Repair. See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair 5. Install wheel and tire assembly. 6. Lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Full Floating Axle > Page 2920 Backing Plate: Service and Repair Semi-Floating Axle Backing Plate REMOVE 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove brake drum. See Brake Drum / Service and Repair. See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair 4. Remove brake shoes. See Brake Shoes / Service and Repair. See: Brake Shoe/Service and Repair 5. Disconnect hydraulic line at wheel cylinder. CAUTION: Do not pull metal line away from cylinder, as this may kink or bend line. Line will separate from cylinder when cylinder is moved away from brake backing plate. 6. Remove wheel cylinder-to-brake plate attaching screws, then the wheel cylinder. 7. Remove axle shaft. 8. Remove the four backing plate attaching bolts then remove the backing plate. INSTALL 1. Install backing plate and retaining bolts. 2. Install wheel cylinder. See Wheel Cylinder / Service and Repair. See: Wheel Cylinder/Service and Repair 3. Install brake shoes. See Brake Shoes / Service and Repair. See: Brake Shoe/Service and Repair 4. Install brake drum. See Brake Drum / Service and Repair. See: Brake Drum/Service and Repair 5. Install wheel and tire assembly. 6. Lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Brake Drum Dimensions Brake Drum: Specifications Inside Diameter Inside Diameter Except Heavy Duty Power Brakes Rear Drum Inside Diameter 11 in Heavy duty power brakes 11.15 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Brake Drum Dimensions > Page 2925 Brake Drum: Specifications Drum Diameter Drum Diameter Original Size 11.0 in 11.15 in 12.0 in 13.0 Maximum Refinish 11.06 in 11.21 in 12.06 in 13.06 Discard 11.09 in 11.24 in 12.09 in 13.09 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2926 Brake Drum: Testing and Inspection VISUAL INSPECTION Inspect the drum for cracks. If any large, through-the-drum cracks are located the drum must be replaced. NOTE: Cracks in drums are often difficult to locate. To quickly determine if a drum is cracked lightly drop the drum (from a height of 4-5 inches) onto a flat hard surface. A cracked drum will make a dull thud sound while a good drum will make a ringing sound. Inspect for signs of overheating. An overheated drum will often be discolored (blue/gold), warped, or heat checked. Heat checks are small cracks in the drum friction surface. Heat checks can be removed by resurfacing. NOTE: The cause of the overheating should be determined prior to replacing the shoes/linings or drums. Inspect for scoring. Any grooves or scores in excess of 0.008 inches should be resurfaced. SPECIFICATIONS - See: Specifications MAXIMUM DIAMETER Purpose The thickness of the drum friction surface is directly proportional to the drums ability to absorb and release heat during braking. As the drum becomes thinner due to normal wear and resurfacing it looses its ability to absorb and release heat and is more prone to brake fade, distortion, and cracking. As the drum wears the inside diameter of the drum increases. The amount of drum thickness lost to wear is equal to 1/2 the increase in diameter. There are two specifications related to drum thickness. Discard Diameter - This is the maximum diameter at which it becomes unsafe to operate. A drum which has reached this thickness should not be machined and should be discarded. Maximum Refinish - This is the maximum diameter to which a drum may be machined or resurfaced to. This diameter is smaller (thicker) than the Discard diameter because it assumes the drum will need to have a sufficient thickness left, after machining, to allow for further wear from a new set of shoes/linings. Which One Should Be Used? If you install a new pair of shoes with the drum diameter at or less than the "Maximum Refinish" specification the drums should have a sufficient thickness to last the normal life of the new shoes/linings. The "Discard Diameter" should be used to determine if a drum needs to be replaced at the present time of inspection. If you install a new pair of shoes with the drums machined at or near "Discard Diameter", within a short time the drums will be too thin Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2927 (unsafe) and the new shoes/linings will be subject to overheating and brake fade. How To Measure NOTE: For additional information on how to use a drum micrometer see Fundamentals and Basics. See: Fundamentals and Basics - A drum micrometer is used to measure the drum diameter. - The micrometer scale should be initially set to the original (new) thickness of the drum. - The base of the micrometer should be placed in the deepest groove in the drum and held steady while the measuring point is swiveled to find the maximum diameter. - The base and measuring point should be kept at the same depth in the drum. Drum Micrometer - The measurement should be repeated at 3 or more places around the circumference of the drum to determine if the drum is out of round. If the measurements differ by more than 0.004 inches the drum should be resurfaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2928 NOTE: A drum which is out of round will cause a pedal pulsation to be felt upon braking. - The measurement should also be repeated at various depths of the drum to check for a bellmouth condition. If the measurements differ by more than .010 inches the drum should be resurfaced. NOTE: 1 inch = 25.4mm, so if your micrometer measures in inches and the specified thickness on the disc is in millimeters, convert millimeters to inches by dividing the specified number of millimeters by 25.4. Example: Specification on disc is 17.8 mm. Dividing 17.8mm by 25.4mm/in = 17.8/25.4 = 0.70 inches. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Axle Types Brake Drum: Service and Repair Identifying Axle Types THERE ARE TWO DIFFERENT TYPES OF AXLES AVAILABLE ON GENERAL MOTORS TRUCKS. Axle Shaft Components Full Floating Axle On full floating axles the drum is part of the hub assembly and they must be removed as an assembly. Rear Drum Assembly Semi Floating Axle On semi-floating axles the drum can be removed without removing the axle shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Axle Types > Page 2931 Brake Drum: Service and Repair Full Floating Axle Removal Axle Shaft Components Removing Or Installing Axle Shaft Bolts 1. Remove wheel, axle shaft and axle shaft gasket (if used) or clean off RTV sealer. 2. Remove retaining ring and key, then remove locknut from housing tube, using appropriate tool. Fig. 6 Removing Or Installing Wheel Bearing Adjusting Nut Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Axle Types > Page 2932 3. Using appropriate tool remove adjusting nut from housing tube. 4. Pull hub and drum straight off axle housing. If brake lining is dragging on brake drum, back off brake adjustment by rotating adjustment screw. Installation Axle Shaft Components Fig. 7 Measuring Brake Drum Inside Diameter Fig. 8 Adjusting Brake Shoes To Brake Drum Inside Diameter 1. If brake shoes have been replaced or the adjusting screw has been moved the shoes should be adjusted. To do this use a suitable brake drum to Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Axle Types > Page 2933 shoe gauge, measure brake drum inside diameter. Adjust brake shoes to dimension obtained on outside portion of gauge. 2. Install hub and drum to the axle tube. a. Be sure the bearings and the oil seal are positioned properly. b. Apply a light coat of high melting point bearing lubricant to the contact surfaces and the outside of the axle tube. 3. Install adjusting nut. Fig. 6 Removing Or Installing Wheel Bearing Adjusting Nut 4. Adjust wheel bearings: a. Torque adjusting nut to 68 Nm (50 ft lb) while rotating wheel. b. Back off nut until loose. c. Rotate nut up against bearing cone shoulder (zero clearance). 5. Insert key 6. Insert retaining ring. Removing Or Installing Axle Shaft Bolts 7. Install a new axle shaft gasket (if used) or apply RTV sealer. 8. Install axle shaft. 9. Install tire and wheel assembly. 10. Lower vehicle. Removal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Axle Types > Page 2934 Fig. 1 Exploded View Of Dana Rear Drive Axle With 10 1/2 Inch Ring Gear 1. Remove wheel. Removing Or Installing Axle Shaft Bolts 2. Remove axle shaft and axle shaft gasket (if used) or clean off RTV sealer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Axle Types > Page 2935 Fig. 6 Removing Or Installing Wheel Bearing Adjusting Nut 3. Bend tang of lock washer away from the outer lock nut and remove the outer lock nut, lock washer and inner lock nut. 4. Remove outer wheel bearing. 5. Pull hub and drum straight off axle housing. If brake lining is dragging on brake drum, back off brake adjustment by rotating adjustment screw. Installation Fig. 1 Exploded View Of Dana Rear Drive Axle With 10 1/2 Inch Ring Gear Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Axle Types > Page 2936 Fig. 7 Measuring Brake Drum Inside Diameter Fig. 8 Adjusting Brake Shoes To Brake Drum Inside Diameter 1. If brake shoes have been replaced or the adjusting screw has been moved the shoes should be adjusted. To do this use a suitable brake drum to shoe gauge, measure brake drum inside diameter. Adjust brake shoes to dimension obtained on outside portion of gauge. 2. Install hub and drum to the axle tube. a. Be sure the inner bearing and the oil seal are positioned properly. b. Apply a light coat of high melting point bearing lubricant to the contact surfaces and the outside of the axle tube. 3. Install outer bearing and inner lock nut. 4. Adjust wheel bearings: a. Torque inner lock nut to 68 Nm (50 ft lb) while rotating wheel. b. Ensure bearing surfaces are in contact, then back adjusting nut off 1/8 turn. 5. Install lock washer. 6. Install outer lock nut. Torque to 88 Nm (65 ft lb). Bend tangs of lock washer over flat of outer lock nut. 7. Install a new axle shaft gasket (if used) or apply RTV sealer. Removing Or Installing Axle Shaft Bolts 8. Install axle shaft. 9. Install tire and wheel assembly. 10. Lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Axle Types > Page 2937 Brake Drum: Service and Repair Semi-Floating Axle Removal Rear Drum Assembly 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove brake drum. If brake lining is dragging on brake drum, back off brake adjustment by rotating adjustment screw. If brake drum is rusted or corroded to axle flange and cannot be removed, lightly tap axle flange to drum mounting surface with a suitable hammer. NOTE: For additional information see Notes, Warnings, and Hints. See: Fundamentals and Basics Installation Rear Drum Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Axle Types > Page 2938 Fig. 7 Measuring Brake Drum Inside Diameter Fig. 8 Adjusting Brake Shoes To Brake Drum Inside Diameter 1. If brake shoes have been replaced or the adjusting screw has been moved the shoes should be adjusted. To do this use a suitable brake drum to shoe gauge, measure brake drum inside diameter. Adjust brake shoes to dimension obtained on outside portion of gauge. 2. Install the brake drum. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly 4. Lower vehicle. NOTE: For additional information see Notes, Warnings, and Hints. See: Fundamentals and Basics Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > How to Read A Brake Drum Micrometer Brake Drum: Fundamentals and Basics How to Read A Brake Drum Micrometer HOW TO READ On a standard micrometer each division on the scale is equal to 0.001 inches. To obtain the total drum diameter the measurement shown on the dial is added to the value for which the micrometer scale is set. NOTE: When the dial is at 0.0 the dial indicator styles is fully inserted. When the styles is fully withdrawn the dial is at its maximum value. EXAMPLES In example "A" a new 10 inch drum is being measured. The micrometer scale is set to 10 inches, the styles is fully inserted, and the dial indicates 0.0. The drum diameter is 10.000 inches. In example "B" an older worn 10 inch drum is being measured. The micrometer scale is still set to 10 inches but now the styles is only partially inserted and the dial indicates 90. The total drum diameter is equal to 10.090 inches. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > How to Read A Brake Drum Micrometer > Page 2941 Brake Drum: Fundamentals and Basics Notes, Warnings, and Hints DRUM REMOVAL The drum should just slide off however it will often bind or stick for the following reasons: Excessive Grooves or Scoring - The interlocking grooves prevent the drum from sliding off. Uneven Wear - Uneven wear across the surface of the shoe creates a wedge which prevents the drum from sliding off. Lip or Edge - Commonly there will be a lip worn at the edge of the drum where the shoe to drum contact stops. NOTE: If both drums are stuck tightly, verify the parking brake is released. To remove a drum which is stuck you should retract the shoes by backing off the automatic adjuster. If the drum still will not slide off there may be corrosion between the drum and hub. A few sharp blows from a mallet or hammer along the front flat surface of the drum will usually free the drum. CAUTION: Prying off a stuck drum with a puller or pry bar can damage the springs or hardware. Always attempt to withdraw the shoes with the automatic adjuster first. Once the drum is removed a layer of brake dust will remain in the bottom of the drum. This dust should be thoroughly soaked with water or brake cleaner and then removed from the drum. WARNING: Inhaling brake dust is extremely hazardous to your health. DRUM INSTALLATION - Prior to installing the drum verify the automatic adjuster operates properly and that the tools you are intending to use to adjust the brakes will be able to reach the adjuster. - With the drum off, practice operating the adjuster through the access hole in the backing-plate. This will make adjusting the brakes much easier once the drum is installed. Ensure the shoes/linings are centered on the backing-plate (top to bottom and side to side). The drum will be very difficult to slide on if the shoes/linings are not centered. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > How to Read A Brake Drum Micrometer > Page 2942 If the drum was resurfaced, verify that all metal shavings have been removed. - If the wheel cylinders were replaced or overhauled, verify that the pistons are fully compressed. Newly installed or rebuilt wheel cylinders may initially stick in the extended position (prior to bleeding the system). Using brake assembly lubricant when overhauling the wheel-cylinder will help prevent this. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Brake Shoe: Testing and Inspection Inspect brake linings for excessive wear, damage, oil, grease or brake fluid contamination. If any of the above conditions exists, brake linings must be replaced. Brake shoes must always be replaced as an axle set to maintain equal braking forces. Examine brake shoe webbing, hold-down and return springs for signs of overheating indicated by a slight blue color. If any component exhibits signs of overheating, replace hold-down and return springs with new ones. Overheated springs lose their pull and could cause brake linings to wear out prematurely. Inspect all springs for sags, bends and external damage, and replace as necessary. Inspect hold-down retainers and pins for bends, rust and corrosion. If any of the above conditions exist, replace retainers and pins. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2946 Brake Shoe: Adjustments These brakes have self-adjusting shoe mechanisms that assure correct lining-to-drum clearances at all times. The automatic adjusters operate only when the brakes are applied as the vehicle is moving rearward or when the car comes to an uphill stop. Although the brakes are self-adjusting, an initial adjustment is necessary after the brake shoes have been relined or replaced, or when the length of the adjusting screw has been changed during some other service operation. Frequent usage of an automatic transmission forward range to halt reverse vehicle motion may prevent the automatic adjusters from functioning, thereby inducing low pedal heights. Should low pedal heights be encountered, it is recommended that numerous forward and reverse stops be made until satisfactory pedal height is obtained. If a low pedal condition cannot be corrected by making numerous reverse stops (provided the hydraulic system is free of air) it indicates that the self-adjusting mechanism is not functioning. Therefore it will be necessary to remove the brake drum, clean, free up and lubricate the adjusting mechanism. Then adjust the brakes, being sure the parking brake is fully released. 1. Using a suitable punch, knock out lanced area in backing plate or drum. If drum is installed on vehicle when this is done, remove drum and clean brake compartment of all metal. NOTICE: When adjustment is completed, a new hole cover must be installed in the backing plate. 2. Using suitable tool, turn brake adjusting screw to expand brake shoes at each wheel until wheel can just be turned by hand. Drag should be equal on all wheels. 3. Back off adjusting screw at each wheel 30 notches. 4. If shoe still drags slightly on drum, back off adjusting screw an additional one or two notches. 5. When adjusting screw has been backed off approximately 12 notches, brakes should be free of drag. Heavy drag at this point indicates tight parking brake cables. 6. Install adjusting hole cover in brake backing plate. 7. Check parking brake for proper adjustment. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Removal For additional information see Notes, Warnings, and Hints. See: Fundamentals and Basics Fig. 1 Exploded View Of Drum Brake Assembly. 1. Raise and support vehicle, then remove tire and wheel assembly. 2. Remove brake drum. If brake lining is dragging on brake drum, back off brake adjustment by rotating adjustment screw. Refer to individual truck chapter for procedure. If brake drum is rusted or corroded to axle flange and cannot be removed, lightly tap flange to drum mounting surface with a suitable hammer. 3. Using brake spring pliers or equivalent, unhook primary and secondary return springs. Observe location of brake parts being removed to aid during installation. NOTE: For additional information see Brake Spring Removal and Installation Notes. See: Fundamentals and Basics 4. Remove brake hold-down springs with suitable tool. 5. Lift actuating lever, then unhook actuator link from anchor pin and remove. 6. Remove actuating lever(s) and return spring. 7. Spread shoes apart and remove parking brake strut and spring. 8. Disconnect parking brake cable from lever, then remove brake shoes from backing plate. 9. Separate brake shoes by removing adjusting screw and spring, then unhook parking brake lever from shoe assembly. 10. Clean dirt from brake drum, backing plate and all other components. WARNING: Do not use compressed air or dry brush to clean brake parts. Many brake parts contain asbestos fibers which, if inhaled, can cause serious injury. Clean brake parts with a water soaked rag or a suitable vacuum cleaner to minimize airborne dust. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2949 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Installation For additional information see Notes, Warnings, and Hints. See: Fundamentals and Basics Fig. 1 Exploded View Of Drum Brake Assembly. 1. Lubricate parking brake lever fulcrum with suitable brake lube, then attach lever to brake shoe. Ensure lever operates smoothly. 2. Connect brake shoes with adjusting screw spring, then position adjusting screw. Ensure adjusting screw star wheel does not contact adjusting screw spring after installation, and also ensure RH thread adjusting screw is installed on left side of vehicle and LH thread adjusting screw is installed on right side of vehicle. When brake shoe installation is completed, ensure star wheel lines up with adjusting hole in backing plate. 3. Lightly lubricate backing plate shoe contact surfaces with suitable brake lube, then the area where parking brake cable contacts backing plate. 4. Install brake shoes on backing plate while engaging wheel cylinder links (if equipped) with shoe webbing. Connect parking brake cable to parking brake lever. The primary shoe (short lining) faces towards front of vehicle. NOTE: For additional information see Brake Spring Removal and Installation Notes. See: Fundamentals and Basics 5. Install actuating levers, actuating link and return spring, Fig. 1 6. Install hold-down springs with suitable tool. 7. Install primary and secondary shoe return springs using brake spring pliers or equivalent. Fig. 7 Measuring Brake Drum Inside Diameter Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2950 Fig. 8 Adjusting Brake Shoes To Brake Drum Inside Diameter 8. Using suitable brake drum to shoe gauge, Fig. 7, measure brake drum inside diameter. Adjust brake shoes to dimension obtained on outside portion of gauge, Fig. 8. 9. Install brake drum, wheel and tire assembly. 10. If any hydraulic connections have been opened, bleed brake system. 11. Adjust parking brake. Refer to ``Adjustments.'' 12. Inspect all hydraulic lines and connections for leakage, and repair as necessary. 13. Check master cylinder fluid level and replenish as necessary. 14. Check brake pedal for proper feel and return. 15. Lower vehicle and road test. CAUTION: Do not severely apply brakes immediately after installation of new brake linings or permanent damage may occur to linings. Brakes must be applied moderately during first several hundred miles of operation to ensure proper burnishing of linings. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Brake Spring Removal and Installation Brake Shoe: Fundamentals and Basics Brake Spring Removal and Installation HOLD-DOWN SPRINGS Purpose Hold-down springs hold the shoes/linings against the backing-plate. The springs provide a flexible grip so that the shoes/linings will still be able to slide back and forth across the surface of the backing-plate. Tools Needed Specialized brake spring tool or - Pliers / needle nose locking pliers - Duct Tape (optional) Removal The hold-down spring must first be compressed so that the tip of the retaining pin is cleared of the spring. - The spring is then rotated so that the slot in top of the spring lines up with the tip of the retaining pin. NOTE: Be sure to hold the retaining pin from the rear of the backing-plate to prevent the pin from rotating with the spring. - The hold-down spring can then be released and the pin should slide through the slot in the top of the spring. - A specialized brake spring tool makes the job very simple. The tool firmly grips the surface of the hold-down spring while providing a clear view of the pin/slot relationship. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Brake Spring Removal and Installation > Page 2953 Hold-down Spring Tool Conventional pliers or needle nose locking pliers will work if a brake spring tool is not available. - Grasp the top the the spring with the plier, compress, and rotate. CAUTION: Excessive pressure can easily distort the top of the spring. Any distortion widens the slot which can cause the pin to pop out during normal operation. If the slot appears distorted or widened it must be replaced. Installation While holding the brake shoe against the backing-plate, insert the retaining pin from the rear of the backing-plate through the appropriate hole in the brake shoe webbing. Verify the shoe is resting squarely on the contact pads of the backing-plate. NOTE: A strip of duct tape placed across the backside of the pin and backing-plate will help keep the pin from inadvertently falling falling out and will free up a hand to help steady the shoe during the next step. - Place the hold-down spring and washers over the pin. - With the thumb of one hand hold the shoe steady while reaching around the backing-plate to hold the retaining pin steady. - Use your other hand to simultaneously compress and align the slot of the hold-down spring with the pin. - When the slot and pin are aligned, further compress the spring to clear the tip of the pin and then rotate the spring 90 degrees. - The slot and tip of the pin should now be opposing each other at a 90 degree angle. - Verify the tip of the retaining pin is locked into the indents on the surface of the hold-down spring. This will keep the retaining pin from twisting and inadvertently popping out. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Brake Spring Removal and Installation > Page 2954 RETURN SPRINGS Purpose Drum brake systems maintain a constant residual pressure on the wheel cylinders. Return springs overcome this residual pressure and keep the shoes/linings from contacting the drum when not in use. Return springs also overcome the resistance encountered by the shoes/linings as they are retracted across the contact pads on the backing-plate. Return springs can be separated into two categories, shoe-to-shoe and shoe-to-anchor pin. Tools Needed To remove and install return springs, three separate tool are useful. These three tools are often combined into a single pair of "brake pliers". Return Spring Tool Shoe-to-Anchor Pin These springs are attached at the brake shoe webbing (two 90 degree bends in the shank of the spring slide through and under webbing) and hook around the anchor pin. Removal A brake spring tool is inserted over the top of the anchor pin and rotated - As you rotate the tool a notch on the bottom side of tool slides under the spring and lifts it up and over the anchor pin. - The other end of the spring should now just pull up and out of the hole in the brake shoe webbing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Brake Spring Removal and Installation > Page 2955 NOTE: Carefully note the color of the spring and which hole it came out of. Liquid typewriting eraser or nail polish can be very useful in marking the appropriate hole for later installation. Installation Install the spring into the brake shoe webbing first. The two 90 degree bends should slide into the hole and lie flat, locking the spring to the webbing. - Slide the brake spring tool through the looped end of the spring and then hook the notched end of the tool over the anchor pin. - Pivot the tool upwards to stretch the spring over the anchor pin (a light film of grease on the backside of the brake tool will help the spring slide over and onto the anchor pin). - Be careful not to over-extend the spring. WARNING: Do not attempt to help the spring over the anchor pin with your fingers. Should the return spring slip off the tool it could seriously lacerate your hand. Shoe-to-Shoe Return Springs Removal Note the color and relationship of the spring and the holes in the brake shoe webbing it is attached to. - Using a pair of brake spring pliers, slide the hooked end of the pliers around and under one end of the spring. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Brake Spring Removal and Installation > Page 2956 - Place the pointed tip of the pliers onto the brake shoe lining surface directly across from the spring (if the shoes are to be reused, place the tip into a rivet hole or place a thin sheet of wood between the linings and pointed tip). - Squeeze the pliers and lift the return spring from the hole. - Release the pliers slowly and remove the other end of the spring. Installation Use the same technique for installing the spring as was used for removing it. - If a rivet hole is not available, place a thin sheet of wood between the lining and pointed end of the tool. - A pair of needle nosed pliers may be helpful for guiding the end of the return spring into the hole. WARNING: Do not attempt to help the spring into the hole with your fingers. Should the return spring slip off the tool it could seriously lacerate your hand. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Brake Spring Removal and Installation > Page 2957 Brake Shoe: Fundamentals and Basics Notes, Warnings, and Hints PRIOR TO REMOVING THE SHOES - Clean the shoes, hardware, and backing-plate thoroughly for the following reasons. Initially the springs will appear black (from brake dust). The springs are actually color coded and it is very important to reinstall the springs in the correct location. - The shoes and hardware will need to be cleaned to determine if an overheating condition has occurred (discolored bluish-purple). - Inhaling brake dust is VERY HAZARDOUS TO YOUR HEALTH. WARNING: Do not use compressed air to clean the brake assembly. - Verify the Leading and Trailing shoes are installed in the correct relationship. - Verify the new brake components exactly match the old ones. DURING REMOVAL - If there is any possibility that the shoes may reused, remove any drip pans that may be under the brake assembly and handle the shoes carefully when removing. NOTE: WORK ON ONE SIDE AT A TIME (unless you are very familiar with the system). The other side may then be used as a model for reassembling. INSTALLATION - Clean and lubricate the backing-plate contact pads with a high temperature silicone lubricant. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Brake Spring Removal and Installation > Page 2958 - Verify the Leading and Trailing shoes are installed in the correct relationship. - Any contamination should be removed from the new shoes immediately. If very light hand sanding will not remove the contamination the shoes should be discared. - When replacing shoes/linings or drums always replace both sides per axle. If only one side is replaced a steering pull may develop during braking. - If brake hardware is being replaced, verify that both the color and shape of the new springs match the old springs. - Prior to reinstalling the drum, the automatic adjuster will need to be backed off to accommodate for the increased thickness of the new shoes/linings. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Cylinder: Specifications Front Disc 2.94 in Rear Drum 0.937 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal For additional information see Notes, Warnings, and Hints. See: Fundamentals and Basics 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove drum. 4. Remove brake shoes. 5. Disconnect hydraulic line at wheel cylinder. CAUTION: Do not pull metal line away from cylinder, as this may kink or bend line. Line will separate from cylinder when cylinder is moved away from brake backing plate. 6. Remove wheel cylinder-to-brake plate attaching screws, then the wheel cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2964 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation For additional information see Notes, Warnings, and Hints. See: Fundamentals and Basics 1. Wipe end of hydraulic line to remove any foreign matter, then place wheel cylinder in position. Enter tubing into cylinder and start threads on fitting. 2. Install wheel cylinder bolts and tighten to backing plate. 3. Tighten brake line. 4. Install brake shoes. 5. Install brake drum. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly. 7. Bleed the brake system. 8. Adjust parking brake. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2965 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Rebuild For additional information see Notes, Warnings, and Hints. See: Fundamentals and Basics Fig. 8 Disassembled View Of Wheel Cylinder (typical) 1. Remove boots, pistons, springs and cups from the wheel cylinder. 2. Clean all parts with brake fluid. 3. Inspect cylinder bore. A scored bore may be honed as long as the diameter is not increased by more than 0.127 mm (0.005 inch). Replace worn or damaged parts as necessary. 4. Ensure hands are clean before proceeding with assembly. Lubricate cylinder wall and rubber cups with brake fluid, then install springs, cups, pistons and boots in housing. 5. Install wheel cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2966 Wheel Cylinder: Fundamentals and Basics REMOVAL - Wheel cylinder retaining bolts, brake line fittings, and bleeder screws are often heavily corroded. Prior to starting the job you should spray these with a penetrating oil. - A line (flare nut) wrench should be used when loosening the brake line fittings. These fittings round off easily. OVERHAUL - Light amounts of corrosion within the cylinder bore and on the piston may be removed with crocus cloth. - Pitting and heavy corrosion should be removed with a hone. When honing the hone should be inserted and withdrawn quickly to achieve a 45 degree crosshatch. - Closely inspect the areas of the cylinder where the pistons seals contact. It is very important these areas are absolutely free of deposits, corrosion, or pitting. - Remove the bleeder screw and verify that the passage is clear. - Leave the bleeder open when installing pistons and cups into the cylinder bore. If the bleeder is closed a large amount of air will be forced into the brake lines. - Use brake assembly lubricant to coat the cylinder bore, pistons, and cups. Clean brake fluid is an acceptable lubricant when assemblying the wheel-cylinder but brake assembly lubricant is much slicker and minimizes the chance that the cups will be damaged. WARNING: Do not use a petroleum based grease or oil to lubricate the wheel-cylinder components. This will cause the seals and cups to swell and deteriorate. - When reassemblying the wheel-cylinder it is helpful to follow this sequence: 1. Rear cup (verify the cup is inserted properly, flat side towards the piston, concave side towards the center) 2. Rear piston 3. Rear dust cap (this prevents the rear cup and piston from popping back out when the spring and front components are installed). 4. Spring 5. Front cup 6. Front piston 7. Front dust cap INSTALLATION Attach the brake fluid line fitting loosely to the wheel-cylinder prior to inserting and tightening the retaining bolts. The brake fluid line fitting is much easier to attach and start turning with the wheel-cylinder loose. WARNING: Don't forget to tighten the brake line fitting after the retaining bolts are tightened. - Leave the wheel-cylinder bleeder screw open and place a drip pan under the rear brake assembly. Refill the master-cylinder with new brake fluid and let the fluid gravity bleed through the open bleeder screw. When brake fluid begins to drip from the bleeder, close the bleeder screw. NOTE: The brake system will still need to be flushed and bled, but this makes starting the process much easier. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Hydraulic System Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Hydraulic System Bleeding Manual Bleeding 1. If vehicle is equipped with power brakes, remove vacuum reserve by applying brakes several times with engine off. 2. Fill master cylinder reservoirs with suitable brake fluid. Be sure to always keep master cylinder reservoirs at least half full during entire bleeding procedure. 3. If master cylinder is suspected to have air in the bore, it must be bled first, as follows: a. Disconnect forward brake pipe connection at master cylinder. b. Allow brake fluid to fill master cylinder bore until it begins to flow from forward pipe connector port. c. Connect and tighten forward brake pipe at master cylinder. d. Depress brake pedal slowly one time and hold, then loosen forward brake pipe connection at master cylinder to purge air from bore. Tighten connection, then release brake pedal slowly. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat sequence, including 15 second wait, until all air is purged from bore. e. Bleed rear bore of master cylinder as front bore was bled. 4. Bleed right rear brake as follows: a. Depress brake pedal slowly one time and hold. b. Loosen bleeder valve to purge air from brake, then tighten bleeder valve and slowly release pedal. c. Wait 15 seconds, then repeat sequence, including 15 second wait, until all air is purged. 5. Bleed left rear, right front, and left front brakes, in that order, using same method as for right rear brake. 6. Check brake operation and ensure pedal is firm. Also check master cylinder fluid level and add fluid as necessary. 7. Turn off brake warning light by applying moderate pressure to brake pedal several times. 8. Road test vehicle. Fig. 1 Installing Pressure Bleeder Adapter Pressure Bleeding 1. Loosen, then slightly retighten bleeder valves at all four wheels. Repair any broken, stripped or frozen valves at this time. 2. Using a diaphragm type pressure bleeder, install suitable bleeder adapter to master cylinder, Fig. 1. 3. Charge bleeder ball to 20-25 psi, then depress and hold valve stem on combination valve. 4. Connect pressure bleeder line to adapter. 5. Open line valve on pressure bleeder, then depress bleed-off valve on adapter until a small amount of brake fluid is released. 6. Raise and support vehicle. 7. Bleed right rear, left rear, right front and left front brakes, in that order. 8. Place transparent tube over bleeder valve, then allow tube to hang down into transparent container. Ensure end of tube is submerged in clean brake fluid. 9. Open bleeder valve 1/2 to 3/4 turn and allow fluid to flow into container until all air is purged from line. Flushing Hydraulic System If brake fluid is old, rusty or contaminated, or whenever new parts are installed in the hydraulic system, the system must be flushed. Bleed brakes, allowing at least one quart of clean brake fluid to pass through system. Any rubber parts in hydraulic system which were exposed to contaminated fluid must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Hydraulic System Bleeding > Page 2972 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bleeding THIS PROCEDURE CAN BE PERFORMED WITH MASTER CYLINDER ON OR OFF VEHICLE. 1. Disconnect brake lines at master cylinder, if necessary. 2. Connect suitable lengths of brake lines to master cylinder and immerse other ends of lines in master cylinder reservoirs. 3. Apply master cylinder pushrod or brake pedal with full strokes until air bubbles have disappeared in reservoirs. It may require 20-30 applications to fully eliminate air bubbles. 4. Remove bleeding lines from master cylinder, then install master cylinder on vehicle, if necessary, and connect brake lines. 5. Fill the reservoir. Normal bleeding procedures should be followed after the master cylinder is installed. For additional information see Bench Bleeding Notes. See: Brake Master Cylinder/Fundamentals and Basics Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 2973 Brake Bleeding: Fundamentals and Basics BENCH BLEEDING Why A master-cylinder will develop little or no pressure if air is trapped in cylinder bore. Normal brake bleeding will not remove air trapped within the master-cylinder. How Clamp the master-cylinder securely in a vice. It is usually best to clamp the side of the vice onto the flat surface that is used to secure the master-cylinder to the brake booster. There are two basic methods for bleeding master-cylinder, one utilizes stroking the master-cylinder to expel air from the cylinder bore while the other utilizes a large syringe to backflush fluid from the outlet ports to the reservoir. Stroking Fill the master-cylinder with clean brake fluid. - The brake line fittings on the master-cylinder should be capped or plugged. NOTE: Special "bench bleeding" plastic fittings are available which allow for recirculating the brake fluid back into the reservoir. - Using a dull object, slowly stroke the master-cylinder piston, air and brake fluid will be expelled from the brake line fittings. Prior to releasing the piston plug or cap the outlet ports. - Repeat this procedure 8-10 times or until no air is emitted from the outlet ports. - When finished, cap the outlet ports and install the master-cylinder. Syringe Fill the syringe (one especially designed for brake bleeding) with clean brake fluid. - Insert the end of the syringe into one of the outlet ports on the master-cylinder. - Slowly compress the syringe and back flush the brake fluid through the master-cylinder. - A combination of air and brake fluid will be emitted from the inlet port in the fluid reservoir. - Repeat this procedure until only brake fluid is emitted into the reservoir. Cap the outlet ports and install the master-cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Manual Clarified, Caliper To Knuckle Clearance Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Manual Clarified, Caliper To Knuckle Clearance 85-38 5 (V) FEB., 1985 Subject: BRAKE CALIPERS TO KNUCKLE CLEARANCE Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The front caliper to knuckle clearance given in the service manuals may be misinterpreted. The indicator clearance of 0.13 - 0.30 mm (0.005 - 0.012 in.) represents an ideal condition where the caliper is centered in the knuckle opening. In actual practice, braking action moves the caliper against the knuckle which may result in little or no clearance on one end of the caliper/knuckle assembly. The clearance at each end of the caliper should be measured individually and added together to determine the total caliper to knuckle clearance. The total clearance should be 0.26 0.60 mm (0.010 - 0.024 in.). Reference Section 5 of the Shop Manual. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Bendix Single Piston Sliding Caliper Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Bendix Single Piston Sliding Caliper Fig. 1 Disc brake assembly The Bendix single piston sliding caliper disc brake is standard equipment on some truck applications, while on other trucks it is used only in Hydro-Boost power brake applications with both front disc brakes and 4 wheel disc brakes. On 4 wheel disc brakes, the front and rear systems are identical. The sliding caliper attaches to and slides on the steering knuckle. The caliper assembly is held in place with a support key and spring Fig. 1. A screw prevents the key from sliding on the steering knuckle. The linings are riveted to the brake pads. The inboard and outboard brake pads are not interchangeable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Bendix Single Piston Sliding Caliper > Page 2980 Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Delco-Moraine Single Piston Caliper Fig. 1 Exploded View The Delco-Moraine Single Piston Caliper is held in place by two mounting bolts. The caliper assembly, Fig. 1, slides on its mounting surfaces. Upon brake application, hydraulic pressure against the piston forces the inboard pad against the inboard side of the disc. This action causes the caliper assembly to slide until the outboard pad comes into contact with the disc, which in turn creates a slowing or stopping action. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2981 Brake Caliper: Testing and Inspection Should it become necessary to remove the caliper for installation of new parts, clean all parts in denatured alcohol or brake parts cleaner, wipe dry using lint-free cloths. Using compressed air, blow out drilled passages and bores. Check dust boots for punctures or tears. If punctures or tears are evident, new boots should be installed upon reassembly. Inspect piston bores in both housings for scoring or pitting. Bores that show light scratches or corrosion can usually be cleaned with crocus cloth. However, bores that have deep scratches or scoring may be honed, provided the diameter of the bore is not increased more than 0.05 mm (0.002 inch). If the bore does not clean up within this specification, a new caliper housing should be installed (black stains on the bore walls are caused by piston seals and will do no harm). When using a hone, be sure to install the hone baffle before honing bore. The baffle is used to protect the hone stones from damage. Use extreme care in cleaning the caliper after honing. Remove all dust and grit by flushing the caliper with denatured alcohol or brake parts cleaner. Wipe dry with clean lint-free cloth and then clean a second time in the same manner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Identifying Caliper Types Fig. 6 Exploded View BENDIX SINGLE PISTON SLIDING CALIPER Type 1 Exploded View DELCO-MORAINE SINGLE PISTON CALIPER Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2984 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Bendix Single Piston Sliding Caliper Removal For additional information see Removal Notes. See: Fundamentals and Basics Fig. 2 Bottoming position in bore 1. Siphon two-thirds of brake fluid from master cylinder reservoir serving front disc brakes. 2. Raise vehicle, support on jack stands and remove front wheels. 3. Bottom the caliper piston in bore. Insert a screwdriver between inboard pad and piston, then pry piston back into bore. The piston can also be bottomed in the bore with a large C-clamp, Fig. 2. Fig. 3 Removing caliper support key 4. Remove support key retaining screw. 5. Drive caliper support key and spring from steering knuckle with a suitable drift and hammer, Fig. 3. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2985 Removing Caliper From Disc 6. Lift caliper from anchor plate and off rotor, Fig. 4. Hang caliper from coil spring with wire. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 7. Remove inboard brake pad from steering knuckle, then the anti-rattle spring from the brake pad. 8. Remove outboard brake pad from caliper. It may be necessary to loosen the brake pad with a hammer to permit pad removal. Rebuild Fig. 6 Exploded View DISASSEMBLY 1. Drain brake fluid from caliper. Fig. 5 Removing caliper piston 2. Position caliper with shop cloths, Fig. 5, and apply compressed air to fluid inlet port to ease piston from bore. Do not attempt to catch piston or to protect it when applying compressed air, since personal injury is possible. 3. Remove boot from piston, then the piston seal from bore, Fig. 6. Use wooden or plastic tool to remove piston seal since metal tools may damage piston. 4. Remove bleeder screw. ASSEMBLY NOTICE: Clean all parts in denatured alcohol or brake parts cleaner before assembly and dry them with dry compressed air 1. Coat square cut piston seal with clean brake fluid, then install seal into piston bore. Work seal into groove with clean fingers. 2. Install and torque bleeder screw to 100 inch lbs. Fig. 7 Installing Caliper Piston Boot 3. Lubricate boot and tool J-24548 with clean brake fluid, then place dust seal on tool, allowing 1/4 inch of tool to extend past small lip of boot, Fig. 7. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2986 4. Place dust seal and tool over piston bore, then work large lip of boot into seal groove, Fig. 8. Ensure dust seal is fully seated. Fig. 8 Installing piston in caliper 5. Lubricate caliper piston and insert through tool. Center piston in bore and use a hammer handle to apply pressure to install piston halfway into bore, Fig. 8. 6. Remove tool J-24548 and seat small lip of boot in caliper piston groove, then bottom piston in bore. Installation For additional information see Installation Notes. See: Fundamentals and Basics Fig. 6 Exploded View 1. Clean and lubricate sliding surfaces of caliper and the anchor plate with Delco Silicone Lube, P/N 5459912, or equivalent. 2. Install inboard brake pad anti-rattle spring on brake pad rear flange, and ensure looped section of clip is facing away from rotor. 3. Install inboard brake pad in steering knuckle. 4. Install outboard brake pad in caliper. Ensure pad flange is seated fully into outboard arms of caliper. It may be necessary to use a C-clamp to seat the pad. 5. Place caliper assembly over rotor and position in steering knuckle. Ensure dust boot is not torn or improperly positioned by inboard brake pad during caliper installation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2987 Installing The Caliper Key Brake Caliper 6. Align caliper with steering knuckle abutment surfaces, then insert support key and spring between abutment surfaces at the trailing end of caliper and steering knuckle. With a hammer and brass drift, drive caliper support key and spring into position, then install and torque support key retaining screw to 16.2-24.3 Nm (12-18 ft lb). 7. Refill master cylinder to within one inch of rim. Press brake pedal several times to seat pads. 8. Install front wheels and lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2988 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Delco-Moraine Single Piston Caliper Removal For additional information see Removal Notes. See: Fundamentals and Basics 1. Siphon enough brake fluid out of the master cylinder to bring fluid level to 1/3 full to avoid fluid overflow when the caliper piston is pushed back into its bore. 2. Raise vehicle and remove front wheels. Fig. 2 Compressing piston & shoes with C-clamp 3. Using a C-clamp, push piston back into its bore. Fig. 3 Caliper & Mounting Bolts 4. Remove two mounting bolts and lift caliper away from disc. Hang caliper from coil spring with wire. CAUTION: Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. Rebuild Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2989 Fig. 1 Exploded View DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove caliper. 2. Disconnect hose from steel line, remove U-shaped retainer and withdraw hose from frame support bracket. 3. After cleaning outside of caliper, remove brake hose and discard copper gasket. 4. Drain brake fluid from caliper. Fig. 4 Removing Piston From Caliper 5. Pad caliper interior with clean shop towels and use compressed air to remove piston, Fig. 5. Use just enough air pressure to ease piston out of bore. Do not blow piston out of bore. WARNING: Do not place fingers in front of piston in an attempt to catch or protect it when applying compressed air. This could result in serious injury. Removing Dust Boot Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2990 6. Carefully pry dust boot out of bore. 7. Using a small piece of wood or plastic, remove piston seal from bore. CAUTION: Do not use a metal tool of any kind to remove seal as it may damage bore. 8. Remove bleeder screw. ASSEMBLY NOTICE: Clean all parts in denatured alcohol or brake parts cleaner before assembly and dry the parts with dry compressed air. 1. Inspect caliper bore for scoring, nicks, corrosion or wear. Replace caliper housing if bore will not clean up with crocus cloth. 2. Lubricate caliper piston bore and new piston seal with clean brake fluid. Position seal in bore groove. Fig. 6 Installing boot to piston 3. Lubricate piston with clean brake fluid and assemble a new boot into the groove in the piston so the fold faces the open end of the piston, Fig. 6. 4. Using care not to unseat the seal, insert piston into bore and force the piston to the bottom of the bore. Fig. 7 Installing boot to caliper 5. Position dust boot in caliper counterbore and install, Fig. 7. Check the boot installation to be sure the retaining ring molded into the boot is not bent and that the boot is installed below the caliper face and evenly all around. If the boot is not fully installed, dirt and moisture may enter the bore and cause corrosion. 6. Install the brake hose in the caliper using a new copper gasket. 7. Install pads and caliper assembly. Installation For additional information see Installation Notes. See: Fundamentals and Basics Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2991 Retracting Piston 1. Retract piston in caliper bore and position caliper over disc, lining up holes in caliper with holes in mounting bracket. If brake hose was not disconnected during removal, be sure not to kink it during installation. Caliper Mounting Bolts 2. Start mounting bolts through sleeves in inboard caliper ears and the mounting bracket, making sure ends of bolts pass under ears on inboard pad. NOTICE: If the caliper was removed for service, make sure it is installed on the correct knuckle. The caliper bleed screw should be positioned on top of caliper when assembled on vehicle. 3. Push mounting bolts through to engage holes in the outboard ears. Then thread mounting bolts into bracket. 4. Torque mounting bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft lb). Caliper Knuckle Clearances 5. Measure the clearance between the caliper and the steering knuckle. The clearance at each end of the caliper should be measured individually and Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Identifying Caliper Types > Page 2992 added together. this total should be between 0.26-0.60 mm (0.010-0.024 inch). 6. If brake hose was removed, reconnect it and bleed the brakes. 7. Install wheels and tires, lower vehicle and add brake fluid to master cylinder to bring level to 1/4 inch from top. WARNING: Before moving vehicle, pump brake pedal several times to be sure it is firm. Do not move vehicle until a firm pedal is obtained. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Removal Notes Brake Caliper: Fundamentals and Basics Removal Notes When Removing the Caliper, Remember... - Prior to removing the calipers, remove/siphon brake fluid from master-cylinder until the reservoir is only 1/3 full. - Brake fluid will remove paint and damage electrical connections. Use a drip pan and fender covers to protect the vehicle's finish and electrical system. - Always replace all brake linings on an axle. Never replace only one wheel. Unequal lining thickness between wheels on the same axle will result in a strong steering pull when the brakes are applied. - Work on one side at a time. If you forget how to reassemble the parts you can always use the other side as a model. - When forcing the piston back into the caliper, open the bleeder valve first. Corrosion and other deposits accumulate inside of the caliper. If the bleeder valve is not opened when the piston is forced back into the caliper, these deposits will be forced back through the brake lines and into the master-cylinder. When pushing the pistons back into the caliper with the bleeder screw open, a stream of brake fluid will be expelled from the bleeder screw for 2-3 feet. Use a drip pan and be careful not to "shoot" brake fluid onto the vehicle's finish. A cleaner method is to use a piece of clear plastic hose and a glass or plastic jar to catch the expelled fluid. - Upon removal, Do Not allow the calipers to hang by the flexible brake hoses. The brake hoses can be damaged easily by this practice. These hoses are double walled, damage to the interior pressure hose will not be visible. - Do not depress the brake pedal with either caliper removed from the rotor. The caliper pistons will be inadvertently expelled from the caliper. If this occurs rebuild or replace the caliper, do not attempt to insert the piston back into the caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Removal Notes > Page 2995 Brake Caliper: Fundamentals and Basics Installation Notes WHEN INSTALLING CALIPERS AND PADS, REMEMBER... - Clean and lubricate caliper slide joint/pins with high temperature silicone grease: Unlike drum brakes, disc brakes do not utilize a spring to withdraw the pads/linings when the brake pedal is released. Disc brakes rely on the elasticity of the piston seals, and the unrestricted movement of the caliper slide assemblies to release the brakes. If the slide joints/pins are not cleaned and lubricated properly the disc brake linings will drag upon the release of the brake pedal. This will result in overheated brakes and premature brake wear. Disc Brake Mechanical Force Diagram NOTE: Floating calipers require free and unrestricted movement on the caliper mounting. Floating or sliding calipers have pistons only on one side of the rotor. The first part of the piston's travel forces the inner pad against the rotor, then further travel forces the movable part of the caliper to pull the outer pad against the rotor. High temperature silicone lubricant must be used. Low temperature grease can melt and contaminate the pads and rotors, or can bake into a very hard substance which binds the slides. Petroleum based grease can cause the slide boots to soften and swell. Work on one side at a time. If you forget how to reassemble the parts you can always use the other side as a model. Anti-squeal Coating - Apply an anti-squeal coating to the back side of the pads/linings. This coatings acts as an insulator to dampen high frequency vibrations that are generated during normal braking. These compounds are highly effective in preventing brake squeal. - Many professional repair shops recommend always rebuilding or replacing the calipers when replacing the brake linings, because: When the pistons are forced back into the calipers, the piston seals are dragged across any corrosion or abrasives that may be deposited on the inside of the caliper. Damage to the seals may not be initially evident. As the new brake linings begin to wear, the piston is gradually withdrawn from the caliper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Removal Notes > Page 2996 This results in the piston seals again being dragged across the layer of corrosion and deposits. Calipers which are not rebuilt or replaced have a higher probability of sticking or leaking. - Check to ensure the bleeder screw is not frozen prior to reinstalling caliper. Freeing a stuck bleeder screw is much easier with the caliper removed from the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brake System - Service Information Brake Hose/Line: Technical Service Bulletins Brake System - Service Information Number: 84-113 Section: 5 (V) Date: April, 1984 Subject: BRAKE SYSTEM SERVICE INFORMATION Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS BRAKE HOSE HANDLING When servicing the brake system, it is important to never let components hang from brake hoses. Some brake hoses have protective rings or covers to prevent direct contact of the hose with other chassis parts. Besides causing possible structural damage to the hose, excessive tension could cause the hose rings to move out of the their design locations. PARKING BRAKE CABLES Some 1984 models are equipped with new parking brake cable assemblies. The wire strand is coated with a black plastic material which slides against nylon seals inside the conduit end fittings. This is for corrosion protection and reduced parking brake effort. Handling of these cables during servicing of the parking brake system requires a little extra care. Damage to the plastic coating will reduce corrosion protection and if the damaged area passes through the seal, increase parking brake effort could result. Contact of the coating with sharp-edged tools, or with "unfriendly" surfaces of the vehicle underbody, should therefore be avoided. PARKING BRAKE ADJUSTMENT To prevent damage to the parking brake threaded adjusting rod when removing the nut or adjusting the parking brake, the following is recommended: A. Before attempting to turn the adjusting nut, clean the exposed threads on the threaded rod on both sides of the nut. Apply lubricant to the cleaned threads. B. Rotate nut to tighten system until the threads under the nut are uncovered. Clean and apply lube to these threads. Proceed with disassembly or adjustment procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Description and Operation These vehicles use either a two function or three function combination valve. Some vehicles use a height sensitive proportioning valve in addition to the combination valve. The two function combination valve consists of a metering valve and a brake failure warning switch. The hydraulic brake lines are routed through this valve to the wheel cylinders or calipers. The metering portion of this valve assists in providing balanced front to rear braking by delaying full hydraulic fluid pressure to the front disc brakes until the rear drum brakes overcome return spring tension and the linings contact the drums. The brake failure warning switch portion of the valve activates the brake warning lamp when there is a loss of pressure in either the front or the rear braking system. The three function combination valve consists of a metering valve, a brake failure warning switch, and a proportioning valve. The metering valve and brake failure warning switch operate the same as those in the two function combination valve previously described. The proportioning section of the valve proportions outlet pressure to the rear brakes after a certain rear input pressure has been reached, preventing rear wheel lock-up. The height sensitive proportioning valve provides ideal brake balance according to weight at rear axle. This valve is mounted on the frame and responds to changes in vehicle trim height in relation to rear axle load. Mechanical linkage connects the valve to a bracket attached to the rear axle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3004 Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Adjustments Fig. 9 Height Sensing Proportioning Valve Fig. 10 Adjustment Gauge Installation The height sensing proportioning valve must be adjusted whenever the valve and/or linkage is disassembled or removed for service. In addition, adjustment should be checked if excessive rear wheel lock-up is experienced with a lower than desired brake application rate when vehicle is at or near maximum GVWR. 1. Raise and support vehicle leaving wheels on, and allow axle to hang free (no load condition). 2. Remove lever retaining nut and disconnect lever from valve shaft, Fig. 1. 3. Rotate valve shaft to permit installation of correct adjustment gauge, Fig. 2, ensuring that ``D'' shaped hole of gauge is properly seated on valve shaft and that gauge tang engages mounting hole in valve. Adjustment gauges vary depending upon vehicle application. Correct gauge must be used to ensure proper operation of braking system. 4. Install lever on valve shaft by pressing plastic bushing and clip assembly over shaft serrations using C-clamp or suitable pliers. Do not press lever onto shaft using retaining nut, as adjustment of valve will be disturbed. 5. Install lever retaining nut and torque to 70---98 inch lbs. 6. Cut tang off adjustment gauge and allow valve to rotate freely. 7. Lower vehicle and test brakes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Some vehicles use a conventional tandem master cylinder with two hydraulic pistons operating in line. The primary piston controls the front brake system and the secondary piston controls the rear brake system. Other models use a master cylinder that operates the same as the conventional master cylinder, but also incorporates a quick take-up feature in the rear chamber to reduce excessive pedal travel which may result from increased fluid displacement required to move the low drag caliper piston out against the rotor. The quick take-up uses a spring-loaded ball check valve to hold pressure in the large diameter rear chamber when the brakes are first applied. At initial application, movement of the rear piston causes fluid to be displaced forward past the primary piston seal into the primary high pressure chamber. At a specified pressure, the ball unseats and fluid from the large rear bore is displaced past the bore into the reservoir. When the brake pedal is released, suction generated in the large bore chamber replenishes its fluid supply by drawing fluid from the reservoir around the quick take-up lip seal and through a small bleed orifice in the ball seat. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3008 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION Inspect for Leakage NOTE: The master-cylinder should be cleaned thoroughly prior to inspection (several days preferably). Spilled brake fluid can be easily confused with leakage. Piston Seals Leakage around the piston seals will seep out from the end of the cylinder and leak down the outside of the brake booster. - Inspect for signs of seepage or bubbled paint on the brake booster. - If any leakage is detected the master-cylinder should be replaced or overhauled Brake Line Fittings While someone is applying pressure to the brake pedal, inspect the brake line fittings on the master-cylinder for leakage. - If the fittings are leaking they should be disassembled and inspected. Reservoir to Cylinder Gasket Inspect the gasket for signs of leakage or hardening and cracking. Overhaul or replace the master-cylinder if any leakage is indicated. Inspect for Oil Contamination. - Inspect the rubber gasket on the inside of the master-cylinder lid. If the gasket is swollen or bloated, the brake fluid is contaminated with oil. - Siphon or scoop a small amount of brake fluid out of the master-cylinder and place into a styrofoam cup filled 2/3 of the way with water. Brake fluid will mix with the water while oil contaminants will float on the surface and dissolve the styrofoam. NOTE: If any oil contamination is present ALL brake components containing rubber seals will need to be replaced or overhauled. This includes the master-cylinder, both front calipers, both rear wheel cylinders, and all flexible brake hoses. Verify Hold-Down Bolts Are Tight - While someone is applying and releasing pressure to the brake pedal, verify the the master-cylinder is tightly secured to the brake booster. Retighten hold-down bolts if necessary. Functional Checks WARNING: Always bleed the entire brake system and verify the rear brakes are properly adjusted prior to diagnosing a master-cylinder as defective. For additional information on master-cylinder / brake pedal relationship see Fundamentals and Basics. See: Fundamentals and Basics Check Related Systems Check for proper brake booster operation 1. With the engine "OFF", depress and release the brake pedal 4-5 times (this bleeds off the vacuum reserve in the booster). 2. Depress the brake pedal firmly and start the engine. If the pedal goes down slightly the brake booster is assisting in brake operation. If the pedal does not go down slightly the brake booster is not assisting in brake operation and should be diagnosed for problems. - Check and adjust rear brakes. - Check all brake lines and brake assemblies for leakage. Repair all deficiencies with related systems prior to diagnosing the master-cylinder as defective. Check Brake Pedal Travel (Non-Antilock Brake Systems Only) Fully depress the brake pedal and check for the following: The pedal should have a 75% reserve. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3009 Pedal Reserve Checks - The pedal should be firm and not leak down. Prior to replacing a master-cylinder for poor pedal travel or feel verify the following: There were no problems with any of the related systems. - The entire brake system has been bled. - Rear brakes are properly adjusted. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Installation Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Installation Master Cylinder 1. Bench bleed master cylinder. 2. Install master cylinder and mounting bolts. 3. Connect brake lines to master cylinder. 4. Connect all wire connectors to master cylinder (if equipped). 5. On models with manual brakes, connect master cylinder push rod to brake pedal. 6. On all models, Bleed brakes. For additional information see Notes, Warnings, and Hints. See: Fundamentals and Basics Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Installation > Page 3012 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Rebuild Composite Type Fig. 2 Exploded View Of Master Cylinder Fig. 3 Exploded View Of Master Cylinder DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove master cylinder from vehicle. 2. Remove reservoir cover and diaphragm. Discard old brake fluid in reservoir. 3. Inspect cover and diaphragm. Replace if cut, cracked or deformed. 4. Remove fluid level switch and proportioner valve assembly, if equipped. 5. Depress primary piston and remove lock ring. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Installation > Page 3013 6. Plug primary fluid outlet (outlet nearest to cowl when master cylinder is installed), then apply compressed air into secondary fluid outlet to remove primary and secondary pistons. 7. Remove spring retainer and seals from secondary piston. 8. Clamp master cylinder in a vise, then remove reservoir using a pry bar. Remove reservoir grommets. 9. Inspect master cylinder bore for corrosion. CAUTION: Do not use abrasive material on master cylinder bore. Replace if bore is corroded. ASSEMBLY Clean all parts not included in repair kit with brake fluid. CAUTION: Do not dry with compressed air. Lubricate all rubber parts with clean brake fluid prior to installation. 1. Lubricate new reservoir grommets with silicone brake lube, then press grommets into master cylinder body. Ensure grommets are properly seated. 2. Lay reservoir upside down on flat, hard surface. Press master cylinder body onto reservoir using rocking motion. 3. Install new seals on secondary piston, then the spring retainer. 4. Install spring and secondary piston assembly into cylinder. 5. Install primary piston. Depress primary piston into cylinder, then install lock ring. 6. Install fluid level switch and proportioner valve assembly, if equipped. 7. Fit diaphragm into reservoir cover, then install cover onto reservoir. 8. Install master cylinder in vehicle. Cast Iron Type Fig. 4 Exploded View Of Master Cylinder. Fig. 5 Secondary Piston & Seals. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove master cylinder from vehicle. 2. Clean outside of master cylinder, then remove reservoir cover and diaphragm. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Installation > Page 3014 3. Turn master cylinder over, then pump pushrod by hand to remove any remaining brake fluid. 4. Clamp master cylinder in a vise, with vise jaws gripping mounting flange and fluid ports pointing up. CAUTION: Do not clamp master cylinder body in vise. 5. Remove lock ring and primary piston assembly from cylinder bore. 6. Apply compressed air to secondary outlet port to remove secondary piston spring and retainer. 7. Using a 13/64 inch drill, enlarge hole in tube fitting insert of fluid outlet holes. Place a heavy washer over outlet hole, then thread a 1/4 X 20 X 3/4 screw into insert. Tighten screw until insert is unseated, then remove insert, screw and washer. 8. Remove primary and secondary seal from secondary piston. INSPECTION Clean all parts not included in repair kit with brake fluid. CAUTION: Do not dry with compressed air. 1. Inspect cylinder bore for scoring and corrosion. Replace master cylinder if necessary. 2. Polish discolored or stained cylinder with crocus cloth, then rinse in clean brake fluid. Ensure compensating port is clean. ASSEMBLY Lubricate all rubber parts with clean brake fluid prior to installation. 1. With master cylinder in a vise, insert brass tube fitting inserts from overhaul kit into outlet holes. 2. Using spare brake line tube, thread tube nut into outlet hole and turn down until tube fitting insert bottoms into outlet hole. Remove tube nut and inspect outlet hole for burrs. 3. Install inner secondary seal into groove in secondary piston. 4. Install primary seal over end of secondary piston, with flat side of seal against flange of piston. 5. Install outer secondary seal into groove in end of secondary piston. 6. Install secondary piston spring retainer into secondary piston spring, then place the retainer and spring over end of secondary piston, with retainer seated inside lip of primary cup. 7. Hold master cylinder with open end down, then place secondary piston assembly into bore, with spring seated against end of bore. 8. Clamp master cylinder in a vise with open end of bore facing up. 9. Insert new primary piston assembly, spring end first, into bore. 10. Hold primary piston down, then install lock ring in groove on inside of bore. 11. Install new reservoir diaphragm into reservoir cover with beaded side out, then secure cover onto cylinder. 12. Install master cylinder in vehicle. Bleed brakes. Bendix Type Master Cylinder DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove master cylinder from vehicle. 2. Clean outside of master cylinder, then remove reservoir cover and diaphragm. 3. Drain brake fluid from reservoir, then remove reservoir attaching bolts and reservoir. 4. Remove O-ring, compensating valve seals, valve poppets and springs. 5. Depress primary piston, then remove snap ring. 6. Remove primary piston assembly and piston return spring. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Installation > Page 3015 7. Remove secondary piston assembly by applying small amount of air pressure to front compensating valve port. Ensure front port is plugged. 8. Remove secondary spring. CLEANING AND INSPECTION 1. Inspect master cylinder bore for scoring and corrosion. Replace master cylinder if necessary. CAUTION: Do not hone the cylinder bore. The master cylinder has a hard, highly polished cylinder bore. Honing will destroy this surface which will cause rapid wear of rubber cups. 2. Clean all metal parts in denatured alcohol or brake parts cleaner. ASSEMBLY 1. Dip replacement piston assemblies in clean DOT 3 brake fluid for lubrication prior to assembly into cylinder. 2. Install secondary spring. 3. Install secondary piston assembly. 4. Install primary piston return spring and primary piston assembly. 5. Depress primary piston and install snap ring. 6. Install reservoir O-ring and springs. 7. Install valve poppets and compensating valve seals. NOTICE: Depress and hold the primary piston assembly with a smooth rounded end tool. 8. Install reservoir and reservoir retaining bolts. Tighten reservoir retaining bolts to 18 Nm (13 ft lb). 9. Install diaphragm into the cover. 10. Install master cylinder cover. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Installation > Page 3016 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Removal Master Cylinder CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage electrical connections and painted surfaces. Use shop cloths, drip pans and fender covers to prevent brake fluid from contacting these areas. 1. On vehicles with manual brakes, disconnect master cylinder pushrod from brake pedal. 2. On all models, disconnect all wire connectors from master cylinder components. 3. Disconnect brake lines from master cylinder. 4. Remove master cylinder mounting nuts, then the master cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Installation > Page 3017 For additional information see Notes, Warnings, and Hints. See: Fundamentals and Basics Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3018 Brake Master Cylinder: Tools and Equipment BASIC SERVICE (Removal and Installation) - Fender cover (servicing and bleeding a master-cylinder can be a messy process) CAUTION: DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid is very corrosive to the vehicles finish and electrical connections. - Drip pan. - Complete set of combination wrenches or sockets. - Bleeding device: - Pressure bleeder or - Vacuum bleeder or - One-man brake bleeder kit or - Length of clear plastic hose (3/16 inch ID) and a glass jar. Brake Bleeding Setup - Small ruler or depth gauge (for adjusting the pushrod) - Brake adjusting tool (rear brake adjustment should be checked) - Clean shop towels. OPTIONAL - Master Cylinder bleeding kit (contains plastic fittings and hoses used for bleeding master cylinders) - Suction bulb (for removing brake fluid from reservoir) IF MASTER-CYLINDER IS OVERHAULED - Snap-ring pliers - Small pry bar (for separating the reservoir from the cylinder) - Cylinder hone (cast iron cylinders only) - Feeler gauges (for checking piston to cylinder clearance). Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Notes, Warnings, and Hints Brake Master Cylinder: Fundamentals and Basics Notes, Warnings, and Hints REMOVAL WARNING: DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid is very corrosive to your vehicles finish. Removing master cylinders can be a messy process. To prevent or minimize any possible damage perform the following: Siphon all brake fluid from the master-cylinder reservoir prior to removal. - Use a fender cover to protect the vehicles finish. - Use a drip pan to catch all fluid that leaks from the master-cylinder during removal. - Any brake fluid which contacts the vehicles finish should be washed off immediately. - Any brake fluid which drips onto electrical connections should be immediately removed (aerosol brake cleaner works well for this). After the brake lines have been disconnected from the master-cylinder place vacuum caps over ends of the lines to prevent further leakage or contamination. Once the master-cylinder has been removed place it in a drip pan. Although the reservoir is empty, brake fluid trapped within the cylinder bore will continue to slowly leak out. OVERHAUL WARNING: Never hone aluminum cylinders, if deposits cannot be removed with crocus cloth the cylinder should be replaced. Check the cylinder bore for excessive clearance. With the piston installed you should not be able to install a 0.006 inch feeler gauge between piston and cylinder. If the clearance is greater than 0.006 inches the cylinder should be replaced. When installing the piston and seals into the cylinder always use clean brake fluid or assembly lubricant to lubricate the components. INSTALLATION Prior to installation the master-cylinder should be bench bled (this can be done on the vehicle but it is much easier on a workbench. NOTE: Normal brake bleeding procedures will not remove air which is trapped in the cylinder bore area of a master-cylinder. Attach the brake line fittings prior to snugging down the master-cylinder retaining bolts. The fittings are much easier to start turning when the master-cylinder is still loose. WARNING: Remember to tighten the retaining bolts after the brake lines are installed and tightened. When snugging down the retaining bolts, alternately tighten them in small increments. This prevents the master-cylinder or push rod from becoming cocked. Upon installing the master-cylinder the entire brake system (front and rear) will need to be bled. Air enters the brake system as soon as the brake lines are removed. It only requires a very small amount of air in the system to create a soft brake pedal. WARNING: Never test drive a vehicle after a master-cylinder replacement until a firm brake pedal with a 75% reserve is established. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Notes, Warnings, and Hints > Page 3021 Brake Master Cylinder: Fundamentals and Basics Parts Reminder List RECOMMENDED PARTS Basic Service, Replacement New or rebuilt master-cylinder - Fresh/New brake fluid If Overhaul is Required Master cylinder overhaul kit - Brake assembly lubricant Optional Aerosol brake cleaner. New or Rebuilt Master Cylinder Always closely compare the new master-cylinder with the old master-cylinder. Minor variations in the size and depth of the primary piston can result in significant reductions in braking performance. Examine the end of the master-cylinder where the pushrod contacts the piston. The depth and diameters of the pistons should match. Brake Fluid Proper bench bleeding the master-cylinder and flushing the brake system will require a minimum of 16 oz of brake fluid. - Never Mix DOT 3 (light amber in color) with DOT 5 (purple in color). There have been reports of damage to brake system seals when DOT 3 and DOT 5 fluids are mixed - Always store brake fluid in a sealed container. When left open brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air. This reduces the boiling point of the brake fluid and could lead to a soft pedal or brake system failure during prolonged or emergency braking. - Never add automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, or power steering fluid to the master-cylinder. Petroleum based fluids will cause the rubber seals and gaskets in the brake system to swell and leak. Master Cylinder Overhaul Kit Overhaul kits will often come with a variety cup and seal sizes. Closely match the old cups and seals with the new ones. Brake Assembly Lubricant Assembly lubricant can greatly simply the master-cylinder overhaul process and prolong the life of the new seals. - Clean brake fluid can be used to lubricate the master-cylinder bore during assembly but assembly lube is much slicker and prevents any sticking or binding and possible damage to the new cups and seals. Aerosol Brake Cleaner - Commercially produced aerosol brake cleaners are designed to effectively clean brake systems while not leaving an oily residue. - Do not use carburetor cleaner or solvent based products to clean brake system components. These products will leave a residue which could contaminate the brake fluid or cause a reduction in braking performance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Notes, Warnings, and Hints > Page 3022 Brake Master Cylinder: Fundamentals and Basics Master Cylinder / Brake Pedal Relationship MASTER CYLINDER / BRAKE PEDAL RELATIONSHIP WARNING: Master Cylinders can be easily misdiagnosed for problems related to excessive brake pedal travel. Excessive brake pedal travel is often associated with a defective master-cylinder, however total pedal travel is affected by a wide variety of components and issues. Issues Affecting Pedal Travel Brake Fluid Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Notes, Warnings, and Hints > Page 3023 - Brake fluid which is contaminated with air or water will significantly add to the amount of pedal travel. - Pure DOT 3 (or 4) brake fluid is incompressible (allowing for a solid, firm pedal). A small amount of air trapped in the brake fluid will require extra effort from the master-cylinder to compress it, resulting in a soft and spongy pedal. - During prolonged or severe braking the brake fluid temperature can rapidly rise above 212 degrees F. When this occurs any water in the brake fluid will boil into steam (which is compressable) and create a soft and spongy pedal. Rear Brake Shoe Adjustment Drum brake system utilize return springs to pull the shoes away from the drums when not in use. The amount of distance the shoes have to extend to meet the drums greatly affects the amount of pedal travel. - Shoes/Linings which are badly out of adjustment can by themselves result in a brake pedal sinking all the way to the floor NOTE: Improperly adjusted rear shoes/linings also affect the parking brake. Calipers Excessive rotor wobble caused by a warped rotor or loose/worn wheel bearings can knock the caliper piston further inward from its normal resting position. This results in additional pedal travel required to extend the piston and apply the brakes. Drum Expansion Drums which are worn past their "Discard" thickness are prone to expanding outwards into an oval shape during heavy braking. This drum expansion results in additional brake pedal travel. Brake Fade During prolonged or severe braking, the amount of pedal effort/travel required to slow the vehicle increases as the ability of the brakes to dissipate heat decreases. - As the brake linings heat up, their "coefficient of friction" is reduced (they become slicker). As the coefficient of friction is reduced, more hydraulic pressure is required to stop the vehicle. More hydraulic pressure results in more heat which then results in more pedal fade. - As the brake linings, rotors, and drums begin to wear, their ability to absorb and release heat is reduced significantly. This makes worn brakes more prone to "pedal fade". NOTE: Prior to replacing a master-cylinder, verify the entire brake system is functioning properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Fundamentals and Basics > Notes, Warnings, and Hints > Page 3024 Brake Master Cylinder: Fundamentals and Basics Bench Bleeding Notes BENCH BLEEDING Why A master-cylinder will develop little or no pressure if air is trapped in cylinder bore. Normal brake bleeding will not remove air trapped within the master-cylinder. How Clamp the master-cylinder securely in a vice. It is usually best to clamp the side of the vice onto the flat surface that is used to secure the master-cylinder to the brake booster. There are two basic methods for bleeding master-cylinder, one utilizes stroking the master-cylinder to expel air from the cylinder bore while the other utilizes a large syringe to backflush fluid from the outlet ports to the reservoir. Stroking Fill the master-cylinder with clean brake fluid. - The brake line fittings on the master-cylinder should be capped or plugged. NOTE: Special "bench bleeding" plastic fittings are available which allow for recirculating the brake fluid back into the reservoir. - Using a dull object, slowly stroke the master-cylinder piston, air and brake fluid will be expelled from the brake line fittings. Prior to releasing the piston plug or cap the outlet ports. - Repeat this procedure 8-10 times or until no air is emitted from the outlet ports. - When finished, cap the outlet ports and install the master-cylinder. Syringe Fill the syringe (one especially designed for brake bleeding) with clean brake fluid. - Insert the end of the syringe into one of the outlet ports on the master-cylinder. - Slowly compress the syringe and back flush the brake fluid through the master-cylinder. - A combination of air and brake fluid will be emitted from the inlet port in the fluid reservoir. - Repeat this procedure until only brake fluid is emitted into the reservoir. - Cap the outlet ports and install the master-cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Cylinder: Specifications Front Disc 2.94 in Rear Drum 0.937 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal For additional information see Notes, Warnings, and Hints. See: Fundamentals and Basics 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove drum. 4. Remove brake shoes. 5. Disconnect hydraulic line at wheel cylinder. CAUTION: Do not pull metal line away from cylinder, as this may kink or bend line. Line will separate from cylinder when cylinder is moved away from brake backing plate. 6. Remove wheel cylinder-to-brake plate attaching screws, then the wheel cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3030 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation For additional information see Notes, Warnings, and Hints. See: Fundamentals and Basics 1. Wipe end of hydraulic line to remove any foreign matter, then place wheel cylinder in position. Enter tubing into cylinder and start threads on fitting. 2. Install wheel cylinder bolts and tighten to backing plate. 3. Tighten brake line. 4. Install brake shoes. 5. Install brake drum. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly. 7. Bleed the brake system. 8. Adjust parking brake. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3031 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Rebuild For additional information see Notes, Warnings, and Hints. See: Fundamentals and Basics Fig. 8 Disassembled View Of Wheel Cylinder (typical) 1. Remove boots, pistons, springs and cups from the wheel cylinder. 2. Clean all parts with brake fluid. 3. Inspect cylinder bore. A scored bore may be honed as long as the diameter is not increased by more than 0.127 mm (0.005 inch). Replace worn or damaged parts as necessary. 4. Ensure hands are clean before proceeding with assembly. Lubricate cylinder wall and rubber cups with brake fluid, then install springs, cups, pistons and boots in housing. 5. Install wheel cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3032 Wheel Cylinder: Fundamentals and Basics REMOVAL - Wheel cylinder retaining bolts, brake line fittings, and bleeder screws are often heavily corroded. Prior to starting the job you should spray these with a penetrating oil. - A line (flare nut) wrench should be used when loosening the brake line fittings. These fittings round off easily. OVERHAUL - Light amounts of corrosion within the cylinder bore and on the piston may be removed with crocus cloth. - Pitting and heavy corrosion should be removed with a hone. When honing the hone should be inserted and withdrawn quickly to achieve a 45 degree crosshatch. - Closely inspect the areas of the cylinder where the pistons seals contact. It is very important these areas are absolutely free of deposits, corrosion, or pitting. - Remove the bleeder screw and verify that the passage is clear. - Leave the bleeder open when installing pistons and cups into the cylinder bore. If the bleeder is closed a large amount of air will be forced into the brake lines. - Use brake assembly lubricant to coat the cylinder bore, pistons, and cups. Clean brake fluid is an acceptable lubricant when assemblying the wheel-cylinder but brake assembly lubricant is much slicker and minimizes the chance that the cups will be damaged. WARNING: Do not use a petroleum based grease or oil to lubricate the wheel-cylinder components. This will cause the seals and cups to swell and deteriorate. - When reassemblying the wheel-cylinder it is helpful to follow this sequence: 1. Rear cup (verify the cup is inserted properly, flat side towards the piston, concave side towards the center) 2. Rear piston 3. Rear dust cap (this prevents the rear cup and piston from popping back out when the spring and front components are installed). 4. Spring 5. Front cup 6. Front piston 7. Front dust cap INSTALLATION Attach the brake fluid line fitting loosely to the wheel-cylinder prior to inserting and tightening the retaining bolts. The brake fluid line fitting is much easier to attach and start turning with the wheel-cylinder loose. WARNING: Don't forget to tighten the brake line fitting after the retaining bolts are tightened. - Leave the wheel-cylinder bleeder screw open and place a drip pan under the rear brake assembly. Refill the master-cylinder with new brake fluid and let the fluid gravity bleed through the open bleeder screw. When brake fluid begins to drip from the bleeder, close the bleeder screw. NOTE: The brake system will still need to be flushed and bled, but this makes starting the process much easier. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brake System - Service Information Parking Brake Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Brake System - Service Information Number: 84-113 Section: 5 (V) Date: April, 1984 Subject: BRAKE SYSTEM SERVICE INFORMATION Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS BRAKE HOSE HANDLING When servicing the brake system, it is important to never let components hang from brake hoses. Some brake hoses have protective rings or covers to prevent direct contact of the hose with other chassis parts. Besides causing possible structural damage to the hose, excessive tension could cause the hose rings to move out of the their design locations. PARKING BRAKE CABLES Some 1984 models are equipped with new parking brake cable assemblies. The wire strand is coated with a black plastic material which slides against nylon seals inside the conduit end fittings. This is for corrosion protection and reduced parking brake effort. Handling of these cables during servicing of the parking brake system requires a little extra care. Damage to the plastic coating will reduce corrosion protection and if the damaged area passes through the seal, increase parking brake effort could result. Contact of the coating with sharp-edged tools, or with "unfriendly" surfaces of the vehicle underbody, should therefore be avoided. PARKING BRAKE ADJUSTMENT To prevent damage to the parking brake threaded adjusting rod when removing the nut or adjusting the parking brake, the following is recommended: A. Before attempting to turn the adjusting nut, clean the exposed threads on the threaded rod on both sides of the nut. Apply lubricant to the cleaned threads. B. Rotate nut to tighten system until the threads under the nut are uncovered. Clean and apply lube to these threads. Proceed with disassembly or adjustment procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hydraulic Brake Booster: Description and Operation Description In order to properly service power brake systems, a thorough understanding of the various power assist systems is necessary. These systems provide a mechanical assist, acting to increase the force applied to the master cylinder piston by the operator while decreasing the effort necessary to obtain acceptable stopping performance. Two basic types of power assist mechanisms are used: vacuum assist diaphragm assemblies which use engine vacuum and in some cases vacuum from an external vacuum pump, and hydraulic assist assemblies which use hydraulic pressure developed by an external pump (usually the power steering pump). Vacuum assist units are similar in operation, using vacuum applied to a diaphragm or piston in opposition to atmospheric pressure in order to increase the force applied to the master cylinder piston. However, two types of vacuum assist assemblies are used, the air suspended type and the vacuum suspended type. Air suspended units are under atmospheric pressure until the brakes are applied, then engine vacuum is admitted causing the piston or diaphragm to move and apply force to the master cylinder pushrod. Vacuum suspended types are balanced with engine vacuum until the brake pedal is depressed, allowing atmospheric pressure to unbalance the unit and apply force to the brake system. Hydraulic assist units incorporate a basic open center spool valve, hydraulic cylinder and an accumulator assembly incorporated into a common housing. When the brake pedal is depressed the hydraulic piston moves forward closing off fluid relief passages, the spool valve applies fluid pressure to the rear of the piston, and pressure applied to the piston is transmitted to the brake master cylinder through a pushrod. When the brake pedal is released, fluid pressure behind the piston is exhausted through the open center of the spool valve to a return line and the pump reservoir, and the spool valve diverts fluid pressure away from the hydraulic piston. The accumulator stores sufficient fluid under pressure to provide 2 or 3 power assisted stops in the event that pressure from the pump is interrupted. The design of the hydraulic cylinder allows the brakes to be applied without power assist, however, greater pedal effort is required to apply the brakes manually. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3043 Hydraulic Brake Booster: Description and Operation Bendix Brake Boosters Fig. 1 Sectional view of typical Bendix Hydro-Boost unit Fig. 2 Typical Hydro-Boost unit disassembled The Hydro-Boost system, Figs. 1 and 2, provides an additional cylinder in the brake system. This cylinder contains no brake fluid. The Hydro-Boost cylinder is hydraulically operated, by pressurized fluid from the power steering pump, providing power assist to operate a dual master cylinder brake system. The booster is composed of two sections; the linkage section and the power section. The booster is designed so that if a total absence of power assist occurs, the brakes can be applied manually, but somewhat greater pressure on the brake pedal is required. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3044 Hydraulic Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Complaints about power brake operation should be handled as if two separate systems exist. Check for faults in the regular brake system first. If it is okay, start looking over the power brake circuit. For a quick check of proper power unit operation, press the brake pedal firmly and then start the engine. The pedal should fall away slightly and less pressure should be needed to maintain the pedal in any position. On vacuum suspended power units, air will rush into the air intake when the brakes are applied. Another check begins with removal of the stop light switch and installation of a pressure gauge. Take a reading with the engine off and the power unit not operating. Maintaining the same pedal height, start the engine and take another reading. There should be a substantial pressure increase in the second reading. Pedal-free travel and total travel are critical. As a general rule, brakes should be adjusted or relined if the pedal is closer than 1-1/2 in. from the floor with the brakes applied. Free travel should be kept strictly to specifications. Take a manifold vacuum reading if the power unit isn't giving enough assistance. Remember, though, that some of the new V-8s have less than 15 in. of vacuum at idle. If manifold vacuum is abnormally low, tune the engine and then try the power brakes again. Naturally, loose vacuum lines and clogged air-intake filters will cut down brake efficiency. Most units have a check valve that retains some vacuum in the system when the engine is off. A vacuum gauge check of this valve will tell you when it is restricted or stuck open or closed. A simple check of the hydraulic system should be made before proceeding. Loosen the connection between the power unit and the wheel cylinder lines. If the brakes release, the trouble is in the power unit hydraulic circuit. If the brakes still will not release, look for a restricted brake line or similar difficulties in the regular hydraulic circuit. A residual pressure check valve is usually included immediately under the brake line connection on hydraulic-assist power brakes. This valve maintains a slight hydraulic pressure on the brake lines and wheel cylinders to give better pedal response. If it is sticking, the brakes may not release. Power brakes that have a hard pedal are usually suffering from a milder form of the same ills that cause complete power unit failure. Collapsed or leaking vacuum lines or insufficient manifold vacuum, as well as punctured diaphragms or bellows and leaky piston seals, all lead to weak power unit operation. A steady hiss when the brake is held down means a vacuum leak that will cause poor power unit operation. Do not immediately condemn the power unit if the brakes grab. First look for all the usual causes, such as greasy linings or scored drums. Then investigate the power unit. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Service Procedures Hydraulic Brake Booster: Service and Repair General Service Procedures Regardless of whether the brakes are vacuum or hydraulically assisted, certain general service procedures apply. Only top quality, clean brake fluid should be used in power brakes. More seals and valves are used with power brake systems than with ordinary brakes, so an inferior brake fluid will do much more damage. For the same reason, be sure all dirt is kept out of the system. Additionally, on models with hydraulic assist brakes, care must be taken not to mix the fluids of the booster hydraulic system and brake hydraulic system as the fluids are not compatible. The fact that brakes will operate even if the power unit fails gives us a clue to successful power brake service. This means the conventional brake system is left intact and a power unit is simply added to the existing system. Troubleshooting is then exactly the same until we get to the power unit. As with conventional hydraulic brakes, a spongy pedal with power brakes still means air in the system and grease on the linings will still make the brakes grab. Keep in mind, however, that power brakes give a higher line pressure, thus making leaks more critical. Power units do not require adjustment. Either they work or they don't. If they don't, the various valves and connections are simply replaced. The only exception is that the power units themselves sometimes have an adjustable connection to the brake pedal or linkage. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Service Procedures > Page 3047 Hydraulic Brake Booster: Service and Repair Bendix Brake Boosters Disassembly Fig. 3 Removing booster pedal rod. 1980---84 Fig. 4 Spool valve inspection 1. Secure booster assembly in vise. 2. On 1980---84 models, proceed as follows: a. Using a chisel and hammer, cut the bracket nut that secures the mounting bracket to the power section. Be careful to avoid damage to the threads on the booster hub. b. Remove pedal rod boot, if equipped. c. Place tool No. J-24569 around pedal rod as shown in Fig. 3, then using a suitable punch, shear pedal rod retainer and remove pedal rod. d. Remove rubber grommet from groove near end of pedal rod and from groove inside input rod end. 3. On 1985---87 models, proceed as follows: a. Remove pedal rod boot, if equipped. b. Remove mounting bracket retaining ring and nut, then saw off pedal rod eyelet and separate the input rod, lever and piston assembly from booster cover. 4. On all models, pry plastic guide out of the output pushrod retainer, then disengage tabs of spring retainer from ledge inside opening near master cylinder mounting flange of booster. 5. Remove retainer, piston return spring and output rod. 6. Position drain pan under booster housing, then remove five housing to cover attaching screws. 7. Remove cover from housing, using caution not to damage cover bore, then the housing seal from housing cover. 8. Remove input rod, lever and piston assembly, then the spool valve assembly and spool return spring from the booster housing. Refer to Fig. 4 and Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Service Procedures > Page 3048 inspect spool valve. If spool valve is found to be defective, the valve assembly must be replaced. 9. Remove power piston seal. Fig. 2 Removing Accumulator Fig. 6 Removing accumulator valves Fig. 7 Accumulator valves 10. Install accumulator retaining cap tool No. J-26889 over master cylinder stud and install nut as shown in Fig. 5. 11. Depress accumulator, using a suitable C-clamp, Fig. 5, then insert a punch into hole in housing and remove retaining ring with a suitable screwdriver. 12. Slowly back off C-clamp until tension on the accumulator is released, then remove accumulator and O-ring. 13. If accumulator valve is to be removed, fabricate tool from .040 inch diameter wire as shown in Fig. 6. Remove dump valve by catching tool under pin guide near center of valve, then remove check valve assembly and seat, Fig. 7. 14. Remove hose fitting O-ring, if necessary. 15. Remove spool plug retaining ring, then the spool plug and O-ring. Cleaning and Inspection Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Service Procedures > Page 3049 Fig. 4 Spool valve inspection 1. Clean all parts in a suitable solvent being careful to avoid losing small parts. 2. Inspect valve spool and valve spool bore in booster housing for corrosion, nicks, scoring or other damage. Discoloration of the spool or bore, particularly in the grooves, is not harmful. 3. If the valve spool or the spool bore has nicks or scoring that can be felt with a fingernail, particularly on the hands, the spool and housing should be replaced as an assembly, Fig. 4. The clearance between the valve spool and the spool bore of the housing is important. Because of this, the spool and housing make are made as a selective assembly and therefore can only be replaced as an assembly. 4. Inspect the input rod and piston assembly for corrosion, nicks, scoring or excessive wear. If the piston is damaged, the input rod and piston assembly should be replaced. 5. Inspect piston bore in booster housing for corrosion, nicks, scoring or other damage. If the bore is damaged, the valve spool and housing should be replaced as an assembly. Assembly Fig. 7 Accumulator valves Fig. 8 Installing input rod seals. 1980---84 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Service Procedures > Page 3050 Fig. 9 Installing input rod & piston assembly into booster 1. Install O-ring onto spool plug, then push spool plug into housing and install retaining ring. 2. Coat piston bore and piston seal with clean power steering fluid, then install seal into bore. Lip of seal must face away from the master cylinder mounting flange. Also, ensure seal is fully seated in the housing. 3. On 1980---84 models, proceed as follows: a. Lubricate input rod end, input rod seals and seal installer with clean power steering fluid. b. Slide seals on tool with the lip of the cups toward open end of tool, Fig. 8. c. Slide tool over input rod end and down to the second groove, then slide the forward seal off tool into the groove. d. Install remaining seal in first groove. Ensure seals are fully seated. On JD3 and JD5 models, only one seal is used. 4. On all models, lubricate piston and piston installing tool, then hold large end of tool against the piston, Fig. 9. 5. Slide the piston installing tool and piston into piston bore and through piston seal, then remove piston installing tool. 6. Install hose fitting O-ring, if removed. 7. If accumulator valve was removed, install new valve seat into valve bore. The seat can be forced to the bottom by installing the check valve assembly, Fig. 7. 8. Install new dump valve over check valve assembly. Ensure dump valve plunger is held in position until installation is complete. Fig. 2 Removing Accumulator 9. Install spool return spring and spool valve assembly into bore in housing. Extend power piston lever to accept sleeve on spool valve, then slide lever pins into slot in sleeve. 10. Install new housing seal in groove in hosing cover, then lubricate input rod seals. 11. Install housing cover and cover attaching screws. Torque screws to 18---26 ft. lbs. 12. Install output rod, spring, baffle and new spring retainer, then secure baffle and spring retainer using a suitable tool. 13. Install accumulator seal and accumulator in housing, then place retaining ring over accumulator. 14. Install tool No. J-26889 over accumulator, then using a suitable C-clamp, depress accumulator, Fig. 5, and install retaining ring. 15. Remove C-clamp and tool No. J-26889, then check retaining ring for proper installation. 16. Install mounting bracket and bracket attaching nut. Torque attaching nut to 110 ft. lbs. and lock in position. 17. If repair kit contains a grommet retained pedal rod, proceed as follows: a. Install boot on pedal rod, if equipped. b. Install new grommet in groove near end of pedal rod. c. Moisten grommet with water, then insert grommet end of pedal rod into the input rod end of the booster housing. d. Push on end of pedal rod to seat grommet. When grommet is fully seated, pedal rod will rotate freely with no binding. e. Slide open end of boot onto the hub of the booster. 18. If repair kit contains a staked two piece pedal rod, proceed as follows: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Service Procedures > Page 3051 a. Install boot over externally threaded pedal rod, if equipped, then slide open end of boot onto hub of booster. b. Install locknut onto externally threaded pedal rod. c. Install eyelet pedal rod onto externally threaded pedal rod, then adjust pedal rod and secure with locknut. Bleeding Booster 1. Fill power steering pump until fluid level is at base of pump reservoir neck. 2. Disconnect 12 volt wire from injection pump or distributor, then crank engine for several seconds. Do not start engine. 3. Check fluid level, adding as necessary. 4. Connect 12 volt wire and start engine. 5. Turn steering wheel from stop to stop, then turn off engine. 6. Depress brake pedal four or five times to deplete accumulator vacuum. 7. Check fluid level, adding as necessary. 8. Start engine, turn steering wheel from stop to stop. Turn engine off, and check fluid level. 9. If fluid is extremely foamy, stop engine and let vehicle stand for one hour, then check fluid level, adding as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Service Procedures > Page 3052 Hydraulic Brake Booster: Service and Repair Power Brake Unit Replace SERIES 10---30/1500---3500 Before disconnecting lines from power unit, depress and release brake pedal several times to allow pressure to discharge from accumulator. 1. On P30 motor home, raise and support vehicle, if necessary. 2. On all vehicles, remove master cylinder to power brake unit attaching nuts, then position master cylinder aside. Do not disconnect brake lines from master cylinder. 3. Disconnect hydraulic lines from power brake unit. Plug all lines and ports to prevent fluid loss and dirt entry. 4. On all models except P30 motor home, remove pedal pushrod cotter pin and washer, then disconnect pushrod from brake pedal or pivot lever. Lower steering column or remove support brackets as necessary. Remove power brake unit bracket to dash panel or support bracket attaching nuts, then the power brake unit. 5. On P30 motor home, remove operating lever to vertical brake rod cotter pin, nut, bolt and washers. Remove power brake unit linkage bracket to front and rear support bracket attaching nuts, washers and bolts, then remove power brake unit from vehicle. Remove operating lever to pedal rod cotter pin, nut, washer and bolt. Remove brake pedal rod lever nut and bolt, then the lever, sleeve and bushing. 6. Reverse procedure to install, then bleed hydraulic system as follows: a. Fill power steering reservoir to proper level and allow vehicle to sit for approximately two minutes. b. Start engine and allow to run for several minutes, then shut engine off. Correct fluid level as necessary. Do this several times until fluid level becomes constant. c. Raise and support front of vehicle, then turn wheels lock to lock. Shut engine off and add fluid as necessary. d. Lower vehicle, then start engine and depress brake pedal several times while turning steering wheel lock to lock. e. Shut engine off, then depress brake pedal 4 to 5 times to allow accumulator to deplete. f. Check reservoir and refill as required. If fluid is extremely foamy, allow vehicle to sit for several minutes, then repeat procedure above. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Fluid Accumulator > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Fluid Accumulator: Service and Repair Fig. 2 Removing Accumulator Do not attempt to repair or apply heat to the accumulator. Before discarding an inoperative accumulator, drill a 1/16 in. diameter hole through the end of the accumulator pan. Do not drill through the piston end. Always wear safety glasses when performing service on the accumulator. 1. Push pedal rod several times to ensure accumulator is depleted. 2. Secure brake booster mounting bracket in a vise with pedal rod facing downward. 3. Place tool No. J-26889 over master cylinder stud and install retaining nut. 4. Using a C-clamp, depress accumulator can, then insert a punch into hole in housing to unseat retaining ring, Fig. 5. Remove ring from housing using a small screwdriver. If can cannot easily be depressed approximately .10 in., the accumulator is still charged. This indicates an internal problem with the accumulator valves and the brake booster must be disassembled. 5. Slowly back off C-clamp until tension is relieved, then remove C-clamp, retaining cap and accumulator. 6. Reverse procedure to assemble. Lubricate accumulator can seal with power steering fluid. Ensure accumulator can retaining ring is completely seated in housing groove. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Replacement Booster Push Rod Height Gage Vacuum Brake Booster: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Replacement Booster Push Rod Height Gage GMC NUMBER: 89-T-51 GROUP: 5 - Brakes DATE: April, 1989 CORPORATE NUMBER: 965005 SUBJECT: BRAKE BOOSTER PUSH ROD HEIGHT GAGE MODELS: 1982-89 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS A new brake booster push rod height gage (J37839) has been approved by Delco Moraine. The new gage is an essential tool and replaces tool J22647, which should be scrapped. The new gage will be shipped to dealers in the April-May 1989 time frame. FIGURE 1 The reason for the new gage is twofold 1. The new gage locates on the chamfered sides of the booster push rod rather then the top of the rod. This is a more accurate reference point because the push rod sides initiate the contact with the master cylinder primary piston (See Figure 1). 2. The maximum and minimum push rod length tolerance was revised to reduce push rod free travel. IMPORTANT: These design change were made for all 1989 Delco Moraine vacuum boosters. The new gage can be used on all pre-1989 models with Delco Moraine vacuum boosters. Gage Procedure 1. With master cylinderr removed and the brake booster still attached to the vehicle, gage the booster with 85.0 kPa (25 In. Hg.) vacuum or maximum engine vacuum. IMPORTANT: Booster can be gaged without being installed on the vehicle, if a suitable vacuum source is available. 2. Position gage (J37839) over piston rod as shown in Figure 1. 3. Check for both the maximum and minimum rod length. 4. If the rod length does not fall between the maxand minimum dimensions, replace with adjustable push rod P/N 5469384. Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Description In order to properly service power brake systems, a thorough understanding of the various power assist systems is necessary. These systems provide a mechanical assist, acting to increase the force applied to the master cylinder piston by the operator while decreasing the effort necessary to obtain acceptable stopping performance. Two basic types of power assist mechanisms are used: vacuum assist diaphragm assemblies which use engine vacuum and in some cases vacuum from an external vacuum pump, and hydraulic assist assemblies which use hydraulic pressure developed by an external pump (usually the power steering pump). Vacuum assist units are similar in operation, using vacuum applied to a diaphragm or piston in opposition to atmospheric pressure in order to increase the force applied to the master cylinder piston. However, two types of vacuum assist assemblies are used, the air suspended type and the vacuum suspended type. Air suspended units are under atmospheric pressure until the brakes are applied, then engine vacuum is admitted causing the piston or diaphragm to move and apply force to the master cylinder pushrod. Vacuum suspended types are balanced with engine vacuum until the brake pedal is depressed, allowing atmospheric pressure to unbalance the unit and apply force to the brake system. Hydraulic assist units incorporate a basic open center spool valve, hydraulic cylinder and an accumulator assembly incorporated into a common housing. When the brake pedal is depressed the hydraulic piston moves forward closing off fluid relief passages, the spool valve applies fluid pressure to the rear of the piston, and pressure applied to the piston is transmitted to the brake master cylinder through a pushrod. When the brake pedal is released, fluid pressure behind the piston is exhausted through the open center of the spool valve to a return line and the pump reservoir, and the spool valve diverts fluid pressure away from the hydraulic piston. The accumulator stores sufficient fluid under pressure to provide 2 or 3 power assisted stops in the event that pressure from the pump is interrupted. The design of the hydraulic cylinder allows the brakes to be applied without power assist, however, greater pedal effort is required to apply the brakes manually. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3062 Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Delco Moraine Brake Boosters Description Fig. 1 Delco Moraine single diaphragm power brake unitexploded view Fig. 2 Delco Moraine single diaphragm power piston assembly exploded view Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3063 These power brake units, Figs. 1 and 2, are a combination vacuum-hydraulic brake booster of the vacuum suspended type which use engine intake manifold vacuum and atmospheric pressure for its power. These units consist of a vacuum power section and an hydraulic master cylinder section. The vacuum power section contains a power piston with rolling diaphragm mechanism and power piston return spring. The control valve is made up of an air valve and floating vacuum control valve assembly. The reaction mechanism consists of an hydraulic piston, reaction plate and a series of levers. The valve operating rod, which operates the air valve, projects from the power section and is connected to the brake pedal linkage. The hydraulic pushrod operates against the master cylinder piston. A split system (tandem piston) type master cylinder is incorporated into some units. The front half of the master cylinder in the split system operates the rear brakes while the rear half of the master cylinder operates the front brakes. A vacuum check valve, attached to the front vacuum chamber and connected to the intake manifold, traps vacuum in the power unit at the highest level of vacuum. Operation As the brakes are applied by the driver, the valve operating rod and control piston move forward in the power piston assembly to compress the valve return spring and bring the poppet valve into contact with the vacuum valve seat in the valve housing to close the vacuum post. Any additional movement of the valve operating rod in the applied direction moves the control valve away from the poppet valve to open the atmospheric port and admit air through the air filter and passages to the chamber at the right of the vacuum power piston assembly. With vacuum on the left side of the diaphragm and atmospheric pressure on the right side of the diaphragm, a force is developed to move the vacuum power piston assembly, hydraulic pushrod, and hydraulic piston to the left to close the compensating port and force hydraulic fluid under pressure through the residual check valve and brake tubes into the brake wheel cylinders. Tandem Diaphragm Type Fig. 3 Delco Moraine tandem power brake unit exploded view Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3064 Fig. 4 Delco Moraine tandem diaphragm power piston assembly exploded view DESCRIPTION These units, Figs. 3 and 4, have a vacuum power chamber that consists of a front and rear shell, a housing divider, front and rear diaphragm and plate assemblies, an hydraulic pushrod and a diaphragm return spring. The unit operates in much the same manner as the Single Diaphragm unit described above. The diaphragm and plate assemblies use the pressure differential created by engine intake manifold vacuum and atmospheric pressure to assist the hydraulic pushrod. TROUBLESHOOTING Hard Pedal 1. Internal vacuum leak. 2. Faulty control valve. Brakes Grab 1. Faulty control valve. Slow or No Release 1. Faulty pushrod adjustment. 2. Bind in linkage. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Checking Complaints Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Checking Complaints Complaints about power brake operation should be handled as if two separate systems exist. Check for faults in the regular brake system first. If it is okay, start looking over the power brake circuit. For a quick check of proper power unit operation, press the brake pedal firmly and then start the engine. The pedal should fall away slightly and less pressure should be needed to maintain the pedal in any position. On vacuum suspended power units, air will rush into the air intake when the brakes are applied. Another check begins with removal of the stop light switch and installation of a pressure gauge. Take a reading with the engine off and the power unit not operating. Maintaining the same pedal height, start the engine and take another reading. There should be a substantial pressure increase in the second reading. Pedal-free travel and total travel are critical. As a general rule, brakes should be adjusted or relined if the pedal is closer than 1-1/2 in. from the floor with the brakes applied. Free travel should be kept strictly to specifications. Take a manifold vacuum reading if the power unit isn't giving enough assistance. Remember, though, that some of the new V-8s have less than 15 in. of vacuum at idle. If manifold vacuum is abnormally low, tune the engine and then try the power brakes again. Naturally, loose vacuum lines and clogged air-intake filters will cut down brake efficiency. Most units have a check valve that retains some vacuum in the system when the engine is off. A vacuum gauge check of this valve will tell you when it is restricted or stuck open or closed. A simple check of the hydraulic system should be made before proceeding. Loosen the connection between the power unit and the wheel cylinder lines. If the brakes release, the trouble is in the power unit hydraulic circuit. If the brakes still will not release, look for a restricted brake line or similar difficulties in the regular hydraulic circuit. A residual pressure check valve is usually included immediately under the brake line connection on hydraulic-assist power brakes. This valve maintains a slight hydraulic pressure on the brake lines and wheel cylinders to give better pedal response. If it is sticking, the brakes may not release. Power brakes that have a hard pedal are usually suffering from a milder form of the same ills that cause complete power unit failure. Collapsed or leaking vacuum lines or insufficient manifold vacuum, as well as punctured diaphragms or bellows and leaky piston seals, all lead to weak power unit operation. A steady hiss when the brake is held down means a vacuum leak that will cause poor power unit operation. Do not immediately condemn the power unit if the brakes grab. First look for all the usual causes, such as greasy linings or scored drums. Then investigate the power unit. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Checking Complaints > Page 3067 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Delco Moraine Brake Boosters Troubleshooting Hard Pedal 1. Internal vacuum leak. 2. Faulty control valve. Brakes Grab 1. Faulty control valve. Slow or No Release 1. Faulty pushrod adjustment. 2. Bind in linkage. Tandem Diaphragm Type Fig. 3 Delco Moraine tandem power brake unit exploded view Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Checking Complaints > Page 3068 Fig. 4 Delco Moraine tandem diaphragm power piston assembly exploded view DESCRIPTION These units, Figs. 3 and 4, have a vacuum power chamber that consists of a front and rear shell, a housing divider, front and rear diaphragm and plate assemblies, an hydraulic pushrod and a diaphragm return spring. The unit operates in much the same manner as the Single Diaphragm unit described above. The diaphragm and plate assemblies use the pressure differential created by engine intake manifold vacuum and atmospheric pressure to assist the hydraulic pushrod. TROUBLESHOOTING Hard Pedal 1. Internal vacuum leak. 2. Faulty control valve. Brakes Grab 1. Faulty control valve. Slow or No Release 1. Faulty pushrod adjustment. 2. Bind in linkage. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3069 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Regardless of whether the brakes are vacuum or hydraulically assisted, certain general service procedures apply. Only top quality, clean brake fluid should be used in power brakes. More seals and valves are used with power brake systems than with ordinary brakes, so an inferior brake fluid will do much more damage. For the same reason, be sure all dirt is kept out of the system. Additionally, on models with hydraulic assist brakes, care must be taken not to mix the fluids of the booster hydraulic system and brake hydraulic system as the fluids are not compatible. The fact that brakes will operate even if the power unit fails gives us a clue to successful power brake service. This means the conventional brake system is left intact and a power unit is simply added to the existing system. Troubleshooting is then exactly the same until we get to the power unit. As with conventional hydraulic brakes, a spongy pedal with power brakes still means air in the system and grease on the linings will still make the brakes grab. Keep in mind, however, that power brakes give a higher line pressure, thus making leaks more critical. Power units do not require adjustment. Either they work or they don't. If they don't, the various valves and connections are simply replaced. The only exception is that the power units themselves sometimes have an adjustable connection to the brake pedal or linkage. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation Vacuum Pump: Description and Operation These vehicles use either a belt driven or gear driven vacuum pump to aid the engine in maintaining a proper vacuum level for the power brake system and other vacuum powered accessories. The gear driven pump is a diaphragm pump that requires no periodic maintenance. This pump is driven by a cam inside the drive assembly on which the pump is mounted. The drive housing assembly includes a gear on the lower end that meshes with the camshaft gear in the engine. This gear causes the cam in the drive housing to turn. The gear also operates the engine oil lubricating pump. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3073 Vacuum Pump: Testing and Inspection GEAR DRIVEN PUMP 1. Start engine, then attach hose and vacuum gauge to pump. Gauge should read at least 20 inch Hg. 2. Shut off engine. Vacuum level should remain above 19 inches Hg. for at least 1 1/2 seconds. Fig. 1 Vacuum chart BELT DRIVEN PUMP 1. Block wheels, apply parking brake, and place gear shift lever in ``P'' or ``N.'' 2. Connect vacuum gauge to vacuum pump inlet (lower port). 3. Disconnect outlet hose from outlet tube (upper port) and plug end of hose. Do not plug vacuum pump outlet tube. 4. Start engine and run at idle. Vacuum should read as shown, Fig. 1, within 30 seconds. 5. If vacuum is within specifications, proceed to step 8. 6. If vacuum is below specification or gauge reading fluctuates, proceed as follows: a. Check gauge and connections for leaks, correcting as necessary. b. Check belt tension and pulley fit to pump, repairing or replacing as necessary. c. Check idle speed and correct as necessary. 7. If vacuum is still below specifications or gauge still fluctuates, replace vacuum pump and repeat steps 1 through 7. 8. If vacuum was within specifications in step 5 or step 7, proceed as follows: a. Remove plug from outlet hose and connect hose to pump outlet tube. b. Connect vacuum inlet hose to pump with a T-fitting and vacuum gauge located near pump inlet. c. Start engine and run at idle for one minute. d. If vacuum is 3 inches Hg. lower than in step 4, vacuum pump is not defective. e. If vacuum is more than 3 inches Hg. lower than in step 4, check all attaching hoses for leaks, correcting as necessary. f. If vacuum is still too low, check all vacuum accessories for leaks, repairing or replacing as necessary. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3074 Vacuum Pump: Service and Repair Fig. 2 Gear driven vacuum pump. Chevrolet & GMC GEAR DRIVEN PUMP Removal 1. Remove vacuum hose from vacuum pump inlet. 2. Remove bolt and clamp holding drive assembly to engine block, Fig. 2. 3. Carefully lift pump and drive assembly out of engine block. 4. Cover hole in engine block with cloth to prevent foreign matter from falling into engine block. Installation 1. Remove protective cloth from engine. 2. Install pump and drive assembly in engine, ensuring gears on drive assembly mesh with gears on engine camshaft. 3. Rotate pump into position so bracket and bolt can be installed. 4. Install clamp and bolt, torquing bolt to 20 ft. lbs. 5. Connect vacuum hose to pump. Fig. 3 Belt driven vacuum pump. Chevrolet & GMC BELT DRIVEN PUMP Removal 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect vacuum hose. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3075 3. Loosen and remove vacuum pump belt. 4. Remove vacuum pump pulley to hub attaching bolts, Fig. 3. 5. Remove pump and bracket from engine. 6. Remove bracket from pump. Hub must be pressed off vacuum pump and used on replacement unit. Installation 1. Install bracket on pump. 2. Install pump and bracket on engine. 3. Install vacuum pump pulley and attaching bolts to hub. 4. Install vacuum pump belt and adjust belt to correct tension. 5. Connect vacuum hose to pump. 6. Connect battery ground cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation Fig. 12 Mechanical neutral start system, shown in Park position On some automatic transmission equipped vehicles, the actuation of the ignition switch is prevented by a mechanical lockout system, Fig. 12, which prevents the lock cylinder from rotating when the selector lever is out of Park or Neutral. When the selector lever is in Park or Neutral, the slots in the bowl plate and the finger on the actuator rod align, allowing the finger to pass through the bowl plate, in turn actuating the ignition switch, Fig. 12. If the selector lever is in any position other than Park or Neutral, the finger contacts the bowl plate when the lock cylinder is rotated, thereby preventing full travel of the lock cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3081 Neutral Safety Switch: Service and Repair On some automatic transmission equipped vehicles, the back-up light switch is integral with the neutral start switch. Fig. 13 Neutral start switch replacement. Series 10---30/1500---3500 C, K, R & V MODELS 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect electrical connector at switch. 3. Remove switch mounting screws, then the switch. 4. Position shift lever in neutral gate notch. 5. Insert a .098 inch gauge pin into switch gauge hole as shown, Fig. 13, then assemble switch to column by inserting carrier tang into shift tube slot. 6. Install switch mounting screws into retainers. If retainers strip, they must be replaced. 7. Remove gauge pin, then position shift lever into Park to shear internal plastic pin in switch. 8. Return shift lever to neutral gate notch, then ensure switch gauge hole will accept .080 inch gauge pin. If not, loosen mounting screws, then rotate switch on column until .098 inch gauge pin can be reinserted into gauge hole. 9. Reconnect electrical connector and battery ground cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Diode Trio, Alternator > Component Information > Description and Operation Diode Trio: Description and Operation Alternators are composed of the same functional parts as the conventional D.C. generator but they operate differently. The field is called a rotor and is the turning portion of the unit. The generating part, called a stator, is the stationary member, comparable to the armature in a D.C. generator. The regulator, similar to those used in a D.C. system, regulates the output of the alternator-rectifier system. The power source of the system is the alternator. Current is transmitted from the field terminal of the regulator through a slip ring to the field coil and back to ground through another slip ring. The strength of the field regulates the output of the alternating current. This alternating current is then transmitted from the alternator to the rectifier where it is converted to direct current. These alternators employ a three-phase stator winding in which the phase windings are electrically 120 degrees apart. The rotor consists of a field coil encased between interleaved sections producing. When the rotor is energized, a magnetic field with alternate north and south poles is created. By rotating the rotor inside the stator the alternating current is induced in the stator windings. This alternating current is rectified (changed to D.C.) by silicon diodes and brought out to the output terminal of the alternator. DIODE RECTIFIERS Six silicon diode rectifiers are used and act as electrical one-way valves. Three of the diodes have ground polarity and are pressed or screwed into a heat sink which is grounded. The other three diodes (ungrounded) are pressed or screwed into and insulated from the end head; these diodes are connected to the alternator output terminal. Since the diodes have a high resistance to the flow of current in one direction and a low resistance in the opposite direction, they may be connected in a manner which allows current to flow from the alternator to the battery in the low resistance direction. The high resistance in the opposite direction prevents the flow of current from the battery to the alternator. Because of this feature no circuit breaker is required between the alternator and battery. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Voltage Regulator > Component Information > Specifications Voltage Regulator: Specifications System Operating Voltage System Operating Voltage Voltage Setting 12.5-15.4 V Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010 Date: May 27, 2010 Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada Only) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu Attention: This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference. Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009. Where Are Key Codes Located? General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it. Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers. The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model years from the current model year. When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors. Tip Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not. GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates & keys"). Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 years from current model year. Important notes about security: - Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously. - Users may only request one KeyCode at a time. - KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes. - Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password. - Never share your password with others. - User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts. - User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days. - Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews. - The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership. - If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 3095 Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is used. Key Code User Agreement - Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle owner. - Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to criminal and civil penalties. - This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone unless authorized. I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information: 1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership. Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and possibly the receipt for payment recorded as well. Important - GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving out key codes. - When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the information. Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this bulletin or other materials. - Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet. - Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions. Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following: - Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) - Registration or other proof of ownership. - Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key to the customer. - Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up to either GM or law enforcement officials. - Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions. - Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered? Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field. How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed? The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for documentation. What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle? Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. Can I get a print out of the information on the screen? It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper or illegal use. Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application? Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 3096 What if I input the VIN incorrectly? If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message. If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home? Yes. What if I suspect key code misuse? Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. Whose key codes can I access through the system? At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet, Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu (up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years. What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information? Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN, you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down? If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911. What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle? On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary. How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records? Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system? Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed. Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or KeyCode information? The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided. How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key? The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name, address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included in your dealer KeyCode file. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 3097 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation Fig. 12 Mechanical neutral start system, shown in Park position On some automatic transmission equipped vehicles, the actuation of the ignition switch is prevented by a mechanical lockout system, Fig. 12, which prevents the lock cylinder from rotating when the selector lever is out of Park or Neutral. When the selector lever is in Park or Neutral, the slots in the bowl plate and the finger on the actuator rod align, allowing the finger to pass through the bowl plate, in turn actuating the ignition switch, Fig. 12. If the selector lever is in any position other than Park or Neutral, the finger contacts the bowl plate when the lock cylinder is rotated, thereby preventing full travel of the lock cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3101 Neutral Safety Switch: Service and Repair On some automatic transmission equipped vehicles, the back-up light switch is integral with the neutral start switch. Fig. 13 Neutral start switch replacement. Series 10---30/1500---3500 C, K, R & V MODELS 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect electrical connector at switch. 3. Remove switch mounting screws, then the switch. 4. Position shift lever in neutral gate notch. 5. Insert a .098 inch gauge pin into switch gauge hole as shown, Fig. 13, then assemble switch to column by inserting carrier tang into shift tube slot. 6. Install switch mounting screws into retainers. If retainers strip, they must be replaced. 7. Remove gauge pin, then position shift lever into Park to shear internal plastic pin in switch. 8. Return shift lever to neutral gate notch, then ensure switch gauge hole will accept .080 inch gauge pin. If not, loosen mounting screws, then rotate switch on column until .098 inch gauge pin can be reinserted into gauge hole. 9. Reconnect electrical connector and battery ground cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Starter Motor: Testing and Inspection Fig. 7 Connections for checking free speed of motor FREE SPEED CHECK With the circuit connected as shown in Fig. 7, use a tachometer to measure armature revolutions per minute. Failure of the motor to perform to specifications may be due to light or dry bearings, or high resistance connections. PINION CLEARANCE There is no provision for adjusting pinion clearance on this type motor. When the shift lever mechanism is correctly assembled, the pinion clearance should fall within the limits of .010 to .140 inch. When the clearance is not within these limits, it may indicate excessive wear of the solenoid linkage or shift lever yoke buttons. Fig. 8 Connections for checking pinion clearance Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3105 Fig. 9 Checking pinion clearance Pinion clearance should be checked after the motor has been disassembled and reassembled. To check, disconnect motor field coil connector from solenoid terminal and insulate end. Connect one battery lead to solenoid switch terminal and the other lead to the solenoid frame, Fig. 8. Using a jumper lead connected to the solenoid motor terminal, momentarily flash the lead to the solenoid frame. This will shift the pinion into the cranking position until the battery is disconnected. After energizing the solenoid with the clutch shifted toward the pinion stop retainer, push the pinion back toward the commutator end as far as possible to take up any slack movement; then check the clearance with feeler gauge, Fig. 9. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3106 Starter Motor: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Remove starter to engine brace and heat shields, if equipped. 4. Remove starter mounting bolts and lower starter. Note position of shims, if used. 5. Disconnect wires from solenoids, then remove starter from vehicle. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Starter whining or a no-start condition on 1982---83 vehicles equipped with V8-379 diesel engines, may be due to insufficient flywheel ring gear to starter pinion clearance. To correct the above mentioned complaint, proceed as follows: 1. Disconnect battery ground cable, then raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove flywheel inspection cover and inspect flywheel teeth for damage. If teeth are excessively worn, replace flywheel. 3. Loosen both starter mounting bolts, then remove outside bolt and shim pack. 4. Measure shim pack thickness. If shim pack is less than .120 inch thick, add shims until total thickness is as stated above. If shim pack is already .120 inch thick, add an additional .040 inch shim to pack. Shim pack thickness should not exceed .160 inch. 5. Reposition shims, install outside mounting bolt, then torque both bolts to 30---40 ft. lbs. 6. Install flywheel inspection cover, then lower vehicle and reconnect battery ground cable. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Diode > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Isolation Diodes - Replacement Information Diode: Technical Service Bulletins Isolation Diodes - Replacement Information Number: 93-163-8A Section: 8A Date: MAY 1993 Corporate Bulletin No.: 178201R ASE No.: A6 Subject: ISOLATION DIODES REPLACEMENT INFORMATION Model and Year: 1993 AND PRIOR YEAR PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 92-47-8A, DATED NOV. 1991. THE 1993 MODEL YEAR HAS BEEN ADDED AS WELL AS PART NUMBERS HAVE BEEN REVISED. THIS WILL ALSO UPDATE CERTAIN SERVICE MANUALS. ALL COPIES OF 92-47-8A SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Many of the electrical systems on our vehicles use a diode to isolate certain circuits and protect them from voltage spikes. Some of the circuits which may use such a diode are listed below: A/C Compressor Clutch ABS/4WAL NOTE: The ABS diode on the Delco Moraine system is hidden inside of an electrical connector under the carpet at the right kick panel. Wiper Charging System (hidden in wire harness) Parking Brake (vehicles with ABS) Relays Solenoids Diesel Glow Plug Circuit Day Time Running Lights Obtaining replacement diodes can sometimes be a problem. A universal diode, that meets the specifications in the chart below, may be used for the applications listed above. Since certain diode applications have specific part numbers, always reference the applicable GM parts catalogue before installing one of the universal diodes listed in this bulletin. When installing the new diode, use the following procedures to obtain a lasting repair: 1. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 2. Paying attention to current flow direction, remove inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. If the diode is located next to a connector terminal, remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 3. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 4. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. Reference Figure 1 for replacement diode symbols and current flow explanations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Diode > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Isolation Diodes - Replacement Information > Page 3112 Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Use a heat sink (aluminum alligator clip) attached across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excess heat. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the solderin equipment you are using. 5. Install terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed in step number 2. 6. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points. NOTE: A universal diode with a 3 amp, 400 PIV (Peak Inverse Voltage) rating can be used in all of the previously mentioned applications. The following 1993 Service Manuals will need to be updated with the correct part numbers and rating changes. Carline Page All J, L, W, and UO 8A-5-12 Heat sink, part number 276-1567, can be obtained from Radio Shack. We believe the diodes and heat sink listed in this article as well as their manufacturer to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers or equivalent products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3121 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3122 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3123 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3124 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3125 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3126 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 3135 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 3141 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 91858A > Oct > 90 > Electrical Connectors - Service Procedure Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical Connectors - Service Procedure Number: 91-85-8A Section: 8A Date: October 1990 Corp. Bulletin No.: 018115 Subject: PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CONTACT Model and Year: 1982-91 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS Figure 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 91858A > Oct > 90 > Electrical Connectors - Service Procedure > Page 3146 When diagnosing an electrical system that utilizes Metri-Pack 150/280/480/630 series terminals (refer to Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-4 instruction manual for terminal identification), it is important to check terminal contact between a connector and component, or between in-line connectors, before replacing a suspect component. Frequently, a diagnostic chart leads to a step that reads: "Check for poor connection or replace...". Mating terminals must be inspected to assure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination is caused by the connector halves being improperly connected, a missing or damaged connector seal, or damage to the connector itself, exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt. Contamination, usually to underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter, improperly joining the connector halves or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact, see Figure 1, causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Follow the procedure below to check terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves, refer to Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-4 instruction manual. 2. Inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination will result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals causing high terminal resistance, intermittent connection or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety, terminals, seals and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-2, check the retention force of the female terminal in question by inserting and removing the male terminal to the female terminal in the connector body. Good terminal contact will require a certain amount of force to separate the terminals. 4. Using an equivalent female terminal from the Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-2, compare the retention force of this terminal to the female terminal in question by joining and separating the male terminal to the good female terminal, and then joining and separating the male terminal to the female terminal in question. If the retention force is significantly different between the two female terminals, replace the female terminal in question, refer to Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-2. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 91858A > Oct > 90 > Electrical Connectors - Service Procedure Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical Connectors - Service Procedure Number: 91-85-8A Section: 8A Date: October 1990 Corp. Bulletin No.: 018115 Subject: PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CONTACT Model and Year: 1982-91 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS Figure 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 91858A > Oct > 90 > Electrical Connectors - Service Procedure > Page 3152 When diagnosing an electrical system that utilizes Metri-Pack 150/280/480/630 series terminals (refer to Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-4 instruction manual for terminal identification), it is important to check terminal contact between a connector and component, or between in-line connectors, before replacing a suspect component. Frequently, a diagnostic chart leads to a step that reads: "Check for poor connection or replace...". Mating terminals must be inspected to assure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination is caused by the connector halves being improperly connected, a missing or damaged connector seal, or damage to the connector itself, exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt. Contamination, usually to underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter, improperly joining the connector halves or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact, see Figure 1, causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Follow the procedure below to check terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves, refer to Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-4 instruction manual. 2. Inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination will result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals causing high terminal resistance, intermittent connection or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety, terminals, seals and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-2, check the retention force of the female terminal in question by inserting and removing the male terminal to the female terminal in the connector body. Good terminal contact will require a certain amount of force to separate the terminals. 4. Using an equivalent female terminal from the Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-2, compare the retention force of this terminal to the female terminal in question by joining and separating the male terminal to the good female terminal, and then joining and separating the male terminal to the female terminal in question. If the retention force is significantly different between the two female terminals, replace the female terminal in question, refer to Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-2. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3161 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3162 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3163 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 3168 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3174 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3175 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3176 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3181 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3182 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3183 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3184 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3185 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3186 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 3191 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 3196 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3202 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3203 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3204 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3205 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3206 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3207 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 3212 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Diode > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Isolation Diodes - Replacement Information Diode: Technical Service Bulletins Isolation Diodes - Replacement Information Number: 93-163-8A Section: 8A Date: MAY 1993 Corporate Bulletin No.: 178201R ASE No.: A6 Subject: ISOLATION DIODES REPLACEMENT INFORMATION Model and Year: 1993 AND PRIOR YEAR PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 92-47-8A, DATED NOV. 1991. THE 1993 MODEL YEAR HAS BEEN ADDED AS WELL AS PART NUMBERS HAVE BEEN REVISED. THIS WILL ALSO UPDATE CERTAIN SERVICE MANUALS. ALL COPIES OF 92-47-8A SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Many of the electrical systems on our vehicles use a diode to isolate certain circuits and protect them from voltage spikes. Some of the circuits which may use such a diode are listed below: A/C Compressor Clutch ABS/4WAL NOTE: The ABS diode on the Delco Moraine system is hidden inside of an electrical connector under the carpet at the right kick panel. Wiper Charging System (hidden in wire harness) Parking Brake (vehicles with ABS) Relays Solenoids Diesel Glow Plug Circuit Day Time Running Lights Obtaining replacement diodes can sometimes be a problem. A universal diode, that meets the specifications in the chart below, may be used for the applications listed above. Since certain diode applications have specific part numbers, always reference the applicable GM parts catalogue before installing one of the universal diodes listed in this bulletin. When installing the new diode, use the following procedures to obtain a lasting repair: 1. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 2. Paying attention to current flow direction, remove inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. If the diode is located next to a connector terminal, remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 3. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 4. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. Reference Figure 1 for replacement diode symbols and current flow explanations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Diode > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Isolation Diodes - Replacement Information > Page 3218 Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Use a heat sink (aluminum alligator clip) attached across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excess heat. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the solderin equipment you are using. 5. Install terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed in step number 2. 6. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points. NOTE: A universal diode with a 3 amp, 400 PIV (Peak Inverse Voltage) rating can be used in all of the previously mentioned applications. The following 1993 Service Manuals will need to be updated with the correct part numbers and rating changes. Carline Page All J, L, W, and UO 8A-5-12 Heat sink, part number 276-1567, can be obtained from Radio Shack. We believe the diodes and heat sink listed in this article as well as their manufacturer to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers or equivalent products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Fuse: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Aftermarket Fuse Warning Bulletin No.: 07-08-45-002 Date: September 05, 2007 ADVANCED SERVICE INFORMATION Subject: Service Alert: Concerns With Aftermarket Fuses in GM Vehicles Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2008 and Prior Saab 9-7X Concerns with Harbor Freight Tools "Storehouse" Branded Blade Type Fuses General Motors has become aware of a fuse recall by Harbor Freight Tools/Storehouse for a variety of aftermarket fuses. In two cases, these fuses have not provided protection for the wiring system of the vehicles they were customer installed in. Upon testing the 15 amp version, it was found that the fuse still would not "open" when shorted directly across the battery terminals. How to Identify These Fuses Packed in a 120 piece set, the fuse has a translucent, hard plastic, blue body with the amperage stamped into the top. There are no white painted numbers on the fuse to indicate amperage. There are no identifying marks on the fuse to tell who is making it. The fuses are known to be distributed by Harbor Freight Tools but there may be other marketers, and packaging of this style of fuse. It would be prudent to replace these fuses if found in a customers vehicle. Likewise, if wiring overheating is found you should check the fuse panel for the presence of this style of fuse. All GM dealers should use genuine GM fuses on the vehicles they service. You should also encourage the use of GM fuses to your customers to assure they are getting the required electrical system protection. GM has no knowledge of any concerns with other aftermarket fuses. If additional information becomes available, this bulletin will be updated. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Grounding Point: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3227 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3228 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3229 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3230 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3231 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Grounding Point > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3232 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 3241 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 3247 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 91858A > Oct > 90 > Electrical Connectors - Service Procedure Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical Connectors - Service Procedure Number: 91-85-8A Section: 8A Date: October 1990 Corp. Bulletin No.: 018115 Subject: PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CONTACT Model and Year: 1982-91 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS Figure 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 91858A > Oct > 90 > Electrical Connectors - Service Procedure > Page 3252 When diagnosing an electrical system that utilizes Metri-Pack 150/280/480/630 series terminals (refer to Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-4 instruction manual for terminal identification), it is important to check terminal contact between a connector and component, or between in-line connectors, before replacing a suspect component. Frequently, a diagnostic chart leads to a step that reads: "Check for poor connection or replace...". Mating terminals must be inspected to assure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination is caused by the connector halves being improperly connected, a missing or damaged connector seal, or damage to the connector itself, exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt. Contamination, usually to underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter, improperly joining the connector halves or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact, see Figure 1, causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Follow the procedure below to check terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves, refer to Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-4 instruction manual. 2. Inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination will result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals causing high terminal resistance, intermittent connection or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety, terminals, seals and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-2, check the retention force of the female terminal in question by inserting and removing the male terminal to the female terminal in the connector body. Good terminal contact will require a certain amount of force to separate the terminals. 4. Using an equivalent female terminal from the Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-2, compare the retention force of this terminal to the female terminal in question by joining and separating the male terminal to the good female terminal, and then joining and separating the male terminal to the female terminal in question. If the retention force is significantly different between the two female terminals, replace the female terminal in question, refer to Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-2. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 91858A > Oct > 90 > Electrical Connectors - Service Procedure Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical Connectors - Service Procedure Number: 91-85-8A Section: 8A Date: October 1990 Corp. Bulletin No.: 018115 Subject: PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING CONNECTOR TERMINAL CONTACT Model and Year: 1982-91 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS Figure 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 91858A > Oct > 90 > Electrical Connectors - Service Procedure > Page 3258 When diagnosing an electrical system that utilizes Metri-Pack 150/280/480/630 series terminals (refer to Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-4 instruction manual for terminal identification), it is important to check terminal contact between a connector and component, or between in-line connectors, before replacing a suspect component. Frequently, a diagnostic chart leads to a step that reads: "Check for poor connection or replace...". Mating terminals must be inspected to assure good terminal contact. A poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation. Contamination is caused by the connector halves being improperly connected, a missing or damaged connector seal, or damage to the connector itself, exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt. Contamination, usually to underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion, causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit. Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter, improperly joining the connector halves or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact, see Figure 1, causing an open or intermittently open circuit. Follow the procedure below to check terminal contact. 1. Separate the connector halves, refer to Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-4 instruction manual. 2. Inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination will result in a white or green build-up within the connector body or between terminals causing high terminal resistance, intermittent connection or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of contamination should be replaced in its entirety, terminals, seals and connector body. 3. Using an equivalent male terminal from the Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-2, check the retention force of the female terminal in question by inserting and removing the male terminal to the female terminal in the connector body. Good terminal contact will require a certain amount of force to separate the terminals. 4. Using an equivalent female terminal from the Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-2, compare the retention force of this terminal to the female terminal in question by joining and separating the male terminal to the good female terminal, and then joining and separating the male terminal to the female terminal in question. If the retention force is significantly different between the two female terminals, replace the female terminal in question, refer to Terminal Repair Kit J 38125-2. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3267 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3268 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3269 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 3274 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3280 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3281 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3282 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3287 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3288 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3289 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3290 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3291 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3292 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 07-06-04-019D Date: June 28, 2010 Subject: Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Illuminated, DTC P2138 with Reduced Engine Power (Repair Instrument Panel (IP) to Body Harness Connector) Models: 2005-2011 GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2005-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and warranty information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 07-06-04-019C (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System) Condition - Some customers may comment on an intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) being Illuminated with a message or an indicator that displays Reduced Engine Power. - The technician may observe on a scan tool DTC P2138 - Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1-2 Correlation set as Current or in History. Cause This condition may be caused by water intrusion into the instrument panel (IP) to body harness connector, which carries the APP sensor signals to the ECM/PCM. This water intrusion results in a voltage difference between APP Sensor 1 and APP Sensor 2 that exceeds a predetermined value for more than a calibrated period of time, setting P2138. Correction Note Aftermarket equipment can generate DTC P2138 and/or other DTCs. 1. Verify that aftermarket equipment is not electrically connected to any of the APP sensor signal or low reference circuits or to any other ECM/PCM 5V reference or low reference circuits. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories in SI. 2. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle. ‹› If any 5V reference DTCs are not set, proceed to Step 3. 3. Locate the IP to body harness connector, which may be located in and around the left hand kick panel area or inside the IP. Depending on the vehicle and model year, refer to Wiring Systems or Power and Signal Distribution in SI. Note Some examples of potential water leaks are: A-pillar seals, sunroof drain lines (if equipped) and windshield/cowl sealing. 4. Inspect for a water leak in the area. If necessary use a water hose to determine the source of the leak. Refer to General Information > Water Leaks in SI. ‹› If a water leak is observed, repair as necessary. Verify the effectiveness of the repair. 5. Inspect the IP to body harness connector terminals for corrosion and debris. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections in SI. ‹› If any corrosion and/or debris is observed, repair as necessary. 6. After completing the repair, verify the proper operation of the system. Depending on the vehicle and model year, perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification procedure or refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 07-06-04-019D > Jun > 10 > Electrical - Intermittent MIL/DTC P2138/Reduced Power > Page 3297 Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate labor operation for the source of the water leak Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 3302 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-45-001B Date: October 25, 2010 Subject: Information for Electrical Ground Repair - Use New Replacement Fasteners with Conductive Finish Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-45-001A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Electrical Ground Repair Overview Proper electrical system function relies on secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground connections. Loose, stripped, or corroded connections increase the possibility of improper system function and loss of module communication. These conditions may also lead to unnecessary repairs and component replacement. In general, electrical ground connections are accomplished using one, or a combination of the following attachment methods: - Welded M6 stud and nut - Welded M6 nut and bolt - Welded M8 nut and bolt Determine which attachment method is used and perform the appropriate or alternative repair as described in this bulletin. M6 Weld Stud Replacement Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. Select a location adjacent the damaged or missing M6 ground stud having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 3. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 4. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3308 Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 5. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 6. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 7. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 8. Ensure the rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 9. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 10. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 11. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 12. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 13. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 14. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3309 15. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 16. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the rivet stud. 17. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 18. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). 19. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M6 weld nut at the electrical ground location is damaged or stripped, a M7 conductive self-threading bolt may be used to secure the ground wire terminal. 2. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the weld nut and allow to dry. 3. Remove any loose metal particles from the damaged or stripped weld nut with a stiff brush. 4. Select a M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin 5. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 6. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 7. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M7 conductive self-threading bolt. 8. Install the M7 conductive self-threading bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb in). 9. Verify proper system operation. M6 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive bolt and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M6 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 8.5 mm (0.33 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 8.5 mm (0.33 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M6 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M6 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M6 conductive nut to the bolt and: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3310 Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is accessible from both sides of the panel, a M8 conductive bolt and a M8 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 2. Select a location adjacent the M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the new electrical ground site. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the surface surrounding the ground location and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole until bare metal is visible. 6. Select a M8 conductive bolt. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 7. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M8 conductive bolt. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 8. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 9. Install the electrical ground wire terminal and the M8 conductive bolt to the ground location. 10. Select a M8 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 11. Install the M8 conductive nut to the bolt and: Tighten Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb ft). Note The repair area MUST BE properly refinished to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 12. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 13. Verify proper system operation. M8 Weld Nut Alternative Repair Caution Use only the GM-approved replacement fasteners with conductive finish for electrical ground repair. 1. If the M8 weld nut electrical ground location is not accessible from both sides of the panel, a M6 conductive rivet stud and a M6 conductive nut may be used to secure the electrical ground wire terminal. 2. Select a location adjacent the damaged M8 weld nut having 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance behind the panel surface and 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance surrounding the M6 conductive rivet stud flange. 3. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, remove any grease from the repair site and allow to dry. Note Ensure 20 mm (0.79 in) clearance is maintained behind the panel to be drilled. 4. Drill a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter hole through the panel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3311 5. Remove paint and primer from the area surrounding the 10 mm (0.40 in) until bare metal is visible. Important The M6 conductive rivet stud as shown, can accommodate a panel thickness range of 0.7-4.2 mm (0.03-0.17 in). If there are layers of sheet metal, they should be touching without any air gaps to ensure a good ground. 6. Select a M6 conductive rivet stud. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. Note Use the GE-50317 rivet stud tool kit. 7. Place the M6 conductive rivet stud (1) in the 10 mm (0.40 in) hole. Assemble the rivet stud tool (2) with the groove and flare side facing the rivet stud, then the washer and the M6 nut (3). 8. Using a wrench on the rivet stud tool, and a socket on the M6 nut, secure the M6 conductive rivet stud. 9. Ensure the new rivet stud is securely fastened, WITHOUT ANY detectable movement. 10. Completely wrap the threads of the rivet stud with painters tape or equivalent. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3312 Note The rivet stud and surrounding panel area MUST BE properly refinished PRIOR to the installation of the electrical ground wire terminal and conductive nut to maintain a secure, stable and corrosion-free electrical ground. 11. Refinish the repair area using an anti-corrosion primer. Refer to Anti-Corrosion Treatment and Repair in SI. 12. Allow the refinished repair area to cure sufficiently before removing the protective material applied to the rivet stud threads. 13. Remove the painters tape or equivalent from the rivet stud threads. 14. Using GM approved residue-free solvent or equivalent, thoroughly clean the rivet stud threads to remove any adhesive and allow to dry. 15. Using a small brush, apply Dielectric Lubricant GM P/N 12377900 (Canadian P/N 10953529) to the threads of the M6 conductive rivet stud. Note Fretting corrosion is a build-up of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The oxidized wear debris can accumulate at the electrical contact points causing the electrical resistance across the connection to increase. 16. Carefully remove ANY corrosion or contamination that may be present on the electrical ground wire terminal. 17. Install the electrical ground wire terminal to the M6 conductive rivet stud. 18. Select a M6 conductive nut. Refer to the Parts Information section of this bulletin. 19. Install the M6 conductive nut to the rivet stud and: Tighten Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb in) 20. Verify proper system operation. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 10-08-45-001B > Oct > 10 > Electrical - Information For Electrical Ground Repair > Page 3313 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair Bulletin No.: 06-08-45-004 Date: May 02, 2006 INFORMATION Subject: Instrument Panel (I/P), Body and General Wiring Harness Repair Models: 2007 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks 2003-2007 HUMMER H2 2006-2007 HUMMER H3 Important: A part restriction has been implemented on all Body and I/P harnesses and is being administered by the PQC. If a body or I/P harness replacement is required, it can take 12-28 weeks for a harness to be built and delivered to a dealer. The dealer technician is expected to repair any harness damage as the first and best choice before replacing a harness. In an effort to standardize repair practices, General Motors is requiring that all wiring harnesses be repaired instead of replaced. If there is a question concerning which connector and/or terminal you are working on, refer to the information in the appropriate Connector End Views in SI. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal remove information. Important: There are some parts in the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit (i.e. SIR connector CPAs and heat shrink tube (used in high heat area pigtail replacement) and some TPAs that are not available from GMSPO. It is vitally important that each update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit be done as soon as it arrives at the dealer. Utilize the Terminal Repair Kit (J 38125) to achieve an effective wiring repair. The Terminal Repair Kit has been an essential tool for all GM Dealers since 1987. Replacement terminals and tools for this kit are available through SPX/Kent Moore. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-45-001 for more information. The Instruction Manual J 38125-620, which is sent with each new update to the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit, also has terminal crimping and terminal removal information. U.S. Dealers Only - Training courses (including Tech Assists, Emerging Issues, Web, IDL and Hands-on) are available through the GM Training website. Refer to Resources and then Training Materials for a complete list of available courses. Canadian Dealers Only - Refer to the Training section of GM infoNet for a complete list of available courses and a copy of the J 38125 Terminal Repair Kit Instruction Manual. Wiring repair information is also available in Service Information (SI). The Wiring Repair section contains information for the following types of wiring repairs: - Testing for intermittent conditions and poor conditions - Flat wire repairs - GMLAN wiring repairs - High temperature wiring repairs - Splicing copper wire using splice clips - Splicing copper wire using splice sleeves - Splicing twisted or shielded cable - Splicing inline harness diodes Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 06-08-45-004 > May > 06 > Electrical - Instrument Panel & General Wiring Repair > Page 3318 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-07-009C Date: December 09, 2010 Subject: Wheel Alignment Specifications, Requirements and Recommendations for GM Vehicles Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being extensively revised to provide technicians and warranty administrators with an all inclusive guide for wheel alignments. PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-07-009B (Section 03 - Suspension). Purpose The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail, wholesale and fleet personnel with General Motors' warranty service requirements and recommendations for customer concerns related to wheel alignment. For your convenience, this bulletin updates and centralizes all of GM's Standard Wheel Alignment Service Procedures, Policy Guidelines and bulletins on wheel alignment warranty service. Important PLEASE FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THESE UPDATES BEFORE PERFORMING YOUR NEXT GM WHEEL ALIGNMENT SERVICE. The following five (5) key steps are a summary of this bulletin and are REQUIRED in completing a successful wheel alignment service. 1. Verify the vehicle is in an Original Equipment condition for curb weight, tires, wheels, suspension and steering configurations. Vehicles modified in any of these areas are not covered for wheel alignment warranty. 2. Review the customer concern relative to "Normal Operation" definitions. 3. Verify that vehicle is within the "Mileage Policy" range. 4. Document wheel alignment warranty claims appropriately for labor operations E2000 and E2020. The following information must be documented or attached to the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 5. Use the proper wheel alignment equipment (preferred with print-out capability), process and the appropriate calibration maintenance schedules. Important If it is determined that a wheel alignment is necessary under warranty, use the proper labor code for the repair. E2000 for Steering Wheel Angle and/or Front Toe set or E2020 for Wheel Alignment Check/Adjust includes Caster, Camber and Toe set (Wheel alignment labor time for other component repairs is to be charged to the component that causes a wheel alignment operation.). The following flowchart is to help summarize the information detailed in this bulletin and should be used whenever a wheel alignment is performed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 3324 Verify Original Equipment Condition of the Vehicle - Verify that Original Equipment Tires and Wheels or Official GM Accessory Tires and Wheels are on the vehicle. - Verify that aftermarket suspension "Lift" or "Lowering" Kits or other suspension alterations have NOT been done to the vehicle. - Check for accidental damage to the vehicle; for example, severe pothole or curb impacts, collision damage that may have affected the wheel alignment of the vehicle; e.g., engine cradles, suspension control arms, axles, wheels, wheel covers, tires may show evidence of damage/impact. - Check to be sure vehicle has seen "Normal Use" rather than abuse; e.g., very aggressive driving may show up by looking at the tires and condition of the vehicle. - Check for other additional equipment items that may significantly affect vehicle mass such as large tool boxes, campers, snow plow packages (without the snowplow RPO), etc., especially in trucks and cutaway/incomplete vehicles. Significant additional mass can affect trim height and wheel alignment of the vehicle and may necessitate a customer pay wheel alignment when placed semi-permanently in the vehicle (Upfitter instructions are to realign the vehicle after placement of these types of items. (This typically applies to trucks and incomplete vehicles that can be upfit with equipment such as the above.) Customer Concerns, "Normal Operation" Conditions and "Mileage Policy" Possible Concerns The following are typical conditions that may require wheel alignment warranty service: 1. Lead/Pull: defined as "at a constant highway speed on a typical straight road, the amount of effort required at the steering wheel to maintain the vehicle's straight heading." Important Please evaluate for the condition with hands-on the steering wheel. Follow the "Vehicle Leads/Pulls" diagnostic tree located in SI to determine the cause of a lead/pull concern. Lead/Pull concerns can be due to road crown or road slope, tires, wheel alignment or even in rare circumstances a steering gear issue. Lead/pull concerns due to road crown are considered "Normal Operation" and are NOT a warrantable condition -- the customer should be advised that this is "Normal Operation." Important Some customers may comment on a "Lead/Pull" when they hold the steering wheel in a level condition. If so, this is more likely a "steering wheel angle" concern because the customer is "steering" the vehicle to obtain a "level" steering wheel. 2. Steering wheel angle to the left or right (counter-clockwise or clockwise, respectively): Defined as the steering wheel angle (clocking) deviation from "level" while maintaining a straight heading on a typical straight road. 3. Irregular or Premature tire wear: Slight to very slight "feathering" or "edge" wear on the shoulders of tires is NOT considered unusual and should even out with a tire rotation; if the customer is concerned about a "feathering" condition of the tires, the customer could be advised to rotate the tires earlier than the next scheduled mileage/maintenance interval (but no later than the next interval). Be sure to understand the customer's driving habits as this will also heavily influence the tire wear performance; tire wear from aggressive or abusive driving habits is NOT a warrantable condition. Important Slight or mild feathering, cupping, edge or heel/toe wear of tire tread shoulders is "normal" and can show up very early in a tire/vehicle service mileage; in fact, some new tires can show evidence of feathering from the factory. These issues do NOT affect the overall performance and tread life of the tire. Dealer personnel should always check the customer's maintenance records to ensure that tire inflation pressure is being maintained to placard and that the tires are being rotated (modified-X pattern) at the proper mileage intervals. Wheel alignments are NOT to be performed for the types of "Normal" Tire Feathering shown in Figures 1-4 below. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 3325 Figure 1: Full Tread View - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder/Adjacent/Center Ribs Figure 2: Tire Shoulder View Example 1 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear on the Shoulder Figure 3: Tire Shoulder View Example 2 - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Figure 4: Detail Side View of Tire Shoulder Area - "NORMAL" Tire "Feathering" Wear Important When a wheel alignment is deemed necessary for tire wear, be sure to document on the repair order, in as much detail as possible, the severity and type of tire wear (e.g., severe center wear or severe inside or outside shoulder wear) and the position of the tire on the vehicle (RF, LF, LR, RR). Please note the customer's concern with the wear such as, noise, appearance, wear life, etc. A field product report with pictures of the tire wear condition is recommended. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 02-00-89-002J and #07-00-89-036C. 4. Other repairs that affect wheel alignment; e.g., certain component replacement such as suspension control arm replacement, engine cradle adjustment/replace, steering gear replacement, steering tie rod replace, suspension strut/shock, steering knuckle, etc. may require a wheel alignment. Important If other components or repairs are identified as affecting the wheel alignment, policy calls for the wheel alignment labor time to be charged to the replaced/repaired component's labor operation time rather than the wheel alignment labor operations. Important Vibration type customer concerns are generally NOT due to wheel alignment except in the rare cases; e.g., extreme diagonal wear across the tread. In general, wheel alignments are NOT to be performed as an investigation/correction for vibration concerns. "Normal Operation" Conditions Vehicle Lead/Pull Due to Road Crown or Slope: As part of "Normal Operation," vehicles will follow side-to-side or left to right road crown or slope. Be sure to verify from the customer the types of roads they are driving as they may not recognize the influence of road crown on vehicle lead/pull and steering wheel angle. If a vehicle requires significant steering effort to prevent it from "climbing" the road crown there may be an issue to be looked into further. Important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 3326 A wheel alignment will generally NOT correct vehicles that follow the road crown since this is within "Normal Operation." Mileage Policy The following mileage policy applies for E2020 and E2000 labor operations: Note Wheel Alignment is NOT covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for Express and Savana Cutaway vehicles as these vehicles require Upfitters to set the wheel alignment after completing the vehicles. - 0-800 km (0-500 mi): E2000/E2020 claims ONLY allowed with Call Center Authorization. Due to the tie down during shipping, the vehicle's suspension requires some time to reach normal operating position. For this reason, new vehicles are generally NOT to be aligned until they have accumulated at least 800 km (500 mi). A field product report should accompany any claim within this mileage range. - 801-12,000 km (501-7,500 mi): - If a vehicle came from the factory with incorrect alignment settings, any resulting off-angle steering wheel, lead/pull characteristics or the rare occurrence of excessive tire wear would be apparent early in the life of the vehicle. The following policy applies: - Vehicles 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe - Escalade/ESV/EXT, Tahoe/Suburban, Yukon/XL/Denali, Silverado/Sierra, Express/Savana, Corvette and Colorado/Canyon: E2000/E2020 Claims: Call Center Authorization Required - All Vehicles NOT 100% Factory Set/Measured for Caster/Camber/Toe as noted above: E2000/E2020 Claims: Dealer Service Manager Authorization Required - 12,001 km and beyond (7,501 miles and beyond): During this period, customers are responsible for the wheel alignment expense or dealers may provide on a case-by case basis a one-time customer enthusiasm claim up to 16,000 km (10,000 mi). In the event that a defective component required the use of the subject labor operations, the identified defective component labor operation will include the appropriate labor time for a wheel alignment as an add condition to the component repair. Important Only one wheel alignment labor operation claim (E2000 or E2020) may be used per VIN. Warranty Documentation Requirements When a wheel alignment service has been deemed necessary, the following items will need to be clearly documented on/with the repair order: - Customer concern in detail - What corrected the customer concern? - If a wheel alignment is performed: - Consult SI for proper specifications. - Document the "Before" AND "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings. - Completed "Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire" (form attached to this bulletin) 1. Document the customer concern in as much detail as possible on the repair order and in the warranty administration system. Preferred examples: - Steering wheel is off angle in the counterclockwise direction by approximately x degrees or clocking position. - Vehicle lead/pulls to the right at approximately x-y mph. Vehicle will climb the road crown. Severe, Moderate or Slight. - RF and LF tires are wearing on the outside shoulders with severe feathering. Important In the event of a lead/pull or steering wheel angle concern, please note the direction of lead/pull (left or right) or direction of steering wheel angle (clockwise or counterclockwise) on the repair order and within the warranty claim verbatim. Important In the event of a tire wear concern, please note the position on the vehicle and where the wear is occurring on the tire; i.e., the RF tire is wearing on the inside shoulder. 2. Document the technician's findings on cause and correction of the issue. Examples: - Reset LF toe from 0.45 degrees to 0.10 degrees and RF toe from -0.25 degrees to 0.10 degrees to correct the steering wheel angle from 5 degrees counterclockwise to 0 degrees. - Reset LF camber from 0.25 degrees to -0.05 degrees to correct the cross-camber condition of +0.30 degrees to 0.00 degrees on the vehicle. - Front Sum toe was found to be 0.50 degrees, reset to 0.20 degrees. 3. Print-out the "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements/settings and attach them to the Repair Order or if print-out capability is not Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 3327 available, measurements may also be clearly and legibly handwritten into the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire attached to this bulletin. 4. Attach the Wheel Alignment Repair Order Questionnaire below along with the print-out of "Before" and "After" wheel alignment measurements to the Repair Order and retain for use by GM. Wheel Alignment Equipment and Process Wheel alignments must be performed with a quality machine that will give accurate results when performing checks. "External Reference" (image-based camera technology) is preferred. Please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 05-00-89-029B: General Motors Dealership Critical Equipment Requirements and Recommendations. Requirements: - Computerized four wheel alignment system. - Computer capable of printing before and after alignment reports. - Computer capable of time and date stamp printout. - Racking system must have jacking capability - Racking system must be capable of level to 1.6 mm (1/16 in) - Appropriate wheel stops and safety certification - Built-in turn plates and slip plates - Wheel clamps capable of attaching to 20" or larger wheels - Racking capable of accepting any GM passenger car or light duty truck - Operator properly trained and ASE-certified (U.S. only) in wheel alignment Recommendations: Racking should have front and rear jacking capability. Equipment Maintenance and Calibration: Alignment machines must be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. Most manufacturers recommend the following: - Alignment machines with "internal reference" sensors should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) every six months. - Alignment machines with "external reference" (image-based camera technology) should be checked (and calibrated, if necessary) once a year. - Racks must be kept level to within 1.6 mm (1/16 in). - If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged in some way, check the calibration immediately. Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. Wheel Alignment Process When performing wheel alignment measurement and/or adjustment, the following steps should be taken: Preliminary Steps: 1. Verify that the vehicle has a full tank of fuel (compensate as necessary). 2. Inspect the wheels and the tires for damage. 3. Inspect the tires for the proper inflation and irregular tire wear. 4. Inspect the wheel bearings for excessive play. 5. Inspect all suspension and steering parts for looseness, wear, or damage. 6. Inspect the steering wheel for excessive drag or poor return due to stiff or rusted linkage or suspension components. 7. Inspect the vehicle trim height. 8. Compensate for frame angle on targeted vehicles (refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI). Satisfactory vehicle operation may occur over a wide range of alignment angles. However, if the wheel alignment angles are not within the range of specifications, adjust the wheel alignment to the specifications. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Give consideration to excess loads, such as tool boxes, sample cases, etc. Follow the wheel alignment equipment manufacturer's instructions. Measure/Adjust: Important Prior to making any adjustments to wheel alignment on a vehicle, technicians must verify that the wheel alignment specifications loaded into their wheel alignment machine are up-to-date by comparing these to the wheel alignment specifications for the appropriate model and model year in SI. Using incorrect and/or outdated specifications may result in unnecessary adjustments, irregular and/or premature tire wear and repeat customer concerns Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 3328 Important When performing adjustments to vehicles requiring a 4-wheel alignment, set the rear wheel alignment angles first in order to obtain proper front wheel alignment angles. Perform the following steps in order to measure the front and rear alignment angles: 1. Install the alignment equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Jounce the front and the rear bumpers 3 times prior to checking the wheel alignment. 3. Measure the alignment angles and record the readings. If necessary, adjust the wheel alignment to vehicle specification and record the before and after measurements. Refer to Wheel Alignment Specifications in SI. Important Technicians must refer to SI for the correct wheel alignment specifications. SI is the only source of GM wheel alignment specifications that is kept up-to-date throughout the year. Test drive vehicle to ensure proper repair. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 3329 Frame Angle Measurement (Express / Savana Only) ........ Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 3330 What corrected the customer concern and was the repair verified? Please Explain: ............. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 3331 Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Alignment - The Importance of Four Wheel Alignment Number: 89-01-3A Section: 3A Date: SEPT., 1988 Subject: THE IMPORTANCE OF FOUR WHEEL ALIGNMENT Model and Year: 1979-89 ALL CHEVROLET MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS In which direction will the vehicle pictured below travel if the steering wheel is straight ahead? The vehicle will track to the left because of the directional forces created by the rear wheels and tires. This directional force is called the "thrust angle". The front wheels aim or steer the vehicle but the rear wheels control tracking and assist in directing the car. What might the driver comment about? In the illustration, the driver may comment about the steering wheel being off center when going straight down the road. This would be true because of the added input required at the steering wheel to offset the thrust angle force caused by the rear wheels not tracking the front wheels to the geometric center line of the vehicle. The driver may also comment about unusual tire wear, not precise handling characteristics and even decreased fuel economy. A four wheel alignment allows the technician to measure the toe of each rear wheel to determine if the rear wheels are tracking the geometric center line of the car. Ideally the geometric center line will be the same as the thrust line. In the example in Figure 1, the thrust line has shifted to the right because the rear wheel toe is not tracking the front wheels. This can occur on both or on one rear wheel. On some vehicles the rear toe is adjustable; other models may require component straightening or replacement or shims. Once the rear toe is properly adjusted or set, the front wheel toe can be set so all four wheels are tracking the geometric center line of the vehicle. This will provide optimum tire wear, handling and fuel economy characteristics for the vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Specifications > Page 3332 Alignment: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Locking Wheel Nuts Impact On Tire Balance 85-37 3E (X) FEB., 1985 Subject: LOCKING WHEEL NUTS Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Whenever a heavier, solid locking wheel nut is used to replace a standard nut, it should be installed nearest the valve stem, and a 1/2 ounce balance weight should be added 180~ opposite the locking nut. This situation will usually occur on styled wheels. For improved appearance, the balance weight should be installed on the wheel's inboard side. When rotating tires, always re-install the locking nut nearest the tire valve stem so that it remains opposite the 1/2 ounce balance weight. This procedure will improve the on-car wheel balance by compensating for the heavy locking wheel nut. This does not apply to the light weight, two-piece locking nuts used on some Chevrolet models. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3333 Alignment: Specifications Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3334 CASTER CHART Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3335 CASTER, CAMBER, WHEEL TOE-IN Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3336 Alignment: Service and Repair Caster and camber adjustments are made by means of shims located between upper control arm shaft and mounting bracket attached to suspension crossmember. A series of convex and concave spacers with flat opposite sides are used. These spacers allow a positive cross shaft-to-bracket attachment regardless of the number of shims used. Shims may be changed at either front or rear to vary caster, or at both points to vary camber. CASTER 1. Measure frame angle at "B". 2. Check caster on alignment machine. 3. Using frame angle measurement and measured caster angle, determine actual (corrected) caster angle as follows: a. Subtract a ``down in rear'' frame angle from a positive caster angle reading. b. Add an ``up in rear'' frame angle to a positive caster angle reading. c. Add a ``down in rear'' frame angle to a negative caster angle reading. d. Subtract an ``up in rear'' frame angle from a negative caster angle reading. 4. Measure dimension ``A''. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3337 5. Using dimension ``A,'' and Caster Specification Chart, find the recommended caster angle. See: Specifications 6. The frame corrected angle should correspond to the recommended angle on the chart within plus or minus 1/4°. Make necessary changes to bring caster angle within limits. CAMBER 1. Determine camber angle using suitable equipment. 2. Add or subtract shims from both front and rear bolts to adjust camber as required. TOE-IN Toe-in can be increased or decreased by changing the length of the tie rods. A threaded sleeve is provided for this purpose. When tie rods are mounted ahead of the steering knuckle, decrease the length to increase toe-in. When tie rods are mounted behind the steering knuckle, increase the length to increase toe-in. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Manual Clarified, Caliper To Knuckle Clearance Front Steering Knuckle: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Manual Clarified, Caliper To Knuckle Clearance 85-38 5 (V) FEB., 1985 Subject: BRAKE CALIPERS TO KNUCKLE CLEARANCE Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The front caliper to knuckle clearance given in the service manuals may be misinterpreted. The indicator clearance of 0.13 - 0.30 mm (0.005 - 0.012 in.) represents an ideal condition where the caliper is centered in the knuckle opening. In actual practice, braking action moves the caliper against the knuckle which may result in little or no clearance on one end of the caliper/knuckle assembly. The clearance at each end of the caliper should be measured individually and added together to determine the total caliper to knuckle clearance. The total clearance should be 0.26 0.60 mm (0.010 - 0.024 in.). Reference Section 5 of the Shop Manual. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3343 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair EXC. K30/3500 & V30/3500 1. Remove hub and spindle. 2. Disconnect tie rod from steering arm. If steering arm is removed from knuckle, discard the self-locking nuts and replace with new ones during installation. Tighten nuts to 90 ft. lbs. 3. Remove cotter pin from upper ball joint stud nut, and remove retaining nuts from both ball joints. 4. Separate stud from yoke using suitable ball joint fork at lower joint and repeat at upper joint is required. Do not remove upper ball joint adjusting sleeve from yoke unless ball joint is being replaced. If it is necessary to loosen the sleeve to remove the knuckle, only loosen the sleeve two threads. The non-hardened threads in the yoke can be easily damaged by the adjusting sleeve. 5. Reverse procedure to install. 6. Torque lower ball joint to 70 ft. lbs., adjusting sleeve to 50 ft. lbs., and upper ball joint to 100 ft. lbs. Tighten tie rod nut to 45 ft. lbs. K30/3500 & V30/3500 1. Remove hub and spindle. 2. Remove upper king pin cap by alternately loosening nuts to unload the compression spring. Withdraw the spring and gasket. 3. Remove the lower bearing cap and king pin. 4. Remove upper king pin tapered bushing and knuckle from yoke. Remove felt king pin seal. 5. Remove upper king pin from yoke using a large breaker bar. 6. Drive lower king pin bearing cup, cone, grease retainer, and seal through bottom of knuckle using suitable tool. 7. Reverse procedure to install. 8. Torque upper king pin to 500---600 ft. lbs., and upper and lower bearing cap nuts to 70---90 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold Power Steering Fluid: Customer Interest P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold Group Ref.: Steering/Suspension Bulletin No.: 033206 Date: March 1994 SUBJECT: REDUCED POWER STEERING ASSIST AT LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURES (NEW POWER STEERING FLUID) MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS Applications: Appropriate for all passenger vehicles, but particularly beneficial in 1980 and later FWD Models equipped with Power Rack and Pinion Steering. CONDITION: Comments of reduced power steering assist at low ambient temperatures (approximately 10°F and lower) may be noted by some vehicle operators when turning the steering wheel in BOTH the right and left direction during warm-up after cold start. All vehicles with power steering exhibit this condition to varying degrees, but condition may be more noticeable with power rack and pinion steering systems that typically have longer hoses and cooler lines. Note: This condition, which is related to power steering fluid viscosity, should not, however, be confused with conditions having similar symptoms such as that described divisional Special Policy numbers listed: CAUSE: In cold weather, power steering fluid thickens in the same manner as any other petroleum-based oil or fluid. Upon cold starting, the fluid resists movement through the system and the driver senses reduced power assist (sometimes referred to as "stiff steer"). As the vehicle operates and fluid circulates through the power steering system, the fluid warms and thins to its normal operating viscosity. CORRECTION: Saginaw Division has developed a new Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid for use in cold climates. Compared with conventional power steering fluid, this new fluid flows better at low temperatures and resists the thickening which contributes to reduced power assist upon start up. RACK AND PINION STEERING SYSTEMS Reduced power assist upon cold weather starting may be more noticeable in Power Rack and Pinion steering systems that may contain six or more feet of Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 3353 pressure and return hose along with long cooler lines. Such long systems contain greater volumes of fluid and vehicles so equipped tend to have longer periods of reduced power assist. The new fluid performs particularly well with current designed Rack and Pinion steering systems and special remanufactured Rack and Pinion Steering Assemblies. PARTS INFORMATION: Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid is available from GMSPO. Order as: Parts are currently available from GMSPO. SERVICE PROCEDURE: The power steering fluid replacement procedure is a two-stage process: first, flushing the old fluid from the system with new fluid; and second, bleeding the system to remove any trapped air. The two sequences outline the steps in each procedure. FLUSHING THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM 1. Raise the front end of the vehicle off the ground until the wheels are free to turn. 2. Remove the fluid return line at the pump reservoir inlet connector. 3. Plug the inlet connector port on the pump reservoir. 4. Position the fluid return line toward a large container in order to catch the draining fluid. 5. While a second person fills the reservoir with new Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid, start and run the engine at idle. 6. Turn the steering wheel from stop to stop. NOTICE: Do not hold the wheel against stops while flushing the system, Holding steering wheel against wheel stops will cause high system pressure, overheating, and damage to the pump and/or gear. 7. Continue draining until all of the old fluid is cleared from the power steering system. Addition of approximately 1 quart of new fluid will be required to flush system. 8. Unplug pump reservoir inlet and reconnect return line. 9. Turn engine off, and fill reservoir to the "Full Cold" mark. 10. Continue with following procedure "Bleeding the Power Steering System". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 3354 BLEEDING THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM After replacing the fluid or servicing the power steering hydraulic system, you must bleed air from the system. Air in the system prevents an accurate fluid level reading, causes pump cavitation noise and over time could damage the pump. To bleed the power steering system proceed as follows: 1. Begin with the engine off, front wheels off the ground, and wheels turned all the way to the left. 2. Add Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid to the "FULL COLD" mark on the fluid level indicator. 3. Bleed the system by turning the wheels from side to side without hitting stops. Important: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 3355 This may require turning the wheels from side to side twenty times. On systems with long return lines or fluid coolers, turning steering wheel lock-to-lock forty times may be required. Keep the fluid level at the "FULL COLD" mark. Fluid with air In it has a light tan appearance. This air must be eliminated from the fluid before normal steering action can be obtained. 4. Start the engine. With the engine idling, recheck the fluid level. If necessary, add fluid to bring the level to the "FULL COLD" mark. 5. Return the wheels to the center position. Lower front wheels to the ground. Continue running the engine for two or three minutes. 6. Test the vehicle to be sure the steering functions normally and is free from noise. Important: Inspect for fluid leakage at connection points along the power steering system. 7. Recheck the fluid level as described in Steps 3 and 4 except that the fluid level should now be up to the "FULL HOT" mark after the system has stabilized at its normal operating temperature. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold Power Steering Fluid: All Technical Service Bulletins P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold Group Ref.: Steering/Suspension Bulletin No.: 033206 Date: March 1994 SUBJECT: REDUCED POWER STEERING ASSIST AT LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURES (NEW POWER STEERING FLUID) MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS Applications: Appropriate for all passenger vehicles, but particularly beneficial in 1980 and later FWD Models equipped with Power Rack and Pinion Steering. CONDITION: Comments of reduced power steering assist at low ambient temperatures (approximately 10°F and lower) may be noted by some vehicle operators when turning the steering wheel in BOTH the right and left direction during warm-up after cold start. All vehicles with power steering exhibit this condition to varying degrees, but condition may be more noticeable with power rack and pinion steering systems that typically have longer hoses and cooler lines. Note: This condition, which is related to power steering fluid viscosity, should not, however, be confused with conditions having similar symptoms such as that described divisional Special Policy numbers listed: CAUSE: In cold weather, power steering fluid thickens in the same manner as any other petroleum-based oil or fluid. Upon cold starting, the fluid resists movement through the system and the driver senses reduced power assist (sometimes referred to as "stiff steer"). As the vehicle operates and fluid circulates through the power steering system, the fluid warms and thins to its normal operating viscosity. CORRECTION: Saginaw Division has developed a new Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid for use in cold climates. Compared with conventional power steering fluid, this new fluid flows better at low temperatures and resists the thickening which contributes to reduced power assist upon start up. RACK AND PINION STEERING SYSTEMS Reduced power assist upon cold weather starting may be more noticeable in Power Rack and Pinion steering systems that may contain six or more feet of Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 3361 pressure and return hose along with long cooler lines. Such long systems contain greater volumes of fluid and vehicles so equipped tend to have longer periods of reduced power assist. The new fluid performs particularly well with current designed Rack and Pinion steering systems and special remanufactured Rack and Pinion Steering Assemblies. PARTS INFORMATION: Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid is available from GMSPO. Order as: Parts are currently available from GMSPO. SERVICE PROCEDURE: The power steering fluid replacement procedure is a two-stage process: first, flushing the old fluid from the system with new fluid; and second, bleeding the system to remove any trapped air. The two sequences outline the steps in each procedure. FLUSHING THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM 1. Raise the front end of the vehicle off the ground until the wheels are free to turn. 2. Remove the fluid return line at the pump reservoir inlet connector. 3. Plug the inlet connector port on the pump reservoir. 4. Position the fluid return line toward a large container in order to catch the draining fluid. 5. While a second person fills the reservoir with new Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid, start and run the engine at idle. 6. Turn the steering wheel from stop to stop. NOTICE: Do not hold the wheel against stops while flushing the system, Holding steering wheel against wheel stops will cause high system pressure, overheating, and damage to the pump and/or gear. 7. Continue draining until all of the old fluid is cleared from the power steering system. Addition of approximately 1 quart of new fluid will be required to flush system. 8. Unplug pump reservoir inlet and reconnect return line. 9. Turn engine off, and fill reservoir to the "Full Cold" mark. 10. Continue with following procedure "Bleeding the Power Steering System". Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 3362 BLEEDING THE POWER STEERING SYSTEM After replacing the fluid or servicing the power steering hydraulic system, you must bleed air from the system. Air in the system prevents an accurate fluid level reading, causes pump cavitation noise and over time could damage the pump. To bleed the power steering system proceed as follows: 1. Begin with the engine off, front wheels off the ground, and wheels turned all the way to the left. 2. Add Low Temperature Climate Service Fluid to the "FULL COLD" mark on the fluid level indicator. 3. Bleed the system by turning the wheels from side to side without hitting stops. Important: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Fluid: > 033206 > Mar > 94 > P/S - Reduced Assist When Cold > Page 3363 This may require turning the wheels from side to side twenty times. On systems with long return lines or fluid coolers, turning steering wheel lock-to-lock forty times may be required. Keep the fluid level at the "FULL COLD" mark. Fluid with air In it has a light tan appearance. This air must be eliminated from the fluid before normal steering action can be obtained. 4. Start the engine. With the engine idling, recheck the fluid level. If necessary, add fluid to bring the level to the "FULL COLD" mark. 5. Return the wheels to the center position. Lower front wheels to the ground. Continue running the engine for two or three minutes. 6. Test the vehicle to be sure the steering functions normally and is free from noise. Important: Inspect for fluid leakage at connection points along the power steering system. 7. Recheck the fluid level as described in Steps 3 and 4 except that the fluid level should now be up to the "FULL HOT" mark after the system has stabilized at its normal operating temperature. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > P/S - Rack & Pinion O-Ring Seal Fitting Leaks Power Steering Line/Hose: Technical Service Bulletins P/S - Rack & Pinion O-Ring Seal Fitting Leaks 85-61 3B (IX) APR., 1985 Subject: POWER STEERING HOSE LINE CONNECTION FITTING LEAKS Model and Year: ALL VEHICLES WITH POWER STEERING EXCEPT NOVA, SPRINT AND SPECTRUM TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS "O" ring type seal fittings have been used on rack and pinion and integral gear power steering hose line connections since 1980. Fitting torque specification is 27 N-m (20 lbs. ft.). If a leak is experienced at the fitting area when properly tightened, this condition may be caused by a damaged fitting "O" ring. Inspect the "O" ring for damage, pipe end for cracks, fitting threads for damage and replace as required. DO NOT EXCEED fitting torque specification. Additional torque will not increase "O" ring sealing ability and may result in cracking the connection boss on aluminum gear housings. If a leak is experienced at the connection area with a new undamaged "O" ring under correct torque, inspect housing boss for possible porosity. A porosity condition will require housing or short gear replacement. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - System Bleed Procedures Power Steering Pump: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - System Bleed Procedures Group Ref.: Steering/Suspension Bulletin No.: 383001 Date: December, 1993 INFORMATION SUBJECT: ILLUSTRATED STEERING SYSTEM BLEED PROCEDURE MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN IS BEING REVISED TO ADD THE 1994 MODEL YEAR AND CHANGE THE ARTWORK. PREVIOUS DIVISIONAL PUBLICATION NUMBERS WERE: BUICK 93-3-5 3/02/93 CADILLAC T-93-76 5/12/93 CHEVROLET 93-146-3B 3/29/93 GM OF CANADA 93-3-102 5/05/93 OLDSMOBILE 2-93-59 (S.G.) 5/14/93 The steering system in 1994 and prior model year cars and light duty trucks should be bled after any of the following: - A power steering component is replaced. - A fluid line is disconnected. - A customer comments on steering system noise. Bleeding air from the steering system should be done in order to prevent pump damage, ensure proper operation, and to eliminate steering system noise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - System Bleed Procedures > Page 3372 The illustration presents a pictorial illustration of the bleed procedure. This new procedure replaces previous steering system bleed procedures. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - System Bleed Procedures > Page 3373 SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly/Assembly Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Disassembly/Assembly Disassembly Fig. 1 Vane type power steering pump w/integral reservoir disassembled (typical) Fig. 2 Removing end plate retaining ring Fig. 3 Removing flow control valve & spring Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly/Assembly > Page 3376 Fig. 4 Thrust plate & rotor installed on driveshaft 1. Referring to Fig. 1, carefully mount pump in vise with soft jaws and remove reservoir cap. When clamping pump in vise, do not exert excessive force on front hub as this may distort drive shaft bushing in housing. 2. Remove rear pump mounting stud and O-ring seal, pressure union and O-ring seal. 3. Remove reservoir, and second pressure union O-ring seal. 4. Using a small punch, depress end plate retaining ring enough to allow removal from groove. Use the 1/8 inch diameter hole in housing, Fig. 2. Then remove retaining ring with screwdriver. 5. Remove end plate which is spring loaded and usually sits above housing level. If end plate sticks, a slight rocking action should free it. If rocking action fails to free plate, use a magnet. 6. Remove two pressure springs from pump housing. 7. Remove flow control valve and spring by inverting housing. Do not disassemble flow control valve as it is serviced as a unit and pre-set at the factory, Fig. 3. 8. Remove drive shaft key from slot in shaft. Then with end of shaft pointed downward, press down until shaft is free. 9. Turn assembly over and remove drive shaft and rotary group. 10. Remove rotor retaining ring from groove in drive shaft. Remove rotor and thrust plate from shaft, Fig. 4. 11. Remove and discard O-ring seals from pump housing. Remove driveshaft oil seal only if inspection shows necessity for replacement. Inspection 1. Clean all parts except the drive shaft oil seal in cleaning fluid. The seal will be damaged if immersed in cleaning fluid. 2. Check fit of vanes in slots of rotor for tightness or excessive looseness. Vanes must fit snugly but slide freely in slots in rotor. Tight fit of vanes in rotor can usually be corrected by thorough cleaning. Replace rotor if excessive looseness exists between rotor and vanes. Replace vanes if worn or scored. 3. Examine machined surfaces of pump ring for roughness or wear. Replace ring if roughness cannot be corrected with crocus cloth. 4. Inspect thrust plate, pressure plate and end plate for wear, scores or other damage. 5. Inspect pump housing for cracks or damage. Check housing for evidence of wear or scoring. 6. Check all springs for free length, distortion or collapsed coils. 7. Inspect located dowel pins for distortion. 8. Examine outer diameter of flow control valve for scoring or roughness. Slight damage may be cleaned up with crocus cloth. Check valve assembly for freedom of movement in bore of pump housing. 9. Check all oil passages in pump parts for obstruction. Use a piece of tag wire to clean out holes. 10. Check bushing in pump housing for wear or damage. Assembly Fig. 4 Thrust plate & rotor installed on driveshaft Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly/Assembly > Page 3377 Fig. 5 Installing driveshaft assembly Fig. 6 Installing pump ring Fig. 7 Installing rotor vanes 1. Lubricate new O-ring seals with Vaseline and place in pump housing. 2. If drive shaft oil seal was removed during disassembly, lubricate new seal with Vaseline. Then install seal in pump body front hub, using a suitable seal driver. 3. Position thrust plate and rotor on drive shaft. Then install rotor retaining ring in groove of drive shaft, Fig. 4. 4. Place pump housing on work bench as shown in Fig. 5 and install two pump ring dowel pins in bore of housing. 5. Install drive shaft in housing, making sure shaft seats properly. 6. Install pump ring in housing over two dowel pins with rotation arrow on ring to rear of pump housing, Fig. 6.Arrow on outer edge of pump ring points in direction of pump rotation (counterclockwise when viewed from rear of pump). 7. Install rotor vanes in slots of pump rotor, with radius edge of vanes toward outside of rotor, Fig. 7. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly/Assembly > Page 3378 Fig. 8 Installing pressure plate Fig. 9 Installing pressure plate springs 8. Position pump housing on two wood blocks and push parts down into place as shown in Fig. 8. 9. Lubricate outside diameter and chamfer of pressure plate with Vaseline to insure against damage to O-ring seals in housing. Then install pressure plate in housing over dowel pins.Ported face of pressure plate goes toward pump ring, Fig. 8. 10. Using a 2-3/4 inch diameter sleeve to apply pressure to outer edge of pressure plate only, press pressure plate into seat. Pressure plate will travel about 1/16 inch to seat. Do not press or hammer on center of pressure plate as to do so will cause permanent distortion resulting in pump failure. 11. Install two pressure plate springs, one over each dowel pin in pump housing, Fig. 9. Fig. 10 Installing end plate & retaining ring Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly/Assembly > Page 3379 Fig. 11 Installing flow control valve & spring Fig. 12 Installing pressure union O-ring seal 12. Lubricate outside diameter and chamfer of end plate with Vaseline to insure against damage to O-ring seal in housing. Then press end plate into housing. While holding end plate down in housing, install end plate retaining ring. Be sure end plate is completely and solidly seated in groove of housing, Fig. 10. 13. Remove assembly from press and place on work bench. Install flow control spring and valve in bore of housing. Make sure hex head screw goes into housing bore, Fig. 11. 14. Position pressure union O-ring seal in bore of housing over flow control valve, Fig. 12. 15. Mount pump housing in vise with soft jaws and install reservoir. 16. Install pressure union and new O-ring seal in reservoir. Tighten union. 17. Install mounting stud and new O-ring seal in reservoir. Tighten stud. 18. Install drive shaft key in slot in shaft. Support shaft on opposite side while installing key. Install reservoir cap. Vane Type Power Steering Pump, Less Integral Reservoir Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly/Assembly > Page 3380 Fig. 1 Vane type power steering pump, less integral reservoir disassembled Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly/Assembly > Page 3381 Fig. 2 Removal & installation of return tube, control valve, driveshaft, ball bearing assembly & driveshaft seal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly/Assembly > Page 3382 Fig. 3 Removal & installation of rotating group Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly/Assembly > Page 3383 Fig. 4 Removal & installation of sleeve assembly Refer to Figs. 1 through 4 for service procedures on this type pump. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly/Assembly > Page 3384 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Replace 1. Disconnect hoses at power steering pump, then plug pump ports and hoses to prevent dirt entry. 2. Loosen pump adjusting bolt and remove pump drive belt. 3. Remove pump to support bracket retaining bolts, then the pump. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Service Precautions Steering Column: Service Precautions When the steering column is installed in the vehicle it is not susceptible to damage through ordinary use; however, when it is removed, care must be taken during handling. Such actions as a sharp blow on the end of the steering shaft or shift levers, leaning on the column assembly or dropping of the assembly could loosen or shear the plastic shear joints or rivets used to maintain column rigidity. Hammering, jolting or bumping on the steering shaft and gearshift tube must be avoided during all service operations. If the shear pins are broken, the controlled length of the telescoping design will be altered making these components unfit for further service. When removing the steering wheel, only a steering wheel puller designed for this purpose must be used. It is important that only the specified screws, bolts and nuts be used during the assembly procedure and torqued to specifications to insure proper breakaway action of the column under impact. Avoid using excessively long bolts or fasteners as they may prevent a portion of the steering column from collapsing. When replacing fasteners, replace with ones of the same part number or equivalent. When removing or installing the steering wheel, ignition switch, lock cylinder, turn signal switch, neutral start switch, back-up light switch or adjusting column shift manual transmission linkage refer to the appropriate vehicle chapter. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Description and Operation > Neutral Start Mechanical Lockout Steering Column: Description and Operation Neutral Start Mechanical Lockout Fig. 12 Mechanical neutral start system, shown in Park position On some automatic transmission equipped vehicles, the actuation of the ignition switch is prevented by a mechanical lockout system, Fig. 12, which prevents the lock cylinder from rotating when the selector lever is out of Park or Neutral. When the selector lever is in Park or Neutral, the slots in the bowl plate and the finger on the actuator rod align, allowing the finger to pass through the bowl plate, in turn actuating the ignition switch, Fig. 12. If the selector lever is in any position other than Park or Neutral, the finger contacts the bowl plate when the lock cylinder is rotated, thereby preventing full travel of the lock cylinder. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Description and Operation > Neutral Start Mechanical Lockout > Page 3390 Steering Column: Description and Operation Steering Column ENERGY ABSORBING STEERING COLUMNS The energy absorbing function of the steering column allows the column to collapse at a controlled rate during a severe collision. The collapsing action reduces the possibility of the steering wheel being driven rearward towards the driver. If the driver is thrown forward into the steering wheel, the column can collapse even further at the same controlled rate, thereby reducing the force of impact. Several designs of steering column jackets are used. There is the slip-tube design which is held together with plastic inserts or rivets that shear upon impact and allow the column to collapse. And there is the slotted or corrugated mesh design and bellows type design which shorten in length during impact. The shift tube is a two piece design which is held together by injections of plastic that form the interconnecting inserts and shear pins. Under impact, there is a gradual paring away of the inserts by the knife-like edge in the adjoining tube section. The steering shaft is a two piece assembly. The upper piece is solid and has a double flattened lower end. The lower piece is hollow and formed to fit over the double flattened section of the upper piece. The purpose of the double flattened section is to provide continued steering action even though the shaft is completely collapsed. Upon impact, the shear pins break off and the shaft gradually telescopes against resistance provided by the plastic injections. The steering column mounting bracket prevents the column from being shifted towards the driver during impact. It uses two `` breakaway capsules'' that allow the mounting bracket to slip off its attaching points, allowing the steering column to compress or yield in a forward direction under a severe impact from the driver's end. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Service and Repair > - With Standard Column Steering Column: Service and Repair - With Standard Column Fig. 8 Non-tilt steering column & components. Automatic & 3 speed manual, exc. Astro Van, S/T 10-15 & Safari Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Service and Repair > - With Standard Column > Page 3393 Fig. 9 Non-tilt steering column & components. 4 speed manual transmission, exc. Astro Van, S/T 10-15 & Safari EXC. ASTRO VAN, S/T 10-15 & SAFARI Disassembly 1. Remove nut retainer and steering wheel nut. 2. Using a suitable screwdriver, pry cover upward from lock. 3. Depress lock plate and pry snap ring out of groove. Remove snap ring and lock plate. 4. Remove turn signal switch, lock cylinder, ignition switch, dimmer and buzzer switch, if used, Figs. 8 and 9. 5. On column shift models, remove upper shift lever pivot pin, then the shifter lever. 6. Remove upper bearing thrust washer, 4 retaining screws and housing assembly. 7. Remove thrust cap from lower portion of housing. 8. Lift ignition switch actuating rod and rack assembly. Remove rack preload spring, lock rack bolt and spring assembly from housing. 9. Remove shift lever detent plate. 10. Using a suitable screwdriver, push ignition switch actuator sector through lock cylinder hole. 11. Remove gearshift lever housing and shroud from steering column jacket assembly. 12. On floor shift models, remove transmission control lock tube housing and shroud. 13. Remove shift lever spring from gearshift lever housing. 14. On floor shift models, remove lock tube spring. 15. Pull steering shaft from lower end of steering column jacket assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Service and Repair > - With Standard Column > Page 3394 16. Remove back-up light or neutral safety switch from steering column. 17. Remove lower bearing retaining clip. 18. On automatic transmission and floor shift models, remove lower bearing retainer, bearing adapter assembly, shift tube thrust spring and washer. 19. On manual transmission column shift models, remove lower bearing adapter, bearing and first reverse shift lever. Remove gearshift housing lower bearing from upper end of steering column jacket. Assembly 1. Coat all friction surfaces with suitable grease. 2. Install sector into turn signal and lock cylinder housing. 3. Install shift lever detent plate onto housing. 4. Insert rack preload spring into the housing. 5. Assemble locking bolt onto crossover arm on rack, then insert rack and lock bolt assembly into the housing. 6. Install thrust cup onto bottom hub of housing. 7. Install gearshift housing lower bearing. Align bearing indentations with steering column protrusions. 8. Install shift lever spring into gearshift lever or lock tube housing. Install housing and shroud assembly onto upper end of column jacket. 9. With shift lever housing in position, install turn signal and lock cylinder housing onto steering column jacket.Ensure gearshift housing is in Park position and rack pulled downward. Ensure turn signal housing is completely seated on the steering column jacket. 10. Install lower bearing into adapter assembly. 11. Insert shift tube assembly into lower end of the steering column jacket. Rotate assembly until upper shift tube key engages housing keyway. 12. On automatic transmission and floor shift column models, assemble spring, lower bearing and adapter assembly onto bottom of steering column jacket. While holding the adapter in position, install lower bearing reinforcement and retainer clip. Ensure clip snaps into the steering column jacket and reinforcement slots. 13. On manual transmission and column shift models, loosely install steering column jacket and shift tube attaching screws. Assemble first-reverse lever, lower bearing and adapter assembly into bottom of steering column jacket. While holding adapter assembly in place, install bearing reinforcement and retaining clip. Ensure retaining clip snaps into steering column jacket and reinforcement slots. 14. Install neutral safety or back-up light switch onto steering column. 15. Install steering shaft into steering column, then the upper bearing thrust washer. 16. Install turn signal switch, lock cylinder, ignition switch, dimmer and buzzer switch, if used. 17. Install shift lever and shift lever pivot pin. 18. Install steering column assembly into vehicle. 19. Install dash panel to steering column bracket. Torque bracket bolts to 30 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Service and Repair > - With Standard Column > Page 3395 Steering Column: Service and Repair - With Tilt Column Ignition Lock Cylinder & Upper Column Components 1. To assemble bearing housing, proceed as follows: a. Using a suitable socket, press bearings into bearing housing. b. Install lock shoe springs, lock shoes and shoe pin into bearing housing. c. Install shoe release lever, spring and pin. d. Install sector drive shaft and snap ring into housing. e. Install lock bolt and engage bolt with sector cam. f. Install rack and spring. Block tooth on rack should engage block tooth on sector. g. Install tilt release lever. h. Install lock bolt spring and retaining bolt. Torque bolt to 35 inch lbs. 2. On C, G and K models, install shift lever spring into housing. 3. On Caballero and El Camino models, install shift lever spring into shift bowl. 4. Install bearing support lock plate and wave washer. 5. On C, G and K models, carefully install shift tube into lower end of steering column jacket. Install wobble plate end of tool J-23073 into upper end of shift tube. Install adapter over end of tube, seating it against the lock plate. Place nut onto threaded portion of tool and pull shift tube into housing. Remove tool. 6. On Caballero and El Camino models, install bearing support thrust washer and retaining ring. Carefully install shift tube into lower portion of steering column jacket. Align shift tube key with shift bowl keyway. Using tool J-23073, pull shift tube into the shift bowl. Install thrust washer and retaining ring. Install actuator rod through support hole between shift bowl and steering column jacket. 7. Install bearing support. Align bearing support ``V'' with ``V'' on steering column jacket. Install attaching bolts through support and into lock plate. Torque attaching bolts to 60 inch lbs. 8. Align lower bearing adapter or bushing with notches in steering column jacket. Install lower bearing, bearing reinforcement and retaining clips. Ensure clips align with reinforcement slots on steering column jacket and adapter assembly. 9. Install centering spheres and anti-lash spring onto upper shaft. Install lower steering shaft assembly. 10. On C, G and K models, install steering shaft assembly into shift tube. Install ignition switch actuator rod through shift lever housing. 11. On Caballero and El Camino models, position shift bowl into Park (counterclockwise to stop). Install ignition switch actuator rod between shift bowl and steering column jacket. 12. Assemble bearing housing over steering shaft and engage rack over actuator rod end. 13. On Caballero and El Camino models, position access hole of bearing housing over dimmer switch actuator rod end. 14. While holding the locking shoes in the disengaged position, install bearing housing over steering shaft until pivot pin holes align with holes in support assembly. 15. Install pivot pins. 16. Place bearing housing in the full up (tilt) position. Install tilt lever spring guide, spring and spring retainer. 17. On C, G and K models, proceed as follows: a. Install upper bearing inner race and race seat. b. Install tilt lever opening shield. c. Remove tilt release lever, then install turn signal housing. Torque housing attaching screws to 45 inch lbs. d. Install tilt release lever, shift lever and lever retaining pin. e. Install lock cylinder, turn signal switch and ignition switch assembly. f. Install intermediate shaft onto upper shaft assembly. Tighten clamp bolt nut. While tightening the clamp bolt nut, the clamp bolt must be drawn through the shaft assembly under cut. g. Install neutral safety or back-up light switch. Connect electrical connectors onto neutral safety or back-up light switch. h. Install dash panel to steering column attaching bolts. Torque bolts to 30 ft. lbs. 18. On Caballero and El Camino models, proceed as follows: a. Install tilt lever opening shield into cover. b. Remove tilt release lever. c. Install housing cover. Torque housing cover screws to 45 inch lbs. d. Install buzzer switch onto spring clip retainer. Push switch and clip assembly into cover hole until switch ``snaps'' into lock cylinder bore. e. Install turn signal switch wires and electrical connector through column cover, bearing housing and shift bowl assembly. f. Install actuator ball arm into pivot slot. g. Install hazard warning knob, bearing inner race, race seat, bearing preload spring, canceling cam and lock plate. h. Using a suitable tool, depress lock plate and install snap ring. Ensure snap ring completely seats into groove. i. Install tilt release lever and turn signal switch lever. j. Install upper shift lever and lever retaining pin. k. Install lock cylinder, shaft lock cover and ignition switch. Connect electrical connector onto ignition switch. l. Install dash panel to steering column attaching bolts. Torque attaching bolts to 30 ft. lbs. Steering Column - Disassemble Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Service and Repair > - With Standard Column > Page 3396 Fig. 13 Tilt steering column and components. Automatic transmission,exc. Astro Van, S/T 10-15 & Safari Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Service and Repair > - With Standard Column > Page 3397 Fig. 14 Tilt steering column and components. Manual transmission, exc. Astro Van, S/T 10-15 & Safari 1. Remove steering column mounting bracket from steering column. 2. Using tool J-23074 or equivalent, mount steering column assembly onto a suitable vise. 3. On Caballero and El Camino models, remove steering wheel nut retainer, nut and steering wheel. 4. On C, G and K models, remove turn signal switch, lock cylinder and ignition switch. Remove tilt release lever, Figs. 13 and 14. 5. On Caballero and El Camino models, pry cover from column housing. Depress lock plate and pry snap ring from groove. Remove lock plate canceling cam and upper bearing spring. 6. On C, G and K models, remove turn signal housing attaching screws, then the housing. Install tilt release lever, and position steering column into full up (tilt) position. Remove tilt lever spring retainer, spring and guide. Remove pot joint-to-steering shaft clamp bolt, then the intermediate shaft and pot joint assembly. Push on upper steering shaft, then pry off lower bearing retainer clip, bearing reinforcement, bearing and bearing adapter assembly from lower end of column jacket. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Service and Repair > - With Standard Column > Page 3398 7. On Caballero and El Camino models, remove tilt release lever, hazard warning knob and upper shift lever from shift bowl. Remove turn signal switch actuator attaching screw, then the arm. Remove turn signal switch mounting screws. Remove turn signal switch wire protector and electrical connector from bracket. Position shift bowl into ``low'' shift position and remove switch. Remove lock cylinder, buzzer and dimmer switch actuator rod. 8. On Caballero and El Camino models, install tilt release lever and place column in full up (Tilt) position. Remove tilt spring retainer, spring and guide. Remove dimmer switch attaching screws, then disconnect and remove dimmer switch from actuating rod. 9. Remove upper bearing housing pivot pins. 10. Disengage lock shoes, then remove bearing housing. 11. Remove steering shaft from upper end of steering column. 12. Remove upper bearing and inner race. 13. Remove steering shaft centering spheres and anti-lash spring. 14. On Caballero and El Camino models, remove support bolts, then the support and dimmer switch actuator rod. 15. On C, G and K models, remove steering shaft housing support to gearshift housing attaching bolts, then the housing support. Remove ignition switch actuator rod. 16. Remove shift tube retaining ring and thrust washer. 17. On C, G and K models, install tool J-23072 into lock plate. Turning tool center screw clockwise, force shift tube from housing. Remove shift tube (transmission control lock tube on floor shift models) from lower end of steering column jacket. 18. On Caballero and El Camino models, install tool J-23072 into lock plate. Insert bushing end of tool into shift tube, then force tube out of shift bowl. Lower shift lever must be aligned with ``T'' slot to remove shift tube. 19. Remove lock plate and wave washer. 20. On C, G and K models, remove shift lever housing from column jacket. Remove shift lever spring. 21. On Caballero and El Camino models, remove shift lever spring from shift bowl. 22. To disassemble bearing housing, proceed as follows: a. Remove tilt lever opening shield. b. Remove lock bolt spring. c. Remove snap ring from sector drive shaft. d. Remove drive shaft, sector and lock bolt. e. Remove rack and rack spring. f. Remove lock shoe retaining pin, lock shoes and springs. g. Remove bearings from housing. Remove bearings from bearing housing only if bearings require replacement. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Service and Repair > - With Standard Column > Page 3399 Steering Column: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder Fig. 6 Ignition lock installation. Exc. G & P models EXC. 1980---85 G & 1980---87 P MODELS 1. Remove steering wheel as outlined previously. 2. Remove turn signal switch as outlined in ``Turn Signal Switch, Replace'' procedure. 3. Place ignition switch in ``Run'' position, then remove lock cylinder retaining screw and lock cylinder. 4. To install, rotate lock cylinder to stop, while holding housing as shown, Fig. 6. Align cylinder key with keyway in housing, then push lock cylinder assembly into housing until fully seated. 5. Install lock cylinder retaining screw. Torque screw to 40 inch lbs. for standard columns, or 22 inch lbs. for adjustable columns. 6. Install buzzer switch, turn signal switch and steering wheel. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Service and Repair > - With Standard Column > Page 3400 Steering Column: Service and Repair Ignition Switch Fig. 7 Positioning ignition switch CABALLERO, EL CAMINO, C, K, R, V & 1986---87 G MODELS The ignition switch is mounted on top of the mast jacket inside the brake pedal support and is actuated by a rod and rack assembly. 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect and lower steering column. On some models, it may be necessary to remove the upper column mounting bracket if it hinders servicing of switch. Use extreme care when lowering steering column to prevent damage to column assembly. Only lower steering column a sufficient distance to perform ignition switch service. 3. On Caballero and El Camino, rotate ignition lock to ``Off'' unlocked position. 4. On C, K, R and V models, rotate ignition lock to ``Off'' locked position. 5. If lock cylinder has been removed, pull switch actuator rod up to stop, then pushrod down to second (Caballero or El Camino) or first (C, K, R and V models) detent as shown, Fig. 7. 6. Remove column mounted dimmer switch, if equipped, then remove switch retaining screws and switch. 7. Reverse procedure to install, noting the following: a. Place gear shift lever in neutral. b. Place lock cylinder and switch in positions noted in steps 3 and 4. c. Fit actuator rod into hole in switch slider and secure switch with retaining screws, ensuring switch does not move out of detent. d. Install and adjust dimmer switch, if equipped, as outlined in ``Column Mounted Dimmer Switch, Replace'' procedure. e. Torque retaining screws to 35 inch lbs., then check switch operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Component Information > Service and Repair > - With Standard Column > Page 3401 Steering Column: Service and Repair Steering Column - Removal and Installation C & K MODELS Removal Front dash plates must be loosened whenever steering column is to be lowered from the instrument panel. 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove steering wheel. 3. Remove nuts and washers securing flanged end of steering shaft to the flexible coupling. 4. Disconnect transmission control linkage from column shift tube levers. 5. Disconnect steering column harness from electrical connector. 6. Disconnect neutral start switch or back-up light switch electrical connectors, if equipped. 7. Remove floor pan trim cover attaching bolts, then the cover. 8. Remove transmission indicator cable, if equipped. 9. Remove screws securing the 2 floor pan cover halves, then the covers. 10. Move front seats as far back as possible to provide maximum clearance. 11. Remove 2 column bracket to instrument panel nuts, then the steering column from vehicle. Fig. 4 Steering column installation. C & K models Installation 1. Assemble lower dash cover (A) and upper dash cover (B) onto seal (C) with ``carrots'' (part of seal), Fig. 4. 2. Connect bracket (D) onto steering column jacket. Torque bolts (E) to 30 ft. lbs. 3. Install lockwashers and nuts (F). Torque nuts (F) to 20 ft. lbs. 4. Loosely assemble 2 capsule nuts (H) onto instrument panel bracket. 5. Position lower clamp (J) and torque attaching nuts (K) to 55 ft. lbs. 6. Torque the 2 (H) nuts at capsule to 25 ft. lbs. 7. Install seal (C) and covers (A and B) onto dash. Torque bolts (L) to 45 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Description and Operation > Saginaw Rotary Valve Type Power Steering Gears Steering Gear: Description and Operation Saginaw Rotary Valve Type Power Steering Gears Fig. 1 Steering gear identification Fig. 2 Model 800-808 Saginaw steering gear Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Description and Operation > Saginaw Rotary Valve Type Power Steering Gears > Page 3406 Fig. 3 Model 800-808 power steering gear disassembled Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Description and Operation > Saginaw Rotary Valve Type Power Steering Gears > Page 3407 Fig. 4 Model 605 power steering gear disassembled There are two types of Saginaw integral rotary valve type single piston steering gears. The two different types of gears can be identified by the configuration of the side covers. The Model 605 gear has a round side cover, secured with a retaining ring, Fig. 1. The Model 800-808 gear has a rectangular side cover, secured with four bolts, Fig. 1. Also, note that the Model 800-808 gear incorporates balls in the rack piston, Figs. 2 and 3, while the Model 605 gear does not, Fig. 4. The power steering gear operates entirely by displacing oil to provide hydraulic pressure assists only when turning. As the entire gear assembly is always filled with oil, all internal components of the gear are immersed in oil, making periodic lubrication unnecessary. In addition this oil acts as a cushion to absorb road shocks that may be transmitted to the driver. The steering shaft, hydraulic valve, worm and rack piston nut are all in line, making a compact and space saving steering gear. All oil passages are internal except the pressure and return hoses between gear and pump. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Description and Operation > Saginaw Rotary Valve Type Power Steering Gears > Page 3408 Steering Gear: Description and Operation Saginaw Recirculating Ball Worm & Nut-Manual Steering Gears Fig. 1 Sectional view of Saginaw recirculating ball-worm & nut steering gear Fig. 2 Cross-sectional view of Saginaw recirculating ball-worm & nut gear As shown in Fig. 1, the wormshaft on the lower end of the steering shaft and the ball nut which is mounted on the worm have mating spiral grooves in which steel balls circulate to provide a low friction drive between wormshaft and ball nut. Two sets of balls are used, ranging in number from approximately 20 to 30 to a set, depending upon the size of the gear unit. Each set of balls operate independently of the other. The circuit through which each set of balls circulates includes the grooves in the worm and ball nut and a ball return guide attached to the outer surface of the nut. When the wheel and steering shaft turn to the left, the ball nut is moved downward by the balls which roll between the worm and nut. As the balls reach the outer surface of the nut, they enter the return guides which direct them across and down into the ball nut where they enter the circuit again. When a right turn is made, the ball nut moves upward and the balls circulate in the reverse direction. The teeth of the ball nut engage teeth on the sector which is forged integral with the pitman shaft, Fig. 2. The teeth on the ball nut are made so that a ``high point'' or tighter fit exists between the ball nut and pitman shaft sector teeth when the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position. The teeth on the sector are tapered slightly so that a proper lash may be obtained by moving the pitman shaft endwise by means of a lash adjuster screw which extends through the gear housing side cover. The head of the last adjuster and the selectively fitted shim fit snugly into a T-slot in the end of the pitman shaft so that the screw also controls end play of the shaft. The screw is locked by an external lock nut. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Excessive Wheel Kickback or Loose Steering Steering Gear: Testing and Inspection Excessive Wheel Kickback or Loose Steering 1. Lash in steering linkage. 2. Air in system. 3. Excessive lash between pitman shaft sector and rack piston. 4. Loose thrust bearing adjustment. 5. Ball nut and worm preload. 6. Steering gear loose on frame. 7. Steering linkage worn. 8. Improper front wheel bearing adjustment. 9. Poppet valve worn. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Excessive Wheel Kickback or Loose Steering > Page 3411 Steering Gear: Testing and Inspection External Oil Leaks 1. Loose hose connections. 2. Damaged hose. 3. Side cover O-ring seal. 4. Pitman shaft seals. 5. Housing end plug seal. 6. Adjuster plug seals. 7. Torsion bar seal. 8. Defective housing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Excessive Wheel Kickback or Loose Steering > Page 3412 Steering Gear: Testing and Inspection Hard Steering 1. Frozen steering shaft bearings. 2. Lower coupling flange rubbing against adjuster. 3. Steering adjustment tight. 4. Low oil level in pump. 5. Loose pump belt. 6. Insufficient oil pressure. 7. Improper tire inflation. 8. Flow control valve sticking. 9. Pump leaking internally. 10. Steering gear leaking internally. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Excessive Wheel Kickback or Loose Steering > Page 3413 Steering Gear: Testing and Inspection Hard Steering When Parking 1. Loose pump belt. 2. Low oil level in reservoir. 3. Lack of lubrication in linkage or front suspension. 4. Tires not properly inflated. 5. Insufficient oil pressure. 6. Low oil pressure due to restriction in hoses. 7. Low oil pressure due to worn piston ring or scored housing bore. 8. Pressure loss due to leakage at valve rings, valve body-to-worm seal or rack piston end plug seal. 9. Pressure loss due to loose fit of spool in valve body or leaky valve body. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Excessive Wheel Kickback or Loose Steering > Page 3414 Steering Gear: Testing and Inspection Excessive Wheel Kickback or Loose Steering 1. Lash in steering linkage. 2. Air in system. 3. Excessive lash between pitman shaft sector and rack piston. 4. Loose thrust bearing adjustment. 5. Ball nut and worm preload. 6. Steering gear loose on frame. 7. Steering linkage worn. 8. Improper front wheel bearing adjustment. 9. Poppet valve worn. External Oil Leaks 1. Loose hose connections. 2. Damaged hose. 3. Side cover O-ring seal. 4. Pitman shaft seals. 5. Housing end plug seal. 6. Adjuster plug seals. 7. Torsion bar seal. 8. Defective housing. Hard Steering 1. Frozen steering shaft bearings. 2. Lower coupling flange rubbing against adjuster. 3. Steering adjustment tight. 4. Low oil level in pump. 5. Loose pump belt. 6. Insufficient oil pressure. 7. Improper tire inflation. 8. Flow control valve sticking. 9. Pump leaking internally. 10. Steering gear leaking internally. Hard Steering When Parking 1. Loose pump belt. 2. Low oil level in reservoir. 3. Lack of lubrication in linkage or front suspension. 4. Tires not properly inflated. 5. Insufficient oil pressure. 6. Low oil pressure due to restriction in hoses. 7. Low oil pressure due to worn piston ring or scored housing bore. 8. Pressure loss due to leakage at valve rings, valve body-to-worm seal or rack piston end plug seal. 9. Pressure loss due to loose fit of spool in valve body or leaky valve body. Momentary Increase In Effort When Turning Wheel Fast 1. Low oil level in pump. 2. Pump belt slipping. 3. High internal leakage. 4. Insufficient pump pressure. No Effort Required to Turn 1. Broken torsion bar. Poor Return of Steering Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Excessive Wheel Kickback or Loose Steering > Page 3415 1. Frozen steering shaft bearings. 2. Lower coupling flange rubbing against adjuster. 3. Tires not inflated properly. 4. Incorrect caster and toe-in. 5. Tight steering linkage. 6. Steering gear or column misalignment. 7. Tight suspension ball joints. 8. Steering adjustment tight. 9. Thrust bearing adjustment tight. 10. Tight sector-to-rack piston adjustment. 11. Rack piston nut and worm preload too tight. 12. Sticky valve spool. 13. Lack of lubricant in suspension joints and steering linkage. 14. Steering wheel rubbing against directional signal housing. 15. Rubber spacer in shift tube is rubbing steering shaft. Steering Gear Noise 1. A rattle or chuckle noise caused by loose over-center adjustment. 2. A hissing sound caused by gear being loose on frame. Valve Squawk 1. Cut or worn dampener ring on valve spool. 2. Loose or worn rotary valve parts. 3. Loose belt. 4. Glazed belt. 5. Flow control valve sticking or binding. Vehicle Leads to One Side 1. Front end misalignment. 2. Unbalanced or badly worn valve. 3. Improper tire inflation. 4. Radial tire pull. Wheel Surges or Jerks 1. Loose pump belt. 2. Fluid level low. 3. Steering linkage hitting engine oil pan at full turn. 4. Sticky flow control valve. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Adjustments > Saginaw Recirculating Ball Gear Steering Gear: Adjustments Saginaw Recirculating Ball Gear There are two adjustments on the steering gear: worn bearing preload and pitman shaft overcenter preload. Prior to adjusting the steering gear, all outside loads must be removed. Fig. 3 Steering gear adjustments Fig. 4 Checking adjustment with an inch pound torque wrench WORM BEARING PRELOAD, ADJUST 1. Disconnect battery ground cable, then raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove pitman arm nut, then mark relationship of pitman arm to pitman shaft to aid during reassembly. 3. Remove pitman arm using a suitable puller. 4. Loosen steering gear adjuster plug lock nut, then back off adjuster plug 1/4 turn, Fig. 3. 5. Remove horn pad or button to gain access to the steering wheel attaching nut. 6. Turn steering wheel gently in one direction to stop, then turn back 1/2 turn to position steering gear away from ``high point'' load position. Do not turn wheel hard against steering stops with pitman arm disconnected as damage to the gear ball guides can result. 7. Position suitable inch pound torque wrench on steering wheel hub nut, Fig. 4, then while rotating steering wheel with inch pound wrench through a 90 degree arc, record and measure ``bearing drag.'' Do not use an inch pound wrench of more than 50 inch pound capacity. 8. Adjust worm bearing preload to specifications listed at end of section by turning adjuster plug while measuring turning torque at steering wheel hub with inch pound wrench. Worm bearing preload specification is in excess of ``bearing drag'' determined in previous step. 9. Torque adjuster plug lock nut to 25 ft. lbs., then recheck preload. Rotate steering wheel from stop to stop. If steering gear feels ``lumpy'', bearing damage is indicated. Gear should be disassembled and inspected as necessary. PITMAN SHAFT OVERCENTER PRELOAD, ADJUST 1. Perform steps 1 through 9 of ``Worm Bearing Preload, Adjust'' procedure. 2. Turn steering wheel from one stop to the other while carefully counting the total turns required, then turn wheel back exactly halfway to position steering gear at ``high point.'' 3. Loosen lash adjuster screw lock nut, Fig. 3, then turn adjuster screw clockwise to remove gear lash between ball nut and pinion shaft. Tighten lock nut. 4. Check steering wheel turning torque with suitable inch pound wrench at steering wheel hub, Fig. 4, and compare to specifications listed at end of section. 5. If measurement is not within specifications, loosen lock nut and readjust adjuster screw to obtain proper turning torque. Tighten lock nut and check turning torque through center of steering wheel travel. If maximum turning torque exceeds specifications, turn adjuster screw counterclockwise, then come up on adjustment by turning in a clockwise direction. 6. Assemble pitman arm to pitman shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Adjustments > Saginaw Recirculating Ball Gear > Page 3418 Steering Gear: Adjustments Saginaw Rotary Valve Type Power Steering Gear Model 605 Bench Adjustments Fig. 29 Thrust bearing preload adjustment THRUST BEARING PRELOAD 1. Tighten adjuster plug until bottomed and torque to 30 ft. lbs. 2. Draw a line on gear housing and plug, and a second line 1/2 inch counter clockwise on housing only, Fig. 29. 3. Turn adjuster back until mark on adjuster aligns with second mark on housing, then tighten lock nut. Fig. 30 Over-center preload adjustment OVER-CENTER PRELOAD 1. Back off preload adjuster until it stops, then turn in one turn.Preload adjuster has left hand thread. 2. Rotate stub shaft from stop to stop, counting number of turns, then back exactly 1/2 number of turns to locate center of travel. 3. Using an inch pound torque wrench, measure torque required to rotate stub shaft. Then turn adjuster until rotating torque is increased 6 to 10 inch lbs. Torque adjuster lock nut to 20 ft. lbs., Fig. 30. Model 800-808 Bench Adjustments Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Adjustments > Saginaw Recirculating Ball Gear > Page 3419 Fig. 29 Thrust bearing preload adjustment THRUST BEARING PRELOAD 1. Tighten adjuster plug until bottomed and torque to 20 ft. lbs. 2. Draw a line on gear housing and adjuster plug, and a second line 1/2 inch counter clockwise on housing only, Fig. 29. 3. Turn adjuster plug counterclockwise until mark on adjuster aligns with second mark on housing. Tighten locknut while holding plug securely to prevent rotation. Fig. 31 On-bench over-center preload specification chart Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Adjustments > Saginaw Recirculating Ball Gear > Page 3420 Fig. 32 Adjusting over-center preload OVER-CENTER PRELOAD 1. Rotate stub shaft from stop to stop, counting number of turns, then turn back exactly 1/2 number of turns to locate center of travel. 2. Measure combined ball and thrust bearing preload using an inch pound torque wrench to rotate stub shaft through the over center position. 3. Referring to Fig. 31, tighten adjusting screw while rotating stub shaft with torque wrench until torque reading obtained is specified inch pounds greater than combined ball and thrust bearing preload, Fig. 32. Note that total steering gear preload must not exceed specifications. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace Steering Gear: Service and Repair Power Steering Gear Replace To remove gear assembly, disconnect pressure and return hoses from gear housing and cap both hoses and steering gear outlets to prevent foreign material from entering system, then follow procedure as outlined under ``Manual Steering Gear, Replace.'' Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3423 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Manual Steering Gear Replace 1. Place front wheels in straight ahead position. 2. Remove flexible coupling to steering shaft bolts, or the lower universal joint pinch bolts, as equipped, and mark position of universal yoke to worm shaft. 3. Mark position of pitman arm to pitman shaft and remove pitman shaft nut or pinch bolt, then pitman arm from shaft with a puller. 4. Unfasten steering gear and remove. 5. If equipped, remove flexible coupling pinch bolt, then the flexible coupling from steering gear worm shaft. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3424 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Manual Steering Gears - Saginaw Recirculating Ball Worm & Nut Fig. 5 Steering gear (typical) disassembled DISASSEMBLY 1. Referring to Fig. 5, loosen adjusting screw lock nut and remove housing side cover by removing adjusting screw. 2. Loosen lock nut and back off worm bearing adjuster several turns, then remove housing end cover and gasket. 3. Remove lower thrust bearing, steering shaft and upper bearing from housing. 4. Remove ball return guide clamps and guides from ball nut. Turn ball nut over and remove ball nut from steering shaft worm. INSPECTION OF COMPONENTS 1. Clean and inspect all ball and roller bearings and races, including race in housing. 2. Inspect pitman shaft bushings in gear housing and end cover. If bushings are worn excessively, replace bushings. 3. It is advisable to replace pitman shaft grease seal in housing to avoid possible leakage of lubricant. Seal must be installed with feather edge toward inside of housing. 4. Inspect pitman shaft for wear or pits in bearing races, which would require replacement of shaft. 5. Check shaft for straightness. 6. Inspect teeth of ball nut and pitman shaft. If scored or excessively worn it is advisable to replace both parts to insure proper mating of teeth. 7. Check serrations of pitman shaft; if twisted replace shaft. 8. Check fit of pitman shaft adjusting screw and shim in slot in end of pitman shaft. With shim in place, screw head must be free to turn in slot with zero to .002 inch end play. If end play is excessive, selectively fit a new shim, which are available in four different thicknesses. ASSEMBLY Lubricate all seals, bushings, bearings and gears with multi-purpose gear lube prior to installation. 1. Position ball nut over worm shaft so that deep side of teeth will be toward side cover when installed in gear housing. 2. Install exactly 1/2 the number of balls in each circuit, rocking worm shaft slightly to aid in installing balls. 3. Place about six balls in each return guide, using grease to hold balls in place. 4. Install return guides, clamp and screw. 5. Rotate worm through its complete travel several times to be sure balls are installed correctly and rotate freely. 6. Place upper bearing on worm shaft and slide worm shaft assembly into housing. 7. Place lower bearing in worm bearing adjuster and install bearing retainer. 8. Install adjuster assembly and lock nut in housing. Tighten adjuster only enough to hold worm bearings in place. Final adjustment will be made later. 9. Turn worm shaft until center groove in ball nut lines up with center of pitman shaft bushing. 10. Install pitman shaft and lash adjuster with shim so that center tooth meshes with center groove in ball nut. 11. Install side cover with gasket on lash adjuster by turning adjuster counterclockwise. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3425 12. Install side cover bolts and washers. 13. Turn lash adjuster so that teeth on shaft and ball nut engage but do not bind. 14. Install lash adjuster lock nut loosely. 15. To protect pitman shaft seal from damage, cover shaft splines with masking tape. Slide new seal into place and seat it against shoulder in housing. 16. Install new worm shaft seal flush with surface of housing. 17. Fill gear housing with multi-purpose lubricant and adjust gear assembly as outlined previously. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3426 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Saginaw Rotary Valve Type Power Steering Gears Maintenance Four factors affect power operation of the steering system: fluid level and condition, drive belt tension, pump pressure and steering gear adjustment. These should always be checked before any major service operations are performed. Conditions such as, hard or loose steering, road shock or vibrations are not always due to steering gear or pump, but are often related instead to such factors as low tire pressure and front end alignment. These factors should be checked and corrected before any adjustment of the steering gear is made. CHECKING FLUID LEVEL 1. Run engine to normal operating temperature, then shut it off. Remove reservoir filler cap and check oil level on dipstick. Level should be up to ``Full'' mark on dipstick. 2. If level is low, add power steering fluid to proper level on dipstick and replace filler cap. When adding less than one pint of fluid, it is permissible to use automatic transmission fluid. When adding larger quantities or when making a complete fluid change, it is recommended that special power steering fluid be used. 3. When checking fluid level after system has been serviced, air must be bled from the system as outlined under ``Bleeding System.'' BLEEDING SYSTEM 1. With wheels turned all the way to the left, add the recommended fluid to the ``Add'' mark on dipstick. 2. Start engine. While running at fast idle, recheck fluid level and, if necessary, add fluid to the ``Add'' mark on dipstick. 3. Bleed system by turning wheels from side to side without hitting stops. Maintain fluid level just above internal pump casting. Fluid with air in it will have a light tan appearance. This air must be eliminated from fluid before normal steering action can be obtained. 4. Return wheels to center position and continue to run engine for two or three minutes, then shut it off. 5. Road test vehicle to make sure steering functions normally and is free from noise. 6. Recheck fluid level, making sure level is at the ``Full'' mark. Model 605 Rack Piston, Valve & Worm Assembly Fig. 15 Spool valve assembly. Model 605 1. To assemble spool valve, Fig. 15, proceed as follows: a. Install three teflon & three O-ring seals on spool. b. Lubricate spool with power steering fluid, then rotate spool while installing. Fig. 21 Stub shaft installation. Model 605 c. Install stub shaft into valve body. Notch must fully engage pin and cap must seat against shoulder, Fig. 21. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3427 Fig. 14 Valve & worm disassembled. Model 605 2. Assemble worm shaft on valve, Fig. 14. Install snap ring with ``curved-in end'' on same side as access hole. Fig. 13 Valve & worm removed from rack. Model 605 3. To install valve and worm in rack: a. Install teflon ring and O-ring seal, Fig. 13. Fig. 22 Installing valve & worm into rack.Model 605 b. Hold rack teeth and worm drive pin in position, Fig. 22. c. With light pressure to hold worm thread against piston, turn worm and valve counter-clockwise slowly until one click is felt, then turn clockwise to complete assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3428 Fig. 23 Stub shaft & rack positioning. Model 605 d. Check relation of stub shaft and rack piston by threading worm and valve into rack piston until valve face and rack piston face are flush. Referring to Fig. 23, flats on stub shaft and piston must be parallel. If not parallel, disassemble and repeat steps b and c. Model 605 Steering Gear Assembly Fig. 12 Pitman shaft seals & bearings. Model 605 Fig. 27 Pitman shaft bearing installation. Model 605 1. If pitman shaft needle bearing was removed, install with lettered edge facing outward and flush with bottom of counter bore with a suitable tool, Fig. 27. 2. Install pitman shaft oil seal, washer and snap ring, Fig. 12. Fig. 9 Lower thrust bearing & adjuster assembly. Model 605 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3429 Fig. 10 Stub shaft seals & snap ring. Model 605 Fig. 28 Stub shaft bearing installation. Model 605 3. If removed, install stub shaft needle bearing and upper thrust bearing, Fig. 28. 4. Apply anhydrous calcium grease to stub shaft seal, then install shaft seal, dust seal and snap ring, Fig. 10. 5. Install rack piston and valve assembly, then lower thrust bearing, O-ring seal, adjuster plug and lock nut, Fig. 9.See procedures for thrust bearing preload adjustment before tightening lock nut. 6. Install side cover spring and O-ring seal. 7. Install pitman shaft gear so center tooth of gear meshes with center groove of rack piston, then depress side cover and install snap ring. Open end of snap ring should be 1/2 inch from access hole. Disassemble Steering Gear Fig. 9 Lower thrust bearing & adjuster assembly. Model 605 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3430 Fig. 10 Stub shaft seals & snap ring. Model 605 Fig. 11 Stub shaft bearing removal. Model 605 Fig. 12 Pitman shaft seals & bearings. Model 605 1. Remove preload adjuster nut. Preload adjusting nut has a left hand thread. 2. Center gear by rotating stub shaft, then remove side cover snap ring, pitman shaft, side cover, O-ring seal and spring. 3. Remove locknut, adjuster plug and O-ring seal, then the lower thrust bearing assembly, Fig. 9. 4. Push stub shaft to remove rack piston and valve assembly. 5. Remove stub shaft snap ring, dust seal and shaft seal, then the needle bearing and upper thrust bearing, if necessary, Figs. 10 and 11. 6. Remove pitman shaft snap ring, dust seal, washer and oil seal, then the needle bearing, if necessary, Fig. 12. Disassemble Rack Piston, Valve & Worm Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3431 Fig. 13 Valve & worm removed from rack. Model 605 Fig. 14 Valve & worm disassembled. Model 605 Fig. 15 Spool valve assembly. Model 605 Fig. 16 Stub shaft removal. Model 605 1. Remove valve and worm from rack, then the Teflon ring and O-ring seal from rack piston, Fig. 13. 2. Remove snap ring and worm shaft from valve, Fig. 14. 3. To disassemble spool valve, Fig. 15, proceed as follows: a. Hold valve and tap stub shaft on wooden block to loosen shaft cap. b. To remove stub shaft, pull cap out 1/4 inch, then disengage pin on shaft from hole in spool, Fig. 16. c. Rotate and lift spool from valve body. d. Remove teflon rings and O-rings from valve body and spool. Disassembly/Assembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3432 Fig. 3 Model 800-808 power steering gear disassembled Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3433 Fig. 17 Adjuster plug components Refer to Fig. 3 and lubricate all parts as they are assembled. 1. Screw lash adjuster through side cover until cover bottoms on pitman shaft gear. Install lash adjuster lock nut while holding lash adjuster with 7/32 inch Allen wrench. 2. Mount adjuster plug in vise with soft jaws. 3. If it has been removed, assemble needle bearing by pressing towards thrust bearing end of adjuster plug against identification end of bearing. End of bearing to be flush with bottom surface of stub shaft seal bore. 4. Install stub shaft far enough to provide clearance for dust seal and retaining ring. Install new dust seal with rubber surface outward. Install new retaining ring. 5. Assemble large thrust bearing race, thrust bearing, small race and spacer (with grooves up) on adjuster plug, Fig. 17, and secure with retainer. Assemble Rotary Valve 1. Assemble one valve body Teflon ring back-up O-ring seal in each groove in valve body, being sure seals do not become twisted. 2. Assemble valve Teflon rings in ring grooves over O-ring seals by carefully slipping rings over valve body. The rings may appear loose or twisted in the grooves but the heat of the oil during subsequent operation will cause them to straighten. 3. Install valve spool dampener O-ring seal in valve spool groove, being sure it is not twisted. 4. Insert stub shaft through valve spool, engaging spool locking pin. 5. Pull valve spool and stub shaft assembly into valve body, aligning stub shaft notch and valve body pin. 6. If used, slide spool spring over stub shaft and place into position. 7. Lubricate cap-to-worm O-ring and install in valve body. During assembly of the valve, if the stub shaft and cap is allowed to slip out of engagement with the valve body pin, the spool will be permitted to enter the valve body too far. The dampener O-ring seal may expand into valve body oil grooves, preventing removal of spool. If this happens, remove spool spring and disassemble rotary valve. Press on spool until O-ring seal is cut and can be removed. Install new O-ring and reassemble. Assemble Housing Fig. 18 Pitman shaft seals & washers 1. With stamped end of needle bearing facing outward, drive bearing into bore from outside of housing until flush. Make sure bearings rotate freely. 2. Lubricate cavity between lips of pitman shaft (double lip) seal with power steering fluid. 3. Lubricate and install pitman shaft seals as shown in Fig. 18. Make sure seal lips are properly positioned, retaining ring is seated. 4. If connectors were removed, install new ones by driving them into place. Assemble Rack-Piston & Worm Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3434 Fig. 19 Loading rack-piston nut 1. Lubricate and install new ring back-up seal and Teflon piston ring on rack-piston nut, being careful ring and seal do not twist during installation. 2. Insert worm into rack-piston nut to bearing shoulder. 3. Align ball return guide holes with worm groove. Load balls into guide hole nearest the teflon piston ring while slowly rotating worm to left, feeding balls through circuit, Fig. 19. If balls are installed properly, the worm should turn out of the rack-piston nut. 4. Fill one-half of ball return guide with remaining balls. Place other guide over balls and plug each end with heavy grease to prevent balls from falling out when installing guides into rack-piston nut. 5. Insert guides into guide holes of rack-piston nut. Make sure black ball in guide is installed next to white ball in rack piston. Guides should fit loosely. Refitting Rack-Piston Balls Do not refit balls unless the steering is loose. If such is the case, a thrust adjustment and over-center adjustment should correct the problem if it lies in the steering gear. If balls are pitted or rough, then select the proper ball size for proper adjustment. If the torque reading obtained above is too high or too low (on new balls only), disassemble and reassemble, using the next size smaller (or larger) balls and recheck worm preload. A rack-piston nut with a ball size of 7 does not have a number stamped on the flat surface. For ball sizes other than 7, the ball size is stamped on the flat surface of the rack-piston nut. Ball sizes are numbered from 6 to 11, with 6 being the smallest and 11 the largest. Ball sizes are graduated in increments of .00008 inch from .28117 inch to .28157 inch. Disassemble Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3435 Fig. 3 Model 800-808 power steering gear disassembled Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3436 Fig. 5 Removing end plug retaining ring Fig. 6 Installing rack-piston arbor tool in end of worm Fig. 7 Removing adjuster plug 1. Referring to Fig. 3, position gear in vise with gear housing end plug facing up. 2. Rotate gear housing end plug retaining ring so that one end of ring is over hole in housing. Spring one end of ring with a punch to allow screwdriver to be inserted to lift ring out, Fig. 5. 3. Rotate coupling flange counterclockwise until rack-piston just forces end plug out of housing. Remove plug from housing. Do not rotate any further than necessary or balls fall out of their circuit and pitman shaft teeth and rack-piston will become disengaged. 4. Remove rack-piston end plug, using a 1/2 inch square drive. To make removal easier, tap rack-piston end plug with a plastic mallet to unseat threads. This is important as end plug is tightened to 75---80 ft-lbs during assembly and could break during removal if not handled carefully. 5. Remove lock nut from pitman shaft adjuster screw and discard. 6. Remove four side cover retaining screws and washers from cover. 7. Rotate pitman shaft adjuster screw with an Allen wrench until side cover is lifted free of housing. 8. Separate side cover from pitman shaft; discard side cover O-ring seal. 9. Turn coupling flange until pitman shaft teeth are centered in housing. 10. Tap end of pitman shaft with a soft mallet and slide pitman shaft out of housing. 11. Remove housing end plug O-ring seal and discard. 12. Insert Rack-Piston Arbor into rack-piston against end of worm, Fig. 6. Turn coupling flange counterclockwise, while holding tool tightly against worm, to force rack-piston onto arbor, and remove rack-piston from gear housing. 13. Remove stub shaft-to-coupling flange retaining screw and remove flange. 14. Remove adjuster plug lock nut by breaking it loose with hammer and punch, and remove lock nut from housing. 15. Loosen adjuster plug and remove from housing, Fig. 7. 16. Remove valve assembly by grasping stub shaft and pulling out. 17. Remove worm, lower thrust bearing and races from upper end of housing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3437 Disassemble Housing 1. Remove pitman, shaft outer dust seal retaining ring. 2. Remove outer dust seal. 3. Remove seal (double lip) by inserting offset screwdriver between seal and back-up washer and prying out of housing. 4. Remove back-up washer. 5. Remove seal (single lip) by cutting and collapsing seal. 6. Remove pitman shaft needle bearings (if necessary) with a suitable driver. 7. If connectors are to be removed, tap threads in holes of connectors using 5/16-18 NF tap. Remove connectors by using threaded bolt into tapped holes with washer and nut as extractor. Disassemble Rotary Valve Fig. 8 Rotary valve components 1. If used, work spool spring onto bearing diameter of stub shaft and remove spool spring. 2. Tap end of stub shaft gently against workbench to remove valve spool. Because of the slight clearance between valve body and spool, the slightest cocking of spool may jam it in valve body. If slight cocking occurs, make a gentle attempt to reverse removal procedure. If this does not free spool, it has become cocked in valve body bore and may be removed later. 3. Remove and discard valve spool dampener O-ring. 4. Remove stub shaft, torsion bar (small diameter bar extending through stub shaft) and valve cap by tapping end of torsion bar lightly with a plastic hammer. This will dislodge cap from valve body cap pin, Fig. 8. Do not disassemble stub shaft as these parts are pinned together and serviced only as an assembly. 5. If valve spool has become cocked as mentioned above, first inspect parts to determine in which direction the spool is cocked. A few very light taps with a plastic hammer should align and free the spool in the bore. Remove and discard O-ring dampener seal from spool. 6. Carefully remove valve body Teflon rings and ring back-up O-ring seals. Replacing Valve Spool Dampener O-Ring Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3438 Fig. 8 Rotary valve components The rotary valve assembly includes the valve body, valve spool and stub shaft assembly. All these parts are precision units and are hydraulically balanced at the factory. Under no circumstances are parts in this unit to be replaced or interchanged with other parts or units. If unit parts are scored or damaged the entire rotary valve assembly is to be replaced. The O-ring should be replaced only if the gear squawks. 1. To replace the valve spool dampener O-ring, work spool spring into bearing diameter of stub shaft and remove spool spring. 2. Tap end of stub shaft gently against workbench to remove valve spool. The diametrical clearance between the valve body and spool may be as low as .0004 inch. The slightest cocking of the spool may jam it in the valve body. 3. Remove valve spool dampener O-ring. 4. Install new O-ring in valve spool groove, then lubricate seal in automatic transmission fluid. Do not allow seal to twist in groove. 5. With notch end of spool towards valve body, install spool, aligning spool notch with pin in stub shaft, Fig. 8. 6. Because of the small clearance between spool and valve body, extreme care must be taken when assembling these parts. Push spool evenly and slowly with a slight oscillating motion until spool reaches drive pin. Before pushing spool completely in, make sure dampener O-ring seal is evenly distributed in spool groove. Slowly push spool completely in, with extreme care taken not to cut or pinch O-ring seal. 7. Slide spool spring over stub shaft and work spring into position. Install Rack-Piston Worm & Valve Fig. 24 Worm shaft & rotary valve components Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3439 Fig. 25 Installing adjuster plug Fig. 26 Installing rack-piston seal compressor 1. Install valve and worm in housing as a unit, Fig. 24. 2. Install new O-rings on adjuster plug. 3. Install adjuster plug on stub shaft in gear housing finger tight, Fig. 25. 4. Holding a suitable Teflon ring compressor sleeve tightly against shoulder of gear housing, insert rack-piston nut and arbor into housing, holding arbor unit it contacts worm end, Fig. 26. 5. Holding arbor tight against worm, turn stub shaft flange and worm to draw ball nut onto worm and into housing until arbor is free. Be certain that no balls drop out. 6. Remove arbor and sleeve. Install Rack-Piston Nut End Plug 1. Install new O-ring seal on end plug, being careful not to allow seal to twist in groove. 2. Install end plug into rack-piston nut by pressing into place. 3. Install end plug retaining ring, being sure ring is bottomed in its groove. Install Housing Lower End Plug 1. Install new housing end plug O-ring seal. 2. Insert end plug into gear housing and seat against O-ring. Slight pressure may be necessary to seat end plug properly. 3. Install end plug retainer ring so end of ring extends over and at least 1/2 inch beyond ring removal assist hole. Install Pitman Shaft Gear & Side Cover 1. Install stub shaft flange and turn steering worm until center groove of rack-piston is aligned with center of pitman shaft needle bearings. 2. Install new side cover O-ring. 3. Install pitman shaft gear so that center tooth of gear meshes with center groove of rack-piston. Make sure side cover O-ring is in place before Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3440 pushing cover against housing. 4. Install and tighten side cover screws. Install Stub Shaft Flange Rotate stub shaft slightly over two complete turns from either extreme right or left turn. This will place gear in center position, which will place torsion bar pin through stub shaft in a straight up and down position. Rotate flange so the bolt with the large head is in top position. Visually align the block tooth in the serrations of the flange with the torsion bar pin and install flange on stub shaft. Tighten flange clamping bolt. Subassemblies, Install Fig. 25 Installing adjuster plug Fig. 26 Installing rack-piston seal compressor 1. Position gear housing in vise with adjuster plug end facing up. 2. Lubricate worm shaft, lower thrust bearing and races with power steering fluid, then position thrust bearing and race on worm. 3. Align valve body drive pin on worm with narrow pin slot on valve body. Be sure O-ring seal between valve body and worm head is installed. 4. Position valve body and worm shaft in housing as a unit. Do not push against stub shaft as this might cause stub shaft and cap to pull out of valve body, allowing spool seal to slip into valve body oil grooves. Valve assembly can be installed by pushing on outer diameter of valve body housing with the fingers of both hands. Make certain that Teflon rings are not binding on inside of housing. Valve is properly seated when oil return hole in gear housing is fully visible. 5. Place a suitable seal protector over end of stub shaft, Fig. 25. 6. Lubricate new adjuster plug O-ring seal with power steering fluid and install in groove on adjuster plug. 7. Install adjuster plug over end of stubshaft and tighten just enough to make certain that all parts are properly seated in gear housing. Remove seal protector. 8. Install adjuster plug lock nut loosely on adjuster plug. 9. Install seal compressor in gear housing, holding it tightly against shoulder in housing, Fig. 26. 10. Insert rack-piston into housing until arbor engages worm. Turn stub shaft clockwise, using a suitable wrench to draw rack-piston into housing. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Gear Replace > Page 3441 When piston ring is in housing bore, arbor and seal compressor can be removed. 11. Turn stub shaft as necessary until middle rack groove in rack-piston is aligned with center of pitman shaft needle bearing. 12. Lubricate new side cover O-ring seal and install in groove in face of side cover. 13. Assemble side cover on pitman shaft by screwing cover onto adjusting screw until cover bottoms on pitman shaft. 14. Install pitman shaft so that center tooth in sector meshes with center groove of rack-piston. Make sure side cover O-ring is in place before pushing side cover down on gear housing. 15. Install side cover screws and lockwashers. 16. Hold adjuster screw with Allen wrench and install new adjuster lock nut halfway on adjuster screw. 17. Install rack-piston end plug in rack-piston and tighten plug to 75---80 ft. lbs. 18. Lubricate new housing end plug O-ring seal with power steering fluid and install in gear housing. 19. Insert end plug into gear housing and seat against O-seal. Slight tapping with a mallet may be necessary to seat end plug properly. 20. Snap end plug retainer ring into place with fingers. Slight tapping may be required to bottom ring in housing securely. Install coupling flange. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Wheel: Service and Repair C, K, R & V MODELS 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove horn button cap. 3. Remove snap ring and steering wheel retaining nut. 4. Using a suitable puller, remove steering wheel. 5. Reverse procedure to install, ensuring turn signal switch is in neutral position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection UPPER Exc. Caballero & El Camino The upper ball joint is spring loaded in its socket. This minimizes looseness at this point and compensates for normal wear. If upper stud has any perceptible lateral shake, or if it can be manually twisted in its socket, the upper ball joint should be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3449 Ball Joint: Adjustments Ball joint adjustment is generally required only when excessive play exists in steering, tires wear irregularly, or tie rods continually loosen. If any of the above mentioned complaints are evident, proceed as follows: 1. Raise vehicle and support with jack stands placed just inside front springs. 2. Disconnect drag link or connecting rod, then the tie rod to permit independent movement of each steering knuckle. 3. Attach a spring scale to tie rod mounting hole of steering knuckle. 4. With wheel in straight ahead position, measure the force required to keep knuckle assembly turning after initial breakaway. The force required should not exceed 25 lbs. If force required exceeds specifications, proceed to next step. 5. Remove upper ball stud nut, then loosen adjusting sleeve as required. Retighten ball stud nut, then recheck turning effort. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Ball Joint: Service and Repair Upper 1. Raise vehicle, then support lower control arm with suitable jack. 2. Remove cotter pin from upper ball stud, then loosen stud nut approximately two turns. 3. Separate ball joint from steering knuckle using suitable tool, then remove stud nut. 4. Center punch rivet heads, then drill out rivets and remove ball joint from control arm. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Torque stud nut to 50 ft. lbs. on 1980---87 10/1500 Series and 1985---87 G20/2500 Series, 65 ft. lbs. on 1980---84 Caballero and El Camino, 52 ft. lbs. on 1985---87 Caballero and El Camino, or 90 ft. lbs. on all other models. If cotter pin does not align with stud nut, tighten nut an additional amount until cotter pin can be installed. Never loosen stud nut when installing cotter pin. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 3452 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Lower Fig. 5 Pressing lower ball joint from steering knuckle 1. Remove steering knuckle as previously described. 2. Remove lower ball joint snap ring. The lower ball joint must be removed before servicing the upper joint. 3. Using a suitable C-clamp and service tools as shown, Fig. 5, press lower ball joint from steering knuckle. 4. Press upper joint from steering knuckle in the same manner as stated in Step 3. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Manual Clarified, Caliper To Knuckle Clearance Front Steering Knuckle: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Manual Clarified, Caliper To Knuckle Clearance 85-38 5 (V) FEB., 1985 Subject: BRAKE CALIPERS TO KNUCKLE CLEARANCE Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The front caliper to knuckle clearance given in the service manuals may be misinterpreted. The indicator clearance of 0.13 - 0.30 mm (0.005 - 0.012 in.) represents an ideal condition where the caliper is centered in the knuckle opening. In actual practice, braking action moves the caliper against the knuckle which may result in little or no clearance on one end of the caliper/knuckle assembly. The clearance at each end of the caliper should be measured individually and added together to determine the total caliper to knuckle clearance. The total clearance should be 0.26 0.60 mm (0.010 - 0.024 in.). Reference Section 5 of the Shop Manual. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3457 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair EXC. K30/3500 & V30/3500 1. Remove hub and spindle. 2. Disconnect tie rod from steering arm. If steering arm is removed from knuckle, discard the self-locking nuts and replace with new ones during installation. Tighten nuts to 90 ft. lbs. 3. Remove cotter pin from upper ball joint stud nut, and remove retaining nuts from both ball joints. 4. Separate stud from yoke using suitable ball joint fork at lower joint and repeat at upper joint is required. Do not remove upper ball joint adjusting sleeve from yoke unless ball joint is being replaced. If it is necessary to loosen the sleeve to remove the knuckle, only loosen the sleeve two threads. The non-hardened threads in the yoke can be easily damaged by the adjusting sleeve. 5. Reverse procedure to install. 6. Torque lower ball joint to 70 ft. lbs., adjusting sleeve to 50 ft. lbs., and upper ball joint to 100 ft. lbs. Tighten tie rod nut to 45 ft. lbs. K30/3500 & V30/3500 1. Remove hub and spindle. 2. Remove upper king pin cap by alternately loosening nuts to unload the compression spring. Withdraw the spring and gasket. 3. Remove the lower bearing cap and king pin. 4. Remove upper king pin tapered bushing and knuckle from yoke. Remove felt king pin seal. 5. Remove upper king pin from yoke using a large breaker bar. 6. Drive lower king pin bearing cup, cone, grease retainer, and seal through bottom of knuckle using suitable tool. 7. Reverse procedure to install. 8. Torque upper king pin to 500---600 ft. lbs., and upper and lower bearing cap nuts to 70---90 ft. lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > King Pin > Component Information > Service and Repair King Pin: Service and Repair Follow the procedure under ``Steering Knuckle, Replace'' for king pin service. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Stabilizer Bar: Service and Repair Front Suspension 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove stabilizer bar attaching bolts and nuts at frame locations. 3. Remove brackets and bushings at leaf spring anchor plates. 4. Remove stabilizer bar from vehicle. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3465 Stabilizer Bar: Service and Repair Rear Suspension SERIES 10---30/1500---3500 1. Raise and support vehicle, then the rear axle. 2. Remove link bolt to frame attaching nut, washer and grommet at each side of vehicle. Remove link bolts. 3. Remove support bracket to anchor plate attaching screws, then withdraw stabilizer bar and remove from vehicle. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Ensure parking brake cable is positioned over stabilizer bar. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Leaf Spring Replace Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Leaf Spring Replace For information on leaf spring front suspensions used on four wheel drive vehicles, refer to ``Front Wheel Drive Section.'' A leaf spring type front suspension is available on P Series vehicles. The suspension is centered around a solid I-beam axle and includes leafsprings, shock absorbers and a stabilizer bar. LEAF SPRINGS, REPLACE 1. Raise and support front of vehicle. Support axle assembly with a separate jack to relieve load from springs. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove lower shock absorber attaching bolt and nut. 4. Remove stabilizer link-to-bar attaching nut, then separate the link from bar using a suitable tool. 5. Remove stabilizer link, nut and retainer from axle, then pull link away from axle. Use care to avoid losing inner insulator and retainer. 6. Remove leaf spring retaining nuts, washers, U-bolts and spacers, then separate leaf spring from axle. 7. Remove leaf spring-to-rear shackle attaching nut and bolt, then separate spring from the shackle. 8. Remove leaf spring-to-front hanger attaching nut and bolt, then separate spring from the hanger and remove assembly from vehicle. 9. Reverse procedure to install, noting the following: a. Torque leaf spring-to-frame attaching nut to 92 ft. lbs. b. Torque leaf spring-to-axle attaching nuts in a diagonal sequence first to 18 ft. lbs. then to 80 ft. lbs. c. Tighten stabilizer link-to-axle attaching nut until distance between each retainer is .82 inch. d. Torque stabilizer bar-to-link attaching nut to 50 ft. lbs. e. Torque lower shock absorber attaching nut to 37 ft. lbs. SHOCK ABSORBER, REPLACE 1. Raise and support front of vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove lower shock absorber attaching bolt and nut. 4. Unfasten shock absorber from upper attachment at frame and remove from vehicle. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Torque upper nut to 136 ft. lbs. and lower nut to 37 ft. lbs. WHEEL BEARINGS, ADJUST 1. Raise front of vehicle and support under lower control arms. 2. Remove retainer and cotter pin, then torque spindle nut to 12 ft. lbs. while rotating wheel forward. 3. Back off spindle nut one flat, then install cotter pin. If cotter pin holes do not align, back off nut no more than an additional 1/2 flat more as necessary. 4. Ensure hub and rotor assembly endplay measures .0005---.0080 inch, then install retainer and lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Leaf Spring Replace > Page 3470 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Coil Spring Fig. 8 Coil spring removal. (typical) 1. Raise front of vehicle and place jack stands under frame, allowing control arms to hang free. 2. Disconnect shock absorber and stabilizer bar from lower control arm. 3. Install tool J-23028 or similar tool onto a suitable jack, Fig.. 8, place jack under cross shaft so cross shaft seats in grooves of tool. 4. Place a safety chain through coil spring and lower control arm, then raise jack, relieving tension from coil spring. 5. Remove cross shaft to crossmember U-bolts, lower jack slowly and remove spring. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Leaf Spring Replace > Page 3471 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Spring Bushings Replace Fig. 14 U-bolt nuts torque chart SERIES 10---30/1500---3500 1. Raise and support vehicle and allow axle to hang freely. 2. Loosen, but do not remove, spring to shackle retaining nut. 3. Remove shackle to spring hanger retaining nut and bolt. 4. Remove spring to front hanger retaining nut and bolt. 5. Remove U-bolt retaining nuts, then the U-bolt and spring plate. 6. Remove leaf spring from vehicle. 7. To replace bushing, position spring on an arbor press and press bushing from spring using a suitable rod or pipe. On some vehicles equipped with heavy duty leaf springs, the front bushing is staked in place. Before attempting to remove these bushings, the staked locations must be straightened with a suitable drift. After installation of bushing, re-stake bushing in three equally spaced locations. 8. Reverse procedure to install, installing U-bolts as follows: a. Install four attaching nuts uniformly on U-bolts to retain and position anchor plate in proper position. b. Torque four nuts to 18 ft. lbs. in diagonal sequence. c. Torque four nuts to specifications in diagonal sequence, Fig. 14. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-08-002C Date: October 16, 2009 Subject: Information on Replacement of Shock Absorbers and Struts Due to Fluid Leaks Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2010 model year and Inspection Procedures. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-08-002B (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin is intended to help identify the severity of shock absorber and strut fluid seepage. Improper diagnosis may lead to components being replaced that are within the manufacturer's specification. Shock absorbers and strut assemblies are fluid-filled components and will normally exhibit some seepage. Seepage is defined as oil film or dust accumulation on the exterior of the shock housing. Shock absorbers and struts are not to be replaced under warranty for seepage. Use the following information to determine if the condition is normal acceptable seepage or a defective component. Important Electronically controlled shock absorbers (MR) may have a tendency to attract dust to this oil film. Often this film and dust can be wiped off and will not return until similar mileage is accumulated again. Inspection Procedure Note The shock absorber or strut assembly DOES NOT have to be removed from the vehicle to perform the following inspection procedure. Use the following descriptions and graphics to determine the serviceability of the component. Shock Absorbers Do Not Replace shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom or top of the shock absorber and not originating from the shaft seal (the upper part of the lower shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on approximately 1/3 (a) or less of the lower shock tube (A) and originating from the shaft seal. Replace shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme wet film of oil covering more than 1/3 (b) of the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. Coil-over Shock Absorber Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 3476 Do Not Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the lower shock absorber tube or the coil-over shock absorber components and not originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the coil-over shock tube). 2. Light film/residue on the shock absorber tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace coil-over shock absorbers displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the lower shock tube and originating from the shaft seal. 4. An extreme, wet film of oil covering the shock absorber tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Struts Do Not Replace Struts displaying condition 1 or 2 levels of seepage. 1. Oil or fluid residue only on the bottom of the strut tube or on other strut components and not originating from the shaft seal. 2. Light film/residue on the strut tube, but not on the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Replace Struts displaying conditions 3 and 4 levels of leaks. 3. Oil drip or trail down the strut tube and originating from the shaft seal (located at the top of the strut tube). 4. Extreme wet film of oil covering the strut tube and pooling in the spring seat and originating from the shaft seal. Correction Use the information published in SI for diagnosis and repair. Use the applicable published labor operation. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Leakage Information > Page 3477 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Shock Absorber/Strut Replacement Guidlines File In Section: Warranty Administration Bulletin No.: 72-05-12 Date: January, 1998 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Subject: Replacement of Shock Absorbers and Struts Labor Operations E3800, E3801, E3807, E5800, E5801, E5807, E3850, E3851, E3857, E5750, E5751, and E5757 Models: All Past, Present, and Future Passenger Cars & Trucks The purpose of this bulletin is to provide retail and wholesale service personnel with enhanced service policies for the above listed subject labor operations. Service Management should make certain that all dealership personnel responsible for replacement of suspension components are familiar with GM Service Manual procedures. Effective with repair orders dated on or after January 15, 1998 the following must also be followed: - Shock absorber/strut assemblies are fluid filled components and will normally exhibit seepage. Seepage is defined as oil film or dust accumulation on the exterior of the shock housing. Shock absorber/strut assemblies are not to be replaced under warranty or seepage. - Defective shock absorber/strut assemblies will have a visible oil path or drip coming from the component. A visible oil path or drip coming from the shock absorber/strut assembly should be replaced as a defective component. - Only defective shock absorber/strut assemblies should be replaced. DO NOT replace pairs unless both are defective, unless otherwise instructed in the Service Manual and/or Service Bulletin. - Service Management approval is required on the repair order for replacement of struts or shocks in pairs. This approval includes noting the reason for replacement. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front Suspension Coil Spring Suspension 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove upper retaining nuts or bolts. 4. Remove lower retaining bolts, then the shock absorber. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Leaf Spring Suspension For information on leaf spring front suspensions used on four wheel drive vehicles, refer to ``Front Wheel Drive Section.'' A leaf spring type front suspension is available on P Series vehicles. The suspension is centered around a solid I-beam axle and includes leafsprings, shock absorbers and a stabilizer bar. LEAF SPRINGS, REPLACE 1. Raise and support front of vehicle. Support axle assembly with a separate jack to relieve load from springs. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove lower shock absorber attaching bolt and nut. 4. Remove stabilizer link-to-bar attaching nut, then separate the link from bar using a suitable tool. 5. Remove stabilizer link, nut and retainer from axle, then pull link away from axle. Use care to avoid losing inner insulator and retainer. 6. Remove leaf spring retaining nuts, washers, U-bolts and spacers, then separate leaf spring from axle. 7. Remove leaf spring-to-rear shackle attaching nut and bolt, then separate spring from the shackle. 8. Remove leaf spring-to-front hanger attaching nut and bolt, then separate spring from the hanger and remove assembly from vehicle. 9. Reverse procedure to install, noting the following: a. Torque leaf spring-to-frame attaching nut to 92 ft. lbs. b. Torque leaf spring-to-axle attaching nuts in a diagonal sequence first to 18 ft. lbs. then to 80 ft. lbs. c. Tighten stabilizer link-to-axle attaching nut until distance between each retainer is .82 inch. d. Torque stabilizer bar-to-link attaching nut to 50 ft. lbs. e. Torque lower shock absorber attaching nut to 37 ft. lbs. SHOCK ABSORBER, REPLACE 1. Raise and support front of vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove lower shock absorber attaching bolt and nut. 4. Unfasten shock absorber from upper attachment at frame and remove from vehicle. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Torque upper nut to 136 ft. lbs. and lower nut to 37 ft. lbs. WHEEL BEARINGS, ADJUST 1. Raise front of vehicle and support under lower control arms. 2. Remove retainer and cotter pin, then torque spindle nut to 12 ft. lbs. while rotating wheel forward. 3. Back off spindle nut one flat, then install cotter pin. If cotter pin holes do not align, back off nut no more than an additional 1/2 flat more as necessary. 4. Ensure hub and rotor assembly endplay measures .0005---.0080 inch, then install retainer and lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 3480 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear Suspension SERIES 10---30/1500---3500 1. Raise and support vehicle, then the rear axle. 2. On models equipped with air lift shock absorbers, bleed air from lines, then disconnect line from shock. 3. Remove upper retaining nut or bolt, then the lower retaining bolt, nut and washer. 4. Remove shock absorber from vehicle. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Adjustments > Front Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Front Two Wheel Drive - 2WD FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT 1. While rotating wheel forward, torque spindle nut to 12 ft. lbs. 2. Back off nut until ``just loose'' then hand tighten nut and back it off again until either hole in spindle lines up with hole in nut. Do not back off nut more than 1/2 flat. 3. Install new cotter pin. With wheel bearing properly adjusted, there will be .001---.005 inch endplay. Four Wheel Drive - 4WD For Front Wheel Bearing Adjustment Procedures on four wheel drive models refer to Locking Hub/Adjustments. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Adjustments > Front > Page 3485 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Rear Chevrolet Full Floating Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT Before checking wheel bearing adjustment, make sure brakes are fully released and do not drag. Check bearing play by grasping tire at top and pulling back and forth or by using a pry bar under tire. If bearings are properly adjusted, movement of brake drum in relation to brake flange plate will be barely noticeable and wheel will turn freely. If movement is excessive, adjust bearings as follows: 1. Raise vehicle until wheel is free to rotate, then remove axle shaft. 2. Disengage retainer tang and remove retainer from axle housing tube. 3. Torque adjusting nut to 50 ft. lbs. while rotating hub assembly. Ensure bearing cones are seated and in contact with spindle shoulder. 4. Back off adjusting nut until just loose. 5. Insert key into adjusting nut slot, if equipped. Install snap ring to retain key in position. 6. Lower vehicle, then install axle shaft. GMC Single Speed Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT 1. Raise and support rear axle. 2. Remove axle shaft as outlined previously. Release brakes. 3. Disengage retainer tang from locknut, then remove locknut and retainer from axle housing tube. 4. Torque inner adjusting nut to 50 ft. lbs. while rotating wheel, then back off nut 1/8 of a turn. 5. Install retainer so that short tang engages nearest slot on adjusting nut. 6. Install outer locknut and torque to 250 ft. lbs., then bend long tang of retainer into slot of outer nut. Timken (Rockwell) Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Adjustments > Front > Page 3486 Fig. 12 Timken (Rockwell) axle w/12 inch ring gear This axle, Fig. 12, employs a heavy duty hypoid drive pinion and ring gear. The differential and gear assembly is mounted on tapered roller bearings. The straddle mounted pinion has two tapered roller bearings in front of the pinion teeth which take the forward and reverse thrust, while a third bearing behind the pinion teeth carries the radial load. AXLE HOUSING, REPLACE Refer to ``Chevrolet Full Floating Axles'' for axle housing replacement procedures, since procedures are identical for both axles. AXLE SHAFT, REPLACE 1. Remove hub cap, then install slide hammer adapter into tapped hole in axle flange. 2. Attach slide hammer onto adapter, then remove axle shaft from housing. 3. Install axle shaft, ensuring flange and hub splines align. 4. Install new gasket, position flange to hub, then install attaching bolts and tighten to specifications. WHEEL BEARINGS, ADJUST 1. Remove axle shaft as outlined previously. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Disengage retainer tang from locknut, then remove locknut and retainer from axle housing tube. 4. While rotating wheel, torque inner adjusting nut to 50 ft. lbs., then back off nut 1/8 of a turn. 5. Install retainer so that short tang engages nearest slot on adjusting nut. 6. Install outer locknut and torque to 250 ft. lbs., then bend long tang of retainer into slot of outer nut. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Coil Spring Suspension FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS AND/OR HUB 1. Raise and support vehicle, then remove wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove hub cap and cotter pin. 3. Remove brake caliper. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 4. Remove retaining nut, then the hub and disc assembly. 5. Remove outer wheel bearing. 6. To remove inner bearing, pry out grease seal, then remove seal and inner bearing. 7. Reverse procedure to install, then adjust wheel bearings as previously described. Leaf Spring Suspension FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS AND/OR HUB 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove dust cap, if equipped. 3. Remove locking hub as outlined under LOCKING HUBS. 4. Remove disc brake caliper and position aside. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 5. Remove wheel bearing outer locknut, lock ring and wheel bearing inner adjusting nut. 6. Remove hub and disc assembly, and outer wheel bearing. 7. Remove oil seal, inner wheel bearing and inner and outer bearing cups using a suitable drift. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Adjust wheel bearings as outlined under ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE/WHEEL BEARING. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 3489 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Chevrolet Full Floating Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS Fig. 5 Removing bearing adjusting nut locknut Hub & Drum, Remove 1. Remove wheel and axle shaft. 2. Disengage tang of nut lock from slot or flat of locknut, then remove locknut from housing tube, using appropriate tool, Fig. 5. 3. Disengage tang of nut lock from slot or flat of adjusting nut and remove nut lock from housing tube. 4. Use appropriate tool, Fig. 5, to remove adjusting nut from housing tube. Remove thrust washer from housing tube. 5. Pull hub and drum straight off axle housing. Fig. 6 Removing outer bearing & cup Bearing & Cup, Replace 1. Using a hammer and suitable drift, drive inner bearing, cup and seal from hub assembly. 2. Remove outer bearing snap ring using suitable pliers. 3. Using tools J-24426 and J-8092, Fig. 6, drive outer bearing and cup from hub assembly. 4. Install new outer bearing into hub assembly. 5. Install outer bearing cup using tools mentioned in Step 3. Drive cup beyond snap ring groove. Install outer bearing cup with tool J-8092 positioned upside down to prevent chamfer on tool from damaging cup. 6. Install snap ring into groove using suitable pliers. 7. Using tool J-24426, drive cup against snap ring. 8. Install inner bearing cup using tools J-24427 and J-8092. Drive cup into position until it seats against shoulder of hub bore. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 3490 9. Install new oil seal. Chevrolet Salisbury Type Semi-Floating Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS 1. Remove axle shaft as previously described. 2. Use a suitable puller to remove bearing and oil seal. 3. Lubricate wheel bearing and cavity between seal lips with wheel bearing lubricant before installation. 4. Reverse procedure to install. GMC Single Speed REAR WHEEL BEARINGS Fig. 5 Removing bearing adjusting nut locknut Fig. 9 Removing bearing retainer ring 1. Remove wheel and axle shaft. 2. Disengage tang of retainer from slot or flat of locknut, then remove locknut from housing tube, Fig. 5. 3. Disengage tang of retainer from slot or flat of adjusting nut, then remove retainer. 4. Using tool shown in Fig. 5, remove adjusting nut from housing tube. Remove thrust washer. 5. Pull hub and drum assembly off axle housing. Remove oil seal and discard. 6. Using a suitable steel bar and an arbor press, press inner bearing cup from hub. 7. Using a suitable pliers, remove outer bearing retaining ring, Fig. 9. 8. Using an old axle shaft or equivalent, drive on axle shaft spacer to remove outer bearing assembly from hub. 9. Position axle shaft spacer and outer bearing into hub, ensuring larger side of bearing faces outer end of hub. 10. Position outer bearing cup into hub with thin edge facing toward outer end of hub, then press cup into hub. 11. Install retaining ring, then press cup into contact with ring. 12. Drive inner bearing cup into hub, then install new oil seal. 13. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to complete installation, then adjust wheel bearings as outlined in ``Wheel Bearing, Adjust'' procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Hub: Service and Repair FRONT HUB/BEARING 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove dust cap, if equipped. 3. Remove locking hub as outlined under ``Locking Hub Service.'' 4. Remove disc brake caliper and position aside. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 5. Remove wheel bearing outer locknut, lock ring and wheel bearing inner adjusting nut. 6. Remove hub and disc assembly, and outer wheel bearing. 7. Remove oil seal, inner wheel bearing and inner and outer bearing cups using a suitable drift. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Adjust wheel bearings as outlined under ``Wheel Bearings, Adjust'' procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Adjustments Wheel Hub (Locking): Adjustments Fig. 4 Adjusting wheel bearing EXC. HUBS W/MONROE AUTO. TYPE LOCKING HUB 1. Remove dust cap or locking hub, lockwasher and outer locknut. 2. Using suitable spanner wrench, torque inner adjusting nut to 50 ft.. lbs. while rotating hub. Back off adjusting nut and torque to 50 ft. lbs. on 1985---87 models with manual hubs, or 35 ft. lbs. on all other models, while rotating hub, Fig. 4. 3. Back off adjusting nut just enough to free bearing on 1986---87 models with manual hubs, or 3/8 of a turn on all other models. 4. On 1980---84 K10---20/1500---2500 vehicles, proceed as follows: a. On 1980 models, assemble adjusting nut lock by aligning nearest hole in lock with adjusting nut pin. Install outer locknut and torque to 80 ft. lbs. b. On 1981---84 models, assemble drag sleeve retainer washer over the axle shaft and against bearing adjusting nut. The tang on the inside diameter of this washer is assembled in the keyway of the spindle. Assemble and tighten outer locknut to 160---205 ft. lbs. 5. On 1980---84 K30/3500 vehicles, proceed as follows: a. On 1980---81 models, assemble lockwasher and locknut, then torque locknut to 65 ft. lbs. Bend one ear of lockwasher at least 30° over inner adjusting nut, and the other ear at least 60° over outer locknut. b. On 1982---84 models, assemble drag sleeve retainer washer over axle shaft and against bearing adjusting nut. The tang on the inside diameter of this washer is assembled in the keyway of the spindle. Assemble and tighten outer locknut to 160---205 ft. lbs. 6. On 1985---87 models, assemble drag sleeve retainer washer. Ensure tang on inside diameter of washer passes onto slot in spindle and hole in washer aligns with locknut pin. Move adjustment nut as necessary to align pin, then torque locknut to 160 ft. lbs. 7. On all vehicles, check to ensure all hub assemblies have .001---.010 inch endplay. 8. Install dust cap or locking hub. HUBS W/MONROE AUTO. TYPE LOCKING HUB 1. Remove locking hub assembly. 2. Torque locknut to 70 ft. lbs. while rotating hub and disc assembly. 3. Back off locknut, then torque to 25 ft. lbs. while rotating hub and disc. 4. Back off locknut to align nearest slot, then install locknut key. 5. Measure endplay. Endplay should be .001---.010 inch. 6. Reinstall locking hub assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Monroe Auto. Locking Hub Fig. 7 Exploded view of Monroe automatic locking hub Description This automatic locking hub, Fig. 7, when placed in four wheel drive, directs power to the front wheels. The front axle turns the axle shaft, activating the tri-cam mechanism, which then moves the drive gear outward into engagement with the ring gear. When two wheel drive is selected, disengagement is accomplished by the reverse movement of the wheels, which causes the drive gear and tri-cam to rotate to the disengaged position, moving the drive gear out of mesh with the ring gear. Removal 1. Remove tire and wheel assembly, hubcap and hub lock. 2. Remove spring retainer, then the loose spring. 3. Carefully pull hub lock assembly from wheel. If hub lock assembly will not slide out freely, rotate wheel to facilitate removal. Disassembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3499 1. Position hub lock assembly with plastic bearing side facing downward. 2. Pry inboard spring from assembly, then remove spindle lock, thrust bearing and tri-cam assembly. 3. Clean adapter housing assembly. If any part of this assembly is worn, replace as necessary. 4. Slide ring gear from adapter housing, then remove the six ring gear springs. 5. Remove ring gear spring retainer. Assembly 1. Install ring gear spring retainer. 2. Position the six ring gear springs into adapter housing. 3. Grease outside surface of ring gear, then install into adapter housing. Ensure gear teeth are closest to springs. 4. Insert and install ring gear retaining ring. Ensure ring gear springs are properly seated in adapter housing. 5. Grease tri-cam assembly, then install into adapter housing. 6. Install thrust bearing, spindle lock and inboard snap ring. Rotate spindle lock tangs in both directions to check for free movement. Installation 1. Install hub lock by first sliding hub onto axle shaft spline, then guide hub into wheel hub spline. When hub lock bottoms out, rotate entire wheel while pressing inward on hub until hub lock tangs engage wheel bearing locknut. Allow hub lock to seat itself. Hub lock should not protrude more than 3/8 inch from face of wheel hub. 2. Install spring, then unlock hub lock by rotating wheel hub while applying force to drive gear spring. 3. Install spring retainer and spring. 4. Install hub cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3500 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Spicer Manual Locking Hub Fig. 8 Exploded view of Spicer manual locking hub Description As shown in Fig. 8, the splines on the inside diameter of the axle shaft sleeve and ring assembly mesh with the axle shaft splines. The assembly is retained on the axle shaft with a snap ring. The splines on the outside diameter of the inner clutch ring assembly mesh with the wheel hub splines. Therefore, when the actuator knob is turned towards the ``L'' position, the actuating cam body is forced outward towards the hub end, allowing the inner clutch to be forced under spring tension towards the axle shaft sleeve and ring assembly until the inner clutch assembly teeth are engaged in the axle shaft sleeve and ring assembly teeth, locking the axle and hub. Operation When the transfer case is shifted into the position for driving the front axle, turn the actuating knob so that it is aligned with the letter L. If the clutch teeth do not engage with the knob turned to this position, the clutch teeth are butted and a slight movement of the wheel in either direction will complete the lock. The front axle will now drive the wheel. When the transfer case is to be shifted into the position for driving the rear axle only, turn the actuating knob so that it is aligned with the letter F. This will disengage the clutch teeth and thus unlock the wheel hub from the axle shaft. The wheel will now turn free on the axle. Be certain that the transfer case is shifted into two wheel drive position before disengaging the Hub-Lock. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3501 Fig. 8 Exploded view of Spicer manual locking hub Removal 1. Position actuator knob in ``LOCK,'' then raise and support vehicle. Rotate tire to ensure engagement of hub lock. 2. Remove retaining plate attaching bolts, then the retaining plate, actuating knob and O-rings. 3. Remove internal snap ring, outer clutch retaining ring, actuating cam body, outer clutch gear and pressure spring, Fig. 8. 4. Remove axle shaft snap ring, then the inner clutch ring. 5. Remove spring retainer plate, if equipped. Installation 1. Install spring retainer plate, if equipped, over spindle nuts and against wheel bearing outer cup. Ensure flanged side of plate faces toward wheel bearing. 2. Install inner clutch ring onto axle shaft, press ring inward, then install snap ring. 3. Install pressure spring with larger side facing inward. 4. Install outer clutch gear, actuating cam body, outer clutch retaining ring and the internal snap ring. Ensure actuating cams face outward. 5. Install O-ring, actuating knob, actuating knob O-ring and the retaining plate. 6. Install retaining plate attaching bolts and torque to 38 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3502 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Warner Auto. Locking Hub Fig. 6 Exploded view of Warner automatic locking hub Description The Automatic Locking Hub, shown in Fig. 6, engages or disengages to lock the front axle shaft to the hub of the front wheel. Engagement occurs whenever the vehicle is operated in 4WD. Disengagement occurs whenever 2WD has been selected and the vehicle is moving rearward. Disengagement will not occur when the vehicle is moved rearward if 4WD is selected and the hub has already been engaged. Before disassembling a unit for a complaint of abnormal noise, note the following: 1. To obtain all-wheel drive, the transfer case lever must be placed in 4L or 4H, at which time the hub locks will automatically engage. 2. To unlock the hubs, shift the transfer case lever to 2H, then slowly reverse the vehicle direction approximately 10 feet. 3. An incomplete shift from 2WD to 4WD, or disengagement of only one hub lock may cause an abnormal sound from the front axle. Shift to 4WD to stop the noise, then unlock the hubs as previously stated. Removal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3503 1. Remove 5 screws retaining the cover to outer clutch housing. 2. Remove cover, seal, seal bridge and bearing components. 3. Compress the wire retaining ring and remove the remaining components from the hub. Disassembly 1. Remove snap ring from groove in hub sleeve, then turn clutch gear until it falls into engagement with the outer clutch housing. Lift and tilt the drag sleeve to unlock the tangs of the brake band from window of inner cage, then remove the drag sleeve and brake assembly. The brake band must never be removed from the drag sleeve. The spring tension of the brake band can be changed if the coils are overexpanded and could affect hub operation. 2. Remove snap ring from groove in outer clutch housing, then pry plastic outer cage free from inner cage while inner cage is being removed. 3. Pry plastic outer cage tabs free from groove in outer clutch housing, then remove outer cage. 4. Remove clutch sleeve and attached components from outer clutch housing. 5. Compress return spring and hold the spring with clamps, then position the assembly in a vise so that the vise holds both ends of the clutch sleeve. Remove retaining spring. 6. Remove clamps holding the return spring, then slowly open the vise to permit the release of the return spring in a safe manner. Remove retainer seat, spring and spring support washers from the hub sleeve. 7. Remove C-ring from clutch sleeve. It is necessary to position sleeve assembly so that the C-ring ends are aligned with legs of cam follower, allowing removal between the legs. 8. Remove conical spring from between cam follower and clutch gear, then separate cam follower from clutch gear. Do not pry the legs of the cam follower apart. Assembly & Installation 1. Install tangs of cam follower over flats of clutch gear, then compress conical spring and position with large diameter located against clutch gear. 2. Position clutch gear assembly over splines of hub sleeve. The teeth of the cam follower should be located at the end of the hub sleeve with no splines, and the clutch gear and spring should slide freely over splines of hub sleeve. 3. Install C-ring into groove of hub sleeve, then install a spring retainer over each end of return spring. 4. Position one end of return spring with retainer against shoulder of clutch gear, then place support washer on end of the return spring. Compress return spring and install retainer ring into groove of hub sleeve. 5. Place assembled components into outer housing. The cam follower should be positioned with legs facing outward. 6. Install 3 of the cover screws into 3 holes of the outer clutch housing. These screws will support the component to permit the clutch hub to drop down so that the tangs of the brake band can be assembled. 7. Carefully install the plastic outer cage into outer clutch housing with ramps facing toward cam follower. The small external tabs of the plastic cage should be located in wide groove of outer clutch housing. 8. Install steel inner cage into the outer cage, aligning tab of outer cage with window of the inner cage, then install retaining ring into groove of outer clutch housing above outer cage. 9. The brake band and drag are serviced as a complete assembly. Install one of the 2 tangs of the brake band on each side of the lug of the outer cage, located in the window of the steel inner cage. It will be necessary to tilt these parts to engage the tangs in this position as the drag sleeve is positioned against the face of the cam follower. 10. Remove the 3 screws and rest the end of the hub sleeve on a suitable support, then install washer and snap ring above drag sleeve. The following steps may be completed as the hub is installed into vehicle. 11. Install wire retaining ring into groove of end of clutch housing without spline. The tangs of retainer ring should point away from splined end of clutch housing. 12. Hold the tangs together and install the 2 bent down tabs of seal bridge over tangs. The seal bridge holds the wire retainer ring in a clamped position in groove of outer clutch housing. Install O-ring into groove of outer clutch housing and over the seal bridge. 13. Lubricate and install the bearing over the inner race. The steel ball bearing should be visible when the bearing is properly installed. 14. Install bearing retainer clip into hole in outer race, then install bearing and retainer assembly in end of hub sleeve. Install seal ring over outer clutch housing. 15. Install bearing race spring into bore of cover, then install cover and spring assembly. Align holes in cover to holes in outer clutch housing and install 5 screws. 16. Install O-ring over seal bridge to prevent it from dislodging during handling prior to the hub bearing being installed into the vehicle. 17. The hub and attached parts should turn freely after installation. The 5 cover screws must be loosened to install the hub into the vehicle. After installation, torque the cover screws to 40---50 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3504 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Warner Manual Locking Hub Description Turning the locking hub clutch control to the ``L'' or ``4'' position connects the wheel hubs to the axle shafts. Therefore, when the transfer case is driving the front axle and the locking hubs are in the ``L'' or ``4'' position, the wheels are driven by the axle shafts. When the transfer case is not driving the front axle, the locking hub clutch controls are turned to the ``F'' or ``2'' position to disconnect the wheel hubs from the axle shafts. The wheels now rotate freely, but the axle shafts remain stationary. On any vehicle equipped with manually operated locking hubs, extreme care must be taken to ensure locking hub dials are fully engaged or disengaged, to prevent possible damage to the locking hubs. If the locking hubs are not properly maintained, full engagement of the control dials may become impossible due to excessive dirt and dust. Any time the vehicle is driven through water deep enough to cover the hubs, the locking hubs should be removed and cleaned, then lubricated thoroughly. These hubs are serviced as an assembly or subassembly only (hub body or hub clutch assembly only). Do not attempt to disassemble these units. If an entire hub or subassembly is defective, replace the entire assembly or subassembly. The hubs may be removed for cleaning and inspection purposes and for periodic lubrication only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3505 Fig. 9 Exploded view of Warner manual locking hub Removal 1. Remove socket head screws, axle hub retaining ring and axle shaft retaining ring. 2. Remove hub clutch assembly, Fig. 9. 3. Clean and inspect all components. Replace as necessary. Installation 1. Lubricate all hub components. 2. Install hub clutch, axle hub retaining ring and axle shaft retaining ring. 3. Install new O-ring in hub body and position in clutch. 4. Install socket head screws and torque to 30 inch lbs. 5. Raise and support front of vehicle, then set control dial to ``FREE'' position and rotate wheels. If wheels drag, check hub installation. 6. Lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Seal: Service and Repair 1. Remove axle shaft as previously described. 2. Use a suitable puller to remove bearing and oil seal. 3. Lubricate wheel bearing and cavity between seal lips with wheel bearing lubricant before installation. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 91263E > Jun > 90 > Tires (Front) - Irregular Wear Tires: Customer Interest Tires (Front) - Irregular Wear Number: 91-26-3E Section: 3E Date: June 1990 Corp. Bulletin No: 053501 Subject: FRONT TIRE WEAR Model and Year: 1982-91 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS (REAR WHEEL DRIVE) THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 91-12-3E. THE KILOMETERS HAVE BEEN TRANSLATED INTO MILES. ALL COPIES OF 91-12-3E SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Rear wheel drive trucks, equipped with All Season and/or On-Off road tires may exhibit irregular wear of; the front tires. Small amounts of irregular wear is considered normal and is not necessarily a result of incorrect alignment. Incorrect alignment (especially toe) may result in premature wear of the front tires, however agressive cornering may also have a similar effect. Drive axle tires are much less prone to irregular wear, therefore they should not be considered for comparison of wear to non-drive axle tires. The rate of irregular wear is also dependent upon the depth of tread. New tires are more prone to irregular wear, so it is essential that tires are rotated at the proper intervals to normalize the wear. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 91263E > Jun > 90 > Tires (Front) - Irregular Wear > Page 3518 Light Duty truck tire rotation recommendations are pictured on the following page. Rotation Guidelines for Tires used on Light Duty Trucks: Tires used on Pickups, Vans and Utility vehicles should be rotated at the first 6,000 miles for Schedule 1 or 7,500 miles for Schedule 2 and then every 15,000 miles thereafter. NOTE: Earlier rotation may be required should irregular wear pafterns develop due to harsh service use - the following rotation patterns are recommended for the various vehicle types and tire combinations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3524 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3525 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3526 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3527 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3528 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 05-03-10-020C > Apr > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 05-03-10-020C > Apr > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires > Page 3533 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 00-00-90-002J > Jan > 09 > Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-90-002J Date: January 28, 2009 Subject: Information on Proper Tire Pressure Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and clarify additional information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-90-002I (Section 00 - General Information). Important: ^ Adjustment of tire pressure for a customer with a Low Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light on and no codes in the TPM system is NOT a warrantable repair. Claims to simply adjust the tire pressure will be rejected. ^ ALL tires (including the spare tire) MUST be set to the recommended inflation pressure stated on the vehicle's tire placard (on driver's door) during the PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION (PDI). Recommended inflation pressure is not the pressure printed on tire sidewall. ^ Tires may be over-inflated from the assembly plant due to the mounting process. ^ Generally a 5.6°C (10°F) temperature change will result in (is equivalent to) a 6.9 kPa (1 psi) tire pressure change. ^ 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 Only - The H2 comes standard with Light Truck "D" Load Range tires with a recommended cold inflation pressure of 289 kPa (42 psi). These tires will alert the driver to a low pressure situation at roughly 262 kPa (38 psi) due to a requirement in FMVSS 138 which specifies a Minimum Activation Pressure for each tire type. This creates a relatively narrow window of "usable" pressure values and the warning will be more sensitive to outside temperature changes during the colder months. As with other cold temperature/tire pressure issues, there is nothing wrong with the system itself. If a vehicle is brought in with this concern, check for tire damage and set all tires to the Recommended Cold Inflation Pressure shown on the vehicle placard. Accurate tire pressures ensure the safe handling and appropriate ride characteristics of GM cars and trucks. It is critical that the tire pressure be adjusted to the specifications on the vehicle¡C■s tire placard during PDI. Ride, handling and road noise concerns may be caused by improperly adjusted tire pressure. The first step in the diagnosis of these concerns is to verify that the tires are inflated to the correct pressures. The recommended tire inflation pressure is listed on the vehicle¡C■s tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver¡C■s side front or rear door edge, center pillar, or the rear compartment lid. Tip ^ Generally a 5.6°C (10°F) temperature increase will result in (is equivalent to) a 6.9 kPa (1 psi) tire pressure increase. ^ The definition of a "cold" tire is one that has been sitting for at least 3 hours, or driven no more than 1.6 km (1 mi). ^ On extremely cold days, if the vehicle has been indoors, it may be necessary to compensate for the low external temperature by adding additional air to the tire during PDI. ^ During cold weather, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator light (a yellow horseshoe with an exclamation point) may illuminate. If this indicator turns off after the tires warm up (reach operating temperature), the tire pressure should be reset to placard pressure at the cold temperature. ^ The TPM system will work correctly with nitrogen in tires. ^ The TPM system is compatible with the GM Vehicle Care Tire Sealant but may not be with other commercially available sealants. Important: ^ Do not use the tire pressure indicated on the tire itself as a guide. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 00-00-90-002J > Jan > 09 > Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information > Page 3538 ^ Always inspect and adjust the pressure when the tires are cold. ^ Vehicles that have different pressures for the front and the rear need to be adjusted after tire rotation. Improper tire inflation may result in any or all of the following conditions: ^ Premature tire wear ^ Harsh ride ^ Excessive road noise ^ Poor handling ^ Reduced fuel economy ^ Low Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Light ON ^ Low Tire Pressure Message on the Drivers Information Center (DIC) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 433502 > Jul > 94 > Tires - Speed Rated Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Speed Rated Information Group Ref.: 3 - Steering/Suspension Bulletin No.: 433502 Date: July, 1994 INFORMATION SUBJECT: SPEED RATED TIRES MODELS: 1995 AND PRIOR YEAR PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS All original equipment passenger car and light duty truck tires used by General Motors have a speed rating symbol molded on their sidewall. This speed symbol, along with the tire's load index, make up the service description that follows the tire's size. The original equipment tire size, speed rating, and recommended inflation pressure are listed on the tire placard usually located on the driver's door edge. WHEN REPLACING TIRES, NEVER INSTALL A TIRE THAT IS A SMALLER SIZE OR LESSER SPEED RATING THAN THAT USED AS ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT. As in the past, it is recommended that replacement tires have a TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) number on the sidewall that is identical to that on the original tires. Common speed rating on tires used by General Motors are as follows: (see illustration) IMPORTANT: Most base all season tires and touring tires used by GM are S rated. Performance tires will usually have a higher speed rating. High performance tires are usually Z rated. Z rated tires carry the Z symbol within the tire size, rather than after the size in the service description. These speeds apply only at the tire's full pressure. An underinflated tire will not meet its speed rating capability. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 91263E > Jun > 90 > Tires (Front) - Irregular Wear Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires (Front) - Irregular Wear Number: 91-26-3E Section: 3E Date: June 1990 Corp. Bulletin No: 053501 Subject: FRONT TIRE WEAR Model and Year: 1982-91 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS (REAR WHEEL DRIVE) THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 91-12-3E. THE KILOMETERS HAVE BEEN TRANSLATED INTO MILES. ALL COPIES OF 91-12-3E SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Rear wheel drive trucks, equipped with All Season and/or On-Off road tires may exhibit irregular wear of; the front tires. Small amounts of irregular wear is considered normal and is not necessarily a result of incorrect alignment. Incorrect alignment (especially toe) may result in premature wear of the front tires, however agressive cornering may also have a similar effect. Drive axle tires are much less prone to irregular wear, therefore they should not be considered for comparison of wear to non-drive axle tires. The rate of irregular wear is also dependent upon the depth of tread. New tires are more prone to irregular wear, so it is essential that tires are rotated at the proper intervals to normalize the wear. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tires: > 91263E > Jun > 90 > Tires (Front) - Irregular Wear > Page 3547 Light Duty truck tire rotation recommendations are pictured on the following page. Rotation Guidelines for Tires used on Light Duty Trucks: Tires used on Pickups, Vans and Utility vehicles should be rotated at the first 6,000 miles for Schedule 1 or 7,500 miles for Schedule 2 and then every 15,000 miles thereafter. NOTE: Earlier rotation may be required should irregular wear pafterns develop due to harsh service use - the following rotation patterns are recommended for the various vehicle types and tire combinations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-001F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Tire Puncture Repair Procedures For All Cars and Light Duty Trucks Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001E (Section 03 - Suspension). This bulletin covers puncture repair procedures for passenger car and light duty truck radial tires in the tread area only. The tire manufacturer must be contacted for its individual repair policy and whether or not the speed rating is retained after repair. Caution - Tire changing can be dangerous and should be done by trained professionals using proper tools and procedures. Always read and understand any manufacturer's warnings contained in their customers literature or molded into the tire sidewall. - Serious eye and ear injury may result from not wearing adequate eye and ear protection while repairing tires. - NEVER inflate beyond 275 kPa (40 pounds) pressure to seat beads. Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. - NEVER stand, lean or reach over the assembly during inflation. Repairable area on a radial tire. Important - NEVER repair tires worn to the tread indicators 1.59 mm (2/32") remaining depth). - NEVER repair tires with a tread puncture larger than 6.35 mm (1/4"). - NEVER substitute an inner tube for a permissible or non-permissible repair. - NEVER perform an outside-in tire repair (plug only, on the wheel). - Every tire must be removed from the wheel for proper inspection and repair. - Regardless of the type of repair used, the repair must seal the inner liner and fill the injury. - Consult with repair material supplier/manufacturer for repair unit application procedures and repair tools/repair material recommendations. Three basic steps for tire puncture repair: 1. Remove the tire from the wheel for inspection and repair. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3553 2. Fill the injury (puncture) to keep moisture out. 3. Seal the inner liner with a repair unit to prevent air loss. External Inspection 1. Prior to demounting, inspect the tire surface, the valve and the wheel for the source of the leak by using a water and soap solution. Mark the injured area and totally deflate the tire by removing the valve core. 2. Demount the tire from the wheel and place the tire on a well-lighted spreader. Internal Inspection 1. Spread the beads and mark the puncture with a tire crayon. 2. Inspect the inner tire for any signs of internal damage. 3. Remove the puncturing object, noting the direction of the penetration. 4. Probe the injury with a blunt awl in order to determine the extent and direction of the injury. 5. Remove any loose foreign material from the injury. 6. Punctures exceeding 6.35 mm (1/4") should not be repaired. Cleaning 1. Clean the area around the puncture thoroughly with a proper liner cleaner, clean cloth and a scraper. This step serves to remove dirt and mold lubricants to insure proper adhesion and non-contamination of the buffing tool. 2. Refer to information on the product or manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet and follow guidelines for handling and disposal. Clean the Injury Channel Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3554 1. Use a proper hand reamer, carbide cutter or drill bit to ream the puncture channel from the inside of the tire in order to clean the injury. 2. Remove steel wires protruding above the liner surface to prevent damage to the repair unit. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for recommended reaming tool(s). Fill the Injury 1. It is necessary to fill the injury channel to provide back up for the repair unit and to prevent moisture from entering the tire fabric and steel wires. 2. (For combination repair/plug units skip this step.) Cement the injured channel and fill the injury from the inside of the tire with the repair plug per repair material manufacturer's recommendations. Without stretching the plug, cut the plug off just above the inside tire surface. 3. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair material selection. Repair Unit Selection Important Do not install the repair unit in this step. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3555 1. Center the repair unit over the injury as a reference and outline an area larger than the unit so that buffing will not remove the crayon marks. 2. Remove the repair unit. 3. DO NOT overlap previous or multiple repair units. 4. Consult your repair material supplier for proper repair unit selection. Buffing 1. To prevent contamination and preserve the outline, buff within the marked area thoroughly and evenly with a low speed buffing tool using a fine wire brush or gritted rasp. 2. Buff to a smooth velvet surface (RMA #1 or #2 buffed texture). 3. Use caution not to gouge the inner liner or expose casing fabric. 4. Remove any buffing dust with a vacuum cleaner. 5. Consult your repair material supplier for a proper buffing tool. Cementing Apply chemical cement according to the repair material manufacturer's procedures. Repair Unit Application Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3556 1. The tire must be in the relaxed position when the repair unit is installed (Do not spread the beads excessively). Two-Piece Plug and Repair Units 1. If applicable, install the repair unit so that the alignment is correct. 2. Center the repair unit over the injury and stitch down thoroughly with the stitching tool, working from the center out. 3. Being careful not to stretch the plug material, cut the plug flush with the outer tread. Combination Repair/Plug Units 1. Pull the plug through the injury until the repair just reaches the liner. Stitch down thoroughly. 2. Follow the repair material manufacturer's recommendations for further installation instructions. 2. Consult your repair material supplier for the proper stitching tool. Safety Cage Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 04-03-10-001F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Tire Puncture Repair Procedures > Page 3557 Some run flat tires, such as the Goodyear Extended Mobility Tire (EMT) used on the Corvette, may require more than 275 kPa (40 psi) to seat the bead. In such a case, a tire safety cage must be used. Consult the tire manufacturer for its individual repair policy. Final Inspection 1. After remounting and inflating the tire, check both beads, the repair and the valve with a water and soap solution in order to detect leaks. 2. If the tire continues to lose air, the tire must be demounted and reinspected. 3. Balance the tire and wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - OFF Vehicle. For additional tire puncture repair information, contact: Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 05-03-10-020C > Apr > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-020C Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-020B (Section 03 - Suspension). GM's Position on the Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires General Motors does not oppose the use of purified nitrogen as an inflation gas for tires. We expect the theoretical benefits to be reduced in practical use due to the lack of an existing infrastructure to continuously facilitate inflating tires with nearly pure nitrogen. Even occasional inflation with compressed atmospheric air will negate many of the theoretical benefits. Given those theoretical benefits, practical limitations, and the robust design of GM original equipment TPC tires, the realized benefits to our customer of inflating their tires with purified nitrogen are expected to be minimal. The Promise of Nitrogen: Under Controlled Conditions Recently, nitrogen gas (for use in inflating tires) has become available to the general consumer through some retailers. The use of nitrogen gas to inflate tires is a technology used in automobile racing. The following benefits under controlled conditions are attributed to nitrogen gas and its unique properties: - A reduction in the expected loss of Tire Pressure over time. - A reduction in the variance of Tire Pressures with temperature changes due to reduction of water vapor concentration. - A reduction of long term rubber degradation due to a decrease in oxygen concentrations. Important These are obtainable performance improvements when relatively pure nitrogen gas is used to inflate tires under controlled conditions. The Promise of Nitrogen: Real World Use Nitrogen inflation can provide some benefit by reducing gas migration (pressure loss) at the molecular level through the tire structure. NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) has stated that the inflation pressure loss of tires can be up to 5% a month. Nitrogen molecules are larger than oxygen molecules and, therefore, are less prone to "seeping" through the tire casing. The actual obtainable benefits of nitrogen vary, based on the physical construction and the materials used in the manufacturing of the tire being inflated. Another potential benefit of nitrogen is the reduced oxidation of tire components. Research has demonstrated that oxygen consumed in the oxidation process of the tire primarily comes from the inflation media. Therefore, it is reasonable to assume that oxidation of tire components can be reduced if the tire is inflated with pure nitrogen. However, only very small amounts of oxygen are required to begin the normal oxidation process. Even slight contamination of the tire inflation gas with compressed atmospheric air during normal inflation pressure maintenance, may negate the benefits of using nitrogen. GM Tire Quality, Technology and Focus of Importance Since 1972, General Motors has designed tires under the TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) specification system, which includes specific requirements that ensure robust tire performance under normal usage. General Motors works with tire suppliers to design and manufacture original equipment tires for GM vehicles. The GM TPC addresses required performance with respect to both inflation pressure retention, and endurance properties for original equipment tires. The inflation pressure retention requirements address availability of oxygen and oxidation concerns, while endurance requirements ensure the mechanical structure of the tire has sufficient strength. This combination has provided our customers with tires that maintain their structural integrity throughout their useful treadlife under normal operating conditions. Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Maintaining the correct inflation pressure allows the tire to perform as intended by the vehicle manufacturer in many areas, including comfort, fuel economy, stopping distance, cornering, traction, treadwear, and noise. Since the load carrying capability of a tire is related to inflation pressure, proper inflation pressure maintenance is necessary for the tire to support the load imposed by the vehicle without excessive structural Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 05-03-10-020C > Apr > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Use of Nitrogen Gas in Tires > Page 3562 degradation. Important Regardless of the inflation media for tires (atmospheric air or nitrogen), inflation pressure maintenance of tires is critical for overall tire, and ultimately, vehicle performance. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 00-00-90-002J > Jan > 09 > Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-90-002J Date: January 28, 2009 Subject: Information on Proper Tire Pressure Models: 2010 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and clarify additional information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-90-002I (Section 00 - General Information). Important: ^ Adjustment of tire pressure for a customer with a Low Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) light on and no codes in the TPM system is NOT a warrantable repair. Claims to simply adjust the tire pressure will be rejected. ^ ALL tires (including the spare tire) MUST be set to the recommended inflation pressure stated on the vehicle's tire placard (on driver's door) during the PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION (PDI). Recommended inflation pressure is not the pressure printed on tire sidewall. ^ Tires may be over-inflated from the assembly plant due to the mounting process. ^ Generally a 5.6°C (10°F) temperature change will result in (is equivalent to) a 6.9 kPa (1 psi) tire pressure change. ^ 2008-2009 HUMMER H2 Only - The H2 comes standard with Light Truck "D" Load Range tires with a recommended cold inflation pressure of 289 kPa (42 psi). These tires will alert the driver to a low pressure situation at roughly 262 kPa (38 psi) due to a requirement in FMVSS 138 which specifies a Minimum Activation Pressure for each tire type. This creates a relatively narrow window of "usable" pressure values and the warning will be more sensitive to outside temperature changes during the colder months. As with other cold temperature/tire pressure issues, there is nothing wrong with the system itself. If a vehicle is brought in with this concern, check for tire damage and set all tires to the Recommended Cold Inflation Pressure shown on the vehicle placard. Accurate tire pressures ensure the safe handling and appropriate ride characteristics of GM cars and trucks. It is critical that the tire pressure be adjusted to the specifications on the vehicle¡C■s tire placard during PDI. Ride, handling and road noise concerns may be caused by improperly adjusted tire pressure. The first step in the diagnosis of these concerns is to verify that the tires are inflated to the correct pressures. The recommended tire inflation pressure is listed on the vehicle¡C■s tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver¡C■s side front or rear door edge, center pillar, or the rear compartment lid. Tip ^ Generally a 5.6°C (10°F) temperature increase will result in (is equivalent to) a 6.9 kPa (1 psi) tire pressure increase. ^ The definition of a "cold" tire is one that has been sitting for at least 3 hours, or driven no more than 1.6 km (1 mi). ^ On extremely cold days, if the vehicle has been indoors, it may be necessary to compensate for the low external temperature by adding additional air to the tire during PDI. ^ During cold weather, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator light (a yellow horseshoe with an exclamation point) may illuminate. If this indicator turns off after the tires warm up (reach operating temperature), the tire pressure should be reset to placard pressure at the cold temperature. ^ The TPM system will work correctly with nitrogen in tires. ^ The TPM system is compatible with the GM Vehicle Care Tire Sealant but may not be with other commercially available sealants. Important: ^ Do not use the tire pressure indicated on the tire itself as a guide. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 00-00-90-002J > Jan > 09 > Tires - Correct Inflation Pressure Information > Page 3567 ^ Always inspect and adjust the pressure when the tires are cold. ^ Vehicles that have different pressures for the front and the rear need to be adjusted after tire rotation. Improper tire inflation may result in any or all of the following conditions: ^ Premature tire wear ^ Harsh ride ^ Excessive road noise ^ Poor handling ^ Reduced fuel economy ^ Low Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) Light ON ^ Low Tire Pressure Message on the Drivers Information Center (DIC) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Tires: > 433502 > Jul > 94 > Tires - Speed Rated Information Tires: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Speed Rated Information Group Ref.: 3 - Steering/Suspension Bulletin No.: 433502 Date: July, 1994 INFORMATION SUBJECT: SPEED RATED TIRES MODELS: 1995 AND PRIOR YEAR PASSENGER CARS AND LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS All original equipment passenger car and light duty truck tires used by General Motors have a speed rating symbol molded on their sidewall. This speed symbol, along with the tire's load index, make up the service description that follows the tire's size. The original equipment tire size, speed rating, and recommended inflation pressure are listed on the tire placard usually located on the driver's door edge. WHEN REPLACING TIRES, NEVER INSTALL A TIRE THAT IS A SMALLER SIZE OR LESSER SPEED RATING THAN THAT USED AS ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT. As in the past, it is recommended that replacement tires have a TPC (Tire Performance Criteria) number on the sidewall that is identical to that on the original tires. Common speed rating on tires used by General Motors are as follows: (see illustration) IMPORTANT: Most base all season tires and touring tires used by GM are S rated. Performance tires will usually have a higher speed rating. High performance tires are usually Z rated. Z rated tires carry the Z symbol within the tire size, rather than after the size in the service description. These speeds apply only at the tire's full pressure. An underinflated tire will not meet its speed rating capability. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA82V128000 > Dec > 82 > Recall 82V128000: Wheel Stud Failure Wheels: Recalls Recall 82V128000: Wheel Stud Failure ON THE INVOLVED VEHICLES, THE REAR BRAKE DRUM BALANCE WEIGHTS MAY INTERFERE WITH THE ALUMINUM WHEELS. THIS CONTACT COULD CAUSE THE WHEEL LUG NUTS TO LOOSEN, LEADING TO WHEEL STUD FAILURE. THIS COULD ALLOW SEPARATION OF THE WHEEL AND TIRE FROM THE VEHICLE. THE DEALER WILL INSPECT AND, IF NECESSARY, MODIFY THE REAR BRAKE DRUM BALANCE WEIGHTS WITHOUT CHARGE TO OWNER. VEHICLE DESCRIPTION: LIGHT TRUCKS EQUIPPED WITH OPTIONAL ALUMINUM WHEELS AND REAR BRAKE DRUMS. SYSTEM: SERVICE BRAKES; REAR BRAKE DRUM, BALANCE WEIGHTS. CONSEQUENCES OF DEFECT: WHEEL AND TIRE SEPARATION COULD OCCUR WITHOUT PRIOR WARNING AND COULD RESULT IN LOSS OF VEHICLE CONTROL AND AN ACCIDENT. 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK BLAZER 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK C10 1982 GMC C15 1982 GMC JIMMY Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3585 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3586 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3587 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 3592 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-002F Date: April 21, 2011 Subject: Chemical Staining, Pitting, Corrosion and/or Spotted Appearance of Chromed Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update model years, suggest additional restorative products and add additional corrosion information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-002E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important You may give a copy of this bulletin to the customer. What is Chemical Staining of Chrome Wheels? Figure 1 Chemical staining in most cases results from acid based cleaners (refer to Figure 1 for an example). These stains are frequently milky, black, or greenish in appearance. They result from using cleaning solutions that contain acids on chrome wheels. Soap and water is usually sufficient to clean wheels. If the customer insists on using a wheel cleaner they should only use one that specifically states that it is safe for chromed wheels and does not contain anything in the following list. (Dealers should also survey any products they use during prep or normal cleaning of stock units for these chemicals.) - Ammonium Bifluoride (fluoride source for dissolution of chrome) - Hydrofluoric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Hydrochloric Acid (directly dissolves chrome) - Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonic Acid - Sulfamic Acid - Phosphoric Acid - Hydroxyacetic Acid Notice Many wheel cleaner instructions advise to take care to avoid contact with painted surfaces. Most customers think of painted surfaces as the fenders, quarter panels and other exterior sheet metal. Many vehicles have painted brake calipers. Acidic wheel cleaners may craze, crack, or discolor the paint on the brake calipers. Damage from wheel cleaners is not covered under the vehicle new car warranty. Soap and water applied with a soft brush is usually all that is required to clean the calipers. Whenever any wheel cleaner is used, it must be THOROUGHLY rinsed off of the wheel with clean, clear water. Special care must be taken to rinse under the hub cap, balance weights, wheel nuts, lug nut caps, between the wheel cladding and off the back side of the wheel. Wheels returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) that exhibit damage from wheel cleaners most often have the damage around and under the wheel weight where the cleaner was incompletely flushed away. Notice Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3598 Do not use cleaning solutions that contain hydrofluoric, oxalic and most other acids on chrome wheels (or any wheels). If the customer is unsure of the chemical make-up of a particular wheel cleaner, it should be avoided. For wheels showing signs of milky staining from acidic cleaners, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Warranty of Stained Chrome Wheels Stained wheels are not warrantable. Most acid based cleaners will permanently stain chrome wheels. Follow-up with dealers has confirmed that such cleaners were used on wheels that were returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC). Any stained wheels received by the WPC will be charged back to the dealership. To assist the customer, refer to Customer Assistance and Instructions below. Pitting or Spotted Appearance of Chrome Wheels Figure 2 A second type or staining or finish disturbance may result from road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads. The staining will look like small pitting (refer to Figure 2). This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke, but may be uniformly distributed. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Important Road chemicals, such as calcium chloride used for dust control of unpaved roads, can also stain chrome wheels. The staining will look like small pitting. This staining will usually be on the leading edges of each wheel spoke. This is explained by the vehicle traveling in the forward direction while being splashed by the road chemical. If a vehicle must be operated under such conditions, the chrome wheels should be washed with mild soap and water and thoroughly rinsed as soon as conveniently possible. Warranty of Pitted or Spotted Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of road chemicals may be replaced one time. Damage resulting from contact with these applied road chemicals is corrosive to the wheels finish and may cause damage if the wheels are not kept clean. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean if they are operating the vehicle in an area that applies calcium chloride or other dust controlling chemicals! "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). "Stardust" Corrosion of Chrome Wheels Figure 3 A third type of finish disturbance results from prolonged exposure to brake dust and resultant penetration of brake dust through the chrome. As brakes are applied hot particles of brake material are thrown off and tend to be forced through the leading edge of the wheel spoke windows by airflow. These Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3599 hot particles embed themselves in the chrome layer and create a small pit. If the material is allowed to sit on the wheel while it is exposed to moisture or salt, it will corrode the wheel beneath the chrome leaving a pit or small blister in the chrome. Heavy brake dust build-up should be removed from wheels by using GM Chrome Cleaner and Polish, P/N 1050173 (in Canada use 10953013). For moderate cleaning, light brake dust build-up or water spots use GM Swirl Remover Polish, P/N 12377965 (in Canada, use Meguiars Plast-X(TM) Clear Plastic Cleaner and Polish #G12310C**). After cleaning, the wheel should be waxed using GM Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, use Meguiars Cleaner Wax #M0616C**), which will help protect the wheel from brake dust and reduce adhesion of any brake dust that gets on the wheel surface. For general maintenance cleaning, PEEK Metal Polish† may be used. It will clean and shine the chrome and leave behind a wax coating that may help protect the finish. Warranty of Stardust Corroded Chrome Wheels Wheels returned with pitting or spotting as a result of neglect and brake dust build-up may be replaced one time. Important Notify the customer that this is a one time replacement. Please stress to the customer the vital importance of keeping the wheels clean and free of prolonged exposure to brake dust build-up. "GM of Canada" dealers require prior approval by the District Manager - Customer Care and Service Process (DM-CCSP). Customer Assistance and Instructions GM has looked for ways customers may improve the appearance of wheels damaged by acidic cleaners. The following product and procedure has been found to dramatically improve the appearance of stained wheels. For wheels that have milky stains caused by acidic cleaners try the following: Notice THE 3M CHROME AND METAL POLISH REQUIRED FOR THIS PROCEDURE IS AN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE POLISH/CLEANER. THE WHEELS MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE APPLICATION TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE WHEEL SURFACE. THIS PRODUCT WILL REDUCE THE THICKNESS OF THE CHROME PLATING ON THE WHEEL AND IF USED INCORRECTLY OR EXCESSIVELY MAY REMOVE THE CHROME PLATING ALL TOGETHER, EXPOSING A LESS BRIGHT AND BRASSY COLORED SUB-LAYER. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS EXACTLY. 1. Wash the wheels with vigorously with soap and water. This step will clean and may reduce wheel staining. Flood all areas of the wheel with water to rinse. 2. Dry the wheels completely. Notice Begin with a small section of the wheel and with light pressure buff off polish and examine results. ONLY apply and rub with sufficient force and time to remove enough staining that you are satisfied with the results. Some wheels may be stained to the extent that you may only achieve a 50% improvement while others may be able to be restored to the original lustre. IN ALL CASES, only apply until the results are satisfactory. 3. Apply 3M Chrome and Metal Polish #39527* with a clean terry cloth towel. As you apply the polish, the staining will be diminished. 4. When dry, buff off the polish with a clean portion of the towel. 5. Repeat application of the 3M Chrome and Metal Polish until satisfied with the results. If continued applications fail to improve the appearance further discontinue use. This procedure will improve the appearance of the wheels and may, with repeated applications, restore the finish dramatically. For wheels that exhibit spotting from road chemicals the above procedure may marginally improve the condition but will not restore the finish or remove the pitting. In this type of staining the wheel finish has actually been removed in spots and no manner of cleaning will restore the finish. †*We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Parts Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-002F > Apr > 11 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Staining/Pitting/Corrosion > Page 3600 *This product is currently available from 3M. To obtain information for your local retail location please call 3M at 1-888-364-3577. **This product is currently available from Meguiars (Canada). To obtain information for your local retail location please call Meguiars at 1-800-347-5700 or at www.meguiarscanada.com. ^ This product is currently available from Tri-Peek International. To obtain information for your local retail location please call Tri-Peek at 1-877-615-4272 or at www.tripeek.com. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-51-007E Date: March 17, 2011 Subject: Refinishing Aluminum Wheels Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add additional model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-51-007D (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin updates General Motor's position on refinishing aluminum wheels. GM does not endorse any repairs that involve welding, bending, straightening or re-machining. Only cosmetic refinishing of the wheel's coatings, using recommended procedures, is allowed. Evaluating Damage In evaluating damage, it is the GM Dealer's responsibility to inspect the wheel for corrosion, scrapes, gouges, etc. The Dealer must insure that such damage is not deeper than what can be sanded or polished off. The wheel must be inspected for cracks. If cracks are found, discard the wheel. Any wheels with bent rim flanges must not be repaired or refinished. Wheels that have been refinished by an outside company must be returned to the same vehicle. The Dealer must record the wheel ID stamp or the cast date on the wheel in order to assure this requirement. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. Aluminum Wheel Refinishing Recommendations - Chrome-plated aluminum wheels Re-plating these wheels is not recommended. - Polished aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. If the clearcoat is damaged, refinishing is possible. However, the required refinishing process cannot be performed in the dealer environment. Refer to Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company later in this bulletin. - Painted aluminum wheels These wheels are painted using a primer, color coat, and clearcoat procedure. If the paint is damaged, refinishing is possible. As with polished wheels, all original coatings must be removed first. Media blasting is recommended. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for the re-painting of this type of wheel. - Bright, machined aluminum wheels These wheels have a polyester or acrylic clearcoat on them. In some cases, the recessed "pocket" areas of the wheel may be painted. Surface refinishing is possible. The wheel must be totally stripped by media blasting or other suitable means. The wheel should be resurfaced by using a sanding process rather than a machining process. This allows the least amount of material to be removed. Important Do not use any re-machining process that removes aluminum. This could affect the dimensions and function of the wheel. Painting is an option to re-clearcoating polished and bright machined aluminum wheels. Paint will better mask any surface imperfections and is somewhat more durable than clearcoat alone. GM recommends using Corsican SILVER WAEQ9283 for a fine "aluminum-like" look or Sparkle SILVER WA9967 for a very bright look. As an option, the body color may also be used. When using any of the painting options, it is recommended that all four wheels be refinished in order to maintain color uniformity. Refer to GM Aluminum Refinishing Bulletin #53-17-03A for specific procedures and product recommendations. Refinisher's Responsibility - Outside Company Important Some outside companies are offering wheel refinishing services. Such refinished wheels will be permanently marked by the refinisher and are warranted by the refinisher. Any process that re-machines or otherwise re-manufactures the wheel should not be used. A refinisher's responsibility includes inspecting for cracks using the Zyglo system or the equivalent. Any cracked wheels must not be refinished. No welding, hammering or reforming of any kind is allowed. The wheel ID must be recorded and follow the wheel throughout the process in order to assure that the same wheel is returned. A plastic media blast may be used for clean up of the wheel. Hand and/or lathe sanding of the machined surface and the wheel window is allowed. Material removal, though, must be kept to a minimum. Re-machining of the wheel is not allowed. Paint and/or clear coat must not be present on the following surfaces: the nut chamfers, the wheel mounting surfaces and the wheel pilot hole. The refinisher must permanently ID stamp the wheel and warrant the painted/clearcoated surfaces for a minimum of one year or the remainder of the new vehicle warranty, whichever is Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 99-08-51-007E > Mar > 11 > Wheels/Tires - Refinishing Aluminum Wheels > Page 3605 longer. Important Whenever a wheel is refinished, the mounting surface and the wheel nut contact surfaces must not be painted or clearcoated. Coating these surfaces could affect the wheel nut torque. When re-mounting a tire on an aluminum wheel, coated balance weights must be used in order to reduce the chance of future cosmetic damage. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-03-10-010A Date: June 09, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Wheel Changing Procedures and Cautions Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER Models 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X 2005-2009 Saturn Vehicles Attention: Complete wheel changing instructions for each vehicle line can be found under Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation in Service Information (SI). This bulletin is intended to quickly review and reinforce simple but vital procedures to reduce the possibility of achieving low torque during wheel installation. Always refer to SI for wheel lug nut torque specifications and complete jacking instructions for safe wheel changing. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include the 2011 model year and update the available special tool list. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-03-10-010 (Section 03 Suspension). Frequency of Wheel Changes - Marketplace Driven Just a few years ago, the increasing longevity of tires along with greater resistance to punctures had greatly reduced the number of times wheels were removed to basically required tire rotation intervals. Today with the booming business in accessory wheels/special application tires (such as winter tires), consumers are having tire/wheel assemblies removed - replaced - or installed more than ever. With this increased activity, it opens up more of a chance for error on the part of the technician. This bulletin will review a few of the common concerns and mistakes to make yourself aware of. Proper Servicing Starts With the Right Tools The following tools have been made available to assist in proper wheel and tire removal and installation. - J 41013 Rotor Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) - J 42450-A Wheel Hub Resurfacing Kit (or equivalent) Corroded Surfaces One area of concern is corrosion on the mating surfaces of the wheel to the hub on the vehicle. Excessive corrosion, dirt, rust or debris built up on these surfaces can mimic a properly tightened wheel in the service stall. Once the vehicle is driven, the debris may loosen, grind up or be washed away from water splash. This action may result in clearance at the mating surface of the wheel and an under-torqued condition. Caution Before installing a wheel, remove any buildup on the wheel mounting surface and brake drum or brake disc mounting surface. Installing wheels with poor metal-to-metal contact at the mounting surfaces can cause wheel nuts to loosen. This may cause a wheel to come off when the vehicle is moving, possibly resulting in a loss of control or personal injury. Whenever you remove the tire/wheel assemblies, you must inspect the mating surfaces. If corrosion is found, you should remove the debris with a die grinder equipped with a fine sanding pad, wire brush or cleaning disc. Just remove enough material to assure a clean, smooth mating surface. The J 41013 (or equivalent) can be used to clean the following surfaces: - The hub mounting surface - The brake rotor mounting surface - The wheel mounting surface Use the J 42450-A (or equivalent) to clean around the base of the studs and the hub. Lubricants, Grease and Fluids Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 3610 Some customers may use penetrating oils, grease or other lubricants on wheel studs to aid in removal or installation. Always use a suitable cleaner/solvent to remove these lubricants prior to installing the wheel and tire assemblies. Lubricants left on the wheel studs may cause improper readings of wheel nut torque. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs ONLY. Notice Lubricants left on the wheel studs or vertical mounting surfaces between the wheel and the rotor or drum may cause the wheel to work itself loose after the vehicle is driven. Always install wheels to clean, dry wheel studs and surfaces ONLY. Beginning with 2011 model year vehicles, put a light coating of grease, GM P/N 1051344 (in Canada, P/N 9930370), on the inner surface of the wheel pilot hole to prevent wheel seizure to the axle or bearing hub. Wheel Stud and Lug Nut Damage Always inspect the wheel studs and lug nuts for signs of damage from crossthreading or abuse. You should never have to force wheel nuts down the stud. Lug nuts that are damaged may not retain properly, yet give the impression of fully tightening. Always inspect and replace any component suspected of damage. Tip Always start wheel nuts by hand! Be certain that all wheel nut threads have been engaged BEFORE tightening the nut. Important If the vehicle has directional tread tires, verify the directional arrow on the outboard side of the tire is pointing in the direction of forward rotation. Wheel Nut Tightening and Torque Improper wheel nut tightening can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. In order to avoid additional brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque specification as shown for each vehicle in SI. Always observe the proper wheel nut tightening sequence as shown below in order to avoid trapping the wheel on the wheel stud threads or clamping the wheel slightly off center resulting in vibration. The Most Important Service You Provide While the above information is well known, and wheel removal so common, technicians run the risk of becoming complacent on this very important Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-03-10-010A > Jun > 10 > Wheels - Changing Procedures/Precautions > Page 3611 service operation. A simple distraction or time constraint that rushes the job may result in personal injury if the greatest of care is not exercised. Make it a habit to double check your work and to always side with caution when installing wheels. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-03-10-006F Date: May 04, 2010 Subject: Information on Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2000-2005 Saturn L Series 2003-2007 Saturn ION Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to considerably expand the available information on Radial Force Variation (RFV) and should be reviewed in whole. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-03-10-006E (Section 03 - Suspension). Important - Before measuring tires on equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700, the vehicle MUST be driven a minimum of 16 km (10 mi) to ensure removal of any flat-spotting. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E - Tire/Wheel Characteristics of GM Original Equipment Tires. - Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 MUST be calibrated prior to measuring tire/wheel assemblies for each vehicle. The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance to GM dealers when using tire force variation measurement equipment, such as the Hunter GSP9700. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool in diagnosing vehicle ride concerns. The most common ride concern involving tire radial force variation is highway speed shake on smooth roads. Tire related smooth road highway speed shake can be caused by three conditions: imbalance, out of round and tire force variation. These three conditions are not necessarily related. All three conditions must be addressed. Imbalance is normally addressed first, because it is the simpler of the three to correct. Off-vehicle, two plane dynamic wheel balancers are readily available and can accurately correct any imbalance. Balancer calibration and maintenance, proper attachment of the wheel to the balancer, and proper balance weights, are all factors required for a quality balance. However, a perfectly balanced tire/wheel assembly can still be "oval shaped" and cause a vibration. Before balancing, perform the following procedures. Tire and Wheel Diagnosis 1. Set the tire pressure to the placard values. 2. With the vehicle raised, ensure the wheels are centered on the hub by loosening all wheel nuts and hand-tightening all nuts first by hand while shaking the wheel, then torque to specifications using a torque wrench, NOT a torque stick. 3. Visually inspect the tires and the wheels. Inspect for evidence of the following conditions and correct as necessary: - Missing balance weights - Bent rim flange - Irregular tire wear - Incomplete bead seating - Tire irregularities (including pressure settings) - Mud/ice build-up in wheel - Stones in the tire tread - Remove any aftermarket wheels and/or tires and restore vehicle to original condition prior to diagnosing a smooth road shake condition. 4. Road test the vehicle using the Electronic Vibration Analyzer (EVA) essential tool. Drive for a sufficient distance on a known, smooth road surface to duplicate the condition. Determine if the vehicle is sensitive to brake apply. If the brakes are applied lightly and the pulsation felt in the steering wheel increases, refer to the Brakes section of the service manual that deals with brake-induced pulsation. If you can start to hear the vibration as a low boom noise (in addition to feeling it), but cannot see it, the vehicle likely has a first order (one pulse per propshaft revolution) driveline vibration. Driveline first order vibrations are high enough in frequency that most humans can start to hear them at highway speeds, but are too high to be able to be easily seen. These issues can be caused by driveline imbalance or misalignment. If the vehicle exhibits this low boom and the booming pulses in-and-out on a regular basis (like a throbbing), chances are good that the vehicle could have driveline vibration. This type Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3616 of vibration is normally felt more in the "seat of the pants" than the steering wheel. 5. Next, record the Hertz (Hz) reading as displayed by the EVA onto the tire data worksheet found at the end of this bulletin. This should be done after a tire break-in period of at least 16 km (10 mi) at 72 km/h (45 mph) or greater, in order to eliminate any possible tire flat-spotting. This reading confirms what the vehicle vibration frequency is prior to vehicle service and documents the amount of improvement occurring as the result of the various steps taken to repair. Completing the Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet below is required. A copy of the completed worksheet must be saved with the R.O. and a copy included with any parts returned to the Warranty Parts Center for analysis. A reading of 35 to 50 Hz typically indicates a first order propshaft vibration. If this is the situation, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-07-30-044D. Generally, a reading between 10 and 20 Hz indicates a tire/wheel vibration and if this is the reading obtained, continue using this bulletin. If the tire 1st order vibration goes away and stays away during this evaluation, the cause is likely tire flat-spotting. Tire flat-spotting vibration may come and go at any speed over 72 km/h (45 mph) during the first 10 minutes of operation, if vibration continues after 10 minutes of driving at speeds greater than 72 km/h (45 mph), tire flat-spotting can be ruled out as the cause for vibration. 6. If flat-spotting is the cause, provide the explanation that this has occurred due to the vehicle being parked for long periods of time and that the nature of the tire is to take a set. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-03-10-007E: Information on Tire/Wheel Characteristics (Vibration, Balance, Shake, Flat Spotting) of GM Original Equipment Tires. 7. If the road test indicates a shake/vibration exists, check the imbalance of each tire/wheel assembly on a known, calibrated, off-car dynamic balancer.Make sure the mounting surface of the wheel and the surface of the balancer are absolutely clean and free of debris. Be sure to chose the proper cone/collet for the wheel, and always use the pilot bore for centering. Never center the wheel using the hub-cap bore since it is not a precision machined surface. If any assembly calls for more than 1/4 ounce on either rim flange, remove all balance weights and rebalance to as close to zero as possible. If you can see the vibration (along with feeling it) in the steering wheel (driving straight without your hands on the wheel), it is very likely to be a tire/wheel first order (one pulse per revolution) disturbance. First order disturbances can be caused by imbalance as well as non-uniformities in tires, wheels or hubs. This first order frequency is too low for a human to hear, but if the amplitude is high enough, it can be seen. If a vibration or shake still exists after balancing, any out of round conditions, of the wheel, and force variation conditions of the tire, must be addressed. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 can address both (it is also a wheel balancer). Tire radial force vibration (RFV) can be defined as the amount of stiffness variation the tire will produce in one revolution under a constant load. Radial force variation is what the vehicle feels because the load (weight) of the vehicle is always on the tires. Although free runout of tires (not under load) is not always a good indicator of a smooth ride, it is critical that total tire/wheel assembly runout be within specification. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 loads the tire, similar to on the vehicle, and measures radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Note that the wheel is affecting the tire's RFV measurement at this point. To isolate the wheel, its runout must be measured. This can be easily done on the Hunter, without the need to set up dial indicators. If the wheel meets the runout specification, the tire's RFV can then be addressed. After measuring the tire/wheel assembly under load, and the wheel alone, the machine then calculates (predicts) the radial force variation of the tire. However, because this is a prediction that can include mounting inaccuracies, and the load wheel is much smaller in diameter than used in tire production, this type of service equipment should NOT be used to audit new tires. Rather, it should be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize radial force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. Equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 does an excellent job of measuring wheel runout, and of finding the low point of the wheel (for runout) and the high point of the tire (for radial force variation). This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly force variation. The machine will simplify this process into easy steps. The following assembly radial force variation numbers should be used as a guide: When measuring RFV and match mounting tires perform the following steps. Measuring Wheel Runout and Assembly Radial Force Variation Important The completed worksheet at the end of this bulletin must be attached to the hard copy of the repair order. - Measure radial force variation and radial runout. - If a road force/balancing machine is used, record the radial force variation (RFV) on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. It may be of benefit to have the lowest RFV assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires onto the subject vehicle. - If a runout/balancing machine is used, record the radial runout of the tire/wheel assemblies on the worksheet at the end of this bulletin. If one or more of the tire/wheel assemblies are more than.040 in (1.02 mm), match mount the tire to the wheel to get below.040 in (1.02 mm). For sensitive customers, readings of 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) or less are preferable, it may also be of benefit to have the lowest runout assembly to the front left corner. If the machine is not available and the EVA data suggests there is an issue, swap the tire and wheel assemblies from the front to the back. Re-check on the EVA and if the problem still exists, test another vehicle to find tires that do not exhibit the same frequency and swap those tires Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3617 onto the subject vehicle. - After match mounting, the tire/wheel assembly must be rebalanced. If match mounting tires to in-spec wheels produces assembly values higher than these, tire replacement may be necessary. Replacing tires at lower values will probably mean good tires are being condemned. Because tires can sometimes become temporarily flat-spotted, which will affect force variation, it is important that the vehicle be driven at least 16 km (10 mi) prior to measuring. Tire pressure must also be adjusted to the usage pressure on the vehicle's tire placard prior to measuring. Most GM vehicles will tolerate radial force variation up to these levels. However, some vehicles are more sensitive, and may require lower levels. Also, there are other tire parameters that equipment such as the Hunter GSP9700 cannot measure that may be a factor. In such cases, TAC should be contacted for further instructions. Important - When mounting a GM wheel to a wheel balancer/force variation machine, always use the wheel's center pilot hole. This is the primary centering mechanism on all GM wheels; the bolt holes are secondary. Usually a back cone method to the machine should be used. For added accuracy and repeatability, a flange plate should be used to clamp the wheel onto the cone and machine. This system is offered by all balancer manufacturers in GM's dealer program. - Any type of service equipment that removes tread rubber by grinding, buffing or truing is NOT recommended, and may void the tire warranty. However, tires may have been ground by the tire company as part of their tire manufacturing process. This is a legitimate procedure. Steering Wheel Shake Worksheet When diagnosing vibration concerns, use the following worksheet in conjunction with the appropriate Vibration Analysis-Road testing procedure in the Vibration Correction sub-section in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-03-10-006F > May > 10 > Wheels/Tires - Tire Radial Force Variation (RFV) > Page 3618 Refer to the appropriate section of SI for specifications and repair procedures that are related to the vibration concern. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 05-03-10-003F Date: April 27, 2010 Subject: Low Tire Pressure, Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels (Repair with Adhesive Sealant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X with Cast Aluminum Wheels Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years and the bulletin reference information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-03-10-003E (Section 03 - Suspension). Condition Some customers may comment on a low tire pressure condition. Diagnosis of the low tire pressure condition indicates an air leak through the cast aluminum wheel. Cause Porosity in the cast aluminum wheel may be the cause. Notice This bulletin specifically addresses issues related to the wheel casting that may result in an air leak. For issues related to corrosion of the wheel in service, please refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 08-03-10-006C - Tire Slowly Goes Flat, Tire Air Loss, Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Illuminated, Aluminum Wheel Bead Seat Corrosion (Clean and Resurface Wheel Bead Seat). Correction 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. 2. Locate the leaking area by inflating the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and dipping the tire/wheel assembly in a water bath, or use a spray bottle with soap and water to locate the specific leak location. Important - If the porosity leak is located in the bead area of the aluminum rim (where the tire meets the rim), the wheel should be replaced. - If two or more leaks are located on one wheel, the wheel should be replaced. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark the location. - If the leak location is on the tire/rubber area, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-001F Tire Puncture Repair Procedures for All Cars and Light Duty Trucks. - If the leak is located on the aluminum wheel area, continue with the next step. 4. Inscribe a mark on the tire at the valve stem in order to indicate the orientation of the tire to the wheel. 5. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 6. Remove the tire pressure sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor removal procedure in SI. 7. Scuff the INSIDE rim surface at the leak area with #80 grit paper and clean the area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M(R) General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner, P/N 08984, or equivalent. 8. Apply a 3 mm (0.12 in) thick layer of Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant, P/N 12378478 (in Canada, use 88900041), or equivalent, to the leak area. 9. Allow for the adhesive/sealant to dry. Notice Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. Damaging the repair area may result in an air leak. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-03-10-003F > Apr > 10 > Tires/Wheels - Low Tire/Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels > Page 3623 10. Align the inscribed mark on the tire with the valve stem on the wheel. 11. Reinstall the Tire Pressure Sensor. Refer to Tire Pressure Sensor installation procedure in SI. 12. Mount the tire on the wheel. Refer to Tire Mounting and Dismounting. 13. Pressurize the tire to 276 kPa (40 psi) and inspect for leaks. 14. Adjust tire pressure to meet the placard specification. 15. Balance the tire/wheel assembly. Refer to Tire and Wheel Assembly Balancing - Off-Vehicle. 16. Install the tire and wheel assembly onto the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service procedure in SI. Parts Information Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) Important The Silicone - Adhesive/Sealant comes in a case quantity of six. ONLY charge warranty one tube of adhesive/sealant per wheel repair. For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: One leak repair per wheel. Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 04-03-10-012B > Feb > 08 > Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Brake Dust Accumulation/Pitting Bulletin No.: 04-03-10-012B Date: February 01, 2008 INFORMATION Subject: Pitting and Brake Dust on Chrome wheels Models: 2008 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2008 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2008 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-03-10-012A (Section 03 - Suspension). Analysis of Returned Wheels Chrome wheels returned under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty for pitting concerns have recently been evaluated. This condition is usually most severe in the vent (or window) area of the front wheels. This "pitting" may actually be brake dust that has been allowed to accumulate on the wheel. The longer this accumulation builds up, the more difficult it is to remove. Cleaning the Wheels In all cases, the returned wheels could be cleaned to their original condition using GM Vehicle Care Cleaner Wax, P/N 12377966 (in Canada, P/N 10952905). When using this product, you should confine your treatment to the areas of the wheel that show evidence of the brake dust build-up. This product is only for use on chromed steel or chromed aluminum wheels. Parts Information Warranty Information Wheel replacement for this condition is NOT applicable under the terms of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 99-03-10-102 > Jun > 99 > Warranty - OE Chrome Plated Aluminum Wheel ID Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - OE Chrome Plated Aluminum Wheel ID File In Section: 03 - Suspension Bulletin No.: 99-03-10-102 Date: June, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Original Equipment Chrome Plated Aluminum Wheel Identification Models: 1999 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Chrome plated aluminum wheels have been returned to the Warranty Parts Center that are not the original equipment (OE) components. Original equipment chrome plated aluminum wheels can be identified by either a balance weight clip retention groove (1) or a step (2) that is machined around both of the wheel's rim flanges. The rim flanges (3) of painted original equipment aluminum wheels do not have a groove or a step. Chrome plated aluminum wheels that do not have the wheel rim flange groove or step are aftermarket chrome plated components and are NOT warrantable. Any aftermarket chrome wheels received by the Warranty Parts Center will be charged back to the dealership. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 393504 > Jul > 93 > Wheels - Sealing Leaking Cast Aluminum Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Sealing Leaking Cast Aluminum Bulletin Number: 93-3-16 Reference Number: 393504 Publish Date: 7/93 Subject: LEAKING CAST ALUMINUM WHEELS (REPAIR WITH ADHESIVE SEALANT) Models Affected: 1985-1993 ALL MODELS Should a vehicle equipped with cast aluminum wheels exhibit a slow leak due to a porous condition existing in the wheel, the wheel can be repaired by using Dow Corning Silastic 732 RTV, p/n 1052366 or equivalent, as described in the following procedure: 1. Remove tire-wheel assembly from vehicle. 2. Locate leaking area by inflating tire to 40 psi and dipping tire-wheel assembly in water bath. 3. If air bubbles are observed, mark leak area and remove tire from wheel. 4. Scuff INSIDE rim surface at leak area with # 80 grit paper and clean area with general purpose cleaner, such as 3M # 08984. 5. Apply 1/8" thick layer of adhesive/sealant to leak area on INSIDE of rim and allow six hours of drying time. 6. Mount tire on wheel, pressurizing to 40 psi and check for leaks. NOTICE: Caution must be used when mounting the tire so as not to damage the sealer. 7. Adjust tire pressure to meet placard specification. 8. Balance tire-wheel assembly, using proper coated weights. 9. Water test wheel again. 10. Reinstall tire-wheel assembly on vehicle. Parts are currently available from GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION: Labor Operation Number: E0420 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 8537 > Feb > 85 > Wheels - Locking Wheel Nuts Impact On Tire Balance Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Locking Wheel Nuts Impact On Tire Balance 85-37 3E (X) FEB., 1985 Subject: LOCKING WHEEL NUTS Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Whenever a heavier, solid locking wheel nut is used to replace a standard nut, it should be installed nearest the valve stem, and a 1/2 ounce balance weight should be added 180~ opposite the locking nut. This situation will usually occur on styled wheels. For improved appearance, the balance weight should be installed on the wheel's inboard side. When rotating tires, always re-install the locking nut nearest the tire valve stem so that it remains opposite the 1/2 ounce balance weight. This procedure will improve the on-car wheel balance by compensating for the heavy locking wheel nut. This does not apply to the light weight, two-piece locking nuts used on some Chevrolet models. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 84127 > May > 84 > Aluminum Wheels Cleaning/Painting/Coating Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Aluminum Wheels - Cleaning/Painting/Coating Number: 84-127 Section: 3E (X) Date: May, 1984 Subject: CLEANING, PAINTING, AND COATING OF ALUMINUM WHEELS Model and Year: ALL MODELS WITH ALUMINUM WHEELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Cast aluminum wheels with a clear coat finish that have peeling paint, discoloration of the paint or corrosion should be cleaned and repainted instead of replaced using the following procedure. NOTICE: During entire procedure, be careful not to scratch or damage the shiny aluminum surfaces. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 360 grit sandpaper. ^ Nylon auto glass type scraper. ^ American Sure Seal Silicone Remover (stock number S-STC), 3M number 08984 wax remover or equivalent.* ^ Paint thinner. ^ American Sure Seal Wheel Polish - stock DAP or equivalent.* ^ Enamel color coat paint or lacquer. ^ American Sure Seal Coricone 1700 Clear Metal Protectant (stock number DCC or equivalent). ^ DuPont 228S conversion coating or equivalent. ^ General Purpose Pads, 3M #7448 or equivalent. ^ American Sure Seal Glaze Cream Cleaner (stock number DGC), 3M number 05979 Clean-N-Glaze or equivalent medium abrasive rubbing compound.* ^ American Sure Seal Aluminum Cleaner (stock number DWC or equivalent).* ^ American Sure Seal Paint Remover Product, strip-off (stock number SSO or equivalent).* PROCEDURE 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly from car. Remove tire from wheel (after marking wheel/tire relationship) or mask off tire prior to painting. If wheel and tire are not separated, mark weights and remove. 2. Using a general purpose pad or buffing wheel and the Clean-N-Glaze, aggressively rub over the machined surface to remove some of the corrosion and restore most of the lustre. 3. Wipe over the previously cleaned surfaces with an aluminum cleaner-polish to obtain maximum lustre. 4. Using the silicone remover, clean the entire wheel. Wash off with clear water and air blow dry. CAUTION: USE OF RUBBER GLOVES AND EYE GOGGLES IS NECESSARY TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY. 5. Using the paint stripper, spray the entire wheel surface with this product. Wait two (2) or three (3) minutes and then remove with a high pressure water hose. Steps 6 through 12 are to be used only on aluminum wheels with painted surfaces. Painted aluminum wheels began to be installed in 1980. 6. If peeling or discoloration is extremely bad, it may be necessary to use the paint stripper. Scrape off any loose paint with a nylon scraper and/or 360 grit sandpaper. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 84127 > May > 84 > Aluminum Wheels Cleaning/Painting/Coating > Page 3644 7. Wipe entire wheel clean with the silicone remover and flush off again with water, followed by blow drying. 8. Mask off areas of wheel not to be painted. 9. Wipe over the painted surface with the aluminum cleaner; then apply the metal prep., following label directions. (This is a two-step operation which will improve the adhesion of the primer.) 10. To ensure coverage in all areas, an application of zinc chromate primer should be applied to the wheel painted surface in four (4) light applications, rotating the wheel 90~ between applications. 11. Apply the color coat using the same procedure as for the primer. 12. After ten (10) minutes of air drying, heat may be applied to the paint to reduce drying time. 13. When the wheel is completely dry, remove masking tape. Wheel must be perfectly clean of foreign material and dry before applying Coricone 1700, and clean the masked area with wax or silicone remover to eliminate tape residue. 14. Spray two (2) light coatings of Coricone 1700 wheel protector on wheel allowing two (2) or three (3) minutes between coats. The clear coat will put an invisible coating on top of the painted surface and the polished aluminum. 15. DO NOT use heat on clear coat, allow to air dry for 24 hours. 16. Reinstall the tire and wheel (re-align the index marks and/or the balance weight). *For the nearest distributor in your area, call collect (416) 625-7900. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > NHTSA82V128000 > Dec > 82 > Recall 82V128000: Wheel Stud Failure Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 82V128000: Wheel Stud Failure ON THE INVOLVED VEHICLES, THE REAR BRAKE DRUM BALANCE WEIGHTS MAY INTERFERE WITH THE ALUMINUM WHEELS. THIS CONTACT COULD CAUSE THE WHEEL LUG NUTS TO LOOSEN, LEADING TO WHEEL STUD FAILURE. THIS COULD ALLOW SEPARATION OF THE WHEEL AND TIRE FROM THE VEHICLE. THE DEALER WILL INSPECT AND, IF NECESSARY, MODIFY THE REAR BRAKE DRUM BALANCE WEIGHTS WITHOUT CHARGE TO OWNER. VEHICLE DESCRIPTION: LIGHT TRUCKS EQUIPPED WITH OPTIONAL ALUMINUM WHEELS AND REAR BRAKE DRUMS. SYSTEM: SERVICE BRAKES; REAR BRAKE DRUM, BALANCE WEIGHTS. CONSEQUENCES OF DEFECT: WHEEL AND TIRE SEPARATION COULD OCCUR WITHOUT PRIOR WARNING AND COULD RESULT IN LOSS OF VEHICLE CONTROL AND AN ACCIDENT. 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK BLAZER 1982 CHEVROLET TRUCK C10 1982 GMC C15 1982 GMC JIMMY Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3654 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3655 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3656 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3662 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3663 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3664 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3670 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3671 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3672 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Adjustments > Front Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Front Two Wheel Drive - 2WD FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT 1. While rotating wheel forward, torque spindle nut to 12 ft. lbs. 2. Back off nut until ``just loose'' then hand tighten nut and back it off again until either hole in spindle lines up with hole in nut. Do not back off nut more than 1/2 flat. 3. Install new cotter pin. With wheel bearing properly adjusted, there will be .001---.005 inch endplay. Four Wheel Drive - 4WD For Front Wheel Bearing Adjustment Procedures on four wheel drive models refer to Locking Hub/Adjustments. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Adjustments > Front > Page 3677 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Rear Chevrolet Full Floating Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT Before checking wheel bearing adjustment, make sure brakes are fully released and do not drag. Check bearing play by grasping tire at top and pulling back and forth or by using a pry bar under tire. If bearings are properly adjusted, movement of brake drum in relation to brake flange plate will be barely noticeable and wheel will turn freely. If movement is excessive, adjust bearings as follows: 1. Raise vehicle until wheel is free to rotate, then remove axle shaft. 2. Disengage retainer tang and remove retainer from axle housing tube. 3. Torque adjusting nut to 50 ft. lbs. while rotating hub assembly. Ensure bearing cones are seated and in contact with spindle shoulder. 4. Back off adjusting nut until just loose. 5. Insert key into adjusting nut slot, if equipped. Install snap ring to retain key in position. 6. Lower vehicle, then install axle shaft. GMC Single Speed Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT 1. Raise and support rear axle. 2. Remove axle shaft as outlined previously. Release brakes. 3. Disengage retainer tang from locknut, then remove locknut and retainer from axle housing tube. 4. Torque inner adjusting nut to 50 ft. lbs. while rotating wheel, then back off nut 1/8 of a turn. 5. Install retainer so that short tang engages nearest slot on adjusting nut. 6. Install outer locknut and torque to 250 ft. lbs., then bend long tang of retainer into slot of outer nut. Timken (Rockwell) Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS ADJUSTMENT Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Adjustments > Front > Page 3678 Fig. 12 Timken (Rockwell) axle w/12 inch ring gear This axle, Fig. 12, employs a heavy duty hypoid drive pinion and ring gear. The differential and gear assembly is mounted on tapered roller bearings. The straddle mounted pinion has two tapered roller bearings in front of the pinion teeth which take the forward and reverse thrust, while a third bearing behind the pinion teeth carries the radial load. AXLE HOUSING, REPLACE Refer to ``Chevrolet Full Floating Axles'' for axle housing replacement procedures, since procedures are identical for both axles. AXLE SHAFT, REPLACE 1. Remove hub cap, then install slide hammer adapter into tapped hole in axle flange. 2. Attach slide hammer onto adapter, then remove axle shaft from housing. 3. Install axle shaft, ensuring flange and hub splines align. 4. Install new gasket, position flange to hub, then install attaching bolts and tighten to specifications. WHEEL BEARINGS, ADJUST 1. Remove axle shaft as outlined previously. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Disengage retainer tang from locknut, then remove locknut and retainer from axle housing tube. 4. While rotating wheel, torque inner adjusting nut to 50 ft. lbs., then back off nut 1/8 of a turn. 5. Install retainer so that short tang engages nearest slot on adjusting nut. 6. Install outer locknut and torque to 250 ft. lbs., then bend long tang of retainer into slot of outer nut. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Coil Spring Suspension FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS AND/OR HUB 1. Raise and support vehicle, then remove wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove hub cap and cotter pin. 3. Remove brake caliper. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 4. Remove retaining nut, then the hub and disc assembly. 5. Remove outer wheel bearing. 6. To remove inner bearing, pry out grease seal, then remove seal and inner bearing. 7. Reverse procedure to install, then adjust wheel bearings as previously described. Leaf Spring Suspension FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS AND/OR HUB 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove dust cap, if equipped. 3. Remove locking hub as outlined under LOCKING HUBS. 4. Remove disc brake caliper and position aside. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 5. Remove wheel bearing outer locknut, lock ring and wheel bearing inner adjusting nut. 6. Remove hub and disc assembly, and outer wheel bearing. 7. Remove oil seal, inner wheel bearing and inner and outer bearing cups using a suitable drift. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Adjust wheel bearings as outlined under ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE/WHEEL BEARING. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 3681 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Chevrolet Full Floating Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS Fig. 5 Removing bearing adjusting nut locknut Hub & Drum, Remove 1. Remove wheel and axle shaft. 2. Disengage tang of nut lock from slot or flat of locknut, then remove locknut from housing tube, using appropriate tool, Fig. 5. 3. Disengage tang of nut lock from slot or flat of adjusting nut and remove nut lock from housing tube. 4. Use appropriate tool, Fig. 5, to remove adjusting nut from housing tube. Remove thrust washer from housing tube. 5. Pull hub and drum straight off axle housing. Fig. 6 Removing outer bearing & cup Bearing & Cup, Replace 1. Using a hammer and suitable drift, drive inner bearing, cup and seal from hub assembly. 2. Remove outer bearing snap ring using suitable pliers. 3. Using tools J-24426 and J-8092, Fig. 6, drive outer bearing and cup from hub assembly. 4. Install new outer bearing into hub assembly. 5. Install outer bearing cup using tools mentioned in Step 3. Drive cup beyond snap ring groove. Install outer bearing cup with tool J-8092 positioned upside down to prevent chamfer on tool from damaging cup. 6. Install snap ring into groove using suitable pliers. 7. Using tool J-24426, drive cup against snap ring. 8. Install inner bearing cup using tools J-24427 and J-8092. Drive cup into position until it seats against shoulder of hub bore. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 3682 9. Install new oil seal. Chevrolet Salisbury Type Semi-Floating Axle REAR WHEEL BEARINGS 1. Remove axle shaft as previously described. 2. Use a suitable puller to remove bearing and oil seal. 3. Lubricate wheel bearing and cavity between seal lips with wheel bearing lubricant before installation. 4. Reverse procedure to install. GMC Single Speed REAR WHEEL BEARINGS Fig. 5 Removing bearing adjusting nut locknut Fig. 9 Removing bearing retainer ring 1. Remove wheel and axle shaft. 2. Disengage tang of retainer from slot or flat of locknut, then remove locknut from housing tube, Fig. 5. 3. Disengage tang of retainer from slot or flat of adjusting nut, then remove retainer. 4. Using tool shown in Fig. 5, remove adjusting nut from housing tube. Remove thrust washer. 5. Pull hub and drum assembly off axle housing. Remove oil seal and discard. 6. Using a suitable steel bar and an arbor press, press inner bearing cup from hub. 7. Using a suitable pliers, remove outer bearing retaining ring, Fig. 9. 8. Using an old axle shaft or equivalent, drive on axle shaft spacer to remove outer bearing assembly from hub. 9. Position axle shaft spacer and outer bearing into hub, ensuring larger side of bearing faces outer end of hub. 10. Position outer bearing cup into hub with thin edge facing toward outer end of hub, then press cup into hub. 11. Install retaining ring, then press cup into contact with ring. 12. Drive inner bearing cup into hub, then install new oil seal. 13. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to complete installation, then adjust wheel bearings as outlined in ``Wheel Bearing, Adjust'' procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cover: > 8454 > Jan > 84 > Wire Wheel Cover Snapping/Creaking Noise Wheel Cover: Customer Interest Wire Wheel Cover - Snapping/Creaking Noise Number : 84-54 Section: 9 (XIV) Date : Jan., 1984 Subject: WIRE WHEEL COVER NOISE Model and Year: ALL MODELS AND YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Wire Wheel Cover Some wire wheel covers may have a snapping or creaking noise when driving at low speeds. This noise may be caused by the wheel cover flexing on the wheel. This condition can be corrected by removing the wheel covers and placing them upside down on a covered bench. Then center punch and drill four (4) 1/4" holes evenly spaced in the wheel cover (see illustration). Holes should be drilled on the second step of the cover from the inboard side. Install the four (4) nylon clips, P/N 411700, in the drilled holes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cover: > 8454 > Jan > 84 > Wire Wheel Cover Snapping/Creaking Noise Wheel Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Wire Wheel Cover - Snapping/Creaking Noise Number : 84-54 Section: 9 (XIV) Date : Jan., 1984 Subject: WIRE WHEEL COVER NOISE Model and Year: ALL MODELS AND YEARS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Wire Wheel Cover Some wire wheel covers may have a snapping or creaking noise when driving at low speeds. This noise may be caused by the wheel cover flexing on the wheel. This condition can be corrected by removing the wheel covers and placing them upside down on a covered bench. Then center punch and drill four (4) 1/4" holes evenly spaced in the wheel cover (see illustration). Holes should be drilled on the second step of the cover from the inboard side. Install the four (4) nylon clips, P/N 411700, in the drilled holes. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Hub: Service and Repair FRONT HUB/BEARING 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove dust cap, if equipped. 3. Remove locking hub as outlined under ``Locking Hub Service.'' 4. Remove disc brake caliper and position aside. Do not allow caliper to hang from brake hose. 5. Remove wheel bearing outer locknut, lock ring and wheel bearing inner adjusting nut. 6. Remove hub and disc assembly, and outer wheel bearing. 7. Remove oil seal, inner wheel bearing and inner and outer bearing cups using a suitable drift. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Adjust wheel bearings as outlined under ``Wheel Bearings, Adjust'' procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Adjustments Wheel Hub (Locking): Adjustments Fig. 4 Adjusting wheel bearing EXC. HUBS W/MONROE AUTO. TYPE LOCKING HUB 1. Remove dust cap or locking hub, lockwasher and outer locknut. 2. Using suitable spanner wrench, torque inner adjusting nut to 50 ft.. lbs. while rotating hub. Back off adjusting nut and torque to 50 ft. lbs. on 1985---87 models with manual hubs, or 35 ft. lbs. on all other models, while rotating hub, Fig. 4. 3. Back off adjusting nut just enough to free bearing on 1986---87 models with manual hubs, or 3/8 of a turn on all other models. 4. On 1980---84 K10---20/1500---2500 vehicles, proceed as follows: a. On 1980 models, assemble adjusting nut lock by aligning nearest hole in lock with adjusting nut pin. Install outer locknut and torque to 80 ft. lbs. b. On 1981---84 models, assemble drag sleeve retainer washer over the axle shaft and against bearing adjusting nut. The tang on the inside diameter of this washer is assembled in the keyway of the spindle. Assemble and tighten outer locknut to 160---205 ft. lbs. 5. On 1980---84 K30/3500 vehicles, proceed as follows: a. On 1980---81 models, assemble lockwasher and locknut, then torque locknut to 65 ft. lbs. Bend one ear of lockwasher at least 30° over inner adjusting nut, and the other ear at least 60° over outer locknut. b. On 1982---84 models, assemble drag sleeve retainer washer over axle shaft and against bearing adjusting nut. The tang on the inside diameter of this washer is assembled in the keyway of the spindle. Assemble and tighten outer locknut to 160---205 ft. lbs. 6. On 1985---87 models, assemble drag sleeve retainer washer. Ensure tang on inside diameter of washer passes onto slot in spindle and hole in washer aligns with locknut pin. Move adjustment nut as necessary to align pin, then torque locknut to 160 ft. lbs. 7. On all vehicles, check to ensure all hub assemblies have .001---.010 inch endplay. 8. Install dust cap or locking hub. HUBS W/MONROE AUTO. TYPE LOCKING HUB 1. Remove locking hub assembly. 2. Torque locknut to 70 ft. lbs. while rotating hub and disc assembly. 3. Back off locknut, then torque to 25 ft. lbs. while rotating hub and disc. 4. Back off locknut to align nearest slot, then install locknut key. 5. Measure endplay. Endplay should be .001---.010 inch. 6. Reinstall locking hub assembly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Monroe Auto. Locking Hub Fig. 7 Exploded view of Monroe automatic locking hub Description This automatic locking hub, Fig. 7, when placed in four wheel drive, directs power to the front wheels. The front axle turns the axle shaft, activating the tri-cam mechanism, which then moves the drive gear outward into engagement with the ring gear. When two wheel drive is selected, disengagement is accomplished by the reverse movement of the wheels, which causes the drive gear and tri-cam to rotate to the disengaged position, moving the drive gear out of mesh with the ring gear. Removal 1. Remove tire and wheel assembly, hubcap and hub lock. 2. Remove spring retainer, then the loose spring. 3. Carefully pull hub lock assembly from wheel. If hub lock assembly will not slide out freely, rotate wheel to facilitate removal. Disassembly Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3704 1. Position hub lock assembly with plastic bearing side facing downward. 2. Pry inboard spring from assembly, then remove spindle lock, thrust bearing and tri-cam assembly. 3. Clean adapter housing assembly. If any part of this assembly is worn, replace as necessary. 4. Slide ring gear from adapter housing, then remove the six ring gear springs. 5. Remove ring gear spring retainer. Assembly 1. Install ring gear spring retainer. 2. Position the six ring gear springs into adapter housing. 3. Grease outside surface of ring gear, then install into adapter housing. Ensure gear teeth are closest to springs. 4. Insert and install ring gear retaining ring. Ensure ring gear springs are properly seated in adapter housing. 5. Grease tri-cam assembly, then install into adapter housing. 6. Install thrust bearing, spindle lock and inboard snap ring. Rotate spindle lock tangs in both directions to check for free movement. Installation 1. Install hub lock by first sliding hub onto axle shaft spline, then guide hub into wheel hub spline. When hub lock bottoms out, rotate entire wheel while pressing inward on hub until hub lock tangs engage wheel bearing locknut. Allow hub lock to seat itself. Hub lock should not protrude more than 3/8 inch from face of wheel hub. 2. Install spring, then unlock hub lock by rotating wheel hub while applying force to drive gear spring. 3. Install spring retainer and spring. 4. Install hub cap. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3705 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Spicer Manual Locking Hub Fig. 8 Exploded view of Spicer manual locking hub Description As shown in Fig. 8, the splines on the inside diameter of the axle shaft sleeve and ring assembly mesh with the axle shaft splines. The assembly is retained on the axle shaft with a snap ring. The splines on the outside diameter of the inner clutch ring assembly mesh with the wheel hub splines. Therefore, when the actuator knob is turned towards the ``L'' position, the actuating cam body is forced outward towards the hub end, allowing the inner clutch to be forced under spring tension towards the axle shaft sleeve and ring assembly until the inner clutch assembly teeth are engaged in the axle shaft sleeve and ring assembly teeth, locking the axle and hub. Operation When the transfer case is shifted into the position for driving the front axle, turn the actuating knob so that it is aligned with the letter L. If the clutch teeth do not engage with the knob turned to this position, the clutch teeth are butted and a slight movement of the wheel in either direction will complete the lock. The front axle will now drive the wheel. When the transfer case is to be shifted into the position for driving the rear axle only, turn the actuating knob so that it is aligned with the letter F. This will disengage the clutch teeth and thus unlock the wheel hub from the axle shaft. The wheel will now turn free on the axle. Be certain that the transfer case is shifted into two wheel drive position before disengaging the Hub-Lock. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3706 Fig. 8 Exploded view of Spicer manual locking hub Removal 1. Position actuator knob in ``LOCK,'' then raise and support vehicle. Rotate tire to ensure engagement of hub lock. 2. Remove retaining plate attaching bolts, then the retaining plate, actuating knob and O-rings. 3. Remove internal snap ring, outer clutch retaining ring, actuating cam body, outer clutch gear and pressure spring, Fig. 8. 4. Remove axle shaft snap ring, then the inner clutch ring. 5. Remove spring retainer plate, if equipped. Installation 1. Install spring retainer plate, if equipped, over spindle nuts and against wheel bearing outer cup. Ensure flanged side of plate faces toward wheel bearing. 2. Install inner clutch ring onto axle shaft, press ring inward, then install snap ring. 3. Install pressure spring with larger side facing inward. 4. Install outer clutch gear, actuating cam body, outer clutch retaining ring and the internal snap ring. Ensure actuating cams face outward. 5. Install O-ring, actuating knob, actuating knob O-ring and the retaining plate. 6. Install retaining plate attaching bolts and torque to 38 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3707 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Warner Auto. Locking Hub Fig. 6 Exploded view of Warner automatic locking hub Description The Automatic Locking Hub, shown in Fig. 6, engages or disengages to lock the front axle shaft to the hub of the front wheel. Engagement occurs whenever the vehicle is operated in 4WD. Disengagement occurs whenever 2WD has been selected and the vehicle is moving rearward. Disengagement will not occur when the vehicle is moved rearward if 4WD is selected and the hub has already been engaged. Before disassembling a unit for a complaint of abnormal noise, note the following: 1. To obtain all-wheel drive, the transfer case lever must be placed in 4L or 4H, at which time the hub locks will automatically engage. 2. To unlock the hubs, shift the transfer case lever to 2H, then slowly reverse the vehicle direction approximately 10 feet. 3. An incomplete shift from 2WD to 4WD, or disengagement of only one hub lock may cause an abnormal sound from the front axle. Shift to 4WD to stop the noise, then unlock the hubs as previously stated. Removal Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3708 1. Remove 5 screws retaining the cover to outer clutch housing. 2. Remove cover, seal, seal bridge and bearing components. 3. Compress the wire retaining ring and remove the remaining components from the hub. Disassembly 1. Remove snap ring from groove in hub sleeve, then turn clutch gear until it falls into engagement with the outer clutch housing. Lift and tilt the drag sleeve to unlock the tangs of the brake band from window of inner cage, then remove the drag sleeve and brake assembly. The brake band must never be removed from the drag sleeve. The spring tension of the brake band can be changed if the coils are overexpanded and could affect hub operation. 2. Remove snap ring from groove in outer clutch housing, then pry plastic outer cage free from inner cage while inner cage is being removed. 3. Pry plastic outer cage tabs free from groove in outer clutch housing, then remove outer cage. 4. Remove clutch sleeve and attached components from outer clutch housing. 5. Compress return spring and hold the spring with clamps, then position the assembly in a vise so that the vise holds both ends of the clutch sleeve. Remove retaining spring. 6. Remove clamps holding the return spring, then slowly open the vise to permit the release of the return spring in a safe manner. Remove retainer seat, spring and spring support washers from the hub sleeve. 7. Remove C-ring from clutch sleeve. It is necessary to position sleeve assembly so that the C-ring ends are aligned with legs of cam follower, allowing removal between the legs. 8. Remove conical spring from between cam follower and clutch gear, then separate cam follower from clutch gear. Do not pry the legs of the cam follower apart. Assembly & Installation 1. Install tangs of cam follower over flats of clutch gear, then compress conical spring and position with large diameter located against clutch gear. 2. Position clutch gear assembly over splines of hub sleeve. The teeth of the cam follower should be located at the end of the hub sleeve with no splines, and the clutch gear and spring should slide freely over splines of hub sleeve. 3. Install C-ring into groove of hub sleeve, then install a spring retainer over each end of return spring. 4. Position one end of return spring with retainer against shoulder of clutch gear, then place support washer on end of the return spring. Compress return spring and install retainer ring into groove of hub sleeve. 5. Place assembled components into outer housing. The cam follower should be positioned with legs facing outward. 6. Install 3 of the cover screws into 3 holes of the outer clutch housing. These screws will support the component to permit the clutch hub to drop down so that the tangs of the brake band can be assembled. 7. Carefully install the plastic outer cage into outer clutch housing with ramps facing toward cam follower. The small external tabs of the plastic cage should be located in wide groove of outer clutch housing. 8. Install steel inner cage into the outer cage, aligning tab of outer cage with window of the inner cage, then install retaining ring into groove of outer clutch housing above outer cage. 9. The brake band and drag are serviced as a complete assembly. Install one of the 2 tangs of the brake band on each side of the lug of the outer cage, located in the window of the steel inner cage. It will be necessary to tilt these parts to engage the tangs in this position as the drag sleeve is positioned against the face of the cam follower. 10. Remove the 3 screws and rest the end of the hub sleeve on a suitable support, then install washer and snap ring above drag sleeve. The following steps may be completed as the hub is installed into vehicle. 11. Install wire retaining ring into groove of end of clutch housing without spline. The tangs of retainer ring should point away from splined end of clutch housing. 12. Hold the tangs together and install the 2 bent down tabs of seal bridge over tangs. The seal bridge holds the wire retainer ring in a clamped position in groove of outer clutch housing. Install O-ring into groove of outer clutch housing and over the seal bridge. 13. Lubricate and install the bearing over the inner race. The steel ball bearing should be visible when the bearing is properly installed. 14. Install bearing retainer clip into hole in outer race, then install bearing and retainer assembly in end of hub sleeve. Install seal ring over outer clutch housing. 15. Install bearing race spring into bore of cover, then install cover and spring assembly. Align holes in cover to holes in outer clutch housing and install 5 screws. 16. Install O-ring over seal bridge to prevent it from dislodging during handling prior to the hub bearing being installed into the vehicle. 17. The hub and attached parts should turn freely after installation. The 5 cover screws must be loosened to install the hub into the vehicle. After installation, torque the cover screws to 40---50 inch lbs. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3709 Wheel Hub (Locking): Service and Repair Warner Manual Locking Hub Description Turning the locking hub clutch control to the ``L'' or ``4'' position connects the wheel hubs to the axle shafts. Therefore, when the transfer case is driving the front axle and the locking hubs are in the ``L'' or ``4'' position, the wheels are driven by the axle shafts. When the transfer case is not driving the front axle, the locking hub clutch controls are turned to the ``F'' or ``2'' position to disconnect the wheel hubs from the axle shafts. The wheels now rotate freely, but the axle shafts remain stationary. On any vehicle equipped with manually operated locking hubs, extreme care must be taken to ensure locking hub dials are fully engaged or disengaged, to prevent possible damage to the locking hubs. If the locking hubs are not properly maintained, full engagement of the control dials may become impossible due to excessive dirt and dust. Any time the vehicle is driven through water deep enough to cover the hubs, the locking hubs should be removed and cleaned, then lubricated thoroughly. These hubs are serviced as an assembly or subassembly only (hub body or hub clutch assembly only). Do not attempt to disassemble these units. If an entire hub or subassembly is defective, replace the entire assembly or subassembly. The hubs may be removed for cleaning and inspection purposes and for periodic lubrication only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub (Locking) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Monroe Auto. Locking Hub > Page 3710 Fig. 9 Exploded view of Warner manual locking hub Removal 1. Remove socket head screws, axle hub retaining ring and axle shaft retaining ring. 2. Remove hub clutch assembly, Fig. 9. 3. Clean and inspect all components. Replace as necessary. Installation 1. Lubricate all hub components. 2. Install hub clutch, axle hub retaining ring and axle shaft retaining ring. 3. Install new O-ring in hub body and position in clutch. 4. Install socket head screws and torque to 30 inch lbs. 5. Raise and support front of vehicle, then set control dial to ``FREE'' position and rotate wheels. If wheels drag, check hub installation. 6. Lower vehicle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels - Locking Wheel Nuts Impact On Tire Balance Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Locking Wheel Nuts Impact On Tire Balance 85-37 3E (X) FEB., 1985 Subject: LOCKING WHEEL NUTS Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Whenever a heavier, solid locking wheel nut is used to replace a standard nut, it should be installed nearest the valve stem, and a 1/2 ounce balance weight should be added 180~ opposite the locking nut. This situation will usually occur on styled wheels. For improved appearance, the balance weight should be installed on the wheel's inboard side. When rotating tires, always re-install the locking nut nearest the tire valve stem so that it remains opposite the 1/2 ounce balance weight. This procedure will improve the on-car wheel balance by compensating for the heavy locking wheel nut. This does not apply to the light weight, two-piece locking nuts used on some Chevrolet models. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheel Seal: Service and Repair 1. Remove axle shaft as previously described. 2. Use a suitable puller to remove bearing and oil seal. 3. Lubricate wheel bearing and cavity between seal lips with wheel bearing lubricant before installation. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Blower Motor: Service and Repair C, G, K, R & V MODELS Front Unit 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. On some G model vehicles, it may be necessary to remove the battery, coolant recovery tank and power antenna, if equipped, to gain access to the blower motor. 2. On G models equipped with A/C and diesel engine, proceed as follows: a. Remove parking lamp assembly, then the coolant recovery tank. b. Remove retaining screws, then the blower insulation through the hood opening. 3. On all models, disconnect blower motor electrical connections. 4. If equipped with A/C, remove blower motor cooling tube. 5. Remove blower motor attaching screws, then pry blower motor from case. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Fig. 22 Rear duct assembly. C, G, K, R & V models w/overhead system Overhead Unit 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove rear duct drain tube, duct to header bracket and roof panel screws, then rear duct assembly, Fig. 22. 3. Disconnect blower motor harness lead and ground wire. 4. While supporting lower case to prevent damage to motor or case assemblies, remove case mounting screws, then lower case from vehicle roof. 5. Remove motor retaining strap, then lift motor and cage assembly from case. Remove cages by removing shaft retaining nuts. 6. Reverse procedure to install. When installing cages on motor shaft, tension springs must be installed on motor shafts. Cages should be mounted so leading edges of blades face lower evaporator case (thin edge first). After installing blower assembly in case, check to ensure there is no interference with rotating cages. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications Compressor Clutch: Specifications A-6 Compressor R-4 Compressor Clutch Air Gap 0.022- 0.057 in 0.020- 0.040 in Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor Removal Fig. 14 Removing lock nut 1. Remove locknut from shaft, Fig. 14. Fig. 15 Removing clutch plate & hub 2. Remove clutch plate and hub, Fig. 15, then the drive key from shaft. Fig. 16 Removing hub retaining ring & spacer 3. Remove hub retainer ring and spacer, Fig. 16. Installation 1. Install square key on shaft, allowing it to project approximately 3/16 inch out of keyway. 2. Wipe frictional surface of clutch plate and pulley clean. 3. Place clutch plate and hub assembly on shaft, aligning key with keyway in hub. To avoid internal damage to compressor, do not drive or pound on hub or shaft. This could improperly position swash plate on shaft, resulting in damage to compressor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor > Page 3728 Fig. 17 Installing clutch plate & hub 4. Place spacer on hub, Fig. 17. Insert end of clutch plate and hub installer through spacer and thread tool onto end of shaft. 5. Hold hex portion of tool body with a wrench and tighten center screw several turns to press hub partially on shaft, Fig. 17. 6. Remove tool and check alignment of drive key with keyway in shaft. If alignment is correct, replace installer tool and continue to press hub onto shaft until there is approximately a 3/32 inch (.093) air gap between frictional surface of pulley and clutch plate. A zero thrust race is 3/32 inch thick and can be used as a gauge between these frictional surfaces. 7. Remove tools and install hub spacer. 8. Install hub retainer ring with flat side of ring facing spacer. Fig. 14 Removing lock nut Fig. 18 Checking air gap 9. Install a new shaft lock nut with small diameter boss of nut against hub spacer, using thin wall socket shown in Fig. 14. Hold clutch hub with holding tool and tighten nut to 15 ft. lbs. Air gap between frictional surfaces of pulley and clutch plate, Fig. 18, should now be as specified in the A/C Data Table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor > Page 3729 Precautions Compressor clutch may be removed with compressor on vehicle if no other operations are to be performed. Do not clean pulley bearing with any type of solvent. Bearing is supplied with correct lubricant when assembled and requires no other lubricant at any time. Removal Fig. 1 Delco Air A-6 axial compressor cross section 1. Remove clutch plate and hub assembly, Fig. 1. 2. Remove pulley and bearing, Figs. 2 through 4. Fig. 2 Removing pulley & bearing retainer ring FIG 2 - Removing Pulley & Bearing Retainer Ring Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor > Page 3730 Fig. 3 Removing bearing from pulley FIG 3 - Removing Bearing From Pulley Fig. 4 Installing bearing on pulley FIG 4 - Installing bearing on pulley 3. Note position of terminals on coil housing and scribe location on compressor front head casting. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor > Page 3731 Fig. 5 Replacing coil housing retaining ring 4. Remove coil housing retainer ring, Fig. 5. 5. Remove clutch coil housing assembly. Installation Fig. 5 Replacing coil housing retaining ring 1. Position coil and housing assembly on compressor front head casting so electrical terminals line up with marks previously scribed on compressor. 2. Align locating extrusions on coil housing with holes in front head casting. 3. Install coil housing retainer rings with flat side of ring facing coil, Fig. 5. 4. Install pulley and bearing assembly. 5. Install clutch plate and hub. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor > Page 3732 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Delco Air R-4 Radial Compressor Removal Fig. 2 Replacing compressor shaft nut 1. With compressor secured to a suitable holding fixture and clamped in a vise, remove shaft nut using tools J-25030 and J-9399. Fig. 3 Removing clutch plate & hub assembly 2. Using tool J-33013-B, remove clutch plate and hub assembly and shaft key, Fig. 3. Installation Fig. 4 Installing shaft key 1. Install shaft key into hub key groove, allowing key to project 3/16 inch from keyway, Fig. 4. The key is slightly curved to provide an interference fit in shaft. 2. With shaft key and keyway aligned, assemble clutch plate and hub on shaft. Clean clutch plate and clutch rotor frictional surfaces before installation. When installing the assembly, do not apply pressure to clutch hub and shaft. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor > Page 3733 Fig. 5 Installing clutch plate & hub assembly 3. Using tool J-9480-B, press hub onto shaft until there is approximately .020 to .040 inch clearance between clutch plate and rotor frictional surfaces, Fig. 5. 4. Install new shaft nut with small diameter boss facing toward crankshaft shoulder, using removal tools. Torque shaft nut to 8-12 ft. lbs. Ensure specified clearance is maintained between clutch plate and rotor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Compressor Pulley: Service and Repair Removal Fig. 19 Removing pulley retaining ring Fig. 20 Removing pulley & bearing 1. Remove clutch plate and hub. 2. Remove pulley retainer ring, Fig. 19. 3. Place puller pilot Fig. 20, over end of shaft. It is important that puller pilot be used to prevent internal damage to compressor when removing pulley. Puller should never be used directly against drilled end of shaft. 4. Remove pulley and bearing, Fig. 20. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3738 Compressor Pulley: Service and Repair Installation Fig. 21 Installing pulley & bearing 1. If original pulley and bearing assembly is being installed, wipe frictional surfaces of pulley clean. If frictional surfaces of pulley show any indication of damage due to overheating, pulley should be replaced. 2. Check bearing for brunnelling, excessive looseness, noise or lubricant leakage. If any of these conditions exist, bearing should be replaced. 3. Press or tap pulley and bearing assembly on neck of compressor until it seats, using tools shown in Fig. 21. Installer will apply force to inner race of bearing, preventing damage to bearing. 4. Check pulley for binding or roughness. It should rotate freely. 5. Install retainer ring. 6. Install clutch plate and hub. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C Compressor Seal Washer - Reference Chart Compressor Shaft Seal: Technical Service Bulletins A/C Compressor Seal Washer - Reference Chart File In Section: 1 - HVAC Bulletin No.: 63-12-15 Date: November, 1996 INFORMATION Subject: Reference Chart for A/C Compressor Seal Washers Models: 1997 and Prior Passenger Cars (Except Corvette and GEO) 1997 and Prior Light Duty Trucks (Except Tracker) GMSPO A/C compressors include a seal washer kit. These kits contain various color edge painted washer seals and inserts in which only two (2) washers and possibly one (1) insert are used. It has come to our attention that some packaging discrepancies were found and some of the seals cannot be properly identified for installation. These seals are very close in size and some of the seals were inadvertently edge painted the wrong color or not painted. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C Compressor Seal Washer - Reference Chart > Page 3743 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C Compressor Seal Washer - Reference Chart > Page 3744 The chart shown will help to properly identify the seals. Use the chart by placing the seal over the pictured seal to identity inside and outside diameters and thickness. Because these seals are very similar in size, specifications are also listed in the chart. Important: If seals are damaged upon installation, obtain new seal kit. Seals will be available separately at a later date. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor Compressor Shaft Seal: Service and Repair Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor Removal Fig. 6 Removing seal seat retaining ring 1. Depressurize system, then remove hub, drive plate and shaft key. 2. Pry out sleeve retainer and remove absorbent sleeve. 3. Using snap ring pliers J-5403 (No. 21), remove shaft seal retaining ring, Fig. 6. 4. Thoroughly clean inside of compressor neck area surrounding shaft, exposed portion of seal and shaft. This is necessary to prevent dirt or foreign material from entering compressor. Fig. 7 Removing seal seat 5. Position seal protector J-22974 over end of shaft to prevent damage to ceramic seat, Fig. 7. Engage tangs of tool J-32128 into recessed portion of seal seat by turning handle clockwise and then removing seat from compressor with a rotary motion. Tool handle must be hand-tightened only. Do not use tools or pliers to tighten tool handle. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor > Page 3747 Fig. 8 Removing shaft seal 6. Using tool J-9392, remove seal assembly. Press tool downward while turning it clockwise to engage tabs of seal assembly, then gently but firmly pull tool straight out, Fig. 8. Fig. 9 Removing shaft seal O-ring 7. Using a hooked wire, remove seal seat O-ring, Fig. 9. 8. Recheck shaft and inside of compressor neck. Make sure that these areas are perfectly clean before installing new parts. Installation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor > Page 3748 Fig. 10 Installing seal seat O-ring Fig. 11 Gauging seal retainer 1. Coat new seal seat O-ring with clean refrigerant oil, then using tool J-21508, Fig. 10, install O-ring in bottom groove of compressor neck, Fig. 11. 2. Coat O-ring and seal face of new seal with clean refrigerant oil. Install seal assembly onto tool J-9392 by engaging tabs of seal with tangs of the tool. 3. Place seal protector J-22974 over end of shaft and carefully slide new seal assembly and tool onto shaft. Gently twist tool clockwise while pushing seal assembly down shaft until seal engages flats on shaft and is seated in place. Disengage tool by pressing downward and twisting counterclockwise. 4. Coat seal face of new seal seat with clean refrigerant oil, then install seal seat on tool J-23128 and install into compressor neck, being careful not to dislodge seal seat O-ring and ensuring seal seat makes a good seal with O-ring. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor > Page 3749 Fig. 6 Removing seal seat retaining ring 5. Using snap ring pliers J-5403 (No. 21), install seal seat retainer ring, Fig. 6. Use sleeve from tool J-23128 to press on seal seat retainer so it snaps into place. Remove seal protector J-22974. Fig. 12 Leak testing compressor seal 6. Install Compressor Leak Test Fixture J-9625 and connect gauge charging lines, Fig. 12. Pressurize suction side of compressor to drum pressure. Temporarily install shaft nut and with compressor horizontal and sump down, rotate compressor shaft several times in normal direction of rotation checking for leaks around seal area using a torch type leak detector. Correct any leaks found, remove and discard shaft nut. 7. Remove any excess oil from shaft and inside compressor neck area. 8. Install new absorbent sleeve by rolling material into a cylinder, then slipping sleeve into compressor neck with overlap at top of compressor. Using a small screwdriver, carefully spread sleeve to remove overlap, so that in its final position, ends butt together at top vertical center line. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor > Page 3750 Fig. 11 Gauging seal retainer 9. Install new sleeve retainer so its flange face will be against front end of sleeve, then using sleeve from tool J-23128 and a mallet, tap sleeve retainer until outer edge of sleeve retainer is recessed about 1/32 inch from face of compressor neck, Fig. 11. 10. Install key, hub and drive plate. 11. Recharge refrigeration system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor > Page 3751 Compressor Shaft Seal: Service and Repair Delco Air R-4 Radial Compressor Removal Fig. 6 Replacing shaft seal seat & seal 1. Discharge refrigerant and remove clutch plate and hub outlined previously. 2. Using tool J-5403-A, remove shaft seal seat retainer ring. 3. Remove shaft seal seat with tool J-23128-A, then the shaft seal with tool J-9392, Fig. 6. 4. Remove seal seat O-ring with tool J-9553-01. Installation Fig. 7 Replacing shaft seal O-ring Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Delco Air A-6 Axial Compressor > Page 3752 Ensure compressor neck and shaft area are free from lint, dirt, or other foreign material before installing new seal parts. 1. Lubricate seal seat O-ring in refrigerant oil and assemble onto tool J-33011, Fig. 7. 2. Insert tool J-33011 into compressor neck until bottomed and install seal in proper position. 3. Assemble seal onto seal installer J-23128-A by rotating tool handle clockwise, then push seal protector J-34614 into seal lip. Ensure the stamped steel case side of the lip seal is engaged with knurled tangs on installer with flared out side of lip seal is facing and installed towards compressor. Seal protector should be handled carefully as seal damage may occur if installed with a nicked or damaged protector. Fig. 8 Removing rotor & bearing assembly retaining ring 4. Install new seal seat retainer ring with flat side against seal seat using suitable snap ring pliers, Fig. 8. Press in on seal seat retainer ring until it snaps in groove, using sleeve from O-ring installer tool No. J-33011. 5. Leak test seal at low pressure side. 6. Remove excess oil resulting from installing new seal parts, from shaft side and from inside compressor neck. 7. Install clutch plate and hub assembly, then install compressor belt and tighten bracket. 8. Evacuate and charge refrigerant system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Diode HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Isolation Diodes - Replacement Information Compressor Clutch Diode HVAC: Technical Service Bulletins Isolation Diodes - Replacement Information Number: 93-163-8A Section: 8A Date: MAY 1993 Corporate Bulletin No.: 178201R ASE No.: A6 Subject: ISOLATION DIODES REPLACEMENT INFORMATION Model and Year: 1993 AND PRIOR YEAR PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 92-47-8A, DATED NOV. 1991. THE 1993 MODEL YEAR HAS BEEN ADDED AS WELL AS PART NUMBERS HAVE BEEN REVISED. THIS WILL ALSO UPDATE CERTAIN SERVICE MANUALS. ALL COPIES OF 92-47-8A SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Many of the electrical systems on our vehicles use a diode to isolate certain circuits and protect them from voltage spikes. Some of the circuits which may use such a diode are listed below: A/C Compressor Clutch ABS/4WAL NOTE: The ABS diode on the Delco Moraine system is hidden inside of an electrical connector under the carpet at the right kick panel. Wiper Charging System (hidden in wire harness) Parking Brake (vehicles with ABS) Relays Solenoids Diesel Glow Plug Circuit Day Time Running Lights Obtaining replacement diodes can sometimes be a problem. A universal diode, that meets the specifications in the chart below, may be used for the applications listed above. Since certain diode applications have specific part numbers, always reference the applicable GM parts catalogue before installing one of the universal diodes listed in this bulletin. When installing the new diode, use the following procedures to obtain a lasting repair: 1. If the diode is taped to the harness, remove all of the tape. 2. Paying attention to current flow direction, remove inoperative diode from the harness with a suitable soldering tool. If the diode is located next to a connector terminal, remove the terminal(s) from the connector to prevent damage from the soldering tool. 3. Carefully strip away a section of insulation next to the old soldered portion of the wire(s). Do not remove any more than is needed to attach the new diode. 4. Check current flow direction of the new diode, being sure to install the diode with correct bias. Reference the appropriate service manual wiring schematic to obtain the correct diode installation position. Reference Figure 1 for replacement diode symbols and current flow explanations. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Diode HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Isolation Diodes - Replacement Information > Page 3757 Attach the new diode to the wire(s) using 60/40 rosin core solder. Use a heat sink (aluminum alligator clip) attached across the diode wire ends to protect the diode from excess heat. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the solderin equipment you are using. 5. Install terminal(s) into the connector body if previously removed in step number 2. 6. Tape the diode to the harness or connector using electrical tape. To prevent shorts to ground and water intrusion completely cover all exposed wire and diode attachment points. NOTE: A universal diode with a 3 amp, 400 PIV (Peak Inverse Voltage) rating can be used in all of the previously mentioned applications. The following 1993 Service Manuals will need to be updated with the correct part numbers and rating changes. Carline Page All J, L, W, and UO 8A-5-12 Heat sink, part number 276-1567, can be obtained from Radio Shack. We believe the diodes and heat sink listed in this article as well as their manufacturer to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers or equivalent products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from these firms or for any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators Heater Core: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 05-06-02-001A Date: July 16, 2008 Subject: Information On Aluminum Heater Core and/or Radiator Replacement Models: 2005 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2005 HUMMER H2 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 05-06-02-001 (Section 06 - Engine/Propulsion System). Important: 2004-05 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX-COOL(R). Refer to the flushing procedure explained later in this bulletin. The following information should be utilized when servicing aluminum heater core and/or radiators on repeat visits. A replacement may be necessary because erosion, corrosion, or insufficient inhibitor levels may cause damage to the heater core, radiator or water pump. A coolant check should be performed whenever a heater core, radiator, or water pump is replaced. The following procedures/ inspections should be done to verify proper coolant effectiveness. Caution: To avoid being burned, do not remove the radiator cap or surge tank cap while the engine is hot. The cooling system will release scalding fluid and steam under pressure if the radiator cap or surge tank cap is removed while the engine and radiator are still hot. Important: If the vehicle's coolant is low, drained out, or the customer has repeatedly added coolant or water to the system, then the system should be completely flushed using the procedure explained later in this bulletin. Technician Diagnosis ^ Verify coolant concentration. A 50% coolant/water solution ensures proper freeze and corrosion protection. Inhibitor levels cannot be easily measured in the field, but can be indirectly done by the measurement of coolant concentration. This must be done by using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale), or equivalent, coolant tester. The Refractometer uses a minimal amount of coolant that can be taken from the coolant recovery reservoir, radiator or the engine block. Inexpensive gravity float testers (floating balls) will not completely analyze the coolant concentration fully and should not be used. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65% coolant concentrate. This mixture will have a freeze point protection of -34 degrees Fahrenheit (-37 degrees Celsius). If the concentration is below 50%, the cooling system must be flushed. ^ Inspect the coolant flow restrictor if the vehicle is equipped with one. Refer to Service Information (SI) and/or the appropriate Service Manual for component location and condition for operation. ^ Verify that no electrolysis is present in the cooling system. This electrolysis test can be performed before or after the system has been repaired. Use a digital voltmeter set to 12 volts. Attach one test lead to the negative battery post and insert the other test lead into the radiator coolant, making sure the lead does not touch the filler neck or core. Any voltage reading over 0.3 volts indicates that stray current is finding its way into the coolant. Electrolysis is often an intermittent condition that occurs when a device or accessory that is mounted to the radiator is energized. This type of current could be caused from a poorly grounded cooling fan or some other accessory and can be verified by watching the volt meter and turning on and off various accessories or engage the starter motor. Before using one of the following flush procedures, the coolant recovery reservoir must be removed, drained, cleaned and reinstalled before refilling the system. Notice: ^ Using coolant other than DEX‐COOL(R) may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX‐COOL(R) (silicate free) coolant in your vehicle. ^ If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 3762 Flushing Procedures using DEX-COOL(R) Important: The following procedure recommends refilling the system with DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. This coolant is orange in color and has a service interval of 5 years or 240,000 km (150,000 mi). However, when used on vehicles built prior to the introduction of DEX-COOL(R), maintenance intervals will remain the same as specified in the Owner's Manual. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling system flush and fill machine is not available, drain the coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run the vehicle until the thermostat opens. Repeat and run the vehicle three (3) times to totally remove the old coolant or until the drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with DEX‐COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% DEX-COOL(R), P/N 12346290 (in Canada, use P/N 10953464), GM specification 6277M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to the system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and reverify the coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore the coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, reverify the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. The concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Flushing Procedures using Conventional Silicated (Green Colored) Coolant Important: 2004-2005 Chevrolet Aveo (Pontiac Wave, Canada Only) does not use DEX‐COOL(R). The Aveo and Wave are filled with conventional, silicated engine coolant that is blue in color. Silicated coolants are typically green in color and are required to be drained, flushed and refilled every 30,000 miles (48,000 km). The Aveo and Wave are to be serviced with conventional, silicated coolant. Use P/N 12378560 (1 gal) (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 (1 L). Refer to the Owner's Manual or Service Information (SI) for further information on OEM coolant. Important: Do not mix the OEM orange colored DEX-COOL(R) coolant with green colored coolant when adding coolant to the system or when servicing the vehicle's cooling system. Mixing the orange and green colored coolants will produce a brown coolant which may be a customer dissatisfier and will not extend the service interval to that of DEX-COOL(R). Conventional silicated coolants offered by GM Service and Parts Operations are green in color. ^ If available, use the approved cooling system flush and fill machine (available through the GM Dealer Equipment Program) following the manufacturer's operating instructions. ^ If approved cooling systems flush and fill machine is not available, drain coolant and dispose of properly following the draining procedures in appropriate Service Manual. Refill the system using clear, drinkable water and run vehicle until thermostat opens. Repeat and run vehicle three (3) times to totally remove old coolant or until drained coolant is almost clear. Once the system is completely flushed, refill the cooling system to a 50%-60% concentration with a good quality ethylene glycol base engine coolant, P/N 12378560, 1 gal (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L), conforming to GM specification 1825M, or recycled coolant conforming to GM specification 1825M, following the refill procedures in the appropriate Service Manual. If a Service Manual is not available, fill half the capacity of the system with 100% good quality ethylene glycol base (green colored) engine coolant, P/N 12378560 1 gal., (in Canada, use P/N 88862159 1 L) conforming to GM specification 1825M. Then slowly add clear, drinkable water (preferably distilled) to system until the level of the coolant mixture has reached the base of the radiator neck. Wait two (2) minutes and recheck coolant level. If necessary, add clean water to restore coolant to the appropriate level. Once the system is refilled, recheck the coolant concentration using a Refractometer J 23688 (Fahrenheit scale) or J 26568 (centigrade scale) coolant tester, or equivalent. Concentration levels should be between 50% and 65%. Parts Information Warranty Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Cooling System, A/C - Aluminum Heater Cores/Radiators > Page 3763 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3764 Heater Core: Service and Repair Fig. 23 Heater distributor assembly. C, K, R & V models less A/C C, K, R & V MODELS Less A/C 1. Disconnect battery ground cable, then drain cooling system. 2. Disconnect heater hoses at core, then plug core tubes to prevent coolant spillage. 3. Working from engine compartment, remove distributor duct stud attaching nuts. 4. Remove glove box and door assembly. 5. Disconnect air-defrost and temperature door cables. 6. Remove floor outlet, then the defroster duct to heater distributor duct attaching screw. 7. Remove heater distributor to dash panel attaching screws, Fig. 23. 8. Pull distributor rearward, then disconnect all harnesses that will interfere with distributor removal. 9. Remove heater distributor from vehicle. 10. Remove heater core retaining straps, then the heater core. 11. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3765 Fig. 24 A/C & heater assembly. C, K, R & V models With A/C 1. Disconnect battery ground cable, then drain cooling system. 2. Disconnect heater hoses at core and plug core tubes. 3. Remove glove box assembly. 4. Remove screws at center duct to selector duct/instrument panel. Remove center upper and lower ducts. 5. Disconnect bowden cable at temperature door. 6. Remove nuts at selector duct studs (projecting through firewall). Remove selector duct to firewall screw. 7. Draw selector duct assembly rearward so core tubes clear firewall. Lower assembly sufficiently to remove vacuum lines and harness connections. 8. Remove selector duct assembly. Disconnect core mounting straps and remove core, Fig. 24. 9. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hose/Line HVAC: > 8540 > Feb > 85 > A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs Hose/Line HVAC: Customer Interest A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs 85-40 1B (Ia) FEB., 1985 Subject: A/C REFRIGERANT HOSE AND CLAMP REPAIRS Model and Year: ALL CHEVROLET VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS WARRANTY AND NON-WARRANTY REPAIRS When a freon leak is detected at an air conditioning refrigerant hose connection which has a crimped metal band, the crimped band may be replaced with a special screw-type service clamp for non-warranty type repairs according to the following clamp replacement procedure. Also included is a hose repair procedure for a damaged and/or leaking refrigerant hose. This allows the dealer the added flexibility of repairing hose assemblies rather than replacing them. Warranty repairs should continue the replacement procedure. NOTICE: Hoses marked with the words "PARKER", "PARKER PARFLEX 80" or "PARFLEX 80" are nylon and cannot be repaired by these procedures. These hoses should be replaced as entire assemblies. Figure 1 CLAMP REPLACEMENT 1. Completely discharge the air conditioning system by an approved method. 2. Disconnect the entire hose assembly and remove it from the vehicle. Put tape or approved plastic caps over all of the openings to the system, including the removed hose assembly, to prevent dirt and moisture contamination. 3. Using a fine tooth hacksaw, cut a wide notch all the way across the crimped metal band (see Figure 1). NOTICE: AVOID CUTTING THE HOSE MATERIAL. FIGURE 2 4. Using a cold chisel and a small hammer, tap carefully at the notch until the band is split all the way across (see Figure 2). 5. Pry the band open until it can be removed without cutting the hose material with the burred edges. NOTICE: If the hose material has been cut, all or part of the hose must be replaced. See Table A for applicable clamps, hose material, and splicer fitting kits. The repaired hose should be the same overall length as the original. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hose/Line HVAC: > 8540 > Feb > 85 > A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs > Page 3774 FIGURE 3 6. Install the special screw-type service clamp so that the locator lug is positioned on the hose end (see Figure 3). Tighten clamp to 4.5 N-m (40 in. lbs.). 7. Reinstall the hose assembly on the vehicle with new 'O' rings where used. A/C compressor oil should be used to lubricate the 'O' rings. 8. Partially charge the system and perform a leak test before completely recharging. FIGURE 4 HOSE REPAIR 1. Perform Step #1 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. 2. Using a fine tooth hacksaw, cut all the way through the metal band clamp and into the top layer of the hose on one end of the hose if only part of it is being replaced or on both ends if the entire hose is being replaced. 3. Pry the band open until it can be removed without damaging the fitting. 4. If only part of the hose is being replaced: a. Cut the bad part away squarely. b. Use a new section of the hose of the same inside diameter and cut it 13 mm (1/2") shorter than the removed section (see Table A for parts applications). c. Install the proper size splicer fitting kit per the instructions, between the remaining section and new section of hose and install the other end of the hose on the fitting. Align fittings so that there will be no twist in the hose when it is on the vehicle (see Figure 4). See Table A for parts applications. d. Install two service clamps at a splice and one at a fitting as in Step #6 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. e. Perform Steps #7 and #8 of the Claim Replacement procedure. 5. If the entire section of hose is being replaced: a. Cut the old hose off of both fittings. b. Install a new section of hose of the same inside diameter and cut to the same length and install it on fittings. Align fittings so that there will be no twist in the hose when it is on the vehicle. See Table A for parts applications. c. Install a service clamp at each end as in Step #6 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. d. Perform Steps #7 and #8 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. TABLE A Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hose/Line HVAC: > 8540 > Feb > 85 > A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs > Page 3775 AIR CONDITIONING SERVICE CLAMPS, HOSE MATERIAL AND SPLICER FITTING KITS Hose Roll Group # Part # Description I.D. Length 9.242/ (Hose O.D. 11/16"1.166 3909030 A/C Hose Clamp 1-7/32") 8.962 230882 A/C Refrigerant Hose 5/16" 15' 8.962 230883* A/C Refrigerant Hose 13/32" 15' 8.962 12309273* A/C Refrigerant Hose 13/32" 15' 8.962 12309274 A/C Refrigerant Hose 13/32" 50' 8.962 230884 A/C Refrigerant Hose 1/2" 15' 8.962 12309271* A/C Refrigerant Hose 1/2" 15' 8.962 12309272 A/C Refrigerant Hose 1/2" 50' 8.962 12309275 A/C Refrigerant Hose 5/8" 15' 8.962 12309276 A/C Refrigerant Hose 5/8" 50' 9.222 3023686 Splicer Fitting Kit 5/16" 9.222 3023687 Splicer Fitting Kit 13/32" 9.222 3023688 Splicer Fitting Kit 1/2" 9.222 3023689 Splicer Fitting Kit 5/8" * Hoses in this list which are of the same inside diameter and roll length are interchangeable. Different part numbers denote different manufacturer sources in these cases. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hose/Line HVAC: > 8540 > Feb > 85 > A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs Hose/Line HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs 85-40 1B (Ia) FEB., 1985 Subject: A/C REFRIGERANT HOSE AND CLAMP REPAIRS Model and Year: ALL CHEVROLET VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS WARRANTY AND NON-WARRANTY REPAIRS When a freon leak is detected at an air conditioning refrigerant hose connection which has a crimped metal band, the crimped band may be replaced with a special screw-type service clamp for non-warranty type repairs according to the following clamp replacement procedure. Also included is a hose repair procedure for a damaged and/or leaking refrigerant hose. This allows the dealer the added flexibility of repairing hose assemblies rather than replacing them. Warranty repairs should continue the replacement procedure. NOTICE: Hoses marked with the words "PARKER", "PARKER PARFLEX 80" or "PARFLEX 80" are nylon and cannot be repaired by these procedures. These hoses should be replaced as entire assemblies. Figure 1 CLAMP REPLACEMENT 1. Completely discharge the air conditioning system by an approved method. 2. Disconnect the entire hose assembly and remove it from the vehicle. Put tape or approved plastic caps over all of the openings to the system, including the removed hose assembly, to prevent dirt and moisture contamination. 3. Using a fine tooth hacksaw, cut a wide notch all the way across the crimped metal band (see Figure 1). NOTICE: AVOID CUTTING THE HOSE MATERIAL. FIGURE 2 4. Using a cold chisel and a small hammer, tap carefully at the notch until the band is split all the way across (see Figure 2). 5. Pry the band open until it can be removed without cutting the hose material with the burred edges. NOTICE: If the hose material has been cut, all or part of the hose must be replaced. See Table A for applicable clamps, hose material, and splicer fitting kits. The repaired hose should be the same overall length as the original. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hose/Line HVAC: > 8540 > Feb > 85 > A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs > Page 3781 FIGURE 3 6. Install the special screw-type service clamp so that the locator lug is positioned on the hose end (see Figure 3). Tighten clamp to 4.5 N-m (40 in. lbs.). 7. Reinstall the hose assembly on the vehicle with new 'O' rings where used. A/C compressor oil should be used to lubricate the 'O' rings. 8. Partially charge the system and perform a leak test before completely recharging. FIGURE 4 HOSE REPAIR 1. Perform Step #1 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. 2. Using a fine tooth hacksaw, cut all the way through the metal band clamp and into the top layer of the hose on one end of the hose if only part of it is being replaced or on both ends if the entire hose is being replaced. 3. Pry the band open until it can be removed without damaging the fitting. 4. If only part of the hose is being replaced: a. Cut the bad part away squarely. b. Use a new section of the hose of the same inside diameter and cut it 13 mm (1/2") shorter than the removed section (see Table A for parts applications). c. Install the proper size splicer fitting kit per the instructions, between the remaining section and new section of hose and install the other end of the hose on the fitting. Align fittings so that there will be no twist in the hose when it is on the vehicle (see Figure 4). See Table A for parts applications. d. Install two service clamps at a splice and one at a fitting as in Step #6 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. e. Perform Steps #7 and #8 of the Claim Replacement procedure. 5. If the entire section of hose is being replaced: a. Cut the old hose off of both fittings. b. Install a new section of hose of the same inside diameter and cut to the same length and install it on fittings. Align fittings so that there will be no twist in the hose when it is on the vehicle. See Table A for parts applications. c. Install a service clamp at each end as in Step #6 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. d. Perform Steps #7 and #8 of the Clamp Replacement Procedure. TABLE A Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hose/Line HVAC: > 8540 > Feb > 85 > A/C - Refrigerant Hose & Clamp Repairs > Page 3782 AIR CONDITIONING SERVICE CLAMPS, HOSE MATERIAL AND SPLICER FITTING KITS Hose Roll Group # Part # Description I.D. Length 9.242/ (Hose O.D. 11/16"1.166 3909030 A/C Hose Clamp 1-7/32") 8.962 230882 A/C Refrigerant Hose 5/16" 15' 8.962 230883* A/C Refrigerant Hose 13/32" 15' 8.962 12309273* A/C Refrigerant Hose 13/32" 15' 8.962 12309274 A/C Refrigerant Hose 13/32" 50' 8.962 230884 A/C Refrigerant Hose 1/2" 15' 8.962 12309271* A/C Refrigerant Hose 1/2" 15' 8.962 12309272 A/C Refrigerant Hose 1/2" 50' 8.962 12309275 A/C Refrigerant Hose 5/8" 15' 8.962 12309276 A/C Refrigerant Hose 5/8" 50' 9.222 3023686 Splicer Fitting Kit 5/16" 9.222 3023687 Splicer Fitting Kit 13/32" 9.222 3023688 Splicer Fitting Kit 1/2" 9.222 3023689 Splicer Fitting Kit 5/8" * Hoses in this list which are of the same inside diameter and roll length are interchangeable. Different part numbers denote different manufacturer sources in these cases. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A Group Ref.: HVAC Bulletin No.: 331226 Date: January, 1994 INFORMATION SUBJECT: RETROFITTING R-12 VEHICLES TO R-134a MODELS: 1994 AND PRIOR YEARS, PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS WITH R-12 A/C SYSTEMS There has been a great deal of information presented by the media regarding the need to retrofit vehicles produced with R-12, to a substitute refrigerant. This bulletin will outline GM's position and future plans on this subject. Most important, there is currently NO requirement to retrofit any R-12 vehicle. Vehicles built with R-12 can be serviced with R-12, as long as the refrigerant is available. At some point in time, R-12 may become either too scarce or too expensive to economically justify service on some vehicles with R-12. By that time, GM will provide you with instructions on retrofitting those vehicles from R-12 to R-134a. GM vehicle divisions, platforms, and component suppliers have been actively working on the details of retrofitting R-12 vehicles. An enormous amount of work is required to determine how hundreds of vehicle models can be satisfactorily retrofitted. Additional information will be provided as it becomes available. The following items contain important technical information that should answer many of the questions, and correct some misconceptions reported in the media. SUBSTITUTE REFRIGERANTS R-134a is the only approved substitute refrigerant that GM recommends and it should only be used if a complete retrofit procedure has been performed. None of the other refrigerants currently being marketed as replacement or drop-in substitutes for R-12 are approved for use in GM vehicles. R-12 and R-134a are not interchangeable. R-134a cannot be added to fill a low R-12 system. The combination of the two materials can cause high system pressures, which could cause damage to the system. Retrofitting an R-12 vehicle to R-134a requires careful preparation to insure that neither the vehicle nor the A/C service equipment has become contaminated. RESIDUAL MINERAL OIL The concern that mineral oil is chemically incompatible with R-134a and/or PAG lubricant has been proven to be untrue. A normal charge of mineral oil left in the A/C system after a retrofit to R-134a will not damage the system. Mineral oil, however, does not mix well with R-134a, and will not provide adequate lubrication. Tests on both the orifice tube and TXV systems show that the mineral oil parks in places such as the accumulator, and does not appreciably affect performance or damage the system. The retrofit service bulletin will specify the correct oil to be used. It is important that this oil recommendation be followed carefully. RESIDUAL R-12 Residual R-12 left in a system, due to improper retrofit service procedures, may result in system damage unless the residual R-12 is kept below the 2 percent limit specified by the Society of Automotive Engineers' Specification J-1661. New service methods are being developed to minimize the level of R-12 remaining in the A/C system after the retrofit procedure is completed. Following these new procedures will be critical to insure that the above limits are met. SYSTEM FLUSHING R-11, a material commonly used as an A/C system flushing solvent, has been found to be chemically incompatible with PAG lubricant. Technicians should be aware that residual R-11 remaining in an R-12 system will be very damaging if the vehicle is retrofitted to R-134a later in its life. For many years GM has recommended the use of in-line filters as an alternative to system flushing. SYSTEM FLUSHING, USING EITHER R-11 OR ANY OTHER FLUSHING MATERIAL, IS NOT APPROVED BY GM FOR ANY A/C SYSTEM. DESICCANT PROTECTION Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 3787 It has been reported that the desiccant (moisture absorption material) used in 1992 and older R-12 A/C systems is incompatible with R-134a and PAG oil. The older desiccant was designed specifically for R-12 systems, but testing has shown that it is NOT necessary to replace the older desiccant just because the vehicle is being retrofitted to R-134a. 1993 and newer GM vehicles use desiccant designed to be compatible with both R-12 and R-134a systems. The amount of desiccant used in most GM vehicles is designed to last for at least seven years. To help maintain adequate protection for vehicles that must be retrofitted, it is recommended that the accumulator/dryer, which contains the desiccant, be replaced if the vehicle is more than five years old. "O" RINGS While continuing to service with R-12, be sure to use "O" rings and seal materials which are compatible with R-134a and PAG oil. This practice will eliminate concern in case the vehicle requires retrofitting later in its life. All "O" rings and seal materials available from GMSPO are compatible with R-134a systems. RETROFITTED SYSTEM PERFORMANCE Currently, it appears that for most GM vehicles, the retrofit procedure will require minimal changes to the existing system. Some vehicles may need additional parts and/or procedures to provide acceptable performance and/or durability. Our testing has shown that vehicles that have undergone recommended retrofit procedures will, in most climatic conditions, be minimally affected in terms of A/C performance. SERVICE POLICY Basic service policy is as follows: During Warranty - If an R-12 produced vehicle A/C system must be repaired or recharged under warranty, repairs will be completed using R-12. If R-12 is unavailable or unaffordable, GM will notify the dealer body and will pay for the warranty repair and the retrofit to R-134a. NOTE: It a customer requests that an in-warranty vehicle be converted to R-134a, and the R-12 system is functioning properly, the customer will be expected to pay for the retrofit. Out of Warranty - The cost of the conversion will be the responsibility of the customer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 3788 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C Refrigerant - Contamination File In Section: 1 - HVAC Bulletin No.: 43-12-23 Date: September, 1994 Subject: Contaminated A/C Refrigerant Models: 1994 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks with R12 Air Conditioning Systems Government regulations limit the production of R12 refrigerant, commonly referred to as Freon, during 1994/1995 and restrict manufacture of new R12 material effective January 1, 1996. As R12 prices rise and supplies are depleted, it is anticipated non-approved substitute refrigerants and/or poor quality R12 material sold as new or reprocessed may become more prevalent. The Mobile Air Conditioning Society (MACS) recently expressed concern over reports of the sale of R12 refrigerant containing as high as 15% contamination by R22, a refrigerant commonly used in stationary home systems but unsuitable for use in mobile units. GM dealers should be careful to protect against contaminating their existing supplies of R12 or the A/C systems in customers' vehicles they service by dealing with reputable suppliers. All R12 refrigerant purchased for warranty repairs should be purchased through GM SPO to ensure GM quality standards are met. The use of non-approved R12 refrigerant substitutes, some of which contain flammable materials, has also been reported by MACS. These products are available to "do-it-yourselfers" who, in many cases, believe they are harmless replacements for the small cans of R12 used so commonly in the past. Once added to the A/C system, the vehicle can no longer be serviced using R12 recovery/recycling equipment without: - Risking permanent damage to recovery/recycling equipment - Contaminating the previously recovered R12 material in the recovery tank - Spreading the contamination when the recovered material is used to charge other vehicles or - Possible loss of the recovered material if the contaminated level is high enough to activate the air purge system Contaminated refrigerant also impacts customer satisfaction through poor vehicle A/C performance and loss of A/C system compressor/component durability. System or component failure resulting from the use of refrigerant which does not meet GM specification is not covered by the "New Vehicle Warranty". Unfortunately, there is no simple method to identify if a "do-it-yourselfer" or repair shop has added to or recharged a system with a non-approved refrigerant. The inability to protect against the spread of contaminated refrigerant threatens the recycling program and the industry's desire to maximize use of the remaining R12 supply. Beginning in 1993, General Motors STG, Harrison Division, Research Labs and Kent-Moore worked in conjunction with suppliers of various technologies to develop a tester to identify contaminated refrigerant in vehicle A/C systems before recovery. During development of the technology, several dealer service manager focus group studies were conducted to identify design features to best suit dealership needs. The discussions and surveys clearly indicated the desire for a dedicated instrument, permanently mounted to the refrigerant recovery cart to ensure ALL vehicles are automatically tested prior to recovering refrigerant. Testing ALL refrigerant for contamination prior to recovery is the ONLY means to ensure customer satisfaction, protect recovery equipment and avoid unintentional venting of refrigerant by your dealership. General Motors has evaluated all available technology for this project and only the J 39851 R12 "Pureguard" meets General Motors' specifications. The J 39851 R12 Pureguard Refrigerant Monitor has been classified as an essential tool and will be shipped by Kent-Moore to your dealership beginning in September of 1994. The essential price of the R12 "Pureguard" is $561 (for Canadian dealers the price is $800 Canadian). If your dealership has multiple R12 recovery equipment, additional units may be ordered from Kent-Moore for $561 at 1-800-345-2233. Features of the R12 "Pureguard" include: - Universally mounts to R12 Recovery Equipment - Automatically interrupts power to the Recovery Equipment when contaminated refrigerant is identified - Fully automatic design does not require technician action, training or interpretation - LCD displays Pureguard functions Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 3789 - Meets GM contamination sensitivity requirements - Self calibrating - Micro-processor controlled - Audio alarm alerts technician Other Refrigerant Identifiers are being advertised which may be available this A/C season. However, ONLY the Kent-Moore J 39851 R12 "Pureguard" meets General Motors' current specifications which ensure recovered refrigerant is compatible with General Motors vehicles and General Motors approved recovery systems. An R134a Pureguard Refrigerant Identifier is currently under development and is anticipated to be available in early 1995. The contamination of R134a refrigerant is not expected to be a concern until the program to retrofit R12 vehicles to R134a becomes more widely used. Future bulletins will be issued to address the recovery and disposal of contaminated refrigerant. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 3790 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins Contaminated R12 Refrigerant - Testing & Handling FILE IN SECTION: 1 - HVAC BULLETIN NO.: 53-12-05 DATE: May, 1995 SUBJECT: Contaminated R12 Refrigerant Testing and Handling MODELS: 1994 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks with R12 A/C Systems The J 39851 "PureGuard" R12 refrigerant monitor was recently shipped to all GM dealers as an essential tool to test R12 refrigerant. Dealers are strongly urged to install this protective device on their ACR3 or other R12 recovery equipment immediately. The PureGuard is easily installed on any recovery cart (20 minutes), requires no recovery cart modifications, is fully automatic (no training required) and does not increase the time required to perform normal A/C service procedures. Proper use of this tool can: ^ Prevent damage to your R12 recovery/recycling equipment. ^ Prevent contamination of previously recovered R12 in the recovery tank. ^ Prevent loss of your recovered R12 as contaminated refrigerant will activate automatic air purge system. ^ Prevent the spread of contaminated R12 to other vehicles you service. If your dealership has multiple R12 recovery stations which are not protected, use the PureGuard to check the refrigerant in these recovery tanks for contamination at least once each week. Simply connect the PureGuard blue service hose (that would normally be connected to the vehicle low side service port) to the red or vapor side of any recovery cart tank and run the test. It is also important to check a tank containing recovered/recycled material for purity before installation on your charging equipment. Even new R12 refrigerant purchased from sources other than GM should be tested for contamination prior to use. Sources of Contaminated R12 Refrigerant Since refrigerant testing has not been a standard practice in the mobile A/C repair industry, the amount of R12 refrigerant contamination is unknown. As R12 prices rise and supplies are depleted, it is anticipated that contaminated R12 refrigerant may become more prevalent from the following as well as other sources: ^ The use of R12 refrigerant substitutes without installation of unique service fittings and proper identification labeling. ^ Improper use of R12 substitutes, such as topping off R12 systems with R134a or other refrigerants available to "do-it-yourselfers". ^ Poor quality or contaminated new or reprocessed R12 refrigerant. R12 can and should continue to be used to service vehicles built with R12 as long as it is available. Combining any refrigerant with R12 results in a refrigerant mixture which cannot be used in an A/C system. R134a is the only substitute refrigerant approved by GM and should only be used when the appropriate retrofit service bulletin procedures are explicitly followed. Use of any other substitute refrigerant requires the purchase of additional dedicated recovery, recycling (if applicable) and charging equipment to service each substitute refrigerant used. However, you should know that the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has listed several products as acceptable replacements for R12 mobile A/C systems under the Significant New Alternatives Policy (SNAP). Some of these products are: R134a, R401c (a DuPont refrigerant blend) and FRIGC (another refrigerant blend). It is important to understand that the SNAP program only considers the health, safety and environmental characteristics of a chemical. It does not test for A/C system cooling performance or durability. That judgment is deferred to the vehicle manufacturer. Use of any R12 refrigerant substitute without dedicated service equipment, unique fittings, labels and refrigerant testing prior to recovery, could result in contamination of the R12 supply and the loss of the R12 recycling program. What To Do When Contamination is Detected Repeat the test to verify contaminated refrigerant is present. Clear the PureGuard following the instructions listed on the face panel, then perform a second test to verify that the vehicle A/C system contains contaminated or mixed refrigerant. Contact the vehicle owner to advise that previous A/C system repairs were apparently performed with an R12 refrigerant substitute. Suggest the owner Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 3791 contact or return to the previous repair facility. Explain that environmental regulations prohibit repair facilities from discharging ozone depleting A/C refrigerants into the atmosphere. Explain that recovery of this unknown refrigerant could damage your service equipment. If the customer wishes to pursue repairs through your facility, it is recommended that the proper A/C service equipment be purchased. General Motors recommends the Kent-Moore J 41428 "Scavenger", an air operated refrigerant recovery station, be used to remove unknown refrigerants. The air operated feature reduces the hazard of recovering potentially flammable refrigerants. Dealers should evaluate the need to purchase the equipment based on the number of contaminated vehicles they encounter. As an alternative to the initial purchase of a recovery only station, dealers should check locally for A/C specialty shops which may have the equipment to service substitute or contaminated refrigerants. They may be able to provide contaminated refrigerant recovery service to the dealer. The GM Service Technology Group has tested a recovery procedure where a 15 or 30 pound DOT approved refillable tank is fully evacuated then connected to a vehicle A/C system to recover the charge. Testing has shown that even when the recovery tank is cooled down in dry ice, the procedure does not guarantee the entire charge will be recovered. Since EPA regulations require full recovery of ozone depleting substances, GM does not recommend this procedure. Contaminated Refrigerant Disposal Although A/C refrigerant testing and disposal have not been a service practice in the mobile A/C industry, It has been common in the stationary A/C service industry for many years. Listed at the end of this bulletin are companies that provide refrigerant disposal service for the stationary A/C industry. Please be advised that GM has not independently evaluated these companies and is not in any way endorsing or promoting the use of these companies. Each of these companies has expressed an interest in providing refrigerant disposal service to GM dealers. In working with the stationary A/C industry, these companies typically receive large volumes of different refrigerants that have been mixed together. Unfortunately, because the volume of material returned by the mobile A/C industry will be in much smaller quantities, the cost of handling will be greater. To arrange for return of the refrigerant, simply call the company nearest you using the phone number listed below. The company will advise you on billing and shipping procedures. Disposal cost will vary between $3.00 and $5.00 per pound plus freight and handling. Shipping charges will vary by distance and location. In general, a 7 to 10 day turn-around time on the tank can be expected. The tank can be shipped via common carrier. Documents that your refrigerant has been properly disposed of will be sent to you with the return of your tank. As an alternative, many dealerships already have contracts in place with a disposal company who manages their hazardous wastes. In these cases, the disposal service may agree to handle containers of mixed refrigerants. Initially, the local disposal companies may be surprised by this inquiry. They may want to evaluate how much material will be collected before deciding whether to provide this service. As we move forward with the practice of testing R12 refrigerant, it will take time for all the questions to be answered. STG will provide additional information as soon as it is available. Understanding The PureGuard The PureGuard is a highly sensitive instrument capable of detecting R12 with 3% or less cross-contamination with other refrigerants. Any refrigerant mixture in excess of this amount poses a threat to both your refrigerant supply and recovery equipment. The PureGuard uses a pass/fail approach when monitoring the refrigerant and is precisely calibrated to cut power to the recovery machine if it encounters R12 mixed with any substitute refrigerants. The PureGuard ignores the presence of the air, dyes or oils in the refrigerant sampled. At least 20 psi must be present in the vehicle's A/C system for the PureGuard to function. Otherwise, refrigerant cannot be introduced to the PureGuard's test chamber. If a vehicle's A/C system contains less than 20 psi, it is an indication that the vehicle's system is nearly depleted of refrigerant. Occasionally, erratic PureGuard operation or service code 002 display will be encountered when A/C system pressure is exactly 20 psi. If this occurs, simply cycle the on/off switch to reset the PureGuard. After the 30 second PureGuard warm-up cycle, proceed immediately with vehicle recovery operation. Feedback from the field has indicated PureGuard service code 002 will also be displayed if the oil drain port is not sealed. Make sure the "0" ring seal in the cap is in place and that the cap is tight. If the PureGuard fails to clear or if you experience any other problems operating the PureGuard, contact Kent-Moore Technical Service at 1-800-345-2233. The unit should not be returned without first contacting Kent-Moore to obtain return authorization. Refrigerant Disposal Locations: United States Refrigerant Reclamation Inc. 12420 North Green River Rd. Evansville, IN 47711 800-207-5931, FAX - 812-867-1463 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 3792 Omega Refrigerant Reclamation 5263 North Fourth St. Irwindale, CA 91706 310-698-0991, FAX 310-696-1908 Refrigerant Management Svcs of Georgia 216 F. Atlanta Hwy. Cumming, GA 30130 Ph/FAX 800-347-5872 Refrigerant Reclaim Inc. 122 Old Stage Coach Rd. Dumfries, VA 22026 800-238-5902, FAX 703-441-0393 Gartech Refrigerant Reclamation Ctr. 2002 Platinum Garland, TX 75042 214-272-4070, FAX 214-272-8548 National Refrigerants, Inc. 11401 Roosevelt Blvd. Philadelphia, PA 19154 215-698-6620, FAX 215-602-8205 CFC Reclamation 1321 Swift North Kansas City, MO 64116 816-471-2511 Full Cycle-Global 550 James Street Lakewood, NJ 08701 908-370-3400, FAX - 908-370-3088 Refrigerant Reclaim Svcs, Inc. dba Full Cycle-Global 121 S. Norwood Drive Ft. Worth, TX 76053-7807 817-282-0022, FAX - 800-831-6182 Full Cycle-Global 2055 Silber, Ste. 109 Houston, TX 77055 713-681-7370, FAX - 713-681-9947 Full Cycle-Global 343 South Airline Hwy. Gonzales, LA 70737 504-644-5303, FAX - 504-644-1809 Full Cycle-Global 2966 Wireton Blue Island, IL 60406 708-388-8551, FAX - 708-388-8550 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Retrofitting R-12 Vehicles to R-134A > Page 3793 Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Use of Alternate Refrigerants In CFC 12 Number: 92-250-1A Section: 0A Date: AUGUST 1992 Corporate Bulletin No.: 231205 ASE No.: A7 Subject: USE OF ALTERNATE REFRIGERANTS IN CFC 12 REFRIGERANT MOBILE AIR CONDITIONERS Model and Year: GALL MODEL YEARS - ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS INCLUDING GEO A number of inquiries have been received concerning the use of "alternate refrigerants" as a replacement for R-12 refrigerant in General Motors air conditioning systems. Regardless of any advertised claims, there are currently no substitutes for refrigerant R-12 approved by General Motors. At the present time, only new or recycled R-12 is approved for use in General Motors R-12 air conditioning systems. Based on studies performed to date, the use of "alternate refrigerants" in General Motors R-12 air conditioning systems may result in higher system pressures, higher leak rates or incompatibility with drying and sealing materials. System performance and reliability may also be affected. Service equipment manufacturers have indicated that cross-contaminating R-12 recovery/recycling equipment with "alternate refrigerants" may damage the equipment. General Motors supports the Society of Automotive Engineers recommended service procedures for recovery and recycling of R-12. The use of known "alternate refrigerants" without proper service practices for identifying vehicle systems containing these "alternate refrigerants" and dedicated recovery equipment to service those vehicles will contaminate the recycled supply of R-12 refrigerant. Contamination of the recycled R-12 refrigerant makes the refrigerant unusable for recharging air conditioning systems and could jeopardize the recycling program. At the present time, General Motors has not approved any "alternate refrigerant" for R-12 in R-12 air conditioning systems. Therefore, R-12 systems should continue to be serviced with new or recycled R-12 only. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3794 Refrigerant: Specifications System ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... 3.75 lbs Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Specifications A-6 Compressor .................................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... 10 oz R-4 Compressor .................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................ 6 oz Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 891271B > Apr > 89 > A/C - R12 Loss From Loose or Missing Access Fitting Caps Service Port HVAC: Customer Interest A/C - R12 Loss From Loose or Missing Access Fitting Caps Number: 89-127-1B Section: 1B Date: APRIL, 1989 Subject: A/C REFRIGERANT LOSS DUE TO LOOSE OR MISSING ACCESS FITTING CAPS Model and Year: 1980-89 CHEVROLET MODELS WITH A/C FIGURE 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS All Chevrolet air conditioning Hi side and Low side access fittings are supplied with a black plastic cap and seal assembly which provides the primary refrigerant seal for the service fittings. If the cap and seal assembly is missing or loose, a significant amount of refrigerant may leak through the valve core located in the access fitting, which could result in poor A/C performance or failure. When servicing any vehicle's A/C system, make sure all access fitting cap seals (refer to Figure 1) are in place and tight. Caps should be threaded on until contact with the O-ring seal is made and then tightened another 1/4 - 1/2 turn to ensure proper sealing. High Side Low Side Valve - Cap and Seal Valve - Cap and Seal P/N 3033974 P/N 6551640 Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Service Port HVAC: > 912841A > Apr > 91 > A/C - Refrigerant Loss Prevention Service Port HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Loss Prevention Number: 91-284-1A Section: 1A Date: APRIL 1991 Corp. Bulletin No.: 971202R Subject: AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT LOSS DUE TO LOOSE OR MISSING ACCESS FITTING CAPS Model and Year: 1980-91 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS All GM air conditioning Hi side and Low side access fittings are supplied with a black plastic cap and seal assembly which provides the primary refrigerant seal for the service fittings. If the cap and seal assembly is missing or loose, a significant amount of refrigerant may leak through the valve core located in the access fitting, which could result in poor A/C performance or failure. When servicing any vehicle's A/C system, make sure all access fitting cap seals (refer to Figure) are in place and tight. Caps should be threaded on until contact with the "O" ring seal is made and then tightened another 1/4 - 1/2 turn to ensure proper sealing. High Side Low Side Valve - Cap and Seal Valve - Cap and Seal P/N 52451233 P/N 6551640 Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Service Port HVAC: > 891271B > Apr > 89 > A/C - R12 Loss From Loose or Missing Access Fitting Caps Service Port HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - R12 Loss From Loose or Missing Access Fitting Caps Number: 89-127-1B Section: 1B Date: APRIL, 1989 Subject: A/C REFRIGERANT LOSS DUE TO LOOSE OR MISSING ACCESS FITTING CAPS Model and Year: 1980-89 CHEVROLET MODELS WITH A/C FIGURE 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS All Chevrolet air conditioning Hi side and Low side access fittings are supplied with a black plastic cap and seal assembly which provides the primary refrigerant seal for the service fittings. If the cap and seal assembly is missing or loose, a significant amount of refrigerant may leak through the valve core located in the access fitting, which could result in poor A/C performance or failure. When servicing any vehicle's A/C system, make sure all access fitting cap seals (refer to Figure 1) are in place and tight. Caps should be threaded on until contact with the O-ring seal is made and then tightened another 1/4 - 1/2 turn to ensure proper sealing. High Side Low Side Valve - Cap and Seal Valve - Cap and Seal P/N 3033974 P/N 6551640 Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Service Port HVAC: > 912841A > Apr > 91 > A/C - Refrigerant Loss Prevention Service Port HVAC: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Loss Prevention Number: 91-284-1A Section: 1A Date: APRIL 1991 Corp. Bulletin No.: 971202R Subject: AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT LOSS DUE TO LOOSE OR MISSING ACCESS FITTING CAPS Model and Year: 1980-91 PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS All GM air conditioning Hi side and Low side access fittings are supplied with a black plastic cap and seal assembly which provides the primary refrigerant seal for the service fittings. If the cap and seal assembly is missing or loose, a significant amount of refrigerant may leak through the valve core located in the access fitting, which could result in poor A/C performance or failure. When servicing any vehicle's A/C system, make sure all access fitting cap seals (refer to Figure) are in place and tight. Caps should be threaded on until contact with the "O" ring seal is made and then tightened another 1/4 - 1/2 turn to ensure proper sealing. High Side Low Side Valve - Cap and Seal Valve - Cap and Seal P/N 52451233 P/N 6551640 Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3820 Service Port HVAC: Locations The high pressure fitting is located either in the high pressure vapor line or muffler, while the low pressure fitting is located on the accumulator. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: > 83-81-34 > Mar > 99 > SIR - Operating Vehicle with Warning Light On Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Customer Interest SIR - Operating Vehicle with Warning Light On File In Section: 8 - Chassis/Body Electrical Bulletin No.: 83-81-34 Date: March, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Operating Vehicle with Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) Warning Light Illuminated Models: 1999 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with SDM Controlled Air Bag System The AIR BAG warning light is the key to driver notification of Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) system malfunctions. When the warning light remains illuminated or continues to flash, one or more of the following conditions may occur if vehicle operation is continued. ^ Non-deployment of the air bags in the event of a crash. ^ Deployment of the air bags without a crash. ^ Deployment of the air bags in crashes less severe than intended. If an AIR BAG warning light is illuminated or flashing, you should advise the customer of these possibilities and that the vehicle should be serviced right away. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: > 83-81-34 > Mar > 99 > SIR - Operating Vehicle with Warning Light On Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: All Technical Service Bulletins SIR - Operating Vehicle with Warning Light On File In Section: 8 - Chassis/Body Electrical Bulletin No.: 83-81-34 Date: March, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Operating Vehicle with Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) Warning Light Illuminated Models: 1999 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks with SDM Controlled Air Bag System The AIR BAG warning light is the key to driver notification of Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) system malfunctions. When the warning light remains illuminated or continues to flash, one or more of the following conditions may occur if vehicle operation is continued. ^ Non-deployment of the air bags in the event of a crash. ^ Deployment of the air bags without a crash. ^ Deployment of the air bags in crashes less severe than intended. If an AIR BAG warning light is illuminated or flashing, you should advise the customer of these possibilities and that the vehicle should be serviced right away. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A Date: March 24, 2011 Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle has its own specifically designed head restraint. The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed. Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper positioning of the passenger within the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Child Restraint - Auxiliary Seat Belt Child Restraint: Technical Service Bulletins Child Restraint - Auxiliary Seat Belt File In Section: 09 - Restraints Bulletin No.: 99-09-40-008 Date: January, 2000 INFORMATION Subject: Auxiliary Seat Belt for Securing Child Restraint Models: 1996 and Prior Passenger Cars with Door Mounted Lap/Shoulder Belts Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at General Motors, therefore, recommend that child restraints (seats) be used only in the rear seat. In addition, NEVER put a REAR-FACING child restraint in the front passenger seat if the vehicle is equipped with a passenger side air bag. In the event that it becomes necessary to use a child seat in the right front seat position, the door mounted seat and shoulder belt restraint system used in the described vehicles can be used to secure it. However, to improve stability during normal driving, GM recommends that customers use an auxiliary seat belt that is specifically designed for this purpose. The use of an auxiliary seat belt is described in detail, including several illustrations, in the vehicle Owner's Manual. For additional information, refer to the subject vehicle Owner's Manual. Parts Information To install an auxiliary seat belt, you must have the correct attaching hardware. For auxiliary seat belt and attaching hardware package part numbers and usage, see Groups 14.870, 21.041 or 21.042 of the appropriate GMSPO parts catalog. Warranty Information Auxiliary seat belts are a NO CHARGE item to all GM customers who request them for their specific vehicles. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lap/Shoulder Belts - Dealer Installed Rear Kits Seat Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Lap/Shoulder Belts - Dealer Installed Rear Kits File In Section: 09 - Restraints Bulletin No.: 99-09-40-006 Date: January, 2000 INFORMATION Subject: Dealer Installed Rear Seat Lap/Shoulder Belt Kits Models: 1988 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks In 1986, General Motors made a commitment to become the first American manufacturer to provide rear seat lap/shoulder belts as standard equipment in new domestic light vehicles. In addition, GM released dealer-installed Rear Seat Lap/Shoulder Belt kits for most current and past model vehicles. At this time, certain belt kits are still available from GMSPO. Some passenger cars can still be retrofitted with belt kits in the correct matching color, while other cars can only be retrofitted with black belt kits. Light Duty Trucks only have retrofit belt kits available in black. With seat belt use required now in most states, public acceptance of all kinds of occupant restraints is increasing. As a result, you may see an increase in requests from vehicle owners. Parts Information For part number, usage, and availability of Rear Seat Lap/Shoulder Belt kits, see Group 21.040 (Accessories) of the appropriate GMSPO Parts Catalog. Warranty Information The cost associated (parts & labor) with installing these Rear Seat Lap/Shoulder Belt kits is the responsibility of the customer. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lap/Shoulder Belts - Dealer Installed Rear Kits > Page 3853 Technical Service Bulletin # 8570 Date: 850401 Seat Belts - Extender Availability 85-70 0A APR., 1985 Subject: MANDATORY SEAT BELT LEGISLATION AND SEAT BELT EXTENDERS Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Several states are considering or have enacted mandatory seat belt legistration. The State of New York enacted a mandatory seat belt law effective January 1, 1985. Chevrolet Motor Division and General Motors strongly endorse and support efforts to enact legislation requiring the use of seat belts and child restraint systems. With this new legislation, there may be increased interest by dealers regarding the availability of seat belts to supply customer replacement needs. Seat belts are available as complete assemblies only and repairs (as opposed to replacements) are not recommended. Dealers should not attempt to stock seat belt assemblies for all model years covered by mandatory state laws, since there are too many variations. New seat belt assemblies should be ordered as needed from GMWDD in the normal manner. In addition, special seat belt extenders are available to accommodate these people who cannot fit the seat belt around themselves. Parts and Accessories Information Bulletin No. 84-212 updated by Accessory Information Bulletin No. 84-230 provide information about seat belt extenders. Recent inquiries regarding seat belt extenders availability indicate that some Service Managers, Body Shop Managers, Shop Foreman, Service Advisors or Sales Personnel were not fully aware Chevrolet offered them for sale. Please be certain all appropriate personnel in your dealership are informed. Both increased use of seat belts and improved customer satisfaction should result. Inasmuch as GM vehicle restraint systems have sufficient belt length to accommodate most drivers and passengers. Requests for belt extensions are infrequent. In the event a customer does make such a request, the attached "Questionnaire" must be completed and sent to the Flint Order Department, attention National Section, where it will be processed as a dealer order. Copies of the three page questionnaire should be made as required. The extension is available for most GM vehicles produced in recent years. The design is such that it can be coupled to the existing belts included in each vehicle. Since the extension makes the belt arrangement a "custom fit", use by anyone else, or in a different vehicle, may lessen the effectiveness afforded by the restraint system. Therefore, before the order for the extension can be processed, the "Questionnaire" must be completed in every respect, particularly the signature of the person who will be using the extension. A word of caution - orders for seat belt extensions should not be submitted if it is determined that the intent is simply to provide a vehicle occupant with more slack for the sake of comfort. Please note that orders will not be filled if the measurement called for is 12 inches or less. Seat belt extenders will be a no charge item to all GM customers who request them for their specific vehicles, effective January 1, 1985. Since each extension is made up individually after receipt of order, the customer should expect to experience a reasonable delay in availability. The time will vary depending on the vendor and his inventory of materials. Questionnaire Seat Belt Extender We have received your request for a Seat Belt Extension. In order to respond, specific information must be supplied regarding the individual and vehicle involved. Please answer the following questions: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lap/Shoulder Belts - Dealer Installed Rear Kits > Page 3854 1. Write in the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) of the car or cars in which you need the longer belt. The VIN is located on the left front top surface of the instrument panel and is visible from the outside of the car. Note the VIN below. 2. Part number, if shown, Manufacturer's Name and Model Number that appears on the label of the seat belt assembly along with the color of the webbing. Colored extenders for past model vehicles are furnished on an "as material available basis" only. If webbing of the color designated for a past model vehicle is not available, the extension will be furnished in black. The label (Figure 2) which is stitched to the webbing is located either slightly above where the webbing attaches to the floor (near the door) or in the retractor. The label on the webbing stowed inside the retractor can be found by fully extracting the webbing from the retractor. Note information below: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lap/Shoulder Belts - Dealer Installed Rear Kits > Page 3855 3. Measurement in Inches Place the seat in the position that it is in when you drive or ride in the car. With you sitting in the seat make sure that the buckle is extended as far through the seat as possible. This may be done by giving the buckle a hard pull. With the buckle resting against your hip, measure from the lap area directly below the navel to the front edge of the buckle (Figure 3) and note dimension below. *NOTE: If measurement is 12 inches (304.8mm) or less, a seat belt extender is not available. With this information, we can supply a seat belt extender tailored for your personal use that will maintain the proper seat belt orientation. Body of letter to be included with the Seat Belt Extender Enclosed Seat Belt Extender was made according to the information you supplied on the Questionnaire. This extender will allow you to use your seat belt properly. We must stress that this seat belt extender was custom made for you and should be used only by you and only in the particular vehicle for which it was made. As noted on the label affixed to the seat belt extender, it should not be used in any other vehicle or by other persons because it will not fit others in a way that affords the protection that belt restraints are designed to offer. There is always a risk of serious injury in a crash, and seat belt restraints usually reduce that risk. However, the risk would not be reduced (it may even be made worse) for people other than you using the extender, or for you if you use it in another vehicle. 4. Customer Information Name: Address: City, State: Customer Signature: 5. Dealer Information Name: Address: City, State: Dealer Parts Code: Parts Manager's Signature Mail completed questionnaire to: Warehousing and Distribution Division of GM 6060 West Bristol Road Flint, MI 48554 Attention: National Order Department Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 3864 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 09-09-40-001A Date: February 02, 2011 Subject: Seat Belt Buckle Latching Issues and/or Seat Belt Warning Lights Illuminated Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7 X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-09-40-001 (Section 09 - Restraints). This bulletin is being published to advise dealers about seat belt buckles not operating and/or seat belt warning light illumination, as well as difficulty latching and unlatching the buckle or the buckle release button sticking. Analysis of warranty data has determined that this condition may be caused by sticky beverages being spilled onto or into the seat belt buckle assembly. Foreign debris from food, candy wrappers, paper and coins can also contribute to this condition. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise the customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. Important Never insert anything other than the seat belt latch plate into the buckle assembly. Do not attempt to dig anything out of a buckle with a tool. Never try to wash out a buckle to remove a spilled liquid as this may damage the buckle. Use the following steps to determine the cause of the concern. 1. Inspect the buckle assembly with a light shining on the latch plate insertion area. Look for any debris or foreign objects in the buckle. 2. If any debris or foreign objects are observed, try to vacuum out the item. After the foreign material is removed, latch and unlatch the seat belt. If the system functions properly, do not replace the seat belt buckle assembly. 3. If the condition has not been corrected, inspect the buckle assembly for any sticky residue. If sticky residue is found, inform the customer that a substance was spilled on the seat belt buckle assembly causing the malfunction. The buckle assembly will need to be replaced at the customer's expense. 4. Refer to SI for seat belt component replacement. Important If foreign material (debris) or sticky liquids are the cause of the concern, show the customer the condition of the component (buckle assembly) and explain how it is affecting the function of the restraint system. Strongly recommend that the component be replaced at the customer's expense. Point out the fact that this is not a manufacturing defect and is not covered by the new vehicle warranty. If the customer declines to have parts replaced, the service department management must make a notation on the service record that the lack of functionality of seating position with an inoperative buckle was fully explained to the customer. The service department management must advise customer that having a non-functioning buckle in a seating position voids ability to use that seating position (no one should ride in the seat). Also make the customer aware that it may be against the law to ride in a vehicle without wearing a restraint system. 5. If further restraint diagnosis is required, refer to Seat Belt System Operational and Functional Checks in SI. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 09-09-40-001A > Feb > 11 > Restraints - Seat Belt Warning Lamp On/Buckling Issues > Page 3870 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt Seat Belt Extension: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Extender Availability For Seat Belt INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-09-40-005F Date: June 23, 2010 Subject: Seat Belt Extender Availability Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2009‐2011 model years and update the Warranty Information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-09-40-005E (Section 09 Restraints). Important: DO NOT use belt extenders when securing a child restraint. The seat and shoulder belt restraint systems used in all General Motors vehicles have sufficient belt length to accommodate most drivers and passengers. Consequently, requests for belt extensions (extenders) should be minimal. Seat belt extenders are available ONLY IN BLACK for most GM passenger cars and trucks produced in recent years. They are available in two different lengths, 23 cm (9 in) and 38 cm (15 in). They are designed to be coupled with the existing belts in each vehicle. When in use, the extender makes the belt arrangement a "custom fit" and use by anyone else or in another vehicle will lessen or nullify the protection offered by the vehicle's restraint system. For this reason, it is extremely important that the correct length extender be used for the vehicle and occupant intended. Important: Do not use an extender just to make it easier to buckle the safety belt. Use an extender only when you cannot buckle the safety belt without using an extender. Parts Information For part numbers, usage and availability of extenders, see Extension Kit in Group 14.875 (cars) or Group 16.714 (trucks) of the appropriate parts catalog. Saturn retailers should refer to the appropriate model year Parts & Illustration catalog for the vehicle. U.S. Saab dealers should contact the Parts Help line. Canadian Saab dealers should fax requests to Partech Canada. Warranty Information ^ Seat belt extenders are a NO CHARGE item to all GM customers who request them for their specific vehicles. ^ Dealers should not be charging part costs since these extenders are supplied by GM to the dealers. ^ Dealers should not be charging labor costs since the extender can be customer installed. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information Seat Occupant Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Passenger Presence System Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-50-009F Date: December 23, 2010 Subject: Information on Passenger Presence Sensing System (PPS or PSS) Concerns With Custom Upholstery, Accessory Seat Heaters or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Passenger Presence Sensing System Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-50-009E (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Concerns About Safety and Alterations to the Front Passenger Seat Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE THE SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER THE SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT. ANY ALTERATIONS TO SEAT COVERS OR GM ACCESSORIES DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. The front passenger seat in many GM vehicles is equipped with a passenger sensing system that will turn off the right front passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions, such as when an infant or child seat is present. In some vehicles, the passenger sensing system will also turn off the right front passenger's seat mounted side impact airbag. For the system to function properly, sensors are used in the seat to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced (1) by non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or (2) by GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle or (3) by GM covers, upholstery or trim that has been altered by a trim shop, or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device is installed under the seat fabric or between the occupant and the seat fabric. Aftermarket Seat Heaters, Custom Upholstery, and Comfort Enhancing Pads or Devices Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM, USE ONLY SEAT COVERS AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT RELEASED AS GM ACCESSORIES FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVERS OR SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT, OR GM ACCESSORIES RELEASED FOR OTHER VEHICLE APPLICATIONS. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER SEAT ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS MADE NECESSARY BY SUCH USE. Many types of aftermarket accessories are available to customers, upfitting shops, and dealers. Some of these devices sit on top of, or are Velcro(R) strapped to the seat while others such as seat heaters are installed under the seat fabric. Additionally, seat covers made of leather or other materials may have different padding thickness installed that could prevent the Passenger Sensing System from functioning properly. Never alter the vehicle seats. Never add pads or other devices to the seat cushion, as this may interfere with the operation of the Passenger Sensing System and either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag or prevent proper suppression of the passenger air bag. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Mast > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Power Antenna Mast - Lubrication Antenna Mast: Technical Service Bulletins Power Antenna Mast - Lubrication Number : 84-159 Section: 9 Date : July, 1984 Subject: CLEANING AND LUBRICATING POWER ANTENNA MAST SECTIONS Model and Year: ALL MODELS WITH POWER ANTENNA TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Periodic cleaning and lubrication may be necessary to assure proper radio and power antenna operation. The following procedure is recommended: I. To clean (before lubricating) mast sections: A. Actuate antenna to full mast extension. B. Dampen clean cloth with mineral spirits. C. Wipe cloth over antenna mast sections removing any dirt. D. Actuate antenna through one complete cycle (retract and extend). E. Repeat Steps A through D at least two more times. II. To lubricate (after cleaning) mast sections: A. Actuate antenna to full mast extension. B. Dampen clean cloth with oil - GM 9981712 (i.e. light sewing machine oil). C. Wipe cloth over antenna mast sections evenly distributing oil over mast sections surfaces. D. Actuate antenna through one complete cycle (retract and extend). E. Repeat Steps A through D at least two more times. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Antenna, Radio: > 891089A > Mar > 89 > Audio - Poor AM or FM Radio Reception Antenna, Radio: Customer Interest Audio - Poor AM or FM Radio Reception Number: 89-108-9A Section: 9A Date: MARCH, 1989 Subject: POOR AM OR FM RADIO RECEPTION Model and Year: 1980-89 CHEVROLET VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Antenna, Radio: > 891089A > Mar > 89 > Audio - Poor AM or FM Radio Reception > Page 3894 Some Chevrolet models may exhibit a condition of poor AM or FM radio reception. This may be caused by a poor contact on the female terminal of the antenna coaxial cable lead. The illustration contains a four-step procedure to test and repair the female terminal. The opening in the female terminal should range from .120" to .125" in diameter. If the gage passes through freely, the terminal should be repaired as illustrated. Gage sets are available from Kent Moore, tool number J26900-14. For warranty purposes use Labor Operation T6369 at .5 hour for all carlines. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Antenna, Radio: > 891089A > Mar > 89 > Audio - Poor AM or FM Radio Reception Antenna, Radio: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Poor AM or FM Radio Reception Number: 89-108-9A Section: 9A Date: MARCH, 1989 Subject: POOR AM OR FM RADIO RECEPTION Model and Year: 1980-89 CHEVROLET VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Antenna, Radio: > 891089A > Mar > 89 > Audio - Poor AM or FM Radio Reception > Page 3900 Some Chevrolet models may exhibit a condition of poor AM or FM radio reception. This may be caused by a poor contact on the female terminal of the antenna coaxial cable lead. The illustration contains a four-step procedure to test and repair the female terminal. The opening in the female terminal should range from .120" to .125" in diameter. If the gage passes through freely, the terminal should be repaired as illustrated. Gage sets are available from Kent Moore, tool number J26900-14. For warranty purposes use Labor Operation T6369 at .5 hour for all carlines. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Compact Disc Player (CD): > 649601 > Jan > 97 > Compact Disc Players - CD Changer Loading Procedures Compact Disc Player (CD): Customer Interest Compact Disc Players - CD Changer Loading Procedures File In Section: 9 - Accessories Bulletin No.: 64-96-01 Date: January, 1997 INFORMATION Subject: Compact Disc Players - Procedures for Correct Use and Maintenance Models: 1997 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks CD Changer Loading Procedures Because of differences in CD changer loading procedures, some confusion exists regarding this issue. Although correct loading procedures are included with each changer's Owner's Manual, often this information is not available to the dealer service personnel. Verify proper loading when evaluating customer concerns of "CD inoperative". Delco Electronics Product Type Loading Procedure Radio w/intergral CD label side up 6 disc changer (LLAI) label side up 10 disc changer (FMI) label side up 12 disc changer (LLAI) label side down Important: Failure to load magazine/player correctly will disable the operation. Important: Only the 12 disc changer is to be loaded with the label side down. CD Cleaners Avoid use of commercially available CD cleaners. The use of CD cleaners is not recommended and can damage the player's CD mechanism. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compact Disc Player (CD): > 649601 > Jan > 97 > Compact Disc Players - CD Changer Loading Procedures Compact Disc Player (CD): All Technical Service Bulletins Compact Disc Players - CD Changer Loading Procedures File In Section: 9 - Accessories Bulletin No.: 64-96-01 Date: January, 1997 INFORMATION Subject: Compact Disc Players - Procedures for Correct Use and Maintenance Models: 1997 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks CD Changer Loading Procedures Because of differences in CD changer loading procedures, some confusion exists regarding this issue. Although correct loading procedures are included with each changer's Owner's Manual, often this information is not available to the dealer service personnel. Verify proper loading when evaluating customer concerns of "CD inoperative". Delco Electronics Product Type Loading Procedure Radio w/intergral CD label side up 6 disc changer (LLAI) label side up 10 disc changer (FMI) label side up 12 disc changer (LLAI) label side down Important: Failure to load magazine/player correctly will disable the operation. Important: Only the 12 disc changer is to be loaded with the label side down. CD Cleaners Avoid use of commercially available CD cleaners. The use of CD cleaners is not recommended and can damage the player's CD mechanism. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 891089A > Mar > 89 > Audio - Poor AM or FM Radio Reception Radio/Stereo: Customer Interest Audio - Poor AM or FM Radio Reception Number: 89-108-9A Section: 9A Date: MARCH, 1989 Subject: POOR AM OR FM RADIO RECEPTION Model and Year: 1980-89 CHEVROLET VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 891089A > Mar > 89 > Audio - Poor AM or FM Radio Reception > Page 3923 Some Chevrolet models may exhibit a condition of poor AM or FM radio reception. This may be caused by a poor contact on the female terminal of the antenna coaxial cable lead. The illustration contains a four-step procedure to test and repair the female terminal. The opening in the female terminal should range from .120" to .125" in diameter. If the gage passes through freely, the terminal should be repaired as illustrated. Gage sets are available from Kent Moore, tool number J26900-14. For warranty purposes use Labor Operation T6369 at .5 hour for all carlines. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 349212R > Jul > 93 > Audio - Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Diagnosis/ID Technical Service Bulletin # 349212R Date: 930701 General Information Bulletin Number: 93-9-10 Reference Number: 349212R Publish Date: 7/93 Subject: RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE IDENTIFICATION AND DIAGNOSIS Models Affected: 1993 AND PRIOR ALL MODELS The purpose of this information is to help in the identification and diagnosis of Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). RFI symptoms may include noises, interference, static, whines, pops. and poor reception of stations normally receivable by the radio system. These symptoms may also apply to any two-way communications radio installed in the vehicle including HAM, police, fire, business band and cellular phones. Radio Frequency Interference is the undesirable disturbance of an electrical system or device with another electrical system or device. The following charts will help identify: 1. If the symptoms are related to RFI, and 2. The source of the interference. It may be helpful to obtain a copy of the Delco Electronics Audio Systems Diagnostics Guide 1992 edition. This is a manual aimed at identifying, diagnosing, and repairing the radio system. This manual is available from STG; item # 19007.03-1. You may also want to consult your division's service bulletin concerning Radio Telephone Installation Guidelines. This information will identify the proper methods and routing for all installations of two-way communications devices. Questionnaire To begin diagnosing RFI, it is important to understand the nature of the condition and the elements that may be involved. The following questionnaire will help determine vital pieces of information for the diagnostic process. 1. Is the vehicle equipped with any non-factory installed electronics? (This includes: radar detectors, scanners, and hand held communications devices.) 2. If the condition occurs with a non-factory installed radio or telephone, have the Radio Installation Guidelines been followed? 3. Identify the frequencies affected. 4. If the concern is with the entertainment radio, is the tape or CD affected. 5. Identify when the condition occurs: Key off, Key in accessory, Key on engine not running, Engine running, Other - describe. 6. Is the condition intermittent or related to the operation of another electrical device in the vehicle? 7. If the condition is related to a fleet vehicle answer the following: a. Who installed the radio(s)? b. Were the GM installation guidelines followed? c. Is this the only vehicle that demonstrates this condition? d. Do similar vehicles have different antennas? e. Are the antennas mounted in the same location? See RFI Diagnostic Charts that follow. RFI Determination and Identifying Chart This chart is to be used along with the diagnostic charts to help determine if the condition is RFI related, and to help identify what electronic device in the vehicle is interfering with the radio. Make sure the information in the questionnaire is as accurate as possible. You MUST be able to duplicate the customer's condition to diagnose RFI concerns. The process of identifying RFI and the source of an interference is simply the process of elimination. When the source of the interference is disconnected from power, the radio will work properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 349212R > Jul > 93 > Audio - Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Diagnosis/ID > Page 3929 Box 1 Verify that the condition is present, then disconnect any non-factory add-on electronics, (not including the radio) Box 2 If the condition goes away when a particular device is disconnected, reconnect the device to verify it as the source of the interference. If the condition is related to non-factory add-on electronics, consult the GM installation guidelines (See Box 6) as an example of how to add an electronic component to the vehicle's electrical system. Box 3 If the condition is ONLY present with the engine running, disconnect electrical components that are active only with the engine running. The charging system, various solenoids, and relays may be intermittently disconnected while observing the condition. In some cases a component cannot be disconnected while the engine is running. In these cases, the component can be tested independent of the vehicle (i.e. fuel injectors). For further tips on engine noise diagnostics refer to the Delco Sound Service Guide, Engine Noise Chart. Box 4 If the condition can be eliminated and the interference isolated to a component, determine if a bulletin has been published concerning this particular condition. Contact your Technical Assistance Group for additional information if no bulletins are found. Box 5 If the concern cannot be eliminated by testing in any key position and by disconnecting fuses and components, the condition most likely is not RFI. Refer to the Delco Sound Service Guide or the vehicle service manual for further diagnostic tips and check for any published bulletins. If the concern cannot be identified or eliminated, contact your Technical Assistance Group for further assistance. Box 6 The "Installation Guidelines for Aftermarket Accessories" for all model years and all trucks and carlines are located in the following Service Bulletin 91-8-2. Also, there may be separate installation guidelines for cellular phones. A search for service bulletins may be necessary to find these. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 349212R > Jul > 93 > Audio - Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Diagnosis/ID > Page 3930 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 349212R > Jul > 93 > Audio - Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Diagnosis/ID > Page 3931 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 349212R > Jul > 93 > Audio - Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Diagnosis/ID > Page 3932 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 349212R > Jul > 93 > Audio - Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Diagnosis/ID > Page 3933 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 891089A > Mar > 89 > Audio - Poor AM or FM Radio Reception Radio/Stereo: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio - Poor AM or FM Radio Reception Number: 89-108-9A Section: 9A Date: MARCH, 1989 Subject: POOR AM OR FM RADIO RECEPTION Model and Year: 1980-89 CHEVROLET VEHICLES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 891089A > Mar > 89 > Audio - Poor AM or FM Radio Reception > Page 3938 Some Chevrolet models may exhibit a condition of poor AM or FM radio reception. This may be caused by a poor contact on the female terminal of the antenna coaxial cable lead. The illustration contains a four-step procedure to test and repair the female terminal. The opening in the female terminal should range from .120" to .125" in diameter. If the gage passes through freely, the terminal should be repaired as illustrated. Gage sets are available from Kent Moore, tool number J26900-14. For warranty purposes use Labor Operation T6369 at .5 hour for all carlines. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 8445 > Dec > 83 > Radios/Electronics - Static Electricity Damage Radio/Stereo: All Technical Service Bulletins Radios/Electronics - Static Electricity Damage Number: 84-45 Section: 9 (XII) Date: Dec., 1983 Subject: STATIC ELECTRICITY DAMAGE TO RADIOS AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Model and Year: 1982-84 ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The integrated circuits used in todays radios, and other electronic products, are extremely susceptible to damage by static electricity. Delco Electronics requires all authorized A/C Delco Repair Stations to install staticprotected work stations. We have heard that some Delco radios are being damaged from static electricity where some dealers sublet to repair shops that do not have static protected work stations. Static damage repairs are more difficult to perform because more than one integrated circuit has been damaged. We therefore encourage dealers to sublet Delco radios and other electronic components to only those shops that have static protected work shops or provide protection from static damage in some manner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 349212R > Jul > 93 > Audio - Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Diagnosis/ID Technical Service Bulletin # 349212R Date: 930701 General Information Bulletin Number: 93-9-10 Reference Number: 349212R Publish Date: 7/93 Subject: RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE IDENTIFICATION AND DIAGNOSIS Models Affected: 1993 AND PRIOR ALL MODELS The purpose of this information is to help in the identification and diagnosis of Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). RFI symptoms may include noises, interference, static, whines, pops. and poor reception of stations normally receivable by the radio system. These symptoms may also apply to any two-way communications radio installed in the vehicle including HAM, police, fire, business band and cellular phones. Radio Frequency Interference is the undesirable disturbance of an electrical system or device with another electrical system or device. The following charts will help identify: 1. If the symptoms are related to RFI, and 2. The source of the interference. It may be helpful to obtain a copy of the Delco Electronics Audio Systems Diagnostics Guide 1992 edition. This is a manual aimed at identifying, diagnosing, and repairing the radio system. This manual is available from STG; item # 19007.03-1. You may also want to consult your division's service bulletin concerning Radio Telephone Installation Guidelines. This information will identify the proper methods and routing for all installations of two-way communications devices. Questionnaire To begin diagnosing RFI, it is important to understand the nature of the condition and the elements that may be involved. The following questionnaire will help determine vital pieces of information for the diagnostic process. 1. Is the vehicle equipped with any non-factory installed electronics? (This includes: radar detectors, scanners, and hand held communications devices.) 2. If the condition occurs with a non-factory installed radio or telephone, have the Radio Installation Guidelines been followed? 3. Identify the frequencies affected. 4. If the concern is with the entertainment radio, is the tape or CD affected. 5. Identify when the condition occurs: Key off, Key in accessory, Key on engine not running, Engine running, Other - describe. 6. Is the condition intermittent or related to the operation of another electrical device in the vehicle? 7. If the condition is related to a fleet vehicle answer the following: a. Who installed the radio(s)? b. Were the GM installation guidelines followed? c. Is this the only vehicle that demonstrates this condition? d. Do similar vehicles have different antennas? e. Are the antennas mounted in the same location? See RFI Diagnostic Charts that follow. RFI Determination and Identifying Chart This chart is to be used along with the diagnostic charts to help determine if the condition is RFI related, and to help identify what electronic device in the vehicle is interfering with the radio. Make sure the information in the questionnaire is as accurate as possible. You MUST be able to duplicate the customer's condition to diagnose RFI concerns. The process of identifying RFI and the source of an interference is simply the process of elimination. When the source of the interference is disconnected from power, the radio will work properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 349212R > Jul > 93 > Audio - Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Diagnosis/ID > Page 3948 Box 1 Verify that the condition is present, then disconnect any non-factory add-on electronics, (not including the radio) Box 2 If the condition goes away when a particular device is disconnected, reconnect the device to verify it as the source of the interference. If the condition is related to non-factory add-on electronics, consult the GM installation guidelines (See Box 6) as an example of how to add an electronic component to the vehicle's electrical system. Box 3 If the condition is ONLY present with the engine running, disconnect electrical components that are active only with the engine running. The charging system, various solenoids, and relays may be intermittently disconnected while observing the condition. In some cases a component cannot be disconnected while the engine is running. In these cases, the component can be tested independent of the vehicle (i.e. fuel injectors). For further tips on engine noise diagnostics refer to the Delco Sound Service Guide, Engine Noise Chart. Box 4 If the condition can be eliminated and the interference isolated to a component, determine if a bulletin has been published concerning this particular condition. Contact your Technical Assistance Group for additional information if no bulletins are found. Box 5 If the concern cannot be eliminated by testing in any key position and by disconnecting fuses and components, the condition most likely is not RFI. Refer to the Delco Sound Service Guide or the vehicle service manual for further diagnostic tips and check for any published bulletins. If the concern cannot be identified or eliminated, contact your Technical Assistance Group for further assistance. Box 6 The "Installation Guidelines for Aftermarket Accessories" for all model years and all trucks and carlines are located in the following Service Bulletin 91-8-2. Also, there may be separate installation guidelines for cellular phones. A search for service bulletins may be necessary to find these. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 349212R > Jul > 93 > Audio - Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Diagnosis/ID > Page 3949 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 349212R > Jul > 93 > Audio - Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Diagnosis/ID > Page 3950 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 349212R > Jul > 93 > Audio - Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Diagnosis/ID > Page 3951 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 349212R > Jul > 93 > Audio - Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Diagnosis/ID > Page 3952 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 8445 > Dec > 83 > Radios/Electronics - Static Electricity Damage Radio/Stereo: All Technical Service Bulletins Radios/Electronics - Static Electricity Damage Number: 84-45 Section: 9 (XII) Date: Dec., 1983 Subject: STATIC ELECTRICITY DAMAGE TO RADIOS AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS Model and Year: 1982-84 ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The integrated circuits used in todays radios, and other electronic products, are extremely susceptible to damage by static electricity. Delco Electronics requires all authorized A/C Delco Repair Stations to install staticprotected work stations. We have heard that some Delco radios are being damaged from static electricity where some dealers sublet to repair shops that do not have static protected work stations. Static damage repairs are more difficult to perform because more than one integrated circuit has been damaged. We therefore encourage dealers to sublet Delco radios and other electronic components to only those shops that have static protected work shops or provide protection from static damage in some manner. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3957 Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair When installing radio, be sure to adjust antenna trimmer for peak reception. C, K, R & V MODELS 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove radio control knobs and bezels. 3. Remove nuts and washers from control shafts. 4. On AM radio equipped vehicles, remove radio support bracket stud nut and washer. 5. On AM-FM equipped vehicles, remove radio support bracket to instrument panel attaching screws. 6. Lift upward on rear edge of radio, then push radio forward until control shafts clear instrument panel. 7. Disconnect power feed, speaker and antenna lead, then remove radio. 8. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3967 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3968 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3969 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3975 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3976 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3977 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3986 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3987 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3988 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules Relay Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-06-03-004D Date: December 08, 2010 Subject: Intermittent No Crank/No Start, No Module Communication, MIL, Warning Lights, Vehicle Messages or DTCs Set by Various Control Modules - Diagnosing and Repairing Fretting Corrosion (Disconnect Affected Connector and Apply Dielectric Lubricant) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Attention: This repair can be applied to ANY electrical connection including, but not limited to: lighting, body electrical, in-line connections, powertrain control sensors, etc. DO NOT over apply lubricant to the point where it prevents the full engagement of sealed connectors. A light coating on the terminal surfaces is sufficient to correct the condition. Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the Attention statement and add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-06-03-004C (Section 06 Engine/Propulsion System). Condition Some customers may comment on any of the following conditions: - An intermittent no crank/no start - Intermittent malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illumination - Intermittent service lamp illumination - Intermittent service message(s) being displayed The technician may determine that he is unable to duplicate the intermittent condition. Cause This condition may be caused by a buildup of nonconductive insulating oxidized debris known as fretting corrosion, occurring between two electrical contact surfaces of the connection or connector. This may be caused by any of the following conditions: - Vibration - Thermal cycling - Poor connection/terminal retention - Micro motion - A connector, component or wiring harness not properly secured resulting in movement On low current signal circuits this condition may cause high resistance, resulting in intermittent connections. On high current power circuits this condition may cause permanent increases in the resistance and may cause a device to become inoperative. Representative List of Control Modules and Components The following is only a representative list of control modules and components that may be affected by this connection or connector condition and DOES NOT include every possible module or component for every vehicle. - Blower Control Module - Body Control Module (BCM) - Communication Interface Module (CIM) - Cooling Fan Control Module - Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM) - Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module (EBTCM) - Electronic Suspension Control (ESC) Module - Engine Control Module (ECM) - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3994 - HVAC Actuator - Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) - Any AIR BAG module - Seatbelt Lap Anchor Pretensioner - Seatbelt Retractor Pretensioner - An SIR system connection or connector condition resulting in the following DTCs being set: B0015, B0016, B0019, B0020, B0022, or B0023 - Powertrain Control Module (PCM) - Remote Control Door Lock Receiver (RCDLR) - Transmission Control Module (TCM) Correction Important DO NOT replace the control module, wiring or component for the following conditions: - The condition is intermittent and cannot be duplicated. - The condition is present and by disconnecting and reconnecting the connector the condition can no longer be duplicated. Use the following procedure to correct the conditions listed above. 1. Install a scan tool and perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle. Retrieve and record any existing history or current DTCs from all of the control modules (refer to SI). ‹› If any DTC(s) are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). ‹› If DTCs are not set, refer to Symptoms - Vehicle to identify the connector(s) of the control module/component which may be causing the condition (refer to SI). 2. When identified, use the appropriate DTC Diagnostics, Symptoms, Schematics, Component Connector End Views and Component Locator documents to locate and disconnect the affected harness connector(s) which are causing the condition. Note Fretting corrosion looks like little dark smudges on electrical terminals and appear where the actual electrical contact is being made. In less severe cases it may be unable to be seen or identified without the use of a magnifying glass. Important DO NOT apply an excessive amount of dielectric lubricant to the connectors as shown, as hydrolock may result when attempting to mate the connectors. Use ONLY a clean nylon brush that is dedicated to the repair of the conditions in this bulletin. 3. With a one-inch nylon bristle brush, apply dielectric lubricant to both the module/component side and the harness side of the affected connector(s). 4. Reconnect the affected connector(s) and wipe away any excess lubricant that may be present. 5. Attempt to duplicate the condition by using the following information: - DTC Diagnostic Procedure - Circuit/System Description - Conditions for Running the DTC - Conditions for Setting the DTC - Diagnostic Aids - Circuit/System Verification ‹› If the condition cannot be duplicated, the repair is complete. ‹› If the condition can be duplicated, then follow the appropriate DTC, Symptom or Circuit/System Testing procedure (refer to SI). Repair Order Documentation Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3995 Important The following information MUST be documented on the repair order. Failure to do so may result in a chargeback. - Customer vehicle condition. - Was a Service Lamp or Service Message illuminated? If yes, specify which Service Lamp or Service Message. - Was a DTC(s) set? If yes, specify which DTC(s) were set. - After following the procedure contained within this bulletin, could the condition be duplicated? ‹› If the condition was not duplicated, then document the affected module/component connector name and number on the repair order. - If the condition was duplicated after the procedure contained within this bulletin was followed, and additional diagnosis led to the replacement of a module or component, the SI Document ID Number MUST be written on the repair order. Parts Information Alternate Distributor For All of North America Note NyoGel(R) 760G Lubricant* is equivalent to GMSPO P/N 12377900, and P/N 10953529 (Canada), specified for use to correct the condition in this bulletin. *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products/materials. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for, or assume any responsibility for the products or material from this firm or for any such items that may be available from other sources. Warranty Information (excluding Saab Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to: Warranty Information (Saab Models) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relay Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Relay Module: > 09-06-03-004D > Dec > 10 > Electrical MIL ON/DTC's Set By Various Control Modules > Page 3996 For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the appropriate/closest labor operation depending upon the module/component connection that the dielectric lubricant was applied to refer to the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Light Duty Trailer Towing Package Trailer Wiring Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Light Duty Trailer Towing Package > Page 4002 Junction Blocks Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Front Bumper Reinforcement: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Bulletin No.: 07-08-63-001 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Repair of Polypropylene Energy Absorbers Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 63-20-02 (Section 8 - Body and Accessories). Because the energy absorbers are relatively low in cost to replace, it is now more cost efficient to replace the energy absorbers whenever they are damaged. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Polypropylene Energy Absorber Replacement Bulletin No.: 07-08-63-001 Date: April 17, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: Information on Repair of Polypropylene Energy Absorbers Models: 2007 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to change the repair information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 63-20-02 (Section 8 - Body and Accessories). Because the energy absorbers are relatively low in cost to replace, it is now more cost efficient to replace the energy absorbers whenever they are damaged. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Side Window Chipping Information Front Door Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Side Window Chipping Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-64-001B Date: October 20, 2009 Subject: Information on Side Door Window Glass Chipping Caused by Hanging Vehicle Key Lock Box Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicles and model years and to include all types of door window glass. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-64-001A (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). - In several warranty parts review cases, side door window glass was observed with a chip or chips on the top side of the window glass. Dealer contacts confirmed that they use a vehicle key lock box on the front side door window glass. - A random selection of side door glass returns will be conducted to confirm adherence. If a side door glass is discovered with a chip or chips in the location previously described, the side door glass will be returned to the dealership for debit. Example of Side Door Glass - DO NOT place a vehicle key lock box on a side door window glass. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Side Window Chipping Information > Page 4030 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lock Cylinders - Inoperative/Proper Lubricant Usage Fuel Door Lock: Technical Service Bulletins Lock Cylinders - Inoperative/Proper Lubricant Usage 86-15 10 DEC., 1985 Subject: LUBRICATION OF LOCK CYLINDER-DOOR, DECK LID AND FUEL DOOR Model and Year: ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Door, deck lid and fuel filler lock cylinders are being returned from the field, due to customer comments of a binding or inoperative condition which is due to lack of lubrication, caused by the use of penetrating oils. These penetrating oils do not lubricate the cylinders but wash out the factory installed lubricant. Penetrating oils are not to be used in any lock cylinders. Also materials, including silicone, which contain chlorinated propellants are not to be used on black plastic cylinders. The chlorine attacks the plastic. Further, lock de-icers which contain alcohol to remove the moisture from the cylinders, additionally tend to cut the existing lubricants. To maintain proper lubrication of lock cylinders it is recommended that a light oil or graphite lubricant be used such as LOCK-EASE* or equivalent, and particularly so if a lock de-icer was previously necessitated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lock Cylinders - Inoperative/Proper Lubricant Usage Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Technical Service Bulletins Lock Cylinders - Inoperative/Proper Lubricant Usage 86-15 10 DEC., 1985 Subject: LUBRICATION OF LOCK CYLINDER-DOOR, DECK LID AND FUEL DOOR Model and Year: ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Door, deck lid and fuel filler lock cylinders are being returned from the field, due to customer comments of a binding or inoperative condition which is due to lack of lubrication, caused by the use of penetrating oils. These penetrating oils do not lubricate the cylinders but wash out the factory installed lubricant. Penetrating oils are not to be used in any lock cylinders. Also materials, including silicone, which contain chlorinated propellants are not to be used on black plastic cylinders. The chlorine attacks the plastic. Further, lock de-icers which contain alcohol to remove the moisture from the cylinders, additionally tend to cut the existing lubricants. To maintain proper lubrication of lock cylinders it is recommended that a light oil or graphite lubricant be used such as LOCK-EASE* or equivalent, and particularly so if a lock de-icer was previously necessitated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > 06-08-111-004B - BULLETIN CANCELLATION NOTIFICATION Body Emblem: Technical Service Bulletins 06-08-111-004B - BULLETIN CANCELLATION NOTIFICATION TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 06-08-111-004B Date: September 25, 2009 Subject: Information on Discoloration, Blistering, Peeling or Erosion of Various Exterior Emblems Including Chevy Bowtie (Bulletin Cancelled) Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2009 HUMMER H3 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being cancelled. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-111-004A (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). This bulletin is being cancelled. The information is no longer applicable. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Squeeze Type Resistance Spot Welding/Equipment Frame: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Squeeze Type Resistance Spot Welding/Equipment INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 03-08-98-002B Date: June 30, 2010 Subject: Squeeze Type Resistance Spot Welding/Equipment Models: 2011 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2010 HUMMER H2, H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 03-08-98-002A (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). This bulletin provides guidelines for repair shops that wish to use squeeze type resistance spot welding (or simply, spot welding) as an alternative to MIG plug welding when performing collision repair procedures. The process of spot welding for attaching body panels and components has been around for many years and is similar to the production welding process used in assembly plants. Spot welding may be applicable in similar situations that are currently MIG plug welded. The following are some of the benefits of spot welding: - Less heat or burn damage - Less damage to corrosion protection - Drilling of holes not required - Replication of the production weld appearance Applicable components for this technology may be panels or components with flanges that are accessible with arms and tips supplied by the equipment manufacturer. Welds from this equipment should be applied on a one-for-one basis, next to the production welds. Here are some of the important factors in proper welding with this equipment. Important Proper use and safety training for each user of the equipment is a must. - Use equipment from companies that are able to produce welds that meet industry standards for size and strength. Equipment most likely to meet those standards at this time would be "inverter" technology and include the following suppliers (other suppliers may have comparable equipment): - Pro Spot (PR2000) - Elektron (M100) - Blackhawk (WEL700) - Car-O-Liner (CR500) For specific information about this and other equipment, call GM Dealer Equipment. - Ensure that the building power source is capable of meeting the equipment manufacturer's power requirement specifications. For example, fuse 60 amp, 208-230 V single or 3-phase, using supply wire of sufficient gauge to carry the current load. Consult with a qualified electrician for wiring assistance. - Prepare and perform sample welds for destructive testing made from similar materials. Perform this operation for each vehicle repaired and prior to actual repair. - Proper equipment maintenance - Proper weld tip alignment and maintenance - Ensure that metal flanges are clean and conform to each other A more complete description of these practices and standards can be found in the following publications: - SAE J-2667, Surface Vehicles Recommended Practice, http://www.sae.org - AWS D8.7-88, Recommended Practices Automotive Weld Quality - Resistance Spot Welding, http://www.aws.org/w/a/ - AWS D8.9-97, Recommended Practices for Test Methods for Evaluating the Resistance Spot Welding Behavior of Automotive Sheet Steels, http://www.aws.com Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body Squeeze Type Resistance Spot Welding/Equipment > Page 4050 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-110-001 Date: March 30, 2010 Subject: Information on Proper Use of Floor Mats Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2003-2009 HUMMER H2 2006-2010 HUMMER H3, H3T 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X GM's carpeted and all-weather (rubber) floor mats are especially designed for use in specific GM vehicles. Using floor mats that were not designed for the specific vehicle or using them incorrectly may cause interference with the accelerator or brake pedal. Please review the following safety guidelines regarding proper driver's side floor mat usage with the customer. Warning If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the accelerator pedal and/or brake pedal. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal. - Do not flip the driver's floor mat over (in an effort to keep the floor mat clean) - Do not place anything on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. carpet remnant, towel) - Do not place another mat on top of the driver's floor mat (e.g. do not place all-weather rubber mats over carpeted floor mats) - Only use floor mats that are designed specifically for your vehicle - When using replacement mats, make certain the mats do not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal before driving the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with a floor mat retaining pin(s) or clip(s), make certain the mat is installed correctly and according to the instructions. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 4056 After installing floor mats, make certain they cannot move and do not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedals. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 4057 Carpet: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-89-027E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and refine the instructions. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-89-027D (Section 00 - General Information). Vehicle Odor Elimination General Motors offers a product that may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator is a non-toxic, biodegradable odor remover. This odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks (as well as customer created odors, i.e. smoke). You may use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet and sound deadening materials. It may also be induced into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts (for the control of non-bacterial related odors). Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be sold as or considered an air freshener. Product action may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers with allergies who are sensitive to perfumes. How to Use This Product GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator may be sprayed on in a ready-to-use formula or used in steam cleaners as an additive with carpet shampoo. This water-based, odorless product is safe for all vehicle interiors. Do not wet or soak any interior surface that plain water would cause to deteriorate, as this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of, or render GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator inert. Note: Complete eight page treatment sheets are enclosed within each case of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. These treatment instructions range from simple vehicle odor elimination to full step by step procedures for odor removal from water leaks. If lost, contact 800-977-4145 to get a replacement set faxed or e-mailed to your dealership. Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle, but additional help is available. If you encounter a difficult to eliminate or reoccurring odor, you may call 1-800-955-8591 (in Canada, 1-800-977-4145) to obtain additional information and usage suggestions. Important: This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures (in cases such as a water leak) to first eliminate the root cause of the odor, and then the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. Vehicle Waterleak Odor Elimination STEP ONE: Confirm that all water leaks have been repaired. Determine what areas of the vehicle were water soaked or wet. Components with visible mold/mildew staining should be replaced. Isolate the odor source inside the vehicle. Often an odor can be isolated to an area or component of the vehicle interior by careful evaluation. Odor evaluation may need to be performed by multiple persons. Another method of isolating an odor source is to remove and segregate interior trim and components. Plastic sheeting or drop cloths can be used to confine seats, headliners, etc. to assist in evaluation and diagnoses. If appropriate the vehicle and interior trim should be evaluated separately to determine if the odor stays with the vehicle or the interior components. Odors that stay with the vehicle may be isolated to insulating and sound deadening materials (i.e. water leak at the windshield or standing water in the front foot well area caused mold/mildew to form on the bulkhead or kick panel sound deadening pads. If the interior is removed the floor pan and primed/painted surfaces should be treated with bleach/soap solution, rinsed with clean water and dried. Interior surfaces should then be treated with GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product before reinstalling carpet or reassembling. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 4058 The GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product is an effective odor elimination product when used properly. It must come into direct contact with the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the root cause of the odor. Some procedures for use after odor root cause correction are: STEP TWO: ^ Use the trigger spray head. ^ Put a drop of dish soap the size of a quarter in the bottom of a bottle. ^ Add 8 oz. of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator (1 cup) to the dish soap and top off the bottle with tap water. ^ This formula should be used on hard surfaces (dash, interior plastic molding, and floor pan) STEP THREE: The third step to neutralizing the vehicle is a light to medium treatment of all carpeting and upholstered seats with the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula and a wide fan spray setting (at full strength) (i.e.: carpeting on the driver's side requires 4-5 triggers pulls for coverage). The headliner and trunk should be sprayed next. Lightly brushing the formula into the carpeting and upholstery is a recommended step for deep odor problems. The dash and all hard surfaces should be sprayed with dish soap/water mixture. Let stand for 1-2 minutes then wipe off the surface. STEP FOUR: (vehicle ventilation system treatment) The ventilation system is generally the last step in the treatment of the vehicle. a. Spray the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula into all dash vents. (1-2 trigger pulls per vent). b. Start the vehicle and turn the vehicle fan on high cool (not A/C setting). c. Spray the formula (10 trigger pulls) into the outside fresh air intake vent (cowl at base of windshield) d. Enter the vehicle after 1 minute and wipe off the excess formula spurting out of the dash vents. e. Smell the air coming from the dash vents. If odors are still present, spray another 5 triggers into the cowl, wait another minute and smell the results. Once you have obtained a fresh, clean smell coming from the vents, turn the system to the A/C re-circulation setting. Roll up the windows, spray 3-5 pumps into the right lower IP area and let the vehicle run with the fan set on high for 5-7 minutes. Please follow this diagnosis process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved without completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If these steps do not resolve the condition, please contact GM TAC for further diagnostic assistance. Additional Suggestions to Increase Customer Satisfaction Here are some additional ideas to benefit your dealership and to generate greater customer enthusiasm for this product. ^ Keep this product on-hand for both the Service Department and the Used Car lot. Add value to your used car trades; treat loaner and demo cars during service and at final sale to eliminate smoke, pet, and other common odors offensive to customers. Make deodorizing a vehicle part of your normal vehicle detailing service. ^ Consider including GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator as a give-away item with new vehicle purchases. Many dealers give away as "gifts" various cleaning supplies at time of delivery. GM Odor Eliminator is one of a few products GM offers that has as many uses in the home as in the vehicle. Customers may find this product can be used for a host of recreational activities associated with their new vehicle, such as deodorizing a boat they tow, or a camper. ^ GM Odor Eliminator and many of the GM Vehicle Care products offer you the chance to increase dealership traffic as these superior quality products cannot be purchased in stores. Many Dealerships have product displays at the parts counter. Consider additional displays in the Customer Service Lounge, the Showroom and at the Service Desk or Cashier Window. Many customers who purchase vehicles and receive regular maintenance at your dealership may never visit the parts counter, and subsequently are not exposed to the variety and value that these products offer. Parts Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Proper Use of Floor Mats > Page 4059 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Door Lock Cylinder: > 9313310 > Mar > 93 > Door Locks - Binding or Sticking or Key Hard to Insert Door Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Door Locks - Binding or Sticking or Key Hard to Insert Number: 93-133-10 Section: 10 Date: MARCH 1993 Corporate Bulletin No.: 1341070R ASE No.: B1 Subject: DOOR LOCK CYLINDERS (RECOMMENDED LUBRICATION) Model and Year: ALL 1993 AND PREVIOUS MODEL CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN 92-41-10, DATED NOV. 1991. THE 1993 MODEL YEAR HAS BEEN ADDED AS WELL AS A NOTE. PLEASE DISCARD ALL COPIES OF 92-41-10. Customer comments of binding/sticking door lock cylinders, or keys that are hard to insert or extract may be corrected in many cases by applying the proper lubrication. The recommended materials for lubricating these components are (in order of preference): - GM # 12345120 Multi purpose lubricant (9 oz. spray) or # 12345121 (12 oz.). - 5 W 30 Motor Oil - GM # 1052276 or 1052277 spray type Silicone (4.5 oz. or 12 oz. cans). Penetrating oil type lubricants (such as GM # 1052949 or 1052950, WD-40 lubricants) ARE NOT RECOMMENDED because they wash out the original lubrication and eventually evaporate, leaving little or no lubricating material. However, if these type materials are used to "unfreeze" or loosen lock cylinder components, refer to steps 2 through 4 listed below for the proper methods of lubricating. NOTE: DO NOT REPLACE THE DOOR LOCK CYLINDERS UNTIL AFTER THE LUBRICATING MATERIALS HAVE BEEN USED AND THE CYLINDER REMAINS FROZEN/BOUND. If door lock cylinders require replacement for any reason, apply a coating of GM # 12345120 Multi purpose Lubricant to the inside of the lock case and the cylinder keyway prior to assembling and installing the cylinder. Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Frozen cylinders due to cold weather may be repaired using the following procedure: 1. Apply heat to the cylinder area with a heat gun while being careful not to damage the painted surfaces. 2. Hold the shutter door open with a paper clip (or similar item) and force air into the cylinder using compressed air and a blow gun attachment. 3. While holding the shutter door open, inject a small amount of lubricant (see above recommendations) into the cylinder. 4. Work the key into the cylinder several times and wipe any excess lubrication residue from the key. Use applicable Labor Time Number and Time allowance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Door Lock Cylinder: > 9313310 > Mar > 93 > Door Locks Binding or Sticking or Key Hard to Insert Door Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Door Locks - Binding or Sticking or Key Hard to Insert Number: 93-133-10 Section: 10 Date: MARCH 1993 Corporate Bulletin No.: 1341070R ASE No.: B1 Subject: DOOR LOCK CYLINDERS (RECOMMENDED LUBRICATION) Model and Year: ALL 1993 AND PREVIOUS MODEL CARS AND TRUCKS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN 92-41-10, DATED NOV. 1991. THE 1993 MODEL YEAR HAS BEEN ADDED AS WELL AS A NOTE. PLEASE DISCARD ALL COPIES OF 92-41-10. Customer comments of binding/sticking door lock cylinders, or keys that are hard to insert or extract may be corrected in many cases by applying the proper lubrication. The recommended materials for lubricating these components are (in order of preference): - GM # 12345120 Multi purpose lubricant (9 oz. spray) or # 12345121 (12 oz.). - 5 W 30 Motor Oil - GM # 1052276 or 1052277 spray type Silicone (4.5 oz. or 12 oz. cans). Penetrating oil type lubricants (such as GM # 1052949 or 1052950, WD-40 lubricants) ARE NOT RECOMMENDED because they wash out the original lubrication and eventually evaporate, leaving little or no lubricating material. However, if these type materials are used to "unfreeze" or loosen lock cylinder components, refer to steps 2 through 4 listed below for the proper methods of lubricating. NOTE: DO NOT REPLACE THE DOOR LOCK CYLINDERS UNTIL AFTER THE LUBRICATING MATERIALS HAVE BEEN USED AND THE CYLINDER REMAINS FROZEN/BOUND. If door lock cylinders require replacement for any reason, apply a coating of GM # 12345120 Multi purpose Lubricant to the inside of the lock case and the cylinder keyway prior to assembling and installing the cylinder. Parts are currently available from GMSPO. Frozen cylinders due to cold weather may be repaired using the following procedure: 1. Apply heat to the cylinder area with a heat gun while being careful not to damage the painted surfaces. 2. Hold the shutter door open with a paper clip (or similar item) and force air into the cylinder using compressed air and a blow gun attachment. 3. While holding the shutter door open, inject a small amount of lubricant (see above recommendations) into the cylinder. 4. Work the key into the cylinder several times and wipe any excess lubrication residue from the key. Use applicable Labor Time Number and Time allowance. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information Key: Technical Service Bulletins Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-00-89-010 Date: May 27, 2010 Subject: Key Code Security Rules and Information on GM KeyCode Look-Up Application (Canada Only) Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saturn and Saab 2002 and Prior Isuzu Attention: This bulletin has been created to address potential issues and questions regarding KeyCode security. This bulletin should be read by all parties involved in KeyCode activity, including dealer operator, partner security coordinator, sales, service and parts departments. A copy of this bulletin should be printed and maintained in the parts department for use as a reference. Important U.S. dealers should refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 10-00-89-009. Where Are Key Codes Located? General Motors provides access to KeyCodes through three sources when a vehicle is delivered to a dealer. Vehicle KeyCodes are located on the original vehicle invoice to the dealership. There is a small white bar coded tag sent with most new vehicles that also has the key code printed on it. Dealerships should make a practice of comparing the tag's keycode numbers to the keycode listed on the invoice. Any discrepancy should be reported immediately to the GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk. Remember to remove the key tag prior to showing vehicles to potential customers. The third source for Key codes is through the GM KeyCode Look-Up feature within the OEConnection D2DLink application. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 previous model years from the current model year. When a vehicle is received by the dealership, care should be taken to safeguard the original vehicle invoice and KeyCode tag provided with the vehicle. Potential customers should not have access to the invoice or this KeyCode tag prior to the sale being completed. After a sale has been completed, the KeyCode information belongs to the customer and General Motors. Tip Only the original invoice contains key code information, a re-printed invoice does not. GM KeyCode Look-Up Application for GM of Canada Dealers All dealers should review the General Motors of Canada KeyCode Look-Up Policies and Procedures (Service Policy & Procedures Manual Section 3.1.6 "Replacement of VIN plates & keys"). Please note that the KeyCode Access site is restricted. Only authorized users should be using this application. Please see your Parts Manager for site authorized users. KeyCode Look-Up currently goes back 17 years from current model year. Important notes about security: - Users may not access the system from multiple computers simultaneously. - Users may only request one KeyCode at a time. - KeyCode information will only be available on the screen for 2 minutes. - Each user is personally responsible for maintaining and protecting their password. - Never share your password with others. - User Id's are suspended after 6 consecutive failed attempts. - User Id's are disabled if not used for 90 days. - Processes must be in place for regular dealership reviews. - The Parts Manager (or assigned management) must have processes in place for employee termination or life change events. Upon termination individuals access must be turned off immediately and access should be re-evaluated upon any position changes within the dealership. - If you think your password or ID security has been breached, contact Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 4079 Each user will be required to accept the following agreement each time the KeyCode application is used. Key Code User Agreement - Key codes are proprietary information belonging to General Motors Corporation and to the vehicle owner. - Unauthorized access to, or use of, key code information is unlawful and may subject the user to criminal and civil penalties. - This information should be treated as strictly confidential and should not be disclosed to anyone unless authorized. I will ensure that the following information is obtained prior to releasing any Key Code information: 1. Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) 2. Registration or other proof of ownership. Registration should have normal markings from the Province that issued the registration and possibly the receipt for payment recorded as well. Important - GM takes this agreement seriously. Each user must be certain of vehicle ownership before giving out key codes. - When the ownership of the vehicle is in doubt, dealership personnel should not provide the information. Key code requests should never be received via a fax or the internet and key codes should never be provided to anyone in this manner. A face to face contact with the owner of the vehicle is the expected manner that dealers will use to release a key code or as otherwise stipulated in this bulletin or other materials. - Key codes should NEVER be sent via a fax or the internet. - Each Dealership should create a permanent file to document all KeyCode Look Up transactions. Requests should be filed by VIN and in each folder retain copies of the following: - Government issued picture ID (Drivers License) - Registration or other proof of ownership. - Copy of the paid customer receipt which has the name of the employee who cut and sold the key to the customer. - Do not put yourself or your Dealership in the position of needing to "explain" a KeyCode Look Up to either GM or law enforcement officials. - Dealership Management has the ability to review all KeyCode Look-Up transactions. - Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) for GM of Canada Dealers How do I request a KeyCode for customer owned vehicle that is not registered? Scrapped, salvaged or stored vehicles that do not have a current registration should still have the ownership verified by requesting the vehicle title, current insurance policy and / or current lien holder information from the customers financing source. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. In these cases, a short description of the vehicle (scrapped, salvaged, etc.) and the dealership location should be kept on file. Any clarifying explanation should be entered into the comments field. How do I document a KeyCode request for a vehicle that is being repossessed? The repossessor must document ownership of the vehicle by providing a court ordered repossession order and lien-holder documents prior to providing key code information. Copies of the repossessors Drivers License and a business card should be retained by the dealership for documentation. What do I do if the registration information is locked in the vehicle? Every effort should be made to obtain complete information for each request. Each Dealership will have to decide on a case by case basis if enough information is available to verify the customer's ownership of the vehicle. Other forms of documentation include vehicle title, insurance policy, and or current lien information from the customers financing source. Dealership Management must be involved in any request without complete information. If you cannot determine if the customer is the owner of the vehicle, do not provide the key code information. Can I get a print out of the information on the screen? It is important to note that the Key Code Look Up Search Results contain sensitive and/or proprietary information. For this reason GM recommends against printing it. If the Search Results must be printed, store and/or dispose of the printed copy properly to minimize the risk of improper or illegal use. Who in the dealership has access to the KeyCode application? Dealership Parts Manager (or assigned management) will determine, and control, who is authorized to access the KeyCode Look Up application. However, we anticipate that dealership parts and service management will be the primary users of the application. The KeyCode Look Up application automatically tracks each user activity session. Information tracked by the system includes: User name, User ID, all other entered data and the date/time of access. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 4080 What if I input the VIN incorrectly? If an incorrect VIN is entered into the system (meaning that the system does not recognize the VIN or that the VIN has been entered incorrectly) the system will return an error message. If I am an authorized user for the KeyCode application, can I access the application from home? Yes. What if I suspect key code misuse? Your dealership should communicate the proper procedures for requesting key codes. Any suspicious activity either within the dealership or externally should be reported to Dealer Systems Support at 1-800-265-0573 or GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. Whose key codes can I access through the system? At this time the following Canadian vehicle codes are available through the system: Chevrolet, Cadillac, Buick, Pontiac, GMC, HUMMER (H2 and H3 only), Oldsmobile, Saturn, Saab and Isuzu (up to 2002 model year) for a maximum of 17 model years. What should I do if I enter a valid VIN and the system does not produce any key code information? Occasionally, the KeyCode Look Up application may not produce a key code for a valid VIN. This may be the result of new vehicle information not yet available. In addition, older vehicle information may have been sent to an archive status. If you do not receive a key code returned for valid VIN, you should contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. How do I access KeyCodes if the KeyCode Look-up system is down? If the KeyCode Look-up system is temporarily unavailable, you can contact the original selling dealer who may have it on file or contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the customer is dealing with an emergency lock-out situation, you need to have the customer contact Roadside assistance, OnStar if subscribed, or 911. What should I do if the KeyCode from the look-up system does not work on the vehicle? On occasion a dealer may encounter a KeyCode that will not work on the vehicle in question. In cases where the KeyCode won't work you will need to verify with the manufacturer of the cutting equipment that the key has been cut correctly. If the key has been cut correctly you may be able to verify the proper KeyCode was given through the original selling dealer. When unable to verify the KeyCode through the original selling dealer contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. If the key has been cut correctly and the code given does not work, the lock cylinder may have been changed. In these situations following the proper SI document for recoding a key or replacing the lock cylinder may be necessary. How long do I have to keep KeyCode Records? Dealership KeyCode documentation must be retained for two years. Can I get a KeyCode changed in the Look-Up system? Yes, KeyCodes can be changed in the Look-Up system if a lock cylinder has been changed. Contact GM of Canada Key Code Inquiry Desk at 1-905-644-4892. What information do I need before I can provide a driver of a company fleet vehicle Keys or KeyCode information? The dealership should have a copy of the individual's driver's license, proof of employment and registration. If there is any question as to the customer's employment by the fleet company, the dealer should attempt to contact the fleet company for verification. If there is not enough information to determine ownership and employment, this information should not be provided. How do I document a request from an Independent Repair facility for a KeyCode or Key? The independent must provide a copy of their driver's license, proof of employment and signed copy of the repair order for that repair facility. The repair order must include customer's name, address, VIN, city, province and license plate number. Copies of this information must be included in your dealer KeyCode file. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Locks - Key Code Security Rules and Information > Page 4081 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > System Information > Diagrams > With Power Windows Power Windows And Door Locks And Relays Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > System Information > Diagrams > With Power Windows > Page 4086 Door Lock Motor And Switches Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lock Cylinders - Inoperative/Proper Lubricant Usage Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Technical Service Bulletins Lock Cylinders - Inoperative/Proper Lubricant Usage 86-15 10 DEC., 1985 Subject: LUBRICATION OF LOCK CYLINDER-DOOR, DECK LID AND FUEL DOOR Model and Year: ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Door, deck lid and fuel filler lock cylinders are being returned from the field, due to customer comments of a binding or inoperative condition which is due to lack of lubrication, caused by the use of penetrating oils. These penetrating oils do not lubricate the cylinders but wash out the factory installed lubricant. Penetrating oils are not to be used in any lock cylinders. Also materials, including silicone, which contain chlorinated propellants are not to be used on black plastic cylinders. The chlorine attacks the plastic. Further, lock de-icers which contain alcohol to remove the moisture from the cylinders, additionally tend to cut the existing lubricants. To maintain proper lubrication of lock cylinders it is recommended that a light oil or graphite lubricant be used such as LOCK-EASE* or equivalent, and particularly so if a lock de-icer was previously necessitated. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 08-08-51-002 Date: March 12, 2008 Subject: New Primer For TPO Fascias and Affected Cleaning Process of Painting Operation Models: 2009 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 The purpose of this bulletin is to inform the technician that General Motors has made a change in the primer it uses for TPO plastic for service parts. This new primer comes in several different colors from five different suppliers. This change affects the cleaning process of the painting operation. The new process is as follows. 1. Wash with soap and water. 2. Clean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). Check with your paint supplier for product recommendations. 3. Scuff sand per your paint suppliers recommendations. Note: The use of a solvent-type cleaner will soften, or begin to dissolve the primer. Base coats do not have any affect on this primer. 4. Reclean with a 50% mix of isopropyl alcohol and water (or a waterborne cleaner). All fascias, with the exception of the Corvette, Camaro, and Cadillac XLR, are made of TPO. You may find other TPO parts with this primer. If the technician has a question as to the type of plastic they are painting, inspect the back of the part for the plastic symbol (TPO). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting > Page 4096 Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Anti Chip Coatings Number : 84-85 Section: 10 (I) Date : Mar., 1984 Subject: ANTI-CHIP COATINGS Model and Year: 1976-84 ALL MODELS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Most late model vehicles have either a smooth anti-chip (gravel guard) material or the more familiar textured type applied to the lower front fenders, rocker panels and quarter panels. In the case of smooth anti-chip, because of its smooth appearance, it is very difficult to detect. Anti Chip Coatings One (1) method of detecting its presence is to check the film build in the areas that require protection (see illustration). Normal unprotected exterior finishes have a total film build between 3.0 and 4.0 mils while protected areas have a range of 5.0 to 11.0 mils. When repairing existing anti-chip or adding anti-chip material where there was none, the following guides will aid in achieving either a smooth or textured finish. In any case, manufacturer's label directions should be read prior to application. Type of Finish Adjustment Smoother (Less Texture) more thinner and/or increase gun distance Uneven (More Texture) Less thinner and/or Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting > Page 4097 decrease gun distance Tighter Pattern Decrease air pressure and/or gun distance Wider Pattern Increase air pressure and/or gun distance Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting > Page 4098 Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Warranty - Rail Dust Removal & Chemical Spotting Labor File In Section: Warranty Administration Bulletin No.: 72-05-11 Date: December, 1997 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION Subject: Clarification of Rail Dust Removal (A5575-A5580) and Chemical Spotting (A5541-A5544) Labor Operations Models: All Past and Future Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks The purpose of this Warranty Administration Bulletin is to clarify the usage, limits and guidelines for the proper use of the above subject labor operations. The above subject labor operations were introduced to correct paint imperfections caused by fallout that occurred either during shipment to the dealer or within the first 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 kms) of vehicle ownership. GM vehicle owners are informed that although no defect in the factory applied paint causes this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 kms) whichever occurs first. Effective with repair orders dated on or after December 1, 1997, labor operations A5575-A5580 Rail Dust Removal and A5541 through A5544 Chemical Spotting will be limited to within the first 12 months or 12,000 miles of the Base Vehicle Warranty (20,000 kms) whichever occurs first. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting > Page 4099 Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - High Volume Low Pressure Paint Application Number: 91-334-10 Section: 10 Date: MAY 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 161701R Subject: HVLP-HIGH VOLUME LOW PRESSURE PAINT APPLICATION Model and Year: 1982-91 ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS VOC stands for Volatile Organic Compounds. Most solvents used in automotive refinishing paints are considered volatile organic compounds. Volatile organic compounds react chemically with sunlight and make a variety of pollutants generally referred to as "Photochemical Smog." VOC regulations seek to reduce the amount of VOC getting into the air and thereby limit pollution. One way to reduce the amount of volatile organic compounds being emitted into the air is to increase the transfer efficiency rate of the paint material being transferred between the spray gun and the surface being painted. Different states throughout the country, such as California, New York, New Jersey, etc., are in the process of writing VOC emission regulations. As an example, the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAOMD) in Southern California has a Rule 1151 for automotive refinishing that stipulates that coating applications must be done with either electrostatic application, high-volume, low-pressure (HVLP) spray or "such other coating application methods that are demonstrated to the executive officer to be capable of achieving at least 65 percent transfer efficiency." HVLP spray is defined as "to spray a coating by means of a gun that operates between 0.1 and 10.0 psi air pressure." What is the difference between the high pressure conventional spray guns now in use and the HVLP spray guns being stipulated in VOC regulations? In the conventional spray gun high pressure air leaves the air cap and rapidly expands. As this air expands, the paint from the fluid tip is blasted apart, sending small paint droplets in all directions at a high velocity. This explosion of paint causes much of the paint to pass or bounce off the surface being painted. Transfer efficiency on conventional spray guns is usually between 20 percent and 50 percent efficiency. HVLP stands for (H)igh (V)olume (L)ow (P)ressure. HVLP spray guns utilize lower spray pressures upon atomization. The relatively low air pressure causes a much "softer" explosion. The resultant paint droplets are larger and slower. The large volume of air from the air caps can now better control the flight of the droplets. The paint spray tends to move in one direction. Bounce back and paint passing by the substrate are reduced, resulting in increased transfer efficiency. Transfer efficiency of HVLP guns is usually between 65 percent to 90 percent efficient. The amount of savings and transfer efficiency varies with the skill of the painter, gun adjustment, the air pressures, the size of the object being painted, and the viscosity of the paint. Basically, there are three types of HVLP spray equipment available; turbine units, air conversion units, and spray guns with the air conversion units inside the gun. The turbine unit is normally a portable or wall-mounted unit that generates a high volume of air at between 3 to 7 psi. Due to friction, the turbine generates heat. The amount of heat generated and the temperature of the air depend on the size of the turbine and length of hose. A large size diameter air hose is used between the turbine and the HVLP spray gun. Air conversion units are normally portable or wall-mounted units that use high pressure air from an air compressor and then convert it to a high volume of air at a lower pressure set on a regulator. Most air regulators on these units do not exceed 10 psi. A large size diameter air hose is used between the air conversion unit and the HVLP spray gun. These units do not generate any heat, but can be purchased with a heat source. HVLP spray guns with the air conversion units inside the gun use high pressure air from an air compressor and then convert it to a high volume of air at a preset pressure normally dependent on incoming air line pressure. The spray guns cannot exceed 10 psi no matter how high the incoming air line pressure is. There is no large diameter air hoses or heat to contend with. HVLP equipment that can maintain precise control and maintain close to 10 psi air cap pressure will provide better atomization of materials, especially low VOC paints. A GM training course on HVLP Paint Application is currently available (Course # 22001.42). Please refer to the GM monthly training schedule for more information. MANUFACTURERS of HVLP SPRAY EQUIPMENT Accuspray System Binks Bessam-Aire Binks Manufacturing Co. 26881 Cannon Road 9201 West Belmont Ave. P.O. Box 46478 Franklin Park, IL 60131 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting > Page 4100 Cleveland, OH 44146-0478 708-671-3000 216-439-1200 Can-Am Croix Can-Am Engineered Croix Air Products Products. Inc. 520 Airport Rd./Flemingfield 30850 Industrial Rd. So. St Paul, MN 55074 Livinoia, MI 48150 612-455-1213 313-427-2020 DevilBiss Graco Inc. The Devilbiss Co. P.O. Box 1441 320 Phillips Ave. Minneapolis, MN 55440-1441 P.O. Box 913 1-800-367-4023 Toledo, OH 43962 419-470-2169 Lex-Air Turbine Spray Mattson Lex-Air South 230 West Coleman 5874 Buford Hwy. P.O. Box 132 Doraville, GA 30340 Rice Lake, WI 54868 404-454-8417 715-234-1617 Sata Sharpe Mfg. Sata Spray Equipment 1224 Wall St. P.O. Box 46 Hwy. 16&63 N. P.O. Box 15042 Spring Valley, MN 55975 Los Angeles, CA 90015-0042 507-346-7102 213-749-4368 Xcel Spray Smith Eastern Corporation 5020 Sunnyside Ave. #207 Beltsville, MD 20705 301-937-4548 We believe the sources listed in this bulletin and their equipment to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such equipment. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from this firm or for any such item which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting > Page 4101 Technical Service Bulletin # 8559 Date: 850301 Paint - Basecoat/Clearcoat Repair Systems Number: 85-59 Section: 10 Date: MAR., 1985 Subject: BASECOAT/CLEARCOAT REPAIR SYSTEMS Model and Year: ALL TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS The repair systems contained in this bulletin are recommended as a guide when repairing basecoat/clearcoat exterior finishes on the above. The following procedures outline a method for making spot/partial and full panel repairs on nonflexible parts and full panel repairs on flexible parts. Nonflexible Panel Repair System Basecoat - Lacquer or Enamel 1. Wash with a mild detergent and water to remove any water soluble contaminates, then clean with wax and grease removing solvent to remove any tar, silicone or other road film not removed with the detergent wash. 2. Repair and featheredge damaged area(s) as required. 3. If substrate is metal, treat surface with a metal conditioner and conversion coating according to label directions. Allow to dry thoroughly and apply primer-surfacer to repair area. Allow to dry 20-30 minutes before sanding. 4. Using wet or dry #400 grit sandpaper or finer, sand entire area(s) to be refinished with the basecoat color. Areas to be clear coated only, should be wet sanded with #600 or finer sandpaper or hand compound (follow manufactures recommendations). 5. Reclean panel(s) with wax and grease removing solvent and then tack wipe. 6. Apply one or two coats of adhesion promoter within moldings and/or breaklines of the panel section(s) to be refinished. When making paint repairs to areas such as quarter panels where the repair is not confined within moldings or breaklines, apply adhesion promoter a minimum of 4-6" onto adjacent panel. Adhesion promoter must extend beyond the area to be covered by the clear coat when not confined by moldings. Allow to flash a minimum of 30 minutes before applying base color coat. Some enamel basecoat may not require adhesion promoter. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 7A. Polyurethane Enamel Basecoat CAUTION: There are a number of paint systems available for service use: however, many require additives containing isocyanates. It is essential that all recommendations and warnings listed on the container label for materials selected be followed. It is mandatory that adequate respiratory protection be worn. Examples of such protection are: 3M models #6984 and #6986 disposable respirators. Such protection should be worn during the entire painting process. Persons with respiratory problems, or those allergic to isocyanates must not be exposed to isocyanate vapors or spray mist. a. Following paint manufacturer's label directions, activitate the Polyurethane Enamel material. Mix material thoroughly. Pot life of activated mixture is approximately eight (8) hours. b. Reduce basecoat per label directions. Some activated Polyurethane Enamel materials are ready to spray as packaged under normal conditions. As conditions vary, to enhance flow out and leveling up to 10% more than the specified enamel reducer may be added to the activated mixture. Check the viscosity of the activated mixture with a Zahn #2 Paint Viscosity Cup or its equivalent. Follow the paint manufacturer's labeled recommendations for paint viscosity cup reading, c. Using manufactures specified air pressure at the gun, spray two medium-wet coats of enamel mixture to achieve full hiding. Allow first coat to set-up for 15-20 minutes before applying the second final coat. Unless manufacturer recommends otherwise allow to cure overnight. 7B. Lacquer Basecoat a. Reduce base color 150-200% with an extra-slow drying lacquer solvent. The viscosity of the reduced base color is very important in order to match the OEM (original equipment manufacturers) finish. The best way of checking the viscosity of a reduced paint material is the a Zahn #2 paint viscosity cup or equivalent. If a cold can of paint is brought into an average temperature room (65-70 degrees), it will be thicker and more viscous. Adding solvent to make the paint sprayable is not the best action. The paint should be allowed to reach workable, or average room temperatures. Follow manufacturer's recommended paint viscosity cup reading for their material. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting > Page 4102 b. Spray base color at 35-45 lbs air pressure at gun or as specified by the paint supplier. Apply only the number of coats needed to get full hiding. This will require two or three mediumwet coats. Allow each coat to flash approximately five minutes and spray each coat slightly wider than the previously applied coat. A premixed mist coat of clear acrylic paint material may be used if desired to melt overspray into the base color. Allow to dry for 20 minutes before applying clear coat. Do not sand base color coat unless it is necessary. 8. If basecoat must be sanded, proceed as follows: a. Allow base color to dry. b. Sand with ultra-fine wet-or-dry sandpaper to remove the imperfection(s). c. Reclean and tack wipe the repair area(s). d. Apply an additional coat of base color. e. Allow to dry thoroughly before applying the clear coat. 9A. Polyurethane Enamel Clearcoat Because of the better durability of polyurethane enamel clear coats as compared to lacquer, it is preferred if shop conditions allow. CAUTION: There are a number of paint systems available for service use: however, many require additives containing isocyanates. It is essential that all recommendations and warnings listed on the container label for materials selected be followed. It is mandatory that adequate respiratory protection be worn. Examples of such protection area: 3M models #6984 and #6986 disposable respirators. Such protection should be worn during the entire painting process. Persons with respiratory problems, or those allergic to isocyanates must not be exposed to isocyanate vapors or spray mist. a. Following paint manufacturer's label directions, activitate the Polyurethane Enamel Clearcoat material. Mix material thoroughly. Pot life of activated mixture is approximately eight (8) hours. b. Reduce clearcoat per label directions. Some activated Polyurethane Enamel Clearcoat materials are ready to spray as packaged when used under normal conditions. As conditions vary, to enhance flow out and leveling, up to 10% more than the specified enamel reducer may be added to the activated clearcoat mixture. Check the viscosity of the activated mixture with a Zahn #2 Paint Viscosity Cup or its equivalent. Follow the paint manufacturer's labeled recommendations for paint viscosity cup reading. c. Using 50 lbs air pressure at the gun, spray two medium-wet coats of enamel clear coat mixture. Allow first coat to set-up for 15-20 minutes before applying the second final coat. Clear coat should be applied over the entire panel wherever possible. When no breaklines are present blend all spray applications within the adhesion promoter boundary. Clean spray painting equipment with lacquer thinner immediately after use. Clearcoat 9B. Lacquer Clearcoat a. Reduce clearcoat 125-150% with an extra-slow drying lacquer thinner to the recommended paint viscosity cup reading of the manufacturer who's paint product you are using. b. Spray two medium-wet coats of reduced clear at 35-45 lbs air pressure at the gun. Allow first coat to flash completely before applying the second coat. At least two coats must be used. Additional coats may be applied if desired. If additional leveling is desired a final coat of premixed mist-coat material (clear acrylic and thinner) can be sprayed at 20 lbs air pressure at the gun. When no breaklines are present, blend all spray applications within the adhesion promoter. Allow the repair to dry overnight, then rub out with a light-cutting hand or machine polishing compound. Flexible Panel Repair System Procedure - Full Panel Full panel repairs must be performed, spot repairs are not recommended. CAUTION: There are a number of flexible paint systems available for service use: however, many required additives containing isocyanates. It is essential that all recommendations and warnings listed on the container label for materials selected be followed. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting > Page 4103 It is mandatory that adequate respiratory protection be worn. Examples of such protection area: 3-M models #6984 and #6986 disposable respirators. Such protection should be worn during the entire paint process. Persons with respiratory problems, or those allergic to isocyanates must not be exposed to isocyanate vapors or spray mist. 1. Flexible Undercoat Requirements If the part to be painted is a replacement, it will be factory primed with an elastomeric enamel-based primer. As long as the original primer is not scratched exposing the plastic substrate, all that is to solvent clean, sand with #400 paper or a red "Scotch-Brite" pad, reclean and apply elastomeric color. However, if the plastic substrate is exposed or the part is repaired with flexible filler material, a flexible primer surfacer must be used to provide the filling properties required. This is to prevent a "bull's-eye" condition or highlighting of the bare substrate or filler repair after color is applied. Prepare flexible primer surfacer as follows: a. Clean the entire part with a wax, grease and silicone removing solvent applied with a water dampened cloth. Wipe dry. NOTE: The step above begins to prepare the entire part for color coats. Spot repair is not recommended because dry spray at the blend area of applied elastomeric color does not "wet out" satisfactorily. b. Featheredge the scuff or filler repair with #320 sandpaper, blow off dust and tack wipe. c. Mix and apply four medium dry coats of flexible primer surfacer. Follow manufacturer's instructions for specific mix ratios and additives. NOTE: Use a fast evaporating thinner as recommended to reduce the primer-surfacer and do not apply excessively wet coats. Bare flexible plastic surface and/or flexible filler materials have a tendency to swell from thinner absorption, resulting in a visible or "highlighted" repair. d. Allow to dry at least one hour and block sand with #400 sandpaper. Sand the entire part with #400 sandpaper or red "Scotch-Brite" pad to remove all gloss in preparation for color application. When paints are modified with a flex additive, the possibility of mixture "pot life" exists; therefore, spray equipment should be cleaned immediately after use. 2. Body Color With Flexible Additive Systems There are several flexible topcoat systems available for the painter's selections; in most cases, it is a matter of personal preference. Basecoat/clearcoat material can be either enamel or lacquer-based. Some manufacturers do no recommend the use of flex additives in their basecolor material, but do recommend its use for their lacquer clear coat. a. Thoroughly sand the entire part with #400 sandpaper or red "Scotch-Brite" pad to remove all gloss. Reclean. b. Mix the base color, flexible additive, if recommended, and thinner. Follow manufacturer's label instructions. c. Apply a sufficient number of coats to achieve complete hiding and color match. Allow flash time between coats. d. Allow the base color coat to dry 30-60 minutes before applying the clear coat. Do not sand the base coat before applying the clear coat. NOTE: If sanding of the base coat is necessary to remove imperfections, such as dirt or sags, sand with #400 grit or finer sandpaper, reclean the area(s). Apply one additional coat of base material and let dry. 3. Clear Coat Application a. Mix and reduce clear coat (lacquer or enamel) material as per label instructions. NOTE: Use flex additive if recommended by paint source. b. Strain the mixture and apply 2-3 coats with 35-40 lbs air pressure at the gun. c. Allow each coat to flash completely before applying the next coat. Allow at least 4 hours air dry time or force dry for 30 minutes with a heat lamp at 180~ Fahrenheit before putting into service. NOTE: Compounding is not recommended when a flexible additive is used in the top coat paint material. The mixture will dry with acceptable gloss. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - TPO Fascia Cleaning Prior to Painting > Page 4104 Compounding dulls the gloss of elastomeric finishes causing a flat appearance. The finish cannot be brought back to the same gloss level without applying more paint. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sun Shade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Sunshade - Replacement Availability Sun Shade: Technical Service Bulletins Sunshade - Replacement Availability File In Section: 08 - Body and Accessories Bulletin No.: 99-08-110-005 Date: June, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Sunshade Replacement Models: 1999 and Prior Chevrolet and GMC Light Duty Trucks This bulletin is to inform dealers that new replacement sunshades are being introduced for service on approximately July 19, 1999. These new replacement sunshades will no longer have the map strap feature. The part numbers for these replacement sunshades will remain the same as the previous parts. Once these new sunshades become available, current replacement sunshades on hand may be used at the customer's/dealer's discretion. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Restraint System > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information Head Restraint System: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Driver/Passenger Seat Head Rest Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 10-08-50-003A Date: March 24, 2011 Subject: Information on Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Concerns with Comfort, Custom Upholstery or Other Comfort Enhancing Devices Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks Equipped with Adjustable Head Restraints Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 10-08-50-003 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Important ON A GM VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS, USE THE HEAD RESTRAINT COVERS, FOAM AND OTHER SEAT-RELATED EQUIPMENT AS RELEASED BY GM FOR THAT VEHICLE. DO NOT ALTER OR REPOSITION THE HEAD RESTRAINT SYSTEM. ANY ALTERATIONS TO HEAD RESTRAINTS DEFEATS THE INTENDED DESIGN OF THE SYSTEM. GM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY USE OF SUCH IMPROPER DESIGN ALTERATIONS, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY REPAIRS INCURRED. You may have a customer with a concern that the head restraint is uncomfortable or sits too far forward. The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with head restraints that have been designed to help minimize injuries while still providing comfort to the occupants. Each GM vehicle has its own specifically designed head restraint. The head restraints should only be used in the vehicle for which they were designed. The head restraint will not operate to its design intent if the original foam is replaced (1) by non-GM foam or head restraint, (2) by GM foam or head restraint designed for a different vehicle, (3) by GM foam or head restraint that has been altered by a trim shop or (4) if any object, such as an aftermarket comfort enhancing pad or device, is installed. Never modify the design of the head restraint or remove the head restraint from the vehicle as this may interfere with the operation of the seating and restraint systems and may prevent proper positioning of the passenger within the vehicle. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 04-08-50-006D Date: September 09, 2010 Subject: Minor Wrinkles/Creases, Discoloration, Cigarette Burns and Customer Induced Cuts and Stains on Front and Rear Driver and Passenger Seats with Leather, Vinyl or Cloth Seat Covers Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2 2010 and Prior HUMMER H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X 2010 and Prior Saturn Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add a model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 04-08-50-006C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). If a customer comes in to your dealership due to certain conditions of the seat covers (splits, wrinkles, loose stitching, etc.), you must examine the seat cover in order to determine the validity of the customer claim. Some components from the above listed vehicles have been returned to the Warranty Parts Center (WPC) and analysis of these parts showed "customer induced damage" or No Trouble Found (NTF). The dealer should pay particular attention to the following conditions: - Cigarette burns Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 4119 - Customer induced cuts (knife cuts, cut by customer tools, etc.) - Paint stains (customer should have cleaned paint stains while paint was still wet) - Coffee stains and other removable dirt These should be cleaned as described in the Owner's Manual under Appearance Care. Also, refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 06-00-89-029A or later. - Evidence of chemicals used for cleaning, other than those specified in the Owner's Manual - Other chemical spills - Minor and normal leather wrinkles as a result of use - Other defects to the seat cover not detected during the pre-delivery inspection (PDI). Inform the customer that the above issues were not present when the vehicle was purchased and cannot be replaced under warranty. The covers, however, may be repaired or replaced at the customer's expense. The following conditions are not caused by the customer and should be covered by warranty: - Split seams Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 4120 - Wear/cracking/peeling - Discoloration/dye transfer from customer clothing (if discoloration/dye transfer is not removed after using GM Leather and Vinyl Plastic Cleaner, P/N 88861401 (in Canada, P/N 88861409), replace the covers.) Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 4121 Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Elimination Of Unwanted Odors INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 00-00-89-027E Date: September 29, 2008 Subject: Eliminating Unwanted Odors in Vehicles Models: 2009 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2009 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Vehicles 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and refine the instructions. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 00-00-89-027D (Section 00 - General Information). Vehicle Odor Elimination General Motors offers a product that may control or eliminate odors in the interior and luggage compartment areas of GM vehicles. GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator is a non-toxic, biodegradable odor remover. This odorless product has been shown to greatly reduce or remove objectionable smells of mold and mildew resulting from vehicle water leaks (as well as customer created odors, i.e. smoke). You may use GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator on fabrics, vinyl, leather, carpet and sound deadening materials. It may also be induced into HVAC modules and instrument panel ducts (for the control of non-bacterial related odors). Important: This product leaves no residual scent and should not be sold as or considered an air freshener. Product action may result in the permanent elimination of an odor and may be preferable to customers with allergies who are sensitive to perfumes. How to Use This Product GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator may be sprayed on in a ready-to-use formula or used in steam cleaners as an additive with carpet shampoo. This water-based, odorless product is safe for all vehicle interiors. Do not wet or soak any interior surface that plain water would cause to deteriorate, as this product will have the same effect. Also avoid letting this product come into contact with vinegar or any acidic substance. Acid-based products will hamper the effectiveness of, or render GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator inert. Note: Complete eight page treatment sheets are enclosed within each case of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator. These treatment instructions range from simple vehicle odor elimination to full step by step procedures for odor removal from water leaks. If lost, contact 800-977-4145 to get a replacement set faxed or e-mailed to your dealership. Instructions and cautions are printed on the bottle, but additional help is available. If you encounter a difficult to eliminate or reoccurring odor, you may call 1-800-955-8591 (in Canada, 1-800-977-4145) to obtain additional information and usage suggestions. Important: This product may effectively remove odors when directly contacting the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures (in cases such as a water leak) to first eliminate the root cause of the odor, and then the residual odor to permanently correct the vehicle condition. Vehicle Waterleak Odor Elimination STEP ONE: Confirm that all water leaks have been repaired. Determine what areas of the vehicle were water soaked or wet. Components with visible mold/mildew staining should be replaced. Isolate the odor source inside the vehicle. Often an odor can be isolated to an area or component of the vehicle interior by careful evaluation. Odor evaluation may need to be performed by multiple persons. Another method of isolating an odor source is to remove and segregate interior trim and components. Plastic sheeting or drop cloths can be used to confine seats, headliners, etc. to assist in evaluation and diagnoses. If appropriate the vehicle and interior trim should be evaluated separately to determine if the odor stays with the vehicle or the interior components. Odors that stay with the vehicle may be isolated to insulating and sound deadening materials (i.e. water leak at the windshield or standing water in the front foot well area caused mold/mildew to form on the bulkhead or kick panel sound deadening pads. If the interior is removed the floor pan and primed/painted surfaces should be treated with bleach/soap solution, rinsed with clean water and dried. Interior surfaces should then be treated with GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product before reinstalling carpet or reassembling. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 4122 The GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator product is an effective odor elimination product when used properly. It must come into direct contact with the odor source. It should be used in conjunction with diagnostic procedures to first eliminate the root cause of the odor. Some procedures for use after odor root cause correction are: STEP TWO: ^ Use the trigger spray head. ^ Put a drop of dish soap the size of a quarter in the bottom of a bottle. ^ Add 8 oz. of GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator (1 cup) to the dish soap and top off the bottle with tap water. ^ This formula should be used on hard surfaces (dash, interior plastic molding, and floor pan) STEP THREE: The third step to neutralizing the vehicle is a light to medium treatment of all carpeting and upholstered seats with the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula and a wide fan spray setting (at full strength) (i.e.: carpeting on the driver's side requires 4-5 triggers pulls for coverage). The headliner and trunk should be sprayed next. Lightly brushing the formula into the carpeting and upholstery is a recommended step for deep odor problems. The dash and all hard surfaces should be sprayed with dish soap/water mixture. Let stand for 1-2 minutes then wipe off the surface. STEP FOUR: (vehicle ventilation system treatment) The ventilation system is generally the last step in the treatment of the vehicle. a. Spray the GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator formula into all dash vents. (1-2 trigger pulls per vent). b. Start the vehicle and turn the vehicle fan on high cool (not A/C setting). c. Spray the formula (10 trigger pulls) into the outside fresh air intake vent (cowl at base of windshield) d. Enter the vehicle after 1 minute and wipe off the excess formula spurting out of the dash vents. e. Smell the air coming from the dash vents. If odors are still present, spray another 5 triggers into the cowl, wait another minute and smell the results. Once you have obtained a fresh, clean smell coming from the vents, turn the system to the A/C re-circulation setting. Roll up the windows, spray 3-5 pumps into the right lower IP area and let the vehicle run with the fan set on high for 5-7 minutes. Please follow this diagnosis process thoroughly and complete each step. If the condition exhibited is resolved without completing every step, the remaining steps do not need to be performed. If these steps do not resolve the condition, please contact GM TAC for further diagnostic assistance. Additional Suggestions to Increase Customer Satisfaction Here are some additional ideas to benefit your dealership and to generate greater customer enthusiasm for this product. ^ Keep this product on-hand for both the Service Department and the Used Car lot. Add value to your used car trades; treat loaner and demo cars during service and at final sale to eliminate smoke, pet, and other common odors offensive to customers. Make deodorizing a vehicle part of your normal vehicle detailing service. ^ Consider including GM Vehicle Care Odor Eliminator as a give-away item with new vehicle purchases. Many dealers give away as "gifts" various cleaning supplies at time of delivery. GM Odor Eliminator is one of a few products GM offers that has as many uses in the home as in the vehicle. Customers may find this product can be used for a host of recreational activities associated with their new vehicle, such as deodorizing a boat they tow, or a camper. ^ GM Odor Eliminator and many of the GM Vehicle Care products offer you the chance to increase dealership traffic as these superior quality products cannot be purchased in stores. Many Dealerships have product displays at the parts counter. Consider additional displays in the Customer Service Lounge, the Showroom and at the Service Desk or Cashier Window. Many customers who purchase vehicles and receive regular maintenance at your dealership may never visit the parts counter, and subsequently are not exposed to the variety and value that these products offer. Parts Information Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Seat Cover Wrinkle/Crease/Burn Info > Page 4123 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Maintaining Exterior Weatherstrip Appearance Weatherstrip: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Maintaining Exterior Weatherstrip Appearance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 99-08-64-016C Date: July 29, 2009 Subject: Information on Maintaining Exterior Weatherstrip Appearance Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and update the parts and procedure information. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 99-08-64-016B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Exterior weatherstrips are exposed to a variety of environmental elements, including UV rays, acid rain, insect and bird residue and atmospheric fallout. All of these may effect the appearance of the weatherstrips; however, they do not effect the functionality of the weatherstrip. Weatherstrips that are discolored should not be replaced under the normal GM New Vehicle Warranty. Weatherstrip Maintenance Instructions Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Clean the weatherstrips with a mild soap and water solution. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather, frequent application may be required. Refer to the information below for the recommended maintenance products. Weatherstrips that are not maintained may crack and weather due to environmental elements. Parts Information Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM P/N 3634770 [in Canada, P/N 10953518]) or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM P/N 12345579 [in Canada, P/N 992887]). Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from valve and connect a suitable vacuum pump with an integral gauge to valve. 2. With pedal in released position, apply approximately 14 inches of vacuum to valve, then observe gauge. 3. If valve loses more than 5 inches of vacuum in one minute, valve is defective. 4. With vacuum applied to valve, depress pedal. If valve does not release vacuum when pedal is depressed, valve is defective. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from valve and connect a suitable vacuum pump with an integral gauge to valve. 2. With pedal in released position, apply approximately 14 inches of vacuum to valve, then observe gauge. 3. If valve loses more than 5 inches of vacuum in one minute, valve is defective. 4. With vacuum applied to valve, depress pedal. If valve does not release vacuum when pedal is depressed, valve is defective. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Servo: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from servo and apply approximately 14 inches of vacuum to servo using a suitable pump with an integral gauge. 2. If servo loses more than 5 inches of vacuum in 1 minute, servo is defective. Connecting vacuum hoses can be checked using a similar test procedure. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Adjustments Cruise Control Servo Cable: Adjustments Power Unit Adjustment With air conditioner off and idle speed solenoid disconnected (if equipped), set curb hot idle speed to 500 RPM, then shut engine off. Unsnap swivel from ball stud, then hold chain taught. Center of swivel should extend 1/8 inch beyond center of ball stud. If not, remove swivel and chain assembly retainer, then position chain into swivel cavities which will give adjustment stated above. Reinstall retainer. Engagement-Cruising Speed Zeroing The only transducer adjustment possible is engagement-cruising speed zeroing. No adjustment should be performed unless the servo unit and brake release switches are properly adjusted and all vacuum lines are checked for kinks, leaks or punctures. If cruising speed is lower than engagement speed, loosen orifice tube locknut and turn tube counterclockwise. If cruising speed is greater than engagement speed, turn orifice tube clockwise. Each 1/4 turn of orifice tube will alter engagement-cruising speed approximately one m.p.h.. After adjustment is completed, tighten locknut and test system at 50 m.p.h.. Brake Release Switch & Valve With brake pedal fully depressed, push switch and valve fully forward against bracket or arm. Pull pedal rearward with a force of 15---20 lbs. to automatically adjust switch and valve. Clutch Release Switch & Valve With clutch pedal at rest, push switch and valve assembly forward against bracket or arm. Pull pedal rearward with a force of 15---20 lbs. to automatically adjust switch and valve. 1983---84 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Fig. 10 Engagement switch test connections. Cruise Master On 1981---83 models, place slide switch in on position. 1. Disconnect switch electrical connector from main harness connector at base of steering column. 2. Connect ohmmeter between terminals 1 and 2 on switch connector, Fig. 10. With engage button released, meter should indicate continuity; with button fully depressed meter should indicate infinite resistance. 3. Connect ohmmeter between terminals 1 and 3 on switch connector. Meter should indicate infinite resistance. 4. Fully depress engage button, then release button halfway to engage position. Meter should indicate continuity. 5. On 1981---82 models, release engage button and move slide switch to resume position. Meter should indicate continuity between terminals 1 and 3. 6. Return slide switch to on position on 1981---82 models, then on all models, connect ohmmeter between terminals 2 and 3 on switch connector. 7. With engage button released, meter should indicate infinite resistance. With engage button in halfway (engage) position, meter should indicate continuity between terminals 2 and 3. 8. If switch fails to perform as outlined, switch assembly is defective. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from valve and connect a suitable vacuum pump with an integral gauge to valve. 2. With pedal in released position, apply approximately 14 inches of vacuum to valve, then observe gauge. 3. If valve loses more than 5 inches of vacuum in one minute, valve is defective. 4. With vacuum applied to valve, depress pedal. If valve does not release vacuum when pedal is depressed, valve is defective. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from valve and connect a suitable vacuum pump with an integral gauge to valve. 2. With pedal in released position, apply approximately 14 inches of vacuum to valve, then observe gauge. 3. If valve loses more than 5 inches of vacuum in one minute, valve is defective. 4. With vacuum applied to valve, depress pedal. If valve does not release vacuum when pedal is depressed, valve is defective. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Fig. 10 Engagement switch test connections. Cruise Master On 1981---83 models, place slide switch in on position. 1. Disconnect switch electrical connector from main harness connector at base of steering column. 2. Connect ohmmeter between terminals 1 and 2 on switch connector, Fig. 10. With engage button released, meter should indicate continuity; with button fully depressed meter should indicate infinite resistance. 3. Connect ohmmeter between terminals 1 and 3 on switch connector. Meter should indicate infinite resistance. 4. Fully depress engage button, then release button halfway to engage position. Meter should indicate continuity. 5. On 1981---82 models, release engage button and move slide switch to resume position. Meter should indicate continuity between terminals 1 and 3. 6. Return slide switch to on position on 1981---82 models, then on all models, connect ohmmeter between terminals 2 and 3 on switch connector. 7. With engage button released, meter should indicate infinite resistance. With engage button in halfway (engage) position, meter should indicate continuity between terminals 2 and 3. 8. If switch fails to perform as outlined, switch assembly is defective. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Ammeter Gauge > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ammeter Gauge: Testing and Inspection Fig. 1 Conventional type ammeter The ammeter is an instrument used to indicate current flow into and out of the battery. When electrical accessories in the vehicle draw more current than the alternator can supply, current flows from the battery and the ammeter indicates a discharge ( - ) condition. When electrical loads of the vehicle are less than alternator output, current is available to charge the battery, and the ammeter indicates a charge (+) condition. If battery is fully charged, the voltage regulator reduces alternator output to meet only immediate vehicle electrical loads. When this happens, the ammeter reads zero. A conventional ammeter must be connected between the battery and alternator in order to indicate current flow. This type ammeter, Fig. 1, consists of a frame to which a permanent magnet is attached. The frame also supports an armature and pointer assembly. Current in this system flows from the alternator through the ammeter, then to the battery or from the battery through the ammeter into the vehicle electrical system, depending on vehicle operating conditions. When no current flows through the ammeter, the magnet holds the pointer armature so that the pointer stands at the center of the dial. When current passes in either direction through the ammeter, the resulting magnetic field attracts the armature away from the effect of the permanent magnet, thus giving a reading proportional to the strength of the current flowing. TROUBLESHOOTING When the ammeter apparently fails to register correctly, there may be trouble in the wiring which connects the ammeter to the alternator and battery or in the alternator or battery itself. To check the connections, first tighten the two terminal posts on the back of the ammeter. Then, following each wire from the ammeter, tighten all connections on the ignition switch, battery and alternator. Chafed, burned or broken insulation can be found by following each ammeter wire from end to end. All wires with chafed, burned or broken insulation should be repaired or replaced. After this is done, and all connections are tightened, connect the battery cable and turn on the ignition switch. The needle should point slightly to the discharge ( - ) side. Start the engine and run slightly above idling speed. The needle should move slowly to the charge side (+). If the pointer does not move as indicated, the ammeter is out of order and should be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Charge Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Fig. 2 Charge indicator lamp wiring system. Delco S1 type charging system DELCOTRON SI INTEGRAL CHARGING SYSTEM This system features an integral solid state regulator mounted inside the alternator slip ring end frame. The alternator indicator lamp is installed in the field wire circuit connected between the ignition ``Ign.'' terminal and alternator No. 1 terminal, Fig. 2. The resistance provided by the alternator warning light circuit is needed to protect the diode trio. The alternator indicator lamp should light when the ignition switch is turned on before engine is started. If lamp does not light, either lamp is burned out or indicator lamp wiring has an open circuit. After engine is started, the indicator lamp should be out at all times. If indicator lamp comes on, alternator belt may be loose, alternator or regulator may be defective, charging circuit may be defective or fuse may be blown. Troubleshooting 1. Switch Off, lamp On: a. Disconnect electrical connector from alternator terminals 1 and 2. b. If indicator light remains lit, repair short circuit between leads. c. If indicator light goes out, replace alternator rectifier bridge. 2. Switch On, lamp Off, engine not running: a. Perform tests described in step 1. b. If problem still exists, there may be an open circuit. c. To locate open circuit, check for blown fuse or fusible link, burned out bulb, defective bulb socket or an open in No. 1 lead circuit between alternator and ignition switch. d. If no faults are found, check charging system for proper operation. 3. Switch On, lamp On, engine running: a. On models so equipped, check condition of fuse between indicator light and ignition switch and fuse in A/C circuit. b. Check charging system for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Clock: Testing and Inspection Regulation of electric clocks is accomplished automatically by resetting the time. If the clock is running fast, the action of turning the hands back to correct the time will automatically cause the clock to run slightly slower. If the clock is running slow, the action of turning the hands forward to correct the time will automatically cause the clock to run slightly faster (10 to 15 seconds day). A lock-out feature prevents the clock regulator mechanism from being reset more than once per wind cycle, regardless of the number of times the time is reset. After the clock rewinds, if the time is then reset, automatic regulation will take place. If a clock varies over 10 minutes per day, it will never adjust properly and must be repaired or replaced. WINDING CLOCK WHEN CONNECTING BATTERY OR CLOCK WIRING The clock requires special attention when reconnecting a battery that has been disconnected for any reason, a clock that has been disconnected, or when replacing a blown clock fuse. It is very important that the initial wind be fully made. The procedure is as follows: 1. Make sure that all other instruments and lights are turned off. 2. Connect positive cable to battery. 3. Before connecting the negative cable, press the terminal to its post on the battery. Immediately afterward, strike the terminal against the battery post to see if there is a spark. If there is a spark, allow the clock to run down until it stops ticking, and repeat as above until there is no spark. Then immediately make the permanent connection before the clock can again run down. The clock will run down in approximately two minutes. 4. Reset clock after all connections have been made. The foregoing procedure should also be followed when reconnecting the clock after it has been disconnected, or if it has stopped because of a blown fuse. Be sure to disconnect battery before installing a new fuse. TROUBLESHOOTING If clock does not run, check for blown ``clock'' fuse. If fuse is blown, check for short in wiring. If fuse is not blown, check for open circuit. With an electric clock, the most frequent cause of clock fuse blowing is voltage at the clock which will prevent a complete wind and allow clock contacts to remain closed. This may be caused by any of the following: discharged battery, corrosion on contact surface of battery terminals, loose connections at battery terminals, at junction block, at fuse clips, or at terminal connection of clock. Therefore, if in reconnecting battery or clock it is noted that the clock is not ticking, always check for blown fuse, or examine the circuits at the points indicated above to determine and correct the cause. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Coolant Level Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Level Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair This lamp will be illuminated when engine coolant level in the radiator drops below a pre-determined level. To turn lamp "OFF," check cooling system, then add coolant to bring system to proper level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > IP Dimmer Control - Proper Setting Dimmer Switch: Technical Service Bulletins IP Dimmer Control - Proper Setting File In Section: 08 - Body and Accessories Bulletin No.: 99-08-42-009 Date: November, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Proper Setting of I/P Dimmer Control to View PRNDL Display with Automatic Headlamp Control Models: 2000 and Prior All Passenger Cars and Trucks With Automatic Headlamp Control and Electronic PRNDL Display Under certain conditions, if the instrument panel dimmer control is turned relatively low, the PRNDL will not be visible until the automatic headlamp control turns the headlamps off and the daytime running lamps (DRL) are turned back on. Such a condition may be if the vehicle is first started in an environment where the headlamp control turns on the headlamps and then the vehicle is driven out into a brighter environment (for example, when a vehicle is backed out of a dark garage into the bright sunlight). This condition is normal and any repair attempt will not be successful. Demonstrate this condition to the customer using the service lane and then turn the instrument panel dimmer control to a higher setting. This will enable the driver to see the PRNDL display Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Fuel Gauge: Testing and Inspection Fig. 4 Fuel Gauge Diagnostic Flow Chart Tester J24538-A or equivalent must be used to diagnosis a fuel gauge malfunction. When troubleshooting fuel gauge refer to Fig. 4 for diagnostic flow chart. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-08-49-006 > Apr > 99 > Instrument Panel - Upper Surface Reflection Instrument Cluster / Carrier: Customer Interest Instrument Panel - Upper Surface Reflection File In Section: 08 - Body and Accessories Bulletin No.: 99-08-49-006 Date: April, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Cleaning of Upper Instrument Panel Surfaces Models: 1999 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Comments on a reflection of the upper instrument panel pad into the windshield, when driving in direct sunlight, may be received. This condition, sometimes referred to as a "veiling reflection", may be aggravated by the use of wax or silicone based products when cleaning the surface. Advise customers, technicians and new car prep or make ready personnel, that products containing wax or silicone should not be used to clean the top instrument panel pad. A warm water and mild soap solution such as saddle soap, oil soap or an equivalent, should be used whenever the top instrument panel pad needs cleaning. If a customer requests that a protectant type product be applied, ONLY USE THOSE THAT LEAVE A FLAT OR SATIN FINISH. Do NOT apply products that leave a glossy finish or those that Increase the shine level above the original production level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Cluster / Carrier: > 99-08-42-009 > Nov > 99 > IP Dimmer Control - Proper Setting Instrument Cluster / Carrier: All Technical Service Bulletins IP Dimmer Control - Proper Setting File In Section: 08 - Body and Accessories Bulletin No.: 99-08-42-009 Date: November, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Proper Setting of I/P Dimmer Control to View PRNDL Display with Automatic Headlamp Control Models: 2000 and Prior All Passenger Cars and Trucks With Automatic Headlamp Control and Electronic PRNDL Display Under certain conditions, if the instrument panel dimmer control is turned relatively low, the PRNDL will not be visible until the automatic headlamp control turns the headlamps off and the daytime running lamps (DRL) are turned back on. Such a condition may be if the vehicle is first started in an environment where the headlamp control turns on the headlamps and then the vehicle is driven out into a brighter environment (for example, when a vehicle is backed out of a dark garage into the bright sunlight). This condition is normal and any repair attempt will not be successful. Demonstrate this condition to the customer using the service lane and then turn the instrument panel dimmer control to a higher setting. This will enable the driver to see the PRNDL display Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Cluster / Carrier: > 99-08-49-006 > Apr > 99 > Instrument Panel - Upper Surface Reflection Instrument Cluster / Carrier: All Technical Service Bulletins Instrument Panel - Upper Surface Reflection File In Section: 08 - Body and Accessories Bulletin No.: 99-08-49-006 Date: April, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Cleaning of Upper Instrument Panel Surfaces Models: 1999 and Prior Passenger Cars and Light Duty Trucks Comments on a reflection of the upper instrument panel pad into the windshield, when driving in direct sunlight, may be received. This condition, sometimes referred to as a "veiling reflection", may be aggravated by the use of wax or silicone based products when cleaning the surface. Advise customers, technicians and new car prep or make ready personnel, that products containing wax or silicone should not be used to clean the top instrument panel pad. A warm water and mild soap solution such as saddle soap, oil soap or an equivalent, should be used whenever the top instrument panel pad needs cleaning. If a customer requests that a protectant type product be applied, ONLY USE THOSE THAT LEAVE A FLAT OR SATIN FINISH. Do NOT apply products that leave a glossy finish or those that Increase the shine level above the original production level. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Cluster / Carrier: > 912850A > Apr > 91 > Instrument Panel - Upper Surface Cleaning Instrument Cluster / Carrier: All Technical Service Bulletins Instrument Panel - Upper Surface Cleaning Number: 91-285-0A Section: 0A Date: APRIL 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 101003 Subject: CLEANING OF UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL SURFACES Model and Year: ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS ALL YEARS Comments on reflection into the windshield of the upper instrument panel may be received. The condition of instrument panel reflection into the windshield in direct sunlight may be aggravated by dealers and owners applying a wax or silicone base material to the pad surface. The higher gloss of such application results in a "veiling reflection" in the windshield. Advise customers and new car make ready area that materials containing wax or silicone should not be used to clean the instrument panel pad. A warm water and mild soap solution such as saddle soap, oil soap, or an equivalent should be used whenever the instrument panel pad needs cleaning. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Cluster / Carrier: > 99-08-42-009 > Nov > 99 > IP Dimmer Control - Proper Setting Instrument Cluster / Carrier: All Technical Service Bulletins IP Dimmer Control - Proper Setting File In Section: 08 - Body and Accessories Bulletin No.: 99-08-42-009 Date: November, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Proper Setting of I/P Dimmer Control to View PRNDL Display with Automatic Headlamp Control Models: 2000 and Prior All Passenger Cars and Trucks With Automatic Headlamp Control and Electronic PRNDL Display Under certain conditions, if the instrument panel dimmer control is turned relatively low, the PRNDL will not be visible until the automatic headlamp control turns the headlamps off and the daytime running lamps (DRL) are turned back on. Such a condition may be if the vehicle is first started in an environment where the headlamp control turns on the headlamps and then the vehicle is driven out into a brighter environment (for example, when a vehicle is backed out of a dark garage into the bright sunlight). This condition is normal and any repair attempt will not be successful. Demonstrate this condition to the customer using the service lane and then turn the instrument panel dimmer control to a higher setting. This will enable the driver to see the PRNDL display Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Instrument Cluster / Carrier: > 912850A > Apr > 91 > Instrument Panel - Upper Surface Cleaning Instrument Cluster / Carrier: All Technical Service Bulletins Instrument Panel - Upper Surface Cleaning Number: 91-285-0A Section: 0A Date: APRIL 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 101003 Subject: CLEANING OF UPPER INSTRUMENT PANEL SURFACES Model and Year: ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS ALL YEARS Comments on reflection into the windshield of the upper instrument panel may be received. The condition of instrument panel reflection into the windshield in direct sunlight may be aggravated by dealers and owners applying a wax or silicone base material to the pad surface. The higher gloss of such application results in a "veiling reflection" in the windshield. Advise customers and new car make ready area that materials containing wax or silicone should not be used to clean the instrument panel pad. A warm water and mild soap solution such as saddle soap, oil soap, or an equivalent should be used whenever the instrument panel pad needs cleaning. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4204 Instrument Cluster / Carrier: Diagrams Front Lighting And Engine Controls Part 1 of 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4205 Engine Controls 6 Cyl Part 2 of 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4206 Alternator, Starter And Engine Controls Part 3 of 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4207 Instrument Panel And HVAC Controls Part 4 of 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4208 Instrument Panel And Fuse Block Part 5 of 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4209 Power Accessories Part 6 of 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4210 Radio Part 7 of 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4211 Exterior Lighting Part 8 of 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4212 Charging System Part 9 of 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4213 Fuel Tank Selector And Water In Fuel Sensor Part 10 of 10 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Instrument Cluster / Carrier: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions For information regarding B, C, P, U and Manufacturer Code Descriptions - Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier <--> [Instrument Cluster / Carrier] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4216 Instrument Cluster / Carrier: Service and Repair Fig. 16 Instrument bezel & cluster removal. C, K, R & V models C, K, R & V MODELS 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove headlight switch knob as outlined in ``Light Switch, Replace'' procedure. 3. Remove radio control knobs. 4. Remove steering column cover, if necessary. 5. Remove the eight instrument panel bezel attaching screws, Fig. 16, then the bezel. 6. Working from behind instrument cluster, disconnect speedometer cable. 7. Disconnect all lines and electrical connectors that will interfere with cluster removal. 8. Remove instrument cluster attaching screws, Fig. 16, then the instrument cluster. 9. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Maintenance Indicator - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T Fluid Level Indicator - Available Number: 90-406-7A Section: 7A Date: March 1991 Corporate Bulletin No.: 067107 Subject: AVAILABILITY/SERVICING OF NEW TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL INDICATOR Model and Year: 1982-90 C/K TRUCKS, 1987-90 R/V TRUCKS, 1983-90 G VANS WITH 3L80 OR 4L60 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION A new transmission fluid level indicator featuring a seal at the transmission fill tube inlet end is available. This indicator, which is installed on all 1991 C/K, R/V and G models, may be installed on previous models listed below. SERVICE PROCEDURE: When installing a new transmission fluid level indicator, replacement of the transmission fluid fill tube is not necessary. SERVICE PARTS INFORMATION Part Number Model Description 15659455 1982-90 C/K All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15659455 1987-90 RN All & Transmission fluid 3L80 or 4L60 level indicator 15677051 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 4L60 level indicator 15677052 1987-90 G2 (6.2C) & 4L60 Transmission fluid 1983-86 G All & 4L60 level indicator 15677055 1987-90 G3 (6.2J) & 3L80 Transmission fluid 1987-88 G3 (5.7M) & 3L80 level indicator 1984-86 G All & 3L80 1983 G3 & 3L80 15677056 1987-90 G All w/(4.3Z, 5.0H, 5.7K) Transmission fluid & 3L80 level indicator 15677057 1988-90 G3 (7.4N) & 3L80 Transmission fluid level indicator Parts are currently available from GMSPO. WARRANTY INFORMATION For vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation: K6130 Use applicable Labor Time Guide for labor hours. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair The Check Engine Lamp will be illuminated when the ignition switch is placed in the On position. When the engine is started, the lamp should go off. If the lamp remains on for 10 seconds or constantly after the engine is started, the self diagnosis system has detected a problem and has stored a code in the system Electronic Control Module (ECM). After diagnosis and repair, the ECM memory can be cleared of codes by removing the ECM fuse or disconnecting the battery ground cable for approximately 30 seconds, with ignition switch in the Off position. It should be noted, that if battery ground cable is disconnected to clear codes, components such as clocks, electronically tuned radios etc., will have to be reset. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations Odometer: Technical Service Bulletins Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations File In Section: 8 - Chassis/Body Electrical Bulletin No.: 66-83-04A Date: September, 1996 INFORMATION Subject: AC Delco Service Center Locations for Odometer/Speedometer Service Models: 1997 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (excluding Cadillac) This bulletin is being revised to provide the necessary contact information only. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 66-83-04 (Section 8 - Chassis/Body Electrical) General Motors provides service for sophisticated electronic products through the authorized AC Delco Service Center Program. This program is designed to provide GM vehicle owners with the highest quality and most technically up-to-date product available. Repair products from unauthorized service outlets are not acceptable as warranty replacements. Currently, there are 25 authorized AC Delco Service Centers who exchange and remanufacture odometer/speedometers (list included). Only these Centers should be contacted for service. Important: W series and 1997 T series Medium Duty truck odometer/speedometers must be ordered directly from GMSPO. The following steps should be taken when utilizing the AC Delco Service Centers: Dealers should contact their local AC Delco Service Center (list included). Any listed facility may be used. The following information must be provided: Part number VIN, Mileage, Vehicle Year, Make and Model Dealer Name and Address Delivery Date of Vehicle Name of the person requesting exchange or service Phone number Repair Order Number P.O. number (if non - warranty) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 4228 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 4229 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 4230 AC Delco Service Centers Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Level Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Level Warning Indicator: Description and Operation On models less gauges, the oil/choke warning indicator lamp should be illuminated when the ignition switch is in the Run or Start position. When the engine is started, the choke warning indicator lamp should go off. If the lamp fails to illuminate with ignition switch in Run or Start position with engine not operating, a burnt out bulb or fuse or defect in choke electrical system is indicated. If lamp remains on after engine has been started, a problem in the engine oil pressure system or electrical choke system exist. On models equipped with gauges, the choke warning indicator lamp should be illuminated when the ignition switch is in the Run or Start position. When the engine is started, the choke warning indicator lamp should go off. If fails to illuminate with ignition switch in Run or Start position with engine not operating, a burnt out bulb or fuse or defect in choke electrical system is indicated. If lamp remains on after engine has been started, a problem in the alternator circuit is indicated. After service has been completed, the lamp operation should return to normal. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications Oil Pressure Switch 10 ft.lb Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Many trucks utilize a warning light on the instrument panel in place of the conventional dash indicating gauge to warn the driver when the oil pressure is dangerously low. The warning light is wired in series with the ignition switch and the engine unit--which is an oil pressure switch. The oil pressure switch contains a diaphragm and a set of contacts. When the ignition switch is turned on, the warning light circuit is energized and the circuit is completed through the closed contacts in the pressure switch. When the engine is started, build-up of oil pressure compresses the diaphragm, opening the contacts, thereby breaking the circuit and putting out the light. TROUBLESHOOTING On some models, the oil pressure indicator light also serves as the electric choke defect indicator. If Oil or ENG. indicator light does not light, check to ensure electric choke is not disconnected at carburetor. Also check for defect in electric choke heater, blown gauge fuse or defect in lamp or wiring circuit. If indicator light stays on with engine running possible causes are: oil pressure is low, switch to indicator light wiring has an open circuit, oil pressure switch wire connector has disconnected or on some models, gauge or radio fuse has blown. The oil pressure warning light should go on when the ignition is turned on. If it does not light, disconnect the wire from the engine unit and ground the wire to the frame or cylinder block. Then if the warning light still does not go on with the ignition switch on, replace the bulb. If the warning light goes on when the wire is grounded to the frame or cylinder block, the engine unit should be checked for being loose or poorly grounded. If the unit is found to be tight and properly grounded, it should be removed and a new one installed. (The presence of sealing compound on the threads of the engine unit will cause a poor ground.) If the warning light remains lit when it normally should be out, replace the engine unit before proceeding further to determine the cause for a low pressure indication. The warning light will sometimes light up or flicker when the engine is idling, even though the oil pressure is adequate. However, the light should go out when the engine speed is increased. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > IP Dimmer Control - Proper Setting Dimmer Switch: Technical Service Bulletins IP Dimmer Control - Proper Setting File In Section: 08 - Body and Accessories Bulletin No.: 99-08-42-009 Date: November, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Proper Setting of I/P Dimmer Control to View PRNDL Display with Automatic Headlamp Control Models: 2000 and Prior All Passenger Cars and Trucks With Automatic Headlamp Control and Electronic PRNDL Display Under certain conditions, if the instrument panel dimmer control is turned relatively low, the PRNDL will not be visible until the automatic headlamp control turns the headlamps off and the daytime running lamps (DRL) are turned back on. Such a condition may be if the vehicle is first started in an environment where the headlamp control turns on the headlamps and then the vehicle is driven out into a brighter environment (for example, when a vehicle is backed out of a dark garage into the bright sunlight). This condition is normal and any repair attempt will not be successful. Demonstrate this condition to the customer using the service lane and then turn the instrument panel dimmer control to a higher setting. This will enable the driver to see the PRNDL display Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 83I23 > Dec > 82 > TCC - Engages at Incorrect Speed Speedometer Head: Customer Interest TCC - Engages at Incorrect Speed Number: 83-I-23 Section: VII Date: Dec., 1982 Subject: TCC ENGAGES AT INCORRECT SPEED - ALL GAS ENGINES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS If a condition is encountered where the torque converter clutch is engaging at the incorrect speed, be sure to check speedometer head magnet field plate for foreign material i.e.: grease, dirt, etc. Foreign material on the drum could change the signal to the ECM resulting in erratic TCC operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speedometer Head: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations Speedometer Head: All Technical Service Bulletins Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations File In Section: 8 - Chassis/Body Electrical Bulletin No.: 66-83-04A Date: September, 1996 INFORMATION Subject: AC Delco Service Center Locations for Odometer/Speedometer Service Models: 1997 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (excluding Cadillac) This bulletin is being revised to provide the necessary contact information only. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 66-83-04 (Section 8 - Chassis/Body Electrical) General Motors provides service for sophisticated electronic products through the authorized AC Delco Service Center Program. This program is designed to provide GM vehicle owners with the highest quality and most technically up-to-date product available. Repair products from unauthorized service outlets are not acceptable as warranty replacements. Currently, there are 25 authorized AC Delco Service Centers who exchange and remanufacture odometer/speedometers (list included). Only these Centers should be contacted for service. Important: W series and 1997 T series Medium Duty truck odometer/speedometers must be ordered directly from GMSPO. The following steps should be taken when utilizing the AC Delco Service Centers: Dealers should contact their local AC Delco Service Center (list included). Any listed facility may be used. The following information must be provided: Part number VIN, Mileage, Vehicle Year, Make and Model Dealer Name and Address Delivery Date of Vehicle Name of the person requesting exchange or service Phone number Repair Order Number P.O. number (if non - warranty) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speedometer Head: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 4258 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speedometer Head: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 4259 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speedometer Head: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 4260 AC Delco Service Centers Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speedometer Head: > 83I23 > Dec > 82 > TCC - Engages at Incorrect Speed Speedometer Head: All Technical Service Bulletins TCC - Engages at Incorrect Speed Number: 83-I-23 Section: VII Date: Dec., 1982 Subject: TCC ENGAGES AT INCORRECT SPEED - ALL GAS ENGINES TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS If a condition is encountered where the torque converter clutch is engaging at the incorrect speed, be sure to check speedometer head magnet field plate for foreign material i.e.: grease, dirt, etc. Foreign material on the drum could change the signal to the ECM resulting in erratic TCC operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Speedometer Head: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations Speedometer Head: All Technical Service Bulletins Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations File In Section: 8 - Chassis/Body Electrical Bulletin No.: 66-83-04A Date: September, 1996 INFORMATION Subject: AC Delco Service Center Locations for Odometer/Speedometer Service Models: 1997 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (excluding Cadillac) This bulletin is being revised to provide the necessary contact information only. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 66-83-04 (Section 8 - Chassis/Body Electrical) General Motors provides service for sophisticated electronic products through the authorized AC Delco Service Center Program. This program is designed to provide GM vehicle owners with the highest quality and most technically up-to-date product available. Repair products from unauthorized service outlets are not acceptable as warranty replacements. Currently, there are 25 authorized AC Delco Service Centers who exchange and remanufacture odometer/speedometers (list included). Only these Centers should be contacted for service. Important: W series and 1997 T series Medium Duty truck odometer/speedometers must be ordered directly from GMSPO. The following steps should be taken when utilizing the AC Delco Service Centers: Dealers should contact their local AC Delco Service Center (list included). Any listed facility may be used. The following information must be provided: Part number VIN, Mileage, Vehicle Year, Make and Model Dealer Name and Address Delivery Date of Vehicle Name of the person requesting exchange or service Phone number Repair Order Number P.O. number (if non - warranty) Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Speedometer Head: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 4270 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Speedometer Head: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 4271 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Speedometer Head: > 668304A > Sep > 96 > Odometer/Speedometer - ACDelco Service Center Locations > Page 4272 AC Delco Service Centers Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4273 Speedometer Head: Description and Operation The following material covers only that service on speedometers which is feasible to perform. Repairs on the units themselves are not included as they require special tools and extreme care when making repairs and adjustments that only an experienced speedometer technician should attempt. The speedometer has two main parts--the speedometer head and the speedometer drive cable. When the speedometer fails to indicate speed or mileage, the cable or cable housing is probably broken. SPEEDOMETER CABLE Most cables are broken due to lack of lubrication, or a sharp bend or kink in the housing. A cable might break because of the speedometer head mechanism binds. In such cases, the speedometer head should be repaired or replaced before a new cable or housing is installed. A ``jumpy'' pointer condition, together with a scraping noise, is due, in most instances, to a dry or kinked speedometer cable. The kinked cable rubs on the housing and winds up, slowing down the pointer. The cable then unwinds and the pointer ``jumps.'' To check for kinks, remove the cable, lay it on a flat surface and twist one end with the fingers. If it turns over smoothly the cable is not kinked. But if part of the cable flops over as it is twisted, the cable is kinked and should be replaced. LUBRICATION The speedometer cable should be lubricated with special cable lubricant. Fill the ferrule on the upper end of the housing with the cable lubricant. Insert the cable in the housing, starting at the upper end. Turn the cable around carefully while feeding it into the housing. Repeat filling the ferrule except for the last six inches of cable. Too much lubricant at this point may cause the lubricant to work into the speedometer head. INSTALLING CABLE During installation, if the cable sticks when inserted in the housing and will not go through, the housing is damaged inside or kinked. Be sure to check the housing from one end to the other. Straighten any sharp bends by relocating clamps or elbows. Replace housing if it is badly kinked or broken. Position the cable and housing so that they lead into the head as straight as possible. Check the new cable for kinks before installing it. Use wide, sweeping, gradual curves where the cable comes out of the transmission and connects to the head so the cable will not be damaged during installation. Arrange the housing so it does not lean against the engine because heat from the engine may dry out the lubricant. If inspection indicates that the cable and housing are in good condition, yet pointer action is erratic, check the speedometer head for possible binding. The speedometer drive pinion should also be checked. If the pinion is dry or its teeth are stripped, the speedometer may not register properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection A bimetal temperature switch located in the cylinder head controls the operation of a temperature indicator light with a red lens. If the engine cooling system is not functioning properly and coolant temperature exceeds a predetermined value, the warning light will illuminate. TROUBLESHOOTING If the red light is not lit when the engine is being cranked, check for a burned out bulb, an open in the light circuit, or a defective ignition switch. If the red light is lit when the engine is running, check the wiring between light and switch for a ground, defective temperature switch, or overheated cooling system. As a test circuit to check whether the red bulb is functioning properly, a wire which is connected to the ground terminal of the ignition switch is tapped into its circuit. When the ignition is in the ``Start'' (engine cranking) position, the ground terminal is grounded inside the switch and the red bulb will be lit. When the engine is started and the ignition switch is in the ``On'' position, the test circuit is opened and the bulb is then controlled by the temperature switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Reduced PRNDL Display Visibility Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Reduced PRNDL Display Visibility Bulletin No.: 02-08-42-004A Date: March 30, 2007 INFORMATION Subject: PRNDL Display Reduced Visibility For Approximately One Minute Models: 2007 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2007 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2005-2007 Saab 9-7X with Automatic Headlamp Control and Vacuum Fluorescent PRNDL Indicator Instrument Panel Cluster Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to include additional models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-42-0004 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). After backing the vehicle out of a garage or dark environment into a daylight environment, the PRNDL display has reduced visibility for approximately one minute. While the vehicle is parked in a dark environment, the sensor for the automatic headlamp/driving lamps senses that it is dark. When the key is turned to the run/start position, the automatic headlamp module will turn all driving lamps, the instrument panel cluster and PRNDL display ON in the night-time mode. The night-time mode intensity of the instrument panel lamps and PRNDL display is controlled by the automatic headlamp module and can be dimmed further by the customer using the dimming control of the headlamp switch. When the customer then moves the vehicle from the dark environment into the bright sunlight, it will take approximately one minute before the headlamp control module recognizes this as true daylight and not just a bright overhead street lamp shining on the sensor. The headlamp control module will then turn the headlamps off and restore the instrument panel and PRNDL display to full brilliance. Without the time delay, the automatic headlamp control module would switch to the night mode (turn on all driving lamps, instrument panel lamps and PRNDL display would dim) each time the vehicle was driven under an overpass or other darkened environment. This is a normal condition and no repair should be attempted. Ensure the instrument panel backlighting control is in the full bright position. This will help alleviate the condition. You may demonstrate to the customer what happens by placing a repair order over the automatic headlamp control light sensor, which will cause the automatic headlamp control module to switch to the night mode in approximately one minute. All driving lamps will come ON, the instrument panel backlight will be dim, and the PRNDL display will also dim to the night setting in conjunction with the position of the headlamp switch dimming control. Demonstrate to the customer the variance in the instrument panel backlighting and PRNDL display while adjusting the headlamp switch dimming control to both ends of its allowable range. Advise the customer to keep the headlight switch dimming control in the highest position to allow viewing of the PRNDL display in a bright environment. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Vacuum Gauge/Economy Meter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Vacuum Gauge/Economy Meter: Testing and Inspection Fig. 3 Typical vacuum gauge This gauge, Fig. 3, measures intake manifold vacuum. The intake manifold vacuum varies with engine operating conditions, carburetor adjustments, valve timing, ignition timing and general engine condition. Since the optimum fuel economy is directly proportional to a properly functioning engine, a high vacuum reading on the gauge relates to fuel economy. Most gauges have colored sectors, the green sector being the ``Economy'' range and the red the ``Power'' range. Therefore, the vehicle should be operated with gauge registering in the green sector or a high numerical number, Fig. 3, for maximum economy. FUEL ECONOMY WARNING SYSTEM This system actually monitors the engine vacuum just like the vacuum gauge, but all it registers is a low vacuum. The light on the instrument panel warns the vehicle operator when engine manifold vacuum drops below the economical limit. Switch operation is similar to that of the oil pressure indicating light, except that the switch opens when vacuum, rather than oil pressure, is applied. TROUBLESHOOTING Fuel Economy Warning Light The fuel economy warning light should go on when the ignition is turned on. If it does not light, disconnect the wire from the fuel economy vacuum switch connector and ground the wire to the frame or cylinder block. If the warning light still does not go on, check for burned out indicating bulb or an open in the harness between the vacuum switch and instrument panel. If the warning light goes on, circuit is functioning and the vacuum switch should be checked for proper ground. Remove and clean the mounting bracket screws and the mounting surfaces. If system still does not operate, perform the following: With the electrical connector and vacuum tube disconnected from the switch, connect a self-powered test light to the switch electrical connector and to the vacuum gauge mounting bracket. Attach a vacuum pump to gauge. If the following conditions are not met, the switch has to be replaced: 1. With vacuum applied, test light should be ``Off.'' 2. With no vacuum to the vacuum switch, test light should be ``On.'' If the warning light remains lit when it normally should be out, check vacuum hose to vacuum switch for damage or plugged condition. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Volt Meter Gauge > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Volt Meter Gauge: Testing and Inspection The voltmeter is a gauge which measures the electrical flow from the battery to indicate whether the battery output is within tolerances. The voltmeter reading can range from 13.5---14.0 volts under normal operating conditions. If an undercharge or overcharge condition is indicated for an extended period, the battery and charging system should be checked. TROUBLESHOOTING To check voltmeter, turn key and headlights on with engine off. Pointer should move to 12.5 volts. If no needle movement is observed, check connections from battery to circuit breaker. If connections are tight and meter shows no movement, check wire continuity. If wire continuity is satisfactory, the meter is inoperative and must be replaced. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Water In Fuel Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Water In Fuel Indicator: Testing and Inspection Fig. 4 Water in fuel detector & tank purge procedure. 1980---84 DESCRIPTION & OPERATION 1980---84 The Water In Fuel warning system employs an electronic water detector mounted inside the fuel tank on the fuel gauge sending unit. The detector provides a warning when 1---21/2 gallons of water are present in the fuel tank by lighting a warning lamp on the instrument panel. The sending unit assembly also contains a provision for siphoning off water in the fuel tank through the fuel return line, Fig. 4. The Water In Fuel lamp will come on for 2---5 seconds each time ignition is switched to Run position to ensure lamp is operating. If water is present in fuel, the lamp will come on after a 15---20 second delay and remain on. Fig. 5 Water in fuel detector. 1985---88 1985---88 The Water In Fuel warning system employs a fuel detector integral with the fuel filter and fuel heater, Fig. 5, and mounted on the engine. When more than 2.2 ounces of water has collected in the filter, the Water In Fuel lamp on the instrument panel will light. After the light comes on, the filter should be drained as soon as possible and must be drained within 2 hours of operation. TROUBLESHOOTING Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Water In Fuel Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4290 1980---84 1. If warning indicator fails to light during bulb check, proceed as follows: a. Disconnect electrical connector from fuel gauge sensing unit. b. Ground yellow/black wire in connector, then turn ignition to Run position. c. If indicator lamp lights, remove fuel gauge tank unit and check yellow wire for opens. Also, check connections to Water In Fuel detector and mounting screws. If connections and attachments are satisfactory, replace detector. d. If indicator lamp fails to light, check indicator lamp bulb. If bulb is satisfactory, check for open in yellow wire between lamp socket and sending unit and repair as necessary. 2. If warning indicator is lit at all times, proceed as follows: a. Disconnect electrical connector from fuel gauge sending unit, then turn ignition to Run position. b. If light remains lit, repair short to ground in yellow/black wire between sender and warning lamp. c. If light goes out, drain water from fuel tank, then recheck circuit. If lamp remains on with harness connected to sending unit, wiring to water detector or the detector itself is at fault. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair MANUAL TRANSMISSION MODELS Column Mounted Type 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect switch wiring harness. 3. Remove switch retaining screws and switch. 4. Assemble new switch onto column, then install retaining screws. 5. Reconnect battery ground cable, then check switch for proper operation. Transmission Mounted Type 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Disconnect switch wiring harness, then remove switch from transmission. 4. Reverse procedure to install, then check switch for proper operation. Models With Neutral Start/Mechanical Lockout 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect wiring harness connectors at switch. 3. Remove switch retaining screws and switch from mast jacket. 4. Place gear selector in neutral, then align actuator on new switch with hole in shift tube. 5. Position connector side of switch into cutout in lower jacket, then push down on front of switch until tangs snap into holes in jacket. Install retaining screws. 6. Reconnect wiring harness connectors, then place shift lever in Park. 7. Reconnect battery ground cable, then check switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Brake Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-08-42-001H Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Guidelines Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-42-001G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The following information is being provided to better define the causes of condensation in exterior lamps and includes guidelines for determining the difference between a lamp with a normal atmospheric condition (condensation) and a lamp with a water leak. Some exterior lamps, such as cornering, turn signal, backup, headlamps or tail lamps may exhibit very small droplets of water, a fine mist or white fog (condensation) on the inside of the lamp lens. This may be more noticeable on lamps with "multi-lens" designs and may be normal during certain weather conditions. Condensation occurs when the air inside the lamp assembly, through atmospheric changes, reaches the "dew point". When this takes place, the moisture in the air within the lamp assembly condenses, creating a fine mist or white fog on the inside surface of the lamp lens. Most exterior lamps on General Motors vehicles use a vented design and feature a replaceable bulb assembly. They are designed to remove any accumulated moisture vapor by expelling it through a vent system. The vent system operates at all times, however, it is most effective when the lamps are ON or when the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the size, shape and location of the lamp on the vehicle, and the atmospheric conditions occurring, the amount of time required to clear the lamp may vary from 2 to 6 hours. Completely sealed headlamp assemblies (sealed beams) are still used on a limited number of models being manufactured today. These lamps require the replacement of the complete lamp assembly if a bulb filament burns out. Condensation 2006 TrailBlazer Shown A Fine Mist or White Fog on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens Occurring After a Period of High Humidity - May be located primarily in the lens corners (near the vents) and SHOULD NOT cover more than half the lens surface. - The condition should clear of moisture when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a SIMILAR performance. If the above conditions are noted, the customer should be advised that replacement of a lamp assembly may not correct this condition. Water Leak New Style Pickup Shown Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 4300 Numerous & Various Size Drops of Water Collecting on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens After the Vehicle Has Been Exposed to Rain or a Car Washing Environment - A condition that covers more than half the surface of the lamp lens. - An accumulation of water in the bottom of the lamp assembly. - A condition that WON'T clear when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a different performance. Any of the above conditions would indicate the need to service the lens or lamp assembly. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4301 Brake Lamp: Diagrams Crew Cab Rear Lighting Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4302 Fleetside Rear Lighting Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4303 Stepside Rear Lighting Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4304 Wideside Exterior Lighting Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Number: 89-262-5 Section: 5 Date: September 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 915002 Subject: LIGHT BRAKE DRAG - BRAKE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Model and Year: 1980-89 A, B, F, G, J, L, X, Y 1980-89 ALL TRUCKS Figure 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 89-178-5, DATED JUNE 1989, IN ORDER THAT WE MAY CORRECTLY IDENTIFY THE SWITCH REQUIRING ADJUSTMENT. ALL COPIES OF 89-178-5 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some vehicles may experience a condition of light brake drag while driving. These conditions have been found to be more noticeable on vehicles which have an anti-lock brake system. This may be caused by improper brake switch adjustment. If the brake switch is not adjusted properly, the switch may push on the brake pedal and cause the brake to remain partially applied. If a vehicle exhibits any of the above conditions, perform the following functional brake switch adjustment check: Passenger Cars Only: The following steps should be used to check brake switch adjustment: 1. Remove the driver-side hush panel (refer to Figure 1). 2. Gently pull back on the brake pedal until no audible clicks are heard. The switch will be moved in the tubular retainer providing adjustment. 3. Replace the hush panel. 4. Verify that the brake drag condition is no longer present and that the cruise control and brake lights function properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving > Page 4313 If the functional brake switch adjustment check does not repair the condition, refer to Section 5 of the appropriate Service Information Manual for aid in diagnosing other causes. For warranty purposes use: Labor Operation Number: N2440 Labor Time: .3 hour TRUCK ONLY: Service Procedure: 1. Depress the brake pedal and press the switch in until it is firmly seated in the clip. * Audible "clicks" can be heard as the threaded portion of the switch is pushed through the clip. 2. Pull the brake pedal against the pedal stop until the audible "click" can no longer be heard. For stop lamp switch adjustments on vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation Number: T7945 Labor Time: .2 Hr. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Number: 89-262-5 Section: 5 Date: September 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 915002 Subject: LIGHT BRAKE DRAG - BRAKE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Model and Year: 1980-89 A, B, F, G, J, L, X, Y 1980-89 ALL TRUCKS Figure 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 89-178-5, DATED JUNE 1989, IN ORDER THAT WE MAY CORRECTLY IDENTIFY THE SWITCH REQUIRING ADJUSTMENT. ALL COPIES OF 89-178-5 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some vehicles may experience a condition of light brake drag while driving. These conditions have been found to be more noticeable on vehicles which have an anti-lock brake system. This may be caused by improper brake switch adjustment. If the brake switch is not adjusted properly, the switch may push on the brake pedal and cause the brake to remain partially applied. If a vehicle exhibits any of the above conditions, perform the following functional brake switch adjustment check: Passenger Cars Only: The following steps should be used to check brake switch adjustment: 1. Remove the driver-side hush panel (refer to Figure 1). 2. Gently pull back on the brake pedal until no audible clicks are heard. The switch will be moved in the tubular retainer providing adjustment. 3. Replace the hush panel. 4. Verify that the brake drag condition is no longer present and that the cruise control and brake lights function properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving > Page 4319 If the functional brake switch adjustment check does not repair the condition, refer to Section 5 of the appropriate Service Information Manual for aid in diagnosing other causes. For warranty purposes use: Labor Operation Number: N2440 Labor Time: .3 hour TRUCK ONLY: Service Procedure: 1. Depress the brake pedal and press the switch in until it is firmly seated in the clip. * Audible "clicks" can be heard as the threaded portion of the switch is pushed through the clip. 2. Pull the brake pedal against the pedal stop until the audible "click" can no longer be heard. For stop lamp switch adjustments on vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation Number: T7945 Labor Time: .2 Hr. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4320 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect wiring connector at switch. 2. Remove retaining nut, if equipped, then unscrew switch from mounting bracket. 3. To install, depress brake pedal and push new switch into clip until shoulder bottoms out. 4. Plug connector onto switch and check operation. Electrical contact should be made when pedal is depressed .500 inch (Caballero and El Camino), .700 inch (G and P models) or 1.125 inch (C, K, R and V models) from its fully released position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > IP Dimmer Control - Proper Setting Dimmer Switch: Technical Service Bulletins IP Dimmer Control - Proper Setting File In Section: 08 - Body and Accessories Bulletin No.: 99-08-42-009 Date: November, 1999 INFORMATION Subject: Proper Setting of I/P Dimmer Control to View PRNDL Display with Automatic Headlamp Control Models: 2000 and Prior All Passenger Cars and Trucks With Automatic Headlamp Control and Electronic PRNDL Display Under certain conditions, if the instrument panel dimmer control is turned relatively low, the PRNDL will not be visible until the automatic headlamp control turns the headlamps off and the daytime running lamps (DRL) are turned back on. Such a condition may be if the vehicle is first started in an environment where the headlamp control turns on the headlamps and then the vehicle is driven out into a brighter environment (for example, when a vehicle is backed out of a dark garage into the bright sunlight). This condition is normal and any repair attempt will not be successful. Demonstrate this condition to the customer using the service lane and then turn the instrument panel dimmer control to a higher setting. This will enable the driver to see the PRNDL display Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Column Mounted Dimmer Switch Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Column Mounted Dimmer Switch Fig. 11 Column mounted dimmer switch installation 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove instrument panel lower trim and on models with A/C, remove A/C duct extension at column. 3. Disconnect shift indicator from column and remove toe-plate cover screws. 4. Remove two nuts from instrument panel support bracket studs and lower steering column, resting steering wheel on front seat. 5. Remove dimmer switch retaining screws and the switch. Tape actuator rod to column and separate switch from rod. 6. Reverse procedure to install. To adjust switch, depress dimmer switch slightly and install a 3/32 inch twist drill to lock the switch to the body, Fig. 11. Force switch upward to remove lash between switch and pivot. Torque switch retaining screw to 35 inch lbs. and remove tape from actuator rod. Remove twist drill and check for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Column Mounted Dimmer Switch > Page 4330 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Floor Mounted Dimmer Switch 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Fold back carpeting in area of switch, then disconnect electrical connector from switch. 3. Remove switch retaining screws and the switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Lens > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention Headlamp Lens: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Headlamp Polycarbonate Lens Damage Prevention INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 02-08-42-001D Date: June 21, 2010 Subject: Headlamp Lens Overheating When Covered and Chemical Damage to Exterior Polycarbonate Headlamp Lenses Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add model years and to revise the warning statements. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 02-08-42-001C (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The bulletin is being issued to make dealers and customers aware of chemical damage that may be caused to exterior polycarbonate headlamp lenses. Most late model vehicles have these types of headlamp lenses. This material is used because of its temperature and high impact resistance. A variety of chemicals can cause crazing or cracking of the headlamp lens. Headlamp lenses are very sensitive. Care should be exercised to avoid contact with all exterior headlamp lenses when treating a vehicle with any type of chemical, such as those recommended for rail dust removal. Rubbing compound, grease tar and oil removers, tire cleaners, cleaner waxes and even car wash soaps in too high a concentration may also attribute to this condition. This could result in the need to replace the entire headlamp housing. Warning Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Also, crazing or deformations of the lens may occur if a shop mat or fender cover is draped over the fender and covers a portion or all of the headlamp assembly while the DRL or headlamps are on. This action restricts the amount of heat dissipated by the headlamps. Warning Care should be taken to not cover headlamps with shop mats or fender covers if the vehicle is being serviced with the headlamps or DRL illuminated. Covering an illuminated lamp can cause excessive heat build up and crazing/deformation of the lens may occur. The degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually become hairline cracks in the lens. In extreme cases, it could cause the lens to deform. This damage can also be caused by aftermarket shields that are often tinted in color. Once a heat buildup is generated by the headlamp, a degradation of the headlamp lens begins. This degradation of the lens can be unnoticeable at first and eventually manifest as spider cracks. In more extreme cases, it will begin to melt the lens of the headlamp. Notice Headlamps damaged by chemicals, improper cleaning, or overheating due to being covered are not covered under the new vehicle warranty. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Fig. 9 Headlamp switch. C, G, K, R & V models C, K, R & V MODELS 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Reaching behind instrument cluster, depress shaft retaining button and remove switch knob and rod. 3. Remove left side instrument cluster bezel screws, then pull outward on bezel and hold switch retaining nut with wrench, Fig. 9. 4. Disconnect wiring connector, then rotate switch counterclockwise and remove from vehicle. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Parking Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-08-42-001H Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Guidelines Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-42-001G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The following information is being provided to better define the causes of condensation in exterior lamps and includes guidelines for determining the difference between a lamp with a normal atmospheric condition (condensation) and a lamp with a water leak. Some exterior lamps, such as cornering, turn signal, backup, headlamps or tail lamps may exhibit very small droplets of water, a fine mist or white fog (condensation) on the inside of the lamp lens. This may be more noticeable on lamps with "multi-lens" designs and may be normal during certain weather conditions. Condensation occurs when the air inside the lamp assembly, through atmospheric changes, reaches the "dew point". When this takes place, the moisture in the air within the lamp assembly condenses, creating a fine mist or white fog on the inside surface of the lamp lens. Most exterior lamps on General Motors vehicles use a vented design and feature a replaceable bulb assembly. They are designed to remove any accumulated moisture vapor by expelling it through a vent system. The vent system operates at all times, however, it is most effective when the lamps are ON or when the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the size, shape and location of the lamp on the vehicle, and the atmospheric conditions occurring, the amount of time required to clear the lamp may vary from 2 to 6 hours. Completely sealed headlamp assemblies (sealed beams) are still used on a limited number of models being manufactured today. These lamps require the replacement of the complete lamp assembly if a bulb filament burns out. Condensation 2006 TrailBlazer Shown A Fine Mist or White Fog on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens Occurring After a Period of High Humidity - May be located primarily in the lens corners (near the vents) and SHOULD NOT cover more than half the lens surface. - The condition should clear of moisture when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a SIMILAR performance. If the above conditions are noted, the customer should be advised that replacement of a lamp assembly may not correct this condition. Water Leak New Style Pickup Shown Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 4342 Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 4343 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair MANUAL TRANSMISSION MODELS Column Mounted Type 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect switch wiring harness. 3. Remove switch retaining screws and switch. 4. Assemble new switch onto column, then install retaining screws. 5. Reconnect battery ground cable, then check switch for proper operation. Transmission Mounted Type 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Disconnect switch wiring harness, then remove switch from transmission. 4. Reverse procedure to install, then check switch for proper operation. Models With Neutral Start/Mechanical Lockout 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect wiring harness connectors at switch. 3. Remove switch retaining screws and switch from mast jacket. 4. Place gear selector in neutral, then align actuator on new switch with hole in shift tube. 5. Position connector side of switch into cutout in lower jacket, then push down on front of switch until tangs snap into holes in jacket. Install retaining screws. 6. Reconnect wiring harness connectors, then place shift lever in Park. 7. Reconnect battery ground cable, then check switch for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Brake Light Switch: Customer Interest Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Number: 89-262-5 Section: 5 Date: September 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 915002 Subject: LIGHT BRAKE DRAG - BRAKE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Model and Year: 1980-89 A, B, F, G, J, L, X, Y 1980-89 ALL TRUCKS Figure 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 89-178-5, DATED JUNE 1989, IN ORDER THAT WE MAY CORRECTLY IDENTIFY THE SWITCH REQUIRING ADJUSTMENT. ALL COPIES OF 89-178-5 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some vehicles may experience a condition of light brake drag while driving. These conditions have been found to be more noticeable on vehicles which have an anti-lock brake system. This may be caused by improper brake switch adjustment. If the brake switch is not adjusted properly, the switch may push on the brake pedal and cause the brake to remain partially applied. If a vehicle exhibits any of the above conditions, perform the following functional brake switch adjustment check: Passenger Cars Only: The following steps should be used to check brake switch adjustment: 1. Remove the driver-side hush panel (refer to Figure 1). 2. Gently pull back on the brake pedal until no audible clicks are heard. The switch will be moved in the tubular retainer providing adjustment. 3. Replace the hush panel. 4. Verify that the brake drag condition is no longer present and that the cruise control and brake lights function properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Light Switch: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving > Page 4356 If the functional brake switch adjustment check does not repair the condition, refer to Section 5 of the appropriate Service Information Manual for aid in diagnosing other causes. For warranty purposes use: Labor Operation Number: N2440 Labor Time: .3 hour TRUCK ONLY: Service Procedure: 1. Depress the brake pedal and press the switch in until it is firmly seated in the clip. * Audible "clicks" can be heard as the threaded portion of the switch is pushed through the clip. 2. Pull the brake pedal against the pedal stop until the audible "click" can no longer be heard. For stop lamp switch adjustments on vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation Number: T7945 Labor Time: .2 Hr. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Brake Light Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving Number: 89-262-5 Section: 5 Date: September 1989 Corporate Bulletin No.: 915002 Subject: LIGHT BRAKE DRAG - BRAKE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT Model and Year: 1980-89 A, B, F, G, J, L, X, Y 1980-89 ALL TRUCKS Figure 1 TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS THIS BULLETIN CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES DEALER SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 89-178-5, DATED JUNE 1989, IN ORDER THAT WE MAY CORRECTLY IDENTIFY THE SWITCH REQUIRING ADJUSTMENT. ALL COPIES OF 89-178-5 SHOULD BE DISCARDED. Some vehicles may experience a condition of light brake drag while driving. These conditions have been found to be more noticeable on vehicles which have an anti-lock brake system. This may be caused by improper brake switch adjustment. If the brake switch is not adjusted properly, the switch may push on the brake pedal and cause the brake to remain partially applied. If a vehicle exhibits any of the above conditions, perform the following functional brake switch adjustment check: Passenger Cars Only: The following steps should be used to check brake switch adjustment: 1. Remove the driver-side hush panel (refer to Figure 1). 2. Gently pull back on the brake pedal until no audible clicks are heard. The switch will be moved in the tubular retainer providing adjustment. 3. Replace the hush panel. 4. Verify that the brake drag condition is no longer present and that the cruise control and brake lights function properly. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Light Switch: > 892625 > Sep > 89 > Brakes - Light Brake Drag While Driving > Page 4362 If the functional brake switch adjustment check does not repair the condition, refer to Section 5 of the appropriate Service Information Manual for aid in diagnosing other causes. For warranty purposes use: Labor Operation Number: N2440 Labor Time: .3 hour TRUCK ONLY: Service Procedure: 1. Depress the brake pedal and press the switch in until it is firmly seated in the clip. * Audible "clicks" can be heard as the threaded portion of the switch is pushed through the clip. 2. Pull the brake pedal against the pedal stop until the audible "click" can no longer be heard. For stop lamp switch adjustments on vehicles repaired under warranty use: Labor Operation Number: T7945 Labor Time: .2 Hr. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4363 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect wiring connector at switch. 2. Remove retaining nut, if equipped, then unscrew switch from mounting bracket. 3. To install, depress brake pedal and push new switch into clip until shoulder bottoms out. 4. Plug connector onto switch and check operation. Electrical contact should be made when pedal is depressed .500 inch (Caballero and El Camino), .700 inch (G and P models) or 1.125 inch (C, K, R and V models) from its fully released position. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Column Mounted Dimmer Switch Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Column Mounted Dimmer Switch Fig. 11 Column mounted dimmer switch installation 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Remove instrument panel lower trim and on models with A/C, remove A/C duct extension at column. 3. Disconnect shift indicator from column and remove toe-plate cover screws. 4. Remove two nuts from instrument panel support bracket studs and lower steering column, resting steering wheel on front seat. 5. Remove dimmer switch retaining screws and the switch. Tape actuator rod to column and separate switch from rod. 6. Reverse procedure to install. To adjust switch, depress dimmer switch slightly and install a 3/32 inch twist drill to lock the switch to the body, Fig. 11. Force switch upward to remove lash between switch and pivot. Torque switch retaining screw to 35 inch lbs. and remove tape from actuator rod. Remove twist drill and check for proper operation. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Column Mounted Dimmer Switch > Page 4368 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Floor Mounted Dimmer Switch 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Fold back carpeting in area of switch, then disconnect electrical connector from switch. 3. Remove switch retaining screws and the switch. 4. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Fig. 9 Headlamp switch. C, G, K, R & V models C, K, R & V MODELS 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Reaching behind instrument cluster, depress shaft retaining button and remove switch knob and rod. 3. Remove left side instrument cluster bezel screws, then pull outward on bezel and hold switch retaining nut with wrench, Fig. 9. 4. Disconnect wiring connector, then rotate switch counterclockwise and remove from vehicle. 5. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair DIRECTIONAL SIGNAL SWITCH The directional signal switch can be removed with the steering column in the vehicle and without disturbing any of the column mountings. Removal 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. Remove the column to instrument panel trim cover. 3. Position screwdriver blade into cover slot. Pry up and out to free cover from lock plate. 4. Screw the center post of Lock Plate Compressing Tool J-23653 onto the steering shaft as far as it will Compress the lock plate by turning the center post clockwise. Pry the round wire snap ring out of the shaft groove and discard the ring. Remove Tool J-23653 and lift the end of the shaft. NOTICE: If the column is being disassembled on the bench, with the snap ring removed the shaft could slide out of the lower end of the mast jacket, damaging the shaft assembly. 5. Slide the directional signal cancelling cam upper bearing preload spring and thrust washer off the end of the shaft. 6. Remove the directional signal lever screw and remove the lever. 7. Push the hazard warning knob in and unscrew the knob. 8. Remove the three switch mounting screws. 9. All Columns - Pull the switch connector out of the bracket on the jacket and feed switch connector through column support bracket and pull switch straight up, guiding the wiring harness through the column housing and protector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4375 10. Remove wire protector by pulling downward out of column with pliers using tab provided. Tilt Column - Position the directional signal and shifter housing in the "low" position. Remove the harness cover by pulling toward the lower end of the column, be careful not to damage the wires. 11. Remove the three switch mounting screws and pull the switch straight up, guiding the wiring harness and cover through the column housing. Installation CAUTION: It is extremely important that only the specified screws, bolts and nuts be used at assembly, or personal injury could result. Use of overlength screws could prevent a portion of the assembly from compressing under impact. 1. All except Tilt - Be sure that the wiring harness is in the protector. Feed the connector and cover down through the housing and under the mounting bracket (column in vehicle). Tilt - Feed the connector down through the housing and under the mounting bracket. Then install the cover on the harness. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4376 2. Install the three mounting screws and clip the connector to the bracket on the jacket. 3. Install the column to instrument panel trim plate. 4. Install the hazard warning knob and directional signal lever. 5. Make certain that the switch is in "Neutral" and the hazard warning knob is out. Slide the thrust washer, upper bearing preload spring and cancelling cam onto the upper end of the shaft. 6. Place the lock plate onto the end of the shaft. Screw the center post of the Lock Plate Compressing Tool J-23653 onto the steering shaft as far as it will go. Place a NEW snap ring over the center post. Place the "C" bar over the center post and then compress the lock plate by turning the nut clockwise. Slide the new snap ring down the tapered center post and into the shaft groove. Remove Tool J-23653. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Tail Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-08-42-001H Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Guidelines Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-42-001G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The following information is being provided to better define the causes of condensation in exterior lamps and includes guidelines for determining the difference between a lamp with a normal atmospheric condition (condensation) and a lamp with a water leak. Some exterior lamps, such as cornering, turn signal, backup, headlamps or tail lamps may exhibit very small droplets of water, a fine mist or white fog (condensation) on the inside of the lamp lens. This may be more noticeable on lamps with "multi-lens" designs and may be normal during certain weather conditions. Condensation occurs when the air inside the lamp assembly, through atmospheric changes, reaches the "dew point". When this takes place, the moisture in the air within the lamp assembly condenses, creating a fine mist or white fog on the inside surface of the lamp lens. Most exterior lamps on General Motors vehicles use a vented design and feature a replaceable bulb assembly. They are designed to remove any accumulated moisture vapor by expelling it through a vent system. The vent system operates at all times, however, it is most effective when the lamps are ON or when the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the size, shape and location of the lamp on the vehicle, and the atmospheric conditions occurring, the amount of time required to clear the lamp may vary from 2 to 6 hours. Completely sealed headlamp assemblies (sealed beams) are still used on a limited number of models being manufactured today. These lamps require the replacement of the complete lamp assembly if a bulb filament burns out. Condensation 2006 TrailBlazer Shown A Fine Mist or White Fog on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens Occurring After a Period of High Humidity - May be located primarily in the lens corners (near the vents) and SHOULD NOT cover more than half the lens surface. - The condition should clear of moisture when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a SIMILAR performance. If the above conditions are noted, the customer should be advised that replacement of a lamp assembly may not correct this condition. Water Leak New Style Pickup Shown Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 4381 Numerous & Various Size Drops of Water Collecting on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens After the Vehicle Has Been Exposed to Rain or a Car Washing Environment - A condition that covers more than half the surface of the lamp lens. - An accumulation of water in the bottom of the lamp assembly. - A condition that WON'T clear when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a different performance. Any of the above conditions would indicate the need to service the lens or lamp assembly. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Stop, Tail and Turn Signal (Crew Cab) Crew Cab Rear Lighting Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Stop, Tail and Turn Signal (Crew Cab) > Page 4384 Fleetside Rear Lighting Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Stop, Tail and Turn Signal (Crew Cab) > Page 4385 Stepside Rear Lighting Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Stop, Tail and Turn Signal (Crew Cab) > Page 4386 Wideside Exterior Lighting Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Light Duty Trailer Towing Package Trailer Wiring Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Light Duty Trailer Towing Package > Page 4391 Junction Blocks Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Turn Signal Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 01-08-42-001H Date: January 05, 2011 Subject: Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement Guidelines Models: 2011 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 01-08-42-001G (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). The following information is being provided to better define the causes of condensation in exterior lamps and includes guidelines for determining the difference between a lamp with a normal atmospheric condition (condensation) and a lamp with a water leak. Some exterior lamps, such as cornering, turn signal, backup, headlamps or tail lamps may exhibit very small droplets of water, a fine mist or white fog (condensation) on the inside of the lamp lens. This may be more noticeable on lamps with "multi-lens" designs and may be normal during certain weather conditions. Condensation occurs when the air inside the lamp assembly, through atmospheric changes, reaches the "dew point". When this takes place, the moisture in the air within the lamp assembly condenses, creating a fine mist or white fog on the inside surface of the lamp lens. Most exterior lamps on General Motors vehicles use a vented design and feature a replaceable bulb assembly. They are designed to remove any accumulated moisture vapor by expelling it through a vent system. The vent system operates at all times, however, it is most effective when the lamps are ON or when the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the size, shape and location of the lamp on the vehicle, and the atmospheric conditions occurring, the amount of time required to clear the lamp may vary from 2 to 6 hours. Completely sealed headlamp assemblies (sealed beams) are still used on a limited number of models being manufactured today. These lamps require the replacement of the complete lamp assembly if a bulb filament burns out. Condensation 2006 TrailBlazer Shown A Fine Mist or White Fog on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens Occurring After a Period of High Humidity - May be located primarily in the lens corners (near the vents) and SHOULD NOT cover more than half the lens surface. - The condition should clear of moisture when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a SIMILAR performance. If the above conditions are noted, the customer should be advised that replacement of a lamp assembly may not correct this condition. Water Leak New Style Pickup Shown Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Exterior Lamp Condensation and Replacement > Page 4397 Numerous & Various Size Drops of Water Collecting on the Inside Surface of the Lamp Lens After the Vehicle Has Been Exposed to Rain or a Car Washing Environment - A condition that covers more than half the surface of the lamp lens. - An accumulation of water in the bottom of the lamp assembly. - A condition that WON'T clear when the vehicle is parked in a dry environment, or when the vehicle is driven with the lights ON. - A comparison of the equivalent lamp on the opposing side of the vehicle indicates a different performance. Any of the above conditions would indicate the need to service the lens or lamp assembly. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair DIRECTIONAL SIGNAL SWITCH The directional signal switch can be removed with the steering column in the vehicle and without disturbing any of the column mountings. Removal 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. Remove the column to instrument panel trim cover. 3. Position screwdriver blade into cover slot. Pry up and out to free cover from lock plate. 4. Screw the center post of Lock Plate Compressing Tool J-23653 onto the steering shaft as far as it will Compress the lock plate by turning the center post clockwise. Pry the round wire snap ring out of the shaft groove and discard the ring. Remove Tool J-23653 and lift the end of the shaft. NOTICE: If the column is being disassembled on the bench, with the snap ring removed the shaft could slide out of the lower end of the mast jacket, damaging the shaft assembly. 5. Slide the directional signal cancelling cam upper bearing preload spring and thrust washer off the end of the shaft. 6. Remove the directional signal lever screw and remove the lever. 7. Push the hazard warning knob in and unscrew the knob. 8. Remove the three switch mounting screws. 9. All Columns - Pull the switch connector out of the bracket on the jacket and feed switch connector through column support bracket and pull switch straight up, guiding the wiring harness through the column housing and protector. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4401 10. Remove wire protector by pulling downward out of column with pliers using tab provided. Tilt Column - Position the directional signal and shifter housing in the "low" position. Remove the harness cover by pulling toward the lower end of the column, be careful not to damage the wires. 11. Remove the three switch mounting screws and pull the switch straight up, guiding the wiring harness and cover through the column housing. Installation CAUTION: It is extremely important that only the specified screws, bolts and nuts be used at assembly, or personal injury could result. Use of overlength screws could prevent a portion of the assembly from compressing under impact. 1. All except Tilt - Be sure that the wiring harness is in the protector. Feed the connector and cover down through the housing and under the mounting bracket (column in vehicle). Tilt - Feed the connector down through the housing and under the mounting bracket. Then install the cover on the harness. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4402 2. Install the three mounting screws and clip the connector to the bracket on the jacket. 3. Install the column to instrument panel trim plate. 4. Install the hazard warning knob and directional signal lever. 5. Make certain that the switch is in "Neutral" and the hazard warning knob is out. Slide the thrust washer, upper bearing preload spring and cancelling cam onto the upper end of the shaft. 6. Place the lock plate onto the end of the shaft. Screw the center post of the Lock Plate Compressing Tool J-23653 onto the steering shaft as far as it will go. Place a NEW snap ring over the center post. Place the "C" bar over the center post and then compress the lock plate by turning the nut clockwise. Slide the new snap ring down the tapered center post and into the shaft groove. Remove Tool J-23653. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Component Information > Diagrams Defogger Switch Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Side Window Chipping Information Front Door Window Glass: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Side Window Chipping Information INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-64-001B Date: October 20, 2009 Subject: Information on Side Door Window Glass Chipping Caused by Hanging Vehicle Key Lock Box Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2009 and Prior Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add vehicles and model years and to include all types of door window glass. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-64-001A (Section 08 - Body & Accessories). - In several warranty parts review cases, side door window glass was observed with a chip or chips on the top side of the window glass. Dealer contacts confirmed that they use a vehicle key lock box on the front side door window glass. - A random selection of side door glass returns will be conducted to confirm adherence. If a side door glass is discovered with a chip or chips in the location previously described, the side door glass will be returned to the dealership for debit. Example of Side Door Glass - DO NOT place a vehicle key lock box on a side door window glass. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Side Window Chipping Information > Page 4413 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-48-006 > Sep > 09 > Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter Windshield: Customer Interest Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-48-006 Date: September 18, 2009 Subject: Clear Stain or Film on Inside Perimeter of Windshield Glass (Clean/Polish Glass) Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Condition Some customers may comment on a clear stain or film on the inside of the windshield glass. This condition appears along the outer edges of the glass along the top, bottom or A-pillar areas. Normal glass cleaning procedures will not remove the stain. Cause The assembly plant uses a clear sealer/primer on the outer edge of the windshield glass to improve adhesion to the urethane adhesive that bonds the windshield glass to the vehicle body. Excess sealer/primer may drip or flow onto the windshield and cause a stain. Once the sealer/primer dries, it may appear to have etched the glass. Correction Note A "white" type of toothpaste is recommended for this repair. Gel-type toothpaste may provide less satisfactory results. Use a small amount of toothpaste on a soft, cotton cloth to polish the stained area. It may be necessary to wrap the cloth around a paint stir stick or a similar tool to reach the lower corners of the windshield glass. After polishing the glass, clean the inside of the windshield glass with a clean, damp, cotton cloth and verify all of the stain is removed. Do not use any cleaners or solvents - use only clean warm water. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-48-006 > Sep > 09 > Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter > Page 4422 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-08-48-002A > Mar > 09 > Body - Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet Windshield: Customer Interest Body - Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-48-002A Date: March 19, 2009 Subject: Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet (Clean Windshield) Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-48-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some owners may comment that marks/stains appear on the windshield when the windshield is wet. Cause This condition may be caused by contact between the windshield and the vacuum hoses or other tools used in the assembly process. This contact may leave a residue that creates a water repellent surface on the glass which, in wet conditions, appear as marks/stains on the surface. Correction Important DO NOT REPLACE THE WINDSHIELD FOR THIS CONDITION. To clean the windshield, use Eastwood Glass Polishing Compound*. Follow the manufacturer's directions for product use. Use only hand tools. DO NOT USE POWER TOOLS. Parts Information Eastwood Glass Polishing Compound 1-800-343-9353 (for overseas inquiries: +1-610-705-2200) http://www.eastwoodco.com/ *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items which may be available from other sources. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 06-08-43-003C > Feb > 11 > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C Date: February 21, 2011 Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Wiper Concerns Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to avoid unnecessary replacements. Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review the information in their Owner Manual. Inspection and Cleaning Scheduled Maintenance - Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or contamination. - Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber elements. Cleaning Procedure Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct contact with washer fluid. Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades. - Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth. - Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking. Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami* (www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely. Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces. Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also recommends using plain water to clean interior glass. *"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 06-08-43-003C > Feb > 11 > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 4432 Avoiding Wiper Damage The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others are environmental concerns. - Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear quickly and unevenly. - Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements. - Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas. - Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow. - Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades. - Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield. - Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition. Note GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes wipers to chatter and have premature wear. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 09-08-48-006 > Sep > 09 > Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-48-006 Date: September 18, 2009 Subject: Clear Stain or Film on Inside Perimeter of Windshield Glass (Clean/Polish Glass) Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Condition Some customers may comment on a clear stain or film on the inside of the windshield glass. This condition appears along the outer edges of the glass along the top, bottom or A-pillar areas. Normal glass cleaning procedures will not remove the stain. Cause The assembly plant uses a clear sealer/primer on the outer edge of the windshield glass to improve adhesion to the urethane adhesive that bonds the windshield glass to the vehicle body. Excess sealer/primer may drip or flow onto the windshield and cause a stain. Once the sealer/primer dries, it may appear to have etched the glass. Correction Note A "white" type of toothpaste is recommended for this repair. Gel-type toothpaste may provide less satisfactory results. Use a small amount of toothpaste on a soft, cotton cloth to polish the stained area. It may be necessary to wrap the cloth around a paint stir stick or a similar tool to reach the lower corners of the windshield glass. After polishing the glass, clean the inside of the windshield glass with a clean, damp, cotton cloth and verify all of the stain is removed. Do not use any cleaners or solvents - use only clean warm water. Warranty Information (excluding Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use: Warranty Information (Saab U.S. Models) For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 09-08-48-006 > Sep > 09 > Body - Stain/Film On Windshield Glass Perimeter > Page 4437 Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 09-08-48-002A > Mar > 09 > Body - Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet TECHNICAL Bulletin No.: 09-08-48-002A Date: March 19, 2009 Subject: Marks/Stains on Windshield When Wet (Clean Windshield) Models: 2010 and Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Including Saturn and Saab) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to update the models and model years. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 09-08-48-002 (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Condition Some owners may comment that marks/stains appear on the windshield when the windshield is wet. Cause This condition may be caused by contact between the windshield and the vacuum hoses or other tools used in the assembly process. This contact may leave a residue that creates a water repellent surface on the glass which, in wet conditions, appear as marks/stains on the surface. Correction Important DO NOT REPLACE THE WINDSHIELD FOR THIS CONDITION. To clean the windshield, use Eastwood Glass Polishing Compound*. Follow the manufacturer's directions for product use. Use only hand tools. DO NOT USE POWER TOOLS. Parts Information Eastwood Glass Polishing Compound 1-800-343-9353 (for overseas inquiries: +1-610-705-2200) http://www.eastwoodco.com/ *We believe this source and their products to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such items which may be available from other sources. Warranty Information For vehicles repaired under warranty, use the table above. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 73-10-54 > May > 97 > Windshield - Two-Part Urethane Adhesive For Installation Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Windshield - Two-Part Urethane Adhesive For Installation File In Section: 10 - Body Bulletin No.: 73-10-54 Date: May, 1997 INFORMATION Subject: Two-Part Urethane Adhesive For Windshield Installations Models: 1997 And Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Using Urethane Adhesive To Retain Windshields) General Motors passenger cars and trucks use urethane adhesive as a means to retain the windshield in the body opening. The urethane adhesive is used to bond the windshield in the opening, increasing vehicle structure. The current recommended urethane adhesive, GM P/N 12346284, is a one-part moisture cure product that requires a minimum curing period of 6 hours at room temperature before returning the vehicle to the customer. Increasing customer demands for faster service in recent years have resulted in quicker cure two-part urethane adhesives. Essex Beta Seal U216* (two-part urethane adhesive) meets the General Motors 3651M Specification (Performance Requirements for Stationary Glass Bonding Adhesive System Service) and can be used when the customer demands quicker repair of the vehicle than the current one-part materials can provide. Either of these products can be used when glass replacement is performed. The differences between these products are as follows: The CURRENT URETHANE ADHESIVE KIT, GM P/N 12346284, IS A ONE-PART ADHESIVE. It includes the necessary glass and pinchweld primers and is specified in Service Manuals for General Motors' vehicles. Since this is a "moisture cure" product, the curing time for this one-part material will vary with changes to either temperature or humidity. The REQUIRED TIME FOR THIS ONE-PART MATERIAL to ensure a safe installation of stationary glass before returning the vehicle to the customer IS A MINIMUM OF SIX (6) HOURS AT 70°F (21°C) AND 30% RELATIVE HUMIDITY. ESSEX BETA SEAL U216 IS A TWO-PART ADHESIVE MATERIAL THAT PROVIDES FOR A ONE (1) TO ONE AND ONE HALF (11/2) HOUR CURE BEFORE RETURNING THE VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. This product also requires primers on the glass and pinchweld surfaces. This product requires a special applicator for the mixing and dispensing of the adhesive. When using this (or any) product, make sure to follow the manufacturer's directions for application and drying times. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. * We believe this source and their product to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such products which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 911268E > Nov > 90 > Wiper Blades - Chattering on Windshield Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Wiper Blades - Chattering on Windshield Number: 91-126-8E Section: 8E Date: November 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 031066 Subject: CHATTERING WIPER BLADES OR BLADE WIPEABILITY Model and Year: ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Condition: Chattering and poor wipeability comments may be due to the windshield glass and/or wiper blades becoming contaminated by insect residue, dirt, road grime, carwax etc. Correction: 1. Clean the windshield glass with GM # 1050011 (Bon Ami) glass cleaner or equivalent. Important: The glass is clean when rinse water does not "bead-up," but "sheets" across the entire glass surface. Multiple cleanings may be required to remove all contaminants. 2. Clean the wiper blades by using a cloth that has been saturated with full strength washer solution and wipe vigorously. Rinse the blades with water after cleaning. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 06-08-43-003C > Feb > 11 > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C Date: February 21, 2011 Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Wiper Concerns Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to avoid unnecessary replacements. Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review the information in their Owner Manual. Inspection and Cleaning Scheduled Maintenance - Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or contamination. - Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber elements. Cleaning Procedure Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct contact with washer fluid. Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades. - Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth. - Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking. Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami* (www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely. Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces. Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also recommends using plain water to clean interior glass. *"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 06-08-43-003C > Feb > 11 > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 4455 Avoiding Wiper Damage The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others are environmental concerns. - Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear quickly and unevenly. - Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements. - Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas. - Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow. - Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades. - Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield. - Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition. Note GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes wipers to chatter and have premature wear. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 73-10-54 > May > 97 > Windshield - Two-Part Urethane Adhesive For Installation Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Windshield - Two-Part Urethane Adhesive For Installation File In Section: 10 - Body Bulletin No.: 73-10-54 Date: May, 1997 INFORMATION Subject: Two-Part Urethane Adhesive For Windshield Installations Models: 1997 And Prior Passenger Cars and Trucks (Using Urethane Adhesive To Retain Windshields) General Motors passenger cars and trucks use urethane adhesive as a means to retain the windshield in the body opening. The urethane adhesive is used to bond the windshield in the opening, increasing vehicle structure. The current recommended urethane adhesive, GM P/N 12346284, is a one-part moisture cure product that requires a minimum curing period of 6 hours at room temperature before returning the vehicle to the customer. Increasing customer demands for faster service in recent years have resulted in quicker cure two-part urethane adhesives. Essex Beta Seal U216* (two-part urethane adhesive) meets the General Motors 3651M Specification (Performance Requirements for Stationary Glass Bonding Adhesive System Service) and can be used when the customer demands quicker repair of the vehicle than the current one-part materials can provide. Either of these products can be used when glass replacement is performed. The differences between these products are as follows: The CURRENT URETHANE ADHESIVE KIT, GM P/N 12346284, IS A ONE-PART ADHESIVE. It includes the necessary glass and pinchweld primers and is specified in Service Manuals for General Motors' vehicles. Since this is a "moisture cure" product, the curing time for this one-part material will vary with changes to either temperature or humidity. The REQUIRED TIME FOR THIS ONE-PART MATERIAL to ensure a safe installation of stationary glass before returning the vehicle to the customer IS A MINIMUM OF SIX (6) HOURS AT 70°F (21°C) AND 30% RELATIVE HUMIDITY. ESSEX BETA SEAL U216 IS A TWO-PART ADHESIVE MATERIAL THAT PROVIDES FOR A ONE (1) TO ONE AND ONE HALF (11/2) HOUR CURE BEFORE RETURNING THE VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. This product also requires primers on the glass and pinchweld surfaces. This product requires a special applicator for the mixing and dispensing of the adhesive. When using this (or any) product, make sure to follow the manufacturer's directions for application and drying times. Parts Information Parts are currently available from GMSPO. * We believe this source and their product to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such products. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products from this firm or for any such products which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 911268E > Nov > 90 > Wiper Blades - Chattering on Windshield Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Wiper Blades - Chattering on Windshield Number: 91-126-8E Section: 8E Date: November 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 031066 Subject: CHATTERING WIPER BLADES OR BLADE WIPEABILITY Model and Year: ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Condition: Chattering and poor wipeability comments may be due to the windshield glass and/or wiper blades becoming contaminated by insect residue, dirt, road grime, carwax etc. Correction: 1. Clean the windshield glass with GM # 1050011 (Bon Ami) glass cleaner or equivalent. Important: The glass is clean when rinse water does not "bead-up," but "sheets" across the entire glass surface. Multiple cleanings may be required to remove all contaminants. 2. Clean the wiper blades by using a cloth that has been saturated with full strength washer solution and wipe vigorously. Rinse the blades with water after cleaning. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance Wiper Blade: Technical Service Bulletins Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance INFORMATION Bulletin No.: 06-08-43-003C Date: February 21, 2011 Subject: Windshield Wiper Performance, Cleaning Instructions and Maintenance Models: 2012 and Prior GM Passenger Cars and Trucks (including Saturn) 2010 and Prior HUMMER H2, H3 2010 and Prior Isuzu Medium Duty Trucks 2005-2009 Saab 9-7X Supercede: This bulletin is being revised to add the 2011 and 2012 model year. Please discard Corporate Bulletin Number 06-08-43-003B (Section 08 - Body and Accessories). Wiper Concerns Most concerns about windshield wiper performance are the result of dirty wiper blades, damaged wiper blades, or worn out blades that are continuing to be used beyond their useful life. Depending on environmental conditions, wiper blades can have dramatic differences in lifespan. Here are some tips and guidelines to maximize wiper performance to avoid damage to the blades, and to avoid unnecessary replacements. Many wiper blades are being replaced under warranty with reviews showing there is nothing wrong with the returned blades other than a build-up of dirt. Additionally, advise the customer to review the information in their Owner Manual. Inspection and Cleaning Scheduled Maintenance - Inspect your wipers rubber blades every 4-6 months or 12,000 km (7,500 mi) for wear, cracking or contamination. - Clean the windshield and the rubber wiper blades (using the procedure below) if the blades are not clearing the glass satisfactorily. If this does not correct the problem, then replace the rubber elements. Cleaning Procedure Important Avoid getting windshield washer fluid on your hands. Wear rubber gloves or avoid direct contact with washer fluid. Important Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or petroleum based products to clean wiper blades. - Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. You should see significant amounts of dirt being removed on the cloth. - Be sure to wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of car wash/wax treatments may additionally cause wiper streaking. Tip For a larger scale buildup on the windshield, use a non-abrasive cleaner such as Bon-Ami* (www.faultless.com) cleanser with a wet sponge, being sure to use plenty of water to avoid scratching the glass. Flush the surface and body panels completely. Tip For day-to-day exterior glass cleaning and to maintain a streak free appearance, suggest Vehicle Care Glass Cleaner, P/N 88862560 (in Canada, 992727). This product is an easy to use foaming cleaner that quickly removes dirt and grime from glass surfaces. Tip Interior glass should be cleaned with plain, clean water to eliminate any film or haze on the window and help prevent fogging, a major customer dissatisfier. Refer to Corporate Bulletin Number 03-00-89-006D for more information. The New Vehicle Pre-Delivery Inspection form also recommends using plain water to clean interior glass. *"We believe this material to be reliable. There may be additional manufacturers of such material. General Motors does not endorse, indicate any preference for or assume any responsibility for the products or equipment from these firms or any such items which may be available from other sources. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 4469 Avoiding Wiper Damage The following are major contributors to wiper damage. Some of these you can control and others are environmental concerns. - Extremely dusty areas (such as driving on dirt roads) may cause the wipers rubber edge to wear quickly and unevenly. - Sand and salt used on roads for increasing winter traction and ice control will cause the wiper blades to wear quicker. Areas with significant snowfall require more frequent blade replacements. - Heat and time may cause the rubber blades to take a "permanent set" resulting in the rubber not flexing and turning over uniformly. This condition may result in streaking and/or unwiped areas. - Rubber blades are easily cut or torn when using ice scrapers. Likewise pulling blades up off a frozen windshield can tear the rubber. Exercise caution when clearing ice and snow. - Using your wipers to "wear through" frost and ice, instead of allowing the defrosters to melt the ice, can dull, nick or tear the rubber blades. - Banging wipers on the glass to remove ice and snow may cause the blade to bend, dislodging the rubber and causing potential scratching of the windshield. - Ice can form in the pin joints of the wipers, which can cause streaking and unwiped areas. To remove ice from pin joints, compress the blade and rubber edge with your hand to loosen the frozen joints. Consider using Winter Blades that have a rubber cover to avoid this condition. Note GM does not recommend the use of any spray on/wipe on windshield treatments or washer fluid additives. The variation in friction that results on the glass from the use of these products causes wipers to chatter and have premature wear. Disclaimer Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Glass/Body - Windshield Wiper Performance > Page 4470 Wiper Blade: Technical Service Bulletins Wiper Blades - Chattering on Windshield Number: 91-126-8E Section: 8E Date: November 1990 Corporate Bulletin No.: 031066 Subject: CHATTERING WIPER BLADES OR BLADE WIPEABILITY Model and Year: ALL PASSENGER CARS AND TRUCKS TO: ALL CHEVROLET DEALERS Condition: Chattering and poor wipeability comments may be due to the windshield glass and/or wiper blades becoming contaminated by insect residue, dirt, road grime, carwax etc. Correction: 1. Clean the windshield glass with GM # 1050011 (Bon Ami) glass cleaner or equivalent. Important: The glass is clean when rinse water does not "bead-up," but "sheets" across the entire glass surface. Multiple cleanings may be required to remove all contaminants. 2. Clean the wiper blades by using a cloth that has been saturated with full strength washer solution and wipe vigorously. Rinse the blades with water after cleaning. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Gear Box > Component Information > Service and Repair Wiper Gear Box: Service and Repair C, K, R & V MODELS 1. Remove wiper arms from pivot shafts. 2. Remove cowl ventilator grille, if necessary. 3. Working from plenum access hole, remove connector link to motor drive arm retaining nuts and washers. 4. Remove transmission pivot shaft assembly to windshield frame attaching screws. 5. Remove wiper linkage and transmission assembly from vehicle. 6. Reverse procedure to install. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Permanent Magnet Motor Wiper Motor: Description and Operation Permanent Magnet Motor Fig. 1 Permanent magnet type windshield wiper motor 1980---87 C, K, G, R & V MODELS Wiper motor internal components, including permanent magnet fields, armature, brush holder, gear train and park switch, are enclosed in a two-piece housing which is held together by ten staked extrusions. The brush holder and motor run terminals are at one end of the motor, and the gearbox and park switch at the other end, Fig. 9. Motor operation is controlled by three brushes, common, low and high speed. When ignition is on, battery voltage is supplied to the common brush through a fuse in the fuse block. Motor speeds are determined by completing the low or high speed brush circuit to ground at the wiper switch. Pulse wiper operation, if equipped, is controlled by a variable resistor in the wiper switch and by a pulse module connected between the wiper motor and switch. Standard (Non-Pulse) Wiper Operation When ignition is on, battery voltage is supplies to the common brush through motor terminal 1, Fig. 9. Placing wiper switch in low or high position completes the ground circuit to motor terminal 2 (low) or 3 (high) at the switch, and the motor runs at the selected speed. When the wiper switch is turned off, park switch terminal 5 is grounded at the wiper switch. Park switch terminal 4 is connected to the low speed terminal through the wiring harness, and the closed park switch allows motor to continue running. When wipers reach their lowest point of travel, a cam on the output gear opens the park switch, and the motor stops. Pulse Wiper Operation In addition to standard wiper system components, models with pulse wipers use a variable resistor in the wiper switch and a control module connected between the motor and switch to provide a delay wipe mode. Current flow between the wiper motor and switch passes through the pulse control module, and the wiper switch is grounded through the module. However, when wiper switch is in low or high position, the pulse module does not affect system operation. When the wiper switch is in delay position, battery voltage is applied to the control module timer through the motor low speed circuit, and the timer is partially grounded through the variable resistor. When the timer capacitor is fully charged, the low speed circuit is completed to ground at the module, starting the wipe cycle. As motor begins to operate, the park switch closes, the timer capacitor discharges, and the low speed circuit is grounded through the park switch. When wipers complete their cycle, the park switch opens, the motor stops, and the timer capacitor begins to recharge. This cycle repeats as long as the wiper switch is in delay position. Delay between wipe cycles is determined by varying resistance between the timer capacitor and ground. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Permanent Magnet Motor > Page 4478 Wiper Motor: Description and Operation Rectangular Motor Fig. 1 Rectangular windshield wiper motor. Shown w/washer pump installed Fig. 2 Rectangular windshield wiper motor electrical connections The rectangular motor, Fig. 1, consists of an armature, brush plate assembly, field coils and a housing which is attached to a gear housing. The motor electrical connections, park switch, and on some models a washer pump are also mounted on the gearbox. A gear on the commutator end of the armature drives an intermediate gear and pinion assembly, which in turn drives the output shaft. A crank arm on the output shaft operates wipers through a pivot link (transmission) assembly. When ignition is on, battery voltage is supplied to motor terminal 2, Fig. 2. Current flows through the series field to a splice where it is divided, and part passes through the armature and part through the shunt field. The armature and shunt field circuits are completed to ground through the wiper switch , with motor speeds determined by resistance in the shunt field ground path. Standard (Non-Pulse) Wiper Operation Placing wiper switch in low position, grounds motor terminals 1 and 3, Fig. 2, at the wiper switch. Shunt field current flows directly to ground through terminal 3, armature current flows to ground through terminal 1 and the motor runs at low speed. Placing wiper switch in high position grounds terminal 1, but terminal 3 remains open. Armature current flows directly to ground through terminal 1, shunt field current flows to ground through a resistor connected between terminals 1 and 3, and the motor runs at high speed due to the weakened shunt field. When wiper switch is turned off, and wipers are not in park position, terminal 1 is grounded through the closed motor park switch contacts. Terminals 1 and 3 are connected through the wiper switch, and the motor runs at low speed. When wipers reach their lowest point of travel, a cam on the motor output shaft opens the park switch, and the motor stops. Pulse Wiper Operation On models with pulse wipers, a pulse control module provides a delay wipe mode through the low speed circuit. When wiper control is in delay position, battery voltage is supplied to a capacitor in the module through a variable resistor. When the capacitor is fully charged, it activates a switching circuit which provides a ground to begin wiper operation. As the motor operates, park switch contacts close, the capacitor discharges, and the motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Permanent Magnet Motor > Page 4479 ground is maintained through the park switch. When wipers complete their cycle, the park switch opens and the capacitor begins to recharge. Delay between wipe cycles is determined by a variable resistor, which controls charging current to the capacitor. Higher resistance produces a longer delay. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Permanent Magnet Motor > Page 4480 Wiper Motor: Description and Operation Round Motor Fig. 3 Two speed round windshield wiper motor Fig. 4 Modified pulse windshield wiper motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Permanent Magnet Motor > Page 4481 Fig. 5 Multiplex pulse windshield wiper motor The 4-1/2 inch long, round motor assembly consists of an armature, field coil and end cap assembly, and a brush plate which fits over the armature and is connected to the field coils. The motor assembly is attached to a gearbox housing which also provides a mount for the washer pump. A worm gear on the armature commutator end drives the output shaft at a 90° angle through a drive gear and pawl assembly. The gearbox assembly contains a magnet switch, relay and terminal board assembly (gearbox relay) which provides electrical connections and controls current flow through the motor. On standard (non-pulse) motors, Fig. 3, the two motor leads to the gearbox relay are concealed and routed through a cavity in the gear housing. On pulse type motors, Figs. 4 and 5, the two motor leads to the gearbox relay, and the feed wire to the pulse relay are exposed. Fig. 3 Two speed round windshield wiper motor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Permanent Magnet Motor > Page 4482 Fig. 6 Gearbox relay & drive gear assembly. Shown out of park position Fig. 7 Gearbox relay & drive gear assembly. Shown in park position STANDARD (NON-PULSE) WIPER OPERATION When ignition is on, battery voltage is supplied to gearbox relay terminal 2, Fig. 3. When terminal 1 is grounded, relay contacts close and current is supplied to the motor. Current flows through the series field to a splice where it is divided, and part passes through the armature to the motor housing ground, and part through the shunt field. Motor speeds are determined by the amount of current flowing through the shunt field. Placing wiper switch in low position grounds gearbox relay terminals 1 and 3. The relay contacts close, shunt field current flows directly to ground at the switch through terminal 3, and the motor runs at low speed. Placing wiper switch in high grounds relay terminal 1, but terminal 3 remains open. Shunt field current flows to ground through a 20 ohm resistor connected between terminals 1 and 3, and the motor runs at a higher speed due to the weakened shunt field. Placing wiper switch in off position opens the circuit to the gearbox relay magnet switch. This allows a spring loaded arm to move into the path of the output gear drive pawl, Fig. 6, while relay contacts remain closed. The shunt field is grounded through the wiper switch and the motor operates at low speed, allowing the gear mechanism to park the wipers and stop the motor. As the output gear rotates, the drive pawl engages the latch arm on the gear box relay, and the output gear is unlocked from the drive pawl, lock pawl and drive plate. Since the output shaft and gear shaft are off center, continuing rotation causes a cam action which moves the drive pawl into a slot in the gearbox relay and allows wipers to move below their lowest point of normal travel. The drive pawl pushes the latch arm against the gearbox relay contacts, opening the contacts and stopping the motor in park position, Fig. 7. PULSE WIPER OPERATION Modified Pulse System Models equipped with pulse wipers use a motor similar to the one used on standard wiper systems which has been modified to provide a delay wipe mode. In addition to standard wiper system components, the modified pulse system includes a voltage feed circuit to the wiper switch and a variable resistor in the switch, a pulse relay and holding switch mounted on the washer pump, and a timer circuit. The timer circuit, consisting of a capacitor, transistor and two diodes, is mounted in the washer pump or contained in a separate module. The gearbox relay functions in a similar manner on both standard and pulse systems, but on pulse systems the gearbox relay supplies voltage to the pulse relay which controls current flow to the motor windings. In all wiper switch positions except delay, the gearbox and pulse relays are grounded simultaneously through the wiper switch, and the motor operates as outlined in ``Standard (Non-Pulse) Wiper Operation.'' When wiper switch is in delay position, pulse relay operation is controlled by the timer circuit. Placing wiper switch in delay position grounds gearbox relay terminals 1 (relay) and 3 (shunt field) at the switch, and battery voltage is supplied to the timer circuit capacitor through the variable resistor in the switch. When the capacitor is fully charged, it activates the timer transistor. The transistor Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Permanent Magnet Motor > Page 4483 completes the pulse relay ground circuit, and current flows through the motor windings. As the motor begins to operate, holding switch contacts close, the capacitor discharges partially, and the pulse relay ground is maintained through the holding switch. As wipers complete their cycle, a fin on the washer pump drive cam opens the holding switch, Fig. 8. This stops the motor and allows the timer capacitor to recharge. This cycle repeats as long as wiper switch is in delay position. Delay between wipe cycles is determined by controlling charging current to the capacitor through the switch resistor. Higher resistance produces longer delay. Fig. 8 Pulse wiper system holding switch contacts Multiplex Wiper System Models with pulse wiper use a motor similar to the one used on standard systems, but with modifications to provide a delay wipe mode. The multiplex system, while similar to earlier pulse wiper systems, uses an integrated circuit timer and the voltage feed to the wiper switch has been eliminated. In addition to standard wiper system components, the multiplex system uses a variable resistor in the wiper switch, a pulse relay and holding switch mounted in the washer pump, and a timer circuit. The timer, consisting of a capacitor and integrated circuit, is mounted on a circuit board in the washer pump or contained in a separate module. The gearbox relay functions in a similar manner on both standard and multiplex systems. However, on pulse systems the gearbox relay supplies voltage to the pulse relay, current to the motor windings is controlled by the pulse relay, and voltage is supplied to the timer circuit from motor terminal 2. In all switch positions except delay, the gearbox relay, pulse relay and timer capacitor circuits are completed directly to ground through the wiper switch. This deactivates the timer circuit and allows the motor to operate as outlined in ``Standard (Non-Pulse) Wiper Operation.'' Placing wiper switch in delay position grounds gearbox relay terminals 1 (relay) and 3 (shunt field), and the timer capacitor is partially grounded through the variable resistor, allowing it to charge at a controlled rate. When the timer capacitor is fully charged it activates the integrated circuit. The integrated circuit completes the pulse relay ground circuit, and current flows through the motor windings. As the motor begins to operate, holding switch contacts close, the capacitor discharges partially, and the pulse relay ground is maintained by the holding switch. As wipers complete their cycle, a fin on the washer pump drive cam opens the holding switch, Fig. 8, wipers stop and the timer capacitor begins to recharge. This cycle repeats as long as wiper switch is in delay position. Delay between wipes is determined by varying resistance between the timer capacitor and ground. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Permanent Magnet Motor Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection Permanent Magnet Motor On models with pulse wipers, disconnect electrical connectors from pulse module and connect switch and motor harnesses together. If problem is corrected, pulse module is defective. Fig. 1 Permanent magnet type windshield wiper motor 1980---87 C, K, G, R & V MODELS Wiper Inoperative 1. Turn ignition switch On, then check for voltage at motor terminal No. 1, Fig. 9, using a suitable test lamp. If lamp does not light, proceed to step 5. If lamp lights, proceed to step 2. 2. Check condition of fuse. If fuse is satisfactory, repair open in wire between fuse block and wiper motor. If fuse is blown, proceed to step 3. 3. Remove fuse and connect ammeter across fuse block terminals. Operate motor and note current draw. If current draw exceeds capacity of original fuse, proceed to step 4. If current draw is satisfactory, replace fuse and recheck system. 4. Disconnect electrical connector from motor and replace fuse. Cycle wiper switch on and off several times, then recheck fuse. If fuse blows again, check circuit for short or ground and repair as necessary. If fuse is satisfactory, motor is defective. 5. Connect jumper wire between motor terminal No. 2 and ground with ignition switch On. If wiper operates, check ground wire connection at wiper switch. If connection is satisfactory, replace switch. If wiper is still inoperative, motor is defective. Wiper Operates At Low Speed Only 1. Connect jumper wire between motor terminal No. 3 and ground, Fig. 9, with ignition switch On and electrical connector attached to motor. 2. Move wiper switch to high speed position. 3. If wiper runs at high speed, check wire between terminal No. 3 and switch and repair as necessary. If wire is satisfactory, replace switch. 4. If wiper is inoperative, motor is defective. Wiper Operates At High Speed Only 1. Connect jumper wire between motor terminal No. 2 and ground, Fig. 9, with ignition switch On and electrical connector attached to motor. 2. Move wiper switch to low speed position. 3. If wiper runs at low speed, check wire between terminal No. 3 and switch and repair as necessary. If wire is satisfactory, replace switch. 4. If wiper is inoperative, motor is defective. Wiper Operates At One Speed In Both High & Low Switch Positions 1. Disconnect electrical connector from wiper motor and alternately connect battery voltage to motor high and low speed terminals, Fig. 9. 2. If wiper operates correctly in both positions, check continuity of wiring between wiper motor and switch and repair as necessary. If wiring is satisfactory, replace switch. 3. If wiper operates at one speed in both switch positions, motor is defective. Wiper Blades Stop At Random Position On Windshield 1. Connect jumper wire between motor terminals 4 and 5, Fig. 9, with ignition switch On and electrical connector attached to motor. 2. Move wiper switch to off position. 3. If wiper operates, replace wiper park switch assembly. 4. If wiper is inoperative, check wire between terminal No. 5 and switch and repair as necessary. If wire is satisfactory, replace switch. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Permanent Magnet Motor > Page 4486 Wiper Will Not Shut Off 1. Disconnect wires from wiper motor terminals 4 and 5, Fig. 9, with ignition switch On and wiper switch in off position. If wiper stops operating, motor is defective. If wiper continues to run, proceed to step 2. 2. Disconnect wires from wiper motor terminals 1, 2 and 3 and apply battery voltage to terminal No. 1. If wiper does not operate, check wires between motor terminals 2 and 3 and switch and repair as necessary. If motor continues to operate, motor is defective. Wiper Operates Intermittently 1. Remove wiper fuse and connect ammeter across fuse block terminals. 2. Turn ignition switch On, then operate wiper at high speed with windshield dry, noting the lowest current draw reading. 3. If current draw is less than 5 amps, motor is defective. If current draw is greater than 5 amps, remove wiper arms and blades, then repeat steps 1 and 2 and proceed to step 4. 4. If current draw is now satisfactory, replace wiper blade elements. If current draw is still high, proceed to step 5. 5. Disconnect wiper linkage from wiper crank arm and repeat steps 1 and 2. If current draw is now satisfactory, check wiper linkage for binding and repair or replace as necessary. If current draw remains high, motor is defective. Motor Operates But Wiper Blades Do Not 1. Check that wiper linkage is connected to crank arm. 2. If linkage is connected, a stripped wiper gear is indicated and the motor must be replaced. 3. If linkage is disconnected, reconnect to crank arm and check system. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Permanent Magnet Motor > Page 4487 Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection Rectangular Motor Fig. 3 Connections to operate rectangular wiper motor independent of vehicle wiring On models with pulse wipers, check system operation with pulse control module removed. If problem is eliminated, pulse control is defective. Refer to Fig. 13, to check wiper motor independent of vehicle wiring. Wiper Inoperative or Intermittent 1. Blown fuse. 2. Open circuit in feed wire (No. 2 terminal on wiper motor). 3. Loose mounting of wiper switch. 4. Open circuit in wire to wiper switch (No. 1 terminal on wiper motor). 5. Defective wiper switch. 6. Poor solder connections at terminal board. 7. Defective wiper motor. Motor Will Not Shut Off 1. Grounded wire between motor terminal 1 and wiper switch. 2. Defective motor park switch. 3. Defective wiper motor. Motor Operates At Low Speed Only 1. Defective wiper switch. 2. Grounded wire between motor terminal 3 and wiper switch. 3. Defective wiper motor. Motor Runs At High Speed Only 1. Defective wiper switch. 2. Open circuit between motor terminal 3 and wiper switch. 3. Defective wiper motor. Blades Do Not Return To Full Park Position 1. Loose wiper ground strap connection. 2. Defective wiper motor. High Speed Too Fast 1. Defective wiper motor. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Permanent Magnet Motor > Page 4488 Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection Two Speed Round Motor On models with pulse wipers, refer to ``Multiplex Wiper System'' for testing procedures. Fig. 7 Gearbox relay & drive gear assembly. Shown in park position Fig. 14 Connections to operate round wiper motor independent of vehicle wiring WIPER INOPERATIVE 1. Remove washer pump to gain access to relay switch assembly. 2. Connect 12 volt source to wiper, feed side to center terminal, ground side to gear housing, Fig. 14. Do not connect jumper to terminal 1 and 3. 3. To determine if relay coil is open, connect test lamp to wiper terminal No. 1. Test lamp should light. 4. Test relay switch as follows: a. If gear mechanism is in full park position insert a small screwdriver into the switch slot (between the drive pawl and the relay latch arm) and push relay latch arm downward and toward the relay coil in direction of the arrow, Fig. 7. Next, remove a small amount of insulation from black lead with pink tracer and touch test lamp to exposed wire. b. If test lamp lights but motor doesn't run, motor is defective. c. If test lamp doesn't light, relay switch is defective. Cover exposed wire with tape after the test. Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Permanent Magnet Motor > Page 4489 Fig. 15 Gearbox relay & drive gear assembly inspection WIPER WILL NOT SHUT OFF Crankarm Rotates 360° 1. Observe if relay latch arm spring is connected properly, Fig. 15. 2. Manually operate latch arm to check it for possible binding condition. 3. If items in 1 and 2 check out, connect power source to wiper and connect jumper wire from terminal No. 3 to wiper housing. DO NOT make any connections from terminal No. 1. Manually actuate latch arm in direction of arrow, Fig. 15, and observe if it remains in energized position (inside plastic switch housing out of path of gear drive pawl). If it remains in energized position, check for grounded red lead from coil to terminal No. 1. If red lead is not grounded, coil is probably grounded internally and relay switch should be replaced. Fig. 14 Connections to operate round wiper motor independent of vehicle wiring Chevrolet Blazer 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-350 5.7L VIN L 4-bbl (1982)) Chevrolet Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Permanent Magnet Motor > Page 4490 Fig. 15 Gearbox relay & drive gear assembly inspection Recycles Crank arm oscillates in a somewhat horizontal plane and is accompanied by a loud ``knock'' with each revolution of the gear. 1. Check that drive pawl and relay latch arm springs are properly connected, Fig. 15. 2. Check wiper for ``Lo'' speed operation, Fig. 14. If wiper has ``Hi'' speed only, check the following items: a. Solder joint at No. 3 wiper terminal. b. Splice joint-field coil cross over splice. c. Splice joint-black lead to field coil. 3. Check relay switch as follows: a. Remove small amount of insulation from black lead with pink stripe and connect test light between exposed wire and wiper housing. b. Connect positive side of power source to terminal No. 2 and negative side to motor case. Install jumper wire from terminal No. 1 to motor case. Observe if test light goes out once for each revolution of gear or if light glows steadily. If light glows steadily, relay switch contacts are not opening and switch is defective. If light goes out each time drive pawl moves into relay switch slot, relay switch is functioning correctly. WIPER HAS ONE SPEED, ``LO'' 1. Check for grounded condition in the internal black lead that connects to wiper terminal No. 3 and repair as needed. 2. Replace defective motor. Fig. 16 Gearbox relay terminal board resistor WIPER HAS EXCESSIVE SPEED IN ``HI'' BUT ``LO'' SPEED IS NORMAL 1. Check for open 20 ohm resistor and the resistor ground connection, Fig. 16.